I 
 
 41 
 
 /3 c- 
 
 AN 
 
 ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE: 
 
 CONTAINING A SEBIES OF GREEK AND ENGLISH 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION, WITH THE * ' 
 
 REQUISITE VOCABULARIES, 
 
 AND 
 
 AN APPENDIX 
 
 ON THE HOMERIC VERSE AND DIALECT, 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. RAPHAEL KUHNER, L- 
 
 CO-RECTOR OP THE LYCEUM, HANOVER. 
 
 TRANSLATED BY 
 
 S. H. TAYLOR, LL.D. 
 
 ' t 4ft 
 
 , - 
 
 9 . 
 
 A NEW EDITION, 
 
 REVISED AND EDITED, 
 
 WITH NUMEROUS EMENDATIONS AND ADDITIONS, 
 
 INCLUDING 
 
 UPWARDS OE A THOUSAND EXAMINATION QUESTIONS, 
 
 I 
 
 BY 
 
 CHARLES W. BATEMAN, LL.B., 
 
 Sometime Scholar of Trinity College, Dublin. 
 
 DUBLIN: 
 
 M. H. GILL & SON, 60 UPPER SACKVILLE-ST. 
 
 BOSTON COMBGE LIBRARY 
 
 CHESTS UT HILL, M£SS. 
 
 ■ 
 
 i 
 
Vf\rs% 
 
 VO 
 
 J\ CTOIRZD^-XT, 
 SWIInTOIwjD, 
 
 Co. MAYO. 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The name of Ktihner is now familiar to Classical 
 
 scholars, both on the Continent and in this country, 
 as that of a writer who has done good service to the 
 cause of Philology by his contributions to Classical 
 criticism, and, more especially, by his numerous and 
 valuable works on the Grammar of the Greek and 
 Latin languages. The latter are characterised by 
 the greatest depth of research, and a method of 
 treatment eminently philosophical. In the year 1834 
 appeared the first part of his “ Copious Grammar of 
 the Greek Language” (“Ausfuhrliche Grammatik der 
 Griechischen Sprache”), and in the following year 
 the second part of the same Work, containing the 
 Syntax. This Grammar has been ably translated by 
 Jelf, with the addition of much original matter, and 
 it is now generally adopted in our Universities as a 
 Text-book. In 1836 he Dublished his “ School Greek 
 Grammar for advanced students” (“ Schulgrammatik 
 der Griechischen Sprache fur die oberen Gymnasial- 
 klassen”), which is an abridgment of the large 
 Grammar; and in 1837 his “Elementary Grammar 
 of the Greek Language” (“ Elementargrammatik 
 der Griechischen Sprache”)* intended expressly for 
 
if 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 beginners. Of this, the present Work is a translar 
 tion. The high estimation in which the original is 
 held in Germany is evidenced by the fact that it has 
 already reached the twenty-first Edition. 
 
 4 
 
 The plan of instruction adopted by the Author is 
 one which is eminently fitted for imparting a thorough 
 knowledge of Greek,and,at the same time,for arriving 
 at the desired end, in a way more expeditious and less 
 disagreeable to the learner than the methods formerly 
 in use. Under the old system, the pupil was forced 
 to commit to memory a number of Rules and Forms 
 which were comparatively useless to him; for, even 
 granting that he did recollect them in their entirety, 
 when he came to apply them, he had to do with such 
 a cumbrous and chaotic mass that he was hopelessly 
 bewildered. He thus became disheartened, when he 
 did not see the practical application of what he had 
 committed to memory, and his progress was propor¬ 
 tionately slow and insecure. The present Work is, 
 therefore, so arranged, that the pupil may at once 
 proceed to translate from Greek into English and 
 vice versa, after becoming familiar with the contents 
 of the introductory Sections, (postponing till a some¬ 
 what later period those marked with a cross). With 
 this view, sentences of the most elementary nature 
 are first proposed, including only the simplest forms 
 of the Verb, some parts of the Verb ufxi, and a few 
 indeclinable words—Adverbs, Prepositions and Con¬ 
 junctions—to diversify them; the fuller consideration 
 of the Verb being reserved till afterwards. The 
 dearner is then taken gradually through the Declen- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 r 
 
 Bions, <fcc.; appropriate Exercises being appended to 
 each, in which the portions of the Grammar previ¬ 
 ously learned are not lost sight of. Longer sentences 
 are given for translation, as his experience becomes 
 enlarged. By the judicious plan of repetition, the 
 strain on the memory is diminished, and the pupil is 
 thoroughly grounded in what he has been taught. 
 
 In the Syntax, the Greek-English Exercises and 
 theVocabulariesprefixedtothem are discontinued; the 
 sentences also become somewhat more difficult than 
 before, and reference has to be made to the English- 
 Greek Vocabulary in the end of the book. Besides this 
 Vocabulary, there are two others—one consisting 
 of Greek words with their meanings, for general re¬ 
 ference; and the other, an Index of Proper Names, 
 which it has been considered advisable to keep apart 
 from the rest. A ‘ General Index’ of the subject- 
 matter is also given. To the later editions the* 
 Author has affixed an Appendix on the Epic dialect, 
 which will be found exceedingly valuable for those 
 who propose to study the Homeric Poems. Thus it 
 will be seen that the present Work combines Gram¬ 
 mar, Delectus and Lexicon; consequently, the boy, 
 when he has mastered it, has acquired insensibly 
 a stock of words, while he is, at the same time, 
 enabled to commence the translation of a prose 
 writer (such as Xenophon), with ease to himself, and 
 with much greater accuracy than he would otherwise 
 be capable of. 
 
 Before commencing an Exercise, it would be well 
 that the pupil should learn carefully the Rules, Para- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 VI 
 
 dip;ms and Vocabalary connected with it; he should 
 then translate it viva voce to his tutor, and afterwards 
 commit it to writing. By this means he will be less 
 likely to fall into the same mistakes again, than if he 
 had impressed them on his mind by the process of 
 writing in the first instance. He might also be re¬ 
 quired to point out the mistakes occurring in the Ex¬ 
 ercises of the other members of the class. If the tutor 
 himself were to propose viva voce sentences for trans¬ 
 lation, formed from those given by a slight variation 
 of the Mood,Tense, Number and Pei^on of the Verbs, 
 the Case and Number of the Nouns,&c., a greater de¬ 
 gree of variety and interest would be imparted to the 
 lesson. The Greek should always be accentuated; 
 for, however opinions may vary as to the utility of the 
 system of accents per se , there can be no ques¬ 
 tion as to the fact of the learner acquiring by the 
 employment of them a degree of' precision otherwise 
 
 unattainable. 
 
 In preparing the present Work, I had at first in¬ 
 tended to translate it directly from the German, but 
 finding the version of Dr. Taylor to be, in general, 
 very faithful, I thought it more advisable to take it 
 as a basis. I have, however, compared it throughout 
 with the original most carefully, and wherever I con¬ 
 sidered an improvement could be effected, whether by 
 alteration, addition or omission, I have not hesitated 
 to depart from Dr. Taylor’s text. Some new matter 
 inserted by Kiihner in his latest edition has also 
 been introduced; all the Exercises in the Etymology 
 have been re-translated ; explanatory notes, hints 
 
♦ 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 • • 
 VJl 
 
 and questions on the subject-matter have been 
 appended to the Exercises; the copious examples oc¬ 
 curring in the Syntax have been translated; the ar¬ 
 rangement and typography have been considerably 
 modified; and upwards of a thousand Examination 
 Questions have been given at the end, which it is 
 hoped may prove serviceable both to the Tutor and 
 the Pupil. 
 
 C. W. B. 
 
 Dublin , Oct. } 1863, 
 
 
 \ 
 
 ♦ 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 I 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 CHAP. L—The Letters and their Sounds. 
 
 Pigs 
 
 f 1. Alphabet ^ 1 
 
 2 . Pronunciation of particular Letters . . • 2 
 
 3. Division of the Vowels.—Diphthongs . » • 2 
 
 4. Division of the Consonants .... 3 
 
 5. Breathings .—Spiritus lenis and Spiritus asper . 5 
 
 6. Marks of Crasis and Elision (Coronis.—Apostr5ph§) . 5 
 
 7. Moveable Consonants at the end of a word . , 6 
 
 8. Change of Consonants in Inflexion and Derivation . 7 
 
 CHAP. II. —Syllables. 
 
 9. Quantity of Syllables ..... 12 
 
 10. Accentuation ...... 12 
 
 11. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflexion and 
 
 Contraction . . .... 14 
 
 12. Change and Removal of the Accent in connected dis¬ 
 
 course ...... 16 
 
 13. Atonies or Proclitics ..... 17 
 
 14. Enclitics . . . ... .17 
 
 15. Accentuation of Words joined with Enclitics . 18 
 
 16. Enclitics accented .... * 19 
 
 17. Division of Syllables ..... 20 
 
 18. Punctuation-marks ..... 20 
 
 CHAP. IIL— § 19. Some general views of the Verb, Page 21. 
 
 CHAP. IV.— The Substantive and Adjective. 
 
 20. Nature and Classification of Substantives 
 
 21. Gender of Substantives . . 
 
 22. Number, Case, Declension . • 
 
 23. Nature and Gender of the Adjective • 
 
 24 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
X 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 
 
 
 . • - 
 
 § 24. General view of the Prepositions 
 25. First Declension . •_ * . • • 
 
 2C. Feminine Nouns of the First Declension • 
 
 27. Masculine Nouns of the First Declension • 
 
 28. Second Declension . • • . • 
 
 29. Contraction of the Second Declension • 
 
 30. Attic Second Declension 
 
 31. Third Declension „ • _• • 
 
 32. Remarks on the Case-endings of the Third De¬ 
 
 clension . • • • 
 
 33. Gender, Quantity and Accentuation of the 
 
 Third Declension . • • 
 
 Pagb 
 
 27 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 33 
 36 
 41 
 44 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 48 
 
 A. Words which in the Genitive Singular have a Conso¬ 
 nant BEFORE THE ENDING ‘OS, i. e. WORDS WHOSE ROOT ENDS 
 in a Consonant. 
 
 34. I. The Nominative Singular exhibits the simple Root 
 
 35. II. The Nominative lengthens the short final Vowel 
 
 of the Root . 
 
 36. Syncopated Nouns, e. g. orocrn^ &c. . 
 
 37. The Nominative appends s to the Root • • 
 
 38. The Root ends in a T-mute . • • • 
 
 39. Neuters with Roots ending in r or *r 
 
 40. The Root ends in » or »r . . . 
 
 49 
 
 61 
 
 54 
 
 56 
 
 57 
 59 
 62 
 
 B. Words which in the. Genitive. Singular have a 
 Vowel before the ending -os. 
 
 41. I. Substantives ending in -tv;,-ecus, -»vs • 
 
 42. II. Words ending in -ns, -ts . • # • • 
 
 43. Words ending in -us (Gen. -uos); and in -us and 
 
 -u (Gen. - oo f) . • • • • 
 
 44. Words ending in -ag (Gen. -aos) ; and in -os (Gen. -tss) 
 
 45. III. Words ending in -is, -us • • • 
 
 46. Words ending in -ts, *«'.*• 
 
 47. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension • * 
 
 48. Irregular Adjectives . . • * * 
 
 49. Comparison of Adjectives . • • » 
 
 50. A. First Form of Comparison . • » 
 
 51. B. Second Form of Comparison • • 
 
 52. Anomalous Forms of Comparison « « 
 
 65 
 
 67 
 
 70 
 
 71 
 73 
 75 
 
 77 
 
 80 
 
 82 
 
 83 
 
 88 
 
 90 
 
 CHAP. V.— The Adverb. 
 
 53. Nature, Division and Formation of Adverb* # 92 
 
 54. Comparison of Adverbs , . • .94 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Xi 
 
 CHAP. VI.— The Pronoun. 
 
 Pas* 
 
 § 55. Nature and Classification of Pronouns 
 
 56—59. 
 
 I. Personal Pronouns. 
 
 
 56. 
 
 Simple Personal Pronouns 
 
 • 
 
 57. 
 
 Reflexive Pronouns 
 
 • 
 
 58. 
 
 Reciprocal Pronoun . 
 
 • 
 
 59. 
 
 Possessive Pronouns 
 
 e 
 
 60. II. Demonstrative Pronouns . 
 
 61. III. Relative Pronoun 
 
 62. IV. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns 
 
 63. Correlative Pronouns . 
 
 64. Lengthening of the Pronouns . 
 
 94 
 
 95 
 
 97 
 
 98 
 
 99 
 101 
 102 
 102 
 
 105 
 
 106 
 
 CHAP. VII.— The Numerals. 
 
 65. Nature and Division of the Numerals . . 107 
 
 66. Numeral Characters ..... 108 
 
 67. Table of the Cardinals and Ordinals . . . 108 
 
 68. Declension of the first four Cardinals. . .110 
 
 69. Numeral Adverbs ..... 112 
 
 CHAP. VIII.— The Verb. 
 
 70. Nature of the Verb ..... 113 
 
 71. Classes of Verbs . • . 113 
 
 72. The Tenses ...... 114 
 
 73. The Moods ....... 115 
 
 74. The Participials.—Infinitive and Participle . . 115 
 
 75. Numbers and Persons of the Verb . . .116 
 
 76. Conjugation of the Verb . , . ,116 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs in *<w. 
 
 77. Root, Augment and Reduplication—Verb-characte¬ 
 
 ristic ...... 
 
 78. Inflexion-endings . . . . . 
 
 79. (a) Tense-characteristics and Tense-endings 
 (b) Personal-endings and Mood-vowels 
 
 80. Remarks on the Personal-endings and Mood- 
 
 vowels .... 
 
 81. Paradigm of the Conjugation of a regular Verb 
 
 IN -u (/3 ouXivu ) . . . • • 
 
 Active Voice ..... 
 Middle Voice ..... 
 Passive Voice ..... 
 
 82. Remarks on the Preceding Paradigm . . 
 
 83. Remarks on the formation of the Attic Future < 
 
 84. Accentuation of the Verb . • 
 
 116 
 
 118 
 
 118 
 
 119 
 
 119 
 
 122 
 
 124 
 
 130 
 
 136 
 
 140 
 
 140 
 
 141 
 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 • • 
 
 XII 
 
 § 85. More particular consideration of the Augment and 
 Reduplication.—Syllabic Augment 
 
 86. Temporal Augment ..... 
 
 87. Remarks on the Augment . • 
 
 88. Reduplication ....•• 
 
 89. Attic Reduplication . . • 
 
 90. Augment and Reduplication in Compound Verbs . 
 
 91. Additional Remarks on the Augment and Redupli¬ 
 
 cation in Compound Verbs . . * 
 
 Formation of the Tenses of Verbs in 
 
 92. Division of Verbs in according to the Characte¬ 
 
 ristic 
 
 I. Pure Verbs. 
 
 93. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs . ; 
 
 94. Pure Verbs which retain the short Characteristic 
 
 Vowel in forming the Tenses 
 
 95. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and Perf. and 
 
 Plpf. Mid. or Pass, with <r 
 
 96. Contract Pure Verbs . . . • 
 
 97. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract Verbs . 
 
 98. Contract Verbs which retain the short Characteristic- 
 
 vowel in forming the Tenses . 
 
 99. Paradigms of the Verbs last-mentioned * . 
 
 II. Impure Verbs. 
 
 100. Formation of the Tenses of Impure Verbs . 
 
 A. Mute Verbs. 
 
 101. Simple and Strengthened Characteristic.—Simple 
 
 and Strengthened Root.—Theme 
 
 102. Variation in the Root-vowel . • «. 
 
 103. Remarks on the formation of the Secondary Tenses 
 
 104. Classification of Mute Verbs . . 
 
 105. Remarks on the Characteristic . • ♦ 
 
 106. Formation of the Tenses of Mute Verbs . . 
 
 Paradigms of Mute Verbs. 
 
 107. Verbs whose Characteristic is a P-mute 
 
 Simple Characteristic, /3, <r, <p . ♦ 
 
 103. Strengthened Characteristic, <rr in Pres, and 
 Impf. ... * * 
 
 109. Verbs whose Characteristic is a K-mute 
 11C. Verbs whose Characteristic is a T-mute 
 
 B. Liquid Verbs. 
 
 11L Formation of the Tenses of Liquid Verbs . 
 
 112. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs 
 
 Pag* 
 
 152 
 
 153 
 
 154 
 
 155 
 
 156 
 
 157 
 
 159 
 
 160 
 
 161 
 
 163 
 
 164 
 166 
 176 
 
 186 
 
 188 
 
 191 
 
 191 
 
 193 
 
 194 
 
 195 
 
 196 
 
 197 
 
 199 
 
 201 
 
 204 
 
 208 
 
 211 
 
 214 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 XIH 
 
 Pacm 
 
 § 113—115. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the 
 Boot-vowel of the Future. 
 
 113. With a in the Future . . , 217 
 
 114. With * in the Future .... 219 
 
 115. With r and S in the Future . . . 220 
 
 116. Special Peculiarities in the formation of certain 
 
 Verbs, both Pure and Impure . . . 224 
 
 Anomalous Verbs in -<*. 
 
 117. Syncope and Metathesis .... 227 
 
 118. Verbs in -u with the Root of the Pres, strengthened 228 
 
 119. L Verbs whose simple Root is strengthened, in the 
 
 Pres, and Impf., by inserting v before the 
 ending ..... 229 
 
 120. II. Verbs whose simple Root is strengthened, in 
 
 the Pres, and Impf., by inserting the syllable 
 
 -v* before the ending .... 230 
 
 121. III. Verbs whose simple Root is strengthened, in 
 
 the Pres, and Impf., by inserting the syllable 
 -av, more rarely -aiv, before the ending 
 
 (a) , -av or -a/v is inserted without any change . 232 
 
 (b) . -a» is inserted before the Tense-ending, and v is 
 
 inserted before the Characteristic Consonant 
 of the simple Root .... 233 
 
 122. IV. Verbs whose simple Root is strengthened, in 
 
 the Pres, and Impf., by inserting -ax or -tax 
 before the ending . . . 236 
 
 123. V. Verbs whose simple Root is strengthened, in 
 
 the Pres, and Impf., by prefixing a Redu¬ 
 plication ..... 239 
 
 124. VI. Verbs to whose simple Root t is added in the 
 
 Pres, and Impf., and some of the othex 
 Tenses ..... 240 
 
 125. VIL Verbs which have the simple Root in the Pres. 
 
 and Impf., but in other Tenses assume a 
 Root with the Characteristic i . . 24? 
 
 126. VIII. Verbs whose Tenses are formed from different 
 
 Roots, classed together only because they 
 coincide in meaning . . • 217 
 
 Verbs in -pt. 
 
 127. Peculiarities in the Conjugation of Verbs in -/u , 2ol 
 
 128. Classification of Verbs in -pt . . ■ 25l 
 
 129. Mood-vowels . 2b2 
 
 130. Personal-endings . . . 2f>3 
 
 Formation of the Tpnses of Verbs in k*. 
 
 131. L First Class of Verbs in 5&G 
 
XIV 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 § 132. II. Second Class of Verbs in -pi . • 
 
 133. Paradigms of Verbs in -pi » * 
 
 134. Remarks on the Paradigms 
 
 Synopsis of Verbs in -pi- 
 
 135. I. Verbs in -pi which affix the Personal-endings di¬ 
 
 rectly to the V owel of the Root . • 
 
 Verbs whose Root ends in -a 
 
 136. Verbs whose Root ends in 
 
 137. Elp! and Clpt . • • _ • _ • 
 
 138. II. Verbs in -pi which affix the syllable -nv or -*£ to 
 
 the Root-vowel, and append to this the Per¬ 
 sonal-endings . • • • 
 
 139. A. Verbs whose Root ends in a Vowel, and af¬ 
 
 fixes -wv . . 
 
 140. B. Verbs whose Root ends in a Consonant, 
 
 and affixes -»tJ 
 
 141. Inflexion of xuput and f,pxi . * • • 
 
 142. Verbs in -u, which, in the Aor. II. Act. and Mid., 
 
 follow the analogy of Verbs in -pi 
 
 143. oTSa, I know . . • • 
 
 144. Deponents and Active Verbs whose Fut. has a Mid. 
 
 form . • * • * 
 
 Pag* 
 
 257 
 
 258 
 270 
 
 281 
 
 281 
 
 286 
 
 287 
 
 291 
 
 293 
 
 295 
 
 297 
 
 298 
 302 
 
 304 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 SIMPLE SENTENCES. 
 
 CHAP. I. _ The Chief Elements of a Simple Sentence. 
 
 145. Nature of a Sentence.—Subject.—Predicate 
 
 146. Concord . . . . • 
 
 147. Exceptions to the General Rules of Concord 
 147b. Concord when there are several Subjects 
 
 148. The Article . 
 
 149. Classes of Verbs 
 
 150. Observations on the Classes of Verbs 
 
 151. Tenses and Moods 
 
 151. A. More particular review of the Tenses 
 
 152. B. More particular review of the Moods 
 
 Remarks on the Modal Adverb «» 
 
 308 
 
 310 
 
 313 
 
 316 
 
 318 
 
 330 
 
 331 
 
 338 
 
 339 
 347 
 349 
 
 CHAP. IL— § 154.— The Attributive Relation, Page 353. 
 CHAP. IIL—§ 155. The-Objective Relation, Page 356. 
 
 The Cases. 
 
 156. I. The Genitive 
 
 357 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 XV 
 
 $ 157. A. Local Relation, 
 
 Genitive of Separation • • . 
 
 158. B. Causal Relation, 
 
 a. The Genitive as an expression of Action in 
 
 general . 
 
 b. The Genitive as an expression of Cause 
 
 c. The Genitive used to denote certain Mutual 
 
 Relations .... 
 
 159. II. The Accusative, 
 
 a. The Accusative denoting Effect . . 
 
 b. The Accusative of the suffering Object . 
 
 160. Double Accusative . • . . • 
 
 161. III. The Dative • . . * . 
 
 162. Prepositions 
 
 Pags 
 
 357 
 
 359 
 
 567 
 
 369 
 
 375 
 
 376 
 382 
 387 
 
 394 
 
 A. Prepositions with one Case. 
 
 163. I. Prepositions with the Gen. alone . » 395 
 
 164. II. Prepositions with the Eat. alone . . 398 
 
 165. III. Prepositions with the Acc. alone . . 399 
 
 B. Prepositions with Two Cases. 
 
 166. Prepositions with the Gen. and Acc. . . 401 
 
 C. Prepositions with Three Cases. 
 
 167. Prepositions with the Gen., Eat. and Act. . . 406 
 
 168. Remarks on the Construction of Verbal Adjectives 
 
 in -rtas, -rea, -riov, and on the Construction of 
 the Comparative . . . .417 
 
 169. Remarks on the use of the Pronouns . .419 
 
 170. The Infinitive ..... 425 
 
 171. A. Infinitive without the Article . . . 425 
 
 172. Nom., Gen., Dat. and Acc. with the Infinitive . 427 
 
 173. B. Infinitive with the Article . . . 430 
 
 174. The Participle ..... 432 
 
 175. A. The Participle a« file Complement of a 
 
 Verbal Idea .... 433 
 
 176. B. The Participle used to express certain Ad¬ 
 
 verbial accessory Relations . • 439 
 
 177. The Adverb ..... 444 
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 CHAP. I.—§ 178. A. Co-ordination, Page 449. 
 CHAP. II.—B. Subordination. 
 
 w 
 
 0 
 
 IV9. Principal and Subordinate Sentences 
 
 453 
 
xrsri 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 § 180. I. Substantive-Sentences. 
 
 A. Substantive-Sentences introduced by In 
 and is . ... 
 
 181. B. Final Substantive-Sentences introduced 
 
 by is, SW, &c. .... 
 
 182. II. Adjective-Sentences „ . . . 
 
 183. III. Adverbial Sentences. 
 
 A. Adverbial Sentences of Place and Time . 
 
 B. Causal Adverbial Sentences 
 
 184 a. Adverbial Sentences denoting Cause 
 
 485 b. Conditional Adverbial Sentences 
 
 18G c. Adverbial Sentences denoting Conse¬ 
 
 quence or Effect 
 
 187. C. Adverbial Sentences denoting Comparison 
 
 18S. Interrogative Sentences .... 
 189. Oblique or Indirect Narration , « , 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 190. Introductory Remarks on the Hexameter 
 
 191. Quantity 
 
 192. Hiatus 
 
 193. The Homeric Dialect 
 
 194. The Digamma . , 
 
 195. Change of Vowels. 
 
 Contraction. —Diaeresis.—Crasis 
 Apocope 
 
 196. Change of Consonants 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 —Synizesis.— 
 
 197. Suffix -<p/(v) 
 
 198. First Declension 
 
 199. Second Declension 
 
 200. Third Declension 
 
 201. Irregular Nouns 
 
 202. Adjectives 
 
 203. Comparison . 
 
 ‘-04. Pronouns 
 
 205. Numerals 
 
 The Verb. 
 
 206. Augment.—Reduplication . . 
 
 207. Personal-endings and Mood-vowels . 
 
 208. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs 
 
 209. Formation of the Tenses 
 
 210. Conjugation of Verlw in -pi . 
 
 2D iuipt uUil upi v 
 
 Paw 
 
 454 
 
 457 
 
 460 
 
 470 
 
 474 
 
 475 
 
 480 
 
 483 
 
 484 
 488 
 
 492 
 
 494 
 
 496 
 
 497 
 
 498 
 
 499 
 
 501 
 
 502 
 
 503 
 
 504 
 504 
 
 508 
 
 509 
 
 509 
 
 510 
 512 
 
 512 
 
 513 
 516 
 518 
 520 
 £21 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 XVil 
 
 Verbs in -<w, which in the Aor. II. Act. and Mid., in the 
 Perf. and Plpf. Act., and in the Pres, and Impf., follow 
 
 THE ANALOGY OF VERBS IN -fii. 
 
 
 
 
 Pash 
 
 § 212. Aor. II. Act. and Mid. • 
 
 » 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 . 522 
 
 213. Perf. and Plpf. Act. . • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 . 524 
 
 214. Pres, and Impf. 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 . 525 
 
 Questions on the Etymology 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 . 526 
 
 Questions on the Syntax 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 . 562 
 
 I. Greek-English Vocabulary . 
 
 • 
 
 t 
 
 . 581 
 
 II. Englisu-Greek Vocabulary . 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 . 618 
 
 III. Index of Proper Names 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 . 654 
 
 IV. General Index ♦ 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 . 659 
 
ELEMENTARY 
 
 GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE LETTERS AND THEIR SOUNDS. 
 § 1. Alphabet 
 
 The Greek language lias twenty-four letters, seven 
 of which are vowels and seventeen consonants, viz.: 
 
 Form. 
 
 Sound. 
 
 Name. 
 
 - 7 . 
 
 » i 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 v A\(fm 
 
 Alpha 
 
 B 
 
 P 
 
 b 
 
 $ 
 
 B i/ra 
 
 Beta 
 
 r 
 
 7 
 
 g hard 
 
 YafXfia 
 
 Gamma 
 
 A 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 AlAr a 
 
 Delta 
 
 E 
 
 £ 
 
 e short 
 
 *E \f/iA6v 
 
 Epsilon 
 
 Z 
 
 
 z 
 
 Z r\ra 
 
 Zeta 
 
 H 
 
 V 
 
 e long 
 
 ’Hra 
 
 Eta(e) 
 
 0 
 
 0 , Sr 
 
 th 
 
 0ijra 
 
 Theta 
 
 I 
 
 l 
 
 • 
 
 i 
 
 ’Iwra 
 
 Iota 
 
 K 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 Ka7r7ra 
 
 Kappa 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 1 
 
 AdjuSSa 
 
 Lambda 
 
 M 
 
 
 m 
 
 Mv 
 
 Mu 
 
 N 
 
 V 
 
 n 
 
 NO 
 
 Nu 
 
 * 
 
 B 
 
2 
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 FORM. SOUND. NAME. 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 X 
 
 tSiL 
 
 Xi 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o short 
 
 *0 jUUKpOV 
 
 Omicron 
 
 n 
 
 7T 
 
 P 
 
 nx 
 
 Pi 
 
 p 
 
 P 
 
 r 
 
 ’Flo 
 
 Rho 
 
 2 
 
 
 s • 
 
 2'iyp.a 
 
 Sigma 
 
 T 
 
 r 
 
 t 
 
 Tav 
 
 Tau 
 
 r 
 
 V 
 
 u 
 
 T r \p~i\6v 
 
 Upsilon 
 
 <*> 
 
 <t> 
 
 ph 
 
 <PT 
 
 Phi 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 ch hard 
 
 XT 
 
 Chi 
 
 v 
 
 * 
 
 ps 
 
 ¥T 
 
 Psi 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 o long 
 
 T £2 jueya 
 
 Omega 
 
 Obs. Sigma (a) takes the form ? at the end of a word; e. g. 
 This small < is sometimes used also in the middle of com¬ 
 pound words, when the first part of the compound ends with 
 Sigma ; e. g. ^usyivr,}. 
 
 § 2. Pronunciation of particular Letters . 
 
 (For rules on the division of syllables see § 17.) 
 
 y before y , k, \ and. £ bas the sound of ng in 
 angle , e. g. ayytkoq , ang-gelos, Lat., angelus , ’A yyjariq, 
 Anchises , avy/cmr rj, syncope , Aapiry£, larynx ; y before 
 vowels always has the hard sound, like p in get. 
 
 t followed by i never has the sound of s/i as ill 
 Latin, e. g. TaXarta —Galatia, Galashia. 
 
 ^ has the guttural sound of cA in Loc/i, e. g. ra^ue* 
 
 § 3. Division of ike Vowels.—Diphthongs. 
 
 e and o are always short vowels; r\ and co always 
 long ; a, t, and v either long or short 
 
 The short vowels are indicated by (f ), the long 
 by ('), e- g- a, a. The mark (*) shows that the 
 vowel may be either long or short, e. g. a- 
 
$.4J DIVISION OF THE CONSONANTS. 3 
 
 The diphthongs are:— 
 
 m pronounced like aye, e.g. ttoXq 
 
 “ ei in height, u Ikuvoq 
 
 u oi u boil, “ \oipo c 
 
 “ whee “ wheel, 11 vloq 
 “ au “ fraud, 11 ypavg 
 
 “ ew u feudal, “ fia&iXevg, r)v%nfra 
 
 11 ou u round, “ Adyoue, itourov; 
 
 also p and tp, i.e. a, and w with an Iota written 
 under (iota subscriptum). These three diphthongs, 
 which are called improper diphthongs, we pronounce 
 like a, t) and u> without an Iota subscript. 
 
 u 
 
 OL 
 
 VI 
 
 «tU 
 
 tv and tjv 
 ou and wv 
 
 a 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 a 
 
 it 
 
 Obs. 1. The way in which the Romans pronounced these diph¬ 
 thongs may be learned from the following examples— ou being re¬ 
 presented by ce, a by l or e, oi by oe, vi by yi, and ou by u :— 
 
 A’/yu-TTos, jE gyp tvs, Tiux^oi, Teucer, 
 
 (SixXtix, Thalia, Sugeizourcu, Syracusoe , 
 
 (A Inlets, uEneas, o^axis, Thraces , 
 
 K foTffos, Croesus , Thressa, 
 
 ’iigs'dutoi, Orithyia, Kuyuutlx, comcedia. 
 
 Alx'ts , Aulis » 
 
 Obs. 2. With the capital letters, the Iota subscript of a., y, and 
 », is placed in a line with the vowel ; e. g. At—a., H<=>?, €it==u. 
 
 Obs. 3. When two vowels, which regularly form a diphthong, 
 are to be pronounced separately , it is indicated by two points 
 (puncta dicer&sis) placed over the second vowel (/, u); e. g. u, w, 
 
 § 4. Division of the Consonants. 
 
 . The consonaxits are divided, first, according to 
 crgans by which they are formed, into:— 
 
 Gutturals,y, k, y; 
 
 Linguals, r, 8, 0, v, X, p, a; 
 
 Labials, (3, t r, <p, p. 
 
 Exercise for Reading, ye. yr\. kcu. \i. \tt. — St. Sab. 
 Sri . ra. re. to. t oj. rtp. rov. rav. ry. Ot. Oti. Aw. ya\a. 
 vv. vti. vtiv. vij. pw. pa. pet. p€tv. <xa. aov. fftvw.—j3ou-, 
 
 I 
 
4 DIVISION OF THE CONSONANTS. [CHAP. I. 
 
 f3ovv. (irjra. (3aXXw. m. 7 rov. i rw. 7rav. pi. pepw. <ptv. 
 pvyr\. \uv. /Lit), poi. 
 
 2. Consonants are divided, again, according to the 
 greater or less influence of the organs of speech in 
 their formation, into:— 
 
 (a) Semi-vowels , viz. X, p, v, g, which are called 
 Liquids, and the sibilant <r; 
 
 (b) Mutes , viz. (3, y, S, i r, k, r, (p , x? 0 These nine 
 mutes are divided:— 
 
 (a) According to the organ of speech , into three 
 Gutturals, three Linguals, and three Labials ; 
 
 (j3) According to their names , into three K— 
 mutes, three T—mutes, and three P—mutes; 
 
 (*y) According to the stress of articulation , into 
 three smooth Mutes (tenues), three medial 
 Mutes (medice), and three rough Mutes (aspi- 
 ratce). 
 
 I SMOOTH. 
 
 MEDIAL. 
 
 ROUGH. 
 
 
 Gutturals 
 
 K 
 
 7 
 
 X 
 
 K—mutes 
 
 Linguals 
 
 T 
 
 8 
 
 e 
 
 T—mutes 
 
 Labials 
 
 7r 
 
 0 
 
 
 |P—mutes 
 
 3. From the union of the Mutes with the sibilant 
 <r, three double consonants originate,— 
 
 \p from 7r<7, j3<r, 0<x. 
 
 % from k<t, yet, \<j. 
 t from S<r or oS. 
 
 Exercise for Reading. Xap/3$a. Xtnru). Xapj3avw. pv. 
 ptXog. paXa. vv. WKreg. vvacrio. pevaiQ. pnrru). aiypa. 
 ffsvu). Kcimra. k aiva. koivov. yap. ypav. \6(nv. — rov. ttjv* 
 toiv. Ttpvo). rpavpa. SeXra. Suvorrjg. Osa. Orira. Oavpa 
 Oavpacria. — 7 r avra. irpinra. 7 ronv. Ttavopev. [3r)ra. (3aivio 
 fSaXXu). (3XcnrTopzv. pevyw. povtvu). ptiBopcu. — \pi. 
 pavin. \paXXii). \paXrrip. £i. &vog. ^avOig. %aivi »* 
 
 ]Ta. K,nfrr\(Jiq. 
 
§6.] 
 
 BREATHINGS. - 
 
 5 
 
 § 5. Breathings . 
 
 Spiritus lenis and Spiritus asper. 
 
 1. Every initial vowel is pronounced with a 
 Breathing ; this is either a smooth or rough Breath¬ 
 ing. The smooth (spiritus lenis) is indicated by the 
 mark (’), the rough (spiritus asper) by (). One of 
 these marks is placed over every vowel which begins 
 a word; e. g. wov, laropia. The rough breathing cor¬ 
 responds to the English and Latin h. The smooth 
 breathing is used with every initial vowel, which has 
 not the rough. 
 
 2. In diphthongs, the mark of the breathing is 
 placed over the second vowel; e. g. viog, tvOvg, avriKci. 
 But when the improper diphthongs q, y, y, are capi¬ 
 tal letters, the breathing is placed over the first 
 vowel; e. g. 'Ai$r)g=q8rig, Hades. 
 
 3. The liquid p is pronounced with the rough 
 breathing, and hence has the mark of the breathing 
 at the beginning of the word ': e. g. pa/38og. When 
 two p’s occur in the middle of a word, the first is 
 pronounced with the smooth breathing, the last with 
 the rough. The first has the mark of the smooth , 
 the last that of the rough ; e. g. JIuppoc, Pyrrhus. 
 
 4. v at the beginning of a word has, in Attic 
 Greek, always the rough breathing. 
 
 Exercise for Reading. a\<pa. avE,av(o. alQrip. alga, 
 tgov. £K(vv. dra. dga. tvpti. typivKU). oXiyov. olvov. olov. 
 olov. rira. qvZov. i )kwv. Iwra. iva. imroi. vtto. vioi. iojkti. 
 qS(o. 'QiiStj. 
 
 § 6. Mark of Crasis and Elision (Coronis — 
 
 Apostrophe.) 
 
 1. The mark of Crasis and Elision is the same as 
 the smooth breathing. 
 
6 
 
 MOVEABLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 [Chap. I 
 
 2. When two words come together, the one ending , 
 and the other beginning, with a vowel , these two vowels 
 frequently unite and form one long syllable. This 
 union is called Crasis , and the mark by which it is 
 indicated, Cordnis. The Coronis is placed over the 
 syllable formed by Crasis , and when this syllable is a 
 diphthong, over the second vowel. But the Coronis 
 is omitted, when a word begins with a vowel or 
 diphthong formed by Crasis; e. g. ro ovo^a==rov- 
 vofia , ro £7roc=rov7roc, rd ayaOa=TayaOa, 6 oivoc= 
 wvog. 
 
 Obs. In Crasis the Iota Subscript (§ 3.) is written only when the 
 latter of the two combining vowel-sounds is a diphthong which con- 
 tains i; e. g. xcci iiTa—xarix, ; but xa.i tvrura.=xa. , n‘ii<ra,. 
 
 3. Elision is to be distinguished from Crasis. It 
 consists in the omission of <2 wur6/(generally a short one) 
 before a word beginning with a vowel. The mark by 
 which Elision is indicated is called Apostrophe; e.g. 
 curb diKov=an oiKov. The Apostrophe is omitted m 
 compound words: e. g. cnrtyzpov for a7ro-t<ptpov. 
 
 f § 7. Moveable Consonants at the end of a word. 
 
 1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of 
 two vowels in two successive words, is by appending 
 a v (called v itpsXKvariKov, i. e. v suffixed) to certain 
 
 final syllables, viz.:— _ • 
 
 (a) to the Bat. PI. in at ; to the two Adverbs, 7re- 
 pvaiy last year , 7ravra7ra(Ti> universally i and all 
 Adverbs of place in at ; e. g. 7rd<yiv tAfSa ; i] IlAa- 
 raiaaiv ^ytgov/a; 
 
 (b) to the third Pers. Sing, and PI. in at; e. g. 
 rvirrovaiv ijui, TiOnaiv iv ry rp«7Ti£y ; so also to 
 
 iari ; 
 
 (c) to the third Pers. Sing, in t; e. g. irvirTtv epl$ 
 

 § 8.] CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. 7 
 
 ( d ) to the numeral ukogi, although even before 
 vowels the v is often omitted; e. g. ukogiv avSptg 
 and eikogl avSpsg. 
 
 Obs. The v itptXxvo-nxov also stands regularly at the end of a 
 book, as well as of a whole section, even if the following section 
 begins with a consonant; also at the end of every verse. 
 
 4 ^ 
 
 2. cr is appended to the Adverb ovtio (thus) before 
 a vowel; e. g. o u r w c broiriGEv, (but our w 7roiio ); 
 sometimes to the Adverbs ps\9 1 an d « X 9 1 ( un til) 1 
 to the Preposition Ik (ex), which then takes the form 
 
 ; e. g. riprivrig, (but Ik ttiq uprjvriQ) ; so also in 
 composition; e. g. t&Xavvetv, (but IkteXuv). 
 
 3. ic is appended to the negative ov before a vowel ; 
 e. g. ovk alaxpog, (but ov KaXog) ; except when ov ends 
 a sentence, it becomes ov\ before a vowel, with a 
 rough breathing; e. g. ov\ r)$vg ; not however before 
 
 p ; e. g. OV p'lTTTb). 
 
 f § 8. Change of Consonants in Inflexion and 
 
 Derivation. 
 
 _ /• 
 
 When two consonants occur together in the form¬ 
 ing of words, the first of them is often changed for 
 the sake of euphony. 
 
 1. A P—mute (rr, j3, (f>) or a K—mute ( k , y, x)> 
 before a T—mute (r, S, 6 ), must be of the same order 
 of breathing (§ 4. 2 ) as the T—mute; therefore only 
 a smooth Mute ( 77 -, k) can stand before the smooth 
 Mute r ; only a medial ((3, 7 ), before the medial 8 ; 
 only an aspirate ( 0 , y), before the aspirate 6 ;«[t rr 
 and icr; (5S and yS; $0 and (compare scriptum 
 from scriboy rectum from rego , coctum from coquo); 
 
 e. g— 
 
 * 
 
 (1 before t becomes W as: (’from rg'ifi-co ) rer^/s-ra/ =Tergi‘n’reci 
 
 <p yy v ,, o' ,, ( ,, y^oitp-u) yiy^a(p-ra{=yiy^et<TTCci 
 
 y ,, r ,, Xiy-u ) XiXty-rai =XiXixra.t 
 
 X »* T »» *»>(»» —frifytxnu 
 
8 
 
 
 
 CHANGE 
 
 $■ 
 
 OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 [Chap. 
 
 re 
 
 before $ becomes P> >» 
 
 ( 
 
 II 
 
 xvre-ru ) 
 
 =xv(&ei 
 
 <p 
 
 It 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 0 „ 
 
 ( 
 
 II 
 
 y/)tx(f>-co ) y£ot<p-%nv 
 
 =.y^fLp>^tit 
 
 X 
 
 It 
 
 5 
 
 99 
 
 y » 
 
 ( 
 
 II 
 
 rektx-u ) rektx-lqv 
 
 =re\iyhn* 
 
 X 
 
 11 
 
 $ 
 
 99 
 
 y » 
 
 ( 
 
 II 
 
 Pbx-”) fy*x-h y 
 
 =(i^tyhn¥ 
 
 re 
 
 11 
 
 4 
 
 II 
 
 »» 
 
 ( 
 
 II 
 
 rr’ifJt.'X-u ) ireiftre-Sw 
 
 =\irtfi<p0n9 
 
 a 
 
 It 
 
 4 
 
 II 
 
 <p ,, 
 
 ( 
 
 II 
 
 rfifi-co ) %T(>i$-6yiv 
 
 II 
 
 «n*» 
 
 8 
 
 X 
 
 9 1 
 
 0 
 
 11 
 
 £ » 
 
 ( 
 
 II 
 
 rekix-u ) trrkix-6nv 
 
 =tT\iX,0nv 
 
 y 
 
 It 
 
 6 
 
 II 
 
 *» 
 
 ( 
 
 II 
 
 Xty-u ) i\iy-6i jv 
 
 =i\t%6i j». 
 
 Obs. 1. U in compound words remains unchanged ; e. g. iMva> r 
 ixhitai, &c., not i ybovvcu. 
 
 2. The smooth mutes (V, »c, r) before a rough breath¬ 
 ing , are changed into the cognate aspirates (0, 0), 
 
 not only in inflexion and derivation, but also in two 
 separate words. The medials (j3, y, S), however, are 
 thus changed only in the in flexion of the Verb; in other 
 cases they remain unchanged; hence:— 
 
 «7r’ ov becomes a<tf ou, inhutpog (from ini, r)y*p a )— 
 
 i(J)rilUitO<>Q- 
 
 tKvfpaivw (from art, vtyaivio) = icpvfjxiivu), TtTVTr-a= 
 T(ru(j)a. 
 
 ovk bmwg = ov\ baiwg, StKiifitpog (from Ssk a, 17 pipa) 
 
 avr b)v = avO ’ wv (from avr'i ) ; ovdtlg (=ov& ug), not 
 ovQbg. 
 
 tt'Xoy-a = aXo^a, but \ty bzpav, (not Xt'x bipav). 
 Ttrpi(3-a = TtrpKpa, but Tptj3’ ovrcoc (no£ rpi</>’ outg>c). 
 
 Obs. 2. This change takes place in Crasis also, as 6arty*, for r» 
 (§ 6. 2). When two smooth mutes (err or xr) precede an as¬ 
 pirate, they must both be changed into aspirates ; e. g.\<pHftt^s 
 instead of (from terra, t see XI). •"'A/ instead of 
 
 / 9 V- 
 
 0Aij*. 
 
 3. A T—mute (r, 8, 0) before another T—mute is 
 changed into a ; (compare claustrum from claudo) ; 
 but in the Perfect and Plupf Act ., it is omitted be¬ 
 fore k:— 
 
 \reu6-6v* 
 
 (from 
 
 ml6u) 
 
 rruD-rios 
 
 ( 
 
 mill to) 
 
 
 ( „ 
 
 Igi tbeo) 
 
 reireitd-xa 
 
 ( », 
 
 •Xii&a ) 
 
 becomes Wi'itrh* 
 
 ,, vruiTrioi 
 
 ,, ersersiJta. 
 
CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 9 
 
 4. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Li¬ 
 quid; thus:— 
 
 ruv-Xoyt%co becomes ffvWoyiZ,u>, ervv-fjbsr^ta, becomes 
 {t-fiivu becomes ifc/tivu, trvv-g'iTru becomes cuppiirrat. 
 
 (Compare ill mo, immmeo). 
 
 Obs. 3. The Preposition if before £ is an exception ; e. g. h^i-rru. 
 This is not so in Latin; e. g. irrao, (not inrwo). 
 
 5. A P—mute ( 7 r, (3, <p) before /a is changed into /x. 
 A K—mute (k, 7 , \) before p is changed into 7 ; 
 
 therefore 7 remains unchanged. 
 
 A T—mute (r, S, 0) before p is changed into a ; 
 thus:— 
 
 (*) P-mute. rirgi&-/u.ai 
 
 XiXUW-fJLCU 
 
 ytygctty-pt-ui 
 (/3) K-mute. <prt<rkix-pi.ai 
 
 XiXiy-/u.a.i 
 
 (y) T-mute. Uvur-ftou 
 
 ipn^ih-puti 
 XlXOfu'b-fAU.I 
 
 (from r£i(Zu ) becomes 
 
 ( >> Xl'i’TfU ) „ 
 
 ( „ y^a<pu) ) ,, 
 
 ( ,, vrXixco) „ 
 
 ( ,, \iyu ) remains 
 ( >> ) becomes 
 
 ( ,, ivvru ) „ 
 
 ( ,, ipfta ) ,, 
 
 ( ,, vu6u ) ,, 
 
 ( ,, xopiZ,u) ,, 
 
 XskufApieu 
 
 y'ty^a.fj.fjt.a .1 
 
 artvrteyfjMLi 
 
 ktktypiKi 
 
 (i'i(ipsype.a,s 
 
 igV(>(t<r/u,eci 
 
 9r'tTti<r/u.<zi 
 
 KiKoptirrptai. 
 
 6 . N before a P-mute ( 7 r, (3, <p, \p) is changed into p. 
 N before a K-mute (k, y, ?) is changed into 7 . 
 N before a T-mute (r, 3, 6) is unchanged ; thus: 
 
 \f-irupia. becomes I pAvupia. 
 
 if-&el\ko ,, tpf'ta.XXu 
 
 iv-<P(>O0f ,, tpc<f)^a>v 
 
 tv-^v%os „ ipt^/up^os 
 
 ffuf-xaXiu 
 
 becomes cruyxakiiv 
 
 ffW-yiyvuorxw ,, 
 
 ffvyyiyvuifxot < 
 
 trvv-^oyog 
 
 99 
 
 ffuy^ovos 
 
 <rvy\iu. 
 
 (fUV-^-U 
 
 9 9 
 
 (Compare imbuo, imp rimo, See.) 
 But irvfTiivu, ffvf&iu, ervvdiu, (compare intendo). 
 
 Obs. 4. The enclitics (§ 14 .) form an exception ; e. g. a*«ri£, rovyi. 
 
 7. A P-mute (71*, (3, <f) with <x forms \p. 
 
 A K-mute («, 7 , \) with a forms £. 
 
 A T-mute ( r , 3, 0) disappears before a; thus:—• 
 
 («) P —mute. Xil’T-ir/u ( from kuvu) becomes kuyj/a ot-os 
 
 rg'ifi-iru ( “ ^s^wjS o$ 
 
 y^atp-tru ( y^tx<f>u) (< ygcc^u NI^, 
 
10 
 
 CIIANGE OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 Xty-Oea ( i( \tyu ) 
 
 fyix-<ru ( “ t>fix u ) 
 
 (y) T—mute, avvr-tru ( kvCru) 
 
 ■v/'li t^-ou ( 
 
 orttti-tru ( “ crtiQu ) 
 
 (fi) K— mute. *\U-au (from *\ixa>) becomes cr\\\u x^ax-ot 
 
 1 4 ‘ ' ** Xs£« a”|, aiy-6s 
 
 (hot? 60 puw\, (JtMVUX' 0 * 
 avvcco ytkeos, yi'kuT-os 
 ^sotreo <rx~s, vrou'Soj 
 cruffco ogv/f, o^vtS-os 
 
 (Pgah-ffu ( “ <P(>x%,&o ) “ <p^aa iXitj;, sAcr/'S-oj. 
 
 Compare duxi (due-si) from duco, rexi ( reg-si^ fromrego , coxi, 
 (coq-si) from coquo, clausi (claud-si) from claudo. 
 
 Obs. 5. ’E* before <r is an exception ; e. g. ixtrul^u. 
 
 8 . N disappears before <r; but when it is joined 
 with a T—mute, both disappear before <r, and as a 
 compensation, the vowel if short is changed into a 
 diphthong ; if doubtful , it is lengthened (t into *t, o into 
 ov, a, t, v into d, I, u). The long vowels (rj, m) are 
 left unchanged; thus:— 
 
 %a.\pov-<rt becomes 'ba.tpoart 
 •rut“pSivr-crt “ ruQPtttn 
 errivb-ffu 
 ru\J/xvT-<n 
 
 cSat. T-<Tt 
 </ 
 
 €f 
 
 ffTTUVCtl 
 
 •rinj/ccori 
 
 tXptv6-<n 
 
 Eivofuvr-<ri 
 
 becomes obovm 
 “ X\pi<n 
 ** txvva 
 
 GtvoOanTu 
 
 Obs. 6. Exceptions : tv, as tvtrxti^u ; <r«x<», as jraX/Vx/a?; some 
 forms of inflexion and derivation in -rat and-r^s, as erttpava-at from 
 f divu ; and some few Substantives in -tvs and ms. In compound 
 words, » in am is changed into a before <r followed by a vowel, as 
 rumroZyUi instead of amadou; but when <r with a consonant, or Z, follows 
 », the v disappears ; e. g. am-arnpa becomes avampet, am-Z,vyi% 
 becomes av^vyia. Adjectives in -us, -taacc, -tv, in the Dat. Masc., 
 and Neut. PL (s n instead of wu) are an exception to the lengthen¬ 
 ing of t into u before * and a T-mute. (See § 40. Obs. 1.). 
 
 9. In the following cases two successive syllables 
 of a word do not begin with an Aspirate , the first 
 Aspirate being changed into the corresponding 
 smooth :— 
 
 (a) in the Reduplication of the verb (§ 77, 4 and 
 § 127, 2); e. g— 
 
 <$t-<plxt)xct (from <ptx(co ) 
 
 Xf xt** ( » xf" ) 
 
 Ht-Pvxu. ( ,, 6uu ) 
 
 6t-6npt (Root 8E ) 
 
 becomes 
 
 >» 
 
 »» 
 
 trt<piX»xa 
 
 xtxZxa 
 
 r'tOuza 
 
 TtSnpt. 
 
 (b) in the first Aor. and Fut. Pass, of Oveiv and 
 TtOtvai (Root 0E):— 
 
 \ru-6t)* t ro-6wop.cu, W t-6tjv, n-Swcpott, instead of iA6-6v*, i/t-fw, &U» 
 
CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 11 
 
 §8.] 
 
 10. When the same Aspirate would regularly be 
 doubled, the first is changed into its corresponding 
 smooths e. g. 2a?rBafc^oe, ’ AtQ'iq ; not 
 Ba\^°c, ’AOQIq. 
 
 11. In some words whose Roots begin with r and 
 end with an Aspirate, the smooth r is changed into 
 the Aspirate 0 , when the Aspirate, in the inflexion 
 or formation of words, is changed, by the laws of 
 euphony, into an unaspirated consonant. Thus :— 
 
 From the Root TPIX is formed the Nom. 0p/£, 
 (f?pfrc)> hair , Dat. PI. Opi^l ; in the other cases the 
 simpleRoot appears : rpt^-oc, rpi^-i, &c. 
 
 Ta^wc ( Boot TAX) becomes Quttwv in the com¬ 
 parative. 
 
 From the Root TAd> come Oai ttm, Oaifjto, rtOappat 
 (rlOaTr-nni) ; but also second Aor. Pass trdfprjv; and 
 the Substantives rcapi'i, rdcpog. 
 
 T pi(f)-o), Fut. Opixfsii) ( OpiTT-crtu ), Aor. Wptipa, Opsn- 
 Tt'jp, Opififia (Optir-fict ); but also Perf. rirpo^a. 
 
 From the Root T PYd> come OpvTr-Tu), Opinpu), t tOpvpr 
 pai ( rtdpvTr-pai ); but also trpiHprjv, Tpv<pog. 
 
 T pi%-U), Fut. Ooi^opai (9ps\-aopat). 
 
 Fut. ( The vowel with the rough breath¬ 
 
 er g is considered as an aspirated letter ). 
 
 Obs. 7. Where the Passive endings of the above verbs, 
 fc xtu (Root TA<f*), {Root TPT #) begin with 6, the aspiration of 
 
 the two final consonants ( <p6 ) changes r, the initial consonant of 
 the Root, into 6 ; e. g- 
 
 \6^i(p-6nv, 6^i(p-6ypia.i } 0^i<p-6yio , t'r6ai, 
 t6x($-6r\v, 0u!p-fati, 6 u.$-6'/\<to[xu.i, ’ri6d.<p-6cti. 
 
 Obs. 8. In the Imperative-ending of the first Aor. Pass., where 
 both syllables would begin with 6, (viz.-M/), the last Aspirate, 
 vot the first, is changed into the corresponding smooth mute; e. g. 
 0>ou\t4-6v)<n (not p>ov\ivfa<h). In the second Aor. Pass, the ending 
 
 again appears ; e. g. rfifi-yh. 
 
 12. P is doubled —(a) when the Augment is pre¬ 
 fixed; e. g. tppenv ; (b) in composition when p is pre¬ 
 ceded by a short vowel; e. g. apprjKTOQ , fiaOvppoog; 
 but tv-pwGTOQ (from tv and pwvvvpa)* 
 
12 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 § 9. Quantity of Syllables . 
 
 1. A syllable is short by nature, when its vowel 
 is short, viz., c, o, a> i } v, and when a vowel or 
 single consonant follows a short vowel; e g ’tvo- 
 
 u W >U W/ f\*J KJ 
 
 fxiaa, tnv U£T o. 
 
 2. A syllable is long by nature , when its vowel is 
 a simple long vowel; viz., rj, w, a, 7, v , or a diphthong, 
 e. g. f 'rjpa>c, icotvai, ytyvpa, l<r\vpog y Trai^evyg; hence 
 contracted syllables are always long, e. g.’aicwv (from 
 «fKwv), ISorpvg (from fiorpvaq). 
 
 3 . A syllable with a short vowel is made long by 
 position, when two or more consonants, or a double 
 consonant (?, £, ^), follow the short vowel; e. g. ’7k- 
 ote’AXw, TixpavTtt;, KOpaZ, (icopaicoq), Tpane^a. 
 
 Obs. Position in the case of a mute followed by a liquid does 
 not usually make a short vowel long; e. g. arexm, 'a.xpn, 
 
 Borovs, 'hiheS.X'it.os. In two cases, however, the short vowel is thus 
 lengthened : (1) in compound words ; e. g. 'exnpu .— (2) when one 
 of the medial mutes (A y, S) stands bejore one of the three liquids , 
 V, ft, »; e. g. /3t/3Xfl5, tvobp.o{, 5TS5 rXlyp.au 
 
 § 10. Accentuation. 
 
 1. Accentuation is the raising of the tone of one 
 syllable, in words of two or more syllables, the others 
 having a depressed tone in comparison, as, writing , 
 paternal. Monosyllabic words ought also to be ac¬ 
 cented, in order that they may have a certain pro¬ 
 minence in continued discourse. 
 
ACCENTUATION. 
 
 13 
 
 § 10.] 
 
 The Greek language has the following marks of 
 accentuation:— 
 
 (a) The acute ('), to denote a sharp tone; e. g. 
 Xd'yoe. 
 
 (b) The circumflex (**), to denote a protracted 
 tone; e. g. GtJjjia. 
 
 (c) The grave ( '), to denote a softened acute on 
 the filial syllables of words in continued dis¬ 
 course (§ 12, 1.). The grave is also used in¬ 
 stead of the acute to distinguish certain words; 
 e. g. r\g (indefinite), any one, and rig (inter¬ 
 rogative), who f 
 
 Obs. 1. The accent is placed over the second vowel of (proper) 
 diphthongs; and, at the beginning of words commencing with a 
 vowel, the acute and grave are placed after the breathing, but the 
 circumflex over it; e. g. aVag, auXuot, S,v s iZ^o?, alpa. But 
 with capital letters , the accent is placed after the breathing, over 
 the first vowel of the (improper) diphthongs a, >j, m • e. g/'Aihm 
 (otivs)* With the diaeresis (§ 3., Obs. 3.), the acute stands between, 
 
 the circumflex over, the points ; e. g. aths, xXwlt. 
 
 2. The acute stands over one of the three last 
 syllables, whether long or short; e. g. ev , Ong, koX 6g, 
 KaXoVQ, (3£f3ovXeVKOTOC, av0pu)7TOV, TToXsflOg, £vE,£LVOQ. 
 
 3. The circumflex stands over one of the two last 
 syllables only; but the syllable on which it stands 
 must always be long by nature; e. g. tov, ruyog, 
 Xpr\ga, TigwfX£v. 
 
 4. If, then, the antepenult * is accented, it can only 
 have the acute ; yet the acute can stand on the 
 antepenult only when the ultimate is short, and is 
 also not long by position; e. g. rpaneZa, avOpwirog, 
 KaXavpo7rog; but TpaTri^rjg, avOpumov, k aXavpoxp- 
 
 5. If the penult f is accented and is short by nature 
 it must always have the acute; e. g. j3ef3ovXevK6rog 
 rpairi^rig, rdrrrn, rarre. 
 
 But if the penult is accented and is long by nature, 
 it takes— 
 
 * I. e. The last syllable but two. 
 
 t L e. The last syllable but one. 
 
14 
 
 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [CflAP. IL 
 
 (a) the acute , when the ultimate* is long by nature; 
 
 e ‘ £* T «X«» wparroi, npa&ig ; 
 
 (b) the circumflex , when the ultimate is short by 
 nature, —a syllable long by position being here 
 considered short ; e. g. ru^og, tt parrs, 7rpa%tg, 
 7 rpayga, ^pnga, avXaZ, (Gen. avXaKog), KaXavpoip, 
 A rjgiavatZ, (but Outpafi, Gen. OutpaKog). 
 
 6 . If the ultimate is accented, and short , it always 
 lias the acute ; e. g. (3s(3ouXevku g; but if the ultimate 
 is long, it has either the acute or circumflex; e. g. 
 fitfiovXevicijjg, ngiov. [Comp. § 11 , 2 ( 2 ), (b).]. 
 
 Obs. 2. According to the accentuation of the last syllable, words 
 have the following names :— 
 
 (a) Oxytones, 1 when the ultimate has the acute; e. g. nrufuf, 
 
 xa.xos, 0r,(> ; 
 
 (b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute; e. g. <r«Arr<w ; 
 
 (c) Proparoxy tones, when the antepenult has the acute; e. g. 
 
 CCvfywiroS, TVTTTopiVOg, aV^OMTTOt, rUTT?Of&CVO! J 
 
 (d) PerispdmZna, when the ultimate has the circumflex ; e. g. 
 
 xuxus ; 
 
 (e) Properispomena, when the penult has the circumflex; e. g. 
 •x^aypet, <pt\oZtra. J 
 
 (f) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented; e. g. *£dyp.*ra ? 
 
 V(fl yfx.ce.. 
 
 t § 11. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflexion 
 
 and Contraction. 
 
 1 . When a word is changed by inflexion, either in 
 the quantity of its final syllable or in the number of 
 its syllables, then, according to the preceding rules, 
 there is generally also a change or removal of the 
 accent:— 
 
 (a) By lengthening the final syllable, 
 
 (a) A Proparoxytone, as noXegog, becomes a 
 Paroxytone ; e. g. TroXigov ; 
 
 • I. e. The last syllable. 
 
 t Oxytone derived from o^vg, sharp, and rbog, tone; PerispSm&i* 
 from viturrwfuvos, drawn-around , (referring to the shape of tha 
 accentuation-mark) ; Barytone from jSagt/*, (gravis), heavy. 
 
§ 11-1 
 
 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. 
 
 15 
 
 ((3) A Properispomenon , as ruxpg, becomes a 
 Paroxytone ; e. g. ovq ; 
 
 (y) An Oxytone , as {hoc, becomes a Perispo - 
 menon'y e. g. 0 eov« But this change is 
 limited to particular instances. [See § 26, 
 5, (a).] ^ 
 
 (b) By shortening th o final syllable, 
 
 (a) A dissyllabic Paroxytone with long penult , 
 as (jitvyu), becomes a Properispomenon; e.g. 
 Qevye; (but rarraj, rarre). 
 
 (]3) A polysyllabic Paroxytone , whether the 
 p,enult is long or short, becomes a Propa - 
 roxytone 3 e. g. (3ov\evu), (3ovX eve. 
 
 (c) By the addition of a syllable or syllables at 
 the beginning of a word, the accent is generally re¬ 
 moved towards the beginning of the word; e. g. <pev- 
 7w, i<l>Evyov. By the addition of syllables at the end 
 of a word, on the contrary, the accent is generally 
 removed towards the end of the word; e. g. tvtttu), 
 ru7rrojU£0a, rvtpOriaofjiEOa. 
 
 Obs. 1. The 'particular cases of the change of accent by inflexion, 
 and the exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be noticed 
 hereafter under the accentuation of the several parts of speech. 
 
 2. With respect to contraction , the following rules 
 are to be attended to:— 
 
 (1) When neither of two syllables to be contracted 
 is accented, the contracted syllable also is unaccented; 
 the syllable which, previous to contraction, had the 
 accent, retaining it after the contraction; e. g. $(Xee 
 =< piXei, (but 0tA££f=^>iXa), yavti=yEVEi , (but ytviiov 
 —yevtov). 
 
 (2) But when one of the two syllables to be con¬ 
 tracted is accented, the contracted syllable also is ac¬ 
 cented :— 
 
 (a) When the contracted syllable is the antepenult 
 or penult, it takes the accent which the general 
 rules require; e. g.— 
 
16 
 
 REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. [CHAP II. 
 
 ivycnraofiai = aycnriofiai (juXtofievog = (ftiXovgevoQ 
 iaraoroQ = taTtoTOQ opOoovai == opOovai 
 
 vXfcaaa = vXriaoa TipaovTcov = ti/j.u)vtu)V ; 
 
 (b) When the contracted syllable is the ultimate , 
 it takes— 
 
 (a) the acute , when the last of the syllables to 
 be contracted has the acute I e. g. I<rraw<,- 
 = tOTWC j 
 
 (j3) the circumflex, when the first of the 
 syllables to be contracted is accented; e. g. 
 
 VX°i = VX ot 
 
 Obs. 2. The exceptions to the rules just given will be noticed 
 hereafter under the contracted declensions and conjugations. 
 
 f § 12. Change and Removal of the Accent in con¬ 
 nected Discourse. 
 
 1. In connected discourse Oxy tones receive the mark of the grave , 
 
 i. e. by the close connection of the words with each other the sharp 
 tone is weakened or depressed; e. g. E< ft) Tfyxxkkin 
 
 ’ Higifioicc. rjv. But the acute must stand before every punctuation- 
 mark by which an actual division is made in the thought; e. g. 
 
 0 (64EV K Vgot t"TS(?U<ri TOV TOTX/UOV, 0 / TOk'tp.lOi XTityuyOV. CyrUS CVOSSed 
 
 the rivet', but the enemy took to flight. 
 
 Exceptions. The interrogatives vis ; vi; quis ? quid ? always 
 remain oxy tone. 
 
 2. In Crdsis (§ 6. 2), the accent of the first word is omitted, and 
 the word formed from the two has the accent of the second word ; 
 
 e g. too xyx6x=vxyoi6x, tou ovgxvov=TOU(>xvou, ry hfttgx=0rip'i£x, to 
 
 wpet—rovvopx ; yet, according to the general rule _(§ 10. 3), the 
 long vowel formed by Crasis takes the circumflex instead of the 
 acute, when the second word is a dissyllabic paroxytone , with a short 
 flnal Syllable , e. g. to i9ros=TouTOf, too xkkx=rxkkx, to i^yor=i 
 
 TO'JeyO*, TX OTkX=6uTkX. , J *' J * 
 
 [This is a violation of the rule that the circumflex is used only 
 when the first of the contracted syllables has the acute. Some, 
 therefore, write the contracted syllable with the accent of the 
 second; e. g. tout os, instead of toZtos.] 
 
 3. In Elision (§ 6, 3), the accent of the elided vowel is thrown 
 back as an acute upon the preceding syllable; but , when the word, 
 from which a vowel has been elided, is a Preposition , or one of tln» 
 
ATONICS-ENCLITICS. 
 
 17 
 
 §14.] 
 
 particles, dxxd, olV&, pr^t, or one of the enclitics, <nv« and Tort, 
 the accent of the elided vowel wholly disappears ; as also when the 
 accented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided ; e. g.— 
 
 xeXXa txa6ot 
 3s/v« igwraf 
 <py fjii tyeo 
 
 sXt^ag 
 Writ n<rctp 
 
 = x'oXX' 'lxa.6at 
 = bay i£ura,$ 
 = (pwfjt, iyu) 
 
 — sXi^ag 
 
 «_ > t 
 
 c= txr n<ra.t 
 
 xaoa ifzou 
 ixo lavTou 
 aXXa. \yu 
 evb s 
 
 v<va iXtyt 
 
 * » ~ 
 
 = sra* 
 
 = ictVTQV 
 
 = aXX’ 
 
 = 
 
 = Tit sXeyt. 
 
 f § 13. Atonies or Proclitics* 
 
 Some small words are termed Atonies or Proclitics , 
 which, in connected discourse, are so closely united 
 to the following word, that they, as it were, coalesce 
 with it, and lose their accent. They are:— 
 
 (a) The forms of the Article, 6, 17 , oi , at; 
 
 (b) The Prepositions, lv, in, dg (ig), into , (iQ, 
 
 ex, from, ad, to; 
 
 (c) The Conjunctions, oog, as, that , so when , 
 
 si, l/; 
 
 ,(d) ou (ouk, oux)» ; but a t the end of a sentence 
 and with the meaning ‘iVo,’ it has the acute ; 
 e. g. ov (ouk). 
 
 t § 14. Enclitics.\ 
 
 Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, 
 which, in connected discourse, are so closely joined, 
 in certain cases, to the preceding word, that they 
 either lose their accent , or throw it hack upon the pre- 
 
 * Atonic, from a, not , and r'ovos, accent. Proclitic, from xf», 
 forward , and xxittit, to lean. 
 
 f Prom tv and xXmiv, to lean back on. Every accented word, 
 and an enclitic itself when not deprived of its accent, is called 
 Orthotone (og6orovovfuvov). 
 
IS 
 
 ACCENTUATION OF WORDS. 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 ceding word i e. g. <pl\og rig, tt oXt/iog Tig. They 
 
 are:— 
 
 (a) The Verbs tipi, I am, and P»f*'i, I say, in the Pres. Indie., 
 except the 2nd Pers. Sing. *7, tliou art, and p*is, thou sayesl. 
 
 (b) The following forms of the three personal Pronouns :— 
 
 1st Per. Sing. 
 
 fcov 
 
 pot 
 
 f.Cl* 
 
 2nd Per. Sing. 0 oZ 
 
 001 
 
 / 
 
 01 
 
 3rd Per. Sing, oZ Dual. cnpwt>. 
 
 oi PL ffp\0i[y). 
 
 i ffpta. 
 
 (c) The indefinite Pronoun, ns, ri, through all its cases and num¬ 
 bers, together with the abridged forms roZ and tu (but not terra 
 for nva) \ and the indefinite Adverbs or us, tu, <xn, tou, to 61, Tofiv, 
 vrot. Tort. The corresponding interrogative forms, on the contrary, 
 are always accented ; e. g. rig, ri, tus, &c. 
 
 (d) The particles, rt, rot, yt, vv or vvv\, trie, 6nv, tu, xt or xtv, 
 fa., and the inseparable particle ll, both when it expresses the 
 direction whither ; e. g. "E ^tfiosti, to Erebus , and also when it 
 serves to strengthen a word; e. g. rotri^h.X 
 
 I § 15. Accentuation of Words joined with Enclitics. 
 
 1 . An Oxytone so unites with the following encli¬ 
 tic that the accent which is commonly grave in the 
 middle of a sentence (§ 12. 1), again becomes acute; 
 e. g.— 
 
 6r\(> ns for Sno ns xctXZg \<rn* for xaXos \<rn* 
 
 xat nvfs ** xai nvts Torxpos yt ** Torxpos yt 
 
 xocXos n i( xxXos rt Torocpol nvts <c Torxpoi nvts. 
 
 2 . A Perispomenon unites with the following en¬ 
 clitic without further change of the accent; e. g. 
 
 Pus n for pus n piXt? ns for piktT r)g 
 
 pus \<rn* “ pus iffnv xotXoZ nvos “ xxXoZ nvof . 
 
 Obs. 1. Long syllables in enclitics are considered in reference to 
 the accentuation as short; hence oTvnvotv, uvnvuv are regarded aa 
 separate or compound words, like xxXu* n.u*. 
 
 * The longer forms, tpoZ, spot, \pi, are not enclitic 
 
 t This particle is distinguished by its accent from vuv, now. 
 
 J The inseparable enclitic 3* must he carefully distinguished 
 from the Conjunction 2t, but. 
 
ENCLITICS ACCENTED. 
 
 m 
 
 § 16 .] 
 
 3. A Paroxytone unites with the following mono¬ 
 syllabic enclitic without further change of the accent ; 
 but the enclitic retains its accent when it is a dissyl¬ 
 lable ; e. g. 
 
 (filXos pov for <piXos pov, (but QiXos it/rlv, (plXot Qat/lv), 
 aXXos areas “ aXXos tfus, ( “ aXXos tort, aXXeov rtvuv). 
 
 4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispdmenon unite 
 with the following enclitic, and take an acute accent 
 on the last syllable ; but after a Properispomenon ending 
 in £ or i//, a dissyllabic Enclitic returns its accent; e. g. 
 
 tt.vS^M’z'oS TtJ for otv^uoros ftf. ffupa. Tl for (foipa Tf. 
 
 avS^uorol rtvts “ avfywrot nv'ts. aupd tanv “ aupa i<rr!v . 
 
 Obs. 2. When several enclitics occur together, each throws 
 hack its accent on the preceding, the last only remaining without 
 the accent; e. g. tl rls yt poi <pntrl orort. 
 
 Obs. 3. If the preceding word be an Atonic, it takes the ac¬ 
 cent of the enclitic ; e. g. tl ns. 
 
 t § 16. Enclitics Accented. 
 
 Some enclitics whose signification gives them a degree of inde¬ 
 pendence in the sentence, are accented in the following cases :— 
 
 1. When ttrrl(v) stands with an Inf. for t\tan[y), or after xal, pi*, 
 ixxd, tl, ort, u$ at the beginning of a sentence, or olx, pi j, or roZro, 
 or generally, when it stands at the beginning o f a sentence, or is 
 emphatic, the form tan(v) is written instead of to-rl(v), (the accent 
 being thrown back to the first syllable); e. g. Ihh t<rnv (videre 
 licet, you may perceive), tl tanv, ovx tanv, roZf tanv, ten ho';. All the 
 other enclitic forms of tipi retain their accent (but the accent is not 
 thrown hack) when they begin a sentence, or are emphatic; e, g* 
 i **i hoi. 
 
 % The enclitic forms of <p*ipl retain the accent when they stand 
 at the beginning of a sentence , or when they are separated from the 
 preceding word by a punctuation-mark; e. g. <pypl \yu ;—tarn 
 a.'j'no ayah;, tpnpl. 
 
 3. The enclitic Pers. Pronouns aou, a of A, oJ, g-tf>lai{v) retain their 
 accent:— 
 
 (a) When an accented Preposition precedes ; e. g. arafd aoZ, ptrd 
 ci, orpos (toi. In this case, instead of the enclitic forms o 
 the first Pers., the longer accented forms are preferred ; e. g. 
 aca(? ipov (not ara^d pov) ; xar tpt (not xard pt) J arfos tpoi „ 
 (not rrgos pot) ; ortfi ipov (not vrtgl pov). 
 
 Obs. The unaccented Prepositions are followed by the enclitic 
 forms of the Pronouns ; e. g. tx, pov , h/aoi, is <n, ts pt, ex <rov, * at aou 
 
20 
 
 DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 
 
 [Chap. II 
 
 But if the Fron. is emphatic, the accent is not thrown back, and 
 instead of pov, f tot, pi, the forms ip. oZ, tpol, \pl, are used; e. g. 
 
 l¥ IfjLOl , aXA OVK sv (TOl . 
 
 (b) When the Pronouns are emphatic, as in antitheses; e. g. 
 
 9 N ' s * 
 
 Ipi X.O.I (Ti , 71 lpi n ffi. 
 
 (c) r l he forms ov, 0 7, t are accented only when they have the 
 force of reflexive Pronouns, (of himself, dec.). 
 
 (d) The enclitic Pronouns are always accented, when they be¬ 
 gin a sentence . 
 
 4. The accent is not thrown back when the accent of the word 
 which the enclitic follows disappears by Elision ; e. g. 5’ 
 
 ttrrlp, (but xxkof irriv ).—IlaXAol 3’ titrtv, (but oroXXol 'hi line).* 
 
 f § 17. Division of Syllables. 
 
 1. General Rule. In Greek, syllables end with a vowel , and 
 begin with a consonant. Therefore, when a consonant stands be¬ 
 tween two vowels, it belongs to the following syllable ; e. g. 
 
 rX-p'S, O-^/O-pXl. 
 
 Exceptions. A compound word is divided according to its com¬ 
 ponent parrs ; e. g. ruv-tx-<pdr/itris. A word with an inflexional or 
 derivative termination is divided according to its elements; e. g. 
 
 rvT-ru. 
 
 2. Rule. When two like consonants (as <r«r, xx, &c.), ora smooth 
 
 mute with its cognate aspirate (trip, r6 ), occur together, or when 
 
 a mute follows a liquid (x. p, v, g), one of the consonants is consi¬ 
 dered to belong to each syllable ; e. g. B oIjc-%os> olx-yos, sg-yov. 
 
 Obs. When two or three consonants occur together, they are 
 generally regarded as belonging to the following syllable, if taken 
 together they can begin a word ; e. g. Wi-r^aaKoe, d-pvfi, o-rpn, i- 
 
 (rr^v-rivau,. 
 
 t § 18. Punchiation-marJcs, 
 
 The colon and semicolon are both indicated by a period at the 
 top of the line ; e. g. t Z i'Xs^as • Telvris y&g apoXoyn<rav. The note of 
 interrogation is like our semicolon ; e. g. ris rxZrx itrolfurte ; Who 
 
 * Many of these enclitics, being closely united with the preced¬ 
 ing words, and having, as such, a peculiar definite meaning , are 
 sometimes written in conjunction with them ; e. g. olorn or el own, 
 u'ivrti, warn, ovrt, orris, tSvnvuv, &Q. 
 
SOME GENERAL VIEWS OF THE VERB. 
 
 21 
 
 5 19 .] 
 
 did this f The period, comma, and note of exclamation, are like 
 ours,* 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 § 19. Some general views of the Verb. 
 
 1. The Verb expresses action; e. g. to bloom, to 
 strike. In Greek there are three classes of Verbs, viz. 
 Active, Passive , and Middle. The Middle has a reflex¬ 
 ive signification, that is, it expresses an action which 
 proceeds from the subject and again returns to it, 
 i.e. an action which the subject performs on itself; 
 e. g. rvTTTOfxai , I strike myself, f3ovXevojuai, I advise 
 myself, afivvoyai , I defend myself. In most of the 
 tenses the Middle and Passive forms are the same ; 
 e. g. Tvirrofiai , I strike myself and I am struck. 
 
 2. At present only those forms of the Verb are 
 given which are necessary for translating the Exer¬ 
 cises that occur before the entire conjugation of the 
 Verb is presented. 
 
 HIP These forms must be learned thoroughly. 
 
 4 
 
 Mood. 
 
 Number 
 
 and 
 
 Person. 
 
 Present Active. 
 
 Number 
 
 and 
 
 Person. 
 
 Present Middle, or 
 Passive. 
 
 Indica¬ 
 
 tive. 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 
 / lovXiu-u , I advise. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 fiouXiv-o/juzi, I advise 
 myself, or, am ad¬ 
 vised. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 (iouXiu-tis, thou ad’ 
 visest. 
 
 2. 
 
 (iou\tu-y, thou advisest 
 thyself \ or, art ad¬ 
 vised. 
 
 
 a 
 
 GovXtu-u, he, she, 
 or it advises. 
 
 3. 
 
 (&ouXev-trxi, he advises 
 himself, or, is ad¬ 
 vised. 
 
 * The comma must not be confounded with the diastole or hypo- 
 diastole (,), which serves to distinguish certain words, which 
 would otherwise be the same in form ; e.'g. the pronoun o,n (neu¬ 
 ter of ems) from the conjunction on, that; and to, n, and that f 
 from the adverb ron, then. 
 
22 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION*. [CHAP. III. 
 
 Mood. 
 
 Number 
 
 and 
 
 Person. 
 
 Present Active. 
 
 ■Number 
 
 and 
 
 Person. 
 
 Present Middle, or 
 Passive. 
 
 Indica- 
 
 PI. 1. 
 
 fiovXiu-D/tiv, we ad- 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 / lovXiv-'oft'Ja, , we ad- 
 
 TIVE. 
 
 
 vise. 
 
 
 vise ourselves, or, 
 
 
 
 
 
 are advised. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 (ZovXtu-tn, ye ad- 
 
 2. 
 
 fiovXiv-tir6e, ye advise 
 
 
 
 vise. 
 
 
 yourselves, or, are 
 
 
 
 
 
 advised. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 (iovXiv-ovffi(yi),* they 
 
 3. 
 
 piovXiu-ovrctt, they ad- 
 
 
 
 advise. 
 
 
 vise themselves , or, 
 
 
 
 
 
 are advised. 
 
 Impera- 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 (hovXtv-t, advise thou 
 
 S. 2. 
 
 (houXtu-ov, advise thy- 
 
 TIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 self, or, be advised. 
 
 
 PI. 2. 
 
 (ZouXtu-irt, advise 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 fiovXiu - vr6i, advise 
 
 
 
 ye. 
 
 
 yourselves, or, be 
 
 
 
 
 
 advised. 
 
 Infini- 
 
 
 fiovXiv-ttv, to ad- 
 
 
 (iouXsv-Mxi,^ to ad - 
 
 TIVE. 
 
 
 vise. 
 
 
 vise oneself, or, be 
 
 
 
 
 
 advised. 
 
 3. The following forms of the irregular Verb tipi, 
 l am, should also be learned:— 
 
 e<rr<(v), (est), he, she, it is. >}v, he, she, or it was » 
 
 iteri(v), (sunt), they are. fitrav, they were. 
 
 Mi, he, ttrru (esto), let him, her, or it he. tern, be ye. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 I. VOCABULARY. 
 
 The Vocabularies should he carefully committed to memory 
 before commencing to translate the Exercises. v 
 
 'I*-opai (governs the Dative), 1 
 follow, accompany. 
 
 \v6i-u (governs the Genit. or Ac-* 
 cusative), I eat. 
 
 tx-n (impersonal Verb), it ] ias * 
 itself, it is. 
 
 ifiius, gladly , cheerfully, with - 
 -pleasure. 
 
 6a.vfta.X-u, I wonder, admire. 
 
 *&'•> a/nd, even. 
 
 * On the * l$t\xy<rnx.ov in (iovXtv-ownv, see § 7,1. (b). 
 t The terminations -«/ and -«/ in Verbs and Nouns, are, with a 
 few exceptions, considered short for the purposes of accentuation* 
 
 Au, always. 
 
 a\y0t6 -u, I speaJc-the-truth. 
 uvfyuus, manfully, bravely, 
 i^urriv-u, I am-the-best, excel. 
 Hionv-u, I live. 
 
 &Xaxt6-u, I am-lazy. 
 y£x<p~u, I write. 
 ituK-u (governs the Accusative), 
 I pursue, strive-for. 
 
 «• if. 
 
23 
 
 § 19.] EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 xaxSe, badly, cowardly. 
 xakSs, well. 
 
 xoXxxtu-a (Acc.), I flatter. 
 
 (Dat.), I fight, 
 fitrgttuf, moderately, 
 f 6«, not: (used with the Impera- 
 
 iraibiU’U, I educate, 
 vr/zt^-co, I play , 
 
 triv-ctj (r) (Gen. or Acc.), I drink. 
 •Titmu-ofAca, 1 am-believed. 
 <r<rtvh-u, I hasten , work-ear- 
 
 tive and Subjunctive). 
 ohv^-opuu, I mourn, bewail. 
 
 •It, not: (before a vowel, it be- 
 
 nestly. 
 
 <ptvy-ea( Acc.), I flee , avoid , shun. 
 I rejoice. 
 
 I blame. 
 
 comes olx; before an aspirate , 
 
 1. ’Au aXriOevt. 2. Xatpe. 3. w E 7 rou. 4. M 17 d£v- 
 
 (2. Why is the circumflex over the penult of x^e} ? 4. Why is 
 the grave accent over ph ? Why is ov not used ? 5. What are 
 words called which have no accent on the last syllable, as (Liorivw ? 
 7. Why is the breathing over the < in s/? 8. Why is 0 ^ used, 
 
 not ov ? 12. What name is given to words, which have a circum¬ 
 flex over the last syllable, as xax£s ? 18. What kind of a diph¬ 
 
 thong is y in W*>j? 23. What does the circumflex over the / in 
 show about its quantity ?) 
 
 In translating the English Exercises into Greek , the 
 appropriate Personal-endings of the Verbs , f which are 
 placed after the hyphen in the above Paradigm), are 
 to be added on to the Roots, (which are placed before 
 the hyphen in the Paradigms and the Vocabularies)- 
 Thus in f3ovXev-o/uev, (3ovAsv- is the Root, -o/uev is 
 the Personal-ending. All the words in Vocab. 1, ex¬ 
 cept the Verbs, are indeclinable. 
 
 Accent the Greek throughout. 
 
 In Verbs the accent is generally placed as far from the end as is 
 consistent with the general rules. 
 
24 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. [CHAP. IV. 
 
 1 I speak-the-truth. 2. If I speak-the-truth, I 
 am-believed. 3. Rejoice (plural). Lament not 
 (singular). 5. Thou livest pleasantly. 6. He writes 
 well. 7. It is (= it lias itself) well to-speak-the- 
 truth. 8. Speak (plural)- the-truth always. 9. Fol¬ 
 low (plural). 10. He is well educated. 11. Flatter 
 not (sing.). 12. If thou flatterest, thou art not 
 believed. 13. It is ( = it has itself) well to-be-be¬ 
 lieved. 14. We are-blamed if we are-lazy. 15. If 
 ye speak-the-truth, ye are believed. 16. If they 
 fight manfully, they are-admired. 17. They are- 
 pursued, if they flee. 18. Always excel (sing). 19. 
 Eat, drink, and play (plural) moderately. 
 
 Words joined by hyphens are to be translated as one word. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 
 
 § 20, Nature and Classification of Substantives. 
 
 A Substantive (or Noun) is used to denote a thing 
 or object. There are two classes of Substantives: (a) 
 the names of persons, as man, woman; (b) the names 
 of things, as earth , garden. 
 
 §21. Gender of Substantives. 
 
 The gender of Substantives, which is threefold, 
 as in Latin, is determined partly by the meaning, 
 partly by their ending. The latter mode of deter¬ 
 mining the gender will be considered under the 
 several declensions. With reference to their meaning, 
 the following general rules are applicable:— 
 
 Rule 1 . Names of men, most male animals, na¬ 
 tions, winds, months, mountains, and rivers, are mas- 
 mime* 
 
./ 
 
 § 22.] NUMBER, CASE, AND DECLENSION. 25 
 
 Rule 2. Karnes of females, countries, islands, most 
 cities, most trees and plants, are feminine. 
 
 Rule 3. The names of fruits, Infinitives, diminu¬ 
 tives in -ov, except the proper names of females, 
 (e. g. 17 Aeovtiov), all indeclinable words, the letters 
 of the alphabet, and finally, every word used as the 
 mere symbol of a sound, e. g. to /uijrrjp, the word 
 “ mother”, are neuter. 
 
 Rule 4. The appellations of persons, which have 
 only one form for the Masc. and Fern., are of com¬ 
 mon gender; e. g. 6 , j? Oeoq, god or goddess . 
 
 § 22. Number , Case , and Declension. 
 
 1. Substantives and Adjectives, as well as Verbs, 
 have three numbers, the Singular , the Plural , and 
 the Dual (which denotes two). 
 
 2 . There are five Cases, namely:— 
 
 (1) Nominative, (the case of the subject). 
 
 (2) Genitive , (to express whence). 
 
 (3) Dative , (to express where). 
 
 (4) Accusative , (to express whither). 
 
 (5) Vocative , (the case of direct address). 
 
 Obs. 1. The Nom. and Voc. are called direct cases, the others, 
 oblique cases. Substantives and Adjectives of the Neuter gender 
 have the same form in the NomAcc ., and Voc . of the three num¬ 
 bers. The Dual has only two forms for cases, one for the Nom., 
 Acc. and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat. 
 
 3. There are in Greek three different ways of in¬ 
 flecting Substantives and Adjectives, distinguished 
 as the First, Second, and Third Declensions. 
 
 Obs. 2. In parsing a Substantive, the pupil may accustom him¬ 
 self to answer the following questions : what case ? what number ? 
 what declension ? what gender t from what nominative, e. g. is »»- 
 
 ioco-roti ? 
 
26 
 
 GENDER OF ADJECTIVES. [CllAP. IY 
 
 QUESTIONS 
 
 What case ? 
 
 What number? 
 
 What declension ? 
 
 What <jender ? 
 
 From what nominative ? 
 E. g. ffcZfiuTos is the Gen. Si 
 gender, from the nominative 
 
 ANSWERS 
 
 Dative case ; 
 
 Plural number ; 
 
 Second declension ; 
 
 Masculine gender ; 
 
 From the Nom. ivfywTof, man. 
 of the third declension, neuter 
 /14a, body. 
 
 § 23. Nature and Gender of the Adjective, 
 
 1 The Adjective expresses a quality, which is con¬ 
 sidered either as already belonging to an object, e.g 
 the red rose *, or one which is merely attributed to an 
 object, e. g. the rose is red. In both instances, in 
 Greek^ as in Latin, the Adjective agrees with its 
 Substantive in Gender , Number and Case; e. g. 6 
 a y a 6 o g avOpwnog, bonus homo, 6 ai'0pu>7ro£ a 7 a- 
 0 6 g l(TTiv r homo bonus est ^17 k a A 77 Moooa, pulchra 
 Musa, 17 Movoa KaXrj t<rnv t Musa pulchra est; ro 
 K a X o v tap, pulchrum ver, to lap k a A d v &anv, ver 
 pulchrum est. 
 
 2. Hence the Adjective, like the Substantive, has 
 three genders . All Adjectives, however, have not 
 separate forms for the three genders; many have 
 but two separate endings, viz., one for the masculine 
 and feminine gender, the other for the neuter; e. g. 
 o t} <t v x 0 C a 1 djp, the quiet man , 17 # a v x o g ymn h 
 the quiet woman , to ij a v \ o v tIkvov, the quiet child ; 
 several, indeed, have only one ending, which com¬ 
 monly indicates only the masculine and feminine 
 genders, seldom the neuter gender; e. g. 6 vy a g 
 avrip, the exiled man , 17 $v y a g yvvh, the exiled wo¬ 
 man, 
 
 3. The declension of Adjectives, with few excep¬ 
 tions, is like that of Substantives. 
 
§ 25.] PREPOSITIONS.—FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 27 
 
 § 24. General view of the Prepositions . 
 
 Preliminary Obs. Before proceeding to the declensions, a 
 general view of the Prepositions will be given, as a knowledge of 
 them is indispensable in translating. 
 
 I. Prepositions with one case. 
 
 (a) With the Genitive. 
 ivri, (ante), before , for, instead 
 
 of- 
 
 *r»a, (pro), before, for. 
 
 (ab), from, by. 
 
 5* (ig before a vowel), (ex), out 
 of, from. 
 
 sttKx, for the sake of on account 
 of. 
 
 To these may be added seve¬ 
 ral Adverbs which, like Prepo¬ 
 sitions, govern the Gen., viz.—• 
 
 vro 'iirO s» and > i[i , r^oir6iv, before, 
 i-rirthy, behind. 
 
 <yv*v and x u (t li , without. 
 sr except. 
 
 (b) With the Dative. 
 
 1 *, (Lat. in with Abl.), in, upon , 
 ffvy. (cum), with, 
 ofia., (properly an Adverb), to¬ 
 gether with. 
 
 (c) With the Accusative. 
 
 a*a, on, upon, up, through, 
 n’e, (Lat. in with Acc.), into, to, 
 
 me, (ad), to. 
 
 II. Prepositions vnth Geni¬ 
 tive and Accusative. 
 
 aid, through, by; (with Acc. 
 often, on account of)- 
 
 xxrd, (de), down; (with Acc. 
 often, through). 
 
 vTi£, (super), over, above; (with 
 Gen. often,jfor). 
 
 III. Prepositions with Gen,, 
 Dat. and Accusative. 
 
 ufotpi and around , about; 
 
 (with Gen. often, for). 
 
 \ti, upon, at; (with Acc. often, 
 towards, against). 
 
 (Aird, with; (with Acc. often, 
 ajter). 
 
 na^d, by, near; with Gen. from, 
 (properly, from being near 
 someone); with Acc. to, (pro¬ 
 perly, into the presence of some 
 one). 
 
 <7r^oe, before; (with Acc. often, 
 to). 
 
 VWO, (sub\ by (with Gen- 
 
 of agent). 
 
 § 25. First Declension. 
 
 The first declension has four endings, a, i\ (or a), 
 ac and ijv ; a and t) are feminine, at and ijf masculine. 
 
23 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION.—ENDINGS. [CHAP. IV. 
 
 Endings. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 • Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 i Masculine. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 a or 
 
 V 
 
 ag 
 
 or tjc 
 
 at 
 
 a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 TJC 
 
 dg 
 
 i}S 
 
 
 ov 
 
 wv 
 
 aiv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 V 
 
 <Z 
 
 V 
 
 ? 
 
 V 
 
 aig 
 
 aiv 
 
 Acc. 
 
 i*/ 
 
 av 
 
 av 
 
 If-V 
 
 av 
 
 T)V 
 
 ag 
 
 a 
 
 Voc. 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 n* 
 
 a 
 
 rj, a 
 
 at 
 
 a. 
 
 $ 26. Remarks on the Paradigms of Feminine Nouns 
 
 1. (a) Words in ij retain ^ in all cases of the Sin¬ 
 
 gular. 
 
 (b) Words in a are of two classes:— 
 
 (a) The Nom. ends in a or a, and the a re¬ 
 mains in all cases of the Sing, when p, 
 t, or i* precede; e. g. yfopa, place, iSia, 
 form, aocp'ia, wisdom,. \otia, tvvoia ; 
 here belong contracts in a (see No. 2); 
 e. g. java ; also a\a\a, war-cry , and 
 some proper names in a; e. g. ’AvSpo- 
 jutSa, A rj$a, <JhAo/iTjAa. 
 
 (8) The Nom. ends in a; but the a remains 
 only in the _A.cc. and Voc.; in the Gen. 
 and Dat. it is changed into tj, if it is 
 preceded by A, v, AA, <r, a a (rr), ip. 
 
 2. When a is preceded by £ or «, contraction takes 
 place in some words,viz. ta into r) T and da into a; then 
 the final syllable is circumfiexed in all the cases, as 
 
 ovk (ta)ib yv(aa)d. 
 
 * That is, when the word ends in a pure, or-£«. A letter is 
 said to be pure, when it is preceded by a Vowel; impure , if pre¬ 
 ceded by a Consonant, 
 
SUBSTANTIVES.—FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 29 
 
 §26.] 
 
 Obs. 1. All words of the first Declension have their Plural as well 
 as Dual endings the same, whatever be the form of the Singular. 
 
 Pabadigms. 
 
 1. if through all the Singular cases. 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 h 
 
 TVS 
 r \5 
 rn* 
 
 T 
 
 to 
 
 Justice. 
 
 2fx-n 
 
 Six-ns 
 
 tSix-n 
 
 Honour 
 
 ripen 
 
 riffs 
 
 ripen 
 
 npenn 
 
 rip.n 
 
 Opinion. 
 
 yncopen 
 
 yvupens 
 
 ynfpcn 
 
 yveoftw 
 
 yvupcn 
 
 Fig-tree. 
 
 ffux-{iet)n 
 
 crux-ns 
 
 rvx-y 
 
 trvx-fm 
 
 trvx-n 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 
 t 
 
 act 
 
 %'nc-oet 
 
 rtpcou 
 
 yvupceu 
 
 <rvx-et7 
 
 Gen. 
 
 rZv 
 
 dlX-UV 
 
 rift, un 
 
 yvupeun 
 
 cvx-un 
 
 Dat. 
 
 reels 
 
 %'tx-oeis 
 
 npeocTs 
 
 ynupcotis 
 
 trvx-xTs 
 
 Acc. 
 
 roes 
 
 %X-ccs 
 
 npcocs 
 
 yvcoftocs 
 
 rvx-ccs ; 
 
 Voc. 
 
 V 
 
 U) 
 
 dlx-eci 
 
 ripceci 
 
 yvupecu 
 
 trux-au 
 
 Dual. N. A. V. 
 
 \ 
 
 TOC 
 
 2ix-ee 
 
 J. 
 
 rifjcoc 
 
 yvupcoi 
 
 trux-ee 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 reel* 
 
 2ix - cun 
 
 npcctZn 
 
 yvupcoctn 
 
 cvx-ocin. 
 
 2. a through all the cases. 3. a, Gen.-?^ 
 
 
 
 
 « long. 
 
 
 
 -a short 
 
 
 
 Shadow. 
 
 Country. Mina. 
 
 Hammer. 
 
 Muse. 
 
 Lioness. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 « 
 
 « 
 
 ± 
 
 rx4-cc 
 
 
 ptn-{otx)ct 
 
 vtyufix. 
 
 Motts'oc 
 
 \iocinol 
 
 r Gr. 
 
 TVS 
 
 ffXl-OUS 
 
 X”Z*s 
 
 fcv-ees 
 
 a-tpv^eis 
 
 Moutrns 
 
 ktoc'ivns 
 
 D. 
 
 TJf 
 
 <rxi-Z 
 
 * ± 
 
 % eoooc 
 
 fxv-Z 
 
 Clpvgix 
 
 Maury 
 
 k toe ivy 
 
 A. 
 
 rh» 
 
 rxi-ocn 
 
 x*e&» 
 
 pen oen 
 
 crQvfiocp 
 
 Maureen 
 
 ~ ^ 
 
 A .saivocv 
 
 V. 
 
 r 
 
 CO 
 
 tnu-a, 
 
 x u e a 
 
 pcv-ac 
 
 artyuget 
 
 Moutrce 
 
 ktccivct 
 
 P. N. 
 
 -« 
 
 ou 
 
 trxi-ai 
 
 Xu^eci 
 
 pcn-ctZ 
 
 r<pv^oet 
 
 M overact 
 
 kicctveti 
 
 G. 
 
 run 
 
 trxiun 
 
 %u£un 
 
 pen-con 
 
 tr<pueun 
 
 M ourun 
 
 ktcetvun 
 
 D. 
 
 rot7$ 
 
 •rtti-ccTs 
 
 X*Z Ki $ 
 
 ftv-ec7s 
 
 atpv^ous 
 
 Mouroets 
 
 ktcetvxis 
 
 A. 
 
 rocf 
 
 ffxt-ocs 
 
 xfiffs 
 
 pen-aes 
 
 tripv^ocs 
 
 Mources 
 
 kioeivces 
 
 V. 
 
 T 
 
 ea 
 
 mu-act 
 
 X"?** 
 
 pen-u.7 
 
 ofyu^cu 
 
 M ouffoet 
 
 "Kiceipcti 
 
 Dual. 
 
 \ 
 
 roc 
 
 ± 
 
 (TX4-CC 
 
 x*(* 
 
 pen a. 
 
 ffQvfioi 
 
 Moutrac 
 
 kiettvee 
 
 
 recin 
 
 <rxt-<un 
 
 Xugccin pen-aeZn 
 
 ctyvf'Otin 
 
 Mautraetn 
 
 kixivtctn. 
 
 Obs. 2. The feminine ofall Adjectives of three terminations is de¬ 
 clined like the above paradigms ; the feminine ends in x when it 
 is preceded by 4 or f ;fout Adjectives in -aas have -oee only 'when • 
 is preceded by otherwise - an ; e. g ic6(>oac, (but oy'Sln). Thus, 
 I * «, kh rift.fi, the fair honour; h yvupcn. the just opinion, 
 
 trijf ^ t Kcttajf ynupens ; it * X ^ the hostile country ; mt 
 
 i gipae x,u£ct(. On the contraction of Adjectives,see § 29. 
 
30 SUBSTANTIVES. —FIRST DECLENSION, [ClIAP. IV, 
 
 I 
 
 3. The quantity of the endings has been given in § 25, The 
 
 Fein, ending a is always long in Adjectives in -os, e. g-. 
 
 iktvfsgos, t k t u 6 t (> a, tkiu'fagOv. 
 
 4. With regard to the accentuation it is to be observed that :— 
 
 (a) The plural ending -at, is considered short with reference to 
 
 the accent; hence (not r^x-rs^xt), Moutrxt (not Mourxt). 
 
 (b) The accent remains on the tone syllable of the Norn, as long 
 as the quantity of the final syllable permits ( § 11, 1.). 
 
 Exceptions to (b). 
 
 (tt) The Vocative £ i <r or 0 r a from Istrrrarvs, lord. 
 
 (/3) In Adjectives in -os, -$(-«)> -«*, the position of the accent 
 in the feminine is conformed to its position in the mascu¬ 
 line, where the nature of the final syllable permits. Hence 
 the Nom. PI. feminine of fotfoxtas, (iifixix, (ilfixsov, ikiuSi^os, 
 \ktvfioa., iktufogov, a.vtS(>w<rivos, xvfywrivv, are accented upon 
 the antepenult 1 (i i (h a, 1 a. i, \kiu 6 i£ 0 i, \kiu 6 i^ai, 
 
 ivfyuv-tvoi, x v 6 £ u t / » a .•); though the Fern. Sing, is a 
 paroxytone, ou account of the long termination (v, »). 
 
 (y) In the Gen. PL of the first Dec., the final syllable -<*>» is 
 circumftexed-, e. g. from t£a-r.=£«, rictviur from 
 
 To this, however, there are the fullowing except 
 
 tions :— 
 
 (1) Feminine Adjectives and Participles in -os, -» (~*)> 
 -av are accented like the genitive masculine; e. g. 
 rwv tpiXaiv Mou-tuv, from (pikas, <plky, pikov, dear / but 
 other feminine Adjectives and Participles are pe- 
 rispomena in the Gen. PI.; e. g fix^tis, fixoi7a r 
 fixou, Gen. PI. (ixgtajv (Masc.) v flxguuv (Fern.); 
 
 {2) The Substantives x^ (rT w> usurer, xpvv, anchovy, 
 trvritM, periodical-winds, and wild boat, 
 
 which remain paroxytone in the Gen. PL 
 
 5. The accent of the Nom. Sing. i3 changed in the other cases, 
 according to the quantity of the final syllable, as follows :— 
 
 (a) Oxytones become perispomena in the Gen. and Dat. of all 
 numbers; e. g. <rtp.?,s, -55, -uv, •cut,-x^. This is true also of 
 the second Dec. 
 
 (b) Proparoxytones become par oxytones, [§ 11, 1. (a) ^«)j, 
 when the ultimate becomes long ; e. g. t^xti^x, rgx<ri&s ; 
 
 (c) Properispomena become paroxytone ?, [§ 11, 1. (a) (/3)J, when 
 the ultimate becomes long ; e. g. MoZcii, Mourns } 
 
 (d) Paroxytones with a short penult remain paroxytones 
 through all cases, (except the Gen. PL, which is always 
 perispomenori), as ZVxxt, (but Ikxm) ; but paroxytones 
 with a long penult become properispomena, [§ 11, 1. (b) (a)], 
 when the ultimate becomes short, (which is the case in the 
 Mom. PI. and in the Voc. Eing. of masculines in•tts, men¬ 
 tioned § 27.)—e. g. yveipn, youfcx^, (but yvcopwv) } vokt rjjf* 
 
 wokarttiy Voc. srokira, {but srokireLv)* 
 
31 
 
 § 26.] SUBSTANTIVES.-FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 / 
 
 IT. VOCABULARY 
 
 ’a 2ix!a, Gen. -at, n, injustice, 
 ahokttrx'iu, -ac, ft, prating, frivo¬ 
 lity. 
 
 i\n9hn, -ns, (vera), true, 
 uirix -ayat, (Gen.), I cibstain- 
 from, keep-myseffrom. 
 
 *?(**), -Us, ii, virtue, bravery. 
 
 &iu, -as, n, violence, force. 
 
 (iorjhia, -as, it, aid,, 
 yiy* - 0 /u.ctt, I am, become, spring- 
 from, arise. 
 iixfioXfj, -b?, it, slander, 
 bfxn, -ns, it, justice, right, a judi¬ 
 cial-sentence. 
 
 fix -a, (Dat.), / give-way to, 
 
 yield-to. 
 
 ivxyyiW -op.a(, I promise. 
 
 Way -a, I bring-on. 
 n&ovrt, -ijs,- n, pleasure, 
 fizamu-u, I honour, pay-court • 
 to. 
 
 Kaxia, -as, n, vice, wickedness, 
 xafila, -as, h, heart, 
 xarxtpoyri, -ns, n, refuge, 
 kvpn, -ns, n, disgrace, ruin. 
 
 Awr#, -ns, n, grief. 
 
 \t^a, -as, 9 , lyre. 
 
 Aw -u, / dissolve , loose, dismiss 
 (an assembly), repeal {a law), 
 violate (a truce), dispel (cares). 
 ffi^i[t.va, -ns, *t- care, 
 povaa, -ns, n. Muse, 
 o, it, to, the, (Article), [§ 60.] 
 vn'i9-op.oa, (Dat), I am-per- 
 suaded-by, believe, obey, 
 trst'ia, -as, i), poverty. 
 orktvvQa, -as, -it, avarice. 
 oroWaius, often. 
 
 ffvvfj9uu, -as, h. intimacy, society. 
 Tii% -u, (tero). I rub or wear- 
 away, weary , weaken, 
 vixr-u, 1 beget, produce. 
 
 T^vpn, -ns, it, luxury, effeminacy. 
 <pikia,-u f, i). friendship. 
 Xa\iv(),^ns, (molesfca), difficult, 
 annoying, oppressive. 
 
 X^ua, -a$, h, (usus), need, use, 
 acquaintance, 
 us, as, how, in-order-that. 
 
 Rules of Syntax .] 1. Transitive Verbs generally 
 govern the Accusative. 
 
 2 . Verbs and Adjectives expressing the relation 
 of to or for in English, generally govern the Dative. 
 
 1. Eoca Tif [3 itf. 2. f H Xvpa rag /ueot/uvag* Xvtt. 
 3. ’An"e)(OV Trig Kaicing* 4. 'H < ptXta iTray'ytXXzTai 
 
 Karacjivyriv Kai fiotiOtmv. 5. ’AttI^ou twp ri^ovwv. 
 6. *H fiigifLva rrjv Kapdlav taQlti. 7. OspaireutTe rag 
 Movaag. 8. Mi) Trt'iQuu SiafioXaig. 4 9. FI Sik)] ttoX- 
 XaKig rrj aSttc'y emu. 10. IloXXaiac X a ^ eiT V Trevici 5 
 TtipoptOaf 11. Tr)i> aSoXtaxtav tpivyere. 12. 'H tea kiu 
 X vnriv hrayu. 13. Tpvtfrrj aSiKtav Ka) TrXeovt&ctv tIktsi- 
 14. 4>tu"y.s rrjv rpvtprjv tog Xv/ur/v. 15. A i aotrijc 6 koX 
 txvvriOdag icat aXriOivrj tfnXia yiyvf-rai. 
 
 1 A As‘£rac£Nouns in Greek sometimes take the Article, sometimes 
 tnofc. 3 The Accusative, a3 in Latin, often precedes its governing 
 
32 SUBSTANTIVES. -FIRST DECLENSION. [ClIAP. IV. 
 
 Verb. Imitate this order in translating the English exercises. 
 *§ 157. 4 § 161, 2. (a). 6 The Dat. is used (like the Lat. Ablative) 
 to denote the cavse or instrument. (§ 161, 3). 6 § 24. 
 
 (1. Why is i7xt properispomenon ? 14. Why is the circumflex 
 placed over <fnvy S ?) 
 
 <3T In accenting nouns and adjectives, remember that the end¬ 
 ing a, Gen. vs, is always short; a, Gen. as, is generally long. 
 
 CiT Accentuation of the Article. — o, v, oi, al are atonic; the geni¬ 
 tives and datives of ail genders and numbers perispomena; all the 
 other cases oxytone. 
 
 1. Abstain (pi .)-from force! 2. Shun (sing.) 
 vice ! 3. Cares corrode the heart. 4. Avoid (sing.) 
 pleasures. 5. Believe (pi.) not slander! 6. The 
 Muses are honoured. 7. Do not yield ( pi .) to 
 pleasure l 8. V irtue produces true friendship. 9. 
 The heart is corroded by cares (Dat). 10. Grief 
 is brought-on by vice. 
 
 III. VOCABULARY. 
 
 [All transitive Verbs in the Vocabularies are to be considered as 
 governing the Acc., unless the contrary is specified.] 
 
 "a yea, I lead , bring, conduct. 
 i-rXv, -vs, simple, 
 a^yvpa (=dpyvgsa), -as, (argen- 
 tea), silver , Adj. 
 
 «ar^a*T) 7 , -vs, h, lightning, 
 ani fa, -as, v, dishonour , dis¬ 
 grace. 
 
 P>omtIxuol,* -as, 17 , queen. 
 (ZaaiXttdf -as, v, kingdom, reign , 
 royalty. 
 
 (iXufiv, -vs, v, injury, 
 fyovrl), -vs, v, thunder, 
 yxirra, -vs, h, tongue, language. 
 'hiuira,-vs,h, mode-of -living, (Eng. 
 diet ). 
 
 -vs, h, report, fame, reputa¬ 
 tion, opinion, expectation. 
 Mkri, -vs, good, noble. 
 svOvvu, I straighten, set-right, 
 ti/xikus, quickly, nimbly, speedily, 
 two fa, -as, v, good-administra¬ 
 tion. 
 
 tX*>, I have, hold, contain, 
 xarzy^u, I restrain. 
 ka/Av^a, -ds, splendid, brilliant. 
 fAiydXv, -vs, (magna), great. 
 (A'rafioXv, -vs, rj, change, vicissi¬ 
 tude. 
 
 vara, -vs, every, all. 
 
 vr'i-vra), 1 fall. 
 
 vokXv, -vs, much, many. 
 
 vrogpuf (=<To^<pv^ea), -as, pur- 
 
 t pie, Adj. 
 
 pa}.u;, easily. 
 
 ozokia, -ds, crooked, perverse. 
 aroXfi, -vs, b, robe. 
 tu %v,-vs, tf,(f° r t lina > casus), for¬ 
 tune, chance. (In the PI. it 
 usually means misfortunes), 
 (flou, (fero), 1 bear, bring. 
 
 XZ ua * (=XS t,a ^)> (aurea), 
 golden. 
 
 * Observe the difference of accentuation , and the difference in 
 quantity of the final syllables. 
 
33 
 
 § 27 .] FIRST DECL.—MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 1. Ty KaKia 1 iracra arifita. errerm. 2. 'PqStwg <p£p£ 
 
 _ t»jv ireviav. 3. Bpovrij k 2 Aapirpag a<xrpa7r?ic yty- 
 i/tra/. 3 4, f H dperr) iaOArjv So&av Ix £( ’ Evvofiia 
 €vOuv£t $iKag atcoAidg^ 6. Akrj Sikijv* tiktu kcli 
 fiAdfiri jSAa'/V 4 . 7. 'AirXriv dtairav ays. 8. Ka'rex* 
 rrjv 5 yXwrrav. 9. H ruy*? iroAAag jU£Taf3oAag h et - 
 10. ilfvtav fitptTS. 11. A i AafiTTpai Tv\ai evicoAwg 
 irhrrovaiv. 12. 3>£p£ rag rv\ag. 13. 'H aptrrj ouic 
 zIk 6i raig rir^cug. 14. 'Att6\£(j0£ yaAiTrCjv v* 
 
 15. r H fiamAtid iueyaArjv /JuaiAtiav £X £t * ^ GToAif 
 
 iari 7 rop^upa. 17. Xpvadg teal apyupac crroAag £X 0 M £V " 
 
 1 § 161, 2 . (a). 1 See § 24. 3 ^V vSTa< (Bat. fit)—results from, 
 springs from. 4 Antithetical words, (i.e. words implying some 
 opposition ), are placed together, as in Lat., alii aliis, &c. 5 The 
 
 Article has frequently the force of a weakened possessive, tw yXurru.* 
 —your tongue. 
 
 (16. Why has arroxi) the acute accent ? 17. Account for the 
 
 circumflex over %(>ucrcts and a,£yv(>ot $.) 
 
 1 . Shun (sing.) cares 1 2. Vice produces dishonour. 
 3. Good reputation follows virtue. 4. The perverse 
 sentence 1 is set-right by good-administration. 5. 
 The lightning is brilliant. 6. Good reputation 
 springs from 2 virtue. 7. Yield (sing.) not to mis¬ 
 fortunes! 8. From splendid fortunes splendid cares 
 often spring. 
 
 1 1 'ixn, a judicial sentence. 2 U, before a vowel \\. 
 
 § 27. II. Masculine Nouns. 
 
 The Gen. of masculine Nouns ends in -ou; those in 
 -ag retain the a in the Dat., Acc. and Voc., and those 
 in -rig retain the r\ in the Dat. and Acc. Sing. 
 
 Nouns ending in -rig have the Vocative in rj, (e. g. 
 rHpdrje, Perses , Voc. Uipari ); except the following, 
 which end in a, viz.: —(1) All in -rije; e. g. ro£dr»jCi 
 Voc. ro^dra; 7rpo^7jnjc? Voc. TrpcnprjTa ; (2) All Sub- 
 
 9 
 
u FIRST DECL.—MASCULINE NOUNS. [CHAP. IV, 
 
 stantives in -rje compounded of a Substantive and a 
 Verb ; <e. g. ytwp.hpii& geometer, Yoc. ytwg&pa ; gvpo-^ 
 irwXrjQ, a salve-seller, Yoc. piuponioXa; (3) National 
 names in -rjc; e - g. Tltpcnjc,*, Persian, Yoc. nipau. 
 The dual and plural of masculine Nouns do not differ 
 from those of feminines. 
 
 Obs. 1. Several masculine Nouns in -xs have the Doric Gen. in 
 
 : viz._ -Txr^xXoioos, /xnrpxXoixs, patricide, matricide, opyiGoG^xs, 
 
 fowler; also several proper names; e. g. ‘Aw!fix;, -a, ’S.vxXxs, -a; 
 finally, contracted nouns in -a;; e. g. fioppa,;, -a, (from fiooex;). 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 Citizen. 
 
 HermSs. 
 
 Youth. 
 
 Fowler. 
 
 North-wind. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 i 
 
 •xroXi rns 
 
 oroXirov 
 
 toXit/i 
 
 vroX'nnv 
 
 otoXTtx 
 
 'E o/x{ixs)ns 
 'Ep/aou 
 'Eo/xn 
 'Eo/x?,v 
 
 z — 
 vtx w o.-s 
 
 ViXVlOV 
 
 vtxvix 
 vtxvix v 
 
 vtx VI X 
 
 o^viio^noo s 
 
 o^viGoGnpx 
 
 opviGoGngx 
 
 <>(>vt6o6n(7av 
 
 ogviGcGngx 
 
 fi oppxs 
 
 fioppx 
 
 fioppx 
 
 fioppoiv 
 
 fioppx. 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 woXUrxi 
 
 woXtruv 
 
 vroXirats 
 
 oroXi'Tus 
 
 <toX7txs 
 
 'E ofxx7 
 'Eopofiv 
 *Es ( ux7s 
 'Eo/xovs 
 * E o/xx7 
 
 Vixvixi 
 
 vtxviuv 
 
 vtxvixis 
 
 -vtxvixs 
 
 vtxvixi 
 
 ogviGo'ngxi 
 ogvi GoGn^oov 
 bgviPoOnexi$ 
 ogviGoGngxs 
 b^yiGvGnpxi 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 or o\ ir cl 
 oroXirxiv 
 
 *E o/xx 
 
 *»> 
 
 '■E ou xiv 
 
 VtXViCt 
 
 vtxvlxiv 
 
 ogviGoGngx 
 
 boviGoGr.gxiv. 
 
 * 
 
 Obs. 2. Adjectives of one ending in -ns and -«s are declined in 
 the same manner; e. g. s 6 t X o v m s oroXirns, a willing citizen , i 6 »- 
 ,Xov<rov oroXirov, i 6 £ X o v r xi oroXirxi ; ft o v t x* vtxvixs, a loueJ’J 
 youth, p o v i o v vtxv'iov , ft o v < a vtxvix. 
 
 IV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ’ A^oXecr^ns , -ov, o , prater , idle- 
 talker. 
 
 ixovo), (Gen. or Acc.), I hear. 
 'XK^ooLTns, - ov, o, hearer., listener. 
 (iXxTrco, I injure, hurt. 
 
 BtcriroTjjj, -ov, o, lord , master. 
 •tuxoaftix, -«f, f], good-order, dis¬ 
 cipline, decorum, 
 xtrupta, -xs, fj, quiet, silence; {hw- 
 x'txv oiyeo, I keep quiet). 
 ixXxrra, -ns, «, sea. 
 fiarfis, -ov, o , spectator. 
 ifix*t)<xi)6t, I learn, study. 
 
 pdxu, {Bat. of the person and 
 Gen. of the thing), it concerns, 
 (Impersonal Verb). 
 oixvrns, ~ov, o, n&uta, sailor, 
 of/o/xxi, (Gen.), I strive-after, 
 grasp-at, desire. 
 
 (Dat.), it is-’becoming-to, 
 it becomes, (Impers. Verb). 
 srgoMKti, (Dart.), it is-becoming 
 to, it becomes, (Irapers. Vnrb)- 
 go'p'lx, -ks, »j, wisdom. 
 
 ■ ns, v, art, skill. 
 
 v£v$n'T(\;, -ov, I, luxurious, riot¬ 
 ous, vo'vpl'uous, '(Adj-.J. 
 
FIRST DECL.—MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 | 27 .] 
 
 35 
 
 Rule of Syntax^] When two Nouns come together, 
 referring to different things, one of them is put in 
 the Genitive. (The Noun in the Genitive usually has 
 the Preposition 0 /, or the apostrophe with s f in Eng¬ 
 lish). 
 
 1. M avOave, u) vsavia , rriv aotyiav. 2 . IIoAirrj tt pi- 
 7 ru tvKo 3. Ntavtou (ro<f>iav davgafyo. 4. <Ptvy£, 
 
 1 flop pas, Boreas, the north-wind , 8 § 153, 3. (b). 3 Iv^aoWns, 
 
 a Sybarite, (a native of Sybaris, a town in the south of Italy). 
 * It concerns sailors = sailors are concerned. § 158, 6. 5 
 
 Tia-rns, a, Spartan. 6 .Remark the irregular accentuation. § 26, 
 
 V 
 
 4. (b). (a). 
 
 (4. What is the quantity of the « in vox7ra ? 5. What is the 
 quantity of the a in o^oH^a ? ,7. How is it that vavrai is properis- 
 pornenon, when its last syllable contains a diphthong ?) 
 
 1. O youths, learn wisdom! 2. Decorum becomes 
 citizens. 3. We admire the wisdom of youths. 4. 
 Q citizens, avoid injustice! '5. The Spartans had a 
 
 great reputation 1 . 6. Keep ('swy.)-from voluptuous 
 youths ! 7. Shun (sing.) idle-talkers ! 8. Keep-from 
 
 (sing.) an idle-talker ! 9. It becomes a hearer and a 
 spectator to keep quiet. 2 10. Flee-from (sing.) a 
 voluptuous youth! 
 
 1 Translate; to the Spartans there was , <&e. 8 ■navxiav dyuv. 
 
 V. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Auxxiorvrn, -ns, *>, justice (as a l^aarns, -oZ, o, lover, friend.. 
 
 t)uv/xa<rrn, -Zs, wonderful , admt - 
 
 habit). 
 
 ruble. 
 
 x^iz-rns, ’sv, o, thief. 
 
 \orif/.eXo[/.ai, (Gen.), I care-foTf 
 take-care-of. 
 
36 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IV. 
 
 xfurnt, -#17, o, judge. 
 va.ua.yioc, -as, r, shipwrech. 
 chirrs , -ov, o, servant, domestic, 
 mtmuofiai, 1 am-trusted , 
 believed. 
 
 mcrtva, (Dat.), I trust, believe, 
 ar^arturrs, -ov, o, soldier. 
 n%vi rrs, -ov, Of artist. 
 
 T(>i$u, I rear , support, nourish 
 y^tutrrrs, -ov, o, liar. 
 
 1. f H rutv 'SiTTapTiariov apmj 1 Oavpaarri ttrrtv. 2. 
 4 >£uy£, UJ Uipaa. 3. KpiraTc nplmi SiKaioovvri. 4. 
 *E<jti rwv arpa'noorujv 2 7rtpi 3 twv 7 roXtru»y yaytaQai' 
 5. 4>£U7£ iptvaraQ. 6. "Etxrt SstTTrorou tTrifiiXteOai rwv 
 otKcrwv. 4 7. Mi? ttutteve i//£u<rrp. 8. Tex»'«Ti|i' 
 
 ^ Tt\VT). 9* *Eic xpivcTTMV yiyvovrai icXiirrat. ^10. 27rap- 
 Tiarai SoZtiq* Ka\ TtpriQ Epaaral igaav. 11. *E k j5oppa 
 iroWatciQ yiyvtrai vavayia. 12. Oaupa^opev rr/v Ep- 
 pov 6 TtXVJjV. 
 
 1 bravery (Lat. virtus). 2 tare with, the Genitive means “ it is the 
 part, duty, mark, business, &c., of any one'\ § 158, 2. 3 (with 
 Gen.) —for. 4 rm ohiruv, his domestics. §158, 6. 5 glory. E#- 
 
 prs, Hermes {Mercury), the messenger of the gods. 
 
 ( 4. Why does Un throw back its accent on the first syllable ? 
 12. Account for 'Egp.au being perispomenon.) 
 
 ]^B.—Words in Italics are not to be translated. 
 
 1. The Persians fly. 2. Justice is-becoming-to the 
 iudge. 3. It is the duty of a soldier to fight for the 
 citizens. 4. Avoid (sing.) a liar ! 5. Believe (sing.) 
 not liars! 6. Art supports artists. 7. We admire 
 Hermes. 8. Soldiers fight. 9. Liars are not trusted. 
 
 § 28. Second Declension . 
 
 The second declension has two endings, -oe and -ov; 
 Nouns in -oe are generally masculine, hut sometime s> 
 feminine; Nouns ih -ov are neuter. Feminine dimi¬ 
 nutive proper names in -ov are an exception; e. g. n 
 rXviceptov. 
 
§ 28 .] 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 37 
 
 Endings. 
 
 (Second Declension .) 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 m.fi n. 
 
 O Q OV 
 
 ov 
 
 V 
 
 ov 
 
 oq and £ ov. 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 oi a 
 
 (OV 
 
 OIQ 
 
 ovg a 
 
 oi a • 
 
 m.fi n. 
 
 CO 
 
 OlV 
 
 oiv ! 
 
 to | 
 
 to. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 G. 
 
 ! D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Word. 
 
 o kby-os 
 kby-ou 
 kby-tu 
 koy-ov 
 koy-1 
 
 Island. 
 
 V v biros 
 vncrou 
 
 vvitroo 
 
 vritrov 
 
 vv\m 
 
 God. 
 o Dios 
 
 6iOU 
 
 hZ 
 
 hov 
 
 fobs 
 
 Messenger. 
 b dyyikos 
 bcyyikov 
 bcyyckeo 
 cbyytkov 
 ccyyikt 
 
 TO ffVXOV 
 
 ffVXOU 
 
 crvxto 
 
 ffuxov 
 
 trZxov 
 
 P. Nj 
 
 koy-oi 
 
 vvrrot 
 
 hoi 
 
 biyyikoi 
 
 a.yyi’kuv 
 
 trvxoo 
 
 G. 
 
 koy-uv 
 
 VYjOtiV 
 
 hZv 
 
 evxuv 
 
 D. 
 
 kby-ois 
 
 vrifois 
 
 ho~s 
 
 ayytkois 
 
 biyyikovs 
 
 alxots 
 
 A. 
 
 koy ovs 
 
 vnirovs 
 
 hobs 
 
 ffVXOO 
 
 V. 
 
 kby-oi 
 
 vr^troi 
 
 hoi 
 
 ecyyekoi 
 
 ffUKCC 
 
 Dual. 
 
 koy-u 
 
 koy-oiv 
 
 Vr\<Td> 
 
 vr\<roiv 
 
 hZ 
 
 hoTv 
 
 bcyylkco 
 
 iyytkotv 
 
 ffuxco 
 
 (TV X OIV. 
 
 Obs. 1. The Voc. of words in -os commonly ends in t, though 
 sometimes in -os ; e. g. L <pikt and u tpikos ; always Z hb$. 
 
 Obs. 2. — Accentuation. The accent remains on the tone-syl¬ 
 lable of the Nom., as long as the quantity of the final syllable per¬ 
 mits ; the Voc. a A <p $ from u$tk<pbs, brother , is an exception. — 
 The plural ending -oi, like -cti in the first declension [§ 26, 4. (a)], 
 with respect to the accent, is considered short. The change of 
 the accent is the same as in the first declension (§ 26, 5.), except in 
 the Oen. PL, where the accent retains the place which it has in 
 the Nominative.* See the Paradigms. 
 
 Obs. 3. Adjectives in -os, -n (.-a), -ov are declined like the pre¬ 
 ceding paradigms in the masculine and neuter j as also those of two 
 endings in -os (Masc. and Fern.), -ov (Neut.) ; e. g. boy oo 6 o ?, boycott, 
 iyeoh'v, (food ; o a y oo 6 o s kbyos, the good speech , r b oi y cc 6 b v <r'txvov, 
 the good child; <r d y x cc ko s, or a. y x a k ov, very-beautiful; b -rdy xa- 
 
 * In the second Dec. oxytones alone become perispomena in the 
 Gen. PI. All others are paroxytone. 
 
38 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. TV. 
 
 Xog Xoyos, the very-beautiful speech , *5 <r a y x a X o s pootp-A, the very- 
 beautiful form, to ‘ 7 ru.yx.tt.X 0 v rtxvov, the very beautiful child. 
 Adjectives of two endings in -os, -ov are generally compound words. 
 Adjectives of three endings in -o S preceded by t, < or and those in 
 -oaf preceded by j», (like Nouns of the first declension in-<a pure and 
 *? a )i li^ve the Nona. Fein, in -« ; e. g. x^ fiaf * X£ v<r ~' il ** XZ^*' 10 ** 
 
 ^XfOOf, -ox, -o'ov. 
 
 will be seen by the following Paradigms 
 that, in Adjectives ending in -oc, -n (-a), -or, the 
 masculine and neuter are declined like the second 
 declension, and the feminine like the first. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 (A djectives of three endings in oq.) 
 
 S.N. 
 
 O. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 ttyttd-ers ttyu6-r) tt.ytt.6-ov. Good. 
 ttycc6-ov ttya-S-ns ciyaQ-ov 
 tt.yot.6-oo ttya.6-7i uyttS-co 
 aya.6-ov ooyot.6 -7]V u.ytt6-ov 
 tt.ya.6-i d.ya6-n ttya6-av 
 
 <PiXi-os ipixi-oi tpixi ov. Dear. 
 tyiXi-ov 1 piXi-a's <piXi-ov 
 piXi-eo tf)iXt-tt <piXi to 
 <piXt ov piXt-av (piXi-ov 
 <plXt t $1X1-00 <pfXi-av 
 
 P.N. 
 
 tt.ytt.6-oi dya.6-tti ciyad-d 
 
 <PiXi-oi tpiXi-tti <p'iXt ot 
 
 a. 
 
 iyoo6-eov d.yoo6 oov ayu6-Zv 
 
 $1X1-oov (piXl cov (piXi gov 
 
 D. 
 
 ayu 6 o 7 s oLyu. 9 -a. 7 s uya. 6 -o 7 s 
 
 (ptXl-ois <piXi-uis (PiXi-oiS 
 
 A. 
 
 xya6-ovs ooya.6-tt{ coy006-00 
 
 $iXt-ovs $iXi-ocs $1X1-00 
 
 V. 
 
 tt.ya.6-oi doy 006-001 ayoo6-K 
 
 $tXi-oi <p'tXi-ttt $iXt tz 
 
 Dual. 
 
 a.yu6-co oLyoo6-d ay 006-00 
 xya 6 -o 7 v ttya. 6 -a 7 v a.ya.6■ o 7 v 
 
 $1X1-00 $i\i-a $tXl- to 
 
 CptXi-ote $iXl-aiv$tXi- oiv. 
 
 
 1x0 e- os Ixfyd *xh~ 
 
 iv. Hostile. 
 
 
 &c. 
 
 &c. 
 
 VI. VOCABULARY 
 
 *A yuSov, -ou, to, a good-tiling, a 
 blessing, (neut.Adj.) 
 xyysXos, -ov, o, messenger, angel, 
 afv^uoros, -ov, o, man. 
 
 %i}ttrxuXos, -ov, o, teacher. 
 oovXos, -ov, a, slave, 
 fyyov, -ov, ro, work, deed, action. 
 itrOxos, -n, -ov, good, noble, splen¬ 
 did. 
 
 iraigos, -ov, o, companion, friend. 
 iVTv%;la, -as, n, good-fortune , 
 prosperity. 
 
 *xh'- s ' enemy, (prop, an 
 
 Adj., hostilef 
 
 6Js,-ov, o, God, a god. 
 xuxds, -n,-ov, bad, wicked, 
 xocxov, -ov, to, an evil. 
 xuXo;, -fj, -ov, beautiful, good, 
 noble ; (to xuXov, goodness^ the 
 beaut ful.) 
 
 xlvluvos, -ov, -o, danger. 
 
 Xoyos, -ov, o, ivord, story, reason. 
 piTtxoo, ((Jen.), I take-part-in, 
 share. 
 
 fileryu, misceo, I mix, (Dat.). 
 oivos, -ov, o, wine. 
 
 I grantj furnish, ojer. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 39 
 
 5 28.] 
 
 t 
 
 tier's, -tj, -it, faithful, trust - (Gen.), F care-fbr-, trou- 
 
 worthy. ble-mysefi about: with Acc. / 
 
 troXXot, -at, -a, many. f meditate-on, think-about. 
 
 'fi'Xof, -ov, o, friend ; tpf xas, -n, (l^ a M> I rejoice, delight- 
 
 -«v, dear, (Adj.). in, take-pleasure in. 
 
 Rule of Syntax.] A Nominative in the neuter plu¬ 
 ral usually takes a singular Verb. 
 
 When a Noun with the Article has a dependent 
 < Genitive , the Genitive commonly stands between the 
 Noun and its Article, (as rote rob SiSaaKaXov Xoyoig ); 
 or follows the Noun with a second Article, (as rolg 
 \6yotg roig rov StSaaKaXov). 
 
 In Greek, as in Latin, an Adjective is often 
 used with a Noun understood. It may or may not 
 have the Article ; e. g. 6 iiyaOog, the good ( man ) ; k«k«, 
 evil (things}. The Noun to be supplied must be de¬ 
 termined by the gender and number of the Adjective. 
 1. A lu)K£ KaXci Ipya. 2. HaiOov roig rov oiSaaKaXov 
 
 Ad 
 
 oyotg 
 
 i 
 
 floo’ laOXoj 
 
 ojv 2 laOXa 3 
 
 IuavOavtig 4. Lha- 
 Kfll TU)V KCIKWV* ptTb\tl. 5. 
 Of Ot(H r(ov avOiubniov 5 <ppoi>ri^ovaii f . 6. Of avOpwirm 
 Tovg Oaovg Oapcnrtvouaiv. 7. HoAAoTc zpyoig G antral 
 Kivfivvog. 8. Mtaytrat laOXa kokih g«, 9. 'O KOKOg 7 
 
 roig Otoig kuI roig avOpdjirotg l\6gog la Tty. 10. O i 
 avOpojTTot roig iaOXoJg 8 ^ai'govaiv. II. Ilapeyf, H) Otog v 
 roig <pi\otg 9 tvrv\iav. 12. 4>eo£, to SouX*, rov olvov 
 
 Tw vzaviy. 13. r O olvog Xvai rag paplyvag. 14. Xu- 
 Xtiriy tpytp 6 Su%a •IVerat. 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (a). 2 § 24. III. 3 \crft:h=noble {things). 4 § 158, 3. (h), 
 6 § 158, 6. I. 6 161, 2. (a). 7 o xa.xfo=the bad [man). 8 § lb I, 
 
 2 . (c). 9 My friends.—The Article is equivalent to & weakened 
 
 possessive. 
 
 N.B.— Words in brackets are to -be substituted in translation fir 
 the words preceding them. 
 
 1. Follow the words of your (=the) teachers. 2. 
 God cares-for men. 3. Men worship God. 4. Dangers 
 follow many actions. 5. Grant, O God, prosperity 
 to my (—the) friend ! 6. Keep-yourself-from the bud 
 man1 7. I deli<dit-in the noble young-man. 8. 
 
 Trust not th 6 * word of a liar, my (=0) dear youth4 
 
 roc craipog t<7> v ayaOiov * 
 :Ot riov avOmoTTiov 5 
 
40 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IV. 
 
 VII. VOCABULARY, 
 
 -A£'«»> -/«, -toy, (Gen.), wmthy, 
 worth. 
 
 m.ro-kutu, (Acc. pers., Gen. rei ), / 
 free-from, release. 
 
 -aw, a', silver, 
 fiiog, -ov, o, life, a living. 
 
 #avA»j, n, counsel, advice. 
 
 XotrroiaU, -as, n, quarrel, 
 tvtp^alva, 1 delight, gladden , 
 
 c/tecr. 
 
 Jaoarof, -ov, o, death. 
 
 6uoo, -ov, ro, the Deity. 
 
 4uftii,-ou, o, mind, courage, heart. 
 6l^a, -as, t), door. 
 
 Kktieo, I shut, fasten. 
 u.a6n<ri)s, -ov, o, pupil, disciple. 
 
 fitr^ov, -ov, ro, measure, limit, 
 
 moderation. 
 
 H-»X,k'°s,-oZ, o, holt, lever. 
 f£>p°s, -4a, -loo (parox.), count¬ 
 less; ftvpio, (proparox.), Un¬ 
 thousand. 
 
 viog, -a, -oo, young; o dog, -ov, 
 ' the youth, young-man. 
 ootros, -ov, disease. 
 ov% (before an aspirate instead 
 of ovx.), not. 
 
 rloos, -ov, o, trouble , labour, 
 hardship. 
 
 -«?, v, silence. 
 
 Xgooogy-ov, o, time. 
 
 Xtyvii, -ov, o, gold. 
 
 1. To Ka\6v l lari ptrpov too /3/ov, ou^ 6 
 O Oavarog rovg avOpwirovg cnro\vu ttoviov 2 kcu ku- 
 K(dv.^ 3. O oivog tixppuivti rout; tiov avOpioirwo Oo- 
 povg. 4. 2ui> 3 pvpioig ttovoiq ra KaXa. ylyverai. 5. 
 To 0t7ov* roiig KaKovg ayti Trpbg 3 rr)v Si'ktjo. 6. Jltaroc 
 $f\og xpvaov uat hpyvpov a£,iog 5 tanv tv x^Xtirij Si- 
 Xoaraaici. 7. IloXAat vocroi tv avOpwiroCg thjiv G . 8. 
 BovXrj tig 7 ayaOov ayti. 9. "2,iyp veto Tiprjv (bum. 
 10., Tl Oopa, poxXolg* tcXtltTat. 11. r H rtyurj roiig av- 
 OpioTToug rptipti. 12. Q, (piXoi paOgrai, rv\g aoiptag 9 kul 
 T gg aptTrjg y o ptytcrOt. 
 
 1 Why has xaklr the acute accent ? 2 § 157. 3 § 24. 4 hloo is 
 
 properly an abstract Noun ; Neut. of the Adj. Cdog. *§ 158, 7. ( y ). 
 Why has afyos two accents ? 6 Why does thrio, being an enclitic, 
 
 retain the accent ? 7 What name is given to words like us which 
 have no accent ? 8 The instrumental Dative, § 161, 3. 9 § 158, 3. (b). 
 
 1. By death 1 men are-released-from troubles and 
 evils. 2. By 2 the Deity the wicked man is brought 
 to 3 justice.. 3. The bolt fastens the door. 4. Art 
 supports the man. 5. My (=0) dear pupil, strive- 
 after wisdom and virtue! 6. Diseases wear-out men. 
 V. My (=0) friends, follow the words of the judges! 
 
 1 The instrumental Dative. 9 Wo, with the Gen. 
 
 3 v£o S , with the Acc. 
 
ft W/)X b b KCLKXHIOH, 
 
 41 
 
 1 
 
 5 29. Contraction of the Second Declension. 
 
 1, A *rr»;»ll nnr/iUr of Nouns, in which o or t prc- 
 ce/Je# the caae-en'ling, are usually wmtrct/ited through* 
 
 out 
 
 J'A RA MOMS. 
 
 
 
 Circumnavigation, 
 
 f/'/n* 
 
 u 
 
 H, 7f. 
 
 i if/ 44* -- 
 
 Iff 4%1 
 
 i 90(0 > /'4/ 44* - 
 
 40(0/40/ 41/* 
 
 T4 497(44 - 
 
 4474V4 
 
 0, 
 
 Itf/'.lv 
 
 44/9/ 
 
 40*0/40/ i,41/ 
 
 40(0/40/ 41/ 
 
 iirUu 
 
 i974*/ 
 
 If. 
 
 0oitf 
 
 40 'y 
 
 40(0040/ 4tf 
 
 40(0/40/ >f 
 
 49r*>/0 
 
 ivrif 
 
 A. 
 
 IT/49/ 
 
 90/ 9.4 
 
 40(0'/4r/ 4//* 
 
 40i(//40?.4V9 
 
 I'/r'i** 
 
 4474*/4 
 
 V. 
 
 44/41 
 
 00/01/ 
 
 401^/40/ 4\ 
 
 40((r/40/ 4U 
 
 447(44 
 
 ha 7 4*/0 
 
 V. ff. 
 
 01% ''■*/ 
 
 90 / 4/ 
 
 00*4/40>44! 
 
 4f(0/4r/.4/ 
 
 447(V. 
 
 147%, 
 
 i\ , 
 
 Iff 4'/r* 
 
 90/94 
 
 40(0/40/ 4001 
 
 40(0/40/ 4/4 
 
 497'itot 
 
 t _ * ^ 
 
 MV to* 
 
 Ik 
 
 Iff imi 
 
 40 / 4*1 
 
 40(0/40/44/* 
 
 40 (0/40 0.4/ * 
 
 147(4/* 
 
 497 4/* 
 
 A. 
 
 44/ ito/* 
 
 44 / 41/1 
 
 40(0/40 / 441/* 
 
 40(0/40/ 4*/* 
 
 hvy'di 
 
 i47M 
 
 V. 
 
 00.41* 
 
 40 /.*i 
 
 40(0/40/. 44/ 
 
 •# 
 
 40(0'/4r/4/ 
 
 hvy'iv. 
 
 4979. 
 
 ffr/*l. 
 
 00.4*0 
 
 40/44 
 
 40(0/40'/i/A 
 
 10(0'/40/ to 
 
 ii97(to 
 
 197M 
 
 
 9T/44/1 
 
 •0/ 4*4 
 
 4r*0/‘/0/.44/f 
 
 w 
 
 40*.0/'/0/ 4/1 
 
 V 
 
 iiyU/i 
 
 i970/4. 
 
 h<w. Tn th-.n '■;>*** {*) M•dtkftlAmltm Adj^/st»vn# in 4«# 
 
 1‘Hrif, inf 4ft -i*f 1 9 / 4 ) ' f **, *>. '%/ '4//1, Mt/mT/lf /—(b) Ad- 
 
 ytK%v/m nf t,m > ttn/Mmy* k> * 4 * ( 4 t/i) f Ma#e, *,n<\ Vtrn,, and -#»» 
 
 ( *vt)y M*?>*,, , H. y 4, b (1/4*/*, 74 iCrH/9 t >W/-(/w//;W differ 
 
 It'ffh Um (bySt-nunn <A H K^oUvfiHy only in «/4 r/mf/rosJmy - 49 . 
 im U/a /i/'t/lff j'O/r'd; n. y. 74, *H>449, 7(/./9, ;-*-('/) Adjwfcive<* in 
 **0i ( * v *), 'la ( '/>), '**f ( * v r), whioh Antx/fo a w/uMrUil / #, g, 
 
 — yt/949/*. '///»'>>'—'///*/'/*,, — yyi/49/-/, yoOUn, Wh*,ri 
 
 o v/'hd'/r » ‘f/f'wlsA'iih* U-.u*. ;../,/•, 6nding4£, -t 9 , ia wA contracted 
 into *%i tnU bit// itff 5 %y \)' f ft 
 
 •*'■■ *4i — ’>»*+'i t \ 0 *' '* v, - * 0 1 k, \t/\ i&7 wo'iVsn. 
 
 hyi/* **1 — kty 'td/ii k 0y 9 0- 19, — k 0 y u 0 k, kty(f^' (9*^>j,*yv^9vi y 
 
 §U*yr f (A'lyf, 
 
 pAHAbMMff, 
 
 n.n. 
 
 jyyi/4( 4* 
 
 (/i/VUm/, 
 yyt/4 * v. 
 
 yy(/9*-94 
 
 1 i/^ffd-41 
 
 Him \/\*}. 
 
 bsryj-n 
 
 k/00%.4 9* 
 
 a. 
 
 * yy//94i/t 
 
 %4*S* 
 
 yyo94vt 
 
 1 f//T0//fl/* 
 
 iyrX/A 
 
 i/,'4/. 9/4 
 
 
 y///94i 
 
 
 f/S/0'/.4{f 
 
 //.Tf/ti* 
 
 1//4 /.**/ 
 
 u. 
 
 y/99y 
 
 yyi/rf 
 
 yyi /94 
 
 t//4/.y 
 
 krtfij 
 k'/0* v,i 
 
 it, 4 ‘/Jf 
 
 A. 
 
 yy/idr/ 
 
 y0i/9//> 
 
 yy//9 494 
 
 h 40/. 461 
 
 b.907v491 
 
 V. 
 
 y /;/4 Hi 
 
 y///in 
 
 y/rU47*/7 
 
 f/,40/ 4’/* 
 
 k/4'/.7l 
 
 kv'/tit* 
 
42 SECOND DECLENSION. [CHAP. IV. 
 
 P.N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 v. 
 
 Golden. 
 
 XQvuo 7 %(>v<r«,7 -£(jv<ra. 
 
 XQvawv xgvaav ^vauv 
 
 XpvooTs x^vraTs XZ U!T0 ~* 
 
 Xpverovf x^vaaf xquou 
 
 Xqvuoi %(>vroc7 %/j vad. 
 
 Simple. 
 
 air\o7 ot.irXu7 ttirXot 
 
 airXuv d.irX.uv ciirXuf 
 
 ee.TX.o7s a.irX.tt7s o.tXo7s 
 
 cc.irX.ovs uirXu; airXa. 
 
 ctirXoi ttirXa.7 ioieXat 
 
 Dual. 
 
 X%v<n» 
 
 Xpvero7f Xi v ' ra d* XQvcroTv 
 
 ttirXu uirXa. uirX/ti 
 
 airX.o7v dorkaTv ttirXot*. 
 
 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 The following are to be noticed as exceptions to 
 the rules in § 11, 2 : (a) In the dual 7r\oio — 7rX(b, 
 <o(tt(u)= ocftm, (instead of ttAoV, varw ); (b) Compounds 
 and polysyllabic proper names , which are accented 
 throughout on the penult, even when, according to 
 the general rules* the contracted syllables should 
 Iiave the circumflex; e. g. TnpnrXoov = Trtp'nrXov, (in¬ 
 stead of mpnrXov)’, tvvoto — tvvip, (instead of tvv(jj)y 
 *(c) To Kaytov — kcivovv,* (instead of icavovv), basket , 
 and also Adjectives in -tog, -la, -tov; e. g. ^ p u <x e o g 
 = ](pu(Touc, (instead of ypi'txouc), ypvoia = yjpvaii, 
 %p v a £ o v =x P v cr ov v, (insteadof ^pvcrovv ); finally, 
 Substantives in -top =-ouc*; e. g. aSeXtyiStog = adt\- 
 rfnSuvg, (instead of adtXrpiSovg), nephew , 
 
 VIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 *A$>j \os, -of, uncertain, unknown. 
 &?.ri0itei, -Acs, fi, truth. 
 ttvoos=&vo>/s, (-flfi»= -ovv) , foolish, 
 impnident, irrational. 
 airXoos~ot-irXovs, -oov— 
 
 - ovv ), simple. 
 
 a^yv^ios'= z a.pyviovs (-£ot=-fiS, «£fiv 
 
 —ovv), si/yer, (Adj.). 
 
 -ov, o, bread. 
 
 \x-xa.XvTTM, I disclose, revcod. 
 WfxovtpiZv, I lighten, alleviate. 
 \fiZ*>, QD&t.), / quarreUwith, con- 
 tend-with. 
 
 tilvooe=tvvovs, (-osv= -ovv), well- 
 affected, kind, friendly. 
 4tQd.ira.ivu,, -*i <, r, handmaid, 
 xcct — xcc't, both — and. 
 xa.viov-xa.vovf, (-iov—^ov), TOybOS- 
 ket. 
 
 kutovt^ov, -ov, to, mirror. 
 xvanWov, -ov, to, goblet, cup. 
 Xiyu, I say , call, name. 
 yoo$=vovs, (-oov= -ov), o, uridet- 
 standing, judgment, mind,spi¬ 
 rit. 
 
 ohlyet, -«/, -a, few. 
 
 * This violates the rule that the circumflex is placed over the 
 contracted syllable, only when the frst oi the two uncontracted 
 syllables ha3 the acute. 
 
\ 
 
 f 29,] SECOND DECLENSION, 43 
 
 •eyv, -xs, *>, anger. 
 
 ’o (>i<rrxs, -ov, a. Orestes. 
 lffTior=oa<rovv,{-iov --at/),<ra, bone. 
 SxXofy -at/, a, plebs, the common - 
 people, crowd, mob. 
 vgof-ipegu, l bear or bring. 
 
 uorvtfs, -ov, a, sleep. 
 
 %a,\lv'os, -oZ, o, bridle. 
 %eckxio$—%a\zovt, {-ict=** it, -uv 
 = -ovv ), brazen. 
 
 'I'i'X*, -vs, v, soul, spirit. 
 
 Rule of Syntax .] One Noun following another to 
 explain it, and referring to the same person or thing, 
 is put in the same case. This construction is called 
 Apposition. 
 
 1. *0 Adyoe l<tr\ to too vov KaroTrrpov , 2. Tot> 
 
 vovv e\ov&iv oi avOpwTrm SiSaoKaXov. 1 3. Top evvow 
 
 </)iXov Oepa 7T£ve. 4. ’OAryot ttkttov vovv e\ov(nv-. 
 
 'O ttAo vg la tiv 2 a^rjXog. 6. 2i>v vtjJ rov {3iov ayz. 
 ,7. 'O O^AoC OVK £%£l VOVV. 8. M JJ £ptX,£ TO\Q O VOig . 3 
 9. Oi ayadoi to ig aya0o7g*tvvoi tlaiv. 10. ’Opeyov 
 tfiXtav 5 tvvtov. 11. T a rov OpiaTov ogtvl iv Teyzq. 6 
 
 12. Ai S£pcnraivai £v Kavoig rov aprov Trpog<ptpov<n.v: 
 
 13 . Oi Oeol Kcii KaXov Kai kukov ttXovv roig vavratg 7 
 rrapl^ovaiv. 14. v Puyrjc \aXivog avOpcuirotg 8 6 vovg 
 £<jtiv. 15 . rioAAaictc dpyrj avQpwmov vovv £KKaXv7rru. 
 16. r AitXovg £<ttiv 6 rijg aXijOdag Xdyog. d 17. Aoyog 
 tvvovg IwiKOV^lZit Xv7TXjV. 18 . To KV7T£\X6v £GTLV 
 •apyvpovv. 19 . f O Oavarog Aiytrai 10 ^ aXKOvg virvog . 
 
 1 t%ovtnv, have=hold, consider. is in apposition to 
 
 *ouv. 2 Why is the •*> appended to i<r™ ? 3 § 161, 2. (a). 4 § 161, 5. (a). 
 
 * § 158, 3. (b). 6 Tegea, a town in Arcadia. 7 § 161, 2. (a)* 
 
 * § 161, 5. 9 the language. 10 is called. 
 
 1. The mind is a teacher to men. 2. The well-al* 
 fected friend is honoured. 3. Keep-yourself-from 
 the foolishl 4. Strive-after (sing.) a kind friend! 5. 
 Bring {sing-) bread in a basket! 6.0 young-men, 
 /honour a simple mind! 7. Avoid (sing.) foolish 
 youths! 8. Trust, O friend, well-affected men / 9 
 
 Youths are often imprudent. 10. The cup is of- 
 
 gold. 
 
44 
 
 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. [CHAP. IV. 
 
 § 30. The Attic Second Declension. 
 
 Several words (Nouns and Adjectives) have in the 
 Nom. the endings we (Masc. and Fem.) and wv (Neut.), 
 instead of oc aud ov. In these w takes the place of 
 o, ou, a of the regular second Declension, and to of 
 ot. The Voc. is the same as the Nom. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 People. 
 
 Cable. 
 
 Dining-room. 
 
 Mild (Adj.). 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 o Xi-us 
 
 o KciX-ws 
 
 to xveoyi-atv 
 
 i, n *Xta>Sf TO 7Xt»» 
 
 G. 
 
 Xi-u 
 
 xx\-u 
 
 avuyi-a 
 
 tXia 
 
 D- 
 
 * f 9 
 Xl-y 
 
 xoiX-u 
 
 xveoyi-u 
 
 |X£« 
 
 A. 
 
 Xs-uv 
 
 KtiX-an 
 
 avcoyt-uf 
 
 'tXsuv 
 
 V. 
 
 Xt-ut 
 
 xaX-us 
 
 avctiyi-wv 
 
 'iXlus, 7Xs<wv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 Xt-cti 
 
 XxX-oo 
 
 etvuyt-u 
 
 el, xi 7 Xty, tu ’tXtx 
 
 G. 
 
 Xt-co » 
 
 XxX-uv 
 
 ivouyi-u* 
 
 iXtuv 
 
 D. 
 
 t 
 
 Xi-oii 
 
 xuX-Cfis 
 
 xvtuyt-ys 
 
 ’IXiys 
 
 A. 
 
 Xe-cuf 
 
 xxX-uf 
 
 avuyi-ot 
 
 iXtCUSy Tflt lAUt 
 
 V. 
 
 Xt-al 
 
 1 
 
 xxX-tu 
 
 xveoyt-u 
 
 7 Xiy, iXtat 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Xi u 
 
 xxX-u 
 
 aveliyt-eo 
 
 7 Xtu 
 
 
 Xi-yv 
 
 xolX wv 
 
 uvcoyi-MH 
 
 tXitvv. 
 
 Obs 1. Some words, masculine and feminine, in the Acciisative 
 Singular often reject the ending v; viz. o x*yh, ™ and 
 
 Xaycl, the hare , and the proper names n Kt« f , n K* s , « A0 U j, t, Tu* , 
 the Adjectives \*l*Xu»s, quite-full , v^xe tus > deeply-m-deht ,and 
 dyvpvs, free-fcom-old aye, undecaying , have-«v or-w in Acc. Masc. 
 and Fem. : n ‘U, the dawn , has always Acc. r*v . 
 
 Obs. 2. Acce^uafcon.] Proparoxytones m -<«*, retain the 
 acute on the antepenult in all the cases <?f all numbers, the two syl¬ 
 lables and - £ «v being considered but one. Oxytones in retain 
 this accent even in the Genitive and Dative , as Xiuj ; the other oxy¬ 
 tones follow the general rule ; e. g. Xxydf **y£, Xay»* t x*- 
 
 v S s x«^». This distinction, however, between the accentuation 
 of oxytones in -ufr and -J$ is not uniformly observed m the editions 
 
 of the classics. .... .. . • 
 
 Obs. 3. This declension is termed Attic, because if a word of 
 
 this class has another form, e. g. Xi*s and Xx»s,n*s aud Mm- 
 Aews, Msvsx*«, the Attic writers usually select the form in ; 
 though in the best Attic writers, the non-Attic forms also may be 
 
 found. 
 
 • This is a violation of the general rule, § 26, 5, (a). 
 
§30.] 
 
 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 45 
 
 IX. VOCABULARY, 
 
 -en, free-from-old-age, 
 undying, undecaying, 
 itros, -ou, o, eagle. 
 al%fAxXci>roj, -oi, captive. 
 
 -w, brave, manly. 
 &*&yta>v, -u, to, dining-room, up¬ 
 per-floor. 
 
 irdyu, 1 lead-away, carry-off", 
 (ia'ivu, I walk, go, advance, 
 infaeva, (Acc.), I lie-in-wait-for , 
 (insidior). 
 
 iruivof, -ou, o, praise. 
 
 (Dat.), I pray-to, pray , 
 beseech. 
 
 fyst/THf, -ou, o, huntsman , sports¬ 
 man. 
 
 I hunt. 
 
 'Ikicds, -cuv, (Dat.), propitious^ 
 
 merciful. 
 
 /takas, -oj, o, rope, cable. 
 xti^o), I found, build , colonize, 
 Xa.ywg, o, hare. 
 
 Xa/u.p>oivco, 1 take, receive, 
 viug. -u, o, temple, 
 vrkutrroi, -rj, -ov, most, 
 pcfiiog, -iK, -toy, easy. 
 aefiopcKt, I worship, respect, re¬ 
 vere. 
 
 tkus, -u, o, peacock, 
 vlos, - ov , o, son. 
 
 Zf. r«g, as, as-it-were. 
 
 1 . ToTc 0EOIQ 1 VE(p Krf^ovrat. 2. Ov pafiiov tar tv 
 £7Ti k aXojv fia'ivftv. 3. AicoKopev rovg Xaytog. 4. ’Au- 
 SpdyEtug rjv 6 Mtuw 2 vlog. 5. 0 t Acry^) Oripevovrat 
 viro ru)V Orjpevrwv. 6. Euyou rip 'iXtip Oem. 7. O e 
 aeroi rovg A ayd>g EVE^pEvovmv. 8. StjSecrftf rovg 'tXetog 
 Oeovg. 9. Ot avSpeTot ayijpcov ettcuvov Xagfidvovaiv 
 10. Euyou rou Oeov^IXeojv e \ eiv . 11. Ot 0eo\ rolg aya- 
 0o7g 3 t'Acw staiv. 12. At igSovu'i enrdyoven rov 7tXei(ttov 
 Xeuiv wgTTEp al\iJ.d\(i)Tov. 13. Oi SdjUtot 4 ry w Hpqc 5 
 tcaXovg rcuvg rpe<pouaiv. 
 
 1 § 161, 5. 2 Minds, king of Crete, in the Heroic Age. 3 § 161, 
 5. (a). 4 The people of Samos, an island in the iEgean Sea. 5 to 
 Hira (Juno); i.e. in honour of Hera. 
 
 1. We found beautiful temples to the gods. 2. 
 It is not easy to walk on a rope. 3. Sportsmen hunt 
 hares. 4. The god is propitious. 5. Revere (pi.) 
 the merciful God! 6. By 1 the Samians handsome 
 peacocks are reared in-honour-of Hera (= to Hera). 
 7. O citizens, keep-from the foolish crowd ! 8. Give- 
 way-to 2 (sing.) the foolish crowd! 9. The sportsman 
 pursues 3 hares. 
 
 1 boro, with Gen. 
 
 n 
 
 tuxuv . 
 
 2 ilxuv, with Dat. 
 
46 
 
 THIRD DECLENSIONS 
 
 
 [Chap. IY 
 
 X. VOCABULARY, 
 
 ’a {i<rxv, rDat.)> I please, 
 et^irv, -Us, fi, virtue, bravery, ex¬ 
 cellence. 
 
 (hizfftXuit, -av, r&, palace, 
 yecfitrn, -vis, fi, Wife. 
 
 iukos, -»», -«*, cowardly , worth¬ 
 less, timid. 
 
 \x-<p'i£u, I bring-forth, produce. 
 
 iTixlv'&uvas, -an, dangerous. 
 
 'ius, -u, h, dawn , morning. 
 
 6vi^iov. -etf , t «, wild-beast , ani¬ 
 mal; (Snota., game). 
 
 *it S os - 6 v, (Gen.), sacred to. 
 
 rroi’/irvis, -o~, o, poet. 
 po%oboix.Tv\os, -ov, rosy-fingered. 
 e-TvXti, -ns, pillar, column. 
 
 1. Oi ra^> Trig "Hnac hpoi fiaav. 2, Qcivjua%ofnv 
 MfcvtAeeov 1 t7Tt ry apery. 3. Oi 7ro irira). r»)v M E<i> 2 p o- 
 noSaicrvXov arrayopevovoiv. 4. H aXr'iQtia ttoXX aiag 
 ovk apicncEi rig Xeig. 3 5. 'EXevrj 4 rjv MeveAtw yap&Ti'i. 
 6. 'H Baj3uAo»tda 5 ek</>E pEi noXXovg raiog, 7. ’Ev ro7g 
 t~ov Qeiov vetog 7roXXai arriXai gaav. 8. O i Xayig ck/Aa 
 Qripta EICTIV. 9, O 7TEp\ tov ’ A0 io r ‘ irXovg riv ethkIv^v/' 
 vo g. 10. Ta (daotXzia k aXa avihyeio t\ei. 
 
 1 Menelaos, one of the Greek chieftains in the Tro jan War. 2 Eds 
 (Aurora), goddess of the Morn. 3 § 161, 2, (c). 4 Helen. 5 Babylon. 
 6 Mount Athos. ( 10. Why is ’{%" in the singular , when its sub¬ 
 ject / lacriXuoc. is plural ?) 
 
 1. Menelaos is admired for his bravery. 2. In the 
 
 { )alace are beautiful dining-rooms. 3. Sportsmen 
 mnt peacocks. 4. Peacocks are handsome. 5. Trust 
 not the language of the people, O citizens! 6. The 
 sportsman lies-in-wait-for peacocks. 7. Good citi¬ 
 zens shun the senseless crowd. 8. Young-men lie- 
 in-wait-for hares. 9. The columns of the temples 
 are beautiful. 
 
 § 31. Third Declension. 
 
 The third declension has the following Case-end- 
 ings:— 
 
§32.] 
 
 THIRD DECL.-CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 47 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 — Neut. — 
 
 EC Neut. a 
 
 g 
 
 Gen. 
 
 o g 
 
 (0 1 / 
 
 OlV 
 
 Dat. 
 
 u 
 
 t 
 
 di( vj 
 
 OlV 
 
 Acc. 
 
 v and a Neut. — 
 
 w u 
 
 ag — a 
 
 g 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 generally like Nom. Neut. — 
 
 1 
 
 ! —a 
 
 g 
 
 These endings are appended to the unaltered Root 
 of the word; e.g. a Onp, wild-beast, Gen. Gqp-oQ. 
 
 § 32. Remarks on the Case-endings . 
 
 1. The simple Root is often altered in the Nom. of 
 masculines and feminines. But this is found again 
 by omitting the genitive ending -og ; e. g, 6 Kopa£ f 
 raven , Gen. k 6 p a k -og, (Root uopaic}. 
 
 2. Neuters exhibit the simple Root in the Nom. sing . 
 But the euphony of the Greek language does not 
 permit a word to end with r. Hence, in this case, r 
 is either wholly rejected or is changed into its cognate a ; 
 e. g._ 
 
 . 
 
 orsm/y 
 
 • 
 
 43 } 
 
 /-N 4# 
 
 1 ffiXas 
 
 s 
 
 vj “ 
 
 i 
 
 1 ffWfJOHT 
 
 o 
 
 ( 
 
 _ Tt^eir 
 
 
 C to orsTitu, pepper, 
 
 j to (rtXas, brilliance, 
 j to {jruifjoctT) awfjott, body. 
 (_ to Ti^uf , prodigy. 
 
 C vst igt-of or t-of 
 fi \ ( 'TtXottr-os) tr'ikec-o$ 
 
 ^ ) (TUfJOCLT-Ot 
 TipttT-Ot. 
 
 3. The Acc. sing, has the form in -w with mascu¬ 
 lines and feminines in -tg, -vg, -avg and -oi»Cr whose 
 Root ends in -i, -v, -au^nd -ov respectively; e. g — 
 
 foroki m C vrokie T vroXut. 
 
 "o J v%v 9 \ vocZs o j vxv y. 
 
 ^2 J fioT(>» £ J (oOT^Vg j (OOT^VV. 
 
 ( j8 ov (. /3 ou$. P>oZv. 
 
 But the Acc. has the form in -a, when the Root endi 
 in a consonant ; e. g. <p\t[3, <j>X£\p, 0A*j3a— Kopatc, ko 
 pa%, KopaK-a — Xapira8, Xajuirag , AajU/raB-a. 
 
48 
 
 THIRD DECL.-GENDER, &C. [CHAP. IV 
 
 Barytone nouns, however, in - ig and -vg, of two or 
 more syllables, whose roots end with a T-mute, in 
 prose , have only the form in -v; e. g.— 
 
 • 
 
 (V s 
 
 1. 
 
 a * 
 
 ( w* 
 
 
 Ge" 
 
 ■g 
 
 ) opvid 
 
 ) opvts 
 
 9 
 
 O 
 
 Q 
 
 _j opVI* 
 j X.C3V* 
 
 \z*e ,9 ‘ 
 
 
 J KOput1 
 
 (z a e ,r 
 
 ^0 
 
 J KCpVf 
 (zaps 
 
 < 
 
 4. The Voc. is either like the Nom. or the Root. 
 See the Paradigms. 
 
 5. On the v ePeXkvo-ikov in the Dative Plural, see 
 § 7, 1, (a). 
 
 § 33. Gender, Quantity and Accentuation of the Third 
 
 Declension. 
 
 I. Gender. The gender of the third declension 
 will be best learned by observation. The following 
 rules, however,maybe observed:— 
 
 (a) Masculine. (1) Substantives in -av, -vv, -ag 
 (Gen. - avog, -avrog), -eug , -rjv, -Etp (except rj \Ap, 
 hand), -vp (except to 7rvp, fine), -ovg (except to ovg, 
 ear); —(2) Those in -inv, -rip, -top, -rig (Gen. -rirog), 
 -mg (Gen. -toTog), -p ( with some exceptions). 
 
 (b) Feminine. (1) Substantives in -ag (Gen. -aSoc), 
 -avg, -ivg, -vvg, -to and -tog (Gen. -ouc), -orrig, -vrrig, 
 -eig (except 6 KTtig, comb) ;—(2) Those in -ig, -iv, -vg , 
 -tov (Gen. -oi>oc) with some exceptions. Those in -£ 
 vary between the Masc. and Fern, gender. 
 
 (c) Neuter. All Substantives in -a, -n, -op, -top, 
 
 -og, -1 , -ap (except 6 pap, starling ), -ap (Gen. -aroc, 
 -aog, except 6 Xag , stone), and contracts in -rip. 
 
 II. Quantity. Words whose Nom. ends in -a£, -/£, 
 -v£, -ap, -ip, -vp, -ig and -vg, have the penult of the 
 Cases which increase, either short or long , according 
 as the vowel of the above endings is short or lon<* 
 by nature ; e. g. 6 Output, coat-of-mail, -aKog, pip. 
 
49 
 
 § 54.] THIRD DECT.-SIMPLE ROOT IN NOM. 
 
 reed , pinog, 17 ciktiq, rat/, -Xvog; but 17 j3 u>Xa%, clod , 
 -a koc, 17 IXttlc, hope , -i$og. 
 
 III. Accentuation, (a) The accent remains, through 
 the several Cases, on the tone-syllable of the Nom., 
 as long as the laws of accentuation permit ; e. g. to 
 npayya,deed, npayyarog, (but irpay fiaTwv), to ovoya, 
 name, d voyarog, (but dvoyarwv), 6, r\ xtXidivv, swal - 
 Zow, x sXiSovog , !Eevocpiov, -iovrog, -dvreg, -wvrwy. 
 The particular exceptions will be noticed in the 
 Paradigms, (b) Monosyllables are accented, in the 
 GW and Dat . 0 / Numbers, on the syllable, 
 the s/iortf syllables -oe, *1 and -<ri taking the acute, and 
 the /owp syllables -eov and -o*v, the circumflex ; e. g. 
 6 yr\v, yy]vog, jurjid, y k)vo7.v, yr]v<x)v, yY]ai(y). 
 
 Exceptions. The following monosyllables are pa- 
 roxytone in the Gen. PI. and in the Gen. and Pat. 
 Dual : h torch , 6 (iiyiog, slave , 6 , 17 Odg, jackal, ro 
 
 ouc, Gen. djrdg, ear, 6, 77 it dig, child, 6, 17 T pojg, Tro¬ 
 jan, r] (p<yg, Gen. (fxp^og, a burn , rd (jswg, Gen. (ptorog, 
 light / e. g. SatScjv, SaSoiv, 0u)O)v, toTwv, I'otolv, natSwv, 
 7 raiSoiv, Tptowv, (JhvSwv, <p(vT(ov. In addition to these 
 may be mentioned the Adjective nag, all, every, Gen. 
 navrog, Dat. navri, &C.; but navrojv, nacri(v ); 6 Ha v, 
 Gen. Ylavog, but Toig Da<7f(v); also monosyllabic par¬ 
 ticiples ; e. g. oravriov, ovtojv ; gtclglv, ovgiv. 
 
 A. Words,which in the Genitive have a consonant 
 
 BEFORE THE ENDING -og, L e. WORDS WHOSE ROOT 
 
 ENDS IN A CONSONANT. 
 
 § 34. I. The Nominative Singular exhibits the simple 
 
 Root. 
 
 The Case-endings are appended to the unaltered Nomi¬ 
 native. Roots which end in -vr (as &evo (ptovr) and -pr 
 (as Sayapr) must drop the r (according to § 32, 2); 
 hence £ Uvo<pu>v 9 Gen. -dvr-og; Sayap, Gen. -apr-og. 
 
 D 
 
50 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IV 
 
 S.N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 o, Paean. 
 
 Tatuv 
 
 Tuidv-os 
 
 Tu.ia.v-i 
 
 Tuidv-a 
 
 X 
 
 TU.IU.V 
 
 0 , Age. 
 
 > / 
 euaiv 
 
 aluv-oi 
 
 alZv-i 
 
 alZv-ce, 
 
 5 t 
 
 U.IUV 
 
 o, Xenophon. 
 
 BivoifiZv 
 %iV0(pZvT-0S 
 ‘z&ivoQZvr-i 
 £ ivo$Zvr~u 
 £s votyZv 
 
 o, Month. 
 
 (JOYiV 
 
 /U.t]V~0S 
 
 fxviv-i 
 
 fnv-x 
 
 fX'AV 
 
 to, Nectar. 
 viz- rug \ 
 
 VBX?ltg-0$ 
 
 vixrag-t 
 
 vlxrag 
 
 v'i x. rug \ 
 
 P. N. 
 
 TU.id.V-iS 
 
 aiZv-i s 
 
 ?2ivo(f>Zvfr-is 
 
 (ihv-is 
 
 vixfrug-u S 
 
 G. 
 
 vrctiav-cov 
 
 ahtir-uv 
 
 ’is.ivotyotivr-av 
 
 fznv-cdv 
 
 vixrag-uv 
 
 D. 
 
 Tutd-afv)* 
 
 alZ-n (v)* 
 
 ’B.-VO^Z-fflff 
 
 (xn-ul(v)* 
 
 v'ixrxg-ffi(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 Tuidv-us 
 
 alZv-as 
 
 £ ivopZvr-as 
 
 fxriv-as 
 
 vixrotg-a 
 
 Y. 
 
 Txidv-ts 
 
 aiZv-is 
 
 SiVO<pZv<r-iS 
 
 fn v-is 
 
 v'ixrxg-a \ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 TUldv-i 
 
 X 
 
 TUIUV-01V 
 
 aiuv-b 
 
 alZv-oiv 
 
 £ iVOpZvT-S 
 £ ivoipuvr-oiv 
 
 /uijv-s 
 
 fxnv-oTv 
 
 ViKTUg-t 
 
 ViXTUg-OIV. 
 
 Obs. 1. The three following Substantives in -u», Gen. -mvos, viz. 
 >A t'oXXuv, noati&Zv, n d.Xuv, threshing-floor, may be contracted in the 
 Acc. Sing, after dropping »; thus, ’A toXXu, Uom^u, xXu>. The three 
 Substantives, ’ AtoXXmv, WomibZv and (preserver), shorten the 
 
 vowel in the Vocative, and throw the accent back} ; e. g. u "AtraA- 
 
 Aav, Ytoaiihov, ffu/Tig. 
 
 Obs. 2. The neuters belonging to this class all end in -g (-ag, -og, 
 . a g, - u d > T '° (Gen. -prup-'os),Jire, has u long , though u in its root 
 is short, (contrary to § 32, 2). 
 
 XI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 *Av^u (c£Zu>), I sing, chant, 
 ivx-ytyvuffxw, I read, 
 uluv, -uvos, o, (aevum), an age, 
 time, lifetime. 
 
 (ZtfiXiov, -ay, to, book. 
 yiyvutrKM, I know, try, perceive. 
 
 GuX'ut, -a n, feast, feasting, 
 idxxca, I bloom, bud. 
 drio, 6v\ gos, o, wild-beast. 
 x.X6d.gu, -as, *>, lyre. 
 
 -yoos., o, mixmg-omd, 
 goblet, wine-cup. 
 
 Xuftclv, -Zvo$, o,. meadow. 
 vIttu, u £&>, I wash. 
 
 1. Qivyt rovg.Qripag. 2. Xtjp ^stpa v ^ ei ‘ 
 yov tow \priv6g. 4. Ot Xsi/jnovtg OciWovgiv, 5. Oi 
 fTTpariufrcu qSovat tt aiava. 6. ’Ev Tivpi ^oiktov k at ap- 
 
 'yupov yiyvcoGKojuev. 1 7. DoAXot napa Kparijpi yiy 
 
 * Instead of Tuidvai, alZ-jut, S svotpZvrui, fintri. See § 8> 8. 
 
 f This is an excejrtion to the rule in § 33, III. (a). 
 
 neudv, -avoi, o, war-song, song- 
 of triumph. 
 
 Tug, Tug os, ro, fire. 
 ffrouboAos, -aid., •etiov, zealous, OC* 
 tive, earnest, serious,., good. 
 v'igTu, I delight, amuse. 
 TigTopca, (Dat.), 1 amuse-myself 
 delight-in. 
 
 %uo, xugot, h, (Dat. PI., xtgcrj l 
 Gen. and Dat. Dual XK^h 
 hand. 
 
 X»gls, -ou, o, dance, 
 fnv, ^jjvoVi «> wasp. 
 
§ 35.] THIRD DECL.-ROOTS LENGTHENED IN NOM. 51 
 
 vovrai iraipou S. 0 t avOpwwoi Ttpirovrai KiQa- 
 
 pa 2 Kai QaXlq. Kai \opoXg ical ttulcktiv. 9. Ot m EXX»]- 
 tov ? AttoXX(j> Kai to v Iloa-aSto 4 aifiovrai. 10. Ot 
 <nrovSatoi jua9rjrai tcl tov ^evoipiovTog j3ij3Xia rjSiwg 
 
 avayiyvibcTKOVcnv. 5 
 
 1 we try. a § 161, 2. (c). 3 the Hdlenes=the Greeks. 4 Poseiddn 
 (Neptune), the god of the ocean. s read with pleasure. 
 
 (1. Why is 67)^0.$ jrroperispomenon ? 3. Why is the accent on the 
 final syllable of ? 5. What is the quantity of the final syllable 
 
 of vuiuvu ?) 
 
 1. Avoid (sing.) tlie wild-beast l 2. Wash your 
 (=the) hands I 3. Keep-from ( sing .) wasps! 4. The 
 meadow blooms. 5 . Soldiers delight-in war-songs. 
 6. War-songs are sung by 1 the soldiers. 7. We de- 
 light-in beautiful meadows. 8. Avoid (sing.) noxious 2 
 wasps I 9. Many are friends of the wine-cup. 10. 
 Poets pray-to Poseidon. 
 
 1 uno, with Gen. 2 xxzog. 
 
 § 35. II. Tlie Nominative lengthens the final Vowel of 
 the Root r c or o, into n or w. 
 
 According to §. 32,2, roots in vt must drop r in the 
 Norn*; e. g. Xiivv, instead of Xitnvr. 
 
 
 o. Shepherd. 
 
 o, »5, Divinity. 
 
 l, Lion. 
 
 o. Air. 
 
 o, Orator. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 TOlfAYIV 
 
 TraifAWf 
 
 Xtcov 
 
 aUr^ 
 
 
 G. 
 
 vro//xtv-os 
 
 5 x'i(A0V-0$ 
 
 Xtovr-os- 
 
 ai6tt>-os 
 
 pvrog-os | 
 
 D. 
 
 xrotfAiv-i 
 
 £ xifAOV-l 
 
 XiovT-i 
 
 a\6i(pt- 
 
 p7rog-i i 
 
 A. 
 
 TTOlfAZV-U 
 
 £ ccifAov-a. 
 
 Xtovr-u 
 
 u’dtp-ot 
 
 pvrog-et 
 
 Y. 
 
 <roi[Arii> 
 
 %ulfAOV 
 
 XiOt 
 
 ul07l(> 
 
 p7<ro(> 
 
 P.N. 
 
 VTOtfAiV-if 
 
 Hxl/xov-ts 
 
 Xtovr-ts 
 
 aUig ■ St 
 
 pnrop-ts 
 
 G. 
 
 vroi/Atv-ui 
 
 2 'ra.ifAov-vv 
 
 Xtovr-cav 
 
 uWifpon 
 
 pr,ro(>-coi 
 
 D. 
 
 <ro4(Ai-tri(y)* 
 
 ^atfA0-<ri{v)* 
 
 Xiovut(v)* 
 
 
 priro£-ffi{t) 
 
 A. 
 
 9Totju,'iv-as 
 
 ^xlptov-as 
 
 XiovT-as 
 
 all! ip-us 
 
 pnrop-us 
 
 V. 
 
 vrotfAtv-if. 
 
 ^x/fiov-ss 
 
 XiOVTSS 
 
 
 p7ro%-ts 
 
 Dual. 
 
 KOlfAiV-i 
 
 dat/wov-t 
 
 Xiovr-t 
 
 aitJsg* i 
 
 pwro/3-i 
 
 
 9TOlfAiV-OtV 
 
 $XlfA0V-tl9 
 
 Xtovr-oiv 
 
 Ul0t(>-Ol9 
 
 pVTOg-Odf 
 
 * Instead of xiovru. See § 8, 8* 
 
52 THIRD DECL.-ADJECTIVES IN -wv & - l(t)V . [ChAP. IV. 
 
 Obs. 1. Oxytone Substantives of this class retain in the Voc. the 
 long vowel («, &>) ; e. g. Z -roipnv. The Voc. bxig from bang, bro- 
 ther-in-law, is an exception ; its accentuation is also irregular [ § 33, 
 III. (a)]. The same irregularity of accent occurs in the Voc. of 
 'Afitp'iuv, -tovos, 'Ayxptpvaiv, -ovos, viz. " Ap(ptov, ’Aya.fAtp.voit. (Comp. 
 
 § 34, Obs. 1). 
 
 Obs. 2. ‘H x*ky hand, Gen. x i T^y & c *» has Dat. Dl. an( * 
 
 Dual Xtg<r/(v) and x l e,°~n. 
 
 Obs. 3. The following Substantives in -«*, Gen. -ovos, drop the » 
 in some of the Cases, and suffer contraction : h ilx.Zv, image, Gen. 
 uxovos and iix,oui, Dat. thcbvi, Acc. tlxova and ti»Z, Acc. PI. tlxbvxs 
 and ilxovs; h xfbuv, nightingale, Gen. at)bbvos and xVbovs, Dat. aVboi; 
 7 i %aibur, swallow, Gen. x (Xl ^tw, Dat. —(Remark the irre¬ 
 
 gular accentuation of tlxu and tbcous). 
 
 Obs. 4. To this class belong : (a) The two Adjectives o, fi x-rxrug, rb 
 iorarog, fatherless , and xp-brug, xptjrog, motherless, Gen. -egos ;— (b) The 
 Adjective o , *> appnv, ro appt*, male, Gen. Zpp£vo$ ;—(c) Adjectives in 
 -«» (Masc. and Fern.), -ov (Neut ) ; e. g. o, bj tvbxgxuv, rb tllbxipo*, 
 fortunate; and Comparatives in -uv, -ov, or -lav, -lev. These Compa¬ 
 ratives after dropping v are contracted in the Acc. Sing, and in the 
 Nom. Acc. and Voc. PI. In the Vocative their accentuation is in¬ 
 regular, [see § 33. III. (a)], with the exception of compound Adjec¬ 
 tives in -<pguv ; e. g. *^a-T£j4^®v, Voc. xgxngbipgov. 
 
 • 
 
 Adjectives in -uv. 
 
 Comparatives 
 
 in-uov and -an. 
 
 
 Fortunate. 
 
 More-hostile. 
 
 Greater. 
 
 
 mfl. n. 
 
 iuoxipuv tuoxipov 
 
 m.f ,, n . 
 
 m.f. n. 
 
 S. 1ST. 
 
 IxOiMV £%01ov 
 
 ptiZ,uv pii^ov 
 
 G. 
 
 tubxipovos 
 
 ivba.ip.ovi. 
 
 tx^ovos 
 
 pcii^ovos 
 
 D. 
 
 tX^IOVi 
 
 pei^ovt 
 
 A. 
 
 iuba.ip.ova lubaipov 
 
 ( tW/ov* „ . 
 
 ] > O' 
 
 ( tx 6iu 
 
 V / uuZova ~- 
 
 i n ,y pufyv 
 
 [ puQu r 
 
 V. 
 
 ivbxtpov 
 
 iX<hov 
 
 puZ,ov 
 
 P.N. 
 
 tvbxlpovts ibbaipovx 
 
 tlbatpbvuv 
 
 ( ’ixMov's ( ixViova 
 ( ix^ioui 1 ix^M 
 
 ipuZ.ovis. (pa^ova 
 (jpuH^pus \piiZ > at 
 
 G. 
 
 tX^bvuv 
 
 1 xVtoffi(v) 
 
 pifo'vuv | 
 
 D. 
 
 tvba'ipom(v) 
 
 pii^omf) j 
 
 A. 
 
 tvbxipovxs tubatpova 
 
 C %xVtovxs { ix^iovx 
 
 \ tx e ' i0t> s ( >l X 6ia 
 
 i pi\X,OVXi ^ pil^ova 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 l ptt/^OUS lpiit,0) 
 
 V. 
 
 like theNominative. 
 
 like theNominative. 
 
 like theNominative. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 tvba'ipovi 
 
 \xQiovt 
 
 ix^ovoi* 
 
 ptlH^OVt 
 
 
 tubxipbvaiv 
 
 4 
 
 XII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 "Ayai, very, too-much. u,\Hg, -tgos, b, ft, (aether), sky, 
 
 iyiXn,-w, n, herd, flock. heaven, air. 
 
 Zbixos,-ov, unjust, wicked. &nu (Gen.), without. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 53 
 
 § 35 .] 
 
 •yigav, -evros, 0, old-man. 
 
 Sxifceuv, -oviSf < 5 , a divinity, the 
 Deity. 
 
 $y,ftos, -ov, S, (plebs ), the.people, 
 the mob, the multitude. 
 
 «y, well ; jy 5 rgKrra, 1 do- 1 
 well , i. e. Jdre-zcell. 
 viytfiuv, -ovas, a, leader. 
 xoXcctrrris, -ov, a, punisher . 
 
 Xipriv, -ivos, 0, harbour. 
 holIm, I dwell , inhabit. 
 
 *Soi, -ov, 9 5 , road, way, journey : 
 (odov six# = / give-place to). 
 
 ekfiios, -ov, (but more commonly 
 -os, -a, -ov), happy, prosperous. 
 ifoifjLriv, -tws, 0, shepherd. 
 
 *vr(>tirru, I do, act J (xaxug or^nT-> 
 <ru = Ifare badly). 
 
 ■ow<p£ot v, -ov, of-sound-mind, pru¬ 
 dent, temperate. 
 
 vni^uv,-ov, high-minded, haugh¬ 
 ty, proud. 
 
 <p^v, -mV, b, pi. tpgzvBs, the under¬ 
 standing, the mind. 
 
 .^oXccttoj, 1 guard, watch, Tceep, 
 protect. 
 
 1. Tov ylpovra QepuTTEVE. 2. Sl|3ou rovg ^aigovag- 
 
 3. 01 TroigivEg rag ayiXag (pvXaTTovaiv. 4. Tov Ka- 
 icov (frtvyz , wg kqkov Xigiva. 5. "Avev Sa'igovog 1 6 av~ 
 0pio7rog ovk 6X(3iog ianv. 6. 'O Otbgjsv alQepi 2 vaui. 
 7. "Aft \a\ziral gipigvai TEipovcn rag rwv avOpcoiroiv 
 <j>ptvag. 8. w E7rou ayaQolg j^yEpocnv. 9. EIke, a> vfa- 
 via , roTc yspovai Trig b(5ov. 10. rioAAtmc Srgiog rjyE- 
 juova 3 adiKOv vovv. 11. O Otbg tcoXaarrig iari 
 Tibv ayav VTrepcppovwv. 12. V E^£ vovv owefipova. 13. 
 
 Saf/uLOv, Trapeze rotg yIpovcn jueyaXriv evru^utv. 14. 
 Ji OrjpevTai rovg Xeo vrag iveSpEvovcnv. 
 
 1 without (the help of) the Deity. 2 is properly the upper, 
 dearer air, as opposed to the lower , denser atmosphere. 3 vovv 
 and rryipivot, are in apposition. 
 
 1. Reverence (pi.) old-men! 2. Worship (pi.) the 
 Deity! 3. The flocks are watched by the shepherd. 
 
 4. Follow (sing.) a good Trader 1 ! 5. Young-man, 
 
 give place to 2 the old-man 1 ! 6. The multitude often 
 
 follows had leaders. 1 7. The mind 3 of man is worn- 
 out by troublesome cares. 1 8. Keep-from ,(sing.) the 
 bad man as from a bad harbour:! 9. The flocks fol¬ 
 low the shepherds. 10. O gods, protect the good 
 old-men! 
 
 * uxi nrrti ohov. 8 <Q$.vi f. 
 
 1 Dative; 
 
54 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IY. • 
 
 § 36. To the preceding Paradigms belong the 
 following Substantives in -?jp; 6 nariip, father, ri gri‘ 
 rrjp, mother, h Ovyarrjp, daughter , r\ yaarx\g, belly, h 
 Ar}fir]Trig f Demeter (Ceres), and 6 dvrjp> man. They 
 differ from them, however, in dropping £ in the Gen. 
 and Dat. Sing., and in the Bat. PL, and in inserting 
 an a (with the acute accent) in the Dat PL before 
 the ending -at, so as to soften the pronunciation. 
 The word dvrjp (Root dy£p) drops e in all the Cases 
 and Numbers,’ except in the Yoc. Sing., but inserts a 
 S to soften the pronunciation. 
 
 Syncopated* Nouns in -r\g. 
 
 
 o. Father. 
 
 v>, Mother. 
 
 af. Daughter. 
 
 o, Man. 
 
 Sing. K 
 G. 
 D- 
 A. 
 
 y. 
 
 crxrijg 
 
 Txrg-os 
 
 wurg-t 
 
 •rxng-x 
 
 Tccrig 
 
 pnrng 
 
 pnrgof 
 
 pnrgt 
 
 prir'iQX 
 
 print) 
 
 &i/yxrt)p 
 
 £vyx?£os 
 
 Gvyxrpi 
 
 6vyxn^x 
 
 6uyxrt(> 
 
 UV-^-gOS 
 
 a.v-'h-g'i 
 
 oiv-C-ox 
 
 ang 
 
 Plnr. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 <7TXn^-l5 
 
 TXTig-WV 
 
 xrxr^-x-<ri{y 
 <r xrig-xs 
 "ffxng-tZ 
 
 prints 
 
 prinfiMV 
 ) pmt>XrTl(v) 
 pnngxt 
 pnnt)i$ 
 
 dvyxngts 
 
 (hiyxngevv 
 
 8vyxrQx<rt{y) 
 
 6vyxn^xt 
 
 th/yxngig 
 
 OtV-2-()Sf j 
 
 a.v-'b-QMV 
 xv-^-t>Mri(v) 
 xv-^-gxg 
 
 o#-S-£S£ 
 
 Dual. ] 
 
 TXTi^-S 
 
 irxng-oi* 
 
 pnn^t 
 
 pyjrlgaw 
 
 fluyxTLoi 
 
 thyxnptiv 
 
 av-d-gs 
 
 CCV-^’^OtV. 
 
 Observe the peculiarity of the accentuation. 
 
 (a) The Cases which drop the £ are all oxytone. — 
 
 (b) In the Vocative Singular the accent is thrown 
 as far bach as possible.—(c) The Cases which keep the 
 £, and the Dat. Pl., are paroxytone. 
 
 Obs. *0 uirri £, -££sf, star, "has Dat. PI. i<rrt>x<rt ; it is not synco¬ 
 pated, however, in any ether Case. 'H a np-qrvg has the following 
 Declension,—A q pnr £05, Ail p n r^i, A^ p n r ^ a, A Yi pvr i £. 
 
 * Syncope (<rvyxo*fi) is (he striking out of one or more letters in z 
 
 word. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 55 
 
 § 3G-] 
 
 XIIL VOCABULARY. 
 
 r A 6\oi, -ov, to, prize, reward. <ro<pJs, -»?, -o», wise, 
 
 yatrrrig, -tp'os, h, belly. crr'igyu, I love, am-contented- 
 
 iouXtvu, (Pat.), I am-aslave-to, with, 
 serve. (Pat.), I gratify, com - 
 
 I hate. pliment, favour. 
 
 Instead of “ many beautiful temples,” we say 
 in Greek u many and beautiful temples.” 
 
 1. Srepyers rov rrarlpa k ai rrjv pyripa. 2. Mu $ov- 
 A Eve yacrrpf . 1 3. Xaips, w (p'iXs vsavia, rip ayaOaj 7ra- 
 
 vpl 2 kcu rig ayaOy /urjrpt. 4. My kqkm gvv avSpl j3ou- 
 Xevov. 3 5. Ty Ariprjrpt 4 iroXXol teal KaXol vt-ig rjaav 
 
 6 . 'H ayaOy Ovyaryp y^tiog ndOtrca ry (P'iXy pyrpi. 
 
 7. O l ayadol avSpig Oavpd^ovrat. 8 . IloAAaiac 
 dyadov tt arpog yiyverat Kaitog vldg. 9 . ? E\0aipw rov 
 tcaicov avSpa. 10. Totg ayaOotg dvdpdai peyaXy §d^a 
 G7TSTcti. 11. 'H rrjg Aypyrptrg 5 Ovyaryp yv D Gp<7t(p6vy. b 
 12. ’12 (pi'Xr) Ovyarsp, arZpye rrjv \ayripa. 13. 'H dptry 
 KaXov dOXov iariv dvSpl 7 <ro<pijj. 14. Ol ay ado 1 viol 
 rag pyripag arrlpyovaiv. 15. Ot "EAXrjvcc Aypyrpa 
 crlfiovrai. 16. YldOsade, io QtXoi veavfat , rote warpaai 
 Kai raiig pyrpdinv* 17. Xapt^ou, a> Trdrep^y dvyarpi. 
 
 *§ 161, 2. (a). 2 §161, 2. (c)., 3 consult not with. 4 to D6- 
 
 mdter were=Demiter had. § 161, 2. (d). 6 1) erne ter, Lat. Ceres , 
 
 goddess of agriculture and rustic life. 6 Persephone, Lat. Proser¬ 
 pina , wife of Hades (Pluto), and queen of the lower world. 
 *§ 161, 5. 
 
 1. Youths, love your (=the) fathers and mothers! 
 2. Consult (sing.) not with 1 bad men! 3. Good 
 daughters gladly follow their (=the) mothers. 4. 
 We admire a good man. 5. Obey, O dear youth, 
 your (=the) father and mother! 6. Gratify, dear 
 father, your (=the) good son! 7. Pray (pi.) to De* 
 meter! 8. Strive, O son, after the reputation 2 of thy 
 (=the) father ! 9. Virtue is the reward of wise 
 men. 3 
 
 I * 
 
 CV P # 
 
 2 
 
 3 Dative. 
 
56 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chat. IV. 
 
 § 37. The Nominative appends Q to the Hoot 
 
 (a) The Root ends in a B- or K- mute—(j3, 7 r, <j> 
 7 , 77 , k, x)- ® n ^ ie union of these with a so as to 
 xp and see § 8, 7. 
 
 form 
 
 Sing. NT. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 57, Storm. 
 
 XotlXuip 
 
 XxiXa.<je-os 
 
 XotiXetv-i 
 
 XxiXxor-eo 
 
 XxTXet’)/ 
 
 0, Raven. 
 
 xo^a.% 
 
 xo^dx-os 
 
 xoqoLx-i 
 
 xdf>a.x-Ct 
 
 e, Throat. 
 
 Xx£uy% 
 
 Xxgvyy-Dt 
 
 Xxgvyy-t i 
 
 Xxgvyy-ot 
 
 Xcoguyt- 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Xx'iXoLtT-is 
 
 XoctXaT-av 
 
 XxiXdi-)/i(y)* 
 
 Xa'iXavr-as 
 
 Xot'tXu.TT-BS 
 
 xs^oix-ts 
 
 Xo^xx-av 
 
 xo(>x'qi(v)* 
 
 xogxx-xS 
 
 xogax-ts 
 
 Xxgvyy-ts 
 Xxgvyy-av >> 
 
 Xx^vy^t(v)* | 
 
 Xxgvyy-xs 
 Xot^vyy-is 
 
 1 Dual. 
 
 XaiXaT-e 
 
 XacXS.Tr-oiv 
 
 XO^XX-l 
 
 xogxx-oiv 
 
 Xxguyy-s 
 Xxguyy-oiv. > 
 
 Obs. To this olass belong Adjectives in -\ (Gen. -yos, -xas, -x»t)v 
 and -•v/' (Gen. ; e. g. i, k &^rS.\, Gen. -a. yos, (rapax), ravenous , 
 i, n IX&n Gen. -'lx os, (aequalis), of-the-same-age, a, % pui»v^, Gen. -vx°s, 
 (solipes) j 0 , w ulylxi^, Gen. -lotos, high. 
 
 XIV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ’ Ayav, o, fight, contest, 
 
 aft,, * y <0 i n, goat. 
 aXixrgvdv, -ovos, o, v, COck. 
 
 £$, (autem), and, bid. 
 ixotvvw, I drive, push-on. 
 twos, -ov, 0, horse, 
 xui —*«/, both — and, as well — as. 
 xaXa£, -axos ,«, flatterer. 
 
 -a.xos, 0, crow, raven. 
 k,^uZ,u), I croak, 
 fjodiffrl^,, -lyos, v, scourge , whip. 
 fjt.ii — indeed — but. (They are 
 used in antitheses: the ph is, 
 generally, not translated in 
 English. Neither of them 
 
 can be the first word of a sen¬ 
 tence or clause). 
 
 -nxos, o, ant. 
 egm?, -vyos, 0, quail. 
 
 ■hpxnSpos, -ov, 0, dance. 
 d-4/, ottos, f], voice. 
 croXvsro-vos, -ov, laborious, toilsome. 
 *rv£ty\, -lyyos , flute, pipe. 
 
 rirriZ, - lyos, o, (Lat. cicada), 
 tree-grasshopper. 
 
 (piva.\, -dLxos, 0 , quack, impostor. 
 <p'oofj.iy\, -lyyos, », lyre, harp. 
 
 -Us, r„ (=*o/5«), song. 
 u$, anas, vi,Jace, countenance. 
 
 • Instead of XalXxsr-fft[v), xd^ax-tn[ v), Xeigvyy-rj^v), 
 
 sJ4 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 57 
 
 ,§ 38.] 
 
 1. Ot KopaKeg KpuiZovatv. 2. Touc k oXaKag fevye. 
 3. 'Aire^ov rou (pevaKog. 1 4. Ot avQp(t)7roi repirovraL 
 tfioppiyyi 2 kol op\ijOp(p Kai <o£y. 5. Ot t7T7rot paan- 
 
 %iv 3 ZXavvovrai. 6. At (froppLyysg rovg tCjv avOpufTranr 
 Ovpovg ripirovaiv. 7. Tern % pev rerriyi 4 <piXog icrr'i, 
 fjtvppriKt Se pvpprj^. 4 8. Ot iroipeveg 7rpoc rag avpiy- 
 yag q.8ovcrcv. 9 . Ilapa to ig ’ A9r}va(oig 5 ko .1 oprvycov 
 Kai aXeKTpvovujv ayioveg rj(rav 6 io. o£ TTOT/xeveg rug 
 rwv alywv ayeXag elg rovg Xeipwvag eXavvovcnv. 11. 
 Mvp/utjKatv Kai oprvyajv (3log rroXvirovog tarty. 12. 
 TIoXAot ayaOriv pev (Lira, Kaicriv Se oira e^ovcnv. 
 
 1 § 157. * 161, 2. (c). 3 161, 3. A Antithetical words are placed 
 near each other. * amongst the Athenians. 6 there were. 
 
 1. The raven croaks. 2. Avoid (sing.) the flatterer! 
 3. Keep-from (pi.) quacks! 4. Men amuse-themselves 
 with the lyre. 5. The horse is driven with the 
 whip. 6 . The shepherd sings to the pipe. 7. The 
 life of the ant and the quail is toilsome. 8 . The shep¬ 
 herd watches the goats. 9. Pipes delight shepherds. 
 
 § 38. (b) The Root ends in a T-mute—(S, r, kt, 
 0, vO). The T-mute is dropped before a (§ 8, 7.). 
 On the Acc. Sing, in - a and -v, see § 32, 3. 
 
 ■S.N. 
 
 Gc. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 », Torch. 7i, 
 
 XctftTbcg* 
 
 XecpTa.'S-og 
 
 Xa.p'ra^-4 
 
 Xxpvxb-x 
 
 Xoc.p<7ra.s 
 
 Helmet, b, 
 
 xb(>vg* 
 
 Ko^uS-ag 
 
 xo^ud-i 
 
 XegVV 
 
 xb^vg 
 
 ft, Bird. 
 
 o/)vig* 
 
 o(>vtt)-og 
 
 C^Vid't 
 
 OgVIV 
 
 o. King. 
 
 &vx\* 
 ctvaxr-eg 
 civet xr*t 
 civaxr-a 
 aval' 
 
 7i, Worm. 
 
 tXftivg* 
 
 iXptv6-eg 
 
 iXpiv6-i 
 
 tXpivd-x 
 
 iXpivg 
 
 T\N. 
 
 Xxperx'S-sg 
 
 Xo(>v6-tg 
 
 opvid-ig 
 
 avotxr-tg 
 
 iXptvS-tg 
 
 \Xpivd-uv 
 
 6. 
 
 Xaperdb-uv 
 
 Xetju,<rot-<r/[v)* 
 
 Xoguti-eov 
 
 5 M 
 ogvi0-6t>y 
 
 otvxxr-av 
 
 B. 
 
 Kb/?w<ri(v)* 
 
 0£v/-<7v(v)* 
 
 **«&(*)* 
 
 tXpi-tn(v)* 
 
 A. 
 
 X.u[Atrccb-ag 
 
 xb(>v6-ag 
 
 b'gvi 0-osg 
 
 ctvetxr-ag 
 
 tXpiv0-oeg 
 
 V. 
 
 XotpTa.1)-tg 
 
 x'ogvd-tg 
 
 pgn6-ig 
 
 avxxr-tg 
 
 lXpiv6 -ig 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Xa.p-7rcll}-t 
 
 Xupwotb-oiv 
 
 XOftuQ-i 
 
 xo^vd-nv 
 
 cpyt6-i 
 
 o(>vld-on 
 
 civxxr-t 
 
 xv xxr-oiv 
 
 iXptvQ-i 
 \Xp\v6- civ. 
 
 * Instead of rochg, xbfvdg, fyvidg, uvctxTg t t\piv3s i Bat. -EL 
 Xotpxi'bat, &C. , 
 
58 THIRD DECLENSION. [CHAP. IV. 
 
 Obs. 1. The word «, b xa7e, child, Gen. irttihos, has -era? in the 
 Vocative. 
 
 Obs. 2 . To this class belong Adjectives in -<? and -*, Gen. -thoe, 
 -Xros', e. g. o, b tu%a.(>is, to Gen. -troe, pleasing ; those in -as, 
 
 Gen. ■■(£&*? ; e. g. <5, b <pvy«e, Gen. -oihoe, fugitive ; those in -ve, Gen, 
 -vroe ; e. g. o, b igyne, Gen. -bra, white ; those in -o>e, Gen. -uroe ; 
 e. g. o, b hyvue, Gen. -uroe, unknown ; those in -/?, Gen. -thoe ; e. g, 
 o, « a>aX*<s, Gen. -<5os, weak, b orargie (yi i understood), Gen. -ihos, 
 native-land ; those in -ps, Gen. Shoe ; e. g. o, * viv^ve, Gen. -pSos, 
 newly-come. 
 
 KV. VOCABULARY, 
 
 *A <raXka.rru, >: (Acc. of person, 
 Gen. of thing), I free-from. 
 &xa<ra, -tie, (Fem. Adj.), every, 
 all. 
 
 ytXeoe, -aroe, o, laughter, 
 iyugu, I awaken, arouse. 
 
 Ikxie, -iho.e, b, hope, 
 hiyugoo, I excite, arouse, 
 tgie, Shoe, b, contention, strife. 
 if>u»e, -airoe, o, love, 
 xaxorve, -vrae, n, wickedness, 
 vice, baseness. 
 
 Kciru-xguorra), I hide, conceal. 
 xoXafeo, I punish. 
 xouQoe, -v, *ot', light, vain. 
 fcaKx^u, I deem-happy. 
 
 vioirne, -vrae, »f,(juventus), youth. 
 vv\, wxroe, b, night; ( yvxroe, by 
 nigkt). 
 
 ofooiorve, -vroe, b, likeness, simi¬ 
 larity. 
 
 vrade, xonVos, o, b, child, boy, ser¬ 
 vant. 
 
 xhvs, -vroe, o, b, poor. 
 x\ovffioe, -*a, -lov, rich, wealthy. 
 vrXovroe, o, riches, wealth. 
 <pi&o% / (iv{M<rv'tv, -ve, b, avarice. 
 
 <pgovrie, Shoe, b, care, concern, 
 xdgte, -iroe, b, grace, favour, 
 kindness, gratitude, elegance. 
 Xgvfffjoarmv, -ve, v, need, poverty. 
 
 1. 01 opviQeg aSovaiv. 2. Xapig X**P lv tiktei, tpig 
 tpiv. 3. Maic ap'iZoptv 1 rrjv vtorifiTa. 4. Xpr)<Tfioovvri 
 riKTEL tptSag. 5. TlAoviTtOf 7roWa.KLQ rijv icafcorr/ra 
 7 rAovrip KaTaKpvirrovaLv. 6. ’ Q, icaAs iral 2 , tv TTparre 
 rovg eLv0pu)7TOUQ' 7. 'H <j)L\oxpx)HO<Jvvr) fifirrip koko- 
 rrjrog andaigg tariv. 3, Ql TrtinjTtg ttoAA aicig tlcriv tv- 
 SalpouEg, 9. H (ro(f>ta tv roig tiuv dv6pu>TT(*>v Ou/aolg 
 Oav)ua&rovg riov koAiov 3 tpwrag ivtytfpti. 10. f O Qd- 
 vcltoq rovg av9pu)7rovg ppovriSwv aTraWaTTSt. 11. f H 
 < piAia Si’ Q/JLOiOTrjTog yiyvtrai. 12. Qlvog tytipti ytAwra 
 13. ’Ev vvicfi fiovAr) roig cropoig yiy vstcu. 14. Ot <ro* 
 pot KoAaZovm rrjv icaicorqra. 15- Oi au@pw 7 roi 7 roX- 
 XaKig Kovpaig IAtticti Ttpirovrui. 
 
 x we deem-happy. * See Obs. 1 . 3 of the beautiful, (lit. of beau¬ 
 tiful things). 
 
 ( 8. Why does *hiv retain its accent ty 
 
§ 39.] THIRD DECLENSION.—NEUTERS. 59 
 
 1. The bird sings. 2. From favour springs fa¬ 
 vour ; from strife strife. 3. By wisdom 1 a wonder¬ 
 ful love 2 of the beautiful 2 is excited in the minds of 
 men. 4. By the song 1 of birds we are delighted. 
 5. Wine frees men from cares. 6. Boy, shun 
 wickedness! 7. From similarity 1 springs friendship. 
 
 8 . We are-delighted-with birds. 
 
 1 Dative. 2 PIuraL 
 
 § 39. The Roots of Neuters belonging to this class 
 end in r, and sometimes in kt, (e. g. yaXaKr). But 
 as the laws of euphony admit neither k nor kt at the 
 end of a wordJ, r and kt are either omitted , or r ic 
 changed into <r. (Comp. § 32, 2.). In the words, to 
 yovv, knee , and to 3opu, spear , (from the Roots 'yoi'ar 
 and Sopar), a, the vowel of the Root, is changed into 
 v in the Nominative. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 -ro, Body, to. Knee, to, Milk, to, Wonder. to, Ear. 1 
 
 tTufAa yovv yxXx r'i^xg ot/jf ?! 
 
 xuftxr-og yovxr-es yxXxxr-oc ri^xr-o; ur-og 
 
 eufjutr-t yovxr-4 yxXxxr-.t rsgxr-i ■ur-i 
 
 trupx ydvu yxXx ts gxg ovg 
 
 r.N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 xupxr-x ydvxr-x yxXxxr-x ri^xr-x ur-x 
 
 eupxr-m yttar-uv yxXxxr-uv rtgxr-uv ur-uv 
 
 ffufcx-xi(v)* yovx-ffi^v)* yxXx\i{y)* fs-i^x~ffi{v)* u-<ri(y)* 
 
 cufixT-x yovx-T-x yxXxxr-x r'sgxr-x ur-x 
 
 j Dual. 
 
 truft.xr-i ydvxr-i yxXxxr-t rigxr-t ur-t 
 
 euftxr-oiv yovxr-oa yxXxxr-oiv n^xr-oiv ur-otv* 
 
 * Instead of yovxrw, yxXxarxt,, &e. See § 8, 7. 
 
 t Instead of Zf. 
 
 t Every genuine Greek word ends either in a vowel, or>», <r. 
 
 The only exceptions are t* and olx, and these never end a clause. 
 Words which end in £ or ^ are to he considered as really ending 
 
 in r. 
 
560 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.—NEUTERS. [CHAP. IV, 
 
 XVT. VOCABULARY. 
 
 'Aftugriifia, -arts, to, error, sin, 
 offence. 
 
 &*-ro/u,ai,((Gce n.), I touch, attach- 
 myself,to, take-hold-of affect, 
 (hitffrx^oo, / hear, carry. 
 
 t, -i xto;, to, aid, help. 
 yoiXoi, ~ecx to;, to, milk. 
 
 •ytvoftxi, (Gen.), I taste, enjoy, 
 yvftvx^at, I exercise, practise. 
 ^ixftiifZo/xxi, I exchange. 
 
 'iio£v, Vo^xrts, to, spear. 
 
 16iZ,u, f accustom, 
 ivtxx, (Gen.), causa, for-tlie-sake- 
 of, on-account-of. § 24. 
 h^xonlx, -a;, *, care, attendance, 
 service. 
 
 -urns, o, sweat. 
 
 Wit*;, -ov, o, suppliant, 
 ftlxfo;, -a, -ov, small, little. 
 p.v 0 o;, -ov, e, speech , word, story. 
 
 9roixiXo;, -*, -tv, various, varie¬ 
 gated. 
 
 ■vrqxypa, -xto;, to, thing , deed, 
 business, action. 
 
 P*,ux,~xto;, to. ivord, saying. 
 
 crorivbeo, I pour-a-drink-offering, 
 pour-out. (Hence, fAvhoptit 
 tivi=I make-a-treaty with any 
 one ; libations of wine usually 
 preceding the conclusion of 
 a treaty). 
 
 ■rxvToXoyix, x;, fi, tautology, re¬ 
 petition. 
 
 <pxuXo;, -y,-ov, 'bcid, wicked, worth¬ 
 less. 
 
 X&f* a > ‘ztos, to, thing; (PI., 
 property, money, riches.) 
 
 Xe*<TTo;, -jj, -ov, useful, good, 
 brave. 
 
 ■Xu^urpi;, -cv, o, separation. 
 
 Ev ^aXbnojg 7 rpayjiacnv oXiyoi srcupoi 7 r/<rrot 
 €imv. 2. Trig aperiig 7 tXovtov ov Sta/uEi/3b/us0a to~iq 
 X ptipaaiv. 1 3. O i hcirai tCjv yovarwv 2 airrovrai. 4. 
 O Oavarog fort ■\tooLap.bg Trig \pv\rig k at tov aiLparog. 
 3. r O TrXovrog 7 rapt^a rote avOpcoTroig 3 TroiKiXa fiori- 
 Orpiara. 6. Myj ttelOov kcucojv ctvOpojTroov .pxijuacriv.^ 
 7. My) SovXeve, to 7rat, rrj row aojpaTog deoairely. 8. Ol 
 * EXXqvtg rcug NvfMpaig 1 * KpcrnjpagydXaicrog (nrivSovoiv. 
 
 9. ’ / E0t£e k at yv/uva^e to adofjia avv ttovoiq k at <l$pioTi. 
 
 10. Ol aSoXsrrxai rdpovm ra wra Tmg ravToXoyiaig. 6 
 
 11- 'Vvxvv WiZe, a> 7raT, 7rpoe ra ^prjora TTpayparu. 
 12. Ol (pavXoi javdoi <ru)<v h)TU)V 2 ovx cnrrovrai. 13. 
 Tote dnrtv 6 aKOvo/uEv. 14. My) ExOaipe (pfXov /aiicpov 
 upapTriparog evekci • 15. Ptvou, 10 Trat, tov yciXciKTog •* 
 
 16. Ol (TTpaTUorai Sopara (daora^oucriv. 
 
 1 for riches. Tile instrument of exchange is put in the Dative ; 
 though, more commonly in the Genitive without a Prep., or with the 
 Prep. xvti. 2 § 158, 3. (b). 3 § 161, 5. 4 § 161, 2. (a). * to the 
 
 Nymphs, i.e. m their worship. 6 § 161, 3. ‘ 7 § 15S, 5. (a). 
 
 1. In a hard thing there are few faithful friends. 
 2. Young-men, exercise jour (=the) bodj with toil 4 
 
THIRD DECLENSION.—NEUTERS. 
 
 61 
 
 §39-3 
 
 and sweat! 3. Boy-, strive-after noble deeds] 4. 
 Many men delight-in money. 2 5. From a noble deed 
 springs fame. 6. We admire noble deeds. 7. Boys 
 taste milk with-pleasure. 8. Soldiers fight with 
 spears 2 . 
 
 1 Plural. * Dat. Plural. 
 
 Obs. To rl^as, prodigy, usually admits contraction in the Plural, 
 after r is dropped; e. g. r'^a, n^av. To yi^as, reward , to yngxs, 
 old age , ro xpas, flesh, and to xioxs, horn, drop the r in all the num¬ 
 bers, and then suffer contraction in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and 
 throughout the Dual and Pi., except the Dat. PI. Besides these 
 forms, however, xi^x? has also the regular forms with r. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 ro Kt/Jtzs ro xp&xs 
 
 xtgxr-os and (xi^a-o;') xsgajs (xpx-os) xpeog 
 
 xigar-t and (xtgx-i) xi^x [xflx-7) xpia 
 
 xi^as (xgias) 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 xi^xr-x and (xiox-x) xi^x (xpza-x) xflx 
 
 xigar-av and (xigx-eov) xz^oov (x^ea-oov) xoiuv 
 
 xioa-trily) xozx-nf) 
 
 xsgxr-x and (xsgx-a) x4gx (xpsx-x) xflx 
 
 Dual. 
 
 xtgxr-s and (xi(>n t-s) xz^x [xpzx-z xpzx * 
 
 xi^ar-ov) and (xt^d-otv) xigeuv [x^ia-oiv) x^imv. 
 
 XVII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ’Av^s/ot, -as, * 1 , manliness, valour, 
 y'i^as, ro, reward , honorary-gift, 
 yr^as, ro, old-age. 
 
 'htar^otyri, -ns, n, nourishment. 
 IvtrxoXos, -ov, difficult, annoying. 
 
 troublesome. 
 tXuQos, - ov, o, n,deer. 
 tin%ia, (tJ, ix u )i good-condition, 
 sound-health. 
 
 itpixtoi, -oil, re, foundation. 
 ttifosf, to', horn. 
 
 xfias, {-iaas —) -toes, ro, flesh, 
 meat. 
 
 TBfX'ro), I send. 
 vrfl&cZrov, -ov, ro, a sheep, 
 srgo-rflora, I turn-any-one-to, in¬ 
 duce, incite. 
 
 -tyyos, *j, trumpet, 
 cnpatvoo, 1 give-a-sign or signal, 
 hint, indicate . 
 
 virx£%u, I am-at-hand, am, am- 
 for, serve-as, beiong-to. 
 <p«opaxov, -ov, ro, drug, remedy. 
 
 1. Ot Qtoi rote avOpuyiraig repo. Tri/unrovcnv. 2. Tu>w 
 Iv y rjper Katcdjv (frappa kov 6 Oavarog lanv. 3. Ta yiptz 
 rovg orpaTitbrag Pig dvSptfav irporptirti. 1 4. atyow 
 *tu 7rpoj3ara>i/ ydXa koI Kpia irobg Siarpofixiv vircipx^i^ 
 
62 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IV. 
 
 5. Ktpacrt kcu traXTriy^tv 3 oi arpanutTm amfiaivovmv. 
 
 6. DoffctAwi^ k pziov* yevogtOa. 7. KaAou yijpcog Oe/az- 
 
 \lOV EV 7Tai(TLV EGTIV T\ TOV (TlOflClTOQ £VE%,lei, 8. A l 
 
 tXa(j>OL KEpa EXOV(Uv. 9. AvgKoXog 6 Iv yvpq fiiog. 5 
 
 1 see Rule, § 28. 2 <r^os=serve for . 3 § 161, 3. 4 § 158, 
 
 5. (a). *s ©*<vi is often omitted, as here. 
 
 1. Prodigies are sent to men 1 by 2 the gods. 2. 
 Death dissolves the evils of old-age. 3 3. Soldiers 
 are incited to valour by rewards. 1 4. Young-man, 
 rejoice-at the reward! 5. We admire the beautiful 
 horns of the stag. 6. Many evils follow old-age. 
 
 7. Bear (sing.) the troubles of old-age ! 
 
 1 Dative.. 2 Lto, with Gen. 3 Say, in old-age. 
 
 § 40. (e). The Boot ends in v or vr. 
 
 1 
 
 n. Nose. 
 
 o, Dolphin, 
 2iX<pr.$* 
 
 o, Giant. 
 
 o. Tooth. 
 
 j Sing. N. 
 
 pis* 
 
 yiyas * 
 yiyavr-tf 
 
 ohovs* 
 
 J Cr. 
 
 fLV-0% 
 
 hsX<p7v-os 
 
 oh dvr-os 
 
 8 D. 
 
 e- / 
 
 piv-i 
 
 htX<p7v-i 
 
 yiyavr-i 
 
 yiyavr-a 
 
 yiyar 
 
 odirr-t 
 
 1 A> 
 
 p7v- a 
 
 is X<p7v-a 
 
 ohivr-a } 
 
 W. 
 
 pt V 
 
 hsXtpt s{-fv) 
 
 ohovs 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 p7v-ts 
 
 5s \<p7r-if 
 
 yiyavr-is 
 
 eh'ovr-ss 
 
 G. 
 
 ptv-ur 
 
 hiXfify-ear 
 
 yiyarr-ur 
 
 ylya-trt[v)* 
 
 ©5©W-&»v j 
 
 D. 
 
 p^(»r 
 
 dtX<p7-o-t(v) * 
 
 ohov-<rt(r)* 
 
 A. 
 
 p7v-a? 
 
 hs^.<p7r-as 
 
 y'tyarr-as 
 
 ylyavr-ts 
 
 hho'rr-as ■! 
 
 v. 
 
 p7v-ts 
 
 %iX<p7r-is 
 
 ohdvr-ss 
 
 Dual. 
 
 p7r-t 
 
 hiXtpTv-s 
 
 y/yavr-t 
 
 ytydrr-otv 
 
 dhovT-i 
 
 
 piv-odr 
 
 haXtpl r-otr 
 
 choir- otr.. 
 
 Obs. 1. To this class belong : (l) The two Adjectives in-a*, -aira, 
 -av, viz. (A t X a*, ‘(tty a, - ay, black, and t a X as , -air a, - a r, 
 wretched; —(2) a-as, Tatra, <rar, all, every, (on the accentua¬ 
 tion, see § 33, IIL), and its compounds; e. g. «*•«©•«, dray; 
 —(3) f#»», -outra, -or, willing, -©Was, -owns, -©Was, and dinar, 
 SLxovtra, ax.or, unwilling-; —(4) Adjectives in -ns, -t<r<ra, -tr,(iis 
 -urtra, -1 r, graceful), which are peculiar, inasmuch as the 
 
 * 'Instead of f iW, hsXpfrf, yiyxrrs, ohotrs, ptrrl, &c. — See § 8, 8. 
 
§ 40.] THIRD DECLENSION-.—ROOTS IN v OR VT. 
 
 63 
 
 Dat. PI. masculine and neuter, ends in - 1 <rt instead of -tier t, con¬ 
 trary to § 8, 8. But Participles in -its, -t7aa, 4v, (as rvcphU, -uaa, 
 -iv, struck ), have the ending-itat in the Dat. PI. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 masc. 
 
 •fAiXdS* 
 fcixdvos 
 
 fx.iXa.vi 
 
 piXava 
 
 piXav 
 
 Black. 
 fem. 
 piXatva 
 piXalvn; 
 piXalvy 
 piXatva v 
 piXatva 
 
 neut. 
 
 flikuv 
 
 p’lXdvos 
 
 p'iXavi 
 
 p'iXav 
 
 piXav 
 
 masc. 
 
 was* 
 
 wavro's 
 
 wavri 
 
 wavrsc 
 
 was 
 
 All. 
 
 fem. 
 
 wa<r a 
 
 wdffns 
 
 waffn 
 
 i 
 
 watrav 
 
 waff a 
 
 neut. 
 
 Wav 
 
 wavreg 
 
 wavri 
 
 wav 
 
 wav 
 
 P. N. 
 
 piXavis 
 
 piXatvat 
 
 ptXava 
 
 f 
 
 wdvns 
 
 waff at 
 
 wdvra 
 
 G. 
 
 piXuvuv 
 
 (A, iXatVUV 
 
 piXdvwv 
 
 wavruv 
 
 waffuv 
 
 wdvruv 
 
 D. 
 
 piXafft* 
 
 piXaivats 
 
 piXafft* 
 
 wdfft * 
 
 wdffats 
 
 warn* 
 
 A. 
 
 piXavas 
 
 psXawas 
 
 piXava 
 
 wavras 
 
 waff as 
 
 wavra 
 
 V. 
 
 piXavis 
 
 piXatvat 
 
 piXauu 
 
 wavr&s 
 
 waff at 
 
 wavra 
 
 Dual. 
 
 piXavi 
 
 piXaivd 
 
 piXavi 
 
 Waviri 
 
 wdffa 
 
 wavn 
 
 
 pfXavotv 
 
 piXatvouv 
 
 piXavotv. 
 
 wavrotv 
 
 waff atv 
 
 wavroiv. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Participle ofAor. 
 
 1. Pass. 
 
 
 
 Graceful. 
 
 
 
 Struck. 
 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 fem. 
 
 neut . 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 neut. 
 
 S. 1ST. 
 
 x“e* e 'sf 
 
 %a()tiffffa 
 
 X a f iv 
 
 rvtpdt'is 
 
 ru(ph7o>a 
 
 rvtykv 
 
 G. 
 
 %agievros 
 
 %a£i'iffffns 
 
 Xag'uvros 
 
 ru<p0ivros 
 
 rvtpkiffns 
 
 rvtyHvros 
 
 D. 
 
 %a/>Uvri 
 
 %a(}i£ffffy 
 
 Xafnvrt 
 
 rvtpdivrt 
 
 rvipktffy 
 
 rvtyOivrt 
 
 A. 
 
 %a(iiivra 
 
 %af>'itffffav 
 
 x a e' ,iv 
 
 rvQ&'ivra 
 
 rv<pk7ffav 
 
 rucpdiv 
 
 V. 
 
 Xa^iiv 
 
 Xafiifffa 
 
 x a e** 
 
 rvtydi'ts 
 
 trv<p6i7ffa 
 
 rvtyd'iv 
 
 P.N. 
 
 %ae'nvris 
 
 
 %a(»ii*ra 
 
 rvtpO'ivr&s 
 
 rv<pk7ffat 
 
 rvtpkvra 
 
 G. 
 
 Xafivruv 
 
 %a(>itffffuv 
 
 Xa^tivruv 
 
 rvtpHvruv 
 
 rvtyOuffuv rutpOtvrui 
 
 D. 
 
 %afn<ri(v) 
 
 Xagtiffffats xa^tifft\y) 
 
 Tv<p6ufft[v) 
 
 ruQdiiffate rvtph7ffi(v) 
 
 - A. 
 
 %af>'itvras 
 
 Xa^itffffds 
 
 Xaguvra 
 
 rvtpS'ivras 
 
 rvcpktffas 
 
 rvtyHvra ; 
 
 V. 
 
 XagUvris 
 
 Xagttffffat 
 
 Xagiivru 
 
 rv<p6ivns 
 
 rutyffutrai 
 
 rvtykvra ’ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Xaftivn 
 
 %a(> tiff tra 
 
 Xagnvri 
 
 rvQOivn 
 
 rv<phiffd 
 
 rvtpkvri 
 
 
 •gagtivroiv 
 
 %agtiffffatv xaguvtroiv. 
 
 rv(p6ivrotv 
 
 Tvtphiffatv 
 
 rutpkvrotv. 
 
 Obs. 2. Adjectives compounded with otovs are declined like 
 obovs ; e. g. o, vi ftavi&ovs, ro fcovo'bov, one-toothed, Gen. povo'hovros ; Ad¬ 
 jectives ending in -as, Gen. -avros, are declined like yiyas ; e. g. 
 o, n a»dp,at, untiring, Gen. -avroe. 
 
 * Instead oi^tikats, w&vrt, piXavtrt, warn*. 
 t Instead of 5 the * being lengthened into », (§ 8, 84- 
 
64 
 
 ,[Chap. 1Y. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 XVIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ’AxrU, -Tvos, $ 1 , sun-beam , ray . 
 <**«», -ouffx, -ov, unwilling, 
 axdcfi-oiiru, -av, (universus), all- 
 tog ether, every. 
 
 auras, -o', (ipse), Self ; o air os, 
 (idem), the same. 
 
 (i/JMftu, -olros, r'o, food, victuals, 
 yi'yus, -avros , o', giant, 
 foxqiis, -7vos, o, dolphin. 
 
 \kud, -othra, -ov, willing. 
 
 « kitpas, -avros, o, elephant, ivory, 
 iuaro^os, -ov, (Gen.), abeunding-in, 
 rich-in. 
 
 nxtos, *ou, o, sun. 
 
 xur7\os, -v, -oi, talkative. 
 
 Ktaivu, I polish, smoothen, grind . 
 jKa^n, -»s, »5, battle, fight. 
 psXxs, -ano i, -av, black , dark, 
 ■obous, -ovroi, o, tooth. 
 
 ■otr<p£ctivop,ai, (Gen.), / smell, 
 or as, Tara, tuv, every, all. 
 
 Tori, once, sometimes. (Indefi¬ 
 nite adverb, enclitic), 
 pis, pivog, v, nostril, nose, 
 rakasi -atva, -av, miserable. 
 QiXavSpooTas, -ov, loving-mankind, 
 philanthropic. 
 
 X^hts, -to-tra, -sv, graceful. 
 
 1. Ov TTCtCFlV avSptvTTOlQ 1 6 aVTOQ VOVQ lariv. 2. Tolg 
 •odoven 2 ra (3pu)para Xeatvojuev. 3. Oi. SeXtpUitg (j)i\av- 
 Opunroi eiaiv. 4. Eanv 3 avSpog ayaOov Travra Kaica 
 tyiptiv. 5. IloAAai Atj3t/J?e 4 X^P al ev7ropvt elaiv 5 iX{- 
 < pavrog . 6. Hawfe kcjtiXov avOpco ttov IxOaipovatv. 
 7. Tote ylyaai iron rjv pax*! Trpbg roug deovg. 8. Tate 
 too riXiov aicnat *(arpog£v. 'P ivtov tpyov lafiv 6a- 
 ■tPpaivEaOai. 
 
 1 thme is not to all men— all men have not. § -161, 2. (d% 
 2 § 161, 3. s it is the duty of. § 158, 2. * Libya, a district in the 
 
 north of Africa. 5 are rich-in. 
 
 ( 1. What is the difference in the meanings of air os and o air os ? 
 4. Why is -tom paroxytone ? 7. Why has yiyatrl two acceuts ? 9. 
 
 By what rule is ptvuv perispomenon ? Mow is it that the accent 
 'remains on the ultimate of \ar-lv ?) 
 
 1. The teeth grind the food: 1 2. We smell with 
 the nose. 2 3. The gods once had a battle with the 
 giants. 3 4. We admire the beautiful ivory. 5. 
 Trust (sing) not all men! 6. It is the office 4 of the 
 teeth to grind the food. 1 7. It is the duty of 5 every 
 man to worship the Deity. 
 
 Plural. 2 Dative. 3 Translate: to the gods there once was. &c. 
 *<W 01 . b Lrn, with Gen. 
 
541.] THIRD DECL.—WORDS IN -EUQ, ~avg 1 m OVQ. 65 
 B. Words, which in the Genitive Singular have 
 
 A VOWEL BEFORE THE ENDING - OQ. 
 
 § 41. I. Substantives ending in -awe, ^civg, -ovg. 
 
 The Root of Substantives in -wg, -avg, -one ends 
 in v. This remains at the end of a ivord, and before 
 Consonants, but is omitted between Vowels. Those in 
 -tvg have -id in the Acc. Sing., and -lag in the Acc. 
 PI. ; in the Gen. Sing, they take the Att;c Gen. 
 -tug, instead of -log, and in the Pat. Sing, and Norn. 
 PL are contracted, but contraction is not usual in 
 the Acc. Plural . When a Vowel comes before -tvg, 
 (as in -)(oevg ), contraction occurs in all Cases of all 
 the Numbers, except in the Nom. and Voc. Sing., and 
 Pat. PL Those in -avg and -cue are contracted 
 only in the Acc, Plural. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 Gr. 
 
 t>. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 S, King. 
 
 (b xmXtvs 
 (bxnXs-as 
 (b ot(riX{ei)u 
 (bxtriXs-x 
 (bxtrtXsv 
 
 o, A measure. 
 
 %o(sco)£s 
 
 X°V‘)h 
 
 X «(**)* 
 
 x°™ 
 
 o, f], Ox. 
 
 (bovs, bos=bdvs 
 
 (bo- o$ 
 
 (bo A 
 (boVV 
 
 (boo 
 
 fi, Old-woman, 
 
 yf>xv; 
 
 yox-of 
 
 ygx-t 
 
 ygxuv 
 
 y/3XU 
 
 P. N. 
 
 (b x<riX[ti)iif 
 
 X»{it)us 
 
 (bo-t; 
 
 y^x-es 
 
 i Gr. 
 
 (b xtr/Xe -ftiv 
 
 X'o[ (or)av 
 
 (bo-XV 
 
 y^oi-cov 
 
 D. 
 
 / hx<TlXiV(Tt[y) 
 
 X»ivai[v) 
 
 (bou<r'i(v) 
 
 ygxvcri(v') 
 
 A. 
 
 fbxffiXt-xs 
 
 Xo(sx)xg 
 
 (/ bo-xs ) (bove 
 
 (ygx-x 5 ) y^xvs 
 
 V. 
 
 P>x<riX(tt)t 7 s 
 
 xANs 
 
 (bb-ts 
 
 y(3x-tS 
 
 Dual 
 
 (bxtnXe-t 
 
 (bxffiXt-on 
 
 xf-t 
 
 Xot-oiv 
 
 ‘(bos 
 
 (bo-o 7 v 
 
 ygx-t 
 
 ygx-oT*. 
 
 Obs. Among the older Attic writers, the Nom. and Voc. Pl. oi 
 Nouns in -tvs end also in -w; e.g. (bxnXvs, (instead of (bx<nXt7s). 
 
 The Nom. of Nouns in -*vg is oxy tones the 
 Voc. is perispomenon. 
 
66 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IY. 
 
 NIX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 “AqX<», (Gen.), I begin , lead, 
 govern. 
 
 argiafu, 1 dishonour, despise. 
 a%dei<Tros,-ov, thankless, ungrate¬ 
 ful. 
 
 Achilles. 
 
 (ZouXopai, I wish, am-willing, 
 yovivs, -tug, o, father., (pi. pa¬ 
 rents). 
 
 (Bat.), I liken, compare. 
 "Ektco^, Hector. 
 iTiuiXua., -as, 'h, Care. 
 
 €va>, I sacrifice, offer. 
 
 Uoivs, -iu$, o, priest . 
 
 Kvgag, Cyrus. 
 
 Kvoos, -ov, o , nonsense, silly-talk . 
 
 Do/ttus, -ius, o, herdsman, shep¬ 
 herd. 
 
 vo[ay\, -Yis, *i, pasture- 
 ’o'bvtrcrivs, Odysseus, ( Ulysses ). 
 “Opnooi, Homer, 
 otptfahftos, -ov, b, eye. 
 
 UarffoxXos, Patroklos. 
 
 •zroXuxiyos, -ov, garrulous, 
 vfo, (Gen.), before. 
 
 <ri — seal, both — and, as well—as. 
 
 (re is an enclitic). 
 
 TtiXs/aa%os, Tflemachos. 
 
 (pov'.uu, I murder, slay. 
 
 ■%oi»s, a G ree k liquid- 
 
 measure, about 3 quarts. 
 
 1. Oi (3aaiXeic eTri/uiXeiav tyovtji row ttoXltiov. 2. 'll 
 wy&Xri rw vop.fi 4V Erai. 3. ’O 'Etcrcup 1 vtto too ^ A\iXXttx)g 
 tpovevsTai. 4. O i hpEig rolg Oeolg (3oug dvovaiv. 5. Kvpog 
 iraig riv ayaOtov yovEtov. 6. Oi aYcipiaroi rovg 2 yoviag 
 aTipaC,ov<Jiv. <. llttuou, to irai, roig yovEvtnv- o. 
 T ri\Epa\og rjv ’OSucraEtog viog. 9. BouAou roue yo- 
 viag 7 rpo 7rauroe 4 n/uaig s\eiv. 10. Oi rwv ypaiov 
 Af/poi ra tura rtiponaiv. II. KaAfeJe ap%Etg, tv (3aat~ 
 Xev. 12. At ypaeg ttoAuAo yoi eIglv. 13. Oi vopflg 
 rriv (3otov aylXrjv fig vopn)v ayovtnv. 14. "Opiipog roiig 
 Trig w Hpae o(J)0aXpovg rote 5 ~(*>v f3otov eiko^el- 15. n ar 
 rpotcXog (ptXog qu ’ A\tXXE(vg. 16. Kupov, rou rwv 
 riepawv fiaaiXia, ettl rt 6 ry apmy tcai ry aotpia Qavjiar 
 ZopEV. 
 
 1 Proper names do not take tbe article, unless tbey have been 
 previously mentioned, or are to be represented as well-known. See 
 § 148, 5. 2 148, 3. 3 § 161, 2. (a). 4 before every thing. 5 to those 
 
 of. 8 both—and is expressed by xal—xai, or vs — **< (with a word 
 or words intervening), or ft *«/ (placed together). Tg xou often 
 means and simply. 
 
 (1. Why is /3 cciuXtTs perispomenon ? 14. What Noun is under¬ 
 stood with vois ? 16. Why is the accent on the final of tori not 
 
 written as the grave accent ?) 
 
 1. The king takes-care-of 1 the citizens. 2. Tbs 
 
§ 42.] THIRD DECLENSION. — WORDS IN -rjg AND -zg. 67 
 
 herds follow the herdsman. 3. Oxen are sacrificed 
 to the gods by the priests. 2 4. The old-women with 
 their nonsense 3 weary our (= the) ears. 5. Ye govern 
 well, O kings! 6. O priests, sacrifice an ox to the 
 god ! 7. It is the business of 4 a good herdsman to 
 
 take-care-of 1 the oxen. 8. Children love tlieir (=the) 
 parents. 
 
 1 in/zsXiixv with Gen. 8 uko, with Gen. 3 Dat. Plural. 
 ^ with Gen, 
 
 § 42. II. Words ending in -mg, -zg; -wc (fieri, -woe); 
 -we and w (Gen. -oog); -ae (Gen.-aog ); -og (Gen. -tog). 
 
 1. The Root of words of this class ends in < 7 . With 
 respect to retaining or omitting the < 7 , the same rule 
 is observed as regards the v in the preceding class 
 <of Substantives, viz. the a remains at the end of a 
 word and befom Consonants, but is omitted between 
 Vowels. In the Dat. PI. one <j is omitted; e. g. 6 
 f Qiog, jackal , rote Ow-at(v). 
 
 (1) Words in ^g and -eg. 
 
 2. The endings -rig (Masc and Fern.) and -zg 
 
 (Neut.) belong only to Adjectives, and to proper names 
 in -vTje, -Kparrtg, -/ir}Sr}g, - irziOrig, -aOivrfg and 
 
 (-tcXtrig) -KXrig , which have the form of Adjectives. 
 The Neuter singular exhibits the simple Root. 
 
 3. Words of this class suffer contraction, (after 
 the omission of < 7 ), in all the Cases., except the Norn. 
 and Voc. Sing, and the Dat. PL Proper names in 
 -kAetjc, (contracted in the Nom. Sing, into -K\r\g), 
 suffer (in Attic Greek) a two-fold contraction in the 
 Dat. Singulars e. g. z-zi (=i-&i) 
 
68 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IV. 
 
 F. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Adjectives 
 
 Singular. 
 
 vxtpns, (clear). ro vx<pl$ 
 
 (o-xipz-os) ffxQovs 
 (axf&d) trxlpti 
 
 (trap's x) raffi crafts 
 
 crxfs trufs 
 
 Dual F. A. V. 
 G. and D. 
 
 in -ns- 
 
 Plural. 
 
 (extpi-ts) ffuQus (trxf-x) cxfn 
 (xxf-uv) ffXtyuV 
 erx(pt-<rt(v) 
 
 (<rx(pl-as) cxtyii? ( <rx<pi-x ) catyn 
 (traf-is') ax<p&7i (traf-x) <rx(pn 
 <rxf-t <rx<p*j 
 ffx<pi-oiv catydiy 
 
 F. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 n rgingns, (trireme). 
 (r/Jingi-os ) rgingous 
 (rgtngi-7) rgingu 
 (rg/ngt-x) <rg/ng >j 
 
 Tgingif 
 
 Nouns in -ns. 
 Plural. 
 
 (rginot-es) rgwgtif 
 T^moi-uv and r^in^uv 
 
 <r(>ingi-<rj(y) 
 
 (rg/ngz-as) rgtngus 
 (rgdgz-zs) rgingtif 
 
 Dual. 
 
 T/iingi-s and rgingn 
 T^in^i-oiv and r£in(>oiv 
 &c. 
 
 F. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 y. 
 
 "Saxgxrns 
 
 Iwxqx'tous 
 
 Iuxqxtu 
 
 'lux^xrn 
 
 l&DCfJxns 
 
 Singular. 
 
 {ThgixXins) ThgizXns 
 
 (Iligixx'ii-os') n i^lxXiOVS 
 
 (n z^ixXzz-'i) (ITs ^txXizi) ntpxXu 
 (Ilig/xXee-x) Il'g/zXex 
 (II zfixXzss) Th^ixXas. 
 
 Obs. X. Remark the contraction in tlie Dual, [<r^in^ttz=<r^in^n), it 
 being contracted into -n, not into-f/, as is usually done. 
 
 Obs. 2. In Adjectives ending in -ns, -is preceded by a voice!, -zx 
 is usually contracted, not into -n (as in xxfx=ira<p7j), but into-a 
 /as in n tjpxAtt-u= -Xzx ); e. g. xxXins, witliout-fame , Acc. Sing. 
 (Masc. and Fern.), and Fom. Acc. and Voc. PL (Feut.), xxXzix— 
 xkXzx ; by ins, liecdthy, byi'ix=byix. 
 
 Obs. 3. Proper names with the above endings [2], and also 
 *Aons, in forming the Acc. Sing, follow both the first and third de¬ 
 clensions, and are -therefore called Heteroclites ; e. g. 2uxfrzx= 
 'S.uK^xrn, also 'ZaxgxTnv like the first declension. But with those in 
 •TtXns the Acc. in -xXm is not usual in good Attic prose. 
 
 Accentuation .] Most Adjectives of tliis class are 
 oxytone. In tlie contracted form of th®Gen. Dual 
 and PL ,Tpir,ar]Q, avrapKrjg, and compound Adjectives 
 in -riOriQ (from r)6og) are paroxytone , instead of being 
 lerispomenon according to tlie fundamental rule.— 
 [§ 11, 2. (2). (b). ($.] 
 
 XX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Aitr%£os, -x, -by, base, shameful. xXntns, -Is, true. 
 bx(>xrns, -is, immoderate, incon- ’A vxtxyoQxs, Anaxacjoras. 
 
 tineut, intemperate . xrv^ns, -is f unfortunate. 
 
69 
 
 § 42.] THIRD DECL.—WORDS IN -rjg AND -eg. 
 
 *Atrrvayvs, «. AstyagSs. 
 atpawf, unknown, obscure. 
 'iouXua, -as, 7i, slavery, 
 ikiaigu, I pity. 
 ixd^Ti$, -is, marshy. 
 
 »E vaftuvav^as, o, Epamindndas, 
 *H^uxXtjs, o, Hercules. 
 
 ’Iv^ixv, ft, India, 
 xay.ccpos, -ov, o, reed. 
 
 At ya> } I say , speak. 
 
 Tii&v$dv7i, », Mandand. 
 
 IfjuXltt, -as, *i, (Dat.), intercourse , 
 association, intimacy. 
 IhgixxUs, o, Pericles, 
 vroruf&os, -ov, o, river. 
 aotyurrr\s, -ov, o, teacher-of-elo¬ 
 quence, -sophist. 
 
 IoQoxXtis, o, Sophocles. 
 
 2 ux(>arviti, o, Sdcrates. 
 erewTifta, -as, h, safety. 
 vo-tos, -ov, o, position, place. 
 T^dyubla, -as, »j, tragedy . 
 
 1. At So^okXcouc rpaytgSfai KaXal elcnv. 2. TleptKXtd 
 lift rrj aorjxia OavpaZoptv. 3. Soncpara 1 ttoAAoi paOr^raL 
 tfaav. 4. *H ’ivdiKi) 7 to pa re rovg t rorapovg kcu rovg 
 iXatdetg ro7roi»c ^fott tcaXapovg iroXXovg. 5. Aeye at 1 
 ra aXriOri . 2 6. ’Ava^ayupag, 6 tro^tarijc, SiSaaKaXng 
 
 rjv TltpucXtovg. 7. ’G'Hpa/cAste 3 , toTc arvyiat gojti)- 
 piav iraptyi. 8. ’ E7T aptivcov^ag Trarpog* arpavovg. 
 9. ’EAlatpe tov arv^r) avOpur ttov. 10. MavSanr} r}v Qv - 
 yarrjp 1 Aarvayovg, tov M/jSa>n 5 (BaatXetog . 11. ’Ope- 
 
 b'taQe, at veaviat , aXr}B(ov Xoyiav . 12. O i aKparttg 
 
 u/aypav SovXtiav 6 SovXtvovaiv. 13. Mr) bpiXlav 
 aKparu avOpatTrw. 7 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (d). 2 the truth. 3 generally in exclamations. 
 
 4 § 158, 1. the Medea. 6 lovxuav is an Acc. of cognate sig¬ 
 
 nification. § 159, 2. 7 § 161, 2. (a). 
 
 (8. What Case is dqavovs ? 9. What Case is drurf ?) 
 
 1. Pericles had great wisdom. 1 2. Pity (sing) un¬ 
 fortunate men? 3. Many young-men were pupils of 
 Socrates. 2 4. The intemperate man serves a shame¬ 
 ful slavery. 5. We admire Sophocles for 3 his 
 (=the) beautiful tragedies. 6. True words are be¬ 
 lieved. 7. We pity the life of unfortunate men. 
 8 . Have (sing) no 4 intimacy with intemperate men. 
 
 1 Translate : to Pericles there was, &c. 8 Dative. 8 1*7, with 
 Dat. 4 Translate : do not have , &c. 
 
70 THIRD DECLENSION. [CHAP. IV. 
 
 § 43.. (2) Words in -we (Gen. -woe) i and in -we an d 
 
 -w (Gen. -oog). 
 
 The Root of words of this class also ends in e.— 
 See § 42 r 1. 
 
 (a) -tog, Gen. -woe. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 G. 
 
 d. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Jackal. 
 
 o, 5 6u$ PI. Qu-is 
 
 6co-of- 6u-uv* 
 
 6u-i 6u-<ri{y) 
 
 6u-a j 6w-ols 
 
 6 us 6u-is 
 
 Hero. . 
 
 S. 0 V\°MS PI. YlgM-lS 
 
 {jcM-Of f^U-MV 
 
 « a _ / \ 
 
 n^oj-i n(>u)-<ri\t) 
 
 % 0 M-xa,ndi!gM riou-us and 
 
 Hgus 
 
 Dual. | du-s 6co-oiv. * 
 
 t\ <r „ * / 
 
 Um ngoo-s 9ig&-0»P. 
 
 (b) -tog and -w, Gen.. (-ooe=) -ovg. 
 
 Substantives with these endings ar q all feminine. 
 The ending -we in this class of words is- retained in 
 the common language only in the Substantive aiSwe* 
 The Dual and PI. are like those of Substantives in -og 
 of the second declension ; e. g.. aiSot, r\%pi, &c.. 
 
 Shame. 
 
 aXdug (Root alidos). 
 [xldo-os) uidouf 
 
 {aidd-i) atdoi 
 
 (aidd-a) aiduf 
 
 (xldo-i) aidoT. 
 
 Echo. 
 
 tt (Root 
 
 (r>Xo-o$) iixous 
 
 »Z a '~ 
 
 (*/£•;•) jz*t 
 
 XXI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Aldus, r, shame , modesty,, rever¬ 
 ence. 
 
 Ho^yu, -n, Gorgon, 
 df&us, dfAwos, o, slave. 
 
 ’Kgaru, Eratd. 
 tvt/TTu, (-oos =)-ovs, j 5) well-being, 
 prosperity. 
 
 sifTo^io'y^oLtpofy -tv, o, historian. 
 
 xnvrof, -ov, 5, garden. 
 
 YJkuu, yi, Clio. 
 
 Zv-rn^os, -a, -dv, painful, grievous , 
 sad. 
 
 hoaias, -ot>> o, Tjysias* 
 ivfnxos, - j u-ov, Lyric. 
 spoLt^ms, -coos, o, uncle (by the fa** 
 ther’s side). 
 
 * On the irregular accentuation 1 , see § 33, IIL (Exceptions), 
 | Remark the irregular accentuation. 
 
71 
 
 § 44.] THIRD DEC1.-WORDS IN -wq, -o>, AND -ag. 
 
 miSu, (-oes=)-ous, v, persuasive¬ 
 ness, persuasion, obedience. 
 vr(>oi-fix'ivru), I loolc-at. 
 v-ps-ti/M, (adsurn), I am-present, 
 am-connected-with. 
 
 vgo;w'Tov, ro, face, visage, coun¬ 
 tenance. 
 
 ff'zpus, to, (only in Nom. and 
 Acc.), respect, esteem. 
 
 •^tvSu, I cheat, deceive ; Mid. 1 
 lie. 
 
 1. tr O/aripog aCEi 1 TroWovg ripioaq (or r/pcoc). 2. T ijv 
 tCov 7}Q(1)U)v aoirrjv OavfiaZojazv. 3. O i 3/xwfc (3iov 
 Xv7Trjcdv dyovoiv. 4 . f Q tov Trarowog Krjrrog k a\dg Ic r- 
 riv. 5. 'Optyov, a> Trai , rfj^ alooug. 6. AlSujq ay a - 
 0oic avdpdaiv ettetoi. 7. Avcrtav etti tij ttelOoi mi ya~ 
 pm Oavpa^opEv. 8. Trj alSoi 2 rrpoQEGTi to oEpag. 
 
 M 7 / 7 rpdgf 3 \E 7 rE to Fopyovg irpogioTrov. 10. ’H^ot, 
 \ptvdEig 7 roXXaKig rovg avOpiairovg. 11. YlavTEg 6 ps- 
 yovrat EVEGTOvg. 12 . Ilp£7r£t vtavtq 1 aiSw e\elv. 13. 
 KAhw k at ^Eparw M ovoai e\glv‘ Tr)v juev KXelu) Ospa- 
 7 tevovgiv o i iGTopioypd<pot, ti)v ’Eparaj ol XvpiKol 
 iroirjrau 
 
 l sings-of. 2 § 161, 2. (a). 
 
 (3. Why is properispomenon ? 5. 7. Account for the cir¬ 
 
 cumflex on the final syllables of aftovr and on 16 ol. 9. Why is the 
 sigma written s in vrgosfixtsrt ? 12. Why should edlu not be peris- 
 
 pomenon ?) 
 
 1. Homer sings-of the hero Achilles. 2. The 
 valour of the hero is admirable. 3. Slaves have 1 'a 
 grievous life. 4. The uncle has 2 a beautiful garden. 
 5. All delight-in prosperity. 6.. Admire, O young- 
 man, with 3 reverence,, the deeds of good men! 7. 
 
 We admire the persuasiveness and the grace of Ly¬ 
 sias. 8. We are often deceived by Echo. 4 
 
 1 Translate : to slaves is, &c. 2 \ori, with Dat 3 usra, with Gen. 
 
 ^Dative. 
 
 § 44. (3) Words in - ag (Gen. -aog) ; and -og 
 
 {Gen. -Eog). 
 
 (a) - ag , Gen. -aog . 
 
 Only a few neuters , as to a£Xag t brilliance , and rA 
 
 \ 
 
THIRD DECLENSION - . 
 
 72 
 
 [Chap. IV 
 
 Seirac, goblet, Belong to this class. The Root of these 
 words also ends in g. See § 42, 1. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 to aixus, ( Brilliance) 
 
 PL cr'iXu-u and asXn 
 
 D. a'sXu-i 
 
 G. 
 
 ff'sXu-os 
 
 mXu cov 
 
 asXa-otv. 
 
 D. 
 
 ciXu-i and as Xu 
 
 aiXu-aj(v) 
 
 &C. ‘ 
 
 A. 
 
 o-sXus 
 
 alXu-u and ertXu 
 
 
 i 
 
 (B) -oc> Gen. (-£ 0 ? =) -ovg. 
 
 SnBstantives of this class are also all neuters ; and 
 the Root ends in g (§ 42, 1). In the Nom. Sing., e , 
 in the final syllable of the Root, is changed into o. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Pace {genus). Glory. 
 
 to yivos (Root ysvss ). to xXlos (Root xXess). 
 
 (ylvi-os) yivous (xXis-or) xXious 
 
 (ysvs-i) yivit (xXtt-t) xXsu 
 
 yivos xXsos 
 
 Plur. 1ST. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 (yivt-u) y'tvT) {xXis-u) xXsu 
 
 ysvi-uv and ytvuv ( xXti-eov) xXsuv 
 
 yivs-<ri[v) xXis-at{v) 
 
 ( yivs-u) yivv\ (xXss u) xXsu 
 
 DuaL 
 
 [yivi-s) yin* ( xXes-s ) xXen 
 
 {ytvi-oLv) ytvoJv (xXss-eiv) xXsoTv. 
 
 Obs. On the contraction, in the Dual, of -u into •*, (not into -u), 
 see § 42, Obs. I; -set in the Plural, pixceded by a vowel , is .con¬ 
 tracted into -u, (not into -n) ; e. g. xXitu=x\soi. Comp, n spixXsu 
 (§ 42, Obs. 2). 6 
 
 XXII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 'AXXu, sed, but. 
 etvt/uos, -ov, o, wind. 
 
 £v0os, {-sos=)-ovs, to, flower, 
 eio-cpctXris, -eg, firm, safe, steady, 
 yens, (- ios=)-ov;, to, race, de¬ 
 scent. 
 
 yft, yvs, ij, the earth. 
 
 2uX6s, -o'v, cowardly, worthless, 
 ieeftvog, (from tug, spring), 
 vernal. 
 
 £&os, (-£sf=)-fli/f, t&, appearance, 
 form. 
 
 eorof, (-eos=)-evs, r4, word, 
 fyp'ia, -us, ft, loss, injury, punish¬ 
 ment, penalty. 
 6uXoros,{-ios—)-ovs, to, heat. 
 6 vv)t6s, -ij,-o'y, mortal, 
 xtfios, {-sos—)-ovs, to, gain. 
 xXsos, (- etos = ) -sous, to, glory, 
 fame ; pi. glorious-deeds . 
 xf vu, cerno, I distinguish, judge, 
 discern, choose. 
 
 (twos, {-tos=)-oui, to, length. 
 
 * 
 
§45.] THIRD DECL.—WORDS IN -ig, -vp, -l, -U. 
 
 73 
 
 vrevvfa, -a, -Sy f evil, viieked, dis•. tyos, (sos-^-ovs, ro, height, ele- 
 honest. ration, 
 
 eixa-s, -aot, ro, splendour, briU -oZ, o, brass. 
 
 Uancy. -^tZ^os, {-tos=)-ovs, ro, a He. 
 
 'J'Zfcos, (-ios^=^)-avt, ro, cold. 
 
 I. 
 
 1. f H yi) avQetnv eapivolg OaXXeL. 2. Tuiy kokiov SeiXa. 
 tTrri tyepovaiv avepoi. 3. Mi) cnre\ov xpv)(ovg Kcii OaX- 
 irovg. 4. To KaXbv ov pijicei \povov Kpivopev, aXXa 
 aperp. 5. O vk ctacpaXeg 1 nav vipog ev OvrjTcg yevei. 6 . 
 Mr) Xeye. 7 . ’A 7 te\ov Trovripibv KEpSutv. 8 . KepSr] 
 
 novrjpa %r]p(av atX <f)EpEi. 2 9. Karo7rrpov e'lSovg ^aXfc bg l , 
 o ivog $e vov. 10. Ot avOpiviroi kXcouc opeyovrai. 11. 
 Of avSpeg kXeel \aipovaiv. 12. Ot av^peioi kXeujv bpL- 
 
 yovrai. 13. Qavp.a%op.ev ra rtov avcpiov icXea. 
 
 1 hrrt understood. 2 Synt. Rule, Ex. VL 
 
 (2. What Case is iV>»? 3. Give the Number and Case of ^Z- 
 
 1. Keep-from (sing.) wicked gain! 2 . We delight- 
 in vernal flowers. 3. Young-man, do not keep- 
 yourself-from cold 1 and heat 1 ! 4. Shun (sing.) wicked 
 gains ! 5 Punishment follows a lie. 6 . We admire 
 the Hellenes for 2 their (=the) glorious-deeds. 7. 
 Soldiers are incited to 3 noble actions by the love 4 of 
 fame. 8. The glorious-deeds of soldiers are ad™ 
 mired. 5 
 
 1 PluraL 2 hrS, with Dat. 3 brl, with Acc. 4 Dative. 
 
 6 Verb Sing. 
 
 § 45. III. Words in -tg, -vg, 
 
 (1) Words in-7 g , -vc(with the vowel long). 
 
 
 Corn-worm. 
 
 Boar, Sow. 
 
 Eish. 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 o xtf 
 
 o, n o-Zf ( sus ) 
 
 o lx,6tt 
 
 1 
 
 G. 
 
 Ml- it 
 
 ev-of 
 
 l%0V-Of 
 
 
 D. 
 
 _ V / 
 
 Xl-I 
 
 ffv-i 
 
 Wu-; 
 
 
 A. 
 
 x7w 
 
 ffZr 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 x7 
 
 ffU 
 
 9 At 
 
 txfiv 
 
 
 
74 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IV. 
 
 Corn-worm. 
 
 Boar, Sow. 
 
 Fish. 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 XI -iS 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 xi-ui 
 
 av-eu* 
 
 l%6u-uv 
 
 V. 
 
 att-y/(v) 
 
 cv-r‘\») 
 
 *x4t/-ct( v) 
 
 A. 
 
 XI -as 
 
 CVS 
 
 Wus * 
 
 y. 
 
 4 
 
 XI -is 
 
 ai-ts 
 
 wu s 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ■i 
 
 XI-1 
 
 xi-ol't 
 
 0 
 
 cv-t 
 
 cv-o7v 
 
 to* 
 
 iX$v-oiv. 
 
 H|f“ There are no Neuters in this class. Tice Nom., 
 Acc., and Voc. Sing 1 , have i and v long. 
 
 XXIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 * Ay xicrgot, -eu, r6, hook, fish¬ 
 hook. 
 
 uygios, -lot, -to'ty ferns, wild , sa¬ 
 vage, rustic, 
 aygivw, I catch . 
 ap<nXos, -ay, j5, vine, 
 a.'ta.-x.vvrco, I peep-out, emerge. 
 fixciXtvu, (Gen.), I rule , am- 
 king-of. 
 
 (ZxT£XX0S, -ay, o, frog. 
 
 /3 6r£vs, -vos, a, cluster-of grapes, 
 "cos, -n, -ay, alike, equal, 
 fvs, -vis, if mus, mouse, 
 vsxvs, -vos, a, corpse f ol vixusst 
 the dead. 
 
 •rxyis, -ftios, v, trap, snare. 
 ffrx^vSf-voi, o, ear-oj-corn. 
 
 Iliyas, -ay, a, Syrian. 
 
 1. Ot l^_0U£C tic rou TTOTapOV avaKVlTTOVCTlV. 2. Of 
 Or\ptVTal rag aypiag avg ayptvovaiv. 3. Ilayrfc t^ot 
 veKveg 1, if/v\u>v Se Oeog fiamXzvEi. 2 4. 'H a/nreXog fytpti 
 fiorpvg. 5. *H yrj (ptpa Grd\vg Ka\ /3()Tpvg. 6. 01 
 
 pv£g 7 TayiGLV ayptvovrai. 7. 01 2upoi trtfiovrai rovg 
 i\Ovg tvg Otovg. 8. ToTc juucrl 3 pa\r] wore 7Tpoc 4 
 roue PaTpa\ovg. 9. ’AyiCLarpoig avsSptvojusv rovg 
 i^Ovg. 
 
 1 utrt understood. 2 § 158,7. (a). 3 § 161, 2. (d). *pxxn —<r ^6s, 
 a battle with. 
 
 (3. Why is 4 /U Z^ v perispomenon ? 4. In what Case is p>or^vs ? 
 
 7. Why has }%0vs the circumflex, when crxxvs and /Sar^yj, in 5, 
 have it not ? 8. trort is an enclitic ; why then is it accented ?) 
 
 1. We catch fishes with hooks. 2. The sportsman 
 lies-in-wait-for the wild boars. 3. The clusters-of- 
 grapes and ears-of-com are beautiful. 4. The vine 
 is rich-in 1 clusters-of-grapes. 5. The frogs once 
 had 2 a battle' with 3 the mice. 
 
 l tu*o^os, with Gen. 2 Translate; to the frogs there once was, Ac. 
 **■{<>(, with Ace; 
 
§46 ] THIRD DECL.—WORDS IN’ -t£, - V Q, -f, -u. 
 
 75 
 
 § 46. (2) TForcfo in -ic, 7, i/c, v, (with the vowel short). 
 
 The Root-vowels i and v remain only inthe Nom^ 
 Acc.f Voc.Sing.; in the other Cases they are changed 
 into £. In the Gen. Sing, and PL, masculine and 
 feminine Substantives end in -wq and -a tv respectively. 
 In these Cases the two final syllables are, for the 
 purposes of accentuation, considered as one > there¬ 
 fore the acute oan stand on the antepenult . (Comp. 
 § 30, Obs. 2). 
 
 Words in i and v are Neuter. 
 
 ■Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 fi ToXlf 
 troXs-eog 
 
 1foX.il 
 
 1FoX.l1 
 
 9ToXj 
 
 Cubit. 
 o irrixA* 
 i irnxt-cos 
 irvxu 
 irnxu* 
 
 9t7ix u 
 
 Mustard. 
 
 to trivxori 
 
 fflVUTTi-OS 
 
 ' vivdoru 
 rlvairi 
 fftveoort 
 
 City. 
 
 \ it . 
 
 TO CUTTU 
 
 atm- of 
 cLtrru 
 itcrru , 
 
 a/rru 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 or o'Xus 
 
 9TV\X. i, i 
 
 ffivaort) 
 
 octrrn 
 
 Gr. 
 
 or6Xe-uv 
 
 9fnx i ' uv 
 
 eivaor'i-eov 
 
 CCCTTe-UV 
 
 D. 
 
 9ToXt-trt[v) 
 
 9TYIXi-(n[l>) 
 
 erivx<r&-tri[v) 
 
 atrrt-(n(») 
 
 ? A. 
 
 ir'oXus 
 
 vrrixiis 
 
 ClVCtTf] 
 
 etirrt) 
 
 V. 
 
 tt'oXus 
 
 irrixiH 
 
 aivohrn 
 
 ccrrtj 
 
 Dual. 
 
 iroXt-t 
 
 
 triveion-t 
 
 CUTTi-l 
 
 
 ireXi-otv 
 
 mixi-otv 
 
 criveeors-otv 
 
 aiTTi-OlV. 
 
 Obs. 1. To this class belong Adjectives in-y*, -ua, -u, (§ 50, III., 
 § 51, I.), the declension of which does not differ from that of Sub¬ 
 stantives, except that the Gen. Sing. (Masc. and Neut .), has the 
 usual form -ios (not *««#), and that the Neut. PI. (. Nom ., Acc. } and 
 Voc.), always has the open form-** (not-«). Thus :— 
 
 K 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 S 
 
 Singular , 
 
 yXvxus yXux.ua. yXuxu 
 yXvKt-os yXuxuas yXvxi-of 
 yXvxu yXvxitqt yXvxu 
 yXvxui yXuxuav yXvxu 
 yXvxu yXvxua yXvxu 
 
 weet 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Plural . 
 
 yXvxtTs yXvxuou yXvxt* 
 
 yXvxlui yXuxuut yXuxiui 
 
 yXuxuri[y) yXvxuous yXvxfo't(i) 
 yXvxus yXuxuois yXuxta, 
 
 yXvxus yXvxuat yXvxex 
 
 Dual. N. A. V. 
 G. and D. 
 
 yXuxit yXuxtioo yXvxtl jj 
 
 yXux'ioiv yXuxuottv yXuxtoit. ® | 
 
76 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [Chap. IV. 
 
 To this class also belong Adjectives (of two 
 Gen? -f«, Which are declined like except that in 
 
 Kent. PL, is contracted into •» (like «»t») ; e. g. », e f » 
 
 -It <**) as also Adjectives in 
 -< (e. g. have the regular inflexions, &c., 
 
 « iy%ikvsf eel? has also the regular inflexion in <Ae smjaZai. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 a 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Calf. 
 
 o, n oro^Tts 
 oro(?ri-os 
 
 oregTi-i 
 
 ere g t iv 
 
 $ro£ tI 
 
 Eel. 
 
 n ey%tXvs 
 iyx'ikv-os 
 \yyfi\v-i 
 eyXtXvf 
 eyxtkv 
 
 Sheep. 
 
 t t s* 
 
 0, 'A otg 
 
 i / 
 
 oioS 
 
 »/ 
 
 Oil 
 
 oTv 
 
 ois 
 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 ' Y. 
 
 , xro^Tt-ss 
 oro^ri-wv 
 
 0T0^7l-ffl(v) 
 
 fft'o^n-xs 
 
 oro^n-is 
 
 oro^rls 
 
 oro/tris 
 or o/3 7 Is 
 
 ty%e\eiS 
 
 iyX,iki-uv 
 
 ty%iXi-ffi[v 
 
 ty%eXeis 
 
 iy^ikus 
 
 oTts 
 
 OIMV 
 
 | oifftfv) 
 
 oixs, rarer dls 
 
 on; 
 
 Dual. 
 
 orogn-l 
 
 orogrl-otv 
 
 
 ty^iXi-l 
 \yX ’iX-i-oiv 
 
 r. 
 oi i 
 
 0I0~9. 
 
 
 XXIV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 -«» beginning, com¬ 
 
 mand : pi. magistrates, autho¬ 
 rities, magistracies, 
 iff tkyax, -xs, n, excess, lewdness. 
 (i'fZuios, •«) fi rm , secure , 
 steadfast. 
 
 (i/>oTof, -i\, -ov, mortal, 
 fyu/rts, -t*>s, >5, eating, food, 
 ^tdtpo^oi, -ov, different. 
 
 2<t>OOV, -on, TO, gift, 
 tvhia, -xs, i|, ivant, need. 
 
 1 vndvpix, -xs, vi, desire, lust, 
 xxgoros, -ov, o, fruit. 
 x6ff(*os, - ov , 0 , (1) ornament, or- 
 cZer ; (2) the world. 
 xTttfAx, -utcs, '■ to , ft 'possession . 
 xrZjff/s, -lots, «5, gain, possession. 
 fjtovoSf *))i “Ov, alone, only• 
 vop.es, -ov, o, law. 
 
 ovAffts, -io>s, n, advantage, benefit, 
 orvxvs, -ius, o, fore-arm, cubit. 
 ffr'oXtpos, -ov, o, war. 
 ffr'okis, -io>s, a, town, state, city. 
 ffto^Tit, -/os, o, y>, calf, heifer, 
 eroffts, -io>s, v, drinking, drink. 
 vrgaZis, -iois, v, action, 
 orvgyos, -ov, o, tower, 
 ffirxvis, -io>s, Yt, dearth, scarcity, 
 want. 
 
 ffTxffis , -loos, y„ faction, sedition, 
 ffvviffis, -lojs, 'a, understanding. 
 nT^os, {-ios=)-ous, ro, wall, for¬ 
 tress. 
 
 vfi^s, -io>s, >), insolence, outrage, 
 haughtiness. 
 
 <p6xxl, -xxos, o, guard, guardian. 
 <piffis’, -tu'„ nature. 
 
 2. ’Ev ttoctsi Kail (3punrei 
 
 1. 'AaiXysia t'iktu vfiptv, 
 voWoi d<nv iraipoi, tv Sc cnrovdaiig 7 Tpayfian oXiyot. 
 3. *0 ttXovtoq ottclvuoq' kcu cvSciac rove avupionovg 
 
§47.] THIRD DECL.-IRREGULAR NOUNS. 77 
 
 Xvti. 4. w E7rou ttj <f>vati. 5. Ai ai to tov aivparog h n- 
 Ovfxia i 2 TroXtpovg kcu araaeig kcu pa\ag 7rapt\ovatv. 
 6. ’Ey Talg TroXtaiv at ap\ai vo/xcov <pvhaKtg tlaiv . 7. 
 
 *At rt\^ta9t t w 7 ToXlrai, araatiov. 1 8. ’OptytaQs koXwv 
 it pa^tojv. 3 9. A ia(f)or)OL tlaiv ai tmv (3porujv ipvatig. 
 10. ’Es vfiptuig ttoXXu KaKa yiyvtrai. 11. Katcou avSpog 
 Stopa ovrjatv ouk i\ti. 12. Ad^a teat 7rXoyroe avtv avv- 
 tatcog ovk aatyaXri KT^para tlaiv. 13. Ot Kapnoi yXv- 
 Ktig tlaiv. 14. ’Apzrir}Q fitfiaiai tlaiv ai KTi'iatig povai. 
 15. TloXXa aarr) Ttiyr) t\ti. 16. Ot tov aartog Trvpyoi 
 (3if3aioi tlaiv. 17. O i Trvpyoi T(v aartt 4 Koapog 5 tlaiv. 
 
 *§ 157. 2 the lusts of the body. 3 § 158, 3. (b). 4 §161, 5. 
 
 *an ornament. 
 
 ( 3. How is it that tr<rdvsus is proparoxytone, when its final syl¬ 
 lable is long ? 5. In what Case is tmUmt; ? 13. In what Case is 
 
 ykvxsTs ? Why is it perispomenon , and <rra.cnis not ? 15. Why is 
 *X, U in the Sing. ?) 
 
 1. Wealth frees from scarcity and need. 2. In 
 the state the magistrates are the guardians of the 
 laws. 3. Young-man, strive-after a noble action! 
 4. The possession of virtue is alone secure. 5. Good 
 laws bring order to cities. 6. Soldiers fight for 1 the 
 safety of cities. 7. Citizens, avoid seditions I 
 
 t 
 
 1 mfi, with Gen. 
 
 § 47. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension . 
 
 1. h4vf)p, see § 36; yaXa, yovv , Sopv, ovg f § 39; 
 \tipt § 35, Obs. 2. 
 
 2. r v v {] ( ri , ivoman), Gen. yvvaiK-og, Dat. yvvauc-i , 
 Acc. yvvaiK-a, Voc. yvvai 9 PI. yvvaiKtgj yvvaiKwv y 
 yvvai^i(v), yvvaiKag.* 
 
 3. Ztvg, (Jupiter), Ge n. Aide, Dat. Ati, Aco 
 At'a, Voc. Z tv. 
 
 • Remark the accentuation in the Gen. and Dat. 
 
78 THIRD DECLENSION. [ChAP.1V. 
 
 4. 0 p i £ (n, hair), Gen. rpi\-6g, Dat. PI. Opi%i(v). 
 See § 8, 11. 
 
 5. KXstg (h» key), Gen. icXaS-dc, Dat. kXei^-i, 
 Acc. kXcT c-a, and commonly k\uv; PL Nom. kXu&q 
 A cc. k\uq. 
 
 6. Kvw (6, i7, dog), Gen. Kw-og, Dat. kvvi, Acc 
 
 KVVa, Voc. KVOV r PI. KVVtQ, KUVUtV, KWl(v), KVVdQ 
 
 7. A a g (6, stone), Gen. Xaog, Dat. Xat, Acc. Xav, 
 (seldom Xaa); PL \atg, Xaaw, \aeaai(v). 
 
 8: Maprwc (6, i7, witness), Gen. paprvpog , Dat. 
 /uaprupi, Acc. yapTvpa, (less commonly yaprvv); Dat 
 PL iiapTv<u(v)- 
 
 9. N av g (17, navis, ship), Gen. vstog, Dat. vri't, 
 Acc. vavv, Voc. vciv ^.Dual:: Gen. and Dat. veoiu, 
 (Nom. and Acc. are not in use); Pl. vr\zg, veutv, vav- 
 a!(v), vavg. Comp, -ypauc and j 3acn\evg, § 41.. 
 
 10. w Y 8 (*) p' (to, water),. Gen. vcarog, &C. 
 
 XXV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 'Ah™*, -ov, 0, Athenian. 
 
 Aixko's, - 0 ?, 0 , AEacus. 
 m .\i 5 ns, -ov, 0, Hades (Pluto), the 
 god of the lower world. 
 
 Ai)ia\p, -ovos, 0, -tEthiopian. 
 anoTos, -ev, faithless, treacher¬ 
 ous, incredible. 
 
 Viws, -tus, >j, prayer, entreaty. 
 $&%o/xai, I receive. 
 txxXvaia, -as, 15, public-assembly. 
 r^yfos, h, hair. 
 
 iHvv, I set-right, direct, guide. 
 \arbs, -ev, 0, loom. 
 
 VLatrreoo, -o^os, b, Gastdr. 
 xt<pxXn, -vs, *), head, 
 xitrrri, -ns, >5, chest, coffer, 
 xoiXaivu, I hollow -OUt. 
 
 xofAt^u, I bring, carry, 
 xrus, -svof, 0, comb. 
 
 xrtvi^u, I COmb. 
 xvfbos, -ev, b, a die ; xvfioi, dice, 
 xufbsgvnms, -ov, b, helmsman, pilot, 
 f&xgrvglx, -as, rf, witness , testi¬ 
 mony. 
 
 elx'iu, -as, n, house, residence , 
 household. 
 
 Axes, -ov, b, llOUSe. 
 enait^eixos, •ov , running-round, 
 gadding-about. 
 orsT^a, -as, n, rock. 
 
 Ilokub&vxns, - ovs, 0 , Polydeukes 
 (Pollux). 
 
 trrxyuv, -6vos, n, drop • 
 auZ,u, I save, preserve. 
 
 <rurn£, -n^ostb, saviour, preserver, 
 utpiktia, -as, n, advantage, profit, 
 benefit. 
 
 1. At yvvaiKzg Toynoapig \afpovmv. 2. Ot w EXXij- 
 
 • Remark the accentuation in the Gen, and Dat. 
 

 § 47.] THIRD DECL.—IRREGULAR NOUNS. 79 
 
 <xlj3 ovrai Aia icat IlotmSw Kal 'AttoXXu) kcu aXXovg 
 Oeovg. 3. Tate yvvai%iv 1 ri alSatg spinet, 4. 01 kvviq 
 tov olkov (j)v\aTTOV(Tiv . 5. *0 Kvj3spv^Trig rrjv vavv 
 Wuvei. 6. At GTayovtQ tov vSarog irirpav KOiXaivov- 
 <riv. 7. ’E xOaipu) yvvcuica 7 Tep&pofxov. 8. Ttje yvvai - 
 icoe 2 tori rot» olkov (pvXarTEiv. 9. FuvatKoc 2 laOXfig 
 t(TTL (TUJ^ELV OIKLCIV. 10. ’Ati tu Tr'nrrovaiv o i A Log kit* 
 fioi, 11. 0 i Kvvfg toXq av0p(x)7roig uicpiXeiav /cat rjSo- 
 vrjv irapt^ovcnv. 12. At tCov fiaprypiov fjLapTvpiai 7roX- 
 XaKLQ aTTlGTOl ELXJLV. 13. 'larol yvvaiKiov spya, Kal ovk 
 6tc»cX»jatat. 3 14. Kaju/Se, <n 7rat, rr)v Trig klotyiq kXuv. 
 15. Zcu, Styou rr)t» rou arv^ovg dericnv. 16. Katr- 
 rejp Kal rioXvStVKrjg tCjv vewv rranijoEg rjaav. 17. Fu- 
 vaiKi* Tracnj Koafiov i] aiyi) (frtpEL. 18. Ot yzpovTtg 
 bXiyag rpt'yac ev rrj kE< j)aXrj e\o vcriv. 19. ’£1 yvvai , 
 orw^£ rrjv olfct'ai/. 20. Tip ktevI rag rp'r^ag ktev'i%0[1Ev. 
 21. r O AiaKog rag ''AlSov /cXttc (pvXaTTti . 
 
 * § 1G1, 2. (c). 2 § 15S, 2. 3 i<V/» understood. 4 § 161, 5. 
 
 (2. In what Case is notru^Z ? Why is it circumflexed ? 10. 
 
 What is the Nom. form of A/oV ? 11. Of xvv-$ ? What is the 
 
 quantity of the final syllable of u^iXuav? How may it be dis¬ 
 covered by inspection ? 15. In what Case is arv^ovs ? 18. What 
 
 is the Nom. form of r£i%xs ?) 
 
 1 . The woman delights in decoration. 2. It is the 
 business 1 of women to guard the house. 3. Boy, 
 bring the key of the house ! 4. Women delight-in 
 
 beautiful hair. 2 5. The Athenians had 3 many ships. 
 6 . Believe (sing.) not all witnesses! 7. It is the 
 
 business of dogs to watch the house. 8. Zeus had 3 
 many temples. 9. The fishes peep-up from 4 the 
 water. 10. The pilots direct the ships. 11. Modesty 
 is-becoming-to a woman. 
 
 ire*, with Gen. * Dative. 8 »/<r«y, with Dat. 4 te. 
 
80 
 
 PARTICIPLES 
 
 [Chap. IV. 
 
 § 48. Irregular Adjectives . 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 ergZos or(>x i7x orgdov, Mild. 
 
 irgctotr tr ^ a t s a s trgxoo j 
 
 vr^au vc pallet. ir^dea 
 
 or^xov a* £ x t 7 a t ir^dot 
 
 orgdos, irqZi «■ £ a t7 a trgaov 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 o. 
 
 D. 
 
 1 A. 
 
 j V. 
 
 orgdot and srgo. *7* trgx$7xi irt>xix 
 
 or x t eo v or g x f . t u v or ^ x t eo v 
 
 a* (> x 1 <c t (») { r g a t < a, i f a* £ x i er i (») 
 
 ir^dovs and <r (> a i7 1 a- £ x 1 i x < a* (>xt x 
 
 ergdot and or g x s7 s or £ x t 7 at. or ^ x t a 
 
 Daal. 
 
 ir^du tr (> at i a ir^d u 
 
 readout ic^xtixtv if(fdoiv.^ 
 
 Obs. 1. The forms which are in spaced printing, (a3 <r % a t7 a), 
 are borrowed from a dialectic form or^xts (Ionic ir^nis). 
 
 S.N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Much. 
 
 a* 9 X v s iroXXri or o A v 
 
 oroXXou xroXXvjj ofoXXov 
 
 oroXXd oroXXv oroXX d 
 
 1 4 / * 
 it o X v v iroXXriv or o X u 
 
 or o X u oroXXrt if o X v 
 
 Great. 
 
 piyxs piyxXn pi yet 
 piyxXou fJtiydtXns ftsyaXov 
 (jtiydXw jXiydXri fi'yciXy 
 piyotv fiiyxXriv fjtiyx 
 p i y x /xsydXri (a. i y a 
 
 P. N. 
 G. 
 
 oroXXo'i oroXXxi oroXXx 
 oroXXeov <xoX7.uv icoXXZv 
 
 Other Cases regular. 
 
 fjt.iyd.Xoi fA.iyd.Xou (JtiydXat 
 fxsydXuv fjaydXm fjtiyxXur 
 Other Cases regular. 
 
 Obs. 2. The Nom., Acc., and Voc. Sing. ( Masc . andNeut.) are 
 the only Cases which are formed regularly from oroXvs and piyxs. 
 The other Cases are declined as if from the obsolete forms I10A- 
 A02, METAA02. 
 
 DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 errx$ 
 
 ffrdtrot 
 
 l 
 
 <rra.v 
 
 Xtorevv 
 
 XtTOUtTX 
 
 Xterev 
 
 G. 
 
 errxvrof 
 
 ffrdtrsf 
 
 or dvr of 
 
 Xiorovrof 
 
 Xtorovtrrif 
 
 Xtordvros 
 
 D. 
 
 errdvn 
 
 ffrxtrn 
 
 errdvn 
 
 Xiorovn 
 
 Xioroverri 
 
 Xiorovn 
 
 A. 
 
 errdvrx 
 
 errdtrxv 
 
 arezv 
 
 Xior'ovrx 
 
 Xtorovtrxv 
 
 Xtorov 
 
 y. 
 
 errds 
 
 ffrdtrot 
 
 ffrdv 
 
 "kiocdov 
 
 XiTovtrx 
 
 Xtordt 
 
 P. N. 
 
 errdvrtt 
 
 ercdtrxt 
 
 errdvrot 
 
 Xrrdvns 
 
 XlTOUTXt 
 
 Xiieovrat ! 
 
 G. 
 
 err dvr a* 
 
 errxffuv 
 
 errxvruv 
 
 Xiorovreov 
 
 XtoeovtrZv 
 
 Xiorovreot 
 
 D. 
 
 errdtri[y) 
 
 errdrxif 
 
 ffrd<r/(v) 
 
 Xtorovtri[v) Xiorovtrxif Xiorovtn[v) 
 
 A. 
 
 err dvr xs 
 
 order a f 
 
 errdvrot 
 
 Xiorovrxf 
 
 Xtocoutrxf 
 
 XiTfovra 
 
 y. 
 
 err dvr if 
 
 ordeal 
 
 err dvr a 
 
 XiorSvrtf 
 
 Xiorouoxt 
 
 Xeorovrx 
 
 Dual. 
 
 errdvn 
 
 ffrdtrot 
 
 errdvn 
 
 Xtordvrs 
 
 Xtorojtrx 
 
 Xiorovn 
 
 
 errdvroiv 
 
 trrotffxiv 
 
 err&vrotv. 
 
 Xiorivroiv 
 
 Xioroutrxtv Xiorovrotv. 
 
§48.] 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 
 81 
 
 S. N. 
 
 XaQtiti s 
 
 -i7<ra 
 
 -tv 
 
 ayytXuv -oura 
 
 -ovi 
 
 G. 
 
 Xti'ptitvros 
 
 -li/rrs 
 
 -ivros 
 
 ayytXovvTos - o'rtis 
 
 -tuvrof 
 
 D. 
 
 Xll^tilVTl 
 
 -ti<rq 
 
 -evn 
 
 ayyiXotivTi -ovr\ j 
 
 -ouvrt 
 
 A. 
 
 \u<ptiiiTa 
 
 -t7<ruv 
 
 f 
 
 •ev 
 
 u.yyt'kovvTu - ouruv 
 
 -ouy 
 
 V. 
 
 Autptiils 
 
 -utra. 
 
 / 
 
 - ev 
 
 uyytXuv -ovru 
 
 -ovy 
 
 P. N. 
 
 AtiQtiiVTis 
 
 -iltrat 
 
 -SVTOC 
 
 ctyytXovvTis -ovrai 
 
 -OVVTOC 
 
 Gr. 
 
 XuiptiiVTUV 
 
 -II7UV 
 
 •iVTCt) V 
 
 uyytXovvTwv - avrZv 
 
 -evyTut 
 
 D. 
 
 Xtl<ptii7o , l[v 
 
 -tier 011s 
 
 -t7n[v ) 
 
 ayytXovn -ovrais 
 
 -ovn 
 
 A. 
 
 AtlQtisVTUS 
 
 -liras 
 
 -IVTU 
 
 uyytXovvTus -ovrag 
 
 -OVVTU 
 
 V. 
 
 XuptiiVTiS 
 
 -urai 
 
 -tVTOC 
 
 uyytXouvTts -ovrai 
 
 -ouvtu 
 
 Dual. 
 
 kuptiivTt 
 
 -lira. 
 
 -tVTS 
 
 uyytXovvTt -ovtru 
 
 -euvrt 
 
 
 XutptitvToiv 
 
 -t irony 
 
 -tvro/y 
 
 ctyytXovyToiy -ovtruiv 
 
 -0UVT0IV. 
 
 Obs. 3. All Participles in -as are declined like crrus; all Present, 
 second Aor. and first Fat. Active Participles in -m, like Xioruv ; 
 all first and second Aor. Passive Participles, like Xtnpffiis, and all 
 Fut. Act. participles of liquid verbs, like uyytXuv. 
 
 tUT The Vocative of Participles is always the 
 same as the Nominative. 
 
 XXVI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Alywrros, -ov, *i, Egypt. 
 
 'AhiZoivSgos, ■ ov, b, Alexander. 
 aXyos, (- to;=)-ovs, to, pain. 
 i$ 6 ovix, -us, it, freedomfrom- 
 envy, abundance, plenty. 
 
 Sties, ( •tos=)-evs , to, custom, man¬ 
 ner. 
 
 ’lX/ecs, -abos, *i, the Iliad. 
 
 KgoTtros, -ov , o, CrCRSUS. 
 
 M uxtbeuv, - 6 \>os, o, Macedonian, 
 ixiyos, -n, -ov, little, small, [help, 
 itplxxu, I increase, strengthen , 
 
 irutios, (-ios==)-ovs, rb , suffering, 
 passion. 
 
 vr(>a.os, orgutTu, or^xov, mild, gentle, 
 soft. 
 
 orgos-uyo/Jiuu, I call , name, ad¬ 
 dress. 
 
 irtfs-o'&os, -ev, h, ( 1 ) approach ; 
 
 (2) income, revenue, (redltus). 
 <t 7 tos, -ov, o, corn, food. 
 
 <p'o(Los, -ov, o,fear ; <pb[Zov 3 i%tiv, to 
 have fear } to be attended ivith 
 fear. 
 
 i . noXi/v olvov 7 t'iveiv kokov lanv. 2. Ot f3acrtX£tg 
 peyaXag npogoSovg e\ov(uv. 3. ’Ev Aryu7rrtp 7 ToXXrj 
 cfltov a(J)0ov'ici rjv. 4 . 'H OaXarra ptyaXrj tariv. 5 . 
 Msya 7ra0og 7 rpogayop£vo/uev ’1 Xt dSa KUKtOV. 6 . Kpo't- 
 mp l rjv TToXvg irXovTog. 7. IloXXawe oXlyrjg 17 S 0 - 
 vrjg fiiya y/yvtrai aXyog. 8. Upatai Xoyotg ri^ewc 
 tiKOfiev. 2 9. Ta fityaXa Siopa Tijg <pd(3ov . 3 
 
 10. IloXXwv avOpomtJV tdr} tart 7 Tpaia. 11. Ilovoc 
 apETrjv piya 4 o<piXXu. 12. Ol TraiSeg to vg 7 rpyovg tto- 
 
 E 2 
 
32 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [CHAP. IV* 
 
 rtpag Ka\ rag irpaeiag priTtpag arlpyovaiv. 13. OfiiAiav 
 2 y£® rote irpafoiv avOpwiroiQ. 2 14. At yuimiicfc vpatla it 
 ziaiv. 15. ’A\e%av8pov, rov MaietSovtov (5acriXea, pt- 
 yav airayoptvovcnv. 
 
 i § 161, 2. (<T). 2 § 161, 2. (a). 3 are attended with fear. 4 greatly, 
 (a Neut. Adj. used adverbially ). 6 = associate with. 
 
 ( 10. What Number is tin ? 12. What other form may be used 
 for Orlovs ? Why is the Greek word for “ gentle” repeated with 
 
 /tilTlgaf ?) 
 
 1. Abstain-from (sing.) much wine ! 2. Kings 
 
 have 1 great revenues. 3. Egypt lias 2 great abun¬ 
 dance of corn. 4. Croesus has 3 great wealth. 5. 
 Strive-after (sing.) gentle manners! 6. Women 
 have 3 a gentle nature (< pixrig ). 7. Alexander, king 
 
 of the Macedonians, is called the Great. 
 
 i Say : to kings are , &c. 2 Say : in Egypt is, &c. 8 i<rri, with 
 
 Dat, • 
 
 § 49. Comparison of Adjectives . 
 
 The Greek language has two forms to indicate 
 the two degrees of comparison (Comparative and 
 Superlativej ; of these two forms by far the more 
 common is - t £ p o c, - r i p 5, - r £ P o v, for the Com- 
 parative, and -t ar o g, -rarrj, -rarov,_lor the 
 Superlative; a much rarer form is -1 o> v, - 7 o v, (or 
 - w v, - o v), for the Comparative, and-i a t o g ,- lar n> 
 i <y t o v, for the Superlative. 
 
 Obs. 1. The Superlative in Greek, as in Latin, expresses a qua¬ 
 lity in the highest degree, or only in a very high degree. 
 
 Obs. 2. In Greek, as in Latin, instead of the simple forms oi 
 the Comparative and Superlative, pZMov ( magis) and f*»\urro 
 (maxime) are sometimes prefixed to the Positive. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 83 
 
 f 50.J 
 
 § 50. A. First Form of Comparison . 
 
 Comparative, -repo g, -rep a, -repo v* 
 Superlative, - r a r o e, - r a r 17 , -rarov. 
 
 The following Adjectives append these endings 
 in the following manner:— 
 
 I. Adjectives in - o g, - v (- a), - o v. 
 
 (a) Most Adjectives of this class, after dropping 
 <r, annex the above endings to the simple Root of 
 the Masculine, and retain the o. This o remains un¬ 
 altered when a syllable long by nature or by position 
 (§ 9, 3) precedes, ( a mute and liquid always make the 
 syllable long in this case ) ; but, in order to prevent 
 the concurrence of too many short syllables, o is 
 lengthened into when a short syllable precedes; 
 
 e. g.— 
 
 xou<p-os, light. 
 l<r%Ui3-e$, strong. 
 Xewr-oV, thin. 
 e<po\-os, vehement. 
 mx/i-os, hitter. 
 eotp-os, wise. 
 
 « XU£-o's,flrm. 
 uZi- »s, worthy. 
 
 (b) Contracts in -soe = -ovg. and -oog = - ovg , suf¬ 
 fer contraction in the Comparative and Superlative 
 also; the former contract ew into w, the latter, 
 after dropping - og , i-nsert the syllable-te, which is 
 contracted with the preceding o; e. g.— 
 
 (c) The following Adjectives in - a i o g, —viz. ye- 
 
84 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [Chap. IV. 
 
 p a 16 g, old, 7 r a X a 16 g, ancient, tt £ p a i o g, 
 other-side , o\o\aXo g, slow —drop -oc an( l append 
 - r £ p o g and - r a r o c to the Root ; e. g. 
 
 yt^x,-6s, Comp. yt^xi-n^os, Sap. yiox't-rxros. 
 
 vtxXxi-os, — -ruXa'm^os, — yrxXxi-rxros, 
 
 (d)The following Adjectives in - o g ,—viz. evdtog, 
 calm, fj cr v % o g, quiet, K § i o c, own, i & o g, equal, p t “ 
 
 <r o middle, 6 p 9 p i o g, early, oipiog, late, tt apa- 
 n \ fj cr i o g, like, and tt p w t o c, early-in-the-day after 
 dropping - oc> insert the syllable-at, so that the Com¬ 
 parative and Superlative of these Adjectives are like 
 those of the preceding class in -mog; e. g.— - 
 
 petr-os, Comp. f*ttr-ai-rt£Of, Sap. pitr-xj-rxros. 
 
 ft,-OS, — t$i~x',-rtgos, — fii-x'i-rxros. 
 
 Obs. 1. # / x o s, beloved, dear, has three different forms of com- * 
 parison : <p,XeoTt^os, tpiXcorxros ; (piXngos, (piX'rxros ; (fiiXxiTigos, <p,Xx,~ 
 rxros. Its most common forms are : Comp. pxXXov q>ix 0i ; Sap. <pix- 
 Txros. 
 
 (e) Two Adjectives in - o g, — viz. Ippwpivog, 
 vigorous, and a k p a t o g, unmixed after di opping 
 -og, insert the syllable -eg ; e. g. tppwpsv-h-Tepog, ip- 
 pwfiev-eG-TCLTog, axpar-Ecr-rspog, aiKpaT-to-rarog. 
 also alSoiog, modest, has alSodaraTog in the Super- 
 
 lative. # , 
 
 (f) The following Adjectives in - o g ,—viz. AaAoc, 
 
 talkative, povo (p ay o g, eating-alone, o\p o<p ay o g, 
 dainty, and tt t w \ 6 g, poor — after dropping -og, in¬ 
 sert the syllable -ig ; e. g. XaX-o g. Comp. XaX-LG-Tepog, 
 Sup. \a\-ia-TaTog . 
 
 II. Adjectives in - rj e, Gen. - o v. change the end¬ 
 ing -rig into -1 g ; e. g. icXfc7r r-rjg, Gen. -ov, thievish , 
 Comp. K\E 7 TT-[(T-T£pog, Sup. KXeTTT'lG-TaTOg . 
 
 So also one Adjective in ->j? of the III. Decl.; ipst/fas, -*» , (Gen. 
 -tof=.ovs), deceitful, g/iihitn^os, ^iuVttrTxros. 
 
 XXVII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 *a yxXXu, I honour, deck ; Mid. 
 / glory-in, am-proud-of, de¬ 
 light-in, (i)at.). 
 
 xlgsTo?, * 'a, -6v, choice, eligible; 
 
 (Comparative, preferable-to), 
 * A^ixtifiyis, -ou, o , Aristide#, 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 85 
 
 §50.] 
 
 Elaios, - 5 , -er, forcible, violent . 
 lixaios, -a, -ov, JUSt, Upright. 
 
 tins, (-£0f =-««*), to, nation,peo¬ 
 ple. 
 
 *hVos, -ov, o, Indian. 
 
 Kakklas, -ov, o, Callias. 
 
 KuxkcuyJ/, -u’TOs, o, Cyclops . 
 Auxtlaipovtos, -ov, o, I/CtcedccmO- 
 nian. 
 
 toI think, consider. 
 
 ovbtU, -ivos, no-one; oils*, no¬ 
 thing. 
 
 orctTQis, -/ bos, ft, native-land. 
 
 ciuvn, -r,s, *i, silence. 
 
 "STa^rizrtxbs, -57,-ov, Spartan. 
 
 v'lpios, -oL,-ov, honoured, esteemed, 
 precious. 
 
 X'lXibwv, - ovos, fi, swallow ; (Dat. 
 %t\ibo 7 ). 
 
 %(}'4<ri/zos, - v , -ov, useful, fit, ser¬ 
 viceable. 
 
 Rule of Syntax] The expression denoting com¬ 
 parison, which in English is subjoined to the Com¬ 
 parative by than , is subjoined in Greek by rj, than , 
 (Lat. quam); or, more commonly , by the Gen. with¬ 
 out rj , (corresponding to the Lat. Ablative ), when 
 that expression must have stood in the Nom. or Acc. 
 after rj if expressed. Hence the rule; The Compa¬ 
 rative governs the Gen. ichen ?; is omitted. 
 
 1. f ApKJTE&riQ TTTOjyhxTaro^ 1 i?v, aXXa Sncaiorarog. 
 2. Oi KvkXcotteq |3 laiuraroi r/oav. 3. K aXXiag ttXov- 
 (TUOTaTOQ 5 AOrjvatiov. 4. OuStu ouoTrrig tern \p , n <yt ~ 
 fllvTtpOV. 5. TTOT 2 tOTLV aipZTb)T£Oa XoyOV. 6. 
 
 Oi>fc goTi 3 GO(j)'iaQ riyubrepov. 7. 2o <j)ici ttXovtov^K rrjpa 
 Tipnu)T£p6v Igtiv- 8. H AaKiSaijuowcov Ciaira rjv airXov- 
 orarij. 9. Ot ytpainpoi 4 rate rCov veiov npalf ayaX- 
 Xovrai. 10. Ou£ty Trarpi^og rote ai'Opujrroig 6 (piXrspov. 
 11. Of , IvSot TraXa/rarou hOvog 7 vopt^ovrai. 12. Cl 
 veavtat, tort r) ( yv\afraToi. 13. O i **napTiciTiKOi vea- 
 viai Eppiv/iEVtaTtpoi rjcrav twv ’A Qqvaiiov. 14* HoXXoi 
 TWV ^tXlSoVlJOV^ ELGl XaXlGTEOOl. 15. Ot SovXoi 7roX* 
 Xaictg ifievSiaTciTOi Ka\ KXsTmaraTOi ticn r. 
 
 * very-poor. 2 sometimes. 3 there is nothing. 4 Lat. seniores. 
 6 § 161, 2. (c). 6 § 161, 5. (a). 7 § 146, 2. 8 than swallows. 
 
 (4. Why is <nuws, the Gen., used? 5. Why is \<rr)v accented, 
 when the preceding word is unaccented ? By what rule does the 
 feminine of ul^irun^os end in a? Why is ctiosruregcc paroxytone? 
 6. In what Case is aotpius 1 10, What Verb is understood ? 11. 
 In what Case is tins ?) 
 
 1 , The father is wiser than the son. 2 The most* 
 
m 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [CHAP. IV. 
 
 precious possession is that of virtue. 3. The mode- 
 of-life of Socrates was very-simple. 4. None of the 
 Athenians was juster than Aristides. 5. The oldest 
 are not always the wisest. 6. Men are quieter than 
 boys. 7. The Lacedaemonians were very-vigorous. 
 8. Old-women are often very-talkative. 9. The ra¬ 
 ven is very-thievish. 
 
 III. Adjectives of the third Declension:— 
 
 (I). Those in -vg,-ela, - v, - r\ c, - £ g (Gen. 
 
 - e 0 - a?,-av, and the word pi a k a p, happy , 
 
 append -r e po g and »raroc immediately to the 
 simple Root, which appears in the Neuter; e. g.— 
 
 ryXvxvs, Neut. -« — ykuxv-rt^os yXuxv-rxrot 
 
 o-XyiMs, Neut. -is — uXviQiff-n^os cc\vi6i<r-rctTos 
 
 vrivvs, Neilt. -is — vnvitr-rigos -riv'nr-raroi 
 
 ftsXxSy Neut. -av — pikav-rigos ftiXav-rctros 
 
 ftcixccg, Neut. -U£ — fAXKU£-rt£OS paxu^-raros. 
 
 Obs. 2. The Adjectives and or o x 6s have the 
 
 second form of Comparison, viz. in -/uv and -«». See § 51, I. and 
 § 52, 9. 
 
 (2) . Compounds of ^ a p i g insert ; e. g.— 
 
 sTixaois, -t, Gen. ’vri^d^ir-es, agreeable, 
 
 Comp. ivri%otgir-u-ri(>os, Sup. tTi%u£tr-u-rare$• 
 
 (3) . Adjectives in - w v, - o v (Gen. -ovog), insert 
 the connecting syllable -e g , e. g.— 
 
 tfialpetv, Neut. tu&aipov, 'prosperous, happy , 
 
 Comp. iubouy.ov-i<r-Ti£Oi, iv^xipov-ia-rarof. 
 
 (4). Adjectives in -£ append to the Root sometimes 
 -cr;, sometimes -ig\ e. g.— 
 
 i<p 5}ju£, Gen. a.QnX'ix.-os, elderly, 
 
 Comp. u(p'/iXtx-itr-rigos, 
 Sup. al{)'/i\i%-t<r-raros. 
 
 ao>xctt, Gen. a.£<roy-os, rapax, 
 Comp, ag-ray-ior-rtgos, 
 Sl\p. Ta y - <<r- Txrof. 
 
 (5). Adjectives in - e i c, - £ v, the Root of which 
 ends in - vt, affix the endings -rtpoc, -raroe immedi¬ 
 ately to the Root; -wr-Tepogf-ivT-rarog being at the 
 
} 50*3 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 87 
 
 ,ume time changed, according to the laws of euphony, 
 into -i<TT6pog and -iararog, (§ 8, 3 and 8); e. g.— 
 
 %*oUk, Neut. x a i liv i graceful, 
 
 Comp. x a i il ~ ari i 0 ^» Sup. x a ^ mffTa<ro{ * 
 
 XXVIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Atrnt, -vs, *i, jffitna. 
 atya, (poet.), quickly, (Adv.). 
 «£*■«£> -ayes, rapax, rapacious, 
 greedy . 
 
 itcforhs, -ts, feeble, powerless . 
 iru%ta, -as, v, misfortune. 
 'AQfiolfrti, -vs, h, AphroditS, 
 (Venus). 
 
 P>a.6vs, -t7a, -v, deep. 
 
 (Za£vs, -ua, -i, heavy, weighty, 
 oppressive, burdensome, 
 yv^as, -a,os , to, old-age. 
 xyx^arvs, -is, continent, temper 
 rate, moderate. 
 iu<rt(ivs, -ts, pious . 
 ivfca/Jis, -i, Gen. -iros, graceful, 
 agreeable, pleasing. 
 r$v, -vs, v, youth . 
 
 K oiTttts, m ov, o, Gritias. 
 
 fitcroTvs, -TvTos, v, the mean, tno 
 diocrity, moderation, 
 tovftz, -oiros, to, thought, idea, 
 i^os, -v, -ov, straight, correct, 
 upright . 
 
 o^v, -vs, v, impetus, rushing- 
 forth, attack , impulse, ardent- 
 desire, passion. 
 
 ovhe, and-not, neither, not-even. 
 tra^av^-vcnos, -a, -ov, (and vra- 
 (txorXvtrios , -ov), lying close-to, 
 near, alike. 
 
 tT(>io-(Zvs, -vos and -tots, o, old. 
 man, (in this signf. only in 
 Acc. and Voc., <rgt<r(iuv, xtftr- 
 (5v) : sr(>i<r(iuTtt>ot, seniores, el¬ 
 ders. 
 
 uxjs, -tiet, -v, quick • 
 
 1. Ah/'a, wg vorifia, vaptpx^aL rlflv, ouS* 'iTnrwv opfirj 
 
 y[yvETai (VKvrepa. 2. To yijpag (5apvrepov ionv k'lrvng. 
 
 3. f O davarog rip (3aOvranp inrvip 1 TrapaTrXriaiaiTaTOQ 
 
 to tiv. 4. O l vtoi roTg rwv Trpt(rj3vTEpi*)v hraivoig 2 
 
 \aipovdiv. 5. <Pi\(ag Encalag icrrjaig lanv adcpaXtcr- 
 
 Tart}. 6. *H fieooTiig 3 * * * 7 Iv iraaiv acr(paXeanpa lanv. 
 
 7. Ol yepovrtg adOtvEGTEpoi ei<ji twv veivv. 8. BovAiJc 
 opOrjg ovStv lanv aafpoXianpov. 9. Ot KopaKtg pt- 
 Xuvraroi eIgiv. 10. ’A^po&rrj c v X aptrujra T v- H- 
 
 Ol EVGE^EGTOTOl EvSaijUOVEGTCtTOl ElGLV» 12. 2(OKpaTTJC 
 
 lyicpciTEOTaTog h v KaL GweppovEGTarog. 13. Ey rate 
 arv\laig A ttoXXcikiq ol avOpiDiroi awippovEGTEpoi eigiv, rj 
 tv Talg evTv\laig. 14. Kptriae v v apirayiGTarog. 15. 
 ’AippoStTrj xapiEdrarri iracrwv Oediv. 
 
 i § 161, 2. (b). 2 161, 2. (c). 3 the mean, i. e. a medium courae. 
 
 • aru%iui, res adversse, adversity ; tvTv%lctt res seeundae, prosperity. 
 
 * Gen. of 6ti, goddess . 
 
83 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. |*ChAP. IV, 
 
 (5. In what Case is QiXitzs ? 6. Why is xxaif not paroxytone, like 
 ? 8. Of what two words is olli* compounded ? 14. What 
 
 is the Positive of u^xa.yiararos ? 15. Why is xa.au* perispomenon ?) 
 
 1. Old-age is very-burdensome. 2. Nothing is 
 quicker than thought. 3. The mean is the safest. 
 4. No bird is blacker than the raven. 5. The 
 ./Ethiopians are very-black. 6. Nothing is more- 
 pleasing than youth. 7. No-one of the Athenians 
 was more-temperate or wiser than Socrates. 8. No- 
 one was more-rapacious than Critias. 9. Nothing is* 
 more-graceful than a beautiful flower. 
 
 § 51. B. Second Form of Comparison . 
 
 Comparative, -1 w v, Neut. - tov; or-wv, Neut. - o v, 
 Superlative, -itrTOf, - ia t i), - t or o v. 
 
 Obs. 1. On the declension of Comparatives of this form, see 
 § 35, Obs. 4. 
 
 This form of comparison includes:— 
 
 I. 'HS v g, sweet, and r a \v g, swift , which drop 
 the ending -vg. Tap? lias in the Comparative 
 Oaaae)v (Att. Oarrcov), [§ 8, 11], Neut. Oaaraov ( Oar - 
 to „). Thus:— 
 
 fi-vt* Comp. vd-fuf, Neut. rfr-lof, Sup. fc-iaros, -jj, -of, 
 
 TU%-VSt ~~~ (ciTTUV, - 6ot,TTOV, - TCt^iaTOg, -VI, - Of . 
 
 Obs. 2. The others in -vs, as jS aJ 6 $, deep , jS a g 6 s, heavy , /3 ^ a - 
 ^ «s, sjow, vs, short, y Xv kv s, sweet , $«. a v s , thick, tv^vs, 
 
 wide, o%v Si sharp, <r g e a ft v s, old, u kv s, swift, have the form in 
 
 -tirtoos, - vrccros, [§ 50, III. (1)]. 
 
 II. Two Adjectives in - p o g t viz. a l a 6 g, 
 
 base, shameful , p 6 g 9 hateful , hostile , (the ending 
 
 -pug being dropped here also) ; e. g.— 
 
 m * /r KV i * Comp, at<r%-tur t Neut. eciafc-Tof, Sup. ttlrx~Kfrot. 
 
f 51. J 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 89 
 
 XXIX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 AXA 0/1 -cu, —cc, othei s. 
 
 %uot, -oo, rS, living-creature, ani¬ 
 mal. 
 
 Kaif'of, -ou, o, (1) occasion, oppor¬ 
 tunity ; (2) time [in general). 
 \oirfc, -b, -or, remaining ; ol Xot- 
 *04, the rest, the others. 
 
 I carry-off, remove, 
 
 change. 
 
 oUroU, -of, piteous, wretched, 
 ctrpn, -j "is, b, smell, perfume, 
 o'pis, -tws, o , b, serpent. 
 
 *a.oJx > co, I present; Mid. I afford,, 
 produce. 
 
 1. *0 fiaOuraroQ v7rvog rjSiardg tanv. 2. rioXXa 
 avOrj rjSlarrjv oa/urjv 7 rapt\tTat. 3. Ovblv Qarrov tan 
 T»je rjj3t)g. 4. Tijv alaxfarrjv SovXtlav 1 ol aKpartig Sow- 
 Xevovaiv• 5. fl avnov^ rjSiaTou tan.v rj (J)L\ia. 6. Ou- 
 Sei/ ala^iov ianv, fj aXXa 3 ptv tv vCg t)(tiv, aXXa St 
 Atytiv. 7. 0 1 6(j)tig roTc Aonrolg (ywoig* t^Oiaroi tiaiv. 
 8. *0 tiov 7 tAovgi(vv (5log ttoWciklq oltcrportpog taTiv y 
 r\ 6 Ttov 7 revrjTwv. 9. OvStv ng avOpcoircg tydiov tanv , 
 rj 6 avOpujirog. 10. Tamara 5 6 Kaipog ptra^ipu ra 
 TTpctypara, 
 
 1 § 159, 2. 2 of all-things. 3 aXXa—Zxxa, alia—alia, one thing ■— 
 another. 4 § 161, 5. (a). 3 Lat. celerrhne, (Adv.). 
 
 I * 
 
 (2. Of what Number is oivfa ? 3. Why is the a in 6a.rrof circum- 
 fiexed? 4. What sort of an Acc. may 'SwXuaf be called ? 6. What 
 is the Nom. form of ? 8. What Noun is understood with the 
 second o ? What is the Nom. form of *tvbruy ?) 
 
 1. Nothing is sweeter than a very-deep sleep. 2. 
 Nothing is more-shameful than slavery. 3. The 
 horses are very-swift. 4. There is nothing more- 
 hateful than bad counsel. 5. The old-man has for 
 the old-man 1 the most-pleasant talk, the boy for the 
 boy. 1 6. The poor have always a very-wretched 2 
 life. 7. Nothing is more-wretched than poverty. 
 
 1 Dative. * •Ixrwrss, Sup. of oixrgos, (Comp, always oixr^sn^t). 
 
90 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [ChaP. IV. 
 
 §52. Anomalous Forms of Comparison. 
 
 Positive. 
 
 1 . xyxSos, good, 
 
 2. xaxof, bad, 
 
 3 . xxx6g, beauti¬ 
 ful, 
 
 4. kxyur'os, pain• 
 ful, f 
 
 5. (auk^os, long, 
 
 6. fAixgos, small, i 
 
 7 . oXiyoijfew, 
 
 8 . ftiycti, great, 
 
 9. <roXvt, much, 
 
 10. patiios, easy, 
 
 11. ort-rar, ripe, 
 
 12. •rfwv/Jat, 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 fx/Ativur, Neut. X/AUVOr 
 ) (itXrlar 
 
 j x^-iatrur, Att. xgrirruv* 
 
 \Xaar 
 
 (xxxiar 
 
 J 
 
 j Wtrcrwv, Att. f,rro*r* ( in- 
 ( ferior) 
 xxXXtur 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 I xgtxr os, -V, -or 
 1 (ZtXr/crros 
 j x^xnxros 
 \ Xuaros 
 
 (* x xx nr rot 
 *< xtiptrres 
 (fltxicrrx, (Adv.) 
 
 xxXXttrrog 
 
 jxXyuroTi^os 
 
 (xXyiar 
 
 fjtxxgZnoos 
 
 xXyurorxros 
 
 xXyiarrof 
 
 (Axx^tirxrot 
 
 jfAtX^TtgOf 
 
 (jXxtrtrur, Att. 1 Xxrrtor* 
 
 xttrros 
 \ (AtxoorxTOS 
 
 \ \Xx%tcrrof 
 
 (Attar 
 
 oXiyurros 
 
 (Ati^ar 
 
 (ttyurros 
 
 •rXtiur or trX'tojv 
 
 or Xu it rot 
 
 t > 
 
 pxur 
 
 fxxrof 
 
 xrtfxirt^os 
 
 trvrxirxros 
 
 •fftOTt^Of 
 
 morxrof. 
 
 and 
 
 Obs. Many of tlie above Comparatives and Superlatives are not 
 etymologically related to the Positives given ; they are, however, 
 placed with them, (their own Positives having become obsolete), 
 as they coincide with them in meaning. Thus, inEnglish, ‘better 
 c best ' % are said to be the Comp, and Sup. of ‘ good .’ 
 
 XXX. YOCABULARY. 
 
 'A rxyxxTos, -a,,-on, (Att. xrxyxxtof, 
 
 -or), necessary. 
 
 itxyxTi, -ns, n, necessity, compul¬ 
 sion. 
 
 krxe%la, -as, ft, want-of-govern¬ 
 ment, anarchy. 
 
 (iXxlZn, -ns, ft, injury, hurt, 
 ytircur, -evog, o, ft, neighbour • 
 yrupn, -vt, v, opinion. 
 tXiufogof, -x, -ov, (and tXiuCt^is, 
 -or), free, independent. 
 iftQurof, -or, implanted, innate. 
 Irion, sometimes. 
 
 iitiSvpix, -xs, ft, desire, lust, 
 tvru^nf, -is, fortunate. 
 
 H, or ; 5?— H, either — or, (aut— 
 aut). 
 
 *l fiyi£tx, -xs, jj, Spain. 
 l<r%6u, I am-strong, have-power, 
 avail. 
 
 xiXiuu, I bid, command. 
 
 xoXxxilx, -xf, 9$, flattery. 
 x^oxobuXos, - ov, o, crocodile. 
 pxXxxo's, -ft, -or, soft, effeminate. 
 xr'oXifAos, -ov, o, war. 
 axuorru, I jest, scoff. 
 
 * The forms in -vrur are later Attic than those in -tram. 
 f Remark that these first six, and iroXvs, are oxytone. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 91 
 
 5 52.] 
 
 rrcgyv, (1) I love; (2) am-ccfo- caxpgooCv*], ’■yis, *ij soundminded- 
 tented-with. . ness, modesty, wisdom, dices- 
 
 fvftfiovXog, -ov, o t adviser , coun - tity. 
 sellor. 
 
 Rule of Syntax .] 'Qg with the Superlative strength¬ 
 ens it, (like quam in Lat.); e. g, wg Tayiora, quam 
 celerrime, as quickly as possible 
 
 1. 0 i)% 6 /uaKporarog (3iog apiorog cor tv, aXXa 6 
 GirovSaiorarog. 2. Mcrpov ln\ ttclgiv apioTOv. 1 3. 
 rVa >pai rw v yEpaiTEpiov a/idvovg eigiv. 4 . 2ivpj3ovXog 
 ovdrfg e<m 2 /oeXtiiov \povov. 5. *H Xeye myrjg Kprir* 
 t ova, rj cnyrjv e\e. 3 ’Aei Kpariarov egtl to aa^aAto’- 
 
 raroy. 7. 2 KivTTTEtg , a> Xwarrc. 4 8. BeAnoyaiv ica- 
 
 KLOVQ EVLOTE EVTV\E(TTEpOL eIgIV. 9. 0 UK EGTL XvVtjg XU* 
 
 pov av0pu)7T(p 5 kokov. 10. KoXaictta rwy aXXiov airav- 
 rw kokwv ^Etpiarov egtiv. 11. f Avrjp paXaKog rrjv 
 \fjv\r)v 6 sgti ical 7 xprj/uartov rjrraiy. 8 12. T dig yvvaiZlv' 9 
 tj Gio^poGvvrj KaWiarr] apETp egtiv- 13. Ovk egtl KTrjpa 
 KaXXiov <j)i\ov. 14. 'H 3ouA Eia Tip eXevQeqip aXyiGTi] 
 EGTIV. 15. f H 6$6g JUrjKlGTT] EGTIV. 16. 'O KpOKuSEtXoQ 
 Es iXa^iGrov 9 yiyvETai piyiGTog. 17. 'H yrj eXcit- 
 tojv egtl tou rfXiov. 18. 'SiTEpyE icai 7 ra pEiio. 19. 
 * OXiyiGTOi av0pio7TOL Evdaifiovig eigiv- 20. OuSsic 
 vo/nog Ig\vei /ueiZov 10 Trig avayKrjg. 21. Mucpa KEpSrf 
 iroXXaicig pEiZovag (3Xaj3ag ipspEk 22.. ’Avapxiag jjle~i~ 
 
 Zov OVK EGTL KOKOV. 23. 'O 7ToXf/XOC TtXeTgTCI KOKO (j)EpEl. 
 24. *E pijrvTog egtl toiq av0pu)7roig f) too TrXEiovog bri- 
 Oupia. 25. Tup]? £CT0Xr/ TrXaara ayaOa Tip o'lKtp (jilpEi. 
 26. Ta avayKaiia tov (3iov (pips tog paora. 21. To ke- 
 Aeutty 11 paov egtl tov TrpaTTEivl 1 28. 0 i Kapiro). 7TE7rcu- 
 raroi eigiv. 29 . ’Ey Tip tov TraTpbg Kriirtp oi (loTpveg 
 TTETTaiTEpOL EIGIV , TJ €V Tip TOV yElTOVOg. 30. ’lj3 K]Oia 
 TpbpEi 7 rtJrara 7rp6j3ara. 
 
 1 soil. I frit. 2 there is no better adviser. 3 keep silence. 4 my 
 dear friend; a common form of address: (similarly Z /3iA<n<rn). 
 * § 161, 5. 6 effeminate in spirit. 4 iV x.^ is an Acc. of more definite 
 limitation. § 159, 7. 7 also. 8 (inferior pecunia), a slave to money. 
 1 from being very-small. 10 (plus potest), is more powerful, pdfr 
 
92 
 
 THE ADVERB. 
 
 [Chap. V. 
 
 is a Neut. Adj. used adverbially. 11 The Infin. with the Article is 
 equivalent to a verbal Noun, and as such may be declined and 
 governed ; e. g. roZ -r^xrruv is in the Gen. 
 
 (3. In what Case is dptivou; ? What is the open form of it ? 
 Of what Gender is it ? 15. What is the Positive of fttiAtrrti ? 18. 
 What is the open form of fula? 21. Why is <p'^u in the Sing. ? 
 22. In what Case is ? 29. What word must be supplied 
 
 with the second ?) 
 
 1. There is nothing better than a very-active life. 
 2. The opinion of the old 1 is the best. 3. Time is the 
 best adviser. 4. Nothing is better than that which 
 is safest. 2 5. The worst men are often the most-for¬ 
 tunate. 6. Sorrow is the worst evil to man. 7. No¬ 
 thing is worse than flattery. 8. The intemperate 
 man is-enslaved-by pleasures. 9. In-women 3 nothing 
 is more-beautiful than modesty. 10. To the free 
 man nothing is more-painful than slavery. 11. The 
 crocodile is very-long. 12. The son is smaller than 
 the father. 13. The wicked often have more wealth 4 
 than the good. 5 14. The poor are often more-honoured 
 than the rich. 15. Avarice is a very-great evil. 16. 
 Nothing brings more, evils than war. 17. To com¬ 
 mand is very-easy. 18. It is easier to bear poverty 
 than sorrow. 19. We taste the ripest fruits with- 
 very-great-pleasure. 6 20. The sheep of his father 
 are fatter than those of his neighbour. 
 
 1 rap yt^ouriouv. 2 Say; than the safest. 3 Dative. 4 xtfipctra* 
 6 tup iffauip. ® n^urra, (Adv., Sup. of s3 fo'ag). 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 THE ADVERB. 
 
 § 53. Nature, Division, and Formation of Adverbs . 
 
 1. Adverbs are indeclinable words, denoting a re¬ 
 lation of place, time, or manner ; e. g. Iku, there, vur*j 
 now, kclXCjqi beautifully, in-a-beautiful-manner . 
 
§53.] 
 
 THE ADVERB. 
 
 93 
 
 2 . Most Adverbs are formed from Adjectives by 
 assuming tbe ending -we* This ending is annexed 
 to the simple Root of the Adjective; and since the 
 Root of Adjectives of the third declension appears 
 in the Genitive , and Adverbs are accented like Adjec¬ 
 tives in the Gen. PI. , the following rule may be given 
 for the formation of Adverbs from Adjectives:— 
 ^ - to v , the ending of the Adjective in the GeK 
 PI., is changed into - w e; e. g.— 
 
 <p'i\-os, friendly, Gen. PI. 
 
 xaX-os, fair, — 
 
 xxi^-os, timely, — 
 
 i<rx(o-es)ovs, simple, — 
 t$v(o-os)ous, benevolent, — 
 <r«j, all, Gen. <rc&vros, — 
 troj<ppa>v, prudent, — 
 
 graceful, — 
 
 SWlJt, — 
 
 fiiyas, great, — 
 
 clXyi@ws, true, - 
 
 ffwifa;, accustomed, — 
 
 tp'iX-eov 
 
 xaX-uv 
 
 XCllp-UV 
 aprX(l -cov)u9 
 
 ( > > \ >i 
 
 iVVO-UV) iVVUf 
 
 5 ravr-cov 
 
 CCOifigOV-COV 
 
 Xagiivr-cov 
 
 ptyu-X-uv 
 
 a.\'/i0(t-wv)at 
 
 (ffuvYidi-uv) truvnicov 
 
 Adv. <p'tX-6os 
 
 — xuX-us 
 
 — xatfi-ui 
 
 •— &.<xX[o-cos) 
 
 —■ {ivvo-cos ) iuvatf 
 
 — <T6tVT-60S 
 
 - COJtp^OV-COS 
 
 •— 
 
 - T06XI-US 
 
 — piyoiX-us 
 
 — iXni[i-as)cot 
 
 — ( <ruv*i06-cos ) <twt)6us. 
 
 Obs. 1. On the accentuation of compounds in -nie»s and of the 
 compound ctlra^xoos, comp. § 42, Obs. 4; aiso on the accentuation 
 of luvaos, (instead of ilvus), see § 29. 
 
 Obs. 2. By appending the three endings -fov, -6t, and -hi to 
 Substantives, Pronouns, and A dverbs, Adverbs are formed to de¬ 
 note the three relations of place, whence, (-isv), where, (-it), and 
 whither, (-£« or -<n) ; e. g. olouvofov, (de ecelo), from-lieaven, ol^avo- 
 it, (in coelo), in-heaven, ot^xvivh, (in coelum), into or to heaven. 
 
 Obs. 3. The ending -hi is usually appended only to the Acc. of 
 Substantives. To Pronouns and primitive Adverbs, -m is appended 
 instead of ; e. g. ixu-m, thither, uXXotn, to-another-place. In 
 the Acc. PI. of Substantives in -as, -<rhs becomes -£s; e. g. ’A inm%i, 
 (—'Aijvots-hi), to-Athens. 
 
 3. Besides Adverbs with the ending -we, there are 
 many which beai; manifest traces of a case-inflection; 
 e. g. tlv\iq, (de repente), suddenly, avrov , there , &c. 
 The Acc. Sing, and PI. of Adjectives is very fre¬ 
 quently used adverbially; e. g. yiya tcXaUiv, to weep 
 much . ’ 
 
94 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 
 
 [Chap. VI. 
 
 § 54. Comparison of Adverbs. 
 
 1. Adverbs derived from Adjectives, have gene¬ 
 rally no peculiar adverbial ending for the different 
 forms of comparison, but, in the Comparative , use 
 the neuter singular , and in the Superlative , the neuter 
 plural of the corresponding Adjective; e. g.— 
 
 <to<pZs 
 
 ctt<p£f 
 
 'Xu^iivrus 
 
 fU$aif&OVUf 
 
 k'kt^us 
 
 flatus 
 
 Tux'tut 
 
 from ffotpls 
 
 Comp. crotpdiTS^o* 
 
 Sup. ttoipurara 
 
 — aatp^s 
 
 ffatpiart^ov 
 
 aa<p'iarar» 
 
 — 
 
 %a(>i{trrt(>ov 
 
 Xocysarttra. 
 
 
 tv^ai/xovttrngov 
 
 t v^aifiev'itrrarM 
 
 — a ’ lcr Xe°S 
 
 aia%iov 
 
 a/r^iara 
 
 — vihvs 
 
 ffiiop 
 
 n^/ara 
 
 — ra^us 
 
 6a,<nrov, ~rm 
 
 rd^itrm. 
 
 2. All primitive Adverbs in e. g. avio, icarw, 
 Sw, Edo*, &c., retain this ending regularly in the Com¬ 
 parative, and generally in the Superlative; e* g.— 
 
 u.vo), above, Comp, avurlou, Sup. avurdru, 
 
 xdru, below, xoltutsou, xa.Tura.Ttt 
 
 In like manner, most other primitive Adverbs have 
 the ending-a# in the Comparative and Superlative; 
 
 e. g.— 
 
 ay%oo, near , 
 vriox, beyond. 
 rnXov,far, 
 \xcts,far, 
 
 lyyvs, near. 
 
 Comp, uy^or'i^u 
 
 wzgairzgu 
 
 rnXorzgu 
 
 Ixctartgu 
 
 iyyvrt^u 
 
 Sup. iy%oraru 
 
 Sup. wanting, 
 
 •rtjXoraru 
 i xa.9ra.ru 
 ( syyvrd.ru 
 ( 1 yyvrara. 
 
 CHAPTER VI« 
 
 THE PRONOUN. 
 
 * 
 
 § 55. Nature and Classification of Pronouns. 
 
 Pronouns do not, like Substantives, express the 
 idea of an object, but only the relation of an object 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 95 
 
 § 56.} 
 
 to the speaker, since they show whether the object 
 is th q speaker himself (the first person),or the person 
 or thing addressed (the second person), or the person 
 or thing spoken of (the third person); e. g. I (the 
 teacher) give to you (the scholar) it (the book) Pro 
 nouns are divided into five principal classes vis.— - 
 Personal , Demonstrative , Relative , Indefinite, and h\ 
 terrogative Pronouns. 
 
 I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 A. Substantive-personal Pronouns. 
 
 §56. (a) The simple Pronouns: lyu), (ego) ; 
 ay, (tu); ov, (sui). 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 J)at. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 \yu, I [me 
 
 fAOV (fAOv), SfAOV, Of 
 
 Pol {pot), i/Aoi, to me 
 pi [fAi), t/At, me 
 
 Singular. 
 
 <ri, thou 
 
 trou ( erov), of thee 
 (Tol ( trot), to thee 
 cri ( <rt), thee 
 
 ou ( ov ), of himself &c. 
 oT ( oi ), to himself, &c. 
 
 £ {&), himself &c. 
 
 KA. 
 G. D. 
 
 vc !>, we both, us both 
 vyv, of us both, to us 
 both. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 tr<pu, you both 
 <rtp cuv, of you both, 
 to you both 
 
 « 
 
 ffipcuiv (< tQuTv), of them 
 both, to them both 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 fifAtT?, we 
 
 r/Avv, of US 
 v\[Atv, to US 
 
 VfAKS, US 
 
 Plural. 
 ifAsTs, ye (s) 
 
 IfAuv, of you (ii) 
 vfiv, to you ( v) 
 
 vfAUS, you fy) 
 
 \ 
 
 (Tip st;, Neut. <r<pia, 
 they themselves 
 <r<pZv, of themselves 
 <rp't<rt{y) (o'Pto’t), to 
 themselves 
 ffpeti, Neut. a plat, 
 
 (trpseo), themselves. 
 
 Obs. The enclitic forms are put in a parenthesis, without any 
 fnark of accentuation. [Comp. § 14, (b)]. On the signification and 
 tse of the III. personal Pronoun, see Syntax, § 169, Ob 3 . 3. 
 
96 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 [Chap. VI. 
 
 XXXI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 nx.trat, I see. 
 
 ya'e, (Oonj .),for. (It never be¬ 
 gins a sentence). 
 
 -aros, to, writing, anal - 
 phabeticul-character; pi. lite¬ 
 rature. 
 
 (Gen.), I differ-from, 
 
 excel. 
 
 I destroy, lay-waste, 
 
 ruin. 
 
 trrovbcilus, zealously, diligently, 
 earnestly . 
 
 cvyxctlta, (Dat.), I rejoice-with. 
 XxoiivTUi, gracefully , 
 
 1. ’Eyu> psv ypa(j)M, av Ss tt al£eic. 2. ^sfiopal OF, 
 (x) psya Ztu. 3. ’12 ttoI, atcuvi pov} 4. 'O Trarrip poi 
 Q'lXraroQ tcrriv. 5. 'O 0ff>c cm as fiXeirsi. 6. Et ps 
 fiXaiTTSiQ, ovk s\0piov 2 ^lacjispsig. 7. ’Eyw sppojpsvsa- 
 Ttoog s'tpi (jov. 8. Tlck'wc TrsiOopai aot 3 , w rrarsp. 9. 
 'HpsiQ vplv (Tvyxcttpouzv.' 10. r H Xvpa vpaq tvtypaivsi. 
 11. '0 Osoq fip.1v rroXXci ay aOa Traps^st' 12. *0 7 rarijp 4 
 may arspysi. 13. A vSpsuoq pa^^aOs, to crrpartiorai ’ 
 vuiov 5 yap sari rrjv iroXiv <j>vXarrstv * si yap vpslq (f>sv- 
 ysTs, 7 TCXTU f] ttoXiq c Oiacptitlpsrai. 14. r Ypffiv 5 £(mv, 
 & 7ralSsg, ra ypappara cr-ouSatajq pavOavsiv. 15. 'H 
 priTrjn vw arspysi . 16. Nwi/ 7 ijv kcmo) i>6<xoc. 17. 
 
 £X £r£ (piXov marorarov. 18. 2r/xpi/ 8 6 Trar^o \aplZsraC 
 (T(j>(t) yap G7TovSaicoq ra ypappara pavOavsre. 
 
 1 § 15S, 5. (b). 2 § 157. 3 § 161, 2. (a). 4 your father. '* it is 
 
 your duty. S 158. 2. G ra.™ fi roxU—the whole city : ra.™ ro\/c=* 
 every city. * § 161, 2. (d). 8 § 161, 2. (c). 
 
 ( 3. Why has Uxovi two accents ? 4. What governs pot ? 7. Ac¬ 
 
 count for the double accent on I ppuft'vstrrspos, while, at the same 
 time, tipi is accented. 16. 18. In what Case are vfv, <r<p$v?) 
 
 Rule of Syntax .] The Nom. of Personal Pronouns 
 is not expressed, except for the sake of emphasis , (as 
 when any opposition is implied). 
 
 tUP In the following exercises , Pronouns in spaced 
 printing must be expressed. 
 
 1. We write, but you play. 2. We-both 
 write 1 , but y o u- b o t h play. 1 3.1 worship you, G 
 gods! 4. O boy, hear us! 5. God sees you always. 
 
97 
 
 
 t 
 
 § 5 7.] REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 6. If thou injurest us, thou differest not from ene¬ 
 mies. 7. Y o u rejoice with us. 8. I obey you cheer¬ 
 fully, 0 parents. 9. Our (=the) father loves me 
 and thee. 10. Our (=-the) mother loves us both. 
 11. It is my duty to guard the house; for I am the 
 guardian of the house. 12. It is thy duty, O boy, to 
 learn diligently. 13. The lyre affords me and thee 2 
 pleasure. 14. Both-of-you had 3 a bad illness. 15. 
 Both-of-you have 4 a very-faithful friend. 16. Our 
 (=the) father gratifies us-both cheerfully; for both- 
 o f - u s study 1 literature diligently. 
 
 1 Verb to be Plural, (not Dual). 2 Dat, 3 with Dat. 4 tsriy. 
 with Dat. 
 
 § 57. (j3) The Reflexive Pronouns .* 1/xavTov, (rtavrou, 
 
 iauTou. 
 
 1. The Reflexive Pronouns of I. and II. Person 
 have both the Pronouns of which they are composed 
 declined, in the plural; e. g. fiinuv avrutv: that of 
 III. Person is either simply iavrcov (=a vtlov), &c., or 
 
 <T<PU)V avTwv, &C, 
 
 Gr. 
 
 I/Ltavrou, -vs, of my- 
 
 Singular. 
 ffioivrov , -vs, or 
 
 ixvrou, -vs, Or 
 
 
 self 
 
 aavrou, -vs, of thy- 
 
 avrov, -vs, of himself, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 self 
 
 of herself 
 
 -v, to my- 
 
 ffiuvr m, -55, or 
 
 iOtVTM, -V, or 
 
 
 self 
 
 ffoturw, -V, to thy- 
 
 uvtco, v, to himself, to 
 
 A. 
 
 
 self 
 
 herself, to itself 
 
 ipawrov, -vv f my¬ 
 self 
 
 ertauTsv, -vv, OF 
 
 lavrov, -vv, -o', or i 
 
 
 troowrov, -r,v, thyself 
 
 al/Tov, -vv, -o', himself, 
 
 Gr. 
 
 1 
 
 Vftut attrut, of OUT- 
 
 Plural. 
 
 u/jluv alruv, of 
 
 yourselves 
 
 herself, itself 
 
 iocvruv or alruv, or 
 
 
 selves 
 
 fftpivv obhruiv, of them- 
 
 
 
 
 selves 
 
 * 
 
98 
 
 THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 
 
 [Chap. VI. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 hfttv uivroTs, -a~s, to 
 ourselves 
 
 VftTv UVTOli, -OtTf, to 
 
 savroTs, -tt~s, or uuroTs, 
 -ot 7f, or [themselves 
 trtpltriv eturois, -u~s, to 
 
 
 yourselves 
 
 A. 
 
 njtus ectirous , -els, 
 
 iftus ulrovs, ^a#, 
 
 iuvrous, -els, -a, or av- 
 
 
 ourselves 
 
 yourselves 
 
 rovs, -d$, -el, OT 
 tr(f)us uvrouf, -us, fftpiu 
 
 ulrol, themselves. 
 
 §58. (y)i The Reciprocal Pronoun. 
 
 The Reciprocal Pronoun expresses a mutual rela¬ 
 tion of several persons to each other. 
 
 Plur. G. 
 
 dxxvXaiv, of one another , 
 
 Dual. OtWriXoiV, -U/9, -Otv 
 
 J). 
 
 uXXriXois, -uis, -ots 
 
 ulkrXoiv, -U19, -019 
 
 :• A. 
 
 u\'Kv,\ovs, -us, -u 
 
 dXXnXu,. -u, -o>. 
 
 XXXII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 • 
 
 ftovov, Adv. only, alone. 
 
 O ufJctvl'Sca, -uv, ol, the inhabitants' 
 of-heaven (Ouranos), the gods, 
 ovtria,, -us, h, (1) being; (2) pos¬ 
 sessions, substance, 
 i^o), I bear-about. 
 'rXioviKms, -ov, covetous. 
 otXovti^oj, I enrich. 
 uQiXi/tos, -ov, useful r beneficial. 
 
 1. 'O (3log 7roXXa Xwrrjpa tv tavrig (avrtg) tytpti. 2. 
 Ftyi'tocnct aeavrov (aavrov). 3. BovXov aptaKtiv nacn 1 , 
 pr) aavTM povov. 4. (> aorpog tv iaurqj 7rtpi<ptpti rijv 
 ova lav. 5. 4>iXwv tircuvov paXXov 2 r) aauTov Xtyt. 
 6. 'Aptryj KaO 1 tavn\v z tan icaX/j, 7. Ot TrXtovtKTai 
 kavrovg ptv irXovTi^ovaiv, aXXovg Ss fiXanrovaiv. 8. 
 Ov^ ot aKpartlg roig ptv aXXoig (3Xaj3tpof, iavroig 
 (artpiaiv avnng) St wtytXipoC ticnv, uXXa KfiKOvpyoi ptv 
 rCtv aXXwv 4 , iavTutv (p$)U)v aifTtopy St 7 toXv k aKOvpyo- 
 
 "AtpDoios, -09, ( Y)free-from-envy; 
 (2) abundant. 
 
 fiXctfiifof, -a, -09, hurtful , detri¬ 
 mental. 
 
 xaxovgyos, -ov, hurtful, wicked y 
 (Subst. an evil-doer). 
 
 (taXu, Adv. very; (Comp. /tdk- 
 Xov } Sup. (tuXteTu), 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 99 
 
 § 59.} 
 
 ripoi. 9. Hfittg avroig fiSicrra xapi^djueOa. 10. 
 "AfJtOovoi Qvpav&cu kcil lv aXXriXoig 5 tloiv. 11. Ot 
 Kaicoi aXXtjXoog fiXairrovaiv. 
 
 § 161, 2. (c). z rather than. ® by or in itself, * to others. 
 6 towards each-other. 
 
 (3. Why is py, not oh, used? 5. What is the meaning of n? 
 8. Account for the Gen., roZv HkXuv.) 
 
 1* The wise bear about their (=the) possessions 
 in themselves. 2. The avaricious man enriches him¬ 
 self, but injures others. 3. You please yourselves. 
 4. The intemperate man is not detrimental to others 
 and beneficial to himself, but he is hurtful to others 
 and much more-hurtful 1 to himself. 5. Good children 
 love each-other. 
 
 1 Comp, of xcocovgyog. 
 
 §59. B. Adjective-Personal Pronouns, or Posses¬ 
 sive Pronouns. 
 
 Th e Possessive Pronouns are formed from the 
 Genitive of the Substantive-Personal Pronouns. 
 
 -ov, meus, my, (from ipou) j vpinpo-rlpoL, -npov , noster, 
 our , (from »); 
 
 ’ fl *’ tuus, thy, (from <roZ) ; upartpog, -repot, -npov, vester, your 
 (from v/iuv) ; 
 
 *?, ov, suus, his, (from oh). 
 
 _ Gbs* Instead of of and its Cases, the A ttic writers use \otvroZ, 
 ” a r ^flexive meaning, and etZroZ, •%;, -uv, with the meaning 
 
 of the Gen. of the III. Personal Pronoun; e. g. ru-rru rov iavroZ 
 vtivor rov olov rov ixurov, he strikes HIS OWN son, (lxurou=SUUm) ; 
 rvorrei ulrov rov vlov or rov utov otlroZ, he strikes HIS SOU, ( oturou=ejvA ). 
 
 Observe the position of the Article. 
 
 XXXIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 MsAip»v, -ov, negligent, remiss. aZpot, -aros, to, body, 
 ptrat-xu^opoti, / handle , ma - rUvov, -ou , ro , child, 
 
 nage, direct. 
 
100 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS- 
 
 [Chap YI 
 
 Rule of Syntax .} The Possessive Pronouns are 
 not expressed unless for the sake of emphasis, (as 
 when some opposition is implied}. When not em¬ 
 phatic, they are omitted, and their place is supplied 
 by the Article,: which stands before the Substantive; 
 e. g. u prirnp aripyu rriv Ovyarcpa , the mother loves 
 Eer daughter. Instead of the Adjective-Personal 
 Pronouns (lp6g, aog, &c.), the Greeks use, with the 
 same signification, the Substantive-Personal Pro¬ 
 nouns, both the simple forms (in the singular the en¬ 
 clitics pov, aov) and the reflexives (ipaurov, &c.). 
 The position of the Article may be learned from the 
 following examples.— 
 
 I. r O i'fiog 7rarr}p (or b var/jp gov or gov o Trarnp, or 
 « Ipavrov 7 rarr/p-or 6 irarrip 6 Ipavrov) ayaOog icrmv. 
 2. O i vpirtpoi 7T a$eg anrovSaiujQ rd ypappara pavOav- 
 ovauv. 3. O i 7 ratchc vpCov waX ol riaiv. 4. Y ptov ot 
 7 raiSig cnrovSaii,l f laiv. O . Ta rjplbv ovtojv 1 TtKva (or 
 rd TtKva rd i)piov avriov) iptyogtv. 6. 'O aeavrov (piXog 
 for o (piXog 6 atavTOv) morog tanv, 6 ipavrov tyiXog (or 
 d (p'iXog 6 ipavrov) amrrTog Icftiv. 7. O aog vovg to 
 (TOO (TU)pa peraxuptfcrcu 2 . 8. f O plv ipog naig ctttou 
 tiaiog ianv, 6 dc aog ptO’fipoJV* 
 
 1 our own . * directs. 
 
 1. Thy father is good. 2. My slave is bad. 3 
 Our children study diligently. 4. Many men love 
 not the children of others, but their-own. 5. lie 
 admires h i s-o w n actions, but not those of others. 
 
§ 60 .] 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 101 
 
 § 60 . n. DEMONSTRATIVE* PRONOUNS. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 
 this 
 
 
 
 this 
 
 
 N. 
 
 o$s 
 
 vh 
 
 roh 
 
 r 
 
 otprof 
 
 oturn 
 
 rouro 
 
 G. 
 
 rvuh 
 
 rnsh 
 
 rouh 
 
 rourou 
 
 returns 
 
 rourou 
 
 D. 
 
 TCuhi 
 
 r>ih 
 
 ruh 
 
 TOUT 60 
 
 return 
 
 rouru 
 
 A. 
 
 r'ovbt 
 
 rn*h 
 
 roh 
 
 rouro* 
 
 r oturn* 
 
 rouro 
 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 etit 
 
 ctibe 
 
 Tech 
 
 •ouroi 
 
 eturett 
 
 retura 
 
 G. 
 
 ruvfrt 
 
 ruvh 
 
 ruvh 
 
 round* 
 
 rouruv 
 
 rouru * . 
 
 D. 
 
 ro7s$i 
 
 ret7g$i 
 
 ro~s^t 
 
 rourots 
 
 rctvretts 
 
 rourots 
 
 A. 
 
 T0V}h 
 
 rash 
 
 rah 
 
 rouro vs 
 
 rau rets 
 
 rauru 
 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. 
 
 rubt 
 
 rech 
 
 ru&t 
 
 rouru 
 
 rauru 
 
 rouru 
 
 G. D. 
 
 ro7vh 
 
 ret7vh 
 
 ro7v$i+ 
 
 rourotv 
 
 r eturou* 
 
 rourotv < 
 
 
 
 
 self, or he, she , it. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. * 
 
 eturig 
 
 uurn 
 
 air 6 
 
 eturoi 
 
 aurotl 
 
 * / 
 etvrct 
 
 G. 
 
 aurou 
 
 OtUTYiS 
 
 eturou 
 
 eturu* 
 
 oturu* 
 
 uuruv 
 
 D. 
 
 3 <** 
 
 3 — 
 
 
 3 ~ 
 
 
 
 eturcfi 
 
 aurn 
 
 oturif 
 
 oturots 
 
 oturotis 
 
 uurot? 
 
 A. 
 
 vturi* 
 
 aurn* 
 
 cturo 
 
 avrous 
 
 otvr us 
 
 othra 
 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. 
 
 * / > / > / 
 otvrco ocvra, olvto) 
 
 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 ctuTotv uvrot7* eturoi*. 
 
 
 Like our os are declined: r or our os, TO (return, rorouro(v), (=tantus, 
 -a, -um), so great; rotouros, rototum, retouro(v), (=talis, -e), such ; 
 mXixovros, rnXrtotvrn, rfi\/xouro(v), so-great, so-old. Remark, (1) 
 that the Neuter Sing., besides the form in c, has also a form in 
 ov ; (2) that in all forms of euros which begin with r, the r is 
 dropped in these compound Pronouns. 
 
 Like eturis (ipse) are declined: \xt7*os, \xt!vn, \xt7*o, (=ille), Ac, 
 she, it; oixxos, aKXn, olxxo, (=alius, alia, aliud), o£/ier.'The Article 
 #, n, ro, is declined like oh, the 2* being omitted. 
 
 * Demonstrative Pronouns are so called, because they point - 
 out some person or thing. 
 
 * 
 
102 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 [Chap. VL 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 rotrovro\ 
 
 rotroLUTVt 
 
 Toaour$[i) 
 
 | Toffouroi 
 
 roffoiurai 
 
 ro/raura 
 
 G. 
 
 roaovrov 
 
 rotroourm 
 
 rorourov 
 
 r off out eui 
 
 to/toutcd » 
 
 rooouroffi 
 
 D. 
 
 T Off OUT (U 
 
 roffuvrri 
 
 rorouToo 
 
 1 rotrourois 
 
 roffu.uTu.is 
 
 TOJOUTOIf 
 
 A. 
 
 TOO-OUT 01 
 
 roeravrtji 
 
 To(Toutb(v) 
 
 | Totrovrot/s 
 
 Teffuurxs 
 
 rOffUUTOt 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. roarovro) rotraura r»i rovva 
 
 'Gr. D. reffovroii roaoiUTaui <r off out on. 
 
 Obs. The Pronoun air Si, -*?. -4, signifies either self, (=ipse, 
 ipsa, ipsum), or is used for the oblique Cases of the III. Personal 
 Pronoun, he. she, it, (=is, ea, id 1 ). With the Article, (viz. o a 1 r 
 n ctvrf), <ro alro), it signifies ‘the same', (=idem, eadem, idem). 
 The Article usually coalesces, by Grcisis (§ 6, 2), with aurbs, and 
 forms one word ; e. g. «lr 6 s » (= '» aurbs), « l r r\, r « u r o, ( more 
 commonly ravrev, r av r r n i <r 5, &C. 
 
 § 61. 111. RELATIVE* PRONOUN. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 N. 
 
 &, qui «, qaae 
 
 o , quod 
 
 1 ** 
 
 etl 
 
 w 
 
 a 
 
 CO 
 
 •/ 
 
 00 
 
 G. 
 
 V» 
 
 1 
 
 ►a 
 
 r 
 
 OV 
 
 i r 
 
 COV 
 
 r 
 
 COV 
 
 r 
 
 £JV 
 
 r 
 
 01V 
 
 uTv 
 
 D. 
 
 f r 
 
 v i 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 r 
 
 ots 
 
 r 
 
 (tig 
 
 r 
 
 01$ 
 
 r 
 
 out 
 
 r 
 
 an 
 
 A. 
 
 OV ffl 
 
 IS 
 
 1 out 
 
 f 
 
 «=? 
 
 </ 
 
 ec 
 
 V 
 
 M 
 
 g 
 
 S 62. IV. INDEFINITE and INTERROGATIVE 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 The Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns are 
 the same inform , but are distinguished by the accent 
 and position; the Indefinite being enclitic [§ 14, (c)], 
 and placed after the word or words which they mo- 
 dify, whereas the Interrogative are accented and 
 placed before . 
 
 * Relative Pronouns are so called because they relate to soma 
 person or thing preceding (called the antecedent 
 
103 
 
 § 62.] INDEF. AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 
 
 Obs. 1. When the Interrogative Pronouns stand in a dependent 
 question, they prefix to their Root the Relative a, which, how¬ 
 ever, (except in the case of es-nj), is not inflected ; e. g. eVwcs, M- 
 eos, ovongos, &C. 
 
 Declension of fig, t ig, and oortg. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 ; x a. 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 Gr. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Dual. N. A. 
 G.D. 
 
 m.f. n. 
 
 vis, some-one rt, something 
 rives or rote 
 viv’t or rip 
 viva. rt 
 
 nvsf viva and c&rroL 
 
 vtvuv 
 vtvi(v) 
 
 vn&s nva and urra 
 
 vtvi 
 vtvoTv 
 
 m.f. n. 
 
 vis , quis? who? ri; quid? 
 vivos or reu 
 r-ivt or rai 
 
 4 
 
 rivet ri 
 
 vivif rivet 
 
 vevarv 
 rivt(y) 
 
 vivas rivet 
 
 v!vt 
 vivotv. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 os rt%, who (ever) yus l rt olrtMtf ettrni‘s txrnct or arret 
 
 ovnvos or orov l,snvof Zvnveov (rarely oruv) j 'rtvt(v) 
 
 cprtvt or oral ynvi elsrtfft(v) (rarely orats) aTsnvt(v), ois- 
 
 ovrtva yvnvx e rt evfrtvotg asrtvces urtvct or arret 
 
 Obs. 2. The negative compounds of r)s, viz. ouns, atSm, pyres, 
 fiyn, no-one , nothing, are inflected like the simple r); ; e. g. ouvtvns, 
 ovrivts. &C. 
 
 Tic (indefinite) is enclitic throughout, (except 
 arm); Tig (interrogative ) is accented , and retains the 
 acute on the i in all the Oases. 
 
 XXXIV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 'T.xetwes ,-y, ~ov, (quisque), each, 
 ixtivos, -n, -o, that, 
 tvioty - a.i , -a, some. 
 tZtrd%a>, I examine, enquire -into , 
 review (an army). 
 tenaroXy, -Us, y, epistle , letter, 
 yftiooc., -as, y, day. 
 fcyhilt, py^tpia, py^iv, nobody , 
 nothing , (used, like with 
 Imperatives and unctives). 
 
 po^av, -ev, ri, VOSC. 
 
 ff-pu.ryy>s, -ov, o, a general. 
 vo7o ;— oio?, -«», (talis—qualis), 
 
 such — as. 
 
 vivas — oao%, -y. -ov, (tantus— 
 qnantus), so great — as. 
 rpoaro;, - ov, o, (1) turn , way ; (2) 
 manner ; (3) character , cZis- 
 position (turn of mind). 
 
 ( The position o/£Ae Demonstrative Pronouns should he observed, 
 in the following Exercise). 
 
 1. *0 avrip ovrog ^or ovrog 6 avijo) ayaQoc lanv . 
 2 . f H yvtbfjiq aurr] (or avrrj ij 7 vojpij) SiKaia eortv* 3 . 
 
104 pronouns, [Chap. VI. 
 
 *H yvvri rjSs (or rjSe 7] yvvrj) k aXri tanv. 4. r O avrip 
 tKeivog (or sKeivog 6 avrjp) fiaoiXevg egtlv. 5. *0 j3a- 
 mXevg avrug 1 (or avrog 6 j3acriXevg) arpaTtiyog tartv. 
 6. <l>£pe, 5) ttcu, avrip rr)v kXeiv. 7. u Evioi mpi rwv 
 ai/rwv rrjg avTijg fifitpag 2 ov ruvra yiyvwoKOvmv 3 . 8. 
 To Xiyetv k ai ro ttqcitteiv ov tclvtov egtiv. 9. Tabra 
 ra poSa, a OaXXu ev Tip Ki]7np, tcaXa egtiv. 10. 2o ^>ov 
 ti xpri/uia 6 avQpivnog egtiv. 11. Et (piXiav tov (=ti~ 
 vbg) SuuKEig, avruv tov rponov a^era^e. 12. Tig ypa- 
 <pei tt)v ETTiaToXrjv ; 13.'£2v 4 E\Eig, tovtivv 5 aXXoig tt ap- 
 i\ov- 14. *OA (3iog 6 , ip iraiSeg tyiXoi elgiv. 15. ’EiceT- 
 vog 6X(3iu)TaTog e , oTip (=ipTivi) /uurjElv kgkov egtiv. 16. 
 Tt (jypovTi^eig ; 17. Ov Xayh) o rt (jypovr'i^cj . 18. OIoi> 
 
 ro £0oc ekogtov, rotoc 6 /3io£. 19. Arye juot, i]ng e<r- 
 
 tiv ekewti i] yvvri* 
 
 1 himself. * Gen. of time. § 158, 4. 3 think the same, (lit. know 
 
 the same things). * By attraction for &. (Syntax, § 182, 6). 
 b rouruv, Jv i%u$=of those things which thou hast. § 158, 3. (b)» 
 
 6 soil, strri. 
 
 ( 2. What are the respective meanings of avm and avrv ? Ob¬ 
 serve the difference in the accentuation and breathing. 3. Give 
 the Gen. of yvvn. 4. What is the Lat. equivalent for he tiros ? 5. 
 For ttloros ? 6. For etvrfy ? 7. For rwv otvrav, rUs otvrris, rotvra ? 
 
 How does ra-vra. differ from ? 8. What is the other form of 
 roevrov ? 10. Why is aotpov written with the acute accent ? 11. Ex¬ 
 plain the difference between rod and rov. 12. What does the ( ;) 
 indicate? 17. Difference between In and on"!) 
 
 1. These men are good. 2. These opinions are 
 just. 3. The children of these women are beautiful. 
 4. That rose is beautiful. 5. The father himself 
 writes the letter. 6. His 1 son is good. 7. Her* 
 daughter is beautiful. 8. I admire the beautiful 
 rose; bring it to me. 9. The children of the same 
 parents often differ. 10. The rose which blooms in 
 the garden is beautiful. 11, Virtue is something* 
 beautiful. 12. What are you (pi.) thinking-on ? 13. 
 
 I am thinking what 3 friendship is. 14. What is more 
 beautiful than virtue ? 
 
 * =egus. t ^ 
 
 5 Fern 
 
•CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 105 
 
 §63.] 
 
 § 63. Correlative Pronouns . 
 
 TJnder Correlative Pronouns are included all those 
 which express a mutual relation (correlation) 
 to each other, and represent this relation by a cor¬ 
 responding form. 
 
 (1) A djective-CovroiditYves. 
 
 < Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 Eelat. and 
 Depend. 
 Interrog. 
 
 ~orio , os, -n, -ov 
 how great 
 how much 
 (quantus ?). 
 
 To<r6s, -rj, -iv, 
 
 of a certain 
 size or num¬ 
 ber, (aliquan- 
 tus). 
 
 Tie-os, -v, * ov, so great 
 so much, (tantus). 
 
 roaigbi, roo-rjdi, rotriv^t, 
 TorouTos, -court], -ourolv) 
 
 j 
 
 oo-os, -n , .ov, and 
 ooricos, -n, -ov,* 
 how great,, t 
 how much, J 
 (quantus). 
 
 rroTos, -ov 
 
 of what kind? 
 (qualis ?). 
 
 vro<6s, -6v, 
 
 of a certain 
 kind. 
 
 toTos, -a, -ov, of such a 
 kind, (talis). 
 
 roiis^t, retort, rotivhi. 
 
 TOIOVTOS, -OCJJTt], -OUTo(v) 
 
 olos, -a, -ov, and 
 ooro?os,-a,-ov,*of 
 what kind, 
 (qualis). 
 
 Tt]\iX0S, -n,-ov ; 
 
 how great ? 
 how old ? 
 
 wanting. 
 
 tv\\ikos, ~n,-ov, so great, 
 so old. 
 
 rtjX/xigh, -qh, -ovbt, 
 rtiXixouros, -court], -ov- 
 ro(v). 
 
 t]Xixos, -n, -ov, 
 and 
 
 bortiXixos, -tj, t 
 -ov,* how great, I 
 how old. 1 
 
 (2) Adverbial-CoYYoi&iivfis. 
 
 Interrog. 
 
 'Indef. 
 
 Demonstr. 
 
 9 
 
 Eelat. 
 
 Depend. 
 
 Interrog. 
 
 *ou ; where ? 
 (ubi ?). 
 
 -*•66 tv; whence? 
 (unde ?). 
 
 oral; whither ? 
 (quo ?). 
 
 To(i, some¬ 
 
 where, (ali- 
 cubi). 
 
 toSIv, from 
 
 some place, 
 (alicunde). 
 •ro'i, to some 
 place, (ali- 
 quo). 
 
 wanting, (hie, 
 ibi). 
 
 wanting, 
 
 (hinc, inde). 
 
 wanting, 
 
 (hue, eo). 
 
 ol, where, 
 (ubi). 
 
 16 iv, whence, 
 (unde). 
 
 ol, whither, 
 (quo). 
 
 oorou, where, 
 (ubi). 
 
 o or 66 tv, 
 
 whence, 
 (unde). 
 oeroi, whi-i 
 thei', ; 
 
 (quo). f 
 
 * The forms beginning with »V are the regular dependent In- 
 terrogatives. 
 
 F 2 
 
106 LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUNS. [CHAP. VI. 
 
 Interrog. 
 
 Inde£ 
 
 Demonstr. 
 
 Relat. 
 
 Depend. 
 
 Interrog. 
 
 trin ; when ? 
 (quando ’)• 
 
 irtivixit ; quo 
 temporis 
 puncto? quo¬ 
 ta hora?). 
 
 orori, some 
 
 time, (ali- 
 <juando). 
 wanting. 
 
 rin, then, 
 
 (turn, tunc). 
 
 t»!w- hoc 
 
 xxh, ( ipSO 
 
 mvi- C tein- 
 Kocvrx ) pore. 
 
 on, when, 
 (quum). 
 
 fivtxet, when, 
 (quo ipso 
 tempore). 
 
 sTiSn, 
 
 when, 
 
 (quando), 
 
 o-mvixa, 
 
 when, 
 
 (quo ipso 
 tempore). 
 
 tr&s j how ? 
 
 *r »i ; whither ? 
 how? 
 
 orws, some Itoio. 
 t/), tx> some 
 place , thither, 
 in some way. 
 
 ovnu(g), SO- 
 
 rfis, < hither 
 vocvryi ( or here. 
 
 t 
 
 ojg, how. 
 fi, where , 
 
 4 whither. 
 
 oirus, how. 
 o-rr,, where, 
 whither. 
 
 Obs. The forms which are wanting in the Common language to 
 4enote here , there (hie, ibi,), are expressed by Wcv^, and those 
 to denote hence (hinc, hide), by htivh, 
 
 § 64. Lengthening of the Pronouns. 
 
 1. The enclitic yi is appended to the I. and II. Personal Pro¬ 
 nouns, in order to make the person emphatic. The Pronoun \y*> 
 then throws back its accent in the Nom. and Dat. ; e. g. e y u y *, 
 ifi o iy £,(but|novye, S^sys) —<rvy £, &c, Moreover yk can be appended 
 to any other word, and also to any other Pronoun, but does not 
 form one word with at.; e. g. tiros yi. 
 
 2. The Particles 2 (but most commonly $4«r««). and oS*, are 
 appended tc Pvelatives compounded of Intel rogatives or Indefinites, 
 as also to o<r»s, to extend the relative meaning to everything em¬ 
 braced in the object denoted by the Pronoun ; e. g. opnglvi, ogns'iv- 
 -rort, is mow, j} Tisovv, ornvv, opx\Cunque,\Gen. ounvasovv OX ovovow, fi;n- 
 '■yosouv, Dat. Zrmovv or orwovv, &G«) ; — oorotrog'irj, ovotrosouv, otrogi^Tron, 
 quantuscungue ; — i^nkixosodv, however great, how old soever* 
 
 3. The enclitic or s o is appended to all Relatives, in order to 
 
 ■make the relative force still more emphatic:; hence it denotes, even 
 -who, just which; e. g. ogon^, ogno, (Gen. aWfg, &c.) ; oirogwt^, 
 
 *l6g*tt>, (Gen. ihreiiTio, osov-ng., &C.) ; ofavorgg. 
 
 4. The inseparable Demonstrative f is appended to Demonstra¬ 
 tive Pronouns and some Demonstrative Adverbs, thus giving them 
 a stronger demonstrative force. It takes th e-acute accent, is always 
 
 '• The Pronouns shift their accent to the $>j and eS*. Those com¬ 
 pounded with are sometimes written separately ; e. g. lot 
 
THE NUMERALS. 
 
 107 
 
 $ 65.] 
 
 long, absorbs every short vowel, and shortens every long vowel and 
 diphthong immediately preceding it; e. g.— 
 
 Ob™?, this here (hicce), vovrt, {French, celui-ci), 
 
 Gen. Tovrovf, TCLUTwi • Dat. rovruf, ruvrp ; PI. ovroi,’, oovrodl. 
 retvri ; ' ’ 
 
 e2/, tjdt , rodt (from efts) • didr (from Sdt) • ouratrt (from ovrtu f) ; 
 itrtvhf (from hnZhv); I tfettf (from Mdh) i vvv f (from m) : dtvpf 
 (from dtvgo). c 
 
 5. When ye' is appended to the Demonstrative, this 4 follows it; 
 
 ■e. g. tovto y£, <rou<rqyi* ' 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 THE NUMERALS. 
 
 § 65. Nature and Division of the Numerals . 
 
 The Numerals express the relation of number and 
 quantity. They are divided into the following classes 
 according to their.meaning*— 
 
 „ (*) Cardinals, which answer the question, “ How many ?” The 
 first four numerals, and th e round numbers from 200 to 
 
 10,000 (pcfy/a/), as well as the compounds of fov^ios, are declined; all 
 the others are indeclinable. The thousands are expressed by ad~ 
 verhial numerals joined with %4\m ; e. g. ^s^lXtot, 3,000. 
 
 (?) Ordinals, which answer the question, “ Which one in the 
 series ? They are all declined like Adjectives of three termina¬ 
 tions ending in -os, -*?, -m, (except hfotgos, which has -o?, -a, -ov). 
 
 (y). Multiplicatives, which answer the question, “ How many 
 void?” They are all Compounds ending in -orxios (= -tXov 5 ), and 
 are Adjectives of three terminations, -oo S {-ov s ), -fa (-v), -tov { ofa); 
 e. g. Wxeik, twofold. (For the declension of these, see § 20). 
 Numeral Adverbs in answer the question, “ How often ?” 
 m fi) Proportionals, which answer the question, “ How many 
 times more V They are all Compounds ending in --rkacris;, -lex, -tot ; 
 e. g. di-rXaaios, twofold, double. 
 
 (f) Substantive-numerals, which express the abstract idea of the 
 number; e. g. i) povfa, (Gen. -ados'), a unit j jj dvfa, duality. 
 
• $ 
 
 108 NUMERAL CHARACTERS. [CflAP. VlL 
 
 § 66. Numeral Characters. 
 
 1. The numeral characters are the twenty-four letters of the 
 
 Greek alphabet, to which three obsolete letters are added, viz., B*S 
 or Digamma (/), or 2 t7 (<r), inserted after s, as the character for 
 6 j_jK Svnra (5), inserted after <r, as the character for 90 ; 2 
 
 (taV inserted after«, as the character for 900. . 
 
 2. The first eight letters (i. e. from « to 0), with Bau or 2r<, de¬ 
 note the diqits ; the following eight, (i. e. from j to -r), with K<**rra, 
 the tens ; the last eight, (i. e. from g to u), with 2a/**v, the hun- 
 
 dreds. • 
 
 3. Up to 999, the letters used as numeral characters are distin¬ 
 
 guished by-a mark placed over them, and when two or more letters 
 stand together as numeral characters, only the last has this mark. 
 With 1,000 the alphabet begins again, but the letters are distin¬ 
 guished by a mark placed under them ; e. g. «' = 1, ,« = fOlK), 
 ?=10, ,= 10,000, = 5742, ,««,«/*' = 1842,* =100, 
 
 * = looiooo. 
 
 § 67. Table of the Cardinals and Ordinals. 
 
 Cardinals. Ordinals, 
 
 la' etc, /JtiaytVyOm npCurog, -*l,-ov, (primus, -a, 
 
 -um) 
 
 2 j3' dvo, two Stvrtpog, -a, -ov, (secundus, 
 
 -a, -um) 
 
 3 y' TpziQy Tpia, TpiroQ, -»i, -ov, (tertius, -a, 
 
 three -um) 
 
 4 S' 
 
 TsrrapEg,-a,or 
 
 riaaapig 
 
 rirapTOQ , -q, -ov 
 
 5 £ ' 
 
 7 TEVTl 
 
 «7T£jU7rrOC, -»?? -ov 
 
 6 «■' 
 
 25 
 
 fKTOC, -IJ, -01/ 
 
 7 2' 
 
 < f 
 
 £7rra 
 
 ?/3SojUOC) -*h -OV 
 
 8 Tj' 
 
 OKTW 
 
 oySoog, -r\, -ov 
 
 9 O' 
 
 «ppta 
 
 Iparoe, -»]> -ov 
 
 10 1 ' 
 
 SfKtt 
 
 StKarog, -rj, -ov 
 
 11 ta' 
 
 fnSfica 
 
 ivSeKCiTog, - T) , -op 
 
 12 if 3' 
 
 SioSeko 
 
 SwSlicaroe, -1?, -op 
 
 13 iy' 
 
 rpigKtuCEKa 
 
 rpigKat&K<iTog> -n, -ov 
 
CARDINALS AND ORDINALS. 
 
 109 
 
 ? 67.] 
 
 Cardinals. 
 
 14 TETTap&QKafSs- 
 
 ic a or T£(faa- 
 
 pE(TKa($€KCl 
 
 15 IE r VEVTEKaiStKa 
 
 16 <«■' ekkoiSekci 
 
 17 lZJ £7rraKat^£ica 
 
 18 It)' OKTUKOlStKa 
 
 19 i0 ; EWEanatSeKa 
 
 20 k' e'Iko(ti(v) 
 
 21 i ca' tiKoai teat tig, 
 
 t M 
 
 pta, ev 
 30 X' rpiciKovTa 
 40 p' TETrapa KOVT-a 
 or rtcraapar 
 Kovra 
 
 50 v' 7T-EvTtiKOvra 
 60 VZrjicovTa 
 
 70 o' eflSo/urjKovTa 
 80 7 / oySoriKovra 
 90 5 / EVEvrjKOira 
 
 100 p EKarov 
 200 o' Siaicoaioi ,~at,~a 
 300 t' rptaKoaiot , -at, 
 -a 
 
 400 l/ r£TpaKO(TtOt,~€U, 
 -a 
 
 500 <f)' TTEVTCLKOaiQli 
 -at, -a 
 
 600 iZaicocrioi, -at, 
 
 -a 
 
 700 ]p f ETTTCIKOOIOI , -at, 
 -a 
 
 800 (t/ OKTClKOGlOly -at, 
 -a 
 
 900 t?)' ivaKOoco t, -at, 
 -a 
 
 1000 ^a -at, -a 
 
 Ordinals. 
 
 vtrrapatcaiSfKaroe? -17, ~ov 
 
 i 
 
 TTEvrEKatSEKarog, -rj, -ov 
 
 EKKai^EKaTOQ, -J], *OV 
 £ 7 rraKatSI»caroc, -rj, -ov 
 6 KT(t)KCU$EKa 70 Q, ' 7 J, "OV 
 
 EvvEaKaiSEKarog, -rj, -ov 
 
 ElKOOTOg, -Y), -OV 
 
 cikootoc (-77, -ov) Kat 7 rpoi" 
 roc, ”i?» “°v 
 
 rpiCLKOdTOQy - 77 , -OV 
 
 rtrrdpdicoardc, - 77 , -ov 
 
 7 rsvrr}ico(TTog, -t 7, -6v 
 
 tsTjicoaroc, -77, -ov 
 
 EpSoptlKOGTOQ, -T), -OV 
 dySorjKOorog, -7?, -ov 
 ivEVTJKOOTOg, - 7 / /, -ov 
 EKdTOOTOg, " 77 , “OV 
 SlCtlCGOlOOTOg, -T), -ov 
 rptaKooiooTog, -77, -ov 
 
 rErpaKOGiooTog , -77, -ov 
 
 7r^vraKO(rtO(Tr6c, -77,-ov 
 
 t^aKOfTtOOTOC, “ 77 , “OV 
 
 £ 7 rratcocrtO( 7 T 6 c, “ 77 , -ov 
 
 OKTaKOOtoarog, -i), -ov 
 
 EvaKOotoorog, -77, -ov 
 
 ^tX/oaroc. -77, “6v 
 
110 
 
 DECLENSION OF CARDINALS. [CHAP. VII. 
 
 Cardinals. 
 
 2000 ^ic\!\iotrai^a 
 
 3000 y rpig-)fiXioi, - at , 
 
 -a 
 
 4000 -3 TtTfjUKigxiX'Oi, 
 
 “at, -a 
 
 5000 ,6 TTtvraKte^t'Xtot, 
 
 'at, -a 
 
 '6000 /r t^aiciQ^jXtoi, 
 
 7000 
 
 8000 
 
 9000 
 
 -at, -a 
 
 ■■£TTTaKiQxjXtoi , 
 -at, -a 
 
 OKTClKlQ-^lXlOl, 
 ■-at, -a 
 
 ,0 ivaKiQ\tXit)i 9 
 
 ~ai, -a 
 
 10,000 ^ *jtivpioi,--ai t -a 
 
 20,000 StCjUv^tot,-at,-a 
 
 100,000 StKaKig^vpioi, 
 
 -at, -a 
 
 Ordinals. 
 
 '^iC^iXmaTOQ^iif -ov 
 ToiQx^iXiv&Togi^rh -ov 
 
 TtTpaKlQ^XtOOTOQi -//, -OV 
 
 Trevra.KtQ'xiXtooTOG, -rj, -cw 
 
 ttiaKlQXlXlO&TOQ) -{]> -ov 
 
 £iTTaKtcx t ^ lo<TT( >G» "*7> ~u v 
 
 OKTaKtcxtXtocTrog, -ri, -ov 
 
 SVdKlGXlXlOrTTOC} -r?, -ov 
 
 fjivoioaroQ, -ri, -6v 
 SlZ/UlVptOCTTOQ, -fj, -ov 
 SiKdKtgjuvpioarog, -y \, -ok. 
 
 Obs. In compound numerals, either the smaller number {always 
 with *a<) is placed before the larger, or the larger (with, or some- 
 "times without *«/) is placed first ; e. g.— 
 
 25 : erevre xeet uxoiri(v), ot tixotn erivn, 
 
 345 : ertvrs xoCi «rTaja*9vra xai r^ia.x6moi, or rgixxtiaiot xa) tpp- 
 
 raoxKovrx xcct tuts. 
 
 The same remark applies to the Ordinals; e. g.— 
 stifAerrog xcti uxo<r?6g , or stxoaros xat ri/ZTTes. 
 
 § 68. Declension of the first four Cardinals. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 r / u tt 
 
 US ft tot, £V 
 
 Ivog ftia; lve$ 
 
 t / ~ t r 
 
 IVi fJLlOf tVi 
 
 « ti 
 
 tvat fttetv iv 
 
 £uo 
 
 $uo7v, (Attic also ^wsTv) 
 
 }vo7v, [rarely W/(»)] 
 duo 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 rgtff Neut. r^lct 
 
 TglUV 
 •rgiir! (v) 
 
 -rgsTi Neut. t^'ix 
 
 rcrTaoii or ’fltnra.^ts Neut. rirraa*. 
 
 TSTTX^MV 
 
 TSTTXOri(v) 
 
 reTraoces Neut. Ttrrftoa.. 
 
 * •» 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 5 68 .] 
 
 Obs. 1. Remark the irregular accentuation of picts, ‘pi». Like 
 * 7f are also declined ovhU and pn'hh (no one), which have the same 
 irregular accentuation , thus :— 
 
 ovhi'ts, si/biptlti, ovhiv, Gen. aubnot, ov^tpiois, Rat. oubivt, ovhfMCC &c. .J 
 hut in PL : Bu^tvif (ftvi$tv£$), -€v«t>v, -tat, -Ivet;. 
 
 Obs. 2. a {jo is often used indeclindbly for all the Cases. The 
 numeral uptpa (both) has, (like %vo), -vuv in the Gen. and Dat. («/*- 
 <ps7v ); the Acc. is like the Nom. Like Svo, it is also sometimes 
 used indedinably. 
 
 XXXV* VOCABULARY. 
 
 -i6r>t, vi, a going-up , an 
 expedition (from the sea in¬ 
 land). 
 
 -«3, i, number, extent, 
 amount 
 
 u^/u,a, -ctTBs, to, chariot. 
 
 ctavviros, -ov, foolish , stupid. 
 
 Bxfivkujv, -uvBf, v\, Babylon. 
 
 (i<x£(ict£Bs, -ov , o, bavarian, fo- 
 reicjner, (every one not a 
 Greek). 
 
 / irjp.ct, -Bt,T6f, to, step, pace* 
 
 $gt<rotvvi(pogo$, -bv , ('Sge-rctvov, < 
 scythe-bearing. 
 
 XvioLurot, -bv, b, year. 
 
 tv^os, ( ies=) -BUS, TO, breadth. 
 
 Eu<p(>drvis, -bv, o, the Euphrates . 
 
 xuroi-(ixTif, -tug, fi, a going-dovm 
 (from ini and to the sea), retreat. 
 
 KjXtxia, -ots, vi, Cilicia. 
 
 K arvu^ot., -uv, r«, Kotydra, (a 
 town in Pontus). 
 
 Ktivas, -bv, o, the Cydnue , (ariver 
 in Cilicia). 
 
 M a.ictvb(>os, -ov? b, the Maunder, 
 (a river in Phrygia). 
 
 irxfrtis, -bv, o, heavy-armed-sol¬ 
 dier. 
 
 vra.e_ttai.yyvH, -6v, d, purasang, (ft 
 Persian measure of length), 
 (adsum), I am present 
 'II tXBorownaBs, -vv, vi, the Pelopon¬ 
 nesus. 
 
 inkraaTi h, -ov, o, one-who-wears • 
 a-light-buckler, targeteer. 
 Us^a/xog, -y), -bv, Persian, 
 vrkefyev, -bv, t 6, a plethron, (a 
 measure of length =100 
 Greek, or 101 English feet). 
 <r>55 hi, (-£»?=) -ovs, rl, throng , 
 extent , length (of time). 
 btbvs, o, (pes), foot. 
 
 '■Vw(/.<x,7b$, o, Roman. 
 
 'laon*, -bv, o, the Saros. 
 
 OTahiov, -ov, To, (PI. si anxdiBi OT 
 to. aradix), a stade, (a measure 
 of length = 6 plethra = 600 
 Greek, or 606| English feet). 
 *Ta.Spo$, -bv, o, stage, day’s- 
 march. 
 
 aT^artvpa., -otT'o’S, To, army, 
 irvyygoupat, I describe, write-about 
 avp'Voii, -ciax, -civ, (universus), 
 all-together , the whole. 
 avviTos, -vj, -ov, sensible, sagacious. 
 &gvyict, - a;, h, Phrygia. 
 
 1. Ei)(pgaTrjQ irorapog ecttl to zvpog 1 TtTTQpiov err ax 
 Sib)v. To c>£ araSiov £\tt 2 uapa roig Ptopaiotg 7 rem 
 Kai etKOGi seal {Karov j^rpiatra, r) irevre koX ukogi ucu 
 kogiovq 7 roSag. 2. Kvpqj 7rapr}aav at tK EJeAottquvji'top 
 vri&g TpiaKOvra nivte. 3. Too Sapou, KtAoctac 7rora- 
 'fiov, ro tvpog i]V rpia tt\ fflpa. To $£ 3 irXtOpov 
 ttcoro v iroSag. 4. Kut^oc, KiAuaac TTorapog, •tvpo■g 
 
112 
 
 NUMERAL ADVERBS. 
 
 [Chap. VIL 
 
 €<m Svo (Suetr) 7 rXeOpiov. 5. Tow MaiawSpou, *Ppvytag 
 
 "trorafiov, TO tvpog £(TTIV UKO(Tl TTtVTt 7 ToSdjV. 6. *0 7 Tap(f 
 aayytig, II cpoiicov fisrpoi^ TpiaKOvra crraSia rj 7 rtv- 
 TrjKOVTa KOI tTTTOKOaiOVC KOI OKTOKig^lXfoitg KO | flVp'lOVg 
 irobag. ^ 7. ’AptOp.og ovfnra<Ji)g Tr\g oSou 4 t?)c nvafla- 
 (Ttiog koi KaTaf3a(T£(og, rj vtto S£vo(purvTog rjvyypa(j)£Tai } 
 (rr(iQ[io\ 5 SiUKomoi Stic a 7rtWf, 7rapa<rdy'yai ^'Atoi iicartw 
 irtvrrjKOvra 1 rtvrt, oradia rpigfjivpia TtrpaKig^iXia *£«- 
 kooio TTtvrriKOVTa; xpuwv nX^Oog Trig avafiaoeutg koi 
 K aTofiacrewg hnavrog koi Tpe7g firivEg. 8. 'Evo£ 0/Ai'a 
 
 owtrow KpdTTuv torn; dffwwtrwv aTrdwrww. 9. Tow 
 Kw()ou orpanv^ioTog i)v cipiO/mbg tCjv juiv 'EXXrirwv 
 b-rXlraL fivpioi Kal TETpaKOcnoi , 7rtAra(Trai Si Sig^iXioi 
 Km mproKomoh tmv Si /ittrd Kvpow [3apf3ap(ov Ska 
 ■juupiaSeg kch apfiara Sp£7ravri(f)<>pa afi<p\ ra ukooiv. 
 
 in breadth: an adverbial Acc. § 159,3, Ohs. 2 contains. 3 now. 
 of the whole march. £ «<r«v understood. 
 
 1- It is better to have one sensible friend, than 
 all foolish ones. 2. Seventy years give 1 about 2 
 25,555 days. 3. The extent 3 of the march from the 
 battle at 4 Babylon to 5 Cotyora during-the-retr eat, 
 which is described by Xenophon, amounts to 122 
 stages, 620 parasangs, 18,600 stadia.; the length 6 of 
 the time eight months. 4. The number of the army 
 is 39,850. 5. The generals of the army are four, 
 
 each of 7 30,000. 6. There-were-present in the battle 
 •96,650 soldiers and 150 scythe-bearing chariots. 
 
 ' 2 **e*X"’- 2 with Acc. 3 kpiSpit. 4 if. s 
 
 * Gen. 
 
 '§ 69. 
 
 H aira%, once 
 
 2 Slg , twice 
 
 3 Tptg 
 
 Numeral Adverbs. 
 
 4 TETpciKlQ 
 
 5 TTEVTOKtg 
 § i^aKig 
 
VERBS. 
 
 §71.] 
 
 113 
 
 7 tTTTaKlQ 
 
 8 OKTCIKIQ 
 
 9 tvvtciKiQ, IvaKig 
 
 10 SsKaKig 
 
 11 ivStKaiag 
 
 12 da)$EKaiciQ 
 
 13 rpigicaiSeicaicig 
 
 14 TETrapEgKaiStKaKtg 
 
 15 irevreKcuSeKaiag 
 
 10 iicKaiSeKaKig 
 
 17 tirTaKmStKciKiQ 
 
 18 Of CTOJKOlStKCtKig 
 
 19 ewsaKaiSsKaKig 
 
 20 EiKoaaKig 
 
 30 TpiUKOVTaKtg 
 40 TtTTapaKOvrnKig 
 50 7T EVrrjKQVTCtKtg 
 60 i^rjKOvraKig 
 70 ij3SojU7]KOvraKtg 
 
 80 oydorjKOVTaKig 
 90 €V€Vt}KOVTaKlQ 
 100 EKarovraKig 
 200 SiaKOGiatag 
 
 300 TpicucoGiaKig 
 1000 \iXicuag 
 2000 Sig^iXiaiag 
 10,000 pvpiaKig 
 20,000 Sig/jivpiaKtQa 
 
 CHAPTER VIII, 
 
 THE VERB. 
 
 § 70. Nature of the Verb. 
 
 The Verb expresses something which is affirmed 
 of a subject; e. g. the father writes , the rose blooms ,„ 
 the boy sleeps , God is loved. 
 
 I 71. Classes of Verbs. 
 
 Verbs are divided, with reference to their waning 
 and form, into the following classes:— 
 
 1, Aetive Verbs, i. e. Verbs denoting an action, 
 which the subject itself performs or exhibits ; 
 e. g. ypafjno, 1 write , OaXXio, I bloom; 
 
 2. Middle or Reflexive Verbs, i. e. Verbs denoting 
 an action, which proceeds from the subject and 
 
114 THE TENSES. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 again returns t© it-; e. g, (3ovXevopat, I advise- 
 
 myself, I deliberate; 
 
 3. Passive Verbs, i. e. Verbs denoting that the 
 subject suffers some action.; e. g. rtmTopm, I 
 am-struck. 
 
 § 72. The Tenses, 
 
 1. The Greek language has the following Tenses-:— 
 
 I. (1) Present, fiovXtvu), I advise, 
 
 (2) Perfect, fitfiovXtvKa, 1 have advised 
 
 II. (3) Imperfect, ij3ovXtvov, I ivas advising., 
 
 (4) Pluperfect, ef3tj3ovXsvKtiv, I had, advised, 
 <5) Aorist, IfiovXivaa, I advised, (time inde¬ 
 finite) ; 
 
 III. (6) Future, (3 ovXev<t(d, I shall or will advise, 
 (7) Future-Perfect, or Third Future, Futu- 
 rum exactum, (found only in the Middle 
 Voice), f3ef3ovX£V(To/uai, I shall have ad¬ 
 vised myself, or, 1 shall have been advised, 
 
 2. All the Tenses may be divided into?— 
 
 a. Principal Tenses, viz. Present, Perfect and 
 Future.; 
 
 1). Historical Tenses, viz. Imperfect, Pluper¬ 
 fect and Aorist. 
 
 Obs. The Greek language has two forms for the Perf. and Plu- 
 perf. Act., two for the simple Fut. Pass, and two each for the Act., 
 'Pass, and Mid. Aor.; these two forms may be distinguished as 
 Primary and Secondary Tenses, (Tempora prima and Tempora 
 secunda). Few Verbs, however, have both forms of these Tenses.; 
 only one or the other form occurring in most Verbs. No Verb has 
 all the Tenses. Pure* Verbs have only the Primary Tenses . 
 What is usually called the Fut. II. Act. is the regular Fut. of 
 liquid Verbs. 
 
 * Pure Verbs are those whose Root ends in a Vowel;Liquid 
 Verbs, those whose Root ends in a Liquid. 
 
THE MOODS.—PARTICIPIALS. 
 
 115 
 
 $ 73. The Moods. 
 
 Greek Verbs have the following Moods:— 
 
 I. The Indicative , which is the affirmation of a fact; 
 e. g. the rose blooms , bloomed , will bloom. 
 
 II. The Subjunctive (or Conjunctive), which denotes 
 merely a hypothesis or conception of the mind. The 
 Subjunctive of the historical Tenses is called the Op¬ 
 tative ; (comp. ypa<poifu with the Lat. scriberem). 
 
 Obs. How the A-orist can have both forms of the Subjunctive 
 (viz. Subj. and Opt.), and the Future an Optative, will be seen in 
 the Syntax (§ 152). 
 
 III. The Imperative, which expresses a command ; 
 e. g. /3ovX tus, advise-thou. 
 
 § 74. Participials.—Infinitive and Participle . 
 
 In addition to the Moods, the Verb has two forms, 
 which, from their partaking of the nature of the 
 Verb, and also of that of the Substantive and Adjec¬ 
 tive, are called Participials ; viz.— 
 
 (a) The Infinitive , which is the Substantive-Parti¬ 
 cipial-; e. g. iOiXoj /3 o v \ e v s i v, I wish to advise; 
 to (3 o v X € if 6i v, advising {—advice). 
 
 (b) The Participle, which is the Adjective-Parti¬ 
 cipial ; e. g. j3 o v X e v <a v avijo, an advising man 
 (=a counsellor). 
 
 Obs. These two Participials may be called Verhum infinitum 
 the remaining forms of the Verb, Verbum finitum. 
 
116 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN U>. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 § 75. Numbers and Persons . 
 
 The Personal-endings of the Verb show whether 
 the subject of the Verb is the speaker himself, (/, 
 the first person); or a person or thing addressed, 
 (thou, the second person) ; or a person or thing 
 spoken of, (he, she, it, the third person). They also 
 show the relation of number, viz. Singular, Dual and 
 Plural ; e. g. j3ovXtvof, I, (the speaker), ■advise j (3ov- 
 Xtiisig, thou, (the person addressed), advisest; /3ouXeua, 
 he, she, it, (the person or thing spoken of), advises; [3m>- 
 XtvtTov, ye two, (the persons addressed), advise > f3ov- 
 Xtuovai, they, (the persons spoken of), advise . 
 
 There is no distinctive form for the First Pers. Dual in the 
 Active voice, and in the Pass. Aorists ; hence it is expressed by the 
 form of the First Pers. Plural. 
 
 § 76. Conjugation. 
 
 The Greek has two forms of Conjugation: (1) the 
 form ending in -w, which includes most Verbs in the 
 language ; e. g. (3ovXtv-<o, I advise j (2) the older 
 form in -jlu, e. g. iorr\-\ ut, I place. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -w. 
 
 § 77. Root, Augment , and Reduplication .— Verb- 
 
 characteristic. 
 
 1. Every verbal form is divisible into the Root, 
 (the fundamental form, on which the other forms 
 are, as it were, built up,) and the Formation-syllables, 
 
ROOT, AUGMENT* REDUPLICATION. 
 
 117 
 
 §77.] 
 
 by which the relations of the actions expressed by 
 the Verb are denoted. (See §§ 71—75). The Root 
 is found in most Verbs in -m by cutting off the ending 
 of the first Pers. Ind. Pres.; e. g. j3oiA tu-w, Xly-iv, 
 
 rpij3-u). 
 
 2. Formation-syllables are either annexed as end¬ 
 ings to the Root, and are then called inflexion-end* 
 mgs; e. g. j3ovXsv-u), fiovXtv-cruj, fSooXkFao/uat ; or 
 are prefixed to the Root, and are then called Aug¬ 
 ment and Reduplication ; e. g. £-j3ovXtvov, I was ad¬ 
 vising, fit-fdovXtvKci, I have advised. 
 
 3. The Augment , which all the historical Tenser 
 (Imperfect, Aorist and Pluperfect) receive, hut in 
 the Indicative only, is £ prefixed to the Root of Verbs, 
 which begin with a Consonant; e. g. t-fiouXtvva, I 
 advised; but in Verbs which begin with a Vowel, 
 
 \ it consists in lengthening the initial Root-vowel, a and 
 t being changed into r], (but sometimes £ into a), T 
 and v into t and v, and o into ok 
 
 4 . Reduplication, (which belongs to the Perfect,. 
 Pluperfect and Future III. only), consists in repeating 
 the initial Root-consonant together with £, in those Verbs- 
 whose Root begins with a Consonant; e. g. fle-poo- 
 XevKa, I have advised; but in Verbs whose Root be¬ 
 gins with a Vowel, it is identical until the Augment; 
 e - g- 7/c£r£UJca, I have supplicated, (from dWch-w). 
 
 (For a more extended notice of the Augment and 
 Reduplication, see § 85—91). 
 
 5. The last letter of the Root, after the ending 
 
 is cut off, is called the Verb-characteristic, or simply, 
 the Characteristic, because, according to it, Verbs in 
 -o) are divided into different classes. According as 
 the characteristic is a Vowel, a Mute, or a Liquid, 
 Verbs are divided into pure, mute, and liquid Verbs ; 
 e * g- (3ovXtv-o), I advise , ripa-w, I honour , rpifi- u>, 1 
 rub, ij>aiv-w, I shew . 
 
 
118 
 
 TENSE-CHARACTERISTICS, <&C, [CHAF. VIII* 
 
 
 
 § 78. Inflexion-endings . 
 
 The Inflexion-endings , inasmuch as they denote the* 
 three relations of Tense, Mood, and Person , contain 
 three different elements, viz.:—the Tens e-characteristic y 
 the Mood-vowel, and the Personal-ending ; e. g. ( 3 ovXev- 
 a-u-juai. They are divided into Active, Middle , and 
 Passive endings, according to the three Voices. 
 
 § 79. (a) Tense-characteristics and Tense-endings. 
 
 1. The Tense-characteristic is that Consonant which 
 stands next after the Root of the Verb , and is the cha¬ 
 racteristic mark of the Tense. In pure Verbs, k is 
 the Tense-characteristic of the Perf. I. and Plpf. L 
 Act y e. g.— 
 
 Perf. X. Act. /3s-/3auX£w-*-« Plpf. I. Act. j. 
 
 that of the Fut. and Aor. I. (Act. and Mid.) t and 
 Fut. III. is ay e. g.— 
 
 Fut. Act. Fut. Mid. Fut. III. 
 
 (houXiv-c-cit (iov\tv.ir-ofixi fii-fhouXti'O’-oftat 
 
 Aor. I. Act. Aor. L Mid. 
 
 1-/3 ovXiu-a-a t-(Zo»kiu-o--<xf*nv j 
 
 that of the Aor. I. Pass, is 9; e. g.— 
 
 l-(Zov\t6-0-w ; 
 
 in addition to the Tense-characteristic <r, the Fut. L 
 Pass, has the ending -Qr\ of the Aor. I. Pass.;e. g.— 
 
 $ovXtv-6r\a-o(x.a.i. 
 
 The primary Tenses only have a Tense-characteristic. 
 
PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 
 
 119 
 
 § 80.] 
 
 2. The Tense-characteristic,, together with the ending 
 following, is called the Tense-ending. (Thus, in the 
 form (3ov\evow, <j is the Tense-characteristic of the 
 Fut., and the syllable -aw, the Tense-ending of the 
 Future). The Root of the Verb, together with the 
 Tense-characteristic and the Augment or Reduplica¬ 
 tion, is called the Tense-root. (Thus, in tj3ov\tva-a>. 
 ifiovXtvo- is the Tense-root of the Aor.. I.. Active). 
 
 (b) Rersonal-endings and Mood-vowels. 
 
 The Rersonal-endmg assumes a different form ac¬ 
 cording to the different Persons and Numbers; and 
 the Mood-vowel a different form according to the 
 different Moods ; e. g.— 
 
 l Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. M. Pov\t6ro-pai. Subj. Qovktv-u-pat 
 
 3 — — — Fat. — (oovXtu-tr-t-rut Opt. (bouXtv-tr-ot-ro 
 
 1 — FI. — Pres. — (iovXtv-6-fi.idet Subj. (Zoi>Xtu-<l)-/ui0u 
 
 2 — — — — — (ZouX&v- i-aHi — {iovXi6-9t-a6t 
 
 1 — Sing. — Aor. I.— i/SayAsyff-a-^jj* — (iouXtv-ff-co-ftui. 
 
 3 — — — — — l/sot/Asuro-a-ro Opt. fiovXi6»c-aii-ro. 
 
 Obs. In the above forms, (ZouXtu- is the Boot; (ZovXsu-, fiou\iu<r~ 
 and ifiovkivff- are the Tense-roots of the Pres., Fut., and Aor. L 
 Mid. respectively ; -pus, - rut , &e., are the Personal-endings ; and 
 •i «, t, oi, *i, a, us, are the Mood-vowels.. 
 
 § 80. Remarks on the Personal-endings and Mood ~ 
 
 vowels. 
 
 1. The Personal-endings are appended directly to 
 the Mood-vowel,, and are often so closely united with 
 it that the two do' not appear as distinct portions,, 
 but are blended into one; e. g. fiovXtvo-ygq, instead 
 of j3 ov\tua-r]-iQ ; (3ovXtv-y, instead of j3ovA*u-£-m, (the 
 
1 mood-vowels. [Chap. VIII. 
 
 € and a coalescing and forming q, and t being sub¬ 
 scribed). 
 
 2. The difference between the principal and his¬ 
 torical Tenses is here important The principal 
 Tenses, (Pres., Perf. and Put.), form the second and 
 third Pers. Dual with the same ending, - 0 v; e. g. 
 f3ovXev-£-TOi>, fiovXsv-t-rov ; (3ovXtv-t-aOov^ /SovXtv-t- 
 <t0oi/’ but the historical Tenses form the second Pers. 
 Dual with the ending -o v t the third with the end¬ 
 ing -ijvje. g.— 
 
 Impf. Ind Act. Impf. Ind. Mid. 
 
 1 m. ifiouXtu-i-r 0 V, itZ>ou\tv-e-T * v ifravXiu-i-cr 6 o », ifrouXivt-c 61, *. 
 
 3. The principal Tenses form the third Pers. 
 Plur. Active with the ending - a i (i») [arising, by the 
 laws of euphony, from - v r /, - v a t], the third Pers. 
 Plur. Middle with -vrai; the historical Tenses have 
 the ending -v in the Act, -vto in the Mid. ; e. g.— 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 Act. (f’5ouXtv-o-v<ri =) (iovXtv-ouffi[v ) 
 Mid. fiouXiv -O-HTXt 
 
 Imperf. Ind. 
 
 tpai/AsV-a-v 
 
 l~(hovXiU-0‘*T9. 
 
 4. The principal Tenses in the Sing, of the Middle 
 Ind in -pai t -aai, -rat the historical , in -/iijv, ao, to ; 
 e - g-— 
 
 _ _ Pres - * nd - Mid. Impf. Ind. Mid. 
 
 1. Pers. £ ovXiv-o-p a. i 1. Pers. 1/3 ovXiv-i-p r ,» 
 
 2. — ((iovXiv-i-tr a. <=) (Zou\iv-ri 2. — (i(5ev^ sv-t-ff e=) i^ovXtu-ow 
 
 3. — p>ov\iv-t-r a i 3 . — ifiovktu-i-T o. 
 
 I 
 
 5. The Personal-endings of the Subj. (Act., and 
 Mid.) of the principal Tenses are the same as those 
 of the Ind. of the same Tenses; and the endings of 
 the Opt. are the same as those of the Ind. of the 
 historical Tenses; e. g.— 
 
 
§ 80.] MOOD-VOWELS. 
 
 121 
 
 2 and 3 Du. Ind. Pres. (ZovXtvev e v (Act.) 
 
 (ZovXivi-ff 0 o v (Mid.) 
 
 3 PI. — — (ZouXiCou-r t (v) (Act.) 
 
 (ZovXtvo-v r a i (Mid.) 
 
 1 Sing. — — (ZouXtijo-u. a t — 
 
 2 — — — (ZouXtv-'/i — 
 
 3 — — — (ZovXtvi-r a < — 
 
 2 and 3 Du. — Impf. i(ZovXtvs-r o v, • r n v, 
 
 (Act.) 
 
 3 PI. — 
 
 1 Sing. — 
 
 2 - 
 
 3- 
 
 \(ZovXivi-a 0 o v, • <r 0 n v, 
 (Mid.) 
 
 tfZovXtu-ov, (Act. 
 t/ZovXivo-v r o, (Mid.) 
 l[ZouX&v 6 -fi v v — 
 
 ( &(ZovXt 6 &-<r o—) 
 
 IfZovXiV-O V -* 
 
 i(ZovXivi-r o — 
 
 Subj. (ZouXtvn- ret 
 
 — / ZouXtfa-cr 6 o d 
 
 — (ZovXtveo-ir i ( v) 
 
 — (ZouXi^M-v <r ai 
 —• (ZouXivat-ft cc i 
 
 — / ZovX&v-y 
 
 — (ZouX&vii-r a i 
 Opt. (ZouX&uoi-r o v, 
 
 *«r yj v 
 
 — (ZouXtvoi-c 0 o j>, 
 
 • or 0 t) V 
 
 — (Z0VXl{)M-i V 
 
 — (ZovXivot-v *r o 
 
 — (ZovXtvoi-fz. v » 
 
 — (/ ZovXtCoi-<T o =) 
 
 (ZovXivoto 
 —- (ZovXttiot-r o. 
 
 Obs. On the » \<^iXKuaruov, see § 7» 1» (b). 
 
 6. The Mood-vowel of the Subj. of the principal 
 tenses differs from that of the Ind. of the same 
 tenses, merely in being lengthened , viz. o into a >, e and 
 a into ri, and ti into y ; e. g.— 
 
 Ind. (ZouXiv-o fttv Subj. (ZovXiv-w-f&sv j Ind. /ZovXs6-t-o-0i Subj. (ZouXiv-n- 
 Ind. (ZovXiti Subj. (ZouXiU-ys . [ cr6i . 
 
 7. The Mood-vowel of the Opt. is i in connection 
 with the preceding Mood-vowel of the 1. Pers. Sing. 
 Ind. of the corresponding historical Tense. Thus:—- 
 
 1. Sing. Ind. Impf. Act. «. Opt. oi \(ZovXiv-o-r (ZovXeC-ot-fju 
 — Plur. — Aor. I. Act. a. — cu i{ZouX&x><r-a,-ptv (ZouXvjtr-ou- fun. 
 
 Exceptions .] The Subj. of the Perf. takes the Mood-vowel of 
 the Pres., and the Opt. of the Piupf., that of the Impf. 
 
122 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -to. [ClIAP. YUL 
 
 § 81. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -w, exhibited 
 in the Pure Verb (§ 77, 5) fiouXtuu) . 
 
 PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 • 
 
 1. As pure Verbs do not form the Tempora secunda (§ 72. Obs.), 
 these Tenses will be supplied in the Paradigm from two mute Verbs 
 and a liquid Verb (< , I rub, Xtlv-u. lioot Ain, / leave, <px,>-u, 
 Root $ AN, / shew ), so as to exhibit a complete conjugation. 
 
 2 . In learning the Table of Conjugation, observe :— 
 
 ( 1 ) The meaning in English is opposite the Greek forms. All 
 
 the particular shades of meaning, however, which belong to the 
 different Moods and Teases in connected discourse, cannot be 
 given in the Table. * 
 
 / * 
 
 (2) The Greek forms may always be resolved into their compo¬ 
 nent parts, viz. («) Personal-ending, (/3) Mood-vowel, ( 7 ) Tense- 
 characteristic, $) Tense-root, (t) Verb-root, VC) Auament or Iledu- 
 plication. 
 
 (S) The forms in spaced printing, e. g. (iovXiC-i r «>, p>ouXi6-n r 0 », 
 (3rd Pers. Du. Ind. and Subj. Pres.), are intended to draw atten¬ 
 tion to the difference between the historical tenses of the Ind. and 
 Opt., and the principal Tenses. 
 
 (4) Forms which are alike, as well as those which differ only in 
 accentuation , are distinguished by an asterisk ( * ). The pupil 
 should look for such forms, and compare them with each other ; 
 e. g. (oovXwtrat, I. Sing. Ind. Fut. Act. or I. Sing. Subj. Aor. I. Act.; 
 MXivaat, 2. Sing. Imper. Aor. I. Mid., (lovXweu, 3. Sing. Opt Aor, 
 
 I. Act., (oouXiiffui, Inf. Aor. I. Act. 
 
 t ' * 
 
 (5) The Accentuation should be learned with the form. [See 
 § 84J. The following general rule will suffice for beginners :—The 
 accent of the Verb is as lar from the end as the nature of the final 
 syllable will permit. [Those forms whose accentuation deviates 
 from the rule are indicated by a cross (t)]. 
 
 (f>) When the following Paradigms have been thoroughly 
 learned in this way, the pupil should first resolve the Verbs oc¬ 
 curring in the Greek Exercises into their component parts, (Per¬ 
 sonal-ending, Mood-vowel, &c.), observing the folio wing order, 
 viz.— 
 
 llovXtir «„ is (1) first Pers., (2) Sing., (3) Ind., (4) Fut, (5) Act, 
 ( 6 ) from the Verb fiouxtu*, 1 advise. 
 
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 
 
 123 
 
 5 81.J 
 
 He should then translate the Verbs in the English Exercises, so 
 as to show the component parts of the Greek Verb, in the follow¬ 
 ing order:—(1) Verb-root, (2) Augment or Reduplication, (3) 
 Tense-characteristic, (4) Tense-root, (5) Mood-vowel, (G) Tense- 
 root with Mood-vowel, (7) Personal-ending, (8) Tense-root With 
 Mood-vowel and Personal-ending. E. g.— 
 
 What is the Greek of ‘ he-advised himself, (Aor. 1. Mid. of (lou- 
 XiOtu, I advise) ? 
 
 Ans. Verb-root is (Zou\tu -, Augment is l, Tense-characteristic 
 of Aor. I. Mid. is <r ; hence Tense-root is t-/houX'u-tr-; Mood-vowel 
 of Aor. I. Ind. Mid. is «, ( i-(3oukiv-<r-a-) ; Personal-ending of III. 
 Pers. Sing, of a historical Tense of the Mid. is - to— hence the com¬ 
 plete form is ^•/5ouX£U-<^-a-re. 
 
 (7) In order that the memory of the pupil may not be tasked 
 too much, only certain portions of the Verb should be learned at 
 one time, and in the order presented in § 84. He may at the 
 same time translate the Greek and English Exercises. After all 
 thj forms have been thoroughly Committed to memory in this way, 
 he may turn back to the Tables, and repeat all the forms together. 
 
 
 
 « 
 
124 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -(t». [Chap.VIII. 
 
 ACT 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Numbers 
 
 and 
 
 Persons, 
 
 MOO 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 of the Princ. Tenses. 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 j3ovAtv-a),* I advise, 
 
 (3ovAev-co,* 1 
 
 
 
 
 may advise, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 j3o vAiv-uQy thou ad - 
 
 f3 ovAtv-yg, 
 
 
 
 visest, 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 (3ovAtv-ei, he , s7ie, ^ 
 
 (3ovAev-y,* 
 
 
 
 advises, 
 
 
 Present, 
 
 D.2. 
 
 (3ovAev-etov ,* yeboth 
 
 (3ovA£l>-r)TUl>,* 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 
 advise, 
 
 
 root: 
 
 3. 
 
 f3ovAev-e r o v,* they 
 
 (3ovAtV-1}TO V,* 
 
 f3ovAtu~y 
 
 
 both advise , 
 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 (3ovAii)-opev, we ad- 
 
 (3nuAcV-io/uc-i', 
 
 
 
 vise , 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 (3ovAtv-8Tt,* you ad- 
 
 / 3ovAev-ijte , 
 
 
 
 vise , 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 [3()vAeI)- 0 V <T l (v),* 
 
 (3ovAtV-U)(Jl(v) 
 
 
 
 they advise. 
 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 e-(3ovAev-ov,* I was 
 
 
 
 
 advising , 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-fiouAtv-eg, 
 
 < 
 
 Imperfect . 
 
 3. 
 
 e-(3ovAev-e{v), 
 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 D.2. 
 
 E~[3ouA EV-ETOV, 
 
 
 root : 
 
 3. 
 
 E~f3oV AeV'E T 7] V t 
 
 ■ 
 
 e-(3ovAev-) 
 
 P.l. 
 
 1-(3ovAeV-OIU8V, 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 £-(3ovAeV-£TE, 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 IfiovAtV-OV* 
 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 j3E-j3ovAEv-K-a, I 
 
 (3e-(3ovAev-k-(i), 
 
 Perfect i. 
 
 
 have advised , 
 
 I may have 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 
 
 advised , 
 
 root: 
 
 2. 
 
 (3E-f3ovA£V-K-ag, 
 
 [3e-(3()vAev-k- 
 
 
 3. 
 
 /3£-I3ovAeu-K-e()'),* 
 
 yg, &c., like 
 
 pouAfu-ic) 
 
 
 
 Subj. Pres. 
 
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -ui. 
 
 125 
 
 § 81 .] 
 
 IVE. 
 
 DS. 
 
 PARTICIPIA1S. 
 
 Optative 
 
 i.e. Subj. of Hist. Tenses 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Inein. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 • 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 1 i 
 
 ( 
 
 fiovAcv-e, 
 advise thou , 
 fiovAev-iriOi 
 
 [3ovAtv- 
 
 £ TOV,* 
 
 ftnvXiv 
 
 £TL)Vf 
 
 t 
 
 (3ovAtv- 
 
 £iv, 
 
 to 
 
 - advise . 
 
 r fiovAtu-cjv, ; 
 
 fiovAsv-ovcra, 
 
 jf3ovX£v-ov,t 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 (SouXtu-ov- 
 
 TOC, 
 
 [3ovXi\f-nv- 
 atie, &c. t 
 <. advising. 1 
 
 PovXlv-bt^* 
 
 fiovAe v-cTwaav, or fiouAev-uvruv* 
 
 f3ovXev-oijui, / 
 might advise, 
 fiovXtv-oig, 
 fiovAtv-oi, 
 (3ov\ev-oitov, 
 
 (5ovX EV-oi T‘7) V , 
 
 (3ovAtv-oi/uei' t 
 
 13ov\eV-OlT£, 
 
 13ouAtv-o l £ V* 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 
 /3f-j3ouXfu- 
 ic-f,* like 
 Imp. Pres. 
 
 fie-fiov- 
 
 Aev- 
 
 / 4* 
 
 ic-£va«,T 
 £o have 
 advised. 
 
 r Be-SovXsV-K- 
 
 WC»t 
 
 j3£-/3(>vX£V-K- 
 1 ^ ^ + 
 wa,T 
 
 [3£-f3ovA£U-K- 
 
 ^ «H‘»t 
 
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN - W .|ClIAP. VIII. 
 
 ACT 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 j Numbers 
 
 I ami 
 
 ;j Persona 
 
 MOO 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 of the Princ. Tenses. 
 
 Perfect i. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 f3e-/3ou\zv-K-cirov,* 
 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 3. 
 
 (3e-f3ovX£u-K-a T o V* 
 
 
 
 p. i. 
 
 f3e-f3(JvXtv-K-ap£v, 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 fls-fSovXev-K-are, 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 fSt-ftovXev-K-a <t i(i>). 
 
 • 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 Ifit-fiovXtv-K-tiv* I 
 
 
 
 
 had advised, 
 
 
 Pluper - 
 
 
 
 
 feet 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 t-fit-fiovXtv-K-eic, 
 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 3. 
 
 i-(3t-fiovXtv-K'ti, 
 
 
 root: 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 t-(3£-f3ouXtV-K-£lTOV } 
 
 • 
 
 t-/3c- 
 
 3. 
 
 £-(3£-}3ovXev-K-£ IT 7}V 
 
 
 f3 ovXev-k -) 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 t-fie-fiovXtv-K-eiiJ.tv, 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 £-f3e-j3ovXeV-K-£lT£ f 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 £~ [3 £~ j3 OvXev-K~ £ (T a V. 
 
 
 PERFECT II. 
 
 
 Tri-tyyv-a,' I appear. 
 
 7T£-(p{)V~0), I ' 
 
 Plpf. II. 
 
 
 £-7T£-(j)riV-£lV , 2 I ap- 
 
 map appear. 
 
 
 
 peared. 
 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 £-(3ovX ev-a-a, I ad- 
 
 I^ovXev-g-cij,* I 
 
 
 
 vised , (indef.), 
 
 may advise, j 
 
 A or. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 £-(3ovX£V-G-aQ f 
 
 3ovAt v-a-r/Q, j 
 
 (lense- 
 
 
 
 &c., like - 
 
 root: 
 
 * 
 
 c- 
 
 3. 
 
 £-[3ovXeV(T-£(v) 9 
 
 Subj. Pres. | 
 
 fiovXtV- (T-) 
 
 
 
 
 * The infh 
 
 jxion oi 
 
 the 2nd Perf. in all tin 
 
 5 Moods and tho 
 
 I articipials, is like that of the 1st Perf. 
 
5 81 .] CONJUGATION OP VERBS IN -ft). 127 
 
 I VE. 
 
 DS . 
 
 PARTICIPIALS. 
 
 Optative 
 
 l.e. Subj. of Hist. Tenses. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 
 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 fit-flouXtu-K- 
 
 oto c, K-viag, 
 &c., having 
 advised. 
 
 (3e-/3ovXe( >-K-oi/ut, 
 I might have 
 advised, 
 
 fte~(3ov\tv-K-niQ, 
 <fec., like Opt. 
 Impf. 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 Trt-(f>))V-OtlM, I 
 
 might appear. 
 
 irt-cprirt, 
 
 appear 
 thou . 
 
 TT£-(pY]- 
 
 f *-L 
 
 Vk-vai. T 
 
 7T£-0?7l>-(O4*.f 
 
 [lovXeu-a-aijui, I 
 might advise , 
 (3ouXzii-a-aiQ or 
 -€<ac, 
 
 ftovXtv-a-ai*^ or 
 -tit(v). 
 
 f 3ovXev-<t- 
 ov, advise , 
 f3ovXtv-cr- 
 arw, 
 
 (3 ovXtv- 
 
 aat* t 
 to have 
 advised. 
 
 fSovXtv-a* 
 ac, ^ 
 
 f3ottXEV-(T m 
 
 aaa, 
 
 [3ovXzv-a - 
 L ayA 
 
 * The inflexion of the 2nd Pluperf. is like that of the 1st 
 Pluperf., both in the Ind. and Opt. 
 
128 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -to. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 ACT 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 MOO 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 ■J, ® 
 
 2* o 
 
 r : w 
 
 G d £ 
 
 r-* 
 
 S5 * 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 of the Princ. Tenses. 
 
 A or. I. 
 (Continued.) 
 
 D~ 
 
 3. 
 
 t-l3ovXtv a arov, 
 
 i-fiavXtv-cT-a t rj v, 
 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 i-povXtv-a-ciitv, 
 
 | 
 
 
 3. 
 
 c-fjovXev-v-ctrt, 
 
 
 
 
 £ (3ovXeu-& a v. 
 
 
 A or. II. 
 (Tense 
 root: 6 -Aitt-) 
 
 S.l. 
 
 « 
 
 2. 
 
 c-Anr-oi', I lejt , (in- 
 def.) 
 
 £-A/7r-ec» &c., like 
 Impf. Ind. 
 
 At7r-w,&c.,like 
 Subj. Pres. 
 
 Future. 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 root: 
 
 (3ovXw-a-) 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 (3ov\ev-(T-(i) f * I shall 
 advise , like Ind. 
 Pres. 
 
 « | 
 
 
.* 
 
 § si.] 
 
 IVE. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN - w . 
 
 129 
 
 DS 
 
 Optative 
 
 l.e. Subj. of Hist. Tenses. 
 
 JjouAeu-a-aiTOv, 
 
 (3ouAcU-(7-a IT1]V, 
 
 (3ouAtv-<y’ai/jiEVt 
 13ovA Ev-<r-atre 9 
 
 ■/SouAev-a-a iev 
 
 or -siav. i 
 
 Imper. 
 
 f3ov Atv-a- 
 
 UTOV , 
 
 [SouAev-ar- 
 
 arw v-f 
 
 /3 ovAev-cr- 
 
 art* 
 
 PARTICIPIALS. 
 
 In fin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 Genitive. 
 [dovAev-a-av 
 roc;, 
 
 ■ fiovAev-a-ao 
 
 VQi &C., 
 having ad 
 vised 
 
 fiovAev-fT-arujaav, or -avTUfv.* 
 
 A'nr-oifjn, &c., like 
 Opt. Impf. 
 
 fiovAtu-cr-oifii, I 
 would advise , 
 like Opt. Impf. 
 
 Aitt-e, & c., 
 like Imp. 
 Pres. 
 
 At7rav.f 
 
 {3ovAcv- 
 cr-siv - 
 
 Al7T-(OV,-0V(Ta , 
 
 -()!/,f 
 
 Genitive. 
 -di/roc;, -ov- 
 frrjg, &C. 
 
 j3ovAev-(r-wvy 
 &c., like 
 Pres. Part. 
 
1 30 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -u>. [ClIAP. VIII. 
 
 MID 
 
 . Tenses. 
 
 Numbers 
 
 and 
 
 Persons. 
 
 MOO 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 of the Princ. Tenses. 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 (3ovA ev-o pcii, I de- 
 
 [3ovAev-w pat, 
 
 
 
 liberate, or advise 
 
 I may deli - 
 
 < 
 
 
 myself, 
 
 berate, 
 
 § 
 
 2. 
 
 fiovAev-y,* 
 
 [3 ovAEv-y,* 
 
 
 3. 
 
 (3ovAev-e rat, 
 
 (3ovAev-i ] r a i, 
 
 Present, 
 
 
 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 D.l. 
 
 f3ovAev-()pe0ov y 
 
 (3ovAev-u>pe - 
 
 root: 
 
 
 
 Oov, 
 
 (3ovAev -) 
 
 2. 
 
 (3 ovAev-ecfOov,* 
 
 (3ovAev-tjg0ov* 
 
 
 3. 
 
 {3ovAev-e <j 0 0 V,* 
 
 (3ovAev~ti <t - 
 
 
 
 
 Oov* 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 (3ovAev-o jutOa, 
 
 (3ovAEV-lbpE0a, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 (3ovAe v-eoOe,* 
 
 ^ouAev-tjoOe, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 (3ouAev-o v t a i. 
 
 j3o vAev-cwto t 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 e-(3ovAev-'> p rj v , I 
 
 
 
 
 ivas deliberating y 
 
 
 Imperfect . 
 
 2. 
 
 e-(3ovAev-o V, 
 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 3. 
 
 e-(3ovAev-e t n, 
 
 
 root: 
 
 D.l. 
 
 e-[3ovAev~()pe6<)v, 
 
 , 
 
 i- fiovXtu-) 
 
 2. 
 
 e-(3ovAev-e(jO()v, 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 E-f3ouAEV-E (J 0 T) Vf 
 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 E-fiovAEV-O/LlEOa, 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 E^UvAev-EgOs, 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 r*"‘ 
 
 
5 81.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -w. 131 
 
 DLE. 
 
 ds. 
 
 PARTICIPIALS. 
 
 Optative 
 
 i.e. Subj.of Hist Tenses. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infix. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 
 [3 ovXtv-ov, 
 deliberate 
 thou, 
 
 f3ovX £V-t(T- 
 Ou), 
 
 fiovXtv- 
 
 f(T Oat, 
 to deli¬ 
 berate. 
 
 ! fiovXtv-6/j.f:- 
 v°c, j 
 
 (3ovXtv-ofit- \ 
 
 vri, 
 
 (3ouXeV-6/U£- 
 
 vnv , 
 
 {.deliberating. 
 
 
 fiovXzv-£o- 
 
 Oov* 
 
 (3ouXtV-£(T- 
 
 0(i)V,* 
 
 ■ 
 
 * 
 
 
 pov\zv-ta- 
 
 Oe* 
 
 
 
 
 fiovXtv-ioOcu 
 
 \ 
 
 <rav, or fiovXtv-taQwv* 
 
 j3oiAtv-o \ JJi 1] V, I 
 might deliberate, 
 /SovXev-o t o, 
 f3ovXev-o i r o, 
 fiovXev-nfiuitOov, 
 povXtv-oiaOov, 
 fiovXtV’O i a 6 r) v, 
 
 fiovXtu-oifxtOct, 
 fiovXtv-oiaQt, 
 fiovXtV-O l V T 0 . 
 
 • 
 
 j 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
132 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -U). [ClIAP. VIII. 
 
 MID 
 
 
 m 
 
 MOO 
 
 ! Tenses. 
 
 Numbe 
 
 and 
 
 Person! 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 
 of the Princ. Teuses. 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 (3e-[3ovXev-iu a i , I 
 have deliberated, 
 
 |3£-j3ouX£U-/U£- 
 
 
 
 i/oc w, 1 may 
 have delibe- 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 - 
 
 rated , 
 
 
 (3e-[3ovXev-(t a t. 
 
 Bs-fiouXEv-fxi- 
 
 
 
 
 vog yg, 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 3. 
 
 j3£-j3ov\ev-r a i , 
 
 (3e-(3ovXev~iu(- 
 
 root: 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 
 vog y, 
 
 
 (3 E-f3 01>Xe V-fX £001', 
 
 fjOVAEV-) 
 
 2. 
 
 (3e-[3ovXeV-o0oV,* 
 
 (3e’‘(3ovXe V -fiE~ 
 
 
 3. 
 
 (3e-(3<jv\ev-cf 9 0 V* 
 
 V(o rjrov , 
 
 (3e-(3qvXev-/j.e- 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 
 V(i* TITOV, 
 
 
 fje-fiovXev-juzOay 
 
 I3e-(3ovXsv-/lie- 
 
 
 % 
 
 I3e-/3ovXev-(t9e 1 * 
 
 VOl WJXEV, 
 
 [3e~[3ovXev~iu(“' 
 
 
 3. 
 
 
 VOl $TE, 
 
 
 (3e-(3uvXev-v rat. 
 
 (3e-(3ovXev-ixe- 
 
 - • 
 
 
 
 VOL £u<Xi(u). 
 
 
 S.1. 
 
 l-(3t-(5nvXev-iu )? v, / 
 had deliberated, 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 2. 
 
 £~(3e~I3ouXeV~(J O, 
 
 
 root: 
 
 
 
 
 1-/3 €- 
 
 3. 
 
 e-(3e-(3ovXev-t o, 
 
 
 (3ov\ev-) 
 
 
 i 
 
 
§81.] 
 
 DLE. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -w. 
 
 133 
 
 D S. 
 
 participials. 
 
 Optative 
 
 4.*. Subj. of Hist. Tenses. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 
 (3t-(3ovXzv- 
 (to, have 
 thou deli¬ 
 berated , 
 fiz-fiovXzv- 
 
 oOu), 
 
 f3e~j3ov- 
 
 Xev- 
 
 -crOcu, f 
 
 to Aaue 
 delibe¬ 
 rated. 
 
 • 
 
 f (3z-[5uvXtv- 
 ptvog, f 
 (3z-(3ovXtv- 
 
 fdvri, 
 
 (5z-(5ovXzv- 
 
 L givov, f 
 having de¬ 
 liberated. 
 
 
 fiz-(3ovXzv- 
 aOov ,* 
 fiz-(3ovXev- 
 oQwv,* 
 
 % 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 (36-f3ov\sv- 
 
 <rOe* 
 
 
 
 
 
 fiz-fiouXzv-aOuxjav, or 
 
 j3e-/3ouXeu- 
 
 r rQiov* 
 
 fit-fiov\zV~ILl(vOQ, 
 tltjv, I might 
 have deliberated , 
 f3e-(3ov\zv-fiivoQ 
 
 c> 
 
 @t-f$ov\tv-/Lizvor 
 
 til], 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
134 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN o). [ClIAP. VITI. 
 
 MID 
 
 
 93 
 
 MOO 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 92 
 
 £ S 
 
 7 T3 O 
 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 . Ec» 
 
 p <A 5 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 ^ Cm 
 
 of the PrinC. Tenges. 
 
 
 D.l. 
 
 l-fie-fiovXtv-fjLtOov , 
 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 2. 
 
 8-j3E-/3ouA£U-<T0OV, 
 
 • 
 
 ( Continued.) 
 
 3. 
 
 £-j3f-/3ouAEv-er 0 17 v, 
 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 t-f3e-(3ov\ tv-fitOa, 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 l-fit-fiovXzv-oOzj 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 l-(3s-j3iw\eu-v t 0 . 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 i'[3ouAtv-(T-a fi r] i», / 
 
 / SovXev-a- 
 
 
 
 deliberated , (indef.) 
 
 it) n a 1 , I 
 
 
 2 . 
 
 £-/3ouAeV-(T-OJ, 
 
 may deliberate , 
 
 [SuvXev-a-y,* 
 
 
 
 
 &c. t 
 
 like Pres. 
 
 A orist I. 
 
 3. 
 
 £-/3ouAfu-(T-a r 0 , 
 
 Sabj. 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 D.l. 
 
 i-fiovAtv-a-aiJitQov, 
 
 
 root: 
 
 
 
 t-J3ovXev- 
 
 2. 
 
 E-fiovAev-a-avOov, 
 
 
 a-) 
 
 3. 
 
 l-(3ovAtv-a-a <t 0 rjv, 
 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 t-fiovAtv-cr-aiutOa, 
 
 
 
 2 . 
 
 / 
 
 l-fiovAzv-G-aaOE, 
 
 
 > \ 
 
 3. 
 
 e-{3o vAiv-a-a v r 0 . 
 
 
§81.] 
 
 D*LE 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN - W . 
 
 135 
 
 DS. 
 
 Optative 
 
 i.e. Subj. of Hist Tenses. 
 
 /j’ejSouA £ U-/U £ VU) 
 
 UrilLlEV, 
 
 I3e-{3ouAeu-/uei'(j 
 etijrov, 
 
 /3e-j3ou\6V-jU£vio 
 
 ehjrrjv, 
 
 j3e-{3ovA£V-JLlH'Ot 
 
 6ilti/utv f 
 
 (3e-f3(wAEU-/UEVOl 
 urirs, 
 
 (3E-f3ouAeU-/Ll£VOl 
 
 eirjrrai', (elsv). 
 
 1 3ovAev-(r-a i gr\ v, 
 
 I might deli¬ 
 berate, 
 
 fjouAev-a-a i o, 
 
 {3ovAtv-d-a i t o, 
 (3ovAeit-a-ai/u- 
 
 uov, 
 
 (3ovAeu -(j-ciktOo r, 
 
 (3ovAev-a-a l cr- 
 0 Y) V, 
 
 (3ouA£u-o-atjut0a , 
 fiovAtv-cr-atoQs, 
 fiouAeu-a-at v r o. 
 
 Impeh. 
 
 j3ovAsv-<r- 
 ai ,* deli¬ 
 berate the 
 j3(wAev-(7- 
 aaOio, 
 
 [3ovAsv-(T- 
 aaOov, 
 fSovAsv-a- 
 aaOtov,* 
 
 (3 
 
 ovA eu-ct- 
 acrOt, 
 
 PARTICIPIALS, 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 
 % 
 
 I^ovAeu- 
 
 
 j3ovAtv(r- 
 
 (T-aa-Oat, 
 
 
 ajuevog. 
 
 to have 
 
 
 fdovAtv-a - 
 
 delibe- 
 
 i 
 
 aglvri. 
 
 rated. 
 
 
 I3ovAeV-(T- 
 
 
 
 a/uevor, i 
 
 
 
 k having de- 
 
 % 
 
 liberated. 
 
 fduvAEV-cr-aaOwaav, or ^ovAev-ct- 
 
 aa0on>* 
 
13G CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -01. [ClIAP. VIII, 
 
 MID 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Numbers 
 
 and 
 
 Persona 
 
 MOO 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 of the Princ. Tenses. 
 
 A or. II. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 e-Anr-o/urjv, I re¬ 
 mained, (—1 left 
 myself), 
 
 i like Imperf. Ind. 
 
 Anr-oijuat, I 
 
 may remain, 
 like Pres. 
 Subj. 
 
 Future. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 (3ovAtv-<r-o/ucii, I 
 shall deliberate, 
 like Pres. Ind. 
 
 
 Fut. III. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 fia-fiovAtv-a-oyai, I 
 shall have delibe¬ 
 rated, 
 
 like Pres. Ind. 
 
 * * j 
 
 PAS 
 
 ’ 
 
 
 
 
 
 cn 
 
 
 MOO 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 1 3 
 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 S c “ 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 A Ph 
 
 of tile Princ. Tenses. 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 i-fiovAzv-O-qv, I ivas 
 
 fiouAtv-Q-iof 
 
 Aorist 1. 
 
 
 advised. 
 
 I may be 
 
 (Tense- 
 
 
 
 advised, 
 
 root: 
 
 2. 
 
 i-fiouAtv-Q-riQ, 
 
 fiutiAeu-O-r/Grf 
 
 i-fiovAtv- 
 
 
 
 0-) 
 
 3. 
 
 c-/3 ovX^v-J9-r], 
 
 /3ouAeu-0-rj,f 
 
§ 81.1 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -Of> 137 
 
 DLE. 
 
 DS. 
 
 FARTICIPIALS. 
 
 Optative 
 
 i.e. Subj. of Hist. Tenses. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 Xiir-oifjiriv, 1 might 
 remain , 
 
 like Imperf. Opt. 
 
 Xt7r-ou,t ~ia- 
 Ocj, 
 
 like Pres. 
 Imp. 
 
 XiTT-iCT- 
 Oai. t 
 
 \l7T-OjUtVO£) 
 -OjUCVTJ, -Ofi£- 
 
 vov . 
 
 fiovXwcr-ot iurjv,I 
 should delibe¬ 
 rate. 
 
 
 j3oi»Atu- 
 <J-£<7 Oat. 
 
 j3ouAfu-<y-OjU£- 
 vog, -rj, -ov. 
 
 fle-fiovXtv-cr-oi- 
 1 ut)v, I should 
 have deliberated , 
 like Impf. Opt. 
 
 
 f3e-f3ov- 
 
 XtV-(T-£(T- 
 
 Oat. 
 
 flt-fiovXtv-a- 
 ojuevog , -rj, 
 
 -ov. 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 x t « 
 
 DS. 
 
 PARTICIP IALS .• 
 
 Optative 
 
 i.e. Subj. of Hist. Tenses. 
 
 • 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infix. 
 
 Particip. | 
 
 l3ovXev-0-£trjv , / 
 might be advised , 
 
 fiovXtv-O-drig, 
 
 /3ovXtV'6-efih 
 
 (3ovXbv- 0- 
 rjn,be thou, 
 advised , 
 fiovXsv-0- 
 1 rw, 
 
 povXev- 
 0-rjvai, t 
 to be ad¬ 
 vised. 
 
 r BovX sv-0- 
 dg, t 
 
 (3ovX £V-0- 
 + 
 
 ttcra,! 
 
 fiovXw-Q- 
 
138 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN - W . [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 _ PAS 
 
 I Tenses. 
 
 lumbers 
 
 and 
 
 Persons 
 
 , MOO 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 of the Princ. Tenses. 
 
 1 
 
 j A or. I. 
 
 I (Continued v 
 
 I). 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 £-(3ou\eu-0-r)roi’ f 
 
 t~/3ov\£V-0-t} T T) V t 
 
 IfiovXtv-Q-rjfxcv, 
 
 t-fiovXtv-O-rjTe, 
 
 t-foovXil)-0~1] CT a v. 
 
 j3uv\zv-Q- 
 i}TOV,*1[ 
 
 (3ov\tu-0- 
 
 VTO l>,*t . 
 fiovXtv-O- 
 
 (OfJl£V,1l 
 
 (3ov\£V-0- 
 
 f3ov\ev-9- 
 
 (b GT<( v )-t 
 
 I Fut. I. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2 
 
 / 3ov\iv-6))-cr-uiuiai , / 
 sAa// be advised , 
 /3ouA Ev-6i)-a-y, (fee,, 
 like Pres. Ind. Mid. 
 
 
 A orist II. 
 
 Irpi^-rjn, 1 was rub¬ 
 bed, 
 
 e-rpjj3-J7C, &C., 
 
 like Aor. I.Ind.Pass. 
 • 
 
 r()(/3-(b ,f / tticry 
 rubbed , 
 
 &C., 
 
 like Aor. I. 
 Subj. Pass. 
 
 I Fut. II. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 Tpifi-rj-cr-o/itai,! shall 
 be rubbed , 
 rptf3-i]-(r-y, &c ., 
 like Fut. I. Ind. Pass. 
 
 
 | Verbal-Adjectives : /3oiAfu-ro'c,t -»i't -m>,t advised-, 
 
I 
 
 5 Sl.j s CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -M. 139 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 DS. 
 
 IARTICIPIALS. 
 
 Optative 
 
 i.e. Subj. of Hist Tenses. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 In fin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 j3i)v\ev-6-ur}Tov, 
 
 * 
 
 [3ovXzv-0-e i ij - 
 
 r t) v, 
 
 f3ov\(v-0-zlr]fuv 
 and -u/uzv, 
 fiouXev-O-Ei'rirt 
 and -e7te, 
 (3ovXzvO-z lev. 
 
 I3ouXeu-6- 
 
 rjrov* 
 
 (3ovXzv-0- 
 
 ijrafv, 
 
 jSovXsv-O- 
 
 rjre,* 
 
 (3ovXzv-9‘ 
 
 i'lT(i)ocn>. 
 
 
 Genitive : 
 
 < (3ovXev-9-ev- 
 
 3 roc, 
 
 1 I3ovXeu-0~e(- 
 
 (Tl/C &C., 
 
 having been 
 advised. 
 
 fiovXtv-Ori-cr- 
 oi fir) v, 1 should 
 he advised, &c., 
 like Impf. Opt. 
 Mid. 
 
 
 (3ovXev- 
 
 EaOai. 
 
 (3ovXEU-0r)-(T- ; 
 
 djucyoc, 'V> 
 -ov. | 
 
 * 
 
 rp//3-£«r}i', 1 might 
 he rubbed, 
 
 Tptfi-Etrjg, &c., 
 
 like Aor. I. Opt. 
 Pass. 
 
 Tplf3-T]0l, 
 -vino, See., 
 like Aor, I. 
 Imp. Pass. 
 
 rpif3- 
 rjvcu. f 
 
 rpi3-E /c,t & c -, 
 like Part. 
 Aor. I. Pass. 
 
 rpij3-rj-<r-o/jUi7v, / 
 should he rubbed, 
 like Fut. I. Opt. 
 Pass. 
 
 
 rpi[3rr(T' 
 
 eaOai. 
 
 rpifS-rj-cr-o/uz- 
 voc, -»J, -oy. 
 
 /douXzu-rtoCit -tea, -dov ,f to be advised. 
 
140 
 
 REMARKS ON THE PARADIGMS. [CHAP. VTII. 
 
 In the Pass, and Mid. Voices the Pres.,Imperf., 
 Voxi^and Plupf. are identical in form. The only 
 Tmses which have distinctive forms are the Futures 
 and Aorists. 
 
 § 82. Remarks on the preceding Paradigms. 
 
 1. In the 1. Pers. Sing. Plupf. Act., Attic writers, 
 use, besides the form in -elv, a form in - rj ; e . g. e(5e- 
 fiovXtvK-ri, instead of e(3e(3ovXevk-elv. The Mood-vowel 
 «£ in the 177. Pers. PL is usually shortened into g; 
 •e- g. ZfieftouXcv-K-e-aav, instead of zfisfiovXzv-ic-Ei-aaiu 
 
 2. In the II. Pers. Sing, lnd., Pres, and Fut, Mid. 
 or Pass., the Attic writers, besides the form in -y, use 
 another in -el ; e. g. fSovXev-y and f3 ovXev-el, j3ovXtv<r-ip 
 and -Et, fdEfiovXtva-r} and -a, (3ovXEv9iiG-y and -a, rpi- 
 firi<T-y and -el. This latter form in - el is exclusively 
 used in the three following Verbs, viz.— 
 
 fiovXojiai, I wish , (3ovX el, thou wishest (but Subj. 
 
 fSovXy), 
 
 oiojuat, I think , o t e l, thou thinkest (but Subj. oiy), 
 
 tyo^ai, I will see , 6\p 11 , thou wilt see. 
 
 t 
 
 The contracted forms of the III. Pers. PI. 
 Imper. Act. have in all Tenses, except the Perf, the 
 same form as the Gen. Plur.of the corresponding Par¬ 
 ticiples. The pupil should seek out these forms, and 
 be careful not to confound them in the Exercises, 
 <&c., with the Participles. 
 
 § 83. Remarks on the formation of the Attic Future. 
 
 ^ When the short vowels «, e, t, precede a in the 
 FuL {Act and Mid.) of certain Verbs, from Roots 
 
$ 84.]' ACCENTUATION OF THE VERB". 141 
 
 of two or more syllables, the <r is dropped, and, (by 
 contraction of the two Vowels), the terminations be¬ 
 come respectively -dx, -o vpai ; e. g. eAow (usually eA«u- 
 vax), I drive, IAdcr-(n, Fut. Att. IX ax, -ag, -of, -ox/ulev, -art, 
 -uhti(v) ; teAeoj, / finish, teAe-ct-w, Fut. Att. teA w, -eTc, -eT, 
 "QviiEVy-tiTErOvcri (v) ; TeXi-cr-oyai (rf Ae'ojucu), rtXovpai,-rj, 
 -eitcu, &c. If the short Vowel is t there is no contrac¬ 
 tion , but the axis circumflexed , and thePersonal-endings 
 are the same as if contraction had taken place; e. g. ko- 
 fxlZu), I carry , Fut. KQfiioax, Fut. Att. ko/ullox, -(Etc, -/e/,. 
 -lovyEv, -ttire, -iovcri(v); Ko/utovjuai, -ir], -ieitui, -lOv/nOa,. 
 &c. This form is called the Attic Future , because it 
 was often used by the Attic writers. 
 
 2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the Ind. r 
 Inf, and Part*, never in the Opt.; e. g. teAw, reXtiv, 
 teAuxv, (but TEXiaoi/Lii). The V erbs which take this 
 form are the following: (a) eA d ox (lAavvax), I drive, 
 t f X r w, I finish, k a A £ ax, I call j —(b) all in -l X, ax ' r 
 ■—(c) a few in -d Z>ax, (f3i[3a^ax very commonly) ;—(d) 
 of Verbs in -pa, all in -d v v v fx t, and a ju <p i i v v v p i , 
 J clothe (Fut. ap^daox, aptyidi, -i£ig, &c.). Excep¬ 
 tions to this form of the Fut. rarely occur in the 
 Attic dialect. 
 
 § 84. Accentuation of the Verb. 
 
 1. General Rule. The accent is as far from the 
 end of the word as the nature of the final syllable per¬ 
 mits j e. g. j3ovXevE, TrauE, tvttts, j3ovA£vaov r Traucror? 
 Tv\pov r (but jdo vXbVEig, J3 ovAeveiv). 
 
 Obs. I. The diphthong -«/ at the end of a Verb, (as at the end of a 
 Substantive), is considered short with reference to the accent ; e. g. 
 liouXtCofAKi. The Opt. ending -*i, however, is considered long ; e. g. 
 fav\s6ffai, (III. Pers. Sing. Opt. Aor. I. Active). The Opt. ending 
 -W is also. long ;, e. g. Vx&smtm. 
 
142 
 
 ACCENTUATION OF TUB VERB. [CllAP. VIII. 
 
 2. The same general rule holds good also in compo¬ 
 sition, e, g.— 
 
 (pips 7 rpogtyspe 
 
 (ptvys SK(psvye 
 
 Xeltts aTToXsnrs 
 oica ovvoica 
 
 Sio/Litv svSu>jusu 
 fjpai KaOrifiai. 
 
 To this, however, there are the following restrictions: 
 (1) The accent cannot he placed farther back than the 
 syllable of the ivord prefixed, ichich had the accent be¬ 
 fore composition; e. g. cittoSoq, sTriOsg ( not diroSog, «rt- 
 Osg): (2) Nor farther back than its position in a pre¬ 
 viously-existing Compound; e. g. awsKSog (from 
 skSoc), naosvOsg (from svOsc): (3) Nor farther back 
 than a previously-existing Augment; e. g. Trpocax 01 ' 
 like st^ov, Traoiiy^ov like taxop, s&iyov like rjyov, 
 airtipyov like sipyov, {not irp6gti\ov,TTdpsa\ov, &c.):— 
 but Imper. ciTtsipys* 
 
 EXCEPTIONS TO TIIE GENERAL RULE. 
 
 3. The accent is on the Ultimate in the following 
 forms:— 
 
 (a) In the Inf. Aor. II. Act. as a circumflex ; in 
 the Masc. and Neut. Sing, of the Part, of the same 
 Tense as an acute; e. g. Xnrsiv, Ximov, Xittov; and. 
 in the II. Pers. Sing. Imper. Aor. II. Act. of the 
 five Verbs, sins, sXOs, tvpi , Xa{3 i and iSi, (but in Com • 
 position > anosins, anuXa/Se, ansXOs , s'igiSs). 
 
 (p) In the Imper. Aor. II. Mid. as a circumflex ; 
 e. g. Xaj3ou f 6ov (from rtOrifii). 
 
 Obs. 2. In Compounds , the Imper. (but not the Participials [see 
 («)]) of the Aor. II. Act. throws back the accent in all Verbs ac¬ 
 cording to the general rule; e. g. t*/saXf, exSaj, i*&- 
 
 Stff, avro /utradof, /usrctdors. (not cttfobos, /^csTxaot, See No. 2},—but 
 'vc£a\i7>, U&u\u>v, txXvruv, iltkdujv, &c. In the Imper. Sing. Aor. 
 II. Mid. of Verbs in -<w, however, the circumflex remains on the 
 Ultimate in Compounds also ; e- g. izficeXov, ipixoZ, \xXitou, Wt\a.6oZ, 
 ipiXov, iviviyxov; so also inVerb3 in -(<u, when the Verb is eora- 
 pounded with a monosyllabic Preposition ;e. g. <r(>ahoZ, tv^ou, kfou, —but 
 tne accent is thrown back, when the Verb is compounded with » 
 
§84.] 
 
 ACCENTUATION OF THE VERB. 
 
 143 
 
 dissyllabic Preposition ; e. g. ani'oou, xar&Qou, arroSou. In the Dual 
 and Pl. of the Aor. It. Mid., the accent is always thrown bad; ; 
 e. g. btfi&ks'rfa, a.vokxfi-'rfa, -irpoboelh, ivfotrJi, ctpuffa, xccTxfordi, (not i*- 
 
 fiakiffUs, &C.). 
 
 (y) In all Participles in -q (Gen. -roc) as an acute, 
 consequently in all Act. Participles of Verbs in -pi, 
 as well as in those of the Perf. I. and II. Act. and 
 Aor. I. and II. Pass, of all Verbs: e. g. flefiovXevKooq, 
 (Gen. -dr oq), rreipiivibc, (Gen. -droq), flovXtvQtiq, (Gen. 
 -ivroq), Tvrrttq , (Gen. -tvroq), lardq, (Geil. -dvroq), 
 nOetq , (Gen. -ivroq), SiSovq , (Gen. -ovroq), Sukvvc, 
 (Gen. -vvroq), chaarctq , ikOtiq, rrpuSouq, (Gen. Staardv- 
 roq, ZkOtvroq, TrpoSdvroq). 
 
 Obs. 3. The Aor. 1. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, 
 is an exception ; e. g. cr«/Sw<r*f, (Gen. vcuhu<rt&vTi};). 
 
 (S) In the Sing. Subj. Aor. I. and II. Pass, as a 
 circumflex ; e. g. fiouXeudio, rpifiio. 
 
 4. The accent is on the Penult in the following 
 forms:— 
 
 (a) In the Inf. of the Perf. Mid. or Pass., of the Aor. 
 I. Act,and of the A or. II. Mid.; also in all Infinitives in 
 -vat, (hence in all Act. Inf. of Verbs in -pi, in the Inf. of 
 the Aor. I. and II. Pass, and of the Perf. I. and II. 
 Act of all Verbs); e.g. TErv(j)9ai, fiejJovXtvcrOai, TEripricr- 
 Out, TrtfjnXrioOai, pEpiaOCoadai ;—r/)uXd£ r u, [3ovXtuaai f 
 riprjaai , ^/Xrjara/, piaOioaai', — XnriaOai, ekOeoQui, Siaboa- 
 Oat ;— laravai, nOivat, SiSdvai, 8 ei Kiwvai, arrival , ik- 
 arijvai, Qtivai , ekOeivoi, Sou rat, /utraSouvai ;— j3ov XtvOi,- 
 vai , rpififivai ;— j3e(3ouX{VKevai, XeXonrival- 
 
 (j3) In all Optative forms in -o i and -a t, (see 
 
 Obs. 1). 
 
 Obs. 4. The three similar forms—the Inf. Aor. /. Act., the 
 Imper. Aor. I. Mkl., and the III. Pers. Sing. Opt. Aor. I. Act .— 
 when they consist of three or more syllables, and have the Penult 
 long by nature, are distinguished from one another by the accent, 
 in the following manner :— 
 
144 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -<i>. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Aor. I. Act. 
 
 ' \ 
 Injin. 111. Sing. Opt. 
 
 fiouXiurca (hou'Xitiaa.t 
 
 •roir\<roLi <roir]trcu 
 
 Aor. I. Mid. 
 
 II. Sing. Imper. 
 
 fioukiurui 
 
 oroltjo-at. 
 
 But when th* Penult is short by nature , or long by position only, 
 the Inf. Aor. J Act. is identical in form with the III. Pers. 
 Sing. Opt. A~ . I. Act. ; e. g. <pu\aE,ou ;—but Imp. Aor. I. Mid. 
 
 (y) In the Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; e. g. /3e- 
 
 fiovXtv/iivcj, -fiivT], -fiivov , Ttn/xij/itpoc, TTt(j)tXi]p.ivog- 
 
 XXXVI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (1) PRESENT AND IMPERFECT, ACTIVE. 
 
 Ayogtva, I say. 
 
 amigos, -ov, (Gen.), inexperienced , 
 unacquainted-with, unsUlled• 
 in, (Adv. hru^/us'). 
 a-ro-T^i-ru, I ward-off, avert. 
 k<To-<pi(ryu, I jlee. 
 ctgorgov, -ov, to, (aratrum), 
 plough. 
 
 ytwooias, (Adv.), nobly, bravely, 
 hoo's, -jj, -6v, frightful, dreadful, 
 powerful, dangerous; to Fiivov, 
 the danger. 
 
 tricot, -a, -ov, (alter), the other 
 (of two), different. 
 
 «a,(ut), in-order-that. With 
 
 the Suhj. after a principal 
 Tense; with the Opt. after a 
 historical Tense. 
 xeikkos, (-tos =) -oos, to, beauty. 
 
 xtlOu, I hide. 
 
 p.ou<rix.Y\, j understood), -~!f r 
 v), every art under the patron¬ 
 age of the Muses, (especially 
 music}. 
 
 0 Txv, (with the Subj.), when, 
 
 whenever, 
 on, when. 
 
 outus, (before a consonant ourw), 
 so, thus. 
 
 vKibtiot, -as, it, education, in¬ 
 struction. 
 
 ? rk'/imoc^u, I approach, 
 orfovoiu, -oos, ij, forethought, pru¬ 
 dence. 
 
 vr£os-vrr<rTu y (accidit), it befalls , 
 
 happens. 
 
 ctoooioZ,*), 1 am-at-variance-with. 
 
 1. Avo 6$<t> 7rpoc rrjv 7 roXiv ayerov. 2. Bot ro apor- 
 pop aytrov. 3. Xaipivpev, & na~L$(g. 4. Qg rjdv 1 
 KaXXoQ, orav i\y vovv otocppova. 5. O i iroXirai rovg 
 vo/iovg (pvXaTTOvrwv 2 . 6. 'EraTpoe iraipov <ppovn~ 
 ZJru). 7. Ilarrjp tc icat jUTjrrip irpovotav lyirwv rijc rwi^ 
 t(kvwv 7 ratSuag- 8. r Q ypappanov anttoog ov fiXinu 
 
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN-m. 
 
 145 
 
 § 84.] 
 
 (SAIttwv. 9. Tac 7rpog7ri7TTOvi7ag Tir^ag yEvvaiwg (pips. 
 
 10. 'O 7raig rip irarp] poSov (pipsi, iva \aipy. 11. 'O 
 irate tw 7 rarpl podov EffrEpEv, !va \aipoi. 12. 2m»cpa~ 
 rr\g, iogirEp lyiyvwGKEv, ovrwg eXeysv. 13. "Ore ol 
 EXXriveg brXnaiaZov, oi /3ap(3apot inri^Evyov. 14. 0e- 
 
 fUGTOicXrig ical ’ApicrTEiSrjg 7 tote Earaaria?'r^v. 15. Aa- 
 
 KE^aipOVlOl pOVGLKTig aTTEipug E\OV(TtV . 3 I f ’ A.TTOTpETTOLTE , 
 u> Qeoi, to Selvov a(f>' ripwv. 17. M rj^epov KEvOoig 
 KapSiq. vovv, aXXa ayopEvcov. 
 
 ' i 
 
 1 Sc. \trri. 2 Imperative. 3 — to be, unskilled in, 
 
 ( 2. Of what Numb, and Pers. is xytro* ? 4. What is the compo¬ 
 sition of «<m» ? 7. In what Mood is i%sTuv ? Why is the Subi. 
 used in 10, but the Opt. ix* 1 ? 0 ') 11 ?) 
 
 1. Two horses hasten, drawing the chariot. 2. Two 
 women sing. 3. Let-us-shun 1 wickedness! 4. The 
 
 boys study literature diligently, that their parents mav 
 rejoice. 5. The boys studied literature diligently, that 
 their parents might rejoice. 6. The citizen shou'id- 
 guard 2 the laws. 7. Let friends care-for friends! 8. 
 Two horses were-hastening, drawing the chariot. 9 
 Two women were-singing. 10. Those who are unac¬ 
 quainted with literature do not see, when they see. 3 
 
 11. Citizens, bear the danger which - befalls' 4 you / 
 
 12. Ye speak even as ye think. 5 13 We are un¬ 
 skilled-in music. 14. May the gods ward-off 2 the 
 danger from us I 
 
 Subj, * Opt. Trans. * seeing, see not . 4 Part. ® y/yvu<rxtrj. 
 
 XXXVII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (2) PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT I., ACTIVE. 
 
 Tvmixues, -<*, -«», pertaining-to- i I go-into, put-on. 
 
 women , feminine. I vi-'btuxa, I pursue. 
 
 Azetiot, -ou, o, Darius. xarx-^uu, I sink, set (as the sun), 
 
 Atolu£9{, .ou, o, Diodorus . hide-myself. 
 
 H 
 
146 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN-w. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 xa.Ta.-Xvu, I dissolve, destroy, 
 xvytvu, (Gen.), I am-master-of 
 conquer, get-possession-of. 
 pains, -ius , b, seer, prophet. 
 f*ex\u, (1) I intend, am-about-to: 
 (2) 1 delay , hesitate: to pixxov, 
 the future. 
 
 Mjhta, -as, rj, Medea. 
 
 Titans, -ou, o, a Persian. 
 TlXaTaiai, -cuv, at, Platcece. 
 
 •roXifuos. -a, -«», hostile J S tro\t- 
 ptos, the enemy. 
 
 'T^oQnTvuu, / prophesy. 
 ZxfiavdiraXos, -ou, b, Sardana - 
 pdlus. 
 
 3>iotx.vhns, •ous, o, Pherecydes. 
 
 <pv&>, (trans.) I bring-forth; Perf. 
 (intrans.j, I am-by-nature , 
 am-formed so and so. 
 
 \‘ 0i J ro ^e tot karbv TTo\lrae m<f>ovivm<nv. 2. <!>;- 
 p£KuCr|c i\tyt pijSsiu 0£w TtQuxivai. 3. Ntop TrvbvKutg' 
 jroAAa XP1®™ pavOavi. 4. 'O p&vne ra piWovrm 
 Ka\«j g TnnpovfrtvKiv. 5. Ta rf K va tS irtjrai'&tucae. 
 O- M'|0£ia ra tskmo TrefovevKvia i^aipiv. 7. Of Aaice- 
 Caifiovwi nAaratae KanXeXvKeoav. 8. SooSarajraAoc 
 aroAfla yvva,KUuv tviS^VKe,. 9. "Ore %XioQ KortStSu- 
 «(, 0 ( iroXifuoi' hrXxioiaZov. 10. ’AAf?a.-3poc 
 KOIU AapiTov, 70V Ulna cuv fiaoiXta, rroXXwv ypriuaTan 
 
 tKEKVpltVKU. 
 
 Being young , i.e. whilst thou art young. 
 
 1. The sun has set. 2. The Lacedasmonians have 
 destroyed Platte*. 3. We admired the woman who. 
 lad-put-on 1 a purple robe. 4. Diodorus says that 
 Alexander’, pursuing Darius, had-got-possession-of 
 many treasures. 5. The enemies had slain 400 sol¬ 
 diers. b Thy friend had educated his (=the) chil- 
 dren well. v 7 
 
 1 Trans. : having-put-on. s Acc. with Inf, 
 
 XXXVIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (3) FUTURE AND AORIST I., ACTIVE.* 
 
 ’a frx&frua, -a s , harmlessness, ld K ov 0v , ro ', tear. 
 
 ^Mambo), both, f§68, Obs.2.] breah ^ *• 
 
 *' V plish C ° mi>lete> fi ni8h > accom- l x d&, / judge. 
 
 10. 12. U thC We and of the A °rist, see Syntax, § 15^ & 
 
§ 84.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN-w. 147 
 
 hxatrrris, -«v, o, a judge, {or ra¬ 
 ther a juror) % 
 
 *fo, (with the Opt.), 0 that / 
 Would thatI 
 Zxyovog, -ov, descendant. 
 iXvlZ'W, I hope, expect. 
 irx'yysA.Xa, / announce. 
 trt-p>ov\iuu,(Da,t.),I plot-against. 
 
 w%tt.T9t, -n, -ov, utmost, last , ex¬ 
 treme, most-remote. 
 
 Ixtnvco, I supplicate, entreat, 
 xivdvvedc, / incur-danger. 
 wna. (Dat.), Iam-enraged-with. 
 on, (Conj.), that, because, 
 or^iv lev, (Subj.), before , ere , until, 
 (pvrtuu, I plant. 
 
 Rule of Syntax.] The particle iv indicates a con¬ 
 dition, either expressed or implied. [See § 153, 2.] 
 
 1. Oi arpartwrat rip: iroAn/ djro tm/ iroAfpiwy tiro- 
 Autrowri p. 2. O xpijoroe uvOpanrog am' toTq tuyovoig 
 •pvrevait. 3. EAin'Sojuci’ jrdrra eu avvoeiv. 4. 'O ay- 
 yt\ 0 Q (irrjyycXAe role TroXlraic, Sri oi iroAluiot rw orpn- 
 reupar, e^ooAeooop,,. 5. ’A^AAeAc 'Aya/tifivovt 
 
 rz a l v - 6 ; °‘ , EAA >l«e avSpEi’a ttoAAA iVvSoa., 
 (■- ° SwKpnnjc ouv i«7£U0£ rode oVaarAf p^d ff0 A- 
 WI/ caKOvwv,^ aWa maTtvaag rrj iavrov aflXafizia skip- 
 buvtvaz rov^xarov k/pSupov. 2 8. Tag rd>v AatXuv 
 ovvnVtiag oXiyog EuXvaev. 3 9. IIotv av au- 
 
 <I>olv pvOov dKo(>cr V g\ S/ K a? f . 10. O i AaKeSaiuo- 
 viot nXaraiag Kari^aav. 11. Tig av b mar^aat (or 
 ^var r 12. E?0e’ ^vra K aA,5 e M aa L. 
 14. Ako vaatc (or a K o6aua t f pou, & pXe. 14. 'O 
 *yyiXog iirfiyytXXcv, Sn oi ffoAdpmi ™ arparm hn- 
 liovXivaauX (or lm(3ovXcv a uav)\ 15.’'Akoo^ poo, 
 <o ^lAe. lo. Eralpoc kraipM irurTtvaarco. 17. T»)v 
 TroAtv Xtyoixri piyav klvSvvov 2 Kivdvvtvaat. 
 
 • lfl S ° (etia ^‘ 2 x j^ vvov is an Ac «- of cognate signification. § 159. 2. 
 destroys. General impositions are expressed in Greek by the 
 
 #5} o 5? gh J by § 152 ’ * 0: 0bs - 5 - 4 § 183,3. (b). 
 
 jA? 3 ’/- •° # bs ; 1 4 * TT T | 11S form of the °P fc - is usually called the 
 
 SiTf •' f IL and IIL Pers * and the Hirers. Plur 
 are tnose oi most common occurrence. 7 § 153,1. b. (/3). » § lgo, 5. 
 
 1. Ye will free the city from the enemies. 2. 
 oo * men will plant for their (=the) descendants 
 likewise. 3. He said that the city would incur 
 great danger, 4. Achilles and Agamemnon were 
 
143 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -o>. [CHAP. VIII 
 
 enraged-with 3 one-another. 5. We supplicated the 
 judges with many tears. 6. Achilles killed Hector. 
 7. Judge not (pi.) before you have heard the story 
 of both ! 8. Thou canst not trust 4 a liar. 9. May 
 >e accomplish 5 everything well! 10. Would-that 
 
 you would hear me, O friends! 11. May the sol¬ 
 diers 5 free us from the enemies! 12. Hear me, O 
 
 friends! 13. Friends should trust 5 friends. 14. To 
 
 order 6 is easier than to do 6 . 15. Medea rejoiced in¬ 
 having-slain 7 her children. 
 
 'xentrrou 2 xaJ. 3 Dual. 4 Opt. with av. *Opt. 6 Aor. 
 
 7 Aor. Part. 
 
 XXXIX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (4) PRESENT AND IMPERFECT, MIDDLE OR PASSIVE. 
 
 'A -oZ, o, brother, 
 ivo-hexoftou, I receive, admit, 
 approve-of. 
 a.v\ 6 i, -00, 0, flute. 
 iav (==%t or av), if, (with Subj,). 
 hxfytos, -oo, native, of-the-coun- 
 try. 
 
 ieya.%0fi.ea, I work. 
 
 I go, come, 
 wuxos, quiet, quietly . 
 
 lateo, (Acc.), I lie-hid, 
 am-concealed, escape-detection. 
 fAsa-og, middle, in-the-middle, 
 erzvoftou, I am-poor. 
 ergarra, I do, act; (with an 
 Adv. I fare so and so). 
 areocnvu, I take-the-field, serve- 
 as-a-soldier; Mid. / make- 
 war, march. 
 
 ^ivHopou, I lie. 
 
 1. Avo avSps jiax^Oov. 2. Tevvaitog fia\d)fxiQa x 
 7T£pi Trig 7rarpiSog. 3. Avayiccuov £<ttl tov viov 7 rsc* 
 OtaQai Tip war pi. 4. rioAAot ayaOo'i 7 rivovrai. 5. No- 
 poig roig tyxtopioig tmcrOai kqXov Icjtiv. 6. Mi) otto- 
 ru)v'<piA(ov Tovg 2 tt pog 3 ra (f>avXa <roi ^apt^ojUE- 
 v ° v< *\ 7. Etfaoroe rjcrvxog p.iar\v t^v oSov Ipylaflw, 
 o. Ot 7 roA 7 rat rote vopoig miQiaQiov. 9. Tw aSeX (pot 
 pot £7T£<t0ov. 10. Ei ft o OX £ i icaXtog TTparzeiv, Ipya- 
 
 1 o U * V/’ ^ ay 0 vXy KaXwg irpaTTtiv, \pyaZ>ov. 
 H. ¥ zvcojisvog ov$t\g XavOavei ttoXvv xpovov. 13. Ot 
 A aictSaipovtoi jut avXwv* kcrTpaTtuovTo* 14. £,'10& 
 
§ 84.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN - W . 
 
 149 
 
 ftavTeg avey 6pyr,g PovXftoivro. 15. Avo koXoj frnra) 
 fiC rny ttoXlv i]XavvioOr]v. 16. ’Eap irlvrj, oXiyoi 
 (jnXor. 1 1 
 
 1 Let us fight. The Subj. of the principal Tenses in the I. Per* 
 hing. and PI. is used to express an exhortation. § 153, 1. b (a) 
 
 those of your friends, who,' &c. 
 — ad. withfiutes, i. e. to the music of flutes. 5 sc. */«■/*. 
 
 1. Let the judge consult without anger! 2 He 
 who goes 1 the middle path goes most-safely. 3. Two 
 beautiful horses are driven into the city. ‘ 4. If 2 sol¬ 
 diers fight bravely, they are admired. 5. We should 
 not lie but always speak-the-truth. 3 6. Let sons 
 obey their fathers! 7. With 4 God and fate* it is 
 dreadful to contend. 8. Two men were fighting. 
 9. I he soldiers were fighting bravely. 10. Would 
 that all would consult 6 without anger! 11 O that 
 
 thou wouldst always worship the Deity! 
 
 1 i iZXOftHOt. 3 Sub j. 4 Dat> 6 0pt 
 
 XL. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (5) PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT, MIDDLE OR PASSIVE. 
 
 A v, top-ofa-hill, citadel, 
 avrovoftia, -at, yj, {auris, v6pt>t), 
 independence, self-government. 
 ifiipvTiuiu, I implant. 
 
 I eirect, found. 
 
 ttara-xXuM, I lock-up, shut-up. 
 xlyouxi, (dicor), I am-said. 
 Xyo-rvs, -ov, o, robber, pirate, 
 o-uvfyx*, -**, ^ covenant, treaty . 
 
 , 1 -.°‘ ^ <TT “‘ ™<povtvvrat. 2. Avo iciXfo, bno rov 
 avrov bibamcaXov imraibtvaOov. 3. 'H BamXda M 
 rov 8,,/wu XtXvrai. 4. To T c 9eot C M tC,v ’AOnva'uov 
 iroAAoi vtqjbpvvrai. 5. H Oupa kck\ dadw x . 6. rino 
 PftovXevao. 7. IW AvflpAroic W 
 
 <p>iTtv/nvi) etrnv tiriBvpia rij-r avrovoplat. 8. 02 Xm- 
 r«i mQovivoQvv. 9. 02 tto Xiptoi tic rrjv aKoav Ka r« 
 
150 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -W. [OlIAP. VIIL 
 
 KticXtiaOcu Xtyovrai, 10. SevofJxovTO c vlu>, TpvWoQ 
 *a\ AtoSwpot’, t7T£7rai$tv(j0r}v ev £ 7 rapry. 11. A i <jvv~ 
 OijKUL vtto tCjv (3ap[3ap(ov iXlXvvro. 
 
 1 Let the door he shut, (and continue shut). The Perf. ImpcT. is 
 used when the consequences of the action are to be permanent. 
 § 153. 1. (c). * is implanted. (This, in English, is really a Perfect 
 
 Tense, as it denotes a permanent state resulting from a past action). 
 
 (3. What are the respective meanings of (&xoiAux and (ZxnAtix ? 
 8. What Number and Person is m<ponwf*n> ? 9. What doe# tit 
 with the Acc. imply ?) 
 
 1. The robber has been slain. 2. The children of 
 the friend are well educated. 1 3. The doors are 
 said to have been shut. 4. Before action, have 
 deliberated (pi.) well! 5. Good and bad desires are 
 implanted* in men. 6. The treaties are said to have 
 been broken b j the barbarians. 7. The two children 
 had been educated by the same master. 8. The 
 monarchy had been destroyed by the people. 
 
 * Perfect. 1 with Perf. P art. 
 
 XLI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (6) FUTUmC AND AOR. I. MID., AND FUT. III. MID. OR PASS'. 
 
 ‘Avx-vrx(ia>, I cause-to-rest; Mid., 
 / rest , recruit myself. 
 ytOot (tiv& rival) , I (jive-to- taste i 
 Mid. (Gen.), I taste, enjoy. 
 tTirfiSiOiu, (studeo), I pursue , 
 practise, devote-niyself-to. 
 
 Takinix, -xf, fi , the state, the 
 government , politics. 
 no£%\>u, l lead-forward; Mid. 
 (with Pass. Aor.),/ go, march , 
 set-out. 
 
 *v\n, -vi, v, gate, (usually in 
 the plural). 
 
 1. Ol iroXtpioi ciri ti)v jiptTlpav noXtv orpaTtvaov* 
 
 rat . 2. Ihpi riii C twp 7roA itCov au>Tijp(ac /3ovXtvaopt0a. 
 
 3. f O nari/p /uoi (XeyiVy on tto ptuaotro. 1 4. Of EA- 
 Arjvfc t 7 rt rovg Utpaaq eorpartvcravTO. 5. ’AvnTraw- 
 owptOa 2 3 , <5 (friXoi. 6. ripo tou ipyov eu fiovXevoat* 
 7. HavTtG Tt/iriG 4 ytticraaOui (dovXovrai. 8. O rrariip 
 avaTravaupivo^’ Troptuatrat. 9. At iruAat rijc pvic- 
 
§ 84 .] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -w. 151 
 
 T <> C 6 KEicXt'njovTai. 7 10. ’Eaw ro/owroc avrip ty)v tto- 
 XiTEiav ETTirridtvp, awrrj iv (3tf3ovXtvotrai. 
 
 1 The Fut. Opt. is used in subordinate sentences where the Fat. 
 Ind. would be used in principal ones. 2 $ 153, I. b. (a). 3 The 
 
 Aor. Imper. expresses a single, instantaneous action ; the Pres. 
 Imper. a continued or repeated one. 4 § 158, 5. (a). 5 The Moods 
 
 of the Aor. do not necessarily denote a past action, but the Aor. 
 Part, does, except in the case of Verbs expressing some affection of 
 the mind ; e g. 2nV*f, fearing , thinking . 6 Gen. of time. 
 
 § 158, 4. 7 shall have been shut. § 152, 7. 
 
 1. Ye will consult about the safety of the citizens. 
 2. The messenger announced that the enemies 
 would march against our city. 3. The general 
 tasted-of 1 great honour. 4. When 2 the enemies 
 have marched 3 against us, the gates of the city will 
 have been shut. 5. Before action, deliberate 4 (pi.) 
 well! 6. In (iv) such a danger it is not easy to de¬ 
 liberate. 4 7. When you (pl.J have deliberated 5 , 
 begin* the work. 
 
 1 Aor. 2 orav. 3 Aor. Subj. of The Aor. Svbj., 
 
 with conjunctions compounded of <xv, is equivalent to the Lat. Put. 
 Perf. (Futurum exactum). 4 Aor. 6 Aor. Part. ( = having delibe¬ 
 rated). 6 oLimvOaii with. Gen. 
 
 XLII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (7) AORIST I. AND FUTURE I., PASSIVE. 
 
 Anpezgeirlet, -at, v, ffifiif, x^a- 
 
 ruv), democracy. 
 i-Ti-fee*), 1 bring-on ; Wnpi^u 
 ir'o\iu.'ov mi (bellum infero), / 
 make war on any one. 
 
 like the Lat. ne, after Verbs 
 of fearing, is to be translated 
 
 * that, or ‘ lest.’ If a princi¬ 
 pal Tense precedes it requires 
 the Subj.; if a historical 
 Tense, the Opt. 
 
 -ov, l, monarch, tyrant. 
 
 The Absolute Case in Greek is the Genitive 
 it corresponds to the Latin Ablative absolute. 
 
 1. f O w Eicrwp Vico TOW ’A^tXXtwc E(jiOVEv0g. 2. Tm 
 actX<f)u) vtto row awrow ^^aaxaAow iirai^ivOiirtiv. 3. 
 
152 
 
 VERBS IN -dJ. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 IIoAAat SrjjuoKpariai in to riov rvpavvwv KarsXvOrjirair. 
 4. Mtyac (poj3og rovg noXirag tyju, prj ai crvvOijKai vt ro 
 twv iroXen'uov X vOUxjiv. 5. E We navreg veaviai icaXiog 
 TraiSevOeiev. 6. <Pov£vOt]Ti, (L Kaicovpje. 7. Oi orpa- 
 riwrat tig ttiv 7roAej uiav yijv 7 ropevOrjvai 1 Xiyovrai. 8. 
 Oi TroXi/uoi , twv avvOriKutv XvSeiawv 2 , fi/iiv iroXtpov 
 hritytpovaiv. 9. *0 XqaTrjg QovevOriatTai. 
 
 1 =to have marched. The A or. Inf. does not usually express a 
 past action, unless after Verbs of asserting and thinking. 2 Gen. 
 absolute. § 176, 2. 
 
 1- You both were educated 1 by the same teacher. 
 2. We were freed 2 from a great danger. 3 3. I fear 
 
 g reatly 4 that the friend who-set-out 5 six days ago 
 as been slain 1 by robbers. 4. I feared much that 
 you had been slain by robbers. 5. Let the two rob¬ 
 bers be slain 1 ! 6. Let the robbers be slain 1 ! 7. Let 
 
 the youth be well educated 1 ! 8. The treaties are 
 
 said to have been broken 1 by the enemies. 9. Well 
 educated youths are esteemed by all. 10. The rob- 
 bers will be slain. 
 
 1 Aor. 2 a.<roxCu. 3 Gen. 4 Trans, j great fear possesses me, &(% 
 5 Aor. I. Pass. Part. 
 
 § 85. More particular consideration of the Augment 
 
 and Reduplication. 
 
 After the general consideration of the Augment 
 and Reduplication (§ 77, 3 and 4), it is necessary to 
 treat them more particularly. 
 
 As has been already seen, all the historical Tenses 
 (Impf., Plpf., and Aor.) take the Augment, but re¬ 
 tain it only in the Indicative. There are two kinds 
 of Augment, the syllabic and temporal. 
 
AUGMENT. 
 
 153 
 
 $ 86 .] 
 
 (a) Syllabic Augment 
 
 1. The syllabic Augment belongs to those Verb* 
 whose Root begins with a Consonant, and consists in 
 prefixing e to the Root in the Impf. and A or is t, bin 
 to the Reduplication in the Pluperfect In this 
 way the Verb is increased (augetur) by one syllable; 
 e- g. (SouAevu >, Impf. 1-fiovAtvov, Aor. t-BovAevaa, 
 hlpf. i-fit-fiovAzvKtiv. 
 
 2* If the Root begins with p, this letter is doubled 
 when the Augment is prefixed (§ 8, 12) ; e. g. p'nruo, 
 I throw, Impf. ippnrTov , Aor. I. ippe^a. 
 
 Obs. The three V erbs (ZavXo/u.eei, I wish, S 6 v a a, t, 1 am able, 
 and I intend, take as an Augment v, instead of s, in the 
 
 later Attic writers especially; e. g.—Impf. ifieuXo^v and ^ovxi^, 
 Aor. ifiovXri^y and r\(iouXr)6m> — Impf. t^vvoL/xyiv and ri^uvix/xriv, Aor. 'Chuvn * 
 4** and tfvvi}0v)i (but always fiwdtrfftiv );— Impf. t^tXXov and 
 (Aor. very rarely rjfiXXwrM). 
 
 § 86. (b) Temporal Augment. 
 
 The temporal Augment belongs to Verbs whose 
 Root begins with a Vowel, and consists in lengthening 
 this Vowel: in this way the quantity or time ( tempus ) 
 of the syllable is increased; e. g.— 
 
 a becomes 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 W, e. g. *a.yee 
 
 %yov 
 
 %Xtt 
 
 wX tlv 
 
 tjXvr/xtjp 
 
 * — 
 
 fl, — 1 Xvr'iZ,a> 
 f, — *1xtnvai 
 
 $Xvri%ov 
 
 HXtrixet 
 
 I — 
 
 *7 xertuov 
 
 Txsrevxx 
 
 • xsrtvxut 
 
 t — 
 
 at, — ofuXiu 
 
 atfiiXtov 
 
 ufAtXnxa, 
 
 u/xiXrixtm 
 
 V -■ 
 
 V, - ’ufylZ* 
 
 
 *u(2 (flK/Z 
 
 'Zf&ftxuv 
 
 mt — 
 
 to, —- at^'icj 
 
 ri(>iov 
 
 y(>*ixet 
 
 fyqxt/v 
 
 eta — 
 
 tlU, — a.h\\u 
 
 YloXtov 
 
 rtvXnxat 
 
 tlvXvxna 
 
 M — 
 
 f, — oUr'ifr 
 
 opKriZfl* 
 
 uxnxat 
 
 UXTIKUl. 
 
 Obs. The Augment effects no change in Verbs beginning with 
 n, f, v, at, oo, or u ; e. g, firrao/xeti, I am defeated , Perf. r>r«* 
 ***'» Plpf. hrrfiftnv ; ’ i <x6a, I press, Aor. V tuff a. ; 'Z <TV 6 u, I lull to 
 fleep, Aor, ; a> <p t X (at, I benefit, Impf. uQeX tov ; ear at at, 
 
 H 2 
 
154 
 
 VERBS IN -&>. 
 
 [Chap. VIII 
 
 I wound, Impf. eSrx%ov ; ti x u, I yield, Impf. tixov, Aor. s7f« 
 E i x & £ u, I liken, is an exception, as it takes the Augment (though 
 rarely ) ; e. g. tlxxX**, uxxax, t"xatrpxt, —rarely 5Ua£av, nx,xax. >j xxa- 
 pat. Those Verbs, also, whose Root begins with tv, usually take 
 no Av/yment ; e. g. i S X ofixi, I pray, Impf. tv X 6p*,v (more rarely 
 n&xfi/mf), but Perf. riypui ;—tifi<rxu, I find, usually omits the Aug¬ 
 ment in good prose. 
 
 § 87. Remarks on the Augment. 
 
 1. Verbs beginning with « followed by a vowel, have « as an 
 Augment instead of v ; e.g ’at a, I perceive, (poetic), Impf. xiov ; 
 but the Augment effects no change in Verbs beginning with «, *», 
 or oi followed by a vowel, e. g. ’a iX o px i , I am disgusted with , 
 Impf. 'xrd&py IV; xlxivu, I dry, Impf. xvxivov ; olu*i%a>, I steer, 
 Impf. oIxki^o* ; also x » a x ; a- * u, / spend, (though no vowel follows 
 a), has xvkXuax, ava Xuxx, as well as xvi\Xu<rx, xvvXuxx. But o i op a i, 
 / thihk, always takes the Augment; e. g. uip> iv. 
 
 2. There are some Verbs beginning with ot followed by a conso¬ 
 nant, in which the Augment effects no change ; e. g. olxou^k u, 
 1 guard the house, Aor. olxotyyvrx. 
 
 3 . The following twelve Verbs, beginning with i, take u as an 
 
 Augment instead of », viz. sxu, I permit, Impf. tixov, Aor. 
 tixrx ;—£ 6 1 Xu, I accustom, (to which also belongs uu6x, I am ac¬ 
 customed) ;—s 7 ax, poet. Aor. (Root *ea), I plated, (in prose only 
 \ *&fitvot and tiaxfittvoi, Part. Aor Mid., having established, having 
 founded) i xi<r<ru, I wind V Xx u, I draw, Aor. uXxuax (Root 
 'EAKT) tixov, I took, (Root *EA), Aor. of xlftu -,—ixop.xi, 
 I follow ;—i^y a X oy, x i, I work;—u, i f -rvX I creep, / 
 no ;—£ <r r i xu, I entertain ;—• £ u, I have. • 
 
 4. The following Verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal 
 
 Augment :— 
 
 xyvufii, I break, Aor. £«£«, &c. (§ 140, 1). 
 
 a x! <r x o p xi, capior, Perf. ixXutx and r,Xuxx, captus sum, 
 (§ 122, 1). 
 
 a H u, / pU8h, \i>6ovv, &,C. 
 
 uv to ft xi, I buy, Impf. 'tuvovftvtv, Perf. wvnpxi. 
 
 5. The Verb s a ? r A % u, I celebrate a feast, takes the Augment 
 in the second syllable,—Impf. IfyrxXov. The same peculiarity occurs 
 in the following forms of the Pluperfect II 
 
 EI’Kn, (Perf. II. toixx, 1 am like), Plpf. II. \uxnv. 
 
 Zx-ropxt, I hope, (Perf. II. eoXrx, I hope), Plpf. II. *d>X*si*. 
 
 ’EPro, (Perf II. Sofya, I have done), Plpf. II. ith^yav. 
 
 6. The following three Verbs take both the temporal and the syl * 
 
 tabic Augment at the same time :— ^ __ 
 
 mvoiyu, I open, Impf. aduyov, Aor. «vl»£a (Inf, ava?!*/), &c. 
 
 i (> x u, I see, Impf. Ifyxov, Perf. ttyxxx, tw£ttpxt, 
 
 ix i a k o p. a. l am caught. Aor. iixam (Inf. 'xX&vtu) and rp^m. 
 
REDUPLICATION. 
 
 155 
 
 § 88. Reduplication . 
 
 1. The Reduplication (§ 77, 4) is prefixed only to 
 those Tenses that denote completed action: viz. the 
 Perfect , the Pluperfect , and the Future III. ^ 
 
 2. When the Perfect takes a Reduplication, the 
 Pluperfect prefixes the Augment to it. But when 
 the Perfect takes an Augment, there is no further 
 change in the Pluperfect.— The Reduplication or Aug¬ 
 ment of the Perfect and Pluperfect remains throughout 
 the Moods and the P articipials. 
 
 3. Those Verbs only admit the Reduplication 
 whose Root begins with a single corisonant , or with a 
 mute and liquid; Verbs beginning with p, f3\, yX, 
 yv, are exceptions, inasmuch as they take merely the 
 simple Augment. Verbs beginning with p, double the 
 p after the Augment (§ 8, 12). If the Verb begins 
 with an aspirated consonant, the corresponding smooth 
 consonant is used for the Reduplication (§ 8, 9); 
 
 Xuu, I loose, 
 
 Hu, I sacrifice, 
 (purtvu, I plant, 
 %oosuM, I dance, 
 
 I write, 
 kXivu, I bend, 
 x/)!vu, I judf/e, 
 irveu, I breathe, 
 
 I bruise, 
 ftvrru, / throw, 
 •yvugl^u, I make 
 known, 
 
 fikuxtvu, I am 
 slothful, 
 yx6$u, I carve. 
 
 Perf. kl-^vxet 
 
 — Tt-Suxot, (§8,9.) 
 
 — <n-<purtvxx (§ 8, 9.) 
 
 — xs-%6(>ivxec, (§8, 9.) 
 
 — ys-yga^a 
 _ Xi-xklXOt 
 
 — xt-xgixa. 
 
 — <re-<rvsvxa 
 
 — ri-6Xxxa (§ 8, 9.) 
 
 — iffitpcc. (§ 8, 12.) 
 
 — i-yvwgixa 
 
 —- l-fiXixtvxx 
 
 — t-yXvfti 
 
 Plpf. s -Xr-Xvxu* 
 
 - t-TB-HxSI* 
 
 — 4-t i-cpvrtuxsn 
 
 — t-xt-%egtvxti¥ 
 
 — i-yf-ygcctpeiv 
 
 — e-xs-xX/xeiv 
 
 — i-xi-xgixuv 
 
 — t-vrt-vvtvxuv 
 
 — \-n-6Xaixm 
 
 — eppiQuv 
 
 — l-yvugixuv 
 
 — l-fiXxxsuxuv 
 
 — t -yXvQin. 
 
 Obs. 1. Of those in /5x, (Ixx-rru, I hurt, (ZXxtrtpvplu, I slander, and 
 sometimes fixarruvu, I sprout, take the Reduplication ; e. g— fii- 
 &Xot$x, fiifiXxftptxi, fiifiXxcrQnurixx, (ZffiXxirrnxa and tfi\x<rrnxa. 
 
 4. The Reduplication is not used when the Root 
 of the Verb begins (1) with a double Consonant ; 
 
156 
 
 ATTIC REDUPLICATION. [CHAP. VIIL 
 
 (2) with two single Consonants , which are not a mute 
 and liquid ; (except in the above-mentioned cases of 
 Yerbs beginning with p , |3X, 7 X, or 7 v); e. g.— 
 
 &\6u, I emulate , 
 vou, I entertain, 
 yJ/oLkXtu, I play the harp, 
 
 fffilgco, I SOW, 
 
 I build, 
 vrrurtrv, I Jbld , 
 
 Perf. \-ZfXuxx 
 
 y ye 
 
 - t-^SVOJKA 
 
 — \~*\/<tXx a 
 
 — e-trTx^xa 
 — C-XTiXX 
 
 — 6 -s rrv%n 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 \-X,nXuxu* 
 
 l-%tVU)XilV 
 
 s-ypaXxti* 
 
 \-a<r&^xU¥ 
 
 t-xrixuv 
 
 'i-xru%U9. 
 
 
 
 Obs. 2. The two Verbs ft 1 ft»* tr x a>, (Root MNA), */ remind and 
 xr olo ft at, ‘I acquiretake the Reduplication, though their Root 
 begius with two consonants which are not a mute and a liquid : 
 
 — (tl-ftvnftxt, xi-xrv)[tut ; t-fti-ftvrj/tyiv, i-xi-XTriftnv. 
 
 5. Five Verbs beginning with a liquid do not re¬ 
 peat this letter, but take u as an Augment :— 
 
 Xetft^&Mu, I take, 
 x*y%<xveu, I obtain by lot, 
 Xeyu, avXXkyu, 1 collect, 
 'PEfi, I say, 
 ftu^oftai, I gain a share, 
 
 Perf. < Wytpoc, Plpf. il\v<pu? 
 
 — $ 7 X*i%ei — uXrt^Ut 
 
 — erv»ilXo%x — trwuX6%uv 
 
 — u^nxa. — tlgifxuv 
 
 — uftct^rxi (with rough breathing), 
 
 [it is fated. 
 
 Obs. 3. AtaXeyoftai, I converse, has Perf. £ / s i x t y ft a i, 
 though the simple xkya>, in the sense of * I say? always takes the re* 
 gular Reduplication, XsXty/tcti, dictus sum, (Perf. Act. wanting.) 
 
 §89. Attic Reduplication. 
 
 Several Verbs beginning with a, e or o, repeat , in 
 the Perf. and Plpf., before the temporal Augment , the 
 first two letters of the Root. This augmentation is 
 called the Attic Reduplication . The Plpf. then very 
 rarely takes an additional Augment; in 
 however, the regular Attic Reduplication is itself 
 augmented. 
 
 (a) Verbs, the second syllable of whose Root is 
 shorthy nature:*—* 
 
§ 90.] AUGMENT IN COMPOUND VERBS, 1&7 
 
 £(>6ai, I plough. 
 
 x^-rt^oxx ag-tyofiieti 
 
 £g*t)g6xu9 ag-vtffAW. 
 
 ikau (ixu6vo>') ) I drive. 
 iX-tjXxxx \X-ifax/xxi 
 
 iX-t]Xaxnv i X-uXdfiiTjv. 
 
 \x(y Z u, I convince. o^Crru, I dig . 
 
 iX.vXey%x iX-fjXly/sceti o (>-u)(>u%x og-tyoyfiai 
 
 iX‘t)Xeyxut iX-tiXly/xw. l^u^^uv o^-co^y/xriv. 
 
 • r ' 
 
 (b) Verbs, which in the second syllable of th© 
 Root have a diphthong , and shorten this after prefix - 
 ing the Reduplication, (except iprfSto, I prop, lpdjpetKa f 
 
 tpripuopai ):— 
 
 aXtltpu, I anoint. 
 aX-yXitya iX^Xi/XfiXi 
 
 £X-yXi<pav <xX-*iXtf/.fAyiv. 
 
 £yuf>eo, I collect. 
 £y-y\ys(>X’OL ay-nytg/xxt 
 
 a.y-91 ytgxe/v dy-vyegficvi/. 
 
 &k oCm, I hear. 
 
 OM-rjXOX flxoVlTfiiai 
 
 £ x - * x o ti v rixovcrf&riv. 
 
 iyu£o>, I arouse. 
 
 ty-riyt^xx \y-rtyi(>f*xt 
 
 iy-nye^xuv ty-yy sgftti*. 
 
 Obs. The Verb xyu, I lead, forms the Aor. IT. Act. and Mid. r 
 and <pega>, I carry, forms all the Aorists, with this Reduplica¬ 
 tion,—with this difference, however, that the vowel of the Redu¬ 
 plication takes the temporal Augment only in the Ind ., and the 
 vowel of the Root remains unaltered :— 
 a y u, I lead, Aor. II. Act. fly-uyov, Inf. ayxysT* ; Aor. II. Mid. 
 riyecy6fttiv, Inf. xyxysvSxt. 
 
 $i£u, I carry, (Root of Aor. ’ErK), Aor. II. Act, nv-iyxo*, InfC 
 i»-eyxs7v; Aor. I. Act, Hv-tyxx, Inf. iv-eyxxi; Aor. Pass. >jV 
 IM* tV-t^YiVXl. 
 
 § 90. Augment and Reduplication in Compound 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 1. First Rule. Verbs compounded with Preposh 
 tions take the Augment and Reduplication between the 
 Preposition and the Verb ; in which case Prepositions 
 which end in a vowel (with the exception of 7 repi and 
 7 tpo) suffer Elision , (§ 6, 3); —7rpo often combines 
 with the Augment by means of Crasis (§ 6 , 2), and 
 becomes irpov. r Ev and avv resume their v, if it had 
 been assimilated , or dropped, or changed (§ 8 , 4. 6. 8. 
 
I 
 
 158 AUGMENT IN COMPOUND VERBS. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 and Obs. 6 ). ’Ek becomes *£ before the syllabic 
 
 Augment (§ 7, 3); e. g. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 £<ra~(iaXXtJ 
 
 UT-ilictXXo* 
 
 <r«g<-/3aXXa» 
 
 vrtpi-efiuXXov 
 
 irga-j 'ia.XXu 
 
 \ <r^e-i(ia.XXov 
 \ <rgou(ictXXo9 
 
 ifi-fi£xXa> 
 
 iv-sfiaXXov 
 
 iy-ytyvefixt 
 
 it-tyiyvofivv 
 
 *v-<rxtvaZ ) u 
 
 <ruv-i<ntiva,Z ) nv 
 
 arvp-p'lTTU 
 
 truv-eppiTTo* 
 
 vvX-Xiya* 
 
 trvv-iXiyov 
 
 Ix-fiaXXcu 
 
 1% sfiaXXov 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 a.<ro-(ie(oXnxa 
 
 Itrt-tfri&XliXtn 
 
 Wtgl-(it(hX>lKX 
 
 «rsg/-sjG{j3A^*w* 
 
 irgo-(htlZXrix.a 
 
 ( vrgo-tfiifZXvixuv 
 \ <T£ol(ii(&Xyixu* 
 
 lft,-(Zi(&Xvxx 
 
 'iy-t/Ztl&Xrixin 
 
 ty-yeyova 
 
 iv-tyty6»nv 
 
 ffvvtaxivaxn 
 
 evv-trxiv&xu* 
 
 eruv-eppi<pa. 
 
 fov-eppilptiv 
 
 truv-tiXo%ei 
 
 ervv-tiXo%ti¥ 
 
 ix-fiefiXrixx 
 
 \%-tll&(iXriXtl*. 
 
 2 . Second Rule. Verbs compounded with 
 (male) take the Augment and Reduplication—(a) At 
 the beginning, when the Root of the simple Verb be¬ 
 gins with a consonant , or a vowel which does not 
 admit the temporal Augment—(b) In the middle , 
 when the Root of the simple Verb begins with a 
 vowel which admits the temporal Augment; e. g.—* 
 
 Pres. Impf. 
 
 ^Uf-ru^;ew, I am un~ l-lusru%ouv 
 fortunate , 
 
 hvi-covre at, I make i-^vsojtovv 
 
 ashamed, 
 
 2i/f-ecgt<rre/v, 1 am dlS - ^vs-v^rrov* 
 pleased, 
 
 Per/. 
 
 $i-^tisrv%rizci 
 
 ^t-^VSoj'T*IKOt 
 
 ^vs-ngltrrriKU, 
 
 Ptpf. 
 
 \-^t-^V}UTr\ Xlll 
 2i/y-»7£S(rr^*£/y. 
 
 Verbs compounded with tv (bene) may take the 
 Augment and Reduplication at the beginning or in 
 the middle; however, they generally omit them at 
 the beginning, and in the middle ; e. g.— 
 
 Pres. Impf. 
 
 I am fortunate , nv-rv%tov, usually i uru%to>. 
 
 1 feast well , sv-uxtopw. 
 
 iP-tgytrea’, I d,0 good , iv-nt>yert 09 Perf. iv-npylrnXtt, 
 
 Usually tu-igysrtov tv-f^yertixx. 
 
 3. Third Rule. All other compound Verbs take 
 the Augment and Reduplication at the beginning 
 e.g.— 
 
 Pres. Impf. Perf., 
 
 ft.Z6o\oyiu, I tell legends , 'ff&uSoXoyiai fit'(jt,v6oXcyi\xx 
 
 ahtohopt&M, I build, cjixoMpttov elxotiopitixa. 
 
§91.] 
 
 AUGMENT IN COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 159 
 
 §91. Additional Remarks on the Augment and Redu¬ 
 plication in Compound Verbs. 
 
 1 . Some Verbs compounded with Prepositions 
 take tbe Augment in both places,—before the Root 
 and before the Preposition; e. g.— 
 
 Pres. 
 
 iffrifcopcu, I 
 
 myself, 
 
 fjt.au, 1 endure, 
 £v*£06v, I raise up, 
 
 * vo%Xsm, I molest, 
 aragoiviv, I riot, 
 
 Imp/.. 
 clothe f y\fi<riix J (>fi.ri'» 
 
 l ot.fjt.'ru^ofjt.nv 
 
 YIVflXOfAW 
 
 fivdi>(> 0 oov 
 rivc>j%\sov 
 W aguvior 
 
 or 
 
 Perf. 
 
 ivitrxW** 
 
 r\vw(> 6 cdXoi 
 
 yvuJX'Xyixx 
 
 <Ti<ru^Mvn»x 
 
 A or. 
 
 i)ft,Tttr%o(Atiir 
 
 rjn<r%6firiv 
 rjveu^cotrx 
 r) vdu%kv<ra 
 iaragwvtiira. 
 
 2. The analogy of these Verbs is followed by three 
 others, which are not compounded with Prepositions, 
 but are derived from other compound words , viz.— 
 
 hauv&a (from Viouvet, mode of life), (1) I maintain, (2) I act as um¬ 
 pire, Impf. e^/jjVaav and ^r«9», Perf. dsdiyryxa. 
 
 atxxoviu (from 'ha.xavos, servant), I serve, Impf. fi.vx6v$ov and 2/tjxb- 
 vtov, Perf. '&tbir\x6vYixct. 
 
 dfjt,<pitrlZ*iret» (from ’AM<f>I2BHTH2), I dispute, Impf. f t fi<pitrfiYiTi 0 T 
 and vp.<p*ff[iY)Tio)t. 
 
 3. Exceptions to the First Rule (§ 90, 1). There 
 are several Verbs compounded with Prepositions,, 
 which take the Augment before the Preposition , since 
 they have acquired, to a certain extent, the force of 
 simple Verbs; e. g.— 
 
 itfjt.(pryvoeu (y oiu), I am 
 uncertain, 
 ac/xtpisvvvfti, I clothe, 
 'vriarctfLOtt, I kflOW, 
 
 xat4%ed, / cause to sit, 
 *x0i^ofAOU, I sit, 
 
 xxfaftati, I sit, 
 xxhvhed, I 8leep, 
 
 Impf. rffA<P/yVOl09 
 
 Aor. -n/xip'ura, Perf. Mid. or Pass, fp$it<rfieu 
 Impf. r^KfTXfx'nv 
 
 — ixtx ?i£av, Perf. xixoeSixx 
 
 — \xat}iZ s bfj.nv and (without 
 
 Aug.) 
 
 ixafftfinv and xaM.fwv, 
 \xd.6ivbov, rarely xafauSov. 
 
 4. Some Verbs which are not formed by the com¬ 
 position of a simple Verb with a Preposition, but by 
 
160 
 
 Formation of tenses. [Chap. VIII. 
 
 derivation from a word already compounded (Comp. 
 No. 2), form an apparent exception to the First Rule 
 (§ 90, 1); e. g.— 
 
 Ifaurtfof&xi, I oppose , (from svavr'ts ) Impf. wavrioofini* 
 
 MriStx.su, I am a defendant ( — dyrtStxog) — ymiix *«* 
 
 (in a law-suit), 
 
 \fjL<xCSiu, I establish , ( — c \(&<xCbot ) **— r^TtSoty, 
 
 Formation of the tenses of verbs in -<u. 
 
 § 92. Division of Verbs in -&> according to the 
 
 Characteristic. 
 
 Verbs in -w are divided into two principal classes, 
 according to the nature of the Characteristic (§77, 
 5):- 
 
 I. Pure Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Vowel ; 
 these are again subdivided into two classes:— 
 
 A. Uncontracted Verbs, whose Characteristic is 
 any vowel but a, c, o; e. g. n atSeu-w, I educate , 
 Au-to, I loose ; 
 
 B. Contract Verbs, whose Characteristic is either 
 a, t, or o; e. g. rifia-w, 1 honour , ^>iXt-a>, 2 
 fiKjOo-w, I hire outi 
 
 II. Impure Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Con* 
 sonant; these are again subdivided into two classes:—* 
 
 A. Mute Verbs, whose Characteristic is one of the 
 nine Mutes \ e. g. XfiV-w, I leave , irXtK-u) , 1 
 twine, irziQ-it), I persuade ; 
 
 B. Liquid Verbs, whose Characteristic is one of 
 the four Liquids, X, ju, v, p; e. g. ayylXX-w, 1 
 announce , vz\ u-co, I distribute , ^xuv-w, / sAew, 
 (pOeip-u), I destroy. 
 
 Obs. According to the accentuation of the I. Pert. Ind. Pfefl# 
 Act, all Verbs are divided into 1 -* 
 
§ 93.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 161 
 
 (1) Barytones, whose final syllable in the I. Pers. Sing. Ind. 
 Pres. Act. is not accented ; e. g. Xv-u, vxi k-u, &c. ; 
 
 (2) Perispomena , whose final syllable is circumfiexed in the I. 
 Pers.; these are consequently contract Verbs; e. g. npu, ipiXu, 
 
 furOed. 
 
 I. Pure Verbs. 
 
 § 93. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs . 
 
 1. In pure Verbs, both, contracted and uncontracted , 
 the Tense-endings are usually affixed to the un¬ 
 changed Characteristic ; e. g. (5ovXev-aw, (3 e(3ovXev- 
 K a. Pure Verbs do not form the Secondary Tenses, 
 but only the Primary Tenses; the Perf. with k (- i ca), 
 the Fut. and Aor. with a and 0 (-aw, -aa, -0rjv,-6ric ro- 
 H ai ). Pure Verbs, however, are subject to the fol¬ 
 lowing regular change in the Root :— 
 
 2. The short Characteristic-vowel of the Pres, and 
 Impf., both in contracted and uncontracted Verbs, is- 
 lengthened in the other Tenses. The uncontracted 
 will first be considered; e. g.— 
 
 i becomes 7, e. g. jurjv-i'w, I am enraged with , pr\vL - 
 
 aio, t-privi-aa, &c.; 
 
 iJ becomes v, e. g. kwXv'-w, I hinder , kwXv -aw, ket 
 
 KwXv-gai- 
 
 
 active. 
 
 kwXv'w , I hinder . 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Ind. kwAS'-w, Subj. kwXS'-w, Imp. K wXS-£, Inf. 
 kwXv-eiv, Part. kwXu'-wv. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. i-Ktt»Xn-ov, Opt. KwXv'-oipi. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Ind. Ka-KwXv-Ka, Inf. Ke-KwXv-Ktvai, Part, ke- 
 KwXv-KWg» 
 
 pipf. 
 
 Ind. 1-ke-kwXv'-khv» 
 
162 
 
 PURE VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. YHI 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 Ind.KwXu'-<rw,Opt. kojX v'-aoifxi, Inf. KtoXu'-aeiv, ^ 
 
 Part. • 
 
 Ind. e-KtuAu-ara, Subj. KwX{/-m»>, Opt. KtoXv'- 
 oaijju . Imp, K(v\v-(rot/. Inf. ic'jiXu-oai, 
 Part. Kix)Ai/*(mg. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 _ MIDDLE, _ 
 
 KtuXu'-Ojuai, Subj. KuAv'-io/uiai, Imp.KwXt/- 
 ov, Inf. kmAv-egQcu, Part. KuAv-d/uEvog 
 £-K(t)Au-d/Ur]V , Opt. K(a)Av~OI flYJV* 
 
 T 1 * , • -j- • 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Fut.I. 
 
 F. hi. 
 Aor. 
 
 S.l 
 
 Indicative. 
 KE‘KU)Xv-fiai, 
 
 Imperative, 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 2. 
 
 KE-KU)Xv-rrai, 
 
 Kf-KwXu-lTO, 
 
 ke-kwAv-gQcu. 
 
 3. 
 
 KE-KOjAv-Tai, 
 
 KE-K wXv-adu), 
 
 
 D.l. 
 
 KE-K(i)Xv'-/J.E‘ 
 Oov , 
 
 KE-KloXv- 
 
 aOov, 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 KE~K(i)Xv“JULE~ 
 
 2. 
 
 K£-K(i)Xv- 
 
 gQov, 
 
 vog. 
 
 3. 
 
 KE-KloXv- 
 
 ke-kojXv- 
 
 Subjunc. 
 
 
 crOov, 
 
 KE-K(i)Xv'-fltOa 
 
 aOutv, 
 
 K£-KGjXt)-jU£- 
 
 P.l. 
 
 
 vog tv. 
 
 2. 
 
 KE-KU)Xv~(T 0 E t 
 
 KE-K(j)Xv~(tOe , 
 
 
 3, 
 
 ke-kwAu-vtcu. 
 
 KE-KU)Xv~adu)aav or ke-kw- 
 
 Av-oQi*)v. 
 
 S. 1. £-K£-/CtoX{/-/il)V, 
 
 2 . £-K£-KtoAv-<TO, 
 
 3. £-K£-*cwXu-ro, 
 
 P. 1. a-KE-KwXv-fiaOa, 
 
 2 . Z-KE-K(t)Xu-( tOe, 
 
 3. i-K£-K(jL>Av-VTO. 
 
 D. £-fC£- KwXv'-fxadov, 
 
 E-KE-KU>Av-(t6oVj 
 
 i-KE-KwXv-aOrjv, 
 
 Opt. 
 
 KE-KUyAv-flEVOQ £t?JV. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Ka>Xu^-(rojuat,Opt.KwXi/-(To/jUi]»/,Inf. kioAv'• 
 
 < JEvOai , Part. KuiXv-crd/uErog. 
 KE-K(oXv'-(TOJLiai, &c., like Fut. I. 
 £-Kix)Xv-aafiY)V' ) Subj. KwXiZ-CTWjuai, Opt. j 
 KtoXv-a at /it} v t Imp. k wXu-rrat, Inf. kojXv . 
 oaoOai, Part. KwXv-aajHEvog. 
 
§ 94.] PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 163 
 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 Ind. l-iaoXv-Oriv, Subj. kwXv-Ow, Opt. icwAS- 
 Otiq jv, Imp. KU>\v'-0riTi, Inf. K(vXv-6ijvat, 
 Part. KioXv-Otig. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Ind. Ku>Au-6bj<rojuat, Opt. ictuAii-^yjdo^rjv, Inf. 
 KinXv-OrtatoOai, Part. KwXv-OricrofjLavog. 
 
 § 94. Verbs which, contrary to the Rule, retain the 
 
 short Characteristic-vowel in forming the Tenses. 
 
 , • 
 
 1 . Several pure Verbs, contrary to the Rule (§ 93, 
 2), retain the short Characteristic-vowel, either in all 
 the Tenses, or at least in some Tenses. Most of these 
 Verbs take a <j in the Perf. and Plpf Mid. or Pass:, 
 the Aor. I. and Fut. Pass, and the Verbal-adjectives. 
 This is indicated by the words, ‘ Pass, with a ;—(see 
 § 95). Thus:— 
 
 Xpi' w, I prick, graze, Fut. yjn'aw ; Aor. tyjnaa, Inf. 
 XpVaai, Pass, with a ;—(but I anoint Flit.. 
 
 yjfiau ; Aor. l\pu ra, Inf. xpTtrai ; Aor. Mid. iyjpioa- 
 Perf, Mid. or Pass. Ktyoiaixai, k txpTaOai ; Aor. 
 Pass. ixpi'aQwr, Verb-Adj. xqkjtoq). 
 avv'w, I complete, Fut. avv'atv, Aor. nvvcra. Pass, 
 with <r. 
 
 a p v'uj, 1 draw water, Fut. apv'aw ; Aor. rjpi/<xa. Pass • 
 with (j. 
 
 fiv w, 1 close (e. g. the eyes), Fut. yvato; Aor. ayvaa ;— 
 but Perf. fiijJVKa, I am shut, am silent m 
 TTTv'ii), I spit, Fut. TTTv'cFO) ] AoY. E7T7V<7a. PaSS. ivitll <T. 
 iS p v w, I cause to sit , Fut. idpv'aw; Aor. 'iSpinra; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, 'Idpvpai, Inf. iSpuaOai; Aor. 
 Pass. iSpu'fliiv. 
 
 2. The following dissyllables in lengthen the 
 
164 
 
 TENSES OF PURE VERBS. [CHAP. VTII. 
 
 short Characteristic-vowel in the Fat. and Aor. Act 
 and Mid., and 81 x 0 in the Per/, and Plpf Act. also, bu 
 they resume the short vowel in the Perf. and Plpf. Act. 
 (except 8 vu>), also in the Mid. or Pass., and in the 
 A or. and Fut. Pass .;— 
 
 Pres. 
 
 5 <57 get into, 
 Q I sacrifice, 
 *0 u, I loose, 
 
 Fut. tr 4 or ’ _ P&f. Aor. Pass. 
 
 ouffw, tdutret, 'btbuxu, %e$v/u.ai, ttiuOnt, 
 
 ‘iSvatt, ridvxot trvDw, 
 
 Xvtru, i\v<rx, XeXuxa XeXvftui, tXvSn*. 
 
 § 95. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and Perf 
 arid PIpf. Mid. or Pass, with <r. 
 
 1. Pure Verbs which retain the short Characteristic- 
 vowei of the Foot in forming the Tenses, insert <r 
 (Comp § 94) before the Tense-endings -Oriv, -nai, &c. 
 ™ th f 1 and Fut. I. Pass., and in the Perf. and 
 ripi. Mid. or Pass.; this a connects the Personal- 
 endings to the Tense-Root; e. g.— 
 
 Ind. Pres. Aor. I. Pass. 
 
 rtXt-u e-nXi-a-fav 
 
 Fut. 1. Pass. 
 
 TiXt- CT-Df) (TO[/.OU 
 
 Perf. Pass. 
 
 Tl-TtXi-f-UOU 
 
 Plpf. Pass. 
 
 £- rt-nXe-cr-firiv. 
 
 ■ ?' B ® sl<Jes tIlese Verbs, several others also, which 
 either have a long Characteristic-vowel in the Root, 
 or lengthen it in forming the Tenses, take the same 
 formation; e^ g. aKovio, I hear , Aor. I. Pass., i }K ov-a- 
 Vnv, 4 ut. L Pass. aKov-a-Oriaopat, Perf. Pass. ijKov-a- 
 fxai, Plpf. Pass. riKov-a-griv; svcivw, I kindle l #ccA evw, 
 Qubeo), Ibid ; kvXT'oj, I roll; Xtvw, I stone ; £vw, / 
 
 I saw ’ gCiw, I shake ; \piw, I anoint 
 (§ 94); I touch, &c. 
 
 k eXtvto, I bid. ACTIVE. 
 
 Impt. e-keAm-ov. Plpf, t-Ke-KeXev-tcuv. Aor. e-iciXtv-aa. 
 
 ■ 
 
§95.] 
 
 TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 
 
 165 
 
 ♦ 
 
 I ' • 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 Present, k zXtv-ojuai. 
 
 Impf. z-KzXzv-o/urjv. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Prf.S.l. 
 
 KZ-KzXzv-a~iuai, 
 
 
 
 2 . 
 
 KE-KzXzv-aai, 
 
 KZ-KzXzV-(TO, 
 
 KZ-KzXzi‘G0aL 
 
 3. 
 
 KZ-iczXzv-cr-Tat , 
 
 kz-k zXzv-ar0(o, 
 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 KZ~KzXzV~G~JUZ- 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 0ov, 
 
 
 kz-kzXzv- a-fiz- 
 
 2 . 
 
 KZ'KZ XzV-(T- 
 
 kz-kzXzv-oOov, 
 
 vog. 
 
 
 0OV, 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 KZ-KzXzv-a- 
 
 KE-KzXzV-(T0lOV, 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 0OV, 
 
 
 KZ-KzXeV-G-IULZ- 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 KZ-KzXzv-G-flZ- 
 
 
 vog o). 
 
 
 0a, 
 
 
 
 2 . 
 
 ke-kzXeu-oOe, 
 
 KZ-KZXZV-(T0Z, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 KZ-KzXzV-(T-JUZ~ 
 
 KZ-KzXzv-a0u)crav or kz-kzXzv- 
 
 
 VOL zl(Tl(v ).* 
 
 
 [crdrnv- 
 
 Plf.S.l. 
 
 Z-KZ-KzXzV-a- 
 
 D. i-KZ-KzXzv - 
 
 P. z-kz-kzXzv- a- 
 
 Ind. 2 
 
 l*Y)V, 
 
 O-/UZ0OV, 
 
 / uz0a , 
 
 
 Z-KE-KzXzV-OO, 
 
 Z-KZ-KzXzv- 
 
 Z-KZ-KZXZV- 
 
 
 
 (T-0OV, 
 
 G0Z, 
 
 3. 
 
 Z-KZ-KzXzV-<7 - 
 
 i-KZ-KzXzv - 
 
 ke-keXev-cf- 
 
 
 TO, 
 
 a-0r}v. 
 
 fizvoi riaav* 
 
 - 
 
 Opt. KZ-KzXzv-a-/ULZVOQ ZIT)V 
 
 . 
 
 Future, KeXzvaofxai. 
 
 Fut. Ill KZ-KzXzv-aOLLai. 
 
 
 Aor. f- 
 
 KzXzv-aajngv. 
 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aorist, 
 
 z-kzXzv'O -0rjv. 
 
 Future, KzXzv-a~0{]GojjLai. 
 
 Obs. 1 . Some Verbs vary between the regular formation and that 
 
 with a ; e. g.— 
 
 61 a. <>u y I break in pieces, <r£6, and ri^xv/xxi, tfyxutrMt. 
 x'Kilu, 1 shut, KSKXuy.a .1 (Att. xsx\yy.xi and xixXu<T(/.xt) } A or. 
 
 x (> o v u, 1 strike against, xsx^ovf^xi and xtx^oux/xxi j Aor. ixf>ovff6viv. 
 Obs. 2. Some Verbs, contrary to the Rule, do not take a, though 
 they retain the short Characteristic-vowel:—e. g. ICu, Mu* Mu* 
 (mentioned § 94,2). * 
 
 
 • See § 106, Obs. 4. 
 
166 
 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [CHAP. VIJI. 
 
 XLIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 A }<r0avtftm 9 (Gen. or Acc.),/ 
 hear, perceive, notice. 
 aarvU, -fios, h, shield, 
 htv&g, terribly, strangely. 
 
 \ipos, -av, o, a course, a run¬ 
 ning-pace. 
 
 Slnapis, -u»s, ft, power, might 
 
 fyuijw, I break, shatter. 
 xccr*-<rotvu } I cause-to-ccase, put- 
 an-end-to. 
 
 x£ovu, I strike, clash, 
 truvftts, -tv, o, earthquake, 
 vuu, I shake. 
 
 , PI erpaTiwrai irpog tovq noXtgiovg iroptvEoQai 
 tutAtvauiiauv.' 2. 2 iraprr] 7tote vtto oEiopov Seivta^ 
 taticruy. 3. H tojv nepcra/v fivvapig v 7 ro twv 'EAA/j- 
 V ? >t/ / T *@P aV(Trai * O i TroXifiioi tug rrjv aicpav Kart - 
 
 Ai'oOmv. 5. Ore ol (3apf3apoi twv acnriScov irpog 
 ra do para v: to t(ov EXXrjvwv KtKpova/utvwv rjaOavovro, 
 • cpofitf fyevyov. 6. f O iroXtpog KaTEiravaOr j. 
 
 1. The soldiers are ordered to march against the 
 enemies. 2. Our city has been terribly shaken by 
 an earthquake. 3. The power of the Persians was 
 bioiten by the Hellenes. 4. The enemies have been 
 shut-up in 1 the citadel. 5. The shields were clashed 
 by the enemies against their (=the) spears. 6. The 
 war has been put-an-end-to. 
 
 1 us, with Ace. 
 
 § 96. Contract Pure Verbs .. 
 
 1. Contract Pure Verbs are such as have for their 
 Characteristic a, t, or o (§ 92), which vowels are con¬ 
 tracted with the Mood-vowel following. Contraction 
 takes place only in the Pres, and ImpAct., Mid. or 
 1 ass., because in these two Tenses only is the Cha¬ 
 racteristic-vowel followed by another Vowel. 
 
 2 . The following are the contractions which oc¬ 
 cur:-^ * 
 
CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 
 
 167 
 
 § 90 -] 
 
 o -f- e becomes a 
 a -f-i? = 
 
 a ~\~y = 
 
 a -f- ft = 
 
 Ct —|— O :-- 
 
 a-fw — 
 
 a -j- oi 
 a -f ov 
 
 a 
 
 £ 
 
 ut 
 
 to 
 
 V 
 
 to 
 
 € + £ = £« O -f- £ ~ OU 
 0 -j-»?=Cu 
 € + V O -f 7? = 0 * 
 c -j- ct = ££ o -f £« = ot (ouin Inf.) 
 £ + o =ou o-[-o = ou 
 £ -)- (L> ~ to O -j- (O = (O 
 £-{-01 = 01 O -j- Ot = Ot 
 £ -f -OV = OV O -j- OV= OV. 
 
 ^ In the concurrence of A and E sounds, the 
 Vowel which comes first remains predominant in con¬ 
 traction, though its form may be modified. If an O 
 
 sound occurs, it, in any case, becomes the predomi¬ 
 nating one. 
 
 3. The Tenses of Contract Pure Verbs— as has 
 been seen in § 93—are formed like those of Uncon¬ 
 tracted Pure Verbs, i. e. the short Characteristic-vowel 
 I is usually lengthened , in forming the Tenses , viz. 
 
 £ into rj, e. g. tptXi-to, 1 love , Fut. tjnXrrcrto, Perf. m- 
 <p'i\r}-Ka, &c. 
 
 I 0 *” t0 "> e g ■ tuo&s-to, I hire out, Fut. /MaOiii-ou, 
 
 , Perf. gt-gtaOto-ica, &c. 
 
 a into v , e. g. rtgd-to, I honour, Fut. rtg^aw, Perf. 
 
 I T£-Tigrj~Ka, &c. 
 
 I a into a, e. g. id-to, I permit , Fut. m-trto, &c. 
 
 J 
 
 The lengthening of a into a occurs, when 
 
 __7_//°1_ (• i \ 7 
 
 c, l or p 
 
 precedes, (Comp. § 26, 1 ); e. g.—- 
 
 I £a-w, ta-aw; fiM-oj, I laugh, gu^td -go gar, <ptnpd-w, 
 I 1 detect , tj)utpa-atv —(but £yyua-a>, I give as a pledge f 
 kyyvfaio ; /3oa-w, /cry o^, fiorraogai, like oySoq). 
 I, this latter class of Verbs belong the two fol¬ 
 lowing, (though a is not preceded by p, t, or t) :_ 
 
 I [■ fdXod'W, I thresh, Fut* aXoij-ato or aXod^Gw. 
 aKpod-ogat , I hear , Fut. aKpod-Gogui. 
 
 if Obs The Verbs z t>«», I give an oracle , x op mt, I use, and 
 ilfre*? I'pierce, (though ^ precedes), lengthen' a into >»; e. g. — 
 
 The exceptions to the ftule given in 
 
 will be stated in § 98. 
 
] 63 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 PARADIGMS OP 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 * l 
 
 2 rf 
 
 <o a 
 
 • 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 '2'O.S‘ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 §c3 
 
 a 03 £ 
 
 S s " 
 
 3 ti a> 
 iV Ph 
 
 Characteristic a 
 
 
 Character- 
 
 Character- 
 
 <3 
 
 
 
 istic £. 
 
 istic i. f 
 
 
 
 I honour , 
 
 
 I love, 
 
 / hire out , 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 Tifx(a-to) w, 
 
 
 
 lULlCJ 0(6-0))- 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Tf/x(a-£ic)ac, 
 
 
 (j)i\(E-ug)- 
 
 tv, 
 
 / jLioQ(6-tiG)- 
 
 
 
 
 
 €IC» 
 
 oig, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Tifi(a-Ei)a , 
 
 
 $tX(£-£t)a, 
 
 fiioQ(6-ti)- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 oT, 
 
 
 D* 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Indi- 
 
 
 
 
 
 nioO(o-z)- 
 
 ca- 
 
 2. 
 
 nju(a-£)a-rov, 
 
 
 0tX(£-£)a- 
 
 tive. 
 
 
 
 
 rov. 
 
 ou-rov, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 T£ju(a-£)a-rov, 
 
 
 ( pi\(i-e)u- 
 
 jU£CT0(d-£)- 
 
 
 
 
 
 TOV, 
 
 ov-rov, j 
 
 I • 
 
 P.l. 
 
 T£ju(a-o)tv-jU£v, 
 
 
 <£><X(£-o)ov- 
 
 fjua0(6- o)- 
 
 
 
 
 
 MfV, 
 
 OV-jU£V, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 n/i(a-£)a-r£, 
 
 
 ^lX(£-f)£t- 
 
 fuo0(6-z)- 
 
 
 
 
 
 T£, 
 
 OV-T£, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Tfju(a-ou)w-<rt( 
 
 v). 
 
 ^)tX(£-Ov)- 
 
 / jlloO(6-ov)- 
 
 
 
 
 ou-o , t(v). 
 
 ov-crt(v). 
 
 
 a i. 
 
 riju(d-w)w, 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 0tX(£'(v)(V, 
 
 fuaQ(6-a))- 
 
 
 
 
 *1 
 
 • 
 
 tv, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 nfx(a-yg)^g t 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 P- 
 
 
 IM<jQ(6-yg)- 
 
 Sub- 
 
 
 S* 
 
 VQ, 
 
 oTc, 
 
 junc- 
 I tive. 
 
 3. 
 
 T 
 
 B 
 
 CD 
 
 
 Hio6(6-y)- 
 
 ot, 
 
 
 D 1. 
 
 
 S' 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 r(ju(a-ij)a- 
 
 P* 
 
 H* 
 
 CD 
 
 P 
 
 n*. 
 
 
 jUitr0(d-j?)- 
 
 
 
 TOV, 
 
 o 
 
 TOV f 
 
 tv-rov, 
 
f 96-] CONTRACT PITRE VERBS. 
 
 GONTTErACTT VERBS. 
 
 169 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 j Present. 
 
 j Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic *, 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 j r(ju(a-o)(J-/ia«,, 
 
 <J>iX(t-o)ov-juiai r 
 
 .tua0(6~o)ov~f.iaiy 
 
 7ifx(a-y)a v 
 
 
 (pL\(£-y)rj, 
 
 i 
 
 fJ.iaO(6-y)oi, 
 
 Tiixiu-^a-Tai, 
 
 
 ,<t>t\(i-i)e7-Tat r 
 
 V 
 
 fUoQ(6-£)0\)-TCH, 
 
 t ifx (a-6)u)-fit9ov ». 
 
 <J)i\(£.-u)ov-[jizQqv, 
 
 fua9(o-6)ov- | 
 
 Tin{a-t)a-<?Oovy 
 
 TtfjL(a-e)a-(r6oVf 
 
 Tin(a-6)ut-fie0a, 
 
 r*ju(a-£)a-<r0£, 
 
 <pL\(£-e)u-ar0ov 9 
 
 <pi\(£~t)u-oOov, 
 
 ^i\(s-o)ov-fu6a f 
 
 0fA(t-£)a-o-0£, 
 
 t \ 
 
 /utOov, 
 
 fJiiaO(o-E)ov- 
 
 (fOoVy 
 
 /U<CT0(o-£)oD- ij 
 
 oQov, 1 
 
 Hi<jQ(n-6)ov- I 
 
 /l ieda, j 
 
 fM(j6(6-£)ov'<r9ey I 
 
 Tif.i{a-o)w-vTai. 
 
 <t>iX(£-o)ov-vrai, 
 
 fJ.Kj9(o-o)ov-vTai. 
 
 t ifi(a-(*))£>- 
 
 ficu, 
 
 T, K«-y)n, 
 
 9 
 
 S 
 
 e+ 
 
 P 
 
 a 
 
 a- 
 
 CD 
 
 a. 
 
 c 5 
 
 4> L Mz-y)y> 
 
 liio9{o-(i))^-fxai i 
 
 fu<r0(6-y)oi r 
 
 Tl/Ll((l-Yj)a- 
 
 raty 
 
 ►i 
 
 B 
 >—- 
 
 r * 
 
 CD 
 
 (friXferijri-Tat, 
 
 lua9(6-r])£)-Tai, 
 
 Tif.i(a-(P)(x>- 
 UtOoVy 
 Tifx(a-rt)a- 
 <r9o v.. 
 
 * 
 
 €f 
 
 or 
 
 CD 
 
 hH 
 
 a 
 
 Bt 
 
 5* 
 
 p 
 
 c** 
 
 •—*• 
 
 < 
 
 p 
 
 (pi\^e-(v)u)-fit9ov, 
 
 0fA(£>r/)i)-o-0ov r 
 
 uw&(o-dj)to- 
 
 fJLe9ov, 
 
 tua6(6-ri)u)-(j9 op. 
 
 r 
 
170 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [CHAP. VTII. 
 
 PARADIGMS OS 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 « *3 
 
 2 «< 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 •s^ P, 
 
 v a 
 p>a o 
 
 isS 
 
 s * 
 
 
 
 
 
 0 S 0 
 
 £ 
 
 Characteristic 
 
 a. 
 
 Character¬ 
 istic *. 
 
 Character¬ 
 istic 4. 
 
 Sub- 
 
 D, 3. 
 
 r/ju(a-ij)a- - 
 
 ft 
 
 
 /Ut(T 0(o-|j)- 
 
 • 
 
 
 roy, 
 
 63 
 
 €*■ 
 
 Toy, 
 
 w-roy, 
 
 junc- 
 
 tive. 
 
 p.l. 
 
 nju(a-(o)(o~ 
 
 p 
 
 1-1 s 
 p £ 
 
 
 jU<CT0(o-Cl>)- 
 
 (Cow- 
 
 ti- 
 
 2. 
 
 /U£V, 
 
 Tiju(a-rj)a-re , 
 
 P» Qj 
 . O •—♦j 
 
 fR? 
 S'3 
 
 jU£V, 
 
 (O-flbV, 
 
 fJLiaO(o-ri)~ 
 
 nued ) 
 
 3. 
 
 Tifi(a-(i))(v- 
 
 • »—• 
 
 © 
 
 rt- 
 
 tr 
 
 re. 
 
 (O-TE, 
 
 fua9(p~ a))- 
 
 
 
 a i(v). J 
 
 a> 
 
 <n(v). 
 
 W-(Ti(v). 
 
 
 S. 2. 
 
 TLfx{a-i)a r 
 
 
 <Pi\(e-e)ei, 
 
 fJLL(jO(o~E)~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ou, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Tifi(a-Z)a-T(jt>, 
 
 
 (j)l\(£-z)U- 
 
 jutcr0(o-£)- 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tli), 
 
 oil-rw, 
 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 r£ju(a-c)a-roi/, 
 
 
 
 jUi<T0(o-£)- 
 
 
 
 
 
 TOV, 
 
 ow-roy. 
 
 Im- 
 
 3. 
 
 Tlfi(art)arTlOV 
 
 * 
 
 $t\(E-i) U- 
 
 jUta0(o-£)- 
 
 pera- 
 
 
 Tifx(a~E) a-TE, 
 
 
 rwr, 
 
 OV-TCOV, 
 
 tive. 
 
 P.2. 
 
 
 
 ILUgQ(6-e)- 
 
 
 
 
 
 TE, 
 
 OV-TEy 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Ti/u(a-i)a-T(t)crav 
 
 <Pi\(e-e)ei- 
 
 jU£a6/(o-£)- 
 
 
 
 Ot 
 
 
 TCDCTUV 
 
 ou-rwcrav 
 
 
 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 
 
 TlJU.(a-6)(O-VT0t)V. 
 
 0iA(£-o)ou- 
 
 fxia0{o-6y 
 
 
 
 
 
 vra>y. 
 
 OV-VTiOV. 
 
 Infill 
 
 
 Tiji(a-uv)qv . 
 
 
 (juX^t-Eiv)- 
 
 f u<jQ(6-Eiv )- 
 
 
 
 
 
 ELV. 
 
 ouy. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 rifji(6.-(i)v)<t)v. 
 
 
 (pi\(E-U>v)- 
 
 fjuaO(o-(ov)“ 
 
 
 
 
 
 (OV. 
 
 (OV. 
 
* CONTRACT PURE VERB3. 
 
 SOHTEACT VEKBS. 
 
 171 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 1 Present, 
 
 I Characteristic«. 
 
 Characteristic s. 
 
 J rifx(ci-n)a - ^ f 
 
 | oOou, | 
 
 II /u £ 0a, 1^ 
 
 I T ^(«-»i)a- ' 11 
 
 f <70*, J* i 
 
 M ' K* 
 
 1 [ Tl f*(a~to){o- « 
 
 I vra/. . J a 
 
 - $^(t-n)ii-aOov, 
 
 !■ ^><A (s-oj)u)-fAtQa y 
 
 * A // 
 
 (pi^{l-to)u)-VTai. j 
 
 I nAt(a-oi/)<u, 
 
 (pi\{L-ou)ov, 
 
 If ri n(a-£)a-(rO(j0, 
 
 <pi\(z-£)u-oOu>, j 
 
 || Ti]u(a-e)a-aOov, 
 
 $<A(t-*)u-<y0Oy, / 
 
 J Tifi(a-t)a-aOwV) 
 
 (pt\(c-i)zi-oOcov, /L 
 
 I ri^(a-e)a-<r0e, 
 
 <pi\(z~t)u-aOe, f. 
 
 Tifi(a-£)d-aO(Daar 
 
 or 
 
 Ttfi(a-t) a-aO(i\i>„ 
 
 9<A(*-*)£t-O0O)- ^ 
 
 Gray 
 
 or 
 
 ^tA(f-£^tt-cr0(Dy. ju 
 
 Ti/i(d-t)ci-(jOai. 
 
 ^>iX{^t)’cL-aOac. fx 
 
 rtfi(a-6)to- j ( 
 
 fliVOQ. j 
 
 pt\(z-o)ov- m 
 
 flZVOQ. 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 pioOtf-rfco-oQov, 
 
 /Ul(T0(o-(u)w- 
 [itOa, 
 
 fMoO^o-rfiw-oOe, 
 
 I fJ-iaO(o-U))u)-vTai. 
 
 oQov, 
 
 igO^o-z 
 
 (rBojVf. 
 
 aOujoav 
 
 or 
 
 t<70(o-*) 7)i 
 (tOq>v. 
 
 [Ai<yO(6-t)jv-aQai. 
 
172 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 PARADIGMS OP 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 » .2 
 
 1 §i'§ 
 
 a S: e 
 
 1 S 
 
 <D P 
 
 O 
 
 e ^ CO 
 
 § c3 S 
 
 a 
 
 
 Characteristic «. 
 
 Character¬ 
 istic E. 
 
 Character- 1 
 istic*. || 
 
 I 
 
 s.l. 
 
 trtju(a-ov)tuv, 
 
 
 fiiciQ(o-ov)- I 
 
 r 
 
 
 ouy. 
 
 ow, | 
 
 I 
 
 2. 
 
 £nV(a-£c)ac> 
 
 8^»iA(e-£c)- 
 
 £jUt<T0(o-6c)- I 
 
 I 
 
 
 £<e. 
 
 owe, | 
 
 F 
 
 a. 
 
 tTi[i(ai)a r 
 
 etpi\(e m t )a. 
 
 i/ufotJ(o-a)- 1 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 OV, | 
 
 I 
 
 Dil. 
 
 
 
 
 I Indi- 
 
 
 
 
 ifjua0(6-t)- I 
 
 t ca- 
 
 2. 
 
 zri[x(a’£)a-TOV r 
 
 i(f>i\((rs') at- 
 
 1 dive. 
 
 
 TOV r 
 
 ou-roy, | 
 
 w 
 
 a. 
 
 £Tfju(a-l)a-r>]v, 
 
 
 ipinO{o-a)- 
 
 t 
 
 
 TT]V, 
 
 OV-TTfV , } 
 
 I 
 
 P. L 
 
 £rtju(a-o)w-jU£v,. 
 
 
 £/Xt<T0(d-o)- 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 ov-fxev, 
 
 OU'/LiaV, | 
 
 1 
 
 2. 
 
 £rfju(a-f)a-r£. 
 
 i<pi\(t-a)at- 
 
 e/jiia6(6-a)- j 
 
 1; 
 
 
 re, 
 
 ou-r£, | 
 
 I 
 
 a. 
 
 erfyi(a-ov)«*w. 
 
 
 ■6- 
 
 «■»% 
 
 or. 
 
 o 
 
 « 
 
 c 
 
 rr 
 
 ii 
 
 I 
 
 
 ovv. 
 
 ouy. 
 
 j: 
 
 S, 1. 
 
 Ttju(d-ot)(p-/K, 
 
 ^>iX(t-oi)oT- 
 
 /uktO^oi)- 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 pu> 
 
 Ol-fAl , 
 
 
 2. 
 
 rtju(a-otc)(i>Cv 
 
 (pi\(i-oi(;)- 
 
 /j.L<r6(6-oigy 
 
 IDpta- 
 
 
 oTc, 
 
 otc» 
 
 I tive. 
 
 3, 
 
 77 jtt(a-ot)(o, 
 
 ( pi\(i-oi)ol , 
 
 [ug6(o-oi)~ 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 i °*> 
 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 r 
 
 | 
 
 2. 
 
 n/u^-oi^-rov, 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 «o 
 
 fu<r0(p-oi) m 
 
 1 
 
 
 * <* 
 
 roy, 
 
 oT-rov, 
 
§ 96.] CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 173 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 
 Characteristic'«. 
 
 Characteristic-!. 
 
 Characteristic «. 
 
 £rtju(a-o)(*j-jur?y, 
 
 • ' 
 
 8 (ptX(t-o)ov~pr}v i, 
 
 Iiu<y 0 {o~o)ov-pr\ v, 
 
 lTifi(a-ov)Co t 
 
 £^(A(£-Ou)oU, 
 
 lfiia 0 ( 6 -ov)ov^ ? 
 
 £Tt[i(art)a‘To * 
 
 £0(A(i-£)a-TO, 
 
 lpiG 0 ( 6 -£)ov-ro 9 1 
 
 £T^(a-o)w-jU£0ov, 
 
 £^iX(f-o)ou- 
 
 £jtH(70(o-o)oU- 
 
 iTip(a-t)a-aOov, 
 
 fiedov, 
 
 jU£0oy, 
 
 t(j)l\(£-i)£L-oQoV , 
 
 £pKj 6 ( 6 -e)ob- 
 aOov, | 
 
 
 hip(a-t)a-aOrjv, 
 
 £<pi\ («-f ) tt-cDrtv, 
 
 IfJHGO(o-t)oi)- jj 
 
 oOr)v , 
 
 lTifji(a-(j)uj-fiz 6 a, 
 
 £^>iX(£-o)oU-jU£0a, 
 
 £/UgO(q- 6 )ov~ ; 
 
 jU£0a, : 
 
 £Tiju(a-£)a-<7$£, 
 
 £^iX(£-£)£l-<7@£, 
 
 £jUt<J0(o-£)oU-<T0£, 
 
 £Tip(aro)u)-VTO. 
 
 £(j)l\(t-o)oV-VTO. 
 
 Ijliig 0 ( 6 -o) ou-yro. 
 
 viix{a-o'i)w-ixr)v , 
 
 ^>tX (f-o 
 
 /UI(T0(o-Ot)ot-jU)jy5 
 
 Tip(a-oi)t^-o, 
 
 <pl\(£-Ol)obo, 
 
 piG 0 ( 6 *Ot)oi-O, 1 
 
 rt/z(d-oi)(o-ra, 
 
 rpt\(t-Ol)oi-TOf 
 
 -/Ltt(r0(o-ot)ot-ro, 
 
 Tlfl(arOL)^-Jl^QoV , 
 
 <PiX(s-Oi)o'i-/LI£Qqv, 
 
 /uiG0(o-oi)oi-pe~ 
 
 Oov, 
 
 Ti/j.(a-OL)to-a9ov , 
 
 <^{A(£-ot)oT-<r0ov, 
 
 /uuxr 0 ( 6-0 i)ol- 
 
 oOoVy 1; 
 
 ■ 
 
I 
 
 174 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [ClIAP. VTIl. 
 
 PARADIGMS OP 
 
 ACTIVE, 
 
 Vi 
 
 *3 
 
 ■a~ 
 - 95 
 
 a *2 
 
 <5 
 
 [Opta 
 
 tive. 
 \(Coiv 
 ti¬ 
 med) 
 
 S rf 
 
 « c 
 •°T 3 9 
 
 £ g 2 
 a sj oj 
 
 fc * 
 
 D.3. 
 
 P.L 
 
 2 . 
 
 3. 
 
 Imperfect—(contin ued). 
 
 Characteristic «. 
 
 ti/x( a-ol)ty-TY}V } 
 Tlfl(a-Ot)l>j-p£V) 
 
 T'n( a-oi)tj7-re, 
 
 njc.(f-oi)(^-t p. 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 r»j|u(a-o<)rj»-iji/, 
 
 Attic 
 
 2. 
 
 Tip(a-oi)y-r)Q f 
 
 Opta- 
 
 3. 
 
 Tifi(a-oi)f)-n t 
 
 tive. 
 
 
 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 rifx (a-m)io-r}TQV, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 
 
 P.L 
 
 Ttp(jroi)t£“q[iev, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 rt[ji(a'oi)<y-nT*, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 TtJJL(a-Ol)’f-ZV. 
 
 Indi- 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Tf:TlfXl)Ka. 
 
 ca- 
 
 
 7rttywaaKCt. 
 
 tive. 
 
 PJpf. 
 
 irtTifiifkiiv. 
 
 
 
 ent<ptjjoaKt<v. 
 
 Character¬ 
 istic *. 
 
 Character- ] 
 istic 0. | 
 
 0 /A(£-o/)o/- 
 
 fJiioQ(o-oi)- j 
 
 r »7 V, 
 
 (Jl-TTJV, |j 
 
 •©- 
 
 >- 
 
 ■ 
 
 c 
 
 V 
 
 'I 1 
 
 fitcr6(6-oi)- I 
 
 fJtfVt 
 
 oi-fisv, | 
 
 01)0!- 
 
 {llo6(6-Ot)- I 
 
 T£, 
 
 oi-rf, | 
 
 <J)i\(i-ot)oi- 
 
 fno0(6-oi)- I 
 
 cv. 
 
 oi-fv. | 
 
 <pi\(t-oi')ot- 
 
 fxioU(o-oi)- I 
 
 VV, 
 
 oi-rjv, ;| 
 
 
 filo6(o-Ol )- I 
 
 *?C, 
 
 S 
 
 (£-01)01* 
 
 jKiird(o-oi)- 1 
 
 
 o<'-» 7 , 1 
 
 <pt\(t-oi)oi- 
 
 /llo6(o’Ol)- ] 
 
 ijrov, 
 
 oi-ijrov, | 
 
 0 iA(r-oi)oi- 
 
 jiioO(o-oi)- I 
 
 »/“*! is 
 
 ot-i'irriv, I 
 
 ■ 0 lA(t*Ol)oi* 
 
 fliod(o-oi)- I 
 
 
 0 i-rj/itv, I 
 
 ^iA(«-o/)oi- 
 
 {1106(0-01)- I 
 
 tjr£, 
 
 oi »7r£, | 
 
 fj)iX(t-oi)ob 
 
 fuo0(6-oiy 1 
 
 iV. 
 
 1 ) 7 -SV. 1 
 
 Trt(j){\rj 
 
 xa. 
 
 tJrtrf)l\iiKUV. 
 
 p.tp.'io0u)ua. 
 
 Ipefjuaduf- 
 
 JjCfW. 
 
§ 96.1 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 175 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 Imperfect — {continued)). 
 
 Characteristic *. 
 
 Characteristic i. 
 
 Characteristic *. 
 
 Tiix(a-oi))faQr)v, 
 
 0tX(e-Ot)oi- <T0IJK, 
 
 p.iaO(o-ol)ot m 
 
 oOriv, 
 
 ti iu(a-of) tfi-fjitOa, 
 
 < pi\(s-Gi)o(-p&9a , 
 
 flLo0(p-Ol)QL-p.Z- 
 
 9 a , 
 
 Tlj u(a-ot)tj)-CT0€, 
 
 ^tX(l-o<)oT-cr0€, 
 
 jUi<J0(o-Ot)ot-<T0f, 
 
 Tip{a~Ol)(^-VTO. 
 
 (pi\(t~oi)oi-vTo. 
 
 j mo 9 (o-o i) ot- uto. 
 
 ■ 
 
 : 
 
 | 
 
 V 
 
 r) 
 
 ti 
 
 '« 
 
 4; 
 
 } 
 
 y 
 
 -* V 
 
 | mffiiifuu• 
 
 
 pLtpia9a)jxai» \ 
 
 7 Thtywoapai. 
 
 
 
 iTtn/jLii/uriv. 
 
 ttmiputpa/iiqv. 
 
 
 £fl£fU<j9J>pJIV. 
 
176 
 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [ChAP.VTTL 
 
 PARADIGMS OP 
 
 ACTIVE. ! 
 
 1 
 
 ■3 
 
 'StS-P. 
 o c o 
 
 a 03 * 
 
 r os *' 
 
 f 
 
 05 • 
 
 5h ro 
 
 a> a 
 -o 
 
 ISi 
 1 * 
 
 1 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Character¬ 
 istic i. 
 
 Character- \ 
 istic «. 
 
 Indi¬ 
 car 
 | tive. 
 
 1*1 c 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Tifir]GU). (ptopacrio. 
 
 
 fllGOuXJh*. 
 
 { 
 
 Aor. 
 
 iTifir\aa. ttpwpuaa. 
 
 i(pt\riaa. 
 
 luiadmcna. \ 
 
 / 
 
 t 
 
 Fut.' 
 
 III.; 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 PAS 
 
 Ind. Aor. 
 
 tTifxrjOrjv. £(pa)paOr]v. etpiXyOriv. tfuaOw- 
 
 Orjv. 
 
 | Verbal-adjectives' Ti/arj-riog^ -ria, -riov ; <pwpa-riog, 
 
 I f-r/5, -rtov; 
 
 § 97. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 1. Verbs in -iu) with a monosyllabic Root, (e. g- 
 arXloj, I sail , irviti), I breathe, 6ioj, 1 run), suffer con¬ 
 traction only in-tt, (from -hi or-f £ )—in all the other 
 forms they are uncontracted; e. g.— 
 
 Act. Pres. Ind. ir\u, arliajitn, <rX£r<rj, jr 
 
§ 97 .] CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 177 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 - - - - - - - 
 
 
 Characteristic as. 
 
 Characteristic t. 
 
 Characteristic «. 
 
 Ttfi’ri(TOncn. (jxo- 
 pdrroniai. 
 
 (ptXrjfTO/uai. 
 
 giuOioaofiat- 
 
 irtjuricra/uTiv. irpio- 
 puaafjinv. 
 
 ZfpiXncrajurfv. 
 
 I 
 
 tfuaOojardiuirfV- 
 
 riTighnofiai. 7 T£- 
 < pwcmooyai . 
 
 7 T£ 0 lX//<XOjUCU. 
 
 ytiuaQihaoyai. | 
 
 S IV E. 
 
 F uture. 
 
 Tt/LLriOiiGoyai. 
 
 (pi\i\Qr]^ofxai. 
 
 yioOwOhoo- 
 
 
 (ho)paOt]aofiai. 
 
 
 pai. 
 
 -Tfa, -Tfov, fXtaOw-Tiog j -rta, -nov. 
 
 Subj. or A*«, (rX-ey-f, ?rAi»j, vXeufi.iv, it A s o tf, 
 57- A s <y «r i ( v ). 
 
 Imper. tXsT. Inf. crAs/v. Part. (rAswv, or A / o v o’ a, 
 or A e o v. 
 
 Impf. Ind. eit-Asov, ZsrXitf, 'erXa, 1 or A e o [x. t », iorAsm, 
 e cr A s 0 v. 
 
 Opt. «r A e o ; ^ i, or A £ o i f, &C. 
 
 Mid. Pres. Ind. tAe o fA a. i, or A s >7, ?rAE/Tai, vr X i o fje, i 6 c t 
 
 vrXutrPov, &C. 
 
 Inf. <7rXu<rt)cti a Part, A * oy. sin f. Impf. l or A £ ^ >t« >7 » 
 
 2. The Verb -8 c 7 bind , (but not Sa, ?s neces- 
 tary\ is, however, usually contracted throughout , par¬ 
 ticularly in its Compounds; e. g. ro Sovv, rou dour- 
 roc, diadovyai, Kart8our- j 2 
 
173 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. fClIAP. Vllfc 
 
 3. Several Verbs deviate from, the general rules of 
 \contraction * <e, g.— 
 
 {a) -of, -aft, -ai? and -op are contracted into ^ and -y 
 (instead of into -a and -<i), in c, ( a - o>) «>, / 
 ZyzrjjrriTov ,-ijrt, Inf. r, Imper. # 7 ;Impf.if&ou, 
 
 ~UC» •»?» -ijrov, -tjrr}v, -rjre ;—7r 6 f v ( a -w ) ru, / 
 hunger, Inf. Tnivyv, t x/j ( a-w ) 1 thirst, 
 
 Inf. Scfirjiy ;—ic v ( a-to) Co, 1 scrape, Inf. Kvyu ; 
 <t p( a- to) Co, 1 smear, Inf apy v ;—^ (a - to )m, 
 I rub. Inf. xhyv ;—^ p <( a - o) Co - p ai, 1 use, 
 
 XPV’ XP*i rai \^ n f- X9*‘ a ® ai 5—« 7T o \ p to pa t, I 
 •abuse, Inf. Cnro^orjaOat ;—-a v 6 xp*) (abridged 
 from a7roxprj), it suffices. Inf. Inroxffij Impf. 
 inrtxprf;—x p ( a-to ) Co, $ give an oracle, I pro¬ 
 phesy, xp.ys, xpy , Illf * xpv i/ - 
 
 (b)-oo and-oe are contracted into-fi>, (instead of into 
 •ov), and -op into -<£,(instead of into -ot), in 
 <P» 7 ( d“ w) w, j freeze , Inf. piyCov and pry our, 
 Part. Gen. ptywrroe and piyouvrog, Subj. ptytp, 
 Impf. hppiytov, Opt i piyun)i>, &C. 
 
 tUF On the use of the Attic forms of the Opt. in 
 -i iv, observe,—(1) In the Singular of Verbs in da, 
 and -out, the form in -o/rjr is much more in use than 
 the common form, and in Verbs in -ato it is used 
 almost exclusively ; (2) In the Dual and PL of all 
 three the common form is more in use; (3) In the 
 111. Pers. Plur ,, the Attic form is always identical 
 with the common form ; e g. -tptoev. 
 
 4. A o v at, A wash , has the following forms as if 
 from the Root A0, viz. — III. Pers. Sing. Imperf. Act. 
 HAov, I. Pers. Plur. iAoupt>s Ind. Pres. Mid. Ao vpai, 
 A ovrai, &c., Imper. Aou, Inf. Ao utrOat, Part. Xovpsvog', 
 Imperf. iXovpnv, IXov? iXovro, &c. The rest of the) 
 Verb is regular. 
 
 Obs. On the change and shifting of the accent caused by contract 
 Hon, see § 11, 2. 
 
CONTRACT PURE VERBS* 
 
 179 
 
 § 97 .] 
 
 XLIV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (1) CONTRACT VERBS IN PRES. AND IMPP. ACT, 
 
 Ay ktmu, I love, am-contented. 
 &0uvxro< t -ov, immortal. 
 i6\'tus, wretchedly, toifully. 
 kxfii), -»s, b, point, height, prime, 
 bloom (of life). 
 aarfuTru, 1 lighten, 
 
 (igovruu, / thunder, 
 iiypau, I thirst, 
 fyatu, I do, act. 
 
 i%-aTKTuw, I deceive - tho roughly. 
 *£«'», (Gen.), I love (ardently). 
 %<xm, I live. 
 
 i)\ixta, -as, b, age, life, (especi¬ 
 ally youth or manhood). 
 6a.ppa.Xeas. boldly, valiantly, 
 fita, •at, ft, appearance,form. 
 
 vixda, T conquer. 
 oXoQugo/xai, I pity. 
 
 Ogata, 1 see. 
 ogfixu, I rush, 
 aruvaa, / hunger, 
 a-ft*, (with Inf.), before, 
 or as ; how ? 
 ctuvaa, I am-silent. 
 crvyxvxaat, I Confound, thrOW-intO- 
 confusion. 
 
 cvfipa^os, -ay, fighting-with ■. 
 Subst. , an ally. 
 
 rtXtVTaa), (1) I end, finish ; (2) 
 1 die, (friov, life, understood). 
 <roXpxa, I dare, venture , under¬ 
 take. 
 
 1. IloAXafae yvwppv e^aTraTwaiv ideal. 2. Mr/ orf i mea¬ 
 nt) k epdog. 3. ’Epd> rpg apETrjg 1 . 4. IloAXaictc vikci k ai 
 kokoq ai^pa ayadov. 5. 0 1 ayaOol ipwm rwv KaXwv 1 
 
 6. IloXXoi avOpwirot £v rp Trig pXuc'iag aicprj teXevtwoiv. 
 
 7. *H aiwira, p Xeye apeivova. 8 . ’ Avayicp ecttl tt avrag 
 dvOputTrovg TcXevrpv. 9. Nove opa. ko. 1 vovg aicovei. 
 10. QappaXtwg, w oTpariwTai, 6pp.wp.ev hr\ rovg 7roAf- 
 piovg. 11. riptv plv 7 Teivrjv, 7roXXoi eaO'iovm , 7rp(ir cte 
 Stlprjv, ■jTivouaiv. 12. Outc ecTTi roig prj dpwen avppayog 
 rv\p. 13. n £ p tK Xi/ C p<JTpa7TT£v, e(3povra , avveicvKa rpv 
 r EXXa3a. 14. E iOe 7r avrtg 7raiSeg rovg yoviag ayar 
 TTipev. 15. Owe av 2 ToXp.igpv tov (j)iXov (SXairreiVf 
 16. To plv awpa 7roXXaKig Kal 7reivfj icat Siipg * 17 
 
 ifnr^p 7 rwg av 2 p di\pqfp rj ireivigp ; 17. 'Eu^rj adavarog 
 »cai ayppwg £r/ dta Travrog. 3 18. Kpeirrov to pp £rj* 
 iariv p Z,gv aOXlwg- 19. ’OXotyvpopeQa tov Iv ry Tpg 
 pXiKiag aicprj TeXevTwvra. 
 
 1 § 158, 6, I. 2 —how could, kc. ? See Synt. Rule, § 84. 3 So. 
 
 %fvov. 
 
 ( 4 . What is the open form of vtx’a. ? 5. Of t^Zat ? 10. Of IgpZ- 
 #m»? 11. What Mood is vruvyv ? 15. ToXftaw ? 16. 'hc^an ? 14, 
 
180 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [CHAP. VIIL 
 
 *WTiat part of the Verb is iyetTSm ? 17. What is the open form 
 of £>» ? Gender of dyfyus ?) 
 
 L*Chifdren love their {== the) parents. 2. Either 
 be-silent (pi-) or say what is better 1 ! 3. With the 
 understanding' 2 we see and hear. 4. Let youths be 
 silent.1 5. We should love 3 virtue. 6. All the citi¬ 
 
 zens fear 4 that® the enemies will rush on the eitv. 
 7. It is well to love our (=the) parents. 8. We pity 
 those-who-die 6 in the prime of life 7 . 9. The soldiers 
 rushed boldly *on the city. 10. The poor man is 
 often "hungry and thirsty. 11. All .the citizens 
 feared that the enemies would rush on the city. 12. 
 Boy, would that thou wouldst always love thy 
 (=the) parents! 
 
 1 =letter things, (Neut. PL'). 2 Dat. * Subj. * Trans. : fear 
 
 possesses, &c. 5 with Subj. 6 Part. 7 hxixia. 
 
 (2) CONTRACT VERBS IN 
 
 ’A Qvptu, I am-dispirited, de¬ 
 spair. 
 
 (Gen.), I neglect. 
 o>, (instead of lav), if, (with 
 Subj.). 
 
 aToppta. IJlow-from. 
 
 Kffxtco, I practise, decorate. 
 
 (Gen.), J want-; — St7, it-is- 
 necessary, one-must, one- 
 ought, (Acc. and Inf.). 
 'hwrvxtu, I am-unfortunate. 
 iTaniitu, I praise, 
 tlrvxiu, I am fortunate. 
 
 -*is, v, wish, prayer. 
 or Utku, I will, wish, am- 
 willing. 
 
 x^ariu, (Gen.), J am-master-cf, 
 subdue. 
 
 yaXtu, I talk, prate. 
 y.dXa, (Adv.), very; Gompar. 
 pidxxov, magis, potius, more, 
 
 —PRES. AND TMPF. ACT. 
 
 rather; Super. ^aX/<rra, maxi- 
 roe, most, especially. 
 ui\i, -ires, jto, honey. 
 
 N etrrco£, -ooos, o, Nest6r. 
 ovdicron, never. 
 
 ■visTt — ovri, neither — nor. 
 v-xiu, I sail. 
 
 noteu, I make, do;—iZ vow, 
 (Acc.), I do-good-to, conjer¬ 
 a-favour-on. 
 
 wona, (laboro), I labour, toil. 
 
 oxdu, I expect , presume, 
 pty, peroi, }), reed. 
 
 -vryiu, I am-silent. 
 
 (TvXXap.^d'Ho, (Dat.), I take-in- 
 common-with, aid. 
 avy.Toviu, (Dat.), I labour-with, 
 aid. 
 
 nXteo, I accomplish, fulfil, 
 tygoviu, •/ think J [tiyx (pgovieo. 1 
 am-haughty. 
 
 :XLV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1 . *Avrjp Trovxipbg ^cap 1 2 , Bu>c 
 
"CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 
 
 181 
 
 S 97] 
 
 KoaTiaro^ 1 , ’uv.-Qvfiov 3 -kckit^q. -3. 'Siiyav fiaXXov rj Xa- 
 XtlV TTptTTEl. 4. W 0 T£ ay TTOlY\T8, VOpi^ETE opav (hoy. 
 5. QiXog (fnXiO arv/nrovMV avrcy 7rovst 6. O i avOptv- 
 7 tol OvrjToi firj cbpovovvrcov u7TEp Oeovg. 7. O fiaXiar o 
 tvru^drv jct ?7 gtya (fipovuru). 8. ‘OuB'Ittot* aOvptiv tuv 
 KCtKCUQ TTpUTTOVTUl TO. ^eXtiCJ Se 7TpOQ$OK(jfV 081. 9. 
 
 Tw srovouvn Oeoq cvXXap(5av8i. 10. AtKaioavvriv ao- 
 K 81 T 8 KaXipyip KaXXoycp. 11 ’Ato rrjc Ntaropoe yXtbrTrjg 
 wQTTsp gtAt, 6 Ao-yoc inrlppEi. 12, f Q Swicparrjc tou ctm 
 paroQ ovk rtpiXei, tovq Se a/ueXovvrag ovk h ryvet. 13 
 E’/0£, (L (Ieo c, reXotrig (or teAoic) juw r?)y ev\r/v. 14 
 Et#£ 8VTV\OlT£, U) (ptXoi. 15. 0£OU OtXoVTOg 4 , KO.V° 8771 
 pirrog nXioig. 
 
 1 Crasis for xtu xv or *«! lav, et’en though ((rtiamsi). 5 sc. «<rr<. 
 3 § 158, 7, («)• 4 Gen. Abs. 5 *av ?rAea<j=x«<—?rXsa/j av, iAoti 
 
 mayest sail even on a reed. 
 
 (2. What is the Positive form *of x^arurms ? - 8. What is the 
 open form of (ZiXrieo ? Of •r^os^oxav ? 9. Of vrovouvn ? What is the 
 
 composition of trvWecpfidvu"! 12. In what Tense is \<rym ? Why 
 has it the i subscribed ? 15. Why is -the mark (’ ) placed over 
 
 XOt¥ ?) , 
 
 1. Wicked men are unfortunate v even though they 
 are fortunate. 2. If God be willing 1 , we may sail 2 
 even on a reed. 3. Whatever thou doest 3 , think that 
 God sees it. 4. Friends, labouring-with friends, labour 
 for themselves. 5. Practise (sing.) justice in deed 
 and word! 6. The Greeks neglected neither the 
 
 body nor the mind. 7. O gods, would that ye would 
 fulfil my wish! 8. Would that thou wert fortunate, 
 
 O friend! 9. Friends should labour with friends. 
 10. It is well to practise virtue. 
 
 ^Gen. Abs. 2 Opt. with a*. ~ o,n &», with Subj, 
 
 XLVI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (3) CONTRACT VERBS IN -ou. —PRES. AND IMPF. ACT. 
 
 Apao^af, I obscure, eclipse,make- uplxua, -as, fi, carelessness* 
 
 dull , impair. attyunvot, ~ti , human. 
 
182 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [CHAP. VIII 
 
 aTeppo -%{, h, stream, source . 
 
 I entrap, deceive. 
 
 }dv>Ju, I enslave. 
 
 \Xiv6tfou, I set-free. 
 
 4 \t<Tr.u, I make-equal. 
 
 cot, I emulate, strive-after, 
 imitate, value, deem-happy, 
 admire. 
 
 X*irea, I seek, endeavour . 
 
 £«>:, -ijf, it, life. 
 
 tuos, ->«», godlike, divine. 
 
 'Itu, (Conj.), in-order-that. Tt 
 takes the Subj. after a prin¬ 
 cipal Tense, the Opt. after a 
 historical Tense. 
 
 xonuvia, -at, v, communion, in¬ 
 tercourse. 
 
 Xipls, -«y, «, hunger, famine. 
 
 S^lis, -ttof, ii. a longing -for, de¬ 
 sire, appetite. 
 
 ooMu, I make-straight, erect, 
 raise up. 
 
 «*■!{, yvto, ortf, who, which-in - 
 deed, the-very-man- who or 
 thing-wliich. 
 
 trw-i]'- epotou, / make-equal-to, 
 assimilate. 
 
 ’rvtpXceo, 1 blind. 
 
 %a\iTut, with-difficulty. 
 
 1. To aXtjdtg KaXXng, oTTfp 'Ik Oetag Kori'tov'ag 1 
 xrjv arroppcniv, ovte irovog rj Xtuog r) aptXtta rig, ovre 6 
 TroXvg xpovog a/uavpot. 2. At (jnXiut to. Wi) ZriTovot 
 ovvt^opotovv. 3. XaXerruig civ 2 ralg rtov ayaOojv apt* 
 raig t^iaohig (or l^tro/e) rovg eiratvovg. 4. Evvopta 
 (t/iavpoi vj3piv. 5. Zr/Xov, to ttuT, tol>£ toOXoug kci\ 
 '(Tio(j)QOvag avSpag. 6. noAAo»c xantog TrpaTTovrag opOoi 
 V rv^V- IIAijfloc Kamov rr)v avdptoTrivrjv Ztorjv a/uav- 
 pot. 8. At 7 Ttpt ti otpobpai upi^ttg rvtpXavrriv tig raXXd 9 
 rpv xf/vx^v. 9. Trjv aptn)v Kat tijv ijottnav ZtjXtoptv. 
 10. Xpl>(70£ tOTIV O SovXtOU OvTJTtOl' (pp?Vj,g. 11* 0 1 
 iroXspioi to (TTpcirtvpa riptdv tSuXow. 12. Ot veavfat 
 tt)v <ro <f)tav ZrjXoltv. 13. O i 7roXtpi&n E7rXrjcria%ov, tva 
 -Tovg alxjuaXtoToug iXwOtpottv. 
 
 1 divine communion, i. e. communion with the Deity. 2 Synt. 
 Rule, § 84 ; av is to be joined with ifyjoivs in translation. 8 Crasis 
 -for tu iixxa. 
 
 (1. What is the derivation of oiToppo^l 2. What part of the 
 Verb is fl-yys^A^fl/flyv ? 5. £*?*.««? 6. What Mood is o^a?? 10. How 
 may the Pres. Part, of louXiu be distinguished from the Gen. PI. 
 of 'hoZxos, a slave ?) 
 
 1. A violent longing for anything 1 blinds the soul 
 to other-things. 2. The enemies approach, that they 
 may free the captives. 3. Young men, emulate ex¬ 
 cellent and wise men! 4. It is not easy to make 
 
CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 
 
 183 
 
 §97.] 
 
 praise -equal’to the virtues of the good. 5. We love 
 young-men who-strive-after 2 wisdom. 6. The ene¬ 
 mies were freeing the captives. 7. May violent de¬ 
 sire not blind your (=the) soul to other-things] 8 
 Young-men should sttive-after virtue. 
 
 mp ~rt. 2 Patt. 
 
 XLVII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (4) CONTRACT VERBS IN -aa. —PRES. AND IMPF., MID. OR PASS, 
 
 A tit/variM, I am unable, 
 iuxvs, -*s, unseemly, disgraceful. 
 ic.xooa.ofjt.ai, (Gen.), I hear, listen - 
 to. 
 
 i%tou, (r/va rtvos), I think-worthy, 
 claim, expect. , 
 
 *£, for. 
 
 iV*— un, (sive—sive), whether 
 —or, either—or. 
 rtivfioo, (with Gen. or Inf.), I 
 desire. 
 
 lioytr'iu, (Acc.), I do-good-to, 
 benefit. 
 
 io/xai, (with Aor. and Fut. 
 
 Pass.), I rejoice. 
 n/jLigo^gofoos, ~ou, o, a courier , (i e. 
 
 one who runs all day, 
 
 $/jafti7v). 
 
 ii.ofjt.ai, 1 heal. 
 
 ftaxagtds, -a, -’ov, blessed, happy. 
 fjcri^avaou.ai, (machinor), I con¬ 
 trive, devise. 
 
 opo'icds, in-like-manner, alike. 
 Titgao/xas, (with Aor. Pass.), 1 
 try. 
 
 rl fjcxoj, -1 esteem, honour, 
 v'xohnfjo*, -aros, to, sandal, shoe, 
 (i. e. that which is bound un¬ 
 der, viro, hsw). 
 
 X'tJtxofA.a.t, (Dat.), I use, employ, 
 (utor). 
 
 ■oitpiklcv, (Acc.), I benefit. 
 
 1. 'Opo'iujQ aptyoiv cucpoattOai Set. 2fOrav aSvvarf /4 
 ny ttXovui) XprjaOai, tl 1 oiatytptig rod i rtvrjrog ; 3. Eit- 
 voi»c Xoyoc Xv'tttjv iarat. 4. Tijuw/xevoi 7rai’T£g rjd o* - 
 rai |3poTot. 5. Ot ai>0pa)7roi 7roXXa fipyavouvrai. 0. 
 M«Kap/oc 2 , OQ ovaiav tern vovv tya' XW raL 
 Sa KaXajg. 7. r O ayaObg virb tt avrwv riparat. 8. FX(or- 
 rrjc 7rapd> fcoawp. 9. FlfoocA^c vtto ruhf AOiqvattov pyar- 
 iraro Ka'i iri/uaro. 10. Ot r)psp ( >3pvpoi ovk ixp<bvro vtto*- 
 SiipcKTiv* iv rate <)dotg. 11. O uk aendg 2 ,-*av rig vtt 
 £4a7rararat. 12. E'lOe Travrec yovtTgnmb raw 
 rtKvtsiv ayan^vTo. 13. O i ayaOcn vtto iravroov ayanacr* 
 B(jjv. 14. Eire vnn <f>'iXu)v iOeXttg aycnraaOai , roiig (pi- 
 Xnvg tvtpytm' tire vtto rivng tt oXtwg tiriOvutig Tijuav- 
 r tfai , TifV ttoXiv to^eXu' £iT£ vtto rij.g 'EXXaSag Traarifg 
 
184 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. TClIAP. VIII. 
 
 a^ioig In apery Oavpia^taOat, rrjv r EAAo£a mtpw bv 
 rroieiv. 
 
 i ' - i. - -* 1 1 
 
 1 ri; = quid’? in what way? 2 sc. itrrlv. * =?»« tout a, tig a. 
 VǤ 161, 3. 
 
 (2. What is the composition of or cm ? 3. Account for the accent 
 of tvvavg. 6. What is the open form of xtf Tai • 8- What part of 
 
 the Verb is <xuo& ? ill. What Mood and Tense is i£a<rar«ra< ? 12. 
 iyavwvro’t 13. ayaTa^wv ? 14. u\to7s ?) 
 
 1. Hear both -"alike, *0 judge.! 2. It is not dis¬ 
 graceful .if we are deceived by enemies. 3. Kind 
 words heal grief. 4. The man rejoices in being-ho¬ 
 noured 1 by others. 5. We desire to be loved by our 
 (=the) friends and honoured by the citizens. 6. 
 Among 2 the Lacedaemonians old-men were exceed¬ 
 ingly honoured. 7. May the good man always be 
 loved and honoured by all ! 8. The judge should 
 
 hear both. 
 
 ’•Part. hsom. 2 cra^a, with Dat. 
 
 XLVIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (5) CONTRACT VERBS IN -CM .— 
 
 ’A (Acc.), I do-wrong-to, 
 injure. 
 
 ni^eo/u.a. 1 , (Acc.), 7 am-ashamed be¬ 
 fore any one, revere, respect, 
 worship , (with Aor. Pass.). 
 
 «c7 /a-T£(w, (Dat.), I disbelieve , dis- 
 trust ; Pass., u-rtoreoput, -I 
 am-disbelieved. 
 
 icri-'kvffig, -lug, rt, deliverance, 
 redemption, release. 
 
 Ytofuti, (Gen.), I need, requirv, 
 (with Aor. Pass.). 
 trot, (-to;=)-oug, <r6, year, 
 itr^v^o;, -cc, -ov, strong, powerful. 
 xeiru.<pgovfu, (Gen.), 1 despise. 
 'iiotlo^eM, J revile, abuse, 
 fu (t'iu, I hate. 
 
 1. Aidov Qtiw. -2. Tor 
 
 PKE8. AND IMBF.,TMID. OR PASS. 
 
 otus, (Adv. and Conj.), (1) how ; 
 (2) in-order-that. It takes 
 
 the Sidy, after a principal 
 Tense, the Opt. after a histo¬ 
 rical Tense ;—after Verbs of 
 ‘ caring ’ it takes also the Fut. 
 Ind. 
 
 wXno-los, -a, -ov, near — oi *•*»»* 
 o-iov— those near , neighbours. 
 
 woXio^xim, I besiege. 
 
 t^os-toisu, I add ; Mid. 1 lay- 
 claim- to, pretend- to. 
 
 T sofa, -«s, ij, Troy. 
 
 Qofceu, I frighten; Mid. (with 
 Aor. Pass.), I am-afruid, 
 fear. 
 
 ayaOov avdpa ttoiou iraipov 
 
CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 
 
 1*5 
 
 
 3. tyiAovvrai, jUKTOuvrtc 'fiurovvrai.^ 4. 
 
 Toy tax^pov Set Trpaov 1 fityat, ottioc ol TrXrjfxtov alSw y- 
 rat fiaWov rj <poj3iol>rai. 5. Al&lvOai Sii (piAovg. 4 
 ^ATTiGTOVvraL ot XaXot, icay 2 aXfjOtvttxriv • '7* Ot Fk(>” 
 
 <rat yffo rtoy 'EXXrjytyy tpuaovirro koi KareippovovvTO. 
 8 . f O jurjSev aSocwy 3 ovStvog Surat vopov 4 . 4). Tpota 
 3tica ?nj v 7 ro Twy e EXX^ywy £ 7 roXtopiceiTO. 10- Ot rro- 
 Xlrat t0o|3oyyro, /xr) 17 7 roXtc 7 roXtopfcotro. 11. Aoibo- 
 i^oujueyoc ^epe * 6 70 ^ XotSopuiy, eay 6 Xotoopoy^tvoc 
 |ur) TrpoQTroiriTaii'AoidoptTTai Xoibopiuv. 12. MrjSeic $ 0 - 
 
 jSet<r0<y Qavarov, 'arroAvtnv kokiov, 
 
 1 §48. 2 — »a< lav. 9 =he who does no tvo'ong. 4 -§158, 5. (a). 
 
 1. Worship fjpZJ God! 2. He-who-loves 1 is loved, 
 
 he-who-hates 1 is hated. 3. Those who do no wrong 1 
 require no law. 4. The king of the Persians was 
 hated and despised by the Greeks. 5. The citi¬ 
 zens are afraid that the city will be "besieged by the 
 enemies. “6. May you make (pi.) good men your 
 friends 1 *7. The good are often hated by the 
 
 wicked. 3. It is not disgraceful to be hated by the 
 
 wicked. , 
 
 Pres. Part. 
 
 XLIX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (6) CONTRACT VERBS IN -ou. —PRES. AND IMPF., 
 MID. OR PASS. 
 
 *w, fi, strength. 
 
 lyetugo&j I 7 IlQ/ 1 C 6 -pVOlld /1 [Mid. 
 
 (with Aor. Pass.), I am- 
 proud, pride-myself-in. 
 inXaoj, 1 make-manijest, show. 
 ivavr looftoti) (Dat.), adversor, I 
 oppose, withstand, (with Aor. 
 Pass.) 
 
 (aj unt/^ea strength¬ 
 ened by \Q, I obscure-utterly, 
 blot-out, weaken, impair, de- 
 
 . stroy. 
 
 Znptou, I punish. 
 
 Vos, (-£«,' =) - ovs, *6, manner , 
 disposition , character. 
 /jtriTs—p’riTs, neither—nor.. 
 
 I share , divide. 
 
 <rag%, a , flesh. 
 
 Tctoruvoej, I humble, 
 vsn^tpxws, -ev, haughty, arro¬ 
 gant. 
 
 pooped, I overpower, master , 
 subdue. 
 
 naOsatv. 2. f Yiro 
 3. 'H (jnXla ti£ vroX- 
 
 1. &ovAovptQa ry <rapici leal rote 
 ir^c awayKijc iray*a iSovAovrai. -7a%y. 
 
186 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [CHAR. V1IT. 
 
 Xovg fifpiZofievri 1 f^apavpovrai, 4. Tovc filv rpfXovc 
 tA ivOepioptv,Tovg & i^Opov? xtipwptOa. 5. Mr) yavpov 
 otxpiq. 2 pr'iT aXiep pr'ire irXovry. 6. To yOo? paXtara 
 iic Ttov epywv StjXourai. 7. 'O V7repri^avog ran eivvito. 
 8. Ou KaXou lari tij oocptq yavpovaOcn■ 9. Oi roTg 
 
 wyaOoig ivavriovpzvoi ix^ioi tl<n ZnpiovaOat. 10. OI 
 yrpariMTai viro riov /3 apfiaptov iSoXovvro . 11. I lav 
 
 TiQ KCIKOL ZrjpiuXvTO. 
 
 1 shared amongst mantj. * § 161, 3. 
 
 1. The intemperate are enslaved by the flesh and 
 the passions. 2. Pride not yourselves on wisdom 1 ! 
 8. May the arrogant be humbled! 4. It is disgrace¬ 
 ful to oppose the good 1 . 5. The citizens fear that 
 they may be subdued by* 2 the enemies. 6. Bad 
 'soldiers are punished by 2 the general. 7. He-who- 
 prides-himself-in 3 his (=the) wisdom 1 is not wise. 
 
 1 Dafc. * icro, with Gen. * Part. 
 
 5 98. Contract Verbs which , contrary to the Rule , 
 retain the shor t Characteristic-vowel in forming the 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 1. As several unccntracted pure Verbs retain the 
 short Characteristic-vowel (§ 94.) in forming the 
 Tenses, contrary to the Rule, so also do several con¬ 
 tract Verbs. Most of these Verbs take a in the Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass,, in the Aor. I. Pass,, and in the Tenses 
 derived from both these forms: this is indicated by 
 the words, * Pass, with & (§ 95). They are the fol¬ 
 lowing.;— 
 
 (a) -aw. 
 
 y*Xaw, I laugh , Fub. y\Xacay.ai ; Aor. \ytXafa. Pass. With t. 
 \Xaw (usually iXecvvw), t drive , Fut. ixlcw (Att. Uw, § 83), &o. 
 6 X a w, I bruise, Fut. (Xcaw, &c. Pass. With a. 
 
 « X a w, / break, Fut. xXaaw, &c. 1 'ass. with o . 
 
CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 
 
 187 
 
 « 
 
 a 
 
 ci. 
 
 0* 
 
 5 98.] ... - 
 
 V 
 
 X‘* X act, I loosen, Fut. ^aXiffco, kd. PdSS . With V.' 
 
 % a p a a (usually iapx^ot), 1 Sllbdue, Aor. tiapara.^ ' 
 
 -rifaa. I transport , se77, Fut -ti^arst; Aor. Wejas-«;—but 
 / over (Intrans.), Fut. ; Aor. Wloacrx. 
 
 ijgp*» These seven Verbs have a Liquid before the Characteristic 
 vowel a. 
 
 f-rau, I draw, Fut. a or daot, &3. Pass, with *• 
 r *X,* u ' I loose, open, hut. <jxu.au, &c. 
 
 fb) -f». 
 
 iit a u a i, I reverence, Fut aiMvopat ; Aor. $Mn*; 'Perf.fiitrp 
 it top at, I heal , Fut. xxtaopat ; Aor. r[xiadpnv; Perf. Mid. 
 Pass. %'cvrpKt, Aor. Pass. yvivOirt. 
 i\iu, I grind, powwcZ, Fut. ix<5 (§83); Perf. Mid. or Pass. aA*A#r- 
 
 ^tta< (§ 89). . 
 
 UPXtu, I suffice, Fut. &c. P ass - Wlt ' l f\ p - -w-., 
 
 \ p t u, I vomit , Fut. &c.; Perf. Aot. ipvptxa ; Perf. Mid. 
 
 or Pass. \pr t pt<rpat (§ 89). 
 
 X i *>, I boil (Intrans.). Pass, with <r. 
 
 1 * u, I scrape. Pass, ioith a. 
 
 *t\t a>, I accomplish , Fut. <riX& (§ 83). Pass . 
 r p s co, I tremble. 
 
 (c) -oeo. 
 
 ioiot, I plough, Fut. iolcrco ; Aor. J Perf. Mid. or Pass, itf- 
 ’ ^o/xa< (§ 89); Aor. Pass, fyofa*. 
 
 q bs> _The following Verbs have in some Tenses the long, in 
 
 •others, the short Vowel 
 
 \-ratlin, J praise, Put. WarAa-opat; Aor. «4'ir» ; Perf- \-rnnxa ; 
 Aor. Pass. WMv but Perf. Mid. or Pass. %*ynp*u 
 \a, I take, Aor. Pass. yotHw ;—but Fut. attfjreo; Perr. Aot. 
 
 ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, fopeu. 
 
 iu, I marry . Fut. yapu, [= yapitrot] (§ 83)but Aor. •y*f** J > 
 Perf. ytydpnKa ; Aor. Pass. tyapWni {1 was taken to wife). 
 Hot, / bind, Perf. Act- *fl»« ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ithpat ; Aor. 
 Pass. QUn *;—but Fut. ; Aor. *W« ; Aor.Mid.tW4- 
 
 pw; Fut. III. Unaopxt. (which is used instead of the un- 
 
 Attic Fut. Pass, hffropat). _, 
 
 na\tu, I call, Fut. [=xa\bcA] (§ 83); Aor. ix&Xttra hut 
 Perf. Act. x-txktjxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. xtxXnpat, I am 
 called; Fut. III. xtxX^opat, I shall be called; Aor. Pass. 
 \x>Ah *; Fut. Pass. xXr.Maopa, (§ 117.). * > 6 & 
 
 c,o Hot I long for, Fut. wftk* and *°k<rop*t\ Aor. o*ob*» and 
 ° irVrf Perf. Act. «%*&***; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ««r*- 
 
 i J^labofo^^ol*aJ, &c. (f s7ia?7 worfc), (/ shall bt m 
 
 ■pain) i Perf. xa in both senses. 
 
 ■mte 
 
 yap 
 
188 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [CHAP. VIII* 
 
 §99. PARA 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 ' Character¬ 
 istic CL. 
 
 Character¬ 
 istic i. 
 
 Charcteristic *. 
 
 Present 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Perfect 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Future 
 
 A or 1st 
 
 I draw. 
 criT (a-to) to. 
 e(T7r(a-ov)b)v . 
 
 eairaKa. 
 
 ? z 
 
 £(T7raK€tP. 
 
 z 
 
 (TTTCKTb). 
 
 >! « 
 tancKja. 
 
 I accomplish. 
 rfX(£-o))w. 
 £TtX(£-Ov)- 
 ovv. 
 
 TETtXtl ca. 
 
 £T£TfXtlC£«|/. 
 
 tcXcJ (§ 83). 
 IreXsaa. 
 
 I plough. • 
 
 r\p{p-ov)ovv. 
 
 ap-rjooKa 
 
 , (i »?)• ; 
 
 wp-ripoKUv 
 
 , (§ 89). 
 
 apocrw. 
 
 ripocra. 
 
 PAS 
 
 Aorist 
 
 "1 <r7ra-ff- 
 ttojfv- 
 
 £ T £ X e- c - 
 6 X) v. 
 
 rjpoOjiv* 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : 
 
 (TTra-O-TSOQ, ■ 
 
 ‘T£d, -T£OV. 
 
 > i 0bs. 1. On the formation of the Perfects and Aorists with <r, see 
 § 95 ; and on the Attic Reduplication in ao-^ox«, &c., see § 89. (a). 
 The further .inflexion of eorwa-Tr-ftat, hrTu-<r-fLw, nriXt-.a-fLcu, irtrtke- 
 r-pviv is like that of xtxiXtv-ff-fLcti, txsxtXtu-rr-ttnv (§ 95). 
 
 OlB'. 2. On "the Attic Future [(r?>. Itu =) nh&, riXt~s., &c., (nXe- 
 ccpcu =) nXovfLCLt, nXy, &C.], See -§ 83. 
 
 Obs. 3. The following contract Verbs assume <r in the Pass., 
 though they lengthen the Characteristic-vowel in forming the Tenses , 
 viz. x'om, I heap, (Fut. Perf. Mid. or Pass. A or. 
 
 Pass. and I give an oracle, (Fut. x^h™, Perf. 
 
 Mid. or Pass. Aor. Pass, ix^r^n») — X a « at, I use, 
 
 (Fut. xfaoju.m), has in the Per£ Mid. xix^vfLcti, but in the Aor. 
 Pass, ixfafw* 
 
 On the.contrary, ix&u, \cramu, ai^eu, 'hint, and a^ou, do not assume 
 c in the Pass., though the Characteristic-vowel in the Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass, (except in Wumu and and in the Aor. Pass., remains 
 short. Comp. § 98. 
 
§ 99:] CONTRACT PURE VEkBS. 189 
 
 DIG MS, 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic i. 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Gir(a-o)(jj->pai» 
 
 iair(a-i))(jj-priv 
 
 TfA(t-o)ov-j UClti. 
 ht\(t-o)ov-fJir)v. 
 
 ap(o-o)ov-pai. 
 
 y]p(p-6)o\)-pr]v. 
 
 to Tra-o-pat\ 
 
 T £T L A £~G-fl a.l. 
 
 . ap-i'ipopai (§ 89).- 
 
 £ cr 7T a * a - /U >J V.. 
 
 £TET£ \t-G~p T) l'. 
 
 ap-i)p6pr]v (§ 89),- 
 
 z 
 
 onaoopai. 
 
 iatraoapY\v. 
 
 rtXovpai (§ 83). 
 trtXsoaprip. 
 
 apooopat. 
 
 ppooappv- 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 Future 
 
 g 7r a - g- 6 rj- 
 
 T 6 A £ - <7-0 l)- 
 
 apodfoo - 
 
 
 go p a i. 
 
 go pai. 
 
 pai. 
 
 TEXt-a-reog r -rta, -rsov. apo-rto c, -rta, -rtov. 
 
 L. VOCABULARY. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 *X’y£Of» ~av t a, (ager), field, land.. 
 ilxYipuv, -ov, inexperienced, igno¬ 
 rant. 
 
 ioxlo/joxi, I heal , (§ 98. b.}. 
 uKoXouOtw, (I>at.), I follow. 
 »n\iu6t £», -*?, (illiberalitas), 
 
 meanness, stinginess* 
 
 I am-unfortunate. 
 
 IrXaj. -*», -a*, evident: 
 
 Saw, / let, allow, (§ 96,< 3). 
 
 (-««?=) " ay? j T0 > (ulcus), 
 
 sore, nicer. 
 
 htro 6 {, -ov, o, physician. 
 
 -a, -ov, timely , seasonable, 
 opportune, fitting. 
 
 xxgToof&aj, 1 reap-the-fruits-oJT. 
 
 xoufxloo, I adorn. 
 
 xra.ofjoxi, I acquire, gain; Perf. 
 
 I possess, have. 
 
 XoytZ,o[joxi^ I think, refiect. 
 xtyiof, -oi, -ov, eloquent, learned t 
 sensible. 
 
 A vjxvb^of, -ov, o, Lysander. 
 Wxxi^cvv, -6voi, o, Macedonian. 
 [Avd’iirovri, (with Imper., or Subj v 
 used imperatively), never. 
 'CihvciriGs, -zoos, o, Odysseus / 
 
 (Ulysses). 
 
 olxeu, I dwell, inhabit, 
 olxobopeoo, I build-a-house,build* 
 
190 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [0HAP. VIII. 
 
 -cv, poor. atp&kku, I cause-to-fall, trip-up^ 
 
 wkovrem, I am-rich, grow-rich. overthrow, foil. 
 
 0tu<rnkk t -n, -o», silent. vtyu, I elevate, exalt. 
 
 wfa, I deprive, rob » bereave* 
 
 1. O i 7 rcpi rov AttoviSav rpetaKOGioi 1 yEvvatwg gayo- 
 HEvoi STEXevrrjijav. 2. N5c >igov opyrjv rip Xoyt%EG0a„ 
 KaXCog. 3. Majcapfoe 2 , ogriq evtv^xigev Eig tei cva. 4. []oA- 
 Xovg Kaicibg TTparrovrag woOloge 3 rv\rj. 5. 2$aAAtt 
 tKEivovg, ovg av vxjswGij ruyrj, 6. *P aSia TTavra 2 Ocy 
 teXegoi. 7. MrjSt7ror£ koiveiv aSuijpovag dvSpag Eaar/g\ 
 8. ’Ev oig av runoig rig arv^crp, rovroig irXrjGici^wv 
 ov% rj$Erai. 9* 'O vsaviag aKoXovOiwano rn Go<pia 5 
 io. f a 7 TOU)Ti]g rov Xoyuhrarov X)SvGGEa Giu)7njXora^ 
 TOV 7TE7TOlY)KEV> ll*. Ot ajaOoi TTaTp'lSa KOGfJiriOfWGIV • 
 
 12. floAAaKtc 7rtwypoe avrjo atya pdX iirXovrrj^ 
 tTEV 3 . 13. OoAAoi, KEKTriJuivOt fAEV 7ToXXdy OV \pU)VTat 
 Se Si avEXtvOtpiav » 14. AvGavSpog r b ^napridrrjg^ 
 fiEyaXaiv riptov 6 rj^iihOq. 15. O i ripEpoSpu/uoi ovk 
 EX pr/aavro VTroSi'ifiaaiv 7 ev raTg oSo'ig . 16. 'H noXig 
 
 ttoXXujv avSpibv E\r]pix)9g. 17. Ot iarpoi ra eXki) oke* 
 aovrai. 18. H yXiiorra aiyijv Kaipiav KEKTijpEvrj nal 
 yipovn teal vew nprjv (pEpEi. 19. Ou8ac hraivov riSo* 
 valg £KX»jaaro 3 . 20. Oux£ rip KaXcog aypov tyvTEvaa- 
 pivip StjXov 2 , ogng KapirojGETat, o vte rij> KaX Cog ohdav 
 
 QlKoSop.Y]GapEV(jO StjXov 2 , (jgTig OLKljGEl. 
 
 1 i.e. Leonidas and his 300 warriors. 2 sc. hrri. * Observe the 
 peculiar force of the Aor. 4 p.v\den-ort — \<xrns, you should never 
 allow= never allow. 8 § 161, 2. (a). 6 § 158, 7. (v). 7 8 161, 3. 
 
 Ǥ158, 5. (a). S 
 
 1. The good will love and honour the good 
 2. Noble young-men will follow virtue. 3. The 
 citizens will deem 1 the valiant soldiers worthy of 
 great honour. 4. Alexander, king of the Macedo¬ 
 nians, conquered 2 Darius, king of the Persians 
 5. Leonidas and his 300 warriors adorned 2 their na¬ 
 tive-land 3 by their valour. 6. The citizens deemed* 
 the valiant soldiers worthy of great honours. 7. Ful¬ 
 fil* for me, O Zeus ( Jupiter my (=*= the) prayer! j 
 
§ 101.1 IMPURE VERBS. 191 
 
 8. The soldiers have conquered the enemies. 9. The 
 var has deprived the city of many citizens. 10. lhe 
 enemies were conquered 2 . IP lhe valiant soldiers 
 will be thought bv the citizens worthy of great 
 honours. 12. The physicians healed 2 the ulcer. 
 13. No-one will acquire praise by pleasures. 14, The 
 city has been deprived of many citizens. 15. All- 
 tilings have been well accomplished. 
 
 » deem worthy . 2 Aor. 3 vary* 
 
 II. IMPURE VERBS- 
 
 m 
 
 § 100. Formation of the Tenses of Impure Verbs. 
 
 Impure Verbs are those which have a Consonant 
 (§ 92) for their Characteristic (§ 77, 5). They are 
 divided into two classes, Mute and liquid Verbs. 
 They differ from Pure Verbs—(1) partly in forming 
 secondary Tenses (§ 103); (2) partly in undergoing 
 in the formation of the Tenses certain changes in the 
 Root (§ 77, 1): first, a strengthening of the Root by 
 consonants , or by lengthening the Root-vowel'» second, 
 a change of the Root-vowel • Phe "V owel thus changed 
 is called the variable-vowel . The Mute Verbs are 
 first considered. 
 
 § 101. A. MUTE VERBS. 
 
 Simple and Strengthened Characteristic.—Simple and 
 Strengthened Root. — Theme. 
 
 1. Mute Verbs have as a Characteristic one of the 
 nine Mutes (§ 4, 2); e. g.— 
 
m 
 
 MTJTE VERBS. 
 
 rcHAp; vnr.. 
 
 u 
 
 fiXtir-Wy I see, Tptf3-(i) r . I rubj I write r 
 
 7rXeK-(o, I weave, ay-ta, 1 lead, Ttv\-w, I form T 
 avvr-d), I accomplish, aS-w, I sing>, ttuQ-u*, I per¬ 
 suade. 
 
 2. Many of these, in forming the Tenses, undergo 
 certain changes in the Root , (§ 77,1). First, the Root 
 of the Verb is strengthened ; this consfsts: : — 
 
 (a) Either, in inserting a strengthening Consonant r 
 c. g. TVTT-T-u), I strike . Such V erbs have two -different 
 Characteristics and Roots,—simple and strengthened.. 
 Thus, iu Tvrr-T-d), the mute 7r is the simple , and nr, the* 
 strengthened Characteristic ; twit, the simple, and twttt v 
 the strengthened Root. This strengthening by consonants ■ 
 consists, (1) either in appending to the P-mute a r as a* 
 Characteristic; e. g. tvtt-t-w ; (2).or in changing the^K- 
 mute into rr or act; e. g. <j>p'iTT(o or (ppitjaa >, J am rough , 
 (which has 0ptic as its simple Root); (3) or in changing 
 the T-mute into Z; e. g.,(ppaZu>, I (declare, (which has 
 $pa§ as-its simple Root). But the Root thus strength¬ 
 ened is found only in the Pres, and Impf. » in all the 
 other Tenses the strengthening is omitted,, and, the 
 simple Root again, appears; e^ g.— 
 
 Pres. 
 
 rvT-r-u- 
 
 <Pf>jaaM 
 
 Impf 
 
 tr-ruff-Tot 
 £- <P()t<rtTOV 
 e-<pga%o* 
 
 FuU 
 
 (rCor-ru =) 'rvj/co. 
 <ru =) <P£ 
 
 [<p^<xh-7u =)$(>d.(ra. 
 
 (b) Or, in strengthening the Root-vowel by lengthen - 
 i/ng it, viz. a into rj, t into 7 or a, is into v or tv. In* 
 this class of Verbs also the simple and strengthenedf 
 Roots are distinguished. The simple Root appears iiv 
 the A or. IE Act., Midl and Pass.,, and in the Fut.. 
 II. Pass . 
 
 A or. II. 
 
 «becomes>j: (Pass, s-<r c~*-riv) 
 » — ft (Pass. 
 
 »■ — ii: (Act. i- A t<r-ov) 
 
 u — v: (Pass, 
 
 i- —— wi- (Act. £-<pt/y-av), 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Perfi. 
 
 
 vrfeu 
 
 II. rerriKcc. 
 
 / 3 « 
 
 
 I. r'irgi <p<t. 
 
 
 
 II. XiXoiva.. 
 
 < pgiiyu 
 
 
 II, vriQivyx.. 
 
VARIATION IN ROOT. 
 
 193 
 
 § 102.] 
 
 3. When any form of a Verb cannot be derived 
 from the Present in use , another Present is assumed; 
 this assumed Present is called the Theme, and is 
 printed in capitals to distinguish it from the Pres, in 
 use. Thus, Tun-Tv and tyzvyw are forms of the Pres, 
 in use; TYTI£2 and <£Yr£2 are the assumed Presents 
 or Themes, used merely for forming the Aor. II. 
 Pass. i-rvir-qv, and Aor. II. Act. ’i-tyvy-ov. 
 
 § 102. Variation in the Root. 
 
 1. A second change which many Mute Verbs un¬ 
 dergo in the Root, in forming the Tenses, consists in 
 altering the Root-vowel ; this is called the variable- 
 vowel ; e. g. K\tTTTti>, I steal , Aor. II. Pass. Ik A a tt-t) v, 
 Perf. I. k £-k A o <p-a ; (similarly in English, sing, sang, 
 sang). This variation belongs only to secondary 
 Tenses, and some first Perfects (No. 4). 
 
 2. Most Mute Verbs with a monosyllabic Root, and 
 c as a Root-voweL take the variable-vowel a in the A or. 
 11. Act., Mid. and Pass., and also in the Fut. II. Pass :— 
 
 9 
 
 I turn, Aor. II. Act. e-r goc <r-o t. 
 rgep-tti, I rear, Aor. II. Pass, \-r g 5. <p - n ». 
 
 I steal, Aor. II. Pass, l-x \a.^e-nv, 
 vtXsk-w, 1 weave, Aor. II. Pass. a x-n *. 
 
 Obs. In the Aor. II. Pass, of some Verbs with c as a Root- 
 vowel, there is no change of the Vowel, since the Aor. Pass, is suffi¬ 
 ciently distinguished from the Imperf. Act. by the ending; e. g. 
 pxiVa, I see, Impf. t-fiXvr-ov, Aor. II. Pass, i-fiksv-vv. 
 
 3. Some Mute Verbs with a monosyllabic Root, and 
 c as a Root-vowel , take the variable-vowel o in the 
 Perf. and Plpfi II. > but those which have the Root- 
 vowel ei , take ot; e. g.— 
 
 r{i<p*, I rear, rir^otp a—(for Perf. Mid. or Pass., see No. 5). 
 
 It***, I leave, xixot v «—(but Perf. Mid. or Pass. xixti/*p.xi). 
 
 K 
 
194 
 
 SECONDARY TENSES. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 4. The following first Perfects also take the vari¬ 
 able-vowel o:— 
 
 xktvrtu, I steal , Perf. I. xixXotp a—(but Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 x.ex.Xi(/,y.ui). 
 
 Xiyu, I collect , Perf. I. tr v v e i X 0 % a, i 1 1 i A o % a— (but Perf. Mid. 
 
 or Pass. o’uvitXiyy.ut), 
 
 I send, Perf. I. <r s * 0 p <p «—(but Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 ‘Z’e7rty.[tou). 
 
 ro'i<ru, I turn, Perf. I. rergo Qa,, like Perf. II. from rpu —(for 
 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass., see No. 5). 
 
 Ifour , Perf. I. ^e^oixa. 
 
 5. The three followingVerbs have the variable-vowel 
 a in the Perf. and Plpfi Mid. or Pass., but not in the 
 Aor. I. Pass. 
 
 rrtftpu, I turn, Perf. Mid. or Pass. 1 <r r ^a.p n a i—{ but Aor. I. 
 
 Pass. IrrptQPmv). 
 
 I turn, — — — <r t r g a. p p a. t — (but Aor. I. 
 
 Pass. \<r^s<p0r,v). 
 
 I rear , —• — — — (but Aor. I. 
 
 Pass. i6£i<p6w>). 
 
 § 103. Remarks on the formation of the Secondary 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 The Secondary Tenses differ from the Primary,_ 
 
 partly, in wanting the Tense-characteristic, and, conse¬ 
 quently, appending the Personal-endings (-ov , -6yx)v, 
 -v}v, -iiao/mai, -a and - eiv) immediately to the simple 
 Characteristic of the Verb; e. g. Aor. II. i-Xlir-or, 
 (but Aor. I. i-TraiStv-G-a') ;—partly, in being formed 
 throughout from the unaltered simple Verb-root; e. g. 
 Xt'nrio, Aor. II. £-X 1 7r-ov; <j)tvyu), Aor. II. H-(p v y-ov ;— 
 and partly, in having the variable-vowel ; e. g. arglcpw, 
 Aor. II. Pass, g-arpa^-tjv, Fut. II. Pass. arpacp-riGOfiai; 
 (but Aor. I. Pass. i-aTgi^-driv). 
 
 Obs. I. The Perf. II. does not always retain the short Root - 
 
§ 104.] CLASSIFICATION OF MUTE VERBS. 
 
 195 
 
 vowel, but it either lengthens it in many Verbs, e. g. « into *t, (bufc 
 after o and vowels, into a) :— 
 
 X(yxZ,ci), I CTy OUt, Aor. II. i-x^xy-ov, Perf. II. xi-x^xya. 
 (f/g'urffco, I shudder, Root, #PIK(i“), — <re-<pffxa ; 
 
 or it retains the long vowel or diphthong of the Pres.— 
 
 Qtvyu, I flee, Aor. [I. Act. eipSyov , Perf. II. t re-<pstr/x. 
 
 rrtxu, I melt, Aor. II. Pass. 'iru.xr,v, — re-r/ixa. 
 
 Obs. 2. Verbs whose Aor. II. Act. or Mid. would be identical in 
 form with the Impf., or differ from it only in the quantity of the 
 Root-vowel, have no Aor. II. Act. or Mid., but the Aor. II. Pass, 
 only, because its ending is different from that of the Impf. ; e. g.— 
 
 Impf. ; Aor. II. Act. and Mid. wanting ; Aor. II. 
 
 Pass, ey^x<p*iv. 
 
 § 104. Classification of Mute Verbs. 
 
 Mute Verbs are divided, (like mute letters), into 
 three classes. In each of these classes, Verbs with a 
 simple Characteristic in the Pres, and Impf. are dis¬ 
 tinguished from those with a strengthened Characte¬ 
 ristic (§ 101, 2):— 
 
 1. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a P-mute o, p, 
 
 simple Characteristic; 7rr, strengthened Charac¬ 
 teristic) ; e g.— 
 
 (a) Simple Characteristic : Tripur-w, I send , rptf 3-w, 
 I rub , ypaty-Lo, I write ’> 
 
 (j3) Strengthened Characteristic : runr-w, 1 strike , 
 {simple Characteristic, n ; simple Root, TYI1), 
 jiXaiTT-u), I injure , (j3, BAAB), pinT-o), I hurl , 
 
 2. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a K-mute (k, y, 
 X, simple Characteristic; a a or rr, strengthened 
 Characteristic); e. g. — 
 
 (a) Simple Characteristic : 7rXk-Wj I weave , ay-io, 
 I lead , I form ; 
 
 (J3) Strengthened Characteristic : (ppiatr- w (Att. 
 
196 
 
 THE CHARACTERISTIC. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 1 shudder, {simple Characteristic, k ; 
 simple Root, <I>P 1 K), Taaa-a) (Att. rarr-a>), I 
 arranqe, ( 7 , TAr), Bricrcr-to (Att. (5 r)rr-w), I 
 cough, ( x , BH X). 
 
 3. Verbs whose Characteristic is a T-mute, (r, S, 
 0, simple Characteristic; Z> strengthened Charac¬ 
 teristic); e. g.— 
 
 (a) Simple Characteristic: avvr-o), I complete, 
 aS-w, I sing, 7 rdO-iv, I persuade ; 
 
 (j3 )'Strengthened Characteristic: <ppaZ-w, I de¬ 
 clare, (simple Characteristic, 3; simple Root, 
 4>PAA). 
 
 § 105. Remarks on the Characteristic. 
 
 1 . Some Verbs ending in - <x a w, - r r w, have a T - 
 mute —not a K-mute—as their simple Characteristic; 
 e. £. a p /jl 6 t t to, ( un-A ttic appoZw), I Jit together , h ut. 
 -d(To>;—£ p i a a to, I row, Fut. -{crw;—n a a a a), I 
 sprinkle, Fut. -aao) ;—7r X a < jaw, 1 form , Fut. -aao >; 
 —7r t iff (i to, / pound , Fut. -mw. 
 
 The Verb v a or a- w, / pms together, partakes of 
 modes of formation—Fut. vai-tu, &c., Perf. Mid, 
 or Pass, vivaapai, Verbal-Adj. vaordc- 
 
 2. The following Verbs in -£w, (most of which ex¬ 
 press a. call or sound),have as their simple Characteristic 
 a K-mute (Usually 7 ), not a T-mute—viz. al aZ w, 1 
 groan, Fut. alaZo);—a \ a \ a Z w, 1 shout ;— k o tZw, I 
 squeak, grunt (like a pig);— k p a Z <*>, I scream ;—<c p or 
 Z o), I croak ; — p a a t 1 Z <*>, 1 lash 3 —6 3 a Z<*>, I bite ;— 
 o I pu)Z<*>> 1 lament, Fut. olpwZopai ;—6 X o X v Z <*>> 1 
 howl ;— p v a t cl Z w, I drag about ;—a r aZ (*> and 
 g r a \ aZ (*>, I drip ;—a r e va Z<*>, I groan ;—a r r\- 
 p iZ w, I make firm;—a t tZ <*>, I prick ;—crv p 1 Z <*>, 
 I whistle 3 —a (p a Z (*> (Att. c r^ctrrw), I slay I —a (j> v Z 
 
 I throb ;—t oiZ w, I chirp ;—$ XvZ w, I bubble. 
 
 
§ 106.1 
 
 TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. 
 
 197 
 
 3. The following Verbs in - Z w partake of both 
 modes of formation:— ft aardZcu, / bear , Fut. -daw, 
 &c., Aor Pass. ej3a<Tra\9riv;—v v a t at> w, I nod , 
 sleep , Fut. -daw and -a£u>;— 7 r a i' ^ w, / sport , Fut. 
 vai^ovpai (§ 116, 2) and Tra'i^opat, Aor. tTraiaa, Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass. Triiraiapai. 
 
 4. The three following Verbs in - £ a> have as their 
 
 simple Characteristic 77 : / cZasA, cZany, 
 
 Perf II. Kt-KXayy-a, Fut kA dy%u), Aor. ificAcry^a;— 
 7 r A a ? cu, / cause <0 wander , Fut. 7 rAa 7 £w, &c., Aor. 
 Pass. iTrXayxOriv; — <7 a A 7 r t £ w, I sound a trumpet , 
 Fut. aaXrriy^u>, &C. 
 
 § 106. Formation of the Tenses o/Mute FcrAs. 
 
 1. Mute Verbs form the Fat and the Aor. I. Act. 
 and Mid. with the Tense-characteristic a ,—and the 
 Perf. and Plpf /. Act. with the aspirated endings 
 -a and -uv, when the Characteristic is aP-or a K-muie; 
 e. g. TtTQ~i(pa (=re-Tp7/3-d) from rptj3u), TrlirXtx^ (=7rt- 
 7 rA€K-a) from ttX(ku) ; but with the endings -jca, -Kttr, 
 wAcn the Characteristic is a T-mute. The T-mute, 
 however, is omitted (§ 8 , 3) before k (e. g. nt-rru-ica 
 from TTtWu)); and before p. and r in the Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass, is changed into a ; but this cr is omitted before a 
 of the Personal-endings; e. g. 7 retOw, I persuade , 7 rt- 
 triiapai, -orat; <£pa£w, / declare, Tri^paapai, -arat ;— 
 (II. Pers. 7 T£ 7 rsi-aai, TT£<ppa-<rai). 
 
 2 . The vowels a, t, u in the Verbs which have a 
 T-mute as a Characteristic, are s/ior£ before endings 
 with the Tense-characteristic <r and k (-k a, -keiv); 
 e. g. 0pa£w, (fipaau), tt^pdaa, tt t^paica; 7rAaar<7a>, / form , 
 7rAd<rw; vop/£u>, I think , ivoptaa ; kAu£w, I wash, 
 kXv aw, &c. 
 
 On the euphonic changes wAicA *Ae Ifutes un- 
 
I 
 
 I9S TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. [CHAP. VIIL 
 
 dergo by the addition of the endings beginning with <r, 
 0, y. or r, and before the aspirated endings -a, -eiv, — 
 also on the lengthening of e into u before a in Verbs 
 ending in -ivSco or -Iv0a>, \e. g cnrev^-u), ‘ I make a liba- 
 tionj Fut. (a 7 T£V'S-o - w=) cnrdaw], see § 8. 
 
 Obs. 1. When a P-mute as Characteristic follows p, the p is 
 dropped in the Per/. Mid . or Pass, before endings beginning 
 with (a ;— thus wifAW-u, I send, <xe-wi(A-(Aa.i (instead of wt-vifA'T-fAcu= 
 
 Wt-WifAfA-/ACti), KOLfAWT-CO, I bend, XB-X-Ct/A-fAXl (Instead of X.%-XX/AW-fAXl— 
 
 xe-KOLfA/jL-fAu.!). So also when two y’s stand before /a, one of them is 
 dropped; e. g. atplyyu, I squeeze, «• c<piy-peu (instead of e-ff<ptyy-/A«t) 
 
 Obs. 2. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a T-mute,. do not form, 
 the Aor. II., in the Common Language. 
 
 Obs. 3. Endings beginning with ad drop the a after a Mute, and 
 the Mute is changed into an Aspirate, on account of the 6 follow¬ 
 ing ; e. g. x.iK(Aj^ai (instead of x^dut), iri*\ix l 6xi (instead of 
 wecrXet'dcu). 
 
 Obs. 4. The III. Pers. Pl, Perf. and Plpf., Mid. or Pass., which, 
 in Pure Verbs, properly end in -vrai and respectively, cannot 
 have these endings in Impure Verbs (Mute or Liquid), on account 
 of the accumulation of so many consonants. This Pers., therefore, 
 is usually expressed by a periphrasis, consisting of the Plural of 
 the Perf. Part. Pass, or Mid., and the III. Pers. PI. Pres, and 
 Impf. of sW to.be, [dai(v), sunt, fcav, erant] ; sometimes, however, 
 the v. is dropped r and its place supplied by an a, which is aspirated 
 after a K-or a P-mute, but after a T-mute is unaspirated; e. g.— 
 
 Perf. Pass, or Mid. III. Pers. PI. 
 
 •rpiQ>-u I rub* t i-TPip-pxi <rird(pxTxi (instead of 
 
 Plpf. iTird^xro. 
 
 wXbk-u, I weave, ?rs -wXiy-fAXi wiwPt^xrxi ( — wsTXtxvTUi )» 
 
 V0.7T-01, 1 arrange, ri-Txy-fAxt «Ta^*Va/ ( — rera.yvrui). 
 
 ax.iu<xZ,-u, I prepare, l-axiCxcr-pxi. hrxtutxjxrcu ( — t<rx.dciZvrxi)i 
 
 I separate , 
 
 f p 
 
 
§ 107.] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 
 
 I 
 
 199 
 
 PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 
 
 § 107. a. Verbs whose Characteristic is a P-mute , 
 
 (/3, t r, (j>). 
 
 (a) Simple Characteristic, j3, re, $, (Fut. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 rpif3-(o 
 
 I rub. 
 
 • 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 Perf. I. 
 
 Plpf. I. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. I . 
 
 Ind. Subj. rpifi-u). Imp. rpt/3-f. Inf. 
 
 rpi(3-£iv. Part .rpifi-cuv. 
 
 Ind. z-Tpifi-ov. Opt. Tpi(5-otpi 
 
 Ind. (r'-rpij3-a=) rl-rpl^-a. Silbj. TE-rpi <f)-w. 
 7 mp. ri-TpKp-E. Inf. TE-Tpity-ivai' Part. 
 
 TE-Tpi(p-(VQ- 
 
 Ind. (l-TE-TQl (3-EIV-) i-TE-TpiQ-ElV. Opt. T£- 
 
 Tpl (j)-OlfJlt. 
 
 Ind. (Tplfi-au)—) rptipto. Opt. Tpixpoipi. Inf. 
 
 rp'npEiv. Part, rplipiov. 
 
 Ind. E-rpi^a. Subj. rptyw. Opt. Tpiipaipi. 
 Imp. rpiipov . Inf. Tplipai. Part, rp'opag. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. Tptfi-opai. Subj. rpifi-wpai. Imp. rpifi- 
 ov. Inf. rpifi-Eadai. Part. Tp7(3-o/uEvoc- 
 Ind. E-rp7(3-oprjv . Opt. Tpifi-oi/urjv. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 / 
 
 Ind. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 ( TE-Tpifi-pai 
 =)T£-Tpifl-p.aii 
 TE-Tpnpai, 
 
 TE-Tpiir-rat , 
 TE~Tpip-pE6ov t 
 T£-Tpi(f)-0oVt 
 T£-Tpi<p-QoV, 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 ( T£-Tpl/3-(TO=) 
 
 TE-TpiipO, 
 T£-Tp'l(p-0to , 
 
 TE-Tpup-Oov , 
 T£-rp<0'0lUV, 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 ( T£-Tp7(5-0ai 
 
 =)T£-Tpl<p- 
 
 Oai. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 TE-Tpl/m-pE- 
 
 vog, - rj, -ov. 
 
200 MUTE VERBS. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Perf. 
 ( Conti¬ 
 nued.) 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 re-rpip-peOa, 
 Te-Tpity-Qe, 
 TE-rpip-pevoi 
 eI<t((v) or 
 
 TE-TpiQ-arcu. 
 
 t e-T pnp-0 s, 
 TE-rp{(p-0u)- 
 
 <rav or te- 
 rpi<p-0 wv. 
 
 Subjunc¬ 
 
 tive. 
 
 TE-rpip-pt- 
 VOQ (V. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 l-TE-Tpip- D. l-TE-rpi/i- P. l-Tt-rptp-pe- 
 pr\v, peQov, 0a , 
 
 E-T£-Tpl\pOf i-ri-Tpup- E-TE-Tpnp-Oe , 
 
 Gov, 
 
 E-TE-rpiTT- E-TE-Tp'np- TE-Tpip-pi- 
 
 to , G»jv, voi ijaav. 
 
 Opt. TE-rpip-pivog tlr}V. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 HI. 
 
 Ind. rpixpopai. Opt. Tpi\fjoifit]v. Inf. rpixpea- 
 Qai. Part, rptipofnvoc. 
 
 Ind. t-Tpupaprjv. Subj. rpiipojpat. Opt. rpop- 
 aipijv. Imp. rplxpai. Inf. rpiipaoOai. 
 
 Part, rptipa/uevog, ' 
 
 Ind. re-rpiipopai. Opt. re-rpixpoiprjv. Inf. te- 
 rpbpeaOai. Part, re-rpixpopevog. 
 
 PA SSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 Fut. I. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 II. 
 
 Fut.II. 
 
 Ind. (E-Tp!j3-6r]v=) £-Tp[<p-0rjv. Subj. rpity- 
 Ou). Opt. rpicp-deiriv. Imp. rpfy>-0qn. Inf. 
 Tpi(f>-Orivai. Part. rpiQ-Oeig. 
 
 Ind. Tpi(j>-Ori<jop.ai. Opt. Tpi<p-Qx)aoip.r)v. Inf. 
 
 Tpup-OriaenOai. Part. t pup-9 Y)oop£vog. 
 Ind. l-rpf j3-rjy. Subj. Tp 7j3-w. Opt. rpYjS-eirtv. 
 Imp. rpf(3-rj9i. Inf. rptj3-»}vat. Part. 
 
 Tpifi-t'ig. 
 
 Ind. rp'ifi-riGop.ai. Opt. rpT|3-i]<xo/ju»jv. Inf. 
 Tpifi-r\<JEaQai. Part. Tp'ifi-Yiaopevog. 
 
 Verbal-adjectives: (rpij3-ruc=) rptn-rog, -i\, -ov; 
 
 Tpin-TtoQ, -rin, -reov. 
 
§ 108.] MUTE VERBS. 201 
 
 § 108. (b) Strengthened Characteristic, m in 
 Pres, and Impf (Fut. - xpw ). 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 | MIDDLE. | PASSIVE. 
 
 koit-t-w, I cut . 
 
 . 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf.I. 
 
 Plpf. I. 
 Perf. 
 
 II. 
 Plpf. 
 
 II. 
 Fut. 
 Aor. I. 
 Fut. 
 HI. 
 
 KOTTT-IO 
 t-KOTTT-OV 
 (K£-K07r-a—)Ke-K0<p-a 
 
 i-Kt-KO(p-ilV 
 Kt-KOTT-a 
 
 (Homer) 
 
 I-KC-K07 T-tlV 
 
 ( 
 
 K07T- 
 
 cru)=) Koipto 
 t-KOipa 
 
 t£- 
 
 6-Kt-KO/i/iriV , 
 
 KOTTT-Ofiai 
 e-Koirr-o/urtv 
 K£-KOjU-jUCU, like 
 
 [rp/^ai 
 like i-r£- 
 [rpifj.fir}v 
 Aor. I. 
 
 i-KO(p-0 t]V 
 
 Fut. I. 
 
 KO0-0/)(TO" 
 
 fiai 
 
 Aor. II. 
 
 Koxpofiat 
 
 e-Koipa/uriv 
 
 K£-K(jlpO fiat 
 
 t-KOTT-rjv 
 
 Fut. II. 
 
 K07T-r)(T0jUaf 
 
 Verbal-adjectives: kott-toq , -ri 9 -ov ; KOTr-Teog,-Tea,-Teov 
 
 Inflexion of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 KafATc-T-M, I bend ; (k£k a/i-fiae for Kwa/ifi-fAiit, § 106, 
 Obs. 1). 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 Keicafjifjiai , 
 
 
 KEKa/uifpOai. 
 
 2. 
 
 KtKafiipai , 
 
 IC^Ka/AlpO, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 KeKajjLTTTaif 
 
 KeKa/KpOaf 
 
 Participle. 
 
 D.l. 
 
 KeKafifiedov , 
 
 
 KEKttfAfJLEVOQ, -1 
 
 2. 
 
 KeKa/uKfiQo v. 
 
 KSKa/KpOov , 
 
 -ov. 
 
 3. 
 
 K£JCCfjU^>0Ol>, 
 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 KtKanixeQay 
 
 
 KEKa/ULfAeVOg U). 
 
 2. 
 
 KEKaiU(p9s, 
 
 K£K afxtyQe, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 KeKU/u/Lievoi elrrdv). 
 
 KEKajULcpOujoav or fC£KdjU0uon 
 
 Verbal-adjectives: KafiffTOQ, -tj, -oi>; Ka/uirreog, -Tea, 
 
 -reov. 
 
202 
 
 MUTE VERBS* 
 
 [Chap. VIII, 
 
 LI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Alav, -Zvoi, o, (sevum), a space- 
 of-time, age, lifetime. 
 akiiipcti, I anoint. 
 ttvx-r£svu, I overturn, ruin, de¬ 
 stroy. 
 
 (oloros, -ov, o, life, means-of-living, 
 sustenance, food. 
 
 (owrcro'fov, (from ojZvo’tro;,the deep), 
 from-the-bottom. 
 yv/xvos, -ri, -ov, naked. 
 
 \%-xXu$u, I wipe-out, oblite¬ 
 rate. 
 
 'Eotxpuvwv^xs, -ov, o, Epaminon- 
 das. 
 
 Eugtvfiys, -ov, o, Euripides, 
 ixorroo, I bury. 
 
 €>v(ix7o;, o, Theban. 
 xx’Kvorru, I conceal, 
 xxporru, I bend. 
 
 xocroo-Xunu), 1 leave-behind, de¬ 
 sert. 
 
 xXeorroo, 1 steal. 
 
 xlorroo, I cut, strike, wound; 
 Mid. xoorropui, I beat-myself, 
 hence, xoornorUxi nvx, (to beat- 
 oneself-for any one =) to 
 
 mourn-for any one, Lat. plan* 
 gere aliquem. 
 xfjvru, I hide. 
 
 pixos, (-ios ■—) -ovs, ro, song, me¬ 
 lody. 
 
 pv^ros, -v, -ov, inmost, most • 
 
 retired. 
 
 vxvpx%tx, -xs, fi, sea-fight, 
 mot rforu, I turn-round, over¬ 
 turn. 
 
 ojgi<rfi&vTr,s, -ov, o, ambassador; 
 (pi. oi orfoQas). 
 
 orno-Xiloruj', I forsake, leave, 
 piorru, I throV). 
 hxXxpls, -7vos , Y), Salamis. 
 axXyifos, -x,-ov,.dry, rough, hardy 
 rude. 
 
 e-uv-PuTrco, I bury-together-with, 
 rc/fs, -sus, i), order, rank. 
 r(>i (7>a>, 1 rub. 
 rfoorxiov, -ov, ro, trophy. 
 
 <pxiva, 1 shew, disclose; Mid./ 
 appear. 
 
 $6ovo$, -ov, o, envy. 
 
 <p<hg, -uf>s, o, thief. 
 
 X,op\)u, I dance. 
 
 1. O 7 toliq rrjv brKTroXrjv tytypcupti. 2. Ol TroXtpiot 
 
 Trpiafdtig tig ti)v ttoXiv h rtpipuv. 3. Ot^oe kcu 1 ra Kg* 
 
 Kpvpptva (fraivti fivaabOev 2 . 4. Uav v\fjog tv Ovtirtf 
 
 ytvsi TrtpitTptiptv 3 * * 6 rj %pbvog i) ({)06vog. 5. Tac tg >v 
 
 a7rovSatu)v (j)iXlag uvS’ av 6 7r«c alcov t^aXtiifiettv. 
 
 6. 2o<poicXrjg /uletcl rpv iv 2 aXapivi vavpa\Jav irtpi 
 
 Tponaiov yvpvog aXriXipiulvog 11 bptvatv. 7, Mvp- 
 
 prjKtg yrig \uv\aTOvg 5 olkovq TrpoXtXonroTtg 6 sp\ovrai 
 f3iorov Ktyogpivoi 7 * * * • 8. HoAAdjac opyb dvOpibrnov 
 
 vovv Z^EKaXuiJjEv 3 . 9. T(5 ’E7rajU£n>(oi^Soi» (nopan avvt- 
 
 0a\pe ti )v Svva/uiv ruiv 6i)fiaiwv 6 Katpdg. 10. Tijg 
 aptrijg rov ttXovtov ov SiaptixpdptOa rotg xpri/uaaiv. 
 
 11. ILvpnr&rig tv MaKtSoi >iq TtOanrai. 12. Otog roig 
 dvOpibiroig rb ptXXov KEKaXv(j)kv. 13. O t A aKt^ai/iO- 
 viol tTpcKpriiav tv aaXrjpolg i]0t(jiv. 14. ’ Akovguq 
 
MUTE VERBS. 
 
 203 
 
 § 108.] 
 
 KaXov plXog Ttp([)0tir}Q ay. 15. 'Pf/ga 7 rapa k atpov 
 pirpOlv 8 avtrpeipt 3 iroXXaKig fiiov. 16. Of (pwptg rpuv 
 ra xpripara KtuXocpaaiv 9 . 17. Of TroXtptoi rr/v noXiv 
 
 avartTpotpaaiv 7 ' 18. Of arpaTiwrai Tag ra£e ig KartXi- 
 i rov 1 ®. 
 
 1 even (etiam). 2 from the bottom , i.e. thoroughly. 3 The A or. 
 (as expressing a general proposition) is to be translated by the 
 "Eng. Pres. 4 § 89. 5 Irreg. Superl. of /audios. 6 Perf. Part, of 
 
 vgoXitxu. § 102, 3. 7 (Perf. of %£<xi/u.ki, utor, with Pres. 
 
 signification) =/ am in want of. 8 thrown ou£=uttered. 9 § 102. 4. 
 10 §101, 2. (b). 
 
 (5. What part of the Verb is ? 6. What is the sort of 
 
 Reduplication, which occurs in called ? 16. What is 
 
 the Pres. Ind. of xtxXa<pxtnp ?) 
 
 1. The letter has been written by the boy. 2. Am¬ 
 bassadors were sent 1 by the enemies into the city. 
 3. Wine often discloses what a man has hidden in 
 his heart. 4. With the body of Epaminondas the 
 power of the Thebans was buried 2 . 5. The future 
 has been hidden from men by God. 6. The Lace¬ 
 daemonians reared 3 their (=the) children in rough 
 manners. 7. A beautiful melody delights 1 us. 
 
 8. Much property has been stolen 4 by the thieves. 
 
 9. The enemies destroyed 5 the city. 10. The ranks 
 were deserted by the soldiers. 
 
 1 Aor. 2 Aor. II. 3 § 8, 11. 4 § 102, 4. s Aor. of 
 
 § 102, 2. 
 
204 
 
 MUJE VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. VIII 
 
 § 109. /3. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a K-mule, 
 
 (7> K> x)- 
 
 (a) SIMPLE CHARACTERISTIC, y, *, 
 
 (b) STRENGTHENED CHARACTERISTIC IN THE PRES. AND 
 IMPF., rr (<T3-), MORE RARELY £. 
 
 irXtic-w, I weave, Fut. -£<o. rarrw (ra<T<ru>), I arrange. 
 
 (Root 7rXfic) 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 A or. 
 
 Fut. III. 
 
 TtKIk-U). 
 £-ttXek-ov. 
 (7T£-7rX£K-a=) 
 7r£-7rA£^-a> 
 i-7T£-7rXe\-£ii/. 
 (7r\EK-cno=) 7r\t%u). 
 
 £-7r Xe%a. 
 
 nXeK-o/aai. 
 1-nXsK-ofiriv. 
 (7T£-7tA £tcyuai=) 
 7T£-7rA£y-/ua£. 
 £-7T£-7rA£y-jU?JV. 
 rrA tZyOfxai. 
 
 7T£-7rA£^ojuai. 
 
 
 (Root ray) 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 rarr-w. 
 
 £-rarr-oy. 
 
 (r£-ray-a==) 
 
 TarT-ofiai 
 
 i-raTT-Ofiriv. 
 
 * 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 Fut. III. 
 
 T£-ra\-a. 
 £-T£-Ta\-£LV. 
 (ray-<x<u=) ra^w. 
 
 £-7a£a. 
 
 TE-ray-fiai. 
 £-T£-ray-[xr)v >. 
 ra^Ojuat. 
 £-ra^a/i»)P. 
 
 Tt-TafZ,Ofiai. 
 
 
§ 109 ] 
 
 MUTE VERBS. 
 
 205 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 ?ut. I. 
 Aor. II. 
 ?ut. II. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 (|- 7 rXllC* 0 >]l>=) 
 
 Tr\e\-Or]croiJ.at, 
 
 £- 7 rX«K-TJV. 
 
 7r\aK-ri<T()/uai» 
 
 (t-ray-0riv=) 
 
 i-Ta\-0riv. 
 
 Ta\-0ri(TOnat . 
 l-ray-rjv. 
 Tay~i]<TOfiau 
 
 Verbal-adjectives! 7 tA£kt6c, -tj> -ov; irXeK-riog, -r£a, 
 -rioy; tciictoc; tcikt tog. 
 
 Inflexion of tbe Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 rarrejy I arrange ; acp'iyyu) (§ 106, Obs. 1.), 
 
 I squeeze. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 Ttrayuai , 
 
 'lo(piyiiai , 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 TtraZai, 
 
 eafjnyKatf 
 
 T£TCl£o, 
 
 icrcpiy^ 
 
 3. 
 
 riraKratf 
 
 eacptyKrai , 
 
 T£Ta\6 w* 
 
 ta^iyx^^i* 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 rtrayutOov, 
 
 y/azOov, 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 rtra\uov , 
 
 £<r<l)iy\6ov* 
 
 rira\0 ov,* 
 
 £(T^i7x“ov, 
 
 3. 
 
 rirayQov* 
 
 £<T0£7\floV* 
 
 rzra)(9 cvv* 
 
 iotyiyX^uv* 
 
 P.l. 
 
 reray/utOa, 
 
 zafpiyfJLtfta, 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 rira\0t* 
 
 ZaQiyxOt* 
 
 rtraxOt* 
 
 i<r(fnyxV£ 7 ~ 
 
 3. 
 
 Ttrayfxivoi 
 
 la<piyjiivoi 
 
 r£ra\fla»* 
 
 zacp'iyx® 10 " 
 
 
 eiai(v) or 
 
 tic ti (v). 
 
 <rav* or 
 
 crav 
 
 
 rera\arai . 
 
 
 rtraxO* 
 
 i or t(T(piy m 
 
 1 /I 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 r£ra\0at. 
 
 i(T(f)tyX0 ai * 
 
 
 
 Part. T£ra7jLteyoc- zoepiy^zvog. 
 
 
 * See § 106, Obs. 3. 
 
206 
 
 MUTE VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 
 LII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 'a -a S , fi, offence, fault, 
 sin. 
 
 av-eXmtrroi, -ov, unexpected, 
 iyo^rreu, I dig-up-again, 
 aro Kn^vTTu, I renounce-publicly, 
 disinherit. 
 
 uaOkvua., -a;, fi , iveabteSS. 
 uarsyos, -ov, without-a-roof, 
 houseless. 
 
 afyuv, -ov, senseless, silly, fool¬ 
 ish. 
 
 ha-rirru, I order, arrange, 
 ^‘xfutos, -ov, double-speaking, 
 false. 
 
 iv-ra.x.T0i, -ov, well-ordered, well- 
 rejulated. 
 
 Unoi, -ov, mild. 
 
 6lkyu, I charm, soften, soothe. 
 QifiuaroxXrji, -sovf, 6, Themistocles. 
 xara-urXvrru, / Strike-down, 
 strike-with-terror, amaze, as¬ 
 tound, terrify. 
 
 Xoira-QXkyu, I bum-down. 
 xX'oortpos, -n, -ov, thievish, stolen. 
 xXu-^, -covoi, o, thief. 
 
 (§ 103, Obs. 1), J crn T 
 
 cry-out. 
 
 xiav, very, exceedingly. 
 piru.xxi.rru, I change, exchange. 
 l*vo t , -ov, o, stranger, guest, 
 ooiyu, I stretch-jorth-the-hand ; 
 Mid. (with Gen.), I grasp-at, 
 desire. 
 
 **i«0rixv, -vs, v, (depositum), 
 deposit, pledge. 
 
 va^a.-rrXi’^u, (§ 105, 4), I cause- 
 to-wander, mislead, 
 mvvnvu, I am-poor „ 
 vi£i-iyu, I lead-round, 
 rrxkjcu, I knit, weave, 
 aw-rirru, I order, arrange. 
 a<piyyu, I squeeze. 
 ra.oi.rru, I confuse, disturb r 
 trouble. 
 
 ™?*xv, -vs, v, confusion, disturb¬ 
 ance. 
 
 rirru, I arrange, order, 
 rvpfooi, -ov, o, tomb. 
 
 <f>vXirropxi, (Acc.), I guard- 
 against any one. 
 
 1. IJoXXaKig ijjriog pvQog koi atyoova avSpa WeX^ev- 
 
 2. Mi} Ti>fj.[3ov rSappiv cm avopvfygf 3. At <p 9 Evfov 
 rapaxai TraptTrXayZav k at (JO(j)6v. 4. 'O TrXovrog ttoA- 
 
 XaiciQ Trjpifiyaytv 1 2 * * rig aaOevEiav. 5. espuTTOKXta, rbu 
 Auyivolov, 6 Trarrjp airetcfjpvZs $td rag kv ry vEorgn 
 apapriag. 6., Otbg navra kv ry (pvc ret apiara cWcra- 
 X £y * 7* j^°^ r0l/ Xlipd TTEVYITEVOVCTIV OpE^OV. 
 
 ~ X?W aTa i wpsv* QlXovg. 9. Of tto- 
 
 Xkpioi rig ri)v ttoXiv TTEtpEvybatv- 10. &hov mydv 
 Kpeirrov , ij KEKpayEvai. 5 . II/EAtti^g Tipkov 6 rovg yovtag 
 irpa&iv KaXdjg. 12. Aiav (fnXuyif OEavrov oi>x 'k^Eig^ 
 <j)lXoV. 13. Q TOOTTOg E(Tt\v EVTQKTOg, TOVTOig Kai b 
 
 P*°g vvvTETaKTaL. 14. Of iroXipioi kStuxOnaav. 15. 
 ^ ^ V ave ^ 7ri(TTa Trpa.TTETO. 1 , TToXXd TTETTpaKTai , 
 
 TToXXa OE TTpaxOrjcTETai. 16. Et ttoXejulujv 7 k at tt paypa- 
 
MUTE VERBS. 
 
 207 
 
 § 109 .] 
 
 TWV 7 (^QOVTlUyHQy O fiiOg gov Tapa\9riGtTai. 17. U^v- 
 Xa£o rovg avdpcoirovg, ot y Xcorrav 8i\op.v9ov tyovoiv* 
 18. * Aar tyov tig ohcov Si^at. 19. Owpwv prj 
 icXo7rquTjv avSpwv 7rapa0/jKTjv ’ a/utporspoi icXw7rfc, Kai c 
 St^a/utvog teaX o K\t\l>ag. 20. Ylovov ptra\Xa\9tvTog [ , 
 oi 7 rovoi y\vKtlg. 21. Tl 7roXt£ vtto Ttov TroXtpKvv ica* 
 rtcpXiyrj. 22. OI fiapfiapoi KaraTrXaytvrtg cnrtctivyov. 
 
 ■ § 153, Obs. 3. * Aor. II. of vre^yu. § 89, Obs. ^ 3 The Fut. of 
 
 has the rough breathing. Comp. § 8, 11. 4 sc. Icrrlv. 5 Perf. 
 
 II. of *.p«Z,u> ( ivith Pres, meaning ). 6 The Part, expresses the ad¬ 
 verbial relation of manner. § 176, 1. (d). 7 § 158, 6, I. 8 —being 
 
 •past. Gen. Abs. 
 
 ( 1. What is the Lai. equivalent of *«/? 2. From what Verb 
 does riS»/jt.fjt.Uov come ? 7. What part of the Verb is o^t^ov? 10. 
 What is the quantity of the second syllable of xix^xytvaa ? 12. How 
 could you distinguish the Pres. Part, of <piXsu from the Gen. Plur. 
 of <p'iXos, a friend f 15. What is the Characteristic of n-gurru ? 17. 
 
 What part of the Verb is < te < pvka.%0 ? 18. 21. xars<pxeyn ? 
 
 22. Of what Verb is xa.ra.vka.'yevris the Part. ?) 
 
 1. The foreigners, pursued 1 by the Greeks, fled 
 into the city. 2. Their disposition is well-regulated* 
 who have also their (=the) life well-ordered. 3. 
 The enemies burned-down 2 the city. 4. The barba¬ 
 rians struck the citizens with terror. 3 5. If thou 
 carest-for war and actions, thou wilt disturb thy life. 
 6. Many and splendid deeds have been performed 4 
 by the Greeks. 7. I will guard-against men who 
 have a double-speaking tongue. 8. The women, ter¬ 
 rified 5 by the enemies, cried-out 6 ; 
 
 1 Aor. Part. 2 Aor. 3 Trans. : ‘ struclc-with-terror' by the Aot. 
 of xxTu.nXvi'Trv. * trgarra, ^ Aor. II. Pass. Part. 6 Aor. II. Act.. 
 
208 
 
 mute verbs. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 § 110. y. Verbs ,, whose Characteristic is a T-mute 
 
 (S, r, 0). * 
 
 (a) Simple Characteristic, S, r , 0. (b) Strength- 
 ened Characteristic in the Pres, and Impf l 
 
 (MORE RARELY a a). *’ 
 
 | ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 1 
 
 I Pres. 
 
 I Impf. 
 
 1 Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 I Fut. 
 
 I Aor. I. 
 
 I deceive. 
 
 \ptv8-h). 
 
 e-\ptv$-ov. 
 
 (t-\ptv$-tca=) 
 
 Hev-Ka , (§ 8, 3). 
 
 i-\p£V~K£lV. 
 (lptv8-OU)=) 
 '\pev-<rio, (§ 8, 7). 
 E-\pEv-oa. 
 
 I lie. 
 
 i-iptvS-o/jiiiv. | 
 
 i-ifrtwr-fiai, (§ 8, 5). 1 
 va-finv. 
 
 (\ptvS-<jofiai=) | 
 
 5 ipty-aOjmat, (§ 8, 7). I 
 
 |l 
 
 I Pres. 
 
 I Impf. 
 
 I Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 I Fut. 
 
 I Aor. I. 
 
 | Fut. III. 
 
 I declare. 
 
 <ppa%-(n). 
 €-0pa£-ov. 
 (7T£-0pa3-»ca =) 
 
 Tri-<ppa-Ka , (§ 8, 3). 
 
 e-TTt-(ppa-KEiv. 
 
 (0pa3-<rtu=) 
 
 < ppa-aio, (§ 8, 7). 
 z-(pparoa* 
 
 I consider. | 
 
 <f>paZ-o[xai. 1 
 
 £-0pa£-d/ifjy 
 (7T£-0pa3-juat=) | 
 
 7r£-0pa<T-juat,(§ 8, 5). 1 
 £-7T£-^pa(T-/U»jy. |j 
 
 (0pd8-a , ojuat=) j 
 < <ppa-<ro/uai,(§8,7). 1 
 £-0pa-<xd/urjv. | 
 
 Trt-fbpd-aouat. ! 
 
 | PASSIVE. | 
 
 I Aor. I. 
 
 I ^ 
 
 ] Fut. I. 
 
 (l-\piv^-9rjv=) 
 
 -\pzva-0riv, (§ 8, 3) 
 x^Eva-dhao/jLai. 
 
 (i-(Ppa^-6r]v=) | 
 
 a-<pi.aa-Oriv. f 
 
 < ppaa-bi]oonai . f 
 
 Verbal-adjectives: ( xpevd-riog ) \peva-riog, ~r(a, -t(ov 
 
 | 0pacr-TJoe, -rta, -teov. 1 
 
MUTE VERBS. 
 
 209 
 
 § no.] 
 
 
 Inflexion of Perf. Mid. or 
 
 Pass. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 £l//£U(T-/Lieu (§ 8,5), 
 
 t-xptvo-Oai. 
 
 2 . 
 
 £i//£U-crai (§ 8, 7), 
 
 £\pEV-(TO, 
 
 Participle. 
 
 3. 
 
 zifitva -rat (§ 8,3), 
 
 Ixptv-oQa), 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 tyhva-ptdov (§ 8 , 
 
 5), 
 
 
 l-\ptva-fjLivog , 
 
 - 17 , -OV. 
 
 2 . 
 
 fyev-oOov, 
 
 £\p£v-<rOov, 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 ! 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 txptv-aQov, 
 
 £ 1 f.tv(T-p£0a, 
 
 £<p£V-(jO(i)Vt 
 
 t\p£V(j-fiivog u). 
 
 2 . 
 
 6lfstV-( I0£» 
 
 ixltv-oOe. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 lipeva-pivoi 
 
 t\<j'i(v). 
 
 txptv-oOiooav or Ixpev-aOwv. 
 
 ! 
 
 LIU. VOCABULART. 
 
 o«ra£«, / make-to follow, grant, 
 
 1 err, commit-a - 
 fault, transgress. 
 
 I plunder. 
 
 Acriet, -as, Asia. 
 aShs, again. 
 
 i!\pas, {-ios =) -ovs, to, thirst. 
 a^olkw, -o»raf, o, Draco. 
 
 \yxJj/uof, -ov, to, ew%y, enco¬ 
 mium. 
 
 in, yet , s«iZZ, besides; on 2i, 
 moreover. . 
 
 iv$£ovvw f -is, v, mirth, gladness. 
 i<p*,(iof , -ov, o, a youth, 
 ifcn, note, already. 
 
 | ./ softenj TnuJcc^effciTi^ 
 
 nate. 
 
 utrtrura, afterwards, hereafter. 
 M tf^ibirvSf -ov, o, Mithridates. 
 Sxfios, -ov, o, wealth, happiness, 
 prosperity. 
 
 confer. 
 
 I define, lay-down, ap¬ 
 point. 
 
 travco, / make-to-cease ; xaiu 
 nvtx Titos, I relieve a person 
 from anything; Mid. (with 
 Part.), I cease. 
 
 triiSu, (Acc.), I persuade; Perf. 
 II. (Dat.), xixoiOa, I trust, 
 rely on. 
 
 trXnyri, -is, *>, blow, wound. 
 
 fTyos, (-tos =) • ovs, to, cold. 
 
 <rxChocZ,», I scatter, dissipate. 
 
 irxayi^u, I am-in-want. 
 
 crftpto, I turn. 
 
 cv't-a^fjc'oX.eo, I fit-together, ad¬ 
 just, arrange. 
 
 <p^a%u, I declare, say, utter. 
 
 1. Oavaov fit. Si (fl'Af, irovtov, okiS aaov St ftipi/iyar, 
 orptyov S’ avOte tie iv<t>poovvac. 2. Sirtmowotv* of 
 rote Xpvnamv* ov xpSivrat. 3. Mt6ptOaroe Aa.'av 
 jpiraKtv. 4. Avyioai irp 6 tpyov. 5. Ot vtoc rote 
 
I 
 
 210 MUTE VERBS. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 • ^ - -.V; 
 
 \h>i)TO~c; oXpoi- wiraaav. 6. V) Oioc airavra rrvv{] 0 fxo- 
 Kiv. 7. *H v 3 (TU icokwc Sucacrpc, <*£ (hoc fitrLirtiTa £t- 
 Kaau . 8. Touc awtrovg av Tig Trtiatit ra\iara tv 
 
 Xtyivv 4 . 9. ’Ev Toig ApaKOvrog vv/ioig /u'ia cnracnv 
 wpiGTO rote a/mpTavovcn Z>r\fiia, Oavarog . 10. IlAourtp 
 
 TTtiroidijjg 4 aSiica /mrj 7 rtipd) irottiv. 11. f Y7r*p atavrov 
 Inr) (poaenjg tyKwfua. 12. 01 tCjv 'EWtjvlov t(J>iri[5oi 
 tlOiadrjcyav^ ({itotiv A ifiov rt teal Siipog kcu piyog , Ieti Sc 
 7r\v}yac k at irovovg aWovg. 13. Ei 7roA t/aivv^ (fipov- 
 ntig 1 , 6 (3iog oov Tapa\OficnTat. 14. Oi ’ A0r\vaioi cm 
 QavfiacsQgaovTai. 15. IlAourtp 7roAAot ijSri i/ua\aida - 
 Oi)aav. 
 
 1 § 83. 2 § 161, 3. 3 contracted from la* 4 § 176, 1. 
 
 6 On the Augment, see § 87, 3. 6 158, 6. I. 
 
 ( 2. What hind of Fut. is crvaviouaiv ? 7. What is the derivation 
 of pirewura. ? 8. What hind of Aor. is xuam ? 14. What is the 
 
 Characteristic of ?) 
 
 1. Cares are dissipated 1 by 2 thee. 2. He who does 
 not use his (=the) wealth, will be-in-want. 3. Pros¬ 
 perity is granted 3 to. mortals by the godjs. 4. Every¬ 
 thing is arranged 3 by God. 5. "intelligent men 
 can-be-persuaded 4 quickly. 6. Draco laid-down 1 for 
 all offenders one punishment, death. 7. Wealth 
 had now made all effeminate 5 . 8. We will always 
 admire the Athenians. 9. The Athenians accustomed 
 their (=the) youths to bear all hardships. 10, So¬ 
 crates was admired for 6 his (=the) wisdom. 11. It 
 is not well to trust-to wealth. 12., The melody has 
 dissipated the cares. 
 
 1 Aor. 2 1<t6, with Gen. 3 Perf. (result of a completed action). 
 
 4 Opt. Aor. I. Pass., with oiv. 6 Trans : ‘ had-made-ejfeminute' by 
 the Aor. 6 Wi, with Dat. 
 
§ 111-1 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 211 
 
 B. LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 § 111. Formation of the Tenses . 
 
 1 . Liquid Verbs, i. e. Verbs whose Characteristic 
 is one of the Liquids (X, ju, v, p); form the Fut. Act. 
 and Mid. and the Aor. I. Act. and Mid. without the 
 Tense-characteristic cr,—but the Perf. and Plpf I- Act. 
 with the Tense-characteristic k; e. g.— 
 
 a <p6iX\o> (simple Root 2 $>AA), Fut. Aor. I. Perf. 
 
 t- a<pa,k-x.oL . 
 
 Obs. 1. The Future-endings of Liquid Verbs, viz -fi and -iv/im 
 ({.rising from -sVw, -taop.cn, by dropping the cr, and then contract¬ 
 ing), are inflected like the Pres. Act. and Mid. of contract Verbs 
 in -ta> j (e. g. <pik-d>, (pik-ovfACtt). 
 
 The Fut. III. is wanting in Liquid Verbs. 
 
 2. The Present of this class of Verbs—(except a 
 few whose Root-vowel is I )—is strengthened (§ 100) 5 
 this consists—(1) In Roots in X,in doubling that letter; 
 e. g. <xtf>aA-X-m, [simple Root 2<PAA] (2) In Roots 
 in u in inserting the liquid v after the Characteristic 3 
 e. g. Tt/i-v-w, [simple Root TEM](3) In Roots in v 
 and p, in lengthening the simple Root-vowel, viz.: 1 into ^ 
 v into v (as in all in -tv o>, -wu, -vpto ); e. g. icptvw, 
 auviuo, avpu), [simple Roots KP1N (i), ’AMYN (v), 
 ZYP (w)];—(4) In lengthening the simple Root by 
 inserting an 1 , viz. 1 a into at, £ into st; e. g. <paiv-ti>, 
 KTtiv-w, [simple Root, <J>AN (5), KTEN];— but peVw 
 and vifi-'j) retain the simple Root. 
 
 3. The Root thus strengthened is found only in the 
 Pres, and Impf. [Comp. § 101, 2, (a)]the other 
 Tenses are formed from the simple Root, but the 
 Vowelm the last syllable of the Root is lengthened m 
 
212 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 the A or. I. Act. and Mid. } (t into 7, v into v, a into n, 
 t into ti); e. g. AA-w (simple Root S< 1 >AA), Fut. 
 ocpaX-ufy Aor. II. Pass. IcrfaX-nv, Perf. I. Act. A- 
 Aor. I. Act. e~(t (j) i] X - a , Aor. I. Mid. I - <r (J> 17 A • 
 ounv. The simple Root appears in the second Aorists 
 and in the Fnt.; but as only a few liquid Verbs form 
 the Aor. II. Act. and Mid., the simple Root is not 
 taken, as in Mute Verbs, from the Aor. II., but from 
 the Fut. 
 
 Liquid Verbs with a monosyllabic Root and s as a 
 Root-vowel , have the variable-vowel a (comp. § 102) 
 in the second Aorists, Perf. and Plpf. I. Act., Perf. and 
 Plpf Mid. or Pass., Aor. I. Pass., Fut. I. and 11 . 
 Pass.; also in the Verb.Adj.; —and the variable- 
 vowel o in Perf. and Plpf. II. Act. ; e. g.— 
 
 ffTfXXar, I send , Fut. artX-Z, Perf. I. Act. s-c r x X-xa, Pert 
 Mid. or Pass. t a r xX-(xxi, Aor. I. Pass, (poet.) i-<r r x x-fa*, 
 Aor. II. Pass. r « x-««>, Verb. Ad j. <r v x x-rlos ;—/ 
 destroy<, Fut. Perf. L Act. t<p6 a £-xx, Perf. Mid. or 
 
 Pass. £-<p 6 x g-ftxi, Aor. II. Pass. l-<p d « ^ Verb. Adj. <p 6 x £- 
 v'oiy Perf. II. Act. 'i-<p 6 0 £-x. Roots of more than one syllable 
 do not take the variable-vowel; e. g. xyyixxu, I announce, 
 xyyiXxx, HyyiX/xxi, hyylxft jv. 
 
 4. All Liquid Verbs are divided into four classes, 
 according to the Root-vowel of the Fut. (a, s, 1 , v). 
 Thus:— 
 
 I. Class with « in the Future. 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. /. 
 
 Qxiv-m, I show, 
 
 (pa if-at 
 
 e-<pt)*-x. 
 
 o-q&xx-u, I trip up, 
 Ttx/xaig-v, I bound, 
 
 <r <p c. X-et 
 
 iX-Xm 
 
 r t x /x a g-Z 
 
 * . 
 
 t~<TSX/XVQ<3m 
 
 II. Class with 1 in the Future. 
 
 
 ftiv-a, I remain , 
 rt/x-u, I distribute, 
 
 ft i 9-Z 
 
 i-fiui-x. 
 
 1 1 fx-Z 
 
 t-*il/X-X. 
 
 Te/xv-w, I cut, 
 ayytxX'U, I announce, 
 
 T i fX-Z 
 
 wanting. 
 
 x y y i X-Z 
 
 HyyuX-a. 
 
 ifAUf-u, I desire, 
 
 i ft t (>-Z 
 
 'l(XUf>-X. 
 
 III. Class with * in the Future. 
 
 
 I judge. 
 
 X £ i 9‘Z 
 
 1-x^t l-O, 
 
 tIxx-v, J pluck, 
 
 r'tX-Z 
 
 •-v< X-». 
 
§111] 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 213 
 
 IV. Class with S in the Future. 
 Fat. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 w ■* 
 
 ruo-o), 1 drag. 
 ifAuv-Uy 1 wai 
 
 titbjf-a,. 
 
 ijf&vv-a. 
 
 Obs. 2. The following Verbs in -«/*&» of the first class (<* jn tti® 
 Fut) take S. in the Aor. instead of * :—<V^»a/v« (iV^vava, <V^vav«/), I 
 make-thin ; * £ e$* va ')> I 9am; *oi\aj V o> 
 
 xetkava .<), / hollow-out; Xtvxaivu, 1 whiten; 0 <>yu>m, I enrage ; «- 
 vrx'ivcu, I ripen ;—also all in -£«/v<w, e. g. •n^a.ivu, I finish, fut. trt- 
 e «vai, Aor. Inf. and all in e. g. **<«"«, 1 
 
 fatten , i*-<«va, ir<av«i, (except putUu, I pollute , ptrptxi). 
 
 5. The Perf. I. Act. of Verbs with the Character¬ 
 istic v, should regularly end in - 7 ko; e. g. /Ufday- 
 Ica (from juiafvoi, / pollute), instead of p^lav- K a 
 ( § 8 , 6 ). But this form (with the exception of nl- 
 d>ayila, from <paivw, I shew), is found only in later 
 writers. The best writers avoid it by adopting other 
 forms; e. g. KsgSatvur, I gain , Perf. KtKepSrjica 
 (comp. No. 6 );— fitv-io and Verbs with the Cliaiacter- 
 lstic u, form the Perf. from a Theme in e ; e. g. /xe- 
 uevnica (as if from MENEw); ve/x-w, I divide, Perf 
 vevifjtn™ (as if from NEMEn>). Many also form no 
 Perfect. 
 
 6 . The three following Verbs drop the Character¬ 
 istic v, not only in the Perf. and Plpf. Act., but 
 also in the Perf. and Plpf. Mid. or Pass, and in the 
 
 Aor. I. Pass.:— 
 
 Pres. 
 
 *£/»&>, 1 judge, 
 xXtvat, I bend, 
 *x6vw, 1 wash, 
 
 7 . On the formation of the Perf. Mid. or Pas?, 
 
 observe:— 
 
 (a) When oO follows a Liquid, the <r is dropped 
 (comp. § 106, Obs. 3) ; e, g. tf 77 f\0a< (instead 
 of fijylh-odai), nt<j>hvdai (instead of m<par 
 
214 
 
 LIQUID VERES. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 (b) In Verbs in -aivio and v'vw, v before tbe 
 endings beginning witli p is usually changed 
 into a ; e. g. (fwtv-u), Perf. Mid. or Pass. n£<pa- 
 o-yai, 7Tf-0a-a--jU£0a;—but some Verbs of this 
 kind assimilate the v to the following p, e. g. 
 7 rapoZvvM, 1 excite, Perf. Mid. or Pass. irop^- 
 %vppai, Inf. irapw^vvOai ; ala^vv-w^ I shame , 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. rjrrxvppai, Inf. ya^vvOai, 
 8 . In the Perf. //., (which, however, is found in 
 only a few Verbs), the short Root-vowe) before the 
 ending -« is lengthened , as in the Aor. L Act., [except 
 in Verbs with e in the Put ., which take the variable- 
 vowel o (comp. § 102, 3)] ; e. g. <p a iv-w, Aor. I. 
 lerf. II. 7 T£-<p)]V-a, 
 
 / 
 
 f 
 
 § 112. PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 ayyeXXto, 1 announce . 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. ayytXX-oj. Subj. ayytAAio. Imp. ay - 
 yfAAf. Inf. ayyiXXeiv. Part. ayyiXXwv. 
 Ind. nyyzXX-ov. Opt. ayyeXXoipt. \ 
 
 Perf. I. 
 
 Plpf. I. 
 Prf.Ii; 
 Pipf. 
 II. 
 
 Ind. hyyzX-Ka. Subj. hyyiXKU). Imp. not 
 found. Inf. riyyeXicivai. Part. wyYfAicwc. 
 Ind. hyyiX-KEiv. Opt. tyyiX- K0 ^ 
 
 Ind. e-(J)0op-a , perii , from (bOeip-w, perdo. 
 
 Ind. l-(j)06p-uv. 
 
 ft 
 
§ 112.J LIQUID VERBS. 2 N5 
 
 ACTIVE— Continued. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3. 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 ayytA-w, 
 
 ayyeX-dg , 
 
 ayytA-d, 
 
 ayyzA-droVi 
 
 ayytA-arov, 
 
 dyytX-o vfiev, 
 
 ayytA-are, 
 
 ayyiX-ov(Ti(v). 
 ayyeXdv. Par 
 
 Optative. 
 
 dyytAoifjii or ayyeXoi- 
 
 ayytAoIc — ayytAoi- 
 
 % he, 
 
 ayytAoT — dyytXot- 
 
 t h, 
 
 ayyeAoTrov — ayysAoi- 
 
 [rjrov, 
 
 ayyeXoLTrjv — c^yfArn- 
 
 rjrrjv, 
 
 ayytXotjUtv — ayycXot- 
 
 ayytXotrf — ayyeXoi- 
 
 ayy eXoisv. 
 
 b. ayy^Xaiv, -overa, -ovv. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 II. 
 
 Ind. riyyeiX-a . Subj. ayydAu). Opt. ay- 
 ydXai/uu. Imp. ayyuXov. Inf. ayyu- 
 Aai . Part. ayydXag. 
 
 Ind. riyytA-oV' Subj. ayyiAto. Opt. ayyi- 
 Xoifxi. Imp. ayyzAe. Inf. ayytAdv. 
 Part. ayyeAwv, -ovaa, -dv. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. ayylXX-o/uai. Subj. ayytAAu)/mat. Imp. 
 ayyiXXov. Inf. ayyiXAtoOai. Part, ay- 
 yeXXofievoQ. 
 
 Ind. riyysAA-o/ariv . Opt. dyyeXXoifinv. j 
 
 Perf. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3. 
 
 Indicative. 
 riyytX-fjiai , 
 riyysA-aat, 
 riyytX-Tai , 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 r/yytA-cro, 
 
 rjyyiX-Oio, 
 
 Infinitive. 
 r)yy£A-0ai. 
 Participle. 
 uyyeX-^l- ^ 
 voc- ; 
 
216 LIQUID VERBS. [CHAP. VIII 
 
 MIDDLE — Continued . 
 
 Perf. 
 
 ( Conti¬ 
 nued.) 
 
 D. 1. 
 2 . 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 2 . 
 3. 
 
 1 rjyy eX-/ueOov, 
 rjyyEX-Oov f 
 iiyysX-Oov, 
 riyy lXyu£0a, 
 nyy eX~0e, 
 f)yyEX-/UlEVOl 
 Eiai(y). 
 
 1 
 
 riyyEX-Oov , 
 
 i)yyiX- 6 ( 1 ) 0 , 
 
 yiyyfX-0£, 
 
 riyyEXOwaai 
 
 Subjunc. 
 rjyyEX-ui - | 
 
 voe a>. | 
 
 i/ or riyyiX- 
 6(0 v. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 riy^i\-fXY]v, -go, -to, -jueOov, - 0 ov,- 0 rjv , -/jleOo, 
 -Qe, riyyzXiitvoi fiaav. 1 
 
 Fut. 
 
 S. 1. 
 2 . 
 3. 
 D. 1. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3. 
 
 Indicative. 
 ayyeX-oi )fiai, 
 ayyfX-y, 
 ayy eX-eTtcu, 
 ayyEX-ov/iE- 
 dov , 
 
 ayysX-ETaOov , 
 ayy eX-eigQov, 
 ayy eX-ov/iEOa, 
 dyyfX-fta^f, 
 dyyfX-oDyraf. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 ayyfX-otjUi?v, 
 
 GyyfX-OtO, 
 
 ayyfX-otro, 
 
 dyyfX-otjUf- 
 
 0OV, 
 
 ayyfX-oiaOov, 
 ayyEX-otoOrjv, 
 ayyEX-oi/UE0a, 
 ayyEX-oi(T0E, 
 ayyEX-olvTo . 
 
 Infin. 
 
 ayyfX- 
 
 ElaSai. 
 
 • Part. 
 ayyeX- 
 ovfiEvog. 
 
 Aor.I. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 II. 
 
 Ind. r\yyu\-ajJLr\v. Subj. ayye/X-OJjuai. Opt. 
 ayyu\-aifii]v. Imp. ayyeiX-at . Inf. 
 
 uyyriX-aaOcu. Part. ayytiX-afievog. 
 
 Ind. 7/yycX-djU^v. Subj. ayyiX-tofiai. Opt. 
 a.yyeX-oifxr)v. Imp. ayyfX-ov. Inf. ay- 
 yeX-eaOai. Part. ayyaX-o/uEvog. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 Fut. I. 
 
 Ind. nyytX-QriV' Subj. ayyeX-Oiv. Opt. ay- 
 ytX-Oe'iriv. Imp. ayytX-OriTi. Inf. ayytX- 
 6 rival. Part. ayyzX-Odg . 
 
 Ind. ayyeX-OticrofjLai. Opt. ayyfX-0rjcrof/z?jv. 
 Inf. ayy£X-0)}<7£CT0at. Part. ayyeX-Oif 
 
 GO/ULEVOg . 
 
5 113.1 
 
 LIQUID VERES 217 
 
 
 PASSIVE— Continued. 
 
 Aor.IL 
 
 Ind. ^rylA-ifv. Subj. ayyt\-io. Opt. ay- 
 
 
 ye\-di}v. Imp. ayyeX-r}9i. Inf. ayyz\- 
 l,*ai. Part. ayytX-e'iQ. 
 
 Fut.II. 
 
 Ind. ayytX-riGOfiai, &c., (like Fut. I. Pass.). 
 
 | Verbal-adjective: ayytX-rtog, -rta, -riov. 
 
 § 113. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the 
 Root-vowel of the Future. 
 
 (a), a IN THE FUTURE . 
 
 <t <p a A A-a>, fallo ; (pal v-u), I shew, Mid. I appear. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 cr^>aAA-(u. 
 
 a^oXX-o/iai. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 6 -<r0a AA-ov. 
 
 l-ofpaXX-ogrtv • 
 
 Perf. I. 
 
 t-a(j)aX-Ka. 
 
 t-a^aX-fiai. 
 
 Plpf. I. 
 
 t-atyaX-Ktiv. 
 
 i-a(paX-firiv. 
 
 Perf. II. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 
 Plpf. II. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 ofpaX-H), -etc, 
 
 wanting. ; 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 t-<r<j)T]X-a. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 <f>a iv-to. 
 
 <paiv-o/Liat. j 
 
 Impf. 
 
 €-<paiv-ov. 
 
 l-cpatv-o/uLriv. 
 
 Perf. I. 
 
 (irt-<j)ay-Ka)* 
 
 irt-fpaa-fjiai. 
 
 Plpf. I. 
 
 (z-iTE-ipay-Ktiv). 
 
 i-7T£~(pCKT-fJ,t]V. 
 
 Perf. II. 
 
 7re-(j)rjv-a, 1 appear. 
 
 Plpf. II. 
 
 k-Tre-(j)Y}v~Hv, I appeared. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 
 (jiav-ov/uai. | 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 t-Qrjv-a. 
 
 l-<Pnv-afXi]v. j 
 
 • Xu these Tables, forms of rare occurrence are put in bracket*. 
 
 L 
 
218 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. Yin; 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Fut. I. 
 Aor. II. 
 Fut. II. 
 
 e-otyaX-Oriv. 
 
 <j(pa\-di)aofi(U . 
 E-G<pa\-r}v. 
 G(pa\-{]aofiai. 
 
 i-<pdv-0riv. 
 
 (frav-dhaofuu* 
 
 E-fpav-riv. 
 
 0 dv-rjCFOfiat. 
 
 Verbal-adjectives: a(pa\-rt6g, -ria, -teov; (Jmivteoq. 
 
 Inflexion of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 <paiv-u> , I shew l Zrjpalv-w, I dry; te'iv-(d, I stretch * 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 Trl-Qaa-fiai, 
 
 E-Zopci/JL-Jiat, 
 
 TE-Ta-pai, 
 
 2. 
 
 Tri-tyav-crai, 
 
 t-sr/pai'-txai, 
 
 TE-Ta-craiy j 
 
 3. 
 
 irt-tyav-Tai, 
 
 t-£?ipav-rcu, 
 
 ri-rd-Tai, 
 
 D.l. 
 
 ire-cpda-fuiiOov, 
 
 £-srj^>ajLi-jU£0ov, 
 
 t£-tu-iule9ov, 
 
 2. 
 
 Tri-(pav-0ov, 
 
 E-£r'ipav-9ov, 
 
 TE-ra-a9o v. 
 
 3. 
 
 ir(-(pav-9ov. 
 
 E-iiripav-Oov, 
 
 TE-TCt-oOoV, 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 7rt-(j)d(T-intQa, 
 
 £-s tipafj.-/UE9a, 
 
 TE-ra-pt9 a, 
 
 2. 
 
 7 Tt-tyav-Ot, 
 
 E-tvpav-9E, 
 
 Ti-ra-adf, ! 
 
 3. 
 
 Tn-cpaa-fiivoi 
 
 e-%ti pa fl-pEVQl 
 
 re-ra-vTai. 
 
 
 Eicrf(v). 
 
 Eial(v). 
 
 
 Imp. S .2. 
 
 (Tri-<f>av-Gu)t 
 
 (l-Zripav-ao), 
 
 TE-ra-ao , j 
 
 3. 
 
 Tn-f^av-Oio, 
 
 £-s rjpav-9a) t . 
 
 TE‘Ta-a9(o , | 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 7rt-0av-0oy, 
 
 E-&jpav-9uv, 
 
 TE-ra-a9ov 1 
 
 3. 
 
 7TE-(j)dv-6(jJV, 
 
 E-£ripav-9u)Vy. 
 
 TE-ra-(j9u)V,- f 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 7T i-Qav-Oe, 
 
 E-thpav-de, 
 
 rl-ra-a0£, 
 
 3. 
 
 TTfripav-Oivaav 
 
 E-^r]0av-9u)~ 
 
 te-tci-o9io- 
 
 
 or 
 
 aav or 
 
 <rav or / 
 
 
 7TE-(f>aV-Q(t)V. 
 
 E-tZrtpav-9u)v. 
 
 T£-ra-CT0&iv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 7 TE-(pav-0ai. 
 
 E-&qpav-9ai• 
 
 TS-7a-cr9ai. ; 
 
 Part. 
 
 7TE-(j)aG-UEVOg. 
 
 ErTixipafi-fiEvog. 
 
 TE-Ta-pivog. 
 
 * t tiva> has in the Perf. Act. T£Ta*a, Perf. Mid. or Pass, rlrafiat 
 Aor. I. Pass, ’tv&tn* (as if from TA-«). 
 
5114.] 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 219 
 
 § 114. (b). e nr THE FUTURE. 
 
 '~i jit \p - (Ton. and Poet.), I desire ; <r r £ X \w, 
 
 I send. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 Perf. I. 
 Plpf. I. 
 Perf. II. 
 Plpf. II. 
 Fut. 
 Aor.I. 
 
 i/uefp-u). 
 
 l/UEip-OV. 
 
 'iJUEp-KCl. 
 
 ijuep-K£iv. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 ljuep-w. 
 
 'ifitip-a. 
 
 i/uetp-o/uai. 
 
 t/atip-oiuLriv. 
 
 'Ifitp-fiaL. 
 
 Lp.ip-fJLY\V. 
 
 t — 
 
 1/XEp‘OVfxa i. 
 lfmp-apr\v. 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 Perf. I. 
 Plpf. I. 
 Perf. II. 
 Plpf. II. 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 GTtW-ii). 
 
 e-cfteAA-ov. 
 
 Ie-gtoX-kci. 
 
 E-araX-KEtv. 
 e -(pOop-a (from (pQt 
 l-(j)Q6p-HVy I was r\ 
 a teX-co. 
 
 E-OTEtX-a. 
 
 GTtXX-OfX<U . 
 k-GTzXX-6fir\v. 
 H-GTaX-fiai. 
 l-GTaX-p-qv. 
 fp-oj), 1 am ruined, 
 lined. 
 
 GTtX-OVfiai. 
 
 l-G7£lX-aflY]V. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Fut. I. 
 
 l/jLEp~0r)v. 1 £-<rrdX-0»]V. 
 
 ifizp-diioofiai' 1 GraX-OriGopai. 
 
 Aor. II. e-g raX-?/v. 
 
 Fut. II. GraX-riao/uat. 
 
 Verbal-adjectives: iptp-Tog, -4, -ov; ifisp-riog,-r(a, 
 
 \ -riov ; gtoX-toq ; GTaX-TtQg. 
 
 Obs. The inflexion of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, is like that of 
 
 P 
 
220 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 [Ciiap. VIIL 
 
 § 115. (c). t AND v IN TIIE FUTURE . 
 
 (a) riXX -w, I pluck ; (rvp-io, I drag ; poXvv-to , I defile . 
 
 Pres. 
 
 TtXX-(i). 
 
 ± 
 
 (TVO-(t). 
 
 poXvv-to. 
 
 
 rlXX-opat . 
 
 (Jvp-Ofiai. 
 
 poXvv-opat. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 ri-riX-Ka. 
 
 (Tt-ovo-tca. 
 
 •» 
 
 (pt-pdXvy-Ka). 
 
 
 Tt-TlX'IULai. 
 
 a i-avg-pat. 
 
 pt-poXvo-pat. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 rtX-to. 
 
 avp-io. 
 
 poXvv-io. 
 
 
 TiX-oi/pat. 
 
 crvcNov- 
 
 poXvv-ov 
 
 
 
 fiat. 
 
 pat. 
 
 Aor. I* 
 
 i-TiX-ci* 
 
 e-( Tvp-a. 
 
 t-poXvv-a. 
 
 
 t-rtX-apr]v. 
 
 i-avp-apt]v. 
 
 l-poXvv-apnv. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 l-riX-Oqv. 
 
 t-avg-dtju. 
 
 t~poXvv-0t]v . 
 
 Pass. 
 
 
 
 ^ . 
 
 Fut. I. 
 
 TtX-0)j(TO- 
 
 aug-Otjar o- 
 
 poXvv-Oip 
 
 Pass. 
 
 fiat. 
 
 pat. 
 
 aopai. 
 
 Verbal-adjectives: tiX 
 
 Tog\ TtX-Ttog 
 
 ; (Tito-Tog ; avp- 
 
 
 ring; poXvv-rog ; poXvv-riog. 
 
 Obs. 1 . The inflexion of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. re-n\-/u.<xi, 
 
 trs-rup-ticci, IS 
 
 like that of nyyil.-pou ; that of /.ti-f&oXua-/u.oii like 
 
 that of ‘T‘-<pxir-/xat ; and that of ritr^u/u. /u.xi 
 
 (from a,t<r%0*-w, I 
 
 shame), like that of 
 
 
 (8) kXiv-u >, I bend ; ttXvv-w, I wash, [with v dropped 
 
 (§ HI, 6)]. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 kXiI'-IO. 
 kc-icAT ko. 
 kXiI'-IO. 
 t-icXiv-a. 
 
 icXiv-opat. 
 
 tce-ieXt-pat. 
 
 KXtv-ovpai. 
 
 i-KXtv-apifV. 
 
 Pres, 
 i Perf. 
 iFut. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 7T Xv V~(i>. 
 
 7 Tt-7rXv-Ka. 
 
 ttXvv-io. 
 
 t-irXvv-a. 
 
 TrXvv-opat. I 
 
 Trl-irXv-pat. 
 
 TrXvv-ovpai. ' 
 
 1-irXvv-apriv. 
 
§ 115 .] 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 221 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. 1 
 Fut. I. 
 
 £-1 
 
 k\7-0 1 ] (to/ in i. 
 
 l-TT\v-0r]V. 
 
 nXii-Qi'iaopai. 
 
 Aor. II. £-kXiv -r/v. Fut. II. teXiv-naoiiai. 
 
 Verbal-adjectives: kXi-toq, -rj, - ov ; kXi-tio c, -ria, 
 
 -rlov; irXu-roc; 7 tAu-teoc. 
 
 Obs. 2. The inflexion of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. *S and 
 <t6tXu-/u.o.i is like that of rt-ra-peti, and corresponds with that of 
 pure Verbs. ___ 
 
 LIV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 AyyiWv, I announce. 
 ub-vvctTos, -°v, impossible. 
 
 Afv)*cu, -uv, Athens. ^ 
 
 1 ward-off,\ repel , defend; 
 Mid. 1 ward-offJrom-myself, 
 defend-myself punish, avenge- 
 myself-on any one. 
 itfo-KTuvu, I slay. 
 
 KTo-ereA*u, Jsend, despatch, 
 uadj/uaros, -ov, bodiless, incorpo¬ 
 real. 
 
 av^viiris, -teas, w, increase, 
 yvet, i), land, field. 
 
 (Dat.), I am-discon- 
 tented-vnih, am-displeased- 
 with. 
 
 \x •<$«.**>, 1 shew-forth, disclose, 
 express. 
 
 iI- okIaxu, I run a ship from her 
 * course; hence (metaph.), 1 
 lead any one astray, 
 ini, when, for, since. 
 
 On<nvs, o, Theseus, 
 
 xxlx'^w, I purify, cleanse, clear, 
 xi^xivta, I gain. 
 
 XgtV&J, [ select, judge. 
 xgvTTOf, -vi, -ov, hidden,secret. 
 ftiru-fiotAXu, I alter, change. 
 fAiaivu, I pollute. 
 vcLvny'os, -ov, (naufr&gus), ship¬ 
 wrecked. 
 
 vUn, -ns, *h victory. 
 vobco, I think. 
 
 ^ri^uivu, I dry. 
 
 •Ixrii^U, I pity, 
 orx^xho^us, unexpectedly. 
 
 TTih'iov, -ov, to, a plain, 
 on-rxivea, I ripen, soften, mitigate, 
 vn^-arixxu, I dress, furnish, 
 adorn. 
 
 cwxlvu, 1 shew-by-a-sign, step 
 nify, declare. 
 
 I sow. 
 
 -vivos, h, TroezSn. 
 
 1. Kpti'flf (plXovQ ov paStov. 2. f H aSoXtcrypa iroX* 
 Xovg StfyOetptv. 3. O TrAouroc noXXaKtg iZwKiiXt 
 tqv K£k-7tybt£vov l dg ertpov rjOog. 4 . 0 ayyiXog tm/y- 
 
 y((Xe rr/v vUyv. 5 . O i ttoXi/uoi rr/v x^P« v SityOetgav. 
 (i. Nawijyouc oiicrapov, E7r£i 7 tAouc turtv aSyXog. 7. Hv 
 siTTOKTtlvyg t\dpov (tov, \dpa ptavelg. 8. 27 ripai yvag 
 v Si Otbg aulyciv raftfe. 9 . Ta KpuTTra pi) Utfn'jvyc 
 
222 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. Vin. 
 
 <piXov . 10. 4>u<r iv 7 rovripav ptTaj3aXtiv ov paSiov. 
 
 11. H TToWaKiQ Tovg ptya (f)povovvTag 7rapaSo^wg 
 Ea^rjXev. 12. O l fl tpuai TroXXag vavg tig 'EXXacki 
 aTnaTaXictaavt 13. Otov utv voriaai \aXt ttov, (bpaaai 
 ct aovvarov to yap acrixiparov aiopan ai)p.r\vai , acvva- 
 tov. 14. Tj^v \pv\pv xaXoig voripaai n tpfartiXov. 
 15. f O KriTrog xaXotg poSoig TtOrjXtv 2 . 16. 01 7 roXt - 
 pioi ra TtSia SiatyQspovcriv. 17. O i <TO(j)irrTa\ iic Trig 
 aotpiag 7roXXa tKtpSavav, 18. ’Eicd0»jpE Qriatvg T(l) V 
 KaKOifpyiov Trjv 6Sov tt) v tig ’ AOi'ivag Ik Tpoi^rjvog. 
 19. KaXoy tan ti)v opyrjv irtiravai. 20. Mr) 
 vyg rotg ay aflatg . 
 
 1 its possessor. 2 Perf. with Pres, meaning. 
 
 ( 3. What Tense is \%uxu\i ? 6. What Mood is olxru%o* ? 7. Why 
 is ftictviTs perispomenon ? 8. What part of the Verb is 
 
 9. £*<p«y>)f? 10. fjt.tra.fiaXuv’i Why has it the accent on the ulti¬ 
 mate? 11. What is the Pres. Ind. form of t<r$n\i »? 12. Of «<*■«- 
 
 rrtzXxurct* ? 17. 19. Account for the first a in ix£$avuv and Ttvavui.) 
 
 1. The road to Athens from Troezen was cleared 
 of villains by 1 Theseus, 2. By the Persians many 
 ships had been sent against Greece. 3. Already 
 have many haughty persons been-made-to-fall 2 by 
 fortune. 4. By foolish-talking many have already 
 been ruined. 5. The victory was announced 3 by the 
 messengers. 6. The country was laid-waste 3 by the 
 enemies. 7. The good man will pity the poor. 
 
 8 . The good will select the good as friends 4 . 9. Thou 
 hast gained much 5 from wisdom. 10. A friend will 
 not disclose the secrets of a friend. 11. The citi¬ 
 zens sowed 3 the fields, but the enemies laid them ^ 
 waste 3 . 12. Wickedness will soon 6 show-itself. 
 13. The fields will soon 6 be laid-waste 7 by the enemies. 
 
 with Gen. 2 Aor. II. Pass, of <r<p£.\\u. 3 Aor. 4 Aoc. 
 
 6 1 roXka. 6 ra^a. 7 Put. II. Pass. 
 
§ 115 .] 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 223 
 
 t 
 
 IV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 'APXyirfis, -ov, i, wrestler, 
 afyo, I raise, lift. 
 
 *i<r%vva>, I shame; Mid. (with 
 Aor. Pass.), I am-ashamed. 
 i* 0 -<pa.'nu, ] shew ; Mid. I ex¬ 
 press, declare. 
 
 (sctajcodva), I bewitch. 
 iia-tr<ru^u, (dissemino), I scatter, 
 spread. 
 
 ifAKTuoa, (Dat.), I spit-on. 
 it-rixxa/, or iVTiXXof^ai, I enjoin, 
 command, direct. 
 
 T.ufZoix, -as, n, Euboea. 
 r,Trat., -ns, n, defeat, 
 xaiv'os, -n, -ov, common, public, 
 general. 
 
 Y.f'truv, -uvos, n, Crotdn, (a city 
 in Magna Gracia). 
 p.ctx£xv, (sc. 0 %'ov), a-long-way, far 
 (Adv.). 
 
 Viiiuvn, —ns, h, MethonS, (a town 
 .in Macedonia). 
 
 M/Xay, -uvos, o, Milo. 
 ifjuXiu), (Dat.), 1 associate-with , 
 have-intercmirse-with. 
 
 ogottris, -teas, $ 1 , vision, Sight, 
 vv-wart, never. 
 
 va.ihio't, -ov, r<5, (diminutive of 
 orals), little-child. 
 ora^a-Ttiveo, I stretch-out, extend, 
 ■va^uva), 1 incite, inspirit, 
 ort^aivoo, I accomplish. 
 orXnrru, I strike, wound. 
 vroXiogxia, -cos, h, Siege. 
 corovbaX^o), I am-in-earnest, work- 
 hard, am-active. 
 crrahiov, -ov, to, ( 1 ) a stade (125 
 Roman paces = 600 Greek 
 feet); (2) a race-course. 
 
 Tavgog, -ov, J, bull. 
 
 ra%a, speedily, soon. 
 tsXos, (~tos=) -ovg, to, end. 
 
 Tiffin, -ns, n, nurse. 
 
 Td\tvfjca, -aTos, to, arrow. 
 QiXitwos, -ov, o, Philip, 
 us, that, in-order-that. It takes 
 the Subj. after principal 
 Tenses, the Opt. after histori¬ 
 cal Tenses. 
 
 .1. 0 1 OTpanunai inro tov arparrjyov tig rrjv pax r l v 
 7rap(*)Z,vv9n<jav> 2. <J>fAt7T7roc rrj TroXiopKiq rrjg Mt- 
 Oiovrjg tig tov bspSaXpov 77 X 197 tig ro^eujuart BitspOapi} 
 rrjv opaaiv 1 . 3. Stxpi'ac 6 Kap7rbg ovttote (pOaprjotrai. 
 4. AlcrxvvOtirjv av, ti (pavtiriv paXXov (ppovTt^ttv rrjg 
 t/uavrov So^rjg 2 , rj rrjg KOivrig (rcjrrjplag 2 . 5. MlXiov, b 
 Kporainoc aOXrjrrjc? ravpov apaptvog ztpEpt Bia tov 
 trraSiov ptaov. 6 . Etc tt)v ttoXiv SttinrapTo o X6yog 
 rove TroXzfJiLOvg viKpOrfvai. 7. Ot 7 roXirai to vg itoXe- 
 piovg irtpX Trig rjTTric 3 ajuvvovvTcti. S. Et (nrovSa^tTt , 
 Travra Ta\a TTEpavOriasTCU. 9. Evfioia /uaicpav 7 rapaTt- 
 t arm*. 10. Kaica spya tig rzXog 5 £^£0avrj 6 . 11. O 
 
 OTpaTriyog roig crTparuoTaig evzteiXcito etti rovg 7 roXt- 
 filovg opjir\(jai. 12. At nOrjvat e/jltttvovoi roig iratBiotg, 
 ujg pi) f3a<jKavO(b<nV' 13. Ot ttoXzuioi BiEOTraptfcav. 
 
22 £ PECULIARITIES IN FORMATION. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 14. ’ OXofpvpai rovg ntviirag. 15. 'O KpirrjQ Trjv yvw- 
 fit]v anttyhvaro. 16. 'AyuOolg avQpwnoig opiXiov jia - 
 
 Ator’ ay tvippavQdrig. 
 
 
 1 = lost the sight of it. 3 § 158, 6. I. 3 for the defeat. 4 Terf. 
 Mid. or Pass, of tx^xtuvoi. b at last. fi The A or as expressing a 
 general proposition, is to be translated by the Pres. • 
 
 1. The general incited 1 the soldiers to the battle. 
 
 2. Battles will never destroy the fruit of wisdom. 
 
 3. The enemies have spread the report that our 
 army 2 has been conquered. 4. The citizens re- 
 venged-themselves-on 1 the enemies 3 for 4 the defeat. ; 
 5. If ye are-in-eamest, ye will accomplish everything 
 speedily. 6. The enemies being-scattered appeared* 
 again. 7. Associating-with good men, thou wilt be 
 much delighted. 8. He will never appear a good 
 citizen, who-cares 6 more for his own glory than for 
 the general safety. 9. If-thou-hast-pitied 7 the unfor¬ 
 tunate, thou also wilt be pitied in-misfortune 8 . 
 
 10. All the citizens were-delighted-at 1 the victory. 
 
 11. The city has been destroyed by the enemies. 
 
 3 Aor. 2 Ace. with Inf. 3 Aec. 4 <*■££*, with Gen. 5 Plpf. IL 
 6 Part. 7 Aor. Mid. Part. 8 =*being unfortunate. 
 
 §116. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of certain 
 Verbs , both Pure and Impure. 
 
 1. The Future of very many Active Verbs is of 
 the Middle form; e. g. atcovio, I hear , Fut. a k o v a 
 pat, Aor. riKOvaa ; arrayrdw, / meet , Fut. air a v r //» 
 copai, Aor. cnrrivTriaa ; anoXavio, I enjoy , Fut. 
 an oX dv a o fiat, Aor. aniXavara, &C. (ComrDk 
 § 144, c). 
 
 2. The following Verbs have certain peculiarities :—■ 
 
 maU») and kXuiw have -av in the Fut., A or. and Perf.—~ 
 
PECULIARITIES IN FORMATION. 
 
 225 
 
 § 11G.J 
 
 Vi'(0, ir\lu) and tti ew have -tv in the Fut., A or. and Perf., 
 and Otw, in the Fut. and A or. (Perf. being wanting)— 
 All, except Kaico, piw and ytw, have a Fut. form in 
 -ooupai (Doric Future) besides the common form in 
 
 -avfiaL — 
 
 * a !a>, Att. (without contraction), I burn , Fut. xxvcu ; 
 Aor. Ua.u<ra., Perf. xUavxx ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. xUavpca; 
 Aor. Pass. ; Fut. Pass xuvfnvopxt Verbal-adjectives, 
 
 xavartos, xccvrros, xauros. 
 
 xXulu, Att. x\ku (without contraction), I weep, Fut .xXxUopxi 
 and x7.a.vcrovfji<ti j Aor. txXxvirx j Perf. xsxXxvpxi and xtxXotvpp.u .1 j 
 Verbal-adjectives, xXccvcrreos, xXotvrros, xXuutos. 
 ftu, I run , Fut. 6ivaop.xi or fovirovpou. 
 
 y e 0), I swim, ]'ut. yf ucofJLO.1 or Viuaovput ; Aor. iviuva. ; Perf. vfviv»x. 
 v X e u, 1 sail, Fut. •rXtvc’Ofje.tx-i , usually ‘ 7 rXiuaovy-a-i Aor. £ vXivcct ; 
 Perf. n'iirXivxa. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. crs^Aa «rpxt; Aor. Pass. 
 iirXiufftvv ; Verbal-adjeetive, TXivtrreos. 
 
 •srv’iu, I blow, breathe, Fut. ‘7rvivtrop.au or <rvs va-ovpxi ; Aor. iarvivtrx\ 
 Perf. veTvivxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. orixvit/orpai ; Aor. Pass. 
 iarvtta-fnv. , , 
 
 f l u, I flovj, Fut. puri<rofJi.eti ; Aor. Yppvxv; Perf. S ppunxa.. 
 
 % eu, I your out, Fut. %iu; Aor. 1'^ta ; Perf. xt%vxa .; Fut. Mid. 
 X*opou ; Aor. Mid. s^a^nv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Kitfpctt; Aor. 
 Pass, ; Fut. Pass, 
 
 Qevyu, 1 Jiee, Fut. tptvloZpxi and (pivtopw. 
 
 w a iZ,u, l sporty Fut. vrai^oifica and valZo/xat. (Comp. § 105, 3). 
 -xivru, IJaJl (Root I1ET), Fut. aritroupai. See § 123. 
 
 3. The following pure Verbs, and impure ones 
 which are analogous to pure Verbs by assuming t as 
 a Characteristic, form the Perf. Subj. and PIpf Opt. 
 Mid . or Pass, without the aid oj an auxiliary Verb :—- 
 
 x r i - e ft at, I obtain, Perf. xixrvpxt, I possess, Subj. * £ * TU - 
 fix I, - n, Plpf . Utxrrtfiv)v, I possessed, Opt. x sxr 
 
 p. t p. v \ a x u (MNAO), / ’ remind, Perf. Mid. or Pass, piprnpx,, 
 (memini), / remember , Subj. p £ p » u p « <, - y, -Hrai; Plpf. 
 Opt- ptpvtiptiv, -rio, - p ro or pipvupw, - u o, - u r #. 
 
 See § 122, 12. 
 
 , a* u, I call, Ferf. xUxvpat, I am named , Plpf. \xtzkxpvt, 
 Opt. «i * x tip *j y, * j «, - p T •• 
 
226 
 
 PECULIARITIES IN FORMATION. [ChAP. VIII. 
 
 LYI. VOCABULARY, 
 
 Apa, al-the-same- time, together * 
 with. 
 
 ivatfraZw, I seize, snatch-up. 
 uufltov, (Adv.), to-morrow. 
 Az'iZuXos, -ov, i, Dcedalus. 
 
 \z-vea>, (en&to), I swim-out. 
 i« ‘rX.iu, I sail out. 
 
 (with Dat., or us and 
 Acc.), Ifall-into. 
 
 \vatvr!os, -a, -ov, opposite, against, 
 contrary-to. 
 
 byeofiou, (1) I lead ; (2) I Hank, 
 consider. 
 
 ‘'izagos, -ov, o, Icarus, 
 x (trn.-Ka.ici), I bum-down. 
 xyfis, -ov, o, wax. 
 xXctiu, I weep, lament, deplore. 
 x'oXoros, -ov, o, (sinus), bosom, 
 gulf 
 
 Koiax/os, -a, -ov, Criscean. 
 
 Avila, -as, *i, Lydia. 
 
 vvv, (nunc), now. 
 oorXov, -ov, to, xoeapon ; Pl. er\* f 
 arms. . 
 
 fl-f "Kayos, (-tos =)-ovs, to, sea. 
 Wifppem, Ifow-round,fall-off. 
 vims, -tas, v, belief, trust, con¬ 
 fidence. 
 
 trvloj. I breathe, blow. 
 
 trnfov, -ov, to, wing. 
 
 Hgius, -i cm, ul, Sardis. 
 orT^a-Tii, -as, -h, army, expedition, 
 vvy^eu, (confundo), I pour-to¬ 
 gether, confuse, disturb. 
 fftyaT^a, -as, 97, ball. 
 t'/ixu, I melt anything; Mid. 
 (with Aor. II. and Fut. II. 
 Pass.), I melt, (intrans.). 
 Tt/xufia, -as, v, punishment. 
 x6u>v, %0ovos, v, earth, ground, 
 soil. 
 
 1 . f H arpana avptov ekttAev (TEtcu (ekttX tv (rural). 2 . 
 
 Avtpog Bo ppag tvavriog rrj arpanct 1 sttvevgev, 3. 
 'Ev rr? vavpa\ia rrj lv koXttm K piaaty oi nt\o7rovvi'r 
 cnot avSpag tujv AOrjvaioov cnrtKTtivav , 6<xot pp e^evev- 
 crav avTiov 2 . 4. O rav oi TroXtpiot Trj itoAei 1 ttX r\aia- 
 (toktiv 3 , ol (TTpanioTat avapTraaavTtg ra ottX a (hvaovrai 
 irpog rag TrvXag. 5. IloAAoTc^ k tit aotyolg avSoacn* ke- 
 icAavarat Tav9pu)7Ttva, ripoopiav pyovptvoig tlvat tov 
 fitov. 6 . T (g ovtc av kXuvgeie too (pi'Aov arvXfi) 7 . Oi 
 7roA iTat riXmaav Tovg iroAtpiovg (ptv^tiaQaL. 8. Oi 
 7raiStg acpaipav irai^ovvTai. 9. EcoKparrjg TroXXaKtg 
 ETTaiotv apa (tttoi >$aC,(ov. 10 . vvv rrjv tti- 
 
 otiv o Kail ppag (3iog 5 . 11. Oi noXipioi Tag toi v EA- 
 Xpvwv Ta^tig 12 . Of vopoi Sia tov TroXtpov 
 
 avyKEXyptvoL Eiaiv. 13. I«capoc, 6 tov AaiSaXou viog, 
 ruKtvrog tov ktjoov k at tiov iTTtpd)v TrtpippvtvTiov, tig 
 to 7TtXayog EvtirnTTEv. 14. Of "rroAtpioi ttjv ttoAiv ku- 
 rtKavcrav. 15. Ai tv Avdi'ci SapStig v 7 ro tcov 'EAArjvujv 
 KaTtKavOrjaav. 
 
ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 227 
 
 § 117.] 
 
 * § 161, 2. (a). * pi) — Kvrtuv, as many of them (is did not, &c. 
 
 * Aor. Subj. (with orav)— Lat . Fut. exactum. 4 Gat., instead of 
 iro with Gen. 5 = our age. 
 
 (1. What name is given to such a Fut. as ixrXsvauroti ? 2. Why 
 is BoppZf perispomenon f 3. What is the Pres. Ind. form of %£»$»• 
 erav'i 4 . Of tUvirovrxi ? 5 . Of xixXa.wra.i ? 10. Of avyxep^vxt '! 11. 
 
 What Tense is rwe% ?a» ? 13. Wliat is the Syntax of i-uxsvros roZ 
 
 \ni>oZ ? What Participle is vipppvivruv ? Account for the double g.) 
 
 1. The army sailed-away 1 . 2. The north wind will 
 blow contrary-to the expedition. 3. The soldiers 
 expected to swim 2 through the river. 4. The sol¬ 
 diers were about 3 to run 2 to the gates. 5. You will 
 deplore the unfortunate. 6. The enemies will flee. 
 7. The children were-playing-at 1 ball. 8. Associat- 
 ing-with children, thou wilt play. 9. The enemies 
 will confuse the ranks of the soldiers. 10. Boy, 
 pour 1 the water 4 on 8 the ground! 11. The wax will 
 melt, and the wings will fall-off. 12. The city has 
 been burnt-down by the enemies. 13. The citizens 
 thought that 6 the enemies would burn-down the city. 
 
 4 Aor. 3 Fut. Inf. 3 /xeXXu. 4 § 47, 10. 6 n’f. 6 on. 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 §117 Syncope and Metathesis. 
 
 4 , * , * » 
 
 l*In certain forms some few Verbs omit the RootV 
 vowel, when it stands between two consonants. This 
 omission of the vowel is called Syncope. Tdius:— 
 
 \ 
 
 f 
 
 I awaken, Aor. (regular) Hyu^a.; Perf. I. lyriys^a,, I have 
 awakened; Perf. II. iygyyoga, 1 am awake; Plpf. II. 
 i y e ri y 0 p I * V, I toas aiuake ; Aor. Mid. rj y j o p. n », I awoke ; — 
 •TIT Oftou, 1 fly , Fut. * T r, <r 0 p a. i ; Aor. irrlptiv, *ri a 6 cti. 
 
 2. Metathesis is the transposition of a Vowel and a 
 iAprid. Thus:— 
 
ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 228 
 
 [Chap. VTIL* 
 
 fixxXXu, I throw, Fat. /SaX<w; Aor. e/3 aXov ; (BAA-) Perf. 
 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. Aor. Pass, i j3x^»»; Fat. 
 
 Pass. jSX » 6 f) ff a fJt. OL I \ Fut. III. fit fi X * <r oft at. 
 
 2ay.a,tfa>, I tame, Fut. 'hayaaot ; Aor. 'tbayaffa [§ 98, (a)] ; (AMA- 
 Perf. f*7i x x ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 3 i 2 y vy « i ; Aor. I. 
 Pass, t S y 6 n *; Aor. II. Pass. thaynv. 
 xuXtu, I call, Perf. * i x X * » a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. xixXny a i, 
 (see § 116, 3); Fut. III. xixX^aoyat, Aor. Pass, i x x * 6 « ». 
 xa.fjt.va] (laboro), I exert myself, am weary, toil, Perf. x e x y n x a. 
 exeXXa], trxiXico, I dry , Perf. t a x X n x a ; Fut. trxXytroyai or 
 axtXovyai. 
 
 Ttyvco, I cut, divide, ravage, Perf. riryvixa; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass. rsryvyat', Aor. Pass, 'tvy^ 6\ Fut. III. 7 * 7 A* ’?* 
 
 c o y at. 
 
 § 118. Verbs in -o> with the Root of the Present 
 
 strengthened. 
 
 It has been already seen (§ 101) that the Root cf 
 the Present of many Verbs is strengthened ; but this 
 strengthening remains only in the Pres, and Impf 
 Besides the modes of strengthening mentioned in 
 §§.101,104, 111,—viz. by inserting a consonant,and 
 by lengthening the Root-vowel,—there are others 
 also, which will be specified in the following list. 
 
 Obs. All the forms assumed merely for the purpose of construct* » 
 
 ing the Tenses in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 101, 3)_The 
 
 abbreviation Mid., denotes that the Verb forms the Fut. and Aor. 1 
 Middle— D.M. (i. e. Deponent Mid.) and D. P. (Deponent Pass., 
 denote that the Verb wants the Active form ; such a Verb is called 
 Deponent Middle, when its Aorist has a Middle form, and De¬ 
 ponent Passive, when its Aorist has a Passive form_The yi in 
 
 parenthesis indicates that the form standing before it follows the 
 analogy of Verbs in -yt, which will be considered hereafter. See 
 § 142. 
 
§ 119.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 229 
 
 § 119. 1. Verbs , whose simple Root is strengthened, in 
 the Pres, and Impf., by inserting v before the ending. 
 
 Preliminary Obs. B «/»» has the Poot-vowel « lengthened int i 
 tu ; a into aw J Ttvu, i into t. 
 
 1. Ba’tvw, I walk, go, (BA-) Fut. [dtjrrngai ; Per'. 
 BlBr,*a; Aor. II. l/3»v ( M «, § 142); Pass in its Com- 
 pounds, e. g. it apafjatvofxai, Perf. 7 rapaptfjapcu , Aor. 
 
 7rapel3a6r]v. , . ^ 
 
 2. IXavvw, I c?r«ie, (EAA-) Fut. tXaiTM, Att. eaw, 
 
 -d c , -d, Inf., IXav (§ 83); Aor. i’j\d<xa; PerF IXi'/Xaica; 
 Perf Mid. or Pass. tXi/Xajuai r Inf. eXriXaauai ; Aor. 
 Pass! [On a in the Tense-formation, see 
 
 § 98, (a)].- Mid . T . 
 
 3. ttivw, I drink , Fut. iriofiai; Aor. ethov, Int. 
 
 7 n£(v, Part. 7 rtwi^, Imper. 7 tT 0 i (,ui, § 142) [Poet. 7 m] ; 
 (no-) Perf. TTETrwKCL ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7 reiropcu; 
 
 Aor. Pass. broOnv. t _ 
 
 4. r/vw, / atone, pay, Fut. r< <rw; Aor. trioa; 1 err. 
 
 Act. rkiKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rbiagai ; Aor. Pass. 
 hlaOnv (§ 95); Mid. rfvopai, / avenge myself, punish, 
 Ticrouai, £Ti<jafiir)v. 
 
 5 (bOavio, I anticipate , Fut. (pOnaogat, (more rarely 
 4>0a<7(o); Aor. I. fyflaaa; Aor. II. hpOqv and ifOapnv 
 § 142); Perf. tfpOana. 
 
 To this class also belongs one Verb, whose simple 
 Root ends in a consonant :—■ 
 
 Sd«cvw, 1 bite , Fut. §T)goju<u; Aor. e<W ov; Perf. 
 Act. SiSr)\a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. S&riypar, Aor. Pass. 
 
m 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. [CHAP. TITT. 
 
 § 120 IT. Verbs, whose simple Root is strengthened, 
 in the Pres, and Imp/., by inserting the Syllable -vt 
 
 before the ending. 
 
 « 
 
 1. /3v-vi-b>, I stop up, fill up, Fut (3v(t(o; Aor. 
 (fivaa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. BeBvauat.; Aor, Pass. 
 ifivoQyv (§ 95). 
 
 2. a^iK-vi-opai, I come , Fut. cupfeoyar, Aor. h<fiK- 
 onnv. Inf. afiiKlaQaL) Perf. atpiyuai, Inf. hcblydai: 
 
 Plpf. a^ly/urjv, a^T^o, &C. 
 
 3. vtt uyx-vi-ofiai, I promise, Aor. dnr£<rx~oyr}v, Imp. 
 
 vjroa^ov ; (but Fut. uttoct^cto^cu); Perf. bniayrtfiai. 
 So a^nriaygdopai or ayni^o/naiy 1 put on, wear , (from 
 hnTri\io or a/i7Tt(T^f.*, / surround, Fut. Aor. 
 
 V/iTTiaxov, aymaxtir).; Fut. ap^oyar, Aor. ^Trar- 
 X <) l Lir i v mid r]y^^<y\6/uriv (§ 91, 1). 
 
 LVII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 a kpos, -a, -av, highest , at-the-top; 
 to clx^ov, top, point, summit, 
 once. 
 
 anXavvn, I drive-out, debar, 
 u to- rivco, I atone, pay ; Mid. 1 
 punish, (wenge-myself 
 ye (enclitic), at-least. (It is a 
 strengthening particle, and 
 can never commence a sen¬ 
 tence). 
 
 ‘x-[halved, (evado) (1) I walk-out, 
 advance; (2) 1 turn out , be¬ 
 come. 
 
 U -Tt vco, 1 drinlc-up. 
 i%-iXavvcd, I drive-out, banish , 
 expel. [nate. 
 
 ii}aiju.ov(Jw)eo, / am-liappy, Jortu- 
 ifrev'-opai, (Gen.), I come-on,ar- 
 rive-at, attain-to, reach. 
 
 1. Tote (TTpaTubratg iv 
 
 v v v £ [3 £ (3 h k £ i. 2, 1 
 
 l panov, -ou, ro, outer-garment, 
 mantle; PI. clothes. 
 
 A vxov^yos, -ou, o, Lycurgus. 
 pdvcd, (from (joiOv, unmixed-wine), 
 I am-drunk. 
 
 N epta, -as, it, Nemea. 
 v»aa, - aros , ro, yam. 
 ouroi, certainly-not re>l (enclitio) 
 is a strengthening particle. 
 oroXurlxua, -as, h, great-expense, 
 extravagance, costly-living. 
 
 p-.oraXov, -ou, ro, club, 
 aufajhaivu, I go-with; ffupfhaivu, 
 it happens, results, 
 cufarivid, I drink-with. 
 raXagos, -ou, o, little basket. 
 
 (polled, I wear , carry. 
 
 rf} arpariq 7roXXa kok a 
 otyolg 1 o/aiXiov icat avrbg 
 
ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 231 
 
 > 
 
 1 
 
 § 120.] 
 
 I t k (3 r} a rj 2 (70(p0Q. 3. Aufcoupyoe TroXvreXtiav t £ rj- 
 
 X a it t Trig SnapTriQ. 4. Ilfpdwu ovdeig a tt tXpX a t a i 3 
 y| vopip Tipiov 4 kcu ap\d)v A . 5. floXXoi a v pir i 6 v t t g 
 !! ana^ ytyvoinai (jtlXot. 6. 'O ptQvuov SovXog tan rou 
 j 7 T E 7 T (l) K‘i v a t 5 . 7 . OvK E K TT l O fL d l TOV OIVOV. 
 
 9 8. O olvog vi to tiov (TTparuvrCov e % t tt 6 0 rj. 9. Toi)^ 
 If KaKovpyovg oi Otol cnroTicraiv to. 10. O? ttoXItcu 
 I rovg TroXtp'iovg EcpOciaav tig rr)v 7 ruXiv (pvyovrtg 6 . 
 111. Kvcov 7 S % e t a i tov $ a k 6 v t a. 12. O Xaywg 
 l viro tov Kwog E^r]\0r). 13. Owe av pp k a p iv v 8 
 
 |J tvSaipovoirig. 14. Ot kek pr\ kot eg orpartMTat avt~ 
 |7 ravoavro, 15. ’ Attikyi vno tlov rUpowi; ETprjOri 9 - 
 I 16. f O HpaieArjc to poTraXov, o itpopti, avrog ETtptv 
 ] Ik Ntptag. 17. 'O TaXapog vi'iparog 10 ft e (3 v a r a i. 
 I 18. O i TTptofitig tig rrjv ttoXiv a (p i k o v t o. 19. Oi>r6i 
 I y tcpi^ti twv axpon' 11 avtv novov. 20. 'O (piXog 
 \virt<T\ET6 poi a (p i t a 0 a i. 21. At yvvaiKEg 
 I i\ p it t a \ o v r o KuXa [puna. 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (a). 9 unit become. 3 § 89. 4 § 157. b =of drinking. 
 The Inf. is equivalent to a Verbal Noun. 6 =m their flight 
 reached the city sooner than the enemies. <p6<xvu (7 anticipate) takes 
 the Acc. of the person who is anticipated, and the Part, of the 
 Verb which expresses that wherein he is anticipated. It may 
 generally be translated by the Adv. 1 before ’ or ‘ sooner tlian\ and 
 I the Pari, by the finite Verb. 7 See §47, 6. 8 not working, i. e. 
 
 l! unless you work. 9 was ravaged. 10 § 158, 5. (a). 1 §158, 3. (b). 
 
 (.3. Derivation of voXvAxua. ? Pres. Ind. form of i&Xa<rs ? 4. 
 
 | What sort of Reduplication occurs in • 5. What Part, 
 
 is <rvu.<rt 'vTi( ? How does the accent aid in the discovery of itt 
 8. Pres. Ind. form of ? 11. Of 'biferct.i'l 14. Of Kixfivxo'r's . 
 
 | is. What part of the Verb is i<pi*ovro ? 19. 20. ? 
 
 I 21. What peculiarity is there in the Augment of nt*™*”* 0 i) 
 
 1. The enemies will advance into our country. 
 2. The enemies were driven-out 1 of tae city by the 
 citizens. 3. The law will debar no citizen from 
 honours and magistracies. 4. Lycurgus has banished 
 costly-living from Sparta. 5. The wine has been 
 drunk up by the soldiers. 6. The laws will punish 
 evil-doers. *7. The citizens will flee into the c.ty 
 
232 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 
 [Chap. VTII. 
 
 sooner than the enemies. 8. The dog has bitten the 
 hare. 9. The hare lias been bitten by the dog. 
 10. If-vou-work 2 you will be happy. 11. The ene¬ 
 mies have ravaged 3 the country. 12. The country 
 has been ravaged 3 by the enemies. 13. The ene¬ 
 mies will ravage 3 the country. 14. The woman 
 filled 1 the basket with yarn 4 . 15. The father is 
 come 5 . 16. My (== the) friend will promise me to 
 come 6 to-morrow. 17. The boy has promised the 
 teacher to learn 6 diligently. 18. The women will 
 wear beautiful clothes. 
 
 * Aor. 2 Aor. Part. 3 rtpvu. ‘‘Gen. a Perf. 6 Fat. Inf. 
 
 §121. III. Verbs, whose simple Root is strengthened, 
 
 in the Pres, and Impf., by inserting the Syllable -a v, 
 
 more rarely -aiv, before the ending, 
 
 (a) -av Oil -aiv IS INSERTED WITHOUT ANY CHANGE. 
 
 All Verbs of this kind form their Tenses from a 
 three-fold Root, — (1) the Pres, and Impf. from the 
 strengthened Root, — (2) the Aor. If. from the simple 
 Root ,— (3) the Put. and Perf. from a third Root, 
 consisting of the simple Root with t appended, which 
 is changed into rj in inflexion. ggp* a in the ending 
 •avw is short. 
 
 1. cuaO-ai'-Ojuat, I perceive, observe, Aor rjVfl-d/iijv, 
 alsOtcrOai ; Perf . yaOriyat] Flit. aiaOhaofxtxi. 
 
 2. apaoravu), 1 miss, err, sin, Aor. rj/biagrov ; Fut. 
 ajiagTYi^opai', Perf. ujuaprijjca *, Perf. Pass. y\fiagTr]paL ; 
 Aor. Pass. ?]juapTi)0rjv. 
 
 3. a7r i\0av open, I become hateful, Aor. cnrr)\Od/ir}v ; 
 Fut. aTreyOrtaofiai ; Perf. ai1 am hated. 
 
 4. av^avw (and av£ o>), I make to grow, increase, 
 Fut. av^/j(TU); Aor. rjv^rjcra ; Perf. t}u£?}jcci ; Mid. (with 
 
ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 233 
 
 5 121 .] 
 
 Aor. Pass.), I grow, Perf. v^ppai; Fut. av&iaopai * 
 Aor. rfv^riOrjv. 
 
 5. [3\a(TTav(o, I sprout, spring , Aor. tfiXaarov ; Fut. 
 f3Xaarri<ru) l Perf. ifiXuarriKa and f3tf3Xaarr)Ka (§ 88, 
 Obs. 1). 
 
 6. SapQavu), I sleep, Aor. s£ap9ov; Fut. EapOhao- 
 pai ; Perf. St^apOriKU. 
 
 7. oXigOuvii>, / slip, glide, Aor. il>X<<t9oi/; but. oXicr- 
 Ori<T(o ; Perf. toXiaOrjKU. 
 
 8. oatypaivopaij I smell, Aor. ma (Ppoprjv', but. o<r- 
 typi'irropai. 
 
 9. b(j>Xi(TKav(d, I am found guilty, incur, deserve, 
 oire, Aor. ib(pXov ; Fut. 6(pX{i<ra); Perf. wtyXrjKa; Pert. 
 ALid. or Pass. wcpXrigai. (Observe the double strength¬ 
 ening, -iatc and-uv ). 
 
 ^(b) av IS INSERTED BEFORE THE TENSE-ENDING, AND 
 V IS INSERTED BEFORE THE ChARACTERISTIC-CONSO- 
 NANT OF THE SIMPLE ROOT. 
 
 Preliminary Obs.] The short vowel, in the middle of the simple 
 Boot, is changed into a lorn) one in the formation of the Tenses, 
 except in the Aor. II. forms an exception , as it retains the 
 
 «]. The » before a P-mute is changed into p, before a K-mute into 
 
 » a s, 6 ). 
 
 10. Oiyyavw, I touch , Aor. IQiyov; Fut. Oi^opai. 
 
 11. Xa-y^dvct), I obtain by lot, acquire, Aor. eXa^ov; 
 Fut. XnkopaL ■, Perf. aXrjx<* J ?eri. Mid. or Pass, u- 
 Xriypai (§ 88, 5); Aor. Pass. sX/jx^v* 
 
 12. Xapf3av(o, 1 take, receive, Aor. tXafiov, Imp. 
 Xa)3i; Fut. Xityopca; Perf. tiXp^a ; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass. eiXijppai (§ 88, 5); Aor. Mid. IXafiopriv ; Aor. 
 Pass. iXi)(f)6iiv. 
 
 13. XauOarw, (rarely Xrj Om), I am concealed, escape 
 notice', Aor. sXaHov Fut. Xr\aw ; Perf. XlXpBa, 1 an f 
 concealed; Mid. I forget, Fut. Xij aopai ; Perf. XtXricr* 
 pai ; Aor. tXadopriv. 
 
 14. pavOavw, I learn, study, Aor. tpaOov ; Fut. 
 paOhaopai ; Perf. ptpuOqK.a.—(The a remains, con¬ 
 trary to the Rule). 
 
234 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 [Ciiap. VIIL 
 
 15. TrvvOavoficu, I inquire, hear of, learn by inquiry, 
 Aor. ETrvQopriv ; Perf. Trinvapai, ttett vaai, &C. ; Fut. 
 ntvcroyai ; Verbal-adjectives, ttevotoq, mvarioc. 
 
 16. Tvy^dvw, I hit, happen, obtain (with Gen.), 
 Aor. en x °vi Fut. rtv^ofiai (TEYX-), Perf. Ttn'.vijKa 
 (TYXE-). 
 
 LVIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 AyytXia., -as, fi, message, tidings, 
 ecyt, age! come! 
 ivit-a-TQI turn-round, (trans. 
 and intrans.). 
 
 ei.vSifjt.ov, -ov, <ro,flower, blossom. 
 (oovXivfiba, -aros, ro, advice, deci¬ 
 sion, resolution. 
 
 (•>gct%us, -tlx, -6, short, 
 ytwalos, -a, -ov. of-noble birth, 
 noble-minded, brave. 
 
 It voo, hither. 
 
 S/s, (bis), twice. 
 
 IokIco, (1) I believe, think ; (2) I 
 appear, seem., 
 tXToftxi, I hope. 
 
 i^-x/jc.x^r<xvM=xfcx^Teivaj strength¬ 
 ened by 11 (§ 121, 2). 
 itraoKio), (Dat.), I aid. 
 i 'tifcov'krt, -ijs, i, plot, design. 
 
 lon-o^xsu, (Acc.), / sv: ear-falsely 
 by any one. 
 
 ibi^yiaix, -as, in, favour, kindness . 
 Ihoi,-a,-ov, (proprius), one's-own . 
 xap-n'Kos, -ov, o, ii, camel. 
 xxTx-'bx^Sa.vea, I fall-asleep, sleep. 
 Xvyoii, -it, -ov, sad. 
 oTireo, behind, back. 
 orx^x->.xfc(itxvoj, I receivefrom, 
 take-up, undertake 
 <r(>0i-')xct>v, -Yjjcoutret, -vjxov, fitting 
 becoming. 
 
 <ra> (enclitic), yet. 
 au/atpoga, -as, «, an event, (espe¬ 
 cially a misfortune). 
 
 %£utr'iov, -ov, ro, (diminutive of 
 Zovai;), gold. 
 
 its, as ; it; <ra.%tffrn, as soon as. 
 
 1. A u v Sta reXovg 1 /it) SoKEiraf 6 Trovyodg. 2. 
 Kt(;3oc Trovrjpbv prjXal5Etv f iovXov i tote. 3. Ai- 
 k aid 2 Spaaag avppaxov t e v £ y 6eov 3 » 4. rpappara 
 u a 0 ei v Su -icai p a 6 ov r a 4 vovv t\uv. 5. A a (3 e 
 irpovoiav row TTpogyicovTog fi'iov. 6. EUvoig ETrapicCov* 
 7ojv ’latov 6 t e v £ y ttote. 7. f O fiaaiXeug rijg npbg 
 kavrov EiufiovXirig 7 ovk y o 0 e t o. 8. O i nkpoai roig 
 EXXyoiv 8 a 7r y % 6 o v r o. “9. tyiXnnrog avrog citte- 
 tyaivETO Sia XP vaiov paXXov, rj Sia rw v birXurv yv £, ri¬ 
 te e v a i ryv iStav fiaaiXEiav. 10. Oi arpanibrai f3pa- 
 \vv xpdvov 9 KdTESapOov. 11. Q,g aMT^jOovro 
 7a X lxJra Ti ^ v Kapr)Xtvv i0 oi t;r7roc, ott'ktw aviorpE^ov. 
 12. M >7 0 i y y g row Kvvdg 3 . 13. w Ays SEvpo, tva 
 ir v 0 y ryg Xvypag ayyEX'iag 7 . 14. 0*ov £ 7 i\«pfcwi' py 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 
ANOMALOUS VERES. 
 
 235 
 
 121.] 
 
 Mku ksXnOiva t. 15. ’Apx'ie'’ '> r|, X | i , “ ! ia0 ‘ 
 ravrrjc 11 a£toc. 16. KaXov, pt]Slv tig (piXovg a p a p - 
 r e i v 12 . 17. Maicapiog, ogng £ru X f ytvvajov tyiXtw, 
 
 18. M a0 £ (pepuv ttjv av/ucpopav 19 Ouoeig jtoj %£- 
 vov c^a 7 Tarrjtrac aOavdrovg £ X a 0 £ v. 20. Att iauXCov 
 hrOXd paOpay. 21. iia\ KUKog TioXXaKLg Ti^tg kcu 
 go^uc 3 £ X a x £ v. 22. riapa rwv 0£mv TroXXa tt a p- 
 11 X rj </) a ju c v Swpa. 28. Oi» X £ X r/ 0 e v, ogrig 
 ® iK a epya tt parret. 24. El 0*ov avfip ti C iXirtra; X a - 
 
 0 1 7 v, apapravti. 25* Ate s^apaprsiv ravrov 
 
 ovk avSpog <ro</>ou 14 . 26. ’E£ ayafoic X° ovo ^ £ P, A a ", 
 
 ffTt 15 icaXd avOepa, Ik 8 op0wy <pozvutv povXtvpar 
 taOXa. 27. Trie tvepyeatag ovirore X rj a o p a i, 
 
 i U = finally . 2 just things, i.e. justly. 3 § 158, 3. (b). 
 
 * the person studying =the student. 5 § 176, 1. — a return. 
 
 ’§ 158, 5. (b). 8 * 161, 2. (c). 9 A space d time is expressed by 
 
 the Acc. § 159. 3. (6) >» § 158, 5. (a). 11 § 168,^7. M- J$" 
 
 = to commit no offence. tout* —to commit me 
 
 „,M offence. See § 60, Obs. » § 158. 2. “ On the Sou,. \ erb, 
 
 see Rule, § 28. 
 
 1 The king will not perceive the plots 1 against 
 himself. 2. lf-thou-drinkest 2 , talk not much 3 ; for 
 thou wilt err. 3 V What man has not once erre . 
 4 The bad man is hated 4 by the good. 5. r hi ip 
 increased 5 his (=the) kingdom more by money than 
 by arms. 6. From an upright mind will always 
 spring excellent resolutions. 7. I have slept® only a 
 short time 7 8. I will not touch the dog 1 .. 9. Fen¬ 
 ces has obtained great glory 1 . 10 The wicked will 
 never obtain true glory 1 . 11. We shall take thoug i 
 for a becoming life 1 . 12. The city was taken y 
 the enemies. 13. The ungrateful maw has forgotten 
 the kindness 1 . 14. The boy has studied literature 
 well. 15. Hast thou learned the sad tidings 1 f 
 
 2 Part. 3 Neut. PI. 4 Perf. a Aor. * wUgCim, 
 
 y ><j itpg.wi/» t^o voice*. 9 i ^nXctv6a.voy.cti. 
 
 1 Geu. 
 1 Acc. B 
 
236 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. YIII. 
 
 § 122. IV. Verbs , whose simple Root is strengthened, 
 in the Pres, and Impf, by inserting the two Conso¬ 
 nants -<tk or the Syllable -igk, before the ending. 
 
 2k is inserted, when the Characteristic of the Root 
 is a Vowel, and -igk, when it is a Consonant . Most 
 Verbs of this class, whose simple Root ends with a 
 Consonant , form the Future, &c., according to the 
 analogy of pure Verbs, e. g. top-icnao, Fut. zvphaw 
 (E'YPE-). Some of these Verbs, in the Pres, and 
 Impf ., take a Reduplication also, which consists in re¬ 
 peating the first Consonant of the Root with t. 
 
 1. 'aXfa k-o/ucu, I am caught, am taken, (applied to a 
 city), Impf- nXtc TKOfxrir} —(AAO-) Fut. aXwoopai, 
 Aor. II. rjX cov and faAwv (pi, § 142,. 8) r J was caught ; 
 Perf. i]X wKa and iaXioKa, I have been caught, (on the 
 Aug., see § 87, 6). The Active is supplied by aiptiv 
 (§ 126, 1), signifying, 1 take , capture. 
 
 2. avaXiamo, I spend , consume, Impf. avriXicmov; 
 — ( ANAAO-) I 1 ut. avaXwau) ; Aor. avt'iXajoa and ava - 
 Xwrra, KarnvaXiiKja ; Perf. avri^WKa and cAaAwKa ; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, avr/Xcopai and avaXiopai ; Aor. 
 Pass. avaXwQnv and avrjXwOrjv. 
 
 3. apeaicu), I please, Fut. a plow; Aor. patera; Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass. pptapai ; Aor. Pass. pptadpv. — Mid. 
 
 4. yppaoKU) (or yppaw), I grow old, Fut. yppacropai; 
 Aor. typpaoa, Inf. yppacrat ; Perf. ytyppaKa. 
 
 5. yiyvwGKio, I know ;—(TNO-) Fut. yvioaopaii 
 Aor. II. Zyvwv (pi, § 142); Perf. tyvwKa; Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass. Zyvuxrpai (§ 95); Verbal-adjectives, yviuardt,*, 
 
 yvitHTTEOQ. 
 
 6. SiSpaaicio, I run away , (found only in its com¬ 
 pounds; e. g. a7roSiSpa(TK(o, SiaSiSpamcto, EK&i8pa(TKio), 
 Fut. 8paanpai; Perf. ciSpaica; Aor. II. tcoav (pi, 
 § 142, 1). 
 
 7. tvpioKw, I find, invent , Aor. II. a/pov; Imper. 
 *vpi‘$ —(E'YPE-j Fut. tvphaw ; Perf. tvpuKa ; Perf. 
 
ANOMALOUS VELDS. 
 
 237 
 
 § 122 .] 
 
 Mid. or Pass tv(.ty]jntaj Aor. Pass. evptOrp '; Aor, Mid. 
 tvpo/itjv ; Verbal-adjectives, tuptro c, tvptreog. 
 
 1 come to manhood , b ut. ijfSgau), Aor. 
 tj/ 3ri<rct;— (hfiaw, I am young, avv^aw, I become young 
 
 again). T . 
 
 9. OvgfTKM, (usually aTroQvfi<nc(o), Idie; —(0AN-) b ut. 
 curoOavou/uai ; Aor. aTrt'Oa^ov; Perf. r WvriKa; Fut. III. 
 TtOvriZw (old Att.) and rtOvt'iZopai, I shall be 
 
 10. Oo(b<TKio, Heap, Fut. Ooponpai ; Aor. II. Wopov; 
 
 Perf. rtOopa. , 
 
 11. iXcKTKopai , I propitiate, Fut. Waaopar, Aor. 
 
 iXaaafigvr Aor. Pass. IXaoOrjv. 
 
 12. tiigvhcjKU), I remind (M N A-) Fut. fivfrw 5 Aor. 
 tuvgaa; Perf. Mid. or Pass, pipvinuai, (memim), I re¬ 
 member, I am mindful, (on tlie Redup., see § 88, 
 Obs. 2), Subj. juej uvtofiai, -fj, -grat (§ 116, 3), Imper. 
 utuvn/ro, Plpf. tutuviifiriv, I remembered , Opt. 
 
 -vo, -yro, or /Jf u W[ Vor, -vo, -vro (§ 116, 3); 
 Fut. III. jutjuvrjcrojuai, I shall be mindful, Aor. tpvg- 
 aOr]v (§ 95), / remembered ; Fut. fivtioOhcropai, I shall 
 remember. 
 
 13. 7rarrx w (arising from 7 raOmcu), I experience a 
 sensation , suffer, Aor. siraOov, (11EN0-) but. irtiao- 
 pai (§ 8,8) ; Perf. 7mroi/0a.—Verbal-adjective, irath,- 
 
 * 
 
 TOC- % 2 A 
 
 14. TrnrtcTKu), 1 give to drink , Fut. 7rt <ra> j Aor. 
 
 ‘*15.’ TriTTpaotcit), I sell, (Fut. and Aor. in the Commori 
 language expressed by anoStpaopai, arrt^opgv); Perf. 
 iren-paica; Perf. Mid. or Pass, Treirpapai, (Inf. y*- 
 irpuadai ); Aor. hpaOrju; Fut. III. TreTrpacTopai, With 
 the meaning of the simple Fut. (TrpaOgaopai)^ 
 
 16. (ttbp'kjkio (and oTcptw), 1 deprive, rob, but. ore - 
 pgaw, Aor. tarepnaa; Mid. and Pass, arspujtcopai 
 (and arepovpai)y Fut. GTEpriaopai', 1 erf. toTtpgpaii 
 
 Aor. tGTfp{)0l)V. ^ r k * 
 
 17. TITPOHTKW, I wound, Fut. rowrno; Aor. erpunra; 
 
 % 1 9 
 
238 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. rtTpiopai ; Aor. ErpihOrjv; Fut. 
 TpwdijGopai and rpivaopai. 
 
 18. <j)a<jK(v, I assert, allegesuppose, (Ind. and 
 Imper. very rarely used),. Impf. tyaaicov; Fut. 
 tyrjaio; Aor. EcprjGct. 
 
 19. X ugkiv, I open the mouth;—(X AN-) Fut. X avov- 
 
 pai ; Aor. II. k X avov; Perf. KE X r]va, 1 remain open 
 gape . 
 
 Obs. Aihauxo*. ‘ / teach* 
 Tenses :—Fut. tdd&; Aor. 
 \lAd%0nn. — Mid. 
 
 retains the K-mute in forming the 
 i; Perf. 2ili'b<x,%a ; Aor. Pass. 
 
 LIX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ivyivys, -s'f, well-born, of high* 
 birth, noble 
 
 (*y*’■> -*S, i, share, lot, fate. 
 l*'c£Gipos, -on, fated. 
 
 •7ru.Xu.ug, -d, -in, old, aged, ancient. 
 •Trourxu), I feel, suffer; tv orda-^a, 
 I receive a favour, am well 
 treated. 
 
 Tiv$(eco)uj, I grieve, mourn for. 
 *oui\, xos, o, Phoenician. 
 
 1. OXiyovg E v p rj a e i g avSpag sratpovg marovg cv 
 X aXE7rolg irpaypaaiv. 2. Ylacnv avdpuriroig fiopaigov 
 EGTIV airoOdVElV. 3. fl£V@oi)jU£V rovg t e 0 v jj k 6 
 rag 1 . 4. H&'wc rcov tt aXaicbv 7rpa%t(vv 2 p £ pv rj vr ai 3 oi 
 av0p(i)7roi. 5. Ovk av ev p oig avdpivrrov tt avra 4 oXfiirff- 
 Tarov. 6. H KaXiog %rjv°, 7) KaXwg t £ 0 vt] k £ v at 6 EvyE m 
 vrjg (SovXetcu. 7. Ei Stiva 8i* u/uETEpav naKUTtjra tt e tt 6 v 
 6 a r e, fir] ri 6 Oeolg tovtivv goipav E 7 rava(J)£pETE. 8. Ta 
 aXXa Kai 7 roXtpog kcu pETafioXrj rv X r]g a v aX was v 7 , 
 U r£ X vr] Se (tu/Zetcu. 9. flaw* e<ttiv 8 e £ e v p e i v, lav 
 gr] tov novov (j)Evyr) rig. 10. Ei rig y r\ p a g a g %vjv 
 sv X ETai, u^iog £crri 9 yrjpaGKEiv 7roXXac £t£ trwy SsKaSag. 
 11. M £fxvr\Go, on Ovrjrbg vtt ap X sig. 12. Tv%q t£- 
 X vriv evprjKag, ov Tt X vp Tv X r\v. 13. Ovk egti 8 
 fiiov EVpELV aXvjTOV OuSevI 10 , 14. ’AxapLGTOCt 
 
 * a Xvoros, - on, wilho ut-trouble, free- 
 from-sorrow. 
 
 &y.vYipon[eco)&, (Gen.), I am-un- 
 mindful-of forget. 
 
 'A^urrortXvs, -ovg, <5, Aristotle. 
 };xdf, -adof, ij, a decade, the 
 number ten. 
 
 \\ iuoluxu, I find-out. 
 tTowuipegeu, (refero), / bring-back, 
 refer, ascribe. 
 
« 123.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 239 
 
 OQTIC tv 7 T a 6 U) V a/ULVYIIULOVEl - 15* Al'lCCUOV tV npaT - 
 
 roi/ra p eg v ij ad a i tCjv druywv. 
 
 1 6vvt<TKo>, I am dying, rs$?Y\x.it, I am dead. 2 § 15S, 5. (b). 3 Perf. 
 with Pres, meaning. 4 =w every way. § 159, 3. (7), Obs. 5 § 97, 
 3. (a). 6 rt =quid, in any way, at all. 7 § 152, 10, Obs^ 8 t<rri with 
 
 the Inf. means it is 'possible , it is lawful , one can. 9 trrf=he 
 deserves. ^®oux scrTt — oll^svi, it is not possible for any one , no one can. 
 See § 177, 6. 
 
 1. The city has been taken by the enemies. 2. 
 The citizens thought' that 11 the city would be taken 
 by the enemies. 3. By the war 2 all the. wealth 
 of the city has been consumed. 4. Seek (sing.) to 
 please 3 the good 2 . 5. The glory of virtue will never 
 grow-old. 6. The bad man will never know the 
 beauty of virtue. 7. The slaves have run away in 
 the night 4 . 8. It is said that letters were invented 5 
 by the Phoenicians. 9. The valiant soldiers will cheer¬ 
 fully die for 6 their (=the) country. 10. To mortals 
 it-is-not-permitted 7 to say, I will not suffer this. 11. 
 The prisoners were sold 3 by the enemies. 12. The 
 soldiers deprived 3 the citizens of their (=the) posses¬ 
 sions. 4 13. Many soldiers were wounded in the 
 battle. 14. Alexander was taught 8 by Aristotle. 
 
 1 on. 2 Dat. 8 Aor. 4 Gen. 5 Acc., with Inf. Aor. of tlfnrxv, 
 e rifl, with Gen. 7 *rrt, with Dat. 8 Aor. of 
 
 § 123. V. Verbs , whose simple Root is strengthened, 
 in the Pres, and Imp/by prefixing a Reduplica¬ 
 tion. 
 
 This Reduplication consists in repeating the first 
 Consonant of the Root with t. In the formation of 
 the Tenses, it remains in a few Verbs only. To this 
 class belong:— 
 
 yiyvogai (instead of ytylvogai), I become ;— 
 
anomalous verbs. [Chap. VIII 
 
 (TEN-) Aor. tyevonnv ;—(rENE-) Fut. yivfoofiai ; 
 ert. yEyEvrjgat, I have become , or ye-yoi/a (with 
 meaning), / am. 
 
 /nLZ r \ W J mSteaci of 7n7rf ' rw )> I fall, Irnper. ttittte;— 
 (I1E1-) Fut. iTE(Tov^ai (§ 116, 2); Aor. IWop; Perf. 
 7r£7TT(OKQ (with irregular variable-vowel). 
 
 uktoj (instead of tltUw), I beget , brinq-forth, pro¬ 
 duce, Fut. tI mogen ; Aor. etekov ; Perf. tetokci . 
 
 Obs. To this class belong several Verbs of class TV S 12° a* 
 
 yryvajtrxcu. *i o *• —» **» 
 
 5 l? 4 - VI - r«r6», to w/io.se simple Root t is added in 
 the Free., Impf, and some of the other Tenses. 
 
 1- ya/i(tw)w, I marry, duco, (of the man), Perf. 
 mwa; Fut. ya/iCo (§ 83)but Aor. i 7W a, yn/juu; 
 Mid. yayovyai (with Dat.), I wed, nubo, (of the 
 woman), 1 ut. ya^w/im (§ 83); Aor. tynpa^v; Perf. 
 
 ■y eyayriyat ; Pass. I am taken to wife , in matrimonium 
 ducor, Aor. iyafi(,0t,v, &c. 
 
 2- yri6({w)w, I rejoice, Fut. yt,9haw ;—but Perf. 
 ytyriua (with Pres, meaning). 
 
 3. <Wfo»)w, I seem, (v ideor), I think, Fut. Sdjw: 
 Aor. tSoga; Perf. Pass. Sicoynai, (visus sum); Aor, 
 1 ass. Eco)(ur)v. 
 
 4. yapri(,(iio)w, I bear witness, Fut. 
 
 fcc.but naprvpofiai, Dep. Mid. / call to witness, 
 (testor), Fut. gagrvgovgai. 
 
 5. £W6w)(o, I shave, Mid. Zvpopm; Aor. ilvod- 
 ur l v V but Perf. E^vprjgai. 
 
 6. wO(lw)Co, I push, Impf. tdiOovv; Fut. imw and 
 
 Aor. luma, S,aar, Perf. Jwmi ; Perf. Mid. or 
 1 ass. ewapa,; Aor. Pass. i&aOqv, (on the Aug., see 
 ) o7, 4).— Mid. 
 
§ 124.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 241 
 
 LX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 I drive-away, thrust- 
 
 out. 
 
 an 7, - ns , fi, infatuation, 
 and consequent unhappiness , 
 eviZ, mischief. 
 
 Analog, -eu, o, AchceOM. 
 
 yiyvop.cu, 1 am, am-born, become, 
 happen, arise; Perf. 
 
 / am-by-birth, have-become so 
 and so. 
 
 Atip,o<r0Bv*is, -ovg, o, Demosthenes. 
 
 us-w6(eu)w, I push, drive-in. 
 
 iporiorrat, I fall-upon or into any¬ 
 thing, meet-with. 
 
 ttioxtp{eu)&, I am-in-good-7'epute, 
 becomefamous. 
 
 xitpaAfi, -vis, ft, head. 
 
 ’M.ivi&vipos, -ov, o, MenedSmus. 
 cr^o~vo{iu)w, I think, consider-be¬ 
 forehand. 
 
 •ruoroTi, ever. 
 
 ffufA-orlorru, I fall-in-with, coin* 
 cide / ffuporiomi, it happens, 
 befalls. 
 
 aup-<ps£co, I bear-with, contribute . 
 am-profitable-to; ffvpft^u, it 
 is-advantageous, is-expedient. 
 aw-'biu.-r^fiu, I spend-time-with , 
 live-with. 
 
 <p'ovos> -ou, o, murder, slaughter. 
 
 1. rioXXaKtc ek kokov loOXov ly k v e t o 1 , KOI KOKOV 
 £% ayaQov. 2. Xtlpa tt e a 6 v r i opE^ov. 3. 'O aya- 
 7 tu)v kivSuvov 8/U7T€<reirai avnp. 4. Oi avOpwTroi 
 TTpog ap£rj}v y e y 6 v a <t i v‘ J . 5. Mr/ juot y £ v o i O' a 
 (3ov\ojuai, aXX a (TV/UCpkpEl. 6. Mr/ 07T81jSe 7rXoVTElV , 
 prj ra\v 7rkvrjg y k v y. 7. IIoXXaKig 6 EvdoKipEiv ttel- 
 pivfiEvog, ov 7 rpovoriarag, Eig peyaXr}v kol ^aXt7rr/v arr/v 
 1 7r £ <t € v. 8. (> Orav arv\uv ool g v fiir k g y r< 3 , Evpi- 
 ttiSov 4 /uvrjoOrjTr Ovk egtiv, bgng tt avr’ avrjp evScil- 
 povEi 5 . 9. MsvtdrgJLog irpog tov EpittTrjoavTa, el 
 y{]/ULai 6 oirovSciiog, eXe^ev’ ’Eyw yEya/urjKa. 10. r H 
 row tpiXov Ovyarrip, £varr/v i 'ipkpav y Ey a fxr\ jikv yi g , 
 t£0vi]KcV- 11. f A\iXXso)g Ovfxog EyEyridei tyovov ’AyaiCov 
 opiovrog . 12. v ESo^£ rip oTparriyip 7 ett\ rovg ttoXe- 
 
 fiiovg (TTpaTEvoaoOai. 13. Sar/cpcm/c eXeZ,ev' 'Ytto 7rai>- 
 7 o»v fiapTvpr\GETai /ulol 8 , otl ky a> T/Soa/on /uiev ovSkva 
 7T(o7Tor£ avOpioTTiov, ovSe \tipu? £7rotr/(ra, (3EXriovg $e 
 TTOIELV E7TElp(vpr]V UEl TOVg E/UOl 10 (TVV$lCtrpt[3oVTag. 14. 
 ArnuoaOkvrjg e £ v p a t o rr/v K£0aXr/ v. 15. Oi orpa - 
 nioTai Eig rrjv ttoXlv eI g e iv o 6 r/ cr a v, 16. Oi arpa - 
 TLUTai CL7T E(V a avr O TOlig TToXEfJlloVg. 
 
 1 arises. 2 are born. 3 xru%i?v n , to meet with any misfortune. 
 * s=the saying of JEuripides. * i. e. olx to-rtv a»^, c(,rn cruv/ru (in 
 
 M 
 
242 
 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 every respect) iVba.ifx.ovu. 6 who was married nine days ago. § 159 
 , ib se ?™ d good to the general , i. e. the general resolved! 
 (3b W% A. 2 ° ^ ^ cdl= all will bear me witness. 9 § 35, 
 
 O* What Tense is \yinro ? 2. What part of the Verb is %|ov? 
 . ? va<r;v • Quantity of the « in it ? 5. What 
 
 . « the/ m// form of yeW? 7. What is the Pres. Ind, form of iWv ? 
 Py what Tense is it to be translated? 8. Why has u.vfo6*n the 
 ending not -A ? 9. What Mood is y^ a , ? How does the 
 
 accent help to determine it ? 13. What Humber and Case is 
 
 ?) 
 
 1. If thou actest thus 1 , thou wilt soon become 
 poor. 2. The soldiers have fallen-upon the ene¬ 
 mies^ 3. Do not fall 3 , O friend! 4. My (=the) 
 friend’s daughter will marry my (=the) brother’s son. 
 5. The citizens will rejoice, if-they-learn 4 the de¬ 
 feat^ of the enemies. 6. It-is-determined 6 that the 
 soldiers 7 should march against the enemies. 7. All 
 will bear thee witness that thou hast benefitted the 
 state much 8 . 8. The slaves have had their (=the) 
 
 heads shaved 9 . 9. The enemies drove the soldiers 
 into the city. 
 
 , ‘ r £™ns. : acting thus. 2 Dat. 3 Aor. Subj. * « Part. » Gen. 
 
 a ^ 0K * a% 7 Acc. with Inf. 8 tvigyeruv trokXx. with Acc. 
 
 9 Perf. Mid. 
 
 § 125. VII. Verbs , which have the simple Root in the 
 Pres, and Impf., but in other Tenses assume a Root 
 with the Characteristic €. 
 
 (The * is lengthened into * in inflexion. Exceptions, &xbfuu 
 
 and /u,a%o/aai). 
 
 1 . a\(%u), I ward off, , Fut. a\£ri< xo>; Mid. I ward 
 off fff m myself, defend myself, Fut. aXe^qaofiai] Aor. 
 rjXe^a/urjv (from ’AAEK-). 
 
 2. axOopai, I am vexed , displeased , Fut, axOiaoyai; 
 Aor. rixOioOriv; Fut. Pass. axOtaQiioopai (with the 
 same meaning as axOeaouat). 
 
 
§ 125.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 243 
 
 3. I36(tk(0 , I feed (transitive), Fut. j3o<T>o7<7to; Aor. 
 i/SoorKrjcra ; Mid. I feed (intransitive), with Aor. Pass. 
 'fiocncrjOriv- 
 
 4. fiovXopai, I wish, am willing , (II. Pers. Sing. 
 /3ouAa, § 82, 2), Fut. fiovXr'icrouar, Perf. f3£j3ovXrjpat; 
 Aor. IfiovXhOriv and ??J3 ovXhOriv, (on the Aug., see 
 § 85, Obs.). 
 
 5. Siw, 1 want , [usually Impersonal, Sa, it is 
 wanting , is necessary , Subj. Sep, Part. Sa)t>, Inf. 
 San; Impf. tSa, Opt. Sioi; Fut. Scr/cra; Aor. tSuj- 
 <rt(v)]; Mid. Sioyai , 2 need , Fut. Sajcrogat; Aor. 
 iSerjbijv ; Perf. SeSajjuat. 
 
 6. efh'Au) (and 0 £'Aw), I will, wish , Impf. rJfoAov and 
 WeXov ; Fut. WeXrirjuj and OeXhatv’, Aor. ^OeArjtra and 
 iOiXr)(ja ; Perf. -^Arjfca only. 
 
 7. f’/Aw, I press, hem in, Fut. uXrjaw ; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass. aArjgai; Aor. Pass. uXr/diiv. 
 
 8. El’POMAi, Aor. ^po/irjn, / ashed, epwpai, Ipot- 
 jurjv, tpon, ipiaOat , ipopwog; Fut. Iphaopai. The 
 other Tenses are supplied by ipiorgv. 
 
 9. Uppw, I go forth, Fut. tpp//< tw; Aor. r/ppijo-a; 
 Perf. ripprjKa. 
 
 10. euSto, (usually KaOevSw), I sleep , Fut. ; 
 
 Perf. wanting, (on the Aug., see § 91, 3). 
 
 11. / have, hold , Impf. ayon (§ 87, 3); Aor. 
 aj-yov, Inf. <r\£iv, Imper. (r\ig, napaa^eg {pi, § 142), 
 Subj. or^fo, "PC’ 7rapacryw, irapacr^pg, &C., Opt. a\oir\v 
 (pi), (but in Comp, napaa^oipi), Part, cr^i'n/ ; Fut. 
 
 and (T^rjo’w; Perf. aryrj»ca ; Aor. Mid. iaypp.Y\V) 
 Subj. ayfopai, Opt. oyoip.x)v, Imper. <ryou, 7rapa<yypD, 
 Inf. ayirrOai, rrapacr^iaOai, Part, a^opevog ; Fut. 
 t^opai and a^haopai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ecr^ripai ; 
 Aor. Pass, ia-^idrjv ; Verbal-adjectives, ixrog, a^erog. 
 
 12. a//a), / COO&, Fut. ; Verbal-adjec¬ 
 
 tives, i<p66g or iipriTog, ixp^riog. 
 
 13. KaOi^io, I seat, sit, Impf. £KaOi%ov, (old Attic, 
 KaOiZ on); Fut. KaOiw (§ 83); Aor. hcaQ'iaa, (old Attic, 
 Kaftaa) ; Perf. KtKaOtKci ; Mid. Kadi%opai, I seat myself, 
 
244 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. [CHAP. VIII 
 
 Fut. KaOi^riao/uai ; Aor. iKaQiaagqv, I seated for myself 
 I placed .—But KaOl^ogai, I seat myself, sit, Impf. 
 tKaOtZo/uriv; Fut. KaO&ovyai, (on the Aug., see § 91, 3). 
 
 14. gaxogai, I fight, Fut. gaxoiigai (instead of gar 
 yzaogai); Aor. lgayzaagi)v ; Perf. gtgdxwycu; Verbal- 
 adjective, gay^ETEog or gaxyriog. 
 
 15. gZXXw, I intend, am about to do , (hence I delay), 
 Impf. ZgtXX ov and ngsXXov ; 1 ut. gzXXijaa) j Aor, 
 tgiXXqaa, (on the Aug., see § 85, Obs.). 
 
 16. gZXu goi nvog, it is a care to me , Iam concerned 
 for , curae mihi est aliquid, (rarely personal, g(Xo >), 
 Fut. gsXrjaei ; Aor. igiXrjcn(v); Perf. g£giXriKt(v); 
 Mid. giXogai , (usually impiXogai, and very frequently 
 imgeXovgai , I care for); Fut. irrigeXiiaopai; Aor. 
 iiregeXyiOrjv; Perf. £7 ng^giXngai. 
 
 17. gvZ,w, I suck , Fut. gv^rfau), &C. 
 
 18. o£w, I smell, Fut. o£f/<ro>; Aor. w^qaa; Perf. 
 o3o>3a (with Pm. meaning). [Att. Redup., § 89.] 
 
 19. oiogai and otgat, / (II. Pers. Sing. oUi 
 
 § 82, 2), Impf. i^ognv and (fgriv; Fut. oihaogai; Aor. 
 WlOrjv, oiqOrivai, (on the .Aug., see § 87, 1), 
 
 20. diyogai, I depart , go, am gone , abii, Impf. f>y 6 - 
 
 gr)v, I went away; Fut. olxfoogai ; Perf. (in 
 
 the Common language only in composition, e. g. 7 r«p- 
 
 *exw ai )' 
 
 21 . 6 (j>rfX(i >, / owe, am under obligation , debeo, Fut 
 bfoiXriato; Aor. w0 £ /Ar?<xa; Aor. II. ib^Xov, -tg, -t(v) 
 fl. and II. Pers. PI. not used ~\, with the Inf. in forms 
 expressing a wish (=utinam). 
 
 22. 7 TtTogai, I fly, Fut. irrhcrogai; Aor. £ 7 rr 6 gtiv, 
 midOai [more rarely Zttttjv and inragw (gi, § 142,2)]; 
 Perf. TrtTroTrigai. —( Syncope , § 117, 1). 
 
 23. / re/owe, Fut. x aL pfo(*>; Aor. 
 
 § ld2, 7), Perf. (with Pres, meaning^ KsxdgijKa 
 and KExaprigai, I am glad. 
 
 Obs. With these Verbs may be classed several liquid Verbs, 
 (which, however, form the Put. and Aor . regularly) j e. g. fdw, 1 
 remain, Perf. (all the other Tenses regular) ;_ vipw, J dU . 
 
ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 245 
 
 § 125.] 
 
 
 I 
 
 vide, distribute, assign, Fut. npw ; Aor. hu/xx; Peri, nvi^xx ; Fut. 
 Mid. vs povpxi ; Aor. ivuy.xy.7iv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. vtvzy. 7 iyx/ ■’ Aor. 
 Pass, iviyW** (and rarely eve^e&jv). 
 
 LXI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Al<ra>y, -OV09, S, jEsdn. 
 
 ipfyorix, -a;, n, ambrosia, (tlie 
 food of the gods). 
 ivx-vsrofjLxt, I fly-away. 
 
 I boil-up, (trans.). 
 fixirlXstoi, -ov, royal. 
 
 Txw/a^hs, -out, o, GanymSdes. 
 oix-peva, I remain, 
 d, if; (in a question, whether), 
 ik'ty^u, I prove, try, search, re¬ 
 prove, shame, convince, convict, 
 refute. 
 
 tmrYifaios-a, -av,(idoneus), suitable, 
 proper, necessary; tx Wirn- 
 "hux, provisions, necessaries. 
 i^ur(&eo)u, I ask. 
 fifties, -ov, o, demigod. 
 
 6 %'ovos, -ov, o, seat, throne 
 
 xxkoxxyxMx, -Xf, 71 , (xxXof XX/ 
 
 xyxdos), the character of a *«- 
 XexxyxP'os or gentleman , ho¬ 
 nourable-conduct, uprightness, 
 virtue. 
 
 Az'/x, -«?, fj, booty, plunder. 
 
 =)-ov;, to, part, share. 
 pz<rr'oi, -)J, -OV, (Gen.), full. 
 
 I share-in, partake-of 
 enjoy, possess. 
 
 pv^ov, -ov, to, unguent, perfume. 
 o^v/ 9 , - 1009 , o, ii, bird. 
 o.£09, (-S09 —)-ov9, to, mountain. 
 9 TXTV 09 , -ov, o, grandfather. 
 TIsAoip, -07T09, o, Pelops. 
 w\j)v, except, besides, unless. 
 Titovs, - 0 I 09 , o, (1) three-legged , 
 (2 ) a tripod. 
 
 1. 0 1 (Trpanwrai tovq ttoXep'iovq- « A e £ {] a o v t a i 
 2. Mri «x 0 i <j 0 r\ r e wrep wv l ripapravere IX eyxbpz* 
 vol. 3. f O TToipf)v alytov rrjv ayiXijr ev rot q opetn 
 (3o (T K 7)<J E l. 4. Oi (TTparitoraL E7TL TOVQ TToXEpiOVQ 
 orpaTEVEcrOaL EfiovXijOriaav. 5. T olq arpanwraiQ 2 
 ev rrj ttoXep'icl yrj rw v briTridEitov 3 Serf or e i. 6. nAouaioc 
 ECFTLV OV% 6 TToXXa KEKTYgULEVOQ, aXX 6 fJUKOLVV 3 Sfr/CTO- 
 
 p£VOQ.' 7 . 'O rioAv 2 €U/ 0 ]^ OU§E OeoQ 77 6 E A Y) (T E 
 povog, aXXa paXXov rjpiOeoQ avv rtp aSeXtptp yEviadai. 
 8. Oi {japfiapoi, V 7 TO T(jJV E/WrjVWV $ 1 (i))(QeVTEQ, EIQ 
 
 tov 7 vorapov e l\ r] 0 rj <r a v. 9 . * E £> o 0 roy 7r arioa, 
 u rf\v E 7 ri<JTo\r)y yaypatpEv. 10. Ov 7rpE7TEi rov orpa- 
 rqybv ev KivSvvotQ KaOEvdijoai. 11. O vSeiq av- 
 OpvJTTWV 5 Tj^LCoOrj TOIQ 0 eOIQ Q OjUlXtiv , 7tA rjv 6(101 fj, E T E - 
 <r\i] Kacr i 7 KaXXovg ' UeXoxP yap tovtov eveko. apfipo* 
 ataQ* iieteg^e Kai Taw priori q teal aXXoi tlveq. * 12. 
 Mr/Stea A taova avEiprioaoa veov iroiriaaL XlyErai. 
 13. KaOiovfiEV oe, u) (jrparqyE, eIq roi/ Opovovrbv 
 
246 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. VIII 
 
 fiairiXeiov. 14. *0 j3 acriXavg hri rov Opovov k a 6 t~ 
 %,{] a it a i. 15 . Oi "EWyiveg ev 2 aXapivi OappaXtwg 
 t fi a \i a a v t o. 16. Kupoc vtto MavSdi^c Trig pi)- 
 
 TpOQ tpUiTriOrig, El fiovXoiTO pEVElV 7rapd Tip TTaTTlTlp, OVK 
 
 e p e XXi} a £ v 9 , aXXa rayi) eXe&v, oti pivEiv f3ovXmro. 
 17. ToTg ayaOolg Trig aperrjg 10 ju e X rj cr e t. 18. Xprja - - 
 Tol veol oi) pvpiov oZrjaovoiv 11 , aXXa k aXoicaya- 
 0'iag. 19. Oi « jrpariuirai olr}OEVTEg rovg TroXEpiovg 
 airotyvytiv ip pno. 20. ' H ^uyr) a v a it t o - 
 pi vri o t ^ a £ 7 a i aOavarog KaX ayrjootg. 21 . Oi 
 Kdicovpyot pEyaXriv Zr\piav w (j) e i X 17 cr av 12 . 22. f H 
 opvig a v aTT £tt or k\t ai. 23. Ot ttoXitoi dsiviog eke- 
 XapriKEuav Em ry v'ucy. 24. Oi OripEVTal tt aoav 
 tt)v vincra ev rolg opem $iEpep£v{]KE<7av. 25. 
 Trjg Xstag pipog vtto rwv arpartwrwv rip oTparriyip 
 IvepriOri (or EVEpiOri). 26. TpiVoStc rjuav Kptiov 13 
 
 pEGToX V E V E prj p E V (t) V. 
 
 1 i.e. u<rt£ reCruv, a. The Relative is attracted into the case of 
 its Antecedent; see § 182, 6. 2 there will he need to the soldiers= 
 the soldiers will need. 3 § 158, 5. (a). 4 were driven. 5 no one of 
 men—no man. avfyarcov is a partitive Gen.; see § 158, 3. Obs. 1. 
 6 § 161, 2. (a). 7 possessed. 8 § 158, 3. (b). 9 did not hesitate. 
 
 10 § 158, 6, I. n o£s<v nvot—U> he redolent of anything. 12 owed— had 
 to suffer. 13 § 39, Obs. 
 
 ( 5. What is the Nom. to liwu ? 6. Why has aXP no accent ? 7. 
 Is there any peculiarity in the Aug. of ydlx *01 ? 9. What part of 
 the Verb is Igou ? What Verb supplies its Pres. Ind. ? 10. Give 
 the Imperf. Ind. of xccfoifitiv. 11. From what Verb does 
 come ? Give the Fut. Ind. of it. 17, What kind of a Verb is 
 
 ft.it.7lGU ?) 
 
 1. The soldiers bravely warded-off 1 the enemies. 
 
 2. Many shepherds fed 2 the flocks of goats on the 
 mountains. 3. The father will wish to depart to¬ 
 
 morrow. 4. A good general takes-care that 3 the 
 
 soldiers may not 3 want necessaries. 5. The good 
 
 will not be-willing to associate-with the wicked 4 . 
 
 6. I will ask the father whether he has written the 
 
 letter. 7. If-tliou-art-weary 5 6 * 8 , thou wilt gladly sleep, 
 
 8. All those possessed by wicked desires are slaves. 
 
§ 126 .] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 247 
 
 9. Cowardly soldiers will not share dangers 6 . 10. 
 iEson, having been boiled by Medea, is said to have 
 Become young. 11. The soldiers set 2 their (=the) 
 general on 7 the royal throne. 12. Good soldiers will 
 fight bravely for their (=the) country. 13.1 will not 
 delay, but quickly ask. 14. The laws will care-for 
 the general safety 6 . 15. The flowers smell 8 beauti¬ 
 fully. 16. The youths smelt-of 2 perfumes 6 . 17. The 
 citizens will not think 9 that the enemies 10 have already 
 fled. 18.1 will be-gone. 19. The evil-doers will-have- 
 to-suffer 1 11 III. a great punishment. 20. The bird will fly¬ 
 away. 21. I will rejoice in being honoured by the 
 good. 22. The soldiers have assigned 12 the general 4 
 a share of the booty. 
 
 1 Aor. Mid. 2 Aor. 3 ’o<ro>s pr\, with Fut. Ind. 4 Dat. 5 Perf. 
 Part. 6 Gen. 7 us. with Acc. 8 o'buha.. 9 oTpou. 10 Acc. with Inf. 
 41 Fut. of otpiiXu. 12 vi( jlu. 
 
 § 126. VIII .Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from diffe¬ 
 rent Roots, classed together only because they coincide 
 in meaning , 
 
 1 . aip(iio)u), 1 take, catchy overtake , capture (e. g. a 
 
 city), Fut. aiprjaaj ; Perf. ypr]Ka ; Aor. (from f EA-) 
 tiXoi/, Inf. ikeiv ; Aor. Pass. ypWrjvi Fut. Pass. 
 aiptOh<jo/jL(u (§ 98, Obs.); Mid. I choose, Fut. aipwo- 
 fiai ; Aor. aXdgijy ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ypr\yai ; Fut. 
 
 III. ppfjaojueu ; Verbal-adjectives, aiperog, aiperioc;. —■ 
 (On the Aug. in aXov, riXouqv, see § 87, 3.). 
 
 2. tp^piiai, I go, come , (the remaining Moods and 
 the Participials of the Pres, are borrowed from elgi, 
 I go [§ 137]; thus— tpypixai, iw, Wi, livai, Iwv) ; 
 Impf. riPX°l ( usua lly or V°)’ loi/ui ; Fut. 
 tipi, I shall go (rj?a>, I shall come) ;—(’EAY0-) Perf. 
 IXriXvOa ; Aor. ^jX0ov, A 6(v, tXOoifu, eXOe, iXOuv, A- 
 0u)v ; Verbal-adjective, Atucmov. 
 
248 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. YIIL 
 
 3. tcrOiii), I eat, Impf. paOiov ; Fut. eSopai ; Perf* 
 iSij^OKa ;—($Ar-) Aor. t^ayov, Inf. <paytiv ; Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass. E^h^tcrpai ; Aor. Pass, i )$todriv ; Verbal- 
 adjectives, kStoTog, i^forloy. 
 
 4. Z(ato)£j,I live, (on the Contraction, see § 97, 8), 
 Impf. t %tov ; Fut. finbaopai ; Aor. t(3iu)v (§ 142, 9) ; 
 Perf. (5e(3uoica ; Perf. Pass. j3f/3t(t>rcu, (3E(3iivpEvog. 
 
 5. op(aw)<jj, I see , Impf. eiopwi /; Perf. kwpaKa, (on 
 the Aug., see § 87, 6);—(J A-) Aor. uSov, 73w, 
 
 —(On the Perf. II. o73a, I know, see 
 § 143);— (’On-) Fut. oxpopai, (II. Pers. ox^el, § 82, 2); 
 Mid. or Pass, opibpai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, kwpapai or 
 w^at, w^cn, &c., Inf. HxpQai ; Aor. Mid. elSopvv, 
 iBiaOai, iSov (and with the meaning ecce, iSov), [in 
 its simple' form it occurs onJ j in poetry]; Aor. Pass. 
 uxpOrjv (visus sum), otyOrivcu Fut. otpOiicrofiaij Verbal- 
 adjectives, bpardg, otttoq. 
 
 T 9 £ X W ’ ^run; —(APAM-) Fut. dpapovpai; Aor. 
 topapov) Perf. Sedpapr)Ka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 3f3pd- 
 pripai . 
 
 7. I bear (’01-) Fut. our a>(’ErK-, § 89, 
 Obs.) Aor. pvejKOv (more ra/ely rivEyKa), Opt. kvky- 
 Koipi, &c. (more rarely - aipi , &c.), Inf. htyiaiv, Part. 
 ivty K u>v (more rarely eviy K ag), Imper. Uey K £, -etw (and, 
 more frequently, -arw, &c.) ;— (’ENEK-) Perf. kvpvo- 
 \a; Perf. Mid. or Pass, evrjVEypai, -y%ai, -yKTcu or iu- 
 7/vtKTat ; Aor. Mid. 7/veyKctprjv, EVEyicai , - ckjOcii, -apevoc ; 
 Aor. Pass. rpjt-^Orjv; Fut. IvexOrioopai (more rarely 
 olrrOiiaopai); Verbal-adj ectives, oiarog, oIoteoq.— 
 Mid. 
 
 v $wi (§ 135,8), Isap, Impf. ;— (’En-) Aor. I. 
 tin a, uirag, elttute, Imper. uttov, el 7 rciru), Inf. thrai ; 
 Aor. II. ehrov, £i7T(jj, ttKoipi, ELITE (in its Compounds, 
 as TTpoeiTTE, the accent is thrown back), eItteIv, elttwv. 
 From the Epic Pres, upw are derived, Fut. Ipw; Perf. 
 tiprjKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eipijpaL ; Fut. III. tlpfoo- 
 pai. From PE-, Aor. Pass. IpphOvjv, pijOrivai , priOtigi 
 Fut. Pass. priOi'iaopai ; Verbal-adjectives, prjroQ, py 
 
ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 249 
 
 § 126.] 
 
 reog. —Mid. only in Compounds , Fut. inrepovpai and 
 Aor. I. airdnadOai, to deny , despair , like aTrmruv. 
 
 LXII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Ay*vaxr(lu)&, I am-displeased, 
 am-angry, am-discontented, 
 ivac-xga^a;, / cry out. 
 ir^x'iats, truly, accurately. 
 (Sgeidus, -ua, -v, slow. 
 yXai-xog, *1, Owl. 
 ii'dco, I fear ; Perf. Vthotxa. (with 
 Pres, meaning). 
 
 %a/u,a t -arts, to, house, home, 
 iwrnov, •ou, to, dream, vision. 
 \%-t7vrov, I tell-out, utter, disclose, 
 ippeufivus, vigorously , firmly. 
 iiifiouXos, -ou, one-who-consults- 
 well, clever, intelligent. 
 Xw(eeu)u, 1 grieve (trans.), an¬ 
 noy, distress. 
 
 petxoos, -&, -ov, long, tedious. 
 prioru, not-yet. 
 
 o^yl^opai, (with Pass. Aor.), 1 
 am-angry. 
 
 *oc£outcirulli)xn, -vs, n, a trust, 
 deposit, pledge. 
 
 •rcc^oc-T^e^u, (Acc.), I run-past, 
 pass-by. 
 
 <ra^oc-(fie^M, I bear-past. 
 
 •regus, -oct os, to, end, limit. 
 <ri£i-ofJcu)w, I overlook, neglect. 
 or£o-sg%opoci, / go-before. 
 
 Troci^co, I sneeze, 
 pivpot, -ccros, to', stream. 
 a<p6l^a, very, exceedingly, very- 
 much, vehemently. 
 
 1. Kai 1 flpaSvg euf3ovXog e I X e 2 ra\vv avSpa $uo- 
 K(ov. 2. O i ’AOrjvaioi OepiGTOzXea GTparrjyov eUovro 
 tv rdg UepGizipTroXEpip. 3. ’OSinrorEuc dg''AiSov peya 
 Siupa ^ X 0 e v. 4. l 'Hv civ 3 poipav e A y g, ravrrjv 
 <ptpe zcii pi) ayavazrei. 5. AvirovpE9\ av irrapy rtg‘ 
 av E y l iry zaziog 4 ., dpytZdpe9a' av id y Tig lvvirviov y 
 <r<p<)8pa (jHifiovyeOa’ av yXavZ, dvazpdyy , Sedoizapev. 
 
 6. M?) TTIGTEVE Ta\lGTa, TTplv ClTpEKtlOg TTEpag OTpei 5 . 
 
 7. Mcrp/mc 0 a ye. 8. OnSt elg 'Opripov E y i prize 
 pazpov. 9. w Ogng Xdyovg, wg irapazaraOrizriv , Aa» 
 
 v 6 ' «* »5 1 / •> y r y / 
 
 piov eqeittev, acizog egtiv, n ayav azpariig. 
 10. M rj roil to fiXexpyg, el vtiorepog Xeyu) 7 , aXA’ u 
 (ftpovovvTwv Tovg Xdyovg avSpiov e p io. 11. Ilin0£t 
 perpfiog Tovg cnro9avdvrag tpiXovg’ ov yap Tedvrizaaiv , 
 aAA a aurr/v ocov , ?/v tt aaiv £ A v e i v egtiv avay- 
 
 zrj, tt p o eX ri Xv 0 a g i v. 12. tEUvovg 7 revrjTag prj 
 TrapaSpapyg iSw v. 13. flora/ioc Tie /cat pevpa 
 (3tcudv egtiv 6 alo>v’ ctpa te yap io 0 0 p zal tt a p £~ 
 v rj v £ k r a t Kai aAXo 7rapa(pipErai, ro 3f 9 e v e^Orp 
 
 M 2 
 
250 ANOMALOUS VERBS. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 g et a i. 14. E v e y k e Xvirrjv icai [3Xa(3riv ippw 
 [itvwg. 15. 4>i'Aov 8i’ opyrjv ev Kcncolg /xrj rr e p i i g, 
 16. M^7ra> fiiyav e l 7T rj g, 7rpty 10 reXiVT^Gavr 11 t g, 
 
 1 though. 2 overtakes. § 152, 10. Obs. 3 fa «» = whatever. 4 Mt 
 kcckus =to speakwords of ill omen. 5 § 82, 2. 6 having received 
 words as a deposit , i. e. having been told a secret in confidence. 
 
 7 whether I who speak ana a young man ; (nwn^os = junior). 
 
 8 Neuter Verbs of motion take the Acc. ; § 159, 3. (6). 9 instead of 
 
 aXXo ds. 10 usually <r^iv «v, 11 SC. rov (Zlov. 
 
 (1. What is the derivation of s S/iovXes? Pres. Ind. form of 
 eTxsl 3. Of -fiXfovt 4. Why is ayava*T£/not perispomenon ? 
 5. What Mood and Tense is Traoy ? What Verb serves as the 
 Pres. Ind. of '/£>> ? l 6. Of oypu ? 7. Of ipdyi ? 11. Quantity of the 
 a in -rooiXvxMeto’i* ? Nature of the Reduplication in it ? 13. Deri« 
 vation of pupa. ?) 
 
 1. The enemies have taken the city. 2. Themis- 
 tocles was chosen general 1 by the Athenians. 3. 
 Come 2 , O friend, and see 2 the unfortunate man! 
 
 4. If-thou-art-hungry 3 , thou wilt eat with-relish 4 . 
 
 5. The boy has eaten. 6. The provisions are eaten 5 , 
 7. I have seen the unfortunate man. 8. The enemies 
 were seen 2 . 9. If-thou-seest 6 thy poor friends, thou 
 wilt not pass them by. 10. The boy has run very- 
 quickly. 11. The grief was borne 2 by the father 
 with-firmness. 12. What has been said to thee by 
 thy (=the) friend ? 
 
 1 Nom. After the Pass. Verb. *Aor. *r=being hungry. See 
 § 97, 3. up. *Perf. 6 Aor. Part. 
 
§ 128.] 
 
 VERBS IN - 111 . 
 
 251 
 
 VERBS IN -/ii. 
 
 § 127. Peculiarities in the Conjugation of Verbs 
 
 in -/it. 
 
 1. The chief peculiarity in the conjugation of 
 Verbs in -pi is, that, in the Pres, and Impfi, and fre¬ 
 quently also in the Aor. II., Act. arid Mid., they take 
 Personal-endings different from those of Verbs in-o»,and 
 have no Mood-vowel in the Ind. of these Tenses. The 
 formation of all the other Tenses of these Verbs is 
 like that of Verbs in -w, with some few exceptions. 
 
 2. Some Verbs in -pi, which have a monosyllabic 
 Root, take, in the Pres, and Impf., a Reduplication 
 (comp. § 123), which consists in repeating the first 
 Consonant of theRoot with i , when the Root begins with a 
 single Consonant or with a Mute and Liquid i but when 
 the Root begins with <rr, ttt, or with an aspirated 
 Vowel, i with the rough Breathing is placed before, the 
 Root. There are only a few Verbs of this kind; 
 
 e. g.— 
 
 AO- Vi-lv-fju, I give , XPA- */-*£>»-£<, I lend, 
 
 2TA- 't-ffTn-pt, I place, * E - ’i-n-Pb I send. 
 
 § 128. Classification of Verbs in -pi. 
 
 Verbs in -pi are divided into two principal 
 classes i - 
 
 I Those which affix the Personal-ending at once 
 to the Root-vowel, the Root of Verbs of this class 
 ends,—• 
 
 (1) in «, e. g. 1-trrn-fje.i, I place, 
 
 ( 2 ) _ g, — ri-fa-fu, I put, 
 
 ( 3 ) — «, — I give, 
 
 (4) — <, — I will go, 
 
 Root 2 TA- 
 
 _ 0E- 
 
 — AO- 
 — 
 
252 
 
 verbs in -fu. [Chap. VIII. 
 
 ^^ose w ^ich affix to tlieir Roots the Syllable 
 ~ vvv or ~ v y, an d then append to this Syllable the Per¬ 
 sonal-endings. The Root of Verbs of this class 
 ends,— 
 
 A. In one of the three Vowels , a, c, o, and affixes 
 -wv :— 
 
 (1) in a, e. g. ffx3i-vvZ.fi!, I scatter , Root 2KEAA- 
 
 }o{ ~ — xo i\ vvZ :f “' 1 sat kfy’ — kope- 
 
 (o) o, — ffrgu>-vvZ-fii, I spread out , — 2TPO-. 
 
 B. In a Consonant, and affixes -vv :— 
 
 (1) in a Mute , e. g. 'htlx-vZ-fu, I shew, 
 
 (2) — Liquid, — ofi-vu-fu, I swear, 
 
 Root AEIK- 
 — ’0M-. 
 
 Obs. Of class II. only the Verb ff(Lt-VVU 
 Root 2BE-), forms an Aor. II., viz. gV/3«v. 
 
 / 
 
 quench, (from the 
 
 § 129. Mood-vowels. 
 
 1 - The Pres., Impf. and Aor . II. of the Ind. have 
 no Mood-vowel , and hence the Personal-endings are 
 attached directly to the Root; e. g._ 
 
 Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. 
 
 Act. 7 - <r <r a - fitv \-ri-6i-fnv 
 
 Mid. i-ff r a - fiiSu. 1 - r ! - 6 s - /m 6a. 
 
 Aor. II. Ind. 
 
 6-00 - fiiv 
 * - £ 0 - filOtt,. 
 
 2. The Subj. has the Mood-vowels to and r\ , (like 
 Verbs in -w), but these Vowels combine with the 
 Characteristic-vowel, so as to form one sound, (as in 
 \ eibs in -am, -gai, and -ow) ;—hence, the following 
 deviations from the conjugation of Verbs in -w, with 
 respect to contraction , are to be noted, viz.:_* 
 
 «« and are contracted into * and » respectively, (not, as in 
 contract Verbs in -au, into a and a) ; 
 
 fl V is contracted into Z>, (not, as in contract Verbs in -o», into 
 i e. g.— 
 
PERSONAL ENDINGS. 
 
 253 
 
 § 130.] 
 
 1 - (TtSl - Ct> = l-ffrru 
 
 <rr<x-a> = (ttu 
 •n-Si-u = rt-(S> 
 
 2 i-'i'o-u = 'bi-’hoj 
 
 t-era-ys = i-rrys 
 cra-ys = <rr>k 
 n-0i-ys — n-0ys 
 jf = i/Syg 
 
 t-crra-y-r at = l-ffry-rat 
 
 — - - Ti-Qu-fteu 
 It-'So-y =. 
 
 0 ? BS ‘ K™ 3 form of of 'lirrnfM and r/V' is like the 
 
 bubj. of the two Aorists Pass, of a// Verbs ; e. g. rt/ipAS, -y S , -y, & c ., 
 -ys,p &C , from rver-rtu ; era-0a, -yg t -y t &c., from^W^/. 
 
 UBS. 2. The tfufy*. of Verbs in -up, is like that of Verbs in -6a>: 
 e. g. biiKvuu, .vys, &C. 
 
 3. The Impf. and //. of the Opt. have the 
 Mood-vowel, i, which is attached directly to the 
 Characteristic-vowel, and with it forms a diphthong ; 
 
 e. g.— 
 
 Impf Act. 
 
 Opt. l-era-i-yv = l-crrat-yv 
 n-h-l-yv = n-Ou-yv 
 ^,-^0-,-yV = jv 
 
 or. //. ^4c£. 
 ara,-yv 
 
 'bol-yv 
 
 Impf Mid. 
 
 ,-era,-pyv 
 
 rt-fai-pyv 
 
 $i-$0i-pyv. 
 
 Obs. 3. The form of the Opt. of Verbs in -p, with the Root 
 ending in -s {riiyp,), is like the Opt. of the two Aorists Pass, of all 
 Verbs je. g. era-hi-yv, rvQ-Ot, -yv, ruvr-u-yv. 
 
 Obs. 4. The Impf Opt. of Verbs in -up,, (like the Snbj. Pres.), 
 follows the analogy of Verbs m -u ; e. g. iaxwoipu 
 
 § 130. Personal-endings. 
 
 1. The following are the Personal-endings of the 
 Active :— 
 
 (a) Indicative Present ,— 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 2 . 
 3. 
 
 Dual. 2. 
 3. 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 2 . 
 3. 
 
 - (*• 
 
 - s 
 
 • a, (v) 
 
 -to v 
 
 - T Of 
 
 - P i v 
 
 - T S 
 
 - atr i (v), for [- a v e /] 
 
 'i-ery-pt, 
 
 \t-trry-i , 
 
 V-o - T»-o'/(y), 
 
 ’,-era-rov, 
 
 c; _ ^ 
 
 c/ ^ 
 
 i-trroi-ft'v, 
 
 et v 
 
 i-trroc-rz, 
 
 [/-era-a «=] /- <rra- 07 (v) 
 
 To -*«(»), the ending of the III. Pers. PI., is prefixed «, which 
 thus becomes -*»«(») ; by the laws of euphony (§ 8, 8), this, a^ain 
 becomes -««*(*). In the case of Roots ending in -a, this « coalesces 
 with the ending -aov(v); e. g,— 
 
254 
 
 VERBS IN -fit. 
 
 [Chap. YIIL 
 
 l-ffTx-ai(v) from Ua<Ta,-a.ffi{y)j 
 
 T/-6£-Uffi(v) f 
 
 2/-$o-aai(v), 
 
 oitx-vu-aai(v). 
 
 (b) The Personal-endings of the Pres, and A or. II. 
 Subj. do not differ from those of Verbs in -w. 
 
 (c) The following are the Personal-endings of the 
 Imp/, and A or. II. Ind.— 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 
 -1 
 
 Impf. 
 
 7-; TTfj-r, 
 
 \-rl-6vt, 
 
 2. 
 
 - s 
 
 
 7-<TTVS, 
 
 i-Ti-6v-s, (Obs. 6) 
 
 3. 
 
 — 
 
 
 7- a tv, 
 
 i-rt-6t j, (Obs. 6), 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 - TO V 
 
 Aor. II. 
 
 l-fTTV-TOV, 
 
 U A 
 
 3. 
 
 - T V V 
 
 
 t (TTrj-TVV, 
 
 1-61-tvv , 
 
 Plural 1. 
 
 - fA.l'T 
 
 
 'i-aTv-fA.lv, 
 
 l -6l-fA.lv, 
 
 2. 
 
 - T l 
 
 
 i-arv-Ti, 
 
 s-dl-Tl, 
 
 3. 
 
 - a at 
 
 
 i-aTv-aeiv. 
 
 i-6t-aav. 
 
 Obs. 1. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all Verbs is like the 
 
 Aor. II. iaTvv, e. g. i tjt-vv, t-aTx-6vv, -vs, •v, - yitov, -vtvv, -vfA.lv, •vrt, 
 -wrx». 
 
 (d) The Personal-endings of the Impf. and Aor. 11. 
 Opt., ( except in the I. Pers. Sing.), differ from those 
 of the Opt. in the historical Tenses of Verbs in -w, 
 only in being preceded by rj; e. g.— 
 
 I. Pers. Sing. arcti-vv, t-arai-v v ; 6ei-vv, rt-Ou-m ; $«/•«», di-doi-vv. 
 
 Obs. 2. In the Dual and PI. Impf. Opt. the v is usually dropped, 
 and the ending of the III. Pers. PI. -vcrxv is regularly shortened 
 into -iv; e. g.— 
 
 Ti6il~VfA.IV = Tl6l7fA.lt iffTai-VTl= \ttx7ti 
 
 TiSiincrccv = Ti6i7iv liloi-va-uv— h$o7iv. 
 
 % * 
 
 The same remark is true of the Opt. Aorists Pass, of all Verbs ; 
 e. g. rvQ6iiyifA,iv = TvQ6i7fA.lv, TVTiivfA.iv = TV7Ti7fA.iv (like Tt6iiw through¬ 
 out ) —On the other hand, in the Opt. Aor II. Act. oi7arvfju, rt- 
 6v(a.i, 'bilufAi, the shortened forms are very rare , except in the III. 
 Pers. Plural. 
 
 (e) The following are the Personal-endings of the 
 Pres, and Aor. II. Imper. — 
 
PERSONAL ENDINGS. 
 
 255 
 
 § 130.] 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 • d, 
 
 ift-ard-di), 
 
 (ri-dt-dt), 
 
 (S/-So A), 
 
 3. 
 
 -TO) 
 
 i- ard- too, 
 
 n-de-ra), 
 
 $/-$o-ru, 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 - <r o v 
 
 'i-arct-rov. 
 
 TI-dt-TOV , 
 
 S/ S o-rov, 
 
 3. 
 
 - TO) V 
 
 l-ard-ruv, 
 
 Ti-di-TUV, 
 
 Si-So-TdWV, 
 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 - re 
 
 'l-ara.-'rt. 
 
 ri-fft-r s, 
 
 Si-S 0-TS, 
 
 3. 
 
 - r a a a » i-ard- moaav 
 
 ri-di-ruactv 
 
 Si Vo-Tuaa* 
 
 » 
 
 
 Or i-ardvreuv. 
 
 Tt-devT/uv. 
 
 Si S OVTUV. 
 
 Obs. 3. The II. Pers. Sing. Pres. Imper. drops the ending -di, and, 
 as a compensation, lengthens the short Characteristic-vowel, viz., a 
 into n, t into u, o into ev, v into v ; e. g.— 
 
 'i-amt-di becomes 'l- am rt-6e-d» becomes ri-du 
 
 Vi-%o-di — S«-Saj/ ^ux-vv-dt — Vix-vv. 
 
 The ending -di in the Pres. Imper. is retained in but a very few 
 Verbs. In the Aor. II. of ridvfu, wpi and V'&apt, the ending -di is 
 softened into -g; e. g. de-di becomes deg, i-di = Vs, Vo-di = Vos; but in 
 the Aor. II. of 'lampi the ending di is retained, (am-d/), also in the 
 two Aorists Pass, of all Verbs, e. g. mm-dt, oraihvdv-n (instead of 
 *cuhvdv-di, § 8, Obs. 8). In the Compounds of o-tj id/, the ending 
 •Hd/ is shortened into -a j e. g. •ra^ao’ra, dt&rrd. 
 
 (f) The ending of the Pres, and Aor. II. Inf. is - vai. 
 This ending is affixed, in the Pres., to the short Cha¬ 
 racteristic-vowel ; but in the Aor II., to the length¬ 
 ened Vowel, (a being lengthened into rj, a into ai, o 
 into ov); thus:— 
 
 Pres. I- ara-teti. ri-de-vui. Si-S«-»*i. Sn*-»v*>*«i. 
 
 Aor. II. a r fj - v a i. d i 7 - v a i. S ov -v cot. 
 
 Obs. 4. The Inf. of the two Aorists Pass, of all Verbs is like 
 
 aarjveu • e. g. rum-vat, fZov\svd?j-va,/. 
 
 (g) The endings of the Participle in the Pres. 
 and Aor. II. are -vrg, -vraa, -vr, which combine with 
 the Characteristic-vowel according to the laws of 
 euphony (§ 8, 8); thus:— 
 
 i-a r d-v <r s =/-a <r a f, i-a a a. a a., i-a rdv. 
 n-d e - v r s =r/-d t / s , - e i a « , -a. 
 
 Si- 5 6-v r s =Si-S o v s , -o v a a. , - o v. 
 
 %uK-y v- » r s =h/x-v vs, -v a a, - vv. 
 
 Obs. 5. The Participles of the two Aorists Pass, of all Verbs are 
 like the Part. ndeig or diis ; e. g. rwr-us, -i7a», -ev, fiovksvd-tig, -e7a<e. 
 
 Z ~ 6 
 
 a r a s , o' r a a a , a r a v. 
 deis,ds7au, dev. 
 
 S o 6 s , S o u a a , S o v. 
 
256 
 
 VERBS IN -fu. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 2 ‘ T J?® Personal-endings of the Middle are like 
 
 ™ ose o* Ver £ s m thr oughout, that in the II. 
 Jr’ers. king., Pres, and Impf, Ind. and Imper., the Per- 
 
 sonal-endmgs retain their full form, -eat and -<ro. See 
 tne Paradigms. 
 
 • 2? S * 6, 11 T ^ e Impf. Act. of ri6*,fu, {except the I. Pers. Sine.), 
 is genemHy formed from Tl©Eg and that of Vilco/u from AIAOO, 
 with the usual contractions. In Verbs in -*>, the collateral forms 
 
 rrTpZ e U SJ al r f ?/ r x the ! n ? re Pres ‘ and Im Pf-> (especially for the 
 
 the PrZ S ‘<fb Ind A’r an i f /? r the Partici P le ; and exclusively for 
 
 well^t £ lbp a « d Imp/ - °& ; e - *• trotyl, as 
 
 Weil as tvduxvufct, ofAvupi, iTuppiywy.!. 
 
 Formation of the Tenses. 
 
 § 131. I. First Class of Verbs in ~pn. 
 
 P In forming the Tenses of the entire Act., as well 
 as the Fut. and Aor. I. Mid ., the short Characteristic -- 
 vowel is lengthened, viz., « into n, e into r, and (in the 
 Per/. Act. of nOnpi and 117 / 11 ) into «, and o into o>;— 
 but m short Characteristic-vowel is retained in the 
 remaining Tenses of the Mid. and throughout the 
 Pass., with the exception of the Perf. and Plpf., Mid. 
 wid Pass. of TiOrfgi and 'In pi, in which the ei of the 
 n^ C ^‘ ( Tt ® £lKa, > T lOeipai, eiKa, ti/uai) is retained. 
 '^■ or *.P ^ct. an( I Mid. of TiOnfJu, 'ingi and 
 oidw/ii has as its Tense-characteristic k, not a, thus:_ 
 
 n-x-u, t-^U-K-et. 
 
 These forms of the Aor. I. Act. (Wr, K a, 7j Ka and Arn¬ 
 ica) are, however, used only in the Ind., and, gene¬ 
 rally, in the Sing, only ; in the other Numbers, as well 
 as in the other Moods and the Participials, the forms 
 of the Aor. II. are always used. Also the forms of the 
 A 01 . II. Mid. of ndnyi. 117/11 and are used in- 
 
VERBS IN -pi. 
 
 257 
 
 § 132.] 
 
 stead of the Aor. 1. Mid. —On the contrary, the Sing. 
 forms of the Aor. II. Ind. Act. of rtOrigi, m/u and 
 $i$wf.u (viz. Wriv, rjv, eSwv) are not in use. 
 
 3. The Verb itrrijjut forms the Aor. I. Act. and Mid., 
 (like Verbs in -w), with the Tense-characteristic <x; 
 e. g. t-oTrj-tx-a, l-(TTY\-(T-anr]v. The Aor. II. Mid. I- 
 <TTafiY]vis not in use. Some other Verbs, however, 
 have the Aor. II. Mid.; e. g. brrapriv, Itt pLagrjv. 
 
 Obs. 1. The Aor. II. Pass, and the Put. II. Pass, are wanting 
 in these Verbs, as also the Fut. III., except in 'Itrrnpi, the Fut III. 
 of which is to-r^u) (old Att.) and itrr&opxt. 
 
 Obs. 2. With reference to the meaning of the Verb Itrrvpi, ob¬ 
 serve :—(1) The Pres., Imp/., Fut. and Aor. I. Act. have a tran¬ 
 sitive meaning, (‘ I place') ; —(2) The Aor. II., Perf. and Plpf. 
 Act. and the Fut. III. have a reflexive or intransitive meaning, 
 (‘ I place myself,' * I stand"), viz. e<rrw, I placed myself, or I stood, 
 hrrvKx, I have placed myself, I stand, (sto), iarrixav, (stabam), icrrilu, 
 \<rrrfeop«.i, (stabo), [<b<psar>j&, I shall withdraw]; — (3) The Mid. 
 signifies either ‘ I place for myself' ‘ 1 stand,' (consisto), or ‘ I let 
 myself be placed,' i.e. ‘ I am placed.' 
 
 § 132. II. Second Class of Verbs in -gi. 
 
 
 There is no difficulty in forming the Tenses of 
 Verbs of the second class (§ 128). All the Tenses 
 are formed from the Root, after rejecting the ending 
 -vvvgi or -vvgi. Verbs whose simple Root ends in o, 
 but which in the Pres, lengthen the o into w, retain 
 the u) through all the Tenses ; e. g, arpto-wv-gi, 
 vvv-j ui, pio-vvv-gi, \io-vvv-gi, Fut. arpio-cno, &c. But 
 Verbs, whose simple Root ends in a Liquid , in form¬ 
 ing some of the Tenses, assume a Theme ending in a 
 Vowel i e. g. op-'vv-fu, Aor. log -o-aa (from OMO£2), 
 The Aor. II. and the Fut. II. Pass, are found in a 
 few Verbs only; e. g. Z,tvy-w-gi, Aor. II. Pass, 
 ; Fut. II. Pass. Zuyfoogai. 
 
258 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -jmi. [CHAP. VIII 
 
 § 133. PARADIGMS OF 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 0 
 
 cn 
 
 0) 
 
 CO 
 
 05 
 
 *0 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 ^ 05 
 
 <D G 
 
 -O ?3 O 
 
 2TA- 
 
 0E- 
 
 AO- 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 » a 
 
 CD 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 g § 53 
 
 fc * 
 
 place. 
 
 put. 
 
 give. 
 
 shew. 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 1 l-(JTT]-fXl , 
 
 
 Si-Suf-iui, 
 
 8 e'uc-vv/u 1 , 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 \-(JTY)-Q, 
 
 riOr)- c, 
 
 8 i- 8 u)-g, 
 
 8 eik-vv-q.. 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 w 
 
 C-GTT)- 
 
 ri-Orj- 
 
 8 i- 8 u)- 
 
 Seik-vv- 
 
 
 w 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 m{y), 
 
 
 m(v), 
 
 <Tl(v), 
 
 
 hW 
 
 H 
 
 2. 
 
 « W 
 
 i-ora-rov. 
 
 tl-Oe-tov, 
 
 Si-So-rov, 
 
 § / w 
 
 ocuc-i/u- 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 TOV t 
 
 
 Q 
 
 3. 
 
 i-ora-rov. 
 
 ti-Qe-tov, 
 
 Si-So-roVf 
 
 ^ / w 
 
 OtlK-VV- 
 
 
 1—( 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 
 
 
 TOVf 
 
 
 
 7-ora-jUfi/, 
 
 tl-Oe-jiev , 
 
 Si-So-juev, 
 
 t \J 
 
 CEIK-VV- 
 
 r <l 
 
 
 2 . 
 
 w ^ 
 
 t-ara-rc, 
 
 tl-Oe-te, 
 
 Sl-So-TE, 
 
 Htv, 
 
 w 
 
 OUK-VU-76, 
 
 Qs 
 
 
 3. 
 
 t-ora- 
 
 tl-Oe-u- 
 
 Si-So-a- 
 
 $ i 
 
 CEIK-VV- 
 
 
 
 
 <n{v) 2 . 
 
 <n(v) 2 . 
 
 Gl(v) 2 . 
 
 aai(v) 2 . 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 i-crrw, 
 
 TL-Oid, 
 
 Si-Sio, 
 
 £ i 
 
 0£ifc-nv-(o, 
 
 
 w 
 
 2 . 
 
 i-orp-c, 
 
 ri-Orj-Q , 
 
 $i- 8 qj- Ci 
 
 Seik-vv- 
 
 
 ►H 
 
 H 
 
 U 
 
 ►z 
 
 3. 
 
 D.l. 
 
 t-crry, 
 
 rt-0p, 
 
 81 - 8 $, 
 
 pc> &C. 
 
 
 P 
 
 2. 
 
 i-arij-rov. 
 
 Ti-Orj-rov, 
 
 Sl-Sid-TOV, 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 £> 
 
 3. 
 
 i-arrj-TOv, 
 
 TL-0r)-TOV , 
 
 Sl-SlO'TOVt 
 
 
 
 72 
 
 P.l. 
 
 i-arw-juev, 
 
 TL-Oij-flEV , 
 
 Sl-Su)-/UEV, 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-GTij-TE, 
 
 TL-Orj-TEf 
 
 Sl-$io-T£, 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 l-aro)- 
 
 tl-Qut 
 
 Si-S(o- 
 
 
 
 
 
 m(v). | 
 
 ai(y). 
 
 <rt(v). 
 
 
 1 And ouxvv-u, -us, &c., [especially hixviaun^)]. Also, Impf. 
 i foUvuov, -Vis, -Vi(v) ; Participle usually hixvv-av, -our*, -ov (§ 130, 
 Obs. 6). 
 
 2 See § 130, 1. (a). 
 
§ 133.] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/it. 
 
 259 
 
 VERBS IN -in- 
 
260 
 
 paradigms of verbs in [Chap. VIII. 
 
 
§ 133.] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/ m. 
 
 261 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 2TA- 
 
 place. 
 
 0E- 
 
 put. 
 
 AO- 
 
 give. 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 shew. 
 
 i-GTa-GO 3 
 
 and i-gto>, 
 i-ara-aOu), 
 
 tl-9e-go 3 
 and ri-OoVy 
 
 Ti-Oe-aO u>, 
 
 St-So-cro 3 
 and Si-Sov, 
 
 Si-$d-a0io, 
 
 dsLic-vv-Go 3 , 
 
 Suk-vv-gOu), 
 
 1r(TT a-aOov, 
 
 Tl-Oe-oOov, 
 
 §i-So-o9ov, 
 
 Selk-vv-g9ov, 
 
 i-(TTa-cr0(i)v, 
 
 tl0e-g0(vv, 
 
 $i-$o-(jO(ov , 
 
 SeIK-VV-g9(l>Vi 
 
 'L-ara-aOe, 
 
 Ti-Qt-aOej 
 
 Si-So-oOs, 
 
 Se'ik-vv-g9e . 
 
 i-GTa-oOcj- 
 aav and 
 l-(TTa-<jOu)V. 
 
 ri-Ot-aOto- 
 
 aav and 
 
 TL-Oe-aOujv . 
 
 di-do-oOu)- 
 aav and 
 
 dl-$6-o0b)V. 
 
 §eik-vv-g9w- 
 Gav and 
 Seik-vv-g9u)v. 
 
 'i-CTTa-aOai. 
 
 r L-Ot-aQai. 
 
 $i-So-g6cu. 
 
 8eiic-vv-g0cu. 
 
 i-ara-fizvoQ, 
 ~T], "OV. 
 
 Tt-6i~IUL£VOQ, 
 
 -rj, -ov. 
 
 Si-So-i uEvog, 
 
 -rj, -ov. 
 
 $EtK-VV-/U£- 
 
 vog,-r}, -ov. 
 
 c S 
 
 j-OT(x-/uiriv, 
 
 l‘OTa-GO 3 
 
 and i-gtoj, 
 
 tt w 
 
 i-ora-ro, 
 
 l-Ti-Oi-firiv , 
 
 i-ri-Oe-ao 3 
 and t-r£- 
 dov, 
 
 i-Ti-Oe-ro, 
 
 i-CL-do-juiriv, 
 
 t-St-So-cro 3 
 
 and 
 
 8ov, 
 
 6-S l-So'TO, 
 
 1 s & 
 
 £-0£fK-VV- 
 
 fir)v, 
 
 t-SetK-vu-aro 8 , 
 
 t-SftK-vv-ro, 
 
 3 See § 130, 2. 
 
. 
 
 ■. *31 
 
 +■ * ‘ B 
 
 262 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fit. fClIAP. VIII. 
 
 
 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 • 
 
 
 00 
 
 c?_ 
 
 09 
 
 'O 
 
 oo 
 
 ^ 00 
 
 5> a 
 
 2TA- 
 
 0E- 
 
 AO- 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 s = « 
 
 5 04 53 
 
 1 £ P 
 
 place. 
 
 put. 
 
 give. 
 
 shew. 
 
 
 
 D.l. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-arci-rov, 
 
 e-ti-Be- 
 
 l-Si-So- 
 
 > w 
 
 E-CHK-VV- 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 TOV, 
 
 tov, 
 
 TOV, 
 
 
 w 
 
 3. 
 
 r >J 
 
 i-ara-Triv , 
 
 e-ti-Qe- 
 
 £-St-3o- 
 
 •> ^ * i 
 
 E-OEtK-VV- 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 rrjv, 
 
 rrjv, 
 
 rrjv, 
 
 
 O 
 
 HH 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 'l-ara-fiev, 
 
 £-r/- (if- 
 
 E-SlSo- 
 
 ■> § / ^ 
 E-CEIK-VV - 
 
 
 P 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 ptv. 
 
 JAEV, 
 
 jUEV, 
 
 
 i—i 
 
 2. 
 
 a * 
 
 i-ora-TE, 
 
 e-ti-Qe-te, 
 
 E-SlSo-TE, 
 
 » « 
 E-CEIK~VV- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 g 
 
 
 3. 
 
 i-OTa-oav. 
 
 e-ti-Qe- 
 
 E-SlSo- 
 
 e-Seik-vv- 
 
 vs 
 
 
 
 
 GUV. 
 
 GOV. 
 
 GCIV. 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 [-(TTClL-riV , 
 
 ti-Oei-tiv, 
 
 Si-Sof-rjv, 
 
 CElK~ VV~ 
 
 § 
 
 35J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Oi/ii, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 t-arat-ijv, 
 
 Ti-0Ei-r)Q, 
 
 Si-Soi-rjg, 
 
 0££ic-i;u- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OfC, 
 
 & 
 
 
 3. 
 
 l-nrai-rj, 
 
 tl-Oei-ti, 
 
 Si-Soi-rj, 
 
 &c. 
 
 
 W 
 
 >• 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 
 2. 
 
 i-gtclX- 
 
 ti-OeX- 
 
 Si-SoT- 
 
 
 
 -< 
 
 
 i 
 
 „ 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 TOV , 
 
 TOV , 
 
 TOV , 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 3. 
 
 l-OTai- 
 
 tl-Oel-t r]v, 
 
 Si-Sot- 
 
 
 
 
 
 rrjv, 
 
 
 TTJV, 
 
 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 i-aral- 
 
 Tl-OEl-fiEV , 
 
 Si-SoX- 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 ti-QeX-te, 
 
 flEV, 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-OTCU-TE , 
 
 Sl-Soi-TE, 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 O. 
 
 i-oraX-Ev. 
 
 ti-QeX-ev. 
 
 1 
 
 SlSoX-EV. 
 
 ! 
 
 See § 130, Obs. 2. 
 
 1 
 
§ 133.] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -pc. 
 
 233 
 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 2TA- 
 
 0E- 
 
 AO- 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 j place. 
 
 put. 
 
 give. 
 
 s/iOtf. 
 
 i-GTa-p£0ov, 
 
 £-ri-0£-jU£- 
 
 E-^L-^O-pE- 
 
 E-^ElK-VV-pE- 
 
 0OV, 
 
 Oov , 
 
 Oov, 
 
 ?-< Tra-aOov , 
 
 e-tl-0e-g0ov, 
 
 e-El-Eo-gOov, 
 
 e-Eeik-vv- 
 gOov , 
 
 l-GTa-crOriv, 
 
 e-ti-Oe-gOy^v , 
 
 E-Si-$6-g6t]V, 
 
 f-Sf/IC-l'U- 
 gOy]V , 
 
 r z n 
 
 i-Gra-pEua , 
 
 E-n-Oi-ptOa, 
 
 l-Ei-Eo-pE0a, 
 
 > $ -s 
 
 £-0£lfC-l»l/- 
 
 /U£0a, 
 
 'l'GTCi-gQe, 
 
 £-rt'0£~(T0£, 
 
 e-Si-Eo-gOe, 
 
 e-Eeik-vv- 
 
 gOe, 
 
 1-ara-vTO. 
 
 e-ti-Oe-vto. 
 
 £-Sl-$0-VTO. 
 
 e-Eeik-vv- 
 
 VTO. 
 
 t * 2 
 
 L-araL-jJLY]v , 
 
 Tl-OoL-prjV 3 , 
 
 % 
 
 $L-$oi-flY]V 3 , 
 
 ^ / 
 CElK~VV-Ol“ 
 
 jurjv, 
 
 t-oraT-o, 
 
 Tl-0(H-O , 
 
 Ei-Eoi-o, 
 
 SftK-1'U-OtO, 
 
 &c. 
 
 i-arai-T o, 
 
 tl-6o7-to , 
 
 Ei-Eoi-to, 
 
 
 l-arai-fjLtOov , 
 
 ti-Ool-heQov, 
 
 Ei-Eoi-pE0ov, 
 
 
 l-gtoI-gOov , 
 
 TI-0oi~g 0 ov, 
 
 El-Eol-gOov, 
 
 
 l-GTai-aOgv, 
 
 Ti-Ooi-oOgv, 
 
 Ei-Eoi-gOyiv, 
 
 
 i-GTa'i-fitOa, 
 
 TL-9o'l-pE6a f 
 
 \ 
 
 Si-Soi-jUEOa, 
 
 
 l-GTal-GOe, 
 
 ti-OoI-gOe , 
 
 Ei-Eol-gOe, 
 
 
 l-GTUl-VTO. 
 
 Tl-ttol-VTO. 
 
 Sl-Soi-V TO. 
 
 
 a On the irregular accentuation of the Impf. Opt. of Wiaruficu, 
 &c., see § 134, 1. 
 

 264 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -jut. [ClIAP. VIII 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 00 
 
 (D 
 
 OD 
 
 ■O 
 
 o 
 
 2 rf 
 
 <D G 
 
 •°T3 <5 
 
 2TA- 
 
 ©E- 
 
 
 AO- 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 p 
 
 <a 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 g § 53 
 £ * 
 
 place. 
 
 put. 
 
 
 give. 
 
 shew. 
 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 i-arrf-Vf I 
 
 (t-Qri-v)^ 
 
 >6 
 
 (£-3(0- v)V 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 stood , 
 
 
 CD 
 
 -4^» 
 
 C/3 
 
 s 
 
 +J 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-orri-g, 
 
 (t-Ori-g) 
 
 .2 
 . •o 
 
 <D 
 
 (£-3(0-c) I 
 
 \ a, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 09 
 
 P 
 
 /•a: 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 £-OT 17 , 
 
 (e-On), 
 
 • 
 
 (H 
 
 o 
 
 (£-3(0), | 
 
 
 
 
 D.l. 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 ■< 
 
 2. 
 
 E~ (T T TJ - 
 
 t-Ot-TOV 
 
 > 
 
 Ck? 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 wanting 1 . 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 TA1I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 £ 
 ►—1 
 
 3. 
 
 ( Ul') 
 
 » / 
 t- a r T] - 
 
 e-Oe-tyjv 
 
 1 
 
 e-So-rrju, 
 
 
 
 
 
 TW>, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 yt 
 
 £- a r K) - 
 
 i£-0£-/i£v 
 
 
 e-So-juev, 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^X£y, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 e- <x r ij - 
 
 £-0£-T£, 
 
 
 £-3o-T£, 
 
 
 ft? 
 
 
 
 re. 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 3. 
 
 t- <T T VJ- 
 
 e-Qe-gciv 
 
 
 £-3o-(t ay. 
 
 
 
 
 
 aav. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 ffTW 2 , 
 
 0,o\ 
 
 
 3(b 2 , 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 ►> 
 
 2. 
 
 <7rr)-e, 
 
 Oy-e, 
 
 
 3(j7-c, 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 EH 
 
 3. 
 
 orijy 
 
 Orj,- 
 
 
 8* 
 
 fjl 
 
 
 O 
 
 £ 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 , I 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 <rrrj-TOv 9 
 
 Ori-rov, 
 
 
 Sio-rov, 
 
 j • i 1 
 
 
 W 
 
 & 
 
 3. 
 
 orrj-rov, 
 
 Orrrov, 
 
 
 3w-rov, 
 
 wanting 1 .1 
 
 
 cc 
 
 P.l. 
 
 OTto-fiev, 
 
 Ooi-fitv, 
 
 
 ^io-peVf 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 GTtj-TE, 
 
 Ofi-rs, 
 
 
 Sid-TE, 
 
 I 
 
 
 • 
 
 3. 
 
 OTtU- 
 
 Ou)-(Tl(v\ 
 
 Su>-<ri(v). 
 
 
 
 
 
 CTf(v). 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 * See § 128, Obs. 
 
 The Compounds, e. g. iiroaru, have the same accen¬ 
 
 tuation as the simple Verbs , e. g. aroarwat, U6r,rov, 
 
§ 133.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -pi. 235 
 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 2TA- 
 
 0E- 
 
 AO- 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 I place. 
 
 put. 
 
 give. 
 
 shew. 
 
 9 
 
 [f7rpta-jur)v 3 , 
 
 ; I bought , 
 
 k-Oi-priv , 
 
 E-So-prjVj 
 
 
 i-Oov (from 
 
 E-dov (from 
 
 
 i i-7rpt-a> 
 
 
 (from £7rp/- 
 
 £0£(To), 
 
 £'3o(to), 
 
 
 a<ro), 
 
 
 
 
 E-irpia-TO, 
 
 £-0£-TO, 
 
 £-3o-TO, 
 
 
 | l-icpia-pE- 
 
 t-0t-/ut0ov, 
 
 e-S6-/ue9ov, 
 
 
 9uv, 
 
 
 
 
 £-7 rgia-GOov, 
 
 t-Oe-oflov, 
 
 e-8o-g9ov, 
 
 wanting 1 . 
 
 a-7Tpia-a9r]v , 
 
 E-0£-cr0riv , 
 
 E-$6-g9y)V, 
 
 j l-TTpia-ptOa, 
 
 £-0£-jU£0d, 
 
 E-$6-[X£9a, 
 
 
 £-7Tpta-<T0£, 
 
 e-9e-g9e, 
 
 e~So~g9e } 
 
 
 i £“7T p ICL-VT O .] 
 
 e-Oe-vto. 
 
 E-So-VTO. 
 
 
 J 7rpiw-ju<u , 
 
 9o)-fiai i , 
 
 Sw/uai 4 , 
 
 
 TTpi-y, 
 
 Oy, 
 
 $(p, 
 
 
 irpiri'Tai, 
 
 9r}-rai, 
 
 Sio-raij 
 
 
 1 7Tp l(ir/LltOoVf 
 
 9u)‘/ie9ov , 
 
 Sat-j ue9ov 9 
 
 
 7 rplr)-(rOov t 
 
 9ri-(j9ov , 
 
 SlO’G 9ov, 
 
 
 I TTpirravov, 
 j 7 TpKjJ-ptOa, 
 
 9y\-g9ov , 
 
 $u>-g 9ov 1 
 
 w anting » 
 
 0<u-jLi£0a, 
 
 8orfiE9a, 
 
 
 i 7TpiTJ-<70£, 
 
 9i}-<j9e, 
 
 Sat- g9e, 
 
 
 7Tptaj-vrai.] 
 
 9ui-vrai. 
 
 $u)-VTau 
 
 
 8 See § 131, 3, and § 135, 6. 
 
 4 The Compounds have the same accentuation; e. g. \v6wfieu, 
 
 -ijrai, &C. ; a.<xo6uficu t -ji, -»jra/, &C. ; ixtiw/Aai, .Arm i, &C. f 
 
 kxo&uftcu, •So f -Arut, &C. 
 
 X 
 
AORIST II. — Continued. 
 
 266 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -Ul. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Numbers 
 
 and 
 
 Persons. 
 
 2TA- 
 
 place. 
 
 0E- 
 
 put. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 <JTa[-r\v , 
 
 Oel-tjv, 
 
 2. 
 
 cr rat-rig, 
 
 6d-rig, 
 
 3. 
 
 (TTat-ij , 
 
 Ou-r), 
 
 D.l. 
 
 
 
 < TTai- 
 rjrov 1 , 
 arai- 
 VTT]V , 
 
 Be 
 
 l-Y]TOV 
 
 1 
 
 AO- 
 
 give. 
 
 AEIK' 
 
 shew . 
 
 l-Y)V t 
 
 So 
 
 Sot-ng, 
 Sot-rj, 
 
 So 
 
 Oel- 
 
 'Fr\v, 
 
 oral- 
 
 Oei-rifXEv 
 
 ypEv, 
 
 BeI-Y]TE , 
 
 GTat-r}TE , 
 
 crrai-Ev. 
 
 0a-Ei>. 
 
 crrij -Oi * * 3 , 
 
 6eg 4 , 
 
 CT T Y] -Tto, 
 
 Oe-tu), 
 
 cr r rj-rov, 
 
 0s-TOV , 
 
 < TTY)- 
 
 Oe-rtovy 
 
 •i-tjrov 
 
 Sol- 
 
 Sot- 
 
 Sot 
 
 Sol 
 
 rimv, 
 
 
 ■rjTE, 
 
 EV. 
 
 TLOVf 
 <TT rj -TE, 
 (TTY} ~T(i>~ 
 
 aav and 
 
 OTCIVTWV. 
 
 Oe-te , 
 Oi-noaav 
 and Oiv- 
 rwv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Sog 4 , 
 
 SO-TU), 
 ^O-TOV, 
 
 So-TLOV , 
 
 So-rc, 
 
 So -T(orrav\ 
 and Sov- 
 
 TIOV. 
 
 wanting 5 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 (YTYl-Vai . QeT-vcu. Sov- 
 
 Odg , -Elcra, 
 -sv, 
 
 G. Oivrog 
 rog , &c. &c. 
 
 aracrao'a? 
 
 vS 
 
 -ai>, 
 
 G. crrav- 
 
 vai. wanting 2 . 
 
 Sou?, -ow- 
 <ra, -ov, wanting 2 . 
 G. Sovrog, 
 
 &c. 
 
 1 See § 130, Obs. 2. 
 
 * See §128, Obs. 
 
 3 ^ “ 11 ^* 
 
 the 
 
 ^ ±A/Oy UDS. 
 
 0b ?; In impounds, the accent is thrown hack on 
 
 <§ 8^ Obs ^ sy able; e - g * ; irirr*, mcc*Z 
 
 4 See § 130, Obs. a In Compounds, the accent is thrown back oa 
 
§ 133.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN - fJLl • 2G7 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 2TA- 
 
 place. 
 
 OE- 
 
 put. 
 
 AO- 
 
 give. 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 shew. 
 
 [7rpiai-fir]v 5 , 
 
 7 rpiai-o, 
 
 7 TpidL-TO, 
 
 TTpiai-ptOov, 
 
 irpiai-oBoVt 
 
 9oi-p7lV°, 
 
 0OI-O, 
 
 9ol-to, 
 
 9oi-fit9ov, 
 
 9oT-o9ov, 
 
 £ot-jurjv 6 , 
 
 $ot-o, 
 
 ^Ot-TO, 
 
 CO <-jU£0OV, 
 
 $oi-o9ov, 
 
 
 7rptai-(y9r)v, 
 
 9oi-a9r)v, 
 
 Soi-<T0IJV, 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 7rpiat-fit0a, 
 
 9oi-f±z9a , 
 
 3oi"jU£0Ct, 
 
 • .1 
 
 Trptai-oOe, 
 
 * jrp'iaL-vTO .] 
 
 0Oi-(70£, 
 
 9ol-vto. 
 
 3ot-(T0£, 
 
 ^ot-vro. 
 
 
 [Vpi-w 5 , 
 
 7 Tpia-(rQ(i), 
 Trpia-aOov , 
 Trpia-aOcov , 
 
 7 rpia-o9e, 
 Trpia-o9u)- 
 
 aav and 
 
 7TjOta-(I0(OV.] 
 
 9ov 7 , 
 
 9e-<t9u), 
 9i-(j9ov> 
 9i-a9(t)v , 
 
 0£-rr0£, 
 
 9e-a9(s)(Tav 
 and 9£~a9u)v. 
 
 Sou 7 , 
 
 So-(t9w, 
 
 8o-(t9ov, 
 
 86-o9cov, 
 
 $6-a9t, 
 
 So-(r9u)(Tav 
 
 and 
 
 So-<t0wv. 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 [7rp/a-(T0at 5 . 
 
 9i-<r9ai. 
 
 $6-o9ai. 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 [7rpm-/u£- 
 5 1 
 
 voc -J . 
 
 9s-[jievoQr r h 
 
 -ov. 
 
 do-fuvog, -jj, 
 -ov. 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 the preceding syllable j e. g. <rtfois, h6ts ; an>%s, txSos; vrtfotrt, 
 tx^art, (§ 84. Obs. 2). 
 
 6 See § 131, 3, and § 135, 6. 6 See § 134, 2. 
 
 7 In the Compounds ; — xanxfeu, avoSov ; ts foots, aarCheu ; xa.T&- 
 iteBi ; vrtfootfh ; hh<rh j vrfooah ; — but \ts6oZ, usQou ; xfoov, itihoZ, {§ 84, 
 Obs. 2). 
 
268 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/it. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 ! ACTIVE. 
 
 
 2TA- 
 
 place. 
 
 0E- 
 
 put. 
 
 AO- 
 
 give. 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 sliew. 
 
 Put. 
 
 GTlrOli). 
 
 Qri-crw . 
 
 
 Sei'^oj. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 £-<TTTJ(Ta, I 
 
 'placed. 
 
 E-dri-Kd . 
 
 Instead of i 
 the Aor. L 
 the Dual a 
 and in the 
 and the . 
 
 (§ 131, 2). 
 
 E-SdJ-KCt. 
 
 ;hese forms, 
 1. is used in 
 nd PL Ind. 
 )ther Moods 
 Participials, 
 
 £~$Eil;a. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 £-(TTT]-Ka 
 
 sto. 
 
 T£- 0 £ t “ 
 
 Kd. 
 
 $E-S(1>-ICC I. 
 
 Si-dEi^a. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 i-(T T7]-K£tv 
 and 
 
 ft-trru-KStv 1 , 
 
 stabam. 
 
 e-te- Bel- 
 
 KELV. 
 
 £-{$£-cJa>- 
 
 KEIV. 
 
 i-$£~$£l m 
 
 Fut.III. 
 
 stabo, 
 
 (old Att.). 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 PAS 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 £-(TTa-0IJV. 
 
 E-TE-BrjV 3 . 
 
 E-do-Oriv. 
 
 E-Se l\“ 
 
 Onv. 
 
 1 See § 134, 3. 
 
 * See § 131, Ohs. 1. 
 
§ 133.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/mi. 269 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 2TA- 
 
 place. 
 
 0E- 
 
 put. 
 
 AO- 
 
 give. 
 
 AEIK- 
 
 shew. 
 
 <STr\-<jofxai. 
 
 Orj-aogai. 
 
 3 ur-aogat. 
 
 StiZogai. 
 
 t-(jri]-(xdjLtTjy. 
 
 (t-0r]-fca-jUTjv.) 
 
 Instead of the 
 A or. II. Mid. 
 Attic writers, | 
 
 ( i-Sco-Ka-griv .) 
 
 ;se forms, the 
 is used by the 
 
 5 131, 2). 
 
 i-SeiZa-grjv- 
 
 t-GTa-fiai. 
 
 T£- 0 £ l “fiat. 
 
 $£-3o-/iCU. 
 
 Si-Seiy-gat. 
 
 r £ 
 
 t-era-guv. 
 
 i 
 
 £-T£- 0 £ 1“ 
 
 jurjv. 
 
 i-$t-S6-gi}v. 
 
 t-Se-Sti y~gt]v 
 
 k-arifeogai. 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 wanting 2 . 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 FUT. I. (FTa-9r}GO~ T£-0?J(TO- %Q-0r)<JO- 
 
 gai. gai 3 . fiat. 
 
 Seix-Orjao- 
 
 /LOLL . 
 
 3 ir'dri* and Ttffaofiui instead of l6Uwt and M^vo/mu (§ S, 9). 
 
270' 
 
 VERBS IN-fXl. 
 
 [Chap. VIIL 
 
 § 134. Remarks on the Paradigms. 
 
 1. The Verbs 16 v a put, I am able , lor / <r r apat, I know, and 
 xglpapat, I hang, have, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., a 
 different accentuation from 'brrapai ; viz. Subj. Ivvupat, Wio-rupai, 
 -n, -nrai, -wQov, -riirh, -uvrat ; Opt. ^vvaipnv, i<rirraipnv, -aio, -airo, 
 -bchtOoi, cue 6 %, -ounro ;—so also the Aor. II. Subj. and Opt.of ^(apai 
 and ovivapai ; viz. <77 (up, 01 , Tgta'ipnv, ova'ipnv, •aio, -airo (§ 135). 
 
 2. The forms with -01 of the Opt. Impf. and Aor. II. Mid. of 
 Verbs in -pi whose Roots end in t, (e. g. ndoipnv, 60 'tpnv), are pre¬ 
 ferred to those with -n, {nfoipnv, -ur, -tiro, &c., 61 'ipnv, -do, -tiro, 
 &c.). In Compounds the accent remains unchanged ; e. g. tvSoipnv, 
 (ivfatpnv), tvSolo (tvhlo), &c. The same is true of Compounds of loi- 
 pnv ; e. g. ^lethoipt jv, 'btubolo, &G. 
 
 3. The Perf. and Plpf. lomna, iarnxuv ( not thrrJjxtiv), form the 
 Dual and PL directly from the Boot, viz. Perf. e-oroi-rov, e-rrx-psv, 
 %-rra-re, \-ara.-<ri{f\; Plpf. t-crro-rov, •drriv , t-oro-ptv, t-oro-rt, e-crra- 
 <rav ;—instead of \<rrnx.iva.i, ioravoi is regularly used. The Part, is 
 torus, .woo, -eg, Gen. -uros, -urns, as well as iornxu>s, -via, -os, Gen. 
 -ores, -uiog. 
 
 4. The forms of the Impf. \ri 6 ug, -u, Xhi^ow, -ovg, -ov, follow the 
 analogy of Verbs in -Su and -ou. The other forms, \r 16 ns, -n, i'Sfivt, 
 -us, -u, are not used (§ 13U, Obs. 6). 
 
 LXIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (^’laTrjfu and its Compounds. — Active.) 
 
 ’Ang, -egos, 6 , v, the air. 
 iviornpi, I set-up, erect, arouse ; 
 Aor. II. I stood-up; Mid. I 
 stand-up, rise-up. 
 avrt-rarru, I put-opposite / 
 Mid. I set-myself-against, 
 oppose. 
 
 o 7 ro-( 7 o 7 (ou)u, I draw-away. 
 
 0070 -or(ipu,Iturn-aivay, estrange, 
 alos, -n, -ov, dry, thirsty, 
 atpiompi, I put from, turn-away, 
 cause-to revolt ; Aor. II. / 
 fell-away, revolted; Mid. I 
 go-off, stand-aloof, 
 hiampi, I set-apart, divide, 
 separate, sever. 
 
 Wiarypi, I put-into \ Perf. I 
 am-present. 
 
 i£-o((6u)u, I make-straight, erect, 
 set-up, restore. 
 
 fivlo%os, -ov, 0 , charioteer, guide. 
 6v<ria, -as, h, sacrifice, offb'ing. 
 'tarvpt, I make-to-stand, lay, set, 
 place, raise. 
 
 xadtcrrnpt, I lay-down, establish, 
 appoint, render, make, 
 xipvn, -ns, n, marsh, pond, lake. 
 Xoipo’s , -ov, 0 , plague, pestilence. 
 ’M.iXnabns, -ov, 0 , Miltiades. 
 Nagioj, 0 , a native of Naxos, 
 vstpikn, -ns, n, (1) nebula, cloud; 
 (2) bird-net. 
 
 <7ra(arnpi, I place-beside; Aor. 
 
 II. I stand-beskle, assist. 
 
 < 77 n ; where ? whither ? 
 < 77 oXip{iu)o>, (Dat.), I go-to-war- 
 with any one. 
 
 o7okv<ptXta, -as, , multitude-oj • 
 friends. 
 
 Txvt»?.os, -ov, 0, Tantalus 
 
VERBS IN -/it. 
 
 271 
 
 § 134.] 
 
 1. r H noXvifnXta SucrTrjcri Kai anooni} Kai anoarpE^Ei, 
 
 2. Et rig Qvo'iav irpogiptpajv 1 evvovv vo/uiZei tov 6eov 
 K aOttrravai, tppivag ko v<pag i\ el ’ 3. OvSe tov atpa ot 
 avOpionoi Totg opviaiv eIwv IXevOepov, nayiSag Kal 
 vetpiXag icrTavreg. 4. ^uXarrou, /ur} to kE pSog ere rtjg 
 StKaioovvrjg 2 aipKJTrj. 5. ’Ev Tip rieXoTrouurjortaicqj 7 ro- 
 Xipip eig avr/p, 6 rTfpticX^Cj t^wpOov rrjv noXiv 3 Kai 
 avioT7\ Kai avTETaTTtTO Kai Tip Xoipip Kai Tip i toXe/im. 
 
 6 . Mr) atyiaTK) roue vloue rr)c tni tt)v apETrjv oSou 2 . 
 
 7. 0 f/itCTroicXrie Xcycrat eitteIv , me to MtXrjaSou rpo- 
 7 raiov avTOv ek tiov vttvojv autoratrj 4 . 8 . TauraXoe *u 
 rr| Xlp.v'p avog Etarrrjicti 5 . 9. To /tiv 6 rou \povov 7570 - 
 uoc 7 , ro Eueoroe 8 terrt, ro $£ 6 piXXov. 10. Ot 
 KoptvOioi TroXXovg ovppayovg anEGTigaav^ a 7 ro rwu 
 A Brjvafiov. 11. Ot Na£ioi a 7 ro raiu 1 ABr\vaiivv aire- 
 
 crrrjcrau 10 . 12 . Flapacrra rote aTV\E(Tiv* 13. II r) <rrw 11 ; 
 7Tf) (3 u > 12 ; 14. Ot ’A0riva7oi Toig N a^'ioig anoaTaoiv 
 an avTU)V inoXiprioav. 15. IlapatTratrjrf roig aru- 
 yhcnv. 10. Adyoe diEinraprj , roue ov/ifia'xpvg ana 
 rrjc 7roXaue inrooTrivai. 17. 'Hvto^Ou 7 Ku/trjv arrjertte 13 
 
 apitJTrjV' 
 
 1 § 176, 1. 2 § 157. 3 sc. Athens. 4 wsec£ to arouse. 6 Trans, 
 
 as the Imp/. 6 ro ph—ro ls=one portion — another. 7 =past. 
 Perf. Part. Neut. of yiyvopai; § 123. *=present. Perf. Part. Neut. 
 of Wurrnp.,; § 134, 3. 9 Aor. I. Act. 10 Aor. II. Act. 11 The 
 
 Subj. is used in questions implying doubt or hesitation ; § 153, 
 1. b. («). 12 § 119, 1. and § 142. 13 thou wilt place, i. e. thou wilt 
 
 make. 
 
 (1. Give the derivation of noXvtptXia. 2. What Tense is xoSiara- 
 *a.i ? Fut. Ind. of it ? 3. What part of the Verb is ilm ? Account 
 for the ending -«». Is there any peculiarity in its Aug. ? What 
 Participle is Irrovns ? 6. What Mood is k<pi<rm ? 7. Pres. Ind. 
 
 form of until ? Why is the Opt., Murrain , used ? Force of the PI. , 
 ra>* vortuv ? 10. 11. Different meanings of knt<rrn<rav ? Pres. Ind. 
 
 of it ? 12. Give the other form of nd^uara. 13. From what Verb 
 
 does come ? ) 
 
 1. Sportsmen lay snares ancl nets for birds. 2. 
 
 The wicked seek to sever the friendship of the good. 
 
 3. The trophies of Miltiades used-to-arouse Themis- 
 
 tocles from sleep 1 . 4. Let us not turn-away young- 
 
272 
 
 VERBS IN -pi. 
 
 [Chap. VIII, 
 
 men from the path to 1 2 virtue! 5. Do not sever (pi) 
 the friendship of the good! 6. The citizens were 
 
 afraid that the enemies would cause their (=the) 
 allies to revolt from them. 7. The wicked rejoice, if- 
 they-sever 3 the friendship of the good. 8. Tantalus 
 stands thirsty in the lake. 9. The wise man takes- 
 care not only for-the-present 4 , but also for-the-future. 
 
 10. The soldiers erected 5 a trophy over 6 the enemies. 
 
 11. The Naxians sought to revolt from the Athe¬ 
 
 nians. 12. Assist (pi.) the unfortunate 7 ! 13. 
 Where shall we stand 8 ? where shall we go 8 ? 14. 
 
 Thou shouldst assist 9 the unfortunate 7 . 15. The 
 soldiers will erect a trophy over 6 the enemies. 
 
 1 Plural. 2 £*■/', with Acc. 3 Part. 4 Gen. of Perf. Part. Act. 
 of Warn j/*i. 6 Aor. 6 Kara, with Gen. 7 Dat. 8 Aor. Subj. 9 Opt. 
 
 LXIV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (TiOrjiu and its Compounds. — Active.) 
 
 A* joVaXij, -tatt, ft, a citadel, the 
 Acropolis. 
 
 awards, -a, -op, belonging-to- 
 others, foreign. 
 
 a.va.-'ridtifjt.t, I set-up, dedicate, 
 offer. 
 
 Avrtyavos, o, Antigonus. 
 
 agy a\ios, -a, -ov, hard, grievous, 
 troublesome. 
 
 liaSvfix, -utos, to, headband, 
 
 diadem. 
 
 iixQoga, -eis, ft, difference, dis¬ 
 cord, quarrel, enmity. 
 
 Aioviio'os, o, Dionysos (Bacchus). 
 
 tv-rifa/M, I put-in, infuse, im¬ 
 plant. 
 
 tOctroi, -ou, o, thyrsus, (a staff of 
 the Bacchantes, wound round 
 with ivy and vine leaves). 
 
 xtrrof,-ov, o, IWJ. 
 
 ’$t\.a.xtbovix6s, -yi, -ov, Macedonian. 
 pi'ra-'rMvifju, I transpose, change, 
 alter, remove. 
 
 (Ufi.eofjt.xi, (Acc.), I imitate, 
 •rtgi-rlfa/u, I put or set round. 
 <ff£os-ri6y(u, I put-to, unite, add. 
 or^o-r\6nfjoi, I place-before, lay¬ 
 out (for show), set-forth, dis¬ 
 play. 
 
 crxrjTTgov, -ov, <r6, staff, sceptre. 
 Ti0vfu, I put, place, appoint, 
 hold or reckon (as), ordain, 
 arrange, propose (as a prize), 
 enact (laws), make, render, 
 assign; Mid. I lay up for 
 myself, make or prepare for 
 myself. 
 
 1. T(p KciXwe 7 toiovvti OtoQ 7roXXci ayaOa riOrjcnv. 
 
 2 . 'O ttXovtoq TroWaKig ptrariOriai tov tljv avdpu) ttiov 
 
 Tpdirou. 3. IloXXaiac oi avQpwiroi ro7g idioig KctKoig 
 
VERBS IN -/t U. 
 
 273 
 
 § 134 .] 
 
 rtAXorpta 1 TTpOQTiOiaaiv. 4. Etc to (3e\tiov r iOei rh 
 /ULtXXov. 5. ’Avrrydvoc Atoywrov ttovto 2 tfUfitiTO , »cal 
 ictrrov jucv ircp iriOtlg ry KtcpaXrj avfi SiaSrigarog Maxt- 
 Sovikov, Ovpoov St avrl OKiinTpov (jitpiov. 6. Ot oocptc r- 
 rai ttjv aptrriv TTpotriOecrav. 7. ’E VTidiogtv roig vtoig 
 rrjg aO(f)iag tpiora. 8 . f H Tv\rj tt avra av fitraTiOtir j. 9. 
 Oi> pa&ov T 17 V tyvaiv /itTariOivat. 10. OoXXoicfc So- 
 Kovvrtg OrjGtiv kokov icrOXov eOe/uev, kcii SoKOvvrtg 
 egOXov eOe/uev kokov. 11. Tag Sta^opag fitradutfitv 3 * 
 12. ’A pyaXtov yripag e9t]ke 9tog. 13. ’A 9r\vaioi X a ^“ 
 k rjv Troir\GafitvOL Xtaivav tv TTvXaig Trig aKpOTToXtivg 
 avtQtaav. 14. 'Pciov 4 t% ayaOov Otlvai kokov , rj ek 
 kokov eoOXov. 15. To kcucou ovSE'ig xpn^ov av Oeiyi 5 . 
 16. MetoOete rag SLa^opag. 17. AvKOvpyov , top 
 Oevto 6 AaK tSaigovloig vo/iovg , fiaXiora 9avfj.aZog.Ev. 
 18. 'O TToXtlUOg TTOVTO flET 07 tOtlKEV* 19. IIp 6 7 Tl]g 
 aptrrig Oeoi iSpcora 8 eOegov- 
 
 i =aliena, sc. *«*«. 2 =in every way, (Neut. Adj. used adverbi « 
 ally). 3 let us remove. 4 sc. to-ri. See § 52, 10. 5 would set down, 
 
 i e. look upon it as, &c. 6 =who laid down , i. e. enacted. 7 before , 
 i. e. before attaining it. 8 swea£=*=toil. 
 
 (3. What part of the Verb is <r^osn6ia(m ? 4. Positive form of 
 fciXno* ? 9. Why is not the Pres. Inf. pirarMvai proparoxytone ? 
 
 11. What Mood and Tense is (i-irad&pv) ? 12. Zdtixt ? 13. avtdiaa.^ ? 
 14. dttveu ? ) 
 
 1. To those-who-do 1 well the gods assign 2 many 
 good things. 2. We often add others’ 3 ills to our- 
 own 4 . 3. We often see wealth alter 5 the disposition 
 of men. 4. The war had altered everything. 5. God 
 assigned 6 to men many good things. 6. The war 
 will alter everything. 7. Who would enact 7 laws 
 for foolish men? 8. It is not easy to change 8 na¬ 
 ture. 9. The gods made 6 old-age troublesome. 10. 
 The wicked we cannot easily make 7 good. 11. The 
 general should infuse 9 courage into the soldiers. 
 
 12. May wealth never alter 10 thy disposition! 13. 
 We should implant 8 in young-men a love of virtue* 
 
 x 2 
 
 i 
 
274 
 
 VERBS IN -/u. 
 
 [Chap. VIIL 
 
 •Part. 3 aWorgtof. 4 Hut. 8 Acc. of the Part. 8 Aor. 
 
 of rUn/u. 7 Aor. Opt. with «». 8 Aor. 9 Pres, or Aor. Subj. 
 
 10 Impf. or Aor. Opt. 
 
 LXV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (AtSwjut and its Compounds .— Active.) 
 
 ’ATo-'Zfiaipi, I give-back, restore , 
 repay ; Mid. I sell. 
 
 Vilufju, I give, grant, bestow. 
 Ipvri&oi, -ov, firm, sure , stable. 
 iv6ui, straightway, immediately, 
 xevrgov, -ov, to, sting, goad. 
 ju,xK*e, -a^os, happy, blessed, 
 fttkirrot, -vs, v, bee. 
 
 p.ira.-'h'itufjt.t nvi nvos, I give any 
 one a share of anything. 
 vra.yxa.KOi, -ov, utterly-bad. 
 vraXiv, again, on-the-contrary. 
 vr^o-Vilvfn, (prodo), I betray. 
 
 (Gen.), I need, am-in - 
 want. 
 
 1. Oi Oeol 7 ravra StSbaatv. 2. Vuvcuki 1 ap\av 
 SiStvoiv ri (jtvaig. 3. Xapiv Xaflutv 2 pipvr\ao 3 , icat Sovg 
 imXaOov 4 . 4. Aaj3wv 2 airoSog, ical Xy]^yf rraXiv. 5. 
 “*£2 paKapzg Oeot, Sore pot oA/3ov teal So^av ayaOt)v 
 t v £ tv. 6. O TrXovrog, oy ay Stoat Otoi, spneSog ianv. 
 7 . *A i] tpvaig SeSiok t, raur’ i\et pova 6 avOptoirog. 8. 
 'H tyvaig ravpoig eScoke KEpa 5 , tcivrpa pEXtrraig. 9. 
 ’Qy 6 aot Osog eScoke, rovrwv 7 XpyZovoi 8 SiSov. 10. ’E- 
 adXtp aySpi k«i haBXa SiStoat Otog. 11. evOuq 
 
 SiSov. 12. Xpijpara Satptov icai TrayKaKip avSpi SiSto - 
 aiv r aptrrje 3’ oXiyoig avSpaat poip’ artrat. 13. ©toe 
 fiot Soirt <piXovg 7rtoroyc- 14. Tote 7r Xovaiotg 9 irpimt 
 rote TCTwypig Sovvat. 15. Ot arparitjoTai rrjv ttoXiv rote 
 TroXtpioig TTpovSiSoaav l0 * 16. r O ayaQbg X ai P H T0 ^ 
 ireviiat XPV juartov 7 psraStSovg 11 . 17. Aa roue ayaOovg 
 avSpag ytvvaiwg (jiEpEtv , o n av 6 Otoe SiStio. 18. l Oe’ 
 ay piXXy rrjv narpiSa irpoStSovai, pEyiarrig 12 Znpiag 13 
 a£tog ianv. 19. Ot Oeoi pot ayr't Kaicwy ayaOa StSotev. > 
 20. 4>tAoe (j>iXov ov irpoSwaEt. 
 
 > § 47, 2. 2 § 121, 12. 3 Imper. Perf . (with Pres, meaning} ; 
 
 § 122, 12. 4 § 121, 13. 5 § 39, Obs. 8 by attraction for a ; § 182, 6. 
 i § 158, 3. (b). 8 to those in need. 9 § 161, 2. (c) . 19 by Crasis for 
 
 § 90, 1. n in sharing. 12 § 52, 8. 13 § 158, 7. (y). 
 
 (3. What part of the Verb is ? Why is ivnxM perispome- 
 ®oa ? 4. From what Verb does come ? 5. Give the Comp*. 
 
§ 134 .] 
 
 VERBS IN -fit. 
 
 2 75 
 
 and Super, of fnxxup. 8. What Tense is e£&>xt ? Uncontracted 
 form of x'tgas ? 12. Meaning of *«/? 16. What Participle is y.% t «- 
 
 itbous ? 18. Lat. equivalent for eg a» ?) 
 
 1. God gives all-things. 2. Having-received 1 a 
 favour, remember (pi.) it; and having-bestowed 1 
 one , forget if. 3. If-you-have-received l anything , 
 repay 2 if. 4. Grant me, O God, to possess prospe¬ 
 rity and a good reputation ! 5. The wealth which 3 
 
 God bestows 2 is sure. 6. The gods have given men 
 many good-things. 7. Give (pi.) to the poor 
 straightway! 8. May the gods grant 2 me trusty 
 friends! 9. Thou must 4 bear bravely whatever 5 the 
 
 gods grant thee. 10. Good citizens will never be¬ 
 tray their (=the) country. 11. God gave 2 men 
 many possessions. 12. The soldiers intended to be¬ 
 tray 2 the city. 13. It is well to give to the poor. 
 14. Who would betray 6 a friend? 15. Honour (pi.) 
 the gods, who-give 7 all good-things to men! 
 
 1 Aor. Part. 2 Aor. z bs «», with Sub]. 4 Ss?. 6 o, n <xv, with 
 Subj. 6 Opt., with &>. 7 Part. 
 
 LXVI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ( Verbs in -vui .— Active.) 
 
 'ACixros, -o », not-to-be-seen. 
 itxo4tUt>uf&i, I point-out, shew- 
 Jbrth, display, make-known , 
 represent, appoint; (with a 
 double Acc.) I appoint or 
 make any one so and so; Mid. 
 / shew -for th-of myself, declare, 
 deliver- an- op inion. 
 ht'actH/M, I shew, 
 lixu'ius, justly, fairly. 
 
 inconsiderately , heedlessly, 
 rashly. 
 
 \y.y.Uu, (Dat.), I remain-withy 
 abide-by. 
 
 Wo'j, (Gen.), within. 
 
 I make one swear , 
 Und-by-oath. 
 
 Ixfyxos, -ov, (perjurus), swear¬ 
 ing-falsely, perjured. 
 
 Ivr6/Avvfct, (Acc.), I swear-by. 
 pernios, -a, -tv, moderate. 
 
 /xi/xtityis, -tv, o, imitator. 
 o/xvufAi, I swear, 
 ogxos, -eu, b, oath, 
 wxv'rus, by-all-means, decidedly t 
 altogether, wholly. 
 
 I order, direct, bid. 
 9r*.ct<rnxri (t$£v»> understood), mo- 
 delling-art, sculpture. 
 Tivlhtyogoof, -ev, o, Pythagoras, 
 fwwvfa, I strengthen, 
 airavius, rarely, seldom. 
 
 -vyos, o, Phrygian, 
 iptitpiefcx, - tiro t, v6 t decree, reso¬ 
 lution. 
 
276 
 
 VERBS IN -jU(. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 1. w 0pK0v (j)tvy£ t Kav StKaiuig opvvyg. 2. Mi] rt l 
 0£OU£ £7TlOpKOV 2 £7 TOfXVV. 3. O OlVOQ fl£TpiOQ Z \r}(j>0tlQ 
 powvvuiv. 4. 01 SiSaaricaXoi tovq paOr]Tag ptpi]Tac 
 iavruiv anoSuicvvaaiv 5 . 5. UvOayopag Trapr]yy£iXe roig 
 pavOavovoi (nraviwQ plv dfivvvai , \pr\Gapivoig 8k roig 
 opKOig TTavToig lppiv£iv. 6. 'H ttXckjtikyi 8ritcvvcn ra £i'S») 
 /mu 0£wv, twv avOpui rwv, icat £viorf icai rwv OtjpCov. 7. 
 Mf) aOlara 8£i^ijg vXitp. 3. ’AvSpoc vouv oiuof tS£i%£v. 
 9. 4>pUy£C OpKOLQ OV X pUiVTai OVT OfJLVVVT£g 9 OVT aX~ 
 Xovg HopKOVVT£Q. 10. ’ OXtyoig Sukvv ra £vtoq 6 (ppt- 
 vwu. 11. Oi KpiTcu ra \pi](j)i(TpaTa cnreSeiKwaav. 12. 
 MjJ 77 HJT£ £IKYI OfXVVOlT£. 13. O (3a<JlXtUQ TOV CIVTOU 
 
 vtbv ^rrpaTijyov anoSlSuxtv. 
 
 1 t) =quid, in any way. 2 itiooxov Ixopwfu = I swear falsely by 
 any one ; (Ur!ogzo> is a Neut. Adj. used adverbially ). 3 —in mode¬ 
 ration. 4 §121, 12. b make. 6 ra hrZ f = the parts within, the 
 interior. 
 
 (I. Of what two words is compounded ? 5. From what 
 Verb does orx^yyuXi come ? What Mood and Tense is it? 8. 
 By what Tense is ?$«£** to be translated? Why? 9. Open form 
 ot £ga)vr«/ ?) 
 
 1. Avoid (pi.) an oath, even if you swear justly I 
 2. Do not swear (pi.) a-false-oath ! 3. Those-who- 
 
 swear 1 a-false-oath are worthy of the greatest punish¬ 
 ment 2 . 4. The Phrygians did not swear. 5. The 
 judges make-known 3 their (=the) decrees. 6. Mayest 
 thou never swear rashly! 7. It is not becoming 
 
 to swear rashly. 8. The Athenians appointed 4 Al- 
 cibiades general. 
 
 1 Part. *Gen. *««■«?*/* wpu. * Aor. 
 
 LXVII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ("larijjui, &c.— Mid. and Pass.) 
 
 ’A fy'oXayot, -«», worthy-ofmention, 
 noticeable, memorable, 
 mpan, v 'with Aor. Pass.), I 
 tm-able, can, have-power < 
 
 \<xi9va(tcu, (with Aor, Pass.) r / 
 know, understand, 
 hvaa.'tfyoe, -ov, o, Ly sander* 
 pifa, -ns, n, intoxication. 
 
VERBS IN -fit. 
 
 277 
 
 § 134 .] 
 
 o, Minos. fut* naval power, 
 
 avals, -tv, foolish ; (Subst. a -«?, «, the rule-oj-a - 
 
 fool.) f ew > Oligarchy. 
 
 ia.vnx.6t, -<?, belonging-to- aw-iarn^, I put-together; Mid. 
 
 ships , nautical ; »a«m*n tivvcc- I collect , unite , bring-together. 
 
 1. 'O irXovTog 7roXXa Svvarai 1 . 2. Tic ptopog 
 StivaiTO 2 £V OLVtp Gl(i)7T(£Vj 3- Avtjp GlKCtlOg tGTIV, Ogtig 
 aSiKUV Svvajuevog 2 j ar, (3 ovXerau 4. IlparrE jirjStv wv* 
 £ 7 rtora<Tai 2 . 5. *Apiarov Igtl iravf brioTwQai 
 Ka'\a. 6. Ziofisv* ov\ tog WzXopev, aXX ait; SvvaptOa 2 ' 
 7. npo jU£0rjc avicFTaao. 8. Ti ovfMptou Ivioig ttXovthv , 
 orav jur) £ 7 ndra>imu 5 r(5 7rXourc{/’ ^pr/cOai 4 ; 9. KaraXir 
 Oivrog 7 rov rUXoTroyvTjd/aKou TroXepov oXiyapxtai tv 
 raig 7 rXfiidraic TroXtdi KctOtcrravTO. 10. Oi TroXtpiot ova 
 cnroGTricrovTcu, tt piv av^ eXiogi^ tt]V ttoXiv • 11 • Mtywc, 
 
 6 Sevrspog, irpiorog 'EXX/jvwv vairrtKrjv Svvapiv aSio- 
 Xo'yov gwegtyigcito. 12. Y7ro Aud avdpov, toy S7rap- 
 rtarov, iv ’A Orivatg rpidicovra rvpavvoi KaTtcrraOriGav- 
 
 1 craXXa Mixftai, (multum valeo), / am very powerful. 2 § 135. 
 
 3 by attraction for (KjjSsv toot^v, a. § 182, 6. 4 See § 97, 3. 5 On the 
 
 accentuation, see § 134, 1. 6 § 161, 3. 7 &em# concluded. 
 
 av = wnliJ. 9 § 126, 1. 
 
 8 , t 
 
 1. Men are very powerful through wealth. 2. 
 Rise-up (pi.) before intoxication! 3. The enemies 
 
 were not able to take 1 the city. 4. Of what advan¬ 
 tage is it 2 to thee to be-rich, when thou knowest not 
 how to employ thy (=the) wealth 3 ? 5. What fools 
 could 4 be silent in wine? 0. No mortal can know 
 all-things. 7. There are few who-know-how 5 to em¬ 
 ploy riches well. 8. The magistrates who-are-ap- 
 pointed 6 to rule the city must 7 take-care-of^ its 
 safety. 
 
 * Aor. IX. of 2 r< ruftipept. 3 Dat. 4 Opt. with «*. 5 Part. 
 
 8 Aor. Pass. Part, of xxfa'trnfAt. with Acc. and Ins 
 
 •§ 125 , 16 . 
 
278 
 
 VERBS IS -fit, 
 
 [Chap. VIII 
 
 LXVIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (TlOtj/u, &c .— Pass, and Mid.) 
 
 “AlXn;, -£, - 09 , unhappy, wretch¬ 
 ed, pitiable. 
 
 kiro-TiDvifAi, I put-aw ay- f Mid. 
 
 take-off, lay-aside. 
 ha.-riXiu, I accomplish ; (with a 
 Part., it expresses the continu¬ 
 ance of the action denoted by 
 the Participle, as hocnXu y^d- 
 <pu9, “ I continue writing”;. 
 htt.-r'iSr.pi, I arrange, manage ; 
 with an Adv. I affect , dispose 
 a person so and so. 
 ixduv, -ova a, -on, willing, willingly. 
 Wi-r'ifvfAt, I put-on , put-to, add ; 
 Mid. put-on-myself; with the 
 Dat. / apply-to, attack, set- 
 upon. 
 
 lyxgurtta, -as , self*restraint^ 
 
 continence. 
 
 \ffoho9, -ov, to, (viaticum), tra- 
 veiling money, provision, 
 vocu, Fut. r&u, I am-come. 
 Snoroovtfs, -ov, 0 , treasure. 
 KctToo-riSnfAi, I lay-down, lay* 
 by ; Mid. lay-down for myself 
 lay-up, deposit. 
 
 KiXrifZtif, -Yt£Of, o, Cdtiberian. 
 xgavof, {-iot=t)-ovs, t6, helmet. 
 Xo'<pof, -ov. o, crest. 
 
 M etvrivtioc, -at, i), Mantinea. 
 ffTi(puvos, -ov, o, crown, wreath. ■ 
 Qoiv'nuos, -lx, -io9, (contracted 
 •out, -n, -ovi), purple. 
 
 1. Ot KtXTifiripEg TTfpt Tag KEipaXag Kpavq ^aXica 
 7rEpiTiQtvTai <f)Oivuco~iQ r)(TKr)plva l XoQoig. 2. OuSeva 
 Orjaavpov iraial KaraOrioy a/ueivio 2 alSovg. 3 . Tig av 
 iiavv iptXov aippova Ooiro 3 ; 4 . Sevo^mvtl Ovovti y\ke 
 tiq a ek IS/lavTivEiag ayyeXog Xiyivv tov viov avrov tov 
 FpvXXov rtOvavai 5 * Kcuceivog cittWeto plv tov oTtipavov, 
 SieteXel Se Qvtvv’ ettei o uyyEXog TrpogWt)KE Kai G 
 ekeTvo, bn vikwv TtOvrjKE, ffaXiv 6 ISevo^uiv £7 teOeto 
 tov <TTE(pavov. 5. 'AXictfliaSrig tipvyEv tig S7T aprrjv 
 Kai Toitg AaKE Saipoviovg 7 rapw^vvEv £7n0£<70at rotg 
 AOqvaioig. 6. Tqj /uev to ctwpa diaTtOtipEVip Kaicwgl 
 Xpt/a icrrtv larpov , up $£ ttjv 4 /V X^ v tfdXou. 7. ’E^o- 
 $iov tig To yripag 1 carariOov. 8. Oi 9 AOqvaToi tv rip 
 $EVTepip TOV nEXoTTOVVIlGldKOV 7 ToXt/ULOV ETEl VTTO TOV 
 
 \oipov aOXiwTara SitTtOricjav** 9 . Kaicoi/ ouSev <pv£Tcu 
 tv avSpl Oe/ueXio. Se/ulevu) tov (5 iov aii)<Ppoovvr}v Kal 
 EyKpaTEtav. 10 . Touc irioTovg tiOegOch <J)iXovg Sti 
 EKaorov EavTip. 11 . O i ttoXitcu <po[5ovvTai, fiq oi 7ro* 
 Xifiio 1 Ty ttoXei £7T iTidwvrai. 
 
§ 134.] VERBS IN -g£. , 279 
 
 1 Perf. Part, of arxia, I adorn. 2 See § 52, 1. 3 take. 1 * * 4 
 
 quidam, a, a certain. 8 A syncopated Perf. Inf. for «*«**«<; 
 
 § 122, 9. Comp. I errands/, § 134, 3. 6 7 — (etiam) also. xa,xu>$ S/a* 
 
 +i6i7a6oti=to be indisposed, cuipa, is an Acc. partis affectcs ; § 159, 
 3. (7). 8 were most wretchedly affected , were in a very wretched 
 
 plight. 
 
 (2. Why is the accent on the final syllable of sra/er/ ? ^ What 
 Case is ipuw ? otfiouf? 4. What Tense is ? W*™ ? 
 
 Of what two words is xhxtTvos compounded ? 6. Supply the ellip¬ 
 sis after 7- Derivation of Itp'ohov ?) 
 
 1. The citizens attack the enemies. 2. We will 
 make 1 the good our friends. 3. The citizens were 
 afraid that the enemies would attack the city. 4. 
 Lay-up (pi.) a provision for 2 old-age! 5. Put-on^ 
 {sing) the crown! (5. Take-care that the enemies do 
 . ot attack 4 you! 7. Croesus laid-up 3 many treasures 
 of gold in his house. 8. The disposition of men is 
 often changed by wealth. 9. Nature cannot easily 
 be changed. 10. A golden crown was placed 3 by 
 the Athenians on the gate of the Acropolis. 11. All- 
 things have been changed by the war. 
 
 1 Put. Mid. of vlOrifM. 2 <<Yj with Acc. 3 Aor. Aor. Subj. 
 
 LXIX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (A$o>jut, &c.—* Pass . and Mid.) 
 
 ’AuoiM, -ris, it exchange, recom - with ; Mid. I give-myself-up • 
 
 pense, vetuvn. with others^ to anything. 
 
 (xroaroi, -ov , o, army. erw-vsu, I spin , weave-together - 
 
 I give-together * with. 
 
 1. Xapic \apiTL cnroBidorai. 2. Tqi ev irotovvTi iro\~ 
 
 Xaictc Kcucrj airoSiSorat ajuoifirj. 3. HarptSec 7ToWaKid 
 
 Sia KepSog 7rpovSo9riaav. 4. IloXXa Scopa SeSotcu rote 
 
 av0pu)7roic irapa 1 rwv 6ewv. 5. &G fiiya to fiiKpov 
 
 iGTtv Iv Kaip<p doQev. 6. "Ore etXe 2 rrjv Qigfdaiwv 7 ro- 
 
 Xiv ’A\i%(ivdpoGf chteSoto 3 tovq eAexjOepovq 7Tavrag* 
 
 7. 'Ekcjv (TEavrov rp K AcoOoi* owe: nStSou, napEXwv 
 
 ttvvi/qdai, olcrtcw 5 iron TTpaypaoi flovAsrat. 8. OpoiwQ. 
 
 A 
 
280 
 
 VERBS IN -pi. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 ala^pov, ctKOvaavra yor\(njiov Xoyov fir) jj.avOa.veiv Ka\ 
 SiSojisvd v tl ayaOov irapa 1 tmv (jtiXcov jirj Xajifiavetv. 
 
 9. Ot iroXirai (pofiouvrai, fir) i] iroXtg irpoStSutrat. 
 
 10. MrjnoTe vi to tojv <j>'iX(i)v frpoStSoio. 11. 'O arparbc 
 
 V7T avrov TOV <J TpaT 1 ]yOV 6 frpOllSlSoTO . 12. ’AfrdSoV 
 
 ro KVfreXXov. 
 
 1 § 167, 5. 2 Aor. II. of ctipiu • §126,1. 3 he sold. 4 Clotho, 
 
 one of tlie three M oT^at or Parcse who spin the thread of life. 
 5 by attraction for wgxyju.ainv, cinvot fiouXtrai. § 182, 6. 6 uvrog f 
 
 argarvyo{=the general himself. 
 
 1. All-things are given by 1 God. 2. The wealth 
 which 2 is given 3 by 1 God is sure. 3. The city was 
 betrayed to the enemies by the soldiers. 4. We 
 must bear nobly whatever 2 is sent 4 by God. 5. The 
 friend will not be betrayed by the friend. 6. Alex¬ 
 ander is said to have sold 5 all the free citizens when 
 he took 6 Thebes. 7. The army is said to have been 
 betrayed 5 by the general. 8. The citizens were- 
 afraid that the town would be betrayed. 9. Let us 
 sell 6 the cups I 
 
 * vrctpix, with Gen. 2 8$ civ. 3 Aor. Subj. 4 Say : is given. 9 Aor. 
 Inf. after a Verb of asset'ting. 6 Aor. 
 
 / 
 
 LXX. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ( Verbs in -vju. — Pass, and Mid.) 
 
 'AXnSZi, indeed, truly, 
 ctptpi-evvvfii, I put-on / Mid. I 
 wear. 
 
 a.<7ro\Xv(iu, I ruin, destroy ; Mid. 
 
 I am-lost, perish. 
 
 MiUvvfAi, I shew ; Mid. I shew- 
 forth-of-myself 
 Wi-'huKvupt, / make-a-display, I 
 shevt-off ; Mid. I shew-for th- 
 boastfully-of-myself exhibit. 
 
 'iadris, - riros, fi, dress, appard. 
 
 xif>a.vvufAi, I mix. 
 crappycria, -as, *), freedom-of 
 speech, boldness. 
 croXuTtX-fjs, -is, costly, splendid, 
 ptrup, -o(>os, o, orator. 
 ftZiwvpti, I quench, extinguish. 
 am-u.'jroXXvfju, I ruin-together- 
 with ; Mid. I go-to-ruin-with 
 any one. 
 
 1. QiXoi (JtlXoiQ (rvvairoXXuvTai Svgrv\ovGtv. 2. 
 OitStfrore kXeoq IgOXov dfrdXXvrai. 3. ’AvSpog SiKaiov 
 leapfrog ovk afruXXvrai. 4. At yvvaiKeg \atpovatv ap- 
 
VERBS IN -pi. 
 
 281 
 
 § 135.] 
 
 <f>iEvvvp&vcn icaAag iaOrirag. Ot ciX?]0a»c ootyoi ov 
 (T 7 T€vSoV(TlV £7 TlS(lKVV(rOai TT]V CtVTU) V GO(f)lC IV. 6. O 
 otvoc, lav vSart 1 KEpavvvrjTat, to awpa piovvvaiv. 7. 
 'H 6 ^ 7 ?) £u0uc aj3evvvoiro. 8. ’Aa £v t<£ £h'w apfTjjv 
 Kat (TU)(f)po(Jvvriv ivStiKvvcro. 9. Oi PUpam TroAureAftc 
 (TToXag iiiKpievvvvTO . 10. 'O jorjrwp W)v yvwpyv ptra 
 
 Trapprjcr'iag cnrtbu^ciTO. 11. ’ A\Kifiiadr)g vtto twv AOuj- 
 va'iwv arparriyog a7raSti\0ri. 
 
 1 § 47, 10, and § 161, 2. (a). 
 
 1. The Persians wore costly apparel. 2. Always 
 shew-forth in yonr life virtue and prudence! 3. We 
 
 admire the friends who-go-to-ruin-with 1 unfortu¬ 
 nate friends. 4. Let us declare our (=the) opinion 
 with boldness! 5. The sophists made-a-display-of 
 their wisdom. 6. Women wear beautiful clothes. 
 7. The orator should express 2 his (=the) opinion 
 with boldness. 
 
 ‘Part. 2 Aor. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF VERBS IN -pi. 
 
 I. Verbs in -pi, which affix the Personal-endings 
 directly to the Vowel of the Root. 
 
 § 135. Verbs, whose Boot ends in -a (like l-orri-pt, 
 
 ST A-):— 
 
 1. K't-xpv-pt > I tend, (XPA-) Inf. taxphvai, Fut. 
 X p{,i tu), Aor. ixpv° a } Mid. 1 borrow,F ut. xpfoopai. 
 — (Aor. £x or i cr <*P r l v not used in this sense by the 
 Attic writers). 
 
 &|T To the same Boot belong also the two following 
 Verbs :— 
 
 2. xphi oportet, it is necessary, (Roots XPA- and 
 
 XPE-) Subj. XP*l val > Part * (jb) xpe<hv m , Impf 
 
- 8Z verbs in -fu. [Chap. VIII. 
 
 ‘XP'>°r xp'iv> Opt. xpa'i) (from XPE-); Fut. vnm 
 
 3. cnroxpih sufficit, it suffices ; there are also formed 
 Regularly from XPAQ, avroxpwfftv, Inf. cnroxgrjv, 
 -Tcart. aTroxpwv, -waa, -wv; Impf. cnrixpv; Fut. ano- 
 Xpw£f, Aor. aTT£XPWt(v). Mid. cnroxpihuai, I have 
 enough* abuse , waste, Inf. a7roxpi)<70ai, inflected like 
 Xpaopcu (§ 97, 3). 
 
 , 4 - ° v l v W, { /wq/fr, help, (’ONA-) Inf. Ai/i- 
 
 ixt ' 1 ? 4 > , P* # Ac k wanting ; Fat. ovyacj; Aor. ibvycra. 
 Mid. ovtvapai , / Aaw or advantage , Fut. ov?F 
 
 <ro^tai Aor. II. wvr'iprjv, -yao, -yro, &c., Imper. ovyao, 
 ±"art. ovryitvog, Opt. ovai/uyv, -aio, -airo (§ 134, 1 ), 
 Inr. ouacr0cu; Aor. Pass. (bvi/Oyv (used, but rarely, 
 
 ’0 x The remainin 9 f orms are supplied by 
 
 , f* Ifill) (IIAA-) Inf. TripTrXhvai; Impf. 
 
 , \ Fut 7rA ^ (TW ; Aor * ^ wa; Perf. TrtVX^a. 
 Mid. nipTrXapai, nipTrXaaOar, Impf. eTripirXapyv ; Fut. 
 TTAiiaopcu ; Aor. brXyaa/uyv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. tt *- 
 irXyapaL; Aor. Pass. brXrioOiiv (§ 95).—Mid. 
 
 The p. in the Reduplication of this and the following Verb is 
 usually omitted m composition , when a ^ precedes the Reduplica¬ 
 tion ’ f e. g. ip.Ti'rXccfi.oti, but i*iTi/u.Tka/u.nv. 
 
 6. TTi-grTrgri-pi, I burn (trans.), is conjugated in ail 
 respects like TripTrXygL, 
 
 7. TAH-MIj I bear, suffer, Pres, and Impf. wanting, 
 (instead of them viroyivu), hui X ofxai are used); Aor. 
 hrXrjv, tXco, rXairjv, rXrjOi, rXrjvai , rXag; Fut. rXrian- 
 pai ; Perf. rerX^Ka —On the forms rei-Aa/xti/, &c., 
 
 comp. § 134, 3. (Ih Attic Prose this Verb rarely oc¬ 
 curs.) J 
 
 I say * (Root 4>A-), has the following for* 
 
 mation:— ° 
 
 % ' 
 
 * See § 1/0, 8. 
 
§ 135.] 
 
 VERBS IN -/«. 
 
 283 
 
 _ ACTIVE. _ 
 
 Present. Imperfect 
 
 Indi¬ 
 
 cative. 
 
 S. 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 0rj<T<(i/), 
 
 0arov, 
 
 0arov, 
 
 0a/i£v, 
 
 0aT£, 
 
 0aa<(v). 
 
 Indi¬ 
 
 cative. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 £0rjv, 
 
 £0rjc,usual¬ 
 ly £0rj(x0a, 
 
 *02’ 
 
 £0ar oi>, 
 
 t(paTT)V , 
 
 £0a/X£V, 
 
 £0ar£, 
 
 £0a(rav. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 0w, 0pe, (prj , 0ij- 
 TOV, (j)U)fJLf:V , (prj~ 
 T€, (f>U)<Tl(v). 
 
 Opt. 
 
 0atrjv, 0airjc, 0au], 
 (j)air)Tov and 0at- 
 rov, 0an)rrjv and 
 
 Imper. 
 
 0 clOl or (j)dOi , 0a- 
 T(o, 0drov, 0a- 
 rwv, 0dr€,0ar(t>- 
 trav and 0a wcov. 
 
 
 (palrirfv, <pair\fjtzv 
 and 0aT/t£v, 0ai- 
 rjT£ and 0air£, 
 0at£v. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 <pavai 
 
 • 
 
 Fut. 
 
 ( prjau). 
 
 Part. 
 
 (0ae, 0a(ra, 0av, 
 Gr.0avroc, 0acrrjc, 
 &c., un-Attic). 
 
 Aor. 
 
 £0r/crc 
 
 i. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Perf. Imper. mfyaoQuj, let it be said . 
 
 Verbal-adjectives, 0ardc, <Jxitw g. 
 
 Obs. 1. In the II. Pers. Sing. <pns, both the accentuation' and the 
 Iota subscript are quite irregular. This Verb is enclitic in the 
 Ind. Pres, (except <p>?i) ; see § 14. 
 
 Obs. 2. This Verb has two meanings, (1) I say in general, (2) / 
 affirm (aio), assert, maintain , &c. The Fut. ^<ru, however, has 
 only the latter meaning; the first is expressed by fyej. The 
 Impf. e<p>jv, with <p<xvai and <p<xs, is used also as an Aorist. 
 
 * In Composition, avriQnfii, trv/uQvifti, avr!<pnfi, <rv(*.$n<Tt, &c.; <rv/i<pxth, 
 ffupiparov, &C. —but uvriQi if, <rvp<Qrii ; Subj. avriQau>, ccvnipris, &C. ; Opt. 
 
 fVfiQaTfttVf &C. 
 
284 
 
 VERBS IN m fLl. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 The following Deponents also belong to this class:— 
 
 1. ayapai , I wonder , am astonished , admire , Impf. 
 iiyufiiiv', Aor. ^yacrflrjv; Fut. ayaaogai. 
 
 2. Svvafjiai, I can , am able , Subj. Svvw/iat (§ 134, 
 1), Imper. Svvatro, Inf. Svvacrdai, Part. Svva/uievog ; 
 Impf. iovva/urjv and hSvvajuriv, (II. Pers. iSvvto), Opt. 
 £ vvaijxriv , Svvato (§ 134, 1); Fut. dvvry to/ucu; Aor. 
 iSwr/Or/Vf fjSvvfi0riv 9 and iSvvaaOrjv, (on the Aug.,see 
 § 85, Obs.); Perf. StSvvrigcu; Verbal-adjective, £v- 
 varog, able and possible. 
 
 3. Eiriara/jLai , I know , understand , (II. Pers. Ittigtci- 
 crat), Subj. iTTioTUifiaL (§ 134, 1), Imper. £7naTw, &c.; 
 Impf. T 7 ^toTajui 7 u, titt'kjtw, &c., (on the Aug., see § 91, 
 3), Opt. hnaraifngvy tTr'iaTaio , &c. (§ 134, 1 ); Fut. 
 tTTKjTfiaofxcu; Aor. rimariiOriv (Aug., § 91, 3); Verbal- 
 adjective, £7riorrjrdc* 
 
 4. tpa/aaiy I love , (in the Pm. and Imp/. epaa> is 
 used instead of it in prose) ; Aor. Apatrf/rjv, amavi; 
 Fut. IpaaOriaopai, amabo. 
 
 5. Kpt/xajuai, I hang , pendeo, Subj. icpe/xio/iai (§ 134, 
 1) ; Impf. £Kpegagr}v, Opt. Kpefiaigrtv, -aio, -airo (§ 134, 
 1); Aor. iKps/uacrQrjv; Fut. Mid. jcp£jurj<ro/iai, pendebo, 
 / sAaZZ hang s Fut. Pass. KpegaaOriaogaiy I shall be 
 hanged. 
 
 6. hrpiafir\Vy I bought , [a defective Aor. Mid. used 
 by the Attic writers instead of lu)vr\(raixr\v (§ 87, 4), 
 the Aor. Mid. of wvcojuat], Subj. irphojiai (§ 134, 1), 
 Opt. Trpiaigrjv, -aio, -airo (§ 134, 1), Imper. irpiu), Inf. 
 TTpiaaOai, Part, irpiafievog. 
 
 LXXI. VOCABULARY. 
 
 AaiftoviM) -«w, ra, the Deity. 
 
 I set-Jire-to, burn• 
 up. 
 
 tvx,\uot, -us, fame, glory, 
 tut, as-long-as . 
 perhaps . 
 
 xwfw, -tit, v, village, 
 ouxsn, no-more, no-longer. 
 troXiTixos, •», -ay, reiating-to-the• 
 state, political , cm7 ; <ra <raA<- 
 politics. 
 
VERBS IN -pi 
 
 285 
 
 § 135.] *—- — r~ 
 
 crortoo f, -a, -ev j (uter ?) which-of- evt-u/u, (Bat.), I am-with , asso- 
 f *6rtfiov, whether. ciate-with. 
 
 xeo-ffnu.ctHu, I shew-beforehand, cutp^vim, I am-of-sound-under - 
 “reveal. standing, am-discreet, am- 
 
 fponpov, sooner , before . temperate. 
 
 (ptfiofAut, (Gen.), I spare, save. 
 
 1 . Swicparrjc npo iravrwv i pW Xp^cu 2 T °^C av0pw- 
 7rouc (JWfppoavvriv KTr)(jaaOai. 2. ’ Ev eXiritri \pb TOV <> 
 
 aodiobg P iov - 3 - Kal a?£ ? C ’ f ? U 
 
 Xo'youe £rjXouv XP^ v3 - 4 * ’' I(Ta, C f ’ tW r ‘ c aV / 5 T 
 ypijv rov So>k parrj irprfrepov ra TroXmica dt- 
 
 Sd(TK£iv roue 5 laurtp awSiarpIfiovrag fj outppovtiv. 0. 
 ZuKodmg TY)V TroXlV TToXXd 6 WVrjCTEV. 6. Oi TToXtfUOl 
 TtoXXdg Kivpag Iviirpnoav. 7. Swicparijc ™ datpovtov 
 id ) Y } 7rpo<n)paiv£iv iavrto to /xe'XXov 7 . 8. Elouoc, ^afftv , 
 tmcXci'ac 7rarr/p. 9. w O<xa ot 6X1701 ro6e iroXXovg pi) 
 Trehavreg, dXXd Kparovvreg 10 ypd<j>ov(ri l \norepov 
 <bZpev 12 tlvat , $ 0(5/xev 12 ; 10. OJ iroXtrai roue trrpa- 
 
 uwrae T^e avSp£i'acr,7a(T0i](Tav 13 . 11. AXic i^tabug, euig 
 Swieparei <x vvrjv, e8vvf)6 n rwv jur) icaXwv ImOvpiuiv Kpa- 
 thv. 12. Ylptatpiju 7rpo 7ravrwv X P^ TWV rov 
 £ y gpa (ptXov that pot. 13. IloXXol xpupartov bvva- 
 pevoi <pd<$e<rOai, irplv Ipqv, epaaOevreg ovKen cvvavrai. 
 
 1 S 125,19. 2 3 sc. Wv; is right, we ought. 4 § 126, 8. 
 
 5 Verbs of teaching take a double Ace.; §160,4. § !60, 2. 
 
 7 the future. 8 is used parenthetically, like our they say. 
 
 9 the multitude, the people. 10 having power ==by virtue of their 
 power. 11 write— lay down as law, enact. n Subj. deliberations. 
 is olyapai nm nvos, I admire a person for anything. 
 
 1. Socrates asserted* that the Deity revealed the 
 future to him. 2. I affirm, said the general, that you 
 must attack the enemies. 3. Virtue will always bene¬ 
 fit men. 4. Fil \ l (pl) the cups with-wine 3 ! 5. The city 
 was-set-on-fire 1 . 6. The moderate man will always 
 be able to master bad passions. 7. The wise man 
 will always love virtue. 8. Socrates understood- 
 how 1 to turn 4 young-men to 5 virtue. 9. We cannot 
 buy a trusty friend for-money 6 . 
 
 1 Aor. 2 Acc., with Inf. 3 Gen. 4 *rgorg*'<r*. 5 tri, with th* 
 Acc. 6 § 158, 7. (y). 
 
286 
 
 VERBS IN -fU. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 § 136. Verbs, whose Hoot ends in -e (like zt-Oti-yi, 
 
 0E-):— 
 
 (Root f E-), I send. Many forms of this 
 Verb occur ojily in its Compounds . 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 In d.Jrifu, tijci iVt(v)$ 'Ietov, isfuv, hre, 
 iam(y). 
 
 Subj. iw, lyg, [y ; itjrov; iXojuev, itjrt, lC)Oi(v)) 
 ckJhw, a<piyg , a(f)iy, &C. 
 
 Imp. m, (trw, &c. Inf. tlvat. Part. 
 isiaa, lev. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. 'low (from f JEI2), atylow and more 
 
 rarely rrftovv, ( rarely uiv, ttqoluv), hig, 
 ai; 'Ietov, itrtjv; iejuev, iete, 'Laav. 
 
 Opt. ieitjv, &C. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Aor.II. 
 
 &S5* The 
 tioned in 
 
 tuca, a(f>e~iKa. —Plpf. e”keiv. —Fut. fou ).— 
 Aor. I. r}ica, a<prjKa (§ 131, 2). 
 
 Ind. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (§ 131, 2); 
 Dual eItov, atyurov, e'irriv; Plur. eX/uev, 
 KaOtiyev, eXte, cive7te, Eiaav, afpsiaav* ! 
 
 Subj. u), yg, a(pd), acpyg, &c. 
 
 Opt. ttrjv, tirig, eiy ); eXtov, ck^eXtov, eitt}v‘, 
 
 ElfXEV, CUpEX/lEV, eXt€, CKpElTE , eXeV, CL^eXev. 
 Imp. Eg, atyEg, etw, etov, a<p£rov, etlov’, ete, 
 a$£TE, ETwaav and evtiov. 
 
 Inf. Eivai, a<J)Eivat .—Part, tig, eXgo, tv, a^ug, 
 acfiEXaa , a(j)Ev, Gen. Evrog, E'iarig, a<j)£VTog. 
 
 Ang. of follows the analogy of the Verbs men- 
 
 § 91, 3—Observe the accentuation of the Compounds. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Ind. ! hyai , uaai, urai , &c. Subj. itoyai, 
 afjnuyai, iy, acpiy, &C. Imp. hao or 7ov. 
 Inf. 'lEaOai. Part. uu.Evog, -rj, -ov. 
 
§ 137.] 
 
 VERBS IN - fU . 
 
 287 
 
 MIDDLE — Continued . 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ufitiv, 'lzoo, &C. Opt. ioigriv (or tEijurjv), 
 
 ioio , a^toTo, &c. 
 
 Aor.II. 
 
 Ind. ujjly)v, Subj. w/Liat, atyCoyai, y, 
 
 tl (to, CKfitiao, a<f>y, i?rat, a^fjrcu. 
 
 tiro, atyeiTO, Opt. irpooiiuLriv,-OLO,-oiTo, 
 tifizQa, -oifitOa, &c. 
 
 &c. Imp. ov, (atyov, irpoov), 
 
 EoO(V, &c. ; II. 
 Pers. PI. ectOe, {u^e- 
 
 oOe, TTpotaOe). 
 
 Inf. zoOcn. Part, Efisvog, 
 
 -Y), -ov. 
 
 Perf. ufiai, fuOeifiat, Inf. sicrOai, fitOuaOai. —Plpf. tr 
 fxr)V, zioo, cKpziao, &C. —Fut. riooycu. —Aor. I. ijiccr 
 jjlt]v (only in Ind. and rare ). 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 a OfJiai 
 
 elOnv, Inf. Wrjvat , Part. We'iq, &c. —Fut. zOi'i- 
 . —Verbal-adjectives, irog, ETEog^a^ETog). 
 
 § 137. Etjut (Root ’E2-), I am, and E lyi (Root ’I-), 
 
 I will go. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 I am. 
 
 
 Ind. 
 
 I icill go, 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Ind.S.l. 
 
 ■> / 
 ilfJLl, 
 
 Subj. w, 
 
 S.l. 
 
 ElfXl, 
 
 itu, • 
 
 2. 
 
 t 
 
 *1, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 •v 
 
 £1, 
 
 yi 
 
 3. 
 
 Igti(v), 
 
 V’ 
 
 3. 
 
 eioi(v), 
 
 y> 
 
 iy, 
 
 D.2. 
 
 eotov, 
 
 YfTOV, 
 
 D.2. 
 
 yf 
 
 LTOV , 
 
 ir]Tov, 
 
 3. 
 
 ZOTOV, 
 
 rjTOVf 
 
 3. 
 
 >! 
 
 LTOV, 
 
 11JTOV, 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 tojuiv. 
 
 WJ1EV, 
 
 P.l. 
 
 l/JLEV, 
 
 l(t)JUEV, 
 
 2. 
 
 > / 
 eare, 
 
 %TE, 
 
 2. 
 
 y l 
 
 ITE, 
 
 LTITE, 
 
 3. 
 
 £1<t!(v). 
 
 wo i(y). 
 
 3. 
 
 iaoi(y). 
 
 l(t)Ol(v ). 
 
288 
 
 VERBS IN -gi. 
 
 [Chap. YIII. 
 
 Imp. S. 2. 
 3. 
 
 1 D. 2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 2. 
 3. 
 
 icrOt , 5 6, 
 
 £<rra>, 
 
 £<TTOV, 
 
 £0T(OV, 
 
 Inf. £tya£. 
 
 Part, wy, ou<ra, oy, 
 
 G. ovrog, ovarjg, &C-. 
 
 >9 
 
 £GT£, 
 
 £aT( 0 (Tav f more rarely egtojv, 
 
 (sometimes ovrwv). 
 
 Imp. S. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 ! 3. 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Wi, go , (7 TpOQlOl, 
 rarely 7 rpogEt), 
 tVo), (7rpoctro>), 
 
 Inf. t£ya£. 
 
 Part. twy. \ovaa, iov, 
 Gen. toyroc. lovarig . 
 
 iVov, (7TpOCtTOv), 
 troiv, 
 
 iVf, (7TpdctT£), 
 
 iVoKrav or tovrwv. 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 D. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 j|y, I was , 
 
 9a, 
 
 riv, 
 
 Tjarov, (Titov), 
 Vcftyiv , (r)rTjv), 
 T\fi£v, 
 
 ?]T£, (fj<TTE), 
 
 Tiaav . 
 
 Opt. £trjv, 
 
 £17/C, 
 
 Sill, 
 
 aijroy, 
 
 arjrrjy, 
 
 £iTjjU£v, (dgev), 
 drire, (eTte), 
 urjaav and £t£y, 
 (irapEUv). 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 rjeiv or $a, I 
 went , (irapya), 
 riEig, or yuaOa, 
 
 yEirov , usu. ^rov, 
 ydrriv, — y, 
 
 yufitv, — $uei/, 
 — $re, 
 
 rjecrav- 
 
 Opt. tot/it or totqy, 
 
 toic. 
 
 tot, 
 
 tOtTOV, 
 
 lolrrjv , 
 
 lOlfJUV , 
 
 . IOLTE, 
 
 lOt£V . s 
 
 Fnt. co-ojuat, / sAaW be , £<ry or £<m, «ttcu, &c.— 
 Opt. ttroijurjv.—Inf. lataQai. —Part. iaojUEvog. 
 
 i 
 
VERBS IN -/*£. 
 
 289 
 
 § 137.] 
 
 Obs. 1. The Pres. Ind. of *<>/, / am (except the II. Pers. Sing. tT) 
 is enclitic ; see § 14. In Compounds , the accent is on the Preposi¬ 
 tion, if the general rules of accentuation permit it to be thrown back 
 80 far ; e. g. <r<xguf&i, vra-gu, oroigtcrri, &c., Imper. <ra.gia6i ; — but oragrjv, 
 iragyaDa, &c. (on account of the Augment, § 84, 2), <ra^sWa* [—w 
 geo-era/] (on account of the omission of s), voogiivou (like Inf. with 
 the ending -vat), vrxgu, -5Jf , -5?, &c. (on account of the contraction). 
 The accentuation of the Part, in Compounds should be remarked ; 
 e. g. orxgouv, Gen. -ragovrog. 
 
 Obs. 2. The Compounds of uy.t, eo, follow the same rules as 
 those of £<><', sum, with respect to accentuation ; hence, several 
 Compound forms of these two Verbs are the same ; e. g. or&gupi, 
 oraga, orxgn<rt (III. Pers. Sing, of upt and III. Pers. PI. of tipi) ;— 
 but Inf. c ragtevai, Part. orugidv, vrxgtouirx, orugtov ; Impf. Ind. orxgyrov, 
 oragy/xtv, oragyrt. 
 
 Obs. 3. The Pres, of iTpt, eo, (particularly in the Ind. , also in 
 the Inf. and Part.) has, in Attic prose-writers, almost always a 
 Future meaning , (I will go, or come). Hence the Pres, is supplied 
 by ’igx,°H' cli (§ 126, 2). 
 
 LXXII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 'A Tvpi, I am-away, am-dbsent. 
 axufju, I go-away, depart, (Pres. 
 
 usually with Put. meaning). 
 igKtoftai , (Dat.), I satisfy-mysef, 
 am-contented, (with Aor. 
 Pass.). 
 
 iq'iyfu, I send forth, let-go, give- 
 up, neglect. 
 
 (hi[9u)u, I live. 
 
 ieov, -ovros (Neut. Part, of $w), 
 to, that-which-is-needful, ne¬ 
 cessary, proper, hence, duty, 
 irjhv, (scilicet), namely, forsooth. 
 Aioyevyg, -ovs, o , Diogenes, 
 ug ufAi, I go-in, come-into, enter. 
 \p.$gox l i% > u, I drive-into-a-net , en¬ 
 snare. 
 
 il-iyfM, I let-out, send-out; (of 
 rivers, \\dvxi =to empty-itsef, 
 fall-into). 
 
 $>,tutx, afterwards, then, here¬ 
 after. 
 
 ’Eguf*<xv0ios, -ov of-Erymanthus. 
 i<plypi, I send-to, sendforth, 
 throw, let-go, permit; Mid. 
 (Gen.), 1 send myself or my 
 thoughts after anything, i. e. 
 / desire, crave for. 
 
 xa0lyp.i, I send-down, let-doum. 
 Kxvrgos, -ov, o , wild-boar. 
 
 KxgTigog, -a., -ov, strong , power¬ 
 ful, great. 
 
 xgavyy, -iis, y, cry , shout. 
 
 xiSog, -ov 9 o, stone. 
 
 p.i6\yp.i, I let-go, give-up , omit. 
 
 N ilxog, -ov, o, the Nile, 
 orxgxirxsvd^cj, I prepare; Mid. 
 
 I prepare-mysef. 
 oragu/xi, (adsum), I am-by, am- 
 present. 
 
 trugiy/xi, I let-fall, let-pass , dis¬ 
 regard, let-go, loose, remit, 
 give-up ; Pass. I am-relaxed, 
 am-exhausted. 
 ore'Sy, -yg, y, fetter. 
 orXiov&xis, oftener. 
 orgos-upi, I go-to, approach. 
 CTOf/tX, -urog, to, mouth. 
 
 •npugsu, I help, avenge; Mid. 
 (Acc.), I revenge-myself-on 
 any one. 
 
 < •pxvigog, -a, -ov, manifest. 
 
 %kvv, -ovos, y, snow, 
 us, (Prep, with an Acc. usually 
 of a Person ), to. 
 
 $ 
 
 O 
 
290 
 
 VERBS IN -/tie. 
 
 [Chap. VIIL 
 
 
 1. Ot ayaOol ov Sta tov vttvov peOiaat ra Seov rcr 
 7 TpaTTtiv. 2. ’A (peig ra (pavepa /urj Stance ra a^avij* 
 
 3. IloXXot avQptonoi etpievrai ttXovtov 1 . 4. IIt§a$ 
 Xtyouffiv €tc TOV 'EXX^cttovtov Kadelvai iSltp^v rt/xto- 
 povfievov SrjOev tov EXXtjcttovtov. Ovr tic xetpog^ 
 fisOevra Kaprepov XtOov paov 2 Kara(T\tLV, ovt airo 
 7 Xwrrrjc Xoyov 3 . 6 . 'Hpa/cX?)? tov ’Epv/uav&ov ica- 
 Trpov Sta>£ac /utra icpavyrjc tig \tova noXXrjv rrapetpevov * 
 ivef3pox^ev. 7. r O NeTXoc i^tijatv tig t^v OaXarray ; 
 £7TTa OTojiaaiv . 8. °ArTa 5 ^/T£tT taTaif ravTa Oeotg pe~ j 
 
 X«. 9. Et OvrjTog £t, (3 eXtkjte 6 , 0vrjra 7 ko\ (ppovei. 
 
 10. Ml/uvr/ao 8 veog wv 9 , wc ytpojv toy i tote. 11. Aticaiag 
 ?<r 0 \ tva Kat SucaiW rvxve\°- , 12 * B ‘ a? ^powcriic 1 
 ovSev \<jyyti vo/utog . 13. EvSatptvv eitjv kcu Oeoig <pt~ < 
 
 Xoc. 14. 'AXE'SavSpoc eTttev 12 * Et /U»J ' AX&avSpog Jiv, | 
 A loyevYjg av ^v. 15. Buoarj 13 apKOvpevog Toig irapovait \ 
 
 rwv aTTovrtov 1 ouk ecptepevog. 16. Kat veottjq Kat yi)- 
 pac 14 ap<p(t> KttXa ecftov. 17. Ot avOpanroi evSatpove tv 
 Suvavrat, icav irtvriTtg ttxxtv. 18. A XriOeia trot rrapEcrrtv. 
 19. y Ia)jU€v, w (piXoi. 20. Qtvye Sixoaraaiag (cat £ptv, ] 
 7 toXe/jlov npogtovrog . 21. ’Ettei tj MavSavij 7 rap£< 7 KEua- ! 
 
 £ero toe 15 amovoa naXtv Trpog tov at^pa 16 , o ’Aorvayijc 
 eXeye irpoc rov Kvpov * * £1 7 rat, fiv /ulvpe vap* *P 0 ' L >\ 
 Trpwrov /U£V, orav flovXri tlgtevai (Lg epe^eni trot £<mu 7 » 
 Kat x^piv fiaXXov e£(o 18 , oatp 1 ^ av irXeovaKig tiaiyg 
 tvg ijul* £7r£tra 20 & 'irnroig roig Ejuotc XP^ a V» Kai > ° Tav 
 airlyg, ex<*>v aTTtt ooc av avroc eOeXyg nrirovg . 
 
 1 § 158, 3. (b). 2 § 52, 10. 3 sc. ptflrrm paov xarao-^tTv. 4 ex¬ 
 
 hausted. 5 § 62. 6 § 52, 1. 7 Neut.Adj. used adverbially. 8 § 122, 12. 
 9 beinq younq = whilst thou art young. 10 § 121, 16. , force 
 
 being present, i. e. in the presence of force. | 2 § 126, 8. o u 1 s ® / ^ 
 
 as the Fut. of Zpua ; see § 126, 4 and § 142, 9. 4 § 39, Obs. b 176, 
 
 Obs. 2. 16 her husband. 17 uvai 1 xi rm —to be in the power of any 
 
 one, to rest with him. ls ^d^v s^uv—to feel gratitude. 
 quanto; oau orXsovocx/s, the oftener. 20 in the next place, moreover, 
 further . 
 
 1. The good man will never omit to do his duty 1 . 
 2. Many, neglecting 2 the known, crave-for 3 the un- 
 
VERBS IN -jm. 
 
 § 138.] 
 
 291 
 
 known. 3. Xerxes let-down 4 fetters into the Hel¬ 
 lespont. 4. May a man not be a friend to me with 
 the tongue 5 , but in-deed G ! 5. Be just, that you 
 may also obtain justice 7 ! 6. The friend cares-for 
 
 the friend, even though he be absent. 7. When the 
 enemies entered the city, the citizens fled. 8. Go-in, 
 O boy! 9. All the soldiers should depart from the 
 
 city. 10. Two armies entered the city. 
 
 1 r* Viovra. 2 Aor. Part. 3 l(pha$a,i, with Gen. 4 Aor. 5 Dafc. 
 6 aktiPw. * Gen. PI. of Vtxcaos. 
 
 II. Verbs in -yi> which affix the Syllable -vvv or - vv to 
 the Root-vowel, and append to this the Personal- 
 endings. 
 
 § 138. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Tool 
 ends in -a, -e, -o, or in a Consonant. 
 
 A. Verbs whose- Root ends in 
 
 -a, or -o. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Tense. 
 
 1. Boot in -a. 
 
 2. Boot in -i. j 
 
 ACT. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 I scatter. 
 
 ( TKtSa-VVV-fU*. 
 l-CFKtda-VVV-V*. 
 
 i-GKtSa-ica. 
 
 i-(TKeSd-K£tV. 
 
 (TKtSd-CFU), 
 
 (Att. (TKe^ufj -«£,-«) 
 
 £-(TK£da-(T a. 
 
 I satisfy. i 
 
 Kopi-vi 
 
 £-KOp£-VVV~V*. 
 
 K£-Kope-Ka. || 
 
 t-Kt-KOpt-KUV. \ 
 
 KOpi-aa), 
 
 (Att. Kopio, -dg,-u) 
 e-Kope-aa. j 
 
m 
 
 VERBS IN -fil. 
 
 [Chap. VIII. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Tense. 
 
 1. Root in 
 
 2. Root in-t. 
 
 MID. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 F. III. 
 
 (TKeSa-vvv-juai» 
 
 i-(TK£Sa-vvv-jurjv . 
 E-(TK£Sa-(T-JUai. 
 
 KOpi-vvv-fiai. 
 
 £-KOp£-VVV-/UTJV. 
 K£-KOp£-<T-/Xai 
 E-K£-KOp£-(T-/Lir)V. \ 
 icopi-a-ofiai. j 
 l-KOpe-a-a/uiiv. 
 K£-Kopl-a-ofiai. 
 
 PASS. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 £-(TKtSa-<T-9riv . 
 
 <TiC£^a-(T-0/;<TO/iat. 
 
 E-Kopi-o-Oriv. 
 Kope-a-Ortaofiai . jj 
 
 Verbal- Ad j. 
 
 CTK^Sa-O'-TOi?. 
 
 crKeSa-a-TWC. 
 
 KOp£-a-rog. 
 KOp£~(T-T£Og. 
 
 3. Root in -o (-*>). 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 \ Fut. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 I spread. 
 ACT. 
 
 orpw-vvv-fJiL *. 
 E-<JTpU)-VVV-V*. 
 C--OTTpW-Ka. 
 >£-OTp(f)-K££V. 
 
 arpd-aw. 
 
 f-orpw-tra. 
 
 MID^ 
 
 (TTpW-VVV-pai. 
 l-(TTp(i)-VVV-priV . 
 £-arpa>-juai. 
 £-<yrpd)-priv. 
 
 (TTpio-tr-opat. 
 
 E-cyrpoj-a-aprjv. 
 
 gg Aor. i-crrpw-0T]v. Verbal-Adj. oTpu-rog. 
 
 ^ Fut. (TTpiO-Ot'iaopai. (TTp(*)-TtOQ. 
 
 * And entidet-vvua/, l-<rxi^oi-vvuov. — xogi-vvva/, i-xogs-vvuov. — rr(>a>-vvua> t 
 l-<rr(><jj-vvuov, (always v). 
 
 B. Verbs whose Boot ends in a Con* 
 
 sonant. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 oA-Av-juit, perdo. 
 
 6A-A v-pai, pereo. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 djX-Xv-vf. 
 
 wA-A v-/uir}v. 
 
 Perf. I. 
 
 oA-wAt-ica rOAEO), perdidi, § 89. 
 
 Perf. II. 
 
 oA-aA-a, perii. 
 
 
 Plpf. I. 
 
 oA-wAe-KE/v, perdideram. 
 
 Plpf. II. 
 
 oX-u)X-£iv, perieram. 
 
§ 139.] 
 
 VERBS IN -fXl- 
 
 293 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 oA-w, -see, -st, &C. oX-ovg at, -y, -arat, 
 
 &c. 
 
 wAs-era- Aor. IL wA-o>rjv. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. I. 
 
 Plpf. I. 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 OjU-vu-juet, I swear. 
 wfi-vv-v\. 
 
 ou-tujUO-Ka (’OMOQ), 
 
 § 89. 
 
 ofi-wfio-Kziv. 
 
 og-ov/Jiai, -y, -strat, &C. 
 lopo-aa. 
 
 Aor. I. Pass. oogo-a-Orji 
 Fut. I. Pass. OjUO-<T-0/j<T 
 
 oj u-vv-gat. 
 
 Wju-vv-fJir)v. j 
 
 o/JL-wfio-G-fnai. 
 
 op-wpo-a-priv. 
 
 wfio-aa/uriv. 
 
 t. 
 
 0/uat. 
 
 t And bxxv-u, £xxv~ov .— opvv-u, ufiw-ov, (always »). 
 
 Obs. "oxxvfti comes by assimilation from ox-wpi .—As an exam¬ 
 ple of* a Root ending in a Mute , see hi*wfu amongst the Para¬ 
 digms in § 133.—The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of is bpvpor- 
 
 The remaining forms of the Perf. and Plpf. usually omit the 
 c in Attic writers; e. g. bpwporat, ipwptrcu 
 
 Synopsis of the Verbs belonging to this Class. 
 
 § 139. A. The Root ends in a Vowel, and affixes - vvv . 
 
 (a. Root ending in -a.) 
 
 1. Kepa-wv-fu, 1 mix , Fut. Kfpdo'ti), (Att. Ktpio) ^ 
 Aor. iic£pa(Ta j Perf. k eKpaKaj Perf. Mid. or Pass. k£" 
 Kpa/iai; Aor. Mid. EKepaaapnv ; Aor. Pass. hcpaOnv , 
 
 also bcEpaoQriv. — Mid. £ 
 
 2. Kpefia-vvv-fu, I hang (trans.), Put. Kptpaaio, 
 (Att. KpEjuw); Aor. l K pifxaaa ; Mid. or Pass. Kpepavvv- 
 
 I hang myself or am hung , (but icptyapai, 1 hang, 
 
294 
 
 verbs in -/u. [Chap. VIII. 
 
 intrans., § 135, 5); Fut. Pass. tcptfiaaOritTopai ; Aor. 
 hcpEfiaoOriv, I was hung or I hung (intrans.). 
 
 3. TTETa-wv-fu , I spread out, expand, open, Fut. nt- 
 Tacru), (Att. 7 rtra>) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. iriirTajiaL ( Syu - 
 cope, § 117, 1); Aor. Pass. liTETaaOriv. 
 
 (b . Root ending in -£.) 
 
 ^ 1. t-vvv-pi, I clothe, (in prose apf^iivvvpi), Impf. 
 apQiivvvv {without Aug) ; Fut. apcpdau), (Att. aju^tw); 
 Aor. u<pitaa; Perf. Act. wanting; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass. i 'ifMpieagai, ripQdvat, rip<t>daTcu, &c., Inf. 
 odaif but. Mid. a/uKpiiaofjLai, Att. aptyiovgai .—(on the 
 Aug., see § 91, 3). 
 
 2. Ze-wv-jLii, I boil (trans.), Fut. X,egw\ Aor '.f?c<ra; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. eZsGpai; Aor. Pass. l&oQriv .— 
 (£!(o, on the contrary, is usually intransitive ). 
 
 3. ct/3 i-wv-fii, I extinguish , Fut. a(3 law ; Aor. I. 
 
 hfieaa, 1 extinguished; Aor. II. tafinv, I ceased to 
 burn, went out; Perf. £crj3rjica, I have ceased to burn. — 
 Mid. afievi>vpat, I cease to burn ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 laflaapai ; Aor. Pass. iafliaQriv. iVo other Verb 
 
 in -v/uli has an Aor. II. 
 
 4. GTopIvvv-gi, I spread out , (abbreviated form, 
 
 oropvvp ); Fut. oropsaw, (Att. oTopw) ; Aor. lord" 
 psora. The other Tenses are formed from arpwvvvut , 
 § 138, A. 3. v * 
 
 (c. Root ending in -o, with the o lengthened 
 
 into w) 
 
 1. Zw-wv-pi, I gird, Fut. Zwaw; Aor. HZwaa ; Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass. IZwapai (§ 95) ; Aor. Mid. i^waapt] t;.— 
 J/i'd 
 
 2. pw-vvv-pi, I strengthen, Fut. pwrroi; Aor. tppwoa ; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, tppw/uiai, Imper. tppwao, vale, fare^ 
 well, Inf. eppwaOai ; Aor. Pass. IppwaOrjv (§ 95). 
 
 3. \pw-wv-pi, I colour, stain, Fut. xpd)Gw ; Aor. 
 eXP <*><™; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ksy pwauai: Aor. Pass. 
 i\p(VG6rjv (§ 95). 
 
§ 140.] 
 
 VKRBS IN -fU. r 
 
 295' 
 
 5 140. B. The Root ends in a Consonant , and affixes 
 - vv . (See SsU-w-pi, § 133.). 
 
 1. ay-vv-ui, I break , Fut. «$<*>; Aor. £a£a,Inf. 
 a£at; Perf. II. laya, / am broken ; Aor. Pass, taynv, 
 (on the Aug., see § 87, 4). Mid.. 
 
 2. uny-vv-fii (or tipyu)* I shut in, Fut. ap£w; Aor. 
 tlp^a; Perf. Mid. or Pass, upypai ; Aor. Pass. apx - 
 
 —[But ttpyu) (with smooth breathing), I shut out , 
 
 £to£(l>, f/PsCt, &C.]. c. 
 
 '3. Zivy-vu-iu, I join, Fut ; Aor. t?£u|a; 
 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. tCivyjim ; Aor. Pass. ii,tv)(pqv, 
 (and, more frequently, lltiyqv). . 
 
 4. aiy-vO-pi, I mix, Fut. ju.'gw; Aor. tpiU, piiai ; 
 
 Perf. jufu*X“ > l‘ erf - Mid - or Pass - m u 'i! laL • Aor ‘ 
 Pass. iuiyOqv, epiynv; Fut. III. pipgopai. 
 
 5. o'ly-vv-fu, I open, generally occurs as a Com¬ 
 pound, avoiyvZfii , (for this, however^ ayolyw in the 
 Pres, is more common; Impf. always aviyyov); h ut. 
 ivofcw; Aor. avu^a, avoiZat; Perf. I. avi V \a, I have 
 opened; Perf. II. avlyya, I stand open, (instead o 
 which the Attics use hvfyypai); Aor. Pass. are v x”»'’’ 
 avoi \dqvai ,—(on the Aug., see §87, 6). 
 
 6 . bpSpy-vv-pt, I wipe off, Fut. opog£<a\ Aor. 
 
 J\Iid- ■« r. -J 
 
 7. op-vv-pi, I rouse , Fut. oo<rw; Aor. wpaa; Mid. 
 opvvficu, I rouse my self t Fut opaopai or opovpcu; 
 
 Aor. (bpouTjv. „ y 
 
 8. wt-vS-fn, I fix, fasten, Fut. Aor. tirq^a, 
 
 Perf. I. 7 T£ 7 rijxa, / have fastened , F^f. II. 7T£tfr]ya, 
 am stand fast ; Mid. irqyvvpai, I stick fast ; Cert. 
 
 ■aiJnypai, I stand fast ; Aor. Pass, ivdyqv ; I ut Pass. 
 
 irayqaopai. — Mid. t fy . 
 
 9. phy-vv-yi, I tear, break, rend, hut p i)g«c, Aor. 
 
 Vobnta; Perf. II. 'ippuya, I am broken, rent; Aor. 
 Mid. ippqldpnv ; Aor. Pass, ippayqv ; Fut. Pass, pa- 
 
 yqaoficu « 
 
296 
 
 VERBS IN -pi. 
 
 [Chap. YIII. 
 
 LXXIII. VOCABULARY. 
 
 *A rtifit, -({, displeasing, loath¬ 
 some. 
 
 im-ZityvSfu, I yolce-again, join- 
 again ; (of an army), I break¬ 
 up, move-off, march, 
 aru-xxliu, I bum, kindle. 
 Avntrttvvs, -ovs, o, Antisihenes. 
 a<ro-trfie)»>ufa, I extinguish, put- 
 out. 
 
 (bltXvypiec, -as, q, disgust. 
 ZtKppriyvufAi, I tear-asunder, rend. 
 iyxxXkuTi&ptai, I take-a-pride-in 
 any thing, sliew-off, make-a- 
 display. 
 
 \\-6xxvfAi, I ruin, destroy-utterly. 
 xuvixxu, I chatter, prattle, whee¬ 
 dle. 
 
 xty^os, -ov, o, lamp, light 
 ftaXCax6s, -vi, -bv, soft, tender, 
 smooth, flattering. 
 
 Bevoipavns, -ovg, o, Xenophanes. 
 'OXv^tios, -a, -ov, Olympian. 
 crvy(eu)u>, I hate. 
 trvpvrr,yvu[Ai, I put-together, 
 frame, congeal, curdle, com¬ 
 pound, compose. 
 
 <pvff7ipta, -ares, t6, breath. 
 
 (fluis, (pur6s, rb, light. 
 
 XoXos, -ov, b, gall, bitterness, 
 wrath. 
 
 ^tvbogxos, -ov, perjured; ro 
 bo^xov, false-oath. 
 
 1. Twv fipatpartov 1 ra f}Si(rra 2 , lav Tig irpogfytpr,, 
 irplv briOvpuv, arjS?) (ftaiverai, KBKOpeaptvoig Sc icai /3Sc- 
 Auy plav irapi^i. 2. Tij> avup (Jivarj/uiaTi to plv 7rvp 
 avaicavcFtiag av , to Sc tov \v%vou (pcog cnroafiiotiag. 
 3.^0i AOrjvaJoi psTa iraarig Trig bvvapetog £ 7 ri Tovg 
 Ilcparac ave^ev^av 3 - 4. M rj Eaipovivv %oAov opcrpg. 
 5. H vfipig 7 roAAa ijSij tojv avOptoTrcov tnrdtAecrev tpya. 
 6* Ei prj <t>vAa%ug piKp\ anoAffig ra pu^ova. 7. Oi 
 TToAtptoi ibpoaav Tag ovvQr)Kag (j>vAd%ai. 8. Stvotpa- 
 vrig c'Acyc r? )v yr/v c| dtpog koI nvpog avpirayrivai. 9. 
 SajKpdrrig lS<vv 4 'AvTioOivrj to Sieppojyog tpariov pipog 
 act 7 roiovvra Qavspov 5 ' Ov iravari , lyicaAAioTriZo- 
 
 pevog r)piv ; 10. 'PcuSopfcov, arvyci Qtog, ogng opfftrai. 
 11. Ztvg av$p’ c£oAc<t£<€v ’ OAvpiriog , og tov iraipov 
 paAQaica kiotIAAcov l^airarqv WeAu. 
 
 1 § 158, 3. (a).Obs. 2 § 51, 1. 3 marched. 4 § 126, 5. 6 ratio <p a - 
 nfo*=I make manifest, exhibit. 
 
 L Boil 1 the water, O boy! 2. The garment is 
 torn 2 . 3. The milk is curdled 2 . 4. The doors are 
 open 3 . 5. The wine was mixed 1 with water 4 . 6. 
 The cup is broken 2 . 7. The light is extinguished 5 . 
 
297 
 
 § 141.] KcTj uai AND T Hjuat. 
 
 8. The soldiers will march 6 against the enemies. 9. 
 Swear 7 ( sing .) not heedlessly! 10. Insolence will nt- 
 terly-destroy you all. 11. Put-out 1 (sing.) the light l 
 12. The women in-their-grief 8 tore 9 their (=the) 
 clothes. 
 
 » Aor. * Perf. IL 8 Perf. Pass. 4 Dat. 8 Perf. L 6 
 Mp. * Aor. Subj. 8 Say : mourning. 9 Aor. Mid. 
 
 § 141, Inflexion of the two Present-Perfects , k ugai 
 
 and jjjuai. 
 
 (a). Ktigai, I lie down . 
 
 1. Ktijucu, (properly, I have laid myself down, I am 
 lain down, hence, I lie down), is a Per/, form without 
 Reduplication. 
 
 PERF. 
 
 PLPF . 
 
 Ind. Ktiyai, k uaai, keT rat, iceigs&a, keT< 70 £, 
 k sivTai. 
 
 Subj. Kewjuat, tcty, Ktrjrat, &C. ^ 
 
 Imper. kelgo, k eioQio, &c. Ini. keigum. 
 
 Part. Kuptvog. 
 
 Ind. tica/iTjv, ekeigo, ekelto , III. Pers. P . 
 
 EKEIVTO. 
 
 Opt. KSOtfilJV, ICE OlO, KEOITO, &C. 
 
 keigo/i at. , « 
 
 Compounds , avaicajuae, KaraRapai, KaraKeiaai, &C.; 
 Inf. KaraKEicrOcii ; Imper. kutukeigo, ejkeigo. 
 
 Observe that the accent of xaraxuaSctA is not thrown bach. 
 
 (b)„ T Hjuat, 1 sit. 
 
 2. (properly, I have seated myself, I have 
 
 been seated, hence, I sit), is a Perf. form of the Poet. 
 Aor. Act. ilaa, I set, 1 established The Root is HA-. 
 _(Comp. for ifrui [§ 8, 3] and the Lat.. 
 
 sed-eo.) o 2 
 
298 VERBS WITH AOR. TIKE VERBS IN -fit. [CHAP. VIII, 
 
 PERF. Ind. rjpai, ijtrat, rjarrat, Hp^Oa, rjcrOe, rjvrat. 
 
 Imper. ^jtro, liaQui, &c . Inf. rjaOau Part. 
 tjpevog. 
 
 PLPF. ypqv, Hero, xjaro, rjpeOa, JjoOe, ijjvro . 
 
 3. In prose the Compound KaOqpai usually occurs 
 instead of rinai. The inflexion of the Compound dif¬ 
 fers from that of the Simple in never taking a in the 
 III. Pers. Sing. Perf , nor in the P/p/, except when it 
 has the temporal Augment, which is indicated by the 
 accent 
 
 PERF : 
 
 PLPF. 
 
 KaOrjpai^ KaOqaat, k a 6 rj r a t, &C. Subj. tea- 
 Oiopat, KaOrj, icaflFjraf, &c. Imper. kct 
 Orjaro, &c. Inf. i caOtjaOai. Part, i cadri m 
 pevog. 
 
 i/caGr/priv and tcadhpi jv, zkciOiicto and k aOijtro, 
 i k a 0 rj r o and k a 0 rj <t t o, &C. Opt. 
 KaOol/jviv, tcaQolo, k adolro, &c. 
 
 Obs. The forms of which are wanting art, supplied by e£*- 
 r6ou or 'iZ>%a6ou, (in prose *tt.6H^ur6cu, xa-ft^iaStu). 
 
 § 142. Verbs in -<*>, which, in the Aor. II. Act. and 
 Mid follow the analogy of Verbs in -pi. 
 
 1. Several Verbs with the Characteristics a, e, o, 
 and v, form their A or. II. Act and Mid. like those of 
 Verbs in -pi, since, in this Tense, they omit the Mood- 
 vowel, and, consequently, append the Personal-endings 
 directly to the Root. But all the remaining forms 
 of these Verbs are like those of Verbs in -o>. 
 
 2. The formation of this Aor. II, Act., through all 
 the Moods and the Participials, is like that of the 
 Aor. II. Act. of Verbs in -pu The Characteristic- 
 vowel is almost invariably lengthened, as in IWiju, 
 viz. a and c into rj, o into w, v into v. This length¬ 
 ened Vowel remains, (as in sotijv), throughout the 
 
299 
 
 § 142.] VERBS WITH AOR. LIKE VERBS IN - pi . 
 
 Jnd., Imper. and Inf. > The Imper. ending -rj Oi is 
 shortened into -a in the Compounds of /3cu'vw; e. g. 
 irpojBa. instead of irpofiriQi. 
 
 Moods 
 
 and 
 
 Persons. 
 
 (a) Charact: a. 
 BA-12, (5aivvj, 
 
 I go. 
 
 (b) Charact.: s. 
 
 2BE-12, afitvvvpi, 
 
 I extinguish. 
 
 I Ind. S. 1. 
 
 1 2. 
 
 j 3. 
 
 1 D. 2. 
 
 i 3. 
 
 f P. 1. 
 
 ! 2. 
 
 ! 3. 
 
 ! Suhj. S. 
 
 | D. 
 
 P. 
 
 I Opt. S. 1. 
 
 1 " 2. 
 
 i a 
 
 1 D - 2 * 
 
 ! a 
 
 | p. l. 
 
 1 2. 
 
 1 3. 
 
 1 Imper. S. 
 
 1 D. 
 
 ! P 2. 
 
 J a 
 
 I Inf. 
 
 I Part. 
 
 H * 
 
 t-f3r)-v, I went , 
 g, 
 
 t-f3r)-rov, 
 
 l-fir'l-TriVy 
 
 t-flri-ptv, 
 
 t-f3rj-Tt, 
 
 t-[3y-arav. 
 
 /3m, /3yc, /3y*, 
 
 jSrjTOV, 
 
 j3w/u£v, -rjrt t 
 
 -<d(Tl(v). 
 
 j3 aiijv, 
 fiairiQ* 
 
 fiairjTov and -airovy 
 [5airfTK]v and -airrjn, 
 j3aii|jU£vand -a.Xp.sv, 
 j3aiijrt and -airs, 
 {3altv~ 
 
 [3ij0t, -r/Twt, 
 
 j3rjrov, -ijtojv, 
 /3rjre, 
 
 {3)]T(i)<jav and 
 
 13avrujv. 
 f3ijvai. 
 
 (3ag, -acra, -avy 
 
 G. fiavrog • 
 
 tcrfinv, I ceased to 
 
 s<r[3riQ, [burn, 
 
 e<r/3rj, 
 
 fcrj3r>rov, 
 
 IcrjSrjTrjv, 
 tafirjptv, 
 safi r}TS, 
 
 ta(3rjaav. f 
 
 /■j - - 
 
 <rpm, -^C» "V » 
 
 <T /SijTOV, 
 ojdwptv, -rjTS, 
 
 ■Wfft(v). 
 
 <t/3 etr]v, 
 
 vfisirjg, 
 
 <r(5sirj, 
 
 ofisiqTOv and-tTrov, 
 <jfisir)Tr\v and -drrjv, 
 afisiripev and -tipsy, 
 G\5tir)Ts and -tlrt, 
 vfitltv. 
 
 <r(3riQi, 
 
 <r{3rjrov, -ijTtov, 
 <rj3rjTS, 
 
 G/3rjrwGav and 
 
 cTptvraiv. 
 
 <7j3rjvat. 
 
 aj3tig, -slaa, -tv, 
 
 G. ofttVTOQ* 
 
 ♦ Compounds, ava/3&>, xvctfiTis, &C. ; wroirfZu>. 
 
 t Compounds, or uwfinn j 
 
300 VERBS WITH AOR. LIKE VERBS IN -fll. [CHAP. VIII 
 
 Moods 
 
 and 
 
 Persons. 
 
 (c) Charact : o. 
 TNO-O, yiyvuKTKut, 
 I know. 
 
 (d) Charact.: v. 
 Su-o), 
 
 I get into. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 eyvwv, I knew. 
 
 t8vv, 1 got in or 
 
 2. 
 
 iyvtug, 
 
 tSv g, [under, 
 
 3. 
 
 zyv<i)> 
 
 eSv, 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 tyvwTOVf 
 
 eSv tov, j 
 
 3. 
 
 eyvwrri v. 
 
 iSvTijv , 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 tyvwfuvy 
 
 t^VfJLiV, 
 
 2. 
 
 iyvujTt, 
 
 eSuT€, 
 
 3. 
 
 iyvbjaav. 
 
 eSvaav. 
 
 1 Subj. »3. 
 
 yvCj, yvwQ, yvip*, 
 
 Svu), -pc, -p*. 
 
 D. 
 
 yvCoTov , 
 
 8vr\rov, 
 
 P. 
 
 yvu)jMV, -WT£, 
 
 Svgj/uev, -rire, 
 
 
 -£j(n(v). 
 
 •uxn(v). 
 
 Opt. S. 1. 
 
 yvoirjVf 
 
 
 2. 
 
 yvolrjg, 
 
 % 
 
 3. 
 
 yvoiv ], 
 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 yvoiri tov and 
 -otrov, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 yvorfjrrjv and 
 
 -OITTJV, 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 yvohifitv and 
 -oTjuev, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 yvoirjre and -otrf, 
 
 
 3 3. 
 
 yvoTtv. 
 
 8v0i, -urmt, 
 
 Imper. S. 
 
 yvioOi, -u)Tio t, 
 
 D. 
 
 yvwTOV, -oirtov, 
 
 yVMTZy 
 
 8vtov, -vtiov, 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 8 vrs, 
 
 3. 
 
 yvbiTcjcrav and 
 
 8uru)oav and 86 v- 
 
 
 yvovTtov. 
 
 TOJV. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 yvCjvai. 
 
 8vvai. 
 
 Part. 
 
 yvovq, -ovaa, -6v, 
 
 •* ^ 
 
 eve, -u<ra, -vv. 
 
 
 G. yvovrog. 
 
 G. Svvrog. 
 
 * Compounds, ; «»«$($«. 
 t Compounds, &<$yi wfa ; iv&bvit. 
 
301 
 
 § 142*3 VERBS WITH AOR. LIRE VERBS IN -fll> 
 
 ~ Th „ 0 r)t form (instead of W), occurs in the Epic 
 
 Oss. Th P . , In the common language, the A or. II. 
 
 SStwt “in only a very /» Verbs; e. g. 
 
 (§ 125 , 22 ), (§ 135 , 6 ). 
 
 Synopsis of Verbs with an Aor. II. like 
 
 Verbs in -/a i. 
 
 Besides the Verbs mentioned above, some others 
 have this forifl^tioiij viz* 
 
 1. SiSpiWa., usually airoStS^mffKW, Iran away 
 a 122, 6), Aor. (APA-) Ind. airfSpav, -ae, -a, “£■ ' 
 -L, -a<rav, Subj. &iro8p&, -W. -8«, 
 usv, -Soire, -8p««(v), Opt. aTroSpa,^^ Imper. .« 
 
 U, .i,, inf. T.t'Tivr ) 5. 
 
 i.ru.l'lni Pnrt. *rlc; Aor. Mid. tri.".,". 
 
 *». V 2 'om 
 
 Ind. toKXrjv, i withered (mtrans.), Inf. ctkXiji; , p 
 
 “ x Adt“ 7 /»- ¥r. «*** « “*• »• 
 
 Aor. II. l>0nv, ♦05w». *6®c> II (KAE-) 
 
 5. Kat(*>, I burn (trans.) [§ 116,2], Aor. 11. KAb ) 
 
 iicanv, / iurned (intrans.)-but Aor. I. vcavea (truns.). 
 
 6 pin-, I flow (§ 116, 2), Aor. (PYE-) W«»v, 7 
 fi °T d X a; P o>, I rejoice (§ 125, 23), Aor. (XAPE-) i X i- 
 
 prjv 
 
 8. aXloKojuai, I am taken (§ 122,1), Aor. (AAO-) 
 
 *? aSSjr" Kw, Aor. II. ip.w, Subj. p.s, -VC, 
 &c-, 0»t. 0ttfqv [not 0,O,V, (like yvomr), to 
 
 distinguish it from the Opt. Impf. fW], Inf. 0.*. 
 2, Part. f3io6e,-ov<ra, {Kent wanting), Gen. I^.roc, 
 
 &c , or pLavroc, &c - Tlfj p’ s and 
 
 . ?•//, from avaBiwaKOjuai.)—lhe rres. ana 
 
 lmif of 3^ are but little used by the Attic writers 
 
 ( 126 , 4 ); instead of these, they employ the corres- 
 
802 
 
 inflexion op oiEa. [Chap. VIII. 
 
 ponding Tenses of which, on the contrary, bor- 
 j ows its remaining Tenses from j3iow ; thus. Pres. 
 
 ; Inipf. (§ 97, 3) }Fut. fiiuHrojuiai ; Aor. iBiojvl 
 Perf. /3c/3iWa; Perf. Pass. fiepivjrai, Part. BeBiur- 
 
 fxivog . 
 
 10. (jivtOj 1 bring forth , produce, Aor. II. tyvv, I 
 was produced, born , sprarc# wp, arose , was, 0u»/a(, 
 
 Subj. (Opt. wanting in the Attic dialect);—but 
 Aor. 1. ttivaa, I produced, Fut. (fivcrco, I will produce. 
 I he Perf. nlfjiVKa also has an intransitive meaning, 
 as also the Pres. Mid. ^vo/xat, and the Fut. (pvaopau 
 
 § 143. Otfyt (Root ’El As vid-eo, I see), 1 know. 
 
 * L Pers. Sing. fin, 1L jf$Wa, III. fin, are considered as Attic 
 farina. 
 
§ 143.] 
 
 inflexion of oTS<*. 
 
 303 
 
 Sing, doaV, -nc, -»i uual > “^‘Vor, 
 
 PI. clSdtifiev, tldeitiTt, ubtav. 
 Fut. titTOficu, I shall know or understand. 
 
 Verbal-adjective, lariov. 
 
 SurotSa, (Compound of olSa), I am conscious, Inf. 
 avv J(vai, Imper. qIviqOl, Subj. ovvubw, &c. 
 
 gs- Oi8a, tfcoupX a Perf. in form, has a Pres, 
 meaning; consequently, p’Seiv has an Impf. meaning. 
 
 LXXIV. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Alfjttt, -tiros, ri, blood. 
 iKo^rrtvs, with-impunity, dis¬ 
 orderly, intemperately, licen¬ 
 tiously. 
 
 ivo-Palvat, I go-away, depart, 
 a.oro-yiyvtitrxu, I give-up, reject; 
 £<roytyw<rx<» ifictvrov, I give- 
 myself-up, despair. 
 
 (Acc.), I run-away- 
 
 from. 
 
 boro-x^virru, I hide. 
 
 Zx'pviffros, -v *i useless. 
 
 hasten-to-as8i8t f aid. 
 
 hx-irirofini, 1 fly-away. 
 
 lu.vlorXvfil (rl rtm), I fill, 
 vnego's, -ol, -ov, dead j Subst. a 
 
 corpse. . 7 
 
 Bfr, -ua, *<», ( 1 ) Sharp ; ( 2 ) quick, 
 
 sioift. 
 
 vra^ot-orerofiut, I fly-past 
 vpo-ofioc, 1 know-beforehand, 
 or^oshr'os, -<>*, added (by art)* 
 artificial. 
 
 <rrtpy\, -vyos, it, wing, 
 wyytyvwrxu, (T)at.), I pardon. 
 2uXAas, -a, 0 , Sulla. 
 
 Zxn, (with Inf. or Ind.), so- 
 
 that. 
 
 1. Ot <tv0p»™ rhv hMiOuav yviovat awUSovan-K 
 
 2. rvw0< «««roV 3. IWa. P^ov. 4.H 
 
 no\ic hiveinavatv inch tmv iroXeptuiv aAwimi. 5. <Ptuye 
 
 (i^avrac 6. SiyynOi M°‘> « 
 
 / n £’ (C T { icaraEvc rov icoapov pepog icai utto 
 
 narep. <• ^ rtKari hiron^evyag; 
 
 § \ipog uiyiGTOV aXyog avOpwirocg efv . »• 
 
 <pO&vu\ 10. 'O SovXoc 
 
 WrJg^orJ. 11. 0 1 arpaTnyoc tyvwav me 
 toX/ra-c f3o„0eiv. 12 M/pro« ££7JU £ 
 
 tipou. 14. SuXXac IvferXww rn* ireXiv » «u 
 
 vuXipioi Ttiv yiv Tcyovcts aTCipwav. lb- A\p1 
 
304 
 
 DEPONENTS MIDDLE. [CHAP. VIII. 
 
 irpottSzvm ra psXXovra. 17. Ol ayaOoi iravriov pirpov 
 ivacriv e X tiv*. 18. IloAAo! ZvOpunoi ovrt SUag rtn/, 
 
 O UTS VOfLOVQ. * * J 
 
 are eager. 
 
 215 {naturally). Aoristic meaning. 8 <p6&nt rretta- 
 vrrxra, anticipates, flying past, i. e. flies past before one wishes it to 
 no so. * irdgb, escaped notice running away from, i. e. ian 
 away without the knowledge of. § 121, 13. *= resolved ,. 
 
 despair. 7 theOerameicos (or Potter’s Quarter), apl;*.e 
 in Athens. taetar, i X i, v know how to observe moderation 
 
 1' Depart 1 , O boy! 2. All the city flowed 1 w. th 
 
 blood. 3. The bird flew-away 1 . 4. The general ve- 
 solved 2 to aid the city. 5. The father pardoned 1 the 
 son. 6. Mayest thou not live disorderly! 7. Men 
 take-pleasure in-knowing 3 the truth. 8. The city 
 was taken by the enemies. 9. Let us not despair 1 ! 
 10. The slave ran-away-from 1 his master. 11. The 
 boy rejoiced 1 seeing 3 the bird fly-away 4 . 12. It is 
 well to know how to observe 5 moderation in-all- 
 thmgs 6 . 13. Never praise (sing) a man before 7 thou 
 knowest him thoroughly 8 . 
 
 * Aor. 2 ytyvuaxu. 3 Nom. Aor. Part. 
 Gen. 7 arpl* «», with Subj. 8 vaipwf. 
 
 4 Aor. Part. 
 
 § 144. Deponents (§ 118, Obs) and Active Verbs^ 
 whose Future has a Middle form. 
 
 (a). LIST OF THE MOST COMMON DEPONENTS MIDDLE *, 
 
 alrtaopat) I accuse , 
 «K£oga/, I heal , 
 aKpoaopat, I hear , 
 UKpopoX'iZopai, I hu l 
 missiles , skirmish , 
 
 ’A yioviZopai, I contend, 
 vhdZopat, I outrage, 
 mv itt opal, I speak in rid¬ 
 dles , 
 
 aloOavopai, I perceive) 
 
 * i. e. Deponents whose Aorist is of the Mid. form. 
 
DEPONENTS MIDDLE. 
 
 305 
 
 § 144.] 
 
 aXXopaiy 1 leap, 
 avafiiwaicopai, I return to 
 life, revivify, 
 
 avaicoivoopai, I communi¬ 
 cate with , 
 
 avexOavopai, I am hated, 
 avoXoyeopai, 1 speak in 
 defence, 
 
 apaopat, I pray, 
 aavaZopai, I welcome, 
 aQucvtogai, I come, 
 fdiaZofiai, I force, 
 yiyvopai, ./ flwi, become, 
 S&ioopai, I greet, 
 
 $i\opai, I receive, 
 SiaKtXtvopai, I exhort, 
 Swpiopai, I present, 
 iyKtXtvopai, I urge, 
 IvriXXopai, I command , 
 EViKtXevopai, I urge, 
 tpya^opai, I work, 
 vo\ojiai, I pray, 
 riyiofiai, ./ go before, 
 Staopai, I see, 
 iaopat, I heal, 
 iXaaKopat, I propitiate , 
 ivva^opai, I ride, 
 iaxvpitopai, I exert my 
 strength, 
 
 Kav\aofjLai, I boast, 
 KOivoXoyiopai, I consult 
 with, 
 
 Kraofiat, I acquire, 
 XijiZopai, I plunder, 
 XoyiZ,opai, I consider, 
 Xvpaivopai, 1 maltreat, 
 Xu?f3aopat, i insult, 
 pavTtvopai, I prophesy , 
 
 paprvpopai, I call to witr 
 ness, 
 
 paxopai, I fight, 
 piptyopai, I blame, 
 ptiXavaopai, I devise, 
 pipiopai, I imitate, 
 pvOeopai, I speak, 
 pvdoXoyiopai, I relate, 
 pvKuopai, I low, 
 
 ZvXevopai, I fetch wood, 
 Z,vXi%opai, I fetch wood, 
 oSvpopai, I mourn, 
 olwvifcopai, I take omens 
 from birds, 
 dXo(fropopen, I lament, 
 opX^opai, I dance, 
 oatypaivopai, I smell , 
 vapairiopai, I entreat, 
 vapaKtXtvopai, I urge, 
 vapapvQlopai, I console , 
 vappi)cnaZopai, I speak 
 freely, 
 
 irlr opai, I fly* 
 vpaypartvopai, I am busy , 
 vpooipia^opai, I make a 
 preamble, 
 
 vpotpacr'i^opai, I offer 08 
 an excuse, 
 
 7 TvvOavopai, I inquire , 
 oifiopai, I reverence, 
 GKEvropai, I consider, 
 oraQpaopai, I estimate, 
 oToxa^opai, I aim at, 
 orpaTivopai, I go to war, 
 oTpaTOTreStvopai, I en¬ 
 camp, 
 
 TtKpatpopai, I limit, 
 TtKTuivopai, I fabricate , 
 
306 
 
 . "* 
 
 DEPONENTS PASSIVE. [CflAP. VIII. 
 
 r(\vaoyai, 1 contrive, 
 v’ t Tia\vioyai, I promise, 
 virotcpivoyai, I expound, 
 Qt&oyai, I spare, 
 (pOiyyoyai, I speak, 
 
 ij)t\o(f)povtonai, I treat 
 kindly, 
 
 / xupJZ 0 /*** 1 ’ 1 9 rai ify, 
 
 Xpaoycu, I use, 
 wvioyai, I buy . 
 
 (b). LIST OF THE DEPONENTS PASSIVE * COMMON IN 
 
 PROSE. 
 
 Ayayai , I wonder, 
 alSioyai (§ 98, b.), Ireve¬ 
 rence, 
 
 aXaoyat, I wander, 
 ayiXXaoyai, I contend, 
 airovoiofiai, I despair, 
 cnropioyai, Iamperplexed, 
 apicrroKpaTtofiai, I am go¬ 
 verned by an aristocracy, 
 apvioyai, I deny , 
 ayfoyai, I am displeased, 
 fiovXoyai, I wish, 
 fipoyfioyai, I roar, 
 
 Sioyai, I want, 
 SrjyoKpaTioyai, I am go¬ 
 verned by a democracy, 
 SiaXiyoyat, I converse 
 with, 
 
 Siavoioyat, I think, 
 Svvayai, I am able, 
 ^vgapEarloyai, I am of¬ 
 fended, 
 
 ivavriooyai, I oppose, 
 IvOvyioyai, 1 reflect, 
 ivvoioyai, I consider, 
 
 tTTiyiXoyai .and - ioyai, 1 
 care, 
 
 hrivoioyai, I reflect on, 
 iiriarayai, I know, 
 tvOvyioyai, I am cheerful, 
 tvXafiioyai, I am on my 
 guard, 
 
 ewoiyioyai, I enjoy good 
 laws, 
 
 €U7 rogioyai, I am prosper¬ 
 ous, 
 
 n$oyai, I rejoice, 
 
 Kpiyayai, I hang, 
 yaivoyai, I am mad, 
 yvaa.TTog.ai , I loathe, 
 oioyai, I think, 
 oXiyapxioyai, I am go¬ 
 verned by an oligarchy, 
 7TEtpaoyai, I attempt, 
 7rpo0vyioyai, I am in¬ 
 clined, 
 
 irpovoioyai, I foresee, 
 aifioyai, I revere, 
 
 VTT0T07Tioyai, I suspect, 
 (piXoTtyioyai, I am anibir 
 tious. 
 
 * i e. Deponents whose Aorist is of the Passive form. 
 
ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MID. FUT. 
 
 307 
 
 (c). LIST OF THE MOST COMMON ACTIVE VERBS WITH A 
 
 MIDDLE FUTURE . 
 
 * Ay void), I do not know, 
 at'iBd) ($&*)), I sing, 
 atcovu), I hear, 
 agapTavcj , I miss , 
 enravrau), I meet, 
 enroXava), I enjoy , 
 apnaZd), I seize, 
 
 (3aSt%io, I walk, 
 
 /Saivio, I go, 
 fiiod), I live, 
 j3At7rw, 1 see, 
 f3oad), I shout, 
 ytXaio, I laugh, 
 yripa{oK)dj, 1 grow old, 
 ytyvwGKd), I know, 
 ^aicva), I bite, 
 
 BapOavio, I sleep, 
 
 BtiBd>, 1 fear, 
 
 SiSpaoKdj, I run away, 
 Bkvkoj, I pursue, 
 tyK.dijuaZtd), I praise, 
 
 | tigi, 1 am, 
 tiraivtd), I praise, 
 tad id), I eat, 
 t\Pd), I cook, 
 davgaZd), I wonder , 
 did), I run, 
 
 drjpad>, drjptvd), I hunt, 
 diyyaviv, I touch, 
 dvriatcd), I die, 
 dpox TKd), I leap, 
 
 Kagvd), I labour, 
 icA aid), I weep, 
 
 KAt7rra>, 1 steal, 
 KoXaZw, 1 punish, 
 
 Xay\avio, I obtain, 
 Xagfiavd), I take, 
 gavdavio, I learn, 
 vld), I swim, 
 olBa, I know, 
 olgibZd), I lament, 
 oXoXvZa), I cry aloud, 
 ogvvgi, I swear, 
 opad), I see, 
 iratZd), I sport, 
 ira<j\d), I suffer, 
 irriBad), I leap, 
 
 7 rivet), I drink, 
 
 7 Tl TTTd), I fall, 
 irXld), I sail, 
 
 7 TVtd), I blow, 
 t Tviyit), I strangle, 
 
 7 roOld), I desire, 
 TrpoQKwld), I do obeisance, 
 P Id), I flow, 
 
 Gtyaio, I am silent, 
 oavTrad), I am silent, 
 GKd)1TTd), I joke, 
 
 GTrovBaZw, I am zealous , 
 GUpiTTd)(-Z d)), I pipe, 
 
 TiKTd), I produce, 
 
 Tpl\d), I run, 
 rpwyd), I gnaw, . 
 Tvyycivd), I obtain > 
 Td)0aZd), I jeer, 
 ptvyio, I flee, 
 pdavd), I anticipate, 
 yaGKd), I gape, * 
 yiopld), I contain • 
 
syntax; 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE CHIEF ELEMENTS OF A SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
 
 § 145. Nature of a Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. 
 
 1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the 
 expression of a thought in words ; e. g. To puSov BaX- 
 O avOpWTTOQ 0vr)TOQ EOTIV .—To KaXov podov 
 uaXXti iv t(£ rov 7rarpog ktjttw. Every sentence must 
 contain, at least, two elements related to each other 
 and combined into one whole, viz. the idea of an 
 action or attribute, and the idea of an object of 
 which the action is predicated, or in which the at* 
 tribute exists. The former is called the predicate , 
 the latter, the subject; e. g. in the sentences, to po- 
 8ov OaXXzi, 6 avOpioTrog Qvrjrog lortv ,—to poSov and 
 o avOpionog are the subjects , OaXXei and Bprfrog egtiv, 
 the predicates. 
 
 2. The Greek language expresses the relation of 
 ideas, sometimes by inflexion ; e. g. To poSov 
 OaXX-e i .— O GTpanu)Tr}g ga\-s r a i.—Oi crrpantJTa • 
 AJ«X"° war, and sometimes by separate words ; e. g. '0 
 avOpioTTog OvrjTog iariv. In this last example, the 
 idea involved in avOpwirog is connected by icm'v with 
 that involved in Ovrjrog. 
 
 3. The subject is either—(1) a Noun ,—(2) a sub- 
 stantive-Pronoun or Numeral ,—(3) an Adjective or 
 Participle used as a Noun ,—(4) an Adverb , which 
 
 t 
 
SUBJECT. PREDICATE. 
 
 309 
 
 § 145.] OUDtl DVA< jl in—r-w— —- 
 
 becomes equivalent to a Noun by prefixing the 
 
 Article ,_(5) a Preposition with the Case which it 
 
 governs ,—or (6) an Infinitive . Indeed, every word. , 
 tor, syllable , or combination of words may be consi¬ 
 dered as a neuter Noun , and can, therefore, be¬ 
 come a subject, the neuter Article being usually pre¬ 
 fixed. 
 
 T'o p o' Sou OdWsi, the rose blooms—'Ey 
 ypa6w, I write.— T p £ i c ?X0ov, came.— O 
 
 (to (bog svSaipwv tor tv, the wis e-m an is happy • 
 
 Of VraAai avSpetot ?<rav, men of old were 
 brave .—O f tt e p i MtXnaSrjv Ka\<og t/iax^avro, 
 Mil tiades fought gallantly.—T o d w 
 8 a <j k e i v icaXov £<mv, to teach is good. T o t« 
 <ruv8i(jp6g e \ is a conjunction. 
 
 i 
 
 4. The subject is in the Nominative. 
 
 Obs. 1. The subject is in the Acc. in the construction Accusa- 
 tivus cam Infinitivo , (§ 172). In indefinite and distributive ex¬ 
 pressions of number, the subject is expressed by a 
 
 its governed Case; e. g.El* ^ ® 6 * w 
 
 o/ w« camesimilarly, *«*' U&trm, smguli, <*«, smgul® 
 
 gentes. 
 
 Obs. 2. In the following cases, the subject is not expressed by a 
 separate vjord :— 
 
 (a) . When the subject is a personal-Pronoun, it is not expressed, 
 unless it is particularly emphatic ; e. g. yg<*<p*>, yztyus, ye*<P**> * 
 write, thou writest, he writes. . ,. . . 
 
 rb). When the verbal notion contained in the predicate is ot 
 such a nature that it is not applicable to every subject, but only 
 to some particular one, the subject being obvious, and, to a oertail 
 extent, involved in the predicate; e. g. ‘E »i iroXe^m wWw, 
 \ KYI evil (sc. 0 >Apvl) ro7i "E xxnat Tuon<r>civK<rxa0ca, when the enemy 
 had returned, the herald proclaimed to the Greeks to pre^ 
 pare. So also, ry «*x«yyi or itraXv.yli* (sc. o 
 
 entX-riKTYii), the trumpeter gives the signal with the t) umpet. 
 The following expressions are to be similarly explained, viz. 
 
 Ssi, it rains, vi<pn, it snows, (o^ovr a, it thunders , ao-rga^r a, 
 it lightens , (z its being understood with each). 
 
 (c). When the subject is easily supplied from the context e. g. 
 in such expressions as <p*crt, xiyovcn, &c., the subject safest * 
 regularly omitted, as being obvious. 
 
310 
 
 CONCORD. 
 
 [Chap. L 
 
 Oes. 3. The indefinite-Pronouns, one, they, are usually ex* 
 pressed by r)s ,—or by the III. Pers. Pl. Act., (e. g. Xeyovtrt, 
 Qa.ri ),—or by the III. Pers. Sing. Pass., (e. g. Xeytred ),—or by the 
 pei'sonal Verb, (e. g. Xsyoftttt, dicor),—or by the II. Pers. Sing , 
 particularly of the Opt. with £ v, e. g. feting «v, dicas, you may say, 
 me may say, people may say. 
 
 5. The predicate is either (l)a Verb , e. g. to poSov 
 0 a XX e ij or (2) an Adjective , Noun , Numeral 
 or Pronoun in connexion with tlvai. In this re¬ 
 lation tlvai is called a Copula , since it connects 
 the Adjective or Noun with the subject, so as 
 to form one thought; e. g. To poSov k aX 6 v e ar i v, 
 the rose is beautifu l .—K vpog rjv /3 a cr i X s v g, 
 Cyrus was king .—So >1 er 0 a iravTtJv jrp wroc, 
 thou w ert fir st of all .—Ot avdpsg % a av r p ei g, 
 the men were thr e e .—To irpaypa lari rode, the 
 thing is this. Without the copula eivai these sen¬ 
 tences would stand, To poSov — koXov. Kopoy— /3acn- 
 Xtvg, &c., and, of course, would express no connected 
 thought. 
 
 Obs. 4. It is necessary to distinguish the use of Amt, when it 
 expresses a distinct, independent idea in itself, such as that of being 
 existing, abiding, &c., (e. g. His, there is a God, God 
 
 exists), from its use as a copula. In the former sense it can 
 be joined with an Adverb ; e. g. 2 a)c^<xTns ij > a. % t al/v <re?s nets, 
 Socrates was always with the young. — K aXds, xu * *> 
 
 \ art V, it is well, ill, &C. 
 
 § 146. Concord. 
 
 1. The finite Verb agrees with its subject ii 1 
 number and person ;—the predicative or attributive* 
 Adjective, Participle, Pronoun or Numeral, and the 
 predicative Noun, or the Noun in apposition (when 
 it denotes a person ), agree with the subject in gender , 
 number , and case (Nominative). 
 
 ’Eyto ypcKpu), av ypcKpzig, ouroy ypaQu, 1 write, thou 
 
 * See § 23, 1. 
 
CONCORD. 
 
 311 
 
 § 146.] 
 
 writest, he writes .— f O avOpwirog Ovrjrog lariv, man is 
 mortal.—'R aptri) k aArj zanv, virtue is beautiful — To 
 Trpay/Jiaal(j\oov zoTiv,the deedzsdisgraceful. Ot tiXAij* 
 vzg TToXcjutKufraTot rjaav, the Greeks were very-warlike 
 r O KaXoc 7 r dig, 17 a o^r) yvvru to fxtKpov tzkvov, the beauti¬ 
 ful boy, the wise woman, the little child .— Kupoc ny 
 fiaoiXtvg, Cyrus was king, (the predicate fiaaiXyvg is, 
 masculine ,because the subject is masculine).—T opvaig 
 7jv paaiXua, Tomyris was queen, (the predicate (5 cktl- 
 Xua is feminine, because the subject is feminine).— 
 Kupo^, 6 f3a<7iXEvg ; To pvpig, rj fiaaiXziai Cyrus, the 
 king ; Tomyris , the queen. 
 
 2. As zivai, when a copula, takes two nominatives , 
 (viz. one of the subject and the other of the predicate), 
 so also the following Verbs, (which of themselves 
 cannot form a complete predicate), take two nomina¬ 
 tives, viz. 07 xap\Eiv, to be , yiyveaOai, to become, (J>vvai, 
 to arise, spring from, be, av^avsdOat, to grow, pivtiv, 
 to remain, Karaorfjvai (from K.aQioTr)fii ), to be circum¬ 
 stanced, doKZiv, zoiKEvai and (fratvecrOai, to appear, Srj- 
 XovoOcu, to shew one's self, k aXttaOai, ovopa&aOai and 
 XtytcrOat, to be named, axouav, to hear one's self called, 
 to be named (like Lat. audire), aipeiaOai, aTrodeUwoOcu 
 and KpivEdOai, to be chosen so and so,vopiZtdOai, to be 
 considered so and so—and other Verbs of this nature. 
 
 Kopoe ly zver o fiaa tX tv g rwv Ilcpawo, Cyrus 
 be cam eking of the Persians .—Am tovtw v 6 <PiXltt- 
 irog rivZriOri p i y a g* 9 by these means Philip grew 
 great.—'AXutfiLaSrig ypeQri (TTparnyog, Aid - 
 biades was chosen general .—’Avrt flXwv koX 
 Se'owv vvv k 6 X a k e g kcu Oeoig ^ P 0 * atcovov- 
 a iv (audiunt), instead of friends and guests, they now 
 (hear themselves called=) are called flatterers 
 and enemies of the gods. 
 
 * Such a construction as this is called proleptic or anticipative ; 
 the effect of the action expressed by the Verb being anticipated , ad 
 if already accomplished. 
 
312 
 
 CONCORD. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 Obs. Instead of tbe second Nom., several of these Verbs are 
 connected vritla. Adverbs, and thus form a complete predicate ; e. g. 
 Ta a *6os x a Xtu s av^dvtrai, the flower grows beaut ifully. 
 The Verbs y lyvta 6 at and Qvvai especially are thus connected 
 with the Adverbs iyyu;, dlXis ; e. g. ToTs ‘A6nva.iut 
 
 croarvyoTs \yiyvovro 5 / % a. ai y vouftcti, the opinions of the A the - 
 nian commanders were divide d. —Ta *^kyparot o 2r a 
 x §», affairs are naturally so. 
 
 LXXV. 
 
 (Exercise on §§ 145, 146.) 
 
 1. Piety is the beginning of every virtue. 2. To 
 mortal men God is a refuge. 3. The wise strive- 
 after virtue. 4. Learning 1 is pleasant both to the 
 youth and to the old-man. 5. Before the gate stood 
 about 2 four thousand soldiers. 6. The maxim, ‘ know 3 
 thyself’, is everywhere useful. 7. The general or¬ 
 dered 3 them to keep 4 their spears on 2 the right shoul¬ 
 der^, till the trumpeter should-give-a-signal with the 
 trumpet 5 . 8. The herald made-proclamation 3 to 
 the soldiers to prepare-themselves for 2 battle. 9. 
 People admire brave soldiers. 10. Without self-con¬ 
 trol one can practise 3 nothing good. 11. Semiramis 
 was queen of Assyria. 12. Socrates always passed- 
 his-time in public 6 . 13. After 7 death the soul sepa¬ 
 rates from the irrational body. 14. It is 8 difficult 
 to understand every man thoroughly 9 . 15. Perhaps 
 the loves are called archers on this account, because 
 the beautiful wound even from-a-distance. 16. Tyr- 
 trnus, the poet, was given 3 by the Athenians to the 
 Spartans as a general. 17. The Lacedaemonians 
 were 10 the authors of many advantages 11 to the 
 Greeks. 18. Minos, who-had-ruled 12 very-constitu- 
 tionally and had-been-mindful 12 of justice, was ap¬ 
 pointed 3 judge in 13 Hades. 19. Virtue remains ever 
 unchanged. 20. If 14 any-one, chosen as a general, 
 
CONCORD. 
 
 313 
 
 § 147.] 
 
 has subdued 3 an unjust and hostile city, shall we call 
 him unjust ? 
 
 * Inf. 2 its- 3 Aor. ®Dat. ^\vtm tpxv'gu s7vxi. 7 fitrtx, 
 
 with Acc. 8 *x u ’ 9 Trans. 4 to know thoroughly ’ by the Aor. of 
 lixyiyvdjaxttv. 10 xuraarvvai. 11 12 Aor. Part. 13 xxtol, 
 
 with Gen. 14 \<xv, with Subj. 
 
 § 147. Exceptions to the General Rules of Concord. 
 
 (a) . The form of the predicate in many cases does 
 not agree with the subject grammatically , but with 
 what is implied in it. — (This is called by Gramma¬ 
 rians, Constructio Kara avvtaivOY ad intellectual). 
 
 To 7rAfj0oc t7nf3oi]9r}(rav, the multitude brought as¬ 
 sistance i (the Verb would regularly be Singular 
 here, but is put in the Plural, because 7rArj0oe, being 
 a collective Noun, includes many individuals).— r O 
 arparoc aTrej3atvov, the army departed .— To arparb- 
 7 reSov avb\u)povv, the encampment withdrew. —To fisf 
 paKiov lent icaAde, the boy is beautiful ; (here the Noun 
 is Neuter , while the Adjective is Masculine , agreeing 
 with the subject, therefore, only in sense). 
 
 (b) . When the subject is not to be considered as 
 something definite, but as a general idea or statement, 
 the predicative Adjective is put in the Neuter Sin¬ 
 gular, without any reference to the Gender and 
 Number of the subject. In English we sometimes 
 j^in the word thing or something with the Adjective, 
 and sometimes translate the Adjective as if it agreed 
 with the Noun. 
 
 Ouk a y a 6 b v iroXvKOipavia' ug Kolpavog 
 tcrrio, a plur a lit y-o f-r uler s (is) not a good 
 tiling; let there be one ruler .—At ju*raj3oAat Aw- 
 
 p 
 
314 
 
 CONCORD. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 ir tj po v, changes (are) troublesome .—'H povap\( a 
 k p ar i (tt ov, monarchy (is) a most excel¬ 
 lent thing. 
 
 Obs. 1. When a demonstrative , relative, or interrogative Pronoun 
 is connected with a Noun, either as subject or predicate, by uvai or 
 any of the Verbs mentioned in § 146, 2, the Pronoun agrees with 
 the Noun in Gender, Number, and Case, as in Latin ; e. g. O Zro, 
 
 \erriv o' Zvfo this is the man .—A S r « tar) -rny» xcc) fyw <ra»T«* 
 rwv xaxuv, this is the fountain and beginning of all the evils.— 
 Tovro hrn rb Mo$, this is the Jlower. In Greek, however, the 
 Pronoun is often put in the Neuter Singular ; e. g. T ov ri emv >, 
 l ,x a 10 <r v y n, this is j U sti ce —T ov r o irn TV y h xa) <i { % * 
 ytvtffiui, this is the fountain and beginning of being. 
 
 (c) . Verbal-adjectives in -roc and -tIoq are often put 
 in the Neuter Plural (instead of the Singular), when 
 they are used impersonally like the Latin impersonal 
 gerundive in -dum. 
 
 n terra (instead of ttlotov) Ioti toIq (piXnip, we 
 should trust friends. —Similarly, when the sub¬ 
 ject is an Infinitive or an entire clause , (in which case 
 we would use the Pronoun ‘ it ’ in English); e. g. 
 T»JV 7 T£ 7 Tp(t)pivr]v jUoT pav aSvvara tonv a7ro(f)vyuv 
 teal Ozdj), it is impossible even for the Deity to 
 escape the destined fate. —A fj X a £<xru>, bn Sti tva yi 
 nva hptijv jSaoiXia ytvtoQai , it is plain that at least 
 some one of us must be king. 
 
 (d) . A subject in the Neater Plural generally takes 
 a Verb in the Singular. 
 
 T d £ w a r p I x « th e anim a l s r u n .—T d 
 it pay par a to t i icaAct, thedeeds a re excellent. 
 KaKOu avSpo c S (v p a oinjoiv ovk t\tij the gifts oj d 
 bad man have no profit 
 
 Obs. 2. When the subject in the Neuter Plural denotes persons 
 or living beings, the Verb is often put in the Plural, to give the 
 personality more prominence; e. g. Ta rs\» rovs (rr^ccnwras «|- 
 v e (a. •$> a », the magistrates sent out the so Idlers.— -This is also 
 the case when the idea of individuality or plurality ia to be made 
 
CONCORD. 
 
 315 
 
 § 147.] 
 
 particularly prominent ; e. g. * * , s e k S , «, **) y,™, 
 
 tttfipo**, , £ y„ *•,*.* A, </iers were many tracks ap¬ 
 parent of horses and men retreating. 
 
 (e) . A Z>MaZ subject is very often connected with 
 a Plural predicate. 
 
 Avo avS pe ip a <x av r o, tw o m e n f o u g Jit. 
 
 A S s A 0 u) Svo % a a v k a \ o i, the two bro¬ 
 thers were handsome. 
 
 Obs. 3. The Dual is not invariably used when two objects are 
 spoken of, but only wheu they are of the same kind, either natu¬ 
 rally connected, e. g. t lh, x,up, Zn, two feet, See., or considered as 
 standing in a close and mutual relation to each other, e. g. afowA 
 a pair of brothers. & f ’ 
 
 „ The Dual forms, <rd>, ro7v, rdih, to7v rouru, rotroiv, abr o» 
 avroiv, &, oJ v are of the common Gender ; e. g. "a p <p * r Z vtkil, 
 both th e cities —T Z yuvctlxe, the two women.—”A p <p a> rof- 
 -rco rZ fifii^, both these days.—To7v ytvstrson, of both gene¬ 
 rations. — 1'obru rZ <re%vcc, these two arts .— The Feminine 
 forms, tol, ra,7v, roZi, &c., are very rarely used. 
 
 (f) . When the predicate is a Superlative, and 
 stands in connexion with a Genitive, the Gender of 
 the Superlative is regularly the same as that of the 
 subject , as in Latin;—more rarely, however, it is the 
 same as that of the Genitive. 
 
 0 O V O Q X a \ £ 7T (v T a T 6 G l(JTl T(OV v6cJU)V, eUVy 
 
 is the most grievous of diseases .— f O hXiog 
 7 TavTwv' XapTrpoTarog eanv, sol omnium rerum 
 lucidissimus est. 
 
 LXXVI. 
 
 (Exercise on § 147 ) 
 
 1. The army of the enemy retired. 2. The people 
 of the Athenians believe that Hipparchus 1 , the tyrant, 
 was killed 2 by Iiarmodius and Aristogeiton. 3. 
 Envy is something hateful. 4. Drunkenness is a 
 troublesome thing to men. 5. Inactivity is indeed 
 
316 
 
 concord. [Chap. I. 
 
 sweet, but inglorious and base. 6. Beautiful indeed 
 is prudence and justice, but difficult and laborious. 
 
 7 To learn from 3 our ancestors, that is the best in¬ 
 struction. 8. Together with power, the pride ot 
 man also increases. 9. Money procures for men 
 friends and honours. 10. Afflictions often become 
 lessons to men. 11. The misfortunes of neigh- 
 bours serve 5 as 6 a warning to men. 12. Hie Attic- 
 nian 7 tribunals, misled by a speech, often put-to- 
 death the innocent 8 , while 9 they often acquitted the 
 guilty 10 , either moved-to-pity 11 by the speech, o 
 because they had spoken 2 gracefully. 13. Both 
 these long roads lead to 6 the city. 14 The Spartan 
 youths, in the streets, kept their hands within the 
 mantle. 15. The enemy possessed-themselves-of the 
 two great and magnificent cities. 16. The eagle is 
 the swiftest of all birds. 17. Virtue is the fairest 
 
 of all blessings. 
 
 ‘ Ace. with Inf. 2 Aor. ^AwitliGen. ' 1 
 
 6 £ ; f 7 =of the Athenians. 8 =those doing no wrong. 
 
 10 =those doing-wrong. 11 =pitying. 12 i*. 
 
 § 147 b . Concord when there are several Subjects. 
 
 1. Two or more subjects require the Verb ox 
 Copula to be Plural. When the subjects are of like 
 Gender , the Adjective is of the same Gender , and m 
 the Plural; but when the subjects are of M e ™ n% 
 Genders , then, when persons are spoken of, the Mas- 
 culine takes precedence of the feminine and the 
 Neuter, and the Feminine of the Neuter; but, w en 
 things are spoken of, the Adjective is often in i® 
 Neuter Plural , without reference to the Gender ot 
 
 the subjects. 
 
CONCORD. 
 
 317 
 
 § 147*] 
 
 t X i 7T 7r o c ica) ’A Ae^avSpoc 7roAXa ical 0 a u- 
 paara epya a rr t <$ e i % a v t o, Philip and Alex¬ 
 ander perfo rmed many wonderful deeds .—2 to- 
 k p a r rj g Kai flAarwv cr o 0 o t, Socrates 
 
 and Plato w ere w is e .— f H p 77 r 77 p /cal 17 9 vya- 
 r rj p 77 <x a v k a X a t, the mother and the 
 daughter were beaut ifu l .—'H 6 p y i) Kai 17 
 a <r v v s a t a el a i k a k a t, anger and stupi¬ 
 dity are ha d .— 0 a v rj p Kai 77 y v v r) a y a 6 o 1 
 e taiv, the man and the woman are good .—H 
 y v v rj Kai t a t e kv a ay a 9 ai elaiv , the woman 
 and the children are goo d .— Q.g el$e 7r a- 
 t e p a re /cal p rj t i p a /cal a S eX (p o v g Kai rrjv iav- 
 rou y v v a! k a ai^paXwTovg yeyevrjpevovg, 
 iSaKpvaev , when he saw his father , his mother , 
 his brothers, and his w i fe made captive , 
 he wept .— f H ay o p a Kai to TrpvTaveiov Ilaphp 
 Xidoj r\ (TKr )! JL ^ va the forum and the town- 
 hall were adorned with Parian stone .—A i 9 01 
 re Kai tt X i v 9 o 1 Kai % v X a Kai k e p a p o g ara/c- 
 nog eppippeva ovSev % p i) a 1 p a £<mv, stones , 
 bricks , wood and clay jlung-together without 
 order are no-way useful. 
 
 Obs. 1 . Sometimes the Verb and Adjective agree in form with 
 the nearest subject; e. g. $ 1 x 1 7 ut 0 xa) « /uriryg, your father 
 
 and mother love you.—'Ay ados t a r t v 0 vrarrig xa) b /xyjrvg, the 
 father and mother are good. 
 
 2 . When several subjects of different Persons are 
 connected, the first Person takes precedence of the 
 second and third, but the second of the third; and 
 the Verb is regularly in the Plural. 
 
 ’Eyw /cat ait ypapopev. ego et tu scribimus; iyd, 
 Kai EKeivog ypatyopsv, ego et ille scribimus; lyut Kai 
 (tv Kai tKtivog ypafjioytv, ego et tu et ille scribimus; 
 ov Kai tKtivog ypcaptre, tu et ille scribitis; gym Kai 
 tKtivoi ypacpoptv, au Kai iKtivoi ypa^/fre, 77 pzig Kai Iku- 
 voi ypatyoptv, vpdg ko .1 tKtivog ypa^ere. 
 
318 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 [Chap. L 
 
 1 
 
 Obs. 2. Sometimes, in addition to a subject-Nominative which 
 expresses the idea of plurality, we have one or more subjects de¬ 
 noting the 'parts of which the first is composed {a-xfipa. x.u.6’ okov »eu 
 f&egos) ; e. g. o\ <r v i u r a. i ol ft tv rivavno/ffricrav ro7s vrokffilots, 
 o l 2 i i*e<pvyov, some of the soldiers withstood the enemy , but 
 the others fled ; (here a-r^anioTai, denoting the whole . is in the 
 Nom., instead of being in the Gen. governed by the partitives ol 
 pttv and ol Vi.) 
 
 LXXVII. 
 
 {Exercise on § 147 b .) 
 
 1. Socrates and Plato were very-wise. 2. Nisus 
 and Euryalus were friends in word and deed. 3. 
 Prudence and health were always the greatest bless¬ 
 ings of men. 4. Kleonymus the Laconian and 
 Basias the Arcadian, two gallant men, died in the 
 battle fought 1 against 2 the Karduchi. 5. Shame 
 and fear are innate in men 8 . 6. I and my 
 brother love tliee. 7. You and your friends 
 have done me many kindnesses 4 . 8. The citizens 
 ran-in-different-directions 5 , each to 6 his own. 9. 
 When my friends saw me, they embraced me, one 
 on one side, another on another 7 . 10. Some of the 
 citizens rejoiced at 8 the victory of Philip, others 
 mourned. 
 
 1 yiyvoftai. * 3 Dat. 4 orokka tvtgytnTv. 5 $ta23g6<rxtiv. 5 **•/, 
 
 with Acc. 7 akkos akkofov, alius aliunde. 8 *«•/, with I)at. 
 
 » 
 
 § 148. The Article. 
 
 1. The Noun as a subject, as well as in every other 
 relation, takes the Article 6, u, to, the , when the 
 speaker wishes to represent the object as a definite one y 
 and to distinguish it from others of the same kind. 
 The Noun without the Article represents the idea 
 merely in a general and indefinite manner, without 
 
I 
 
 § 148.] 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 319 
 
 any limitation; e. g. avOpconog, man , (i. e. an indivi¬ 
 dual or some one of the race of men ); but the Noun 
 with the Article makes the object definite, indicating 
 that such was the view taken of it by the speaker / e. g. 
 o avOpivnog, (i. e. the man whom I am considering, or 
 have in view, and whom I consider as a distinct indi¬ 
 vidual from the rest of men). So, (ftiXoacnpia , philoso¬ 
 phy in general; i) (piXoaorpia, philosophy as a particu¬ 
 lar branch of knowledge. 
 
 2. Hence the Article is also used to denote the 
 whole compass of the idea, when the speaker consi¬ 
 ders an object as the representative of all others of 
 the same class, and therefore as expressing a definite 
 whole; e. g. o avftpionog OvrjTog Icftlv, man (i. e. 
 all men) is mortal; 77 avdpeia KaXrj tonv (i. e. 
 everything which is understood by the term av- 
 dpeia); to y aXa IcftIv ijSu, milk (i. e. milk in 
 general, all milk) is sweet. 
 
 0B3. 1. The English indefinite Article, a or an, has a two-fold 
 signification. It denotes (1) a class generally, e. g. a man ; in'this 
 nase the Greeks use the Noun simply ; e. g. &vdauiros :—or (2) it 
 denotes a particular individual of that class, but not defined and 
 distinguished from the rest; in this case the Noun is usually 
 joined in Greek with the indefinite Pronoun rts; e. g. "a vdpuvoi 
 Ti s,' homo (j ui d am, a certain man. — Twi j tis oovtv a cer- 
 
 ir f. ™ 0 J* a 11 lut'd a hep T 'f is regularly placed after its Noun as an 
 Enclitic, but sometimes in connected discourse it is placed before it. 
 
 3. The Article is very often used instead of a 
 Possessive Pronoun, when it is connected with such 
 Nouns as naturally belong to a particular person 
 mentioned in the sentence. 
 
 0 1 yoyeig r a r ekv a orfpyoumv, parents love 
 THEIR children. K vpog T£ Karan Y)dri<rag and t o if a p- 
 p. a t o g tov 0 to p a k a evtdv, kol avaj3ag enl tov 
 inn ov r a naXr a ng rag x £ * P C eXafis, 
 and Cyrus, leap)ing doion from his chariot, put on his 
 breast-plate , and, mounting his horse, took His javelins 
 in his hands. 
 
320 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 Obs. 2. The Article is often used in a distribvtive sense; the 
 Article is here to be explained by its giving individuality to the 
 Noun with which it is connected ; e. g. 'O Kvgos v<xi<Txvi~ira.i 2u>rut> 
 r^'ia. iifiiha.(>uxa. r ov (/. v »o { r u argurnurri, Cyvus promises to 
 give three half-Darics a (=each) month to each soldier . 
 
 4. The Article, being originally a demonstrative 
 Pronoun , is often used where an object, at first 
 stated indefinitely, is referred to a second time ,—for 
 the same reason it is used when the speaker 'points to 
 an object. 
 
 O Kbpoc SiSaxTiv abrcp pvplouQ SapEtKOv q. *0 
 Xafiwv to \p v a i o v, Cyrus gives him ten-thousand 
 Darics. And betaking the (= that) money l —(here 
 Xpvcriov has the Article, because it refers to the pre¬ 
 ceding Saptacovg ).—OepE juoi, 7rat, to j3 i X i o v 
 
 Boy , bring me the (—that) book ! 
 
 5. As a general rule, proper names do not take the 
 Article. 
 
 S WKpar jj? Socrates said. — r Evncrj<Tav Or}- 
 j3 aioL AaKtSaifioviovg, the Thebans conquered 
 the Lacedaemonians. — Mr) o'UoOe /xijrs K.£pcro/3A£7r- 
 r r} v virlp Xtppovhaov, ph T * <P iX in tt o v VTTtp 
 ’Afi(l>nr6\e(joQ TroXtphaeiv, orav 'iSuxnv hpaG pn~ 
 two aAAorphov iejneplvovg, do not imagine that 
 Kersobleptes will go to war for the Chersonesos, or Phi¬ 
 lip for Amphipolis , when they see us coveting nothing 
 of what belongs to others. 
 
 They take the Article , however, when they have 
 been previously mentioned and are afterwards referred 
 to, or even when they have not been previously 
 mentioned, if they are to be represented as well- 
 known; e. g. ’A 7 to tov ’1 A i (toov XiytTcu 6 Bo- 
 p tag t b v 'Qi p € i 6 v i a v aprracrai, Boreas is said to 
 have carried off Oreithyia from the Ilissus. 
 
 Obs. 3. Proper names, even in connexion with an Adjective, 
 do not usually take the Article; e g. 2 the wise So- 
 
THE ARTICLE. 
 
 321 
 
 § 148 .] 
 
 €rate8. The Article is also omitted with a proper name, when a 
 -Noun in apposition having the Article follows it; e. g. K p o 7 a o s, 
 i ran A vluv (ictenXtCf, Croesus, the king of the Lydians. The names 
 of rivers are usually placed, as Adjectives, between the Article 
 and the word ; e. g. » n nvuot •roTa.pos, the river Peneus. 
 
 6. When Adjectives or Participles are used as 
 Nouns, they regularly take the Article (No. 2). In 
 English, in such a case, we employ either an Ad¬ 
 jective or a Noun ; e. g. oi ayaOoi, the good, 
 ro hyadov, the advantage , the good , 6 A iytov, the 
 speaker ,—or we resolve the Participle into he, who (is, 
 qui), &c. In Greek, this use of the Participle, in all 
 its Tenses, is very frequent. 
 
 O irXiiara a> (p e A w v (—ekeivoq oq ox^eXeI) to koivov 
 pEyicrriov r ipiov a^tovrai, h e who ( —whoever ) bene¬ 
 fits the commonwealth most is deemed worthy of the 
 highest honours ; 6 7rAacrra w (p e Aijaa? (=ekeivoq oq 
 to<pEXr](T£) r6 koivov p. r. ri&wOri; b nX. <b (p s X i} a io v 
 
 T. K. p. T. a£,l(oOt](T£Tai. - rioAAoUC i^OpEV T O V Q ETOipiilQ 
 
 awaytoviZopivovg, we will have many w h 
 will readily s u c c o u r us. 
 
 But if the Adjectives are intended to express only 
 a part of the whole, the Article is omitted ; e. g. K a k a 
 Ka) a t <r x p a iirpa^Ev, he did bad and disgrace- 
 Jul things .—The Infinitive also has the Article, 
 when it is considered as a Noun; e g. to ypatpEtv, to 
 write, or writing. 
 
 7- A A A o < means others, ol a X X o i, the others , 
 the rest, (i. e. all besides those who have been men¬ 
 tioned) ; h dXXr) f EAA«e, the rest of Greece. —"Ert- 
 p o g, alter , takes the Article (6 e t e p o q) when it 
 denotes definitely one of two; so also, oi ETEpoi, 
 the one of two parties.— [] o A A o i means many, o i 
 tt o A A o [, the many, the multitude , the mass (as distin¬ 
 guished from the component parts); ttXeiovq, plures, 
 several, oi tt X e l o v q, the greater portion (as distin¬ 
 guished from the smaller portion); ttXeIgtoi, plurimi, 
 o i TrAaorot, the most (of a preponderance in number). 
 
 p 2 
 
322 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 8 . In Greek, Adverbs of place and time , (more 
 rarely of quality ), may be changed into A djectives or 
 Nouns by prefixing the Article. In like manner, a 
 Preposition with its Case may be considered as an 
 Adjective or a Noun. 
 
 *H a v to TroXtc, the upper city ;— 6 pera£v 
 tottoc, the intervening place ;—oi ev 0 a $ £ av~ 
 Opwiroi or o i s v 6 ad e, the men there ;—6 v v v 
 fiacnXws, the pres ent king ( vvv , now ) ;—oi i t aX at 
 <ro 0 o£ avSpsc, the wise men of - o Z d ;—oi tote, 
 then existing ;—17 auptov (sc. 1 ipepa), the next 
 day ;—6 a tt, the ever enduring;—oi ?r a v v rwv 
 (TTpaTitoTtov, the best of the soldiers ;—17 ay a v a/ui- 
 Xeicl, the too-great carelessness / —6 it g 6 g r o v g 
 H ip a a c 7 roXtjuoc, the P er sian war ;— 17 i v Xtp- 
 p o v rj cr tg rvgavvig > Cher sonesian sove¬ 
 
 reigntyf. 
 
 9. When a Noun having the Article has attributive 
 words also connected with it, [viz. an Adjective, 
 an adjective-Pronoun or a Numeral, a Noun in 
 the Genitive, an Adverb, or a Preposition with its 
 Case (No. 8)], with respect to the position of the 
 Article the two following cases should be distin¬ 
 guished :— 
 
 (a). The attributive is connected with its Noun so 
 as to express a single idea. (e. g. the good man — the 
 worthy ; the wise man = the sage), and denotes an ob¬ 
 ject which is contrasted ivith others of the same kind , by 
 means of the accompanying attributive. In this case, 
 the attributive either stands between the Article and 
 the Noun , or is placed after the Noun with the Article 
 repeated. 
 
 'O ayaOog avfjo or 6 avrjp 6 ayaOog, the good man 
 (in opposition to the bad man) ; o i rrXovann noXirai 
 or oi 7 ToXirai oi 7 rXoutnot, the rich citizens (in opposi¬ 
 tion to the poor citizens); 6 tu>v ’A Oiiva'aov ciipog or 
 
THE ARTICLE. 
 
 323 
 
 § 148 .] 
 
 V oc 6 t(ov ’Adr/vai'iov, the people of the Athenians 
 (m opposition to another people); 0 i vvv avOpwirot 
 or oi avdpwirot o i vvv , the men of the present day (in 
 opposition to men of former days); b irobg Tobg [Up- 
 (rag uoXeyog or 6 TroXepog ,6 irpog robg LUpoag, the 
 Persian tear (in opposition to other wars). In all 
 these examples the emphasis is on the attributive. 
 
 (b). The attributive is not connected with its Noun 
 to express a single idea, but is to be considered as the 
 predicate of an abridged subordinate clause j — here the 
 attributive is not contrasted with another object of 
 the same kind, but with itself, inasmuch as it is in¬ 
 tended that the object should be considered with re¬ 
 spect to a certain property or quality, by itself with¬ 
 out reference to any other object. In English, we 
 use in this case the indefinite Article with a Singular 
 Aoun, but with a Plural Noun we use no Article. 
 Under these circumstances the Adjective without the 
 Article is placed in Greek either after the Article and 
 Noun,or before the Article and Noun. 
 
 O avrjp a y a 0 6 g OT a y a 0 6 g 6 ai’?'/p, a good 
 man [= ayuObg ibv, the man who is good , inasmuch as 
 (or because, or if) he is good].—Oi avSpamot puooboi 
 toi/ avopa k a k o v or kokov tov avSpa, men hate a 
 bad man [i. e. they hate the man , inasmuch as (or be¬ 
 cause, or if ) he is bad ].— (On the contrary, rov kukov * 
 avopa or tov avSpa tov kokov, the bad man , as distin¬ 
 guished from the good; hence, Tovg fiv ayaOovg av- 
 OgojTrovg ayaircofiEv, rovg Se jccikooc yiaoufitv , we love 
 good men , but we hate bad men) — O fiaoiXtog hStwg 
 \api^erai Tolg iroXiraig ayaOoTg , the king gladly 
 gratifies good citizens , i. e. if or because they are good; 
 (oil the other hand, roig ayaOolg iroXiraig or rolg noXt- 
 raig roig ayaOoig, good citizens , as distinguished from 
 bad citizens). O Otog ryv k p ar ( a t rj v rtJ 
 
 avOpunry ivtyuatv, God has implanted in man a soul , 
 
324 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 which is the most excellent or perfect.— Oi vtto tov 
 riMov KaTa\af,nr6fievoL tu \pwpaTa ntXavrtpa ovoiv, 
 
 those on whom the sun shines have blacker skins , (the 
 blackness of the skin is the consequence of the Kara- 
 \a/jnreaOai viru tov ijAiou). 
 
 Obs. 4. When a Noun with the Article has a Genitive connected 
 with it, the position mentioned in (a) occurs only when the Noun 
 with its Genitive forms a contrast to another, object of the same 
 kind ; e. g. 'O ’a favxlu* Ibpos or b "hfipos o ’A tyvxiuv, (the Athe¬ 
 nians, in contrast to another people) ; the emphasis is then on the 
 Genitive. On the contrary, the Genitive without the Article ot 
 the governing Noun is placed before or after that Noun, when 
 this latter Noun expresses a part of ivlmt is denoted by the 
 Genitive; the emphasis is then on the governing boun ; e. g. O iupf 
 ruv' AOnvxiwv or tuv' Adnvotiuv b Ibp 0 *, (i.e. the people, and not t e 
 
 nobility)_When the Genitive of the substantive-Pronoun is used 
 
 instead of the possessive-Pronoun, the reflexives i*t >roZ, rixvroZ, &c., 
 have the position indicated in (a) ; e. g. c O s puoroo orarjif or 
 b Tar tip i ipxvroZ, &c. ; but the simple personal-Pronouns \ poo aoo, 
 &c., stand without the Article, either after or before the Noun 
 which has the Article ; e. g. 'O wnij poo dr poo o crartig, o orccrriz croo 
 or a 00 o orarrig, o ttxtyio otorov (otorrji) or aoroo (at/TTjf) o orctrrij, my, thy , 
 Jlis (ejus) father, o orarbo bp&v, op&v, aorun OT hp&v, opojv, a.lru>y o 
 ■jrotrrip our, your, their (eorum) father. In the Sing, and Dual the 
 enclitic forms are always used. 
 
 Obs. 5. The difference between the two cases above-mentioned is 
 very plain in the case of the Adjectives & * % o s, p e a o s, t f x «f <>*• 
 When the position mentioned in (a) occurs, the Noun with its at¬ 
 tribute forms a contrast toother objects of the same kind, e. g. 
 V plan oroAis, the middle city, (in contrast to other cities) , h 
 wot, the most-remote island, (in contrast to other islands). When, 
 on the other hand, the position mentioned in (b) occurs, the Noun 
 is contrasted with itself, since the attributive only defines it moio 
 clearly. In this last case we usually translate these Adjectives into 
 English by Nouns, and the Nouns with which they a £ re ® as though 
 they were in the Genitive ; e. g. 'EA rZ> fya **& cr »<r a**<y rf •jm, 
 on the top of the mountain, (properly, on the mountain where high¬ 
 est) ; b plan tyi rfb’ku or b <r \5 vbAu p'nry, in the middle of the city ; 
 
 i rjwv or tv TW vrvrc? \cr X &r V , on the margin of the island. 
 (Comp, the Lat. summus mons, &c.). 
 
 Obs. 6. In like manner, the Adjective pin; has the position 
 mentioned in (a), when it expresses an actual attributive explana¬ 
 tion of its Noun; e. g. 'O pms w, the only son ; on the contrary, 
 it has the position mentioned in (b), when it is a more definite ex¬ 
 planation of the predicate ; e. g. ‘O orcui phot or phot b *aT s 
 the boy plays alone { i. e. without company) ; whereas o pom 
 would mean, the only son plays. 
 
THE ARTICLE. 
 
 325 
 
 § 113 .] 
 
 10. Further remarks on the use of the Article 
 with a Noun which has an Adjective agreeing with 
 it.— 
 
 (a) . The Article is used with a Noun which has an 
 adjective-Pronoun connected with it, when the ob¬ 
 ject is to be represented as a definite one; the adjec¬ 
 tive-Pronoun is then placed between the Article and 
 the Noun, e. g. 'O l yog aSeXcpbg; —on the other 
 hand, lyog a$e\(pbg would mean a brother of mine, 
 (leaving it undetermined which); lybg naig, a child 
 of mine. 
 
 (b) . The Article is used with a Noun with which 
 
 TOlOVTOg, T Ol 6 g$Ej TOOOVTOg, T T} X l K o v- 
 
 t o g agree, when the quality or quantity designated 
 bv these is to be considered as belonging to a definite 
 object, or to a whole class of objects previously named. 
 The Article regularly stands before the Pronoun and 
 the Noun ; e. g. 'O t oiov r o g avrip Oavyaorog lanv, 
 such a man (as this) is admirable. —Td ro lavra 
 npayyara KaXa la tiv, such actions (as those I have 
 mentioned) are honourable. On the contrary, the 
 Article must be omitted when the object is indefi¬ 
 nite, {any one of those who are of such a nature, or are 
 so great ) ; e. g. Totourov arSpa ovk av liraivoing, 
 you would not praise any man of such a cha¬ 
 racter. / 
 
 (c) . When nag, n avrsg occur with a Noun, the 
 following cases must be distinguished:— 
 
 (a). When the idea expressed by the Noun is 
 considered as quite indefinite, the Article is 
 not used ; e. g. Ude avQpwnog, every man , (i. e. 
 every one of whom the term man may be pre¬ 
 dicated), navTig avOpconoi, all men. In this 
 case, 7 rac in the Singular may always be 
 translated by each, every. 
 
 (f3). When the Noun to which 7rae, r avreg be¬ 
 long is to be considered as a whole in contra- 
 
 O 
 
THE ARTICLE. 
 
 32t> 
 
 [Ciiap. L 
 
 distinction to its component parts , it takes the 
 Article, which occupies the position indicated 
 in No. 9, (a); e. g. r H n a a a ythe whole 
 earthy ot 7 r a v t e g no/\irai , all the citizens 
 without exception, the citizens as a 
 whole or body. This construction occurs less 
 frequently than that mentioned in (a). In 
 this case, nag in the Singular may always be 
 translated by the whole , all. 
 
 (y). When the idea of the whole or all is joined 
 with a definite . object, (and, consequently, 
 having the Article), merely for the purpose 
 of a fuller explanation, but without any spe¬ 
 cial emphasis, its position is that indicated 
 in No. 9, (b); e. g. Oi (TTpaTitorai tTAov r o 
 a 1 paroneSov a 7T a v or a ir a v to (t t p a~ 
 t oneSov, the soldiers took the entire 
 Cam p .—0 e a t p ar l in t a 1 n a v t e g or 
 ir a vt eg o i arpariufrai KaXiog epa\ I- 
 (TavTo, the soldiers all fought well 
 This is by far the most frequent use of nag. 
 Trainee. The word 0 X 0 g also has the same 
 construction when connected with a Noun 
 having the Article; e. g. Am rrjv noXiv oX n v 
 or Sia oXrjv rrjv noXiv, through the whole 
 city. 
 
 (d) . When e k a a r o g, each , every, is joined with a 
 Noun, the Article is omitted , (as with nag in the 
 sense of each , every), when the idea expressed by the 
 Noun is considered as zndefinzte » e. g. Ko^ eKaiTTTfv 
 1 ifupav, every day, on all days ;—on the other hand, 
 when the idea involved in the Noun is to be made 
 prominent, the Article is joined with it, and occupies 
 the position indicated in No. 9, (b); e. g. Kara rrj v 
 17 flip av e k a <j t ri v, or (usually) K aO' i k a a t tj v 
 n) v rj g I p a v, each single , individual day. 
 
 (e) . When e k a t e p o g, each of two , a p <j> w and 
 apcporepog, both, occur with a Noun, the Article 
 
THE ARTICLE. 
 
 327 
 
 § 148 .] 
 
 is always used , and occupies the position indicated in 
 No. 9 , (b); e. g. ’ Etti T to V IT X £v p to V EKariptOP 
 or Itp' i k a r e p to v t to v 7r A £ v p to v, upon ‘each 
 Sides T to COT £ aptjiOTEptO OT a/ULt})OT£ptO T tO 
 to t £ t both the e a v s s a p tj> oi v r oiv \ £ p oi v or 
 r oi v \£ p ot v a p tp ot v, with both the han ds. 
 
 (f) . When a cardinal number is joined with a 
 Noun, the Article is omitted , if the idea involved in 
 the Noun is indefinite; e. g. Tpetc av8ptg nXQov , 
 three men came. On the other hand, the Noun 
 takes the Article ( 1 ) in the position indicated in No. 
 9 , (a), when the Noun, with which the Numeral 
 agrees, contains the idea of a definite combination; 
 e. g. Oi rtov fiatnXitov olvo^ooi 8t8oaoi t oi g t p i a t 
 3 a k r vX o i g o\ovvt£q rrjv ffnaAqv, the kings cup¬ 
 bearers present the cup , holding it with the three 
 fingers (i. e. the three generally used); indeed 
 the Article is very frequently used, when reference 
 is made to a preceding Noun without the Article , but 
 with a cardinal agreeing with it.;—(2) in the position 
 indicated in No. 9 , (b)., when the numeral is joined 
 with a definite object , merely to define it more fully, 
 but without any special emphasis ; e. g. ’E pa\iaavTo 
 oi p.£Ta IljpficAtowe onXiraL \iAioi or \iXiol oi ptra 
 UtpiKXiovg onXiTai , the hoplites with Pericles, to the 
 number of l,0i)0, fought. 
 
 (g) . Nouns to which the Demonstratives ouroc, 
 o 8 £, i k e i v o g f and avrog, ipse, are joined, also 
 regularly take the Article ; but the Article never 
 occupies any position but that indicated in No. 9 , 
 (b); e. g.— 
 
 ouroc 6 avrip or 6 avrjp ovrog, ( not 6 ovrog ainip), 
 j} 8 e r\ yvtopr} or 17 yvcLpr] ri 8 £, 
 
 EKUvog 0 avrip or 6 avrjp EKtivog, 
 avrog 6 fiaaiXEvg or 6 j3a(riX£vg avrog , ipse rex or 
 rex ipse,—(but 6 avrog j3a<jiA£vg=idem rex, the 
 same king). 
 
THE ARTTCLE. 
 
 328 
 
 [Chap. T. 
 
 Obs. 7. The Article with these words is omitted — (1) when the 
 Pronoun is the subject, and the Noun the predicate ; e. g. A Z r* 
 \<rr}» Afy'os this is the virtue of a -man ; so there is a differ, 
 
 ence between toutm tm 'biha.ay.AXM %(>iuvrui, they have this teacher, and 
 ■ ^ ha ay. otX ^ XZ&vrut, they have this man as or for a teacher 
 (2) when the Noun is a proper name; e. g. O Iras, ixt7»os, a hr is 
 
 2 Mx^artig, 
 
 LXXVIII. 
 
 (Exercise on § 148.) 
 
 1. Avarice is the root of every vice. 2. Good 
 education is the source and root of excellence 3 
 Wisdom is worthy of all diligence. 4. Man has un¬ 
 derstanding. 5. O young-man, strive-after wisdom! 
 6 . A kid, standing on 1 a house, when he saw a wolf 
 passing-by, reviled and scoffed-at him. But the wolf 
 said: Hark-you, 2 y o u do not revile me, but the 
 p i ace. 7. An honourable war is preferable to a 
 disgraceful peace. 8. Over 3 solicitude is sometimes 
 injurious. 9. In the war against 4 the Persians the 
 Greeks she wed-themselves very-brave. 10. The 
 Athenians, persuaded by Alcibiades to seek-for 5 
 power on 6 the sea, lost 5 even their supremacv on 
 land. 11. The wealth of Tantalus and the dominion 
 of Pel ops and the power of Eurystheus are cele¬ 
 brated by the ancient poets. 12. The halcyon, a 
 sea-bird, utters a mournful cry [No. 9, (b)]. 13. 
 
 Those who were born of the same parents and have 
 grown-up 7 in the same house and have been beloved 
 by the same parents, those indeed 8 are of all the 
 most-intimate. 14. Thy mind directs thy body as it 
 chooses. 15. I saw thy friend. 16. Through 9 the 
 midst of the park in Celaenoe flows the river Msean- 
 der. 17. On the top of the tree sits a bird. 18. In 6 
 the middle of Caucasus is a rock which-has 10 a cir¬ 
 cumference of ten stadia. 19. The city lies on 11 the 
 margin of the island. 20. The words of those 
 who 12 pursue 13 truth often avail more than the vio- 
 
THE ARTICLE. 
 
 323 
 
 § 148 .] 
 
 lence of others. 21. If 14 such men promise one 
 anything, they perform nothing less than others who- 
 give 10 at-once. 22. The earth bears and nourishes 
 everything fair and everything good. 23. Among 
 all men it-is-an-established-custom 15 , that the elder 16 
 begin every work and word. 24. The generals 
 resolved to put-to-death 5 not only those 17 present, 
 but all the Mytilenaeans. 25. Most of the cities 
 sent, every year, as a memorial of former kind¬ 
 ness, the first fruits of their grain to 18 the 
 Athenians. 26. Every day deserters were com¬ 
 ing to Cyrus. 27. Mysus came-in, holding a 
 buckler in each of his two hands. 28. The pel- 
 tasts ran 5 to 19 each of the two wings. 29. When 
 Darius was sick and expecting the end. of his life, he 
 desired that both his sons 16 might be present-before 
 him. 30. Both the ears of the slave were bored- 
 through. 31. Both the cities were destroyed by the 
 enemy. 32. These works are very-pleasant to me. 
 33. That man is very-wise. 34. Dionysius, the 
 tyrant of the Syracusans, founded in Sicily a city 
 directly 20 under the mountain of iEtna, and named 
 it Adranum. 35. According-to 6 these laws the judge 
 decides. 36. This is a sufficient defence. 37. This 
 is true justice. 38. Not only the soldiers, but also 
 the king himself fought very-bravely. 39. This 
 they use as a mere excuse. 40. This Charmides re¬ 
 cently met me, dancing. 41. Cyrus sent to Cilicia 
 the soldiers that Meuon had, and Menon, the Thes¬ 
 salian, himself. 42. The period of maturity for 
 woman 21 is twenty years, for man 21 thirty years. 
 43. The three cities lying on 22 the sea were destroyed 
 by the enemy. 
 
 1 with Gen. 2 u> ouros. 3 ay 4 <**£«*• 5 Aor. 6 Kara, with 
 
 Acc. 7 Aor. Part. 8 9 2/a, with Gen. . 10 Part. 11 e». u el a* 
 
 with Subj. 13 iTirn'Siuuv. 14 iav, with Subj. 15 vof&i^srui. 18 Acc. 
 with Inf. 17 —the. 18 «f. 19 isn, with Acc. 20 auras- 21 Dak. 
 
 u *a£U, with Acc. 
 
330 
 
 CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. L 
 
 § 149. Classes of Verbs . 
 
 The Predicate or Verb may be expressed in dif¬ 
 ferent ways with reference to the subject. Hence 
 arise different classes (Genera) of Verbs, which are 
 indicated by different forms, (Active, Middle and 
 Passive ). 
 
 1 . The Subject appears as active; e. g. 'O irate 
 7 p a 0 c t, the boy writes ; to clvQoq 9 a X X t t, the 
 flower blooms. The Active form, however, has a 
 two-fold signification:— 
 
 (a). Transitive , when the object to which the 
 action is directed is in the Accusative , and 
 therefore receives the action; e. g. Tvtt rw 
 tov 7raiSa, I strike the boy ; y p a 0 w t^v 
 zmoToXhv, I write the letter.—(Transitive 
 Verb ). 
 
 (j3). Intransitive , when the action is either con¬ 
 fined to the Subject, e. g. TO av9og 0 a XX a, 
 or. when the Verb has an object in the Gen. 
 or Dat., or is connected with it by a Preposi¬ 
 tion ; e. g. ’E 7T i 9 v fi Co Trig aptrrig, I long- 
 for virtue ; y a ip w ry (ro<ptq, I rejoice- 
 in wisdom ; p a Si Z, to tig ttjv ttoXiv, I go 
 into the city.—(Intransitive Verb). 
 
 2 . The Subject performs an action which is re- 
 
 fiided on itself; hence the Subject is at the same 
 time the object of the action; e. g. T v w r o /u a / , / 
 strike my s e if; ,6 opat,/ advise my- 
 
 s el f.—(Middle or Reflexive Verb). 
 
 Obs. 1. When the reflexive action is performed by two or more 
 Subjects on each other, e. g. T 6^tovtkj, they strike each other ; ha.- 
 xtXt6ivrai, they encourarje each other, it is called a reciprocal action, 
 and the Verb a reciprocal Verb. 
 
 3. The Subject is represented as receiving the ac¬ 
 tion ; e. g. O i arpana/rai vtto twv TroXiyojjv e 8 t to - 
 
CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 331 
 
 § 150] 
 
 X 0 ij or a v, the soldiers were 'pursued by the ene¬ 
 mies.—( Passive Verb). 
 
 Obs. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. In Greek the 
 Pass, has only two Tenses peculiar to itself, viz. the Put. and A or. 
 All the other forms are expressed by the Mid., inasmuch as the 
 passive action was considered as a reflexive one. 
 
 § 150. Observations on the Classes of Verbs. 
 
 1. Many Active Verbs, especially such as express 
 motion, besides a transitive signification, have also 
 an intransitive one.—(Comp, the English expressions, 
 T move [intrans.] and I move the book [trans.], the 
 tree breaks [intrans.] and the ice breaks the trees 
 [trans.], and the Latin vertere, mutare, declinare );— 
 thus, e. g. avaytiv , to draw back , regredi, Siayttv, to 
 continue , perstare, IXavvuv, to ride , drive , t/ufiaWsiv 
 and tigfiaWtLv, to fall into or upon , UfiaWtiv, to 
 spring forth , cnroicXlvaiv, like declinare, toettuv, like 
 vertere, arptcpeiv, like mutare, i\uv in connection with 
 Adverbs, e. g. tu, kcikwg e\uv, tene, male se habere, 
 TtXtvrijiv, to end, to die, and many others. 
 
 2 . Several Active Verbs with a transitive meaning, 
 which form both Aorists, have in the Aor. I. a tran¬ 
 sitive , but in the Aor. II. an intransitive meaning; 
 e. g.— 
 
 I wrap up, Aor. I. eSvcra, I wrapped up, 
 'iGTYifu, 1 place, — tar\\aa, 1 placed, 
 
 (pvw, I produce, — 'ityvo a, I produced, 
 
 oidXXw, I make dry, — ioKrjXa (Poet.),/ made thy, 
 
 Aor. II. tSuv, I went in, sunk, 
 
 - £(TTr]V, I stood, 
 
 — E(j)vv f I was produced, 
 
 — 1e(tkXt)v, I withered. 
 
 / 
 
332 CLASSES OF VERBS. [ClIAP. L 
 
 In like manner, several Active Verbs with a transi¬ 
 tive meaning, which form both Perfects, have in the 
 Perf. I. a transitive , but in the Perf. II. an intransi¬ 
 tive meaning; e. g.— 
 
 iydpw, I awake , Perf. I. lybytptca, I have awakened , 
 oXXvpi, perdo, — oXibXiKa, perdidi, I have 
 1 destroy , destroyed , 
 
 wdO tv, I persuade, — 7rt7reiKa, I have persuaded, 
 Perf. II. eypbyopa, I am awake , 
 
 — oAwAa, perii, I am ruined , 
 
 — 7T£7TOtda, / 
 
 Moreover, some Perfects II. of transitive Verbs 
 which have no Perf. /., have an intransitive meaning; 
 e. g. ayrvjii , I break , Perf. II. tdya, I am broken ; 
 n-riyvvfii , / fasten , TTtTnjya, I am fixed or stand fast; 
 pbyvvpi, I rend , tppwya, I am rent / <xrj7r(t>, / make 
 rotten , ato-rjn-a, / am rotten j t/jkoj, I smelt (e. g. iron), 
 rirrfKa, I am melted ; tpaivu), I shew , iri^va, I appear. 
 
 \ . 
 
 3. The following remarks oh the meaning and use 
 of the Middle-form should be attended to:— 
 
 (a). The Middle-form denotes, in the first place, 
 an action which the subject performs directly on himself 
 or itself (in which case we use in English the Active 
 Verb and the Accusative of the reflexive-Pronoun); 
 e. g. TviTTopai , / sfrn/e myself ’, irv^ap.r)v, I struck my¬ 
 self rvftpcu, I will strike myself This use of the 
 Middle is rare. To this class belong the following 
 Verbs, which are presented in the Aorist form: 
 airi'xto, I keep from , airoayfaQai, se abstinere, to keep 
 ones self from ; airay^ai rivet, to strangle, to hang 
 some one , cnrayZaoOcu, to strangle or hang one's self; 
 Tv\pa<j0ai } KO\paa0ai, to strike one's self i tirifiaXiaOcu 
 rivi, to throw or place one's self upon something , to 
 apply one's self to something ; iravaaadai, to cease 
 (from rravu), I cause to cease) ; 0ai, to shew one's 
 
 self ; and particularly Verbs which express an action 
 
CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 On •» 
 
 OoO 
 
 § 150.] 
 
 performed by the subject on his own body : \ovaaa- 
 Ocu (to wash ones self), vtTpaaOai, a\t'opao0ai, yp/cxacr- 
 0at, yv/ivacraaOaL^ KctXvipaoOai , KO(j(i{)aa(j6ai, ivSuaaa- 
 Oat , £K$urracrOat, KtipacrOai, GTStpavtocratjOai, and the 
 like.—With the exception of the above Verbs and 
 some others this reflexive relation is usually expressed 
 by the Active form with the Accusative of the reflexive- 
 Pronoun ; e. g. hraivtiv iavrov, to praise one's self, 
 avaprav iavrov, to make one's self dependent on, arro- 
 Kpvrrreiv iavrov, Wi^eiv iavrov, Trape-^iv iavrov, airo- 
 Avfty iavrov, to free ones self, cnroGtyarreiv iavro\', 
 a 7 roKT£iv£iv iavrov, pirrruv iavrov. Under these cir¬ 
 cumstances the Middle-form has the signification of 
 the Passive ; e. g. hraivucsQai, cnroKrdvtijOat, airoatpar- 
 rtaOai, (laudari, interfici, jugulari), and also has its 
 liorist and Future of the Passive form. 
 
 Obs. 1. In all the Middle Verbs mentioned above, the action is 
 such as does not necessarily refer to the subject; for I can, e. g. 
 as well wash another as myself. But the action may be of such a 
 nature as necessarily to refer to the subject, inasmuch as the sub • 
 ject which performs the action must be considered one and the 
 same as the object which receives the action ; in that case the Middle 
 lorm expresses the simple idea of an intransitive action ; this is a 
 frequent use of the Middle. To this class belong particularly very 
 many Verbs which express a mental act or perception. Only a 
 very few Verbs of this kind have their A or. of the Middle form ; 
 e. g. <pvx*%ucr0cii, to guard one's self to beware (<pv\<x?xi nvx, to guard 
 any one else), ovXdaxadxt , to advise one's self to deliberate (fiov\iZ<rxi 
 nvi, to advise any one else), yivxxaQxi, to taste, (Act, to cause to taste). 
 —On the contrary, most Verbs of this kind have their A or. of 
 the Passive form, but the Future of the Middle form ; e. g. 
 rOvtui, avxf*vf)<rnr0ai, to remind one's self to remember, recordari 
 (dv«/xvS 7 <r«/ rivet, to remind any one), xio-%vvdHvxi, xl<r%vvua6xi, to be 
 ashamed ( xlo-xZvxi Ttvet > 1° make any one ashamed), Qofitifrjvxi, <pe(er,- 
 riviai, to fear (<pofifira,i nvot, to make any one afraid, terrere), ero^iu- 
 tvjfcii, *ro(>iv<ncr6oti, to go, proficisci (erogtvrxi rivet, to cause any one to 
 go to convey one), engxiudyvai, <7ri^xi<hmir6xi (erorot(jtov), to pass over, to 
 yr<>ss (ert^uieearai nvx, to bring any one across, trajicere), erXxy%tijfxi, 
 T'i.<ty\vr$oti, to wander about, circumvagari {rXxy^xi nvx, to cause 
 any one to wander), xvix^vxi, xvionarSxi, to afflict one's self to be an - 
 notjed (fixer xt nvx, to annoy any one) ; also, ZixXutlijvxi, }ixx.giPfjvxt, to 
 separate one's sef to depart, discedere, xnxXXxyrivxi, abire, xoi/xv- 
 fijvxt, to sleep, (pxvrjvxt, apparere, trxyijvxt, So congeal , ttrx^ijvxi, to 
 raise one's self and many others. 
 
334 
 
 CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. 
 
 i. 
 
 (b). In the second place, the Middle-form denotes 
 an action which the subject performs on an object belong¬ 
 ing to itself, connected with itself, or standing in an in - 
 timate relation with itself In this case we commonly 
 use in English either a poSsessive-Pronoun, or a Pre¬ 
 position with a personal-Pronoun ; e. g. rvirTogai, 
 iTv\pafir)v ri)v K£(j)a\{)v, I strike, struck my head (tvtttuv 
 rrjv KityciXi'iv, to strike the head of another), XovaaaOai 
 roue 7ro3ae, to wash one's own feet (Xoveiv tovq i roSae, to 
 wash the feet of another ), aTTOKpvipaaOai ra tavTov, 
 conceal ones own affairs / KaTaaTptipacrOai yfjv, sibi 
 subjicere terram, to subjugate land to ones self, avap- 
 TrjaaaOal nva , sibi devincire, to make dependent on 
 one's self, cnroXvaacrQat nva, to free for ones self, to re¬ 
 deem, TroptcraaOai ti, sibi aliquid comparare, to procure 
 for ones self (-rropiZtiv n nvi, alii aliquid comparare, 
 to procure something for another ), icrj 'loaaOai ti , tt apa- 
 aKivcKraaOai ti, sibi comparare, to acquire, prepare for 
 one's self l aguvaaOcu tovq 7 toA eglovg, propulsare a se 
 hostes, to keep off the enemy from ones self > anwrraa- 
 Oai Ka kq, a se propulsare mala. — This use of the Mid¬ 
 dle is far the rnost frequent 
 
 Obs. 2. As the Active maybe used, when the subject does not it¬ 
 self perform the action, but causes it to be done by another, (e. g. 'AXi- 
 ty)v toXiv xa.reax.a.^/tv, A lexander caused the city to be 
 destroyed), so also the Middle may be used in the same way, but with 
 this difference , that with the Middle the action is always referred 
 in some way to the subject / e. g. 'O 'ra.rno robs <ru7$as <x % a, r o, 
 which means, the father educat ed his own chi l dr en, or, 
 (if it is evident from the context), he caused them to be 
 educated ; xti^aadai, to shave one's self or to get one’s self 
 shaved. —’A^y uoi lawr&Jv tixovctg ffoi7icr<x/u,ivoi ivshtrav iif jAiX^ovs, 
 the Argives having got statues of themselves made, erected 
 them at Delphi. — <r^viZ,av, to set a table before one’s 
 self, or have it set before one’s self. 
 
 4. From the reflexive meaning of the Middle the 
 Passive meaning is derived, inasmuch as the subject 
 permits the action to be performed by another upon 
 itself, so that it appears the recipient of the action . 
 e. g. pacmyovpai , vpai {vi ro Ttvog), I receive blows 9 
 
CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 335 
 
 § 150.] 
 
 punishment, I let myself be struck, punished— I am 
 struck, punished (by some one ); (3\lnrrouai, aSiKoi,uca, 
 1 suffer injury , injustice ; SidacvKoycn, I let myself be 
 instructed , I receive instructional learn , hence ci$a- 
 cKoyai inronvog, I am taught by some one = doceor ab 
 aliquo; t re'iOoyai, I persuade myself or I permit my¬ 
 self to be persuaded , ndOo/uai viro nvog , I let myself be 
 persuaded by some one = I am persuaded. 
 
 5. For two Tenses, however,—viz. the Fut. and 
 A or .—there are separate forms to express the Pas¬ 
 sive notion; yet, the Aor. Pass, (see Obs. 1) of 
 many reflexive and intransitive Verbs is used instead 
 of the Middle-form; all the other Tenses are ex¬ 
 pressed by the Middle-form. Hence the rule:— the 
 Fut. and Aor. 3fid. have a reflexive (or intransitive) 
 signification, (not Passive, inasmuch as there are 
 separate forms for the Fut. and Aor. Pass.); all the 
 other Tenses of the Middle are used to denote the Pas¬ 
 sive also. (In a few Verbs, the Fut. Mid. has the 
 meaning of the Fut. Pass.; e. g. Tiy^aopai, honora- 
 bor, I will be honoured .) 
 
 Obs. 3. The cause or the agent in the case of a Passive Verb is 
 generally ^expressed by the Preposition v <%■ 6 with the Gen. ; e. y. 
 O' CT^a.'riurcu u*o ruv o A i p. / u v 3i6%0tnrav, the soldiers were 
 pursued by the enemy. —Instead of with the Gen. 
 
 is used, when at the same time the powerful and direct influence 
 of a person is to be denoted; e. g. ’A tiexurt*, 
 
 ZF°*.’ 10 gutted, wronged by any one.~na.p&. with the 
 Gen. is used, when the agent is, at the same time, to be repre¬ 
 sented as the person from whose vicinity , or through whose means 
 {internal or external) the action has come j hence especially with 
 
 ri/Mneteu,dftofffa,, <&<p t kt7<r0*i, ffukkiyscrfai, keyiffSca, t*j- 
 
 IukmScu (demonstrari) ; e. g. 'O ayytkos \*ip<ph * a, eh (6 a <r, k t „ 
 the messenger ioas sent from the king, by the kin g.~' H ptyUm 
 tvrv%ict roertu 700 a.v}fi <r a. £ a tfswv diSoreu, the greatest prosperity 
 was given to this man by the gods.—Uokkh x rfp*r* Kt ev * a A 
 TV V <p,k co V ffvniktyfiivtt. r)v, much wealth was collected for Cyrus b y 
 
 ll % 8 j T % 671 d,8. 
 
 6 . It is a peculiarity of the Greek language, that 
 not merely the Active of transitive Verbs governing 
 the Accusative may be changed into the personal 
 
336 
 
 CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 Passive form , as in Latin, but also the Active of 
 intransitive Verbs governing the Gen. or Dat. 
 
 <I >Qovovyat vi to tivo c, I am envied by some 
 one , invidetur mihi ab aliquo (from (pOovuv tivi, in- 
 videre alicui).—n (orre vojuat, aniGTOvyai viro 
 TLvog, creditur, non creditur mihi ab aliquo (from 
 ttiotevuv , airiGTtiv tivi)> — Kai iTnfiovXzvovTtg kcu 
 f 7T i j 3 o v X e v o y e v o t Stat;nu(Ti navra to v ^povov 
 (from huj3ov\avav tivi), both those plotting and those 
 plotted-against will spend their whole time .— 
 ’AcncuTcn ro an Tiywyevov , a yeXtlr ai to anya- 
 Zoyevov (from ayeXtiv tlvoq ), that which is always 
 honoured is practised , but that which is dishonoured i s 
 neglected. Similarly, a p \ o y a i, Kparovyai, 
 KaTaf^povovyaL vno tlvoq (from ap\eiv, KpaTtiv, 
 
 KClTCKppOVElV Tivog). 
 
 Obs. 4. Deponents (§ 118, Obs.) are Verbs, which want the Ac¬ 
 tive form, are found only in the Middle form, and have a reflexive 
 or intransitive meaning. 
 
 LXXIX. 
 
 (Exercise on §§ 149, 150.) 
 
 1. Cyrus, as he was riding-by, cried-out to Cle- 
 archus to lead the army against 1 the centre of the 
 enemy. 2. The river Acheron, which-flows 2 through 
 Thesprotis, falls into the Acherusian lake. 3. Cyrus 
 died fighting 11 very-bravely. 4. The general com¬ 
 manded the soldiers to go-forward, until they should 
 engage 4 with Cyrus. 5. In the third year of the 
 Peloponnesian war Lesbos revolted from the Athe¬ 
 nians. 6. The Athenians say that the first men 6 were 
 born in 6 Attica. 7. When the soldiers were sleep¬ 
 ing, the general was-awake. 8. Nothing among 
 men, neither good nor evil, has a steadfast 7 order 
 (§ 148, 9. b.). 9. The wicked are pale through 8 
 
CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 337 
 
 § 150.] 
 
 cares, and lean (=dried-up) in body 9 10. Antis- 
 thenes prided himself Galways exhibiting 10 the torn 
 part of his garment. 11. Troy was taken by the 
 Greeks. 12. Some came after-they-had-exercised 11 
 and anointed-themselves 11 , others 12 after-they-had- 
 bathed 11 . 13. Beware-of (sing.) the flatterer 9 ! 14. 
 Abstain (sing.) from intercourse 13 with bad men 13 ! 
 15. The youths had adorned-themselves with gar¬ 
 lands. 16. The Sphinx flung 3 herself from the 
 height. 17. Ajax killed himself in-a-fit-of-mad- 
 ness 14 . 18. Those whom 15 men fear 3 very-much 
 they cannot look-in-the-face, even if they encourage 
 them 16 . 19. Xerxes, after the sea-fight at 17 Salamis, 
 
 departed-from 18 Europe with 19 a portion of his 
 force. 20. The soldiers separated 3 . 21. Agesilaus 
 travelled 3 from Sparta into 20 Asia. 22. Ulysses 
 (Odysseus) wandered-about 3 ten years. 23. Ninus, 
 the king of the Assyrians, having collected 11 a con¬ 
 siderable army, made 3 (for himself) an alliance 
 with 21 Ariasus, the king of the Arabians. 24. The 
 wrestlers anointed 3 their bodies with oil. 25. What 
 thou hast not 22 laid-up 3 , take not! 26. When Alex¬ 
 
 ander had taken 3 the city of the Thebans, he sold 3 all 
 the freemen. 27. The Plataeans repelled the attacks 
 of the Thebans, wherever they met 23 them. 28. Fair 
 is the man who-has-adorned 11 his mind with education. 
 29. In-addition-to 24 necessary evils, men themselves 
 provide-themselves-yet 25 others. 30. The soldiers 
 held 3 their shields before 26 them. 31. Always lay-up- 
 for-thyself provision for 20 old-age ! 32. If-thou-hast* 
 acquired 11 reflection, thou wilt neither strive-after 
 riches, nor reproach poverty. 33. Sensible parents 
 get their children educated. 34. Darius caused a 
 stone monument to be made 27 and erected 3 it. 35. 
 If-we-keep-off 11 the enemy, we shall possess the city 
 free and little exposed-to-stratagems 28 . 36. A govern¬ 
 ment that-has-been-neglected 11 and has begun to de* 
 generate 29 is difficult-to-restore 30 . 37. Hate (sing. 
 
338 
 
 TENSES AND MOODS. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 flatterers 2 as deceivers 2 ; for both, being trusted 11 , 
 injure those-who-trust 2 them. 38. It is burdensome 
 to be governed by a bad-man 31 . 
 
 »MMtf, with Acc. 2 Part. 3 Aor. 4 Aor. Opt. » Acc., with Inf. 
 
 « fymi U. 7 ». 8 M, with Gen. 9 Acc. 
 
 ‘i Aor. Part. 12 Translate ‘ some—others by 3£ - Oen. 
 
 i4 —being mad , (Aor. Part.) 15 «v, with Sub). Trans, *o 7ooi 
 
 them in the face, even if they encourage them\ by ovl* «***«•$»"** 
 (lit. not even to look full at themencouraging). ” m 
 with Acc. 18 &**xx«tf**i. 19 ^<4, with Gen. u t . *&> 
 
 with Acc. 22 23 Opt. 24 «• (is, with Dat. 
 
 ™ I hold beforemyselfJ** v $&kx***u 27 Trans 'caused to be made 
 
 by the Aor. Part, of irunpeu. Trans, by the Pres. Part, of *« 
 &ou\t6ou ai . 29 I begin to degenerate ==/AtradoXfiv \*i ro x*xovX»ftfi**» 
 (lit. I take a change for the bad ). 30 use the Com¬ 
 
 parative, 
 
 § 151. Tenses and Moods. 
 
 1. Tenses (Tempora) indicate the time of the pre¬ 
 dicate, inasmuch as it is represented thereby either 
 as present, future, or past; e. g. The rose blooms, will 
 
 bloom, bloomed. 
 
 2. Moods (Modi) indicate the manner of represent¬ 
 ing the assertion contained in the predicate; i. e. the 
 relation of the subject to the predicate is represented 
 either as an actual fact , as a conception, or as a direct 
 expression of the will. The Mood which expresses a 
 fact, (e. g. The rose blooms), is called the Indicative; 
 that which denotes a conception, (e. g. The rose may 
 bloom), the Subjunctive ; that which denotes a direct 
 expression of the will , (e. g. Give), the Imperative. 
 
TENSES OE VERBS. 
 
 339 
 
 § 152.] 
 
 § 152. A. More particular review of the Tenses. 
 
 1. The Tenses may be divided, according to their 
 iorm and meaning, into two classes, viz. (1) the Prin 
 cipal Tenses which, in the Ind., always indicate 
 
 T“ g v el ^ r 0r , Historical 
 
 paT ’ W UC1 ’ m t ie Ind ’’ alwa y s indicate something 
 
 2 . The Principal Tenses are the following:— 
 
 ^ (Mttbinn cV i VP d 1 C a 1 e ’ e ' g ‘ y Z*Q°f liv ’ scribimus ; 
 
 , P e r a t i i e e g SCribamu ° > < 3 ) I — 
 
 <b) ™« e - flfs u bV,, 1 ,,^ ‘ C a ‘ ‘ v e ’ e -8; m&W’, ecripsi- 
 
 £iisr tive ’ e - g - 
 
 (C) 'wJutrite tW '( e 4ult^f tiVe ’ smfemus. toe 
 
 /jn ( bub J- an d Imper. wanting). . 
 
 (d). The Future III., In dicative e a a*ti i ' t- 
 
 3. The Historical Tenses are the following 
 
 (a). The A orwt, (1) I n d i c a t i v e, e. g. ‘ly^a, / wrote • (2) 
 written'(3 T™ g * 1 mi 9 ht write > or might ham 
 
 (2VO (1) Indi , cative> e - g- scribebam ; 
 
 ■ i ^ g ‘ y ? a< P 0i t A, > scriberem —.*EX«y*y, «, 
 
 / that h-e w ould write. ^ 
 
 ° ram • f2V^Oindicative, e. g. lyey^ipuv, scripse- 
 >() Optative, e. g. yiy^capoifu, scripsissem _"EXsyov 
 
 1 y J & $ ^ written ’ 
 
 <d) »S > 
 
 or/ 01 vroXefuoi vtx^ao itv, the messenger said that the enemi 
 
 r«* n' ,!, ‘ r r' n 'rr' 
 
 Pi fSovktvffoi ro, he said that everything would have 
 been well planned by the general. e 
 
 • fi, T 3 ie Present (Indicative) represents the action 
 m the time present to the speaker, and as yet in pro- 
 ness of accomplishment. The Present is often used in 
 
TENSES OF VERBS. 
 
 340 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 the narration of past events , since in a vivid descrip¬ 
 tion what is past is viewed as present. . inis is called 
 the Historical Present (Prcesens historicum ). 
 
 Tavrriv rr/v rafoov fiaaiXtvg piyag note iavr\ Ipv- ' 
 uarog, sTrsiSr) 7rvvd aver at Kvpov irpogeXavvovra , 
 the great king constructs this trench as a protec¬ 
 tion, when he learns that Cyrus is advancing. ~ H v 
 rig UpiapuSwv vewrarog YloXv^iopog, 'ExapiK Traig, ov 
 £« Tpomc Ejuol 7 rarr?p did u) <r i npia/xoe zv ^opoig rpe- 
 (bztv, there was one Poly dor us, the youngest of Priam s 
 offspring , son of 'Hecuba , whom his father Pnam 
 gives\ i. e. sends) to me from Troy to rear up m my 
 
 home. 
 
 Obs. 1. The Present sT/*, with its compounds has a Future 
 meaning in the In d. and Sub j., (I will go) ; the Inf. and 
 Pres Part, have both a Present and Future meaning, e. g. 
 obx iieli «<pic CO Mv otf (abibo), i e h* *' av ™. 
 
 tZiratrcu kki ixiyfalwill not at once l e t him g o nor will I 
 depart , but will question, examine and rep rov e lum. 
 The Present is expressed by (comp. § l^b, l. ana | Mi, 
 
 Obs. 3).—O? v ouai and $ x «, with Present forms, are often trans¬ 
 lated in English as Perfects , viz., 1 have T departed, and 
 
 **•, I have come; properly means I am gone , and 
 
 vKtu, I am here, adsum); e. g. M>j xmou, on Agour-ras o i %s<r a i 
 lU rovs iroXtfitovs, do not grieve, because Araspas ha s gone over 
 i=z transfugit) to the enemy.—xtvfa&vei xy a ’ X0T f u *»*** 
 ki-ruv, I have come, leaving the vault of the dead and the gates 
 of darkness.—?f*u S p.6\is aQMnlrh, o*oi n,pui* aX«< you 
 
 scarcely reach where we have come long-since. 
 
 5. The Perfect (Indicative) represents an action as 
 completed ( or remaining completed) in time present to 
 the speaker. 
 
 r 17 pa (p a rrjv IttkttoXyjv , I have wr it ten the 
 letter , the letter is now written , (it being imma¬ 
 terial whether it was written just now or a long time 
 ago); rj iroXig e k t lot a i, urbs condita es t,the 
 city is now built , now stands there built. 
 
 0 Obs. 2. Many Greek Perfects are translated into English by the 
 Present Tense; in this case a condition or state consequent on the 
 
 « 
 
TENSES OF VERBS. 
 
 341 
 
 § 152.] 
 
 completion of the action is denoted ; e. g. (= / have been 
 
 bound), / am now in a bound state, am bound; (= I have 
 
 died), I am dead; -reipvy* (=/ have shewn myself), / appear ; cl2<z 
 novi (= 1 have seen), I know ; rs6n\a. (— I have bloomed), I am 
 blooming ; <ri<reida (— I have convinced or persuaded myself) 1 
 trust; (Ufaxa ( == / have stepped out), 1 go; meraini 
 
 • 1 remmd ed myself), I remember ; (=/ have ac¬ 
 
 quired for myself), I possess; xUxtipcti (== /have been named) I 
 am called, and many others. When the Perfect is translated bv 
 the Present, the Plpf is translated by the Impf ; e. g. / 
 
 appeared. ’ 
 
 6 . The Future (Indicative) denotes an action as 
 future in relation to the time present to the speaker. 
 The Greeks very often use the Fut. Ind . in subordi - 
 nate clauses, even after a Historical tense, to express 
 that which should, must or may be, in which case the 
 Latins would use the Subj. ;—the other forms of the 
 
 Fut., particularly the Part., are also used simi¬ 
 larly. 
 
 No^oue inrapZat SeT toiovtovq, Si ’ wv roig juev ayrt- 
 0o7q tvTifiOQ Kcd IXtvOepog 6 fitog tt a p a a k e v a a 6 if 
 VETCH, Toig Se KOKOlg TQTTEIVOQ te koI aXyEivogicai 
 afiuoTOQ 6 alujv ETrava^Ei veto i, laws ought to be 
 such f that by them a life honourable and free may 
 be provided for the good, but a mean, painful and 
 insupportable existence may be imposed on the 
 wicked. Ylyegovag eXafiov oi arpartwrat, oi avrovg 
 a £ o v a i v evOev e £ ov a i ra E7rtTY]SEta , the soldiers 
 took guides, who should lead them to where they 
 might obtain provisions . 
 
 . 7. The Future III. (Indicative) represents the ac¬ 
 tion as in a permanent state of completion in the future. 
 
 Kai Toig kcucoIq /xe/uli^et at IvOXa, the good will 
 
 h av e b e e n mixed with evil (and remain so)._ 
 
 H iroXiTEia teXewq KEKoa/xr)VETai, lav 6 tolovtoc 
 avTrjv ETTKJKOTrrj QvX a£ 6 tovtwv hrivThfuov, the state 
 will have been regulated perfectly (and re¬ 
 main so), if such a man, who is skilled in those things 
 watch over it as a guardian ♦ 
 
342 
 
 TENSES OF VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 The Fut. III. of Verbs whose Perfects are 
 translated by the Present (Obs. 2) must be trans¬ 
 lated by the simple Future ; e. g. ptpvriaopaL, memi- 
 nero, (==*I will have reminded myself ), I will remem¬ 
 ber. 
 
 Obs. 3. The idea of the bare completion of an action in the future 
 •without the accessory idea of the continuance of that completion, (which 
 is expressed in Latin by the Futurum exactum), cannot be ex¬ 
 pressed in Greek by the Fut. III. In subordinate clauses which are 
 intended to indicate the completion of an action in the future, the 
 Greeks use the Aor. Subj. in connexion with a Conjunction combined 
 with av [idty (=*; civ), \*&.v (=l*ri) av), {=WuV* av), orccv {—or s 
 
 «»), <rg/» av, tsr av, os av, &C.] ; e. g.’Eav rovro Si hoc dixe- 
 
 ris, if you shall have said (or, if you say) this. 
 
 8 . The Aorist (Indicative) expresses a past action 
 in a manner quite indefinite , without any accessory 
 idea; (it corresponds to the French Perfect Definite) ; 
 e. g. V E y p a\p a, j ecrivis, I wrote. —Kvpos iro\Xa 
 Wvn tv tier) (rev, Cyrus conquered many nations. 
 It thus stands in contrast with the other Tenses 
 which express past time; however, since it indicates 
 past time indefinitely , it may be used instead of any 
 of these Tenses. 
 
 9. The Imperfect (Indicative) represents an action 
 not only as past , but as going on at some past time. 
 
 ’Ev ^ tv a iZ,tQ, iqo) ty pa (p o v, while, you 
 were playing , I was w r i t i n g. Ore tyyvQ 
 i] a a v oi (3apf3apoi, oi 'EXXip'cc spax<>vTO, when 
 the barbarians were near , the Greeks foug ht.-—- 
 w O T£ oi (3ap(3apoi hrtXr)XvOt<rav (or hr r)X0ov), oi EA- 
 Xt]vtQ t p. a xov to, when the barbarians had come on,~ 
 the Greeks fo ugh t. —T ore (= l v r a v r rj r y 
 u a x U ) oi "EAAtjvec OappaXtwraTa t p a x ° v T °> 
 t h e n (i. e. in that battle) the Greeks fought most - 
 
 bravely . 
 
 Obs. 4 The Impf Ind. is also used to denote,—(1) the beginning 
 of an action ; e. g. ’Ecrsi b/yvs iy evovro i&w/vw, ol fiv avrwv iro^tvov, 
 when they approached suddenly, sows of them began to shoot 
 
TEST3ES OF VERBS. 
 
 348 
 
 § 152.J 
 
 their arrows (2) the continuance of an action; e. g. Ol fi* 
 tTogsuovr a, ol S’ tl-rovro, one party continued their 
 march, the other continued to pursue;—{ 3) habit or 
 Custom , e. g. At/rav -r^oshv •rgosexvvoi/v xai Ton TpogtxC- 
 
 wav, those who were before accustomed to do obeisance 
 to him , did it then~ also ; —(4) endeavour or attempt; e. g. 
 Kkeec^oe roug avrou ffr^a.nuTot.g i /3 i<x%sro thou, Clearchus tried 
 to compel his soldiers to advance. 
 
 10. Hence the Aor. (Ind.) is used in historical 
 narration to relate the principal events, the Impf. 
 (Ind.) the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. 
 narrates , the Impf. describes and paints ; the Aor., 
 generally speaking, denotes a single , momentary ac¬ 
 tion, the Impf. a continued action. 
 
 Tot»c TTfXraorac ZSiZavro oi /3a'pj3apot icai l p a- 
 \o v t o' bTU S’ 'eyyvg i? <r a v ol oTrXtrm, erpa- 
 7T o y t o * icai ol 7reXraaTai tvQvg eittovto, the bar¬ 
 barians withstood the peltasts and fought; 
 and when the hoplites were near , they turned; 
 and the peltasts straightway pursued. 
 
 Obs. 5. The Aor. (Ind.) is often used in general propositions-, 
 which express a fact deduced from experience; the Verb is then 
 translated into English by the Pres., or by ‘ is wont ’or i is accus¬ 
 tomed, with the Inf. ; e. g. K akXog i] xb yos Oivakucr tv ij voaog 
 either time destroys (i. e. is wont to destroy) or 
 disease impairs beauty. 
 
 11 . The Pluperfect (Indicative) represents an action 
 as completed (or remaining completed ) in past time. 
 
 ’E TretSrj oVEWriveg nr pXOov, ol tc oXeptoi cnrei re- 
 fptvyecrav, when the Greeks had come on, the enemy 
 had taken to flight (and were still fleeing).— 
 Ore ol <r vppaypi brXricrlaZov, ol AOjjvaloi rovg Illpaag 
 EveviKTjKsaav, when the allies were approaching , 
 the A tlienians had conquered the Persians (and 
 were still conquerors). — E y s y p a 0 e iv tyiv briaro- 
 
 Xr/v, I had written the letter (and it lav there 
 ready). 
 
344 
 
 TENSES OF VERBS. 
 
 [Chap I. 
 
 Obs. 6. There are essential points of difference between the 
 Lat. and the Greek Plpf.:—(1) the Lat. Plpf. represents an action 
 as completed before another past action ; e. g. Scripseram epistolam, 
 quum amicus venit; (2) it does not involve the accessory idea of 
 the abiding effect of the action.—In subordinate clauses, in which 
 an action is intended to be represented as completed before another 
 past action, the Greeks use the Aor. ; e. g. ’E oriihvi ol "EXA>?»£f 
 * or i) x 6 o v, ot <xo\zpioi oLTtmtpivyiO'av. —Indeed, the Aor. is often used 
 instead of the Perf too, when the relation of the past to the 
 present does not require to be particularly indicated. 
 
 12. As the Indicative shews whether an action is 
 being accomplished, about to be accomplished , or already 
 accomplished , so also do the other Moods (Subj., Opt. 
 and Imper.), and the Inf. and Part.—As the Aor. 
 Ind. expresses the action merely, without any regard to 
 the attendant circumstances, thus giving prominence 
 to the action , the remaining Moods, the Inf. and the 
 Part, of the Aor. are used to convey the same idea. 
 Hence the A or. (not only in the Ind., but in all its 
 other forms) stands in contrast with the other Tenses 
 which express the duration or progress of an action, 
 or its continuance in a state of completion; e. g. 
 <t> v y e lays stress on the mere act of flight, without 
 regard to anything else ; <p e v y e, on the other hand, 
 refers rather to the performance of the action; o i 
 aTrotyvyovTEQ means, ‘ those who fled 1 , o i a tt o - 
 TTEfjievyoTsg, ‘ those who have fled and are still flee¬ 
 ing \ In the same way the following forms stand con¬ 
 trasted :— 
 
 (a) . The Aor. Subj. with the Pres, and Perf. Subj.; 
 e. g. & 6 y w [A l v and <f>i l y u [/. t v, let us fly .—A eya, 'Iva. 
 
 6 ri $ and 7v« p a. v 6 a »>j t, I speak that thou mayest learn. — 
 *Eav oc.ya.6ov ri lord nvo; or a 6 u ft t », ffriqfeoftsv avrdv, [if we shall 
 have received (acceperimus, Put. exact.) a kindness from any 
 one, we will love him], and £«v oriordv 6 u ptv, [if we will be 
 in possession of a kindness received from any one, acceptum 
 habebimus]. 
 
 (b) .TheAor. Im p.with thePres. and Perf. Imp.; e. g. 
 
 and <p t v y t, fly. —A 61 and $ / 5 0 v poi ro (dcfixiov, give me the 
 book. — BovXiucrai,(determine), and/3e/3ai;Xiy<ra, (be determined). 
 
 (c) . The Aor. Inf. with the Pres, and Perf. Inf.; e. g. 
 ’E 6 tko> <p vyt7v and <p 1 v y * 1 *, / wish to fly. —KsXstJw Jt $ t £»-• 
 
§ 152 .] 
 
 TENSES OF VERBS. 
 
 315 
 
 p a i and $ / $ aval pot ro (hfiXtov, I bid you give me the booh .— 
 *EA.fy« rout ToXiptout a. or o <p u y s 7 v, {lie said that the enemy 
 had taken to flight ), and uTOTttptvyevai, {were 
 fleeing). 
 
 (d) . The Aor. Opt. with the Impf. and Plpf. Opt. ; 
 e. g. *EX£y ov, r lva. (/. a 6 o 11 and Vva /u.a.vOd,voiSy I spoke that 
 thou miglitest learn, (ut disceres). — E’/fo rouro yivoiro and 
 y / y » o ITo, 0 that this might happen! — o! g-rgetncura/ e<po/2ouvro, 
 P*i K v£os a, to 0 a v ot, (the so Idlers were afraid that Gyrus 
 had died), and pb r i6* coin, (that he was dead). 
 
 (e) . The Aor. Part, (which always denotes past time), with 
 the P e rf. Part.; e. g. Ol alr6poXoi %yyuXa.v rout ToXifjiiout 
 uTotpuyovroos, {the deserters announced that the enemy 
 had taken to flig h t), and a t o t i <p t u y 6 r a t, (that 
 they wer e fleeing). 
 
 ' L XXX. 
 
 ( Exercise on § 152.) 
 
 1. After Darius was dead and Artaxerxes had 
 succeeded-to l the sovereignty, Tissaphernes tra¬ 
 duced 2 Cyrus to 3 his brother, asserting that he was 
 plotting-against 4 him. And the latter 5 believes 6 it, 
 iind arrests Cyrus, intending to put /dm to 
 death 7 ; but his mother byentreaty obtains 
 h i s release 8 and sends him back again to 9 his 
 government. 2. Hector, whither has gone the cou¬ 
 rage that thou formerly hadst ? 3. Be not troubled 
 
 because Araspas has gone-over to 10 the enemy. 4. 
 In good time 11 art thou come. 5. Themistocles 
 wrote: Themistocles, have come to 12 thee.” 6. If 
 
 any one does not know himself, and believes that he 
 knows that which he does not 13 know, he is a fool. 
 7. The envoys from Sinope said: “We are come to 
 congratulate 14 you, O warriors, that ye are-here, 
 preserved, as we have heard, through many 
 great dangers 15 .” 8. Under 16 Cecropsand the 
 first kings until 10 Theseus, Attica was always inha¬ 
 bited by cities 17 . 9. God has carefully regulated 
 "werything in the world. 10. The dwellings in 
 Memphis have remained until 18 modern 19 times. 11. 
 
 Q2 
 

 346 TENSES OF VERBS. [CHAP. I. 
 
 CEnoe, which-lies 20 on 21 the frontiers of Attica and 
 Boeotia, had been fortified. 12. Zeno scourged a> 
 slave for 22 theft; upon his saying 23 : “It was fated 
 for me to steal,” Zeno said: “ To be thrashed 1 too.” 
 
 13. The world is a stage, life a passage-across that 
 stage ; thou earnest, thou sawest, thou wentest-away. 
 
 14. Xerxes bridged the Hellespont and dug-through 
 Athos. 15. Destiny casts-down 24 whom 25 she has 
 exalted 1 . 16. Even the worst man acquires 24 riches 
 easily. 17. Idleness teaches 24 much vice. 18. To bid is 
 easier than to do. 19. Cyrus called Araspas, a Mede, 
 who had been a companion of his from youth 26 , and 
 bade him guard for him the wife of Abradatas, the 
 Susian, and the tent, until he himself should take- 
 tfAm-in-charge. 20. The people resolved to choose 
 thirty men, who should draw up the laws of-the- 
 country, according-to 27 which they should admi¬ 
 nister the government. 21. Everywhere in Greece 
 the custom prevails 2 *, that the citizens 29 swear to be 
 united 30 . 22. The soldiers hoped to take the city. 
 23. I believe that those who 31 practise wisdom, and 
 think themselves competent to teach the citizens 
 
 ' what is useful, by-no-means become violent. 24. Say 
 what I must do, and it shall be done. 25. It 32 is 
 very-beautifully said and will be said 33 , that the 
 useful is beautiful, the hurtful odious. 26. Tyrants 
 will acquire nothing valuable. 27. Noble men we 
 shall ever remember. 
 
 1 Aor. 2 Historical Present. 3 with Acc. 4 Opt. 5 o. 
 « = is persuaded. 7 us with Fut. Part. 9 = having begged him 
 off for herself, (Aor. Part.). 9 Wi, with Acc. 10 ug. 11 us xax 6 v. 
 1 - With ACC. 13 fit, 14 Fut. Part. 15 ToXXurv rt xx) hivuv 
 
 < 7 rpa.yfji. 6 t.ruv. 16 Wi, with Gen. 17 xara tcXus, (observe the distribu¬ 
 tive force of xara). 18 fiixQ 1, 19 Comp, of v£og. 20 Trans. ‘ which 
 lies' by the Pres. Part, of eW 21 h. 22 Wi, with Dat. 23 Gen.Abs. 
 24 A qeneral proposition, and therefore to be put in the Aor. 25 ous 
 6tv, with Subj. 26 tx trails. 27 xara, with Acc. 28 xtTfiai. 29 Acc. 
 with Inf. 30 Fut. 31 See § 148, 6. 32 = this. 33 i. e. will remain 
 
 said, (Fut. III.). 
 
§ 153.] 
 
 347 
 
 MOODS OF VERBS. 
 
 * * . It'. 
 
 § 153. B. More particular review of the Mood*. 
 
 1. The three following Moods are to be distin¬ 
 guished, viz. the Indicative , the Subjunctive (Optative), 
 and the Imperative (§ 151, 2). 
 
 a. The Indicative expresses a fact or phenomenon, 
 asserts something directly; e. g. To podov 0 a \\e i, 
 the rose bloom s. — O iraTTfp y e y p a <p e tt]v ettkttq - 
 Ar/v, the father has written the letter .—O l noXt- 
 pioL a 7r t v y o v, the enemies fl e d. — Oi noXirai tovq 
 rr oXe/u'kwq v i ki'i g o v g l v, the citizens will con¬ 
 quer the enemies. 
 
 b. The Subjunctive denotes a conception. The 
 Subj. of the historical Tenses is called the Optative 
 in Greek (§ 73, II.). 
 
 (a). The Subj. of the principal Tenses, (i. e. of 
 the Pres, and Perf), and also the Subj. Aor., 
 in Greek always represents that which is 
 conceived as something future ; it denotes 
 that what is expressed by the Predicate 
 will take place according to the conception of 
 the speaker. The Subj. of the principal 
 Tenses is used in principal clauses : (1) in the 
 I. Pers. Sing, and PL to express an exhorta¬ 
 tion or admonition ; (2) in the II. Pers. Sing. 
 and PI. of the Aor. (not the Pres.) with pfi 
 to express a prohibition ; (3) in doubtful ques¬ 
 tions , (Subj. deliberativus); in principal 
 clauses, however, almost exclusively in the 
 I. Pers. Sing, and PL, but in subordinate 
 clauses, it may be in any of the Persons. 
 
 *1(o/j.ev, eamus, let us go ! — M rj 'iwjiEv, let us not 
 go! —M?? ne metueris, do not fear !— 
 
 Tt TTouopEv; quid faciamus? what shall we 
 do f what are we to do ? In subordinate 
 clauses, Ovk exw, vttol Tpairwpai, non habeo, 
 
348 
 
 MOODS OF VERBS. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 quo me vertam, I do not hnow where to turn to* 
 Oinc e'x £1 > oiroi rpaTT.jrat, he does not hnow 
 where to turn to . 
 
 The Subj. of the historical Tenses, [viz. f 
 ^ the Opt. of the A or., Impf. and Plpfi] , as well j 
 as the Opt. of the Fut. (§ 152, 3, d), repre- j 
 sent what is conceived either as past or j 
 future. In principal clauses the Optative ot I 
 the Future is not used, but the Optative ot | 
 the Impf. , Plpf and Aorist is; . these! 
 latter Optatives regularly take av,m the \ 
 Common language, to express a future con- j 
 ‘tinqency (No. 2. c.). Sentences expressive 
 of a wish in which the Optative with a0e, a 
 yap ( Would that , 0 that) occur, are subordi - 
 note clauses, the principal clauses requisite _ 
 to complete the sense being understood j e. g. ^ 
 E 'iOe l yap) ipo\ 0eol ravrrjv rrjv Svvapiv j 
 7 T apaOeltvlO th a t the gods w o u l db e- > 
 stow on me this power ! (see No. 2, c. Obs.). . 
 But very often the Optative without av is 
 used in subordinate clauses to express some¬ 
 times the past , sometimes the future , as wel 
 shall see in the Chapter on Subordinate Sen¬ 
 tences. 
 
 Hit TOVTO i y B V t T 0 '. yj UbUO Vll*o IV vu W P P { 
 
 Latin, O si (or usually utinam) hoc factum essetl 
 
 c. The Imperative denotes the direct expression of 
 the will; e.g. Adf and S 18 o u pot to /dt^SAiov, give 
 me the book !—B ovXtvff at, determine / and 
 BtBovXsvoo, be determined !—KA tit at) in 
 h Ovoa, let the door be closed !— r p afar w and y p a- 
 firw rrjv ImoToXvv, scribito, let him write the letter. 
 
349 
 
 § 153.] THE MODAL ADVERB av. 
 
 Obs. 2. The difference between the Pres, and Aor. Imper. is, 
 that the Pres, generally denotes a continued , oft-repeated action, 
 while the A or. denotes a single , instantaneous action; e.g. n e'tdoo ro7f 
 aotpturi^ois, obey those wiser than yourself (a direction to be observed 
 at all times); ivariivv.ru rhv %i7ga, let him raise his hand / /3 x t- 
 tl s ra fyn, look upon the mountains (single, instantaneous acts). 
 See § 152, 12, (b).— The Perf Imper., which is of rare occurrence, 
 i 3 used to indicate that the consequences of the action are to re¬ 
 main or be permanent; e. g. « 6 \>^a, let the door be 
 
 shut (and remain shut). It will be evident, therefore, that nei¬ 
 ther the Aor. nor Perf. Imper. has any reference to past time. 
 
 Obs. 3. In negative or prohibitive expressions with p >j (ne) pre¬ 
 fixed, the Greeks use the Pres. Imper. or the Aor. Subj.— but not 
 the Aor. Imper. ; e. g. Mjj y gap* (notp.b or p* s (not pv 
 
 ygiyf'ov), ne scripseris. 
 
 Remarks on the Modal Adverb av. 
 
 2. The discussion of the modal Adverb av is inti¬ 
 mately connected with the consideration of the 
 Moods. This Adverb is used to shew the relation 
 of a conditional expression to its condition, inasmuch 
 as it indicates that the predicate of the sentence to 
 which it belongs is contingent on another idea. A 
 complete view of the use of av cannot be presented 
 until Conditional Sentences are treated of (§ 185); 
 for the present, the following remarks on its con¬ 
 struction will be sufficient. It is connected:— 
 a. With the Ind. of the historical Tenses, ( Impf. % 
 Plpf. and A or.) — 
 
 (a). To indicate that something might take place 
 under a condition, hut did not , because the 
 condition was not fulfilled. 
 
 El tovto iXtyig (tXi^ag), lyuapTaveg (fipapTeg) av r si 
 hoc dixisses, errasses, if you had said this , you would 
 have erred , (but now I know you did not say it, con¬ 
 sequently you did not err); or without a protasis , 
 (see § 185, 1 ), e. g. ’Eyopric av, laetatus esses (sc. si 
 hoc vidisses), you would have been glad (i. e. if you had 
 seen this).—If the conditional proposition, though 
 past, has a reference to the present and future, the 
 
X • 
 
 
 350 
 
 THE MODAL ADVERB av. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 Impf. Subj. is used in Latin; usually in Greek the 
 Impf. Ind. (and sometimes the Plpf, § 152, Obs. 2.), 
 more rarely the Aor. ; e. g. ’AMKavSpog' El ph, e(Jm, 
 
 ? AXe^avSpog rjv, Atoyevrjg av ?/v (essem), Alexander 
 said: “ If I were not Alexander, I would be Diogenes 
 
 (|3). To indicate that an action took place (or 
 was repeated) at some past time in certain 
 cases , or under certain circumstances . The 
 historical Tense of the principal clause is 
 then usually the Imperfect 
 
 Ei ric ^(OKparei wepi tov a v t i \ i y o i, tw\ rrjv 
 vwoOeaiv l w a v n y e v a v wavra tov \oy ov, if (i. e. 
 as often as) any one contradicted Socrates about 
 anything , he would (i. e. he was accustomed to ) carry 
 back the whole argument to the original proposition. 
 
 Obs. 3 . *Av is never used with the Indicative of the Pres, and 
 Perf. , or with an Imperative; very rarely with the Indicative of 
 the Fut. 
 
 b. With the Subj., in order to represent the con¬ 
 ceived future event , which is naturally expressed by the 
 Greek Subj. [No. 1, b. (a)], as conditional , and de¬ 
 pendent on circumstances. In the Common language, 
 this construction occurs only in subordinate clauses, 
 the modal Adverb then standing in close connexion 
 with the Conjunction of the subordinate clause, or 
 combining with it and forming one word. In this 
 way are formed, lav (from el av), orav (from ore av), 
 67rorav (from 07rort av), wp\v av, oOi av, ov av, 07 row 
 av, oi av, owoi av, y av, own av, odsv av, owoOev av, 
 &c., og av ( quicunque and si quis), o*og av, bwolog 
 av, oaog av, owoaog av, and others. (See the Chapter 
 on Subordinate Sentences.) 
 
 c. With the Opt. of the Aor., Impf. and Plpf 
 <but not with the Opt. Fut), to represent a future con¬ 
 tingency, an undetermined possibility, a mere supposi¬ 
 tion, admission or conception as conditional . 
 
351 
 
 § 153.] THE MODAL ADVERB av. 
 
 % / 
 The Opt with dv must always be considered 
 as the principal clause of a conditional proposition, 
 even if the condition belonging to it is not expressed , 
 /comp. No. 1, b. (/3)]. 
 
 Ei rovro XiyoiQ, a/uapravoi g av , if you were to, 
 say this , you would err. E i tl i\oi c, 3oi»/ c 
 av, if you had anything , you would give it. (In 
 this case the Latin differs from the Greek, inasmuch 
 as the former uses the Pres. Subj.; e. g. Si hoc dicas , 
 erres). —The Opt.with av is also used very frequently 
 without a protasis (§ 185,1); e. g. Xaipoip av , gaudeas, 
 you would , might rejoice , (sc. if you heard this). f H3l<v£ 
 av tovto aKovaaipi, I would gladly hear this , (sc. if it 
 W'ere possible), rtvotr’ av 7rav tv rip juaxpip ^pdva>, 
 it might all happen in course of time. Aiyo i<; av, dicas, 
 you might say, (sc. si tibi placuerit).—Very often, too, 
 the Opt. with dv is used, when the speaker wishes to 
 make a strong affirmation in a modest way. 
 
 Obs. 4. From sentences of this form is derived the mode of ex- 
 pressing a wish by tl0 1 or § l y<x? {would that , 0 that) iu con¬ 
 nexion with the Opt. of the historical Tenses , inasmuch as the con¬ 
 ditional clause belonging to it is understood. This construction is 
 employed in the case of a wish which refers to the future, whe¬ 
 ther it is possible to be realized or not; whereas uk (d yaf) with the 
 Ind. of the historical Tenses implies that the wish has not been 
 realized, (Obs. 1.). In the former case the Latins use o si (or 
 usually utinam) with the Pres. Subj. E 16 s tovto yiyvoiTo (yt- 
 > i < to), O that this may happen ! Utinam hoc fiat [not fieret)! 
 
 d. With the Inf. and Part, (but very rarely with 
 the Fut. Inf. and Part.), when the finite Verb would 
 be connected with dv, if it were used instead of the 
 Inf. and Part. 
 
 Ei tl cT^ev, 3 o v v a i dv, he said, if he had any¬ 
 thing he ivould have given it, si quid habuisset, dixit 
 se daturum fuisse, (oratio recta, u ri Efyov, “v t 
 
 if I had anything , I would have given it). Ei ri e\oi, 
 
352 
 
 THE MODAL ADVERB av. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 £<prj Sovvat av, si quid habere^dixjt se daturum 
 esse, (oratio recta, u tl i\oifit, Solrjv av). ~ ArjAog el 
 auaprdvbjv av, el tovto \eyoiQ (= 3f?Xoy eOTtv* 
 Sn dfj.apTa.voiQ av , el tovto \iyotg), it is plain that you 
 would err , if you were to say this. 
 
 Obs. 5. As av represents the predicate as conditional, it ought 
 proper y to be joined with the predicate, e. g. toyoi/u av javnt , 
 ixsyev av rctZra,: however, it usually follows that member of a sen¬ 
 tence which is to be made emphatic. It is, therefore, regularly joined 
 to such words as modify the entire meaning of the sentence, viz., 
 negative Adverbs and Interrogatives; e. s. ol* av, w? av, ov**r 
 cuUtot av, &C .—vis av, r/ £v, <r/ ? av, ri hr av, cra/j 
 V av, &c. also to Adverbs of place, time, manner, and other Ad¬ 
 verbs, which in various ways modify the idea contained in t e 
 predicate and define it more exactly ; e. g. \tr*u6* av, r6r av, n*«- 
 
 dtv, av, r&x t* l<rT « v ’ P** 1 ?. av ’ a '» 
 
 Hence it happens that av is sometimes repeated in the same sen¬ 
 tence. 
 
 LXXXI. 
 
 (Exercise on § 153.) 
 
 1. Let us sbun the unseemly and aspire-after the 
 beautiful! 2. Let us pray 1 the gods to guide 2 the 
 
 present enterprise to 3 the most-honourable issue. 
 3. Let us not yield to the enemy! 4. How shall I, 
 
 who-am 9 mortal, contend-with divine destiny? 5. 
 Tell me whether 4 we shall say that Socrates in his 
 conversations speaks-seriously or jests 5 . 6. When 
 Hercules was-at-a-loss which-of-two 6 ways to 7 liie he 
 should enter 8 , there appeared 2 to him two majestic wo¬ 
 men. One, running-to 2 him, spoke thus: “ I see, O 
 Hercules, thou art-at-a-loss 9 which way to life thou 
 shouldst enter. If 10 therefore thou wilt make me a 
 friend 11 ,1 will lead thee to the pleasantest and easiest 
 way”. 7! O gods, that ye might avert danger from us! 
 8. O that the triad of the Graces 12 might ever assist 
 me! 9. Would that I might ever associate-with the 
 
 wise and good, and never have-intercourse-with the 
 wicked! 10. O if I could have lived-with you then. 
 
353 
 
 § 154.] THE ATTRIBUTIVE RELATION. 
 
 when you were still a youth! 11. If I were but able 13 
 to make what-is-done 14 undone ! 12. Fight bravely, 
 
 soldiers! 13. Strive-after virtue, young-men ! 14. 
 
 Let the temple-robber be-torn-in-pieces by wild-beasts! 
 15. Historians should neither extol 15 anything 16 for 3 
 favour, nor omit anything 16 deserving of mention 
 and remembrance. 16. Judge 2 (pi.) not contrary - 
 to 17 the laws ! 17. O soldiers, despair 2 not of your¬ 
 
 selves 18 ! 18. He who 19 ventures to employ-force 20 
 may need not a few allies; but he who 19 can per¬ 
 suade, none. 19. How could those-who-do 9 evil 
 deeds become friends to those-who-hate 9 such deeds ? 
 20. Who without self-control could either learn or 
 properly practise anything good ? 21. With 21 a wise 
 understanding one may pass 2 life most-pleasantly. 
 22. The bad no-one could render 22 useful. 
 
 1 Aor. of tSp^saffai. 2 Aor. 3 with Acc. 4 *—whe¬ 
 ther we shall call Socrates speaking-seriously or jesting. 6 o<r6rzpos, 
 with Gen. 7 W/, with Acc. 8 =turn himself. 9 Part. 10 ta», 
 with Sabi. 11 Fem. 12 X^,n S . 13 to be able = Jin n «!»«/. 14 Perf. 
 
 i? art * *^ os *% a k uv - 16see § 177, 6. 17 with Acc. 
 
 to despair of one's self = etToytyvdjo'x.uv txvrn. * 9 § 148, 6. 20 (Iti- 
 
 Z,za6au % 21 fitrd, with Gen. 22 Aor. of Tidsvau. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 § 154. The Attributive Relation. 
 
 1. An Attributive notion is one that modifies a 
 Noun without being connected with it by the Copula. 
 Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea 
 contained in the Noun to which they belong; e. g. 
 to k a X 6 v poSov, the beaut ifu l rose ; 6 piy a g 
 mug, the tall boy. The Attributive may be:— 
 a. An Adjective , Participle , or Adjective-Pronoun ; 
 e. g. to koAov poSov, the beautiful rose ; to 
 
354 
 
 THE ATTRIBUTIVE RELATION. [CHAP. II. 
 
 avOog 0 a X X o v, the blooming flower; 6 I p 6 g 
 irarrip, m y father ; 
 
 b. A Noun in the Genitive ; e. g. ot to v Sev 
 Spov KapiToi , the fruits of the tr ee ; 
 
 c. A Noun with its governing Preposition ; e. g. rj 
 7r p 6 g r rj v 7 t oXiv oSog, the road to the city ; 
 
 d. An Adverb; e. g. oi vvv avOponroi, the men 
 of-the-present-day , (lit. the now men) ; 
 
 e. A Noun in apposition ; e. g. Kpottroc. 6 j3 a <r i - 
 X t v g, Croesus , the kin g. 
 
 Obs. When the Noun, which is to be more fully explained by 
 the Attributive, contains a general idea, or one which can be easily 
 supplied from the context , or, by frequent usage in a particular 
 connexion may he supposed to be blown , then the Noun, as it is subor¬ 
 dinate in the idea to be expressed, is often omitted , and the Adjective 
 or Participle, (usually with the Article), is used as a Noun. Such 
 Nouns are, avfywog, av^ (man, husband), ywj, {woman, wife),Ta.r-fio y 
 
 ftr,rri(>, v't'og, Ta. 15 , 6uydrn(>, adtXtpos, < 7 r^a.yy.a,, X(fl / ' a i egyov, Xgovos, 
 yv, otog, thc'nz, oixos, &C. 
 
 Oi OvrfToi (sc. avOpwiroi), mortales.— Td iiptrepa 
 (sc. ^orj/tara), res nostrse. —'H uorfpata (sc. rpaepa), the 
 next (day). —'H 7 roXf pia and 17 ^tAta (sc .%(vpa), thehos - 
 tile and the friendly (country).— C H olKovpivri (sc. yr\), 
 the inhabited (earth).— T i)v raytorqi; (sc. oSdv), quam 
 celerrime. —To kcikov, evil. —Ta Kaica , evils. —’AXt^ap- 
 ?pog, 6 <PtXhnrov, (sc. viog), Alexander , the (son) of 
 Philip .—’Ev aSov (sc. otictp) Aval, to be in (the home) 
 of Hades .—Etc SiSaaKaXov, dg IlAdrti>i;oc (poirqv, to 
 go to a teacher s (house), to Plato's (house). —Ta Trig 
 rv\rig, fortune and all connected with it; rd rf/c tto- 
 Xtiog, the affairs of the city ; ra rov ivoXipov, the war 
 and all connected with it .—Ot vvv, oi rort, oi rraXcu 
 (sc. avOp(vTToi ), the (men) of-the-present-day , the (men) 
 then, the (men) of-yore .—Ta otVot (sc. it pay par a), res 
 domesticse. —Ot KaQ ’ u/xac, our cotemporaries .—Ot 
 ap(pl or 7 repi nva, a person with his companions, fol¬ 
 lowers or disciples ; oi ap<p\ UeiaioTparov, Pisistratus 
 and his troops ; oi apffi QaXriv, Thales and, his school . 
 
§ 154.] THE ATTRIBUTIVE RELATION-. 35j> 
 
 2. When a Noun is in the same Case with another 
 to define it more accurately, it is said to be in appo¬ 
 sition with that Noun. A word may be in apposition 
 not merely with a Noun, but also with a substantive - 
 Pronoun ; e.g. f Hj uei<q, oi crocpoi. —’E/ctii/oc, 6 fiaaiAevg ; 
 and even with a personal-Pronoun implied in the 
 Verb. 
 
 Q c fi i a r o k \ ij g y k o) iraga <rl, I, Themistocles, 
 have come to you.—'O Maiac tijq ’'ArXavroe Siaico- 
 v ov /ua t avroig (instead of 6 Marne, sc. vioc), I, 
 </ie(son of) Mai a, the daughter of Atlas, ic ait- 
 up on them. 
 
 3. When a word is in apposition with the posses - 
 szr^-Pronouns yptTtpog, vpirepo c, G<ptTEpoQ, it is put 
 in the Gen., because these Pronouns supply the place 
 of the Gen. of the ^rscwa^-Pronouns. 
 
 'HptTEpoQ twv aO\ib)v fiiog, our life , wretched as we 
 are, (similarly in Latin, nostra miserorum vita ).— 
 H plrepa tiov Suarrjvajv Kaica, the misfortunes of us, 
 unhappy beings /— 'Ypertpa tiov koAA'igtwv tvpoptyia, 
 your beauty , most lovely creatures! Such Genitives 
 may generally be rendered in English by an excla- * 
 motion. On such phrases as 6 ypirepog, vpirepog, 
 GcpiTEpoQ avTiov iraryp, see § 169. 
 
 lxxxii. 
 
 (Exercise on § 154.) 
 
 1. In Hades dwell 1 all the dead. 2. Men send 
 their children to school 2 that-they-may-learn 3 lite¬ 
 rature, music and the 4 exercises in the gymnasium. 
 3. Alexander, the son of Philip, achieved many 
 and brilliant actions. 4. Many, who-negiect 5 do- 
 mestic affairs, attend-to those of the state. 5. 
 Leonidas and the three hundred with him fougbfi 
 
356 
 
 TIIE OBJECTIVE RELATION. [CHAP. III. 
 
 bravely at 6 Thermopylae against 7 the Persians. 6. 
 Thales and his school and almost all the philoso¬ 
 phers abstained-from politics. 7. The character of 
 the Deity we must reverence very highly 8 . 
 8. O fortunate b e in g s, your life 9 have the 
 gods adorned with every blessing ! 9. Unhappy thal 
 we are, our (=the) enemies have utterly-destroyed 
 our native-land! 
 
 * = are. 2 = to the house of teachers. 8 Fut. Part. 4 r&. 
 6 Aor. Part. 6 l». 7 *«■/. 8 «■££< <ro\teu *oii7<r6au 9 Trans, as if 
 
 ‘your life of the fortunate \ 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 § 155. The Objective Relation. 
 
 As the attributive relation (§ 154) serves to 
 define the Subject (which is a Substantive-idea) more 
 particularly, so the objective relation serves to 
 define the Predicate (which is a Yerbal-idea) more 
 particularly. The attributive notion may be called the 
 ' complement of the Subject , tlid objective notion the com¬ 
 plement of the Predicate. By Object , taken in its wider 
 sense, is to be understood everything by which the 
 predicate is more particularly defined, viz. (1) the 
 Cases alone , (2) the Cases in conjunction with their 
 governing Prepositions , (3) the Infinitive , (4) the 
 Participle , and (5) the Adverb. 
 
 ’ElTiOvguf Trig (TO(j)'ias, I desire wisdo m. — 
 r t v v I tt i cr t o \ v v, I write the l ett e r .— 
 E vyopai rote 0 £ oi g, I pray to th e g o d s .— O 
 crrpaTvybg forrj ir a p a t co (3 a ( riAst, the general stood 
 beside the kin g. —’E7 nOupib y p a (J> s i v, I desire 
 to writ e .—F e A iv v throv, I said l au ghingl y. — 
 K a A (I) g £ga\£cravTO oi <xrpcm£irai, the soldiers fought 
 
THE CASES. 
 
 35? 
 
 § 157.] 
 
 well . In each of these examples it is evident that 
 the Verb is limited, defined, or more fully explained 
 by the word or words connected with it. 
 
 The Cases. 
 
 § 156. I. The Genitive . 
 
 The Genitive primarily denotes the relation in¬ 
 volved in Whence , and therefore expresses—(a) in a 
 local relation, the out-going, removal or separation 
 from an object, since it designates the object or 
 point from which the action of the Verb proceeds; 
 e. g. ukuv oSou, cedere via, to get out of the way ;— 
 (b) in a causal relation, the cause, source, author , in 
 general the object which calls forth , produces (gig- 
 nit), excites or occasions the action of the Verb: e. g. 
 tniOn/aco t r\ c apcrijc; (here agtrriQ is the object 
 which calls forth , &c., the desire expressed by im- 
 Ou/xw). 
 
 § 157. A. Local Relation. 
 
 Genitive of Separation (Genitivus 
 
 separativus). 
 
 The Genitive, in a local relation, is used with ex¬ 
 pressions denoting removal , separation, being distant 
 from; originating , beginning; loosing, abstaining, desist¬ 
 ing, ceasing, freeing, missing, deviating from, differing 
 from, depriving . 
 
 Examples of words of this class .—The Verbs Ta^a^a>^sTv, v<ro%u- 
 
 uxuv, v<ruxiiv, vvaviffriardai, t^taraadat, vorr<p'i^uv, 
 mip/ivai, alfiurdui, a-Ts^£^a/, <%££JV, <%£SO^a/, 
 
 MarafX'U*, vrctuuv, vavirdut, A.]?y{<v, xuXuuv, Xu«<v, ikivdtgovv, avu.'k- 
 
358 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. | j 
 
 X&rTttt, crtgiTv, dtfearsgiTv, (g*i/uovy, ^txipi^iiv, ^ie%ttv, xftxgrxviif, | 
 
 <r<pa.Wt<j6cci, •tyitihtaOcti ;—the Adjectives ixMs^os, xxix^os, in^os, 
 ^idtpo^a;, and many compounded with a jprivxiive ;—the Adverbs 
 avtu, X&g'ig t vrkyv, e?u, lxa$, £/;£«, xe^av. 
 
 O i tmv AaKz$aifiovi(i)v vecvrepot toiq npeafiuTipoig 
 trvvTvy\avovTtg s'ikovcfi t r\ g b^> ov,the young men 
 among the Lacedaemonians meeting with their elders 
 withdraw from the road. — , An£X £l t <*> v 
 apyvpeiiov 17 iyy vrara noXig Mcyapa 7 roXif n Xeiov 
 tmv 7 T£vt(iko<j'i(x)v gtu^imv, Megara , the nearest city , i s 
 distant from the silver- mines much more 
 than 500 stades.—n aid b g tipyei pviav, 
 the mother keeps the fly from her child .— , 
 Ilauou r rj g v fi p e m g, cease your in s o- 
 l enc e .— f H noXig ^XfudepwOrj Twvrvpav- 
 v w y , the city iv a s fr ee d from the tyrant s. — . 
 01 noAtyioL rovg noXirag r mv a y aft m v aneari- 
 prjcrav, the enemy deprived the citizens of 
 their goods .—Ttp vip ol avftpMnoi dia(f>Epovai 
 t w v aXXw v Z m mv, men d iffe r fr om other 
 animals by their reason.—* A p \ £ <* ® a 1 r i v o g 
 means ‘ to begin something ’ in general, without any 
 reference to others; e. g. ovv roig (ho ig apx £(T ^ a ‘ 
 Xph tt a v t b g e p y o v, with the gods we should be - 
 gin every work ; but a p \ £ lv > e % a p \ £ i v, 
 v n a p x £ L v > tcarapx £lv rivog, mean ‘ to be the 
 first to do ’ (i. e. with reference to others ), ‘ to begirt, 
 hence also 4 to be the author of, * to originate ’; e. g. 
 Oi noXlpioi rj p Z a v a d i k m v £ p y w v, the enemy 
 were the first to commit unjust deeds.—Oi 
 ’A ftrjvatoi tcai AaKEdaipovioi v n rj p Z a v t r\ g eXev- 
 ftepiag ana<jq ry *E XXadi, libertatis auctores fuer 
 runt .—’E X e v ft £ p o g $ 6 fi o v,free from fear ; k li¬ 
 ft ap 6 g a d l k i a g,free from injustice ; diaipopog tmv 
 kokmv, differing from the bad i g t m v a X - 
 
 X m y, apart from the others ; nXr) v N e m v o g, except 
 Neon l n ip av t ov n o t a /i ov, beyond the river / 
 !£<*> fi eX mv Etvai, to be beyond the reach of the darts. 
 
§ 153.] 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 359 
 
 § 158. B. Causal Relation . 
 
 The Genitive , in the causal relation, signifies also 
 an out-going , but not, as in the local relation, a mere 
 external out-going , but an internal and active one, 
 since it expresses the object, by whose inward power 
 the action of the subject is called forth and produced 
 (gignitur). 
 
 a. The Genitive as an expression of Action 
 
 in general. 
 
 1. In theyi^ place, the active Gen. stands as the 
 Gen. of the origin or author (Genitivus auctoris ), and 
 is connected with Verbs denoting to originate from, 
 spring from, arise from , produce from, he produced 
 from, he horn from; e. g. yiyveaOat, <pvuv, <pbvat, 
 dvai. 
 
 ’ApicFTwv a v S p id v apiara fiovXwpara y [ y v t- 
 r a i, the best counsels originate fr o m the best 
 m e n. n a t p o g pev Xiysrat K vpog ysvecrOai 
 K a p [5 v a o v, riepaidv fiaaiXsujg -6 $£ Kapfivarig 
 ovrog t o v []£pcF£iS(dv y £ v o v g v ' p j) t p o g Ss 
 bpoXoydrai M a v S a v rj g yeviaOai, Cyrus is said 
 to have sprung from a father (i. e. to have 
 had as his father ) C amhyses, king of the Per¬ 
 sians, {now this Camhyses iv a s of the race of the 
 Perseidce), and he is universally allowed to have 
 been b o r n of Mundane, who was his mo the r. 
 
 Secondly , the active Gen . stands as the object 
 which has acquired another, made it its own and pos¬ 
 sesses it, hence, as Gen. of the owner or possessor 
 (Gen. possessors sive possessivus). This Gen. occurs 
 with the Verbs avert, ywiaOat; also with the Adjec¬ 
 tives iSiog, ohcdog, iepog , k vpiog. 
 
360 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 T 7, g <}> v cr £ to g fieyicrTov k aXXog e gt tv, nature 
 possesses the greatest beauty .—T ou S w k p a - 
 r o v g 7roAA?7 ^ v apcr^, Socrates had much virtue. 
 Hence originates the Gen. of quality (Gen. qualita - 
 tivus), with which in English we connect the Nouns 
 business, manner , custom, peculiarity, duty, mark, &c.; 
 e. g. ’AvSpog e cr r i v a y a 0 o v ev ttoielv rovg tj>i- 
 Xovg, is the business, custom, peculiarity, duty, 
 mark o/ a good man to benefit his friends ; or, i£ 
 becomes a good man , a good man is wont , &c.—01 ju£y 
 kivSvvoi iroXXaKig t to v nYt/ioywy to t, piaOdg 
 3’ oiuc £(Trfy, dangers are often the lot of (lit. pecu¬ 
 liar to) commanders , and they have no compensa¬ 
 tion .—Kwpoe t a v r r) g t rj g \to p ag kv p t o g iyi- 
 t'ETOy Cyrus was master of this country. 
 
 3. Thirdly , the active Gen. stands as the object 
 which includes another or several other objects as 
 parts belonging to it; the Gen. in this case expresses 
 the whole in relation to its parts , and is usually called 
 the partitive Genitive (Gen. totius sive partitivus ). 
 This Gen. is used:— 
 
 (a). With the Verbs e! vat and y iy v ea 0 at, 
 which then signify to be among , to be numbered or 
 considered among, to be of the number of, to be a part 
 of, to be one of. 
 
 teal 6 2tOKpaTtjg r to v aptjii MtAijroy trrpa- 
 TEvopEvwv, Socrates also was among those 
 who served around Miletus ; (arpaTEvopEvtov here 
 denotes the whole, of which Socrates is a part).—'H 
 ZeXeio. Ear l Trig ’ A a i a g, Zeleia is a p art (or 
 a city ) of A si a .—Toy Oavarov fiyovvrai ttoXXoI t to v 
 pEyitTTtov k a Kto v e i v a i, many consider death 
 to b e one ofthe greatest evils. 
 
 Obs. 1. The partitive Gen. has very often the force of an attri¬ 
 butive: —(1) with Nouns, e. g. ’Zra.yons vluros, drops of water, 
 (here Smarts is the whole, parts of which are expressed by trayons, 
 
THE GENITIVE.- 
 
 361 
 
 § 158.] 
 
 * n . d 8 ^ n OF °? er exa “PM.; O pari of the body 
 
 (2) with Adjectives used substantively , more especially with *SWr- 
 and Wlth substantive-Pronouns and Numerals , e. a o/ 
 
 waefa/ omongr m, i. e. twe/M men.—OisS 
 Kovovvra r&v M^cov, the wise among men.—mxu), hW T «i, c*# 
 
 «v £wrav. (On the contrary, «/ oIv^mtoi means simply, mortal 
 men because the property of mortality belongs to whole class • 
 or x aX< V" denotes a whole, consisting of many or few 
 
 iT XA u °y represents the many or the few as a part 
 
 of the whole)(3) with Adverbs, (a) of place, e. g. otixurj Aiyv-r- 
 rov nowhere vn Egypt- o l x •!!«, yfr W,, / rfo ^ know where on 
 
 earth lie is.—n«,ra X o» rns yni, ublvis terrarum, everywhere in the 
 world ;—($) of time e.g. ’o-^e rifr <r? f r»5 xe i nVt late 
 
 in the day, late in life , &c. -rib- hps^at, thrice a day _ri<j;ua*<j 
 
 -r>jf ypegcti, many times a day. 
 
 . 0 5 ) With words which denote participation, shar¬ 
 ing in, imparting , communicating touching, taking 
 
 hold of, attachment to, dependence on, hordering on j _— 
 
 acquiring, attaining, or striving to acquire. 
 
 Examples of words of this class .—The Per&j ^rs'^/r, 
 
 koivuvuv and koivoZctScu (these latter often 
 akmg a Dat. besides the Gen.), (to impart a share of) 
 
 *? os * l * ovai g—'P*™», SmrPeu, (hyyiniv, Xa/tH&ntteu, ptraAaf- 
 &iTiA*fA&&n<rteu, Wikaft^An^eu, 
 
 *%i*6*t(to adhere to, to border upon), ne,i X trt« h i V rt X s,0 at , y Lw- 
 e*, TVfxagm (to acquire, to hit), x ayz *n<y, tyxnTrfai, *X* e o VO %n 
 iff" something belongs to me) ;—fyiyurfat, Wnrsl,, & VTI . 
 
 7°ull at ’ '•r»x&K*<re*i ;—the Adjectives ko»o S , 1W Zuuos 
 
 (all these, however usually taketh e Eat.), Uri^*, <piXo S ,cc^6,\ 
 (also with Dat.) ;_the Adverbs ltf s , lyttfs, &c. 
 
 rioAAafcic of Kaicol appn kol TipCjv ptri- 
 \ova iv, evil men often partake of offices and 
 honour s. —0 a A 7T o v q plv fcai \p v ^ o v g Kai a (• 
 
 TU)V KQ.L TT O T (O V KOI V 7T V O V UVayKT) KCIL T(HQ Sov- 
 
 A OL Q ptraSiSovai, tto\ zpiicrig S’ £ tt t <7 r tj - 
 p n Q k«i p e A £ r t) g ov pzTaSoTtov, it is neces¬ 
 sary to share with slaves heat, cold, food , 
 d r in k and s le ep, hut we are not to share with 
 them war like skill and p r actic e .— f O oo(J)6q 
 T VQ v f3 p aw c apoi p o c iarriv, the wise man is 
 free from (is no sharer of) insolenc e. —-"A 7 r - 
 
 read a 1 Trig x* l P°G, to cling to the hand* 
 
 R 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 m 
 
 [Chap. Ill 
 
 — \ifivT) a i row (tt) g ar o g gtyaXrh the great 
 
 marsh borders on the monumen t .—*E py ov 
 ix*oge0a, opus aggrediamur.—'O orpaTvyog twv 
 avrwv ro7.g oTpaTiwraLg ouvaiperai k i v S v v w v, 
 the general shares the same dangers as the 
 soldiers. — 'E7rti$rj 6 vijt ov a w g ar o g £Tu\£f, 
 aO av arov Sc xp v C, t rcipw rrjc xpvxhQ aOavarov 
 gvhgnv KaraXi7T£cv, since you have got a mor¬ 
 tal body, but an immortal spirit, try to 
 leave behind you an immortal memory of your spirit. — 
 Tvy^aveiv, Xay^a v£tv xprjjuarwi', ev - 
 t u x£ « Ci t>o attain, acquire wealth, good 
 f or tun e. —T v x*~i v t e\evt r\ g, ov 6 gar o g, t o 
 find an end, a name.—'OpiyeoOe or i<pt - 
 e o 0 e t tj g a p e t ij g, strive to attain virtue . 
 
 
 Obs. 2. Verbs signifying to talce hold of govern the Acc. of the 
 j person , the Gen. of the 'part taken hold of; e. g. IXetfav rx.i 
 rov *0 e'ovTTiv, they took Orontes by the girdle ; x u f°c * Xt7v rtvec ’ t0 
 one by the hand. So any Verb may govern the Gen., when its 
 action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part; e. g. 
 *E ra£s rA.at/» xa) Tliy^ra, XafZivrus v a v fiuf>(&et(>ixou a r £ a r ou, 
 he commanded Glous and Pigres, having taken apart of the foreign '• 
 army .— 'E^oxti, ffuyxctkeo’Kyras \oxttyov; xa) <riXrcc<rra.s xat r div o or 
 tZv, they resolved, having coiled together the captains, the targeteers, 
 and a part of the heavy-armed. 
 
 4. Fourthly , tlie active Gen. denotes the place 
 where (Gen. loci), and the time when (Gen. temporis) 
 an action occurs. The action or event belongs, as it 
 were, to the place and time, and to a certain extent 
 proceeds from them, and is produced by them. 
 
 The Gen. of place is rare in prose. Adverbs of 
 place in the form of the Gen. occur very frequently; 
 e. g. ou, where, aurou, there, at that place, ovSagov, no¬ 
 where, and others.—* AvOrj OdWei t ov cap o g, flowers 
 bloom i nthe sprin g, (the spring being considered 
 as the producer of the blossoms). Similarly, 0 L - 
 pouci in summer , in the winter, h g c - 
 
 p a g, by day, r ij g av tij g h g c p a g, vvkt 6 g, th& 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 § 153.] 
 
 363 
 
 same day , night. The Gen. too denotes the time 
 within which anything is done; e. g. BamXVvg o v pa- 
 
 X UTa ‘ Of K a T)/lip MV, the king will not fight with - 
 in ten days. 
 
 5. Finally, the Gen. denotes the material 
 
 ot winch anything is made, and, as it were, produced, 
 or the source from which anything is derived (Gen. 
 materia;).. This Gen. is used:— 
 
 (a). With Verbs signifying to make or form from 
 something ; w r ith expressions denoting fulness and 
 want /—with Verbs signifying to eat , to drink , to taste , 
 to came to taste , to enjoy, to derive profit or advantage 
 
 from ; to smell (intransitive), and to emit an odour of 
 something. J 
 
 Examples of words of this class.— The Verbs aW,, vx*- 
 
 p^Xuvcu, yipuv, <r6rruv, tbvocu*, aoroo'Tv, vrencrfai, Sutrfat, h7, 
 r<rtsw£w», XfY) t<r0u,v, tpayeTv, tbu>x,U<r6a.i, <r' lvU v, ysi juv, xoArarfai, riaro- 
 
 % uv : «'V, &C. ;—the Adjectives *xio f , 
 
 Ki*ot, fticrros, nXMies, law;, U^iij s> &c.the Adverb ot\,s, &C. 
 
 XaAicoD 7Tf not rjpiva tor) ra ayaApara, the statues 
 are made of brass .—’£ ar p top(v ri ior\v h 685 e 
 A i U o v, the road ispaved with s t o n e.~ (Hence, 
 m an attributive relation, ^Kirwga £ {, A o u, a cup 
 made of wo o d. — Tpair^a a p y v pi o v, a table of 
 s live r.—Srirpavog v a k l v 0 w v, a chaplet of hy a- 
 ci n t h s). 'H vcivq ae a a y p £ v r) hvavQpwTrwv, 
 Me ship wa s lade nw i t Ji m e n.—Ta 'Ava^ayopov 
 pipAia y £ p f i a o <p h> v A 6 y oj v, the books of Anax¬ 
 agoras are full of wise sayings.—'EvravOa 
 V<rav Kiupai noAAdi p £ or r a l a i r o v kol o’i v o v, there 
 were there many villages abounding in food 
 and w in e. —’A Trope tv, iriveaOai, a tt a v t - 
 Zztv r to v XPVparbJv, to be in want of 
 
 mean s. E o 0 it i v k p e Co v, to eat f l e s h. _ 
 
 Ko pj a a aO at (p o p [3 rj c, to be sated with 
 j oo d. II tv c i v o’lvov, to drink some of the 
 win e . Att oAavtiv tt a vtcjv t w v ay aOwv, 
 
364 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 to enjoy all g o o d thing s. —F evea 6 ai ri - 
 prjgfto taste ho nou r. —f 1 evsiv rtva t i p fj C, 
 to cause one to taste honour .— O Z, £ t v i w v 9 
 to smell of v io l et s. —II v ei v, n p oq (5 a\\e iv ? 
 pvpov,to emit an o dour of my rr li .—II v eT v \ 
 rpayov.to have the odour of a he-go at.— ; 
 v O £ £ iv k p o p v (i) v, to have the savour^ of i 
 onion s. — f £2c P 0L 7 r p o c £ 7r v £ imt £ X ° ipttwv j 
 k p e w v, so sweet io a s the smell of swines flesh i 
 to me .—K £voc <p pevibv, devoid of j u d g- 
 merit. —0 ?j p i o> v ttXt] p n c, / u H °f animals . 
 
 Obs. 3. Verbs of eating and drinking govern tbe Ace., (1) when 
 the article in question is represented as consumed wholly or w a \ 
 great measure j (2) when it is implied that the article forms one s 
 ordinary diet ; e. g. Ill» u rov aT»ov, <ro\6 v «7y«v, 1 drink wine , 
 much wine. (Hence the Gen. with Verbs of eating and drink¬ 
 ing has a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or 
 drink ofsomething). — ’A TaXausiv nvo s r /, means l to enjoy some- t 
 
 thing from some one 1 , ‘ to receive good or evil from some one. > 
 
 Obs. 4. Aj 7 (impersonal) may take the Dat. of the person with 
 the Gen. of the thing ox person needed ; e. g. E / ft* if* n*o S aXXov M, 
 if you need anything else. —A; 7 and in the sense of necesse, opus j 
 est, are followed either by the Inf. alone or by the Acc. of t/ie j 
 person with the Inf ; e. g. J*7 (xf) at ruvr* vronTv, you must do this. 
 Ai7also, though more rarely, takes the Dat. of the person with the 
 Inf ; e . g. tfcroi Mot hteo-Kti*, if it were necessary for you to teach. 
 
 (b). With Verbs of sensation and perception ; e. g. 
 
 CLKOVtiv , ctKpoaaOai, 7rvv0avea0ai, aloOaveaOai, OGtppai - 
 
 v£(T 0 £ii» Guvdvai {to understand) j and with Verbs of 
 reminding , remembering and forgetting j e. g., pipvri- 
 (tkeiv, avapipvfjoKEiv, vTroptpvrioKEiv, pvrjpovEveiv, pi- 
 pvrjaOai, zTnXavOavtaOai, apvr\povtiv ; and the corres¬ 
 ponding Adverbs, e. g. X aOpa, Kpixpa, &c. 
 
 Kcii Kiotpov ovviript Kai ov (pcovovvr oq 
 a kov a>, I understand the dumb man and 
 hear hi m , although he does not s p e aJc. 
 
 'Qq ib g <p po vt o raxtara r Co v k a p ij X to v ot i 7 T 7 roi 
 Kai slSov avraQ) ottigio avt.GTp£(pov , as soon as ever the 
 horses smelt the camels and saw them 9 they 
 

 § 158.] THE GENITIVE. s $G5 
 
 turned back. Ovk aKpowfiEvot t o v a $ o v t o g 
 wfivvzTE a$tiv apirrra, not ha vine) heard the 
 singer you swore that he sang most excellently .— 
 ’A k o v e i v $ L Kr) g , to hear a suit; a l <t- 
 OavecrOat k p a v y rj g, 0 o p v (3 o v , E7rif3ov- 
 \ij g, to take notice of a cry, a tumult, a 
 plot. (These Verbs often govern the Acc. of the 
 thing; they also frequently take the Acc. of the 
 thing besides the Gen. of the person; e. g. r Q ’Apjul- 
 
 VIOC,’, 0)Q rj K O V E T O V CL J J £ X O V T« 7 TCtpa TOV KvpOV, 
 
 i&TrXayn, ichen the Armenian heard from the 
 messenger the communication of Cyrus, he zoas 
 amazed). —O i ayaOoi fcai cnrovTiovTcov cbiXwv 
 H £ g v n v r a i, the good remember even absent 
 f r i e n d s. M77 EiriXavOavov t Cj v e v e p y e- 
 o id) v, do not forget acts of kindness .— 
 A a 0 p a t io v ffrparjjywy, without the 
 knowledge of the generals . 
 
 (c). With expressions of being acquainted and un¬ 
 acquainted with, of experience and inexperience, of 
 knowledge and ignorance, of making trial of something, 
 and of ability, dexterity and skill in anything. 
 
 Examples of words of this class.— The Adjectives 
 
 I’Tiffrripuv, inviarrifAuv, iTurroi/u.tvof, truyyvui/u.uv, uvathuroc, a2ct^, idtth- 
 
 vvs, and Adjectives in (derived from transitive Verbs) which 
 express the idea of capability or aptness for the Verbs nupKaSau, 
 and a.<xiioui &c. 
 
 E p tt e 1 p o g or EiricrrrifKjjv ttjui r r\ g r i^VYig, 
 I am acquainted with the ar t. —’A tt a t - 
 S £v t o c a p e rfj g, /uovaiKijp, ignorant of 
 virtue, m u s i c. —2 vyyvwpojv t tj v a. v 0 o to- 
 7T iv o) v tt pay panw, pardoning ([having a 
 fellow-feeling with) human action s. —’A tt eipio g 
 t X w JVQ poucriKrjc, I am un acquainted with 
 music. —Kupoe air ett e i p aO r] t y) g tCjv ayyEXtov 
 yvwpng, Cyrus made trial of the judgment 
 of the messengers. —K cii Trapaa-KEvacrriKov r at ¥ 
 
 £tg TOV 7 ToXe^OV TOV OTpaTrjybv £1 veil Xpl? K(U 7 T o P l* 
 
366 
 
 THE GENITIVE. [CHAP. III. 
 
 <r r ik bv t to v sTrirriSeitov tolq (Trpemoirafc, a ge¬ 
 neral must be c ap able both of providing 
 w hat pertains to the war , and of p rocuring 
 necessaries for the soldiers. 
 
 (d). Finally, with Verbs signifying to see, to ob¬ 
 serve, to judge, to examine something, some action, 
 external indication or peculiar circumstance in one 
 (nvoe), particularly with Verbs signifying to admire , 
 to praise, to blame .—The person in whom one sees, 
 &c., something, is put in the Gen., and that which 
 is seen, &c., in the Acc., or in an accessory clause, or 
 in the Gen. of the Part, which then agrees with the 
 person. 
 
 Examples of Verbs of this class — 'Ogoiv, foxtrdxi, <rxon~v, v-revos'v, 
 \vvoitv, yiyvuxrxuv, \<7riaru.a6iti i ii^evai, iv0ufx.i7<r0cti, TvvSxvtffdai, ulff06ivtv6xi % 
 fx.Kv0a.vaVy xglvav, i^ira^av, ayxadcci, 0ctvp.aZ > uVy ivraivtTv, f&eptpiO'tieii, 
 ypeyav. 
 
 To (3paSv Ka\ ytXXov, 6 pifJL^ovrai fiaXiara 
 rt y Co v, firi uIct^vvectOe, be not ashamed of the slowness 
 and delay, which they blame most on our 
 par t.—El ay a cr a i row TraTpoQrfoaa (5 e- 
 j3 o t> X evr a l ?7 6 cr a 7 r e tt p a \e, Ttavv aoi avfifi ov- 
 Xevio tqvtov fiifit’ioOai, ifyou admire your fa¬ 
 ther either for what he has determined 
 on or w hat li e has don e, I earnestly advise you 
 to imitate him .—’Eyw kcu rouro e tt a tv Ho ’Ayij- 
 (y l \ a o v to 7 rpog ro apiiJKEtv roig "EXXjjeriv v tt £ p i- 
 £ el v rrjv (5acn\EWQ Z,Eviav, I p r ais e Agesilaus 
 for this also, that he despised the friendship 
 of the king in comparison with pleasing the Greeks .— 
 F o p 7 i o w /uaXtara ravra a y a j u a t, I admire 
 these things especially in G or g ia s .—-'O 0 a v- 
 fi aZ, w tou et a i p o v, to Se eotiv, what I admire 
 in a fn en d is this .—II o X X a r O fii) p o v lira i- 
 vovyEv, we praise many things in Ho¬ 
 rn e r .—*E y v (jo e y ov tovto ttoiovvtoq, he per¬ 
 ceived that I was doing this. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 § 158.] 
 
 Obs. 5. When Verbs of this kind refer merely to a thing which, 
 one admires, blames or praises, they govern the Acc., sometimes 
 also the Acc. of the person alone; e. g. W cunTv, $eyu», pifA<pta6al 
 vjvot ; so also, ayaffflat, GavpA^n* <ma, to look with wonder at one f 
 either at the person himself or at his character altogether. 
 
 b. The Genitive as an expression of C a u s e 
 (Gen. causoe, Gen. causativus). 
 
 6. The second division of the causal Gen. includes 
 the Gen. which expresses the cause s i. e. the object 
 which calls forth and occasions the action of the Sub¬ 
 ject. This Gen. stands:— 
 
 I. With many Verbs which denote some disposi¬ 
 tion or emotion of the mind (Verba affectuum ), viz. 
 
 (a) with Verbs signifying to desire, to long for ;— 
 
 (b) to care for, to he concerned for, or the contrary ; 
 —(c) to he pained, to be grieved, to pity ; —(d) to be 
 -angry, to he displeased y —(e) with (f)Qovuv, to envy {nm 
 n i'o£, Dat. of the person and Gen. of the thing );— 
 (f) to admire, to approve of, to praise, to blame (nva 
 rivog, Acc. of the person and Gen. of the thing'). 
 
 Examples of Verbs of this class. •— (a) £««*, IvUv/xt7v6ou, XvtQvfx.uv, 
 i(>urix&; ij^uv or Iticcxsladtu, h\j/rn> y srwvJj* ;—(b) kvip'iXvrSxi, x$t<rGoc.i, 
 xaraip^ovuv, ip/JovrJ^stv, <nato^u.(r6eu, <T(>co(>q.v, irgovotTv, fxAXu, api- 
 
 5ur», piToftiku, oXiyu^uv, tpefiiirGcii ;—(e) oXotpvgvrGoii, vtvSixu; 
 iXsun and olxru^uv (nv<x two;) —(d) Gvpautrdou, igyi%t<r0cu, %«Xt- 
 vrxwiiv, pw’tuv (all with Dat. of the person and Gen. of the thing) ;— 
 (f) 6civfjt.a.Z > uv, uyarGetJ, £v^xiju,ovi^uv, fyXevv, cdvtZv, itfcuviZv, ptp.tyi<r6au (all 
 with Acc. of the person and Gen. of the thing). 
 
 Ou$£ig 7TO TOW €7 T l 0 V JUl St, OtXXa \ptj(TTOV 
 vr o r o v, Ka\ ob <r it ov, a\\a ^pijcrrou a it o i# * 
 TravTfQ yao apa r ut v a y a 0 to v liriOvgovaiv, no 
 one desires drink merely, but wholesome 
 drink , nor food, but wholesome food; for 
 all desire what is goo d. — To avopoiov a v o - 
 juotwv i 7r i 0 v p ft Kal t p a, the dissimilar de¬ 
 sires and loves the dissimila r .—H t ivy v 
 
 T U> V or t 7 U) V, T U 1 V TTOI W V, T O V IvaiVOV, tO 
 
 . 
 
368 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 crave for food , drink , praise.—01 vuyoi 
 r o v k o i v o it a y a 0 o v l 7r t ju t A o v r a i, the laws 
 care fo r the public goo d .—Ot 7 ovtte tt tv 61 - 
 k £) g tl v t o v tt a i S b g Tt0vr)KOTOQ , the 
 ' parents grieved for th eir dead so n .—T o> v 
 a 8 1 k t) y a r u) v opyi^oysOci, we are angry 
 with unjust actions .—Oi ica»coi <p 0 o v ov a i 
 toIg ay aOotG r n G a o <j> i a Gi the wicked envy the 
 good their iv is do m .—*A y ay at as r ri g av - 
 3 p t i a Gi I admire thee for thy braver y. 
 Qavya^oysv Swicparrj t 5j c a o (j) i a Gi w e ad¬ 
 mire Socrates for hiswisdo m .—Z rj X w at r o v 
 v\ o v t o v, I deem thee happy for tliy 
 wealth .—E vdaiyoviZw at t id v ayaOwv, I 
 consider thee happy on account of thy 
 blessing s .—A l v Co at r Tig irpoOvyiaG, d 
 praise thee for thy zeal. 
 
 Obs. 6. The Verbs ay a t a v, <p iXtTv, c r i z y t < v, to love , do 
 not govern the Gen., but the Acc. —M s x s < ( impersonal ) takes 
 she Pat. of the 'person caring, and Gen. of the person or thing cared 
 for ; e. g. MsAe/ fxoi <nvos (or orifi <rivo;), I care for some person or 
 )hmg. If the thing cared for is expressed by a neuter-Pronoun, 
 It may stand in the Norn, as the subject of the Verb, which then 
 becomes personal ; e. g. Taura, foy pt^an, God will take care of 
 these things. —The Verbs 6 avpuZ,nv and a yaadai have the 
 following constructions : (1) the Acc. of the person or the Acc. of 
 the thing alone, when the wonder or admiration extends to the 
 whole person or thing, or to the whole character of a person or 
 thing ; e. g. Qa.vft,vX s o) {pLyu.fj.oLi) tov ffT^uTriyov, 1 wonder at the general, 
 i olv fixC,u) t>jv ffotyluv, I admire wisdom j —(2) the Gen. of the person and 
 the Acc. of the thing or an accessory clause, when we admire some ac¬ 
 tion, external manifestation, or particular circumstance in a person; 
 e. g. roZro 0 aup a£y <rov,I wonder at this onyourpart. —(aya^aa/) 
 cov, ^ioti ovx ugyuoiou xotl %gu&iou T/totthou 6nO’ccv(>ou5 xtXTyjix^tx.i ftttXXsv i) <ro- 
 fas, I admire your preferring not to acquire treasures of silver and 
 gold rather than wisdom , [comp. 5, (d)j ;—(3) the Acc. of the per¬ 
 son and the Gen. of the thing, when we admire a person on account 
 of some quality ; e. g. 6«.vpuZ,M (ay etpxi) ’Zux.^u.tyi <njs troptas, I ad¬ 
 mire Socrates for his wisdom , [comp 6 , I.]. Instead of the Gen. 
 'of the thing a Preposition may be used, usually ’vri with the Pat. ; 
 e. g. ^uvpoL^o) 'Zuxft.TYi Wt r>5 cro<pia. 
 
 II. With Verbs which signify to requite , to revenge , 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 369 
 
 § 158.] 
 
 to punish, to accuse, to condemn. The Gen. represents 
 the offence or crime as the cause of the requital, re¬ 
 venge, &c. 
 
 Examples of Verbs of this class. — <r!aa.cr§ou, (to 
 
 PI OSCCUtc), ygouptffllcci (to indict ), otiTictTOeit, l veuTtaaQxi, tigixyuv, t/v&yut, 
 xaruytyvdjffxm, ■.r^oixaXtlaiai, aiguv (to convict), ^ixx^uv, xoivuv (all with 
 Acc. of the person and. Gen. of the thing') j tyxxXuv ivt-io-xri- 
 
 VTur6at (all with Dat. of the person and Gen. of the thing, but iy- 
 xtXuv more frequently with Acc. of the thing) ; <pi<ryu* (to be accused f 
 to be defendant in a lawsuit) ,xXcuvk/ and hpxuv (to be convicted), xarn- 
 yooiiv (but usually with Gen. of the person and Acc. of the 
 iking). 
 
 ’OSutrosvg £ r i cr a t o rovg p.vr}(7Tripag T r\ Q V 7 T £ p - 
 (3 atria g, Ulysses took v e n g e a n c e o n the suitors 
 for their transgressions. — T i p to p £ T <r 0 a i 
 Tiva tp 6 v ov, to puni sli a man fo r mur d e r. — 
 Et rairtatrO at nva tj) 6 v o v, t o accuse one of 
 mur d e r. — MtArtaSrjv oi e^Opoi £ S i to £ a v r v p a v- 
 v i 8 og t h g iv Xtppovhaw, his enemies prosecuted 
 (judicially pursued) Miltiades fo r his govern¬ 
 ment in the Chersonesus. —r p a tjt £trO a i nva tt a - 
 p a v 6 p to v, to indict one for unco n s tit u- 
 tional measure s. —d> tuyav k \ ott h g, tj) 6- 
 vov, atT£p£iag, to be tried for theft , 
 mur der, impie ty. —K piv£trOai it tr £ (3 £ i a g, 
 to be ac cus e d of i mp iet y. — A i naZovo iv ot 
 Tltptrai koi £ y jc A tj p a r o g, . . . . a y a p i tr r i a g, 
 the Persians condemn ingratitude as a 
 cr im e. — f A A io v a i k A o tt rj g, t o be convicted 
 of th eft. The penalty of the crime is also put in 
 the Gen., e. g. Q a v ar o v k p i v £ t v, Kpiv£oOai , 
 to try, to be tried for one's life. 
 
 * 
 
 c. The Genitive used to denote certain 
 Mutual Relations. 
 
 7. The third division of the causal Gen. includes 
 the Gen. by which certain mutual relations are ex¬ 
 it 2 
 
370 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 [Chap. IIL 
 
 pressed (Gen. comparationis sive relationis). In these 
 mutual relations, one idea (e. g. that of superiority 
 or inferiority) necessarily supposes the other, and 
 thus, to a certain extent, calls it forth and causes it. 
 Hence the Gen. is used:— 
 
 (a). With expressions of ruling , superiority , excell¬ 
 ing, prominence , and the contrary, viz. those denoting 
 subjection , yielding to and inferiority . 
 
 Examples of words of this class .—The Verbs (to 
 
 master, to govern), lvT*%a*, cr^rnyu*, rvoxgu*, rtwnuup, 
 im<rrari7», ijyifcontu*, lyutrSxi (to rule), 
 mpiyiyvarllou, foitfigu*, *'»*’<>«’. xyttaf, vi¬ 
 
 rility, vparfatuv, v^txfivu», tr^ortfixy, vKisvtxrat, nrrxrSxt, verbal, 
 vrrtpiZaK TcvoXuvi^xi, WxrrovtrSxt, nuoutrUt, (tutmxruy, 
 
 vvTi£ov ;—the Adjectives uxoxrris-, lyx^rns, rvxoos, xxrr,x»os,&Q, 
 
 f O Xoyoc tov € py ov Ik pars*, the report ex¬ 
 ceeded the thing itself —'la po X 0nga av- 
 OpuTTia 7T acruv r Cj v kvtOvfiiuv a k pa r rj etjriv, 
 depraved men are unable to control c j' n y °J 
 their passion s.— FIoAAaK^ XuTrp vireppaA A et 
 TO hSuceiv TOV aSiKticrOai, the doing an injury 
 often exceeds in grief thebeing injur ed.-—Oi 
 Trovrjpoi hrrCovTai t Co v liriOvfiiCt v, wicked men 
 are slaves to (lit. are worsted by) their pa s- 
 sio ns, 
 
 (S') With the Comparative, and with Adjectives in 
 the Positive which have the force of the Comparative, 
 (e. g. Numerals in -a<xtoc, -7rXouc? &c.), the object 
 with which the comparison is made is put in the 
 Genitive (Gen. comparatioas ). 
 
 'O woe ixtiZ<ov £<wi row v a r p 6 c, the son ts 
 greater than his father .—Xpuode icptir- 
 ruiv uvoivv \6yvv SporoTe, gold is more 
 powerful with men than a myriad oj 
 word s.—To 'EXXjivikoi/ orparsupa faiverat iro \\ ti¬ 
 ff X a a i o v iaioOai tov n p s r ( p o w, the Greek army 
 
t 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 371 
 
 § 158.] 
 
 seems likely to be many times larger than 
 our s. —O v $ £ v b g Sevrepog, utrrepog, i nf e- 
 r io r to no on e. —T to v apKovvrtov ir e p itt a 
 kt rjaaaOat, to acquire more than sufficient. 
 
 (y). With Verbs signifying to buy and sell , ex¬ 
 change and barter , and with expressions of valuing, 
 of being worthy or unworthy \a%iovv, a£tog) ; and, 
 generally, the price of a thing stands in the Gen. 
 
 Examples of Verbs of this class. — Tlgicterfitzi, euytTrPai, iyoocc^tiv, <r«- 
 
 £«Aa^c./3av£/v, XTa,tr?a.i, ‘Tioi^otr&oei, St. r roboffQa.i ) $i$ovai, <ra>%.i7v, \viiv, ccWtzr* 
 Tut), ei^Xa.TTta'Sai ) a.vTCikXciTTia'^cu, oi^iova'6ai ) votiiffOui, 
 
 •npaarSau. 
 
 Oi Qpctioig to v ov v r a i rag yvvai/cag n apa ruw yo- 
 v'cmv \p rj /U a r a) v g s y a X to v, the Thracians buy 
 their wives from their parents for great sums of 
 m o 11 e y. T to v tt o i^w v 7ru) Xovaiv hpiv 7 ravra 
 rayaO ’ ol Otoi, the gods sell all good things to us fo r 
 t o i Is. Ot ayaOoi o v S £ v o g av k £ p S o v g rijv rrjg 
 7rarpfSog iXevOepiav a v r aXX a % a i v r o, the good 
 would exchange the freedom of their country for 
 no g a i n. —’larpoc ?r oX X w y a X X to v a v r a - 
 £i b g iartr, a physician is worth many other 
 men .— E-ycuye owStw aviatbr£pov vopiZio rtbv £i> av- 
 OpLorroig £ivai row r to v t a to v rov re kokov Kal ay a- 
 Obv it % i o v a 0 a i, I think there is nothing more une¬ 
 qual among men than that the bad man and the good man 
 should be valued e qua a y -— "a $ tog r i png, 
 worthy of h o no u r. — fl o a o v SiSaoicei ; II i v r e 
 p v to v, f o r how much does he teach ? Fo r five 
 min ce. —’A p y v p i o v, pia 0 o v Ipya^eaOai, to work 
 for money , for hire . 
 
372 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 LXXXIII. 
 
 (Exercise on §§ 157,158.) 
 
 1. We must restrain the soul from evil desires. 
 2. It is mournful and grievous to be deprived of 
 the good-will of men. 3. The soul, if 1 it depart 
 from the body polluted and impure, is not imme¬ 
 diately with God. 4. As the body bereft 2 of the 
 soul sinks-away 3 , so also a state bereft of laws will 
 be dissolved. 5. He-who 4 does not 5 consider the 
 highest-good 6 , but in 7 every way seeks to do what is 
 the most-agreeable, wherein 8 would he differ 9 from 
 the irrational brutes? 6. The battle has delivered 
 us from shameful slavery. 7. We esteem the old- 
 man happy, because he is free from passions. 8. Epa- 
 minondas sprang 10 from an obscure father. 9. From 
 Telamon sprang 11 Ajax and Teucer; from Peleus, 
 Achilles. 10. It is the business of the general to com¬ 
 mand, but the duty of the soldiers to obey. H* Stags 
 were sacred-to Artemis {Diana). 12. Of all friends 
 the first and the most-trusty is a brother. 13. Socrates 
 generously imparted 12 what was hi s 13 to all. 14. 
 The hired-labourers, who 4 for-the-sake-of a subsistence 
 performed servile labours andparticipated-in no office, 
 were the poorest of the Athenians. 15. A good king 
 allows the citizens to enjoy 14 a just freedom of speech 
 and action. 16. The saying takes-hold-of the mind. 
 17. Young-men, hold-fast-to instruction, and direct- 
 y our selves to 15 what is more-excellent! 16 18. The 
 virtues of good men obtain honour and fame even 
 with enemies. 19. The young 17 should 18 aspire-after 
 the good 16 and abstain-from evil actions. 20. The 
 pains of the sick are more violent by-night than by¬ 
 day. 21. In-winter men wish-for summer, but in¬ 
 summer, winter. 22. Hercules reclaimed 19 Lybia, 
 which-was 20 full of wild-beasts, 23. The good lack 
 not praise. 24. Natures which-seem 20 to be the best 
 
THE GENITIVE. 
 
 373 
 
 § 158.] 
 
 need education most. 25. The earth is full of in¬ 
 justice. 26. Virtue leads us by a path rugged and 
 full of toil 21 . 27. iEtna is-full-of 22 valuable firs and 
 pines. 28. We contrive many-things whereby 23 we 
 may enjoy the good 16 and avert the evil, 29. Milo, 
 the Crotonian, ate twenty minaa of flesh 16 and as 
 much bread 16 , and 24 drank three flagons of wine. 
 30. Men derive many advantages 25 from sheep, 
 horses, cows and other animals. 31. It is written in 
 the laws that both the plaintiff and the defendant 
 should be heard alike 26 . 32. It is fair and right to 
 be mindful of the good 16 rather than of the evil. 
 33. It is pleasant to the unhappy to forget 2 , even 
 for a short time, present evils. 34. Since-thou-art 20 
 young, be-willing to hear thine (=the) elders 1 35. 
 Those who are unacquainted-with literature see 
 not, though they see 27 . 36. Hermes (Mer¬ 
 cury) had great experience in medical science. 37. 
 It is better to die 2 than to experience insult. 38. 
 Socrates considered with respect to philosophers, 
 whether 28 they devoted themselves 29 to 30 reflection 31 
 upon the celestial 16 ,/ro??i thinking 32 that they already 
 sufficiently understood 33 the human 16 , or that they 
 supposed that they did what-was-befitting in neglect¬ 
 ing 33 the human 16 and 34 contemplating the divine 16 . 
 39. This we admire in Socrates, that even while 35 ban¬ 
 tering he instructed the young-men who-associated- 
 with 20 him. 40. Socrates exhorted young-men to 
 aspire-af'ter the fairest and choicest virtue, by 
 which 36 both states and households are well regu¬ 
 lated. 41. Pluto being-in-love-with 37 Proserpine, 
 carried her off secretly with the cooperation 
 of J u p i t e r 38 . 42. He is a sorry president, who 4 
 
 cares-for the present time, but is not 5 also provident- 
 for 39 the future. 43. Do not neglect even absent 
 friends ! 44. Be-sparing-of time ! 45. The good 
 
 man is more concerned for the common weal, than 
 for his-own fame 46. Many care 40 more for the ac- 
 
374 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 [Chap. TIL 
 
 quisition of money than for that of friends. 47. The 
 Athenian state often repented 41 of sentences passed 42 
 in 43 anger and not 5 after 43 examination. 48. I pity 
 thee for thy (=the) sad fate. 49. Envy 2 me not 
 the memorial! 50. Demosthenes we admire for his 
 
 (=the) greatness of nature and self-command in 44 
 practice, and for his dignity 45 , promptitude, boldness- 
 of-speech and firmness. 51. Anaxagoras is said to 
 have been condemned 2 for impiety, because he called 
 the sun a red-hot mass. 52. Meletus indicted 2 So¬ 
 crates for impiety. 53. Themistocles was accused, 
 in-his-absence 46 , of treason and condemned to death. 
 54. All-things everywhere are subject-to the gods, 
 and the gods rule-overall alike. 55. Apollo led the 
 nine Muses, whence he was also called the leader-of- 
 the-Muses. 56. Why do the educated rank-before 47 
 the uneducated? 57. Cadmus, the Sidonian, reigned- 
 over 48 Thebes, but over the whole of the Pelopon¬ 
 nesus reigned Pelops, the son of Tantalus. 58. Many 
 are slaves-to 49 money. 59. Master appetite, sleep 
 and anger! 60. The bravery of the Greeks tri- 
 umphed-over 50 the power of the king of the Persians. 
 61. Nothing is more valuable to men than the culti¬ 
 vation of the mind. 62. No teacher of hunger, 
 thirst and cold is better than necessity. 63. Thou 
 canst 9 not purchase virtue and nobleness-of-mind 
 for money. 64. Diphridas took Tigranes with his 
 wife, and released them for a large sum of 
 money 51 . 65. The Chaldeans served for pay, be¬ 
 cause they were very-warlike and poor. 66. Only 
 those who 52 practise virtue are worthy of honour. 
 67. The benefactors of men are-deemed-worthy 2 of 
 immortal honours. 
 
 1 iav, with Subj. 2 Aor. s = falls. 4 c'sris. 8 /e$. 6 to a/sitrmi. 
 
 7 ix. 8 Ti. 9 see § 153, 2. C. 10 = was. 11 ylyuvrOctu 12 WyxeTv. 
 13 rx luurou. 14 to allow one to enjoy a thing — fara^ovai rm twos 
 (i. e. to give share of -a thing to any one). 16 with Acc. 
 16 Plur. 17 Comp. 18 ££* 7 , with Acc. and Inf. 19 Aor. of 
 20 Part. 21 = 6weat (fiows), 22 yepu. 24 5*. to derive 
 
THIS ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 375 
 
 § 158.] 
 
 an advantage from anything — ivo\*6uv <w's n. * 6 Trans : to hear 
 alike, &c. 27 Trans: seeing see not. 28 whether — or, vertex — H. 
 
 29 = turned themselves. 30 *«•/, witli Acc. 31 ro <p^ovt^uv. 32 Aor. 
 Part. 33 Inf. 34 = but. 35 xpx. 36 Dat. 37 Aor. Part, of t^5». 
 38 Gen. Abs. 39 to be provident for = T^ovoudhu. 40 ftku. 41 Say: 
 it often repented (Aor.) the state of the Athenians , &c. 42 Aor. Part, 
 of yiyv'.atxt. 43 /ura, with Gen. 44 = with Acc. 45 — gravity. 
 46 XTohifAiui. 47 *goix.ttv. 48 Aor. of (ixanXtvtiv. 49 yrrovtf. M Aor. 
 of Ti^tyiynaSat. 51 Say: for much money. 63 see § 148, 6. 
 
 § 159. II. The Accusative. 
 
 . / 
 
 1. The Accusative primarily denotes the relation 
 involved in Whither , and therefore expresses—(a) in 
 a local relation, the limit or point to which the 
 action of the Verb is directed; (in prose , however, 
 a Preposition is regularly used to express this rela¬ 
 tion; e. g. ug aaTv iXOtiv)] —(b) in a causal relation, 
 the effect or result of the action indicated by the 
 Verb, or the object on which the action is performed. 
 
 • 
 
 » 
 
 (a). Accusative denoting Effect 
 
 2. The Accusative of effect is used as in other lan¬ 
 guages; e. g. ypcKt>u) hriGToXr'iv (IttigtoXuv being the 
 effect or result of the action of the Verb). It is to 
 be observed that in Greek a Verb (either transitive 
 or intransitive) very frequently governs the Acc. of a 
 Noun , which is either from the same Root as the Verb y 
 or has a kindred signification. An attributive Adjec¬ 
 tive or Pronoun is generally found with this Acc.— 
 This is usually called the Acc. of kindred or cognate 
 signification. 
 
 ’EtTriptXovvTai tt aoav s 7T i ft c A s i a v, t h e y 
 take care with all diligenc e .—Ato ju a t vgioy 
 SiKaiav S e if a i v, Task of you a just r e quest. Si- 
 
376 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 milarly, k ctX a g tt p a £ e tg tt p ar r tt toper - 
 form good actions ;— s p y aZ e <r 0 a i e p y o v 
 ica\ 6 v, to work a good work ;— a p \ s 1 v 
 a p\\]v, t o h old a government ; — S ovX e i av 
 SovXeveiv, to s uffer slavery ;—tt oX e/ut o v 
 7 r oX e fi fiv, to wage a w ar ;—v 6 <r ov voatl v, 
 to be sick of a disease;—opKOvg opvv- 
 vai, to swear oaths ; — a a 6 e v eiv votrov, to 
 be sick of a d i s e a s e; ~—Zy v |3 t o v, to live 
 a life. 
 
 (b). Accusative of tbe Object on which 
 the action is performed, i. e. the 
 s uffe ring Object. 
 
 3. The Verbs which will be mentioned here are, 
 generally speaking, only those which, in Latin, take 
 some other Case than the Acc ., or are construed with 
 Prepositions . 
 
 (1) The Verbs cj^eXeIv, ovivavai, (XvgiteXeiv, how¬ 
 ever, always with the Pat.), to profit ; fiXairreiv, aSt - 
 v(3pt%£iv, XvpaivtaOai , X(o(3acr0ai; tvatfdtiv, aae- 
 Qtiv) Aoyav, eveSoeveiv, insidiari j ri/uuoptlcrOai ; Otpa- 
 tteveiv, S(jpu<popth>, iirLTpoirEvtiv, to act as ETrirpoTrog or 
 guardian to anyone; koXuiceveiv, Qiotteveiv, Qiottteiv, 
 TTGogKvvtiu; tteiOeiv ; apt!fizrsOcu, respondere and remu- 
 nerarii <pvXarrEadai, euXa/3ua6ai ; j pipticrOai, Z*)Xovv. 
 
 0 Epa 7 T 6 VE t o if g aOavarovg, serve the 
 immortals. — Mrj QCottte tov Kparovvrn , 
 d 0 not flatter the man in powe r. —' A Am- 
 fStaSrjg e tt e 1 9 e to tt Xri 6 og, AIcibiades per¬ 
 suade d th e mult it u d e. — [1 X e t a t a p x 0 
 AewviSou, ovra jSacnXea teal veov etl, e tt et p o 7T e v e 
 Jlavaavfag, Pausanias was the guardian of 
 Pleistar chus , being a king and still young. —M 17 
 k oX a. k e v e t o v g i X o v g , do not flatter 
 friends — ’£2 (p IX £ 1 r vv g (piXov g, tcai py 
 

 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 377 
 
 § 159.] 
 
 (3 X a 7r t e roitg ix&pov c, benefit friends, 
 and do not i nj tire enemie s. — Mi) aS ik £i roue 
 (jiiXove, do no wrong to thy friends .— 
 Mi? v (3 p i Z £ to it g 7r a iS a g, efo not in s u Vt 
 boy s. —rioAA«<«c Kai SouXoi rijutopouvrai rove 
 a S t ko v g Se(77r orag, even slaves often take 
 vengeance on unjust masters. — -Ap£i~ 
 (3 e a 0 a i t iv a pvOotg, Xoyoig, to answer one 
 with words > a p £ i (3 sa 0 a i ^ a p { v, £V£py£<riav, 
 or a /a a i j3 £ <x 6 a i riva X^9 LTl y return any 
 one a fa v our, 
 
 (2) Verbs which signify to do good or evil to any 
 one by word or deed. 
 
 Examples of Vetbs of" this class. —Eys^ys ts/v, s S xohiv, xxxovgytTv, 
 KaxoTotuv, ivXoyuv, xuxokoytiv, tv [koiXu$, xa.xus) *.iyuv 01' tixttv. 
 
 *A v0p(O7T£, pt) Spa t o it g T£0vTjKorag k a k at g, 
 man , do not harm the dead /•— Mi) KciKoitpyti 
 t o it g (j> [ X o v g, do not injure your fr ien d s. 
 —E X) £ p y £ T £ 1 TY)V 7 r a t p l $ a, do good to 
 your country. — Ev ttoUi roitg (jtfXovg, 
 c 0 nf er favours on your fr i e n d s. —E v 
 
 X £ y £ T O V £ it X £ y O V T a, KOI £ V 7T O l £ l T 6 V 
 ev TToiouvra, speak well of him who 
 sp e aks w ell, and do well to him who does 
 well. Instead of the Adverbs £v and Kcaciog with 
 Troiuvy &c., the Greek also uses the corresponding 
 Adjectives , k a A a, kok a tt o i£iv or A iy £ 1 v r 1 v a, 
 to do or say good or ill to any one. (On 
 the double Acc. see § 160, 2.). 
 
 (3) Verbs which signify to persevere , to await , to 
 wait for^ and their opposites; e. g. ptvuv, Qapptiv ; 
 <l>£Vy£tVy a7roSlSpa<TK£lV ) Spa7T£T£V£lV. 
 
 Mr) <{> £vy e to v k ( v S v v o v, do not fl ee from 
 d a ng er. — Xpi) 0 a p p £ iv (J a v a r o v, it is neces- 
 
378 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 sary to meet death bravely (= ^ fe ar 
 
 death), fidenti animo expectare mortem.—O tovAoc 
 nWSpa ro v 3 e <x tt o' r q v, the slave ran away 
 from his master.—Ol tCov vpayyariov tcatpoi ov 
 nivoval ryv Vfttri pau /3paSurijr a, the 
 
 favourable opportunities for action do not wait jor 
 
 our sloth. 
 
 (4) Verbs of concealing and being concealed, 
 e. a. XavOavttv, Kpimruv (celare), Kp6imo0a«the 
 Verbs d>0avitv (to anticipate, ante vertere) A 11 - 
 *• £ 1 V, i TT «X t f ir S < v (to f ail ; deficere)also Verbs 
 of swearing and the like. With Verbs of swearing, the 
 object sworn by is put m the A cc. Hence also Ad¬ 
 verbs of swearing are followed by the Acc.S e. g. i >n. 
 ya, ov ya, vai ya. 
 
 0 c o 6 c oiirE Xav 9 a vttv, oUrt ftumaaOal 6mm- 
 tov, it is not possible either to escape the notice 
 of the gods, or to compel them.—Oi jroAf/iiot 
 I W) 0 n <T aw roue A0»)valoue afucopivoi tie to 
 &<rrv,the enemy anticipated the Athenians 
 in coming into the city, ( 1 . e. reached^ tU city before 
 them ).—’E wiXshrci pt 6 \povoc, n VP‘P«, th f tinie ’ 
 the day fails me.—“Q pv»pivavrac rove Ve 
 ovc, '[ swear by all the gods.—Nat pa A < a, 
 
 no, by Zeus l —N u roue Otovg, aye, by the 
 
 ^ # # 
 gods! 
 
 (5) Very many Verbs denoting a feeling or an 
 affection of the mind; e. g. ^o8ua0ai, Siiaai; alaxv- 
 viaOai, aiSeta0at; a X 0£<x0ai; 3u CX e gaivtiV, larXnr- 
 reoOai, KarairXr]TTiodai", oltcrtipuv, eXeeiu, oXo<j>vpt- 
 
 aOai, &C. 
 
 Xoii al$ii*9ai roic Otobe, we must reve¬ 
 rence the gods.-Alaxivopai rovOtov, 
 Jam ashamed before th e deity.— OX o- 
 <j>b(>ov r out vivyraQ, ptty the poor. 
 
TIIE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 379 
 
 § 159.] 
 
 (6) With Verbs of motion , the space or way is put 
 m the Acc these being the objects on which the 
 action of the Verb is performed;—so also the time 
 during which an action takes place, (answering to 
 the question, How long ? How long ago ?)—also words 
 expressing bulk and weight , (answering to the ques¬ 
 tion, How much?), 
 
 i 
 
 Baivsiv (its pa t p tt e i v, iropeveaQai) 
 
 o3o v, to go a journey (like itque reditque 
 viam ).— X p 6 vo v 9 r bv \ p 6 v o v, a long time , 
 v v kt a, h p i p a v, during the night, day .— 
 Sv(3apig r/Kpa^e tout ov t b v %povov paXiara, 
 Sybaris was most flourishing during this time. 
 — ' , l<j)(ucrciv tl Ka\ Qnjdaioi rovg r eX evt at o v g 
 rovroucri % p o v o v g pEra rrjv ev A evKTpoig pa\r)v, 
 the Thebans too had some power during these 
 latter ti me s, after the battle at Leuctra. —M*Xnd3»K* 
 cnrlTrXu II apov TroXiopKijaag 6% icai eikoolv r\pi m 
 p a g, Miltiades sailed away, having besieged Paros 
 twenty-six days .— To BafiuXwviov raXavrov 
 S v v a t a e E u |3 o t 3 a e I (3 3 o pp k o v t a p v a g, 
 the Babylonian talent is worth (is equivalent to) 
 seventy Euboean mince . 
 
 (7) Finally, the Acc. is used with intransitive or 
 passive Verbs and intransitive Adjectives of all kinds, 
 to explain them more fully. Here, also, the Acc. 
 represents the object as acted upon or suffering , since 
 it denotes the object to which the intransitive action 
 of the Verb or the property expressed by the Adjec¬ 
 tive refers. This is the Acc. of more definite limita¬ 
 tion, or, as it is often called, the Acc. partis affectce. 
 
 K apvto r ov g 6 <j> 0 aXp o v g, I suffer in the 
 ey e s, (i.e. I have sore eyes). — T agfyplvag vyialvw, 
 lam sound i n mi n d .—’ AXyH) rovg n 6 S a g, 1 feel 
 pain in my fee t .—O l arpemwrat k di t ci a w p a r a 
 
380 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 nail rcig \p v x a g ev e7rc(f)VKEcrav, the soldiers were well 
 constituted in both their bodies and minds. 
 — Atm^foa yvvi) avSpog r 6 v 0 v gov, woman differs 
 from man in her disp ositio n. —O vrog 6 avOpio- 
 7 roc t o v SaKtuXov aXycT, this man has a pain i n 
 his finger .— 'AyaOog Ci/n ravriiv r i) v t£- 
 Xvrjv, I am good at this ar t. — AiEcpOapyivog 
 t r) v xp v \ {] v, corrupt in s pi r i t — Tig ovk av rate 
 h^ovalg SovXevojv ai'xypwc ciartOeiri Kai to g Co ii a 
 Kaii t i) v ip v xv v i who, if he were a slave to plea¬ 
 sures, would not be shamefully affected in body and 
 mind?—Qavrig Kai yvd)}ir\v iKavog, Kai ra tto- 
 X £ fi i a aXictjuoc Phanes was both competent in 
 j u d gm ent and brave inb attl e. —Ila/otc dav/iaGTog 
 VV t b KaXXog , Paris was wonderful for beauty 
 (i. e. was of a icondrous beauty). —’ Avegti) <pEpavXug 
 to (Tw/x a ovk acj)vfig Ka\ r fj v xpvxvv ovk ayevvEi 
 avdpi toiKiog, Pheraulas stood up, in person not 
 uncomely, and in mind not like a low-born man. 
 In English we generally employ certain Prepositions 
 with jthis Acc., such as in, with respect to, of ; or, 
 when it occurs with an Adjective, the Acc. of the 
 thing is sometimes turned into a personal Noun and 
 the Adjective as an attributive is made to agree 
 with it; e. g. ayaOog rtyvr/v, a good artist ; or, the 
 Prepositions of or with are placed before the Noun 
 denoting the thing, and the attributive Adjective is 
 made to agree with that Noun; e. g. veaviag KaXbg 
 rfjv ipvxvv, a youth of or with a noble spirit. 
 
 Obs. In this way many Adverbial expressions are to be ex¬ 
 plained, as, v'pos, fAsy'Jos, (Z><xSo$, ftwxos, TXriQot, b^iUpov, , ysvot, 
 
 cvo/aoc,, [At^ot ; also ri, Totrourov, fieyoc, to. v, wavTot, to \oit6v, ov'Sev, a /a- 
 (pQTiQot, <r<SXA«, &C. ; e. g. K Xeotvfyos y rh ^lyaXtvs acr ’A^xaS/af, 
 Kleandros was from Arcadia, a Phigalean by cl esc ent .—Mi ra 
 
 TOLVTCA OlQiXOVTO it) TOV Z<x(ldT0V VOTCAfAOV TO logo; TiTTdOUV t\£0om¥, 
 
 after this they came to the river Zabatos, fourplethra in width . 
 
§ 159.J 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 381 
 
 LXXXIV. 
 
 (Exercise on § 159.) 
 
 1. He who 1 is enslaved 2 to pleasures submits-to 3 
 the most shameful servitude. 2. The laws not only 
 punish the evil-doers, but also benefit the just. o. 
 If thou wishest to be beloved by friends, benefit thy 
 (=the) friends; if thou desirest to be honoured by 
 any state, benefit and do-good-to the state. 4. 
 Wealth often injures both the body 4 and the mind 4 . 
 5. He who 1 flatters friends wrongs and injures them 
 much 5 . 6. Revenge not thyself on thine enemies ! 
 7. Wine drunk 6 in-moderation benefits 7 the body, 
 but does not injure the mind. 8. Those who 1 injure 
 a benefactor are punished by God. 9. We worship 
 no man as lord, but the gods. 10. Sedentary trades 
 injure the body 4 and wear-out the mind 4 . 11. The 
 hunter lies-in-wait-for the hares. 12. Endeavour to 
 repay benefactors with gratitude 4 ! 13. Especially 
 
 beware-of meetings for 8 carousal! 14. Imitate wise 
 
 men 1 15. The prudent man takes-heed-to the dan¬ 
 
 ger from which he has once been rescued 9 . 16. We 
 must 10 emulate the works and acts, not the words 
 of virtue. 17. They say that Xerxes 11 threw-down 9 
 fetters into the Hellespont to-revenge-himself- 
 upon 6 the Hellespont forsooth. 18. A slave who- 
 has-run-away-from 12 his (=the) master is worthy of 
 punishment. 19. Shun a pleasure which afterwards 
 brings 6 pain! 20. The general must l£> demean 
 
 himself kindly 14 towards 15 his (==the) soldiers, 
 that they may-have-confidence-in 16 him. . 21. Tell 
 me, what 17 punishment the betrayer of his country 
 will have-to-expect 18 after 19 death. 22. Conceal- 
 from 20 me nothing, my friend! 23. To deceive 9 
 
 men is easy, but to remain-concealed-from 9 God is 
 impossible. 24. Provisions failed the army. 25. I 
 swear to you by all the gods and all the goddesses 
 
382 
 
 THE DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. [ClIAP. Ill 
 
 that I have never injured 21 any of the citizens. 26. 
 Young-men must 22 in 23 the house respect their(=the) 
 parents, in 8 the streets those-who-meet 6 them, in 8 
 solitude 4 themselves. 27. The beginning of wisdom 
 is to fear God. 28. Compassionate 9 me, who-am 6 un¬ 
 deservedly 24 unfortunate! 29. The Lacedaemonians 
 reverenced old-men not less than their fathers. 30. 
 Do not shrink-from going 2J a long way to 15 those 
 who 1 profess to teach anything useful! 31. 
 For a long 26 time the Lacedaemonians had 9 the su¬ 
 premacy of Greece both by 26 land and by 26 sea. 
 32. Theophrastus died 9 after-he-had-lived 12 eighty- 
 five years. 33. Phanes had sufficient judg- 
 m e n t 27 , and was brave in battle 28 . 34. Men ap¬ 
 pear to be well 29 in body 4 after 30 many labours. 
 35. Cyrus was very-beautiful in person, of a humane 
 heart, very-fond-of-learning and very-eager-for-ho- 
 nour. 36. Larissa was built of earthen bricks 31 ; and 
 underneath-was a stone foundation of twenty feet 
 in height. 
 
 *§148,6. 2 Act. Part. 3 =£o«X£<5e». 4 Plur. 6 Pres. 
 
 Part. 7 Aor. of «»<vava;. B lv. 9 Aor. I 0 ^£o»v. li Acc. with 
 Inf. 12 Aor. Part. 13 ^ 17 , with Acc. and Inf. 14 <pi\i><p^ovus *££<». 
 15 <r£«s, with Acc. 16 Oxppttv. 17 o<ro~o;. 18 uTop&vu*. 19 para, with 
 Acc. 20 Aor. Mid. 21 Inf. 22 2e 7, with Acc. and Inf. 23 Wi, with 
 Gen. 24 <Ta^' a-l'iav. 2b iro\6i. 26 xura, with Acc. 27 Trans: was 
 sufficient in judgment, 28 = warlike ajfairs vroXt/u*). 29 tu ’^ u »- 
 ^isro. 3 , Dat. 
 
 § 1G0. Double Accusative . 
 
 In the following instances two objects are put in 
 the Acc. with one Verb in Greek:— 
 
 L In the construction mentioned in § 159, 2, 
 when the Verb has a transitive signification, (e. g. 
 (piXiav (pi\uv), the idea of activity, being expressed 
 by 'he union of a Verb and a iVbw?i,(with the latter ot 
 
THE DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 383 
 
 § 160.] 
 
 which an Adjective usually occurs), may at the same 
 time be extended to a personal object; e. g. 
 ft i\y a X rj v <p t X t a v (= piya (jnXCo) tov t ralSa, 
 I love the boy with great lov e (= greatly).— 
 KaAw ere rovro rb bvojxa, I call you this 
 name or by this na m e. (Here <piXiav and 
 ovo/ua are Accusatives of cognate signification , having 
 a meaning which is involved in that of their respec¬ 
 tive Verbs). 
 
 2. Expressions of doing or saying good or evil to, 
 (which may contain an Acc. of the thing said or done), 
 take also an Acc. of the object to which the go 3 d or 
 evil is done by word or deed. The Acc. here also 
 denotes the object acted on, or the valient ; e. g. 
 ttoluv, tpyaZtaOai, &C., Xiyuv, unuv, &c., ay a 6 a, 
 k a k a t 1 v a, to do good or evil to any one , to say good 
 or evil of any one. Similarly, giy a wtytXiiv or \$\h- 
 tttuv t iv a, to benefit or injure one greatly, &c. 
 
 Tore 0£giOTOK:Ai)c £ k eivo v rt tca\ r o v g K o - 
 pivQ iov c 7r o X X a te Kai tea k a sXey e v, then 1 he- 
 mistocles s aid much evil both of h i m f '' 
 the Corinthians. — Ov^£.ttlottot£ tTravovro 7ro ' 
 v gag 7 t o lovvT zg tea tea, they never ceased dP^ 
 u s mu ch har m. 
 
 3. Moreover, the double Accusative occurs v 
 Verbs which signify to make (a person or thing sonu m 
 thing), to choose, to appoint, to nominate, to consider (as 
 anything), to declare, to represent, to regard, to know, 
 to say, to name, to call, &c.; e. g. ttoluv, riOivai, enru- 
 tSuicvuvai (to appoint), KaOiaravai, alpuoOai, vojjli^uv, 
 hyucrQai, Xiyeiv, dvojaa&iv, teaXuv, &c. —One of these 
 Accusatives is the Acc. of the patient, the other i° 
 the complement of the Predicate , and consequently 
 may often be an Adjective . 
 
 K voog to v g QiXovg Itt o l i)g z 7rXou<xt- 
 
384 
 
 THE DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. [CHAP. III. 
 
 ouc, Cyrus made liis friends ri ch . II a i - 
 $£UW < 7 £ (7 o(f)6v, I educate you wise , ( 1 . e. i 
 make you wise by education ).—A t pw o- * M* 7 a 
 exalt you to be grea t .—N rty or 
 
 gai <T£ avSpa a y a 0 6 v, I think , consider 
 you a good ma n .—’O vofia^tv r t v a <r o - 
 rf) I <7 TV V, to call one a sop his t .—A iptXo- 
 0 at t iv a a t p ar u y 6 v, to choose one as a 
 comma nde r. —T o i/ T w^ouav a v v b t nr v o v 
 7 T a p a\a(3 e v, he made Gobryas his com¬ 
 panion at dinne r .—IloAcuic ttXovtov r\yov - 
 nai ovppaxovc;, tt i a r i v, e v v o £ a v, i con- 
 sider allies, confidence and g o od-wiU 
 the w e alt h of a city. 
 
 13 
 
 Obs 1 In the passive construction this predicative Acc 
 changed into the Nom ., and agrees with the Subject; e. g. Ax»*- 
 Tuflt k*M x *n, Alcibiades was appointed 
 
 general. 
 
 4. The double Acc. is also found with Verbs (a) 
 of entreating, beseeching, desiring, enquiring and ash¬ 
 ing, e. g. iiirtiv, irpaTTEiv (to demand), irparTzaUa,, 
 iponQv.'&T&Ztiv, iaroptw ; (fj) of teaching, e. g. bi- 
 SaoKtiv, TTa&vuv; (y) of dividing and cutting up, e. g. 
 Siaioziv, ripvzw, K aravlgziV, (8) of depriving and 
 vbbing, e. g. arweiv, aTrooTtptiv, ov\<iv, 
 
 ; (t) of concealing or hiding from, e. g. KpvTrrtiv; 
 ) of on and o/, e. g. ivbmiv, Ubvuv, ap- 
 
 <pisvvvvcu» 
 
 nfudac KauBvagg fie Aijv-TOV Kijpvk-a p r <M 
 'Audtfiv 0 „ 7 a t i p a, Cambyses, sending a herald 
 
 toEqupt,asked Amasis for his daughter.— 
 Olarnarnyo'iTobg tt 0 X i r o C Iicari» raXavra 
 ? it p a S a v, the generals demanded of t he ci¬ 
 tizens a hundred talent s. ’A p 7 u p < o k 
 irparrc a z, I exact m o n e y f r o m y o u— 
 noXXd SiSaiTKZi fit o TtoXiig (3iorog, abundant 
 means teaches me many things. 
 
§ 160.] 
 
 THE DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 385 
 
 ova i ol Ueoggi tovq Trai8ag rpia no v a, the Per¬ 
 sians teach their sons three things only. 
 —r A w r t av te Trjv 'At tlkt}v kcu t p 6 7 r o v g 
 tmv ’A Orjvaitov tSidacFKOv tovq tt at 3 a g, t h e y 
 taught their sons the Attic tongue and 
 the customs of the Athenians .—T p si g go i pag 
 Sip^rjQ i 8 a o a t o n a v t a r o v 7 t s% 6 v a r p a- 
 t 6 v, Xerxes divided all his land force 
 into three division s .—T i g v e 1 v, 8iaipEiv 
 t 1 giprg g 01 p ag, to divide anything into 
 parts .—Kupoc to a TpciTEvga KaTEVEiga 
 8 w8 eko g e p r\, Cyrus divided the army into 
 twelve parts .— Tov govov goi Ka\ (piAov 
 tt a 1 8 a atytiAeTO t r) v ip v xv v, he h a s de¬ 
 prived my only and beloved son of life. 
 — T rjv T mh V a 7T o GT £ p El g g, he r oh s me 
 of honour. — Ta fiUtrapa rjgag cnr o o t Ep el 
 o <P'iAi7nrog, Philip is depriving us of our 
 possessions.—K p v tt t to g e to a t v xv g a, I c on¬ 
 ce al the misfortune from you . —Ylaig gl- 
 yag gacpov i\(x)V xiTwva ETEpov tt ai8a giKpov giyav 
 Exovra x iT <bva, ek8v oag a v r 6 v, tov glv euvtov 
 
 EKE LVOV 1) g (pi EG £, TOV 8e EKEIVOV OVTOQ E V £ 8 V, 
 
 a large boy having a small tunic , stripping an¬ 
 other boy who was small and had a large tunic , 
 put on his own tunic on him, and clad 
 himself in the 0 ther' 9 . 
 
 Obs. 2. 'Avoan^uv and a(petigt7trda.i, to deprive, to take away, have 
 the following constructions—(a) with Acc. of thing alone (b) 
 with Acc. of person alone, but rarely;—(c) with Acc. both of 
 person and thing, very often;—(d) with Gen. of person and Acc. 
 of thing, more rarely ;—(e) dvroari^Tv with Acc. of person and Gen. 
 of thing, very often (§ 157), a<pai£i7tr0cn very seldom ; anfiv has 
 the constructions mentioned in (c) and (e). 
 
 Obs. 3. When the Active Verbs mentioned in No. 4 are 
 changed into the Passive, the Acc. of the patient becomes the Norn., 
 but the Acc. of the thing remains (according to § 150, 4) ; e. g. 
 
 ’E ^ur&(Ani rbv y > <i> y. n v, lam asked my opinion _ 
 
 n aihus/ta/, 'hi'b&axoftoii ftourixriv, / get my self 
 taught, am taught, or learn music .—r? $e *«) oUfras r» 
 
-V> ft* 
 
 330 
 
 THE DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. [CHAP. III. 
 
 aura let the land and the dwellings he 
 
 divided into the same number of parts.— A <p 7? »**»*, 
 vritrrt^fi^nv r »j v a ^ », I w as deprived of m y of - 
 ice .— Kotvrofixt r ov r o ro <r^ay ft a, I am kept M 
 ignor ance of this affair.— Evi%6 0vv xirZva., I was 
 clad in a tunicj (iptptewvpou has a Middle meaning only). 
 
 Obs. 4. Even some Verbs which in the Active take the Mat. of 
 the person and the .4cc. of the thing, in the Passive change this Dat 
 of the person into^the Mom., while the Acc. of the thing remains 
 unaltered. This is the regular construction with the Passive of 
 Wtrarruv, Uirtfiuy, UnsriXAu* ml r,, to commit, to entrust some¬ 
 thing to some one, e. g. Oi -ro\7ra t i<nr*x(i*<rccv rb ms voXius 
 QuXa* 4 *> the citizens w ere assigned the protection oj 
 the city. 
 
 LXXXV • 
 
 ( Exercise on § 160.) 
 
 1. When Pyrrhus engaging-with 1 the Romans* 
 had conquered 3 them twice, having lost 4 many of 
 his friends and commanders, he said: If 5 we con¬ 
 quer 3 the Romans in one battle more 6 , we are ruined. 
 2. Critias and Alcibiades wrought 3 very many evils 
 to the state. 3. The gods have conferred many 
 blessings upon human life. 4. Consider Cp^J 
 hours the guide to a pleasant life 7 ! 5. Plato called 
 
 philosophy a preparation for death 7 , b. Misfoitune 
 makes 3 men more-thouglitful. 7. Socrates did not 
 exact-from those who 8 had-intercourse-with him any 
 money for his conversation 7 . 8. Apollo, who-was ? 
 the inventor of the bow, taught men archery, j. 
 Socrates benefitted 10 men very greatly 
 hy teaching wisdom to all those who 8 were willing 
 10. The Greeks, in the Median wars , took 4 the su¬ 
 premacy from the Lacedaemonians and gave it to 
 the Athenians. 11. The public-square of the Per¬ 
 sians around the governor s-residence is-divided-into 
 four parts; of these, one is for boys, another for 
 youths, another for adult men, another for those 
 who are 11 past military y e a r s 12 . 12. Many, 
 
 who have 13 mean minds, are adorned-with fine per- 
 
THE DATIVE. 
 
 387 
 
 § 161 .] 
 
 sons and fine lineage 15 and wealth 15 . 13 Many 
 young-men were taught wisdom by Socrates. 14. 
 ^fen Croesus was deprived-of 4 his power, he lived- 
 with Cyrus. 15. The soldiers to whom the 
 guard had been entrusted 16 had fled. 
 
 1 Aor. Part, of 2 Dat. 3 Aor 4 A or Pnrf 5" 
 
 with Subj. .fc* 7(J H 148, 6. Xor^rt 
 J* fttyurr* u pg tiv l p er f. Part, of y \yn<rU, ” 6*1* T \ ' 
 
 T ■ F art = are invested with (*■*««&«). 15 Plur 
 Say : having been entrusted (Perf. Part.) with the guard. 
 
 f 161. III. The Dative. 
 
 }• The Dative expresses the relation involved in 
 Where, and is therefore used, first , to denote,—(a) 
 the place at or in which an action is performed ;'in 
 prose, however, Prepositions are usually joined with 
 the Dative to express this relation, e. g. l v ft p s L 
 in monte;—{ b) the time when or in which an action is* 
 performed, e. g. ravry T rj 17 fiipq, on this day; 
 T y avTTf vv KT i, the same night; ir o A A o i q g r 8 - 
 criy, many years; in this case also the Preposition 
 in is often used, and always when the Noun is with¬ 
 out an Attributive ; e. g. lv ry vvkti ;—(c) the beinq 
 with, associating, accompanying, especially in the form 
 of (a) the Dat. Sing, of collective Nouns, or the Dat. 
 Plur. of common Nouns, connected with a Verb of 
 going or coming, e. g. ’A Orivaioi ?,\0ov tt A 77 0 £ £ oh,c 
 oXiyty, 7ro A A a t c vavcriv, rrr party, <rrpa- 
 r i Mr a 1 c, &c., the Athenians came with no small 
 number, with many ships, with an army 
 
 &c.; ((3) the Dat. in connexion 
 with the Dat. of mo?, to express the idea, at the 
 same time time with, together with, e. g. 0 i 7 to\Iulol 
 i^UiTroaaav rrjv tt6\lv avroU ro £C i*po £C , 
 
388 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 the enemies burnt the city to gether with the j 
 sanctuaries , sanctuaries and all. 
 
 2. Secondly , the Dat. is used to denote an object, , 
 which participates in and is concerned in the action 
 of the subject. Hence the Dat. is used: 
 
 (a). With expressions of association and union 
 (Dativus communionis );—to this class belong (a) ex¬ 
 pressions denoting intercourse , associating with, mixing 
 with , conversing with , communication , participation , 
 
 ;—(0) expressions indicative of going towards , „ 
 encountering , meeting , approaching , being near to , and 
 their opposites, viz. retiring , yielding , giving way to , 
 &c. ; —( 7 ) expressions of fighting , quarrelling , 
 ingr, contending , vieing with > —(S) expressions of fol¬ 
 lowing, serving , obeying , trusting , accompanying , 
 attending (*) expressions of ordering , counselling , 
 inciting , encouraging. 1 
 
 Examples of words of this class.—{a) the Fer&s 
 fiiyvCvxi, piyvvaSxt, o/xiXt7v, xatf&<r6ai,xoivuvi7v, xoivouv, xoivovvOxi, dixX- 
 Xa rrtffScu, \uoi><r6xt, ff 7 rsvh<T 0 xi, or ToiuaOxi, 
 
 wotxrruv (to treat with). virnrxvucrSxi, £<V£<~v, Xsye/v, dixXtytaBxi, sv££- 
 xaraMai ; also Adjectives and Adverbs and even Nouns, as 
 ffvvrgoQos, avpQwvof, ruyyivris, fttra'irtos and others compounded 
 with and ,C6STa;—(/3) the Ferfrs vvotrrijvxi, vtpjrrxtrBxt, xvxvruv, 
 vvrxvrxv, vvrxvri&Zuv, -riXaZuv, \yytZ,uv, TX»j<r<a?f/v, *<**/», vxuxtg, X u “ 
 pa *; the Adjectives *Xr>(rlos, iwvios; the Adverbs iyyvs, *eX*t 
 (y) the Fer&S £^<^£<», £yavr/ay<r^a<, (Ax%i<r6xi, noXtftuv, OixofiiirBxi^ xyup- 
 ZiffSxi, xu<piir(inruv; the Adjectives vroxiptos, IvapMt, hxtp^os, Wpi » 
 
 _($) the Fer&s xxcXou0t7v, IvrtffOxi, 1 ixHx,i<t6xi [to succeed), *n<rrtvsi*, 
 
 vrt'Mxt, x<ru6uv, vtvroidivxi, vxxxoCuv, rt7v, iovXtCiy ; the 
 
 fives and Adverbs xxoXovSos, xxoXovOus , $ia%o%os, £?»??, t<pt%ys ; (*) the 
 
 Fer&S *gw«rru», tvnrxrruv, vx£xm7v, ^xxtXttkaSxi, avpfavXttan. 
 
 'O pi\zi t oXg ayaOolg a v O p u> tt o i g, a s - 
 
 sociate with good me n.--E v° 0 £ TO ~ L S 
 Qeoig, pray to the god s .—’A iravryv, irXr)- 
 *iaZ*iv,iyytZ*iv Tivt , to meet, approach, 
 eo me near to any one. —M?) aiicerc role 
 TroXe/itoL c, do no* yield to the enemy.— 
 Oi "EXXr/vte icaXwe ijuax^avTO rote hi £ p - 
 
 a ate> the Greeks fought nobly with the Fer- 
 
THE DATIVE. 
 
 389 
 
 § 161.] 
 
 sian s.—01 arpariCoTai a v rj k o v <t t rj a a v ro7g 
 GTparriyoiG, the soldiers disobeyed their 
 commander s. n e iO ov tolq v6poig, obey 
 the laws.—Trj apery aicoXo vOet SJ£ a , 
 glory follows virtue. 
 
 (b). With expressions of likeness and unlikeness, of 
 equality and inequality, of agreement and difference. 
 Under those of equality is included b avrbg, the same. 
 
 * Exa ™P l€S of words of this dass.-'o^om, l^ 0 Zc6 xl , I** £ w 
 
 a 'f uos > 0fi0 T’ '/**&*’ I™, I**, 
 
 */**, and very many words compounded with 
 
 0(d.OV, arm, fAiTX ; e. g. OfAOyXuTTOS , ffvpQuvuv, OfAWVVpoS, &C. 
 
 I 
 
 Of rraiSeg Egtpepeararoi fjaav tm tt ar pi, the 
 
 children were very like their father.—& v Xi- 
 
 opevoi TravregJjarav oi ne pi roy Kupoy ro7 g av r oig 
 r ip Kvpw ott\o ig, all Cyrus' soldiers were pro - 
 vided with the same arms as Cyrus. 
 
 . ( c )\ With, expressions signifying—(«) assent, agree¬ 
 ing with, &c .; (fi) threatening, upbraiding, reproach¬ 
 ing, being angry with, envying ;—(y) helping, being 
 useful to, averting from, and many Verbs compounded 
 with avv expressing these ideas, [some Verbs of this 
 kind, however, take the Acc.; see § 159, 3. (1)];— 
 (3) befitting, becoming, being suitable to, pleasing, 
 and many others, the personal object is put in the 
 Dat. In addition to the Dat. of the person, these • 
 Verbs frequently govern the Acc. of the thing. The 
 -Dat. is also used with Verbs signifying to rejoice at, 
 to be pleased with, and the like: in many cases, how¬ 
 ever, the Dat. with such Verbs may be regarded as 
 the instrumental Dat. (comp. No. 3).—In general, the 
 Dat. is used when the action takes place for the 
 benefit or injury of a person or thing. This is called 
 the Dat. of advantage or disadvantage (Dat. commodi 
 et mcommodi ), and often includes what is termed the 
 
390 THE DATIVE. [CHAP. IIL 
 
 limiting Dat., or the Dat. expressing the relation of 
 to or for. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 Examples of words of this class. —(«) oftovout, IpoXayut ; ta —(/3) ftif*- 
 ftt6a.t (with the Acc. it means to blame), Xolho^urSou, \<nn/xa.v, o^yi- 
 %i<r0ai, \yxxXi7v and It ixaXt7v ( rm n), ani'$tZ ) uv, ivo%Xi7» t 
 
 ivfJkovaOoii, (& ;>i[iovtr§ou, %c&Xs<rxtviiv, %oXouo-l)eii f f6o\n7v and (ixtrxxmiv {to 
 envy) ;—(y) XvtrmXt7v, xgyytiv, (hon<k7v, afjiuvtiv, xXi\u*, i<ru^xi7v, nfxu- 
 I>t7v, i<rixovgt7r, %gxi<r/xt7v, xvroXoyi7<r0xi, crv/xfi^uv, <Tv(A.<r£&rrtiv, cruvtgyt7t ; 
 and Adjectives of similar signification, e. g. x, ‘v*(**s, QlXog, &c., and 
 those of an opposite signification, e. g. (ZXx/Ztgog, &c.($) t gosh- 
 xt/t, rgears/v, oLg/zomH, tixog ten, agtextit J the Adverbs tlxorug, trg i- 
 Totrus, axrgt<rws, &C. 
 
 Ilo<TEtS(ov a (j)6dpa s p s v la iv sv' O 8 v a a si, Posei - 
 don (Neptune) w asvery angry with Odysseus 
 (Ulysses).— ’E irt7rXrjTrto, 6 v s i 8 i % at, s y KaX io 
 (to ( ti, I reproach, charge you with some¬ 
 thing.—Ov T Ol Q ap\£tv (3 o vXo p l V O L g p l p- 
 <pop at, aXXd rolg viraKOveiv sTOLporlpoig 
 o v a iv, I do not reproach those wishing 
 to rule , hut those over-ready to obey. —’H v w- 
 ■%\si 6 OtXt7r7roc rolg ’AOiivaioig, Philip 
 gave trouble to the Athenian s. —<1> 0 o v <5 
 croi, 1 envy the e .—’A p v v Cj, o<sov irep Suvarog 
 eipi, Tip v 6 poy, I will uphold the law , as 
 far as I am able .— Oplcrrrig ^0cXr|<T£ r i p a> p el v 
 irarpi rriv pr\rlpa anoKTsivag, Orestes wished to 
 avenge his father by killing his mother.—' AyiX- 
 Xevc It i pd) pri a e IlaTpd»cX<p Tip sraipip rov 
 tpovov, Achilles avenged the murder of his 
 friend Patroclus .— r H apsTrj ap latest rote 
 ay ad ol g, virtue pleases the g oo d .—EtKorwe 
 (sol %aipov(sivoi AaKt8aipovioi, the Lacedaemo¬ 
 nians are naturally pleased with y o u .—-H § s- 
 isQ a t tlv l, to be pleased with a thing. 
 
 (d). Finally, the Dat. is used to denote the pos¬ 
 sessor with the Verbs slvat, v it a p \ s t v and y [- 
 y vs (s0a i, these Verbs being then translated by the 
 Verb to have , and the Dat. as the Nom.;e.g. Kupy 
 
THE DATIVE. 
 
 391 
 
 § 161 ] 
 
 fj v peyaXrj (3amXEia, Cyrus had a great kingdom* 
 In general the Dat. is used, where an action takes 
 place with regard to, in relation to a person, or an 
 object considered as a person; e. g. 2a>jcparrjc toiov - 
 T(tg ixtv Tiyriz a^iog fiv ry 7T o X e i yaXXov rj Oavarov, 
 Socrates, being such, deserved honour with r eg ar d 
 to the city rather than death. Hence the Dat. is 
 also frequently used with the Perf. Pass., and regu¬ 
 larly with Verbal-adjectives in - riog and -roe, instead 
 of v7ro with the Gen.; e. g. log got 7 rpor£pov tbcbj- 
 Xtorai, as has been before shewn by me. —’Aancijrla 
 tarrt a o t 17 apmj, virtue must be practised by thee. 
 (On the construction with the Verbal-adjective, see 
 § 168 , 1 . 2 ). 
 
 3. Thirdly, the Dat. is used (like the Latin Abla- 
 tivus instrumentalis) to denote the cause, the means 
 and instrument (hence with X9*i°9ai), the manner and 
 way, the measure (by which the action is limited), 
 particularly with Comparatives and Superlatives, con¬ 
 formity (according to, in accordance with ), often also 
 the material. 
 
 Ol 7 ToXtptoi 6 (3 (o a7rrjX9ov, the enemy departed 
 
 through fear (the fear being the cause of the 
 action). — ’AyaXXopai r rj v t k rj, I exult at the vic- 
 t 0 r y. —Srtpyai (aycnrw) rote v tt a p v <r t v 
 ay a9 01 g, I am content with existing bles¬ 
 sings. — 'O(j>0 aX pot Q bpiopEV, wcriv aKOvoptv, 
 we see with our eyes, we hear with our 
 ear s .—t ip a w g a r 1 , I am strong i n 
 bod y. — Oi (TTpaTitorai a v g (p o p a pey aXy 
 aai/To, the soldiers experienced a great misfor¬ 
 tune. — 'kXt^av^pOQ SiSaaKaXtp ^pijcraro ’ Api - 
 ex toteXei, Alexander employed Aristotle as h i s 
 teache r.—Ol 7 roXipioi j3 i g tig rrjv iroXiv EigyEaav, 
 the enemy entered the city by fore e. — Oi ’A 9r)va7oi 
 MiXriaSrpf Ji evrqico vra raAavrotc £?>igi 'waav, 
 
392 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 the Athenians fined Miltiades fifty talents.— 
 *H cry opa fl a p 'ay A i 9 w fioKrjpevri the Agora icas 
 adorned with Parian marble .—II o A A cp, 
 6 A i y w psiZwv, greater by much, by little (the Dat. 
 measuring the degree of difference between the things 
 compared).—T y a A ?j 0 ti $ k pivuv, to judge ac~ 
 cording to truth. 
 
 4. The Dat. of the thing often stands with Verbs, 
 Nouns, and Adjectives, to denote in what respect 
 their signification is to be taken; e. g. virepflaWHv 
 to X py, to excel in or with respect to bold¬ 
 ness; KuSvoc 6 v 6 p a t i, Cydnus byname; ra^ug 
 7 t o <t if swift offoo t. This Dat., however, is often 
 the same as the Dat. of the manner or instrument. 
 
 5. The Dat. stands as the indirect object or com¬ 
 plement of very many Verbs, to denote the relation 
 expressed in English by to or for ; e. g. Sidupi a o i 
 to fifiXtov, I give the book to you; KOpoc axtTtp 
 €t 7 r£v, Cyrus said to him; tyi Xoi irpoge^lpovro 
 i 7 pi v, they behaved to us as friends ; a t par tv pa 
 aweX iytTo K v p cp, an army was collected for Cy¬ 
 rus. 
 
 5. (a). The Dat. is also used as the complement of 
 certain Adjectives, denoting the relation expressed 
 by to or for, e. g. tt a a i SrjXov iyivtroy it became 
 evident to all. 
 
 Obs. Nos. 5 and 5. (a) are virtually included in the preceding 
 paragraphs. 
 
 LXXXVI. 
 
 (Exercise on § 161.) 
 
 1. Cyrus resolved 1 on this day to engage-with the 
 enemy; and after the battle he marched 1 the same 
 day twenty stadia. 2. The Athenians made-an-ex- 
 pedition 2 with thirty ships against the islands of 
 iEolus. 3. When the Persians came ‘with their 
 entire f o r c e 3 , the Athenians dared 4 to encoun* 
 
THE DATIVE. 
 
 393 
 
 § 161.] 
 
 ter 1 them, and conquered them. 4. The Athenians 
 conquered the enemy and took their ships, crews 5 
 and all. ,5. Associate not with bad men, but always 
 cleave-to the good! 6. Thamyris, who-was-distin- 
 
 guished 4 for beauty and minstrelsy, contended 1 with 
 the Muses in 6 music. 7. Human nature is mingled- 
 with a divine energy. 8. The Athenians were-at- 
 war-with the Macedonians. 9. Marsyas, who-vied- 
 with 4 Apollo in 6 music and was conquered 4 , was 
 flayed as? a punishment. 10. Truth discourses with 8 
 boldness, and therefore men are-displeased-with it. 
 11. It is easy to advise 1 another 9 . 12. The general 
 exhorted the soldiers to fight bravely with the 
 enemy. 13. Life resembles a theatre. 14. Most of 
 the Roman women used-to-wear 10 the same shoes as 
 the men. 15. Actions are not always like words. 
 16. Homer compares the race of men^to leaves. 17. 
 The understanding destroyed by wine is in the 
 same c a s e as 11 chariots that-have-lost 12 their cha¬ 
 rioteers. 18. Some object to the laws of Lycurgus, 
 that they are indeed sufficient for ™ producing bra¬ 
 very, but are insufficient for 13 producing justice. 
 
 19. To please the multitude is to displease the wise. 
 
 20 . Esteem as trusty friends those who 14 censure 
 faults. 21. Quails have 15 a pleasant song. 22. 
 Human-destinies 16 have been deplored by many 
 wise 17 men, who-believed 12 that life 18 is a punish¬ 
 ment. 23. The gods rejoice-in the uprightness of 
 men. 24. The bull wounds with the horn, the horse 
 with the hoof, the dog with the mouth, the boar with 
 the tusk. 25. The Thessalians practised 19 lawless¬ 
 ness more than justice. 26. Helen was very 20 dis¬ 
 tinguished by birth as-well-as by her beauty and 
 fame. 27. It is possible neither to use a horse safelv 
 without a bridle, nor riches without consideration. 
 
 l Aor. 9 crrgxrsCsiv. 9 vetprXrifas crrolof. 4 Aor. Part 6 avW. 
 
 8 with Gen. 1 tU. V*™, with Gen. 9 'in^s. '<> = hi i. 
 
 TO avr'o *<x<T%u>, (to suffer the same, to be affected in the same way) 
 
 s 2 
 
394 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [Chap. IIL 
 
 '* Pres. Part. 18 to be sufficient ( insufficient) for = ixetr&t (l 
 l%u* «&, with Acc. 14 § 148, 6. 15 Say : to quails is, &c. 
 
 16 17 Say: many and wise. 18 Acc. with Ini 19 x&<r6cu. 
 
 *° == much. 
 
 § 162. Prepositions. 
 
 1. As tlie Cases denote tlie local relations Whence , 
 Whither and Where, so the Prepositions denote other 
 local relations , which designate the position or exten¬ 
 sion of objects in space, viz. either their juxtaposi¬ 
 tion (BESIDE, BEFORE, BY, AROUND, WITH), Or their 
 
 being locally opposed , (above and below, within 
 and without, before and behind, &c.). 
 
 2. The Case connected with the Preposition shews 
 in which of the three relations before-mentioned— 
 Whence , Whither , Where— the local idea expressed 
 by the Preposition must be considered. 
 
 Thus, e. g. the Preposition * a ^ a denotes merely the local re¬ 
 lation of vicinity, (near or by) ; but in connexion with the Gen., 
 0 ' g t yj x ^ s 5 f a ^ cc tow /Soso’/Xswf, it denotes, moreover, the 
 direction Whence, (he came from near the king, de chez le roi) ; in 
 connexion with the Acc., e. g. ?,n -rct^ot t»* (iatriXea, the 
 direction Whither, (he went into the vicinity or presence of the king) ; 
 and in connexion with the Dat., e. g. ‘i <r r y> t a g a v<2 (& at nXt7, 
 the position Where, (he stood beside the king). 
 
 3. The Prepositions are divided according to their 
 construction:— 
 
 (a) . Into Prepositions with the Gen.: dim, airo, 
 
 Ik, 7rpo, eve*a; 
 
 (b) . _ — with the Dat.: iv and ow; 
 
 (c) . — — with the Acc.: dva, ac, 
 
 (d) . _ — with the Gen. and Acc.: &d, 
 
 Kara, virep', 
 
 (e) . — — with the Gen., Dat. and Acc: 
 
 aytyL t rspi, h n, jutra, 7rapa, npog and viro. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 1(53.] 
 
 395 
 
 4. The local relation expressed by Prepositions is 
 transferred to the relations of time d?hd causality 
 (i cause, effect, &c.); e. g. vtvo tt\q y rj g uvai, to be 
 under the earth, and b tt o 0d/3ov (bsvystv, 
 toffee through (=u?ider) fear; i K r 9} g tto- 
 A€w C aireXOuv, to depart out of the city, and 
 c 5 vpip a g cnreXOuv, to depart immediately 
 afte r daybreak . 
 
 A. Prepositions with one Case. 
 
 § 163. I. Prepositions with the Gen. alone. 
 
 1 . 'A vr t , (Lat. ante), primary meaning, over 
 against, before, opposite; then, for, in¬ 
 stead of, in the place of, e. g. arrival avri 
 rivog, to stand before on e;~8ovXog a vr\ /3 aai- 
 X& oj g, a slave instead of king ;—ft v r \ f) /* e gag 
 
 iyevETo, in place of day it was night ;—« v 0’ 
 
 ov, a v 6'wv, wherefore, because, (lit. for 
 which). J 
 
 2. n po, ( pro, prce), before, for , very nearly 
 agrees with avri in all its relations, but is used in a 
 much greater variety of relations; e. g. ar^vai tv pb 
 ttvXwv, to stand before the gates ;—tt p 6 
 V yip a g, before day, (avri is not used of time) ; 
 — t*a\Eodai, cnroOavEiv tv p 6 t rj g ir a r p i So g, to 
 fight, to die f or one's country ; — 8ovXog irpo 
 Ssairorov, a slave instead of master ;— 
 TV po T w vS £, wherefore , (lit. for these things). 
 
 3. ’A 7r 6, (ah), primary meaning, fr o m, e. g. 
 arr b r ri g tv o X e to g i)XdEv, lie came from the 
 city ;—of time: from, since, after , e. g. 
 airo 8 e i ir v o v lya^EcravTO, they fought after 
 dinner ; — uvai, yiyvtaOai air 6 t iv o g, to be de¬ 
 scended fro m some one ~o a ir o r oj v tt o X e- 
 
396 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 fiiojv (pofiog, fear of (=from) th e enemy, (like 
 metus ab aliquo) ;—of the means : fr om, by, w i th, 
 e. g. ToicpeLv to vavriKOv a 7r b TrpogoSwv, to sup¬ 
 port the fleet by revenues ;—a tt 6 r i v o g KaXet- 
 <rOai, to be called afte r someone. 
 
 4. ’Ek, l£, (««), primary meaning, out of, 
 e. g. £ fc rrjg 7r o X £ o) ? cnrrfXQev, he departed out 
 of the city ;—of time immediately following: 
 after,e.g.£Z h p i p a g, ex quo dies illuxit, after 
 or as s oo n as it was day ; Ik tt a l S w v, from 
 childhood / £ % a i 0 p i a g re kcu v rj v s pi a c 
 ovveSpapev £Zcnrivi]g vltyr), after the clear and 
 calm weather clouds suddenly collected .— r O <xoe r ra- 
 Trip £v TijSt rfi yia hi utpq £% a (J) p o v o g aw([>pu>v ytyi- 
 vrjrai, your father in this one day fr om a foolish 
 man has become discreet. —E Ivcu, yiyveoOai ei c n- 
 v o c , to be descended fr om some one;—a c- 
 cording to, by virtue of, after or from , 
 e. g. £ k Trig oipewp tov oveipov, according 
 to the appearance of the dream.—’OvopaZtodat 
 e k t l v o g, to be named af ter ot from some one. 
 
 5. "E v a k a (placed before or after the Gen.), on 
 account of,for the sake of, with respect 
 t o ;—b y virtue of. 
 
 Obs. Some Adverbs and oblique cases of Nouns are also very 
 often used as Prepositions, and are therefore called Improper Pre¬ 
 positions (§ 157, et seqq.) ; e. g. or £ o it 6 %» and «^ a <r 0 e v, be¬ 
 fore, o v nr 6 e v, behind, avtv and x u Z * ?, without, vr xi) *, 
 except, pir a.\v, between, p s % g i, until, (usually 
 
 placed after the Gen.), gratis, for the sake of Instead of 
 the Gen. of the personal-Pronouns, regularly takes the pos- 
 sesswe-Pronouns agreeing with it in Gender, Number and Case; 
 e. g. t p b v, ah* x&ziv, med, tud gr at id. 
 
 LXXXYII. 
 
 (Exercise on § 163.) 
 
 1. No-one would 1 take 2 a blind guide instead-of 
 one who could see 3 . 2. It is beautiful to 
 
prepositions. 
 
 397 
 
 § 163.] 
 
 exchange 4 a mortal body for immortal fame. 3. 
 Those who have-made- proficiency 2 in 9 
 philosophy become free instead-of slaves, truly rich 
 mstead-of poor, rational* instead-of unintelligent 
 andstupid. _ 4. Before action deliberate (sing.) 1 5. A 
 
 ( T t h 8 e 2 l nend 0f i e ?, does for his (=the) friend 
 
 what 8 he does not do 2 for himself. 
 
 Sardif Ph 7 eS Tl 1 1S ’w 1S l t i ant & three f W s ’ journey from 
 d ?' . I ^. h / 9 H . elle . s P° nt was named from Helle, 
 
 «M,r!u«' 1Cr ’i] ff * n ,L , When Socrates pre- 
 ted small offerings from his small means , he be¬ 
 lieved to be no less meritorious 
 
 an those who 5 from their many and great means 
 offer many and great offerings. 9. Socrates lived 
 very-contentedly 2 on very-little property. 10. We 
 may not judge the best men by 13 their exterior 14 , but 
 by their morals. 11. It is easier to make 15 evil out- 
 
 °/ g00 . d t l h f a \ ?0 u° d ° U , t '°( eviL 12 ‘ The character 
 shews-itself chiefly in 18 the actions. 13. From the 
 
 ™ 1 know the tree. 14. After the war came 1 * 
 peace 15. Men plot-agamst each-other for-the-sake- 
 or gold, iame 8 and pleasures. 
 
 16. Semiramis reigned until old-age over the As- 
 Syrians. 17. A beautiful action is not performed'* 
 without virtue. 18. The gods bestow-upon men no- 
 hinggood and beautiful 18 without labour and care. 
 19. lempe lies between Olympus and Ossa. 20 
 Oonceal (smg.J good-fortune on-account-of envy 19 i 
 X have written the letter for jour sake. 
 
 1 § 153, 2. c. 2 Aor. 3 = a seeing one. 4 Aor. Mid 6 8 uq o 
 
 to"fall short Of) 12 fc ’> art. of tra ou t^uovadoti [lit. )l0 t 
 
 r£L 15 Aor. of 
 
 envy. I8 Gen.Plur. la i. e. lest it excite 
 
398 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 § 164. 2. Prepositions with the Dat. alone. 
 
 1. ’Ev (Lat. in with Abl.) denotes that one thing 
 is in, on, at, by or n e ar another ; it indicates 
 an actual union or contact of the two objects spoken 
 of, and hence is the opposite of tic, e. g. I v v r\o q>, 
 in the island, iv y y, by land, l v 2 tt a p r y, 
 at Sparta ;— e v ottAoj c, i v r 6 So i g Sia - 
 ywiZtoOai, to fight in arms, equipped ic ith 
 bows and arrows', e v it p o p a \ o l g, among 
 the foremost warriors, ev rz 0 e oT g teal 
 avOptoTroig, among gods and m e n. Hence, 
 before { coram); — on, upon , e.g. ev opzaiv, 
 on th e mountains, zvlrriroig, o n K o r s e- 
 back , ev 0 p 6 v o i g, on the throne >—a t % 
 by, near, (especially with the names of cities, and 
 particularly in descriptions of battles ); e. g. n e v 
 MavnvEta ^ ie battle at or near Man• 
 
 tine i a .— Of time, e. g. ev r o v r r %p 6 v tp, 
 in or within this time, lv a5, while or 
 during the time that, tv tt t v r e n £ p a i g, 
 within five days .— Of the means and instru¬ 
 ment with the expressions 3 ij A o v v, S ij A o v el va i, 
 <t Tj/uQtveiv e v t iv i, t o shew by some - 
 thing; e. g. ort ot fhoi <te eXew te k«i Evpzvzig nip- 
 7 rovcri, Ka\ e v i £ p o i g 3 ij \ 6 v i o t i k«i ev ovpcivi- 
 o ig oYipzioig, it is evident b oth by th e 
 victims and the signs from heaven 
 that the gods conduct thee propitiously and graciously . 
 
 Obs. 1. With several Verbs of motion, the Greeks often use \* 
 with the Dat., instead of us with the Acc. ; e. g. nOtvca, xxTanfitvtti, 
 iiardivca (to consecrate to), and the like. 
 
 2. 2 v v (£ v v occurs mostly in old Attic). The 
 primary meaning of ovv corresponds almost entirely 
 with the Latin cum and the English with, e. g. 6 
 orparriyog ovv r oi g orpariwraic, the general 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 399 
 
 § 165.] 
 
 uu<4 the soldiers;- —of help, e. g . „ 5 v 0 {e j 
 
 V th help of G- o d ;• of manner, e.*g. <t if v 
 
 . “ * * j avv fig *otuv rt, to do anything with 
 speed, with violence. y 
 
 Obs 
 with , 
 
 
 § 165. 3. Prepositions with the Acc. alone. 
 
 j^tER3£& z m 3J 
 
 lower to a higher place; e. g. 4 „a T (, v w or { u 6 „ 
 
 av a poor uXuy, to sail up the river uv 
 ! ! : e T (°PP°? d K ar a it o r a p d v, do wn 
 sion in Ti« m ' A " a USU , ally serves t0 denote exten- 
 fZZ T “ E " SPACE> from below upwards, 
 thlT \°. ttom , 0 throughout 
 
 out Crp 3 e * “ v “ J * v f E A A a S «, through - 
 *«< Greece.—ava (per) r ft „ * 6 Xtuo V ro 5 - 
 
 r A l’ d h T ' * 9 * \*7 Si, nilarly, 4 „ 4 
 
 y»0 Wffy, through the whole day 
 ava IT av TO ero e , during the whole year- 
 ence, without the Article, 4v4 tr5<x«„ h/ipav, 
 
 dailypearly' kJ” 9 ’ ‘ V ‘ r * f”' 
 
 , J* yearty, ava vuicra, per noctem, ava 
 
 ^ ir^- Also to deno ‘? 
 
 one's might, vigorously ,‘ a\T„°£„*‘f£ 
 
 « »•«._Also in a distributive sense with^Numerals- 
 
 ,rE, ' T£ ^poMyyac ryg hulpac, five 
 
 parasangs daily -Also with definite eZreliZZ 
 of Number, l lk e the English a 5 4* (L.^ 
 
400 prepositions. [Chap. III. 
 
 « • * 
 
 e. g. a v a SiaKoata <r r a S i a f about two 
 
 hundred stadia. . 
 
 2. E i q (ec> old Attic) corresponds almost entirely 
 
 with the Lat. in with the Acc.,and the Eng. into ; 
 e. g. liven 1 l q t rj v tt 6 A t v, to go into the city. - 
 In a hostile sense : contra, e. g. lorpaTivaav 
 Etc rhv ’Arrmjv, they marched into or 
 against Attic a .—With Numerals: to, or 
 
 about , e. g. v a v g Etc rac r e r p a k o a f a c» 
 about four hundred ships .—In a distribu¬ 
 tive sense with definite expressions of number ; e.^ g. 
 Etc I k a r o v, centeni, by h u n d r e d s, e l q $ v o, 
 bini, tic o by two, two deep .—In the. sense 
 of coram, in the presence of but with the 
 collateral idea of the direction whither; e. g. Ad- 
 , youc TTouioOai Etc t 6 v 3 if /x o v, to make a 
 speech t o or b efo re the p eo p le.—~ Of time : 
 until , towards , /or, Etc e <t 7r e p a v, £ o - 
 wards evening , Etc nv v a r e p a t a v, / o r 
 the following day , Etc rpiriiv $ p i p a v, 
 against the third da y .—To denote purpose, 
 OBJECT or REFERENCE; e.g. ixpnaaTO rote XQ^pnoiv E t C 
 T»jv TroXtv, lie used the money for the city; 
 Etc K e' p 8 o C rt Spa V, to do something for gain: 
 SicKpipEiv tiv'oq Etc a p £ t rj v, to excel some one in 
 ov with respect to virtue; Etc iravra, 
 in every respect. 
 
 3. '12 c» (ad), < o, is used only with persons, or ob¬ 
 jects considered as persons , to denote direction to¬ 
 wards them; e. g. Uvai, Tripirtiv wc (3 aer i\ i a, to 
 po, to send £ o £ A o king ; giaiv w c r A y M t A tj - 
 r o y, to comg £ o Miletus (i. e. to the Milesians). 
 
 LXXXYIII. 
 
 (Exercise on §§ 164, 165.) 
 
 1. He is best who 1 is nurtured amid the great¬ 
 est necessities 2 . 2. Diogenes said: “ A friend 
 
 | 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 401 
 
 § 166.] 
 
 is one soul dwelling 3 in two bodies”. 3. My sons, 
 do not lay 4 my body either in gold or in silver, but 
 restore itasquicklyas possible to the earth! 
 4. The Grecian armament conquered the barbarians 
 at Salamis. 5. With the help of the gods let us go 
 against the unjust! 6. The acquisition of trusty 
 friends is by-no-means 5 made by 6 violence, but rather 
 by 6 beneficence. 7. At daybreak 7 the soldiers 
 marched-out. 8. The Karduchi dwell on the moun¬ 
 tains and are warlike. 9. The vessels could not sail 
 up the river. 10. The deeds of Alcibiades were 
 celebrated throughout all Greece. 11. During the 
 whole war there was the greatest harmony amon^ 
 the generals. 12. The three daughters of Phorkys] 
 having but one eye, used it in turn 8 . 13. The 
 enemy pressed into the middle of the city. 14. 
 Apollo was sent 9 out-of heaven to the earth. 15. 
 Time, revealing everything, brings it to the light. 
 16* The Athenians performed 10 many (and) noble 
 actions before all men, both indivicluallyand 
 publicly 11 . 17. The Lacedsemonians made-an- 
 expedition against Attica. 18. Expend (sing.) the 
 leisure of 12 life in listening-to 13 beautiful discourses ! 
 19. God brings like 14 to like 14 . 20. Agesilaus sent 
 ambassadors to the king of the Persians. 
 
 x oar is. 2 to. ava.yxai6ra.ra. 3 =lying. 4 Aor. Subj. (§ 153, Obs. 3). 
 
 6 gfiafuZf. 6 = with. 7 Trans : together-with the day. 8 h uepti 
 ® Aor. 10 Aor. of aarotyatviaDat. ** xa) i$la xai 'Srjicoaia. X3 — 
 
 13 Inf. 14 Sing. Masc. 4 4 
 
 § 166. B. Prepositions with the Gen. and Acc. 
 
 1. A i a. [Primary meaning, through ].—A. With 
 the Genitive : through and out again , out 
 through , e. g. l^rjXavvs tov arparov S id r fj q 
 OpqicriQ £7rt rrjv 'EAAaSa, he marched his army 
 
V. / 
 
 402 prepositions. [Chap. III. 
 
 through Thrace against Greece;—through 
 ( =across ), e. g. S i a ir e 8 i o v, p e T campum;ota 
 TroXegiag noptveaOaiy to march thr ou g h a hos¬ 
 tile country .—Of time, to denote the lapse of a 
 certain period .* through , af ter; properly, to the^ 
 end of the period , through and out , e. g. Si 
 £touc» through the year; Sia i roXXov, 
 p a k p oi>, oXiyov xpovov, after ( through ) 
 a long , a short time; Sia iravrog rov 
 Xpovov roiavra ovk iyivero, during the wh ole 
 time such things did not take place .—So also of an 
 action repeated at definite intervals , e. g. Si a rp(- 
 rov btovq (jvvytaav, they assembled every three 
 years , quarto ‘ quoque anno, always after 
 three years; Sia itipirTov £to«c, 8io 
 tt svt e crwv, sexto quoque anno; Si a rpirni 
 rj fie pa e> every third da y .—To denote ^ the 
 agent and the means, e. g. § i i pavr ov ravra Ikttj- 
 oapr\v, through my self I acquired these things , 
 Si 6<t>0aXpuv opqv, to see thr o u g h or with 
 the eyes ;—the manner and way, e. g. Sia <nrov- 
 S ij c, with earnestness , earnestly; S t a 
 r a x° v £■> with s p e e d y s p e e dil y . B. "V^ith the 
 Accusative, to denote time, e, g. Sia vv Kray per 
 nocte m.—To denote the cause or the means, e. g. 
 ha rovroy ravra , thereforey on account 
 of this; Sia (3 o v X a c, by means of coun¬ 
 sels; Sia privivy through or by means of 
 w rath. 
 
 2. K ar d. [Primary meaning, from abov e down 
 (desuper)].— A. With the Genitive, e. g. Ippinrow 
 iavrovg Kara rov relx ov C Kara), they threw 
 themselves down from the w all;—d own into , 
 e. g. KaraSeSvictvai Kara rrjc 0 a X a r r r/ c, to go 
 down into the sea ;—u n d e r, e. g. ie a r ay n C> 
 under the eart h .— To denote the cause or the oc¬ 
 casion*. de, concerning f about , e. g. Xiyuv Kara 
 rivoc, dicere de aliqua re, to speak about some- 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 403 
 
 § 106.} 
 
 thing; especially in a hostile sense, e. g. Aly blv tear a 
 r I vo g, to speak against one, xptvSeoQai Kara 
 tov 0 a o it, to lie against Go d. —B. With the 
 Accusative, Kara forms a strong contrast to ava 
 with respect to the point where the motion begins , 
 but agrees with ava in denoting the direction to an 
 object and the extension over it, the former meaning 
 down through , the latter up through. The use of ava 
 in prose is not so frequent as that of Kara .—To de¬ 
 note local extension from above downwards -.through¬ 
 out, through , over, e. g. k a O' 'E A X a l a, 
 throughout Greece, Kara tt a a a v r rj v 
 ifi v, throughout all the land; it often 
 signifies over against, opposite to, (e re- 
 gione), e. g. KEirai rj Kc^aAAjjida Kara ’A k a p i/ a- 
 v lav, Cephallenia lies opposite A c arnani a. 
 —Of time, to denote its extension or duration: 
 during, through, e. g. Kara rov avrov 
 Xpovov, during the same time; Kara 
 rov t rporepov 7r o A s p o v, d u r in g t h e fo r- 
 mer w a r .—To denote object or intention, e. g. 
 Kara 9 e a v rjicsiv, spectatum venisse ; 
 conformity (secundum) or relation, e. g. Kara 
 v op ov, according to law ; Kara A o y ov, 
 ad rationem, pro ration e, conforma - 
 ble to reason; Kara y v w /u r] v r rjv l p r\ v, 
 in accordance with my judgment; Kara 
 r ov to, hoc respect u, hence, propter hoc; 
 Kara <j> v a iv, secundum naturam; Kara 
 Sv v a /i i v, to the best of ones power; 
 Kara kq ar og, with all one's might,by force; 
 Kara piKpov, nearly, by degrees; Kar’ 
 avOpcoirov, according to the manner 
 or standard of man .—To denote an indefinite 
 quantity, Q. g. k a O' ££ rj k o v r a 8 r x\, about 
 sixty years .—To denote manner and way, e. g. 
 Kara ra\oq , swiftly, Kara avvrv^iav, 
 casu, by chance .—In a distributive sense, e. g. 
 
404 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 Karo tcwfiag, vicatim, by villages , Kara 
 fiijva, m ontlily, k a O' rifiipav, daily , icar 
 trog, yearly , k a O' Itt t a, septeni, by 
 sevens. 
 
 3. 'Y 7 rIp, (super), over, above . A. With 
 the Genitive, e. g. vi rfp over the earth. 
 
 To denote the cause: for, for the sake of in 
 behalf of e. g. fiax^Oai virlp t ri g irar p i - 
 So g, to fight for on e's country , (to fight, as it 
 were, standing over it); 6 v 7r £ p rr\g 'E A A a S o c* 
 Oavarog, death in behalf of G r e e c e. \B.^"With 
 the Accusative : over, b e y on d, e. g. piirreiv 
 vTTEp TOV Sofiov, to throw over the house; 
 v 7 r e p 'E \ \ rj g 7r o v r o v oikuv, to live beyond 
 (i. e. on the opposite side of) the H e lie s p on t ; 
 i)TT£p rrjv i 7 A t k t a v, over age , v tt s p Svva- 
 liiv, beyond ones power, v 7r e p a vO p (o- 
 t rov, beyond th e n atur e or s tr eng th o f 
 man, vtt £p ra rerrapaicovTa arrj, over 
 forty years. 
 
 LXXXIX. 
 
 (Exercise on § 166.) 
 
 1. There is a middle path that leads neither 
 through dominion nor through slavery, but through 
 freedom. 2. Socrates throughout his whole life taught 
 men wisdom. 3. Osiris is said to have made 1 his (=the) 
 march from Egypt through Arabia to the Red Sea. 
 4. The river Euphrates flows through the middle of 
 Babylon. 5.The presidents of the cities come-together 
 every three years. 6. Those who 2 learn every¬ 
 thing by themselves are called self-taught. 7. 
 Apollo benefited the race of men by oracles and 
 other services. 8. He who 2 is-indolent 3 for-the-sake- 
 of pleasure, may 4 verv-soon be deprived 5 of the 
 charm of inactivity, for-the-sake-of which he is-in- 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 405 
 
 § 166.] 
 
 dolent. 9. Praise (sing.) not a worthless man be- 
 cause-of his wealth! 
 
 10. Some rivers sink 6 into the earth and flow 7 a- 
 long-way 8 , concealed under the earth. 11. The is¬ 
 land Atlantis sank 9 under the sea and disappeared? 
 12. He who 2 contrives a snare against another 
 turns 10 it often against himself. 13. During the 
 sacred war, great 11 disorder and dissension* pre¬ 
 vailed 12 over all Greece. 14. Do not impose-upon 
 (sing.) others a greater task than their abili¬ 
 ties p e r m i t 13 . 15. It-is-necessary that men 14 live 
 according-to laws. 16. The city was-in-danger of- 
 being-taken 15 by force. 17. A bad man who-obtains 9 
 power is not wont 16 to bear good fortune as man 
 ought 17 . 18. The Athenians sent annually to 
 
 Crete seven boys and seven girls as food 18 for the*Mi- 
 notaur. 19. God gave us the powers by which we 
 are-to-bear 19 all the events of fortune. 
 
 _ 20- The sun passes over the earth. 21. Over the 
 city is a hill. 22. Arsames governed the Arabians and 
 -Ethiopians dwelling beyond Egypt. 23. Alcestis, the 
 daughter of Pelias, was willing 5 to die 5 for her hus¬ 
 band. 24. It is very-dishonourable to shun 5 death 
 for one’s (=the) country. 25. Clearchus waged-war- 
 with the Thracians dwelling beyond the Hellespont. 
 26. It is madness to attempt to do anything beyond 
 one's power. 27. Numa Pompilius, the most fortu¬ 
 nate of the Roman kings, is said to have lived above 
 eighty years. 
 
 'Aor. Mid. 2 § 143, 6. 34 § 153,2.c. 3 Aor. 8 « a r*. 
 Kiadxi. 7 — are borne. 8 9 Aor. Part. 10 *n* t roi*uv. 
 
 11 = much. 12 =were 13 Say : than according-to ability. 14 Acc. 
 with Inf. 15 = Aor. Inf. 16 to be wont = uuiimu 17 * a V &lOpurtv. 
 
 18 Acc. 19 Put. 
 
 I 
 
406 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 
 § 167. C. Prepositions with the Gen., Dat. and Acc. 
 
 1. ’A n 0 1 denotes, in general , that one thing is 
 about or around (on two sides only), near or 
 close t o another. A. With the Genitive, ^seldom 
 used of place, e. g. ajufi rfjc 7rdX*wc ohcsiv, to 
 dwell around the city .—Of cause a b o u t, 
 for, for the sake of, e. g./uax^Oai ap<pt Ti¬ 
 ts o c, to fight about or for s o met hi ng. B. 
 With the Dative, as with the Gen.—C. With the 
 Accusative, e. g. a g ({> t r i) v no X i v, r ou nd the 
 c { t y. —To denote ttme and number indefinitely, 
 e. g. a fi (j> \ i cr 7 r s g a v, about evening , aptyi 
 roue gvgiovq, about ten thousand. 
 
 2 n c p i signifies a 11 around, round about 
 (in a circle), in this respect differing from 
 au(pt, which signifies properly on two sides 
 only. A. With the Genitive. —In a 1 o c a 1 relation 
 it is not used in prose, but very frequently in a c au s al 
 sense: concerning, for, a b out, o n account 
 of, e.g- yaygvOat, cnroOaveiv 7r £ g i r f? c 7r a r p i- 
 § O C, to fight, to die for ones country, \iyuv 
 7T eg l r iv o c, to speak about something , <po- 
 QtXaOai tv £ g \ tt urpt'Soc, to fear for one's 
 country ;—to denote value or estimation, m tae 
 phrases n £ gl 7 r o X X o u, tt £ g 1 tt X £ 1 o v o c» tt £ g l 
 
 ir \ £ l (T T O V, 7T £ p l oXiyOV, 7T£pi O V S £ V O C 
 
 TTouiaOat or hyuaOat n, to value or regard anything 
 highly,more highly, v ery highly, little, 
 in no wise.— B. With the Dative: around, 
 about, on, at, near, e.g. Trepi raig k c^aXai? 
 uxov Tiagag, they had tiaras ab out or on their 
 heads, 7 r e p 1 ry X^* 0 ” 1 ' SoktuXiov £</>£- 
 
 gov, they wore a gold ring on the hand ;—m a 
 causal sense: about, for, on account of, 
 e.g. SeSiivai 7T£gt rivi, to fear for or about 
 one.—C. With the Accusative: about, m and 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 407 
 
 § 167.] 
 
 around , at, near , throughout, e. g. oJkouv 
 tfcwWc 7T6 p t tt a era v rijv ZtKeXiav, (per 
 totam Siciliam), the Phoenicians dwelt throughout 
 all Sicily. To denote time and number inde¬ 
 finitely, e. g. 
 
 7T£pt rovrouf roug Ypo- 
 vouc, times, tt e p i pvpioxjg 
 
 <tt par iwr a g, about ten thousand sol¬ 
 dier s. — In a causal sense : with reference 
 to, with respect to, towards,about,z,g. 
 <ru>$povEiv 7rep! rovg 0 to be, to be of sober mind 
 with respect to the g ods. 
 
 A si > ifies P rimar % upon, on, at, near. 
 
 A. With the Genitive, e. g. h x 0 n oi plv ZvEptg i tt i 
 tgjv k e <j) a \ g) v (popovaiv, ai 8 e yvvcuKeg i tt i r w v 
 wguv, the men carry burdens on their heads, 
 thewomenon their shoulder s; piv £lv 4 tt e rijj 
 £7rt Thy y vwp rig, to remain in the 
 government, in ones opinion; ot £ 7 ri 
 rwi / tt p ay par w v, those over affairs (i. e. 
 at the head of public affairs)towards, if it is 
 intended to express that a person is striving to reach 
 a place, [according to § 158, 3. (b)], e. g. TrAfTv ettI 
 a p o v, to be sailing towards S a m o s .— In 
 a temporal relation, to denote the time in or 
 during which something takes place, e. g. I tt i K v - 
 pov (3 a <j i\ ev o v t o g, during, in or under 
 the reign of Cyrus .— To denote the occa¬ 
 sion or the author, e. g. KaXeiaOai e tt i nvog, 
 to be called af ter some one; conformity to, 
 e -g. Kpiveiv ti £7 rt rivog, to judge a thing ac¬ 
 cording t o s o m e thin g. —B. With the Dative : 
 upon, at, by, e. g. IttI roig 8 6 p a a i poiag 
 £i\°v X pvcrag, they had golden pomegranates upon 
 their spears; oikeiv etti OaXaTrp, to dwell 
 by the sea, upon the sea-coast .— To de¬ 
 note dependence, e. g. £ 7r / tivi tivai , penes ali- 
 quem esse, to be in the power of any one, 
 yiyveodai £ tt i tiv t, to come into the power 
 
408 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 / 
 
 [Chap. Ill. 
 
 of any one ; —condition, purpose, destina¬ 
 tion, object, e. g. £7rt r o v t <£>, hac condi- 
 tione, on this condition ; in] hv- 
 
 Opo'jnov oiSripoc avevpvTai , (in perniciem homi- 
 nis), iron was discovered for the destruction 
 of man; —the ground or cause, e. g. 
 
 Int tivi , to rejoice at something ; Qavgal>uv 
 riva ini tivi, to admire a person for some- 
 t j L i n g.—C. With the Accusative, up o n, up, o n, 
 over , towards (different from ini with the Gen., 
 since with the Acc. merely direction to a place is e 
 noted), t o, e. g. avajdaiveiv i i n n o v , to go up 
 o n (to mount) a hors e. — Of time : until, 
 
 e. g. i^ ianipav, until evening for, 
 
 during , (per), 1 7r i no Wag rip£p a G* J or 
 many 'days.— To denote purpose or object, 
 e. g. i nl 0 rj p a v Uvai , venatum ire, to go to 
 hunt;— in a hostile sense: against, e. g. 
 arpaTEfaaOai ini U ipaag, to make an expedition 
 against the Persians. 
 
 XC. 
 
 (Exercise on § 167, 1. 2. 3.) 
 
 1. The poets have uttered such words about the 
 gods themselves as no-one would 1 dare 2 to utter 
 about his (=the) enemies. 2. Consider first how 3 the 
 adviser has managed 2 his own affairs; for he who 4 has 
 not 5 reflected 2 upon his own 6 concerns will never de¬ 
 cide well upon another’s. 3. Carthage waged~war- 
 with Rome for Sicily twenty-four years. 4. All men 
 value their (=the) kindred more than strangers. 
 5. Justly dost thou esteem the soul more 
 h i g h 1 v7 than the body. 6 . Gyges found a corpse 
 which had on the hand a golden ring. 7.. Some. ot 
 the Persians had both necklaces about their (=the) 
 necks and bracelets about the hands. 8 . Phe motion 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 §107] 
 
 4C9 
 
 of the earth around the sun makes the year 8 , hut the 
 motion of the moon around the earth, the months 
 9. According-to-law the Spartan boyS 9 were scourged 
 going-round the altar of Orthia. 10. Be 10 suclTto- 
 wards thy parents as 11 thou wouldst 1 wish 2 thy 
 children to be towards thyself. 11. No human plea¬ 
 sure seems to lie 12 closer-at-hand 13 than joy about 
 honours. 12. The enemy, despairing-of 2 their cause* 4 , 
 about 15 midnight abandoned the city. 13. There 
 are said to be about 120,000 Persians. 
 
 14. Each of the Cyclopes had one eye in the fore¬ 
 head. 15. In Egypt the men carry burdens on their 
 (=the) heads, but the women on the shoulders. 16. 
 The soldiers returned homewards. 17. After 16 the 
 battle Croesus fled to Sardis. 18. Under Cecrops 
 and the first kings, until 17 Theseus, Attica was always 
 inhabited in cities 18 . 19. All the children of 
 the noblest Persians were educated at the court 19 of 
 the king. 20. Strive not after t hat which is 20 
 not 5 i n thy power ! 21. Macedonia was in- 
 
 the-power-o.f the Athenians and brought tri¬ 
 bute. 22. Dost thou consider that which hap¬ 
 pens 21 for thy advantage as the work 22 of chance 
 or of intelligence? 23. For epic poetry we most 
 admire Homer, for tragedy, Sophocles, for statuarv, 
 Polycleitus, Tor painting, Zeuxis. 24. Wb-ought 23 
 not to be-displeased-atgood-fortune of others, but 
 rejoice for-the-sake-of 24 our (=the) common-origin. 
 25. The Nile flows 25 from south to north. 26. 
 Xerxes having collected 2 an innumerable army 
 marched against Greece. 27. Socrates not only ex¬ 
 horted 2 men to virtue, but also led 2 them onward 26 to 
 it. 28. Zeus (Jupiter) permitted 27 Sarpedon, the king * 
 of the Lycians, to live for three generations. 
 
 *§153, 2. c. 3 Aor. 3 «W 4 §148, 6. 6 ’<% es . 7 to es - 
 
 teem more highly z= <rtg} ptiifyvog nyutrdui. 8 tviuvr6$, 9 Say: the boys 
 Of the Spartans. 10 ytytrOcc,. u ohs. 12 13 With 
 
 Gen. 14 r« T^yfAxrtt. 13 ipQ /. 16 with ^ cc l7 ^ J3 
 
410 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [Chap. IIL 
 
 vckus. 19 ml efyau 20 Trans, by the Art. and Part. 31 ra y ry»«>s»<*. 
 22 Plur. 23 xtf- 24 $'«• 2i =is borne. 26 to lead onward — 
 yup. 27 Aor. of S*o6*cu. 
 
 4. Mara (derived from ptoog), with , denotes 
 the being in the midst of something. A. With 
 the Genitive, to denote association, connexion, 
 and community of an internal and intimate 
 nature; e.g. M €V av0pw7rwv elvat,to be among 
 men . Elya* p £ r a tiv o g, cum aliquo stare, to 
 be to i th or on the side of on e. 'Ypiv ol 
 irpoyovoi tovto to yipag tKTr)<javro icnt KtmAiTrov p er a 
 7 r o A A (l> v teal n t y a \ to v k i v S v v w v, your an¬ 
 cestors acquired this distinction for you with many 
 and great dangers, and bequeathed it to 
 y OU . —to denote conformity to, ju era t w v v a - 
 fjio v, according to the law s, per a r o 5 
 \ 6 y o v, in c o nf or mi ty with r e as o n. —B. 
 With the Dative (found only in poetry) '.among, 
 in the midst of, e. g. per' aOavaroig, 
 among the immortals. —C. With the Ac¬ 
 cusative, in prose it is used almost exclusively 
 to denote that one thing succeeds another in 
 space, time, or order: after , e. g. £tt€- 
 aQa i fi tT a t iv a, to follow after some o n e i 
 per a t o v fitov, after li fe ; iroTapog ply lot og 
 per a ,f l or gov, the greatest river after the 
 1st er; and in the phrase per a \eigag €\ av ri > 
 to hold something between or in the hands. 
 
 5. n a p d indicates being near something: by, 
 near, by the side of A. With the Genitive, 
 to denote a removal from near, from beside a per¬ 
 son : fro m, e. g. sA Ouv tt a g a t i v o g, to come 
 fr om some one (like the French, d e eh e z 
 quelqu ’un ).—To denote the author, e. g. Trep<p6v’cu 
 t t a p a t i v o g, to be sent by some one (§ 150. 
 Ohs 3): ayysXot, 7rpioj3£ig & a p a rivog t envoys 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 411 
 
 $ 167.] 
 
 from any one; ayylXXvv irapl T ,voc to 
 bear a message} r o m any one,-Tin-apt nvo c 
 the commissions, commands, &c., of any one;— 
 pavOavuv napd rivo c , to learn from some 
 
 o ne ’ 7 will P ar t v o q, to hear from some 
 one.— B. With the Dative, to denote rest near 
 a placeor object e. g. Ur n „ apt r ,X Baa, XeT 
 hestood beside the king.— C. With the Accu- 
 SATtVE, to denote direction or motion so as to come 
 to the side of, to or near a person or 
 
 r 'rZ\ e ' g - a ^' K . tof,a . 1 7r °P“ K P O ? <7 O V, to come t o 
 Or os sus, direction or motion by the side of 
 
 or past a place: along, near, by, beyond. 
 
 Tf j7 ", j T v B a /3 v X w v a Ttapiivai, to pass 
 - . . a y o n - Hence, jt a p a S o ^ a v, printer 
 opimonein, , „ p > iXrriSa, contrary to hTpe 
 7r , 0 P“ tyvoiv, contrary to nature, „ a ui 
 to bi K yov, contrary to justice, -a ao a 
 rone opicouc, contrary to the oaths, 
 a pa v v ay iv, beyond on e’s power; also, 
 e sides, prater, ir apa ravr a, prater haec, b e- 
 ?* . these things ;—to denote local ex- 
 
 tension beside an object: along, e. g. napt 
 TOV A a Ionov, along the Asopus— In a 
 temporal relation, to denote duration of Time • 
 during, e.g. ,r a p’ tylpav, during the 
 a y? tc a pa tov n 6 A £ fx o v, during the 
 w a r, t r a p a n) v Truer tv, inter potandum, while 
 dri nkin g. So also of particular, important points 
 ot time, during which something happens, e. g. Trap’ 
 UVTOV TOV KivSvvov, in ipso discrimine, in 
 the very moment of d a n g er.~ In a c a u s a 1 
 relation, to denote a comparison, e. g. hXiov hcAchW 
 VUKVOTtpai fcav 7Tap& Td h TOV TTplv xolvov 
 v V g o v t v og. e V a, eclipses of the sun were more 
 frequent in comparison with (—than) 
 those mentioned in former time* 
 
v 
 
 412 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 ^Chap. TIT. 
 
 XCI. 
 
 (Exercise on § 167, 4. 5.) 
 
 I. Pursue 1 (sineh) reputable 2 pleasures. 2. No- 
 one deliberates safely in 3 anger. 3. It is noble to 
 fio-ht with many and brave allies. 4. The good } 
 after d e a t h 4 lie not in 3 oblivion, but ever bloom 
 in memory. 5. The Athenians, amid very-many 
 hardships and very-famous contests, and dangers 
 very-honourable, liberated 5 Greece, and highly 
 exalted 6 their native-land.. 6. The judge ought 
 to deliver-judgment 7 according-to the laws. . 7. 
 After life the wicked await their (=the) punish¬ 
 ment 8 , but the virtuous abide in happiness. 8. After 
 the sea-fight at Salamis, Sophocles, who-was 9 still 
 a bov, danced naked and anointed. 9. The Chians, 
 first of the Greeks after the Thessalians and.Lace- 
 dsemonians, made-use-of 5 slaves. 10. Of all things 
 
 in life, after the gods, the soul is most-divine. 
 
 II. A messenger came from Cyaxares, who-saul 9 
 that an embassy of Jews had arrived, and had 
 brought a very-beautiful robe from him for Cyrus. 
 12. Prometheus stole 11 fire from the gods and 
 brought 5 it in a reed to men. 13. The praises of 
 crood^men 12 are very-pleasant. 14. The gods delight 
 most in honours from the most-pious men 12 . 15. What 
 is not 13 manifest to men, it-is-allowable to ascertain 
 from the gods by divination. 16. It is said that the 
 invention 14 of letters was given 5 by Zeus to. the 
 Muses. 17. In 15 the war against the Messenians, 
 the Pythia gave as a response 16 to the Spar¬ 
 tans that-they-should-ask 17 a general from the Athe¬ 
 nians. 18. Minos pretended to have learned his 
 (=the) laws from Jupiter himself. 19. The Persian 
 bovs 18 are educated not with the mother but with a 
 (=the) teacher. 20. The good £re honoured among 
 gods and men. 21. Cyrus sent ambassadors to the 
 
§ 167.] PREPOSITIONS;. 413 
 
 king of the Persians. 22. The river Selinus flows 
 by the temple of Artemis {Diana) in Ephesus. 23. 
 The Amazons dwelt 5 by the river Thermodon. 24. 
 A word unseasonably 19 thrown-out often destroys 20 
 life. 25. Paris, contrary-to all justice 21 , carried- 
 off 5 the wife of his (=tlie) host Menelaus to Troy. 
 26. The lawgiver of the Romans gave 5 to (the) fa¬ 
 thers power over 22 their (=the) sons during their 
 (=the) whole life-time 23 . 27. No man 24 will be- 
 fortunate during his (=the) whole life. 28. I n 
 eomparison-with (the) other creatures, men 
 live as gods, since-they-are-superior 25 in their nature, 
 body and mind. 
 
 2 Say : (connected) with reputation. 3 =with. 4 Say: 
 being dead. 6 Aor. G fxsy'urryiv ccTo'Suxvljvca, (Aor.). 7 S/xd^iv. 
 
 8 Plur. 9 Part. 10 xt%/xx. 11 Aor. Part. 12 See §148, 8. 13 ^ 7 . 
 
 34 Acc. with Inf. 15 16 Aor. of 17 Aor. Inf. 18 Say: 
 
 the boys oj the Persians. 19 crapx xxifov. 20 —subverts. 2 , Plur. 
 of Vixaiov. 22 xur&, with Gen. 23 — time of life. 24 Say : no one of 
 men. 26 Part, of x^ano-ntis*. 
 
 6. npoc (derived from 7r po) signifies before 
 £ in the presence of). A. With the Genitive, to de¬ 
 note direction or motion from the pre¬ 
 sence of an object, especially with reference to- 
 the situation of a place, e; g. oIkeiv tt p b g vorov 
 avipov, tow ar d s the south (like ab oriente). 
 Sometimes it is to be translated by, in the opi¬ 
 nion of in the sigh t of &c,, (properly, b e- 
 f 0 r e one), e. g. 6 rt StKaibrarov kui tt p b g 6 e w v 
 Kal Trpog a v 0 p w tt w v, rowro irpa^to, 1 shall do 
 what is most just in the sight of gods and 
 men ;—also, for th e advantage of on the 
 side of for some one, e. g. Sok tig pot tov \6yov 
 tt p og I pov \eyetv, you seem to me to speak for 
 me .—To denote the cause, occasion or author; 
 hence with passive and intransitive Verbs, e. g. anpa- 
 ZtaQai tt a o g fl ztaioTpaTov, to be dishonoured 
 
414 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 by Pisistratus (§ 150, Obs. 3);—in oaths, e. g. 
 7r pog 0 ewv, per deos, by the gods , (properly, 
 b ef or e the gods). —B. Witli the Dative, to denote 
 local rest before, near or by an object, 
 g. g. tt p b g t ij 7 r o A f t, b efo re or near the 
 city , 7rpoc rot c k p i t aT g, b ef ore the 
 judges, uvat, yiyvtoQat tt po g r i v i, to be earnestly 
 engaged in or at s om ethin g, e. g. ir p o g 
 tt p ay pao i y 7 r p o c r to A d y to, in business, 
 in conversation. Then: in addition to, 
 besides , e. g. tt p b g r ovt ip, tt po g r o v r o i g, 
 praster ea, in addition to this, thereon, 
 mor eove r. — C. With the Accusative, to denote 
 the local limit, direction or motion 
 b ef or e an object, both in a friendly and a hostile 
 sense, e. g. tXOtiv tt p 6 g r tv a, to come to one, 
 inrofiXiirav n p 6 g r i v a, to look upon one , Xi- 
 yuv tt p 6 g r tv a, to speak to one, avppayiav 
 TroieiaOai tt p 6 g t i v a g, to make an alliance with , 
 pa^aOai, iroXtpuv tt p 6 g r iv a, to fight against 
 one, tt p o g pz cr r) p (3 p i a v, towards the 
 s o u thy aSeiv 7 t p b g av X 6 v, to sing to the 
 flut e .— To denote time or number indefi¬ 
 nitely, e. g. 7 rpoc bp £ p av, towards day - 
 brea k .— In a causal sense, to denote purpose : 
 for, e. g. TravTodana tvprjpiva ratg irbXecn tt p o g 
 <j) v X a k b p kcu GWTripiav, various schemes were 
 devised for protection and safety for the 
 cities ;—conformity : according to, in conse- 
 qu enc e of, afte r, e. g. tt p o g tt} v 6 ip 1 v 
 t a v t rj v too yapov tovtov zcnrzvoa, in accord¬ 
 ance with this v is ion I hastened this marriage. 
 So, KpLvnv tl tt p 6 g r 1 , to judge of a thing accord¬ 
 ing to something. Also, :r p t> e (3 1 a v, b!/ 
 force , against one's will , 7r p o e av ay - 
 kt)v, necessarily ;— hence, on account of 
 propter, e. g. tt po c ravr a, (properly, in confor¬ 
 mity with these things), on this account, 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 415 
 
 § 167.] 
 
 wherefore; —hence, to denote a comparison, like 
 contra ;—in general, to denote reference: with 
 respect to, e. g. gkottelv, (SXetteiv irpog t i, to 
 consider with a view to something, $ia<pi- 
 guv 7 t p 6 g a p erri v, to differ with respect to 
 virtue, to excel in virtue. 
 
 7 . f T7r o, (sub), primary meaning, under. A. 
 With the Genitive, to denote motion from a 
 depth out: out fr o m unde r, fo rth 
 from, out of, e. g, t>7r’ aTri]vr\Q Xveiv iirnovg, 
 to loose the horses from under the char iot; 
 —to denote rest under an object, e. g. i)7r6 
 7 v g oheiv, to dwell under the ear t h .—To 
 denote the agent or author with passive and in¬ 
 transitive Verbs, e. g. ktelvegOoi v ito t tvo g, cnro- 
 tiavEiv vTTo t i vo g, to be put to death by some 
 one ;—the cause, occasion, active influence, e. g. 
 b i to Kav par o g, for, on acc ount of by 
 reason of the heat, vn 6 p 7 rj g, fr 0 m, b e -. 
 cause of anger; — to denote the means and in¬ 
 strument, particularly with reference to the ac¬ 
 companiment of musical instruments, 
 e. g. EOTpaTEvovro v n o cr a A t 7 7 w v, they 
 marched to the sound of tru mp et s ; v 7 r’ 
 nv X ov \o p e v o v a l v, they dance to the flute. 
 — B. With the Dative as with the Gen., e. g. vn 6 
 7 rj tlvai, to be under the earth, &c.— C. 
 With the Accusative, to denote direction or 
 motion towards and unde r, e. g. levai v 7r b 
 7 ij v, to go under the earth; extension 
 under an object, e. g. vttegtiv olKT'i/mra virq 
 7 i? v, the dwellings are under the e art h .—To 
 denote time approximately, e. g. vtto vv- 
 kt a, sub noctem, towards night ;—to denote 
 exten si on in time, e. g. u7ro rp vv kt q. 
 during the night. 
 
 Obs. When the Article (alone or with a Substantive) in con¬ 
 nexion with a Preposition expresses a substantive-idea, and the 
 
416 
 
 prepositions: 
 
 I 
 
 [Chaf. im 
 
 Preposition s» ought to be used, this Preposition is attracted by. 
 the Verb in the sentence (expressed or understood) denoting the. 
 direction Whence, and is changed into or **; e. g. Oi ix- 
 
 v yj s et y o g a. g uvfyuToi u.wsQvyov, (the men wh o w er 6 in the 
 market-place fled),, instead of oi i* <ry « § mfyuiroi < x 
 
 T-oj s oi y o f>a. t owreQuyov. 
 
 XCII. 
 
 (Exercise on § 167, 6 . 7.)* 
 
 1. RLampsinltos, a king of Egypt, erected 1 two- 
 statues, of which the Egyptians call the one standing 2 
 towards the north, summer, the one towards the south,, 
 winter. 2. Arabia is the most-remote of the inha¬ 
 bited 3 countries towards the south. 3. It is time for; 
 us to deliberate about ourselves, that we may not 4 
 appear 5 very-base and dishonourable before gods and 
 men. 4. The Persians were deprived 6 by the Lace¬ 
 daemonians of the supremacy of Asia. 5. It is not 
 f o r-t h e-a dvantage-of your reputation to 
 sin against 7 the public 8 laws and our (=the) ances¬ 
 tors. 6. By the gods, abstain-from (pi) injustice! . 
 7. Stesichorus, the poet, was magnificently interred 6 ' 
 in Catana, near the gate called from him the Stesr- 
 chorean. 8. Near the dwelling of the king a lake- 
 affords an abundance of water. 9. Socrates was^ 
 earnestly engaged' i n^ discourse . 10 10. Al— 
 cibiades was beautiful, and, moreover, very 
 brave. 11. Aristippus, the Thessalian, comes to- 
 Cyrus, and asks-of him about 7 'two-hundred merce¬ 
 naries. 12. The Megareans buried their (=the>* 
 dead, turning them towards the east, but the Athe¬ 
 nians towards the west. 13. Nicocles demeaned-him- 
 self 6 towards the citizens with 11 very-great 12 mild¬ 
 ness. 14. The Creeks fought^against the Persians.,. 
 15. When it was towards evening the enemy re¬ 
 treated 6 . 16. Socrates was very-hardy 13 against 
 winter and summer and all hardships. 17. Worthy 
 men have the same disposition.towards, their. (=they 
 
VERBA L-ADJECTIVES. 
 
 417 
 
 § 168.] 
 
 * 
 
 inferiors as 14 their (=the) superiors have towards 
 them. 18. The Thracians danced to the flute with 
 their (r=the) arms. 19. The exercise 10 of the bodj 
 is useful for the health. 20. Let us not judge hap¬ 
 piness by money, but by virtue and wisdom. 21. 
 Socrates despised everything human in-compa- 
 r i s o n-w i th counsel from 15 the gods. 
 
 22 . A very-lovely fountain flows under that plane- 
 tree. 23. Hector was slain by Achilles. 24. Many 
 masters have ere-this 16 been-put-to-death 17 with vio¬ 
 lence by their (= the) slaves. 25. Archestratos travel¬ 
 led-over 6 all lands and seas from a love-of-pleasure. 
 26. The rich often do not enjoy their (=the) prospe¬ 
 rity from its (=the) unvarying pleasure. 27. The sob 
 diers go into the battle to-the-sound-of trum¬ 
 pets. 28. All the gold upon earth and under earth 18 
 is not equivalent-to 19 virtue. 29. Dionysius founded 
 a city in Sicily just 20 under Mount iEtna, and called 
 it Adranum. 30. Towards night the enemy re¬ 
 treated. 31. Towards the end of the war there 
 arose 6 a violent famine. 
 
 1 =placed, (Aor.). 2 Perf. 5 Pres. Part. 4 Trans : ‘ that —not 
 
 by fttij, with Subj. 6 <x<ro<pa.iviaiou. 6 Aor. 7 tls. 8 =common. 
 9 to be earnestly engaged in anything=tlvxt, yiyviaSou nps rm, or 
 V7rovbdZ,u'» vipt rt. 10 Pilir. 11 fxiraL. 12 =much. 13 
 14 15 16 17 Aor. of txra^v>j<r*£/». 18 ACC. 19 ayxag/oj, 
 
 with Gen. 2(> aitrof. 
 
 f 168. Remarks on the construction of Verbal-Adjec¬ 
 tives in -rtoc, -rta, -rtov, and on the construction of 
 the Comparative. 
 
 1. Verbal-adjectives derived from transitive Verbs 
 (i. e. from such as govern the Acc.) are used either 
 impersonally in the Neuter , (-rtoi; or -rta), like the Lat. 
 impersonal Gerundive in - dum [§ 147, (c)], or per- 
 
 t 2 
 
418 
 
 VERBAL-ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 $o? 2 «%,like the Lat. personal Gerundive; but Verbal- 
 adjectives derived from intransitive Verbs are always 
 used impersonally. 
 
 2. The Verbal-adjective, when used impersonally , 
 has its object in that Case which the Verb from which 
 it is derived usually governs. The agent is put in the 
 Dative [§ 161, 2 . (d)]. 
 
 * AaKr\Ttov lari a o i r i) v ciperrivOYfi apsTriiori 
 a o ( aafcTjrta, you must practise virtue , or virtue 
 must be practised by you. —’E 7 n 0 u/ir)rlov lari a o i 
 ri)c aperigg, you must desire virtu e .—’ ETn\Hpr]~ 
 Ttov lari cot rai e p y to, you must attempt the 
 w or Jc. —KoAaareoi/ lari a o i rov avOpwiroVOTo 
 avOpojTTog ecrrl cr o l icoAacrrtoc, you must punish 
 the man. So with deponent Verbs; e. g. Mipngrtov lari 
 (to it ov c a 7 a 0 o v c (from j utjueiaOai nva) or pipn- 
 Ttoi £ioi cro t o l ay a.0 o (, y o u must imitate the good . 
 
 3. When two objects are compared, the one with 
 which the comparison is made is either put in the 
 Genitive [§ 158, 7. (j3)], or is connected with the 
 other by the Conjunction r? ( than ); e. g. 6 Ttarqp 
 
 f±uZ,<j)V £(TTl TOO V L OX) Or 6 TTdTTip j £(TTtV 1] O 
 
 vloq, the father is greater than the son. 
 
 Obs. When two qualities belonging to one and the same object are 
 compared with each other, both are expressed by the Comparative 
 Adjective and are connected by « ; e. g J a t t & » « a-otpwTt^os 
 itmv, celerior quam prudentior, he is more hasty than pru¬ 
 dent. So also with Adverbs , e. g. rovro Sarrov % <r o <p u r i £ o » 
 hroitiirxs, celerius quam prudentius, you did this with more 
 haste than prudence. 
 
 XCIII. 
 
 (Exercise on § 168.) 
 
 1. We must shun a (=the) dissolute friend. 2. 
 The citizens must obey the laws. 3. We must at¬ 
 tempt noble actions. 4. We must despise dangers 
 
PRONOUNS. 
 
 419 
 
 § 169.] 
 
 for-the-sake-of virtue. 5. We must keep-from him 
 who-is-governed 1 by evil passions. 6. We must at¬ 
 tempt 2 even difficult undertakings. 7. The sun is 
 larger than the moon. 
 
 ‘ Pres. Part. 2 i*i%u£U9 (lit. put the hand to). 
 
 § 169. Remarks on the use of the Pronouns. 
 
 1 . The Subject, Predicate, Attribute and Object 
 stre expressed by Pronouns , when those portions of 
 the sentence are not intended to represent the ideas 
 of objects or qualities, but when it is merely to be 
 shewn that an object or a quality refers either to the 
 speaker himself or to another (second or third) person 
 or thing (§55). 
 
 2. All the rules which have been given on the 
 Substantive and Adjective apply also to the sub¬ 
 stantive- and adjective-Pronouns; a few remarks, 
 however, are here necessary on the use of the per¬ 
 sonal-Pronouns. 
 
 3. The substantive personal-Pronouns in the Nom ., 
 (viz. tyo), av, rjpuQ, vgug, &c.), and the adjective (pos- 
 sessive)-Pronouns as A ttributives , e. g. e no g i ranjp, 
 are, in Greek, as in Latin, expressed • only when 
 they are peculiarly emphatic , hence especially in 
 antitheses i e. g. Kai <rv ravra Iett pa£ag; and have 
 you done this ?•—Kai 6 oog iranjp arridavev, and 
 your father died .—’Eyw plv aneipi, <r v St 
 [live, I will go away , but do you stay . But where 
 this is not the case, they are omitted , the sub- 
 stantive-Pronouns being supplied by the endings of 
 the Verb , and the adjective-Pronouns by the Article 
 prefixed to the Noun; e. g. ypufro, ypatyug, ypcnpti .— 
 ii /u h r I® p tint my mother said to me.—oi yovtis 
 
V. 
 
 420 pronouns. [Chap. IIL 
 
 artpyovGi t a t i k v a.y parents love their children* 
 (See § 56, Ex. xxxi., § 59, Ex. xxxiii.,and § 148,3). 
 
 Obs. 1. A l r os in the Norn, is not generally used as the Subject 
 of a Verb, but most frequently as an intensive Pronoun (self* 
 very), agreeing with another Pronoun (expressed or understood), 
 or with a Noun. In some instances* however, it- seems to be used 
 simply as the subject of the Verb, though even then retaining 
 something of its intensive force ; e. g. 'O avrbs the 
 
 father himself was afraid ; au air os trv^ds pi, you your¬ 
 self struck me j ab r o s h e said. It has its intensive force 
 also, when it agrees with a Pronoun or Noun in any other Case 
 than the Nom .—The demonstratives, o l r os ( hie) and odt, usually 
 refer to what is near, (he, this man, this thing) ,* the demonstra¬ 
 tive txiTvis (ille), on the contrary, properly refers to what is 
 more remote, the person or thing there, that person or thing, 
 but sometimes to what immediately precedes. Hence, - when 
 and olrot are used in opposition to each other, the latter refers to 
 w'hat is nearer, the former, to what is more remote , though the 
 reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Lat. hie and ille. 
 
 Obs. 2. The difference between the accented and the enclitw 
 forms of the personal-Pronouns, (e. g. tfiov and pou), lies m the 
 greater or less emphasis with which they are pronounced m dis¬ 
 course. The accented forms are, therefore, naturally employed in- 
 antitheses; e. g. tpou ph xa.nytXa.crt, at 2* tarynatv, he derided 
 me, but praised you .—On the use of the Gen. of the ^fstantive-, 
 instead of the adjective - (possessive) Pronouns, see § 148, Obs. 4, 
 and § 59, Ex. xxxiii.— On the Gen. in apposition to the possessive- 
 pronouns, e. g. riptn^ps a brio* •xar^, See Obs. 4. 
 
 4. The reflexive-Pronouns always refer to some¬ 
 thing before mentioned , this being opposed to itself as 
 an Object (in the Glen., Dat., Acc., or in connexion 
 with a Preposition) or as an A.ttribute. 
 
 f O a o(p 6 g e a v r o v Kparti, the wi s e m a n- 
 governs hi m s el f .—S v a t a v r q> aptGK£ig, you 
 please yourself.— 'O ttciiq kavro v iiraivu, the 
 boy praises him sel f —Ot y o v £ i q ayenrunu rovg 
 k a v r tb v 7 raiSag, parents love their-own? 
 children.—TvwOi g £ a v r d v, know thyself— 
 O v t o g a a v r) p navra Si' £ a v r o if y.£paOr)K£v , t hi s 
 man has learned everything by him se Ifl—O 
 arparrjyoc utto tiov £ ct v t o if arpaTUOTtov cnrtOti 
 , vtv } the general was killed by h i s - o w n soldiers 
 
f 169.]. 
 
 PRONOUNS*. 
 
 42 % 
 
 5. The object previously-mentioned, to which tho^ 
 reflexive-Pronouns refer, is:— 
 
 (a) The Subject of the sentence, as in the examples 
 of No. 4; 
 
 (b) An Object of the sentence, e. g. ’Atto a av- 
 t o v iyut <t a St8 as u), I will teach thee from > 
 thyself. 
 
 6. In Greek, as in Latin, the reflexive-Pronoun 
 may be used in the relations above named, in con-r 
 nexion with an Infinitive (Acc. cum In f.) or a’ 
 Participle , and even when it stands in a subordinate 
 clause. In this case, the English language often 
 uses the III. jomoraiZ-Pronouns, Aim, her fit, them , &c. r 
 instead of the reflexive-Pronouns. 
 
 O rvpavvog vopi^et t ovg TroXhag VTrrjpeTetv 
 iavTtf, t h e tyra n t thinks that the citizens are subject 
 to h i m. —IloAAAiv lOviov rin^e K v p o g ovO' t av t i[\ 
 b/iioy\wTTo)v ovtwv ovre aXXi/Xoig , Cyrus governed 
 many nations , not speaking the same language with 
 him nor with each other .— f O Karhyopog tQri tov 
 2>wKparr)v avairttOovra rovg veovg, tog avrog 
 oofjxnrarog re Kal aXXovg tKavwrarog tto iri<mL oo(j)ovg; 
 ourtu SianOtvaL rovg avrtp avvovrag, wgrt p^a/iov 
 7 rap’ avrolg roi/g aXXovg elvai 7rpog i avr 6 v, the ac¬ 
 cuser said that Socrates , by persuading the youth 
 that he himself was the wisest of men, and most capable 
 of making others icise, so influenced the minds of those 
 who associated with h i m , that with them others were of 
 no account in comparison with h im .— K vpog SirivtyKt 
 riov hXXcov /3 a a i X e to v rwv ap^ag Si* i a v r to zr 
 KTr](Tagivo)v, Cyrus differed from other kings who ac¬ 
 quired sovereignty by the m s el v es. 
 
 7. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the Pro¬ 
 noun avrog -A, -o: viz, a v t a v 7 Iigy avrp, -y; 
 
422 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 avr ov, -/) v, -o ; avr Co v, &c ., or of a demonstrative- 
 Pronoun, are invariably used when an object is op¬ 
 posed, not to itself but to another object; e. g. r O 
 TraTYjp a v t tp s8cok£ to [3i(3Xiov, the father gave the 
 hook to h im (e. g. the son).—Srlpycu av r ov, I love 
 h i m. — ’ Ant^ofiai outou, I abstain from h i m. 
 The Pronoun avrov, &c. is here nothing else than 
 the personal-Pronoun of the III. Person. 
 
 Obs. 3. The personal-Pronoun aJ, oT, &c. has usually a reflexive 
 meaning in the Attic writers. But, in this case, it is regularly 
 employed only when the reflexive relation has a reference, not to 
 the nearer, but to the more remote Subject; e. g. 'O -r^awap voft%u 
 volf voXitus iirnprili ot (but not, o rfyotvvos x«g<£fra<- ot). 
 
 8. In the instances mentioned in No. 6, the cor¬ 
 responding forms of a v r 6 q are very frequently 
 used instead of the reflexive-Pronoun; and this is 
 always the case where a member of a sentence or a 
 subordinate clause is not the expression or sentiment 
 of the person to whom the Pronoun refers, but the 
 expression of the speaker (the writer). 
 
 KOpoc l8uro tov Swfca Travrioq aripaivuv avr tp, 
 o 7 tot£ iyx<opolri digiivai 7r pog tov nairnov, Cyrus ro- 
 gabat Sacam, ut indicaret sibi, quando tempestivum 
 esset, &C.—Ot noXtpioi tvOvq atyhoovoi Tt)v Xttav, £7ra- 
 Sav (Smart Tivaq in’ avTOvq tXavvovrag, the enemy 
 ivill straightway stop plundering , as soon as they see 
 any coming against them (contra se ).— I n v tavrov 
 yviopriv aTTtQaiviTO 'Zwicpariiq 7rpbq Toiiq oyiXovvraq 
 a v r (p, Socrates expressed his views to those who asso¬ 
 ciated with him .—Smxparrjc T °^ iTl %V V T ® 
 
 TtOvavat a i) t (p KpCirrov tivcu, Socrates knew that to 
 die was better for him than to live longer. 
 
 9. In the compound reflexive-Pronouns, ayroq 
 either retains its exclusive force or it does not , i. e- it 
 is sometimes emphatic, and sometimes not. 
 
 / (a) IlotoG plv <piXove tovc biio'uoq avroiq rf (or 
 
§ 169.] 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 423 
 
 <T </> t (T < re avroi g) icat roig ciXXoig ^pw/aivovg, <po[5ov 
 rovg 7rpog a (p a g plv avrovg (or i a v r o v g) 
 oiKStorara §iaiaiy.ivovg, irpog Se rovg ciXXovg aX- 
 Xorp'iwg, make friends of those ivho treat themselves 
 and others alike , but fear those who are very friendly 
 to themselves and hostile to others ; here the re¬ 
 flexives avroig and atyag avrovg, being compounded 
 of avrog, are emphatic, ( =se ijosis and se ipsos ). 
 
 (b) O i arpancorat 7 raper^ov e avr ov g (or a $ a g 
 a v r o u g) avSpeiorarovg, the soldiers shewed them¬ 
 selves (se) very brave. —Ol rroXipaoi iraplSocrav i av¬ 
 rovg (or o<p a g avrovg) roig ” EXXi]cnv, the enemy 
 surrendered themselves (se) to the Greeks ; in 
 these two examples, the avrog contained in the re¬ 
 flexives is not emphatic. 
 
 Obs. 4. The reflexive possessive-Pronouns are either used (1 ) alone, 
 e> o- ptrabl'hupi cot cuv \ p u\ ^nptxcuv, l share with you my 
 effects y bixaioezgov zact roc t] p i c i /) a >j pa; $%uv vj coucovg, it is more 
 just that we should have our own than that they should have it • 
 Vf*u$ ei'Ta.vcts cov; vpzcz^ovs ora.7^as ayavraez, you all (0V€ 
 your children ; 01 ToXicat ca a <p s c z ^ a. cbu^ziv zvruewvTo, the citizens 
 
 tried to save their property; or (2) with the addition of the Gen. 
 of aids (according to § 154, 3) ; or (3) instead of the possessives, 
 the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexives is employed ; in¬ 
 deed, in the common language, the last form is always used with 
 the singular Pronoun, and more frequently than the possessives 
 with the III. Pers. PI., the Gen. of alco; being usually employed 
 with the plural of the possessives (except the III. Person). Thus : 
 
 S. cov \puvcov ( trzavcov, zavcov) craczoa not cov zpov {cov) alcov cr. 
 
 crtv spavcov ( trzavcov, zavcov) pnc'z^a not c'nv iphv («■> jv) alcov p. 
 
 co7i zpaveov [trzavcov, zavcov) Xoyois not eo7s zpo7s (co7$) alcov X. 
 
 P. cov Ytpkcz^ov avcuv orace^a rarely cov vjpuv alccuv <rr. 
 
 Crtv vpzezoav alcSiv pnce^a rarely crtv vpwv avcuv p. 
 
 ca. rjpzezga avc&v apa^cr\paca rarely cot. ripuv avcuv a., 
 
 cov ctpecigov avcuv <raczga- f more frequently cov zaucuv Tareoa, 
 
 never cov txiptvv alcuv oraezga. 
 
 Here also ale os is sometimes emphatic, sometimes not : (a) 'O 
 tcc 7; IfyiZyii cov \ a vc ov craczoa, the son insults his own father, 
 suum ipsius patrem ; Ipt7s vtZfiQa cobs Ipzeegovs a l c u>v 
 varenas, you insult your own fathers, vestros ipsorum 
 patres ; ol irai'lzs vfifi^ovtri cobs I a v c u> v iraezgas, the SOUS insult 
 their own fathers, s u o s ipsorum patres (b) Uz^lxxa; 
 TLc^acovtxrtv, crtv zavcov a^ikcpr/v, bibuai 2zuty, PerdicCOS gives hi 6 
 sister (suam sororem ), Stratonice, to Seuthes. 
 
PRONOUNS. 
 
 [Chap: Till. 
 
 
 XCIV. 
 
 (Exercise on § 169.y 
 
 1. The dissolute man makes himself the slave of 
 himself. 2. Care-for (sing.) all, but most for thy¬ 
 self 1 3 The appetites 1 implauted-in the soul do- 
 not persuade it to be-prudent, but forthwith 2 to gra¬ 
 tify both itself and the body 4. The good bestow 
 the goods belonging-to-them 3 , but consider their 
 /_the) friends to be tlielr-own. 5.- We should be 
 ashamed 5 if we cared more for our own reputation 
 than for the common safety. 6. Those whom we- 
 consider 5 better than ourselves, those we are-willing 
 to obey even without compulsion, 7. To those who 
 do not' 8 command themselves to do right 9 , God assigns 
 others as commanders. 8. The Chaldseans came 
 entreating Cyrus to make 5 peace with them. 9. lhe' 
 Athenians thought 10 they ought 11 not to ieel 
 grateful to 12 others 13 for (the) deliverance,but 
 the other Greeks to them. 10. In the Peloponnesian 
 war, some Grecian cities were laid-waste by 
 foreigners, others by themselves.. 11. Enrich thy 
 (t—tlie) friends, for then thou wilt enrich thyself. 
 12. Phrixus, having learned 15 that his father was- 
 about 16 to sacrifice him, took 15 his sister, and mount¬ 
 ing 1 ? a ram with her, came 5 through the sea to the 
 Pontus Euxinus. 13. The Persians went-through 
 the whole country of the Eretrians, binding their 
 (_the) hands, that they might be-able 18 to tell the 
 king that no-one had escaped them. 
 
 1 tfovx'i. 
 with Subj. 
 ** Inf. 12 
 
 T»jv rx%i<rryv 
 
 7 § 148 , 6 . 
 
 ifitvat. 
 
 oixiTof. 4 § 153 , 2 . C. 
 
 Art*/ 
 
 Q ovg 
 
 ©f ^ to mount =«v«/3am/v ixl, (Aor. Part.), 18 
 
 IQ c/ 
 
 16 irzgog. 
 
 5 Aor. 
 
 9 =the good. 10 Aor. of 
 
 15 Aor. Part. 16 Opt... 
 18 , 
 
fl'TL] 
 
 THE infinitive: 
 
 42& 
 
 §170: The Infinitive. 
 
 The Infinitive represents the idea of the Verb as- 
 an abstract substantive-idea; but it differs from the 
 Substantive in retaining so much of the nature of 
 the Verb, that (1) it implies the nature or quality 
 of the action, viz. duration, completion and: futurity, 
 e. y pctfptiv, y eypatyivcu, ypaipai, ypaxf/eiv;.(2 ) it has 
 the same construction as the Verb, (i. e. it governs the 
 same Cases as the Verb), e. g. ypafaiv e tt i a r o A % »/, 
 Witivyuv r rj q a p e t ri Q, IvavTuwcrOai roig n o - 
 
 X ejui o ic»-(3) the attributive word qualifying the Inf. 
 is an Adverb , and not an Adjective, as in the case 
 of a Substantivee. g , k a \ w g cnroOavuv (but ko- 
 Xog Oavarog). The Inf. will be considered [A) with¬ 
 out the Article, { B) with the Article . 
 
 §"171. A. Infinitive without the Article. 
 
 1. The Inf without the Article is used, in the 
 first place, as the Subject. 
 
 Ov kokov (sc. £<rrt) . j3 a <t t X € v s i v, to b e a 
 k ing is not ill .— 'Au hfiy roig yipovaiv tv g o 6 tiv, 
 the a b i l it y to learn well always remains 
 young to the old .— giyioTog yr\g narptag a r (- 
 p £ a 6 a i, t o be deprived of ones native land is 
 a very great hardship s 
 
 s 
 
 2. In the second place, the* Inf is used as the 
 Object in the Acc., performing the office of. a comple¬ 
 ment with the following classes of Verbs and.Adjec¬ 
 tives :— 
 
 (a) With Verbs which denote an act or ex.pres- 
 fri o n. o f. t h e wil.l ;,.e. g. to wish , to desire long jar,. 
 
426 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [Chap. ill. 
 
 to dare, to ash, to command, to counsel, to 'permit (<■<?»’)> 
 to fear, to delay, to prevent; —(b) with Verbs which 
 denote the exercise of the intellectual powers 
 or their m a n i f e s t a t i o n; e. g. to think, to intend, 
 to hope, to seem, to learn, to say, to deny ; (c) with 
 
 Verbs which contain the idea of being able or effecting, 
 of power, capacity or ability ;—(d) with many other 
 Verbs and Adjectives, to express a purpose or ob¬ 
 ject, a con sequence or result. 
 
 BouXojuai, /ke'AXw ypa(p£iv, I Wish, I 
 am about to writ e. — ’ E n iu v p 10 iropEv- 
 toOai, I desire to set out.— ToX/iw vtto- 
 pivtiv TOP Kiv^vvov, I venture to encoun¬ 
 ter the danger. — U a g a i v to ooi y p a (j) £ tv, 
 advise you to writ e.—Ovroc tovq bovXovg 
 17r £ t (T £ v ETTtOUOai roig haTroraig, he per- 
 suaded the slaves to set upon their masters 
 —Kvpoc to aXXy organa apa rr a p £ a k £ v aZ, £ r o 
 B o v 0 £ i v £tti roue TroXepiovg, Cyrus was pr e - 
 paring at the same time to aid the rest op the 
 
 army against the enemy .—K id X v w o£ ravra n o 1 £ 1 v, 
 I hinder you from doing this .— o[ 3 ovpai 
 SitXtyxti” at, I fear to refute you.— 
 Nojut'Sw afiapTtXv, I think that I have 
 err e d .—’E X jr 1 2 w ehr v X v «e iv, I hop e that 
 I will be fortunate.— H rroAie 
 vtvot iraoa 8 t a 0 0 a p r, v a t, the city was in 
 danger of being completely destroyed- 
 Outoc £ (p rj tlv ai orparijyo'e, he s a i d t h a t 
 he was general. —As 7 to EiStvai raura, s t a V 
 that I know these things .—M a v Vav w itt- 
 rrevtiv, I learn to rid e.—A icaaKto oe 
 y p a 6 e 1 v, I teach you to write.—Avvapai 
 TTottiv ravra, 1 am able to do this, lloiw 
 cr£ 7 £ X a v, I make you lau g*h. A s 10 C £<T J 4 
 *auju atteOai, he is worthy to 04 ad ~ 
 
§ 172 .] 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 427 
 
 mire d. — W H k o p e v p a v Q a v a iv, w e are come 
 to learn. 
 
 Obs. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that with these Adjectives 
 it generally employs the Inf., Act. or Mid. , instead of the Passive 
 Inf. Such Infinitives may be translated both actively and pas¬ 
 sively into English; e. g. xx\Zs iartv iSsTv, he is beautiful to 
 look on, <x%iis i<rn da.v/u<x<ra.t, he is worthy to be admired, \oyo$ 
 'hwxros Ian x, a r a v on a a i, the saying can be under - 
 stood. 
 
 § 172. Nom., Gen., Dat. and Acc. with the Infinitive. 
 
 1. Most Verbs which take an Inf. have, in addi¬ 
 tion to this Object, also a personal Object , which is 
 put in the Case that the principal Verb requires ; e. g. 
 A eo pa i aon tXOatv, I b e g y ou to come .— 
 'Zvpfi o vX a v a) a o i awcppovaiv, I advise you 
 to be discreet .—’E Trorpuv w cr £ pa^aaOai, 1 urge 
 you to fight. — K a X t v iv or e ygacjiuv (jubeo te scri- 
 bere), I bid. you write. 
 
 2. But when the principal Verb is a Verb of feel¬ 
 ing or declaring ( Verbum sentiendi sive dicendi ), 
 governing the Acc., and the Subject of the principal 
 Verb is at the same time its Object, (or, in English, 
 when the Subject of the principal 
 Verb is the same as the Subject of 
 the dependent clause, e. g. I think that I 
 have erred), then the Acc. of a personal-Pronoun is 
 not joined with the Inf., as in Latin, but is wholly 
 omitted. 
 
 Oiopai apaprstv (instead of o mpai Ipavrov 
 apapreiv), I think that I have erred , credo 
 me errasse ; dlai a p a p t ai v (instead of olai aaavrov 
 apapraiv), you think that you have erred, 
 credis te errasse ; outcu apapraiv (instead of 
 thtrat iavrov apapraiv), he thinks that he has 
 e r re d, credit se errasse. 
 
428 
 
 THE infinitive; 
 
 [Chap; HE 
 
 I 
 
 3. When Adjectives or Substantives are joined with, j 
 the Inf., as explanations of the Predicate, they are- 
 put, by attraction y in the same Case as the personal 
 Object, viz. in the Gen., Pat. or Acc.; —and when; 
 the Subject of a Verbum sentiendi or dicendi is also its v 
 Object , (or, in English, when the Subject of the prin¬ 
 cipal Verb is the same as that of, the subordinate clause), - 
 the explanatory word is put in the Nom. by attrac¬ 
 tion. 
 
 Nom. with Inf. 'O trrgaTriyoQ tyn* 7r p 6 9 v no g 
 
 uvai, the general said that he was* 
 zealous. 
 
 Gem with Inf klofiai crov tt p o 6 vpo u elvai , I 
 
 request you to be ze al o us. 
 
 Pat. with Inf. 'SupfiovXzvio a o i tt p o 0 v p 
 
 Uvai, I advise y ou to be zea¬ 
 lous. 
 
 Acc • with Inf. ’ ETTOTpvvo) <r £ tt p 6 0 v p o v a vai r 
 
 I urge you to be zealous. 
 
 <t>£ e v S a t /i o v-a tii>cu,.he‘' 
 said that you were prospe¬ 
 rous. 
 
 Obs. I'. Frequently, however, in the case of words explanatory 
 
 the Predicate, attraction does not yecur, but they are put in* 
 theAcC., e. g. A eopui ffov T^o 6u.p a* uvai. 
 
 Obs. 2. Besides the instances mentioned in No. 3, the Accusa- 
 tivus cum Infinitivo is used, as in Latin, after Verbs of believ* 
 ing, saying , wishing,- as also after impersonal expressions («<", <r^s- 
 «■*<, xaX6v hrri», &C.), e. g. N(Xsy«) rh cty^cv d»V <&*«¥»»«- 
 I think (Isay ) that the good man is happy.—BoCXoput m a-rumw 
 
 1 wish you to depart. , , 
 
 Obs. 3. When the Inf. is used as the Subject (§ 171, 1), and has- 
 a Subject of its own or predicative explanatory, words connected 
 with it, both the Subject of the Inf. and the predicative explana* 
 tions are put in the Acc. ; e. g. rni vrarpilos y. « x 0 pj 9 0 u r 
 uTodatviT* xaXoritrr/v, it is honourable to die fighting for our • 
 country ;—here u.<ro6xvuv, which is the Subject of t<rn, has as its owhj 
 hubject the Acc. r/vdf or b/u.as understood, and as its predicative* 
 explanation, fAu%op.tvous, also in the Acc*. 
 
1172 .] 
 
 THE INFINITIVE* 
 
 429 
 
 xcv. 
 
 (Exercise on §§ 171, 172.) 
 
 1. Critias and Alcibiades believed that if they 
 should associate-with 1 Socrates, they would 2 become 
 very-competent both to speak and to act. 2. En¬ 
 deavour to be fond-of-labour with thy (=the) body, 
 fond-of-wisdom with thy mind, that 3 thou mayest 
 execute thy purposes 4 with the one, foresee 
 .that which is for thy advantage 5 with 
 the other. 3. The Persians thought they were invin¬ 
 cible by 6 sea. 4. Thou wilt find many tyrants who 
 have been destroyed by those who 7 seemed most to 
 be their friends. 5. Socrates said that those who 7 
 consult-an-oracle 8 on what the gods have given 9 men 
 the ability to learn 10 and decide, were-insane. 6. It- 
 be comes every ruler to be-discreet. 7. I believe 
 that men have riches and poverty not in their (=the) 
 house but in their (=the) minds. 8. Their (=the) 
 common dangers made the allies to be kindly- 
 disposed 11 towards each-other. 9. Some phi- 
 losophers 12 think 13 that everything is always in 
 motion 14 , but others that nothing can 2 ever move.; 
 .some, that everything is-coming-into-being 15 and 
 perishing, but others that nothing can ever either 
 come-into-being 9 or perish 9 . 10. Men, when-they- 
 .are-sick 16 , submit 17 their bodies both to be ampu¬ 
 tated 18 and cauterised 18 amid 19 sufferings and pains. 
 
 11. Cyrus bade the enemy deliver-up 9 their arms. 
 
 12. The most-fortunate thing in-the-world 20 is to 
 die 9 happy 21 . 13. It is better to learn late than to 
 be ignorant. 
 
 ‘Aor. Opt. 2 § 153, 2. d. 3 me, with Subj. 4 ra $c'£eevree. 
 6 —the 'profitable. 6 *ara. 7 § 148, 6. 8 to consult an oracle = 
 
 (,ixvrtviaffai , 9 Aor. 10 Aor. Part. 11 q>i\o<P(‘6vuf %xuv. 12 Say : 
 
 some of the philosophers. 13 Ioku, with I)at. 14 #m 7<r0cu. 15 y/y«- 
 
 ffd&t. 16 Part. 17 =present. 18 Act. 19 ps-x. 20 =among (b) 
 men, 21 = being-happy (Pres. Part.). 
 

 430 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. [CHAP. III. 
 
 § 173. B. Infinitive with the Article . 
 
 1. The Inf. wit h the Article (to) is treated in all 
 respects as a Noun, and is really a Verbal-Noun, 
 since by means of the Article it can be declined , and 
 is capable of expressing all those relations which are 
 indicated by the Cases of the Noun. On the other 
 hand, it retains the nature of the Verb in this case 
 also, as in the Inf. without the Article (§ 170); e. g. 
 to hrirrTo\r)v ypa^tiv, to write a letter or 
 writing a letter , r o koXCoq y p a (f> 6 i v, t o w r it e 
 (or writing ) a letter well, to kciXcoq cnroOvrioKtiv, 
 to die honourably or an honourable death , r 6 virto 
 Tijg Trarpidog air o 6 a v & i v, to die (or death) for 
 ones country. 
 
 2. When the Inf. (whether used as a Subject or 
 an Object) has a Subject and predicative explanations 
 belonging to it, both these, [as in the case of the Inf. 
 without the Article (§ 172, Obs. 3.)], are put in the 
 Acc. When, however, the Subject of the Inf. is the 
 same as that of the 'principal Verb , it is not expressed , 
 and the predicative explanations are put, 
 by attraction, in the same Case as the Subject of 
 the principal Verb, i. e. in the Nominative (§ 172, 2 
 and 3). 
 
 To air o 9 av bl v r iva vTrlp Trig irarpi^og KaXrj 
 rig tv\h, that one should die for his country 
 is a glorious lot .—T b a papruveiv av 0 p lo¬ 
 tto v g 6 vr a g ovSev, olpai, OavpaoTov egtiv , that 
 those who are men should err , I think , is 
 nothing wonderful , or, it is not wonderful that , &c.—• 
 KAiapyo? pacpov l^ifpvyE t o v KaTa7r€Tp(i)0r}vai t 
 Clearchus barely escaped being stoned to 
 dea th .— ScuKparrig TrapEKaXei rovg avOpwirovg ETTipE- 
 AtT(T0ai row (PpovipwTaTovg el v a i kqX 
 
 w^Ai/iwrarove, Socrates exhorted men to study 
 
§ 173.] 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 431 
 
 to be as prudent and as useful a 8 p o s- 
 sib le ; here the entire clause (rou we ^poutjuwra- 
 tovq, &c.) may be considered as equivalent to a 
 Noun in the Gen. governed by iTripeXt^cu. (Very 
 often r ou or r o v jurj with the Inf. is used to de¬ 
 note a p u r p o s e or o b j e c t ; e. g. A vvagiv ira- 
 paaictvaZoiLitOa t ov fir) a S t k ei a 9 a t, we are pre¬ 
 paring a force in order that we mag not 
 be injured , or, so as not to be injure d ). 
 —01 av9pu)Troi TTavra pnX av ^ JVTClL ^ 7r i r w turu^ttu, 
 men use every expedient in order to be pr o s - 
 p e r o u s .— Kupoc S i a r 6 (f>iXniua9i)Q tl v a i 
 7ro\\a roi>e TTopovrag aiujpwra, jccu oaa auroe utt’ 
 aXXwv (SC. arrjpwraro), Sia ro ayytuoue £ I v a i, 
 ra^u cnreKp'ivtTo, on account of his fond¬ 
 ness for learning , Cyrus was in the habit of 
 proposing many questions to those about him , and what¬ 
 ever he himself was asked by others he readily 
 answered , on account of his quick ness of 
 perception; (in this sentence, the Subject of the 
 Infinitives being the same as that of the principal 
 Verb, the predicative explanations, (j)LXopa9hg and 
 ayytuoue, are put in the Nom. by attraction, agree¬ 
 ing with the implied Subject of the Infinitives). 
 
 XCVI. 
 
 (Exercise on § 173.) 
 
 1. The hunters cheerfully toil in the hope of 
 catching J game. 2. Prometheus was bound in Scy¬ 
 thia, because 2 he had stolen fire. 3. The Spartans 
 prided-themselves 3 on shewing 4 themselves submis¬ 
 sive and obedient to the magistrates. 4. Covetous¬ 
 ness, besides 5 benefiting in-no-way 6 , often deprives 
 even of present possessions. 5. In-order-that the 
 hares may not escape from the nets, the hunters 
 station scouts. 6. So-far-from 7 corrupting the 
 
‘432 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. [CHAP. XII. 
 
 young-men, Socrates incited them in 8 every way to 
 practise virtue, 
 
 1 Fat. of «.» i % to pride one's self on anything =«- 
 
 or ky&xxirt*. In ow, 4 ^presenting 
 * prtih. 1 8 i*. 
 
 174. 77ie Participle. 
 
 1. The Participle represents the idea of the Verb 
 as an adjective-idea , and is like the Adjective both 
 in itsjform and its attributive use l but, in the same 
 manner as the Inf. (§ 170), it indicates, moreover, 
 the nature or quality of the action ( ypatywv , ytytut- 
 (ftwg, ypaipag, ypa\pior), and retains the construction 
 of the Verb from which it is derived (emOvyutv t r\ g 
 a per rig, fi ayoptvog roig tt o A £ p io i g, ypcup'KV 
 i 7 T i <t t o A tj v, icaAwc ypatytov). As the Tart, has 
 an attributive form and meaning, it can never be used 
 independently , but always depends on a Noun , with 
 which it aqrees in Gender, Number and Case. 
 
 2. The Participle is used in the following ways:— 
 
 (a) . Simply as an Adjective; e. g. To OaWov 
 
 poSov or to pobov to 0 a A A o v, the b l o o nt - 
 in a rose . To poSov ierri OaWov, the ro*e 
 is v l o o m in g. 
 
 (b) . Instead of the Relative Who or WUch with 
 
 the finite Verb; e. g. Tin >i] rig opviv u\e 
 k aO' 4k aarriv r]pl9 av ^ov avrij TiKTOvrra 
 a woman had a hen which laid her an egg 
 every day. 
 
 (c) . As the complement of a Verb or an Adjec¬ 
 
 tive; e. g. Xafpu) tov <pi\ov oj <{> e A u» v 9 I de¬ 
 light in ass i st in g my friend . 
 
433 
 
 § 175.] _ THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 (d). To express the adverbial accessory ideas of the 
 principal action ; e. g. Kupoc y e \ w v tiirtv, 
 Cyrus said laughingly. 
 
 Obs. As the use of the Participle in (a) and (b) presents no dif¬ 
 ficulty, we shall proceed to consider its use in the two latter cases. 
 
 § 175. The Participle as the complement of a 
 
 Verbal Idea. 
 
 1. As the Part, is an Attributive, and therefore 
 represents the action as already belonging to an ob¬ 
 ject, the only Verbs which can have a Part, as their 
 complement are those which require as a comple¬ 
 ment an action, in the character of an attribute, so 
 attached or belonging to an object that this object 
 appears in some action or state. Hence the follow¬ 
 ing classes of Verbs have a Part, as their comple¬ 
 ment :— 
 
 (a). Verba sentiendi , i. e. such as denote a per¬ 
 ception by the senses or by the 
 mind, e. g. to hear, to see , to observe, to know, 
 to perceive, to remember, to forget; 
 
 (b>. Verba declarandi, e. g. to declare, to shew, to 
 make manifest, to appear, to be known, to be 
 evident; 
 
 (c) . Verba affectuum, i. e. such as denote an af¬ 
 
 fection of the mind, e. g. to rejoice, 
 to grieve, to be contented, to be happy, to be dis¬ 
 pleased, to be ashamed, to regret; 
 
 (d) . verbs signifying to permit, to overlook, to en¬ 
 
 dure , to persevere, to continue, to be weary 
 ( 7T£piopav, avi^eaOai, Kapreptiv, Kajuveiv, &c.; 
 but lav always with the Inf); 
 
 {e). Verbs signifying to begin, to cease , to cause to 
 cease, to omit , to be remiss in something; 
 
 u 
 

 434 THE PARTICIPLE. [CHAP. III. 
 
 (f). Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish 
 ones self, to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to 
 err, to do wrong, to enjoy, to be full of some¬ 
 thing. 
 
 Obs. 1. The Part, used with the preceding classes of Verbs is 
 often equivalent to a subordinate clause introduced by on or u, 
 and, in English, must often be translated by a Noun, a subordi¬ 
 nate clause introduced by that or if, or an Inf. 
 
 2. The construction in this case is evident. The 
 Part, agrees in Case with the substantive-object of the 
 principal Verb, this object being in the Case which 
 the principal Verb requires. But when the Subject 
 of the principal Verb is, at the same time, its Object, 
 [as ol8a (lyw) Ipavrov 9 vj]tov ovra], the personal - 
 Pronoun, which represents the Subject as an Object, 
 is not expressed , and the Part, is put, by attraction, in 
 the same Case as the Subject of the principal Verb, 
 i. e. in the Nom. (comp. § 172, 2). 
 
 'OpO) Tov av 9 po) 7 rov rptpvra, I see the man 
 running .— OiSa avOpcmrov 9vy)tov o v t a, I know 
 that man" i s mortal .— Ol8a 0 v rj r o c &v, I know 
 that lam mortal .—’Aicoum avrov Xiyovrpg, 
 I hear him sayin g. — Ol ’ Adrivatoi Icpaivovro v tt a p- 
 a^OsaOivTeQ ry MtXijrou aXu ktei, the Athenian* 
 appeared exceedingly grieved at the capture 
 of Miletus. —PaSt'toe l\£y\0hay \p£v8og£vog, you 
 will easily be conf uted if you falsify. —Ol 9eo 1 yalpo\>oi 
 t i g (h g £v o l u 7 ro tuv av9punrojv, the gods rejoice if 
 they are honoured (or, at being ho¬ 
 noured) by men. — Xaipto a ol £ X 6 6 v r i, I ^rejoice 
 that you have com e.—Ol n oXtrat TT£pi£tdov rrjv 
 yv\v vtto twv Tro\£p'iii)v Tju 9 £% <y a v, the citizens per¬ 
 mitted the land to be laid waste by the enemy. 
 —Bantu a£ aSiicovvTa, I make you cease 1 0 da 
 wrong (or , doing wrong). —llavo/xat <rs a8i m 
 ic tu v, I cease to injure you.—* Ap\ogai X k y w 
 I begin to spea k .—Ev iiroinioag a<p i k 6gt v o& 
 
THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 435 
 
 § 175.] 
 
 you have done well to come.—■'Ayapravtig ravra 
 7 rotwv, you are wrong todo these things. —n \hgi)Q 
 tlfii ravra Oewyevoc; , / am satiated with seein g 
 these things . 
 
 Obs. 2. With trZvot'Z a, tr vyy ty v tjj <r k w i/a a o r Z, {I am con¬ 
 scious of), the Part, may agree either with the Subject implied in 
 the Verb, or with the reflexive-Pronoun which stands with the 
 Verb ; if it agrees with the Subject, it is put in the Nom., if with 
 the Pronoun, in the Pat. j e. g. avvot'Sa (ffvyytyvdjffxu) tfaavrZ zv 
 •r o t y) <r a s or avvotZa \fxavrZ iZ rrorhffuvri, 1 am conscious that 
 I have done well. But when the Subject is not at the same 
 time the Object, the Object with its Part, is either put in the Pat., 
 e. g. avvoih oc a o t tv t o i Yj ff etv t t, I am conscious that you have 
 done well; or both are put in the Acc., e. g. avvotZa <r t tZ or uv¬ 
 ea* r a. 
 
 Obs. 3. Some Verbs of the classes above-mentioned take also the 
 Infinitive after them, but then the meaning is somewhat different; 
 
 ®* g— 
 
 (a) ’a x o Z 11 v, with the Part., implies an immediate percep¬ 
 tion ; with the Inf. one not immediate, but obtained by 
 report; e. g. axoZtu <rov 'b i uX z y o fx i v o v, i. e. tuos ser- 
 mones auribus meis pcrcipio ; but, ih7» i<rz0v/au ’Atrrvayng rov 
 K u/yov, on tjxouz (ex aliis audiverat) xaXov xa.ya.6ov uvrov 
 tZ v a t, Astyages was desirous of seeing Cyrus, because he 
 had heard (from others) that he was good and 
 excellent. 
 
 (b) E Its vat, t <r i <r r a, ff 6 a t, with the Part., to Jcnow ; with 
 the Inf., to know how to do something, (to be able); e. g. 
 eZZa (iriffra/aai) hob? atfZo/xzvos, I know that I 
 reverence the gods j but o'tbx (i-rlffrapai) hovg <rip>Zff6ui, 
 
 I know ho w to rev ere nee the gods ; 
 
 (c) M av6 avtiv, with the Part., to perceive ; with the Inf., 
 to learn ; e. g. /aav6avco aotpos co v, I perceive that lam wise; 
 ftavSavu <ro<pbs zZv ai, I learn to be wise; 
 
 (d) Tiyvwcrxttv, with the Part., to know, to perceive ; with 
 the Inf., to learn, to judge, to resolve; e. g. yiyvcbaxu aya- 
 tiobs o v r a { ro7s ffr^aridrats <rob} aycvvas, I know that the prize¬ 
 fights are useful for the soldiers ; but, ytyvuffxca robg ayuvag 
 rots ffrganojrats ayaSobs zZvat , I judge that, &C. 
 
 (e) M £ ft.»H ff 6 a i, with the Part., to be mindful, to remember ; 
 with the Inf., to meditate doing something , to intend, to 
 endeavour ; e. g. (jdy.vY\rat t Z or o if) <r a s robs ToXirag, he re¬ 
 members that lie did good to the citizens; plpvnrai sZ 
 tr ot ij <r it i robs vroxirag, he strives ( wishes ) todo good , &c. 
 
 (f) * «/»iff 6 at, with the Part., to appear , apparere, to 
 shew one’s self, to be evidently; e. g. itpainro xXai&>r, he 
 was evidently weeping; with the Inf., to seem, 
 videri; e. g. itpx'mro x Xu in», he seemed to weep;' 
 
/ 
 
 436 THE PARTICIPLE. [CHAP. III. 
 
 (g) 'Ayyixxsiv, with the P a rt., denotes the annunciation 
 oiafact; with the Inf., the annunciation of things still 
 uncertain or merely assumed ; e. g. i ' Aatru^tos sis rrtv xfy U9 
 tp. (ZaXXuv ctyyixxsrai, it is announced that the Assyrian 
 has made an inroad into the country (a fact) ; but, 
 c *A aervgias us r»v %a>(>xv spfixXXsiv uy/eXXtrai, it is reported 
 that the Assyrian is making, &c., (whether he has made an 
 actual inroad or not is not certain); 
 
 (h) As,* v v v at or a sr o tp a t y t tv, with the Part., to shew, 
 to prove ; with the Inf., to shew how, to teach, to direct; 
 e. g. e hsit^a cri ah i k r\ a a. v r a, I proved that you had done 
 wrong ; but, tj (ZouXri At<r%ivnv xai t^ ohort jv i tv at xai 
 xaxovovv vpiv acrityatviv (docuit) ; 
 
 (i) Uoi t Tv, with the Part., to represent; with the Inf., 
 to cause, to make one do something; e. g. to tax as y s X u> » r a, 
 I represent you laughing ; but, tom as y s X a », efficio 
 ut rideas, 1 make you laugh ; 
 
 (k) A}a%6vstr0ai and alhs7tr0ai, with the Part., to be 
 ashamed on account of something which one does; with 
 the Inf., to be ashamed, or afraid to do something, to for¬ 
 bear doing something from shame; e. g. alr%6votceu xaxa 
 t oi&y rov <piXov, lam ashamed of doing evil to a friend, ; 
 but, ala%6vo/u.ai xaxa t o i si v rov QiXov, I am ashamed to do 
 evil to a friend; 
 
 (l) *A £ x £ a 6 at, with the Part., to be in the beginning of an 
 action; with the Inf., to begin to do something, to com¬ 
 mence (something intended) ; e. g. H^avro ra rslxv olx o- 
 hopovvrsg and cl x oh o [a t 7 v. 
 
 Obs. 4. Instead of the impersoned phrases, hrjxfv Ian, <pavifov \en, 
 Qxmrai, apparet, it is plain, it appeal's, the Greek uses the personal 
 construction, and makes the Part, agree with the Subject; (such 
 phrases, however, are generally rendered into English as if they 
 Were impersonal); e. g. hfjXos sipi, Qavtfos sipi, Qaivopai rnv Tarfiha 
 tS Toirjffaf, it is evident that I have done good to my country . 
 
 3. Finally, the Part, is used as a complement with 
 the following Verbs: (a) r^pyw, I happen ; 
 (b) \av0avw, I am concealed , unobserved; (c) 
 
 £ i a r e X w, diayiyvopat 1 a yW) which ex¬ 
 press a continuance j (d) (j>9av o>, I come before , T 
 anticipate ; (e) o’i \o p a i, I am gone , I have de¬ 
 parted . In the case of these Verbs the construction 
 is often changed in English, the Verb being fre¬ 
 quently rendered by an Adverb or an Adverbial 
 phrase , and the Part, connected with them, by a finite 
 Verb * 
 
THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 437 
 
 § 175.] 
 
 Kpoicroe <()ov£a rov nai^og IX a v 0 a v e J3 o ar k at v f 
 Croesus nourished the murderer of his son unwit- 
 TINGLY. A t a y w ) S i a r £ A w j t l a y iy v o fi a i 
 KaXa ' 7T O l w V) 1 ALWAYS (CONTINUALLY, INVARIABLY) 
 d o what is honourable .—•*, 12 i\e to <t> e v y cj v, he 
 went away quickly (or, he is fled and gone), 
 X nvr 0 air o ttXe o vt t g, they sailed away, 
 o t x ° ft a 1 <J) (ov, 1 have gone and car¬ 
 ried off. E r V \ ov oTrXiTai sv rrj ayoga k a - 
 OevSovrsg wc 7 TtuTriKovra, about fifty hoplites 
 were just then (happened to be) sleep¬ 
 ing in the market-place. [Tuypvw is always 
 used, where an event is to be represented as taking 
 place, not by our intention or design, but by the ac¬ 
 cidental cooperation of external circumstances, or 
 by the natural course of things; it may sometimes 
 be translated by just, just now , just tlten , 
 by chance , but often cannot be translated at all 
 into English], Ovk clv aXXog (f> 0 a <r c t e tovto 
 tt o n) a a g, no other would do this before him . 
 
 XCVII. 
 
 (Exercise on §§ 174, 175.) 
 
 1. I hear 1 that some are praised, because they are 
 
 men observant-of-law. 2. It is pleasant to learn 2 
 
 that a friend is prosperous. 3. I once heard 1 So¬ 
 
 crates discoursing on friendship. 4. No-one repents 3 
 of having-been-silent 19 , very-many of having-talked l9 . 
 
 5. Remember that-thou-art a man! 6. Those-who 4 
 are-conscious that they are well trained will fight 
 boldly against the enemy. 7. Socrates was well- 
 known 5 to be humane. 8. The man had been con¬ 
 victed of having deceived 19 us. 9. It is evident that 
 the enemy will besiege the city by sea and by land 
 at-the-same-time. 10. Industrious pupils rejoice in 
 being praised by their (=the) teacher. 11. Xerxes 
 repented 3 of having scourged 19 the Hellespont. 12. 
 
438 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 The citizens repented 3 that they betrayed the city. 
 13. It is hard to suffer 6 friends to be ruined.. 14. 
 Be not weary 7 of benefiting thy (=the) friend! 
 15. Socrates never ceased both to seek-for and to 
 learn the good 8 . 16. The enemy left-off 3 besieging 
 the city. 17. Endeavour to surpass thy (=the) 
 friends in doing-kindness 9 ! 18. I was conscious of 
 not having wronged 19 my (=the) friend. 19. The 
 Persians learn betimes 10 , while-they-are 11 yet. chil¬ 
 dren, both to govern and to obey 12 . 20. A.kindly- 
 disposed friend understands-how to alleviate the 
 grief of a friend. 21. If-thou-art-rich 11 , remember 
 to relieve the poor! 22. Let us not be-ashamed 13 
 when-we-learn what-is-useful from 14 a stranger! 
 23. Let us not be-ashamed 13 to learn what-is-usefui 
 from 14 a stranger! 24. The Lacedaemonians, be¬ 
 lieving 19 that the war would benefit them, resolved 15 
 to aid Cyrus. 25. Philip seems to have increased 
 his dominion by gold rather than by arms. 
 
 26. Death is 16 the greatest of all blessings to man. 
 
 27. The soldiers just then happened-to-be marshalled. 
 
 28. Canst thou tell me what thou thinkest 16 ? 29. 
 He-who 17 fears others 18 is, without-knowing-it, a slave. 
 30. Callixenus, the Athenian, who-had-been-con- 
 fined 19 in the public-prison, secretly dug-through 19 
 it and escaped 19 to the enemy. 31. Socrates was- 
 alwavs doing good. 32. Benefactors are-always 
 beloved. 33. If 20 we first kill the enemy, no-one 
 of us will die. 34. After death the body indeed 
 will be-dead 21 , but the soul soars 22 away 23 immortal 
 and never-growing-old. 35. The prisoners secretly 
 dug-through 19 the prison and fled 24 away -3 . 
 
 1 ax./)6uv, with Gen. 2 wuvtxvso-Pca, with Acc. 3 Aor.^ 4 a< <?», 
 with Subj. 5 &}Aof or (pantos. 6 vnoiogKv. 7 Aor. of xafAVM ; sea 
 § 153, Obs. 3. 8 Neut. Sing. 9 tut^yirtTv. 10 tvdus. Part. 
 >2 =to be governed. 13 § 153, 1. b. (*). 14 with Gen. 15 Aor. 
 of yiyvojjKUV. 16 express ruy%<xvuv. 17 osns. 18 STS£ 0 f. 19 Aor. Part. 
 20 sav, with Aor. Subj. 21 Put. III. of Moxut. 22 i*a*trttrtcu (Aor.). 
 * 3 oI^o/acu. 24 citfocpivyuv. 
 
§ 176.] 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 439 
 
 § 176. B. The Participle used to express certain Ad¬ 
 verbial accessory Relations. 
 
 1. In the second place, the Participle denotes the 
 Adverbial relations (a) of time: when, after, 
 while; —(b) cause: since, because, as, in¬ 
 asmuch as ; —(c) supposition and concession : 
 if, although ;— (d) manner and way ;— (e) pur¬ 
 pose, object: to, in order to, for the pur¬ 
 pose of. 
 
 (a) ’Hk $£ o7rdr£ Kcil avrolq rote a v a j3 a a t ttoXXo. 
 irpay/uara irapu^ov ol (3apj3apoi tt aXtv k ar a/3 a t * 
 vovmv, sometimes also after they had as¬ 
 cended, the barbarians annoyed them much while 
 coming down again 5 * aKovaaai ravra roig 
 GTparnyoig to IvQvjjinfia \apiev eSokei Eivai, ivhen the. 
 generals heard this, they thought the device inge¬ 
 nious ;— (b) hgtig S’ £7 ri Trig yhi' ft sfiriKoreg 7roXif 
 iG^vpoTspov Tra.LGoi.iEv, but we, in a s much as we 
 stand up on the ground, will strike a much 
 more severe blow ; lEpwvv/ioq, TroEafSuTarog w v tCjv 
 \ o\aywv, yio^eto Xiyaiv, Hieronymus began to speak, 
 because he was the oldest of the captains ; ra 
 ETTLThdtia e\olev Ik rijg \tupag, TroXXrjg Kat ayaOrig 
 o v g r) g, they might obtain supplies from the country, 
 because it was extensive and fertile ;—(c) <p o- 
 (3 ov/uevoi rrjv 6 Sov bpujg ol rroXXo'i ovvr]icoXov9r]oav, 
 although they feared the journey, yet many fol¬ 
 lowed ; Tovg ({iiXovg evapy ETOitvTeg E)(0povg Siivr)- 
 gegOe KoXaZsiv, if you confer benefits on 
 friends you will be able to punish your enemies ;— 
 (d) y g X Cj v eIttev, he spoke laughing;—ri ouk 
 ETToirfOE TTpEofiaig tt e p tt (i) v, teal 7r a p e \ w v ra hri- 
 tyiSeiu eqte G7rovS(ov etv\ev ; what did he not do, b y 
 sending envoys and b y fu mis h i n g supplies , 
 until he obtained a truce ? —(e) rouro 'ipypixat <p p d m 
 
440 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 a w v, I come to say this j arpanav iroWrjv ay wv 
 wc j3 o Yf 6 r) <t (v v fiaoiXti, bringing a large army t o 
 assist the king. 
 
 Obs. 1. In English the explanatory Participle is more rarely 
 used than in Greek,the place of it being supplied either by suboi •- 
 dinate clauses introduced by the Conjunctions when, since, after, 
 because, inasmuch as, if, although, &c. ; or by a Substantive with a 
 Preposition ; e. g. &<r o 6a v6 v r os K v^ov, af ter the death 
 of Cyrus, <p tvy uv, in flight; or (rarely) by an Adverb, e. g. 
 •rxvrx <rotv\aa.f=thereon, then. 
 
 2. There are in Greek, as in Latin, two sorts of 
 Participial construction ; one is called the con¬ 
 joined Participle (Participium conjunctum), 
 the other the Genitive absolute (Genitim 
 absoluti, in Lat. Ab/ativi absoluti). As we usually 
 translate the Participle, in English, by a subordinate 
 clause , the difference of the two constructions may 
 be explained thus :— 
 
 (a) The conjoined Participle is used, when the 
 Subject of the subordinate clause is either the 
 Subject or the Object of the principal clause. 
 In this case the Participle agrees with the Sub¬ 
 ject or Object in Gender, Number and 
 Case. 
 
 (b) The Genitive absolute is used, when the Subject 
 of the subordinate clause is neither the Sub¬ 
 ject nor the Object of the principal clause. 
 In this case the Subject of the subordinate 
 clause is put in the Genitive , and to it the Par¬ 
 ticiple is appended, also in the Genitive. 
 
 rioXXoi ra xprifiara a v a \ to a ovrtc, <nv TrpooOtv 
 aTrei\ovTO k epSiov, ai(T\pa v o fii Z,o vr c g iivcu , tov- 
 to)v ovk cnri^ovrai , many , ajter having squan¬ 
 dered their wealth , have recourse to those means of 
 gain, which they did not resort to before , because 
 they thought them dishonourable .—T o'v e a p o q 
 e A 9 6 v r o ra avOrj QaWei , when the spring 
 
THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 441 
 
 § 176.] 
 
 comes the flowers bloom .—A rj it £ 6 ju e v o t fyoaiv, 
 raptu vivunt, they live by p l un d erin g .—IloAAy 
 r *X v y XP f 1 £ v ° G rovg iroXep'iovg evUriaev, he con¬ 
 quered the enemy by using much stratagem. —Sw- 
 Kpar-qg eIq AeXQovq iiropEvOr} %p rj a 6 p e v o g rip XP 1 ?" 
 arrip'up, oraculum consulturus, Socrates went to Delphi 
 to consult the oracle.—’ASvvarov noXXa te^vio- 
 p £ v ov avOpwTrov 7ravTa k aXtug ttoieiv , it is impossible 
 for a man who devises many things to do every¬ 
 thing well. The Particles p et v (during, 
 while\ a pa (at the same time), kcli, k «t- 
 tt e p (although), are sometimes joined with the 
 Part, to express its force more fully. 
 
 3. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Acc. also is 
 used, but, generally, only when the Part, has no de¬ 
 finite Subject , consequently, where the Verb from 
 which the Part, comes is impersonal, e. g. I £ 6 v 
 (from eZeoti, it is lawful, possible ), quum liceat, 
 (1 i c e r e t), or in the case of impersonal phrases, 
 e. g. a l a x p o v. 6 v (from ala^pov ecttlv, it is shame- 
 /«/J,quum turpe sit (esset). The Subject 
 is sometimes expressed by a Neuter Pronoun ; e. g. 
 A u % a v r a r av t a, these things having 
 been agreed up on. 
 
 II a p 6 v avrtjj (3cnriXea yEvicrOat, aXXcp 7rspte0i]K£ 
 to Kparog, though it was in his power to be 
 a king, he conferred the sovereignty on another .— ’A SeX- 
 < poKTovog , ovSev S e o v (quum fas non esset, or fieri 
 non deberet), yiyova, I slew my brother, though it 
 ouaht not to have been done. So, also, 
 $ 6 5 a V ai)Toig (quum eis visum sit, esset), when 
 it had seemed good to them ; 8 o k o v v (quum 
 videatur, videretur) ava\u)pEiv, when they 
 thought . fi t to retreat ; irpogriKov (quum de- 
 ceat, deceret), since it is proper. Also Pas¬ 
 sive Participles; SeSoymcvoi/, quum decretum sit, 
 
442 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [Chap. Ill 
 
 esset jBiorjfiivovj quum dictum sit, esset. Thirdly, 
 Adjectives with ov; e g. SrjXov ov (quum mani- 
 festum sit, esset), it being evident; Sv v aro v 
 OV, aSvvarov ov, it being possible, im¬ 
 possible. 
 
 Obs. 2. The Particle of comparison , us, is joined with the Par - 
 ticipium conjunctum, and also with the Part, in the Gen. or -dec. 
 absolute, when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be indicated 
 as something merely supposed , (as the subjective view of the agent or 
 the speaker). In English the force of this us with the Part, may 
 be expressed by as, as if, as though, since forsooth, because, think¬ 
 ing, intending, saying that, &c. On the contrary, the Particle « r e 
 (quippe, seeing that, inasmuch as) is used when a cause or reason 
 is represented as an objective one, i. e. really existing, in contradis¬ 
 tinction to one merely supposed. 
 
 a. Simple Participle. 01 apx ovTS c» 
 ottooovovv xpovov ap\ovTtQ Stayivw vrat, (JaupaZovrat, 
 to g (tocJxjl re kui tvTV\tli y£y£vrip£voi (= vo- 
 p l Z 6 p £ v o l aofpot re icai tvTv\iTg y£y£vrjaOai), rulers 
 are admired whatever time they continue in power , a s 
 if they had been wise and fortunate .— ’Ayaya- 
 
 KTOvaiv, to g jU^aXtov tivwv a 7 T£crr£pr]p£voi (l. e. 
 riyovpevoi peyaXwv tivmv anwTtprioOai), they are 
 displeased, thinking that they have been 
 dep riv ed of some great blessings .—Oi ttoXIjuol are 
 tfZatyvnQ £ 7 Ti 7 T £<to v t £ g avc)pa7roSu TroXXa HXafdov, 
 the enemy took many slaves, inasmuch as they 
 f e 11 up o n them suddenly. 
 
 b. Genitive absolute. *0 arpaTrjybg rraphy- 
 y aXc roig oTpaTiwraiQ napa(JK£vaZ^Oai^ to e paxng 
 e cr o pi v rj g (i. e. vopiZ^v p^xw ’laeaOat), the 
 general ordered the soldiers to prepare themselves , a s 
 (in his opinion) there would be a b a tt l e.- 
 ’Eiajpurrov iZitvai iravrag Qrjflatoug, a) g twv rvpav- 
 vtov r £ 0 v £ ib r a> v, (quia tyranni mortui essent ), 
 they proclaimed that all the Thebans should come out , 
 because (as they thought) the tyrants were 
 dead. —"A re 7ruicvov ovrog to v aAtrouc, oux 
 
THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 443 
 
 § 176.] 
 
 ttupivv ol £i>Toc,‘ tovq sktoc, because the grove 
 was dense , those within did not see those outside. 
 
 Obs. 3. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connexion with 
 «u i. Occurs with the Verbs ii'h l vat, i or i 7 r a 7 6 a t, vas/~v, 
 e % i i v y v (v fjt. n v, § / a x s7 a 6 a i <r »j v y v u p. v v, <Pgovrt%itv, 
 (also sometimes with ksy n v, and similar Verbs), where, instead of 
 the Gen. absolute, we would expect to find the Acc. with a Part, or 
 the Acc. with an Ivf. The result of the action implied in the Gen. 
 is commonly denoted by olr w joined to the 'predicate ; e. g. d> ; 
 i/aov ouv loir os, av xa) v/as?s, ovrco rvtv y v <jj/ a i jv 
 
 be assured that I will go wherever you decide to go. —'0; 
 
 £ id a * t ov o v 7 n s t fj s oo £ i r rj s, kiy i ty he says that 
 
 vir tue can be taught. 
 
 XCVIII. 
 
 (Exercise on § 176.) 
 
 1. The enemy burned 1 the city and then sailed- 
 away 2 to 3 the islands. 2. When our (the=) bodies 
 are effeminated, our minds also become far weaker. 
 3. If agriculture prospers 4 , the other arts also 
 flourish. 4. Should we say of all unintelligent men 
 that they were insane, we should say 5 rightly. 5 
 lie-assured 6 that you would be-able 5 to live more- 
 sccurely if-there-were peace, than if you were-wag- 
 ing-war. 6. If thou dost not 7 labour 8 ,thou canstnot 
 be happy. 7. Every-thing 9 may 3 happen 1 , if God 
 so disposes. 8. Tyrtasus, the poet, was given by the 
 Athenians to the Spartans at-their-request as a leader. 
 9. Alexander killed Clitus while suppin g 10 , 
 because-he-had-ventured 8 to praise the deeds of 
 Philip. 10. The soldiers broke-up-their-encamp- 
 ment to-go-to-meet the enemy. 11 . These seem to 
 be the actions of a man fond-of-war, who 11 , while-he- 
 can have peace without disgrace and injury, prefers 
 to carry-on-war. 12. Harpagos conferred the sove¬ 
 reignty on another, though it was in his own power 
 to become 1 king. 13. Although-it-was possible to 
 have taken 1 the city, the enemy retreated 14. 
 
the adverb. 
 
 444 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 When the generals had resolved 12 to fight, the enemy 
 hastily 13 fled. 15. The Athenians sent-out colonies 
 to Ionia, because Attica was not sufficiently-spaci- 
 ous 14 . 16. Socrates bade men endeavour to begin 
 every action with the approbation of the gods, since 
 the gods controlled all actions. 17. Endeavour so 
 to live as if thou wert to live a short as-well-as a 
 
 long 15 time. 
 
 9 ) / 
 
 3 1*1. 
 
 1 Aor. 2 ivaytffSai. 
 
 6 =believe. 7 § 177, 5. 
 with the Part, of Wvm. 
 
 13 ra^ovs. 14 ^sufficient. 
 
 4 to prosper=iv tpigurtiti. 5 § 153, 2. c. 
 8 Aor. Part. 9 Sing. 10 Trans, by 
 
 1(1 a . £ ^ .. .** «v*i ^ n I IT 
 
 11 osrif. 
 
 12 Aor. of 'tioxiiy with Dat. 
 
 15 =much. 
 
 § 177. The Adverb. 
 
 1. Finally, the objective relation is expressed by 
 Adverbs. Adverbs denote the. relation of place, 
 time, manner and way in connexion with a Predicate 
 or Attribute; e. g. i y y v 9 e v TiXOev, he came n e ar, 
 ^ 0 c C cnr£(3ri, he went away yesterday , k a A w c 
 
 airtOavev, he died nobly. t 
 
 2. Besides Adverbs of place, time, manner and 
 
 way, there are also other Adverbs,, which do not, 
 like those above-named, more precisely dehne the 
 , Predicate, but the Copula, (the relation oi the Pre¬ 
 dicate to the Subject). These are called modal 
 Adverbs. They denote certainty or uncertainty, 
 affirmation or negation. The only Adverbs which 
 will be considered here are those expressing negation, 
 viz. o b and p h ; (o v before a Consonant , o vk before 
 a Vowel with a smooth breathing, ov X °® to 5 e a 
 Vowel with a rough breathing). On av see $ 15d, 2. 
 
 3. oi (as well as its compounds, e. g. oudc, 
 our c, ovSei'c, &c.) is used when something is 
 denied absolutely, by itself (objectively); pn ( an 
 its compounds), on the contrary, when something is 
 
THE ADVERB. 
 
 445 
 
 § 177 .] 
 
 denied with reference to the conception or will of the 
 speaker or some one else (subjectively). Both are 
 regularly placed before the word which is to be 
 made negative. 
 
 4. Hence ov is used in all sentences containing a 
 direct assertion , whether it be expressed by the Ind. 
 or the Opt . s e. g. o v yiyvtrai, o v i c iytvtro, o v yzvir 
 atrai tovto , —oil k av ylyvoiro ravra", also in subor¬ 
 dinate clauses with or i, tl) g, that, e. g. ot6a, ore 
 ravra ovk iytvtro, I know that these things did not 
 happen; in those denoting time, with ore, i tt t t S ?}, 
 &c., those denoting ground or reason,, with on, 
 8 tort, ivst, &c., and those denoting consequence, 
 with wqt e and the Ind.., e. g. ore ov k h\9tv, when he 
 did not come,—ind ravra ovk iytvtro, since these 
 things did not happen ; finally, when the idea of a 
 single word in the sentence is to be negatived abso- 
 lutely, e. g. ovk ayaOog , o v KaKtog ; in this last 
 case, ov remains > even when the relation of the sen¬ 
 tence would otherwise require pp, e* g. ft ov Stvati 
 (si recusabit)'. 
 
 5. M fj, on the contrary, is used with the Imperative 
 and with the Subjunctive used imperatively , e. g. p r) 
 ypat^t , pi) y p a\fj y g (comp. § 153, 1. Obs. 3); with 
 wishes and exhortations,* e. g. pi) ypatpoig, may 
 you not write , p i) ypatj)toptv, let us not write ; in all 
 clauses denoting purpose, with t r a, e to g,& c.; in con¬ 
 ditional clauses, with £ l, i a v, o r a v, i na v, &c., e. g. 
 Xtyto tovto, 'iva pi) ypatpyg,- — tl pi) ypatfrzig; in 
 clauses denoting effect or consequence, with (ogre 
 and the Inf , e. g. oi noXlrai avSptltog ipa%ttravTo, 
 tbgrs p i) rovg noXtpiovg dg ri)v noXiv dgj3a\dv, the 
 citizens fought bravely , so that the enemy might not 
 fall upon the city ; in all relative clauses, which im¬ 
 ply a condition or purpose, e. g. oc jui) 
 ayaOog tarn, rovrov ov tfnXovptv (l. e. a rig pi) ayaOog 
 tan), if any one (or, whoever) is no t good, 
 we do not love him; in interrogative sentences, which 
 
<446 
 
 the adverb. 
 
 [Chap. III. 
 
 express anxiety on the part of the enquirer, and 
 hence require a negative answer, 
 
 Spa MO *«rfcS you are not sick are you ?gather 
 
 interrogative sentences ou is used, a * Ti^raiTivE 
 answer is expected); usually with the Infiniti 
 also • and, finally, with Participles and Adjectives. 
 which may be resolved by a conditional clause; e. g. 
 van mart 6,up, si quis non credit, whoever does no t 
 believe (but bob Ttarrevu>v=is, qui non ere 1 , , 
 
 quia non credit, he who does n o t believe, or, because 
 
 he g''“y| ien a ne g2tive sentence contains i n d e fi¬ 
 nite- Pr onouns or A d;v er b s, e. g-amy g’ 
 any how, any where, at any time, ever , &c„ these ai 
 alfexpressed negatMly. The negatives must a ll be 
 of the same kind, i. e. all compounds of owe or mo, 
 
 e 2 utKohibveieohSlv glya ovbtirore ovbtva 
 
 otr e ilibrnv oirf ttoXw Spf a mean nature ney er 
 does anything great e 11 he r /or a ny P"™ 
 individual o r for the state J W J o v S w iroovg 
 ovllv tolovtov, we do not intend any such thing . 
 
 7 After expressions of fear , timidity , anxiety , un- 
 
 certainty, doubt, distrust-dping-hmdenng-for- 
 
 biddina, prohibiting, the Inf. with g o is generally 
 usedfnsfead of the Inf. without MOi «• 
 
 « g b ravre rroiuv, 1 prevent you from domgthis. 
 (No equivalent for the mo appears in translat ). 
 
 Obs. When expressions of few,fT*fmust be Mrafdered 1 l^an 
 by e-h with the Ind. or Saj. ( P ^ m 0 j teI1 be translated 
 Interrogative, (numne, whether t) , J- J moriatur), I fear 
 by ‘ that ; e. g. wiU die: m* 
 
 whether he will not die ^“K™ a ZLidlhat he would 
 avroOtxvoi, (metuebam ne morer )» mt) I fear wh ether he 
 
 will not take place, or has not taken place^e. g ^^. g > 
 “"^.^^“nTaonmorietur), I feared that heivould not 
 
THE ADVERB. 
 
 447 
 
 § 177.] 
 
 die ; 23e/x*, pti ov rifonxiv, (n e non mortuus sit), I fear that he 
 is not dead. 
 
 8 . M i) ov with the Inf is used instead of the Inf 
 without negation, Sifter expressions of hindering , deny - 
 ing , ceasing, abstaining, distrusting, &c., when the 
 negative ou, or any negative expression, precedes 
 grj ov. 
 
 Ovdlv K(oXvei (ts pi) ov k cnroQaveiv, nothing 
 prevents you from dying; ovStig apveirai ri)v 
 aptrriv p fj o v KaXfjv uviu, no-one denies that virtue 
 is lovely / ovk. air & a \ o p r\ v pi) o v ravra Xeyuv, 
 I did not r efr ain from saying this. 
 
 9. O v pi 7 (usually with the Subj. or Fut. Ind.) is 
 elliptical, since with ovk a Verb denoting anxiety 
 or fear (which is sometimes also expressed) must be 
 supplied, and prj must be referred to this Verb. 
 Hence ov pi 7 is used, when the idea to be ex- 
 piessed is, it is not (ov) to be feared (<po/3r]reov) 
 that (p {]) something will happen ; e. g. o v pi) yivrjrai 
 tovto , non vereor, n e hoc fiat, this will certainly 
 n o t happen. 
 
 XCIX. 
 
 (Exercise on § 177.) 
 
 1 . The truly wise will never be-enslaved-by base 
 desires. 2. What might 1 not happen in a long 
 period? 3. What 2 evidence did the Athenians em¬ 
 ploy to prove that Socrates did not believe 3 in the 
 gods in which the state believed? 4. As 4 the Per¬ 
 sians did not hold-out, the Greeks took the city. 5. 
 If thou sayest not the truth, do not expect to be be¬ 
 lieved by 5 men. 6 . Let us not flee before the enemy! 
 7. He-who 6 does not believe 7 one-on-his-oath 8 can 9 
 easily swear-falsely 10 himself. 8 . It is a great mis¬ 
 fortune not to be-able to endure misfortune. 9. No- 
 one is free whc does not control 11 himself. 10 *. 
 
44$ 
 
 THE ADVERB. 
 
 [Chap. IIT. 
 
 Give 12 to friends, even if they do not ask 18 .. 11. The 
 Sophists were not willing 14 to converse-with those 
 who 15 were not able 16 to give money. 12. What is 
 not manifest to men, they endeavour to learn from 
 the gods by divination. 13. What one neither 
 earns 17 , nor sees 12 , nor hears 12 , nor performs 12 for 
 himself, friend often supplies to friend. . 14 ; I 
 might 1 affirm that no one gains 18 any cultivation 
 from one who 15 does not please. 15. You affirm 
 that you need no man for 19 anything. 16. If thou 
 doest 20 anything shameful, never hope to remain- 
 concealed 2 ' 1 17. No envy about anything ever arises 
 in 22 a good man. 18. The beautiful never anywhere 
 appears to any-one as deformed. 19. The Thirty 
 Tyrants forbade 1 ' 2 Socrates to converse-with the 
 voun^-men. 20. Prexaspes denied that he mur¬ 
 dered 12 Smerdis. 21. Clearchus then scarcely es¬ 
 caped being-stoned 23 . 22. All laws prohibit inscrib¬ 
 ing the name of any liar in the public decrees. 23. 
 I fear that the city is already taken by the enemy. 
 24. I doubt 24 whether it is not best for me to be- 
 silent. 25. Neither snow-storms 25 , nor rain, nor 
 heat, nor night, hinders the Persian couriers from 
 most rapidly accomplishing 12 the journey 26 
 lying-before them. 26. No fear shall prevent me 
 from saying what I think. 27. Be-of-good-courage; 
 surely nothing unjust will happen 12 , if justice be 
 present. 28. The wicked you (pi) will certainly 
 never make better. 29. If 27 we conquer 12 ,, the Pe¬ 
 loponnesians will certainly never invade 28 the coun¬ 
 try. 30. Socrates said: As long as 29 I breathe and 
 am-able 30 ,-1 surely shall not cease 2 to philosophise. 
 
 Wti. 5 vto\ with Gen. 6 Urn. 
 10 
 
 1 § 153 , 2 . C . 2 <T0i0S* 3 VOfAlfylV. - . 
 
 T tfuhaGcu. 8 =swearing. 9 twlarctafai. inopxur. ^ a y : W ^ 
 controlling: 12 Aor. 13 Say: [not asking ^ 14 «**««• 
 
 '^Aor. oi i&eya&rfa'. 18 with Dat. 19 «fe. 20 Aor. Part. 
 
 21 Fut.' of Wdjy'etvf y * 22 = to. 23 Aor. Inf. 24 UUm. 26 Sing. 
 28 %ifus. 27 idcr. 28 tiV/3«XX«y e<V (Aor.). 29 Mtfwg <&» with bubj. 
 
 ** elos rt uvcu* 
 
449 
 
 SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES, 
 
 OR 
 
 THE CONNEXION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 § 178. A. CO-ORDINATION. 
 
 1. When two or more sentences stand in close 
 connexion with each other, there is a two-fold rela¬ 
 tion to be distinguished. They are either related to 
 each other (1) in such a manner as to form one 
 thought , each, however, being, in a measure, inde¬ 
 pendent of the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise , 
 Plato also was very wise ; or (2) they are wholly 
 united , inasmuch as the one defines and explains the 
 other, or appears as the dependent member of the 
 other, e. g. When the spring comes , the flowers blos¬ 
 som. The first kind of connexion is called Co-ordi¬ 
 nation, the last Sub-ordination , and the sentences, Co- 
 ordinate and Sub-ordinate. 
 
 I came , I saw , I conquered. —Co-ordinate. 
 
 When I came, I conquered. —Sub-ordinate. 
 
 2. Co-ordination consists either in expanding or 
 restricting the idea. The former is called copu¬ 
 lative, the latter, adversative co-ordination. Copula¬ 
 tive co-ordination is either a simple succession of 
 words, or an enhancing or strengthening of the idea. 
 
 3. A simple succession of words is effected,—(a) 
 by k a if et,. a n d r more rarely in prose by r I (en¬ 
 clitic), que, andy e. g. Sc oKpartiQ jcai IlAarwv;— 
 
 
450 
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 [Chap. I. 
 
 (b) by k a i — k. a i, et — et, hot h a n d, as w el l—~ 
 a s, more rarely r t—r I, e. g. k a i ayaQoi k a\ kcikoi, 
 both good and bad ;• —(c) by r e—k a /, both— 
 and , and also , e. g. KaXog te Kat ay adog, \P* m 
 
 GTOL TE Kat 7TOVr)poi 
 
 Obs 1. Ka/ also signifies even (etiam), with which corres¬ 
 ponds’the negative not even (ne-quidem) ; e. g. 
 
 eri, (etiam tu) e v e n you said this; ovli au (ne tu 
 
 qnidem) tocvtu bXi^xs, not even you said this. 
 
 4. The enhancing or strengthening of the idea is 
 effected by the simple k a i, but still more definitely 
 by,—(a) o v jnovo v —a XX a k a i (a X X o v S e), 
 
 —(h) oiiY 6tl (on mg) or g.rj on (ott wq) [i.e. 
 
 ov fir., or, n>) Xiye, 5r«]-iXXa ««l 
 
 (a X X’ onL y ( not only not)— but 
 
 even (but not even), either when the more im¬ 
 portant member precedes the less important, or when 
 two very antithetic clauses are opposed to each other. 
 
 Soncpanjc o v fio v o v cro^oc rjv, a X X a k a t ay a- 
 Qog, Socrates was not only wise, b u t als o ^ good. 
 
 _Kai ju vTTtpaTioOvijGKtiv yz j uovov WzXovoiv oi zpiov- 
 
 reg , o u g d v o v dri avSptg, dXXa Kai yvvauceg 
 (non modo—sed etiam), indeed , Covers a tog arg ready 
 to die for each other, not only men , but a l s a 
 women .—O u x d tt oi c 7ro Xepiovg ETpzipavro ol 
 
 w EXXr, V £C, a X X a Kat ito X^P av «««*«»'» 
 
 the Greeks not only put the enemy to flight , 
 but even ravaged their country—Alaxtvug ov X 
 onwg \ooiv rolg ’AOrjvaioig ax^, d X X d fuaOtoaag 
 iavrbv Kara tovtcovi ettoXitevzto (non modo non > 
 sed etiam), not only was ^Eschines not grate - 
 ful to the Athenians, but he even acted as a states¬ 
 man against them, suffering himself to be bribed.—M t ? 
 b tt m c bpy^Oai iv pvOpy, d X X’ o d S opOovoVac 
 tSvvavTo (non modo non), not only were they n o t 
 able to dance in time, but not even to stand erect. 
 
CO-ORDINATION. 
 
 451 
 
 5 178.] 
 
 5. A. duersative co-ordination consists in vestviction 
 or in entire negation, e. g. he is indeed poor, hut 
 brave; lie is not brave, but cowardly; (here, the 
 clause ‘ but brave' restricts the one preceding 
 and 4 but cowardly wholly negatives the idea of 
 
 4 brave'). Restriction most frequently expressed by 
 
 5 f (autem). Xo this S g there usually corresponds 
 the connective p£ v , standing in the preceding con¬ 
 trasted sentence. Miv primarily signifies, in truth, 
 truly, indeed (quidem), but generally its force is so 
 slight that it cannot be translated at all into English; 
 e * S', To M« v wQiXipov tcaXov, to S g fiXafitpov al- 
 (T X9 ov £<Tr * v > what is useful is honourable, but what is 
 hurtful is disgraceful M £ v—S £ is used especially 
 
 in divisions and classifications, e. s. ol u i v _ ol S / 
 
 some-others, to /liv-rh Si, on the one 
 side on the other, p art ly — p ar tly ; also, 
 where the same word is repeated in two different sen¬ 
 tences, e. g. avveipi pev Oeoig, ovvetpi S’av- 
 UpwTToig toiq ay aOoig, I take part with the gods, and 
 I take part with good men. Generally speaking Se 
 may be translated by 1 and'. 
 
 6 . The following Conjunctions are also to h& 
 noticed, viz. av, usually in connexion with Si (S’ 
 av), rursus, ag a in, on the contrary; tea i- 
 roi, verum, sed tamen, however, yet, and y et ; 
 psvToi, yet, however; 6 pio g, although, 
 yet nevertheless; finally, «AA«, which, 
 according to the nature of the preceding portion 
 of the sentence, denotes either the opposite of that 
 which is expressed in the first member, so that the 
 first member is negatived by the last, and one can¬ 
 not coexist with the other (b u t), e. g. ov X ol nXobenot 
 tvbaipovzt,' ucuv, a XX’ ol ayadoi, not the rich are 
 happy, b u t the good; or, it merely denotes some¬ 
 thing different from what is contained in the first 
 member, so that the first member is only partially 
 negatived, i. e. merely restricted (still, yet, but), 
 

 452 
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. [CHAP. I. 
 
 e. g. TOVTO TO 7 Tpay/xa wfjyzXifiov piv ioTiv , a X X ov 
 KaXov, this action is useful indeed , but not honou- 
 
 ra 7 ^*Th e wnion 0 / negative sentences is effected by 
 o Ur f-o 3 T E 0* U r p-fi V J *), nec-uec, nett her- 
 nor , e. a. ovre Oeoi ovre avOpwnoi, neither 
 nods nor men. Oh hi either expresses z contrast 
 (but no t), or serves to annex a new additional 
 clause (and no t, also not ). 
 
 Obs. 2. When a negative sentence follows 9 . positive one, the con- 
 
 nexion is regularly formed in prose by * « ‘ •;* « * a 1 f f !* * 
 &x'ivoucu yatpiros rt<rv%vx,us * a < o u (ASft^tus ° u £ rifieo^i , 
 evidmtlyvJt with favour, and notblam* or punishment. 
 
 8. Disjunctive co-ordination consists m combining 
 into one whole, sentences, the one of which excludes 
 the other, so that the one can be considered as exist¬ 
 ing only when the other is non-existent. Ihis relation 
 (Disjunction) is expressed by disjunctive Conjunctions , 
 viz. fi—ih aut—aut or vel—vel, e it he r—o rj tire 
 
 —eKre (with thelnd.), la wrc—ia vr e or nv re— 
 
 Zvre (with the S u b j.), sive—siye, whet he r— 
 or. ei the r—o r; e. g. r) 6 i raWjp rj o> viog airtVarev, 
 either the father or the son died, (the first ?j may, 
 however, be omitted , e. g. 6 naryg V b viog avtVavtv ); 
 
 Kaiva Clr e 7 raXath rahra ionv, whether 
 these things are new or old; i a we tt arr, 9 ypap, 
 lavri fihmo, whether the father or the mother 
 
 “*9 'Finally, sentences may also be co-ordinate when 
 the latter of them denotes either the cause or the 
 effect of the former. The sentence denoting t le 
 cause is introduced by 7 dp, enim, nam, fo r, and 
 that denoting the effect, by o ov, consequently, 
 therefore, &p a, then, therefore, roivvv, 
 then, so then, rolyap, ergo, therefore, 
 rolyaproi, for that very reason and 
 
SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 I 
 
 455 
 
 § 179.] 
 
 reason then , wherefore; e. g. OavpaZop^v 
 Sow parr}' avhp yap hv KaXog koX ayaOog, ice admire 
 Socrates, for he was an honourable and good man .— 
 Stoicparrjc avpp KaXog kol ayaOog * OavpaZopev a p a 
 avrov, Socrates was an honourable and good man. 
 therefore we admire him. 
 
 Obs. 3. ra^, ovv, aga,, pi*, re, rolvuv, rol or a,Z can never stand as 
 the first word in a sentence. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 B. SUBORDINATION. 
 
 § 179. Principal and Subordinate Sentences. 
 
 1. When sentences, which together present one 
 
 united thought, are so related, as to their import, 
 that the one appears as a dependent and merely com¬ 
 pleting member of the other, their connexion may 
 be expressed, either by co-ordinate Conjunctions, as 
 Se, yap, apa, &C., (e. g. to tap ra $£ SivSpa 
 
 OaXXti, the spring has come , and the trees bloom ); or 
 in such a manner that the sentence which, as to its 
 import, merely completes the other, is evidently, in 
 its outward form, a dependent, or a simply complet¬ 
 ing member of the other ; e. g. ore to tap ^ A 0 1, 
 ra $£v$pa OaWzi, when the spring has come , 
 the trees bloom. This mode of connexion is called 
 Subordination. 
 
 2. The sentence, to which the other belongs as a 
 complementary or defining member, is called the 
 principal sentence; the completing one, the subordi¬ 
 nate or accessory sentence ; and the two together, a 
 compound sentence ; e. g. in the compound sentence, 
 on to tap h\0e, ra EivBpa OaXXei , the principal sentence 
 
 f 
 
 i 
 
454 
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 [Chap. IL 
 
 is TO Sti'Spa OaXXet, and the subordinate sentence, art 
 TO tap n\fh. 
 
 3. Subordinate-sentences are* 
 
 (a) . Substantive-sentences, i. e. those 
 
 which are equivalent to a Case of a Substan¬ 
 tive (or an Infinitive) ; 
 
 (b) . Adjective-sentences, i. e. those 
 
 which are equivalent to a case of an A djective 
 (or a Participle) ; 
 
 (c) . Ad v er bial-s entences, i. e. those 
 
 which are equivalent to an Adverb or an 
 Adverbial phrase. 
 
 Thus, e. g. in the sentence, “The v i c t o r y of Cyrus over 
 the enemy was announced”, the Subject may be expanded into a 
 subordinate sentence, viz, “That Cyrus had conquered 
 the enemy was announced : also, in the sentence. Sin to 
 me 0 Muse, the far-wandering man”, the Attributive far- 
 wandering” may be expanded into a subordinate sentence, 
 “who has wandered far”. Comp. “ He announced the 
 victory of Cyrus over the enemy”, with “ He announced that 
 Cyrus had conquered the enemy ; In the spring 
 the flowers bloom”, with “When the spring has come, 
 
 the flowers bloom. ” 
 
 
 § 180. I. Substantive-Sentences . 
 
 1. A substantive-sentence is a Substantive or 
 an Inf initiv e expanded into a sentence , 
 and, like a Substantive, may stand as the Subject or 
 the Object of a sentence. 
 
 A. Substantive-Sentences, introduced 
 by 6 t l or o>e> 1 that*. 
 
 2. Substantive-sentences introduced by the Con¬ 
 junctions on and <I>c» i that\ express the Object 
 
§ 180.] SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. 455 
 
 (Acc.) of Verba sentiendi and declarandi, i. e. of 
 Verbs which denote either sensation or perception ; 
 e. g. opav . atcoveiv , voelv, /uavOavsiv , yiyvwatzEiv , & C . 
 or the expression of a sensation or perception ; e. g 
 XiyEiv, Seikvvvch, ayyEXXEiv , SfiXov Eivcu , &c. 
 
 3. The Predicate of such a substantive-sentence 
 may be expressed, (a) by the In d., (b) by the Op t ., 
 (c) by the Op t. with a v, (d) by the Ind. of 
 the historical Tenses with a v. 
 
 4. The Ind. of all the Tenses is used, when what 
 is affirmed is to be represented as a fact or plienome- 
 non , something certain or actual. More especially 
 the Ind. is used regularly, when the Verb of the 
 principal sentence is a principal Tense , (Pm., Perf 
 or Fat.). 
 
 5. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when 
 what is affirmed is to be represented as a mere con¬ 
 ception or supposition; hence, especially, when what 
 is stated as the sentiment of another is to be indi¬ 
 cated as such. 
 
 ’TAc'yov, 6 t i apKTOL ttoXXovq rJSrj nX^aiacravrag 
 $it(J)Oeipav, they said that bears had ere this 
 destroyed many who approached them. — f 'Or£ Srj 
 ravra Evitivpovj ueOci, ovrofQ iyiyvwcrKOfiEv irEpl ai/rwr, 
 (L C avOpurrrw iteQvkoti rravriov riov aXXwv paov e ’/ t) 
 Zwwv rj avOpuTTuv ap\Eiv, when we reflected on these 
 things , we concluded that it w as easier for mail, 
 as he is , to rule all other animals than men. . 
 
 6. The Opt. with av is used, when the affir¬ 
 mation is to be indicated as a conditional supposition , 
 an assumption, a conjecture , or an undetermined pos¬ 
 sibility (§ 153, 2, c.). 
 
 Atyw, 6 t i, ei ravra Xtyoig, apapravoi g av, 
 I say that if you were to say these things , y o u 
 would er r .— Mifivn]pai aKbvoag irore aov, 6 r i eiko - 
 
456 
 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. [CHAP. II. 
 
 rw? a v Kai 7rapa Oeiov 7rpaKTiKti)TEpoQ £ t ij, a>cTTfp kal 
 7r apa avOpiomov, oqtiq prj (= el tlq g ? j ), ottote ev a 7 ro - 
 potg e’/tj, tote koXokevoi , aXV ora ret apicrra irparroif 
 tote paXiara twv Qemv fXE/ivipTo, I remember having 
 heard you once remark, that he would reasonably 
 be most likely to obtain what he wished from gods , as 
 well as from men, wAo should, &c. 
 
 7. The Ind. a/ the historical Tenses 
 with a v is used, when the affirmation is to be re¬ 
 presented as something conditional, the existence or 
 possibility of which is denied [§ 153, 2. a. (a)]; e. g. 
 A riXov e< ttlv, on, el raura fAe'ycc, hgapTavEg a v, 
 is evident that if you had said this, you would 
 have erred, (but you did not say it, therefore 
 you did not err). 
 
 Obs. Impersonal forms of expression are, in Greek, often made 
 personal ; e. g. Srjkos tipi (ipctvtgof tl/Ai), eri raZrot tv 
 e-r^a, it is evident that I did these things well; 2 n x o / 
 tia-if, on raZru. ’ixiZ'O.v, it is evident that they said this. 
 Comp. § 175, Obs. 4. 
 
 c. 
 
 (Exercise on § 180.) 
 
 1 . We know that the kings of the Lacedaemonians 
 are descendants of Hercules. 2. The Athenians 
 fortified the city in a short 1 time, and it is even 
 now 2 evident that the construction was done 3 in 4 
 haste. 3. I have often wondered 5 by what 6 argu¬ 
 ments the accusers of Socrates persuaded 5 the Athe¬ 
 nians, that he was deserving 7 of death from the 
 State. 8 4. Tissaphernes traduced Cyrus to 9 his 
 (=the) brother, saying that he was plotting-against 
 him. 5. Brasidas not-only 10 shewed himself pru¬ 
 dent 11 in other respects , but-also 12 in his speeches 
 evervwhere he manifested that he was sent-forth to 
 liberate 13 Greeoe. 6. Many of those who 14 pretend 
 
 _ 
 
SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. 
 
 457 
 
 § 181.] 
 
 to philosophise might 15 perhaps say 5 , that the just 
 man could never become 5 unjust, nor the sober- 
 minded arrogant. 7. It is evident that you may be 
 delivered 5 far more-speedily, if-you-say 16 nothing, 
 than if you defend yourself badly. 8. I pray you 
 to observe-beforehand that, if JEschines had not 
 brought-forward 17 something foreign-to 18 the in¬ 
 dictment, I also would not have said 19 a single 20 
 word. 
 
 1 =little. 2 > irixa)vvv. 3 A or. of yr/naSa.i. 4 kxtk, with Acc. 
 5 Aor. 6 osns. 7 agios tlvaci. 8 Dat. without a Prep. (§ 161,2. d). 
 9 cr^f, with Acc. 10 rt. 11 = moderate. 12 *.«/. 13 Fut. Part. 
 14 § 148, 6. 15 § 153, 2. c. ,6 Aor. Part. 17 Aor. Part, of xam- 
 
 yo^itv. 18 = outside. 19 rtotiiada. 1 . 20 =any. 
 
 § 181. B. Final Substantive-Sentences, 
 introduced by <5 g, t v a, &c. 
 
 1 . The second kind of substantive-sentences are 
 final sentences, i. e. those which denote a pur¬ 
 pose, intention or end. These sentences are intro¬ 
 duced by the following Conjunctions, w?, 07 rwc, 
 1 v a, w c o 7 T 10 g \ u ??, 'i v a p rj, (ut, ut ne). 
 
 2. The Mood used in such sentences is usually 
 the Subj. or the Opt. When the Verb of the prin¬ 
 cipal sentence is a principal Tense [P res., Perf. 
 or Fu t ., or an A 0 r. with a Pres, meaning 
 (§ 152, 12.)] the final Conjunctions are followed by 
 the Subj.; but when the Verb of the principal sen¬ 
 tence is a historical Tense [ 1 mpf, P l%)f- or A or.] 
 the final conjunctions are followed by the Opt. (but 
 never by the Opt. Fut.). 
 
 Tawra y p a 0 w, y I y p a (/> a, 7 p a w, 1 v £ A- 
 8 t) g, u t venias, / w rite, have written , 
 
 to ill 10 rite this , that you may come; Al~ 
 
 x 
 
453 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. II 
 
 iovj'iv z I S w, d i c, u t s c i a m , say, that I may 
 know ; Tavra zy p a (j) o v, zy ty p a(f> ziv, zy p a-fa, 
 ? v ’ zXOoig, ut venires , I was writing, 
 had written, wrote this, that you might 
 com e. Efc Trig rwv llspawv zXzvOzpag ayopag KaXov - 
 gtvrjg ra pzv iovia kol ol ay o palm an zXiiXavrai 
 zig aXXov ronov, oj g ju rj fiiyvvr)rai fj tovtlov 
 rvpfiii rrj riov nznaidzvjuzvivv zvKoafiiq, merchandise 
 and traders have been removed from the public 
 forum of the P ersians, that their turmoil may not 
 mingle with the correct deportment of the educated. 
 
 * I v a cra^zcTTzpov $ v}X 10 6 rj naaa i) Xlfprymi/ noXi- 
 rzia, piKorv znavziyt , (paucis repetam), in or¬ 
 der that the entire polity of the Persians maybe 
 more clearly explained, I will recapitulate 
 briefly.—-Kapfiuarig tov Kvpov an z k aX z i , 6 n u) g 
 ra zv Hzpaaig zni^tvpia z n i r zX o i t). 
 
 Obs. Hence, what in Latin is the sequence or dependence of 
 
 Tenses, is, in Greek, the sequence of Mo o ds. For example •_ 
 
 if, in Latin, the principal Verb is in the Pres., the Verb of the sub¬ 
 ordinate clause is generally in the Pres, also ; and if the principal 
 Verb is a past Tense, so is the Verb of the subordinate clause. 
 But, in Greek, if the principal Verb is a Pres., Perf. or Put., the 
 isubj. is used in the subordinate clause ; and if the principal Verb 
 is a past Tense, the Opt. is generally used in the subordinate 
 clause.—On the Subj. after a historical Tense, see § 189, 5. 
 
 With the final Conjunctions 4> g, o n u> g and. 
 
 4 v a , the modal Adverb av is sometimes joined, 
 referring to a conditional sentence (usually not ex¬ 
 pressed, but to be supplied); e. g. Sia rrjg ayg 
 \tvpag a&ig hgag, on wg av ziS w ju z v, a re Set 
 ipiXia Kal noXz/uia vopi^ziv, you will lead us through 
 your territory, in order that (when we have en¬ 
 tered it) w e may know both what it is necessary to 
 regard as friendly and what hostile. 
 
 4. Verbs of care, anxiety , considering, endeavouring , 
 striving, effecting and admonishing, [e. g. znipeXu- 
 aOai, (ppovTiZ,ziv, (pvXarTziv, atconzlv, fiovXzvzoQai, opqv, 
 noiziv, nparrziv (curare), prjxavaoOai, napaicaXziv, 
 
§ 181.] 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. 
 
 459 
 
 rrapayysXXEiv, ttoowtuv, alrtitrQai , ciye, & C .], are fol¬ 
 lowed by the Conjunction b 7r to g (bn tug pi '/) 
 with the Subj. or Opt. (according to No. 2.), or, 
 more frequently , with the Ind. Fut., not only after 
 a principal Tense, but very often also after a histo¬ 
 rical Tense ; when the Ind. Fut. is used, the accom¬ 
 plishment of the purpose is represented as really oc¬ 
 curring and continuing. 
 
 Oi EUocukoi vdjuoL enipiXovrai, o;rwg r^v 
 apxhv p h toiovtol s a o v t a l oi 7 roXirai, olot (—togrt) 
 novrjoov 7j alar^pov epyou £<pi£<jOat, the Persian 
 laws take care that the citizens shall by no 
 means b e such as to desire any wicked or shameful 
 act. —S KOTrtifrOs tout o, to itrSpeg ’ AOrjvaiot , 
 bn tog p r) Xbyovg I p o v a 1 povov oi 7rap’ rjpihv 
 77p£cr(3£ig , aXXa icai £pyov n Seikvveiv £ £ o v cj lv, look 
 to this, Athenians, that our envoys shall not 
 merely utter words, but likewise be able to ex¬ 
 hibit some result. 
 
 5. The final Conjunctions tv a and c5 c (more 
 rarely o tv to g) are followed by the Ind. of the histo¬ 
 rical Tenses, when a purpose is to be expressed 
 which has not been accomplished or which cannot be 
 accomplished. 
 
 * „ , , 
 
 exp rj v <T£ Unyacrov ttt£q6v, bn to g t (fra u' 
 
 v o v rotg Qeoig r pay actor epog, you should h avl 
 harnessed the winged Pegasus, that you might 
 have appeared more imposing to the gods .— 
 ’EfiovXopriv S' av, 'Zlptova rrjv avrrjv yvthptjv 
 tpoi t\£iv, t v aptyoriptov hptov cucovcravrEg pqSitog 
 £ y v a) r £ ra Sbcaia, I would that Simon had been 
 of the same opinion as I am, that lor, then = in 
 which case) having heard both of us, you might 
 have easily j ud q eel what was just. 
 
460 
 
 SUB-ORDINATIOS. 
 
 [Chap. II 
 
 . 
 
 CL 
 
 ( Exercise on § 181.) 
 
 1. Contemplate thine actions as in a mirror, that 
 thou mayest adorn the beautiful, hide the unseemly. 
 2. The Lacedsemonians were not permitted 1 to travel- 
 abroad, lest the citizens should become filled-with 
 frivolity by 2 strangers. 3. Remember absent as- 
 well-as 3 present friends, lest it may seem that you 
 would neglect the latter also in-their-absence 4 . 4. 
 Agesilaus took-care that the soldiers should-be-able 
 to endure hardships. 5. The president of the city 
 must 5 see-to this, that the best men have the greatest 
 honours. 6. Ambitious and higli-souled men 6 do 
 everything, that they may leave-behind an immortal 
 remembrance of themselves. 7. Endeavour to fight 
 with all ardour, that you may surpass your fore¬ 
 fathers in renown 1 8. W o u 1 d t h a t 7 the multi¬ 
 tude 8 were able to effect the greatest evils, then 9 
 they would also be able to effect the greatest good 10 ; 
 and it would be well. 11 9. Why 12 didst thou 
 not seize 13 and slay me, that I might never shew 14 
 myself to men? 
 
 1 \\uvcLi, with Dat. 2 a.To. 3 rtfs, with Acc. 4 Part. 5 
 with Acc. and Inf. 6 —of men. 7 el ya£ u<pe\ov, with Inf. 8 a! -r o\\oi. 
 
 • Vva. 10 Plur. xaXwi (§ 1^3, 2. a.). **t/. 13 Aor. Part. 
 
 -4 Aor, 
 
 § 182. II. Adjective-Sentences. 
 
 1. Adjective-Sentences are Adjectives or Participles 
 expanded into a sentence , and, like Adjectives, define 
 more fully a Substantive or a substantive-Pronoun; 
 e. g. oi 7roXipioi, o t Ik Trjg tto\ tcog air i (jr vy ov 
 
5 182.] ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 461 
 
 (=o t 7 ToXt/nioi (K rijg iroAewg cnro(pivj6vTEg\ the 
 enemy, to h o fled from the city; ra npayyara, 
 a ’A\i^avSpog t tt p a % £ v ( = ra vir' ’AXt^avSpou 
 7 T pa^Oivra 7 rpay/uara), the deeds, which Alex¬ 
 ander per formed. These sentences are intro¬ 
 duced by the rclative-Pronouns o g, rj, 6, 6 g r i e, 
 
 •ti « r j 
 
 i] r i g, o r t, oiof, 0 £C. 
 
 2. The relative-Pronoun agrees in Gender and 
 N u mb er with the Substantive (standing in the prin¬ 
 cipal sentence) to which it refers, in the same manner 
 as the attributive Adjective with its Substantive; 
 but its C as e is determined by the Predicate standing 
 in the subordinate sentence ; e. g/O avrjp, ov z g, 
 the man, whom you saw ; — h aperr), fj g navreg 
 oi ayaOdi t tt l 0 v fi o v a t v, the virtue , w hie h all 
 qood men desire ;—ol arpaTiCoTai , o I g fia^o i±zQ a, 
 the soldiers, whom we are fighting. 
 
 Obs. 1. When, in adjective-sentences, the Relative with a,Part. 
 is dependent on a finite Vei'b, we usually translate the Part, into 
 English by the Inf., e. g/O <piXot, «"» «/ £ a r t 9 v n x o t a., the friend, 
 whom I know to he dead. (Comp. the La,t., amicus, quern 
 scio mortuum esse). 
 
 Obs. 2. When a predicative Substantive stands in an adjective- 
 sentence, very frequently the Relative does not agree in Gender 
 and Number with the Substantive to which it refers, but, by means 
 of a kind of Attraction, with th e pr edicativ eSub stan- 
 tive. The Verb of the adjective-sentence is usually a Verb signify¬ 
 ing to be, to name, to call j e. g. ‘H £» rgeortrxi, 2 xxXtiTxt 
 
 n*iXo6<rtov a -to fit. a, the course of the river which is called the 
 Pelusian mouth turns to the east; (here 2 takes the Gender of 
 the predicative aro/xx, instead of that of its Antecedent 
 -A k o a, at zotXouvToci x X s <*5 i s <r>jf K.uor^ov, the heights, which 
 are called the keys of Cyprus*— Us^amb V®os, 2v xxivxx.no 
 xuXouciv, the Persian sword, which they call ‘acinaces '— 
 A o y o i tir'iv tv Ixxtrrois ti/xuv, x s s X or i 2 x s ovoy.xZ l o[/.tt, thoughts 
 are in each of us, which we call hopes. 
 
 Obs. 3. A peculiarity with respect to Number occurs in the 
 phrases, i <r ri v uv, olt, o v ?, x, sunt quorum, guibus, quos,guce. 
 These formulae are treated in all respects as substantive-Pro¬ 
 nouns, as the Number of the Relative has no influence on that of the 
 Verb Urn, nor is the Tense changed when the context relates to 
 past or future time. 
 
 i 
 
462 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. IL 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 e a r 1 * 
 
 U V 
 
 (=* v ! a v) 
 
 a<re<r%tvo. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 t <r r tv 
 
 o7s 
 
 (=i v to 1 f) 
 
 ovy^ ouru; 
 
 Ace. 
 
 e cr r 1 v 
 
 cl 
 
 0 V s 
 
 (=i v / a v s) 
 
 otxtxriivtv. 
 
 3. The Person of the Verb in an adjective-sen¬ 
 tence is determined by the Substantive or Pronoun 
 (expressed or understood) to which the Relative refers ; 
 e. g. ’E 7 <*>J 6 C ypa(j)(i ),—<r v, 6 c 7 oacpeig ,—6 avr)p 
 or I k e l v o g, oc 7 pa<pEi. Hence, after a Vocative the 
 second Person is regularly used; e. g. V A v 6 p w tt e, 
 6 c u^ac roiavra kokcl ett 01 r)<* a g, 0 man, who 
 didst infl ict such evils on its / 
 
 4. The Relative is Plural when it refers to two 
 or more objects; and when the Gender of the Sub¬ 
 stantives is the same , the Relative agrees with them in 
 Gender ; the Relative, however, is often in the 
 Neuter , when the Substantives denote inanimate ob¬ 
 jects. 
 
 \ 
 
 'H ghrvp iccii i) 0 v y ar rj p, a g **the mo¬ 
 ther and daughter , whom you saw.—'Opa 
 avrov KEKoaprjpEiov kcu ocjiOaX/uiijjv i) 7 roypa<py kol 
 Xpwparog e v t p i\p e l kuI k 6 paig 7rpog0tToig , a 
 $ 1 ) v 6 pi pa rjv tv M tiSoig, he sees him adorned with 
 the painted eyelids , the cosmetics and the artificial locks , 
 whic h were customary amongst the Medes. 
 
 5. When the Substantives are of different Genders , 
 the Relative, when persons are spoken of, agrees with 
 the Masculine rather than the Feminine ; but when 
 things are spoken of, it is usually Neuter. 
 
 f O a v rj p Kai ri 7 v v u, o 1 7 rapa <rl ijXSov, the 
 man and woman, who came to thee. — -Ukoihv 
 UkXyioiciZovteq TTEpi te rroXipov kol elphvrig, a yEyi(TTr)v 
 e\u Svvapiv iv up riov avOpiorrivv fi'up, we have come , 
 deliberating about war and peace , which are of 
 very great moment in the life of man. 
 
ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 
 
 463 
 
 § 132.] 
 
 6 . When the Relative should ho in the j4.cc., and 
 refers to a Substantive in the Gen. oi Dat., it is 
 generally put in the same Case cts its Substantive, 
 when the adjective-sentence has nearly the force of 
 an attributive Adjective or Participle. This con¬ 
 struction is called A ttr action of the Relative. The 
 Substantive frequently stands in the relative sentence. 
 
 ’ApiW Siduoa/upov irowrog avOpwirtov wv 
 UjUfTc tffjuev (instead of owe lagtv) tiroiyatv, Arion 
 ivas the first among men known to us, who 
 composed a dithyramb .—'O arparrjyoc yye ryv arpa- 
 Tiav enro t to v tt o X s to v <b v (instead of ag f z 7T 11 - 
 (7 £ v (= rwy irtiaOtiaibv), the general led his army 
 from the cities 'which he h ad p e r - 
 s u a de d. —2uv role Oyaavpoig ol g (instead of 
 oug) 6 iraTrjo icariXi tt £ v (= rotg vtto rob Trarpbg 
 KaraXeKpOuauv), with the treasures w hich his 
 father l e ft — Kupoe TTpogriXOt a v v y £ i \ f # © v va ~ 
 g £ i , Cyrus came with the for ce iv hie h^ h e 
 h a d. —’Eyo) ffoi u maypovyai, rjv 6 Otog tv Sicw, a v 0 
 fa v (= avrt tovtwv, a) a v tgol S a v £ i cr y g 
 TrXziovog a^ta Evtpytrrjativ, I promise you that I will 
 repay you benefits many-fold greater , in return 
 forw hat you will lend me, if God grant me 
 
 success. 
 
 7. The Relatives oiog, o a o g, b g r i g o v 
 *) XiKog, both as Accusatives and Nominatives, are 
 attracted , when the Verb tl vat and a Subject for¬ 
 mally expressed are in the relative clause; e. g. oiog 
 ci, tl, oiog hetivog ionv or olog ^paryg tarty. This 
 attraction is brought about in the following man¬ 
 ner ; _the Demonstrative in the Gen., Dat. or Acc., 
 
 to which the Relative refers, is omitted , and the Re¬ 
 lative is put in the Case of the preceding Substantive 
 or of the (omitted) substantival Demonstrative ; the 
 Verb aval of the relative-clause is also omitted , and 
 
464 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 the Subject of the relative-clause is put in the Case of 
 the Relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective- 
 clause is, in all respects, equivalent to an inflected 
 Adjective; moreover, the connexion of the adjective- 
 clause with its Substantive is still more complete and 
 intimate , when the Substantive is placed in the ad¬ 
 jective-clause; e. g. in the full and natural form of 
 the sentence ^apl^opai av<$p\ rotovnp , olog av el, by 
 omitting the Demonstrative toiovtm , to which the 
 Relative otog refers, (flog is attracted into the Case 
 of the preceding Substantive av$pl, and by omitting 
 a of the relative-sentence, its Subject av is at¬ 
 tracted into the Case of the Relative, and we have 
 the common form yao/£opat avdpl (flip aol , or (by 
 transposition) \api^ouai oup aoi av$pl. In English 
 the above Relatives may be translated by ‘as’ or 
 ‘such a s\ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 tgev o i o v a o v a, v d (> o g 
 
 (I love {such a man as you). 
 
 % ) u.(/iZ ) oy,a.i ofco trotav^gi. 
 i-rouvu) o t ov <rt « » £ g et. 
 tgco o l co v v fjc Co v a v g v. 
 Xoc/st^oftoci o l o i s vfjciv<xv'b(>a.ait. 
 ivrcuvu o’l o v s 1 p. a. s a v £ g a j . 
 
 \oS> of o v a oZ. 
 
 XudIZ > o[zu.i of oo ff o i. 
 Wa/vcD o l o v a s. 
 
 Igct of co v v p u> v. 
 %afi%opoii of o is v p 7 v. 
 iiracivcu ofovg v pa. s. 
 
 Obs. 4. Attraction also takes place, when of os or of os r s is 
 used instead of u s r t with the Inf., signifying I am of such a 
 nature or character that—{= is sum,qui, with the Subj .), hence, 
 J Can , 6 . g. An\e%0yiv 'S.tohx.m to/outm o f co pr^Ti \vTt7a0ai, pr\r 
 O g y/ ? £ a 6oci, I conversed with such a Stoic as could neither 
 be grieved nor irritated. The Demonstrative is generally 
 
 omitted J e. g. Msvjjv t*jv tu>v o.vQfj’fuv yXcurrav tToltjaav ol 6toi of a t 
 a. g 6 g o Z v ty)v Qcovnv, the gods made the human tongue alone c ap a - 
 ble of uttering articulate sounds; (here the Demonstrative 
 •rjtocvrvv, which is the correlative of ofeev, is omitted). 
 
 Obs. 5. Sometimes, in the case of adjective-sentences, an attrac¬ 
 tion occurs quite the reverse of that just mentioned, when the Re¬ 
 lative does not take the Case of its Substantive, but the Substan¬ 
 tive the Case of the Relative which refers to it. This may be called 
 inverted Attraction', e. g. T ij v o l a- i a. v (instead of rj ol<riu) 
 ti v o <rcirn(> xocrtXtTt ru vico, ov orXiiovos serr/v, the property 
 which the father left to his son is worth no more. This inverted At¬ 
 traction is very common in the case of o 1 2 1 \ s o s r is ol k jio one , 
 who not— every one) after an omitted i 3 -r/(v). 
 
§ 182.] 
 
 ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 
 
 465 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 oi^tts os rtf ou* av raurx <roifouiv 
 
 (there is no one, who would not do this). 
 
 o v'htvos "orou ou xxrtyiXxa'to 
 
 (there was no one, whom he did not ridicule). 
 
 o u $ t v i or of o u k iorsxgivctro 
 
 {there was no one, whom he did not answer). 
 
 ov^eva o v r i v ot ou xctrixXuuat* 
 
 {he bewailed every owe). 
 
 8 . On the use of the Moods in adjective-sentences, 
 the following remarks should be attended to:— 
 
 (a) The Ind. is used, when the attributive qualifi¬ 
 cation (i. e. the idea contained in the Predicate) is 
 represented as something actual or real; e. g. ttoXiq, 
 rj k riZerai, rj l k r t a 9 rj, rj kt i a 6 r\ a e r a t. 
 The Ind. Put. is very frequently used (even after a 
 historical Tense, § 189, 5) to denote a purpose , or 
 what is intended to happen (§ 152, b); e. g. Srparij- 
 yovg aioovvrai, o i q^AiTTTTtp 7r o A £ p i] <r o v <r i v, 
 q u i cum Philippo b e 11 u m g e r a n t, they choose 
 generals who shall fight (=to fight) with Philip. 
 Also, after negations , the Ind. is used in Greek, where 
 the Latin employs the Subj.; e. g. flap’ Ipoi ou- 
 Sc* c Igtiv, d grig pi) bcavog l gt iv ttra irotfiv ipoi, 
 nemo est meorum, qui facere non p o s s i t paria 
 atque ego. 
 
 (b) The Relative with a v, e. g. oc av, rj av, 6 ay, 
 ocrtc ay, &c., is followed by the Subj., when the 
 Verb of the principal clause is one of the principal 
 Tenses (Pres., Perf. or Fut.), if the attributive qua¬ 
 lification is to be represented as merely conceived or 
 assumed. Hence it is also used to designate quality 
 and size i n d efi nit ely, and also to express i n - 
 definite frequency (as often as). The 
 adjective-sentence may generally be considered as 
 a conditional sentence, and the Relative with av may 
 be resolved into the Conjunction lav with tiq (° r 
 some other Pronoun) and the Subj. 
 
 Ouc a v (=r£ay Tivag) fleXrioue ripuv avruv 
 
466 sub-ordination. [Chap. If. 
 
 t] y t] <t ct) n 8 0 a, rovroig noXXaKig kcu avev avayKtjg 
 iOiXo/usv nsi'BeaOat, whomsoever we think (or, 
 if we think any men ) superior to ourselves, these we are 
 often willing to obey, even without compulsion. —’A v- 
 Qpionoi tn ovSlvag juaAAov fruviaravrai rj tnl rovrovg, 
 ovg av (=tav nvag) ataButvrac ap^iiv avriov 
 inixupouvrac, men combine against none more than 
 against those whom they see endeavouring to rule 
 them. 
 
 (c) The Relative (with out av) is used with the 
 Opt., in the first place, in the same sense as with 
 the Subj. and av, but referring to a historical Tense. 
 Hence, it is used in general and indefinite state¬ 
 ments; as also to express indefinite frequency ,— in 
 which case the Verb of the principal sentence is 
 usually in the Impf. Here, also, the adjective-sen¬ 
 tence may be resolved by d with the Opt. 
 
 Ot noXt/uiot navrag 6 r w (=u nvi ) evrv- 
 
 \ o t £ v, Kal net tSag Kal yvvalKag, antKTtivov, the eiie- 
 my killed all, one after another , both children and wo¬ 
 men, whomsoever they me t. —<J>t Aoue, 6 a ov g 
 noiri<raiTO Kal evvovg yvoiiq ovrag, Kal iKavnvg 
 k p i v e t € crvvEpyoug dvai , on r v y \ a v o i /iouAd- 
 mvog KaTtpyaZzoOai, opoXoytiTai npog navriov Kau¬ 
 ri arog Srj yevicrOai Oepantvtiv , Cyrus is acknow¬ 
 ledged by all to have been most excellent in serving 
 whomsoever he might make his friends, and 
 those whom he might find well-disposed to¬ 
 wards him, and might judge to be fit co-operators 
 in whatever he might happen to ivish to 
 accomplish. 
 
 (d) Secondly, the Opt. is used, when the attribu¬ 
 tive qualification is to be represented as a mere sup - 
 position , conjecture or assumption. The adjective-sen¬ 
 tence is then considered as an uncertain or doubt/ul 
 
j 182.] ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 4G7 
 
 condition [§ 153, 1. b. (j3)], or forms a part of a sen¬ 
 tence expressing a wish. 
 
 Tou avrov \iytiv, a gn acicpijjg c i <5 £ i jj, cj)£i$£oQ<u 
 & 7 , one mt<s£ avoid saying what he does not 
 fully know ( =if\perhaps, he does not fully know 
 it). — ’'EpSot rig, f)v eicaarog slSsin Ti\vr]v, any 
 one c an practise the art with which he is a c- 
 quain ted (=if he is acquainted with it). 
 
 (e) The Opt. with civ is used, when the attribu¬ 
 tive qualification is to be represented as a conditional 
 supposition , conjecture, assumption or undetermined 
 possibility (§ 153, 2. c.). 
 
 Ouk tanv, o r t dv ng /lihZov rovrov kukov 7T a 9 o i, 
 there is no evil, which any one can experi¬ 
 ence, greater than this. 
 
 (f) The Ind. of the historical Tenses (Impf., Plpf., 
 Aor.) is used w ith d v, when it is to be indicated that 
 the attributive qualification could take place only 
 under a certain condition, but did not take place, be¬ 
 cause the condition was not fulfilled [§ 153, 2. a. (a)]; 
 e. g. H TToXig, rjv oi 7 ro\igicn ovic av £7 ropOncrav, 
 a oi arpanuTcu f/3oi'i0ri<Tav, quam hostes non diruis- 
 sent, si milites auxilio venissent, the city, which the 
 enemy would not have sacked, ij the soldiers 
 had come to its aid. 
 
 CIL 
 
 (Exercise on § 182.) 
 
 1. Many acts have ere-this become 1 the occasions 
 of very-great advantages, which, at-first 2 , all sup¬ 
 posed 1 to" be calamities 3 . 2. Who would 4 not praise 1 
 you (pi.), who have fought 1 boldly for the freedom 
 of your i-=the) native-land? 3. The ungrateful 
 forgot us, who have conferred on them 
 
463 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 great benefits 5 . 4. There-are men who are 
 esteemed-happy 14 by all more than by themselves. 5. 
 Cannot thy brother, O Chaerecrates, said Socrates, 
 please 1 any-one, or doth he please some very 
 highly 6 ? 6. The enemy ravaged some 7 portions of 
 our land. 7. In the young-man there dwells 8 a fear, 
 which we call shame. 8. For the acquisition of a 
 friend, which is said to be a very-great blessing, we 
 see that the multitude care little. 9. There-arose 
 confused-noises, cries and shoutings, which is com¬ 
 mon to all who-fight-at-sea. 9 10. Of the nations 
 which we know in Asia, the Persians rule, but the 
 Syrians, Phrygians and Lydians are dependent 10 . 11. 
 I have never-yet esteemed'a rich man happy 11 , 
 who-enjoys 12 nothing of what he possesses. 12. We 
 must remember not only the death of the departed, 
 but also the virtue which they have left-behind. 
 13. Many indeed praise fair words, but nevertheless 
 do otherwise 13 and contrary-to what they have 
 praised 1 . 14. Do nothing which thou dost not un¬ 
 derstand. 15. A rational man, if-he-has-lost 14 a son or 
 anything else which he prizes very highly, 
 will bear it more-easily than others. 16. I have sent 1 
 thee this wine, said Cyrus, and I pray thee to drink 1 
 it to-day with those-whom thou lovest most. 1 7. 
 The tyrant has suffered sufficient punish¬ 
 ment 15 for-what he has done 1 . 18. The general led- 
 away 1 his (=the) army from the cities which he had 
 subdued 1 . 19. The Persians were not able 16 
 to fight 1 courageously against men so brave as were 
 the Athenians and Lacedaemonians. 20. To a man 
 such as thou art the citizens will cheerfully entrust 
 the government. 21. It is no trivial work to en- 
 gage-in-single-combat-with 17 a man like thee. 22. 
 Socrates was one of those who obey 18 reason 
 alone. 23. The barbarians had dwellings so built as 
 to be fitted to shelter 19 them both winter and summer 
 24. There was no danger which our (=the) fore- 
 
ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 
 
 469 
 
 §182.] ——--- 
 
 fathers did not undergo for the freedom of their 
 (=the) native-land. 25. There was no-one of those 
 present, except indeed Socrates himself, whom Apol- 
 lodorus did not move 20 by his weeping and complain¬ 
 ing 2 ^ • 
 
 26.’ What one does not* 2 possess, he cannot 4 give* 
 another. 27. It is not the golden sceptre that pre¬ 
 serves the royal-authority, but faithful friends, who 
 are the truest and surest sceptre for kings. 28. The 
 Phseacians gave Odysseus treasures, such-as he 
 would never have carried-off 24 from Troy, if he 
 had come unharmed to his native-land. 29. There 
 was then not-one of the Spartans, who, if the coun¬ 
 try had been-in-danger 26 , would not have been-will- 
 ing to die for it. 30. States are called very-fortunate 
 that 27 continue 28 most of their time in peace. 31. It 
 is a great mark of a good ruler, if the citizens volun¬ 
 tarily obey him and are-willing to stand-by him in 
 dangers. 32. A man is truly great, who can 29 ac¬ 
 complish 1 a great object by intellect 30 rather than by 
 strength of body. 33. He, at-sight-of 31 whom men 
 are stirred', and ardour and emulation seize every¬ 
 one he, I might assert 4 , has something of the kingly 
 nature. 34. The wives of the Assyrians prayed all 
 whom 33 they might meet, not to flee and leave them 
 behind 14 , but to succour 1 them. . 35. No-one could 
 take-pleasure-in 1 a man, who delights in dainty-food 
 and wine more than in friends. 36. Who could 
 hate owe, whom he knew to be-considered noble. 
 37. Socrates always said, that there was no 34 better 
 way to a (=the) good-reputation than that by-which 
 one would become 1 expert 35 at-that 36 in-which 36 
 he wished to appear so. 38. Those who take pay 
 for their (=the) instruction 37 Socrates called kid¬ 
 nappers of themselves, because 38 it was necessary for 
 them to converse with those from whom they might 
 receive pav. 39. No 34 city w.as-there, by-which tin .y 
 
 could-defend-themselves. 
 
470 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 -[CtfAP. II. 
 
 1 Ar l r ' l ==at tlie be 0^ning. 3 Sing. 4 § 153, 2. c. 6 to confer 
 .treat benefits on any one=fttyakx tuifytTM r,vx. « xai *6 VV . 7 ^ eut _ 
 
 , ur * if(>osuv at. 9 § 148,6. 10 =are governed. 11 to esteem 
 
 happy—jauKa^iu. 12 Part. 13 Neut. Sing, of oixxeg. 14 Aor. Part. 
 K in punishment—'hibivou ripufien (lit. to give vengeance). 
 
 to be able=oi6v rt sU*. 17 Aor. of p.ovo/xu%t7v (with Dat.). 18 Sav : 
 was suck as to obey , &C. 19 <rriyuv. 20 Aor. of xaraxXa 9 . 21 aya- 
 
 vaxretK _ fxf,. 23 *<r» } . 24 \%ahtaSat. 25 tl, with Aor. Ind. 26 Gen. 
 
 !• e- {f they, &c. 28 liariXti*. 29 i. e. if he can, &c. 30 yvuu*. 
 
 , vr, (; " Aor. Sing, of (with Dat.) 33 Sin^. of kt*. 
 
 oh. K^goocU 36 Acc. 37 Gen. of Z^Xt*. 38 Ur*. 
 
 Si 
 
 § 183. III. Adverbial-Sentences. 
 
 Adverbial-sentences are Adverbs or Participles used 
 adverbially (§ 176* 1) expanded into a sentence , and, 
 like Adveibs, denote an adverbial Object, i. e. sucli 
 an Object as merely defines the Predicate, (but does 
 not, like the Object expressed by the substantive- 
 sentence, complete it); e. g. w O re to Zap fiXQ e (=tou 
 haaoQ tXUdvrog), ra dvOq OdXXu , when the sp ring 
 comes, the flowers bloom. 
 
 A. Adverbial Sentences of Place and Time. 
 
 1. Adverbial-sentences of place are introduced by 
 the relative Adverbs of place, ou, Stti?, forou, ZvQa, 
 iva (ubi); odsv, ZvOtv (unde); ol, ottoi, ottjj (quo), 
 and, like Adverbs of place, express the three rela¬ 
 tions, Where , IP'toce, Whither. The use of the 
 Moods in adverbial-sentences of place is, in all 
 respects, like that in adjective-sentences. 
 
 2. Adverbial sentences of time are introduced by 
 the following Conjunctions z — 
 
 a - To d f not f tliat , one action is c otemporaneous with 
 •another,—ori, irjn, u S , fivUa, (which indicate a point of time) : 
 a,no. to cy t tu( } while, (which indicate a space of time). 
 
adverbial-sentence. 
 
 471 
 
 § 133 .] 
 
 b. To denote that one action is prior to another,— iru, tru'd/), 
 postquam, ol, ig fcw, ex quo, and ip' .5, since. / 
 
 c To denote that one action succeeds, another, r^v, prius- 
 
 quam, 1*e, w «* 2, ft™, p*xe rotf' 2ratf ’ WW* 
 
 3. On the use of the Moods , the following remarks 
 
 should be attended to:— , 
 
 (a) The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be 
 
 represented as a fact; hence, in mentioning actual 
 
 events or occurrences. 
 
 'a? fifiloa r«X‘ CTTa lycySvit, atri )X9ov, as 
 SO-on as'it was day, they departed (u>e rax*- 
 CTra= _q Uum primum).— Ov i rporepov hravaavro, tt p t v 
 TOv Tt rrartpa k roD arpaTOTrtSov p e r e tt t p ip a v r o, 
 Ka \ rwv (biXwv avrov tovq piv cnr ttcrtiv av, tovq 
 §» U rijg ttoXecuq i £ t (5 a X o v, they did not cease , 
 until they s ent f or their father from the camp , 
 and put to death some of his friends and ban¬ 
 ish e d others from the city.—' Epa X ovTo, pexpi OL 
 >A0r,va7ot avUXeuvav, they fought u n 111 the 
 Athenians sailed away . 
 
 ('b') The Subj. is used, when the statement of time 
 or the assertion involved in the Predicate, is repie- 
 rented as something conceived and general, . and reter*, 
 at the same time, to a Predicate of the principal sen¬ 
 tence, the Verb of which is in one of the principal 
 Tenses. The modal Adverb avis united with the 
 Conjunctions; e. g. orav, korav, h^iic av, tnav 
 
 (or trrbv), ineiSciv, irplv av, av, €QT 
 
 Accordingly, the Subj. is used with the above Con- 
 junctions from Sr a v to irp'iv a v, when the state 
 xnent of time is also to be represented as the condi¬ 
 tion, under which the Predicate of the principal sen¬ 
 tence will take place. But with the Conjunctions 
 which signify ‘ till,' the Subj. expresses an object 
 expected and' aimed at. In like manner, also, thy 
 Subj. is used to denote indefinite frequency , the 
 
SUB-ORDINATION. [CHAP. II. 
 
 Conjunctions are then translated by ‘ as often as,' or 
 whenever.* 
 
 ’E tte t 8 h V av (3ovXrj SiaXeyeaOat, u>g iyu Sv- 
 ra/xai ei TEcrOar, tote aoi SiaXi^opai, whenever (or, 
 if) you w i s li to discourse so that I can follow, then I 
 ivill discourse with you.—Ov i rpoTEpov nainropai, tt p \ v 
 av eX to te kcu 7r v p ut <j cd rac ’A Orjvag, I will not 
 cease until I have taken and burned 
 Athens . Ewe av a w £ rj t a 1 to ok acpog, tote 
 kcu vavTrjv kcu KvfiepvrjTrjv TrpoOvpovg eIvcu (dum 
 servari possit), while (or, 50 long as) the ship 
 can be saved, the sailor and the pilot should be 
 active. O tt 6 t a v arpaTOTTE^Eviovrai oi 
 pap (3 a pot ftamXEig, Tafpov 7r£pif3ci\XovTaL EV 7 T£Ttog Sia 
 rrjv 7roXvx£tptav, as often as (or, whenever) 
 the barbarian kings encamp , they easily entrench 
 themselves on account of the great number of workmen. 
 
 (c) The Opt. is used with Conjunctions of time, 
 7 (a) , w hen the conception or hypothesis refers to a 
 historical Tense in the principal clause. When the 
 Opt. is used to denote indefinite frequency [a s oft e n 
 a s, comp, (b)], the Impfi generally stands in the 
 principal sentence; ((3) when the statement of time 
 is to be considered also as a condition of the principal 
 sentence, and such a condition as appears as a present 
 ov future uncertainty , as a mere supposition , conjec¬ 
 ture, assumption or undetermined possibility [§ 153, 1. 
 h* (/3)]« With the Opt. the Conjunctions are used 
 without av; e. g. 6Vf, hrti, &c., (not otuv, 
 Ittclv, &C.). 
 
 Ou TTpOTEpOV ETTavaaTO, 7T p t V £ X O t TE Ka\ TT V p O)- 
 e i e Tag ’AOrivag, he did not cease , until he 
 took and burned A thens. — O tt 6 r e (as of ten 
 a f->jfj ienever 'i if ever) ffrparoireSevoivTo 
 <01 (3dp[3apOl f3aOl/\ttg, TCL(ppOV TTEptE^uXXoVTO 
 evTTETug 8m Tt)v noXvxupLav.—'O tt 6 r e to (piXooo<ptiv 
 
ADVERBIAL-SENTENCES. 
 
 473 
 
 § 183 .] 
 
 aitrypov i) y rj <t a i fi rj v tlvai, ouS’ av avOownov vopi- 
 aatpL l/jLctvTov tivai, if I believed it disgraceful 
 to be a philosopher, I would not even think myself a 
 man. So also, o te pi) (with Opt.)=nisi. 
 
 Obs. In addition to the constructions already mentioned, the 
 Conjunction ?r^/» takes the Inf., especially after affirma¬ 
 tive sentences containing one of the principal Tenses, when the 
 action is to be represented as an approximate indication of thi 
 point of time. The Subject of the Inf. is put in the A cc. ; (on 
 Attraction, see § 172, 3). A ot^tTos, t ft v a,t%p.uXu)rous y *»«* 
 a 6 a. i rout ’E t r (> t e u s, lvt7%tv uurots ^avov %oXov, b ef 0 r e the 
 Eretrians were taken captive , Darius cherished 
 hitter wrath against them. — r H truv Aage/y, (Z x a t \ s u tr a. t 
 
 ( = (ZatriXea yv>k<r6oti), yiyovorts rpus orx7}tt, three children were born to 
 Darius b ef ore he was king. Similarly, orfn^ov % and the 
 Epic *fya S are followed by the Inf. 
 
 cm. 
 
 (Exercise on § 183.) 
 
 1. The soul is freest when it leaves the body. 2. 
 Agesilaus offered-sacrifice and waited until the fugi¬ 
 tives had brought 1 the sacrifice 2 to Po¬ 
 seidon {Neptune). 3. The Athenians did not cease t o 
 be angry with 3 Pericles, until 4 they had pun¬ 
 ished 1 him by a fine 5 . 4. When men have robbed 1 
 or stolen 1 anything, they are punished. 5. Do not 
 decide 1 before thou hast heard 1 the plea of both. 
 6. We must 6 resolutely perform 7 the journey, till 
 we have reached 1 the goal. 7. What does-it-profit 
 some to be-rich, when they do not 8 understand-how 
 to use riches? 8. Those who 9 have received 
 
 a kindness 10 we call ungrateful, if when able to 
 return the favour 11 they do not return it. 
 9. It was not permitted to go-in 12 to the general when 
 he was not 8 at-leisure. 10. The Chalcidians gave- 
 way 13 as-often-as the enemy charged, but as-they-re- 
 treated 14 they pressed-on and threw-javelins. 11. 
 Whenever young-men associated-with Socrates, 
 they made progress in virtue 15 . 12. He 
 
474 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. IL 
 
 who is hungry voluntarily can-cat 10 when he will 
 and he who js thirsty voluntarily can-drink ls when 
 lie will; hut he who 9 suffers this 11 of necessity has- 
 not-the-power 18 to cease to hunger and thirst when 
 he will. 13. Eat not before thou art-hungry, and 
 drink not before thou art-thirsty! 14. Painless is 
 
 tiie death which-happens* 9 before one expects 20 . 15. 
 There is a tradition, that the island 21 of Delos, be¬ 
 fore Apollo appeared 1 to men, was-concealed 22 by 
 the ocean 23 . J 
 
 1 Aor. 2 to bring a sacrifice— (vaiav troitTo-Pui. 3 U loyr, sVs/v (Part. \ 
 
 ‘ • h7 t with Acc. and* In f.^ 5 
 
 Ja 177, 5 t > f 148 ,’ 6 * ?*!'* xrzt ‘ v ( Aor> )■ 11 X*V V IvroUhxt (Aor.). 
 Aor. of ustextrfeu. 13 ivjibovui, 14 Pres. Part, of airavWv. 1 3 to 
 
 wYl r£ r< o ,reS& \\ n ^ n 9 — ^OKOTruv, Ur^ovoci vrpe S or W/ rt. 
 
 20 1 C \ p ? 1 ?- 18 t&crri, with Dat. 19 Aor. Part. 
 
 (Aor.), Acc. with Inf. 22 Pres. yos . 
 
 B. Causal Adverbial-Sentences. 
 
 § 184. a. Adverbial-Sentences denoting Cause. 
 
 There are two classes of Adverbial-Sentences de¬ 
 noting the cause, reason or motive ;— 
 
 . L Such as are introduced by the Conjunctions of 
 time, 6 r f, 6 7T o r c, a> c, £ tt 1 i, quoniam (=the 
 lench puisque), since, i 7r eiSr/, quoniam;—the 
 cause being considered either as cotemp oraneous (3™, 
 o7tot£, dig) with the Predicate of the principal sen- 
 tence, or prior (bn(, breiSt,) to it. The Ind. is the 
 usual M^od in these adverbial-sentences; e. g. Mrj 
 pe kteiv , i 7T £ l ov% opoyaarpioc “EKTOpOQ ^ElUt, 
 (quoniam—non sum), do not slag me, since lam 
 not a brother of Hector.— T a roivvx, raW otriog 
 £ Y £ i, npogr'iKU TrpoOvpwQ WeXeiv ukoveiv, a s , then , 
 
 these Hangs are so, you ought to be willing to listen 
 with alacrity. 
 
$ i85.] 
 
 ADVERBIAL-SENTENCES. 
 
 47.5 
 
 2. Such as are introduced by the Conjunctions 
 vri and Si or i f because. With these also the 
 Ind. is the Mood usually employed; e. g. 'Apa to 
 oaiov, oti oaiov l a t i, (piXsirai vtto riiov Oeiov* r), 
 on $ i \ si t a i, baiov sartv ; is what is holy loved by 
 the gods because it is holy, or is it holy be¬ 
 cause it is loved? 
 
 § 185. b. Conditional Adverbial-Sentences. 
 
 1. The second kind of causal adverbial-sentences 
 are those which express a condition, and are intro¬ 
 duced by the Conjunctions s l and lav (=r\ v, a v, 
 which must not be confounded with the modal Ad¬ 
 verb av; see § 153, 2). The principal clause ex¬ 
 presses the consequent of the condition in the subor¬ 
 dinate clause. As the hypothetical clause precedes 
 the consequent, the former is called the Protasis 
 or Antecedent, the latter, the Apoddsis or 
 Consequent. 
 
 2. In Greek there are four different ways of ex¬ 
 pressing conditionality:^- 
 
 (i) The Protasis has si with the Ind., and the 
 Apodosis likewise the Ind. (sometimes also 
 the Imper.). In this case both the condition 
 and the consequent are represented as a reality 
 or fact, and hence as certain. 
 
 Ei tovto \systg, ayapravsig, ifyou 
 say this (admitted or assumed as a fact), 
 you err. — Ei si a i j3ujyoi, slat ical Qsoi, 
 if there are altars (an admitted fact), 
 there are also gods. — Ei sari dsog, ao<p6g 
 iar iv, if there is a God, he is wise .—• 
 £< ravra 7rs7roiTjKag, liraivsXaOai a^iog s 1, 
 
476 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 if you have done this, you deserve 
 to he praised. — Et n e t * g, kqi eSiSov, if 
 he had anything (or, whatever he had), 
 h e also g a v e. — Et EppovTrjaE, teat 
 V err p a ip e v, if it thundered, it also 
 lightene d. — Et ravra ettettoitikei , 
 hyapTriKE i, he had erred, if he had 
 done this. Ei tovto A e % e i g, agaprrjcry, 
 if you will say (or, if you say ) 
 this, you will er r. — Et tl So g, 
 
 if you have anything (or, whatever 
 you have), giv e it. 
 
 (2) The Protasis has e l with the Tnd. of a histo¬ 
 rical Tense, and the Apodosis has also the 
 Ind. of a historical Tense with a v. This 
 form is used, when the reality of the con¬ 
 dition and of the consequent is to he de¬ 
 nied. It is asserted that something might 
 have taken place under a certain condition, hut 
 did n o t, because the condition was not fulfilled. 
 
 Ei' ti ei x* v, IS tS ov a v, si quid habuisset, 
 dedisset (nunc autem nihil habet; ergo nihil 
 dare potest), if he had [or, if he had had] 
 anything, he would give [or, he would 
 have given] it, (but he has nothing, con¬ 
 sequently he can give nothing). — Et tovto 
 e A ey Eg, ypapravEg a v, si hoc dixisses, 
 errasses, if you had said this, you 
 would have erre d. —Et tovto eA s£ag, 
 rjpapTEg av (Aor. instead of the Plpf.), si 
 hoc dixisses, errasses, if you had said 
 this, you would have erred (but you 
 have not said it, consequently you cannot 
 have erred).— Et In EioOvtv, o vie av hp- 
 P w a t o v v, si obedissem, non aggrotarem, if 
 had been persuaded (then), / 
 
§ 1S5.J 
 
 ADVERBIAL-SENTENCES. 
 
 477 
 
 would not be sick (now)in this last 
 sentence, the condition refers to the past, the 
 consequent to the present. 
 
 (3) The Protasis has lav with the Subj., and the 
 Apodosis has the Pres., or more frequently 
 the Put., of the Ind. (but sometimes the 
 Imper.). The condition is then represented 
 as a supposition, the accomplishment 
 of which is, however, expected; 
 the result of the hypothesis is represented by 
 the Ind. as certain or necessary. 
 
 ’E av (?>, av) rouro X i 7 y C, apapri } <r n, 
 if you say (will say) this, you w ill 
 e r r. (Whether you will actually say this 
 I do not yet know; but I expect, I assume, 
 that you will say it, and then it is a necessary 
 
 consequence that you err).—’Eav n£X«M £ v » 
 if we have (or, %f we 
 
 should have) anything (which we expect 
 is the case, or, which depends on^ circum¬ 
 stances), we will give it.- Eav tovto 
 X £ £ p c, a p apri'i cr rj, si hoc aixens, errabis. 
 
 (4) The Protasis has e I with the Opt., and the 
 J Apodosis the Opt. with av. (In this case 
 the Opt. Fut. is not used). By this form, both 
 the hypothesis and the consequent are repre¬ 
 sented as a present (or, more frequently, a 
 future) uncertainty, as an undetermined possi¬ 
 bility, a mere supposition, conjecture or as¬ 
 sumption, without any reference to the hypo¬ 
 thesis being real or not real, possible or im¬ 
 possible. 
 
 Ei Ti £ X O 1 C. 8 O i r) C av, if you had 
 anything (it being neither assumed nor de¬ 
 nied that you have), you would give it. 
 
 
478 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 Chap. II 
 
 —Et tovto o i c, a fia QT av o i q av, if 
 you were to say this , you would 
 err. — Ovk av V7revay Kai/UEv ovte to 
 Kavfia ovte to xpv^og, el E^airlvrjg y i - 
 y v o l r o, w e w ould not endure either 
 heat or cold , if it were to come on sud¬ 
 denly .— Et avayicaiov £ i tj aSnctiv rj aSiKtiaQat, 
 EXoLyqv av /uaWov aSiKtioOai i) aSiKEiv, if 
 it were necessary either to do wrong or to he 
 wronged , 1 should rather he wronged 
 than do wrong. 
 
 Obs. 1. E< with the 2nd. or i a» with the Subj. is frequently 
 followed, by the Opt. with « v j e. g. a tovto a sy its, u. p a. ^ tcc v o t f 
 uv, if you (really) say this , you xoould err ; lav toZto Ae'yvjy, 
 iftctgTtxvoisixv, if y ou say this (as I expect), you would err ; 
 on the other hand, 11 with the Opt. is sometimes followed by the 
 Ind., e. g. ii tovto A t yo n, a./u.agToivsis, if you should say 
 this, you certainly err. 
 
 Obs. 2 . E < with the Opt. is often used instead of a Conjunction 
 of time [§ 183, 3, (c)] to denote indefinite frequency with reference 
 to what is past. Then i! is translated by ‘as often as', 
 or ‘ whenever ’, and the principal clause has the Ind. of a his¬ 
 torical Tense, (usually the I m p f.), with or without a »; e. g. E 7 Tie 
 
 KA§ 0 X, 0 l *1 TCVV T(?0S TOVTO TiTOCy/XSVMV (cXotXiV&IV, 6 or CO I i V CC V, a S 
 
 oft en as (or, to he never) any one of those appointed to this work 
 seemed to Clearchus to be indolent, he would strike him .— 
 
 h i tis SatXfPOCTit tou uvTtksyot, tb <rijv vTotficriv i or a v rj y e * a » 
 
 orocrTtx. tov A oyov, if (or, whenever) any one contradicted 
 tiocrates about anything , he w o u l d (i. e. he was wont to) carry 
 back the whole argument to the original proposition. 
 
 Obs. 3 . With the Ind. of the historical Tenses, & v is usually 
 omitted in the Apodosis with expressions which denote the 
 Idea of necessity , duty, justice, possibility, freedom, inclination, 
 [such as thi. Verbal-adjectives in -rbf, tr^afijxi(v), xuifa b, 
 lixoi rjv, xaAov r\ aicr^ov b, xocXus Hb, t£ovkip*»\ , e/g. E l 
 
 ai 0 ’/t£ a ’’ ti tf&sWov \^yocaoca^oci, Socvcctov ocvt ccvtov Tgoect/rtTeov b, 
 
 mors prceferenda erat, if I were about to do any thing shameful, 
 death should be preferred to it. What is here expressed 
 absolutely in Greek is expressed with an implied condition in Eng¬ 
 lish, e. g. axos b, it would be fair, oda^oov riv, it would, be shameful. 
 
 Obs. 4 . The Protasis is occasionally omitted , and then the Opt. 
 with av stands without any conditional clause ; the Protasis, how¬ 
 ever, is then involved in an adjective-sentence, in a Participle, or 
 ixi some word of the sentence which may be expanded into a con¬ 
 ditional Protasis (e. g. the Adverb ovtus , or a Preposition with its 
 Case), or it is indicated by the context. v Og tuZtql k § y # 4 ( = & 1 
 
§ 185.] 
 
 ADVERBIAL-SE STOCKS. 
 
 479 
 
 Tty txZtx Xiy oi), u/u,x^t<xvoi a v, W Jl 0 6 V Sr (— if any Oils') 
 should say tii is, would err. — Txura. X s y u v, uy-aorivois a », 
 saying (== if you say) this , you would er r. — o £ <r (== s< ovr» 
 mows) y av L U pet e <T <xv 01 S, thus (—if you act thus) yon 
 too u Id err. Very often, however, the Protasis is altogether 
 wanting, particularly where it can be easily supplied, (e. g. bv 
 such phrases as, when one, wishes, if it is allowed, if I can, if cir¬ 
 cumstances favour ); e g. frovXo i p.** «* (sciL d buvxipr.v). The 
 Apodosis is also occasionally omitted. 
 
 CIV. 
 
 (Exercise on § 185.) 
 
 1. If we pursue virtue, we are-liappy. 2. If thou 
 wilt obey me, said Virtue to Hercules, thou wilt be¬ 
 come a good performer of what is noble 1 . 3. If thou 
 wishest the gods to be gracious to thee, thou must 
 worship them. 4. If thou art fond-of-learning, thou 
 wilt learn much 2 . 5. To all men death is the 
 bound of life, even though one shut-himself-up 3 in 
 a cell and watch 4 . 6. That which is unex¬ 
 pect e d 5 , if it be good, delights men the more, but 
 if it be fearful, it terrifies the more. 7. If thou 
 callest-to-mind the past 6 , thou wilt decide better 
 about the future. 8. If we have money, we shall 
 have friends. 9. The possession is nothing, unless 
 use be-therewith 7 10. If one supposed 8 thee to be 
 ungrateful towards thy (=tlie) parents, no-one, if- 
 he-benefitted 3 thee, would believe that he would re- 
 ceive-back the favour. 11. The whole time would 
 fail 8 us, if we should enumerate all the deeds of 
 Hercules. 12. If we should banish 8 from life the 
 love of fame, what then would become 8 
 of virtue 9 , or who would be-eager to do 8 any¬ 
 thing illustrious? 13. If thou shouldst be-willing to 
 take-hold-of 8 philosophy, thou wilt shortly 10 see 
 how-much thou wilt-be-distinguished-from others. 
 14. Wisdom would awaken 11 a vehement love 1 , if it 
 were seen by the eyes. 15. Alexander said: If I 
 
480 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 were not Alexander, I would be Diogenes. 16. I! 
 Socrates had not been 12 very-temperate himself, how 
 would he have made 8 others temperate? 17. When¬ 
 ever Astyages required anything, Cyrus observed 
 it first. 18. If ever any-one served 8 Cyrus in-any- 
 way 13 , when-he-had-given-a-command 14 , in-no-case 15 
 did he ever leave 8 his (=the) readiness unrewarded. 
 19. It would not bo well 16 , if the gods delighted 
 more in great offerings than in small. 20. If a 
 greater danger were-to 17 threaten 18 us there than 
 here, we must perhaps prefer the greatest-security 19 . 
 
 1 Plur. 2 <7roXv//.a.( : r\ sTvcti. 3 Aor. Part. 4 ry^Tv. 5 Say : the un¬ 
 expected. * ro <7ra.^.\n\v6oi. 7 <rgosi7vxt. 8 A or. 9 Say : what would 
 
 the good become to us any-longer ? 10 k» (7>^x^u. u = would afford. 
 
 I2 Impf. 13 ri. 14 Aor. Part, of T^fTarT£/». lb =tonoone. 
 16 xct>.k>s 17 geWuv. i8 i Ivxi. 19 Sup. of utrQuXfo. 
 
 § 186. c. Adverbial-Sentences denoting Consequence 
 
 or Effect. 
 
 Adverbial-sentences of consequence or effect are in¬ 
 troduced by the Conjunction o> c re (more rarely 
 we)? *that ‘so th at \ the correlative to which is 
 o v t (i) q in the principal clause; ovrwe, however, is 
 often omitted. 
 
 On the use of the Moods , the following remarks 
 should be attended to:— 
 
 (a) The Ind. is used, when the consequence or 
 effect is to be represented as a fact, something actually 
 accomplished; the Inf., on the contrary, is used, 
 when the consequence or effect is to be represented 
 as merely conceived , not actually accomplished, 
 but merely as possible or aimed at, or as the condi¬ 
 tional result of the affirmation in the principal clause 
 (on condition that , supposing that). 
 The negative Particle to be used with the Inf. is g r)< 
 
ADVEBBIAL-SENTENCES. 
 
 481 
 
 § 186.] 
 
 ^Apyog avSpwv E^ijptoOr} o v r to g, to g t e oi SouAo t 
 avriov e a \ o v tt avra ra 7 rpaypara, Argos was left s 0 
 destitute of men , that their slaves had all the 
 duties .—SwKparrjc irpog to pETpltov StiaQai TTEiraidEvgE' 
 vog rjv ov t to g, (ogre navv yiKpa KeKrrj/uevog navv 
 pqS'uog i x £ 1 v apKovvra, Socrates was s 0 educated to 
 moderate wants , as to hav e a sufficiency very easily , 
 though he possessed very little , (here the consequence 
 is not carried into effect, but is dependent solely on 
 the character of Socrates). 
 
 Obs. 1. If the Inf. after fyn has a special Subject of its own, 
 ■different from that of the principal sentence , it is put in the Acc. ; 
 but if the Subjects of doth sentences are the same, Attraction takes 
 place {§ 172, 3). 
 
 (b) The Opt. with a v is used, when the con¬ 
 sequence or effect is to be represented as a contin¬ 
 gent conjecture, supposition or assumption (§ 153, 
 2. c.). 
 
 (c) Finally, thelND.of the historical Tenses wi th 
 « v, or the Inf. with a v is used, when it is to be 
 indicated that the consequence or effect would take 
 place or would have taken place only under certain 
 conditions [§ 153, 2. a. (a) and d.]. 
 
 To^iktjv Kat tarpiKrjv icdi /uavTiKrjv ’A7roAAwv avEvptv, 
 ETTiOv/i'icig teal Eptorog rj'yquoi'JEi itravTog, to gr e kcu ovrog 
 * Eptorog av eiri fiaOririig, Apollo discovered archery, 
 medicine and the prophetic art , under the guidance of 
 desire and love, so that he must h e a disciple of 
 Eros. — IlavTfc oi 7 roA irat 7 roAfjUtKa o 7 rAa KaTECFKEua^ot , 
 to g t e rrjv ttoXiv ovrtog 17 y r\ g to a v (sc. ei Ei$Eg) 
 ttoXe/jlov EpycKTTiipiov ELvai , all the citizens were pi e- 
 paring weapons of war , so that you would 
 have thought (1. e. if you had seen it) that the 
 city was actually a manufactory for war. —01 (hot ourw 
 fioi ev rdig lEpoig EtJtjpnvtiv, to g r s kcu iSuortjv a v 
 y v to v a 1 , otl r^g povap\iag aTTE\E(r9ai p£ %ei* the 
 
482 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. IL 
 
 ands gave me such indications hy the auspices , that 
 even a private man might have 'perceived 
 (i. e. if he had been present) that I must abstain from 
 the government. 
 
 Obs. 2. Instead of Z> s r c with the Inf., signifying ed conditione, 
 ut, or ita , ut, (o n the condition that), i <p « r s is also used, 
 either with the Ind. Fut. or with the Inf. ; e. g. ’E-r) ravrt* 
 vvd't'TTXf&Bti rns 6 I) t e ut ovSsvof vpo>* (X () % 0 a l, I (five 
 
 up all c’aim to the government on this condition, that I 
 shall be ruled by no one of you. 
 
 Obs. 3. ‘n i is used with the Inf. in certain independent or pa¬ 
 renthetic phrases ; e. g. u s s l v e 7 », so to speak ; u s ye pot 3 o x % < r, 
 as it seems to me ; —is also omitted sometimes in such phrases ; 
 e g. o b -toXXm Xoyu to speak briefly; ixtyou Set'll, 
 
 almost (lit. so as to want but little). 
 
 cv. 
 
 (Exercise on § 186.) 
 
 1. Cyrus had soon killed-off 1 the beasts in the park, 
 so-that Astyages could 2 no-longer collect others for 
 him. 2. The Persians were so scattered by the 
 Greeks, that they could make resistance nowhere. 
 3. The Greeks were-obliged 3 to go-back again so-far 
 while fighting, that during the whole day they ad¬ 
 vanced 4 not more than twenty-five stadia, and 5 came 
 to the villages in the evening. 4. The Greeks 
 made so much clamour, that the enemy could hear 
 it; so-that even the nearest 6 of the enemy took-to- 
 flight 7 . 5. I n process of time 8 , Cyrus be¬ 
 came so filled-with modesty, as even to blush when 
 ever he met his (=the) parents. 6. God supplied 9 
 men with eyes to see the visible, and 10 ears to hear 
 the audible. 7. What law is-full-of so gross injus¬ 
 tice, as to deprive him of recompense who - gives* 
 away 11 something from his-own 12 and does 11 a hu¬ 
 mane deed? 8. The Athenians were-permitted 13 to 
 
 rule-over the remaining 14 Greeks, provided-that thev- 
 themselves obeyed th^ king of the Persians. 9. 
 
ADVERBIAL-SENT ENCES. 
 
 § 187.] 
 
 483 
 
 l 
 
 &»#r.us was very-ambitious, so that he underwent 
 everything for-the-sake-of 1 2 * . 5 being-praised. 10. The 
 generals stood-firm, that the enemy miodit not 
 thro w the wings into disorder 1 ' 6 . 11."There 
 are vessels at your command 17 , so-that you 
 mav sail wherever 18 you will. 12. The excellence 
 ol Nestor is well-known to all the Greeks, so-that, if 
 1 should speak-of 19 it, I should speak to those ac¬ 
 quainted-with it. 13. The cup was so strong, that 
 it could not be-broken. 14. The barbarians had so 
 invested 7 the city that the Greeks could not es¬ 
 cape from it unobserved 20 . 15. The intes¬ 
 tines 21 of the sick burned 22 so, that they would very- 
 gladly have plunged themselves into cold water.' 
 lb. Our soldiers fought 7 so boldly, that, if night 
 had not come-on 23 , the enemy would have been tho¬ 
 roughly defeated. 
 
 1 xvxXiaxuv. 2 65 
 
 A or. 
 
 mt> , A . ,«***» with Inf. 3 hr, with Acc. and Inf. 
 
 Of 0 l e eZ t cAt/. x\Xx. Si lyyCrxrx. 7 Aor. 8 ^orjysv o 
 
 to sU V ply.with=^ osri ei V x t ( Aor .). » Aor Part. >*Pl U r. 
 
 i\uva.i. ot Xoivroi. 15 ivixa, with the Art. 
 
 , , » -— 16 3 throw into dis- 
 
 order= T^ccTTu V . " to be at any one's comma? 
 
 «*i« 19 Xt*uv. 20 Trans, hv A nr- ... * 
 
 21 
 
 rae lyraj 
 
 kiyuv. 
 
 22 x.ocitaia. 1 . 
 
 1 rails, by the Aor. of XxttJavuv, with Part. 
 
 23 y'ryvartla.1. 
 
 C. § 187. Adverbial Sentences denoting Com¬ 
 parison. 
 
 1. Comparative adverbial-sentences of manner and 
 
 way are introduced by the relative Adverbs d>c 
 6vr«. as’; e g. 
 
 ZeitQ diSwatv, o tt to ^ iOaXei, Zeus giveo, even as 
 he wills. The use of the Moods in these sentences 
 corresponds with that in adjective-sentences (182, 8). 
 
 2. Comparative adverbial-sentences of quantity or 
 
 degree are introduced by the Relative ( 6aw (6 o o v), 
 
484 
 
 *€UB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 and with this corresponds the Demonstrative- ra¬ 
 ff o u t (TO(Tourov)in the principal clause; these 
 are translated ‘so mu c h—a s,’ but with a Com¬ 
 parative or Superlative , by ‘ the—the ’ (quo—eo, or, 
 quanto—tan to). 
 
 T o a ovr o v Sunpipetv ujuac riov SovXwv, b a 0 i> 
 01 juev SovXoi ctKOvreg roig Secnrbraig {nrrjperovcnr , we 
 ought to differ so far from slaves , as that slaves 
 obey their masters unwillingly .— - w O a ip ,(oaov) aocjno- 
 repot? rig ean, r o a o v r ip (roaovrov) <r iv p o re¬ 
 ar ep 0 g eanv, the wiser any one is , the more 
 discreet will he be. — -O a ip (baov ) a a (j> ihr a r 6 g 
 rig ear 1 , r o a o v r ip (roauvrov) awcppovearaT of 
 iaru». 
 
 § 188. Interrogative Sentences . 
 
 1. Questions are either independent of a preceding 
 sentence or dependent on it; e. g. Is the friend comef 
 —and, I do not know ivhether the friend has come 
 The first is called a direct , the last, an indirect or de¬ 
 pendent question. Both may consist either of one 
 member , or of two or more members ; e. g. Is the friend 
 come , or is he not yet come ?—Do you not know whe¬ 
 ther he is coming , or not coming ? According as the 
 question refers to a single word or notion, or to the 
 whole sentence , questions are divided into nominal 
 and predicative questions; e. g. Who has done 
 this ? (nominal question), and Have you written the 
 letter ? (predicative question). 
 
 2. Nominal questions (i. e. questions, in which 
 the enquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single 
 point) are introduced by substantive-, adjective -, or ad-' 
 vsrfo'ad-interrogative-Pronouns, rig, wotoc, iroaog, ir ore- 
 pog, 7 Tujg, 7ry, 7rou, 7 ro9<, noOev, 7roae, &c.; e. g. T t g 
 
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 485 
 
 § 188.] 
 
 ravra ; w h o did this ?—predicative questions 
 
 (i. e. those, whereby the enquirer desires only an 
 affirmation or denial of his enquiry) are introduced 
 by certain interrogative words, as apa; e. g. 'A pa 
 ravra £7r olrjaag j did you do this ? 
 
 Obs. 1. Predicative questions are frequently indicated by the 
 mere tone, or by the position of the words ; the Predicate, or that 
 word on which the stress of the question rests, standing first in 
 the sentence. This occurs especially in the case of negatives ; e. g. 
 O if x iS'iXus aval ; do you not wish to go ? 
 
 3. On the use of Interrogatives , the following re¬ 
 marks should be attended toi:— 
 
 (1) *H, usually in connexion with other Particles, implies an as¬ 
 sertion, inasmuch as it supposes that the object of the question ac¬ 
 tually exists, e. g. T H olroi -ro\ifitoi unv ; these are enemies; are they 
 not ? — r H 5 rov, n nm forte, truly? indeed? perh ap s—n ot? 
 when the enquirer expects a negative answer; e. g. r H or ov nrix- 
 fiqxa. fyy av u"<r%nrrov ; have I indeed dared a most disgraceful deed ? 
 
 _ _7h yd is it not so? is it no t true? e. g. T H y a £, Z 
 
 *tororia, lav n ifiMTcc 2 ux^cums, u-rox^ivfi j Hippias, if Socrates asks 
 
 you any question, will you not answer ? 
 
 (2) r A ^ « is properly used in questions implying doubt, uncer¬ 
 tainty or wonder, but often, also, with a degree of modesty in 
 questions that are quite definite ; e. g. ( oi<r6d -rivets, a? «v «<tpiXtit 
 £vt&s u^tXiptvs ^vvavroti (ptXovs -roiucOott ; do you know any persons who, 
 being valueless themselves, are able to acquire (sibi facere) valuable 
 friends? —(A negative answer is expected). 
 
 (3) M j) (per hap s—n ot?) always expresses apprehension 
 
 or anxiety on the part of the enquirer, and hence expects a negative 
 answer; e. g. 'AXXa pi\ a^irexruv (iovXu yeviadat’, — Ovx ovv tyuy , 
 'iQn, do you wish to become an architect ?— By no means (minime 
 gentium), said he. 'AXXa p w ytufdr^vs \-ri6vpus, t<p», yivUGai dya¬ 
 ds ;—O v £ t yiuf/.ir^v\s, *• *r. x., well, then, do you desire to be¬ 
 
 come a good geometer J? said he. — Nor yet a geometer, said he, &c. 
 
 (4) O it or ft ij is joined with fya, according as the enquirer ex¬ 
 pects either an affirmative or a negative answer; e. g. T A f o v * 
 ienv u.o'Givyis ; n onn e aegrotat? (is he not sick?) Ans, jEgrotat .— 
 ’a ^ a ft. i) tirTiv onrGivYjs ; numnam aegrotat ? (he is not sick , is 
 he ?) Ans. Non cegrotai. 
 
 (5) M w v (compounded of the interrogative pi) and ovv) corres¬ 
 ponds in all respects with the Lat. n u rn, and hence always ex¬ 
 pects a negative answer; e. g. M<Dv nroXpvtxas ravrot 'bfatra .; you. 
 have not dared to do these thing*, have you ? For the sake of per¬ 
 spicuity, the Particles ovv and (y- & v ovv, p&v pf) are often 
 y>jnp.<i wjth it i e. g. M u v ovv nroXpnxas — J ol' Mw v p n rtroX* 
 
486 
 
 SUB-ORDINATIOtf 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 finxus— ; But when the negative o u is joined with the ques¬ 
 tion expects an affirmative answer (nonne) y e.g. M &» o u tet'oX 
 y-rixus —; nonne ausus es— ? 
 
 (6) 0 1, non, nonne? and o u x o v v, non or nonne er goK 
 (with collateral reference to a conclusion from what precedes), 
 always denote affirmative questions; e. g. O.lxovv xu) ru yurtm 
 
 ixv agiaxav; do you not therefore wish to please your neigh- 
 
 lour ? 
 
 (7) E/rtx and ’It time are used in questions expressing indig - 
 notion , astonishment and irony , and denote opposition or contrast, 
 (then, and yet), inasmuch as they imply that an unexpected 
 conclusion has been drawn from what precedes ; e. g. "E t s i t ol» 
 elu poovri^tiy tkovs dvfydjoroav; and do you not suppose, then, that the 
 gods care for men ? 
 
 (8) Direct double questions are introduced :— 
 
 a. By *rort£ov (vom^ex) —#, atrum —an; e. g. ri«- 
 T££o» ovtoi ufyio-Teii tio-iv vj <piki%tvoi ;wh ether are they inso¬ 
 lent o r hospitable ? (tote^ov in the first member is some¬ 
 times omitted), b. r A ? a— $, n e—a n. c. M i,—H, whe¬ 
 ther not—or. d. "axx« m (instead of cixko ti ye- 
 *oir i'v, li) and «XXmi, nonne; e. g." A x X o r i rj An- 
 -nra.! ifcoi xiv^vvuv o (xeyitrroi .; nonne relinquitur mihi—? 
 is not the greatest of the dangers left to. me? 'ax 
 a « t/ ovv olyt <piAoxt^t7e <piAodai to xiodos ; nonne igitur lucri 
 studiosi arnant— ? then, do not those who are fond of gain 
 love gain ? 
 
 (9) Single indirect questions are introduced :— 
 
 a. By the interrogative-Pronouns osns, ovoios, ox'oaos, ovaries, 
 OVUS, otou, 0 <rv, o-rort, &c. (§ 62, Obs. 1.); e. g. Oux oTba, 
 
 , os.Tif. itrriv, I don’t know who he is.—Oux oThet, 0 -xus to 
 
 ‘Tfayftx ETfocize v, 1 don’t know how he performed the action. 
 
 Obs. 2 . Frequently, however, the direct Interrogatives T.IS, T0I0(, 
 w-fT/f, &c., take the place of the indirect forms, the indirect ques¬ 
 tions then assuming the character of the direct; e. g. Oux oTSa, 
 t i s TuvTu. stagey (instead of Zstk), 1 don’t know w h o did this. 
 
 b. Ei ( whether ) is properly used only in double questions, 
 and denotes a wavering between two possibilities ; but 
 often only one member is expressed , the other being present 
 in the mind of the speaker. Hence u is used after Verba 
 
 ■ of refecting, deliberating, enquiring, asking, trying, know¬ 
 ing and saying / o^Zv, trxovuv, oxo-rutr^at, tibevni, <po(bi 7 t 70 ou, 
 &C. — {rfigas-^ai, Wivoiiv) IguTciv —A tysiv, <Pga%eiv, &C., and may 
 generally be translated by '-whether — not’ ; e. g. 
 
 ei o Ekkrivuv vlpos xixX-Xiov i%ii, consider whether- 
 the Greek custom is not better. ‘Eav with the Subj. is also; 
 used in such questions, when things that are in the future 
 and yet to be proved are spoken of ; e. g. i Z » Toh 
 
 coi fZxxoy u£E<rxy, consider w h e t h e r this would please you 
 belter. 
 
\ 
 
 §188.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 487 
 
 c M >j, as in d i r e c t questions, (wh e the r —n o t), is used after 
 expressions of reflecting, considering, enquiring, asking, 
 as well as after th.ose of anxiety and fear, which, also in¬ 
 volve the idea of reflection. In English, this m after 
 Verbs oifear and anxiety is translated by *t ha t ’ ; e. g. 
 *Opc&, pn Toura ovTu$ e%u, see whether this is not so. 
 $g 0 yri£«, ph xg&narov s? poi ot/kv, 1 am considering whe¬ 
 ther it is not best for me to be silent. 
 
 (10) Indirect double questions are introduced by : (a) to ri ? ov 
 ur i r\e «)-*, e. g. o;* Tirteov 1 «'***«, I don't know 
 
 / - • *• 11 /1_ V 1 *t -■» i f« 4" M A Cl n TT» D o c? 
 
 >,h< 
 
 whether he is alive o r dead. —(b) i <’— v, which is the same as 
 but with this difference, that u—% expresses uncertainty 
 and choice.— (c) tirs—t 7ti, with the same meaning as ex¬ 
 
 cept that by tlrt-iln the corresponding relation of the two mem- 
 bers is denoted, and the indecision of the speaker between two 
 possibilities is made more prominent; e. g. h%us t* r 
 
 Mvy^yis Ti<pa*ui, * i<r6\w kooky,, and perhaps you will shew whe¬ 
 ther you are well-born, o r base from noble ancestors. 
 
 Obs 3 On the use of the Moods, the following remarks should 
 be attended to The Indicative is used in direct and indirect 
 questions ; the Subjunctive and Optative are used in doubtful ques¬ 
 tions, and differ only as they are affected by^the Tense of the 
 Verb in the principal sentence ; e. g. Olx S X m, « **•' f “ 
 
 and .1. U.. T< .r.,>».(§188, l.h). Onfte/mt 
 
 and Opt. of the historical Tenses with «», see 103, A. a. (*) 
 and c. 
 
 Obs. 4 The Answer is expressed 
 
 a By the repetition of the interrogative word ; e. g. 'O g « s pi, 
 SioW, rov MXioy ;—0 g Z,—0 queen, dost thou 
 
 see wretched me, how I am situated ? I do see. In a 
 negative Answer, a negative is joined with the interrogative 
 word; e. g. Oiffl olv fyorois OS xuttarvxiv v'opes-,—Oix 
 0 T2 a’—d ost thou know , then, what law is fixed for 
 mortals ?—I do not kno w. 
 
 b. By <p*ipi, flip ty<h, «y y * ‘—negative, ou pi, ov* 
 
 e. Very ^frequently by ye, quidem, utique, assuredly , 
 indeed, certainly, which denotes that the Answer 
 completes the idea contained in the question, extends it 
 further, continues and strengthens it, or, by an additional 
 clause, limits and corrects it. Also by y a g, which makes 
 the Answer still stronger. 
 
 <L By 9 *h fh rot Aia, TU9V, *«gva, ye, &0. 
 
[Chap. II 
 
 4S8' SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 § 189. Oblique or Indirect Nan'ation: 
 
 1. The words or thoughts of a person —whether 
 & be the speaker himself, or the second or third Per¬ 
 son-may be repeated, either (1) without change, in 
 precisely the same form as they were at first stated by 
 the person that uttered them ,—then the discourse or 
 thought quoted is independent of the representation 
 of the narrator, and is called direct narration 
 (O ratio re c t a) e. g. I thought , “ a 11 men arc 
 m o r t a If—He announced to me, “ p e ace has- 
 been cone ludedf —or,. without a preceding. 
 y er b, “ all men are mortal ” ; —or, (2) the narrative 
 is made to refer to the representation of the speaker or 
 some one else , and thus depends on a V erb of percep¬ 
 tion or assertion ( Verbum sentiendi or declarandi) in 
 the principal sentence. The statement is then quoted 
 as the sentiment of the person spoken of, i. e. of the 
 person by whom it was originally uttered. This is 
 called i n direct, or oblique n a .r r atiom 
 {Or a tio ob li qua); e. g. he announced, that- 
 peace was concluded. 
 
 I will make peace with the enemy .—Oratio recta 
 
 He said that he would make peace with the enemy —■ 
 Oratio obliqua. 
 
 2. Sentences which are principal sentences in 
 direct narration, including those sentences which are 
 introduced by the causal co-ordinate Conjunctions, 
 
 ')fp, ovv, Kairoi, &c., are expressed in oblique narra¬ 
 tion, (1) when they contain a simple affirmation, 
 
 Ik he Acc. with Inf. (§ 172, 1), or by 
 art and ojq with the finite Verb (§ 180, 
 2), or by the Par ticipial cons-triU cti on 
 (§175,1); e. g. 'ETrriyyeiXs tovq ttoX t p i o v q 
 a 7r o <p v y ti v—o t t oi ttoX ifxioi a jto^'vou v or 
 
§ 189.1 
 
 INDIRECT NARRATION. 
 
 489 
 
 « 7T i i(> v y o v—r ov g ?r o X £ jw i o w c airoQvyov- 
 
 T a ^ —or, (2) when they express a command, wish or 
 desire , by the Infinitive (§ 171, 2), e. g. "EAe^e 
 role arpariwraig £ 7r t 0 t a 0 a t tolq iroXtyioig, he di¬ 
 rected the soldiers to attack the enemy ; (in Ora - 
 tin recta this would be expressed by the Imper. hr t- 
 OtoOe). 
 
 f 'H S o jet a t, (o KXeap^s, a koviov <tov (ppovryovg Xo- 
 y ov g (Oratio recta), 1 am pleased , Clear- 
 chus , to hear you make these sensible remarks. —Ttaraa- 
 <J>ipvT}g eAeSev, X) ti J^otro ajcouiov KAfap^ou (poovi- 
 povg A oyovg (Oratio obliqua), Tissaphernes said that 
 he was pleased to hear Clearchus make these 
 sensible remarks . 
 
 3. Subordinate clauses in direct narration do not 
 change their form in indirect narration , except that 
 they sometimes take the Opt. instead of the Ind. 
 and Subj. 
 
 4. For instance, when the affirmation in the go¬ 
 verning principal sentence is expressed by a histo¬ 
 rical Tense, the Opt. is necessarily used instead of 
 the Ind. or Subj. of direct narration, when the asser¬ 
 tion involved in the subordinate clause is to be repre* 
 seated as the sentiment of the person spoken of. 
 
 Thus, lav tovto A £ y y g, ayapryap, becomes im 
 oblique narration , eAeI-I <t£, £ t tovto A i y o i g, ayap- 
 Thartabai, lie said that , if you were t o s a y this , 
 you would err. —TeAeutwv eAeyev, oara ayaOa Kypog 
 U'zpoag 7 T £ 7 T o I rj K o I (fecisset),. lie finally mentioned 
 what advantages Cyrus had conferredon the 
 Persians. —TWo’a^tpi'Tjc ioyomv ’ AynaXaip, ti air if 
 a a i t o, £toc £ A 0 o i £ v, uisg tt £ y xp £ i £ Trpog (3aai- 
 Asa ayyiXovg, SiaTTpa&aOai avrip acjnOrivai avrovoyovg 
 rag iv rij ’A <ria iroXug ' EXXyviSag, Tissaphernes took 
 an oath to Agesilaus , that if h e would make a 
 truce , until the messengers whom he had sent 
 
490 
 
 SUB-ORDINATION. 
 
 [Chap. II. 
 
 to the king should r e turn, lie would effect that 
 the Greek cities in Asia should be allowed to be inde¬ 
 pendent. 
 
 5. Very often, however, in Greek, oblique narra¬ 
 tion assumes the form of direct narration , inasmuch 
 as the Ind. and Subj. of direct sentences are retained 
 even in indirect sentences, and the Ind. of the principal 
 Tenses and the Subj. are often used even after a his¬ 
 torical Tense in the principal sentence. Actions and 
 representations contained in the subordinate clauses, 
 belonging to the past , are thus transferred to the time 
 present to the. speaker. The Ind. is regularly used, 
 when the statement in the principal sentence is repre¬ 
 sented in time present with reference to the speaker; 
 o. g. A t y to, otl b avOpurtrog OvYjTog egtiv; or, in¬ 
 stead of ort with the finite Verb, the Acc. with the 
 
 Inf. is used; e. g. A e y to top avdptoirov Ovyitov 
 ti v at. 
 
 Act £7 t e p. eX.e it o Kupo£, uttote gvgkyivoiev, 
 o 7 r to g Ev^apiGTOTaToi Xoyoi hpfi\r)Qr)aovTai, 
 
 Gyrus always took care , whenever they were with 
 him in his tent , that the most pleasant subjects of 
 conversation should be brought forward. 
 — £ So £ g 7w <$hfjax) rpiatcovra eXegOcu, of rovg irarpi- 
 OVQ vopovg ov y y p a\p o v g i, k aO’ ovg ttoXitev- 
 <r o v a l v, the people resolved to choose thirty men , 
 who should draw up laws for the state , in ac¬ 
 cordance with which they should administer 
 the government. — 'QpidoigpEyaXoig Kartlpv 
 to ’AOrivaioi St'ica ety\ ^phaeaQai vopoig, ovgav av- 
 roig SoAto v 9 7) r a t, the Athenians bound them¬ 
 selves by great oaths , that they would use for ten 
 years the laws which Solon enacted for them. 
 
 ~ Touc ITTTTEag E K eX E V G E KupO£ (pvXaTTElV TOVg 
 
 ayayovrag, e <o g a v Tig g Yjpr) v q, Cyrus directed 
 the cavalry to guard the convoy , until a signal 
 would be given. 
 
INDIRECT NARRATION. 
 
 491 
 
 § 189 .] 
 
 6. In Greek, the Acc. with the Inf may he used 
 instead of the finite Verb in all kinds of subordinate 
 sentences. 
 
 2 tcvQag <f>a<ri tovq vopaSag, I rr e \ avroiQ A a p ei o v 
 tlgfiaXtiv eiQ rr)v \iopav, /nera ravra /ue/uovevai 
 avrov uacKrOat, they say that the Scythian nomads , 
 aft er Darius had^made an irruption 
 (postquam invasisset) into their country, eagerly de¬ 
 sired to take vengeance on him. 
 
 
 
 
 ✓ 
 
4 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 THE HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 § 190. Introductory Remarks on the Hexameter 
 
 1. The measure of the Homeric verse is Hexameter 
 (t£, phpov), which consists of six portions called 
 Feet. Each of these feet is a Dactyl or a Spon¬ 
 dee. A Dactyl consists of one long and two 
 short syllables a Spondee of two long ( —/ ~). 
 
 The first four feet of a Hexameter Verse may be 
 either Dactyls or Spondees ; the fifth is usually a 
 Dactyl, and the sixth a Spondee or Trochee ( ~' J ). 
 The following is the Scheme of the Hexameter:— 
 
 _ f w w 
 
 *AvSpa iuoi 
 ir\ay\0ri, l 
 
 _/ V W 
 
 —J W SJ 
 
 _/ w w 
 
 - f V w 
 
 ivvti re, 
 
 Mou<xa,7ro 
 
 Xvrp 07 T 0 V, 
 
 ogpaXa 
 
 o 
 
 Q* 
 
 /- 
 
 UU 
 
 
 pov 7 rroXt 
 
 tOpov t 
 
 noXXa 
 
 7TEp(T£V 
 
 2. The first syllable of the Dactyl and also of the 
 Spondee is pronounced with a stress or elevation of 
 voice, which is called the Arsis ; the short syllables 
 following the Arsis, or the long one, if the foot be a 
 Spondee, are pronounced with a depression of voice, 
 which is called the Thesis. The Arsis is marked in 
 the Scheme by the sign (~ / ). 
 
 Obs. The fifth foot is usually a Dactyl, hut sometimes a Spondee ; 
 then the verse is called a spondaic verse. A succession of Dactyls 
 indicates a quick and lively motion, a succession of Spondees, a 
 slow and heavy motion. 
 
§ 190.J the hexameter; 493 
 
 3. In every well constructed Hexameter there is 
 at least one Caesura (or ‘ cutting ’), which is occa¬ 
 sioned by a word beginning in the middle of a foot. 
 But as the harmony of the verse requires that the 
 beginning of a'foot and of a word should generally 
 not coincide , several words of a Hexameter verse 
 may begin in the middle of a foot, and lienee there 
 may be several Caesuras in a Hexameter* 
 
 i \ • 
 
 Xuto/uiEvov |1 Kara Ovuov || tv^iovoio || yvvatKog. 
 
 In this line the beginning of a foot and of a word 
 coincide only in the word Ov/iov. In a Dactyl the 
 word may end with a long syllable in the Arsis 
 (-' | vw ), or with the first short in the Thesis ( _/v | " ). 
 In the former case, the Caesura is called masculine , 
 in the latter, feminine. The principal Ccesuras are 
 the following :— 
 
 (a) The most usual and most emphatic Caesura 
 is the masculine , after the Arsis of the third 
 foot; e. g.— 
 
 wv r^r ru r'- 
 
 ’AAA’ 6 fxlv AlOionag || ptTEKiaOe tjjXo'0’ iovrag. 
 
 (b) Often also a less emphatic feminine Caesura 
 occurs in the Thesis of the third foot; e. g. 
 
 - ~|-^| -/• - 
 
 *Ai'$pa iuot ivvt 7 Tf, Mou<ra,||7roAurpo7rov, og ga\a TroAAa. 
 
 (c) A third Caesura is the masculine after the 
 Arsis of the fourth foot; this is usually pre¬ 
 ceded by a masculine Caesura in the second 
 foot; e. g.— 
 
 ’Apvv/nvog | rji' rc ipvxhv vogtov tra/'pwv. 
 
494 HOMERIC DIALECT. [§ 191 . 
 
 4. Besides these principal Caesuras there are also 
 other subordinate ones. 
 
 5. Besides the Caesura, Diaeresis (Siarptutg) also 
 is of frequent occurrence, (i. e. a separation of the 
 verse , occasioned by the ending of a word and of a 
 foot coinciding). The following are the principal 
 Diaereses : (a) after the first foot; (b) after the se- 
 cond foot; (c) after the third foot; (d) after the 
 fourth foot; e. g.— 
 
 (a) v H<T0/ov | avrao 6 rolmv aipdXETO vogtijjiov r\fxnp . 
 
 (b) ’AAA’ or c Sr) etoq | j)A0g 7rept7rAo/bi£V(ov iiuavTtov. 
 
 (c) ’E vvr\fiap filv ava arparbv | qlytro K ^ a Otolo. 
 
 (d ) u AvSpa /lOL evvette, Mouaa, TroXvrpoirov, J oq 
 
 juaAa 7roAAa. 
 
 § 191. Quantity (Comp. § 9). 
 
 Preliminary Obs. Only a few general Rules will be given 
 here ; the quantity of particular words, not included in these 
 Rules, may be learned by observation. 
 
 1. A syllable which has the Vowels g or o, followed 
 by another Vowel or a single Consonant , is short by 
 nature j e. g. te'koq, Qto'q, {3utj. 
 
 2. A syllable which has the Vowel rj or w, or a 
 Diphthong , is long by nature ; all contracted and cir- 
 cmnflexed syllables are also long by nature ; e g. 'rj'pihc, 
 ovpavoq ; a 'kmv (instead of uskiov), triga (from trtjuae), 
 7rdc, atroc, ipv\og, vvv. 
 
 d. A syllable which has a doubtful Vowel ( a , i, v) 
 followed by another Vowel or a single Const iant, or at 
 1 e end of a word, is short by position ; e. g. ’adSuvTtg, 
 caipovX rj, (jivrii (fiXoq , apyvptoq. 
 
 4. A syllable which has a short or a doubtful Vowel 
 followed by two Consonants or a double Consonant , is 
 
QTTAKTITY. 
 
 495 
 
 § 191.] 
 
 long by position ; e. g • inVadat, hearer fifirj, Sl'^acrOai, 
 t\Oiarog, (f>v'\ Aov. 
 
 Exceptions to No. 3. 
 
 (a) . « in Nouns of the first Dec., which have the Gen . in -«s, is 
 
 long in all the Cases in which it occurs ; e. g. fiutpol, tpikii, 
 -if, -a, av, &C. 
 
 (b) . a in the Dual of all Nouns of the first Dec. is long ; e. g. 
 
 Nom. Sing, x'txiva, Dual Asa/va. 
 
 (c) . « is long in the Gen. Sing., in -ao and Gen. PI. in -<*«»; e. g. t 
 
 ’A iyogauv. 
 
 (d) . The ending -as of the /rsi Dec. is long, in the iVom. and 
 
 Gen. Sing., and in the .dec. Pl.; e. g. Nom. wp'ias , Gen. 
 
 ACC. PI. Stfga?. 
 
 (e) . a of masculine and feminine Participles in -ay is long j so 
 
 also other words in as, where vr or v has been clipped; e. g. 
 ixaiffoi .f ( =a,xovactvrs ), uxov7<xaa,, Icrrxt, fiAf ; y/yaf (=y<yavTf),, 
 fxlXcLi (=fJt,iXa.vs). 
 
 (f) . « in the///. Pers. PL Perf. Ind. Act. is fo ; e. g. n- 
 
 TV^OLffl. 
 
 (g) . v is foragi in the Sing, of the Pres, and Impj. Ind. Act. of 
 
 Verbs in -vpi, also in the masculine and feminine Sing, oj 
 the Participles ; e. g. hixwpi, ih/xvvv, 2uxvi>$, hixwau .— Other 
 exceptions may be learned by observation. 
 
 5. In Homer, a Mute and Liquid regularly make 
 a syllable long by position. 
 
 6. The final syllable of a word in verse is uni¬ 
 formly long by position • (a) when it ends with a Con¬ 
 sonant, and the next word begins with a Consonant; 
 e. g. Kai Kadi I abv T pCo | ag; also (b) when the final 
 syllable of a word ends with a short Vowel , but the 
 following word begins with a double Consonant , or 
 with two single Consonants , which are not a Mute and 
 a Liquid ; e. g. ’A^juf/ | rr/n, r/v | ovttwv | 7ro Zgyyov j 
 hyaytv [ ci vi]o. A M^ute and a Liquid in this case, 
 always make the syllable in the Arsis long , while 
 the syllable in the thesis may be either long or shorty 
 according to the necessities of thejyerse; e.g. Mr/ got | 
 
 Stop 1 Ipa | ra npoept | ()i I. ’hfpo J $tryg ; on 
 the contrary, in the Thesis, Amap 6 (o) j 7 tAij- 
 Ctuv I tCTTl'l [ Ktl. 
 
 7 A long Vowel or a Diphthong at the end of a 
 
49(5 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [§ 192 . 
 
 word is usually made short, in Homer, when it oc¬ 
 curs in the Thesis before a word beginning with a 
 Vowel, but it remains long when it is in the A r s is, 
 or when the following word has the Digamma 
 (§ 194); e. g. 'H/iivrj I kv (3sv | Otoaiv. — Yhg, 6 | 
 fitv Krca | tov, 6 S’ ap’ j Evpvrou | ’Aicropt | wyoc- 
 
 A vrap o | eyvto J yatv I |,H <ppto\ \ (frivvi} | atv T£ 
 
 =J r p<Tii>f 
 
 t 8. A long Vowel or Diphthong in the middle of a 
 word, before a succeeding Vowel, is but seldom 
 shortened; e. g. Ittht] ( ww ), tunaiog (~ wu ), oloc 
 
 <: ww )/j3*j3A«a«. 
 
 9. The Arsis has the effect of making a short syl¬ 
 lable long in the following cases; (1) at the beginning 
 of a word, e. g. ’AcnrtSog \ ’aic aga | tov niip ; (2) at the 
 e nd —in which case it is generally followed by a 
 Liquid , or a a or S, the sound of which is easily 
 doubled in pronunciation, or by a word with the 
 Digamma (§194); e. g. Km tt&i | a Aai | Ttvvra .— 
 Gtryart I pa ijv (==fr)v). 
 
 10. Not unfrequently in Homer, merely from the 
 necessities of the verse, a short Vowel in the Thesis 
 is measured as long , when it stands between two long 
 Vowels; 'Wo | cit? I rj. 
 
 § 192. Hiatus. 
 
 Hiatus (i. e. a harshness in the pronunciation, 
 arising from the concurrence of two Vowels, one of 
 which ends a word, and the other begins the succeed¬ 
 ing word) is generally avoided by the Greeks, but 
 especially in verse. In the Homeric Hexameter, how¬ 
 ever, it is admitted in the following cases:— 
 
 (a) With long Vowels or Diphthongs , either in 
 the Arsis, e. g. ’A vriOt | y ’OSu | <rrfi; or in 
 
193 .] 
 
 HIATUS. 
 
 497 
 
 the Thesis , in which case the long Vowel or 
 Diphthong is short; e. g. Otic ot t | cay j 
 
 (b) When the Vowel does not admit of Elision , 
 or but seldom; e. g.IltuSi a | yvvtv; 
 
 (c) WTien two words are separated by inter¬ 
 punctuation; e. g. ’AXX’ ava, | a yiyo | vag 
 
 (d) In the feminine Ccesura’ (§ 190; 3), after the 
 first short syllable in the third foot of^ the 
 verse; e. g. Kavr) j St rgucpa | Xtia |] ay. J t- 
 
 (r7rtro | X £l P L 7ra I 7 7 , 
 
 (e) In the Diaeresis (§ 190, 5), a/fer the first and 
 
 fourth foot of the verse; e. g. ’'Eyx** I ’looju- 
 vriog;—My\pm in ’Arpt%’A yaytyvovi \ ov- 
 \ov”Ovz ipov; 
 
 # (f) When the first word has the Apostrophe ; 
 
 e. g. AtvSpt 1 £0«XXti>; 
 
 (g) Words which have the Digamma occasion 
 * no Hiatus (§ 194, 3). 
 
 § 193. The Homeric Dialect 
 
 The language of Homer and his school is the older 
 Ionic; these poets, however, were not satisfied with 
 their own dialect merely, but selected from all the 
 dialects, in accordance with the true principles of 
 art, those forms which were adapted to the nature of 
 their poetry; the regular laws of versification, also, 
 had much influence in the formation of their lan¬ 
 guage. Thus they produced a peculiar and definite 
 poetic language*.called the Epic or Homeric . 
 
498 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT, 
 
 [§ 194 . 
 
 § 194. Digamma or Labial Breathing (J ). 
 
 1. The Greek language had originally a special 
 labial breathing , the sound of which corresponded 
 nearly to the Latin V or the English F. From its 
 form (/), which resembles one Gamma standing on 
 another, it is called Digamma (or double Gamma). 
 
 2. The JEolians retained this character the long¬ 
 est; among the other Greek tribes it disappeared 
 very early; its sound, however, was in some in¬ 
 stances changed into the smooth labial (3, [e. g. fi!u, 
 arising from fig (later tg), vis]; in some instances 
 it was softened into the Vowel v, and after other 
 Vowels coalesced with them and formed the Diph¬ 
 thongs av, ev, rjv, ov, wu, [e. g. vavg (instead of vafg ) T 
 navis, (3oi>g (/3ofg), bovs, bos, Gen. bo-vis]; hi 
 other instances, it was merely changed into- a smooth 
 breathing , which, at the beginning of the word, is 
 indicated by the Spiritus lenis, but in the middle of 
 a word and before p it was not indicated by any 
 character; e. g. fig, vis, tg; eiXiw, volvo; ofig, ovis, 
 oig ; fgoSov, pbSov ; finally, it was also changed, at the 
 beginning of some words, into a rough breathing r 
 which was indicated by the Spiritus asper ; e. g. fcrn-t- 
 poe, vesperus; tvvvfii, vestio. 
 
 3. In the Homeric poems, the character denoting 
 the breathing f no longer exists ; but it is very clear 
 that in the time of Homer many words were pro¬ 
 nounced with the Digamma; e. g. ayvv/ui, avSavtv^ 
 tag (ver), the forms of E’lAQ (video), sWa, u/ia 
 (vestimentum), evvv/uu (vestio), eItteiv (vocare), &ctjAoc, 
 tog and og (suus), ov (sui), eanepog (vesperus), oLcoc 
 (vicus), ot vog (vinum). This is obvious from several 
 facts: (a) words that have the Digamma cause no 
 Hiatus [§ 192, (g)] e. g. ?r po Wev (== 7 rpo ftOev); (b) a 
 Vowel capable of elision, when placed before such a 
 word, cannot be elided ; e. g. An rtv Si i (=Si ft) in- 
 
CHANGE OF VOWELS. 
 
 439 
 
 § 195 .] 
 
 stead of S’ 2; (c) the v tyeAicv&riKuv is wanting before 
 words which have the Digamma ; e. g. Sail oi (==^at£ 
 Soi) instead of Saiiv oi ; (d) ov instead of <wk is found 
 before the Digamma] e. g. 67rci ov iOlv (=ov 
 ftOtv) lari ptiwv, instead of ou^ £Qzv', (e) in Com¬ 
 pounds neither Elision nor Crasis takes place ; e. g. 
 
 (=Sia/ft7rfjU€i^) instead of Sunrifitv ; dayije 
 (=afayi]Q) ; (f) long Vowels are not shortened 
 (§ 191, 7) before words that have the Digamma ; e. g. 
 k aXAti rt otiA fiwv icai' ugaoi (=kqi ftipaoi).. 
 
 § 195. Change of Vowels. 
 
 Contraction.— Dleresis.—Crasis.—Synizesis.— 
 
 Apocope. 
 
 1. The Homeric language often varies in the use 
 of contracted and uncontracted or open forms, accord¬ 
 ing to the necessities of the verse; e. g. aUiov and 
 ukwv. The particular instances of contraction will 
 be seen further on, under the contract Declensions 
 and Conjugations. The contraction of oi? into w in 
 the body of a word takes place in the Verbs |3oav, to 
 cry , and voav, to think ; e. g. fiwoag (instead of j3cr> 
 tyag ), ayvuxTaaKtv (instead of ayvoriaaoK^v ); so also, 
 dySutKOvra (instead of oySo/jK ovra). 
 
 2. The separation of a Diphthong into its Compo¬ 
 nent Vowels (Diaeresis) is not rare in Homer; it oc¬ 
 curs most frequently in those words in which the two 
 Vowels are separated by, the Digamma; e. g. italq, 
 avT/un) (from afw), breath , aa/coi, evuriptvog, oig (ofig, 
 ovis), oiofxai (comp, opinor). 
 
 3. The use of C r a s i s is limited to a few cases , 
 viz. : Kayib, raAAa, ovfxog , ovvtKa, iopioTog, wvtoq (in¬ 
 stead of nai iywt rd dAAa, 6 tfiog, 6 apiarog, b aurbg). 
 
 4. Synizes i s (i. e. the contraction of two Vowels 
 
500 HOMERIC DI ALEC TV [§ 195. 
 
 into one), which is perceptible only in the pronun¬ 
 ciation , but is not indicated by the form of the word, 
 is of very frequent occurrence •*— 
 
 (a) In the middle of words, most frequently in the 
 following combinations of Vowels: £«, ftt r 
 
 iai, sag; to, eoi, sou; ew, ; e. g. arriOta, 
 r}/uLtag, Oeo'i, \pvariotg, teOvewti ;—much more 
 
 rarely in as, ia, iai, 117 , irf, <o, e. g. cieOXevmv^ 
 
 noXiag, 7ro\ioQy — 00 only in oySoov",—vui 
 
 only in SaKpvoan ;— 174 in Scioto, Sri'uov, Sni- 
 OKJi , ijta; 
 
 (b) Between two words , in the following combina¬ 
 tions of Vowels ’ r\ a, r\ s, r\ r\, r) si, r\ ou, *7 oe 
 
 £t ou; a) a, to ou ;—the first word is, in that 
 case, one of the following: rj, Srr, ph or 
 sir ei ; or a word with the inflexion-ending s -t\> 
 e. g. rj ou, Sri a^vEioraTOQ, pn aXXot, — siXa- 
 Trivr) yis yapog, ckt(3e<jtu) ov& vlov. 
 
 5. Eli si on (§ 6 , 3)occurs very frequently. The 
 Vowel is elided in the following cases:— 
 
 (a) The a in the Neut. PI. , and in the Acc. Sing. 
 of the III. Dec. ; —rarely in the Aorist-ending 
 -era ; e. g. aXsofl ipt ;—usually in the Par¬ 
 ticle apa 
 
 0 >) The £ in the personal-Pronouns spi, pi, as, 
 y —in the Voc. of the II: Dec. ;—in the 
 Dual of the III. Dec. ;—in the Verbal-end¬ 
 ing s j— and in Particles , e. g. Si, te , tot*, 
 &c. (but never in lSi)y 
 
 (c) The 1 in the Dot. PL. of the III. Dec. ;— 
 much more rarely in the Dai . Sing., and in¬ 
 deed only when the connexion is such that 
 it could not be mistaken for the A cc. i e. g 
 Xa~ipE Se Tip opviO’ 'OSuuEvg ;— in appp vppi 
 and < r$ii —in Adverbs of place in -di, ^except 
 
i 196.] 
 
 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 501 
 
 those derived from Substantives) ;—in il~ 
 ko<ti ;—finally, in all Verbal-endings ; 
 
 (d) The o in air 6 and imo (but never in irgo) ; 
 —in Svo ;—in Neut. Pronouns (except to ) ; 
 —and in all Verbal-endings ; 
 
 (e) at in the Verbal-endings, -gat, -rat, -adai ; 
 
 (f) ol in got, to me; — and in the Particle rot. 
 
 6 . Apocope [ anoKonri ] (i. e. the rejection oj a 
 short final Vowel before a word beginning with a Con¬ 
 sonant) occurs in the Prepositions ava, Kara, naga r 
 rarely in airo and w to ; and in the Conjunction aga. 
 —*A v before f3, n, (p, g is changed into a g (§ 
 
 4 . 6) ; e. g. ag fitiygoiat, ag niXayog, ag tpovov, aggtvrv ; 
 — k a r assimilates its r to the following Consonant r 
 except that the rough Mute is preceded by the corres¬ 
 ponding smooth; e. g. icaS Svvagtv, k ate K£(pa\rjg, Kay 
 yovv, Kan (paXapa ; Kanneaev, Kan nsStov .— Examples 
 of Apocope in the case of a7ro and vno are annig\pu 7 
 vfijBaXXsiv (instead of anonigiptt, imofiaXXttv). 
 
 § 196. Change of Consonants . 
 
 1. A and 6 remain before g (contrary to § 8, 5); 
 e. g. iSgev, KEKopvOglvog (instead of tcrgtv, kekoov - 
 <r givog). 
 
 2. The Metathesis (or transposition) of p with 
 a preceding Vowel occurs not unfrequently ; e. g. 
 KgaPtn (instead of KapS(a), heart , Kaprtpog and icpa- 
 repog, fiapSttjrog (from fipaSvg) ; also in the A or. IT. : 
 £ 7 rpaOov, eSpadov, tSpaKov (from ntpOto , SapOavto, Slp- 
 Kogat). 
 
 3. In Homer Consonants may be doubled after short 
 Vowels, according to the necessities of the verse, in 
 the following cases:— 
 
 (a) The Liquids and <r, on the addition of the 
 
502 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [§ 197. 
 
 Augment i 6. g. eXXq{ 3 ov, EfXgaOov f EWEQV, 
 EGCTEVa ; 
 
 (b) In Compounds , also, the Liquids and a are 
 doubled j e. g. vtoAAouroc (from veoq and 
 Xovqj) ; 
 
 (c) The a in the inflexion of the Pat. in -at, and 
 of the Fut. and Aor . j e. g. vekuggiv, (pgaa- 
 cfo/licu, koXeggq ; 
 
 (d) The a in the middle of several words ; e. g. 
 
 ooaov, to<t(tov, ott'igguj, &C. 
 
 Of the Mutes, ^r is doubled in the interrogative- 
 Pronouns which begin with 6 tt- ; e. g. Sttttwc, &c. ; 
 —k in tteXekkov, tteXekkciu) ;—r in otti , orrfo, ottcu; 
 —£ in eSSeige, a$$EEg, aSSrjv. 
 
 Obs. The doubling of e , when the Augment is prefixed, and in 
 composition (§ 8,J2), may be omitted, if the verse requires it; 
 e. g. e^ov (from ^vtropvros. For the same reason, though 
 
 but seldom, one of the Consonants, which otherwise usually occur 
 doubled, is omitted; e. g. ’o£t uiCs, ‘A^iktvs, (instead of 
 
 O dticcius, A %iA\ius, (p<xouyyo;), 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 , 
 
 § 197. Suffix -(p i ( v ). - 
 
 In addition to the Case-endings, the Homeric dialect 
 has the suffix -tf>i(v), which expresses the relation of 
 the D at., and in connexion with Prepositions, that of 
 the Gen. This suffix is always appended to the un¬ 
 altered Root of the word; e. g.— 
 
 •£* ^ ec * f n Sing.: ay eXtj^i, airo ve vprjtptv; 
 
 II. Dec. in Sing. andPlur.; all these forms, without 
 respect to the accentuation of the Nom., are 
 paroxytones (-otyi'): Qeotyiv (for 6emv), of the 
 gods, air ogteo^lv (for o artwii), of bones i 
 
* 
 
 § 198 .] FIRST DECLENSION. * 503 
 
 III. Dec. almost exclusively in the Plur.: op£<r^t(i'), 
 upon the mountains , Ik oThOtacpL (comp. § 44), 
 vainpi . 
 
 § 198. i^V\s£ Declension. 
 
 0 
 
 1. Instead of the long a , is used through all the 
 Cases of the Sing.; e. g. flr)i'tAo7T£(T]c> IlrjvcXoTrtfy 
 (from ri)]t'£Ad7raa), (j)pr}Tph, B optrjg, Bo p(y, B operjv. 
 
 Exceptions : — 6ia, goddess, -as, -a, -av ; N avantxa, $«/a ; Am/af, 
 Ab'yuas, 'Egfiuaf, and some other p<roper names in -a? pure. The 
 Voc. of vvftipy is vu/atyx. 
 
 2. Substantives in -c ia and -o i a, derived from 
 Adjectives in -r/c and -ouc, and also some other Fe¬ 
 minines, change short a of the Attic dialect into rj; 
 e. g. aXrj0e/rj, avaiStin, zvTrXoir], k vlaarj (instead of 
 aXhOtia, avaiSsia, tv7rXota, Kviaoa )• 
 
 3. The Nom. Sing, of Masculines , in a great 
 number of, words, especially those which in Attic 
 end in -r»jc> has the ending -a (like the Lat., e. g. 
 poeta), instead of -rjg, according to the necessities of 
 the verse; e. g. inn or a, a\\fxx\ T u t /ul^tUtu, tvpvona. 
 The Voc. retains in all these the ending -a. 
 
 4. The Cr e n. Sing, of Masculines has the fol¬ 
 lowing endings: -a o, - w (contracted from -ao) and 
 -e w; the last ending -tto is always pronounced ivith 
 Synizesis, and,with reference to the Accent, w is con¬ 
 sidered short (comp. § 30, Obs. 2) ; e. g. 'Eppuug, Gen. 
 'Epjuttao and 'Eppaw; BopErjc, Gen. Boptao and Bo* 
 plot ; ’ArptfSrjc, Gen. ArpttSao and WrpstStu). 
 
 5. The Gen. P lur. of Masculines and Feminines 
 has the following endings: -a w v, -w v and -{ w v f 
 (- id)v is regularly pronounced ivith Synizesis) ; e. g. 
 kXkj iawv, kXktiu)v, nvXucov, nuXicov. 
 
504 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [§ 200 . 
 
 6. The Dat. Blur, has the following endings: 
 -y a i (v) , -y g, and -aig (only in Otdig and cerate); 
 e. g. KXicri'pat(v), 7T£r()rjc peyaXycnv 
 
 § .199. Second Declension. 
 
 1. Gen. Sing.: -ov and -oto ; e. g. wpov, 
 io got o (from wjnog, o, shoulder). 
 
 2. Gen. and Bat. Dual: -onv (instead of 
 -oiv)', e. g. wfioiiv. 
 
 3. Dai. Blur.: -oiat(v) and -ot?; e. g. 
 
 W [1 O l <T l V, W/LlOig. 
 
 4 . Attic Declension.—Gtfw. Sing.: -wo 
 (instead of -w); e. g. nrjveAewo (from riiji>fA£a>c)* 
 In -yaXwc, sister-in-law,”AOwg and K wg, the -wg pro¬ 
 duced by contraction is resolved by o; e. g. yaXowg f 
 ’AOowg, Kowg. 
 
 5. Contracted forms of the II. Dec. occur but 
 rarely , viz. vouc (usually vooc); \tiyappovg and 
 ^ipappoog; ndv0ouc, UavOov, UavOy. In formsend¬ 
 ing in -£og, -sov, Homer either lengthens the e into u 
 or employs Synizesis , as the verse requires ; e. g. \o(y 
 
 GtLOg. 
 
 § 200. Third Declension. 
 
 $ 
 
 1. D at. Blur.: -<rt(v), -<x<xt(v), -€trt(v) and 
 * t <T ff i (y). The endings - e <t l and -e a <r i, like the 
 other Case-endings, are always appended to the simple 
 Root; e. g. kvv-eooi (from kvwv, Gen. Kvv-og), i>eku- 
 ferert (from vek vg, -v-og), xt'ip-tot. In Neuters, which 
 have a radical a in the Nom. (§ 42,1. and § 44), this 
 a is dropped; e. g. (instead of hrio-iooi, 
 
THIED DECLENSION. 
 
 505 
 
 § 200.] 
 
 from to Root site c)> Sett a-taaiv (from to ct 7 rac) ; 
 —v is also dropped in Roots ending in av, tv, ou 
 (5 41); e. g. f36- eggi (instead of fiof-Eaai, bov-ibus), 
 'nnrrrEGai .—The ending - a a i is appended almost 
 exclusively to Roots which end in a Vowel ; e. g. 
 
 VEKV~GGL (from VEKVg, -v-og). 
 
 2. Gen. and Dat. Dual: -otiv (as in the 
 II. Dec.); e. g. 7TodoUV. 
 
 3. The Ace. Sing. of forms in -vq sometimes 
 has the ending -a ; e. g. e v p ia 7tovtov , lyOua, via 
 (instead of evovv, l\Qvv, vavv). 
 
 4. The words y £ A w c, laughter, id p w g, sweat, 
 and e p w g, love, which properly belong to the III. 
 Dec., have, in Homer, some of their Cases like the 
 Attic II. Dec.: y £ A w and yfAwv (instead of yl 
 Awra), y e A (instead of y£\ (oti) ; id p w, id p ip 
 (instead of idputra, idputn) ; e p ip (instead of Epwri). 
 
 5. Words in -ig, Gen. -1 8 o g, especially proper 
 names, often have the inflexion -Log, &c., and in 
 the D at. Sing, always; e. g. pi'iviog, Otnog, Qet~i. 
 
 6. The Neuter ovg, wrog, ear (§ 39), in Homer has 
 the form ova?, ovarog, PI. oiiara; the Neuters ariap, 
 fat, ovOap, breast, and 7 retpap, issue, have -arog in the 
 Gen.: aTEdTog, ovdara, Trtipara, TTEipaai. In the 
 Neuters ripag and KEpag (§ 39) the r is dropped; 
 e. g. TEpaa, -awv, - cleggi ; Dat. KEp ft; PI. KEpa , KEpuwv, 
 KEpaEGGL and k ipaai ;—the following forms of icptag 
 (§ 39) occur; PL icpia, icpEatov, KpEiov and Kpettov, Kpiu- 
 giv. 
 
 7. In the words mentioned in § 36, Homer either 
 retains or omits e, as the verse may require ; e. g. 
 avrjp, avipog and dvSpoe, avipi and avSpi, &c. (but 
 avdpiov, avdpaai and avdpEGGi only ) ; yaarrip, - spog , -ipi 
 (and yaarpog, yaarpi), yaaripa, yaaripEg; Ariprirnp, 
 - 1 jTEpog and -rjrpog, Ar\pr\rEpa and -rjrpa; Bvyarrip, Ov- 
 yarEpog and Qvyarpog, &C., OvyaripEaat , (but Ouyu- 
 Tpwv );— in irarrip, prirrip and yaarrip he omits the c 
 
 z 
 
 11 
 
 % 
 
506 HOMERIC DIALECT. [§ 200. 
 
 (except in the Dat. PL), but usually in the Gen. and 
 Dat. Sing, only, e. g. rrarpog, tt arpi. 
 
 8 . The word l\(np, blood of the gods , has, in the 
 Acc. Sing, iyw (instead of l^iopa), and kvkewv, 6 , 
 mixed drink , has in the Acc. Sing, kvkeco or kvkeko. 
 
 9. (See § 41). - a v g, - £ V g, -o v g. Of ypavg, 
 
 there occur in Homer only Nom. ypr^vg, ypnv'g, Oat. 
 ypri'C, and Voc. ypnv and ypiyu. The word j3o0g 
 does not admit contraction : e. g. jdoag ; Dat. PI. j3o- 
 £<r<rt, (see No. 1.). 
 
 10. (See § 41). In common Nouns in -cue and 
 in the proper name ’ A\tXXavg, 17 is used, instead of e, 
 in all the forms in which the v (f) of the Root is 
 dropped ; e. g. fiacnXEvg, Voc. - tv , Dat. PI. -that (ex¬ 
 cept apiaTi)E(TOiv from apiaTEvg), but jdaaiXriog t -flt* ~V a ’ 
 -fag, -rjac (a in the Acc. Sing, and PI. being short). 
 Among the proper names of this class, the following 
 are to be specially noticed:— ’OSuaaEvg, ’OSvtjarjog and 
 ’O Svarjog and ’ 0 <W<r£oe, also ’OSutrcrtuc (contracted), 
 ’OSvaiji and ’O Svgei, ’O Svaaija and ’OSvcrcrEa, also 
 OSvcrij; rirjXtwc, nrjXrjoc and -iog, -rfi and-a, -ij«; 
 the others (as ’Arptuc, TuScuc) generally retain c, and 
 contract -toe in the Gen. (by Sgnizesis ), and some¬ 
 times -Ea in the Acc. into -rj, thus: TuSloe, -a. da 
 and -r]. 
 
 11. (See § 42). -nc and-cc, Gen. - e o g. The 
 Gen. Sing, remains uncontracted; the Nom. PL ends 
 in -etc and -«e; the Gen. PL remains uncontracted 
 (except when the ending -ewv is preceded by a Vowel , 
 in which case contraction takes place; e. g. Za\pr\uv 
 for Zaxpwwv, which is from Zaxpi)rtg y impetuous ), 
 also the Acc. Pl. - sag.—"Aprjg is thus declined: 
 Gen. "Apriog and -sog, Dat. ’'Apn'i, ’'App, ’'A pa, Acc. 
 *Apri and ’'Aprjv, Voc. r ApEg and "Apsg. 
 
 12. (See § 42). Proper names in -icXrje contract 
 ee into rj ; e. g. 'HpaicXajc, -k Xrjoe, - r\i , -»]«> Voc. 
 HpaicXac;— Adjectives in -ey\Q have both el and 17 ; 
 e. g. aicXErig , aicXijae, aya/cXrjoc; but iiiicXfctac (Acc. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 507 
 
 § 200 .] 
 
 PI.) from IvkXetiq, Ivppeing (Gen. Sing.) from lvpper)g. 
 The forms SvgicX£a, vTrepSia (instead of -tia) also 
 occur. 
 
 13. (See § 43). - w g, Gen. -woe- In Homer the 
 contracted forms ripio (Dat.) and M«Tw (Acc.) occur. 
 Of words in -wc and -w, Gen. -oog, only xpwe and its 
 compounds occur uncontracted: \ooog, xpoi, X9 ()a - 
 
 14. (See §44). [1] -a g, Gen. -ao£. The Dat. 
 Sing, is uncontr acted or contracted, as the verse may 
 require ; e. g. yi'ipai and yrjpq.. But the N om. and 
 Acc. P lur. are always contracted ; e. g. Sira.—[2] 
 -o?, Gen. - c o g. Both the uncontracted and contracted 
 forms are used, as the verse may require, (except in 
 the Gen. Flur., which always remains uncontracted , 
 and in the Gen. Sing., except in some Substantives 
 which contract -toe into -evg; as, ’Ep£j3tue, Oapazvg), 
 e. g. Dat. Otpu and Qepti, KaXXsi and kciXXei ; the No rn . 
 and A c c. P lur. in -ea regularly remain uncontracted , 
 but must be pronounced with Synizesis l e. g. ve'ikeu, 
 fitXea. —In aniog, icXiog, $iog, \plog, e is sometimes 
 lengthened into u, sometimes into r \; e. g. Sing. Gen. 
 Girdovg, Dat. cnriji, Acc. an tog and amlog, PI. Gen. 
 <T7rtiwv, Dat. airiaai and <77nj£<7<xt; \pt°g and xP £ *°e J 
 kX ta and kX da. 
 
 15. (See § 45). -T g, Gen. -Toe; -w Gen. -v o e- The 
 Dai. Sing, is contracted ; e.g. ot'£ut, irXriOvi, vekvl; 
 the Acc. Plu r ., as the verse may require, is some¬ 
 times uncontracted , sometimes, and indeed more com¬ 
 monly, contracted ; e. g. i\^og (instead of l\0vag), 
 Spvg ; the Nom. Plu r. is never contracted, but is pro¬ 
 nounced with Synizesis; e. g. i\0vEg (dissyllable). 
 The Dat. P lur. ends in -vac i and -veggl (dissylla¬ 
 ble)^. g. ixOvgglv and lxOvegglv. 
 
 16. (See § 46). -t«, and -t, Gen. -toe (Att. 
 -*o>e) ; -ue and -v, Gen. - wo? (Att. -twe). (1) 
 Words in -1 e retain the i of the Root through all 
 the Cases , and are always contracted in the Dat. 
 S i ng., and sometimes in the Ac c. PIu r ■ , e. g. vroAtei 
 
508 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT 
 
 [§ 201 . 
 
 - iog , -7, PI. -Uov, -ten , -tag and -7c Tlie Da t. 
 
 Sing, has also the endings -« and -u ; e. g. 7roVi 
 and 7 rd<i£i (from iroaig) ; in some words the i of the 
 Root is changed into e in other Cases also [e. g. 
 liraX^tg (Acc.), IttciX&giv], especially in noXtg, which, 
 moreover, as the verse requires, may lengthen e into 
 tj, e. g. Gen. noXtog (dissyllable),’ ttoAeoc and voXriog, 
 &c., Dat. PL 7 roXie<j(Tt, Acc. 7roXitg ; and in oic, ovis , 
 D at. PI. oka gw, o ’iWiv, oeatv. —(2) Words in -vg 
 (which in the Attic end in the Gen. in -ewe) have 
 -eoc, and in the Dat Sin g. both the uncontracted 
 and contracted forms, e. g. tvpti, nrix^h irXarei ; in the 
 other Cases, the uncontracted forms are commonly 
 used, but they are generally to be pronounced with 
 Synizesis* 
 
 § 201. Irregular Nouns (comp. § 47.). 
 1. P o v v (to, knee), and 8 6 p v (to, spear) 
 
 Sing. 
 
 PI. N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 yovvarog and yovvog, Sovparog and Sovpog 
 
 Sovpan and Sovpl, 
 
 yovvara and yovva, 8oupara and 
 
 Dual 8ovp&, 
 
 yovvtoVf Sovptov, , 
 
 yovvaat^-aat) and'youvfffcri. SovpaaiandSovpwa 
 
 2. K d pa (to, head ):— 
 
 Sing. N. k apt], Gen. leapfrog, Kapfjarog , Kparog , Kpaa to 
 Dat. Kapnn, k apWTiy k pari, Kpaan , 
 
 Acc. k apri (kjo ara, Masc Od. 8, 92), 
 Plur. N. K apd, KopijoTO (and Kapr\va 
 
 G. KparwVf ( Kaprivtov 
 
 D. Kpaai, f i 
 
 A . Kpaara f ( Kapyva). 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 
 
 509 
 
 § 203 .] 
 
 3. fc a v g (fi, ship ):— 
 
 Sing. N. vtjuc> Plur. vnag and veec, 
 
 G. vrtog and vtoc, and vtwv, 
 
 J)' v)J f VlJVfft, V»?E<T<Tl,vIcflTfft, 
 
 A. vfja and via, vijac and vlac- 
 
 i ' 
 
 4. X c i> ( 17 , /tand), Dat. x £ /”> Acc. x*{> a > Dat * P1 * 
 fctigtcnv and ^aigaaaLv. 
 
 , 
 
 § 202. Adjectives. 
 
 1. The Adjectives (3a0vg and wicvg have some¬ 
 times the Feminine form - a a or - in: (3a0irjg, (3a- 
 Bifiv, ioKta. Some Adjectives in -vc are also of Com¬ 
 mon Gender ; e. g. "H prj OriXvg aova a, r\ 8 v g avrpm 
 
 2. Adjectives in ■ tj £ « Ct - ij e a a a, -r\av otten 
 occur in the contracted form, - f j g, - rj a a a, - ii v; 
 e. g. Tfjuiic ; those in -6 eig, - o e a a a, - o e v con¬ 
 tract OE into £u; e. g. 7raSta Xwraiivra. 
 
 3. n o X u C (§48) is thus inflected 
 
 Sing. Nom. 7 roXuc and 7rouXvc; 7roXu; and iroA- 
 Xog, t roXAo'vGen. ttoXeoc Acc. ttoXvv and 
 
 7rovXvv; 
 
 Plur. Nom. 7 toXe£c and ttoXeTc; Gen. ttoAewv, 
 
 —Dat. TroXeai, 7 roXioai and noXaaaai Acc. tto- 
 Xtag and noXalg* 
 
 i> 
 
 hv § 203. Comparison. 
 
 1. The endings -wrtpog and -curaroc are sometimes 
 used, though the Vowel of the preceding syllable is 
 | long [comp. § 50,1. (a)]; e. g. bfagwrarog, KaKoiaivd)- 
 rtpog. Adjectives in -vg and -pog have the Comp. 
 
 1 • * ■ 
 
510 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [§ 204. 
 
 in •Uov and the Sup. in -iarog, though sometimes 
 also the regular form; e.g. yXvxvg, yXodiov; (5a9vg, 
 fiadiarog; ohcrpog, oiKTiarog and oltcTpoTarog . 
 
 2. Anomalous fo r m s (§ 52):— 
 ay ad 6 g, Comp. apdto v, Xioiiov and X (oirepog, Sup. 
 
 KapuaTog. 
 
 x a ko g, Comp. KaKMTEpog, \tipoTtpog, \tpdiov, %e- 
 pttoTtpog, Sup. rjKKTTog . 
 
 6 X i y o g, Comp. oXi^iov. 
 
 p rj t Slog, Comp. prfiTtpog, Sup. prfiarog and pij'i- 
 rarog. 
 
 f3 p a S v g, Comp. (3paaa<ov, Sup. j3apSiarog» 
 p a k p 6 g, Comp. paaaiov. 
 
 7r a ^ v g , Comp. Traaoiov* 
 
 § 204. Pronouns . 
 
 1 .Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Dual Nom. 
 G. and D. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 
 iyio, (before a 
 Vowel, iyiov), 
 
 iptO, tptV, JULtV 
 
 , (^ v \> 
 
 epdo, tptdtv, 
 
 tpOl, pOl (jUOl), 
 
 £/X£, pi (pt), 
 
 ^ •• 
 viol, 
 
 vCSiv, 
 
 vioi and viOf 
 
 rjpdg, apptg, 
 Vpiiov, ripd- 
 io v. 
 
 (TV, TVVTJ, 
 
 crio, atv 
 (aev), 
 
 ado, aid tv, 
 
 TtOLO, 
 
 aoi, toi ( toi), 
 rdivy 
 ai (ad), 
 
 a(f)idi, <7 (j)io, 
 a<pioiv,o<p(pv, 
 
 atyioi and 
 
 atyiv, 
 
 vpdg, vpptg, 
 vpiiov, vpd- 
 
 (OV, 
 
 to, tv (tv), 
 do, tdtv, 
 ioT, ot (ot), 
 
 it, t (t;, piv 
 
 (gw), 
 
 atytoiv (a<j>w 
 iv), 
 
 acjnoi (i aijxos ), 
 
 a(J)iiov (<70£- 
 a>v),<70wi/, 
 aipdiov, 
 
§ 204.] 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 511 
 
 Plur. Dat. ti/uv, rijutv, 
 a>/a(v), 
 
 ACC. Uju/ac, VfJLCiQ, 
 
 ayfiE. 
 
 r * >f 
 VfJLIV , VjU- 
 
 fu(v), 
 
 vyiag, v/ifie, 
 
 (T<p(<Tt(v)[<T(l)l- 
 
 <T(j)((t') 
 [fX0l(v)], 
 G(piag (a(pE- 
 ag), (T(pae 
 (a<pag), 
 cr<pt (&</>£)• 
 
 2. The compound forms of the reflexive- 
 Pronouns t/uavrou , otavrov , &c., never occur in 
 Homer; instead of them he uses the personal-Pro¬ 
 nouns, and the Pronoun avrog separately ; e. g. 
 Cfx avTOv, ijULol avrip, e/ulev avrrjg, £ avrtjv, oT «i»r^ 
 
 3. Possessive-Pronouns: rede, -*1, m 6v 
 
 (instead of trot,'); tdc, *dv and dc, *7> ov > suns, -a, 
 -um; djudc-, -4 -ov (instead of rnizrepog); rtvirepog , 
 -a, -ov, o/its vfiog, -r),-6v (instead of yyirEpog ); 
 
 (yQbHTtpog, -a, -ov , of you both ; acpog, -ih m ov (instead 
 
 of cnpirepog). s 
 
 4. Demonstrative-Pronouns: roto and 
 r£v (instead of rou); rot and rat (instead of ot and ai ); 
 rdwv (instead of rwv); rotcrt (instead of rote); ratcrt, 
 Tpai and rijg (instead of rate);— oSe, Dat. PI. roteSeat, 
 and ToigStacn (instead of roigSe). 
 
 5. Relative-Pronoun s : o (instead of de); 
 oov (instead of ov); hjg (instead of fjc)> \ a anc ^ V c 
 (instead of alg). 
 
 6. Indefinite- and Interrogative- 
 Pronouns: (1) Gen. rlo, tev (instead of rtvo'e); 
 Dat. tuo, T$ (instead of rtvt); PI- aaaa (instead oi 
 riva) , Gen. temv (instead of rtvtvv); Dat. teoigl (in¬ 
 stead of rial) (2) Gen. rlo, tev (instead of rivog) 
 
 (3) ogngl Sing . Nom. ong, Neut. ort,drrt, Plur. onva, 
 
 Gen. OTEV, OTE O, drrtO, UTTEV, OTEU)V, 
 Dat. OTE(p, OTlp, OT EOLGl, 
 
 Acc. drtva, Neut. ort, drrt, onvag, 
 
 drtva and aGCM- 
 
HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [§ 200. 
 
 M2 
 
 § 205. Numerals. 
 
 Cardinals. The collateral form of pia is ia, 
 njc, fy, tav; and of ivi, the form lip. —Auo and Svu 
 are indeclinable ; collateral forms of these are So nb, 
 Soiot, Sotai, Soia, &C. —tlterupcCj ~d (instead of TEaaa- 
 pEg, -a). —AucGScko and SvoKaiStKd as well as SioSe tea. 
 —’E tiKocn (instead of ukocti).—’O ySuncovra and^ eu- 
 vliKovra (instead of oySorjKovra and EPEvriKovra ).—’Ev- 
 vtd\i\oi and SEKcrfiXoi (instead of EvvaKig\iXioi an d 
 pvpioi). —The endings -anovra and -atcoaioi become 
 -I'lKOvra, -rjKocnoi. —O r d i n a 1 s : rpirarog , rtrparoe, 
 EjSSopuzog, oySbarog, Evarog and eivarog . 
 
 The Verb. 
 
 § 206. Auament. — Reduplication. 
 
 1. The Au g m e n z is prefixed or omitted, as the 
 verse requires; e. g. A vge, Olcrav, oparo, e\e. In the 
 P e r f. the temporal Augment is omitted only in cer¬ 
 tain words i e. g. avioya. 
 
 2. Words which have the Digamma always take 
 the syllabic Augment; e. g. avSavw, EaSov ; ec- 
 So/uai, EEKsapr)v, also in the Part. EEiaapEvog • The e 
 seems to be lengthened on account of the verse in 
 EioiKvia and EVdSa (llfaSs, from avSavio ). 
 
 3. The Verbs o i v o \ o e to and avSavw take 
 the syllabic and the temporal Augment at the same time, 
 viz. ttpi/oxda (but more frequently ipvo\oEi), ErivSavE 
 as well as rjvSavE. 
 
 4. The Reduplication of p occurs in p e - 
 p v 7r w pkv o g from pvirbio, I make foul. On the 
 other hand, the Perfects e ppo p a (from pEipopat) 
 and ia a v pat, (from oevw) are formed according 
 
PERSONAL-ENDINGS 
 
 513 
 
 § 207.] 
 
 to the analogy of Verbs beginning with p —K raopai 
 makes etcrripai in the Perf. 
 
 5. The A o r. II. Act. aw \ Mi d., also, fre¬ 
 quently takes the j Reduplication, which re¬ 
 mains through all the Moods t as well as i’n the Inf. 
 and Part. The simple Augment e is sometimes, but 
 rarely , prefixed to this Reduplication in the Ind. ; 
 e. g. Ka/uvuj, I become weary, Aor. II. Subj. tcticajww; 
 KeXopai, I incite , i k e k A 6 /lit] v; \ay\avw, I obtain, 
 X IX a x o v ; Xapf3avu), I receive , XeXafieaQai; 
 <ppaZ(o, I say , tt e <J) p aS o v, eir e (J> p a ^ o v. 
 
 ' 6 . The following are examples of Homeric 
 Perfects with the Attic Reduplication 
 (§ 89) :— aXaofiai, I wander , aX-aXripai; ’AX£2 
 (aKa\iZ(n), 1 grieve , aic-ijx*P a ‘,» « K ’«X T »/ iat ; 
 ipt'nrw, I demolish, Ip-epnrro; ep'iZw, 1 contend , 
 g p-rj p i a pa i. 
 
 7. Homeric A or i sts with the A 6 t«c Redu¬ 
 plication (§ 89, Obs.) aXc'gw, / ward o/, 
 (’AAK12) rjX-aXicov, aX-aX *■£ tv, aX-aXicdtv; 
 Iv-iktu), I chide, ev-ev~nrov; op-vvpi, I excite, 
 lop-ope ;—and with the Reduplication in the middle: 
 epvKto, I restrain , 17 p v-k a - k ov, Inf. iputcaicieiv; 
 iviTTTCJ, ^ V l / - 7T a - 7T £ v. 
 
 § 207. Personal-endings and Mood-vowels. 
 
 1. I. Per s. Sing. Act. Several Subjunctives 
 have the ending -pi; e. g. Kreiviopi (instead of Kretvw), 
 WeXwpi, ’ISwpi, Tvywpt, 'iicwpi, ayaywpi. 
 
 2. II. Pers. Sing. Act. The ending -aOa 
 
 (§§ 137 and 143) occurs in the II. Pers. Pres. Ind. 
 of Verbs in -pi; e. g. rfOrioOa , SiSoiaOa ;—also fre¬ 
 quently in the Subj. of other Verbs; e. g. lOeXyaOa, 
 eiiryaOa ;—more rarely in the Opt i e. g. kX aioicrOa, 
 fjaXoiaOa. z 2 
 
514 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT 
 
 [§ 207 . 
 
 3. Ill, Per s. Sing. Act. The Subj. some¬ 
 times has the ending -<n(v); e. g. WeXi^cl^v), ayijm, 
 aXaXKriai, Stptjai (instead of Stg), ptOiyaij —the Opt. 
 only in iTapcnfrOairim. 
 
 The///. Per s. Plur. Imp er. always has the 
 short ending, (viz. in the Act. -vtlov, and in the 3fid. 
 and Pass. -oOoov) ; e. g. p etovtiov, SrjaavTtov, etteoGcov, 
 Xe^aaQa) v, laravTivv , iaraaO iov. 
 
 4. Personal-endings of the Plpf. Ac¬ 
 tive :— 
 
 I. Pers. Sing, -e a (always); e. g. 7 tettoiBeu, EreSt'iirEa, 
 
 ySea (instead of ettettoiGeiv, &c.). 
 
 II. — — -t a (,•; e g. E7£0rj7T£ac (instead of ete- 
 
 Oi'itteiq). 
 
 Obs. 1. The III. Pers. Sing. Plpf. Act. in and also the same 
 Pers. of the Impf. in -u occurs in Homer before a Vowel with v ipsfc- 
 xuarixov appended J hrrqxi/v, (ZsfiX/jKUv, flaxtut (Impf. from acrKsa). 
 Comp. § 143. 
 
 5. The II. and III. Pers. Dual of the 
 historical Tenses, Act. and Mid., are sometimes 
 exchanged for each other —(- r ov and - crOov, in¬ 
 stead of -rrjv and -cr0r|i>);— e. g. Suoketov, Owpi'iocre- 
 <r Oov (instead of Sicoketyiv, GtoprjaaEcrOr])'). 
 
 6. The II. Pers. Sing. Mid. appears either 
 (1) in the uncontracted form, -ecu, -7?at, -eo, -ao,—e. g. 
 XilTTECU, XlXa'lECll , CKplKYjat , EpVGCYECll , £7 TaVpr)(U, VTTeXiXJCIO , 
 iyelvao; or (2) in the contracted form, - y (from -tat, 
 -rjat), - e v (Irom -eo), - to (from -ao), e. g. a^'iKp, 
 eVAeu, tpx £u > EKpepu). The endings -EEat and -eo are 
 also lengthened into - e l a i and - e i o, or one e is 
 dropped ; e. g. /uvQtiai, vEiai, epeio, antio ;—fwQtcii 
 (instead of poOeech), ntoXEai, ekXeo, ettcoXeo .—In the 
 P erf. and Plpf. Mi d. or P ass.,a is sometimes 
 dropped, e. g. pipvai (as well as plpvy, formed from 
 pipve-a-ai), fSlfiXiiat, Eocrvo. 
 
 7. The I. P ers. D ual and P lur. Mi d. end in 
 -pEoOov or -ptOov, -pEoOa or -peOa respectively ; e. g. 
 typaZoptaOa and ptQa. 
 
/ 
 
 § 207.] PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 515 
 
 8. The III. Pers. Plur. Ind. Perf. and 
 Plpf. Mid. or Pass . and Op t. Mid. have the 
 endings -arai, - a r o respectively (instead of - vrai , 
 -vro) ; e. g. aKr])££aTai, 7T£^)o/3/jaro, tcrraXar o, TErpa- 
 < paTai , apr\<yaiaro , ytvoiaro. (Comp. § 106, Obs. 4.) 
 
 9. The III. Pers. Plur. A or. Pass, has the 
 short ending - e v (instead of -rjaav) ; e. g. rpcKptv 
 (instead of irpa^rjaav). 
 
 10. The long Mood-vowels of the Subj. (viz. w and 
 rj) are frequently shortened intoo and c, as the verse 
 may require; e. g. tojUEv (instead of ioj/xev), arpE^Erac 
 (instead of arpi^rai). 
 
 11. The Inf. Act. has the endings - 1 fit vat, 
 -£>£v and -av (e being the Mood-vowel and 
 -p£vcu the ending); e. g. TvrrTtpzvai, rvirregev, rvirreiv; 
 _Verbs in -can and -tw have - rj p tv a i (the rj aris¬ 
 ing from the contraction of the Mood-vowel s and 
 the final Vowel of the Root); e. g. 70 hfizvai (yoaw), 
 (piXrifJLtvcu (fjnXito );—with the ending -rgxtvcu, that of 
 the Pass. Aorists corresponds; e. g. Tvm'ifMvat (in¬ 
 stead of TVTTrivai ). The Inf. Aor. II. has the ending 
 - £ e 1 v as well as -av ; e. g. iSeeiv and iSuv. In the 
 Pres, of Verbs in -jut, the endings -/uevai and -gsv are 
 appended directly to the unaltered Root of the Pies., 
 and in the Aor. II. Act. to the simple Root; e. g. tiO£- 
 
 jtxtvat, TiQIyzv; iura-nEvai ; bibo-gevai, fziKvv-jiEvai ; 
 6£-llev, bo-ptvai ;—there is an exception in the case of 
 the Aor. II. Inf. Act. of Verbs with Roots ending in 
 a and u, which, as in the Ind., retain the long Vowel ; 
 e g. crnj-jU£vut> Su-pa >ai. 
 
 12. The I m p f. and Aor. Ind. take the endings 
 -afCOM, -<TKtC, -<XKe(v), in the Mid. -OKOpriV, -(TKOU (-(TKEO, 
 -ctkeu), -antrOf when a repeated action is to be denoted; 
 hence this is called the 11 e r a t i v e f o r m; it regu¬ 
 larly omits the Augment j e. g. bu>tu-£-(TKovj I3octk-e- 
 (TKOVTO, VlKa-CTKO/ueV, KCtAf-E'CTfCE, EA ClG-a-CTKEV, ba-OKS, 
 ou-(tk£, ara-ffKt. 
 
516 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [S 208 
 
 C»BS. 2. In Verbs in -a>, the Mood-vowel of the Ind. is used be¬ 
 fore these endings;—in those in -a#, -uutkov is shortened into 
 -aer xov, which, as the verse requires, may be lengthened into 
 axtrxov ; e. g. vcutrdccaxov ;—those in -So> have - * & a k o v, rarely 
 ' 5 <7 x o » (e. g. xxXecrxtTo), also - s 11 <r x o v (e. g. vuxilto’xov) io 
 Verbs in -fu the Mood-vowel is omitted. 
 
 § 208. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. 
 
 1- A. Verbs in -a to. —In these, the uncon -j 
 traded form occurs only in particular words and 
 forms ; e. g. 7 rcpaov, KartaKtaov ; always in vXato, and 
 those Verbs which have a long a for their Charac¬ 
 teristic, or have a monosyllabic Root; e. g. Siipatov, 
 Trttvawv, txpae (from ^pa'-to, I assail). In some 
 Verbs, a is changed into £ ; e. g. pevoivtov (from ^ £ - 
 voivaw), yvrEov (from avrato), 6 /uokXwv (from 6/uo‘ 
 kXcuo). 
 
 2. Instead of the uncontracted and contracted 
 forms, a resolution of the syllable produced by con¬ 
 traction occurs, whenever the measure of the verse 
 requires. Two cases are here to be distinguished:—• 
 
 (a) When the first syllable in the uncontracted 
 form is short, and the second syllable is long 
 (whether by nature or position ), a short a (a) 
 is placed before a or ct, and o is placed before 
 (D or ( 1 ), e. g. opato, opio, b p 6 to; bpaug, opag, 
 o paq g; opaei, opa, 6 p a a ; 6 p a o v a 1 , optoot, 
 6 po (o cri ;— bparjg, opag, 6 p a a g ; — opaoipi, 
 opippi, o p 6 (p p.L ;— opaovrai , opiovrai, o p b - 
 (ovrat; bpatoOcu, opacrOai, bpa'acrQat .— 
 Rut such forms as bpatrov, bpaoptv, opatre, 
 &c., can only be contracted , not resolved, be¬ 
 cause the second syllable of the uncontracted 
 form is short; nor can such forms as dixpatov; 
 
 7 Ttivatov be resolved, because the first syllable 
 of the uncontracted form is long. 
 
 (b) But it the first syllable of the uncoiltracteU 
 
§ 208.] 
 
 CONTRACTION IN VERBS 
 
 517 
 
 form is long by nature or position, there are 
 likewise two cases to be distinguished:— 
 
 (a) When the second of the two uncon¬ 
 tracted syllables is long by nature, a long 
 a (a) is placed before a or q, and o> is 
 placed before w (but wo i occurs instead 
 of coif), e. g. fitvoivau), fiEvoivCo, /j.e- 
 v o l v to to ; /itvoivaei, fievoiva , julevoi - 
 v aq ; rif3aovaa, ?]j3w<xa, nj3wwaa ; hfiaoipi, 
 i}j 5 ippi, 17 j 3 o j o l fit ; fiaigaoiv, yaipiov, 
 g. a 1 g u) a> v ; fiaifAaovGa, fiaipioaci, fiai- 
 (lonvcra; fiaipaovai, gaifiCjai, fiaipu)- 
 w cr t. 
 
 (j3) But when the second of the two uncon¬ 
 tracted syllables is short, or long merely 
 by position, the corresponding short 
 Vowel is placed after the long one, e. g. 
 VTn/jLvaEaOe, virtyvaaOe, vTTEpva'aGOt; 
 /urj8?' jit v a a a 0 a t clkoitiv, Od. a, 39 .; 
 TTUVTEQ jUL V (x) o v t o, Od. A, 288.; 
 
 O ijpOJl'TtC, flfiwOVTtg. 
 
 Obs. In the Dual-forms, a- v x v r v *, <r u v « * - 
 
 e « r » v, <p oirrir »j* (from Verbs in -a*/), as is contracted into n 
 (instead of a); and in op.a.^r u'r>iv and atrs iky tv* (from 
 Verbs in -s u), st is contracted into v (instead of u). 
 
 3 . B . Verbs in - e w .— The only contractions 
 which occur are e1 (from ee or eei) and e v (from eo 
 or eov). Contraction, therefore, does not take place in 
 all the forms in which t is followed by the Vowels 
 w, to, 17 , rj, or 01 ; e. g. ^tXlwjusv, (juXioipi, &c.; such 
 forms, however, must generally be pronounced with 
 Synizesis. In the other forms, contraction occurs or 
 not, as the verse may require ; e. g. <}>lXeei, IpEw, otqwe - 
 ovaa ; aipEvpriv, jevev . Sometimes the uncontracted 
 e is lengthened into «; e. g. trsAasro, fiiyely (instead 
 of ju/ 7 ^, Aor. II. Pass.). 
 
 4. C Verbs in -ou>.—These Verbs either 
 
518 
 
 H03IERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [§ 209. 
 
 (1) follow the ordinary rules of contraction, e. g. 
 •yowov/iiai’, or (2) are not contracted, but lengthen 
 o into (v , so that the forms of Verbs in -ow resemble 
 those of Verbs in -aw] e. g. iSowovrai, iSpo'ouaa, virvw- 
 oi nag (comp. hfiatoi’Ta); or (3) become altogether 
 analogous to Verbs in -aw, inasmuch as they resolve 
 "o vai {III. P er s. P lur. Pres.) into -6 w a i, 
 -ouvro into - owvro, - oUv into - o tp e v ; e. g. (dpo- 
 ovai) apovai, a pow a i (comp, bpowai) ; (SrjioovTo) 
 oriiovv to, SrjtowvTo (comp, ooocjvto) ; {Srfioou v} 
 Stjwiev, S r) i 6 w e v (comp, bgotgtv). 
 
 § 209. Formation of the Tenses. 
 
 The Attic Fut. (§ 83) occurs in Verbs in 
 e. g. KrepioiKTi. InVerbs in *tw, the ending 
 
 - f w is often used for the Fat. instead of -law ; e. g. 
 Kopkig (instead of Koplatig), p.a\iovrai (instead of 
 ga\iaovTai )\—in Verbs in -dw, after dropping <r, a 
 corresponding short Vowel is placed before the Vowel 
 formed by contraction; e. g. avnow, eXowai, Sa/uaci ; 
 — of Verbs in -vw, epvovai and ravvovai occur. 
 
 2. Liquid Verbs, in Homer, usually have the un¬ 
 contracted form in the Fut. Act. and Mid. ; e. g. 
 ipeu), tpEug, &c.—The following liquid Verbs form 
 the Fut. and A o r. I. with the endings -aw and 
 
 - a a respectively:— iceipw, I shear ( Ktpaai ), kIXXw, I 
 bring to shore (ntXacu), eiAw, 1 press (fXaai), Kvpw, I 
 light on (ku£)(T(i)), AP£2 {apapiaKw), I Jit {aoaai), op- 
 vupi, I excite ( bpaw , wpaa), $latyQdpw , I destroy ( Sia - 
 <pQipacu), cpvpw, 1 mix (({ivpaw). 
 
 3. The following Verbs form the Fut. without 
 the Tense-characteristic a: — filo/uai or fidopai (II. 
 Ters. far,), I shall live, Sr/w, 1 shall find, kViw or khu, 
 1 shall lie down. 
 
 4. The following Verbs form the A or. /. without 
 
FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 519 
 
 § 209.] 
 
 the Tense-characteristic <r :—I pour out, ; 
 <revo>, I put in motion , taotva) dXeopcu and aXtvofiai, / 
 avoid , nXevaro , aXtvdfitvog, aXiaaOat ; Kaiw, I burn , 
 £Kr?a and tfcaa. » 
 
 5. The endings of the A or. 1I. are sometimes ex¬ 
 
 changed for those of the Aor. I.: — fiaivw, I go , t[3i'r 
 crtTo, Imper. Svopai, I plunge into , eSuoeto, 
 
 Imper. Suoeq, Part. Svadpsvog; ayw, I lead , 
 a&pev ; iKviopai, I come , i^ov ; iXiyprjv, I laid myself 
 down to sleep , Imper. At£o, At£to; opw/ju, I excite, 
 Imper. opato (opatv ); I bear, otoz, olatfitvar, 
 
 dd8 a>, I sing , Imper. adazo. 
 
 6. In the dor. /. Pass, of some Verbs, v is 
 prefixed to the ending -Orjv, as the verse may re¬ 
 quire; e. g. &aicpn;0ijr£, KpivOdg , ekXIvOy} (§ 111, 0), 
 idovvdriv (from iSpuw), apTrvvvOt j (from 7 tv£Cl»). 
 
 7. Several J. o r i s t s II., in order to make a Dac¬ 
 tyl , are formed by a transposition ( Metathesis , § 190, 
 2.) of the Consonants ; e. g. eSpaicov, instead of j&ap- 
 kov (from SepKojuai), iirpaOov (from iripOw), eSpaOou 
 (from dapOarw), iipfiporov, instead of rj paprov (from 
 apapravu)). In like manner, on account of the metre, 
 a Vowel of the Root is dropped; e. g. aypo/uevog, 
 from ayepdpriv (ayeipw, I assemble)', typtro, from iye- 
 po/urjv (iysipto, I awaken ); ntyvov, ett t(j>vov (<I>EN12, I 
 put to death). 
 
 8. Homer forms a Perf. I. only from pure 
 
 Verbs , and such impure Verbs as assume z (§ 124) in 
 forming the Tenses, or are subject to Metathesis > e. g. 
 ya/pw, KEXapriKa (from XAl PE12) ; [3dXXiv , (3e[ 3Ar}i<« 
 (from BAA-). Besides these he forms only Per¬ 
 fects II .; but, even in pure Verbs and in the im¬ 
 pure Verbs just mentioned, he rejects the k in cer¬ 
 tain of the Persons and Moods , (e. g. regularly in the 
 Part.)) thus these forms become analogous to those 
 of the Perf. II.; e. g. KtKprjihg, from Kupvw ; k£\«- 
 ptjwg, from fisfidibg, from fiaivio (BA 12). 
 
 4 
 
HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [§ 210. 
 
 § 210. Conjugation of Verbs in -fit. 
 
 1. Even in Homer, the forms derived from -ho 
 and -oio (§ 130, Obs. 6) occur in the II. and III. 
 P e r s. S in g. Pres, and Impf.; e. g. eriOu, St- 
 3otc» StSol —A reduplicated Fut. of SiSw/ju also oc¬ 
 curs: SiSioGOfitv and SiSukjelv. 
 
 2. Verbs in -vpi form an Op t. both in the Act. 
 
 and Mid.; e. g. USvpsv (instead of hc$vlr]fnv) from 
 ticSvco, 0 {/tj (instead of <pmr]) from Scuvuro; so 
 
 also <pOio, (pOiro (Opt. of t (pOipriv) from (j>0'no. 
 
 3. The III. Pers. Plur. Impf. and A or. 
 11. in - e-aav , -?/-oav, -o- aav, -w-aav, -v-crav , are 
 shortened into -ev, -av, -ov, -vv respectively; e. g. tn- 
 Oev (instead of ErWtaav), W&v (instead of Wtoav ); 
 iarav (instead of i&Trjcrav) ; iSiSov (instead of |£k)o- 
 aav) ; eSo v (insteadof iSocrav ); i(j)vv (insteadof ityvaav). 
 
 4. In the II. Pers. Sing. Imp er. Pres, and 
 A or. 11 Mid., Homer rejects <7, and uses the uncon¬ 
 tracted form; e. g. Saivvo (instead of Satvvao ), pag- 
 vao, (pao , c rvvQto, tvOto. 
 
 5. The short Root-vowel is lengthened before the 
 Personal endings beginning with p and v, as the 
 verse may require; e. g. nOhpEvog (instead of nQipi- 
 voe), SiSovvat (instead of SiSovat ); so also FiEwOl, 'iXriQt. 
 
 6. In the A or. II. Subj. the following forms 
 are used, as the verse may require:— 
 
 Contracted Forms. Resolved and lengthened Forms. 
 
 (a) 2TA-. bing.l. or<o orho, ortho, j3 tho, 
 
 Dual GTrjTOV 
 Plur. 1. GTWflEV 
 
 *TVVQ-> 
 
 <77777/, tp{3r)y, <pr/y, <pOriy , 
 
 7Tapor? , /t70M, 
 
 GTEwpev (dissyll.), orriopt v, 
 
 2. ori/rt 
 
 3. orto (7 L 
 
 KarafteLOjuiEV, 
 tTTrjETE, 
 
VERBS IN -p. 
 
 521 
 
 § 211.] 
 
 (b) 0E-. Sing.l. 0<5 
 
 2. 6 rj q 
 
 3. Orj 
 Dual Orjrov 
 Plur. 1. Oio/uev 
 
 2. Orjre 
 
 3. 0(d<Tl(v) 
 
 (c) A0-. Sing. 3. Sio 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 
 3. 3u»o-t(v) 
 
 Oeoj, Oeioj, Safjttti), 
 
 Otyg, Oi'iyg, Oeiyg, 
 
 Oe 77 , 0np. awifl, piOnV f 
 OrisTOv, 
 
 OliO/ULEV, QeIOJUEVj 
 Sa/ueteTE, 
 
 6iu)cyi(v ), OeUogi(v)» 
 
 cujij(7i(v), dioy, 
 
 Zwouev, 
 
 6'wwcri(v). 
 
 Obs. Instead of ecrrva-av (Aor. I.), the shortened form tariaat 
 occurs j and instead of tarocrs (Perf.), the lengthened form icrrvrt. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 Subj. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Impf. Ind. 
 
 Opt. 
 Fut. Ind. 
 
 ■ 
 
 ■ 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 Impf. Ind. 
 
 Flit. Ind. 
 
 § 211. E l fit CE2 -flam. 
 
 2. E(J(TI, eIq. PI. 1. ElfXEV. 3. £a<n(v). 
 
 1. EW, flETe'lU). 3. £fl, E7JGl(v) } $<X l(v), 6fy. 
 
 PI. 3. iu)Gi(y ). 
 
 2. £(TGO. —Inf. £jUj uEvaiy EfiEvaii EfiEv. — -Part. 
 Ifjjv, eg vaa } eov; Gen. eovtoq. 
 
 1. Ea, ^a, EOV) ecfkov. 2. srjoOa. 3. hrjv, ^£i/, 
 ijrjv. Dual 3. rjorr/v. PI. 3. laav, Eiaro 
 (instead of ^vro, from ripriv). 
 
 2. £Oig. 3. £ 0 t. PL 2. ElTE. 3. £l£V’ 
 
 1. EGOpai , EOGOflCU , &c. 3. EGETai, EGCTSTdl 
 
 and EGEirai. 
 
 Eljui (’I-). 
 
 2. tlaOa. —Sub]’. 2. bjiOa. 3.iymv. —Inf. 
 
 ’/jU£vat, ijU£V > ’tl/x£vat. 
 
 1. rjta, Y\iov» 2. f£C. , 3. ?}t£(v), ye(v), 
 
 PI. 1. yofiEv. 3. rjicrav, yvav, rjiov, ioav. 
 —Opt. (01, l£(T|. 
 
 1. E y iGopai. —Ind. 3. ao-aro and «t- 
 araro. Dual 3. EEiaaaOrfv. 
 
522 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 [§ 212. 
 
 Verbs in-w, which in the AOR. II. ACT. and 
 MID., IN THE PERF. AND PLPF. ACT., and 
 IN THE PRES. AND IMPF., FOLLOW THE ANALOGY 
 of Verbs in -gi. 
 
 § 212. (1) A or. II. Act. and Mid. (Comp, 
 
 § 142). 
 
 E. The Characteristic is a V o w e 1 1 
 
 a, e, i, o, v. 
 
 fiaWaj, I throw, Aor. II. Act. (BAA-, zfi\i ]v ) ZvgflXri- 
 Ttjv, Inf. ZvgfiXi'igEvai (instead of ZvgjSXrjvcu); Aor. 
 II. Mid. (I/3A r]gr\v) e(5Xy]to , ZvgfiXrjvTO, Subj. gu/ 1 - 
 pXrjrai, fiXr/tTcu, Opt. (3Xe7o (from BAE-), Inf. 
 fiXriaOcu, Part. pXhtizvoQ. Hence the Put. /3A»j- 
 
 t Togai. 
 
 yilpaw or yripaaKU), I grow old , Aor. II. Act., III. 
 
 Pers. Sing, lyhpa, Part, yrjoag. 
 ktsivoj, I kill, Aor. II. Act. \ K tZv, PI. hragev, III. 
 Pers. tKTav, Subj. PI. KricogEv, Inf. Kragevai, 
 Kragev, Part, icracj Aor. II. Mid. (with Passive 
 > waning), cnrUraro, k raaOai, Kragevog. 
 ovrato, I wound, Aor. II. Act., III. Pers. Sing. oSra, 
 
 Inf. ovragevai, ovragav; Aor. II. Mid. ovragtvot 
 
 wounded. 
 
 mXaZw, I approach, Aor. II. Mid. IirX^nv. irAijro, 
 TrXr)VTQ. 
 
 TripTTXrjgi, I fill, Aor. II. Mid. ZttXtjto, Opt. TrXeignv 
 (from flAE-), Imper. -n-X^o. 
 irriivao,, 1 shrink through fear, Aor. II. Act., III. Pers 
 Dual KaTcnrTijTnv. 
 
 <pOa„w, I anticipate, Aor. II. Mid. <j>0auevoQ. 
 
 Obs. From s/Sw come the forms fiZrw (III. Fei 
 (HI. Pers. PI.), with a short Root-vowel. 
 
 l ers. Dual) and 
 
VERBS. 
 
 523 
 
 § 212 .] 
 
 A A £2 (Epic Root-form of Si£avK(o), I teach , Aor. IL 
 Act. (AAE-) tSajjv, I learned, Subj. daEio), Inf. Scn'r 
 
 fiEvai. 
 
 <t>0i-v(jj, I destroy and I decay, Aor. II. Mid. EtpOXfinv, 
 Opt. (pOVyriv , <p6iro, Imper. <p0i(r0u), Inf. fOiadai, 
 Part. (pdt/uEvog . 
 
 13i(3panTKu), I cat , Aor. II. Act. hfipivv. 
 t r\(vo), I float , Aor. II. Act. £7rXwv, Part. ttXwq, Gen. 
 
 -iovTog. 
 
 kXvio, I hear, Aor. II. Act. Imper. kXvOi, kXvte, ke- 
 
 kX vOl, KEkXUT6. 
 
 Xvat, I loose, Aor. II. Mid. Avro, Xvvto. 
 ttveu), I breathe, Aor. II. Mid. (I1NT-) ajunrvvTo (in¬ 
 stead of avEirvvro), he recovered breath, 
 mow, I put in motion , Aor. II. Mid. lavvyriv, I has¬ 
 tened, I strove, eggvo, avro. 
 
 I pour, Aor. II. Mid. \vvto, \vpEvoq. 
 
 B. The Characteristic is a Consonant. 
 
 ( i » „ 
 
 aXXofiai, I leap , Aor. II. Mid. aXao, aXro, liraXyEvog, 
 
 ETriaXfJLEvnq, Subj. aXtfrat. 
 
 apapi<jKU) (APQ), I flt, Aor. II. Mid. apfiEvog,fitted to. 
 fivTOy he seized , formed from JeXto (derived from 
 IXeTv, Aor. II. of aipEw). 
 
 SfYOjuai) I receive, Aor. II. Mid. eOekto, Imper. ce^o, 
 Inf. the I. Pers. E$Eyyr)v and the Part. Sly- 
 
 fitvog, as well as the Perf. SiStyyai, signify 4 to ex¬ 
 pect .’ 
 
 iX eXi^u), I whirl, Aor. II. IMid. c AtAlKTO. 
 
 iKviopai, I come, Aor. II. Mid. hero, 'UyEvog and 
 
 'iKfjiEvog, favorable. , 
 
 Xiyoyai, I lie down, select , recount, Aor. II. Mid. tAty- 
 
 yrjv, eXekto, Xekto. 
 
 fiiaivu), I defile, j uiavOrjv (III. Pers. Dual, instead or 
 
 Efita v-aOriv). 
 
 uiyvvfii, 1 mix, Aor. II. Mid. yu cro. 
 
524 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 
 [§ 213. 
 
 opvvfu , I excite , Aor. II. Mid. wpro, Imper. op<ro, op- 
 (TEOf Inf. opdat, Part, oppEvog 
 TraXXu), I brandish , hurl , shake , Aor. II. Mid. iraAro, 
 A# sprang. 
 
 TTEpOu), I destroy , Aor. II. Mid. nepOai (instead of 
 
 TTEpO-oOcu). 
 
 Trfiyvv/u , I make firm , yLr, Aor. II. Mid. Karl- 
 
 7TTJKTO* 
 
 § 213. (2) Per/. an d P Ipf Active . 
 
 (a) The Root ends in a Po w 0 A 
 
 *. « 
 
 yiyvopcu , / become , Perf. PI. yiyapEV , -art, -aa(T£(v) t 
 Inf. yeyafitv , Part, 'ycyaioe; Plpf. hcyEyarriv . 
 f3aivu), I go , Perf. PI. j3tj3ajU£v, &c.; Plpf. /3t- 
 
 13aaav . 
 
 defSai, I fear, Inf. Sei&pev (instead of Sct&lvcu), Imper. 
 SeihiOi, SeidiTE", Plpf. E^EiSipEv, E^tidurav. 
 
 tp\opai , I come , Perf. PI. EtXriXovOpEv. 
 
 Ovhm<(*)> I die , Perf. PI. riOvapEv, TE0va(Ti(v), Imper. 
 riOvaOi , Inf. teOvo-pev and TEOvapEvai , Part, Ttftyrfo'ci 
 -wrocj T£0i'£WTt; Plpf. Opt. TEOvatrjv. 
 
 TAAAQ, / Am/*, suffer, dare , Perf. PI. TErXapEv, 
 Imper. tetXuOi , Inf. TErXapEv , Part. rerX/jw g. 
 
 MAI2, I strive after , desire earnestly , Perf. PL piparov, 
 -apEv, -ars, -aaai, Imper. pEparto, Part, pepau; c, 
 -drroc and -droe; Plpf. pipaaav. 
 
 (b)The Root ends in a Consonant 
 
 Preliminary Obs. The r of the inflexion-ending, when it comes 
 immediately after £7ie Root-consonant, is changed into 6 in some 
 Perfects. 
 
 avwya, / command , avcuypEv , Imper. 
 clvw^Oe. 
 
§ 214.] 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 525 
 
 iyphyopa, I am awake (from lyupio, I awaken ), Imper. 
 lypvyopOs, Inf. iyprjyopOcu; hence zypriy6pQa(Ji(v) 
 (instead of eypvyopam(v). , 
 
 7 T£ 7 roi 0 a, I trust (from ttuOu), I persuade ), Plpi. £7re- 
 
 mOuitv. ~ . 
 
 otSa, I know (from E’lAQ [a8w], video), ifym' (in¬ 
 stead of i'( 7 jU£v), Inf. ’iSpevai. 
 
 Sot«ca, 7 am like (from E’lKQ [t’lW]), II. and III. Pers. 
 Dual tiKTov ; III. Pers. Dual Plpf. aicnjv; hence, 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. et/cro. 
 
 na(T\u)j I suffer, Perf. TrinoaOt (instead of TnirovOaTt). 
 
 § 214 . ( 3 ) Present and Imp e rfe c t. 
 
 avvu), I accomplish , Impf. avvTo(a). , 
 
 Ttxvvw, I expand , stretch, ravurai (instead of ravmrai). 
 zpvio and el pvw, I draw , drag away ; Mid. upvaTai 
 (instead of upvvrai ), Inf. tpvaOai, eipvauai, m the 
 sense of 6 to protect 4 to guard \ 
 tSo), I eat , Inf. idptvai. . 
 
 ^e'pw, / 6ear, Imper. ^epre (instead of (peptrs). 
 
QUESTIONS 
 
 ON THE 
 
 ETYMOLOGY* 
 
 § 1. The Alphabet. 
 
 1. How many letters has the Greek language? 
 
 2. How are they divided ? 
 
 3. Write the second form of <r. When is it used ? 
 
 4 Give the meanings of the terms 4'iXov, pix^ov, ftya appended 
 
 to the names of the letter i, v, o, a respectively. 
 
 § 2. Pronunciation. • 
 
 5. How is the pronunciation of * distinguished from that of % ? 
 
 6. What sound has y before y, x, % and | ?—before Vowels ? 
 
 7. Has n the sound which the corresponding letters have in the 
 
 word ‘ nation ’ ? 
 
 § 3. Division of the Vowels. — Diphthongs. 
 
 8. Which are the short Vowels ?—the long ones ?—the doubtful 
 
 ones ? 
 
 9. Are the doubtful Vowels so called because their quantity is 
 
 undetermined ? 
 
 10. Write the marks of the short , the long and the doubtful Vowels 
 
 respectively. 
 
 11. Repeat the Diphthongs. Give their English equivalents. 
 
 12. What do you mean by the Iota subscript ? With what letters 
 
 is it used? What are such letters then called ? How are 
 they pronounced ? What is the position of the Iota sub - 
 script in the case of capital letters ? 
 
 13. What is the puncta dicer&sis , and what does it indicate? 
 
 When two Vowels occur together, over which of them is it 
 placed ? 
 
 14. Give examples shewing the way in which the Romans pro¬ 
 
 nounced the Greek Diphthongs. 
 
 § 4. Division of the Consonants. 
 
 15. What are the two divisions of the Consonants f 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 K 07 
 
 t/« * 
 
 16. Meaning of the terms, guttural , lingual , Za&ia/ ? 
 
 17. Which are the Semivowels? —the Mutes? How are the 
 
 Mutes subdivided ? 
 
 18. What name is given to a ? 
 
 19. Mention the double Consonants. Origin of the name ? To 
 
 what two letters is £ equivalent ? 
 
 * 
 
 § 5. Breathings. 
 
 '20. How many Breathings are there ?—name them. Write the 
 marks of them. 
 
 21. To what English letter does the rough Breathing correspond ? 
 
 22. Where are the Breathings placed ? What is their position in 
 
 the case of Diphthongs commencing with a capital ? What 
 initial letters always have the Spiritus asper ? Supply the 
 breathings in dv^oog (the initial letter having the smooth). 
 
 § 6 . Crasis and Elision. 
 
 23. Meaning of Crasis ?—Elision ? When do they take place ? 
 
 24. What name is given to the mark of Crasis ? Is it different 
 
 from that of Elision ? 
 
 25. Quantity of the syllable formed by Crasis ? Position of the 
 
 mark of Crasis in the case of a Vowel and a Diphthong re¬ 
 spectively ? Is this mark ever omitted ? 
 
 26. In Crasis, what is the only case wherein the Iota subscript is 
 
 written ? 
 
 27. What is the mark of Elision called ? It is sometimes omitted ; 
 
 w'hen ? 
 
 .. A 
 
 § 7. Moveable Consonants at the end of a word. 
 
 28. Mention the moveable Consonants appended to words in Greek. 
 
 29. What is the use of the » i<piXxv<rnxov ? Enumerate the cases 
 
 in which it is employed. Is ssra«ri Upa. avrovlot.'^wv correct ? 
 
 30. To what words is <r appended ? How is lx written when it 
 
 precedes a Voivel ? 
 
 31. What does ol become before a Vowel with a rough Breathing ? — 
 
 before one with a smooth Breathing ?—before p ? Correct 
 
 »VX ivpvxu. 1 
 
 § 8 . Change of Consonants in Inflexion and Derivation. 
 
 32. What do you mean by ‘ the laws of Euphony ’ ? 
 
 33. State the general Rule relative to the order of breathing of a 
 
 P- or a K- sound coming before a. T- sound. Is there any 
 exception ? 
 
 34. When only are the Medial Mutes changed before a rough 
 
 Breathing ? 
 
 35. When two smooth Mutes precede an Aspirate, must both, or 
 
 only one be changed ? 
 
 36. What change takes place in a T- mute before another T- mute ? 
 
 Exception to this ? 
 
528 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 
 37. What does v before a Liquid become ? Exception to this ? 
 
 38. State the effect of a p on a preceding P-, K or T- sound. 
 
 39. What changes take place in v before a P-, a K-, and a T- sound 
 
 respectively ? Exception ? 
 
 40. When <r comes after a P-, a K-, or a T- sound, what takes 
 
 place ? Is there any exception to the Rule ? 
 
 41. Give some Latin words exemplifying the preceding Rules. 
 
 42. What takes place when <t is preceded, by », or » with a T- 
 
 sound ? 
 
 43. Correct, where requisite :— o-lin.ros, vritpavirut, <rvv<r<rii(>u, 'uurri'kXai, 
 
 (rvvZ > iuyvu[At, <rv<rreXXw, <raXi/rr^i<r'roi (vrixXiv, ffrgivrros). 
 
 44. What is the ending of the Dat. Masc. Piur. of the Adjective 
 
 Xa-ih'i ? 
 
 45. In what instances is ^ doubled ? Is iSppvfaos (R, pvOpos) correct ? 
 
 46. Account for the Genitive of being r^os, while the Dat. 
 
 Plur. is fyfy. 
 
 47. Repeat the Rule, in accordance with which 6\6npi becomes 
 
 <ri6tifu. 
 
 48. Write the correct forms of 6v0r i <r»y.%i and \6tdn*. 
 
 49. Why do we write not 2x<p<p<t> ? 
 
 . 50. Correct the following words :— rttQHfoo/ieti, <r^t<p^rjvui, (louXiifafa, 
 
 Ti6a.<7r8ou, rgifirjTi, ItJgeTlinv. 
 
 § 9. Quantity of Syllables. 
 
 51. When is a Syllable short by nature ?—when long by nature ? 
 
 52. What is meant by a Syllable being ‘ long by position ’ ? 
 
 53. When a short Vowel is followed by a Mute and a Liquid, is 
 
 the quantity of it altered ? Give the exceptions to this Rule, 
 if there are any. 
 
 54. What is the quantity of contracted Syllables ? 
 
 § 10. Accentuation. 
 
 55. What is meant by ‘ Accentuation ’ ? 
 
 56. How many Accents are there in Greek ?—write the marks of 
 
 them. 
 
 57. What is denoted by the acute, the grave, the circumflex re¬ 
 
 spectively ? 
 
 58. How may the indefinite- Pronoun ns (any) be distinguished 
 
 from the interrogative- Pronoun ns ( who ?) ? 
 
 59. What is the position of the Accent in the case of a proper 
 
 Diphthong ?—in the case of an improper Diphthong com¬ 
 mencing with a Capital ?—in the case of diceresis ? 
 
 60. Repeat the general Rules relative to the position of the Accent | 
 
 in a word. 
 
 61. How is a Syllable long by position regarded with reference to I 
 
 Accentuation ? 
 
 62. Give the meanings of the terms :— Oxytone, Paroxytone , Pro-1 
 
 paroxytone, Perispomenon, Properispomenon, Barytone. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 523 
 
 § 11. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflexion 
 
 and Contraction. 
 
 63. By lengthening tlie final Syllable, what effect is produced in a 
 
 Proparoxytone ? —in a Properispommon ?—in an Oxytone ? 
 
 64. Mention the only class of words, in which a change would 
 
 result on shortening th e final syllable. 
 
 65. With reference to the Accent, what is the general effect of in¬ 
 
 creasing the number of Syllables, (1) at the beginning, (2) at 
 the end of a word ? 
 
 6o. State the general Rules as to the Accentuation of contracted/ 
 
 Syllables. 
 
 67. What Accent is to be set over th e final [contracted) Syllable, 
 when th q first of the uncontracted Syllables has the Acute ? 
 
 
 12. Change and Removal of the Accent in connected 
 
 Discourse . 
 
 68. How are Oxytones marked in the body of a sentence ? Execu¬ 
 
 tions ? 
 
 69. How is an Oxytone marked, when it comes before a punctua¬ 
 
 tion-mark ? 
 
 70. How are words formed by Crasis to be accented ? 
 
 71. Give the Rule for Accentuation in the case of Elision. Under 
 
 what circumstances is this Buie not applicable ? 
 
 § 13. Atonies. 
 
 72. What is meant by Atonies ’ ? 
 
 73. What other name is given to Atonies, and why? 
 
 74. Give a list of the Atonies. 
 
 75. When is ov accented, and what Accent has it ? 
 
 § 14. Enclitics. 
 
 76. Origin of the term * Enclitic ’ ? 
 
 77. What sort of words are called c^ovavpiva ? 
 
 78. Give a list of the Enclitics. 
 
 79. Is \fioi an Enclitic ? 
 
 50. Accent the interrogative- Adverb iras ( how ?) and the Adverk 
 
 ton [now). 
 
 § 15. Accentuation of words joined with Enclitics. 
 
 51. Describe the effect of an Enclitic on a preceding Oxytone, 
 Paroxytone, Proparoxytone, Perispomenon and Properispo- 
 menon respectively. 
 
 52. How are long Syllables in Enclitics regarded, with reference U 
 
 Accentuation ? 
 
 83. What is the effect of an Enelitie on a preceding A tome ? 
 
 84. What is the result in the case of a succession of Enclitics ? 
 
 2 A 
 
530 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. [ 
 
 85. Accentuate properly (where requisite) &vfyu<ro< tern, &v»p nt, i 
 
 Ktt) aoi, si ng, aupa pov, <pt\u as, y uvkixm rtvuv, nxovtrn nran, i 
 ayi loot, rs, ti ns nvx Qntri pot srapivai, havnog orfitrit. 
 
 § 16. Enclitics Accented. 
 
 86. Mention the different cases in which lan(v) is paroxytone. 
 
 87. When do the enclitic forms retain their Accent ? 
 
 88. Under what circumstances do the enclitic personal-Pronouns 
 * retain their Accent ? 
 
 89. What forms of the personal-Pronouns are to be used after un¬ 
 
 accented Prepositions ? 
 
 90. How is the phrase voa-Xo) Vs siatv, to be accented, if the i of a m 
 
 elided ? 
 
 § 17. Division of Syllables . 
 
 91. Repeat the general Rule for the division of Syllables. 
 
 92. How are compound words divided ? 
 
 93. If three Consonants occur together, when are they all considered ! 
 
 to belong to the following Syllable ? 
 
 94. How are the Syllables divided, when a 1s\.w.\>g follows a Liquid, 
 
 or when two like Consonants occur together ? 
 
 § 18. Punctuation-marks. 
 
 95. Give the names of the punctuation-marks. Write them. 
 
 96. Which of them are written as the corresponding ones are ia 
 
 English ? 
 
 97. How is the note of interrogation written in Greek ? 
 
 98. What is meant by the diastole, and what is its use l 
 
 § 19. General Views of the Verb . 
 
 99. What does the Verb express ? 
 
 100- How many classes of Greek Verbs are there ? 
 
 101. What peculiar signification has the Middle ? 
 
 102. Are any of the Tenses of the Middle and Passive identical ? 
 
 103. Repeat the Pres. Ind. Act. and the Pres. Ind. Pass, or Mid. \ 
 
 of ]3 ovXsvu. 
 
 104. What is the Greek of ‘ they were ’ ? 
 
 105. Mention the general Rule for the Accentuation of Verbs. 
 
 §§ 20, 21. Nature and Gender of the Noun. 
 
 106. Define a Noun. What other name is given to it ? 
 
 107- How many classes of Nouns are there ? 
 
 108. How many Genders have Nouns in Greek? 
 
 109. What are the two modes of determining the Gender of 
 
 Nouns ? I 
 
 110. There are 4 general Rules for determining the Gender of 
 
 Nouns by their meaning ; repeat them. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 531 
 
 § 22. Number, Case and Declension . 
 
 111. How many Numbers have Nouns, Adjectives and Verbs in 
 
 Greek ? 
 
 112. What is meant by the * Dual' ? 
 
 113. Give the names of the 5 Cases, and what they respectively 
 
 denote. 
 
 114. Which are the direct Cases ?—which, the oblique ? 
 
 115. How many Case-forms has the Dual ? 
 
 116. In a Neuter Noun or Adjective, what Cases have the same 
 
 form ? 
 
 117. What is meant by * Declension ’ ? How many Declensions 
 
 are there in Greek ? 
 
 § 23. Nature and Gender of the Adjective . 
 
 118. Define an Adjective. 
 
 119. In what respects does an Adjective agree with its Noun ? 
 
 120. How many Genders have Adjectives ? Have all Adjectives 
 
 distinct terminations for the different Genders ? 
 
 121. What other class of words do Adjectives resemble in their De¬ 
 
 clension f 
 
 § 24. General View of the Prepositions. 
 
 122. Mention some Prepositions which govern the Gen. only _the 
 
 Dat. only —the Acc. only— the Gen. andAcc _the Gen., DaU 
 
 and Acc. 
 
 123. To what class of words does a pot properly belong? 
 
 § 25. First Declension .' 
 
 124. There are no Nouns of one of the Genders belonging to the 
 
 first Declension ; which Gender is it ? 
 
 125. Give the Norn. Sing, endings of Nouns of the first Declen¬ 
 
 sion, specifying to which Gender they belong. 
 
 126. Repeat the Case-endings in the first Declension. 
 
 § 26. Paradigms of Feminine Nouns. 
 
 127. In which oi the Numbers are the Case-endings the same for 
 
 all words of the first Declension ? 
 
 128. When is a Vowel said to be pure ?—when impure ? 
 
 129. Repeat the Rules for forming the Sing. Case-endings of Nouns 
 
 in -n and -a respectively. 
 
 130. Under what circumstances does contraction take place ? How 
 
 are contracted words accented ? 
 
 131. Decline tpiXua, PoMuct, Xvoct., imota, 'Atitiva, yy, 
 
 and i'KaXa.. 
 
 132. What is the quantity of the ending Gen. -ns ?—of 
 
 Gen. -as (generally) ? 
 
532 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY- 
 
 / 
 
 133. What is the Nom. Fern. Sing, ending of Adjectives of three 
 
 terminations in -os preceded by e, * or ? ? 
 
 134. How do Adjectives in -oos form their Fem. ? 
 
 135. What is the quantity of the ending in the Adj. Xanvei ? 
 
 136- How are the Plur. endings -at and -m regarded with reference 
 
 to Accentuation ? 
 
 137. Give the general Rule for the Accentuation of words of the 
 
 first Declension. 
 
 138. How is the Gen. Plur. accented ? Exceptions ? 
 
 139. How is the position of the Accent regulated in the Fem. Plur. 
 
 of Adjectives in -os, -«(-a), -ov ? 
 
 140. Correct the Accentuation of voxfra, irr^aridbrai, xotlatv, f%ya- 
 
 X»jf, yXurrr,, (from 'Abovr,), ^turruv, uyfiai (from the 
 
 Adj. ayoia). 
 
 141. What Case do transitive Verbs generally govern ? 
 
 142. What Case generally goes with Verbs and Adjectives ex* 
 
 pressing the relation of ‘ to ’ or ’■for ’ ? 
 
 143. Give the Accentuation of the Article, o, >?, <r« throughout. 
 
 § 27. Paradigms of Masculine Nouns. 
 
 144. What is the ending of the Gen. Sing, of Masc. Nouns of the 
 
 first Declension ? If there are any exceptions to this, state 
 them. 
 
 145. In what Cases do Nouns in -as retain the -a ? 
 
 140. What is the general ending for the Voc. of Masc. Nouns in 
 this Declension ? Mention the classes of Nouns which make 
 the Voc. in -a. 
 
 147. What name is given to the Gen. in «? 
 
 148. What kind of Adjectives are declined like Masc. Nouns of 
 
 this Declension ? 
 
 149. Decline s^cctrrfji, /an-TgaXolas, ra/aias, ajrs-r ojXns, Kucgovrid'/is, 
 
 SjciPjjj, 2 vXXas and "Eo/u-ijs. 
 
 150. What is the quantity of the ending -as in the Acc. Plur., and 
 
 of -a in the Norn., Acc. and Voc. Dual? 
 
 § 28. Second Declension . 
 
 151.. How many endings has the second Declension, and to what 
 Genders do they respectively belong ? 
 
 152. Some Nouns in -ov are Fem. ; which are they? 
 
 153. Give the Case-endings throughout. 
 
 154. What is the ending of the Voc. of words in -os ? Exceptions ? 
 
 155. General rule for Accentuation in this Declension ? Exception ? 
 
 156. How is the Accent regulated in the Gen. Plur. ? 
 
 157. What kind of Adjectives are declined like Nouns of this De¬ 
 
 clension ? 
 
 158. Adjectives of two endings {-os, -ov) are generally of what 
 
 nature? 
 
 159. If a Verb has a Nom. in the Nent. Plur., of what Nuvibei 
 
 must the Verb (generally) be ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 5o3 
 
 1G0. Describe tbe usual positions of a governed Gen. , when it occurs 
 with a Noun and its Article. 
 
 161. When an Adj. occurs without its Noun , how are the Gender 
 
 and Number of the Noun understood to be determined ? 
 
 162. Decline the Nouns ct/xvriXae, his, ’l^yov, ip&nov; and the Ad¬ 
 
 jectives xoo'k'o; (->?, -ov), iXivhcog (-«, - ov), lixcaog (a, -ov), 2<a- 
 Qogos (- ov ). 
 
 § 29. Contraction of the Second Declension. 
 
 163. What sort of Nouns are contracted in the second Declension ? 
 
 164. Mention also the different classes of Adjectives which suffer 
 
 contraction. 
 
 165. In what respect does the Declension of contracted Adj. in 
 
 -ooi differ from that of similar Nouns ? 
 
 166. In an Adj., when a Vowel or q precedes the Fem. ending -ia, 
 
 how is it contracted ? 
 
 167. In the Accentuation of contract words of this Declension, 
 
 there are some exceptions to the general Rule ; give them. 
 
 168. What is meant by ‘ Apposition ’ t 
 
 169. Decline the contracted form of the Nouns poo;, xdv-ov; and of 
 
 the Adjectives xocxovoo; (-o-v), 'St-rXoos (-v, -ov), foivtxza; (-«, -ov), 
 cogyvgto; [-a, -ov) aild \ghog (-a, -ov). 
 
 § 30. Attic Second Declension. 
 
 170. Describe the Attic second Declension . Give its Case-endings 
 
 throughout. 
 
 171. What letter is substituted for cv of the regular second De¬ 
 
 clension ?—what for oi ? 
 
 172. What ending has the Voc..? 
 
 173. Peculiar ending of the Neut. Plur. of Adj. of this Declen¬ 
 
 sion ? 
 
 174. Mention some words of this class which reject v in the Acc. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 175. Why is this Declension termed ‘Attic’ ? 
 
 176. Explain how it is that some words in this Declension can be 
 
 proparoxytone, though the final Syllable is long throughout. 
 
 177. How do some Oxytones of this Declension differ from thosa 
 
 of the regular second Declension ? 
 
 178. Decline the Nouns vrar^as, lut, dvwysuv; and the Adjectives 
 
 luyico;, dyrjgus. 
 
 § 31. Third Declension. 
 
 179. How is the third Declension distinguished from the others? 
 
 180. Repeat the Case-endings throughout. 
 
 181. To what part of the word are these Case-endings added ? 
 
 § 32. Remarks on the Case-endings. 
 
 182. In what Case is the Simple Root generally found altered ? 
 
 183. How may the Simple Root be recovered ? 
 
1 
 
 534 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY*. 
 
 ♦ 
 
 184. What class of words generally have the Simple Root in the 
 
 Nom. Sing. ? 
 
 185. In this latter class, if the Simple Root ends in c, what 
 
 change takes place ? 
 
 186. What words form the Acc. Sing, in -a ?—what words form it 
 
 in -*? Exception to the latter ? 
 
 187. What is the usual form of the Voc. 2 
 
 188. What letter is sometimes added to the Dat. Plur., and whenl 
 
 §33. Gender, Quantity and Accentuation of words of the 
 
 Third Declension. j 
 
 189. How may the Gender of words of this Declension be best 
 
 learned ? 
 
 190. Repeat the Rules which are given for discovering the Gender 
 
 by the termination. 
 
 191. How is the Quantity of the penult of the oblique Cases de¬ 
 
 termined in Nouns in -a£, -<£, -v%, *' s au< ^ ~ vs ? 
 
 192. General Rule for the Accentuation of w'ords of this Declen¬ 
 
 sion ? 
 
 193. How are Monosyllables accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all 
 
 Numbers ? What Accents do the short final syllables then 
 take 2 —the long final syllables 2 What Monosyllables do not 
 follow the Rule ? 
 
 I 
 
 WORDS WHICH IN THE GEN. SING. HAVE A 
 CONSONANT BEFORE 
 
 § 34. Simple Root in the Nom. Sing. 
 
 194. In this class, to what form of the word are the Case-endings 
 
 added ? . 
 
 195. How is the Nom. Sing, got from Roots ending m -»r or 
 
 196. How do ’A v'oXXuv, IWiiJw* and form their Acc. Sing. I 
 
 197. What peculiar Accentuation have ’A sroXXuv, nocrato and <r&»- 
 
 <r«£ in the Voc. Sing. ? 
 
 198. Termination of all Neuters of this class ? 
 
 199. Quantity of the Root of 2 _ / ^ 
 
 200. Decline xgxryg {-&ves), •xvq (sri/ga?), 3 V 
 
 HoCTil^CJV (-0 OVO() t ij'ixg (•pxg'oi)) Siva 
 
 (pijv (-d>vraj), ar«iav (-av3j)> [Aoau* EAAjjv (-wvas), <$&£ 
 
 ($&£(>;), <p6itt> (tpfoigos). 
 
 § 35. Final Vowel of the Root lengthened in the Nom. Sing. 
 
 201. In forming the Nom. Sing, from the Root of words of this 
 
 class, what do s and o become respectively ? 
 
 202. What change takes place in Roots ending in -w 1 
 
 203. In the Dat. Plur. what do -tvat, -ovai and ovrci become respec¬ 
 
 tively ? 
 
 204. What words of this class retain the long Vowel in the Voc. t 
 
 205. Some words of this class have an iiregular Accentuation id 
 
 the Voc.; mention them. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 535 
 
 206. Give the Dat. Plur. and Dual of » a p a ce«? and 
 
 207. Some Nouns in Gen. drop , in some of the Cases and 
 
 suffer contraction ; which are they . 
 
 20S. What Adjectives belong to this class . , ? H 
 
 OOQ Tn wl.nt Oases are Comparatives m -«* conti actea i _ ndv« 
 209 ' 1 they^ny oJ^Accentuation? How does their Foe. 
 
 210. Decline the Nouns ye'e« v (' avTaJ )> ^’’the Ad- 
 
 jectives o-t^g«v (Neut. -*>)> opp»»» C- «) > 
 
 Comp. Adjectives ap**"®** 
 
 § 36. Syncopated Nouns in -ug. 
 
 211. What is meant by ‘ Syncope’ ? , 
 
 9i9 p pneatthe words which belong to this class. 
 
 £ (teSfaSttS «SWS£K SV 
 
 215. Which Cases in these words are oxytone, and which paroxy- 
 
 216. Howis the Accent regulated in the Voc. 
 
 917 What word of this class is syncopated in the Dat.rtur. o y 
 918* Write all the Sing, forms of Anf*nr*i( and accent them. 
 
 219*. Express, in Greek, “ many wise men. 
 
 220. Decline yacr-nig and «v«g. 
 
 The Nom. appends < to the Boot. 
 
 [§ 37 (a). Boots ending in a P- or a K- mute.'] 
 
 o 2 l. How is cr blended with the final letters of the Hoots ending 
 
 inaP- ora K-mute? 
 
 222. What Adjectives belong to this class . 
 
 nnn l.nvne\- uvownZ. {-rixoq), 
 
 xurriXi^ (-i<p°s), piy (?* *° s )> ’ ^ * « r (-Zvos) ad lutroi ). 
 
 (.ryo S ), xfcu+ (-<>*)> x^ W"** «**'* 1 y s) ’ * 1 
 
 [§ 38 (b). Boots ending in a T- mule.] 
 
 124. What becomes of the T- mute before <r ? 
 
 125. How does the Acc. Sing, end ? ,, T)f . pi ur ? 
 
 126. What do -*v« and -''^ become l & • f) ec i e nsion«, 
 
 >28. "Write the Foe. of 
 
 J29. What Adjectives belong to this class . 
 

 536 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 230. Decline the Nouns :— \x<ris (~l2o;), vv% ( vuxros ), <tx~s (-raiZ's% 
 
 (oroSos), ayXts (-/Va?), ($«$«;), jssjA./; 
 
 llovvf (-vvffos),^ <p&$ (puras), xXufits (-t/&>?), vtorys (-yros), Ila£- 
 »»?s (-»?&;), vrugivs (-Wo;), duyv$ (-v^os), xujpvs (-t/4o;), (pus (<Qu- 
 3a;); and the Adjectives •t (-tros), news (-tiros), Igop&s, 
 
 (-ados), vtyXvs (-w$o;). 
 
 [§ 30. iY^wters/J 
 
 231. How do the Roots of Neuters of this class end 7 
 
 232. .What euphonic changes take place in these endings in forn> 
 
 ing the Nom. Sing. ? 
 
 233. Give the Gen. Sing, of yaw and a a pi*. 
 
 234. How are Neuters in -as usually declined ? What word has 
 • both the syncopated and the unsyncopated forms ? What 
 forms of riga; admit of contraction ? 
 
 235. TV hat do -am and -axrsi become in the Dat. Plur. ? 
 
 236. The letters which can terminate a genuine Greek word 1 
 
 Exceptions ? 
 
 237. Decline pypa (-aros), $ogv (-eras), yoiXa (-axros), oils (arc's), <rc- 
 
 gas (-aros), x-toas (-arcs and -as), yygas (-as). 
 
 [§ 40 (c) . Roots ending m -■» or -vr.J 
 
 238. What becomes of the ■» or before a ? 
 
 239. What Adjectives and Participles belong to this class ? 
 
 240. What peculiar Accentuation have some of the Cases of nag 
 
 and monosyllabic Participles in -as ? 
 
 241. How do Adjectives in -us and Participles in -sis- respectively 
 
 form their Dat. Plur. Masc. and Neut.? 
 
 242. Explain how %agius is derived from the Hoot x a i* VT ~> and 
 
 ohaiis from the Root odovr-. 
 
 243. Decline the Nouns tXupas (-«»tsj), axris (-iws), uvSgicts (-avros), 
 
 xrus (-ivag) • the Adjectives povodovs (-ov), <ruXas (- aiva , -av) t 
 Biaras (-atra, -av), rtgyv (-uva, -tv), oixuv (-outa, -av), wA )jus (-icnroc, 
 
 -u>); and the Participle Xu(ki s (-t7*a, -tv). 
 
 WORDS WHICH IN THE GEN. SING. HAVE A VOWEL 
 
 BEFORE -og. 
 
 § 41. JVoi els ending tn -tvs, ~ouis, -oZs. 
 
 otr‘ * S e pding of the Root in words of this elass? 
 
 tt en d°es this ending remain , and when is it omitted ? 
 
 24b. How do Nouns in -tvs form their Gen. Sing., Acc. Sing., and 
 _ ^lur. ? Bi what Cases are they contracted ? 
 
 <>aq V* ? ccurs when a Vowel comes before -tvs ? 
 
 2 . What is the only Case of Nouns in -aZ$ or -ovc which suffers 
 contraction ? 
 
 249. In the older Attic, what ending has the Nom. and Voc. Plur. 
 ox Nouns in -tvs ? 
 
 - V 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 537 
 
 250. Give the Accentuation of the Nom. and Voc. Sing, of Nouns 
 
 in -tui. 
 
 251. Decline yovtvs , n u^utivs, pous, y£XVS. 
 
 §42. (1). Words ending in -vs and -is. 
 
 252. What is the ending of the Root in words of this class ? 
 
 253. When does this ending remain , and when is it omitted ? 
 
 254. What becomes of this Root-ending in the Rat. Plar. ? 
 
 255. What sort of words end in -vs and -is ? 
 
 256. In what form of them is the simple Root found ? 
 
 257. In what Cases are words of this class contracted ? 
 
 258. What peculiarity ha3 the Rat. Sing, of proper names in 
 
 -K'kl'/is (in Attic) ? 
 
 259. How is the Dual-ending -n contracted ? 
 
 2^0. In Adjectives in -ns, -is preceded by a Vowel , how is the end¬ 
 ing -ice. contracted ? 
 
 261. Proper names of this class sometimes form their Acc. Sing. 
 
 in a peculiar way ; describe it. 
 
 262. What is meant by l Heteroolites ’?. 
 
 203. How are most Adjectives of this class accented in the Nom. 
 
 Sing. ? ^ 
 
 234. Some words of this class have an anomalous Accent in the 
 Gen. Ru.al. and Plur. ; which are they, and what is the 
 anomaly ? 
 
 265. Decline the Nouns ‘Av* \cr6ivns, 2 oQokXyIs, "a %vs ; and the Adjec¬ 
 tives urv%nt, ivxteris, vyii\;. 
 
 § 43. (2). Words in -us {Gen. -*>*;), and in - Ui and -a, 
 
 {Gen. -eos = -vjs). 
 
 266. How does the Root of words of this class end ? 
 
 267. What is the Gender of Nouns in -us or -u (Gen. -oos) ? How 
 
 do they form their Rudl. and Plural? Mention the only 
 one of them which in the common language retains the end¬ 
 ing -US. 
 
 268. Decline ttolt^us (-mo;), a.i'Stis (-cos), tfuOw, YL’kutv. 
 
 § 44. (3). Words in {Gen. -aos\ and. os {Gen. .ns =-<>«;)' 
 
 269. How does the Root of words of this class end ? 
 
 270. To what Gender do they all belong? 
 
 271. What is the simple Root of y it os ? 
 
 272. In what Cases do Nouns in -os (Gen. -ns) suffer contraction ? 
 
 273. How are the Dual-ending -n and the Plural-ending (when 
 
 preceded by a Vowel) contracted ? 
 
 274. Decline uhos, x^°s, •f^'xu.s. 
 
 § 45 . ( 1 ). Words in -is, 
 
 275. Of what Gender does no example occur in this class? 
 
 2 a 2 
 
538 
 
 276 . 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Give the characteristic- Vowels of the Nom., Acc. and 
 Sing., and their Quantity. 
 
 P Vhat ^ orm Nouns in -vs suffers contraction ? 
 
 278. Decline *sxvs, pus, x7g. 
 
 § 46. (2). Words in -is, -Zs, -S. 
 
 279. Of what Gender are words in -/ and - v ? 
 
 2S0. In what Cases does the Root-Vowel remain ? What become* 
 of it m the other Cases ? 
 
 281. Give the ending of the Gen. Sing. 
 
 282. Shew how the Gen. Sing, and Plur. may be proparoxylone, 
 
 though the final Syllable is long. 
 
 2X' W °S es ° f N QUns of this cl ass admit of contraction ? 
 
 284. Mention the Adjectives which belong to this class. 
 
 250. In what respects does the Declension of Nouns in -ve differ 
 
 oar tst^P , a t Adjectives of three endings in -Is ? 
 
 280. VV rite the open forms of yXvxag. 
 
 287. 'Wherein does the Declension of Adjectives of two endings in 
 
 r* VS dl i er * rom Adjectives of three endings in -us ? 
 
 288. Give a few examples of Nouns and Adjectives in -t s which 
 
 oco nS aVe S e re 9 uiar ^flexion (-,o S ). 
 
 2b J. VV hat Noun m -is has the regular inflexion (-vos) ? Has it 
 the reguiar inflexion throughout? 
 
 200. Decline the Nouns Sfys {-teas), rtitxvs t£u(-us), Uxou 
 
 lu°AZ! vw f*Z l h‘ s) > X « T ?' S )» ** (««), hz^ s (-vos); ami 
 tne Adjectives rig* (-v),%'? lf 
 
 § 47. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension* 
 
 Pf^f® yu ^ w, 
 
 ^92. What form of is not m use ? 
 
 293. What peculiarity of Accentuation have some of the forma of 
 
 XUWV Qr “l --- 9 
 
 and 
 
 y vvt] 
 
 204. 
 
 295. 
 
 296 
 
 § 48. Irregular Adjectives, 
 
 P ndicat3 the form « which are derived from 
 the Theme «rgay f . 
 
 Decline .W, and Mention the only Cases that are 
 
 ar:“heXrtol^d“r”e^^ and,^^5 '“ , • FromwhatT1 *^ 
 
 “It (AOr - tt >> "*»* 
 
 297. How is the Voc. of Participles formed? 
 
 § 49. Comparison of Adjectives . 
 
 29& alte 1fo - rm j“ g the Comparative and 
 
 the dfir f re SOmetimes I )refixed to the Adj. to indicate 
 the degrees of comparison ? 
 
 \ 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 539 
 
 § 50. A. First Form of Comparison. 
 
 300. How do Adj. in -vs (Gen. -ou) form tho Comp, and Sup. ? 
 
 301. What Adj. in -vs of the III. Deel. is compared the same way ? 
 
 302. Describe how most Adj. in -os (-y, -° v ) form their degrees of 
 
 comparison. When is o in such words changed into u ? 
 
 303. Explain the formation of the Comp, and Sup. of contract Adj. 
 
 in - 60 ? (= -ovs) and -oos (= -ovs). 
 
 304. How are yepai6s, iraA .ai6s, ivepaios, and o'xoA.atos compared P 
 
 305. Enumerate the Adjectives in -os which insert at before -repos 
 
 and -Taros ? > 
 
 306. Give the four different modes of comparing <pl\os ? 
 
 307. Which are the two Adjectives in -os that insert es before -repos 
 
 and -raros ? _ 
 
 308. Eepeat the Adjectives in -os which insert t<r before the Comp. 
 
 and Sup. endings ? 
 
 309. By what Conjunction is the object with which the comparison 
 
 is made subjoined to the Comp.? 
 
 310. When this Conj. is not used, what Case does the Comp. 
 
 govern ? 
 
 311. Give the Comp, and Sup. of oloeros, Sbcaios, hupdros, vraxos, 
 
 aXoXa'ios, xf/evSiis, Ka.Qa.p6s, efipaop-evos, kuk6 ovs, tticttSs, K\eirrys, 
 tci Kp6s, iropcpvpovs, %8los, yepaios, \a\os, Trupa.irAy<Tios ? 
 
 312. What Adjectives of the III. Decl. are compared by adding 
 
 -repos and -raros directly to the simple Boot ? IIow is this 
 simple Boot got ? 
 
 313. How are the Compounds of xdpts compared ? 
 
 314. What connecting syllable is inserted before -repos and -raros m 
 
 Adjectives in -coy, -ou (Gen. -ovos) ? 
 
 315. How are Adjectives in -\ compared? 
 
 316. Explain how the Comp, and Sup. of xap/ets are formed ? , 
 
 317. Compare evpvs, &(f)pay, e^xupis, p.dnap, eixreflys, apira^, ra\as, 
 
 at/iar6eis , a<pr\Ki£ ? 
 
 § 51. B. Second Form of Comparison. 
 
 318. Mention the Adjectives which are compared in this way ? , 
 
 319. Account for the form Qaaaaiv ? To what dialect does Qarrwv 
 
 belong ? 
 
 320. What is the Quantity of the t in the Comp, ending -n*v t 
 
 321. Compare ix^p6s, o'lKTpSs, ySvs, fipadvs, rax^s, aiaxp° s '• 
 
 § 52. Anomalous Forms of Comparison. 
 
 322. Give all the forms of comparison of KaXos, p.eyas, ftaStos, ayaffos, 
 
 oKlyos, TrtW, aKyeivos, kukos, Treircav, p.anpos noAvs, fxiKpos ? 
 
 323. Several of these forms of comparison do not belong etymologi¬ 
 
 cally to the above words; why, then, are they placed with them ? 
 
 324. To what dialect do the forms in -rrwv belong ? 
 
540 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 
 325. What word is sometimes joined with the Sup. to strengthen it? 
 
 326. Decline /3 iXriuv, vXziuv, puav. 
 
 § 53. Nature and Formation of Adverbs • 
 
 327. Define an Adverb. 
 
 328. What relations do Adverbs generally denote ? 
 
 329. Can Adverbs be declined ? 
 
 330. From what class of words are most Adverbs formed ? Giva 
 
 the Rule for their formation. 
 
 331. How are Adverbs accented ? 
 
 332. To what classes of words are the endings -0iv, -A and 4« (-at) 
 
 appended, and what relations do they severally denote ? 
 
 333. To what Case of ISouns is 4s appended ? When is the end* 
 
 ing -at used instead of 4s ? 
 
 334. What does - <4$ become with the Acc. Plur. in -a; ? 
 
 335. Give examples of Adverbs which bear traces of a caseA 
 
 inflexion. 
 
 336. What Adjective-forms are often used adverbially ? 
 
 337. Form Adverbs from the Adjectives cL\iog, ula^oog, ar^x-fig, aufl 
 
 vovg, /3 ctgvf, rgivrXoui, was, uuTXgxtig, tvnQiif, xaxeg, ihyvtlflcov, 
 psya-s, x K Z >u s. Accentuate them. 
 
 § 54. Comparison of Adverbs. 
 
 338. How are Adverbs derived from Adjectives generally com¬ 
 
 pared ? 
 
 339. What kind of Adverbs have their Comp, ending in c* ? What 
 
 is their Sup. ending usually ? 
 
 340. How do most primitive Adverbs form their Comp, and Sup. ? 
 
 341. Compare iiltui, ii'Batpt.ovus, aactp&ij toc^sus, x.a.’koj;, a'tT^^uSy 
 
 %a.giev7a){, xuru, astro, syytk, s r&oct, ay^ov, &««£, t>j ?.ov t 
 
 &V0OV. 
 
 § 55. Nature and Classification of Pronouns. 
 
 342. Define a Pronoun. 
 
 343. What do the Pronouns of the I., II. and III. Pers. respec¬ 
 
 tively indicate ? 
 
 344 Into how many classes may Pronouns be divided?—name 
 them. 
 
 A. Substantive-Personal Pronouns. 
 
 § 56 (»). The Simple Pronouns. 
 
 345. Repeat the simple personal-Pronouns. Give their Latin 
 
 equivalents. 
 
 346. Mention the enclitic forms of them. 
 
 347. What is the Quantity of the u in vpiiig and its Cases ? 
 
 348. What Cases of the III. personal-Pronoun are wanting 1 
 
 349. When only is the Norn, of personal-Pronouns expressed 1 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 511 
 
 350. Write the Case-forms of the simple personal-Pronouns, ac¬ 
 
 centing them throughout. 
 
 § 57 (/S). The Reflexive Pronoun?, 
 
 351. Repeat the reflexive-Pronouns. 
 
 352. Wherein does the PLur. of reflexive-Pronouns of the I. ani 
 
 II. Pers. differ from that of the III. Pers. ? 
 
 353. What Case is wanting in these Pronouns, and why ? 
 
 354. What is the other form of lavrov ? 
 
 355. Write and accentuate all the Case-forma of the Pronouns of 
 
 this class. 
 
 § 58 ( 7 ). The Reciprocal Pronoun, 
 
 356. Mention the reciprocal-Pronoun. 
 
 357. What does it express ? 
 
 358. What Number and Case are wanting ? Why ? 
 
 359. Decline and accentuate it. 
 
 § 59. B. Adjective-Personal or Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 360. Shew how the possessive-Pronouns are formed. 
 
 361. Repeat them. Give their Lat. equivalents. 
 
 362. What Pronouns are used in Attic instead of 09 and its Cases ? 
 
 363. Translate into Greek : ‘ he strikes h i s son and, ‘ he strikes 
 
 li is ow n son \ 
 
 364. How are these Pronouns declined ? 
 
 365. When only are these Pronouns expressed ? 
 
 366. When they are omitted, how is their place supplied ? 
 
 367. What Pronouns are often used instead of t[*og, <rc,i, &c. ? 
 
 § 60. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 3 r8. Why arc dernbnstrative -Pronouns so called ? 
 
 369. Repeat them, and give their Eng. and Lat. equivalents. 
 
 370. What words are declined like oZros ? What two forms havs 
 
 they in the Neut. Sing. ? Is the declension of these words 
 strictly like that of ourog ? 
 
 371. What words are declined like alrog ? 
 
 372. How is the Article («) declined? Write all the Case-forms 
 
 of it, and accentuate them. 
 
 373. What different meanings has uvrog ? 
 
 374. Give the meaning of 0 aurog, and its Lat. equivalent. 
 
 375. How is txuto formed ? Is it written another way ? 
 
 376. Give the respective meanings of avrf), a.ur*i and aurrj. 
 
 377. What is the distinction between uv-tm, uuru, and ?— be¬ 
 
 tween Tu-vrce. and rulnx ? 
 
 378. Decline and accentuate roiwreg, uXXcs, r»XtxojTo$, 0 
 
 UtUMif CC.UT66 . 
 
542 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 § 61. The Relative Pronoun. 
 
 379 . Why is the relative-T ronoun so called ? 
 
 380. Mention the Greek relative-Pronoun, and its Lat. equivalent 
 
 381. Decline and accentuate it. 
 
 382. Enumerate the points of distinction between n, fa i and tf; 
 
 u and u ; dl and «<• 
 
 § 62. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 3S3. How are the indefinite - distinguished from, the interrogative- 
 Pronouns ? 
 
 384. Give examples of both classes. 
 
 385. How are the interrogative- Pronouns modified when they occur 
 
 in a dependent question ? . 
 
 386. Mention the only word in which the modifying syllable is 
 
 declined. 
 
 387. How are the negative Compounds of r<c declined ? 
 
 388. Distinguish between ns and rjs. 
 
 389. What form of ns is not enclitic ? 
 
 390. How is rif accented throughout ? 
 
 391. With what other word might the Interrogative <r$ be con¬ 
 
 founded? # 
 
 392. What are the respective meanings of arra and arr«, o n and 
 
 on l 
 
 393. What Cases of fans have second forms ? ^ 
 
 394. Decline and accentuate to7os, ovortgiSy ovo<r»s, r)g t pnnsy 
 
 fans. 
 
 § 63. Correlative Pronouns . 
 
 395. What is meant by ‘ correlative-Pronouns' ? 
 
 396. Into what two classes may Correlatives be divided ? 
 
 397. Repeat the Correlatives of the Interrogatives to-tos, to7o;, -rn- 
 
 Xixog. Which of these wants the Indef. Correlative ? ^ 
 
 398. Give the Lat. equivalents for to a os, r»7os, tctos, to a fa, oto7os, 
 
 <to7os, ototo;. 
 
 399. Repeat the Correlatives of the Interrogatives <roZ, Tofov, *ro7, 
 
 tots, TYivlxno, tu>s, ty). Which of these want the Demonst. 
 Correlatives ? 
 
 400. Give the Lat. equivalents for the adverbial-Correlatives. 
 
 401. How do the regular dependent Correlatives begin ? 
 
 402. How are the Indef. forms distinguished from the Interroga¬ 
 
 tives ? 
 
 403. How are the forms corresponding to hie■ ibi, June, inde sup¬ 
 
 plied ? 
 
 § 64. Lengthening of the Pronouns. 
 
 404. With what words is yi united, so as to form part of the wordl 
 
 What change in the Accentuation results ? 
 
 405. To what words are In and •£* appended ?— Lat. equivalent ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY, 
 
 543 
 
 408. Explain how they modify the meaning. How do they affect 
 the Accent ? 
 
 407. What affix is sometimes used instead of ? 
 
 408. To what sort of words is «rs£ joined ? How does it affect 
 
 their meaning ? What is the Accentuation of vio ? 
 
 409. Mention the class of words to which the syllable t is ap¬ 
 
 pended. How does it modify their meaning? What is the 
 Quantity and Accentuation of it? How does it affect the 
 'preceding letter ? 
 
 410. Append < to ivtfufo, ouraf, roZro, a.urv\, rouru, rctvrt j, aurot, <raZrx, 
 
 T0VT0V, vZv, £V TiZHiV, Ulbi, blZeO. 
 
 411. When ys is appended to a Demonstrative, what is the^)©- 
 
 sition of this < ? Append i to our os y s. 
 
 § 65. Nature and Division of the Numerals. 
 
 412. Give the names of the different classes of Numerals, and what 
 
 questions they answer respectively. 
 
 413. Which of the Cardinals are declined ? 
 
 414. How are the thousands expressed ? 
 
 415. Shew how the Ordinals are declined. 
 
 416. How are the Multiplicativesformed and declined ? 
 
 417. What do Numeral-Adverbs in indicate? 
 
 418. Explain the formation of the Proportionals. 
 
 419. What is expressed by the substantive-Numerals f 
 
 § 66. Numeral Characters. 
 
 420. What are the Greek numeral Characters ? 
 
 421. Write the obsolete letters which are used for the same pur¬ 
 
 pose, and mention what Numbers they denote. 
 
 422. By what Characters are the digits, the tens, the hundreds 
 
 denoted ? 
 
 423. How are the numeral-Characters after 1,000 distinguished 
 
 from those preceding it ? 
 
 424 When several numeral-Characters stand together, how are 
 they marked ? 
 
 425. Write the Characters which express 3, 6, 18, 57, 95, 920, 
 
 3462, 70965, 358100. 
 
 § 67. Table of the Cardinals and Ordinals. 
 
 426. Give the names of the Cardinals and Ordinals from 1 to 10. 
 
 From 10 to 20. From 30 to 40. The tens. The hundreds. 
 The thousands. The tens of thousahds. 
 
 427. What is the arrangement in the case of compound Cardinals? 
 
 Does the same Buie apply to compound Ordinals ? 
 
 % 
 
 § 68 . Declension of the first four Cardinals. 
 
 428. What Case-forms of & have an irregular Accentuation ? 
 
 4 £3. Which of the first four Cardinals is sometimes used inde- 
 
 dinably ? , 
 
544 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 430. How is a 'ftfu declined ? 
 
 431. Write and accentuate all the Case-forms of «rgs 7g, t7g, rlrrupf, 
 
 p'/lbilg, Sua. 
 
 § 69. Numeral Adverbs. 
 
 43*2. Which of the numeral-Adverbs do not end in -axis ? 
 
 433. Are they declined ? 
 
 434. Repeat the numeral-Adverbs from 1 to 10. From 10 to 20. 
 
 The tens. The hundreds. 
 
 435. W hat is the Greek of '■thirty-one times' ? 
 
 §§ 70, 71. Nature and Classes of Verbs. 
 
 436. Define a Verb. 
 
 437. What is meant by Active, Middle and Passive Verbs respec¬ 
 
 tively ? Give an example of each class. 
 
 § 72. The Tenses. 
 
 438. Enumerate the Tenses of the Greek Verb, giving an example 
 
 of each. 
 
 439. Into what two classes may all the Tenses be divided ? 
 
 440. Mention the Tenses for which there are two fomns in Greek. 
 
 441. Have all Verbs both these forms ? 
 
 442. Has any Verb all the Tense-forms ? 
 
 443. What is meant by * pure ’ Verbs ‘l —‘ liquid * Verbs ? —‘ mule 
 
 Verbs ? 
 
 444. What are the only Tenses which a pure Verb can have? 
 
 445. Explain what the Tense, which is usually called the Fut. II 
 
 Act., really is. 
 
 446. What is meant by 1 Temporaprima ’ and * Tempora secuncla ’ 9 
 
 § 73. The Moods. 
 
 447. How many Moods have Greek Verbs ? 
 
 448. What is denoted by the Indicative, the Subjunctive , the Im¬ 
 
 perative respectively 'i 
 
 449. What other name is sometimes given to the Subj. ? 
 
 450. What is the Subj. of the historical Tenses called 'i 
 
 § 74. The Participials. 
 
 451. What are the two Participials , and why are they so called ? 
 
 452. Which is the si/fistaniive-Participial ?—which the adjective 
 
 Participial ? Give an example of each. 
 
 453. Explain the terms ‘ Verbum finitum! and ‘Verbum infinitum' 
 
 § 75. Numbers and Persons. 
 
 454. What do the Personal-endings of the Verb shew ? 
 
 455. What part of the Greek Verb has no distinctive form ? 
 
 456. How, then, is it expressed ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 5 15 
 
 § 76. Conjugation. 
 
 457. How many forms of Conjugation are found in Greek Verbs. 
 
 458. Explain and give examples of each. 
 
 459. Which is the older form ? 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs in -a. 
 
 § 77. Root, Augment and Reduplication .— Verb-charac¬ 
 teristic. 
 
 460. State the different portions into which every verbal-form 
 
 may.be resolved. 
 
 461. Shew how the Root is got in most Verbs in -&». 
 
 462. Formation-syllables are of two kinds ; w'hick are they ? 
 
 463. What is meant by the ‘ Augment ’ f —what is its position ? 
 
 464. Explain the two kinds of Augment. 
 
 465. What Tenses take the Aug. ? 
 
 466. Do all the Moods retain it ? 
 
 467. What Aug. do Verbs which begin with a Vowel take ? 
 
 468. Explain what is meant by ‘ Reduplication 
 
 469. Mention the only Tenses which take it. 
 
 470. Under what circumstance is it identical with the Aug. ? 
 
 471. Define the ‘ Characteristic'. Why is it so called ? 
 
 472. Mention the divisions of Verbs according to their Charac¬ 
 
 teristic. 
 
 § 78. Inflexion-endings. 
 
 473. What relations are indicated by the In flexion-endings ? 
 
 474. State the different elements contained in them. 
 
 475. What classification of Inflexion-endings may be made ? 
 
 § 79. Tense-characteristics and Tense-endings .— Personal- 
 
 endings and Alood-voivels. 
 
 476. Define the ‘ Tense-characteristic'. Origin of the name? 
 
 477. Mention the only Tenses which have a Tense-eharacteristic. 
 
 478. In pure Verbs, what is the Tense-characteristic of the Fut. 
 
 and Aor. 1. (Act. and Mid.) and of the Fut . III. ? —of the 
 Aor. I. Pass. ?—of the Fut. I. Pass. ?—of the Ferf. I. and 
 Plpf. I. A ct. ? 
 
 479. What is meant by the * Tense-ending ’ ? 
 
 480. What constitutes the ‘ Tense-root 
 
 481. How do the Pei'soncd-endings vary? 
 
 482. Why are Mood-vowels so called ? Give examples. 
 
 483. In the form point out the Root, the Tense-root, 
 
 the Tense-characteristic , the Tense-ending and the Mood- 
 voweh . 
 
546 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 § 80. Remarks on the Personal-endings and Mood-vowels. 
 
 484. To what portion of the Verbal-form is the Personal-ending 
 
 appended ? 
 
 485. How is the Mood-vowel often disguised ? 
 
 486. In the form (lovXtwy, distinguish the Personal-ending and the 
 
 Mood-vowel. 
 
 487. How do the 'principal and the historical Tenses differ in the 
 
 II. and III. Pers. Dual ? 
 
 488. How do they differ in the III. Pers. Plur. Act. and in the 
 
 III. Pers. Plur. Mid. ? 
 
 489. How do they differ in. the Sing. Personal-endings of the Mid. ? 
 
 490. Shew the difference between the Personal-endings of the 
 
 Subj. and those of the Opt. 
 
 491. Enumerate the changes which take place in the Mood-vowels 
 
 of the Ind. on their conversion into Subj. Mood-vowels. 
 
 492. How is the Mood-vowel of the Opt. generally obtained ? 
 
 493. Give examples illustrating the Answers to Questions 4S7-492. 
 
 494. What Mood-vowels do the Perf. Subj. and the Plpf. Opt. 
 
 respectively take ? 
 
 495. To what parts of the Verb may the v ItpiXxvtrnxcv be added ? 
 
 § 81. Paradigms of the Conjugation of pure Verbs in 
 
 496. Repeat all the Ind., Subj. and lmper. forms of the historical 
 
 Tenses in the Act. Voice of xtXtvuv. 
 
 497. Repeat the same forms of the principal Tenses in the Act. 
 
 Voice of (punvuv. 
 
 498. Give all the Participials of both principal and historical 
 
 Tenses in the Act. Voice of Ixsr svs/p. 
 
 499. What Tenses do the Perf. II. and the Plpf II- resemble 
 
 in their inflexions ? 
 
 500. Why are the Perf. II., Plpf. II. and A or. II. supplied by 
 
 other Verbs in the Paradigms of (LovXiCu »? 
 
 501. Give the Answers to Questions 496—498, with reference to 
 
 the Mid. Voice of vroulivuv. 
 
 502. Mention the only Tenses in the Pass., which differ inform 
 
 from the corresponding Tenses of the Mid. 
 
 503. Repeat all the Ind,, Subj. and lmper. forms of the Tenses of 
 
 (ponCuv, which have distinctive forms in the Pass. 
 
 504. Give the Infinitives and Participles of each of these Tenses. 
 
 505. What is meant by ‘ Verbal-adjectives ’ ? 
 
 506. To what Voice do they belong ? 
 
 507. What are their usual endings ? 
 
 508. Mention the Verbal-adjectives of /3 ovXiiuv, and their meanings 
 
 » 
 
 § 82. Remarks on the Paradigms . 
 
 509. What ending, besides -*<», has the I. Pers. Sing. Plpf Act* 
 
 sometimes in Attic 2 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 547 
 
 510. Give tlie usual ending of tlie III. Pers. Pl. Plpf Act. 
 
 511. In wliat parts of the Verb do Attic writers sometimes use 
 
 the ending -a, instead of -/? ? 
 
 512. Mention the Verbs in which -it is the exclusive ending. 
 
 513. What Pers. of the Imper. is sometimes contracted ? 
 
 514. With what other form is this contracted Imper. apt to be con¬ 
 founded ? * 
 
 515. Mention the Imperatives in which this confusion is likely to 
 
 arise. 
 
 § 83. The Attic Future. 
 
 516. Explain the Attic Future. Origin of the name ? 
 
 517. Is it confined to the Act. Voice ? 
 
 518. Under what circumstances can it be formed ? 
 
 519. Repeat the Personal-endings of it in the Ind. 
 
 520. Explain how it is formed when t would precede tr in the ordi¬ 
 
 nary Fut. 
 
 521. In what Mood does it never occur ? 
 
 522. Enumerate the Verbs in which this form of the Fut. is of 
 
 common occurrence. 
 
 523. Form Att. Futures from ffro^i-vw/xt, <riru-vvLp,i y fixVt^u (Fut. 
 
 Mid.), yapiu, xct0i& (Fut. Act.), Ixuu, (iifiufy. 
 
 § 84. Accentuation of the Verb. 
 
 524. State the General Rule for the Accentuation of Verbs. 
 
 525. Restrictions to the Rule in the case of Compounds ? _ 
 
 526. With reference to the Accent, what is the Quantity of the 
 
 Verbal-ending -at ? Exception ? \ 
 
 527. Quantity of the Opt. ending under the same circum¬ 
 
 stances ? ... 
 
 528. Accentuate the Verbs * %of&tv, axovfns, vriffriwaru. iTtmat, «<r*- 
 
 Qivyti, -rtfnvffat (Opt.), xtvli, xivfot, ninths {vritf, (is), Udort 
 (tx, Serf), crvys-Ttdof (crvv, icrt, Ses), atpu^ov (ccvro and A or. uXov) y 
 vrxgnv (<r«e<x and Impf. >fv), crwith; (cuv and Aor. iths), ir - 
 i<r%i » (sen and Aor. ia%tv), (S/a and Impf. wyi). 
 
 529. Mention the Verbal-forms which are perispomenon. 
 
 530. Mention also the Verbal-forms which are oxytone. 
 
 531. What parts of the Verb are properispomenon contrary to the 
 
 general Rule? 
 
 532. What parts of the Verb are paroxytone contrary to the gene- 
 
 533. One Participle ending in -g is always paroxytone; which is it? 
 
 534. The II. Sing. Imper. Aor. II. Act. of some Verbs is oxytone; 
 
 repeat them. Are they also oxytone in composition ? 
 
 535. Repeat the Rules for the accentuation of the Imper. of the 
 
 Aor. II. Act. and of the Aor. II. Mid. in Compounds. 
 Give examples illustrating each case. 
 
 536. Accentuate vruthvcrai (1) as II. Sing. Aor. I. Imper. Mid ^ 
 
 (2) as Aor. /. Inf. Act., (3) as III. Sing Aor. I. Opt. Act 
 
548 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 537. Under what circumstances is the III. Sing. A or. I. Opt. 
 
 Act. identical in form with the Aor. I. Inf. Act. ? 
 
 538. When are all the three forms of the Aor. I. mentioned in 
 
 No. 536. liable to be confounded with each other ? 
 
 539. Accentuate XtXvxag (Perf. Part. Act.), tlvuv (Inf. Aor. II. 
 
 Act.), mva.ibivfAivo; (Perf. Part. Pass.), <povsuhis (Aor. I. Part. 
 Pass.), tiuv (Aor. II. Part. Act.), uxovaxs (Aor. I. Part. 
 Act.), fjt-tyug (Aor. II. Part. Pass.), ysvov (Aor. II. Imper. 
 Mid.), Z,tv yws (Pres. Part.), <ro^tv6ns (Aor. I. Subj. Pass.), 
 uxautrea (III. Sing. Aor. I. Opt. Act.), wageiXccfii (Aor. II. 
 Imper. Act.), xi xtXivaQou (Perf. Inf. Pass.), ccroarai (Aor. 
 II. Part.), (Pres. Inf.), vxyy (Aor. II. Subj. Pass.), 
 
 \\r\’ffu.rr,o6ou (Perf. Inf. Pass.), xa.Ttx.XtXvH.iv cu (Perf. Inf. Act.), 
 XxfcicrDou (Aor. II. Inf. Mid.), kiv'Swsu/u (Pres. Opt. Act.), 
 
 *u£ctX&(liffii (II. PI. Aor. IL Imper. Mid.). 
 
 » % 
 
 § 85. Syllabic Augment. 
 
 540. Origin of the term ‘A agment ’ ? 
 
 541. Explain the '■Syllabic Augment ’. 
 
 542. What sort of Verbs take the Syllabic Augment ? 
 
 543. To what Mood is the Aug. confined ? 
 
 544. What is the position of the Aug. in the Plpf. ? 
 
 545. What change takes place on prefixing the Aug. to Verbs be¬ 
 
 ginning with £ ? 
 
 546. Mention some Verbs beginning with a Consonant which take 
 
 *i as an Aug. 
 
 o4<. Form Imperfects from y oxtpvj, ouvapcu, pxrra>, p.ixXcu, *<a>A’hu, 
 (ituXopcu. 
 
 § 86. Temporal Augment. 
 
 548. Why is the ( Temporal A ugment 7 so called ? 
 
 549. Explain the Temporal Augment. 
 
 550. What sort of Verbs take it ? 
 
 w -hat Verbs does the Aug. effect no change ? 
 
 552. Mention a Verb, whose Hoot begins with u, which takes the 
 Aug. 
 
 Are Verbs, whose Hoot begins with su, ever augmented ? 
 o54. Form l7YlpgvJfit,cts from omr^vveoy OQvrrzo, 'vyiaivco* 
 
 oiip'^cd^ £/V.a(w, ’/ v^ca, 'hcrv%oc%c0 } av^xvu, li/paxm, trytipu, 
 
 svdeo, axouoj, liayw, oi/x(v^a. 
 
 § 87. Remarks on the Augment. 
 
 555. What Aug. do Verbs take which begin with « folloiced by a 
 Vowel ? J * 
 
 ->oj. How do Verbs, beginning with a, ay or oi folloiced by a Vowel, 
 rr _ ± . orm their Impf. ? Exception in the case of u ? 
 irl' n • Ve the A0r ’ L and Perf - L Act. Of KmXicxo*. 
 
 ^T e an example of a Verb, beginning with ot followed by a 
 Consonant, in which the Aug. effects no change. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 549 
 
 559. Repeat tlie 12 Verbs which take u as an Aug., instead of n. 
 
 560. Mention some Verbs, beginning with a Vowel, which take the 
 
 Syllabic Aug. 
 
 531. Give examples of Verbal-forms which have the Aug. in the 
 second syllable. 
 
 5G2. There are some Verbs which take the Syllabic and the Tem¬ 
 poral Aug. together ; which are they ? 
 
 Form Imperfects from IV opai, ojHm, olou.a. 1 , Ifu, sx&>, 
 
 avsouu.1, iK'iaaco, cchccivw, i(>yotZ ) opu.i, oizx.tZ > u, lanx u, 
 
 ' avid iZ,open, avoiyu. 
 
 Give the Aor. Of uvoiyeo, cdoiu, otxougea, \Xxu>, iau, hkicrxopat, 
 
 ayvvfzi. 
 
 563. 
 
 564. 
 
 § 83. Reduplication. 
 
 565. To what Tenses is the Reduplication prefixed ? 
 
 586. How is the Plpf formed, when the Perf. takes a Reduplica¬ 
 
 tion ? 
 
 587. How is the Plpf formed, when the Perf. takes an Aug. ? 
 
 58S. Are the Redup. and Aug. of the Perf. and Plpf. confined to 
 
 the Ind. ? 
 
 569. What sort of Verbs admit the Redup. ? 
 
 570. What Verbs beginning with a Mute and Liquid do not take 
 
 the Redixp. ? 
 
 571. How do Verbs beginning with ^ form their Perf. and Pipf. ? 
 
 572. How is the Redup. formed in the case of a Verb beginning 
 
 with an aspirated Consonant ? 
 
 573. Mention some Verbs, beginning with ftk, which are redupli¬ 
 
 cated. 
 
 574. What sort of Verbs, beginning with a Consonant, are not redu¬ 
 
 plicated ? 
 
 575. There are 2 Verbs, beginning with two Consonants (not a Mute 
 
 and Liquid), which are reduplicated ; name them. 
 
 576. Repeat the Verbs, beginning with a Liquid, which take the 
 
 Aug. u. 
 
 577* Form Perfects and Pluperfects from kzXvju, o-rgxnuv, Xa,y%avM, 
 
 TXovrzu, axoTZu, fiXctatynpeu, (ikuzzucj, avX^zyu, padvptw, 
 tpofisu, (fiooveu, Xcipfiavw, \voiu, xraopou, 
 
 yXuQu, (iXaarolvu, Z^nriw, 6r,oz\jM, pipvrrfxoj, yvuvipu.-fctu. 
 
 § 89. Attic Reduplication, 
 
 578. Describe the ‘ Attic Reduplication ’. 
 
 679. To what Tenses is this Redup. prefixed ? 
 
 680. Does the Plpf usually take an Aug. when it has this Redup. ? 
 
 Exception ? 
 
 681. When a Verb which takes this Redup has a diphthong in 
 
 the second syllable of its Root, what change occms ? Ex¬ 
 ception ? 
 
 682. Mention some Verbs which take this Redup. in the Aor. 
 
 With what difference, however ? 
 
550 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 § 90. Augment and Reduplication in Compound Verbs. 
 
 583. What is the position of the Aug. and Redup i n Verbs mm 
 
 pounded with Prepositions ? P 8 ° m ' 
 
 584. What effect have the Aug. and Redup. then on Preposition 
 re- f^fdhendina Vowel ? Exceptions ? 
 
 4“ e effect in the case of « and c t6,. 
 
 T^ h f- d Ti S H become bef ore the Syllabic Aug. ? 
 o87. Explain the form -r^tlr^e-rtro. h 
 
 588. When do Verbs compounded with take the Aug. at the 
 
 Tjtn gi ? n - ln ?l a r> d T Wh . en 111 the middle of the word ? 
 
 5<Y ^at is the Rule in the case of Verbs compounded with tZ * 
 
 691 ' i 
 
 y x«.\i U , vp-sixon*,, iv-ipiTtv, avX-X«pMio, aro-Qityco, cv- 
 
 +r^’ (from and AAB 
 
 the Root of a*-,*«'?>, * w * 7 AB ’ 
 
 § 91. Additional Remarks on the Aug. and Redup. in 
 
 Compound Verbs. 
 
 592. Mentum some Verbs compounded with Prepositions which 
 
 593 TW e the A r g> \° T th ^ re ** Root and before the Prep 
 
 593. There are a few Verbs not compounded with Prep, which fol- 
 
 so. n * OW tb e analogy of those just mentioned ; which are thev 3 
 
 594. Give some examples of Verbs compounded with Prep, whfch 
 
 595 A m Y? Al A g - bef ° re the Pre P■ ^ew lohy they do so ? 
 
 596.’ Form* ^mperfctF AUg ' infrom 
 
 / A- , ^ ST/CTfit^as/, iVO^Xsu, VPOftvi'riVM (from 
 
 ,‘ XX0 , nM ' * a f*Z*t***, Kctfotiu. bvotfiu, ivavnoofuu, W 
 * “Ppiyvoeu, ccvexofccu, *«%*«,, xati^u. 
 
 § 92. Division of Verbs in -a. 
 
 597 ‘ lively ? meant by Contract aud Uncontracted Verbs respec- 
 
 5??* )y] lat Verbs only are contracted ? 
 
 Zn w ar .i Verbs said t0 be ‘Impure* ? 
 
 601* WfrWhYt n^ S <Pa ^one Verbs\ ‘Perispomenon Verbs', 
 idenikat? ^ ° f Verbs are Rerispomenon Verbs 
 
 M rr § 93 ‘ Forrmtion °f Senses of Pure Verbs. 
 
 addedV^ 011 ° f Verb8 are tbe Tense-endings usually 
 603. What Tenses do pure Verbs not form ? 
 
 04. Give the Tense-characteristic of the Perf and Plvf A ct r>f 
 tZl “ d ^ - 4et -of the AorfZVfi 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 551 
 
 605. Is the short Characteristic- Vowel of the Pres, and Imp/, of 
 
 pure Verbs retained in the other Tenses ? 
 
 606. Kepeat all the Act., Mid. and Pass, forms of rf* and /twit*. 
 
 §94. Verbs which retain the short Characteristic-vowel in 
 
 forming the Tenses. 
 
 607. Mention some Verbs which retain the short Characteristic- 
 
 vowel in all or some of the Tenses. 
 
 608. What other peculiarity have such Verbs usually ? 
 
 § 95. Formation of the Aor. Pass. fyc. with <?. 
 
 609. In what respects are 26m, Qua and x6m peculiar ? 
 
 610. What sort of Verbs usually insert tr between the Personal- 
 
 endings and the Tense-root in the Pass. ? 
 
 611. In what Tense-forms does this occur? 
 
 612. Mention some Verbs which have a long Characteristic-vowel 
 
 or lengthen it in forming the Tenses, and yet have this for¬ 
 mation. 
 
 613. Go through the Perf, Plpf, Aor. and Put. Pass, of nPiu. 
 
 614. Give examples of Verbs, which do not take <r, though they 
 
 retain the short Vowel. 
 
 § 96. Contract Pure Verbs. 
 
 615. With what other Vowel is the Characteristic-vowel blended 
 
 in Contract Verbs ? 
 
 616. In what Tenses alone can contraction take place ? Why ? 
 
 617. Repeat the list of the regular contractions. 
 
 618. In the concurrence of A and E sounds, which remains pre¬ 
 
 dominant ? 
 
 619. When an O sound occurs, what effect has it on the contrac¬ 
 
 tion ? 
 
 620. How are the Tenses of Contract Verbs formed ? 
 
 621. When is a lengthened into «? Exceptions ? 
 
 622. Go through (1) all the open forms, (2) all the contracted forms 
 
 of the Pres, and Jmpf. Act. and Pass, of ayxvaM, a.hxeu> and 
 'bouPou. 
 
 § 97. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract Verbs . 
 
 623. What Verbs in -ta> are uncontracted, except in changing -si or 
 
 -tu into -£/ ? Exceptions ? 
 
 624. Repeat all the forms of the Pres, and Impf. Act. and Mid. 
 
 Of via), I spin. 
 
 625. Mention the Verbs in -xco which have an irregular contraction . 
 
 626. Specify the irregularities. 
 
 627. What parts of piyoeo are irregularly contracted ? 
 
 628. Give the parts of Xo6a> which are derived from the Root AO-. 
 
 629. Explain the Attic Optative. 
 
552 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 630. What does the I. Pers. Sing, of the Att. Opt. become by con¬ 
 
 traction in Verbs in -«&>, -s u and -«*/ respectively ? 
 
 631. In which Pers. is the Att. form identical with the common, 
 
 form ? 
 
 632. What kind of Verbs have the Att. Opt. almost exclusively 
 
 in the Sing. ? 
 
 033. Which form is the more common in the Dual and Plur. ? 
 
 § 98. Contract Verbs , which retain the. short. Characteristic - 
 vowel informing the Tenses. 
 
 631 Repeat the Verbs in -«» which retain the short Vowel in 
 forming the Tenses—those in -sw—those in -saw. 
 
 635. Give the Put. Act. in each case. 
 
 636. What other peculiarity have most of these Verbs ? 
 
 637. Mention the Verbs which have the long Vowel in some 
 
 Tenses and the short in others. 
 
 638. Illustrate this, by giving the principal parts of each Verb. 
 
 § 99. Paradigms of the Verbs in § 97. 
 
 639. Repeat all the Incl. Tenses (Act., Mid. Pass.) and the Verb. 
 
 Adj. of \\6 lu or iXoevyet), a?Ja> and ufou. 
 
 640. Mention some contract Verbs which assume c in the Pass., 
 
 though they lengthen the Characteristic-vowel. 
 
 641. Mention also some which do not assume a in the Pass., though 
 
 they retain the short Vowel . 
 
 § 100. Formation of the Tenses of Impure Verbs . 
 
 642. How are Impure Verbs divided ? 
 
 •643. In what respects do they differ from Pure Verbs? 
 
 644. What is meant by the ‘ variable-vowel ’ / 
 
 a. Mute Verbs. 
 
 § 101. Characteristic .— Root. — Theme. 
 
 645. Of what nature is the Characteristic in Mute Verbs ? 
 
 646. The Root of the Verb may be strengthened in two ways \ ex¬ 
 
 plain them. 
 
 64/. What is meant by the simple Characteristic ?—the ■ strength¬ 
 ened Characteristic"! 
 
 648. Explain the 3 modes of strengthening by Consonants. 
 
 649. To what Tenses is the strengthened Root confined ? Give ex¬ 
 
 amples. 
 
 650. IIow is the Root-vowel strengthened ? 
 
 651. In what parts of the Verb does the simple Root appear ? 
 
 Give examples illustrating this. 
 
 652. Shew what is meant by the ‘ Theme'. 
 
 6o3. Wnat are the Themes of <rvtv*u and 2 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 553 
 
 § 102. Variation in the Boot. 
 
 654. What change may the Root undergo, when not strengthened ! 
 
 655. To what Tenses is this change confined ? 
 
 656. What kind of Verbs take the variable-vowel a in the Aor. 
 
 II. Act. and Pass, and in the Put. II. Pass. ? 
 
 657. Why does the Root-vowel (i) in the Aor. II. Pass, of some 
 
 Verbs undergo no change ? 
 
 658. Mention some Verbs which have the variable-vowel o or «/ in 
 
 the Perf. II. and Plpf. II. What sort of Verbs are they ? 
 650. Some first Perfects have the variable-vowel o ; repeat them. 
 
 660. What Verbs have the variable-vowel « in the Perf. and Plpf. 
 
 Mid. or Pass., but not in the Aor. I. Pass. ? 
 
 § 103. Bemarhs on the formation of the Secondary Tenses. 
 
 661. In what respects do the Secondary differ from the Primary 
 
 Tenses ? 
 
 662. Mention some second Perfects in which the short Root-vowel 
 
 is lengthened. 
 
 663. Describe how this lengthening is effected. 
 
 664. Some second Perfects also retain the long Vowel or Diphthong 
 
 of the Pres. ; give examples. 
 
 665. Under what circumstances has a Verb no Aor. II. Act. or 
 
 Mid. ? 
 
 § 104. Classification of Mute Verbs. 
 
 666 . Give the classification of Mute Verbs according to their Cha¬ 
 
 racteristic , distinguishing those with a simple from those 
 with a strengthened Characteristic. 
 
 667. What are the simple Boots of rarr®, <p% /S Xunru, (itac-v, 
 
 tUtto/, (pfirrco, pivru ? 
 
 668 . To which class do most of the £- Roots belong ? 
 
 669. To which class do most of the rr- (aa-) Roots belong ? 
 
 § 105. Remarks on the Characteristic. 
 
 670. Give examples of Verbs in -ttu (-aau) which belong to the 
 
 T- Roots. 
 
 671. Are there any Verbs of this class which vary between a K- 
 
 and a T- sound ? 
 
 672. Give examples of Verbs in -£&» which belong to theK- Roots. 
 
 673. Mention some Verbs in -£« which vary between a K- and a 
 
 T- sound. 
 
 674. There are 3 Verbs in which have yy as their simple Cha¬ 
 
 racteristic; which are they ? 
 
 § 106. Formation of the Tenses of Mute Verbs. 
 
 675. What is the Tense-Characteristic in the Fut. and Aor. I. 
 
 Act. and Mid. of Mute Verbs ? 
 
 2 E 
 
554 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY, 
 
 676. When have the Per/, and Plpf. Act. the endings -*/» re* 
 
 spectively ? When do they end in -*«, -xuv ? 
 
 677. What becomes of the T- sound before * ? 
 
 678. When a T- sound occurs before ^ or r in the Per/. Mid. or 
 
 Pass., what change takes place ? 
 
 679. Explain the effect of the Personal-endings beginning with a 
 
 on a preceding T- sound. 
 
 680. What is the Quantity of «, /, v in T- Verbs before a and * ? 
 
 681. Explain fully the respective effects of a, 6 , r, and the as¬ 
 
 pirated endings (-a, 4/v), on a preceding Mute. 
 
 682. What do -tv&au, -tvdau in the Fut. become ? 
 
 683. What effect have the Perf. Mid. endings beginning with f* 
 
 on a ft. followed by a P- sound in the Foot ? 
 
 684 What takes place when yy precedes the endings beginning 
 with p ? 
 
 685. In what sort of Verbs does the Aor. II. not usually occur ? 
 
 686 . Describe the euphonic changes which occur, when an ending 
 
 beginning with ad comes after a Mute . 
 
 687. Give the respective endings of the III. PI. Per/, and Pip/ 
 
 Pass, in Pure Verbs. 
 
 688 . How is this Pers. usually formed in Impure Verbs ? Why ? 
 
 689. How is the place of the »in the proper endings of this Pers. 
 
 sometimes supplied ? 
 
 690. What effect has this supplied letter on a preceding P-, K> 
 
 and T- mute respectively ? 
 
 §§ 107-110. Paradigms of Mute Verbs. 
 
 691. Repeat all the Act. forms of -xfiiru, piirru, y^a^w, Xufi&t, arl^yco, 
 
 rvxw, ani%u, xyig6rra> (Fut. -|«) ,’e/rrat (Fut. -au), ivvru, aTtv^M, 
 rrvdu, du.vfjt.a/a) (Fut. -am), av/^u (Fut. -£«)• 
 
 692. Repeat all the Mid. forms of r^eveo, xgvrrca, ixutpu (§ 89, b), 
 
 aptti(Za>, areyw, 'bi^ofJLau, <rXarr&> (Fut. ~aa), aXX&rrea 
 
 (Fut. a<xtvhu (Fut. avuaa), <rudu, a%<xZ,u (Fut. -au), arrt£i%u>, 
 (Fut. -&). 
 
 693. Give the Aorists and Futures Pass, of ar^eQu, fixarru (Char. 
 
 /3), rgsTw, 0(>e%u (Aor. I.), tpxiyu (Aor. II.), dxl(hc.> (Aor. II.), 
 atpirru (Char, y), ovofix^tu (Aor. I.), (Aor. I.). 
 
 694. Inflect all the Moods of the Perf. and Plpf. Pass, of riyyu , 
 
 vof/i^a (Fut. •au) i aQtxrrco (Fut. *£«)> arefjt.<fu, rev%et (rsrvyfictt), 
 ««•«*(§ 89, b). 
 
 695. Form Verbal-adjectives from y^i<pu, xiyu, x^Cttu, avriudco, 
 
 (Fut. -ffu), nourru) (Fut. -aeo), Qvxirra (Fut. -£«)• 
 
 b. Liquid Verbs. 
 
 § 111 . Formation of the Tenses, 
 
 696. Define a ‘ Liquid Verb ’. 
 
 697. How do Liquid Verbs differ from other Verbs in the forma¬ 
 
 tion of the Futures and Aorists (Act. and Mid.)? 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 555 
 
 G98. What is the Tense-characteristic in the Perf. and Plpf. /. 
 Act.? 
 
 699. Give the Personal-endings of the Fut. (Act. and Mid.). 
 
 700. Explain how these endings are obtained. 
 
 701. What other Verbs do they follow in the inflexion of the 
 
 Put. ? 
 
 702. What Tense is wanting in Liquid Verbs ? 
 
 703. How is the Pres. Root usually got from the simple Root ? 
 
 704. Explain the 4 ways by which this is effected. 
 
 705. Mention some Verbs which retain the simple Root in the 
 
 Pres. 
 
 706. In what Tenses does the strengthened Root appear ? 
 
 707. How are the other Tenses formed ? 
 
 708. In what Tenses is the Vowel in the last syllable of the 
 
 Root lengthened ? 
 
 709. Mention the Tenses in which the simple Root occurs. 
 
 710. What Tenses are rarely formed by Liquid Verbs ? 
 
 711. Is the simple Root taken from the same Tense as in Mute 
 
 Verbs ? 
 
 712. Liquid Verbs with a monosyllabic Root and i as a Root-vowel 
 
 have the variable-vowel a. in some of the Tenses ; which are 
 they ? Give examples. 
 
 713. In what Tenses have they the variable vowel «? Give 
 
 examples. 
 
 714. What is the basis of the classification of Liquid Verbs ? 
 
 715. Give a Verb of each class, with its Fut. and A or. I. 
 
 716. Mention some Verbs in -xivu which take » in the Aor. L 
 
 What would the Vowel regularly be ? 
 
 717. Shew how the Perf. I. Act. of Verbs with the Char. » was 
 
 usually formed. 
 
 718. Give the Perf. and Plpf. I. Act. of ftvu and vipu. Shew 
 
 whence they are derived. 
 
 719. Do all Liquid Verbs form a Perf. I. ? 
 
 720. Explain the peculiarity in the formation of some of the Tenses 
 
 of xfivat, xX'ivat and vrXvvu. 
 
 721. When <x6 follows a Liquid, what euphonic change occurs ? 
 
 722. In Verbs in -aiva» and - O'vat, what becomes of the v before p ? 
 
 723. Shew how the Perf. II. is usually formed. 
 
 724. How is the Perf. II. formed, in the case of Verbs with i in 
 
 the Fut. 
 
 725. Is the Perf. II. of common occurrence in Verbs of this class ? 
 
 §§ 112—115. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs. 
 
 726. Repeat all the Act. forms of xtfiaivat, •*p<kxxat i <rxivat, vl/xat, tL^vk, 
 
 (Aor. I. and II.), a.p./ix6vai, SaXXai (Perf. II. and Aor. 
 II.), oxiXXat, tra'i^at (Perf. II.-), athlvat. 
 
 727. Repeat all the Pass, forms of x^ivat, axu^u (Aor. II. and 
 
 Perf. II .), WireXXu, ulj^hvu, aQfyu, ptx'tvu (Perf. Pass. 
 
 -fffAxi). 
 
 728. Form Verbal-adjectives from xlaxvvu, <pdu^u, nivu, 
 
 XXtf f vtpxivu. 
 
556 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 116. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of Certain 
 Verbs, both Pure and Impure. 
 
 729. Give examples of Act. Verbs which have the FuU of the 
 
 Middle form. 
 
 730. Describe the 1 Doric Future'. 
 
 731. Mention some Verbs which have the Doric Fut. 
 
 732. Enumerate the peculiarities in the Conjugation of plu, <rX**> 
 
 deu, vsu, xottu, xXcc'iu, tvs to, oriitru, tpsvyco and tu.'lZ,u. 
 
 733. Repeat the Perf. Subj. and the Plpf. Opt. Mid. or Pass, of 
 
 faptvriaKto, xru.ofj.a .1 and xolXslo. What is to be remarked re¬ 
 lative to their formation ? 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 § 117. Syncope and Metathesis. 
 
 734. Explain what ‘ Syncope ’ means. 
 
 735. Mention some examples of syncopated Verbs. 
 
 736. What is understood by ‘ Metathesis ’ ? 
 
 737. Repeat the Tenses of rspovu, xaXtu, (ZvXXu, xv.fj.vu and Ivuv^u 
 
 in which Metathesis occurs. Shew clearly how it is 
 effected. 
 
 § 118. Verbs in -v, with the Root of the Pres, strengthened . 
 
 738. To what Tenses is the strengthened Root confined ? 
 
 739. What kind of Verbs are called ‘ Deponents Middle ’ and 
 
 ‘ Deponents Passive ’ respectively ? 
 
 The Pupil should become quite familiar with the Lists of 
 Anomalous Verbs (§§ 119-126), taking particular note of 
 what parts of them are irregular, and wherein the irregularity 
 consists. The simple Roots in each case should be attended 
 to. It would be a good exercise for the Pupil if the Tutor 
 were to take a Verb at random, and require of him to refer 
 it to the class to which it properly belongs. 
 
 Verbs in -g.i. 
 
 § 127. Peculiarities in the Conjugation of Verbs in -fit. 
 
 740. Wherein do Verbs in -fit chiefly differ from those in -»? 
 
 741. Describe the Reduplication which some Verbs in -fit take in 
 
 the Pres, and Impf. 
 
 742. Under what circumstances is the initial Consonant not re¬ 
 
 peated ? 
 
 743. Give examples of Verbs with this Redup. 
 
 § 128. Classification of Verbs in -fit. 
 
 744. What are the two principal classes of Verbs in -pit 
 
 745. Repeat the Root endings of Verbs of the first class. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 557 
 
 746. When is -w u added to the Root ?—when is -»w added ? 
 
 747. What is the only Verb in -upi which forms an Aor. II. ? 
 
 § 129. Mood-vowels. 
 
 748. In what Tenses have Verbs in -pi distinctive forms from 
 
 those in -a ? 
 
 749. Mention the parts of Verbs in -pi which have no Mood-vowel 
 
 750. When the Mood-vowel is wanting, to what portion of the 
 
 Verb is the Personal-ending added ? 
 
 751. Give the Mood-vowels of the Subj. 
 
 752. With what are these Mood-vowels blended ? 
 
 753. State in what respects the contraction of the Subj. of Verbs 
 
 in -pi differs from that of Verbs in Give examples illus¬ 
 trating this. 
 
 754. What Subjunctive-form of all Verbs resembles the Pres, and 
 
 A or. II. Subj. of 'iarvpi and riOnpi ? 
 
 755. How do Verbs in -vpt form their Subj. ? 
 
 756. What is the Mood-vowel of the Irnpf. and Aor. II. Opt. ? 
 
 757. With what is this Mood-vowel combined ? 
 
 758. What Optative-form of all Verbs resembles the Impf. and 
 
 Aor. II. Opt. of rlSwpi ? 
 
 759. On what analogy is the Opt. of Verbs in -vpi formed ? 
 
 § 130. Personal-endings. 
 
 760. Repeat the Personal-endings of the Pres. Ind. Act. 
 
 761. Explain the formation of the ending of the III. Pers. Plur. 
 
 762. What further change does this ending undergo when the 
 
 Boot ends in a "l 
 
 763. Give the Personal-endings of the Pres, and Aor. II. Subj. 
 
 Act. 
 
 764. Repeat the Personal-endings of the Impf. and Aor. II. Ind. 
 
 Act. 
 
 765. What Ind.-form of all Verbs is inflected like the Aor. II. 
 
 earw ? 
 
 766. How do the Personal-endings of the Impf. and Aor. II. Opt. 
 
 of Verbs in -pi differ from those of the corresponding forms 
 of Verbs in -u ? Exception ? 
 
 767- What portions of the Impf. Opt. are usually contracted ? 
 Explain the nature of this contraction. 
 
 768. What Optative-forms of all Verbs suffer a similar contraction ? 
 
 769. Mention the Verbs in which the contracted forms are very rare 
 
 in the Opt. Aor. II. Act. 
 
 770. Give the Personal-endings of the Pres, and Aor. II. Imper. 
 
 Act. 
 
 771. When the II. Pers. Sing. Pres. Imper. Act. drops its regular 
 
 ending, how is its rejection compensated ? 
 
 772. Do many Verbs retain the regular ending in the II. Pers. 
 
 Sing. Pres. Imper. Act.? 
 
 773. Enumerate the Verbs in -pi which have the II. Pers. Sing. 
 
 Aor. II. Imper. Act. ending in -s. 
 
558 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 774. What Imperative-forms of all Verbs resemble arrj^ ? 
 
 775. What change takes place in the Compounds of arrifo ? 
 
 776. What is the ending of the Pres, and Aor . II. Inf. Act. ? 
 
 777. How is this ending appended in the Pres, and the Aor. II, 
 
 respectively ? 
 
 778. What is th e Accentuation of these Infinitives ? 
 
 779. What Infinitive-forms of all Verbs resemble arrival ? 
 
 780. Give the proper endings of the Pres, and Aor. II. Part. Act. 
 
 781. Explain the euphonic changes which occur in the Pres, and 
 
 Aor. II. Participles (Act.) of Vibu/ti, huxvufti, 'larnpi and 
 
 r'lUnfii. 
 
 782. What Participles of all Verbs are like the Pres. Part. Act. 
 
 of rl&npu ? 
 
 783. Shew how the Personal-endings of the Middle are formed. 
 
 784. In what parts of the Mid. Voice do the Personal-endings re¬ 
 
 tain their full form ? 
 
 785. Shew how the Sing. Impf. Act. of rIDvfu and are usually 
 
 formed. What Pers , of rlfapt is not so formed ? 
 
 786. What parts of Verbs in -vpi are usually formed like Verbs 
 
 in -vul 
 
 Formation of the Tenses. 
 
 § 131. First Class of Verbs in -[<u. 
 
 787. In what Tenses is the short Characteristic-vowel lengthened? 
 
 788. What Verbs form their Perf. and Plpf. (Act., Mid. and 
 
 Pass.) by changing the short Characteristic-vowel into u ? 
 
 789. What is the Tense-characteristic in the Aor. I. (Act. and 
 
 Mid.) of r'i09ifii, 'In/ai and Vi'hwfti ? 
 
 790. What parts of the Aor. of these Verbs are supplied by the 
 
 Aor. II. forms ? 
 
 791. What parts of the Aor. II. Act. of these Verbs are not in use ? 
 
 792. Explain the formation of the Aor. I. (Act. and Mid.) of 
 
 ‘larnfti. 
 
 793. What Aoristform of 'larnfti is not in use ? 
 
 794. What Tenses are wanting in Verbs in -fit ? 
 
 795. To what part of ’lam/ti would you refer \arn\u ? 
 
 796. What parts of the Act. Voice of ‘lam/ti are transitive , and 
 
 what parts are intransitive ? The English equivalent of each 
 Tense ? 
 
 797. Give the different meanings of the Mid. of lartipu. 
 
 \ 
 
 § 132. Second Class of Verbs in-ftu 
 
 798. In Verbs of this Class, from what part of the word are all 
 
 the Tenses formed ? 
 
 799. What modification occurs in the case of Verbs with simple 
 
 Roots ending in o ? 
 
 800. In what peculiar way do Verbs with Liquid Roots form some 
 
 of the Tenses ? 
 
 801. What Tenses are formed in but a Jew Verbs of this class? 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 559 
 
 § 133. Paradigms of Verbs in -fit. 
 
 802. What Tense is wanting in hixwfu throughout ? 
 
 803. Repeat all the Tense-forms (Act. Mid. and Pass.) of 'Itm/tt, 
 
 r'iOnpi, Vilafsu and 2 tixvvpu, in convenient portions at a time. 
 
 804. Give the second forms of the Pres., Impf and Pres. Part. 
 
 Act. of 2iixvufit. 
 
 805. Whether is Iridouv or irtfa* to be preferred ? 
 
 806. How are the Compounds to be accented in the A or. II. Subj. 
 
 (Act. and Mid.) ? 
 
 807. Form the A or. II. Imper. Act. of affttrrtifu, and accent it 
 
 throughout the Persons. 
 
 808. Accentuate the forms— xirodou, ort/pHirt, v^ov, lx2tc, vri^iioffSt, 
 
 t'tgSov, i rgodsrt, ar^obojtk, ivfere. 
 
 809. Explain how the forms irifav, nOfoopoii arise. 
 
 IHK -' v [ *pS V * * 
 
 § 134. Remarks on the Paradigms. 
 
 810. In what Tenses have 2uva.ft.xt, tar a fiat, x^fixfixt, vrftxfiat and 
 
 Wnxpxt a different Accentuation from Explain 
 
 wherein this difference consists. 
 
 811. In the Opt. Impf. and A or. II. Mid. of Verbs in -fit with 
 
 Roots ending in s, whether are the forms with -u or those 
 with -ot to be preferred ? 
 
 812. Accentuate the forms :— ivrJoiro, xxrxdoto, a<ro2t2oi<r(k, 2tu2oivro. 
 
 813. Shew how the Dual and Plur. of the Perf. and Plpf Act. of 
 
 ‘iar/ifu are formed. 
 
 814. Repeat all the Personal-forms of the Perf. and Plpf. Act. of 
 
 txruftt throughout the Moods. 
 
 815. Give the shortened form of the Inf. and Part, of the Perf. 
 
 Act. Of 'IffTnfit. 
 
 816. Decline this Participle. 
 
 817. Are the forms Wiins, ->», i2t2uv, -us, -u in use ? 
 
 Synopsis of Verbs in -fit. 
 
 1. Verbs in which affix the Personal-endings directly to 
 
 the Root-vowel. 
 
 § 135. Verbs with Roots ending in a. 
 
 818. Repeat the Verbs in -fit with Roots ending in «, giving the 
 
 principal parts of each. 
 
 819. What Verb supplies some of the Tenses of Wtrnfii ? 
 
 820. What Verbs supply the Pres, and Impf. of TAHMI ? 
 
 S21. Go through the Perf. Ind. of TAHMI. 
 
 822. When is the p in the Redup. of and trifirXnfu 
 
 omitted ? ' • 
 
 823. Write all the forms of which are in use, accentuating them 
 
 throughout. 
 
5G0 QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 824. In what respects is the II. Pet's. Sing. Ind. Act. of tpvpl irre¬ 
 gular ? 
 
 S25. Give the parts of Qvpl which are enclitic. 
 
 826. What two different meanings has this Verb ? 
 
 827. What is to be revvarke 1 about the meaning of its Put. ? 
 
 828. What parts of (~npti [nit Air.) are used in an Aoristic sense ? 
 
 829. Mention the Deponents banging to this class, and the 
 
 Tenses which present any peculiarity. 
 
 § 136. Verbs with Roots ending in t. 
 
 830. What is the Root of inpi ? 
 
 831. Does wpi present a complete Conjugation ? 
 
 832. Write all the Tense-forms (Act., Mid. and Pass.) of Ivpi 
 
 which are in use, and accentuate them throughout. 
 
 833. Where does atpinpi take the Aug. (sometimes) in the Imp/. 
 
 Ind. Act.? 
 
 834. What is the only part of the A or. I. Mid. that is in use ? 
 
 § 137. e ipi, I am, and Eipi, I will go . 
 
 835. Give the respective Roots of tipi and tipi 
 
 836. Write out all the Tense-forms of tipi and tipi that are in use, 
 
 comparing the corresponding Tenses of both Verbs, and 
 accentuating them throughout. 
 
 837. What parts of tipi are enclitic ? 
 
 838. Repeat the Rules for the Accentuation of the Compounds of 
 
 > / 
 
 UfAt. 
 
 839. Mention some parts of the Compounds of tipi which ara 
 
 identical in form with the corresponding Compounds of tipi 
 
 840. What meaning has the Pres, of tipi usually ? By what Verb, 
 
 therefore, is the form with Pres, meaning supplied ? 
 
 IL Verbs in -p,, which affix ->w or -w to the Root-vowel, ana 
 append to this the Personal-endings. 
 
 § 138. Formation of the Tenses • 
 
 841. Repeat the Paradigms (Act., Mid. and Pass.) of xt^avwpi, 
 
 trfiivvvpi, pdjvvupi, a.voiyvupi, irfiyvupi, oXXvpt and opvupi. 
 
 842. Shew how the form oXXvpi is derived. 
 
 §§ 139, 140. Synopsis of Verbs in -vpi. 
 
 843. Repeat the Verbs in -vpi, with Roots ending in a —those 
 
 with Roots ending in t — those with Roots ending in e. Give 
 the Tenses of each Verb which present any peculiarity. 
 
 844. In Verbs of this class with Roots ending in #, what change 
 
 takes place in the o on the addition of -v »upi ? 
 
 845. Repeat the Verbs in -vpi, with Roots ending in a Consonant . 
 
 Give the leading Tenses of each Verb. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 561 
 
 § 141. Inflexion of Kupxt and r Upm. 
 
 846. To what Tense do xiipai and v\pxi strictly belong ? Shew 
 
 how their respective meanings accord with this. 
 
 847. What is the Root of npui ? What Lat. Verb is from the 
 
 same Root? 
 
 848. Write all the forms of these two Verbs which occur, and 
 
 accent them. 
 
 849. What form usually occurs in Prose instead of vpai ? How 
 
 does the inflexion of this form differ from that of Ipcu itself ? 
 
 850. Accentuate the forms xccfatrro, \xoo6nro, xxSupxt, xuHtirai, xaGoio, 
 
 xotraxuaSou. 
 
 851. How are the forms of fipon, which are wanting , supplied ? 
 
 § 142. Verbs in -u, which , in the Aor. II. Act. and Mid., 
 follow the analogy of Verbs in -pi. 
 
 852. What kind of Verbs form their Aor. II. Act. and Mid. like 
 
 Verbs in -pi ? 
 
 853. Describe how they resemble Verbs in -pi. 
 
 854. How are the remaining forms of these Verbs inflected ? 
 
 855. How is the Characteristic-vowel affected (generally) in the 
 
 Aor II. Act. of Verbs of this class ? 
 
 856. Mention the ending of the II. Pers. Sing. Aor. II. Impef. 
 
 in the Compounds of (Z&'ivu. 
 
 857. Give some examples of Verbs with an Aor. II. like Verbs in 
 
 •pi. 
 
 858. Repeat all the forms of the Aor. II. Act. of uoro^i\&axtt, mXt- 
 
 axopooi, <pveo and %oc't(>u. 
 
 859. Is the Aor. II. Mid. of common occurrence in Verbs of this 
 
 kind? 
 
 § 143. Inflexion of oft*. 
 
 860. What is the Root of ? What Lat. Verb is from the same 
 
 Root ? 
 
 861. To what Tense does strictly belong ? What meaning 
 
 has it ? 
 
 862. Give all the parts of oft* which are in use. 
 
 863. To what Dialect are the forms fin and fincrllu considered to 
 
 belong ? 
 
 § 144. Deponents , and Active Verbs whose Fut. has a Mid. 
 
 form. 
 
 864. Commit to memory, and repeat, in convenient portions at a 
 
 time, the lists of the Deponents Mid., Deponents Pass., 
 and Act. Verbs with a Mid. Fut., which most commonly 
 occur. 
 
 2 b 2 
 
CtUESTIONS 
 
 ON THE 
 
 SYNTAX* 
 
 The Chief Elements of a Simple Sentence. 
 
 § 145. Mature of a Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate . 
 
 865. Of what does Syntax treat ? 
 
 866. Give the definition of a ‘ Sentence .’ 
 
 867. Explain the two necessary elements in a sentence. How are 
 
 they named? 
 
 868. Shew how the Greek language expresses the relation of ideas. 
 
 869. What different parts of speech may constitute the Subject 
 
 870. In what Case is* the Subject? 
 
 871. Under what circumstances is the Subject in the Acc. ? 
 
 872. How may the Subject be expressed in indefinite and distribu¬ 
 
 tive expressions of number ? Give examples. 
 
 873. Mention the different cases in which the Subject is not ex¬ 
 
 pressed by a distinct word. 
 
 874. In what different ways may the indefinite-Pronouns * one r 
 
 ‘ they,’ be expressed in Greek ? 
 
 875. What different parts of speech may constitute the Predicate 
 
 of a sentence ? 
 
 876. What name is given to ilva* when it occurs in the Predicate £ 
 
 Why ? . 
 
 877. How may you distinguish when *7va< is a principal Verb f 
 
 § 146. Concord. 
 
 878. In what respects does a finite Verb agree with its Subject ? 
 
 879. Mention also in what respects predicative Adjectives, Par¬ 
 
 ticiples, Pronouns, Numerals and predicative Nouns agree 
 with the Subject. 
 
 880. What kind of Verbs take two Nominatives ? Give examples 
 
 of them. 
 
 881. How is the place of the second Nom. supplied with some of 
 
 these Verbs ? 
 
 I 
 
563 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 § 147. Exceptions to the General Rules of Concord. 
 
 882. Explain the ‘ Constructio Kara avviatv or ad intellectum.' 
 
 883. When is the predicative Adj. put in the Neut. Sing., with¬ 
 
 out any reference to the Gender and Number of the Subject ? 
 
 884. How are the Gender, Number, and Case of a demonstrative-, 
 
 relative- or interrogative-Pronoun regulated, when it is 
 connected with a Noun by *T»a/? In what Gender and 
 Number may the Pronoun sometimes stand, irrespective of 
 the Gender and Number of the Noun ? 
 
 885. When may Verbal-adjectives stand in the Neut. Plur. ? 
 
 886. What is the Number of the Verb (generally) when its Sub¬ 
 
 ject is in the Neut. Plur. ? Give the exceptional cases. 
 
 887. Is the Predicate always in the Dual when the Subject is so ? 
 
 888. Shew generally when the Subject of a sentence ought to be 
 
 in the Dual. » 
 
 889. Enumerate the Dual forms which are of the common Gender. 
 
 890. How is the Gender of the Predicate regulated, when it is a 
 
 Superlative, and in connexion with a Gen. ? 
 
 § 147 b . Concord , when there are several Subjects. 
 
 891. In what Number is the Verb, when it has two or more Sub¬ 
 
 jects ? 
 
 892. What is the Gender of the Adj., when the Subjects are of 
 
 like Gender ? 
 
 893. How is the Gender of the Adj. regulated, when the Subjects 
 
 are of different Genders, (1) in the case of persons, (2) in the 
 case of things 1 
 
 894. Are the Verb and Adj. always in the Plur. when there are 
 
 several Subjects ? 
 
 895. How is the Pers. of the Verb regulated, when it has several 
 
 Subjects of different Persons ? 
 
 896. Explain the ax/ipa ku.$ «Ao» kA fftgos, and illustrate the ex¬ 
 
 planation by an example. 
 
 § 148. The Article . 
 
 897. When does a Noun take the Article ? 
 
 898. How does the Noun without the Art. represent the idea ? 
 
 899. When is the Art. used to denote the whole compass of the 
 
 ideal 
 
 900. Give the different significations of the Eng. indefinite Art. 
 
 (a or an), and shew how the Greeks supplied its place in 
 each case. 
 
 901. When is the Art. used instead of a possessive-Pronoun ? 
 
 902. Explain the distributive use of the Art. 
 
 903. What was the Art. originally ? Where is it often used, in 
 
 consequence ? 
 
 904. State the general Rule relative to the use of the Art. with 
 
 proper names. 
 
564 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 905. When do proper names take the Art. ? 
 
 906. Do proper names take the Art. when they are connected 
 
 with an Adj. ? 
 
 907. Does a proper name take the Art. when a Noun in apposition 
 
 with it has the Art. ? 
 
 908. Describe the usual position of the names of rivers. 
 
 909. When do Adjectives and Participles take the Art., and when 
 
 is it omitted ? 
 
 910. How is the Part, with the Art. usually translated into Eng- 
 
 iish? T 
 
 911. Under what circumstances does the Inf. take the Art. ? 
 
 912. When does in^og take the Art. ? * w 
 
 913. Give the different meanings of akXoi and ol and 
 
 et trtgoi, — ToXXot and at woXXo't,—arkilovg and el ffktloug, — w'ku~ 
 crot and at <rXiicrroi. 
 
 914. Describe how Adverbs of place and time (sometimes of qua¬ 
 
 lity), and Prepositions with their Cases may be turned into 
 Adjectives or Nouns. 
 
 915. When a Noun with the Art. has attributive words connected 
 
 with it, there are two cases [(a) and (b)] to be distinguished 
 with reference to the position of the Art. ; explain these two 
 cases clearly. 
 
 916. When a Noun with the Art. has a Gen. connected with it, 
 
 explain the position of the Art., (1) when the emphasis is on 
 the Gen., (2) when the emphasis is on the governing Noun. 
 
 917. Describe the respective positions of the Art., when \awrou, 
 
 avTou, crov, ygjL&v occur with the Noun. 
 
 918. Explain the use of the Art. in the two positions before-men¬ 
 
 tioned, when oix^os, ftecrog, tT^urog or fovog occur in the sen¬ 
 tence. Give examples of the two cases, and shew how they 
 are usually translated into English. 
 
 919. When is the Art. used with a Noun which has an adjective- 
 
 Pronoun joined with it ? Position of the Art. in this case ? 
 Explain the difference between <5 ip,os cpl^-os and tpog <fn\og. 
 
 920. When is the Art. used with a Noun in connexion with rotaZ- 
 
 rog, &c. ? Position of the Art. in this case ? When is the 
 Art. omitted f 
 
 921. When vag, yruvrtg occur with a Noun, there are three cases 
 
 to be distinguished; explain them fully, mention which 
 is of most frequent occurrence, and shew how they are to be 
 translated in each case. 
 
 922. When txacrog occurs with a Noun, shew when the Art. ia-i 
 
 used, and when it is omitted. 
 
 923. Describe the use and position of the Art. with a Noun in 
 
 connexion with oiy.pu) and ap$ori£og. 
 
 924. In the case of a Noun joined with a cardinal number, shew 
 
 when the Art, is omitted, and when it is used. Distinguish 
 the two different positions which the Art. may have in the 
 latter case. 
 
 925. Explain the position of the Art., when eSt, ixtivog, olrag or 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 565 
 
 airit is employed with the Noun. When is th« Art. 
 omitted ? 
 
 § 149. Classes of Verbs. 
 
 926. Whence arise the different classes Verbs? 
 
 927. Define Active, Middle and Passaic Verbs. 
 
 928. What twofold signification has 'he Act. form ? 
 
 929. What is meant by a reciprocal V^rb ? 
 
 930 What are the only peculiar Tenses which the Pass. has r 
 How are the other Tenses supplied ? Why ? 
 
 § 150. Observations on the Classes of Verbs. 
 
 931. Mention some Act. Verbs which have an intrans. as well as 
 
 a trans. signification. Give some Eng. and Lat. parallels. 
 
 932. Give examples of Act. Verbs whose Aor. I. has a tram., but 
 
 whose Aor. II. has an intrans. meaning. 
 
 933. Give examples also of Act. Verbs whose Perf. 1. has a trans., 
 
 but whose Perf. II- lias an intrans. meaning. 
 
 934. There are some trans. Verbs which have no Perf. L, but 
 
 whose Perf. II. is intrans. ; mention a few examples. 
 
 935. Explain precisely the different significations of the Middle- 
 
 form. _ . 
 
 936 In what way, besides the Middle-form, may the reflexive 
 relation be expressed? Under these circumstances, what 
 meaning Lrss the Middle-form ? How does it form its Put. 
 
 and Aor. ? , . 
 
 937. Repeat the E ule relative to the form of the Put. and Aor. 
 
 of Middle Verbs which denote an action necessarily refer- 
 rinq to the Subject. Of what nature are several of the Verbs 
 of this class ? Mention some of these Verbs which have 
 their Aor. of the Mid. form. 
 
 938. What use of the Middle is far the most frequent ? 
 
 939. Explain the difference in the use of the Act. and Mid., when 
 
 they each denote that the Subject causes the action to be 
 
 done by another. . . 
 
 940. Describe how the Pass, meaning is derived from that of the 
 
 Mid., exemplifying your remarks by examples. 
 
 941. What Tenses of the Mid. are used to denote the Pass, also . 
 
 942. * What Tense peculiar to the Pass. Voice is used instead of 
 
 the Mid. form in the case of many reflexive and intransi- 
 V Grbs 
 
 943. Has the Fut. Mid. ever a Pass, meaning ? 
 
 944. In the case of a Pass. Verb, how is the cause or agent usually 
 
 expressed • 
 
 945. When are and used with the word denoting the 
 
 946. What kind of Act. Verbs may assume the personal Pass. 
 
 form in Greek ? Does the Lat. coincide with the Greek m 
 this respect ? 
 
 947. Explain what is meant by a ‘ Deponent Verb- 
 
566 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 § 151, Tenses and Moods. 
 
 948. What is indicated by the Tenses ? 
 
 949. What do the Moods denote ? 
 
 C50. Name the different Moods, and shew what they severally 
 express. 
 
 § 152. a. More particular review of the Tenses. 
 
 951. How may the Tenses be divided ? 
 
 952. Mention the principal Tenses and also the historical Tenses, 
 
 giving examples of each. 
 
 953. How does the Pres. (Ind.) represent the action ? 
 
 954. Explain what is meant by the Prcesens historicum. 
 
 955. In what Moods has upi a Fut. meaning ? What time may 
 
 be indicated by its Inf. and Pres. Part. ? How is the 
 meaning of the Pres expressed ? 
 
 9o6. How are the Present-forms ol^opai and often translated 
 into English ? Shew how these significations are derived. 
 9o/. In what manner does the Perf (Ind.) represent the action ? 
 
 958. What kind of Greek Perfects are translated into Eng lish by 
 
 the Pres . ? How is the Plpf. of such Verbs translated ? 
 Give examples. 
 
 959. What does the Fut. (Ind.) denote ? 
 
 9t>0. Is the Fut. Ind. ever used in a subordinate clause after a 
 historical Tense in Greek ? What Mood would be used in 
 this case in Lat. ? 
 
 961. What is denoted by the Fut. III. (Ind.) ? 
 
 962. In the case of Present Perfects , how is their Fut. III. to be 
 
 translated ? 
 
 963. IIow does the Fut III. differ from the Lat. Futurum exac- 
 
 turn ? What part of the Verb is usually employed in Greek, 
 m subordinate clauses, to indicate the completion of an action 
 in the future ? What words in this case introduce the sub¬ 
 ordinate clause ? 
 
 964. Wherein does the A or. (Ind.) differ from the other Tenres 
 
 which express past time ? 
 
 ll° w does the Imperf. (Ind.) usually represent the action ? . 
 Jo6. Mention some other uses of the Impf. Ind. 
 
 967. Contrast the use of the Aor. (Ind.) and the Impf. (Ind.) ij 
 
 historical narration. 
 
 968. In what sort of propositions may the Aor. (Ind.) be trans¬ 
 
 lated by the Eng. Pres. ? 
 
 969. In ^ what manner is the action represented by the PlpJ 
 
 970. Enumerate the essential points of difference between th- 
 
 Greek and the Lat. Plpf. 
 
 971. What Tense is used in subordinate clauses, in which an ao 
 
 *on to be represented as completed before another pat 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 567 
 
 972. Under what circumstances may the .4 or. be used instead of 
 
 973. Contrast the use of the Aor. with that of the other Tenses 
 
 in the Moods and the Participials, illustrating your re¬ 
 marks by examples. 
 
 § 153. b. More particular review of the Moods. 
 
 974. What is expressed by the Ind., Subj. and Imper. respec- 
 
 tively ? 
 
 975. What is the Subj. of the historical Tenses called ? 
 
 976. How does the Subj. of the principal Tenses and of the Aor. 
 
 represent the action ? 0 , . - ., 
 
 977. Mention the circumstances under which the bubj, ot tne 
 
 principal Tenses may be employed m principal clauses. 
 To what Person is it usually restricted then? 
 
 978. Give examples of the Subjunctivus deliberative. 
 
 979. What Tense of the Subj. is used to express prohibitions f 
 
 What negative Particle is then employed ? 
 
 980. How does the Subj. of the historical Tenses represent the 
 
 action? , . . . 7 . 0 
 
 981. What Tense of the Opt is not used in principal clauses i 
 
 982. When is used with the Opt. in principal clauses, what is 
 
 denoted by it? , , , . ,, 
 
 983. What kind of clauses are Optatives with u6t or u y*?, strictly 
 
 984. Whlt k paft ? of the Verb is used to express a wish which the 
 
 speaker knows cannot be realized ? What is th e Lat. usage . 
 
 985. Describe the difference between the Pres, and the Aor. 
 
 Imper., and give examples. 
 
 986. When is the Perf. Imper. used? Is it of frequent occur 
 
 rence ? . »...,. 
 
 987. What parts of the Verb are used in negative or prohibitive 
 
 expressions with p* ? 
 
 Remarks on the Modal Adverb «>. 
 
 988. For what purpose is <xv used ? , J . ., , , . 
 
 989. With the 2nd. of the historical Tenses what does it shew (*), 
 
 (IS) ? When the conditional proposition, though past, refers 
 to the present or future, what parts of the \ erb are usua y 
 employed in Lat. and in Greek respectively ? 
 
 990. With what parts of the Verb is never used . 
 
 991. Explain the use of «» with the Subj. To what kind of 
 
 clauses is it confined in the common language . How are 
 such clauses then usually introduced? 
 
 992. What is indicated by «» with the Opt. of the Imp/., Plpj • or 
 
 993. In*a conditional proposition, whether is the Opt. with «* 
 
 a principal or a subordinate clause ? . .. 
 
 994. Is the Opt. with ever used without a Protasis or condi¬ 
 
 tioning clause ? 
 
568 
 
 QUESTION ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 995. How is a strong affirmation sometimes expressed in a modest 
 
 way? 
 
 996. In sentences expressive of a wish, when is uk or u yfy em¬ 
 
 ployed with the Opt. of the historical Tenses ? Explain the 
 full construction, and shew the connexion of such sentences 
 with the ordinary use of the Opt. with a*. What is the 
 Lat. usage in this case ? 
 
 997. When mayav be joined with the Inf. or Part . ? Exemplify 
 
 this by some Greek sentences. 
 
 998. Why should av be regularly connected with the Predicate ? 
 
 999. What member of the sentence, however, does it usually fol¬ 
 
 low ? 
 
 1000. To what sort of words, therefore, is it usually joined? 
 
 1001. How is it that oiv is sometimes repeated in the same sen¬ 
 
 tence ? 
 
 § 154. The Attributive Relation. 
 
 1002. What is an Attributive notion ? What part of the sentence 
 
 does it define ? 
 
 1003. State the different kinds of words which may stand as 
 
 Attributives. 
 
 1004. When is the Noun ("which is modified by the Attributive) 
 
 omitted ? Give a few common examples of such omission. 
 
 1005. Explain what is meant by ‘ Apposition \ Can a word stand 
 
 in apposition with any other word than a Noun ? 
 
 1006. When a word is in apposition wdth hpcrt^og, vpsrt^og or <r$t- 
 n^og, in what Case is it put ? Why ? 
 
 § 155. The Objective Relation . 
 
 Describe the Objective relation. What part of the senten<»e 
 does it define ? 
 
 What may the attributive and the objective notions be called ? 
 What different words, or combinations of words, may stand 
 es the Object of the sentence ? 
 
 The Cases. 
 
 § 156. I. The Genitive . 
 
 1010. What is denoted primarily by the Qen.? 
 
 1011. What is expressed by the Gen. (a) in a local relation, (b) in 
 
 a causal relation / 
 
 § 157. A. Local Relation . 
 
 1012. What may the Gen. be called, when used to express local 
 
 relation ? 
 
 1013. With what expressions is the Gen. denoting this relation 
 
 used ? 
 
 1014. Give some examples of Verbs, Adj. and Adv. of this class. 
 
 1007. 
 
 1008. 
 1009. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX, 
 
 569 
 
 § 158. B. Causal Relation . 
 
 1015. What does the Gen., in the causal relation, signify ? Con¬ 
 
 trast it with the Gen. in the local relation. 
 
 1016. What is the first division of th q causal Gen, ? 
 
 1017. Explain the Gen. auctoris. With what Verbs is it con- 
 
 1018. Explain the Gen. possessors. With what words is it usually 
 
 found? . . , . 
 
 1019. What is meant by the Gen. totius or partitivus ? With what 
 
 expressions does it usually occur ? Give some examples of 
 words of this class. 
 
 1020. Mention the different cases in which the partitive Gen. Has 
 
 the force of an Attributive. 
 
 1021. What is the syntax of Verbs signifying ‘ to take hold of f 
 
 1022. When the action of the Verb refers only to a part of an 
 
 object, what Case does it commonly govern? 
 
 1023 How is it that words expressing time and place are put m 
 the Gen. ? Is the Gen. of place of common occurrence . 
 
 1024. By what Case may the time within which any thing is done 
 
 13G 6Xpr6SS6(l ? 
 
 1025. What is meant by the Gen. materia ? Mention the differ¬ 
 
 ent sorts of expressions with which this Gen. may stand. 
 Give examples of words of each class. 
 
 1026. When do Verbs of eating and drinking govern the Gen., and 
 
 .when the Acc. ? / 
 
 1027. Explain the government of 3*7 and w*. 
 
 1028. Bo Verbs signifying admiration, praise or blame govern any 
 
 other Case than the Gen. ? , ,, 
 
 1029 What is the second division of the causal Gen. ? Repeat tne 
 different kinds of Verbs with which the Gen. causae may 
 occur. Give some examples of each of these classes o* 
 
 Y 
 
 1030. What Case do Zya***, <P‘^ and o-r^yi/* govern ? 
 
 1031. What is the syntax of 
 
 1032. Mention the different constructions of and 
 
 1033! In what Case is the penalty for a crime put ? 
 
 1034 Explain the Gen. comparatioms or relatioms. With what 
 expressions is this Gen. used ? Give some examples of each 
 class of such expressions. . 
 
 1035. In what case is the word denoting price put r 
 
 § 159. II. The Accusative . 
 
 1036. What is primarily denoted by the Acc. ? 
 
 1037. What does it express (a) in a local relation, (b) in a causai 
 
 relation? 
 
 1038. Describe the Acc. of effect. . . 
 
 1039. What is meant by the Acc. of cognate signification f What 
 
 generally occurs with this Acc.? Give examples. 
 
 1040. Mention some Verbs which in Greek take the Acc., but 1 a 
 
570 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 Lat. take some other Case than the Acc., or are construed 
 
 with Prepositions. 
 
 1041. With Verbs of swearing, in what Case is the object sworn bv t 
 
 1042. What Case follows vt, /*«, ol pi and »«/' pit 
 
 1043. What questions does the Acc. of time answer? 
 
 1044. In what Case are words signifying space, bulk or weiqht 
 
 put? 
 
 1045. What is meant by the Acc. of more definite limitation (Acc. 
 
 partis affect®) ? Give some examples illustrating its use. 
 How is this Acc. turned into English ? 
 
 1046. What Adverbial expressions may be explained on the prin¬ 
 
 ciple of this Acc. ? 
 
 § 160. Double Accusative . 
 
 1047. Enumerate, in detail, the instances in which the double Acc. 
 
 is used in Greek. 
 
 1048. With Verbs of doing or saying good or evil to, of what nature 
 
 are the two Accusatives ? 
 
 1049. With what kind of Verbs may one of the Accusatives be an 
 
 Adj. ? 
 
 1050. When Verbs of naming, appointing, &c., are changed into 
 
 the Pass., what becomes of both Accusatives ? 
 
 1051. State the different constructions of avao-n^u* and iQeuouatat. 
 
 1052. When Verbs of asking , teaching, &c., are turned into the 
 
 Pass. Voice, what does the Acc. of the patient become ? 
 10 d 3. W hat is the construction with the Pass. of iTiTot-TTuv, 'fxiTPi- 
 run and i vno-ribkav ? 
 
 § 161. III. The Dative. 
 
 1054. What is primarily denoted by the Dat. ? 
 
 1055. Mention, in detail, the relations expressed by the Dat. 
 
 in the first place. 
 
 1056. What idea is denoted by the Dat. in connexion with the 
 
 Dat. of ctvros ? 
 
 1057. Mention also the relations expressed by the Dat. in the 
 
 a-o r f eC071 ^ place. Give examples of words used with this Dat. 
 
 10o8. Explain the Dativus communionis. 
 
 1059. What is meant by the Dat. commodi or incommodi 1 
 
 1060. What Case is used with Verbal-adjectives , and with Per¬ 
 
 fects Pass, instead of tt<ro with the Gen. ? 
 
 1061. To what Case in Lat. does the instrumental Dat. corres¬ 
 
 pond ? 
 
 1062. What Case usually denotes the relation expressed in Eng¬ 
 
 lish by to or for ? ° 
 
 § 162. Prepositions. 
 
 i Mention some of the relations denoted by Prepositions. 
 
 10b4. How may it be known what relation the Prep, is intended 
 to express ? 
 
571 
 
 questions on tiie syntax. 
 
 1065. Repeat the Prepositions which govern th e Gen. only the 
 
 Dat. only— the Acc. only— the Gen. and Ace—the Gen. f 
 
 Dat. and Acc. ..... , , 
 
 1066. To what other relations is the local relation expressed by 
 
 Prepositions transferred? 
 
 A. Prepositions with one Case. 
 
 § 163. 1. Prepositions with the Gen. alone. 
 
 1067. Give the different meanings of a»r/. What is its Lat. 
 
 1068. What are the different meaning of <r^o ? Lat. equivalent ? 
 
 With what other Prep, does it nearly agree ? .... 
 
 1069. What is the primary meaning of a.xo ? Lat equivalent . 
 
 Mention the different relations denoted by 
 
 1070. Primary meaning of!*? Lat. equivalent. Different re¬ 
 
 lations denoted by it ? 
 
 1071. Meanings of 'inxa ? Different positions of it. 
 
 1072. What sort of words are called improper Prepositions . Men¬ 
 
 tion a few of them. . , - .. n e 
 
 1073. What construction does z^‘ v ta ^ e > mstead oi (jren * ot 
 
 the personal-Pronouns ? 
 
 § 164. 2. Prepositions with the Dat. alone. 
 
 1074. To what Prep, is t» opposed ? Lat. equivalent of it ? 
 
 ’* Enumerate the relations expressed by it. 
 
 1075. With what kind of Verbs is lv with the Dat. sometimes 
 
 used, instead of us with the Acc. ? . - 
 
 1076 To what Dialect does belong? Primary meanmg of 
 ? Give examples illustrating the use ot it. 
 
 1077. What improper Prep, governs the Dat. ? 
 
 § 165. 3. Prepositions with the Acc. alone. 
 
 1078. To what Prep, does a»a stand in contrast ? Primary mean¬ 
 
 ing of it? Different relations denoted by it? 
 
 1079 With what Lat. and Eng. Prepositions does us correspond ? 
 17 Old Attic form of it ? Different relations denoted by it ? 
 
 1080. How is the use of us restricted ? Lat. equivalent. 
 
 C. Prepositions with two Cases. 
 
 § 166. Prepositions with the Gen. and Acc. 
 
 1081. Primary meaning of 3i«? Different relations denoted by 
 
 Sia with the Gen. ?— with the Acc. ? . * 
 
 i aqo Lat. equivalent of *ar« ? Primary meaning of it* * 
 ferent relations denoted by it with the Gen. ■with t 
 Acc. ? With what Prep, does xara with the Acc. form a 
 
 strong contrast ? 
 
572 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 1083. Lat. equivalent of uveg 1 Primary meaning of it ? Different 
 
 relations denoted by it with the Gen. ?—with the Acc. ? 
 
 C. Prepositions with three Cases. 
 
 § 167. Prepositions with the Gen., Dat. and Acc. 
 
 1084. General meaning of etpipi ? Different relations denoted by 
 
 it with the Gen. ? —with the Dat. ?—with the Acc. f In 
 what relation is it rarely used with the Gen. I 
 
 1085. Distinguish accurately the meanings of and ap,<pi. Dif¬ 
 
 ferent relations denoted by srs^' with the Gen. ?—with the 
 Dat. ? —with the Acc. ? In what relation is it not used with 
 the Gen. in prose ? 
 
 1086. Primary meaning of Wi ? Different relations denoted by it 
 
 with the Gen. ?—with the Dat. ? —with the Acc. ? Ex¬ 
 plain the difference between i«r/ with the Gen. and with 
 the Acc., expressing local relation. 
 
 1087. Derivation of pira. ? What does it denote in general ? Dif¬ 
 
 ferent relations denoted by it with the Gen. ?—with the 
 Dat. ? —with the Acc. ? With what Case is it not found, 
 except in poetry ? 
 
 1088. What is indicated, in general, by ? Different rela¬ 
 
 tions denoted by it with the Gen. ? —with the Dat. ?—with 
 the A cc. ? 
 
 1089. Derivation of t^os ? General meaning of it ? Different re¬ 
 
 lations denoted by it with the Gen. ?—with the Dat. ?— 
 with the Acc. ? 
 
 1090. Lat. equivalent of l<ro ? Primary meaning of it ? Different 
 
 relations denoted by it with the Gen. ?—with the Dat. f — 
 with the Acc. ? 
 
 1091. 'A wo or ix. is sometimes used instead of it ; under what cir¬ 
 
 cumstances does this take place ? 
 
 § 168, Remarks on the construction of Verbal-Adjectives 
 and of the Comparative. 
 
 What is the construction of Verbal-adjectives derived from 
 transitive Verbs ?— of those derived from intransitiveVe rbs ? 
 When a Verbal-adjective is used impersonally, in what Case 
 is its Object put ? In what Case is the agent ? 
 
 Describe the construction of the Comparative. 
 
 Express in Greek, ‘ he is more hasty than prudent* Give 
 the Pule for this construction. Is this Pule confined to 
 Adjectives ? 
 
 § 169. Remarks on the use of the Pronouns. 
 
 1096. When may the Subject, Predicate, Attribute or Object be 
 expressed by Pronouns ? 
 
 1092. 
 
 1093. 
 
 1094. 
 
 1095. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 573 
 
 1097 When only are the substantive-personal-Pronouns (in the 
 Nom.) and the possessive-Pronouns (as Attributives) ex- 
 
 1098. When they are omitted, how are their places severally sup- 
 
 1099. Howfs in the Nom. most frequently used ? Generally 
 
 sneaking when has it an intensive force (self, very) ? . 
 
 1100. Shew clearly the distinction between ourog and txavo;, giving 
 
 1101 Wherein consists the difference between the accented and 
 110 the eruditic personal-Pronouns ? When are the accented 
 
 forms naturally employed ? * 9 T 
 
 1102 To what do the reflexive- Pronouns always refer . In w £ 
 
 relations may the reflexive-Prououns stand t 
 1103. What portions of the sentence may the object be, to which 
 
 the reflexive-Pronouns refer ? , 
 
 1104 Give examples of reflexive-Pronouns employed in connexion 
 ll )4 ' wi th an Inf or a Part. Are they ever used thus in a 
 subordinate < clause? How are these Pronouns then com¬ 
 monly rendered into English ? . . ■, . 
 
 1105. What Pronouns are employed when an object is opposed t 
 
 another object, not to itself ? . . ... „ m v i. 
 
 1106. What meaning has oh, oJ, &o. usually in Atti . 
 
 portion of the sentence must it then refer . 
 
 1107. When are the forms of air os always used instead of t le cor¬ 
 
 responding reflexive-Pronouns ? 
 
 11 aq a re the compound reflexive-Pronouns always emphatic ? 
 nOQ State accurately the Pules relative to the use of the reflexive 
 wss^ve- Pronouns. What Pronouns are sometimes used 
 instead of them, and when ? Is aMs, when used in con¬ 
 nexion with the reflexive possessive-Pronouns, always em¬ 
 phatic ? 
 
 § 170. The Infinitive. 
 
 1110 How does the Inf represent the idea of the Verb ? 
 
 1111. State the essential points of difference between it and the 
 
 Noun. 
 
 § 171. A. Infinitive without the Article. 
 
 What two functions may the Inf. without the Art. perform 
 
 Wtenthetof? stands as the Object , what Case does it re- 
 
 M P entio“n the different classes of Verbs and Adjectives with 
 which the Inf. performs the office of a complement. 
 
 Of what nature is the Inf. generally employed with such 
 Adjectives ? How may this Inf. be translated into Enghsh. 
 
 1112 . 
 
 1113. 
 
 1114. 
 
 1115. 
 
 § 
 
 1116. 
 
 172. Nom., Gen., Vat. and Acc. with the Infinitive. 
 
 In addition to the Inf. most Verbs take a personal Object ; 
 in what Case is it put ? 
 
574 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 1117. Under what circumstances is the Acc. of a personal-Pronoun 
 
 omitted before an Inf., though not so in Eng. or in Lat. ? 
 
 1118. When Adj. or Nouns are joined with the Inf., as explana¬ 
 
 tions of the Predicate, in what Case are they put ? Are 
 there any exceptions ? 
 
 1119. When the subject of a Verbum sentiendi or dicendi is also its 
 
 Object, in what Case does it stand ? 
 
 1120. Mention some classes of Verbs with which the Acc. cum Inf. 
 
 is used, as in Lat. 
 
 1121. When the Subject is an Inf. which has a Subject of its own , 
 
 in what Case is this latter Subject put ? 
 
 § 173. B. Infinitive with the Article. 
 
 1122. What is the Inf. with the Art. virtually? Why ? 
 
 1123. Shew that it retains the nature of the Verb. 
 
 1124. When the Inf. has a Subject and predicative explanations 
 
 belonging to it, in what Case are they put ? 
 
 1125. What takes place when the Subject of the Inf. is the same 
 
 as that of the principal Verb ? 
 
 § 174. The Participle. 
 
 1126. How does the Part, represent the idea of the Verb ? 
 
 1127. In what respects does it resemble the Adj.? 
 
 1128. Shew that it also retains the nature of the Verb. 
 
 1129. Why can the Part, never be used independently? On what 
 
 kind of a word does it always depend ? In what respects 
 does it agree with it ? 
 
 1130. Mention the different ways in which the Part, may be em¬ 
 
 ployed. 
 
 § 175. The Participle as the complement of a Verbal Idea . 
 
 1131. Generally speaking, what kind of Verbs alone can have a 
 Part, as their complement? Why ? 
 
 Repeat, in detail, the different classes of Verbs which can 
 have a Part, as their complement. 
 
 To what sort of a clause is the Part, used with these Verbs 
 
 equivalent ? How may this construction be translated into 
 English ? 
 
 With what does the Part., in such sentences, agree in Case? 
 Explain the construction, when the Subject of the princi¬ 
 pal Verb is, at the same time, its Object. 
 
 Describe the different constructions of the Part, with wot* 
 
 Or truyyiyvw ' Tx . u . 
 
 S ° m ® of * he Verbs previously mentioned take also the Inf, 
 Put with a difference of meaning; mention them in detail, 
 shewing also this difference of meaning in the two cases. 
 When instead of the impersonal phrases tiki* tern. &o., the 
 
 personal construction is used, with what is the Part, made 
 to agree ? 
 
 1132. 
 
 1133. 
 
 1134. 
 
 1135. 
 
 1136. 
 
 1137. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX, 
 
 575 
 
 1138. When the Part, is used as the complement of 
 
 tixvw, 'hta.TiXu), hayiyvouai, hayeu, <pPdvu> or ol^opai, how are the 
 Verb and the Part, usually rendered into English ? 
 
 1139. When is ruyx™* used, and how may it be translated (some¬ 
 
 times) ? 
 
 § 176. B. The Participle used to express certain Adverbial 
 
 accessory Relations. 
 
 1140. State the different adverbial relations which the Part, serves 
 
 to denote. _ .. , 
 
 1141. How is the place of the explanatory Part, generally supplied 
 
 in English ? . _ . 
 
 1142. Mention the two sorts of Participial construction in Greek, 
 
 and shew when each is employed. 
 
 1143. When is the Acc. absolute used? When the Subject is ex¬ 
 
 pressed, of what nature is it ? # . 
 
 1144. Contrast the meanings of ut and a« in connexion with the 
 
 two modes of Participial construction. 
 
 1145. How may the force of this u; with the Part, be expressed 
 
 in English ? . i 
 
 1146. Explain the peculiar use of and the Gen. Abs., m con¬ 
 
 nexion with uneven, ioriarttaCai, vouv, (pgovrifyi?, &C. How IS 
 the result of the action implied in the Gen. commonly de¬ 
 noted ? 
 
 § 177. The Adverb. 
 
 1147. What relations are generally expressed by Adverbs ? 
 
 1148. What is meant by ‘ modal Adverbs' , and what do they de- 
 
 1149. Explain the difference in the use of oh and pn (and their 
 
 compounds). _ , , , . 
 
 1150. With what Moods may oh be used ? In what sort of sen¬ 
 
 tences may oh occur ? . 
 
 1151. Describe the sentences in which pv may be employed. 
 
 With what Moods may it be used ? 
 
 1152. Whether is oh or pv of more frequent occurrence with the 
 
 1153. When a negative sentence contains indefinite-Pronouns or 
 
 Adverbs, of what nature must all the negatives be ? 
 
 1154. After what expressions is the Inf. with fin used, instead of 
 
 the Inf. without fin ? . _ , 
 
 1155. When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt, &c. are followed 
 
 by fin with the Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), what is^m reality, 
 and how is it to be translated ? 
 
 1156. With similar expressions when should fin eu be used, and 
 
 how is it to be translated ? . 
 
 1157. When is fin oh with the Inf. used after expressions of hinder- 
 
 ing, denying, ceasing, &c.? „ 
 
 1158. Explain the construction of ou fiy\ with the bubj. or rut. 
 
 Ind., denoting a strong assertion. 
 
576 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 § 178. A. Co-ordination. 
 
 1159. What is meant by ‘ Co-ordination ' and ‘Subordination' ? 
 
 1160. What are the two sorts of Co-ordination? 
 
 1161. Enumerate the different ways in which a simple succession 
 
 of words is effected. 
 
 1162. What meaning has besides * both « and'’l What nega¬ 
 
 tive then corresponds to it ? 
 
 1163. State the ways in which the strengthening of the idea is 
 
 effected. 
 
 1164. Explain adversative Co-ordination. 
 
 1165. How is restriction of the idea most frequently expressed ? 
 
 1166. What Particle usually corresponds to ffiv ? What is the 
 
 primary meaning of [tin ? Can it be always translated ? 
 
 1167. How may iS be generally translated? What is the chief 
 
 use of f&sv—it ? 
 
 1168. Describe the meaning and use of aS, xxiroi, pevroi, 'ipus and 
 
 1169. How is the union of negative sentences effected ? 
 
 1170. Mention the two uses of alii. 
 
 1171. When & negative sentence follows a positive one, how is the 
 
 connexion regularly formed in prose ? 
 
 1172. Wherein does disjunctive Co-ordination consist? How is 
 
 it expressed ? 
 
 1173. In the case of co-ordinate sentences, of which one denotes the 
 
 cause and the other the effect , how are these sentences 
 severally introduced ? 
 
 1174. Mention some words which can never stand as the first word 
 
 in a sentence. 
 
 B. Subordination. 
 
 § 179. Principal and Subordinate Sentences . 
 
 1175. Define (1) a principal sentence, (2) a subordinate or acces¬ 
 
 sory sentence, (3) a compound sentence. 
 
 1176. How are subordinate sentences divided? Explain the ori¬ 
 
 gin of the name of each class. 
 
 § 180. I. Substantive-Sentences. 
 
 1177. What is a substantive-sentence ? What office may it perform 
 
 in a compound sentence ? 
 
 A. Substantive-sentences introduced by on or <5*. 
 
 1178. What is denoted by substantive-sentences introduced by 
 
 on or us ? 
 
 1179. Enumerate the different ways in which the Predicate of 
 
 such substantive-sentences may be expressed. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 577 
 
 1180. Iu sentences of this nature, when is the Ind. used ?—when 
 
 the Opt. ?—when the Opt. with E ?—when the 'lad. of the 
 historical Tenses with «»? 
 
 1181. When is the lad. employed more especially ? Is the use of 
 
 the lad. confined to any particular Teases ? 
 
 1182. Give some examples of forms of expression which are per¬ 
 
 sonal in Greek, but impersonal in Eng. and Lat. 
 
 § 181. B. Final Substantive-Sentences. 
 
 1183. What are final substantive-sentences? How are such sen¬ 
 
 tences introduced ? 
 
 1184. What Mood is usually employed in these sentences ? How 
 
 is the Mood in the final sentence regulated, (1) when the 
 Verb in the principal sentence is a principal Tense, (2) 
 when it is a historical Tense ? 
 
 1185. What sequence in Greek corresponds to the sequence of 
 
 Tenses m Lat ? 
 
 1186. Explain the full construction, when «»occurs with us, liras cr 
 
 c/ 
 
 iva. 
 
 1187- What Conjunction usually follows Verbs of care, anxiety , 
 considering, striving, admonishing, &c. ? What verbal- 
 forms generally follow this Conj. 1 
 
 1188. When are '/»«, as and liras followed by the Ind. of the his¬ 
 
 torical Tenses ? 
 
 § 182. II. Adjective-sentences. 
 
 1189. What are adjective-sentences ? How are they introduced ? 
 
 1190. How are the Gender , Number and Case of the relative-Pro¬ 
 
 noun deteftnined ? 
 
 1191. When a predicative Noun stands in an adjective-sentence, 
 
 how is the Gender and Number of the Relative very often 
 regulated ? 
 
 1192. Describe the peculiarities in the use of the phrases lam Z», 
 
 a, &c. 
 
 1193. How is the Person of the Verb in an adjective-sentence 
 
 determined ? 
 
 1194. What Pers. is regularly used after a Voc. ? 
 
 1195. When the Relative refers to two or more objects, in what 
 
 Number is it put ? How is its Gendei' regulated, (1) when 
 the objects are of the same Gender, (2) when they are of 
 different Genders, (3) when they are inanimate objects? 
 
 1196. Describe the construction which is called k A ttraction of the 
 
 Relative^ What position does the Noun , in that case, 
 often occupy ? 
 
 1197. Explain clearly the syntax of such a sentence as ivai*olov , 
 
 Iffas otfyas, and shew the steps by which this construction 
 may be derived from the ordinary one. 
 
 1198. Exemplify the attraction which takes place, when oTos or 
 
 oils Ti is used instead of asn with the Inf. 
 
 1199. Explain what is meant by ‘ inverted Attraction’. Mention 
 
 a phrase in which it is of very common occurrence. 
 
 2 c 
 
578 
 
 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 1200. In adjective-sentences, when do we employ (1) the Ind., (2} 
 
 the Ind. Fut. , (3) the Opt. without $.* [two cases], (4) the 
 Opt. with aV, (5) the Ind. of the historical Tenses with civ ? 
 
 § 183. III. Adverbial Sentences . 
 
 1201. What are adverbial sentences ? What do they denote I 
 
 A. Adverbial Sentences of Place and Time. 
 
 1202. How are adverbial sentences of place introduced ? What 
 
 three relations do they express ? 
 
 3203. How is the use of the Moods regulated in such sentences ? 
 
 1204. How are adverbial sentences of time introduced, denoting 
 
 (1) cotemporaneity, (2) priority, (3) succession ? 
 
 1205. In such sentences, when do we use (1) the Ind., (2) the 
 
 Subj., (3) the Opt. [two cases] ? What Adverb is then 
 used with the Subj., but not with the Opt. ? 
 
 1206. When does -rfiv take the Inf. ? In what case is the Subject 
 
 of the Inf. put ? 
 
 B. Causal Adverbial Sentences. 
 
 § 184. a. Adverbial Sentences denoting Cause. 
 
 1207. Mention the two classes of adverbial sentences denoting 
 
 cause or reason, and the Conj unctions by which they are 
 severally introduced. 
 
 1208. What Mood is generally employed in both these classes of 
 adverbial sentences ? 
 
 § 185. b. Conditional Adverbial Sentences . 
 
 By what Conjunctions are adverbial sentences expressing a 
 condition introduced ? 
 
 What is expressed by the principal clause ?—what by the 
 subordinate clause ? What names are given to them ? 
 Repeat, in detail, the four different ways of expressing con¬ 
 ditionality in Greek, giving a sentence to exemplify each 
 case. 
 
 There are also two constructions to express conditionality, 
 of rarer occurrence ; give them. 
 
 When u with the Opt. is used instead of a Conjunction of 
 time, what does it denote, and how is the si translated ? 
 What part of the Verb is then found, usually, in the prin¬ 
 cipal clause ? 
 
 With what sort of expressions is &» usually omitted in the 
 Apodosis with the Ind. of the historical Tenses ? 
 
 Give examples of sentences wherein the Protasis is omitted . 
 What verbal-form is then employed? How may the 
 Protasis be supplied ? 
 
 Is the Apodosis ever wanting ? 
 
 1209. 
 
 1210. 
 1211 . 
 
 1212 . 
 
 1213. 
 
 1214. 
 
 1215. 
 
 1216. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 579 
 
 § 186. c. Adverbial Sentences denoting Consequence or Effect. 
 
 1217. By what Conjunction are adverbial sentences of consequence 
 
 or effect introduced ? What is the Correlative to it ? 
 
 1218. In such sentences, when do we employ, (1) the Ind., (2) the 
 
 Inf-, (3) the Opt. with &, (4) the Ind. of the historical 
 Tenses with oiv, (5) the Inf. with av ? 
 
 1219. What negative Particle is to be used with the Inf. ? 
 
 1220. If the Ind. after usn has a special Subject of its own, in 
 
 what Case is it put ? What takes place when the Subjects 
 of both sentences are the same ? 
 
 1221. Give the meaning of tip'Zrt. What parts of the Verb are 
 
 found with it ? 
 
 1222. Mention some independent or parenthetic phrases, in which 
 
 ut with the Inf. occurs. 
 
 C. § 187. Adverbial Sentences denoting Comparison. 
 
 1223. How are comparative adverbial sentences of manner and 
 
 way introduced ? 
 
 1224. How is the use of the Moods in such sentences regulated ? 
 
 1225. By what Relative are comparative adverbial sentences of 
 
 quantity or degree introduced ? Mention the Correlative 
 
 to it. 
 
 § 188. Interrogative Sentence». 
 
 1226. Define (1) direct and (2) indirect or dependent questions. 
 
 1227. Of how many members may each sort of question consist? 
 
 1228. What is meant by (1) nominal and (2) predicative ques¬ 
 
 tions ? Give an example of each. 
 
 1229. How are (1) nominal and (2) predicative questions intro¬ 
 
 duced ? 
 
 1230. In what way are predicative questions often indicted, 
 
 when not so introduced ? 
 
 1231. Give some explanation as to the meaning and use of the In- 
 
 terrogatives 5 -rou, « P-t, P& v > 
 
 0VV, (AUV (AVI) (AUV OU, OU, 0UX.0UV , ll'TOC, and k'TUTCi. 
 
 1232. Enumerate the different ways in which (1) direct. double 
 
 questions, (2) indirect single questions and (3) indirect 
 double questions are introduced. 
 
 1233. In single indirect questions, what Interrogatives are often 
 
 used instead of osrts, otoios, on-us, &c. ? 
 
 1234. In such questions, after what kind of Verbs is u properly 
 
 used ? How may u be then translated ? When is lav with 
 the Subj. employed? 
 
 1235. Shew the difference (1) between ti—n and oro'ri£ov—%, (2) be¬ 
 
 tween tl —jj and sirs — tin in indirect double questions. 
 
 1236. In interrogative-sentences, when should we employ (1) tlio 
 
 Ind., (2) the Subj., (3) the Opt., (4) the Ind. of the histo - 
 rical Tenses with (5) the Opt. with a* ? 
 
580 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 1237. Enumerate the different ways iq which the Answer may 
 
 be expressed. 
 
 § 189. Oblique or Indirect Narration. 
 
 1238. Describe what is meant by (1; Oratio recta, (2) Oratio oth 
 
 liqua, and give examples of each. 
 
 1239. How are sentences, which are principal sentences in direct 
 
 narration, expressed in oblique narration, (1) when they 
 contain a simple affirmation, (2) when they express a com¬ 
 mand, wish, or desire ? 1 
 
 3240. What is the only change undergone in oblique narration by 
 clauses which are subordinate in direct narration ? Under 
 what circumstances does this take place ? 
 
 1241. In Greek, oblique narration often simulates the form o\ 
 
 direct narration ; shew wherein this resemblance consists, 
 and its effect on the narrative. In this species of oblique 
 narration, when is the Ind. regularly used ? 
 
 1242. Give an example of the Acc. with the Inf. used instead ol 
 
 the finite Verb in a subordinate sentence. 
 

 
 I GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY, 
 
 WHICH, BESIDES THE MEANINGS, CONTAINS 
 
 THE ANOMALOUS NOUNS, ADJECTIVES AND VERBS, 
 AS WELL AS THE ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPA¬ 
 RISON AND THE SYNTACTICAL CONSTRUCTIONS 
 MENTIONED IN THE GRAMMAR. 
 
 The Numbers 1, 2, 3, after an Adjective, denote that it has 
 one, two or three endings.— For the Numerals and the Propositions, 
 reference should be made to the sections where they are explained. 
 —For Proper Names, see Index III. 
 
 A. 
 
 'Afilvrot 2, not tobelived, insup¬ 
 portable. 
 
 A/3 b, harmlessness, inno¬ 
 cence. 
 
 ay a. So q 3, good, [ Comparison , § o2, 
 
 1 ];— iyaHo*, a good thing, 
 blessing, advantage. 
 iyixku, I adorn, deck; Mid. 
 (Dat.), I glory in, am proud 
 of, delight in. 
 my a. > /ax, -arog, to, statue. 
 ayafAM, I wonder, admire. [. For - 
 mation of the Tenses, § 135, 1, 
 f>age 284;— Construction, % 158, 
 Obs. 5.]. 
 
 Ayav, Adv., very, too much. 
 ityavxxrta/, I am displeased, am 
 angry, am discontented. 
 iyaTtxv, I love ; with Dat., I am 
 contented with. 
 iyytXia, b, message, tidings. 
 ayyeXXu, I announce [§ 112.].— 
 With Part and Inf., § 175, 
 Obs. 3. 
 
 A'yysXof, 0 , messenger, angel. 
 aye, ( Imper. of ay do ), age! come! 
 ayei^u, I collect. [Perf, § 89, (b)]. 
 ocyeXv, b, herd, flock. 
 uyevrng, -«?, ignoble. 
 olytjoMs , -«», free from old age, 
 undying, undecaying. 
 ayxicrT^ov, to, hook, fishhook. 
 olyvvfM, I break. [Formation of 
 the Tenses, § 140, 1;— Aug., 
 
 § ? 7 : 4 ’ ] - w , r 
 
 uyoga, by market-place, forum. 
 
 uyo/oooiog, o, trafficker. 
 
 uyoptva, I say. 
 
 ay/oevoo, I Catch. 
 
 &typos 3, fcrus, wild, savage, rus- 
 tic. 
 
 ay fog, o , ager , field, land. 
 ay %lvoog 2, shrewd. 
 
 I lead, bring, conduct. 
 [Aor., § 89, Obs.; Perf. fax, 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. bypa.i]. 
 
 ayttiy, -wvog, o, fight, Contest.^ 
 otiaripuv, -flv, inexperienced, igno¬ 
 rant. 
 
582 
 
 GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 ihx<p> 7 , $, sister. 
 
 a.h\q>oxTovos, o, murderer of a bro¬ 
 ther, fratricide. 
 uhiXtp'o?, l, brother. 
 c&nXos 2 , uncertain, unknown. 
 dhs, -ov, o, the lower world, 
 Hades. 
 
 it^ineeu, (Acc.), I do wrong to, in- 
 
 , j ure ‘ 
 
 cti'ixwftx, -aros, to, injustice, 
 wrong, injury. 
 dihtxioo, *, injustice. 
 
 SFixos 2 , unjust, wicked. 
 cfi/Miros 3, untamed, unsubdued. 
 d^oXta^m, -ov, o, prater, idle 
 talker. 
 
 aboXtax'ix, f), prating, frivolity. 
 aSvyetreeo, I am unable. 
 ctivvdros 2 , unable, impossible. 
 eobu, di'Aco, {Fat. u.ao[Acu), X sing, 
 chant. 
 
 du, Adv., always. 
 
 iuxYii, -eg, unseemly, disgraceful. 
 
 dire's, o, eagle. 
 
 d^/is, -«c, unpleasant, loatlisome. 
 d*i$l%oftcit, I am disgusted with 
 , [§ 87, 1 ]. 
 
 h, nightingale. [. Decl ., § 35, 
 
 > Obs. 3.]. 
 
 d.y\^, •\^os , o, the air. 
 v.6dva.rog 2 , immortal. 
 dtHuros 2, not to be seen. 
 ddxnrYis, -ov, o, wrestler. 
 ddXtog 3, unhappy, wretched, un¬ 
 fortunate, pitiable. 
 d6xius, Adv., wretchedly, pain¬ 
 fully, toilfully. 
 
 &0\ov, ro, prize, reward. 
 dSvfxiu, I am dispirited, despair. 
 
 I groan. [Char., § 105, 2.]. 
 etl^eofiooi, (Acc.), I am ashamed 
 before any one, revere, respect, 
 worship (Aor. Pass. )[§ 98, (b). 
 — With Part, and Inf., § 175, 
 
 > Obs. 3.]. 
 
 ki^s, f), shame, modesty, rever¬ 
 ence. [Decl, § 43 .]. • 
 
 u.l8v£, -6gog, i, ft, aether, sky, hea¬ 
 ven, air. 
 
 pure air, the open sky. 
 0,1(401,, -drag, re, blood. 
 
 col \>sco, iTcttvtu, I praise [§ 38, Obs.]. 
 -yos, fi, goat. 
 
 col^irog 3, choice, eligible ; (Com¬ 
 parative, preferable to). 
 cotgiu, I take, assume [§ 120, 1; 
 —Formation of the Tenses, 
 § 98, Obs. ;—Aug., § 87, 3.]. 
 
 I raise, lift. 
 
 ooiaHoovotAOti , (Gen. or Acc.), I per¬ 
 ceive, notice, hear [§121,1.]. 
 octavo; 3, base, shameful. 
 colj^&g, Adv., disgracefully. 
 aiayftu, I shame ; Mid. (with 
 Aor. Pass.), I am ashamed. 
 [With Part, and Inf, § 175, 
 Obs. 3.]. 
 
 coirku (rivd n), I ask. 
 ai%f4oiXvros 2, captive. 
 
 Afcc, Adv. (poet.), quickly. 
 aldjv, -Cjvos, o , aevum, an age, time, 
 lifetime. 
 
 dxd/4ot.rog 2, unwearied. 
 dcxiopeu, I heal [§ 98, (b)], 
 oixivdx'/ig, -ov, o, a Persian sword, 
 scimitar. 
 
 dx(jotxQw, 1 am at the prime, 
 bloom. 
 
 dxf/yjf, point, height, prime, 
 bloom (of life). 
 
 dxoxdarug, Adv., with impunity, 
 disorderly, intemperately, li¬ 
 centiously. 
 
 dcoXovCiu, (DaC), I follow. 
 ookovoo, (Gen. or Acc.), I hear.' 
 [Perf. , § 89, (b); Fu,t. dxovaofxcti ; 
 Pass, with <r, § 95.— With 
 Part, and Inf, § 175, 0b3. 3]. 
 dix^ct, », top of a hill, height, 
 citadel. 
 
 dx^dcrris, -eg, immoderate, incon¬ 
 tinent, intemperate;— dx^xr/i( 
 ilfjoi loriHvptiuv, I am unable to 
 control my passions. 
 cLxttoiros 2, unmixed. 
 d.x^odoo(4ooi, (Gen.), I hear, listen to 
 , li 96 / 3.]. ^ 
 
 ouo^ooorvig, -ov, o, hearer, listener. 
 dcx^o’KoXii, -ices, h) a> citadel, tlia 
 Acropolis. 
 
 olx^os 3, highest, at the top, [with 
 the Art., § 148, Obs. 6] j— 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 583 
 
 to a*£»v, the top, point, sum¬ 
 mit. 
 
 a.KTis, -7vos, 37, sunbeam, ray. 
 olkco v, -ovax, -ov, unwilling. 
 xkakxZ,co, I shout [§ 105, 2.]. 
 xkx'ou, 1 make blind. 
 i.Xyuv'os 3, painful. [Comparison, 
 
 § 52, 4.]. 
 i\ysat, I feel pain. 
 ctXyos, -ovs, to, pain. 
 aXiitpu, I anoint. [Per/., § 89, (b)]. 
 
 dksxTpvdiv, - ovo$, o, cock. 
 dketa, I ward off [§ 125, 1.]. 
 akew, I grind, pound [§ 93, (b)]. 
 aXjjf't/a, «, truth. 
 
 dk'/ifovcu, I speak the truth, am 
 sincere. 
 
 dknSv,;, -es, true. 
 dk*6iv'os 3, verus , true. 
 dXnCws, Adv., indeed, truly. 
 akts, Adv., enough. 
 akiaxoyxi, I am caught, am 
 taken [of a city). [Formation of 
 the Tenses, § 122, 1 j— Aug., 
 § 87, 4 and 6 ]. 
 akxt, ri, strength. 
 oLAxiftot 3, strong. 
 dkka, sed, but, yet [§ 178, 6.]. 
 dkkrtkuv, of one another [§ 58.]. 
 akkofav, Adv., from another place. 
 akkoe, -v, -*, another, alius, 
 tikkon, nonne , [Interrog., § 188, 
 ( 8 )]. 
 
 dkk'or^os 3, alienus, belonging to 
 others, foreign. 
 
 ikkorftui, Adv., in a foreign or 
 hostile manner. 
 ako&oo, I thresh [§ 96, 3.]. 
 tLkrot, - ovt, to, grove. 
 akuoros 2, without trouble, free 
 from sorrow. 
 akucns, -iuf, *i, capture. 
 dyx, Adv., at the same time, to¬ 
 gether with [§164, Obs. 2.]. 
 
 I miss, err, commit a 
 fault, sin [§ 121, 2.]. 
 itpagrvpa, to, error, sin, offence. 
 iyxgrix, }>, offence, fault, sin. 
 xyXUgOU), I obscure, eclipse, make 
 dull, impair. 
 
 dyfi^oAx, ambrosia, (the food of 
 the gods). 
 
 xyikux, n, carelessness. 
 oyik'ioo, [Gen.), I neglect. 
 aywyoviu, [Gen.), I amunmindfiX 
 of, forget. 
 
 xyoifZyi, y, exchange, recompense 
 return. 
 
 xyoigos 2, without a share in. 
 ayonkos, ft, vine. 
 dy.TE%oyuu or xy,Ti<r%vovyxi, I 
 clothe myself, put on, wear. 
 [Formation of the Tenses, § 120, 
 3 Aug., § 91, 1.]. 
 
 6C/&UVM, I ward off, repel;— toith 
 the Dat., I help, defend;— 
 Mid., I ward off from my¬ 
 self, defend myself, punish, 
 avenge myself on any one. 
 xyip/, Prep., § 167, 1. 
 xyQiyvo&u, I am uncertain. [Aug., 
 § 91, 3.]. 
 
 xytpievvvfM, I put on, clothe ; 
 Mid. , I wear. [Formation of 
 the Tenses, §139, 6. 1;— Aug., 
 § 91, 3.]. 
 
 iy^KT^rtu, I dispute. [Aug., 
 § 91, 2.]. 
 
 dyfoTt^os 3, uterque, both ;Plur., 
 ambo. 
 
 uy<pu, ambo, both [§ 68, Obs. 2.]. 
 xv, with Subj., [instead of lav, 
 § 185, 2, (3) ], if. 
 
 XV, Modal Adverb, § 153, 2;— 
 omitted, § 185, Obs. 3. 
 xvx, Prep., § 165, 1. 
 
 xvxfix'ivco, I gO Up. 
 
 xvxfixTi?, -iut, 7i, a going up, an 
 expedition [from the sea in¬ 
 ward). 
 
 xvxyiyvuaxoo, X read. 
 xvxyxtxZ,a>, I compel. 
 xvxyxxlot 2 and 3, necessary. 
 xvxyxn, v, necessity, compulsion. 
 d.vx\i{,yvvyi, I yoke again, join 
 again;— [of an army), I break 
 up, decamp, move off, march. 
 XV XXX l CO, I burn [trans.), kindle. 
 xvxx^afu, I cry out. 
 xvxxvtttu, I peep out , emerge. 
 
584 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 kvuxiaxu, I spend, consume [§ 87, 
 1, and § 122, 2.J. 
 ivwruvu, I cause to rest ; Mid., 
 I rest, recruit myself. 
 ivu,<ru6u, I persuade. 
 ctva.vrerofjt.ui, I fly away. 
 iyuorXiu, (1) I sail on the open 
 sea ; (2) I sail back. 
 livKgTOi^co, I seize, snatch up. 
 avajraw, I hang upon, attach to. 
 a»«££/«, fi, want of government, 
 anarchy. 
 
 avaar^tfu, I turn round, (trails, 
 and intrans.). 
 
 ocvetr'ifafti, I set up. dedicate,offer. 
 avaT££T«, I overturn, ruin, de¬ 
 stroy [§ 102, 2. 4. 5.J. 
 
 I go back. 
 
 Kv}ga.To}iaryis, -oZ, o , slave-dealer, 
 kidnapper. 
 
 &.v}o<x<ro$ov, to, slave. 
 dyfyeiu, i). manliness, valour. 
 avisos 3, manly, brave. 
 
 Avfytlug, A dv., manfully, bravely. 
 huXivSt^M, illiberalitas , mean¬ 
 ness, stinginess. 
 
 *vtX<Ti(rros 2, unexpected. 
 avisos, o, wind. 
 dveo^ofioa, I come back. 
 avt^urdu, I ask. 
 
 iviv, (Gen.), without [§ 163, 
 t Obs.]. 
 
 dytvftiaxu, I find out. 
 avixopoit, I endure [§ 91, 1.]. 
 ayi-j/u, I boil up (trans.), cook. 
 avrixovartw, ( Dat .), I am disobe¬ 
 dient. 
 
 dvijj, o, man. [. Decl. § 36.]. 
 avfapov, to, flower, blossom. 
 otvio$, to, flower. 
 
 av^tunvog 3, human. 
 dvfydj'rtov, to, a little man, dwarf. 
 uv^covoi, o, homo , man. 
 ay it os 2, unequal. 
 a.v'iTTyf/.i, I set up, erect, arouse ; 
 A or. II. Act., 1 stood up : 
 Mid., 1 stand up, rise up. 
 avoiyyvfAi, ay oiyu, I open [§ 140, 
 
 , 5;—Au(/., § 87, 6.]. 
 avofAoios 2 aud 3, unlike. 
 avofAos 2, lawless. 
 
 avoos (- ovs ), -oof (-ot/y), imprudent, 
 foolish, irrational. 
 dyo^oeu, I raise up [§ 91, ].]. 
 di io^vttu, I dig up again. 
 uyTa.xxa.TTu , 1 exchange. 
 dvTtx%ios 3, (Gen.), of equal worth, 
 equivalent, 
 dvr/, Prep., § 163, 1. 
 
 UYTl2lX.SU, I defend at law [§ 91, 
 
 , 4 -J’ 
 
 avTihos 2, godlike. 
 uvTiXsyu, 1 contradict. 
 uvtItuttu, 1 put opposite ; Mid., 
 I set myself against, oppose. 
 uvvu, I complete, finish, accom¬ 
 plish [§ 94, 1.]. 
 uyu, Adv., above 
 clvuiyiuv, to, dining-room, upper 
 floor. 
 
 dvucpsXyis, -is, useless, unprofit¬ 
 able. 
 
 u%ioXoyos 2, worthy of mention, 
 noticeable, memorable. 
 a\ios 3, (Gen.), worthy of, worth. 
 ubou (r/vd tivos), I think worthy; 
 
 I claim, expect, wish. 
 aoi2v, fj, song. 
 
 dor uyu, I lead away, carry off 
 aoruid&vTos 2, uneducated. 
 uoraXXuTTu, {Gen. rei et Acc. 
 
 ■pers.), I free from. 
 utuvtuu, (Dat.), I meet [§116,1.]. 
 uoru\. Adv., once. 
 dorus 3, universus, all, every, 
 altogether [§ 40, Obs. 1]. 
 dorufjci, [nf. dirtivoti, I am absent 
 
 , L* 137]. 
 
 uoru/ui, Inf. utisYui, I go away, 
 depart [§ 137.]. 
 
 avisos 2, (Gen.), unacquainted 
 with, inexperienced, unskilled. 
 dorti^us, Adv., in an inexperi¬ 
 enced manner. 
 dortxauvu , I drive out, debar. 
 direg%ofiai, I go away. 
 dxt^&yofjtat, I become hateful 
 [§ 121, 3.]. 
 
 uori^ofiai, (Gen.), I abstain from, 
 keep myself from. 
 a.'jriX'U, (1) I keep off; (2) I am 
 distant from. 
 
CREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 585 
 
 irfjvn, i, wagon. 
 
 ivicriu, (Pat.), I disbelieve, dis¬ 
 trust ; Pass ., KXKTrtofAou, I am 
 disbelieved. 
 
 iiriUTt; 2, faithless, treacherous, 
 incredible. 
 
 kvrk'oos 3, simple. [ Peel., § 29.]. 
 d<ro, Prep., § 163, 3. 
 i-Tofr'tlvu, I go away, depart. 
 ««roj3AeV», I look upon. 
 i-ToyryvtovKu, I give up, reject;— 
 d<royiyvd>axu ipiavTov, I give 
 myself up, despair. 
 dro%tixvv/u,i, I point out, shew 
 forth, display, make known, 
 represent, appoint; with a 
 double A cc. , I appoint or make 
 any one so and so; Mid., I 
 shew forth of myself, declare, 
 deliver an opinion. 
 uvobexoftm, I receive, admit, ap¬ 
 prove of. 
 
 mvah*ifjLtu, I am from home, tra¬ 
 vel. 
 
 &<xeht\d<r»at, (Acc.), I run away 
 from. 
 
 irdhilu/At, I give back, restore, 
 repay; Mid., I sell. 
 d‘To0vY)O'xa>, I die [§ 122, 9.]. 
 aKoxaXev, I call back, name. 
 droxti^rru, I renounce publicly, 
 disinherit. 
 
 tt,<vox^hofjuu, I answer. 
 
 etToxgvTrw, I hide. 
 
 uToxnivu, I slay. 
 
 doroxavu, ( Gen .), I enjoy [§ 116, 
 
 1 .]. 
 
 / r«AAl )fu, I ruin, destroy ; Mid., 
 I am lost, perish. 
 iToXvms, -u»s, y, deliverance, re¬ 
 demption, release. 
 aToXvw, (Gen. rex et Acc. pers.), I 
 free from, release. 
 i<xo<xutM.o(iu.i, (Gen.), Pep. Pass., 
 1 try. 
 
 i.ToTr'Kiu, I sail away. 
 
 1 am in want. 
 
 civrogei 2, impassable, difficult ; 
 tv u.tc()ms to be in difficul¬ 
 ties. 
 
 ClVTOppUt), I flow from. 
 
 droppat ', stream, source. 
 i<roir{iivvvfM, I extinguish, put 
 out. 
 
 dvovjedu, I draw away. 
 diroarlwu, I send, despatch. 
 drotTritfu, I deprive of. 
 itfaargeQu, I turn away, es¬ 
 trange. 
 
 d<xori6*(Ai, I put away; Mid., I 
 take off, lay aside. 
 ix-orivtu, I atone, pay ; Mid., I 
 punish, avenge myself. 
 d-rorpiru, I turn away, ward off, 
 avert. 
 
 irotpuiva, I shew, display ; Mid., 
 I shew, express, declare.— 
 With the Part, and Inf., § 175, 
 Obs. 3. 
 
 dvroiptuyv, (Acc.), I flee from. 
 d<r&xz >?, sufficit, it suffices [§ 135, 
 3.]._ 
 
 uvrox^ufiou, I abuse, waste [§ 97, 
 3, (a)]. 
 
 &Tro(/.a.i, Gen., I touch, attach 
 myself to, take hold of, affect. 
 «• TuOiu, I drive away, thrust out. 
 
 ; Interrogative, [§ 188, 3, ( 2 ), 
 (4) and ( 8 )]. 
 
 dp*, igitur, therefore, then [ 178, 
 
 9-]. 
 
 ipyaxios 3, hard, grievous, trou¬ 
 blesome. 
 
 agyu/ftiov, to, silver-mine. 
 dgyv^os 3, made of silver. [ Decl., 
 § 29, Obs.]. 
 dpyvgiov, to, silver. 
 eigyvgog, o, silver. 
 
 d^eaxu, (Pat.), I please [§ 122, 
 3.]. 
 
 ag£Ti 7 , b, virtue, valour, excel¬ 
 lence. 
 
 oou, I articulate. 
 d^ept-os, o, number, extent, 
 amount. 
 
 dpicTivu, I am the best. 
 d^xtu, I suffice ; Mid. with A or. 
 Pass. (Pat.), I satisfy myself, 
 am contented [§ 98, (b).]. 
 d^xTOf, o, b, a bear. 
 agptx, - dreg , to, chariot. 
 
 &(>(aottu, I fit, adjust [§ 105, 1.] 
 
 2 c 2 
 
586 
 
 GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Kgveoftui, Dep. Pass., I deny. 
 &(*vpeti, I bear away, win, earn. 
 aporgovj to, aratrum, plough. 
 atfu, I plough [§ 98, (c) and § 89, 
 (a)]. 
 
 k^Ta^u, I plunder. 
 
 a<><rot% l,rapax, rapacious, greedy. 
 
 apputrriu, I am sick. 
 
 *groi, o, bread. 
 
 cl^vu, I draw water [§ 94, 1.]. 
 HW* *>> beginning, command, 
 sovereignty ;—xi «££«/, ma¬ 
 gistrates ;— r*iv otg%nv, from the 
 beginning, completely, tho¬ 
 roughly. 
 
 a^ir'txTuv, -ovog, o. architect. 
 
 iat > (Gen.), i begin. [ With 
 * Part, and Inf., § 175, Obs. 3.]. 
 HX u i (Gen .), I begin, lead, go¬ 
 vern. 
 
 datfiiia, b, impiety. 
 acrt/lev, (Acc.), I act wickedly 
 towards, sin against. 
 ao-'iXyfix, b, excess, levvdness. 
 dvGovux, f ), weakness. 
 do-fovtu, I am weak, am sick. 
 x?6ivrn, -i s , feeble, powerless. 
 daxiu, (1) I practise, attend to, 
 work ; (2) I decorate. 
 aaoris, -fiog, f), shield. 
 amyos 2, without a roof, house¬ 
 less. 
 
 <w; e , star. [Bed., § 36, Obs.]. 
 d-ar^xorv, b, lightning. 
 da-T^xoTTM, I lighten. 
 
 O.TTU, TO, city. [Bed., § 46.]. 
 d<rvvttrix, >], stupidity. 
 derfosTog 2, stupid, foolish. 
 atripxXbg, -is, firm, safe, steady. 
 avtofixTos 2, bodiless, incorporeal. 
 arxKrcog, Adv., without order. 
 «r{, quippe, seeing that, inas¬ 
 much as. [With the Part., 
 § 176, Obs. 2.]. 
 
 « t », f[, infatuation, folly and con¬ 
 sequent unhappiness, evil, mis¬ 
 chief. 
 
 aTifix^co, I dishonour, despise. 
 drtftix, ii, dishonour, disgrace. 
 a-T^iKius, Adv., truly, accurately. 
 mrra and oottx. See § 62. 
 
 xrv^iu, I am unfortunate. 
 dr6x.rip.oi, to, misfortune. 
 
 4f, unfortunate. 
 xtvx'ix, 17 , misfortune. 
 aZ, rursus, again, on the con* 
 trary [§ 178, 6 .]. 
 avxlviv, torreo, 1 dry, wither, 
 parch up. [Aug., § 87, 1.]. 
 •ZOig, Adv., again. 
 ctvXog, 0 , flute. 
 
 xuj'xvu, I increase, cause to grow 
 „l§ 121, 4.]. 
 
 octl^va-ig, -nog, b, increase. 
 avot 3, dry, thirsty. 
 xilgiov, Ado., to-morrow. 
 a.Zrxg, but. 
 
 aurdcfoxng, independent. [ Accent, 
 
 ,§42-]. 
 
 olvtopo\os, 0 , deserter. 
 u-JTovopix, b, (uuros, vo'pof), self- 
 
 government, independence. 
 avrovopos 2 , free. 
 auTos, -97, - 0 , ipse , self, or he, she, 
 it; 0 xvtos, idem, the same. 
 [Bed. § 60 ; meaning and use, 
 
 § 169, 7. 8 and Obs. 1 and 4 .]. 
 
 itpxio'iopxi (nvd n), I take away, 
 deprive of. 
 
 atpxvfc, -is, unknown, obscure. 
 iapOooix, 97 , ( 1 ) freedom from envy; 
 
 ( 2 ) abundance, plenty. 
 d<p0ovog 2 , ( 1 ) free from envy; 
 ( 2 ) abundant. 
 
 dipinpi, 1 send forth, let go, give 
 up, neglect | § 136, Obs.]. . I 
 dipixvBopxi, I come [§ 120 , 2 .]. 
 citpicrmpi, I put from, turn away, 
 cause to revolt; A or. II. Act., 
 
 I fell away, revolted; Mid., 
 
 I go off, stand aloof. 
 
 «( p^eoy 2, foolish, senseless, silly. 
 olQvyis, -is, without natural taleat, 
 dull. 
 
 xxoL^KTrix, b, ingratitude. 
 xxx/oiarot 2, thankless, ungrate¬ 
 ful. 
 
 a x?opxi, I am vexed, am indig¬ 
 nant at [§ 125, 2 ]. 
 d%0o{, -*u(, ro, burden. 
 
 <x-X.°v<rro{ 2, useless. 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 587 
 
 B. 
 
 B xPoS) m *vt, to, depth. 
 
 G>a,6vi, a., -v, deep. 
 
 (Zaiveo, I walk, go, advance [§ 119, 
 
 1 .]. 
 
 B&xxu, I throw [§ 117, 2.]. 
 
 Barf^s, barbarian, foreigner, 
 
 (every one not a Greek). 
 
 Bafis, -uot, -u, heavy, weighty, 
 oppressive, burdensome. 
 
 BourlXux, fj, queen. 
 
 BatriXui, h, kingdom, reign, roy¬ 
 alty. 
 
 BShrlXua, r&, palace. 
 
 Bcarlxtios 2, royal. 
 
 Bettrt^tvi, -ea>s, o, king. 
 
 ficcciXiviv, (Gen .), I am king of, 
 rule. 
 
 B«trxalva, I bewitch. ^ 
 
 /W<ra?>, I bear, carry [§ 105, 
 3.]. 
 
 Bdrga%oi, o, frog. 
 
 fiSzXvyplx, hi disgust. 
 
 ^epa/os 2 and 3, firm, steadfast, 
 secure. 
 
 B'ivBos, -oviy ro, depth. 
 
 Bhpx, -aros, to, step, pace. 
 
 Bla, h, violence, force. 
 
 Bta^lpai, {Ace.), Dep. Mid., I 
 do violence to. 
 
 B'taios 3, violent, forcible. 
 
 BtBxlov, to, book. 
 
 Bios , o, life, a living o xa6' hpxg 
 Bios, our times. 
 
 |S<ot£u«, I live. 
 
 B'lorog, 0 , life, livelihood, suste¬ 
 nance, food. 
 
 Biiu, I live [§ 142, 9.]. See 
 
 Cx*j3^o'f 3, hurtful, detrimental. 
 
 BxdBn, h, injury, hurt. 
 
 SXxxbuo it, I am lazy. 
 
 BXolttu, {Acc.), I injure, hurt. 
 [Redup., § 88, Obs. 1.]. 
 
 BXao'rot.vfo, I bud, sprout [§ 121, 
 5;— Redup., § 88, Obs. 1.]. 
 
 BXtofa), I see. [Aor. II. Pass., 
 § 102, Obs.]. 
 
 focL, boo, I cry out. [Formation 
 of the Tenses, § 96, 3.]. 
 
 B*rd l,a ) hi help, aid. 
 
 Boyi$e», {J)at.), I hasten to assist, 
 aid. 
 
 ,3 oh&npx, -xros, to, help, aid. 
 
 3 o*i6os, o, helper. 
 
 Boppxs, m x, o, Boreas, the north 
 wind [§ 27, Obs. 1.]. 
 
 3 oaxu, 1 feed, support [§ 125, 
 3.]. 
 
 Borsys, -vos, 0 , cluster of grapes.^ 
 SouXty^*, -S.rog, to, advice, deci¬ 
 sion, resolution. 
 
 BouXitu, I advise, deliberate on; 
 Mid., I determine with my¬ 
 self, resolve on. 
 
 BovXh , hi counsel, advice. 
 
 BouXopxi, I wish, am willing 
 [§ 125, 4; II. Pers. Sing. Pres. 
 Ind., § 82, 2. ; Aug., § 85, 
 Obs.]. 
 
 B«Zs, Boig, o', h, ox, cow. [Bed., 
 
 § 41J* _ , . ' r S' 
 
 B^vg, -ux, -V, slow; TO B?*&v, 
 sloth. 
 
 Bgechvrhs, -*}Tog, »i, slowness, 
 
 sloth. 
 
 Bt?xfcvg, -iix, -u, short. 
 
 B^ovtixu, I thunder. 
 
 Bgovrh, h, thunder. 
 
 B^oTog 3, mortal. 
 
 Bpwyx, -a.Tog, to, food, victuals. 
 B^ertg, -t*s, h, eating, food. 
 
 Bvnu, {Gen.), I stop up, fill up 
 
 [§ 120, 1.]. 
 
 Bvr&ofov, Adv., (from o Bvrabg, 
 the deep), from the bottom. 
 Bu/xog, o, altar. 
 
 r. 
 
 TxXx, -axros, ro, milk. [ Decl. t 
 § 39.]. 
 
 yapirfi, h, wife. 
 
 yap iu, duco, I marry [§ 124, 1; 
 —Formation of the Tenses, 
 § 98, Obs.]. 
 yxpos, o, marriage, 
 ya^, for. [_It stands after the first 
 word of a sentence, § 178, 9; 
 —in Questions, § 188, 3, (1) 
 in Answers, § 188, Obs. 4, c.]. 
 yctrrng, -rfos, fl, belly. [BeC(. 9 
 
 § 36.]. 
 
588 
 
 GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 •yavtfu, I make proud; Mid. 
 (with Aor. Pass.), I am proud, 
 pride myself on. 
 ri, (Enel.), at least, indeed;— 
 after Pronouns, § 64, 1;— in 
 Answers , § 188, Obs. 4. c. 
 (It is a strengthening Particle, 
 and can never commence a 
 sentence). 
 
 fAruv, -ovoi, o, «, neighbour. 
 yiXdu, I laugh [§ 98, (a)]. 
 yfXus, -urot, o, laughter. 
 y(««, (Gen.), I am full of. 
 yeW/j, - tug, in, origin. 
 yivvociot 3, of noble birth, noble- 
 minded, brave. 
 
 y ivvctiug, Adv ., nobly, bravely. 
 yivag, -ovg, to, race, descent 
 , [§ 44, (b)]. 
 
 y to, reward, honorary-gift. 
 [Decl., § 39, Obs.]. 
 
 yiouv, -ovros, o, old man. 
 yiiicu (nva. nvos), I cause to taste; 
 Mid. (Gen.), I taste, enjoy, 
 have experience of. 
 yiup&r£ns, - ov, o, geometer. 
 yij, b, the earth. 
 yn8io>, I rejoice [§ 124, 2.]. 
 y%*f, to, old age. [Decl., § 39, 
 Obs.]. 
 
 y n^eto-xu, ym^xu, I grow old [§ 122, 
 
 , 4.]. 
 
 y< yxg, -avrog, o, giant. 
 
 Y'Yvopeti, I am, am born, become, 
 spring from, arise, happen 
 I §123.]. 
 
 y r/tujaxu, I know, try, perceive 
 [§ 122, 5, and § 142 ; Pass, 
 with a, § 95. — With the Part, 
 and Inf, § 175, Obs. 3.J. 
 
 yXavl, -x'og, i], owl. 
 yXvxvi, -uct, -6, sweet. 
 yX&TTo., «, tongue, language. 
 yvupn, fj, opinion, the under¬ 
 standing. 
 
 yoviug, 0 , father; Plur. , parents. 
 yow, - urot , to, knee. [Decl. 
 
 § 39.]. w 
 
 yt&fAfAu, -arog, r}>; writing, an al¬ 
 phabetical character; Plur., 
 liter ce, letters, literature. 
 
 y^avg, fi , old woman. [DecL, 
 § 41.]. 
 
 yi*$o>, I write. 
 yva, 17, field, land, 
 y vfA.vi.Xu, I exercise, practise. 
 yvy.vog 3, naked. 
 
 ywa.ix.uog 3, pertaining to women, 
 feminine. 
 
 yt im'nuov, ro, little woman. 
 ywft, yuva.tx.o$, «, woman. [Decl- 
 §47,2.]. 
 
 D. 
 
 Aotipovtov, to, the Deity. 
 
 ^xlftuv, -evog, o, 17, a divinity, the 
 Deity. 
 
 Ixlofjoxi, I distribute ; Put., ld<r»> 
 ftoa, A Or., i^xo’ix/u.ri*. 
 
 Idxvu, I bite [§ 119.]. 
 
 ^dx^vov, to, a tear. 
 lax^Cu, I weep. 
 
 IxxruXiog, 0, ring. 
 
 IdxrvXoi, 0, finger. 
 haixa^u, 'hap.du, I tame [§ 117,2.]. 
 I lend. 
 
 'Scttfdvu, I sleep [121, 6.]. 
 
 K autem, and, but. [It stands 
 after the first word ofa sentence, 
 r § 178, 5.]. 
 
 Viwns, -tug, h, prayer, entreaty. 
 h7, (with ^4cc. and Inf), it is 
 wanting, it is necessary, one 
 must [§ 125, 5.]. 
 fofiu, I fear. [Perfi, 'hlhoixu, § 102, 
 4, and "hobto ,; Aor., iBuret]. 
 hixvvfit, I shew [§ 133].— With 
 Part, and Inf, § 175, Obs. 3. 
 %ux*i, 17, evening. 
 h/Xof 3, timid, cowardly, worth¬ 
 less. 
 
 2uvig3, frightful,dreadful, power¬ 
 ful, dangerous; to Iuyov, tue 
 danger. 
 
 diivuj;, Adv., terribly, powerfully, 
 strangely. 
 
 lixdg, ~atog, 17 , a decade, the nuni' 
 her ten. 
 
 hx<pf g, -7vof, 0 , dolphin. 
 
 'biv^ooY, to, tree. 
 
 'beopcu, (Gen.), Dep. Pass., I need, 
 require, request [§ 125, 5.]. 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 589 
 
 $«•*, r«, (Neut. Part. ofh7 ), that 
 which is needful, necessary, 
 proper; hence duty. 
 
 I see. \Perf, tilo^xu, 
 
 § 102, 3.]. 
 
 $E£a», I flay, cudgel, thrash. [ Perf, 
 ieiecgxet and 5s5o£fl6, § 102, 3. } 
 A or. II. Pass., »*]. 
 Vto-roivx, b, mistress of a house. 
 hirx-oms, -tv, o, master, lord. 
 
 [ Accent, § 26, 4, («)]. 
 tiZ^o, Adv ., hither. 
 i$%o/u.eti, Pep. Mid., I receive, 
 take. 
 
 ti*>, (Gen.), (1) I want, need 
 [§ 125, 5.] ; see hT;—( 2) I bind 
 [§ 98, Obs.; Contr., §97, 2.]. 
 
 Adv., scilicet, namely, fur- 
 
 sooth. 
 
 3, evident, plain. 
 inXou, I make manifest, shew. 
 , &ripox£otr'nt xguniv), v, de¬ 
 
 mocracy. 
 
 tfiftof, o, the people, the multi¬ 
 tude, the mob. 
 
 lyjrci, (a strengthening Particle), 
 certainly. 
 
 5/*, Prep., § 166, 1. 
 hxfroXti, n, slander, calumny. 
 hxyiyvofixi, I live, continue. [ With 
 the Part., § 175, 3.]. 
 
 'hiiyu, I carry through, spend 
 my life, continue. [With the 
 Part., § 175, 3.]. 
 
 \ixyotf‘tZ > op.xi, (Pat.), Pep. Mid., 
 I contend against. 
 
 }<o3ft/u,ec, -arts, to, headband, dia- 
 detii. 
 
 iiaigeco, 1 divide. 
 
 J/os/rat, ft, mode of life (Eng.,cfie<). 
 b airoLM, (1) I maintain; (2) I act 
 as umpire. \_Aug., § 91, 2.]. 
 iAx.iificc. 1 , I am in a certain state, 
 am affected or disposed so and 
 so. 
 
 itaxofsu, I serve. \Aug., § 91, 2.]. 
 iiacXsyofAxi, Pep. Pass., I con¬ 
 verse. [ Redup ., § 88, Obs. 3.]. 
 
 I dissolve, break up, de¬ 
 stroy. 
 
 ^tupn(io/*xi, I exchange. 
 
 Htxpsvu, I remain. 
 lixnfjLu, I distribute. 
 
 J/aTjiTTw, I effect. 
 
 ^txppriyvvfu, I tear asunder, rend. 
 'hicLGTu^w, dissemino, I scatter, 
 spread. 
 
 hxr&rru, I order, arrange. 
 'hixnXiu, I accomplish. [With a 
 Part, it expresses the continu¬ 
 ance of the action denoted by 
 the Part., Synt., § 175, 3.]. 
 Htxr'Afifu, I arrange, manage, 
 with an Adv., I affect or dis¬ 
 pose a person so and so. 
 iixr^oipri, fi, nourishment. 
 hcci pig*, (Gen.), I differ from, 
 excel. 
 
 , hioi<p6uzu, I destroy, lay waste, 
 ruin. 
 
 hxtpo^x, ft, difference, discord, 
 quarrel, enmity. 
 
 'hnx$o£<>{ 2, different. 
 
 5/5«*roV 3, taught. 
 di'dourxxXoc, o , teacher. 
 
 }^xa-xu, I teach [§ 122, Obs.]. 
 Itfyiaxu, (Acc.), I run away 
 from [§ 122, 6.]. 
 
 'ifiufju, I give, grant, bestow 
 [§ 133.]. 
 
 hiXiy^u, I censure, make 
 ashamed, convince, confute. 
 'hiefyxpfros, 0 , the dithyramb, (a 
 kind of lyric poetry, of a lofty, 
 enthusiastic style), 
 ti'iampi, I set apart, divide, se¬ 
 parate, sever. 
 
 I judge. 
 
 tixxiog 3, just, upright. 
 
 ^ixctioiTuvri, ft, justice (as a habit). 
 Sikx'iuc, Adv., justly, fairly. 
 hxxtxTrit, -oZ, o, a judge (or rather 
 a juror). 
 
 i), justice, right, a trial, a 
 judicial punishment. 
 
 5/or/, because, that, since, where¬ 
 fore [§ 184, 2 ] 
 tie, Adv., bis, twice. 
 tix a > Adv., (Gen.), apart from, 
 without. 
 
 hxfZ6og 2, double-speaking, 
 false. 
 
590 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 % 00 -rxo-iec, f), quarrel. 
 
 I thirst. [Contr,,§ 97, 3, 
 
 (a)]. 
 
 di^/os, -ovg, to, thirst. 
 
 hdjxu, (Acc.), I pursue, strive for. 
 
 $fiuis, -ur's, i, slave. 
 
 2»Ktu, (1) I think, believe ; (2) I 
 appear, seem [§ 124, 3.]. 
 
 $o\9v, I entrap, deceive. 
 
 'Sola., jj, report, fame, glory, re¬ 
 putation, opinion, expectation. 
 lo^aros, to, spear. [Deei. 
 , §39.]. • ' 
 
 co£u<po£ia, (Acc.), Iattend as a life¬ 
 guard. 
 
 %ov\ua, slavery. 
 
 'hovXiva, (.Dat .), I am a slave to, 
 serve. 
 
 "hoZxos, o, slave. 
 
 'htvxiea, I enslave, subject. 
 '%g&'rirt\)u,{Acc.), run away from. 
 Sgtxco, I do, act. 
 
 ^^orxvn^o^os 2 , fyecrccvoy, $eou), 
 
 scythe-bearing. 
 
 fyofiog, o, a course, a runnfhg 
 pace. 
 
 luvxfA.ee,, (with A or. Pass.), I am 
 able, can, have power [§ 135, 
 page 284 ;—Aug., § 85, Obs.J. 
 duvxftif, -e« ?J power, might. 
 Iuvxtos 3, possible, powerful, 
 iwjysvfc, -tg, low-born, mean. 
 iusKokos 2, difficult, annoying, 
 troublesome. 
 
 Ivcmtvos 2, unfortunate. 
 
 }viTu%ec9, I am unfortunate. 
 Ivsx^cAvta, (Dat.), I am discon¬ 
 tented with, am displeased 
 with. 
 
 1 get into. [Formation of the 
 _ Tenses, § 94, 2.]. 
 hr,fA. x , - xTos , to, house, home. 
 
 fiuioov, TO, gift. 
 
 E«y (=„ v or 5,). if, r With Subj., 
 § 185, 2, (3) and Obs. 1.1; idv 
 , ’“*’«,[§ 178, 8.]. 
 
 •*< to, spring. 
 va£, vog (**g) 3, belonging to 
 spring, vernal " " 
 
 ixurou, sui, of himself [§ 57 
 Synt., § 169, 4—6 J. 
 
 \xoa, I let, allow [§ 96, 3; Auq. 
 
 §87,3.]. ‘ - 
 
 lyyi^oa, (Dat.), I come near. 
 iyyvxea, I give as a pledge, [^or- 
 mation of the Tenses /§ 96, 3.]. 
 iyyMiv, Adv ., from near, near. 
 iyyvs, Adv., near, 
 i yt'^ca, I awaken, arouse f§ 89, 
 (b) and § 117, 1.]. 
 iyxaXeca, (Dat.), 1 accuse. 
 iyxxXX oj or'i^t/rteu, I take a pride in 
 anything , shew oif, make a 
 display. 
 
 iyxXvfAx, -O.TOS, to, accusation. 
 iyx^xrua, i), self-restraint, conti¬ 
 nence. 
 
 iyx^xTvis, -&s, continent, tempe¬ 
 rate, moderate. 
 
 \yxrhfuov, to, eulogy, encomium. 
 •y&tefi eel [§ 46, Obs. 2.]. 
 
 * yx»ph it is possible, it is al 
 lowable. 
 
 iyx,a£t°s 2, native, of the country. 
 iyu, ego, I. [Synt, § 169, 3.1. 
 ’EA-. See lira [§ 87, 3.]. 
 i0iA.u or teXea, I will, wish, am 
 
 > willing [§ 125, 6.]. 
 
 I accustom. [Aug., § 87, 
 3. ]. 
 
 -ous, to, gens, people, nation. 
 'Dos, -oug, to, custom, manner. 
 
 *1 si, if. [Synt. § 185, 2 and Obs. 
 1, 2.;— in wishes, § 153, l,b. /J, 
 and§ 153,2, Obs. 4.; —in Ques¬ 
 tions, whether, § 188, 3, (9).b.; 
 
 _ */’— #, § 188, 3. (10)]. 
 ifievxi, ( Inf. of oiZx, 1 know), with 
 r Part, and Inf, § 175, Obs. 3. 
 tH^os, -ovg, to, form, appearance. 
 E’inn. (i ft*,). See optica. 
 iSt, ( with Opt.), 0 that! Would 
 that! [§ 153,1. b. (/J) and Obs; 
 
 > 1., and § 153, 2, Obs. 4.]. 
 tixx^oa, (Dat.), I liken, compare. 
 
 [Aug, § 86, Obs.]. 
 tlx-v, Adv., inconsiderately, heed¬ 
 lessly, rashly. 
 
 tlxog io-ri(v), it is likely, it is fair. 
 uxoTcag, Adv., naturally. 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 591 
 
 IflKfl. See toixet. 
 
 «”*«, (Da*.), I yield, give way to. 
 tixicrv, ~ctaf, w, statue. 
 
 %7xoy. See 
 
 S'a«, I press, hero in [§ 125, 7.]. 
 Jpi, I am [§ 137.]. 
 
 I go. [ Formation , § 137.— 
 With Fut. meaning, § 152, 
 Obs. 1.]. 
 
 E’mfi. See <pvpi. 
 upyvu/xi, u^yu, I shut in [§ 140, 
 2 .]. 
 
 t!()yco, (Gen.), I shut out, keep 
 from. 
 
 tflPoMAl [§ 125, 8.]. 
 tU. Prep , § 165, 2. 
 tTa-et, I placed. [Aug., § 87, 3.]. 
 ugfb&xxu, (1) I throw into ; (2) 
 intrans. , I fall into. 
 u;u(jt.i. Inf. figuvui, I go in, come 
 into, enter. 
 
 tkvPeu, I push, drive in. 
 iTt«, then. [In Questions, § 188, 
 
 3 ’ (7)] - . • 
 
 tlrt—uTt, sive—sive, whether— 
 or, either—or. [Synt. , § 178, 
 8. ; § 188, 3. (10)]. 
 tlW«. See u%m. 
 
 U (*£), Prep., § 163, 4 ;—\% ol, i£ 
 otou, § 183, 2. b. 
 
 S*«f, Adv., (Gen.), far. 
 kza.o'rot -r>, -ov, cpiisgue, each;— 
 with the Art., § 148, 10, (d). 
 
 (1) I walk out, advance; 
 (2) evado, I turn out, become. 
 Ix&aXku, I throw out. 
 txyovog, o.jj, descendant, offspring. 
 ixitieu (r/va ti ), I strip off. 
 ixuvog, -7i, - o , ille, that, he. 
 txsio-e, Adv., thither, illuc. 
 txKctiw, I burn out. 
 ixx.a.kuvrru, 1 disclose. reveal. 
 txxkTuria, fj, public assembly. 
 'txxkTiiriixico, I hold an assembly. 
 Sx>itilis (fi) i)Xiou, eclipse of the 
 sun. 
 
 txvtu, enato, I swim out. 
 hffe/ttrw, I send out. 
 
 I** eTdfiteci, I fly away. 
 ixTI 7U>, I drink up. 
 i xir/.ttt, 1 sail out. 
 
 1 xvkriTrw, I strike out of, 
 astound; Mid. with A or. Pass ., 
 I am amazed. 
 
 txrrufia, -a,rog, to, drinking-cup. 
 
 1 xro'g, (Gen.), without, outside. 
 ixQotivco, I shew forth, disclose*, 
 express. 
 
 \xipsoM, I bring forth, produce. 
 ixQtvyu, (Acc.), I flee from, es¬ 
 
 cape. 
 
 Ixdv, -ouitx, -07, willing, willingly. 
 tkoifot, o, y, deer. 
 
 \ka.{jvu, I drive, push on [§ 119, 
 2.]. See \XoLot. 
 
 ixieo, I drive [§ 83, 1. 2; Per/., 
 § 89, (a)]. 
 
 iXiuipu, (Acc.), I pity. 
 ixey%a>, I prove, try, search, re¬ 
 prove, shame, convince, con¬ 
 vict, refute. [Per/., § 89, (a)]. 
 ixt'ico, (Acc.), I pity. 
 iXt.uhg'iK, i), freedom. 
 iXivStpog 2 and 3, free, indepen¬ 
 dent. 
 
 1 
 
 iXivfogoco, I set free. 
 
 ’EAET012. See e^ofMXt. 
 
 \XeQoig, -kvtos, o, elephant, ivory. 
 ixhrtru, I wind. [A ug., § 87, 3.; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass., iXYiXiypxi 
 and tiXiy/u-xi, § 89.]. 
 tXxog, -ovg, to, ulcus, sore, ulcer. 
 ‘EAKTft and iXkco, I draw. [Fut., 
 tX%u ; Aor., uXxvTtx,, tXxvirai ; 
 
 A or. Pass., tiXxCo-^v; Perf., 
 Mid. or Pass., tiXxvapttf, Aug., 
 § 87, 3.]. 
 
 hpi7t, -ivHos, f), worm. 
 
 iXvi%M, I hope, expect. 
 
 iXorit, -i^os, ij, hope. 
 
 tXirofiui, (Poet, for \x<r%u), I hope. 
 
 [Perf, § 87, 5.]. 
 
 ‘EAft. See uigecd. 
 
 Utvht, -u%tt, marshy. 
 
 t^jS a.xxu, (1) I throw in, suggest; 
 
 (2) intrans., I fall in or on. 
 ipPgox'tZu, I drive into a net, en¬ 
 snare. 
 
 iftu, I vomit [§ 98, (b)]. 
 
 \pftYu, (Dat .), I remain with, 
 stand by, protect, uphold. 
 'ipTild-, 2, Arm, sure, stable. 
 
592 
 
 GREEK—ENGLISn VOCABULARY* 
 
 tp-rthlu, I make firm, establish. 
 [Aug., § 91, 4.]. 
 
 ipvuaag 2, (Gen.), experienced 
 in. 
 
 (rl nvag), I fill any¬ 
 thing with a thing [§ 135, 5.]. 
 i fiTiar^nfjtt, I set on fire, burn up. 
 [§ 135, 6.]. 
 
 IfiTi-rru, (Dat., or tig and Acc.), 
 I fall into, light on, meet 
 with. 
 
 ipvrvu, (Dat.), I spit into or 
 on. 
 
 tutpttfg, -£?, (Dat.), similar to. 
 tuft/Tivu, I implant. 
 hfAtpCrog 2, implanted, innate. 
 
 iu. <ptu, I implant. 
 
 iv, Prep., § 164. 1. j —tv Z, Synt., 
 § 183. 2. a. 
 
 iva,vTioaf/.ui, (with Aor. Pass.), 
 adversor , I oppose, withstand, 
 (Dat.). [Aug., § 91, 4.1. 
 ivuvrios 3, opposite, against, con¬ 
 trary to. 
 
 ivuCu, I kindle. [Pass, with a, 
 * 95.]. 
 
 ivhuu, ri, want, need. 
 ivhixvvft a, I shew ; Mid., I shew 
 forth of myself. 
 tvoutki. I go into, put on. 
 ivtyti^u, I awaken, excite, arouse. 
 ivsfysvtv, (Acc.), insidior, I lie in 
 wait for. 
 
 tvs*«, (Gen.), causd, for the sake 
 of, on account of [163, 5.]. 
 ’ENEKO. See peg*. 
 iv\%u, I have, hold. 
 iv9u, Adv., there. 
 ivfiait, Adv., hither. 
 iWsv, Adv., thence, whence. 
 tv6ufjt.iop.ott, Dep. Pass., I consi¬ 
 der. 
 
 ivtuurog, o, year. 
 
 * vtot 3, Some. 
 
 Ivton, Adv., sometimes. 
 ivt<rrr,/j,i 9 I put into ; Perf., I am 
 present. 
 
 Ivvtrto, (Eptic), I tell of, sing. 
 tvvfjuu^, (Epic), Adv., for nine 
 days. 
 
 kwifu. See i.p<f>iivvvpt. 
 
 ivoxXtv, Dat, I molest, annoy. 
 
 [Aug., § 91, 1.]. 
 
 \vtuZ6u, Adv., here. 
 ivrikXu or IvrtWopeu, I enjoin, 
 command, direct. 
 ivrtu6tv, Adv., thence, hence ; <ri 
 ivrtv6tv, thereupon. 
 ivrt6*i(M, I put in, infuse, implant. 
 tWr pog 2, honoured. 
 ivrof, (Gen.), Adv., within. 
 tvr^ts, -tut, >i, cosmetic. 
 ivrvyxavu, (Dat.), I fall in with. 
 Jvutv/ov, ro, dream, vision. 
 
 «£. See «*. 
 
 iQvvs, Adv., suddenly. 
 t\u\u<pu„ I wipe out, obliterate. 
 i\upu^roLvu, I err greatly [jj 121, 
 2 .]. 
 
 \\upuv^u, I obscure utterly, blot 
 out, weaken, impair, destroy. 
 I^ututuu, I deceive thoroughly. 
 e|«cr/v»?, (Adv.), suddenly. 
 sZupi, (\iGrt, licet, it is lawful, it 
 is in one’s power. 
 i\upt. Inf. e%ievui, 1 go Out. 
 e%i7*ov, (Aor.), I tell out, utter, 
 disclose [§ 126, 8.]. 
 
 \\i\u<)vu, (1) l drive out, banish, 
 expel; (2) I lead out 
 \\(tuZ,u, I examine, enquire into, 
 review (an army). 
 vo'urxu, I find out. 
 
 Adv., in order. 
 
 tfyvfu, I let out, send out;— of a 
 river, l^*v«<=to empty itself, 
 fall into. 
 
 tg/jraw, I make equal, assimilate. 
 \\oxiWu, I run from the straight 
 course, (properly of a ship) ; 
 hence (metaph.), 1 mislead. 
 t^ixkvfu, I ruin, destroy utterly. 
 t| otf'ou, I make straight, erect, 
 set up, restore. 
 
 t \ookou, I make one swear, bind 
 by oath. 
 
 toiKu, I am like [§ 87, 5.]. 
 
 See tX<rof*a,i* 
 
 % io^ycta See ’EPrn. 
 to^rofu, I celebrate a feast 
 [Aug., § 87, 5.]. 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 593 
 
 WayySxxu, I announce; Mid., I 
 promise. 
 
 * v*yo>, I bring on. 
 
 Waive*!, I praise [§ 98, Obs.]. 
 
 W a i vos, o, praise. 
 
 WatnoLoijLtt. 1 , Dep. Pass., I accuse. 
 
 Wav (Wrjv), (with Subj.), when¬ 
 ever. 
 
 Wa.va.yu. I lead back. 
 
 V Tava.xufjt.ai, I lie On. 
 
 Wavatp’e^u, refero, I bring back, 
 refer, ascribe. 
 
 tTugxeu, ( Pat.), I aid. 
 
 Wu , when, since, for [§ 183, 2. 
 b. ; § 184, 1.]. 
 
 Wu'bu.v, (with Subj.) whenever, 
 when [§ 183, 3, (b)]. 
 
 WtiSri, when, since, because. See 
 > / 
 tsm. 
 
 Wii*, poetics for Wu. 
 
 Wuru., Adv., afterwards, then, 
 hereafter ; [in Questions , § 188, 
 
 , ?’ (7) ]‘ 
 
 Weg%opca, I come to. 
 
 Wi , Prep., § 167, 3. 
 
 WifionSW, (Bat.), I come to the 
 assistance of. 
 
 WtfiovXivu, ( Dat .), I plot against. 
 
 hiPouX-f), h, plot, design. 
 
 Wihtixvvpt, I make a display, 
 shew off; Mid., I shew forth 
 boastfully of myself, exhibit. 
 
 tvdtuxu, I pursue. 
 
 WtPupiu, (with Gen. or Inf.), I 
 desire. 
 
 WiOvfiia, b, desire, lust. 
 
 iartxccXeu, (Dat.), I accuse. 
 
 Wuc 'ivhvvoi 2, dangerous. 
 
 WixovQiZ'U, 1 lighten, alleviate. 
 
 tori\a.v6avopou, Dep. Mid., I for* 
 get. 
 
 t'riutXua. b. care. 
 
 WipeXopai or toripiXovpai, Dep. 
 Pass (Gen.), I care for [§ 125, 
 16 .]. 
 
 Wiveeu. I think of. 
 
 WiooxW, 1 swear falsely; with the 
 Acc.,I swear falsely by any 
 one. 
 
 Wio^x-es , o , perjured. 
 
 It/t/tt«, I fall on. 
 
 WitXvttu, (Dat.), I chastise, 
 reproach. 
 
 Wtaxooreu, I look On. 
 
 WiffTufieu , (with A or. Pass.), I 
 know, understand. [§ 135, 3, 
 page 284; Accentuation, § 134, 
 1; Aug., § 91, 3.— With 
 Part, and Inf., § 175, Obs. 
 3.]. 
 
 WiareXXu, I command, commis¬ 
 sion. 
 
 ’unartful, b, knowledge. 
 
 Wiarbpuv, -ov, (Gen.), acquainted 
 with, learned in. 
 
 Wio-roXi), b, epistle, letter. 
 
 Wnarru, I set over, enjoin. 
 
 WinXeu, I accomplish. 
 
 Wtrfiuos 3, idoneus, suitable, 
 proper, necessary; ra Winfiux, 
 provisions, necessaries. 
 
 Wirnbivu, studeo, I pursue, prac¬ 
 tise, devote myself to. 
 
 Wirihpi, I put on, put to, add ; 
 Mid., I put on myself ;—with 
 the Dat., I apply to, attack, 
 set upon. 
 
 Winp.au, (Dat.), I censure. 
 
 Wir^Wu, (1) I entrust to; (2) I 
 permit. 
 
 Wir^oTivu, (^4cc.), 1 act as guar¬ 
 dian to. 
 
 Witpi^u, I bring on; WiQt^u t oXt- 
 pav nvi, bellum infero, I make 
 war on any one. 
 
 Wityevyu, I fly to. 
 
 Wix,upu, (Dat.), I put the hand 
 to something, attempt. 
 
 Wixfi^i 3, belonging to the 
 country, native. 
 
 Wopai, (Dat.), sequor, I follow. 
 See Wu. 
 
 Wopvupi, (Acc.), I swear by. 
 
 Was, ~ovs, to, word. 
 
 Wortfjvu, I urge on. 
 
 Wu, I am occupied about, (it oc¬ 
 curs in Prose only in the Com¬ 
 pounds ore^iWu, dieoru, & C .) , 
 [Aor. Act., Worov. not used in 
 Attic prose] ; — Mid., Woueu. 1 
 follow ; [Imp/., tivropnv, § 87, 
 3 /» Aor., Wxopnv, ifiorvrbtiw, 
 
594 
 
 GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Inf., or iff 6at, ImperacroZ, fart- 
 orov ( Accent, § 84, Obs. 2.)]. 
 «£«/*«/, I love [§ 135, 4, page 
 284.]. See 
 
 i£uerrr,s, -oZ, b, lover, friend. 
 i'XTog 3, amabilis, lovely. 
 fyxv, (Gen.), I love (ardently) 
 [§ 135, 4.]. See tgapat. 
 
 WDep. Mid., I work. 
 
 [Aug., § 87, 3.]. 
 
 't^yua-TYjoiov, to, workshop. 
 tpyvvpt. See iloyvufju. 
 ioyov, to, work, deed, action. 
 *EPro [Perf, § 87, 5.]. 
 t-Au, I do. 
 
 jeyM I prop. [Perf., § 89, (b)]. 
 ysaau, I row. [Char., § 105, 1.]. 
 
 (. Pat .), I quarrel with, con¬ 
 tend with. 
 
 *<?'*, b, contention, strife. 
 ’EPOMAI. See E IPOMAI. 
 
 sprco, I creep. [Aug., §87, 
 3. ]. 
 
 I go forth [§ 125, 9.] . 
 ippupivos 3, strong, vigorous. 
 ippapivco ?, Adv., vigorously, 
 
 firmly. 
 
 It y f _ 
 
 fjvftoo, -a,Tos, ro, defence. 
 kx»f***, I go, come. [Formation 
 w of the Tenses, § 12S, 2.]. 
 
 ’ioug, -utos, o, love. 
 t£ur<xu, I ask. 
 
 hr8fa, -rj-Tos, b, vestis, dress, ap¬ 
 parel. 
 
 \a6iu, (Gen. and^cc.), I eat, con¬ 
 sume [§ 126, 3.]. 
 icrdkos 3, good, noble. 
 ta-re^a, rj, evening. 
 kn, i S T civ, until. [Synt. § 183, 
 t 2, c. ]. 
 
 ioAco, I entertain. [Aug., § 87, 
 3.]. 
 
 ta%a.To; 3, utmost, last, extreme, 
 most remote. 
 
 iradgog, b, companion, friend. 
 
 3 , alter, the other (of two), 
 different. 
 
 ‘ T< > Adv., yet, still, besides;— 
 lr ‘ $t, moreover. 
 irotpcof 3, ready. 
 iroipug, Adv., readily. 
 
 stos, -ovg, to, year. 
 iu, Adv., well ;—tv ot^lttu, I do 
 well (i. e. prosper) ; tZ *oi&, , T 
 f do good to. 
 
 tvfiovXos 2, one who consults well, 
 clever, intelligent. 
 tuytv-fig, -tg, of high birth, noble. 
 ilAa.ifx.ovtu, I am happy, am for¬ 
 tunate. 
 
 iv^xipovt^u, I deem happy. 
 tvba.ifx.ovug , Adv., fortunately. 
 
 tlbatpcuv, -ov, fortunate. 
 tvbtog 2, serene, cheerful. 
 tvbox.tpx.tu, I am in good repute, 
 become famous. 
 
 'Abu, I sleep [§ 125, 10.]. See 
 
 xaQtvbu. 
 
 iitl'ta, v/, (iZ, t%u), sound health, 
 good condition. 
 tlt^ytAa, b, favour, kindness. 
 tvtpysTtu, (Acc.), I do good to, 
 benefit. 
 
 tvtffTu, -oZg, if, well-being, pros¬ 
 perity. 
 
 TvSvvu, I straighten, set right. 
 tZivs, Adv., straightway, imme¬ 
 diately. 
 
 tvxXuK, b, fame, glory. 
 tvxbxug, Adv., quickly, nimbly, 
 speedily. 
 
 ivxotrpiia, b, good order, discip¬ 
 line, decorum. 
 
 iv\et(btopai, (Acc.), Dep . Pass., I 
 am cautious. 
 
 tvptvvig, As, well disposed, gra¬ 
 cious. 
 
 tvfxofup'ta, b, beauty of form. 
 tvvota, b, good will, favour, kind¬ 
 ness. 
 
 tvvofXtioo, b, good administration. 
 
 tvvoos (-ovg), -oov (- ovv ), well-dis- 
 posed, kind, friendly. 
 tvTtTws, Adv., easily. v 
 tvro^og 2, (Gen.), abounding in, 
 rich in. 
 
 tu^'ttrxu, Ifind, invent [§ 122, 7.]. 
 tv^os, -ovg, to, breadth. 
 tvpys, -ttu, ~v, broad. 
 tvtrtfb'u, (vice.), I reverence, re* 
 spect. 
 
 tutnjbbg, -tg, pious. 
 
GREEK.—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 595 
 
 tvraxros 2 , well ordered, well re¬ 
 gulated. 
 
 tvTv X tu, I am fortunate. 
 tu7ii%ris, *>() fortunate. 
 iutv X ix, ft, good fortune, prospe¬ 
 rity. , , . 
 
 ( UlpOXtVU, I delight, gladden, 
 cli66r» 
 
 thfipotruMi, f), mirth, gladness. 
 tvx^>s, -b Gen., iu%<xo,7<i;, grace¬ 
 ful, agreeable, pleasing. 
 lu^xQKTTOf 2 , winning, pleasing, 
 wish, prayer. 
 
 tfiy'o/u.oti, ( Dat .), Dep. Mid., 1 
 pray to, beseech. 
 if Zn, on condition that, l Spit., 
 
 § 186, Obs. 2.]. 
 fytfae, o , a youth. , 
 
 itpiw/Ai, I send to, send forth, 
 throw, let go, permit; Mid. 
 [Gen.), I send myself or my 
 thoughts after anything, i. e. 
 
 I desire, crave for. 
 iipixvet/xxi, (Gen.), Dep. Mid., I 
 come on, arrive at, attain oo, 
 ro&ch.. 
 
 iQo^iov, to, viaticum, travelling 
 money, provision. 
 
 I x ixi^u, (Acc.), I hate. 
 i^dvo/xxi. See xxix.fdvop.xi. ' 
 i X 6oos 3, hostile, [Comparison, 
 § 51. II.] ;— Subst., an enemy. 
 i Z v^s 3 , firm, strong. _ . , 
 
 'i X u, I have, hold, contain;— with 
 various A dverbs, I am, am 
 circumstanced so and so ; with 
 the Inf., I am able [§ 125, 11 ; 
 Aug., §87, 3.]. 
 
 X-^u, I boil, cook [§ 125, 12.]. 
 Xus, & v i as long as, until. 
 [ Synt ., § 183.]. 
 
 Xus, -w, fi, dawn, morning. [Decl., 
 
 § 30, Obs. 1.]. 
 
 I boil (intrans.), [§ 98, (b)] 
 Inxiu, (Acc.), I emulate, stnve- 
 after, imitate, value, deem 
 happy, admire. 
 
 T^rpix, rj, injury, loss, punish¬ 
 ment, penalty. 
 fyptou, I punish. 
 
 Xpnriu, I seek, endeavour. ' 
 
 Z,vyos , o , and Z,uyov, to, yoke. 
 
 Z,uv\, i], life. 
 
 ZflJVWfM'i I gird [§ 139, c. 1.]. 
 
 %cuov, to, living creature, animal* 
 
 H. 
 
 ”H, quam, than (with the Compa¬ 
 rative, § 168, 3);— in Questions, 
 
 § 188, 3 , (8) and ( 10 ) ;— aut, 
 or; $~ti, aut—aut, either—or, 
 
 § 178, 8 . 
 
 rj in Questions, § 188, 3, (1). 
 
 ?, Adv., where. 
 
 Wiirxu, I come to manhood 
 [§ 122 , 8 .]. 
 fM youth. 
 
 riy sf/.oviuu, I shew the way, lead. 
 
 Y)yi[*.u)v, -ovo;, o, leader. 
 
 riyEou-cu, Dep. Mid., (1) I lead; 
 
 ( 2 ) 1 think, consider. 
 
 Cosu;, Adv., gladly, cheerfully, 
 pleasantly. 
 
 jftfi, Adv., now, already. 
 
 ®op*t, (with Aor. and Fut . 
 Pass.), I rejoice. 
 
 17 , pleasure. 
 
 f,hs, -Cix, -u, sweet, pleasant. 
 
 [ Comparison, § 51, I.]. 
 fyosr -<w, ro i manner, disposition 
 character. 
 
 yixkttx, Adv., least of all. 
 riKu, adsum , I am come, am here. 
 
 [Synt., § 152, Obs. 1.]. 
 fjXixix. fi, cetas, age, life (especially 
 youth and manhood). 
 
 YtxUos 3 , as great as. 
 
 z. 
 
 Ziu, I live [§ 126, 4; Contr., 
 § 97, 3, (a)]. See fal*. 
 
 £svvvpi, 1 boil ( trans.), [§ 139, o. 
 2 .]. 
 
 fyvyvvfu, I yoke, join to [§ 140, 
 
 3.}. 
 
 ids, o, sun. 
 
 xi, I sit [§ 141, (b)]. 
 i^x, Yi, day. 
 
 i£ 0 \opo f, 0, a courier (i.e. on* 
 
 ***#*> o nil t.hP. d(LU- YiULlOX 
 
 'baxpilv) . 
 
 Yipihts, 0, demigod. 
 
596 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 «*, {with Subj.), if. [Sunt, § 185, 
 2, (3) ]. See lav. 
 
 ijv'ixK, yjv'ik «», when, whenever. 
 
 t Synt., § 183, 2, a.]. 
 fjv'io%oi, o, charioteer, guide. 
 
 97 nos 2 and 3, soft, mild. 
 y.oeus, -uog, o, hero. 
 
 I am quiet, am still. 
 vauxLu., fi, quiet, silence;— yav^ixv 
 ays/v, to keep quiet. 
 
 ^au-^os 2, quiet, quietly. 
 
 T,rra, f ], defeat. 
 
 nrrcxopcti, (Gen.), I am inferior to, 
 am worsted, am defeated. 
 
 e. 
 
 Gikxrra, fj, sea. 
 
 6a.x\a., f), feast, feasting. 
 ixXXu, I bloom, bud. [Perf, re- 
 VyiXcc (with Pres, meaning ), I 
 bloom, § 103, Obs. 1.]. 
 
 ot, -ous, ro, heat. 
 
 (xvxrog, o, death. 
 iirru, I bury. [Aor. IT. Pass., 
 erxpyiv, Fut. Pass., rxQljcro/xxi]. 
 tuppxXeu?,Adv., boldly, valiantly. 
 iappew, I am of good courage ; 
 tfapptT* nvx, to have confidence 
 in a person ; flappuv n. to en¬ 
 counter something with confi¬ 
 dence. 
 
 0Kvp<x%a>, I wonder, admire. [Con¬ 
 struction, § 158, Obs. 5 and 6]. 
 ixvfAxtrris 3, wonderful, admir¬ 
 able. 
 
 Dep. Mid., I see. 
 ffxrrjs, -ou, o, spectator. 
 
 6uov, ro, the Deity. 
 hjos 3, godlike, divine. 
 
 6'iXyu, I charm, soften, soothe. 
 teXu or e6e\u, I will, wish, am 
 willing [§ 125, 6.]. 
 fipiXiov, rl>, foundation. 
 
 °> «. God, a god or goddess. 
 4t£<xrutvx, i b handmaid. 
 tetania, «, care, attendance, ser¬ 
 vice. 
 
 fii^xviuu, I honour, pay court to. 
 hzxru*, -<nrog, o, servant, atten¬ 
 dant. 
 
 -out, re, summer. 
 
 (eo), I run. [Fut., § 116, 2 
 Contr., § 97, 1. The other 
 Tenses are from rg'i%a, which 
 see ]. 
 
 -gos, o, wild beast. 
 e*i£ivrr.s, -ou, o, huntsman, sports¬ 
 man. 
 
 6*oiv U , I hunt, pursue. 
 
 6n^iov, ro, wild beast, animal 
 Pnolx, game. 
 
 0*iaxu£o S , o, treasure. 
 
 6r fyivu, (Gen.), I touch [§ 121, 
 
 10 .]. 
 
 e\xu, I bruise. [Formation of the 
 Tenses , § 98, (a)]. 
 hr.axu, xroSvfiaxUy I die [§ 122, 
 9.]. 
 
 Qvnrcs 3, mortal. 
 
 6o£v(iof, o, tumult. 
 
 I break, shatter [§ 95, 
 Obs. 1.]. 
 
 T ?‘Z°s, *h hair. [Decl. § 47, 
 
 4 .]-, 
 
 fycvos, o, seat, throne. 
 
 C^cxo>, I leap [§ 122, 10.]. 
 duyirviz, -rp'og, fi, daughter. [Decl., 
 §36.], 
 
 6vfog, o, mind, courage, heart. 
 (v^x, fj, door. 
 
 Metros, o, a thyrsus, (i. e. a staff 
 of the Bacchantes, xoound round 
 with ivy and vine-leaves), 
 iuria, t], sacrifice, offering. ' 
 6vu, I sacrifice, offer [§ 94, 2.]. 
 6u<n\iu and Ouxrto, (Aoc.), I flat¬ 
 ter. 
 
 (dig, (uog, o, ft, jackal. [Decl., 
 §43.]. 
 
 L 
 
 ’I iofxxi, Dep. Mid., I heal. 
 ixr^x 97, fi, medicine. 
 
 Ixrfot, o, physician. 
 
 fie a, n, appearance, form. 
 
 "%‘ot 3, (Gen.), proprius , one’s 
 own. 
 
 fiiwrvs, -ou, o, (1) a private man; 
 (2) a layman. 
 
 fi^vu, I erect, found [§ 94, l.J, 
 fi^djg, -urog , o, sweat. 
 
 -tug, o, priest. 
 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 51)7 
 
 /££«», to, victim, offering. 
 
 Upt 3, [Gen.), sacred to. 
 
 See xa.6iZ,co, 
 
 'Irtpt, I send [§ 136.3* 
 
 Wvvu, 1 set right, direct, guide. 
 Ixavog 3, sufficient, able, compe¬ 
 tent. 
 
 fxtriuu, X supplicate, entreat. 
 iximt, -ou f o, suppliant. 
 
 IXVEOUXI. See X(f)lX.VSOpXI. 
 
 ixxoxopxt, I propitiate [§ 112, 
 11 .]. 
 
 Ixtus, -*v, (. Dat .), propitious, 
 
 merciful. 
 
 ’IX/a;, -xhog, ft, the Iliad. 
 i>ar<o», to, outer garment, man¬ 
 tle; P/«r., clothes. 
 
 <>£/*«, I desire [§ 114.]. 
 
 V»* (1) ut, that, in order that; 
 [with the Subj. after a princi¬ 
 pal Tense , the Opt. after a his¬ 
 torical Tense ; Synt., § 181.]; 
 (2) where, [Synt. § 183, 1.]. 
 
 5av, to, violet. 
 
 Imvs, Aug, o, horseman. 
 iorortvu, I ride. 
 
 Wros, o, horse. 
 
 7to; 3, equal, alike. 
 
 'tempi, I cause to stand, lay, set, 
 place, raise [§ 133.]. 
 
 Jeropsu (t/v<x n), I enquire of. 
 larofta, ft, (1) an enquiry ; (2) a 
 history. 
 
 taro^toy^x^og, o, historian. 
 
 tarot, 0 , loom. 
 
 io’^dooivo), X make thin [§ 
 
 Obs. 2.]. 
 
 tayvpog 3, strong, powerful. 
 
 I am strong, have power, 
 
 avail. 
 
 taut, Adv., perhaps. 
 
 7vvof, -oitg, ro , track. 
 
 tjfjHig, -(tot, "j fish. [Pec?., § 45.]. 
 ’ML See *fci, I go. 
 
 K. 
 
 K xiafyu, I purify, cleanse, clear. 
 nttdtlopxi, I sit down. [Aug., 
 § 91 , 3 ; Fut., xxh^ovpxt.]. 
 
 n*eifiu, I sleep [§ 125,10; Aug., 
 § 91 , 3 .]. 
 
 xddypott, I sit. [Aug., § 91, 3.]. 
 xxthZ'M, I seat, sit [§ 12o, 13; 
 Aug., § 91, 3.]. 
 
 xetfftvpi, I send down, let down. 
 HxMampt, I lay down, establish, 
 appoint, render, make. 
 xut, and, even ; xxi — xxi, both— 
 and, (et — et). [Synt., § 178, 3 
 and Obs. 1.]. 
 xxtvog 3, new. 
 
 xalotog 3 , timely, seasonable, op¬ 
 portune, fitting. 
 xottoog, o, (1) the right time, oc¬ 
 casion, opportunity; (2) time 
 {in general). 
 
 xxirot , however, and yet. [Synt., 
 
 § 178, 6.]. 
 
 kcl'ic*), I burn [§ 116, 2.]. 
 xxxia, ft, vice, wickedness. 
 xxxovoog 2 , ill-disposed. 
 xxxos 3, bad, wicked. [Compa¬ 
 rison, § 52, 2.]. 
 
 xxxorrtt, ~nros, v, wickedness, 
 vice, baseness. 
 
 xuxovgyiu, (Acc.), I do evil to. 
 xxxou^yot 2, hurtful, wicked, 
 Subst., an evil-doer. 
 xxxout, I treat ill, hurt. 
 xxx&t , Adv., badly, cowardly. 
 xxkxpot, o, reed. 
 xxXiu, I call, name [§ 98, Obs. 
 and § 117, 2; Opt. Flpf. Mid. 
 or Pass., § 116, 3.]. 
 xxk’kot, -ovg, ro, beauty. 
 xxXaxxyxQix, f), (xxXog xx) xyxCog), 
 
 the character of a xxXoxxyxSog 
 or gentleman, honourable con¬ 
 duct, uprightness, virtue. 
 xxXog 3, beautiful, fair, good, 
 noble. [Comparison, § 52, 3.]. 
 —T« xxXoi, goodness, the beau¬ 
 tiful. 
 
 xxxCorru, I conceal. 
 xxXcut, Adv., well. 
 xxXut, -at, o, rope, cable. 
 xxpnXot, o, n, camel. 
 xxpva, laboro, I suffer, am weary, 
 toil [§ 117.]. 
 xiporru, I bend [§ 108.]. 
 
 #<i'v (= xx) lav), with Subj., etiamsi, 
 even though. 
 
598 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 xxotot (-ovp), to, basket. 
 kxt^os, o, wild boar. 
 rafiia, f ], heart. 
 
 'tctgvoo/x.oci, I reap the fruits of, 
 enjoy. 
 
 xaoTo's, o, fruit. 
 
 K<xora, Adv., very. 
 xocoTigicu, I am steadfast, perse¬ 
 vere. 
 
 xapnoos 3, strong, powerful, 
 great. 
 
 xa.Tx, Prep., § 166, 2. 
 
 KccTctfroiais, -iws, f), a going down 
 (from inland to the sea ), re¬ 
 treat. 
 
 xxTxyixdeo, (Gen.), I laugh at, 
 ridicule. 
 
 xa.To^x^x.vu, I fall asleep, sleep. 
 xcctx'Suu, I submerge, sink(£rcww.); 
 Mid., and. A or. II., Perf. and 
 Plpf. Act., I sink (intrans.), 
 set (as the sun), go down, hide 
 myself. 
 
 xetrctKotiu, I burn down. 
 xarxxXuia, I bewail. 
 xu.tu.xXuu, I lock up, shut up. 
 xarax^voTTu, I hide, conceal. 
 xu.Tcc\a.f&<r<i), I shine on. 
 xo.tu.Xutu, I leave behind, desert. 
 xa.Ta.Xuo), I loosen, dissolve, de¬ 
 stroy. 
 
 xuravifAco, I distribute. 
 xu.tu.to.uo), I cause to cease, put a 
 stop to. 
 
 xuTuTtT^oo), I stone to death. 
 xuTa.TX-nTTO), I strike down, strike 
 with terror, amaze, astound, 
 terrify. 
 
 uaTua-xiuix^o), I prepare. 
 Ka.TttTi6r)fxi, I lay down, lay by ; 
 Mid. , I lay down for myself, 
 lay up, deposit. 
 xuTu<pxiyo), I burn down. 
 xuTa,<peovea>, (Gen.), I despise. 
 xocTutpuyn, %, refuge. 
 xetTt^ytx^ofxai, I accomplish, per¬ 
 form. 
 
 xa.Ti^o>, I hold back, restrain. 
 xecTtryo^os, o, accuser. 
 x&tott^w, to, mirror. 
 
 ** Adv., below. 
 
 xavfjta, -otTog, to, heat. 
 
 xxoj. See xxiu. 
 
 xu(jc.ai, I lie down [§ 141, (a)]. 
 
 xnvos (Epic for xivof) 3, empty. 
 
 xiiou, I shear, shave. 
 
 xsXiuo), jubeo, Ibid, direct, order. 
 
 [Pass, with er, § 95, 2.]. 
 xlvT/iov, to, sting, goad. 
 xsoa.fjt.og, l, clay. 
 
 xs^awufu, I mix [§ 139, a. 1.]. 
 xs^us, to, horn. [Decl. , § 39, 
 Obs.]. 
 
 xifiatvo), I gain [§ 111, Obs. 2; 
 Perf, xsx&finxu, § 111, 5.]. 
 
 xsobo;, -oug, to, gain. 
 
 xiudfjouv, -uvog, i, lair, den, vault. 
 xtufio), I hide. 
 xitpa.X/ 1 , f), head. 
 
 xi^nfipog 3, (Gen.), wanting, 
 [Perf. Part, of x.fafj.a.i, utor\. 
 xvXop, to, a shaft (i.e. an arrow). 
 xrjTos, o, garden. 
 xyi^, xvjoos, to, heart. 
 xnfs, o, wax. 
 wouZ, -uxog, o, herald. 
 xn^uTTeo, I proclaim (by a herald). 
 xidugu, }), lyre. 
 
 xtvlunuo), I incur danger, am iu 
 danger, run a risk, am likely 
 to do so and so. 
 x'niluvog, o, danger. 
 x7{, xios, o, corn-worm. [Decl., 
 §45.]. 
 
 x'kttyi, ?t, chest, coffer. 
 xiTTog, o, ivy. 
 
 xi^n/joi, I lend [§ 135, 1.]. 
 xX<xZ,o), I clash, clang, shout, 
 scream. [Char., § 105, 4; Put.. 
 III., xixXaty\u and xsxXxyro. 
 
 fJOUt. 
 
 xXa'iu, I weep, lament, deplore 
 [§ 116, 2.]. 
 
 xXuo), I break [§ 98, (a)]. 
 xXug, t), key. [Decl., § 47, 5.]. 
 xXuo), I shut, fasten. [Pass, with 
 a, § 95, Obs. 1.]. 
 xXsog, - soug , to, fame, glory; 
 Plur., glorious deeds. [Decl ., 
 § 44, (b)j. t 
 
 xXsTTYig, -ou, 0 , thief. 
 
 kXsttu, I steal. [Put. xXi-J.op.at j 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 599 
 
 Aor. II. Pass., ixXtxvw ; Perf. 
 Act., xixXoQa, § 102, 2, 4.]. 
 xXtva/, I bend [§ 111, 6 and 
 
 § 115.]. 
 
 xXoxrt, Y), theft. 
 xXovtpos 3, thievish, stolen. 
 xXeir^, -aiTos, o, thief. 
 xvy.u, xvxlu, I scrape. [Contr ., 
 §97,3, (a)]. 
 
 I squeak. [Char. , § 105, 
 
 2 .]. 
 
 xoiXttivu, I hollow out [§ 111, 
 Obs. 2.]. 
 
 xcivo; 3, common, public, gene¬ 
 ral ; to xoivo'v, the common* 
 wealth. 
 
 xotveovieo, b, communion, inter¬ 
 course. 
 
 xaiocLvoq, o , ruler. 
 xoX&Zco, I punish. 
 xoXaxilix, f), flattery. 
 xoXotxtvo t>, (Acc.), I flatter. 
 xlXa.1, -olxos, 0 , flatterer. 
 xoXnffrr,g, - oZ, a', punisher. 
 xoXovm, 1 curtail. [Pass, with <r, 
 § 95.]. 
 
 xoXoro;, a, sinus , bosom, gulf. 
 fi, hair. 
 
 I bring, carry. 
 
 hottu, I cut, strike, wound 
 [§ 108.]. 
 
 x«eot.\, -S.K 0 S, o, crow, raven. 
 xo}iV¥uf£i, I satisfy [§ 138, A. 2. ]. 
 x^uf, -v6og, b, helmet. 
 xo<T(4.ku, 1 adorn, embellish. 
 xotrfAot, o', (1) order, ornament, 
 decoration ; (2) the world. 
 xodpog 3, light, vain. 
 
 *oa£*/, I cry, scream, cry out 
 [§ 103, Obs. 1; § 105, 2; 
 
 Put., XiX^OL gfl^fl!/]. 
 
 xgfxtot, -ow?, to, helmet. 
 x^xrtoj, I rule, have power ; with 
 the Gen., I am master of, sub¬ 
 due. 
 
 -%«?, o, mixing-bowl, 
 goblet, wine-cup. 
 x^xrog, -ok?, to, strength. 
 xfAcyyi], 9, shout, cry. 
 
 *£««?, to, flesh, meat. [Dec£., 
 
 § 39, Obs.]. 
 
 pendeo, and x^.yAwlut, 
 I hang ( trans .), [§ 135, 5, page 
 284; § 139, a. 2 Accent, 
 § 134, 1.]. 
 
 xoivu, cerno, I distinguish, dis¬ 
 cern, judge, choose [§ 111, 6.]. 
 xgirrjS, -ou, o, judge. 
 xQoxo'buXos, o, crocodile. 
 xqo/jivov, ro, onion. 
 
 Tetovo), I strike against, clash 
 [§ 95, Obs. 1.]. 
 x^uTTog 3, hidden, secret. 
 x^oTTca, I hide. 
 
 XOOJ^U, I croak. [Char. § 105, 2.]. 
 KTu.op(u, I acquire, gain; Per/., 
 I possess, have. [Redup., § 83, 
 Obs. 2 ; Subj. Perf. and Opt. 
 Plpf., § 116, 3.]. 
 xTilvu, 1 kill, ( usually xtoxtuvu). 
 [Perf. Act., § 111, 5. Te.V/j 
 and ctTePccvov uTroTivogiWQ used in¬ 
 stead of exra.fjt,ot.i and iXTue’-ziv}. 
 xreif, -tvos, o, comb. 
 
 I comb. 
 
 xrrj/xa., -a.Tog, to, a possession. 
 
 xTrjcns, -soy?, b, gain, possession. 
 xt'i^m, I found, build, colonize. 
 xu(ii(>v{]TYii, -ou, o, gubemator , 
 helmsman, pilot. 
 
 *yj3<j?, <5, a die, cube ; Plur., dice. 
 xvxiu, I roll. [Pass, with a, 
 § 95.]. 
 
 xvtiXXov, to, goblet, cup. 
 xupiuoo, (Gen.), I am master of, 
 conquer, get possession of. 
 xvotog 3, (Gen.), having power 
 over, governing. 
 xuwv, xvv'og, o, b, dog. [Peel., § 47, 
 6 .]. 
 
 xmXvu>, I hinder. 
 xuj/u,>i, h, village. 
 
 xcotiXXco, I chatter, prattle, whee¬ 
 dle. 
 
 xuti Xot 3, talkative. 
 xuf'os 3, dumb, deaf. 
 
 A. 
 
 Aay^avw, I acquire by lot [§ 121, 
 11 Redup., § 88, 5.]. 
 
 Xayflfl?, -u, a, hare. [Decl., § 30, 
 Obs. 1.]. 
 
600 
 
 GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 XatXxyf/, -aro;, fi, storni. 
 
 XaXiu. I talk, prate. 
 
 Xtx\o; 2, talkative. 
 
 Xapfhuvo), I take, receive [§ 121, 
 12 -,— Redup., § 88, 5.]. 
 
 Xup-rfos 3, brilliant, splendid. 
 
 XocvQtxvu, (Acc.), lateo , I lie hid, 
 am concealed, escape detec¬ 
 tion. [Formation of the Tenses, 
 § 121, 13.— With the Part., 
 § 175, 3.]. 
 
 Xaov y|, -vyyo;, o, throat. 
 
 Xexiva, lioness. 
 
 xsct'weo, I polish, smoothen, grind. 
 
 Xeyu, (1)1 say, speak,tell; A syopai, 
 dicor, I am said, e. g. Xeyopai 
 (iouXtuaxi, I am said to have 
 advised [§ 88, Obs. 3] ; (2) I 
 collect [§ 88, 5 and § 102, 4; 
 A or. Pass, i Ae^^v and eAsyjjv], 
 
 A da, ft, booty, plunder. 
 
 Xupuv, -coves, o, meadow. 
 
 Xuiru, I leave, leave behind. 
 [ Aor. iXtvrov jPer/1 AeA oiora, 
 
 § 102, 3.]. 
 
 Xt-rros 3, thin. 
 
 a tvzet'ivu, I whiten [§ 111, Obs. 
 
 2 .]. 
 
 A i<)u, I stone. [Pass. with a, 
 §95.]. 
 
 Xitk/V, -OVTOg , 0, lion. 
 
 Xeu>; t Xul), o, people [§ 30.]. 
 
 X{j6u. See A av6avu. 
 
 Xrjooi, o, nonsense, silly talk. 
 
 -ou, a, robber. 
 
 A iay, Adv ., very, exceedingly. 
 
 a 16os, o, stone. 
 
 A ipriv, ~evos, o, harbour. 
 
 xifAVYs, f), marsh, pond, lake. 
 
 Xif*o$, o , hunger, famine. 
 
 Xoyt%o/uai,l think, reflect. 
 
 A oyiot 3, eloquent, learned, sen¬ 
 sible. 
 
 A o os , o, word, thought, reason, 
 story. 
 
 Xenla^ecj, I revile, abuse. 
 
 A oifjo'os, «, plague, pestilence. 
 
 A oi-ros 3, remaining;— ol Xoivol, 
 the rest, tne others. 
 
 Xouu, I wash. [Formation of the 
 
 Senses, § 97 , 4 .], 
 
 Xoipos , o, crest. 
 
 Xi%ouo, (Acc .), I lie in wait for. 
 Xvyfos 3, sad. 
 
 Xvp.xivop.oLi, (Acc.), I abuse, mal¬ 
 treat. 
 
 A tpy, i>, insult, disgrace, ruin. 
 
 A voreu, 1 grieve (i trans .), annoy, 
 distress. 
 
 Xu *?t, f), grief. 
 
 a vornfcs 3, painful, grievous, sad. 
 Xv^x, it, lyre. 
 
 Xuf x.Is 3, lyric. 
 
 XuairtXen, (Dat.), I am useful to, 
 profit. 
 
 A v%vos, o, lamp, light. 
 xtiu , I dissolve, loose, dismis? 
 (an assembly), violate (a truce), 
 repeal (a law), dispel (cares) 
 [§ 94, 2.]. 
 
 Xufrxopau, (Acc.), I outrage, mal¬ 
 treat. 
 
 Xurous, -tatro s, -i», overgrown with 
 Xutos, grassy. 
 
 M. 
 
 Madrirfis, -ou. «, pupil, disciple. 
 pxxag, -oloos 1, happy, blessed. 
 puKxf^u, I deem happy. 
 pxxaeios 3, blessed, happy. 
 pxxgxv, (sc. ohov'), Adv., a long 
 way, far. 
 
 pxxfos 3, long, tedious. [Com¬ 
 parison, § 52, 5.]. 
 pxXx, Adv., very, (Comp. pa.x- 
 Xov, magis, potius; Sup. pa- 
 Xkttol, maxime). 
 
 pxXxxiX^u, I soften, make effemi¬ 
 nate. 
 
 px.Xax.os 3, soft, effeminate. 
 pax6ax.es 3 , soft, tender, smooth, 
 flattering. 
 
 paXirrx, Adv., (Sup. of p&.Xa) 
 most, especially, chiefly, (max¬ 
 ime). 
 
 paxxov, Adv., (Comp, of pfcXa), 
 better, rather, more, (magis, 
 potius). 
 
 pxvdavu, I learn, study. [Forma- 
 tion, § 121, 14. — With the 
 Part . and Inf., § 175, Obs. 3.]. 
 
GRE R K — ENGLISH VOC A GUT. A RY. 
 
 fietvrixri (sc. divination, 
 
 prophecy. 
 
 f&ttvns, - 5 cog, o, prophet, seer. 
 f ., I cause to wither. 
 ft rcrJgect), I bear witness [§ 124, 
 4 ]. 
 
 fietgTigoftxi, Dep. Mid., testor, I 
 call to witness [§ 124, 4. ]. 
 {tagrugtx, v, testimony, witness. 
 uagrus, 'Tvo-n, o, a witness. [Decl., 
 §47,8.]. 
 
 yairTiy'cco, 1 scourge, whip. 
 ftaart^u , I whip. [C'/iar.,§ 105, 
 2 .]. 
 
 ya.a rfg, -7yot, ft, scourge, whip. 
 i % battle, fight. 
 
 (Dcit .), i fight [§ 125, 1 
 
 14.]. 
 
 fttya.s, -<Zkn, -a, great. [Dec!., 
 
 § 48.— Comparison , § 52, 8.]. 
 ftiyiffo;, -ovg, to, greatness. 
 fttCn, y], intoxication. 
 
 (ti6r,f/,uf, -ov, negligent, remiss. 
 ftiSinft. 1 , I let go, give up, omit. 
 ftidveo (from yGv, unmixed wine), 
 
 I am drunk. 
 
 ttuhaco, I smile. [Formation of the 
 Tenses, § 96, 3.]. 
 
 ytigtxxiov tI, a lad. 
 t , I gain a share. [Redup., 
 
 § 88, 5.]. 
 
 ftiXtxg, -aiva, -civ, black, dark. 
 
 [Decl., § 40.]. 
 
 ys mi, [Gen. rei et Dat. pers.), it 
 concerns, it is a care to [§ 125, 
 
 16 .]. 
 
 fttXerft, ft, care. 
 fttXi, -trot, to, honey. 
 ftiXirra, n, bee. 
 
 mkXat, (1) I intend, am about 
 to ; (2) I delay, hesitate ;—to 
 ysXXov, (1) futurity, the future; 
 (2) delay [§ 125, 15 ; Aug., 
 § 85, Obs.]. 
 
 yuiXoyxt, ionyeXeyoti or \<nytXouyou, 
 
 I care for [§ 125. 16.]. 
 
 *(kog, -ovg, TO, song, melody. 
 yiy<poym, [Acc.), 1 blame; [Dat.), 
 I reproach. 
 
 -tug, h, reproach, cen¬ 
 
 sure. 
 
 (m 
 
 ftsv— Is, i n d e e d,—b u t, [gene 
 rally not translated into Eng* 
 lish; Synt., § 178. 5.]. 
 fzsvzcilvct)) [Dat.), Iam angry wit’s. 
 fisvroi, yet, however. [Synt., 
 § 178, 6.]. 
 
 yivu, I remain ; (^4cc.), I await. 
 [Perf II., yd(j. ova., I desire, 
 § 111, 5.]. 
 
 ytfiZ,u, I share, divide. 
 y\oiftvx. vi, care. 
 ftsoo;, -evg, to, part, share. 
 yiMiy&fx, >j, mid-day, noon. 
 ftsaog 3, middle, in the middle. 
 
 [With the Art., § 14S, Obs. 5.J. 
 ftsaoT'/ji, -viro;, f}, the mean, medi® 
 ocrity, moderation. 
 ft-aTci 3, [Gen. ), full. 
 fttrx. Prep., § 167, 4. 
 foirafoaXtoj, 1 alter, change. 
 ftirafooXri, h, change, vicissitude. 
 yiToTbdbwyi tivI tivo ;, I give any 
 one a share of anything ;— 
 ft-TczhoTic'j ’tt;(v), one must give 
 a share. 
 
 ftsTx'kXctTToi, X change, exchange. 
 ftiTadf [Gen.), Prep , between. 
 p.iTctvrifcToft.u.i, I send for. 
 fUTccTdvifti, I transpose, change, 
 alter, remove. 
 
 ftiTafeoui, I carry olf, remove, 
 change. 
 
 ft,iTKxu£<Z ) o[Aai, I handle, manage, 
 direct. 
 
 ftiTCTura, Adv., hereafter, after¬ 
 wards. 
 
 fisTixco, [Gen.], T take part in, 
 share in, enjoy, possess. 
 
 [tirgiog 3, moderate. 
 yt-ftug, Adv., moderately. 
 yi-gov, to, measure, moderation. 
 yeXe.n y-Xt l “ v > Conj., unt.L 
 [Construction, § 183, 3, (b)] ;~® 
 Prep., (Gen.), § 163, Obs. 
 yv\, ne, not, Synt., § 177, 5 . 
 
 with the Pres. Imper. or A or, 
 Subj., § 153, 1, Obs. 3;—■ 
 
 with the Inf. pleonasticaUy , 
 § 177, 7 yn with the Ind., 
 Subj., Opt., after expressions 
 cf fear, doubt, &c. (‘that’), 
 
 2 D 
 
602 
 
 GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 § 177. Obs. in Questions, 
 
 § 188. 3, (4), (8), and (9b c. 
 
 pv oti (oofus) — aXXa xat (aA.X ovhs), 
 
 not only—but even [§ 17S, 4.]. 
 ynhayov, Adv., nowhere ; fx.rihay.oZ 
 iivxi, to be of no value. 
 ynhiis, - tyia , -ev, no one, nothing ; 
 {used, like yi. with Imperatives 
 and Subjunctives). [Peel., 
 
 § 68, Obs. 1.]. 
 
 ynleTon, Adv., (with Imper., or 
 Subj. used imperatively), never. 
 yyjxog, -ovg, r'o, length. 
 yriv, (a strengthening Particle), 
 vero, indeed. 
 yiv, -vog, o, month. 
 yrjvig, -tog or -/hog, y, anger. 
 ynv'iu, ( Pat.), I am enraged with. 
 yioroTi, Adv., never. 
 yn-ra. Adv., not yet. 
 yin —(W-tjTfc, neither—nor. [Synt., 
 
 § 178, 7.]. 
 
 yh T ng, •''■£«?, v, mother. {Peel., 
 § 36. J. 
 
 y,yig£avotoy.ai. Pep. 71 fid., muchinor, 
 
 I contrive, devise. 
 y.aivai, I pollute [§ 111, Obs. 2.]. 
 yiyvvy.i, I mix [§ 140, 4.]. 
 yi xgos 3, small, little. [ Compari¬ 
 son , § 52, G.]. 
 
 yiy.koy.ai, (Acc.), imitov, I imitate. 
 y,iynTY\g, -oZ, o, imitator. 
 fx.iyvio'xco, I remind. [ Formation, 
 § 122, 12 ; Redup., § 88, Obs. 
 2; Perf Subj. and Plpf 
 
 Ovt., § 116, 3—M kyvnyai with 
 
 Part, and Inf., § 175, Obs. 
 3.]. 
 
 y.\ayu, (Pat.), misceo , I mix, 
 mingle with. 
 yt irku, I hate. 
 yicrdoi, o, reward, hire. 
 yia-dou, I hire out. 
 y.va, -ag, fj, mina, (a weight or a 
 sum of money= 100 drachm/e) 
 [§ 26.]. 
 
 y.vny *(, b, memory. 
 jxvnyoviVM,(Gen.),commemoro, I re¬ 
 mind, mention. 
 yvnarf)/}, -r)gog, i, SUltor. 
 y»\a, n , share, lot, fate. 
 
 ylXig, Adv., with difficulty. 
 yoXitvu, I defile £§ 115.J. 
 yova^ia, b, monarchy. 
 yovov, Adv., only, alone. 
 yoMOf 3, alone, only, [ With the j 
 Art., § 148, Obs. 6.J. 
 yopayos 2, fated. 
 
 MoZcra b, a Muse. 
 yovaixr], (ts^vti understood ), >}, 
 every art under the patronage 
 of the Muses, (especially 
 music). 
 
 yoxfv^og 3, miserable, base. 
 yo-'tfog, 0 , toil, distress. 
 yofcXog, o, bolt, bar, lever. 
 yvZ,w, I suck [§ 125, 17.]. 
 yZdoi, o, word, speech, story. 
 yv7a, f), fly- 
 
 yvfios 3, countless ;— yuoioi, ten 
 thousand. 
 
 yugyrilz,, -rixog, o, ant. 
 yjftov, to, unguent, ointment. 
 y.Zs, -vog, o, mus, mouse. 
 yjXXTog 3, inmost, most retired. 
 yva>, I Close (especially the lips 
 and eyes). [FormatAn of the 
 Tenses, § 94, 1.]. 
 y£>v= num L§ 188, 5.]. 
 yaifog 3, foolish ; Subst., a fool. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nad, Adv., truly, yea. 
 
 V'ZlCt), I dwell, inhabit. 
 vaa<ro), I press together. [Chat, t 
 § 105 1 
 
 v'zuv'ytci. *) ...Lp wreck. 
 
 va.,., y oi, o, 2, naufrdgus , ship* 
 wrecked. 
 
 vavyx%iot, b, Sea-fight, 
 v aZg, vioog, »i, navis, ship. [Ped.^ 
 § 47, 9.]. 
 
 vavTrtg, -ov , o, nauta , sailor. 
 vavnxos 3, belonging to ships, 
 nautical ; vxunxb huvayis, naval 
 power ; to vxvtixo », the fleet. 
 viavlai, -ev, o, a youth, 
 y ixfog 3, dead ; Subst., a corpse. 
 vexTa^, -a^og, to, nectar. 
 nxZg, -VOS, 0 , corpse;—*? tixtrtt, 
 the dead. 
 
 1 nyox, I divide, distribute, assign. 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 G03 
 
 fFuf., vtpZ and vipyc-u; A or. 
 tvufjt,a ; Perf, vsvl/xYixa; Aor. 
 Pass., lviju,fi0tiv and iny-iSriv. See 
 § 125, Obs.]. 
 
 vt 05 3, young;—e vias, the youth, 
 young man. 
 
 mV*?*, -nre?, w, juventns, youth. 
 vstyeXfi, k, (1) nebula, cloud; (2) 
 bird-net. 
 
 vs <pog, -ovs, to, cloud. 
 
 vsm, I swim [§ 116, 2.]. 
 
 vsug, -rf), o, temple. 
 
 vvt , Adv., yes, truly. 
 
 rrjf&oi, - uros, to, thread, yam. 
 
 vnvzftt'a, «, a calm. 
 
 vr, crag, fi , island. 
 
 viX^oi, [Put. v'r^/u'), I wash. 
 
 vtK<xw, I conquer. 
 
 vt xvi, f), victory. 
 
 vWtu, [later form for »/£&>), I 
 wash. 
 
 vl$u, it snows. 
 voeu, I think. 
 
 vonf/.oc., -a to;, to, thought, idea. 
 voft&s, -Z2og, o, «, nomadic, leading 
 a roving life. 
 
 i ttfzsvs, -loo;, o, herdsman, shep¬ 
 herd. 
 
 sop*i, *i, pasture. 
 
 vo/x,it,u, I think, consider [§ 83.]. 
 vofjoiy.os 3, customary. 
 
 vofxog, o, law. 
 
 voos [voZg), o, understanding, judg¬ 
 ment, mind, spirit. 
 votTieo, I am sick. 
 vl<ro;, f], disease. 
 
 voTTtfJLov vifteco, ro, the day of re¬ 
 turn. 
 
 voto;, o, south-west wind. 
 vvfiKpv, f), a Nymph, a bride. 
 vZv, Adv., nunc, now. 
 
 »u|. wxrof, vi, night. 
 
 wffT&^a, I nod, slumber. [Char., 
 
 § 105, 3.]. 
 
 n. 
 
 Ksvlec, fi, hospitality. 
 
 |evos 3, strange, foreign ; Subst., 
 stranger, guest. 
 
 \ku, I scrape. [Formation of the 
 Tenses , § 98, (b)]. 
 
 %YH>a.ivw, I dry [§ 113.]. 
 
 %ipo(, -ovs, to , sword. ' 
 
 QjXov, <fo, wood. 
 
 %vftu and \v^w. Mid. tygofteti, I 
 shave [§ 124, 5.]. 
 
 \Zca, I scrape, polish. [Pass, witl* 
 v, § 95.]. 
 
 O. 
 
 'O, 17. to, [Art.], the, [§ 60.]. 
 ohaZ^oo, I bite. [Char., § 105, 2.]. 
 
 Hit, ijh, to%, this, [§ 60. ]. 
 
 Hi}, r way, road, journey 
 0 Z 0 Z b’/xuj, I give place to. 
 
 Hovs, -ovto;, 0 , tooth. 
 
 obv^auou, I mourn, bewail. 
 
 o^oj [Gen.), I smell of [§ 125, 18.]. 
 
 okv, Adv., whence. 
 
 oh, Adv., ubi, where. 
 
 ol, Adv., whither. 
 
 oixxi^M. I steer. [Aug., § 87, 1.]. 
 
 oTZot, I know [§ 143.]. 
 
 olyvZfjLi, o'tyu. See otvoiyw/xi. 
 ol xu os 3, domestic, belonging to, 
 one’s own, intimate. 
 oixsTvjs, -ov, 0 , servant, domestic; 
 ohciu, I dwell, inhabit. 
 o’lxnfjoos, -cLtos, to, dwelling. 
 olx'/iTis, -tug, fj, dwelling. 
 olxix, f], house, residence, house* 
 hold. 
 
 o’ixo'hofiu, I build a house, build. 1 
 oixos, 0, house. 
 
 olxovfiu, I guard the house. 
 
 [Aug., § 87, 2.]. 
 olxT&tfYGo, [Acc.), I pity. 
 oiXTgig 3, piteous, wretched. 
 [Comparison, § 51.]. 
 
 o'tfjoca. See 0 / 0 / 6406 /. 
 
 olpu^u, I lament, groan. [Char., 
 § 105, 2.]. 
 
 oJvos, 0 , vinum, wine. 
 olvo^oos, b, cup-bearer. 
 
 0/0/6406/, I think [§ 125, 19 ;-ir. 
 Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind., § 82, 
 2;— Aug., § 87, 1.]. 
 oTog, such as, [Correlative, § 63) ; 
 — with Inf, instead of us r*, 
 so as to, [Sunt., § 182, Obs. 
 4.]* 
 
604 
 
 GREEK —ENGLISH VOCABULARY, 
 
 t •' 
 
 ei;. mS, 
 
 l, *, sheep [§ 46, Obs. 
 
 o"%opcu, I have departed, am 
 cone. [Formation of the Tenses, 
 1 125, 20 .;—with Perf. mean¬ 
 ing, § 152, Obs. 1. i—with the 
 Part., § 175, 3.]. 
 
 o“m. See (pe^u. 
 
 Sxfaos 3, happy, prosperous. 
 
 o\(hos, o, wealth, good fortune, 
 pros} erity. 
 
 iXtyx^^'ia, k, the rule of a few, 
 oligarchy. 
 
 ixiyos 3, little, [Comparison, § 52, 
 7.J ;— oXiyoi, few. 
 
 iXurPot-vw, I slip £§ 121, 7.]]* 
 
 ZxxZpi, per do, 1 destroy [§ 133, 
 B.]. 
 
 okoXv^v, I howL [Char., § lOo, 
 
 2.J. 
 
 oXos 3, whole. [With the Ait., 
 
 § 148, 10. (c). (y)]. 
 ixoQvQopou, I pity. 
 
 opiXeat, (Dat.), I associate with, 
 have intercourse with. 
 i/uxi*, fi, intercourse with, asso¬ 
 ciation, intimacy. 
 
 Spwpi, 1 swear [§ 138, B. ]. 
 ipvvu, I swear. 
 bpoya.arpos, b, brother. 
 cp'/yXuTT’o; 2, speaking the same 
 language. 
 
 bpoiBTrig, -nres, fi , similarity, like¬ 
 ness. 
 
 Spoils, Adv., in like manner, 
 alike. 
 
 IpoXoyita, I agree with, confess. 
 opogyvupi, I wipe off £§ 140, 6.]. 
 opus, yet, although, however. 
 
 [Synt., § 178, 6.]. 
 ovules, 0 , dream. 
 
 ovnais, -ius, h, advantage, benefit. 
 Wivnpi, ( Acc.), I benefit, help 
 [§ 135, 4.]. 
 
 ovopa, -oLTos, to, name. 
 ivopa^u, I name, call. 
 bvrais, Adv., really. 
 
 %6 S , -*r«, - v , (1) sharp, sour; (2) 
 quick, swift. 
 
 #*•*£«, I cause to follow, grant, 
 confer. 
 
 "t»j, Adv., whither, where. 
 b Tip u. Adv., behind, back. 
 b<rx!^u, I arm. 
 
 bvrxfrvis, - 0 V , 0 , heavy-armed sol¬ 
 dier. 
 
 orrXov, to, weapon ; Plur. , arms; 
 o<to,, Adv., whither. 
 
 1-roTos 3, qualis, of what kind. 
 oorbiros 3 , quantus, how great. 
 boroaogoZv 3 , how great, how long 
 or how short soever. 
 oototuv, (with Subj.), whenever, as 
 as often as. [Synt., § 183.]. 
 oorliTt, when, if, since. [§§ lol^ 
 184.]. 
 
 boroTz^os 3 , which of two. 
 
 OTOU, Adv., where. 
 
 ’onTa See «ga&>. 
 
 Um, (1) Adv. and Conj., how;— 
 (2) in order that, (with Subj., 
 Opt., and Fat. Ind.), \Synt. r 
 § 181.]. 
 
 opxtrig, -Mg, >), sight, vision. 
 bL ,I see [§ 126, 5; § 82, 2 
 and § 87, 6.]. r ^ ^ _ 
 
 boyx'ivu, I enrage [§ 111, 01 s - 2.> 
 ooyh, fh anger. 
 
 boy’i^opxi, Dep. Pass., I am 
 
 angry. , , 
 
 bpkyu, I stretch forth my hand, 
 Mid. (Gen.), I strive after, 
 grasp at, crave for, desire. 
 Spits, -t»s, f,, a longing for, de¬ 
 sire, appetite. - 
 
 Mis 3, straight, correct, upright, 
 I make straight, erect, 
 
 raise up, 
 
 ooPpios 2 and 3, early. 
 
 4 'U I define, limit, lay down, 
 appoint. 
 ogxtov, to, oath. 
 opKos, o, oath. 
 
 hp&m, I rush, press forward. 
 bppn, h, impetus, rushing forth, 
 attack, impulse, ardent desire, 
 
 i { Se«;-,i.birdc a tcher[§2.7, 
 Obs. 1.]. 
 
 ‘ l0os > •> *» bird *r R 14ft 7 1 
 ipZfu, opuu, I rouse 14U. /. J. 
 
 Saos, -out, TO, mountain. 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 605 
 
 - vyos, o. quaiL 
 
 i^LTTUy 1 dig. [Fut. oo{\o ; Perf, 
 o£u>oZ%&; Perf. Mid. or Pass , 
 dgdjguyftwi, § 89, (a)]. 
 
 I cause to dauce; Mid., 
 I dance. 
 
 o, dance. 
 c<rios 3, holy. 
 ha-p*, i ), smell, perfume. 
 taog 3, as great as, as much as, 
 [Correlative , § 63] ; oau — to- 
 couru, Syni., § 187, 2. 
 egong, r,vig, long, who, which in¬ 
 deed, the very man who or 
 thing which. 
 laTtoM (-euv), to, bone. 
 
 Utk, riTa, o ti, who (ever)[§ 62.]. 
 i;rtsovv, *Tigouv, onovv, quicuuque, 
 whoever. 
 
 ic+ga'ivoftoct, (Gen.), I smell [§ 121, 
 8.]. 
 
 ■StoCv, ( with Subj.), when, when¬ 
 ever. [ Synt., § 183, 3, (b)]. 
 In, when, as, since. [Synt., 
 § 183, 2. a. and § 184, 1.]. 
 in, that, [Synt. r § 180]; be¬ 
 cause, [Synt., § 184, 2.]. 
 cv, Adv., where. 
 el, oJ, i, sui , of himself, [§ 56,;— 
 use and meaning , § 169, Obs. 
 
 3. ]. 
 
 d (before Consonants), ov* (before 
 Vowels), oux, (before aspirated 
 Vowels), not; Synt., § 177, 3. 
 
 4. and Obs. ;—in Questions, 
 § 188, 3. (4),(6 );—ov § 177,, 
 
 9; ov ft 'ovov — a.X'Ka. xal (doXX 
 oudt), § 178, 4 ; av% on (oorug) 
 — coXXoo x.a.1 (aXX’ ovde), § 178, 4. 
 ddxpr,, Adv., nowhere. 
 dds, and not, neither, not even 
 (ne — quidem). [Synt., § 178, 
 
 ■ 1 -> 
 
 o-Atlf, -ipiot, -6v, no one; ovosv , 
 nothing, [Ded., §68, Obs. 1.]; 
 —audits d'snf ov, nemo non, § 182, 
 Obs. 5. 
 
 ddivroTi, Adv., never. 
 eAiordj-ron, Adv., never yet. 
 dx, Adv. See ov. 
 
 *l*i’ ti, Adv., no more, no longer. 
 
 ouzouv, non ? or nonne ergo i 
 [ lnterrog., § 188, 3. ( 6 )]. 
 olxog 3, (Epic), pernicious. 
 o5v, therefore, then, [§ 178, 9.J. 
 ou-toti, Adv., never. 
 out- u, Adv., not yet. 
 
 O ugxvidai, ol, the inhabitants of 
 heaven ( Ouranos), the gods. 
 ovgtxviog 3, heavenly. 
 oug, uTog. to, ear. [Ded., § 39.]. 
 ouaioc , 17 ,( 1 ) being; ( 2 ) possessions, 
 substance. 
 
 ourt — outs, neither—nor. [Synt., 
 § 178, i.y 
 
 out ot, certainly not. [To! (Encl.y 
 is a strengthening Particle ]. 
 outu(s), Adv., so, thus [§ 7, 2.]. 
 
 Adv. See ov. 
 
 hpuXu, I owe [§ 125, 21.]. 
 opsXXu, I increase, strengthen, 
 help. 
 
 opt)ex.Xf*os, o, eye. 
 opts, -icag, o, *, serpent. 
 ipXiaKoivu, 1 owe, am found 
 guilty, incur, deserve [§ 121 , 
 9.]. 
 
 5 ^ew, I bear, endure. 
 o^xos, o, plebs , the common peo¬ 
 ple, crowd, mob. 
 o\}/, ot os, b, vox, voice. 
 o-^b, Adv., late, too late. 
 o^J/ios 3, late. 
 
 o^ig, -uos , h, sight, visage, vision. 
 o-pop<xyos 2 , dainty. [Comparison, 
 § 50, L (f)]. 
 
 n. 
 
 n ocyi's, - tdos, b, trap, snare. 
 oruyxoixos 2 , utterly bad. 
 v&Sos, -ovs, to, suffering, passion. 
 Ta/a», - avos. o, war-song, song of 
 triumph. 
 
 orouduK, fj, education, instruction. 
 Toadivw, I educate. 
 aroudiov, to, (diminutive of oraolg), 
 little child. 
 
 I play [§ 105, 3 and § 116, 
 
 ?.]• 
 
 nous, -do's, o, i)- child, boy, son, 
 daughter, servant. [DecL, §38, 
 Obs. l.J. 
 
603 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 waioj, I strike. [-Pass, with a, | 
 § 95.]. 
 
 wxXxi, Adv., formerly, long ago ; 
 
 — el waken, the ancients. 
 wa.Xa.iu, I wrestle. [Pass, with cr, 
 §.95.]. 
 
 Tax ads 3, old, aged, ancient. 
 TaXi't, Adv., again, on the con¬ 
 trary. 
 
 wavraratrt, universally, by all 
 means [§ 7, 1.]. 
 
 wavrxxou, Adv., everywhere, in 
 all respects. 
 
 wa'tro'hZwoi 3, of every kind. 
 Txvrui, Adv., by all means, de¬ 
 cidedly, altogether, wholly. 
 wxw, Adv., altogether, very. 
 war to;, o , grandfather. 
 tu.£x, Prep., § 167, 5. 
 
 Ta^ay'pXXu, 1 order, direct, bid. 
 waoaoi'hufu, I give over to, com¬ 
 mit. 
 
 wa^olu;, Adv., unexpectedly. 
 wxoxjfa*, fi, deposition, deposit, 
 pledge. 
 
 (Dat.), I advise, exhort. 
 Ta^axaXiu, (AcC.), I Call to, ex- 
 hort. 
 
 Ta^axaraS^KTi, 17 , a trust, deposit, 
 pledge. 
 
 Ta^xx.tXivopxc, (Dat.), Dep. Mid., 
 I order, advise, encourage. 
 waoaXa.p.ft>avu, 1 receive from, 
 take up, undertake. 
 
 TCibavofxoi 2 , contrary to law, il¬ 
 legal. 
 
 wa.oa.TBrop.xi, I fly past, fly away. 
 t rnaTkxZ,^, I cause to wander, 
 mislead [§ 105, 4.]. 
 wx{XTXr)crios 2 and 3, lying close 
 to, near, like. [ Comparison, 
 § 50, (d)]. 
 
 -»«, 0 , a parasang, (a 
 
 Persian measure of length, con¬ 
 taining 30 stadia), 
 wx^xaxivx^u, I prepare; Mid., I 
 prepare myself. 
 
 TagxaxiuaariKos 3, (Gen.), skilled 
 in preparing. 
 
 wx^arslvu, I stretch out extend. 
 ISee ruvu. 
 
 Ta^xriirjpi, I place beside, pro¬ 
 vide, propose, declare. 
 Tu^xr^t^u, (Acc.), I run past, 
 pass by. 
 
 wx(>x$e(>M, I bear past. 
 wx^upt, Inf. wa^iivxi, adsum, I 
 am present;— wa^mf), it is 
 lawful, it is in one’s power. 
 wa^upi, Inf. wagisvai, I pass by, 
 go near. 
 
 TxoBo^opxt, I go by. 
 wx^xu, I offer, grant, present, 
 furnish; Mid., I afford, pro¬ 
 duce. 
 
 wugivpi, 1 let fall, let pass, disre¬ 
 gard, let go, loose, remit, 
 give up; Pass., I am relaxed, 
 am exhausted. 
 
 wxfiarnpi, I place beside; A or. 
 
 II. Act., I stand beside, assist. 
 Tx^aivsu, I riot. [Aug., § 91, 1.]. 
 wxoo'ivMu, I incite, inspirit [§111. 
 7.]. 
 
 Txppvala, *i, freedom of speech, 
 boldness. 
 
 was, wxax, wav, each, every, 
 whole ;Plur., all. [Decl., § 40, 
 Obs.l.] .-With the Art., §148, 
 10, (c). 
 
 wxaau, I scatter, sprinkle. [Char ., 
 §105,1.]. 
 
 wa.<rx u i I suffer, feel [§ 122, 13.]; 
 —tS wxaxu, I receive a favour, 
 am well treated. 
 wxrr](>, -rgof, c , father. [Decl. , 
 § 36.]. 
 
 wxr^ioi 2 and 3, patrius, estab¬ 
 lished by forefathers, heredi- 
 tary. 
 
 wxr^ig, -Itos, h, native-land. 
 wxr^ug, -coos, o, uncle (by the fa - 
 thePs side). 
 
 wxvu , I cause to cease; wxxtu 
 nva. nvos, I relieve a person 
 from anything; Mid. with 
 Part., I cease. [Aor. Pass., 
 twavrhv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass., 
 wewxupxi, I cease ; Put. III., 
 wiwavaopxt, I will cease]. 
 wxx a;, -iix, -u, thick, stout, stu¬ 
 pid. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 GO 7 
 
 fffbv, y, fetter. 
 irt'Siov, to, a plain. 
 irt^oeS, pedester , (1) on foot; (2) 
 prosaic. 
 
 «tt6u, (Acc.), I persuade ; Perf 
 II. (Pat.), -riTotOa, I trust, 
 rely on ; Mid. with Aor. Pans. 
 (Pat.), I am persuaded by, 
 trust, believe, obey. 
 
 -ov j, b, persuasiveness, per¬ 
 suasion, obedience. 
 iriivow, I hunger. [Contr., § 97, 3, 
 (a)]. 
 
 onioa.ofjL j/, (Gen.), Pep. Pass., I 
 
 otiXtolctyis, -ov, o, one who wears 
 a light budder, a targeteer. 
 ori/tATco, I send £§ 102, 4. ]. 
 rrsvYit, -yitos 1 , poor. 
 ortvYinvcii, I am poor. 
 ortvSeea, I grieve, mourn for. 
 onvSiKus t^u, (Gen.), I mourn for 
 something. 
 nENen. See vaaxu. 
 
 <T 2 v/«, b, poverty. 
 ortvi^ts 3, poor. 
 orivoftoii, I am poor. 
 
 •nora. 1 vu, I ripen, soften, mitigate 
 [§ 111, Obs. 2.]. 
 
 9 iff gu[tev os 3, (P&f. Part, of 
 ffo^u ), allotted, fated ;—b cre- 
 ffgwfiivn (sc. pol^a). Fate. 
 fftiruv. -ovos, ripe. [ Comparison, 
 § 52, 11.]. 
 
 I finish, accomplish 
 [§ 111, Obs. 2.]. 
 fftgxTof 3, beyond. 
 ffipOOS, -UTOS, TO, end, limit. 
 
 Vi%A. m, (1) I transport, sell; (2) I 
 pass over (intrans.), [§ 98, 
 (a)]. 
 
 tip6u, I waste, destroy. 
 ffto'i. Prep., § 167, 2. 
 ffi\tot,yu, 1 lead round. 
 rt^pxxXXco, I throw round. 
 ffigtioopos 2, running round, gad¬ 
 ding about. 
 
 ffi^ioooLu, 1 overlook, neglect, per¬ 
 mit. 
 
 rngivksu, I sail round* 
 
 ffi^iffXoos (- ous ), 0 , voyage round. 
 ffifppsu. I flow round, fall off. 
 ffigiaTexxu, I dress, furnish, 
 adorn. 
 
 ffipiTiSvif/i, I put or set round. 
 ffi/jiTg'iffw, I turn round, overturn. 
 ffi^iTTog 3, beyond the usu.vl 
 number, superfluous. 
 ffif>i(pe/?a/, 1 bear about. 
 ffi fiat, (from ffeoas), a year ago, 
 last year [§ 7, l.b 
 ffiTtxwv/xi, I expand [§ 139, ®. 
 3.1. 
 
 ffETOCCOCi, I fly [§125, 22 and § 117, 
 
 ffETpoc., b, rock. 
 
 FLET0OMAI. See ffvvPxvouui. 
 ffrj ; Adv., whither? where? 
 ffYtyf), b, fountain. 
 ffbyvi/xt, I fix, fasten [§ 140, 8.], 
 flrij %t>s, -ioog, o, fore-arm, cubit. 
 ffiOttYM, I make fat [§ 111, Obs. 
 2 .]. 
 
 one%u, I press. 
 ffixoos 3, sharp, bitter. 
 ffifA.ffXn/jt.i, 1 fill [§ 135, 5.]. 
 fflfAff^nfu, I burn [§ 135, 6.]. 
 ffivu, (Gen. and Ace.), I dr'nk 
 [§ H9, 3.]. 
 
 ffiffio-xu, I give to drink [§ 122, 
 14.]. 
 
 ffiffgxazu, I sell [§ 122, 15.]. 
 
 ffi ffTU, I fall [§ 116, 2 and 
 
 § 123.]. 
 
 onanvu, (Pat.), I trust, believe ; 
 Pass. fftaTiiofAxi, I am believed, 
 am trusted. 
 
 fficTTis, -tus, b, belief, trust, con¬ 
 fidence. 
 
 ffiCTTOS 3, trustworthy, faithful, 
 true. 
 
 ffiuv 2, fat. (Comparison, § 52, 
 
 12 .]. 
 
 ff\aZ,u, I cause to wander ; Mid., 
 (poet.) with Aor. Pass., I wan¬ 
 der about; Aor. iff\&y%0'/iY. 
 [Char., § 105, 4.]. 
 ff\a.a<ru,\ form. [Char., §105,1.]* 
 ffXxffTDcb, b, (sc. te^yv !), model¬ 
 ling-art, sculpture. 
 ffXs^oY, to, a plethron, (a mea- 
 
GftEEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 6,8 
 
 sure of length = 100 Greek feet 
 or 101 English feet). 
 
 *\i 7 aroi 3, most, (Sup. of oroXvg). 
 otxixu, I knit, weave [§ 109.]. 
 orXtoAxig, Adv ., oftener. 
 w/.iovszms, • ev , avaricious, cove¬ 
 tous. 
 
 jrXiovi^ia, fj, avarice. 
 vrXtuod, ft, side. 
 
 orXeu, I sail [§ 116, 2 ; Contr., 
 § 97, 1.1. 
 
 vrXrryfi , fj, blow, WOUnd. 
 vr> rj$os, -ovg, ro , multitude, throng, 
 extent, length (of time). 
 
 {Gen.), except, besides, un¬ 
 less. 
 
 vx-^ng, -eg, (Gen.), full, satisfied 
 with. 
 
 orXnaAZ,u, I approach. 
 wXriaiog 3, near; oi orXnaiov, those 
 near, neighbours. 
 vrx/iTTM, I strike, wound. \Perf 
 ortvXvyx, I have struck ; A or. 
 Pass. iorXrtyw, but in compo¬ 
 sition, torXxyrtv,. e. g. lorXx- 
 yvv]. 
 
 orXudog, f), brick. 
 
 orxios (==orXoZg), o, voyage [§ 29.]. 
 •rXotaioi 3, rich, wealthy. 
 or xovtbu, I am rich, grow rich. 
 orXovri\u, 1 enrich. 
 orXoZrog, o, riches, wealth. 
 vXuva, I wash [§ 111, 6 and 
 § 115.]. 
 
 mev, I breathe, blow [§ 116, 2; 
 
 Contr., § 97, 1;]. 
 trc-'iv j Adv., whence? 
 vo.'lu, I desire, long for [§ 98, 
 Obs. ]. 
 
 scau, I make, do, act;— sfi, xxXwg 
 iroiu, (with Acc.), I do good to, 
 benefit [$ 159, 3, (2)] ;—with 
 a double Acc., § 160, 2 ;— with 
 the Part, and Inf ., § 175, Obs. 
 3. 
 
 sroiiirris, -ov, o, poet. 
 
 «■ otAkos 3, variegated, various. 
 voipr/v, -e*og, o, shepherd. 
 vo.o; ; 3, of what kind ? 
 tro^tutcu. (Dat.), 1 go to war 
 witu. 
 
 Toxipiog 3, hostile; Subst., ait 
 enemy. 
 
 -roXipixbs 3, warlike. 
 orbxipog, o, war. 
 
 ToXio^xeu, I besiege. 
 voXto^Kiu, b, siege. 
 orLxig, -tug, b, town, state, city. 
 ToXiTua. b, the state, the govern¬ 
 ment, politics. 
 
 iroXtrivu, I govern a state ; Midi, 
 
 I live as a citizen, govern a 
 state. 
 
 oroXi rjj;, -ov, o, citizen. 
 
 ToXinxbg 3, relating to the state, 
 political, Civil ;—rx oroXtnxx, 
 politics. 
 
 < roXXuxig, Adv., often. 
 iroX:.xrX<x<ri&e 3, many times - 
 more. 
 
 toXxoi. See toXvs. 
 woXuxoigavlx, ft, the rule of many. 
 voXvXbyog 2, garrulous. 
 
 ToXvorovog 2, laborious, toilsome. 
 oroXZg, voXXrt, -roXv, much, many. 
 [Decl., § 48. — Comparison , 
 §52,9.]. 
 
 vroXuriXua, i), great expense, ex¬ 
 travagance, costly living. 
 vroXvriXvtg, -eg, costly, splendid.. 
 c roXvr^ovog 2, versatile, crafty. 
 ToXvpiXix, ft, multitude of friendst 
 oroXv^nfix, ft, multitude of hands, 
 abundance of workmen. 
 
 W0VS6U, laboro, I toil, am in pain * 
 [§ 98, Obs.]. 
 
 Tovr.obg 3, wicked, evil, disho¬ 
 nest. 
 
 b, toil, trouble, labour* 
 hardship. 
 
 OTO^lVU, I lead forward ; Mid., 
 (with Aor. Pass.), I go, march, 
 set out. 
 
 orotfeu, I destroy, ravage. 
 orooiarixog 3, (Gen.), skilled ia* 
 procuring. 
 
 orbing, -tog, l, b , calf, heifer. 
 orooQugtog (-oZg) 3, Adj ., purple.-. 
 or arts, -tug, », drinking, drink. 
 orlcrog; 3, how great ? 
 oroToip.bg, o, river. 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 609 
 
 r»<™, Adv., ( Enel.), once, some¬ 
 times. 
 
 rJrtgov (-Tcrigu)—», utrum — an, 
 whether—or. [Synt., § 188, 3, 
 (8) and (10)]. 
 
 » 'rf^as; 3, uter 1 which of two ? 
 ro<rov, to, drink. 
 
 Tout, oroiSog, o, pes, foot. 
 
 • TgoiyftK, -oLrog , to, action, deed, 
 thing, business ; Plur., affairs 
 of state, government, power. 
 t?f)otxTiKog 3, capable of accom¬ 
 plishing, effective, able to 
 carry one’s point (with an¬ 
 other, ora^a. T/vog). 
 
 Toa^tg, -ius, h, an action. 
 
 •*£«£?«, orouov, mild, gentle, 
 soft. [ Dec !, § 48.]. 
 vrf&TToo, I do, act;—c t(>6.t- 
 Topcoi. i Tiva. i^yvotov, I demand 
 money from any one ;—with 
 A dverbs, 1 fare so and so. 
 r^fru, ( Dat.), it is becoming to. 
 aoecrfiiig, -tuv oi, ambassadors, 
 (Sing, o orgsff,3uiTris). 
 rr^ijfiiVThg. -ov, o, ambassador. 
 See ocottrfSus. 
 
 u^etrfivg, -uoi and -tug 1, old man, 
 (in this signif. only in Acc. and 
 VoC., <rftcrfivv, orgecriSu) ; —cr^s- 
 c-fovTigot, seniores, elders. , 
 rfiardcu, to buy [§ 135, 6, page 
 284.]. 
 
 v^iv. Cong., before, ere, until, 
 with Ind. and Opt. [§ 1S3, 3, 
 (a) and (c)] ; orfiv oiv with Subj. 
 {§ 183, 3, (b)] ; <roi* with Inf. 
 [§ 183, Obs.]. 
 
 toIu, I saw. [Pass. with a, § 95.]. 
 
 Prep., § 163, 2. 
 
 •roou.ieeofjt.oLi, I prefer. 
 we ‘,(Za.rov, to, a sh ep. 
 orpiyovos, o, ancestor. 
 trcohiSufu, prodo, I betray. 
 V(3oScTr,s, -tv, o. traitor. 
 wfouvov (Aor.), 1 said before¬ 
 hand, commanded (§ 126, 8.]. 
 •rooiexofjiac.i, I go before. 
 v^oJv/uut, h, willingness. 
 c(>lP vf&oi 2, willing, ready. 
 
 *eo0uftug, Adv., willingly, with 
 alacrity. 
 
 orooXtioroj, I forsake, leave. 
 oroofcoi^og 2, fighting in front; 
 
 Subst., a champion. 
 or^ovoeu, I think, consider before¬ 
 hand. 
 
 oreovotu, h, forethought, prudence. 
 or^ooiSei, I know beforehand. 
 or fog, Prep., § 167, 6. 
 
 aya«st'&;, I call, name, address. 
 or^osfiaXXu, (Gen.), I smell of. 
 <r^fl 5 jSA£'T&», I look at. 
 
 I expect, presume. 
 orfgufu, Inf. Tooguvut, adsum , I 
 am present, am connected 
 with. 
 
 vrfoguy.t, Inf. ori>ogievxi, I go to, 
 approach. 
 
 irgo$i*.avvu, I advance towards, 
 march up. 
 
 TgtgegXtptai, I come to. 
 
 -jr^gmu, (Dat.), it is becoming to. 
 Tfioshxuv, -hxovtrtx., -fjxov, Gen., 
 -yjkovtos, fitting, becoming. 
 oreoo"/i / u.otivu, I shew beforehand, 
 reveal. 
 
 orfotrSiv, Adv., before, [with Gen. 
 § 24.]. 
 
 ToogStTog 3, added (by art), arti¬ 
 ficial. 
 
 oreosKvveu, (Acc.), I fall prostrate 
 before, do obeisance to, wor¬ 
 ship. 
 
 wfgoSog, h, (1) approach ; (2) in¬ 
 come, revenue (reditus). 
 oreogTf orrtn, I fall upon, chance ; 
 ■x gogor'ioTTii, accldit, it befalls, 
 happens. 
 
 I breathe on. 
 
 9rgog<roiEaj, I add to ; Mid., I lay 
 claim to, pretend to. 
 or^ogrihftu, I put to, unite, add. 
 noogpeeu, I bear or bring to. 
 orgeguorov, face, visage, counte¬ 
 nance. 
 
 ore ore^ov, A dv. , before, sooner. 
 wooTioog 3, before, sooner. 
 
 •vooti. Ytfjot 1 place before, lay out 
 / for show), set forth, display. 
 
610 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 I turn, any one to, in¬ 
 duce, incite. 
 
 irrupted], I bring before, present, 
 allege. 
 
 vrgocpririua), I prophesy. 
 
 Tgv-Tocvuov, to, a court of justice 
 at Athens. 
 rrg/vios 3, early. 
 
 TO OUT Of 3, first. I 
 
 wTctl/jai, I sneeze. 
 
 TTuiu, I strike against. [Pass. 
 with a, § 95.]. 
 
 TTi(>0 V, TC, wing. 
 
 Tripy\, -V'yog, V, wing. 
 
 T~i J O'60 , I pound. [Char., § 105, j 
 
 1 .]. 
 
 ttoXuS^ov, to, (poet.), town. 
 
 OTTXJOO, I spit [§ 94, 1.]. 
 
 TTCO^Ot 3, beggarly, poor. : 
 
 rvuvof 3, frequent, compact. 
 
 ■rvXn, v, gate, (usually in the 
 Plur.). 
 
 iruv&ocvoftou, [Gen.), I ask, hear of, 
 learn by inquiry [§ 121, 15.]. 
 orvo, orvgos, to, fire. 
 orv^yof, o, tower. 
 
 TU£ooo, I burn (trans.). 
 
 TO) (Enel.), Adv., yet; 
 
 TooXioo, I sell. 
 
 •to f/roTt, Adv., ever. 
 
 ir&i; Adv., how? 
 
 # 
 
 P. 
 
 'P £biof 3, easy. [ Comparison, 
 §52,10.]. 
 piAlouAdv., easily. 
 pivfjott,, - oltos, to, stream. 
 ploo, I flow [§ 116, 2 and § 142, 
 6;— Contr., § 97, 1.]. 
 
 ’PEG [§ 88, 5.]. See <p*pi. 
 priyvupt, I tear, break, rend 
 . C§ 140, 9.]. 
 
 pyjpx, -cot of, to, word, saying. 
 py\TW£, -o^os, o, orator. 
 piyos, -out, to, cold. 
 
 pry ooo, I am cold. [Contr., § 97, 
 
 3 , m 
 
 ptTTseo, I throw. 
 i'iVToo, I throw, hurl. 
 pis, pivot, i, i, nose j Plur ., the 
 nostrils. 
 
 p'r^i piTog, ti, reed. 
 
 polotxxTvXo; 2, rosy-fingered, 
 
 po$ov, to, rose. 
 
 poA, fi, pomegranate. 
 
 plorooXov, to, club. 
 
 pv'pcs, o, rhythm,measure. 
 
 pvcrroL 7 to, I drag about. [ Char. 
 
 § 105, 2.]. 
 
 puvvifu, I strengthen [§ 139, C. 
 
 2.J. 
 
 2 . 
 
 2a \Tty\, -ry/ot, fi, trumpet. 
 aa.’KTiZ } o), 1 blow a trumpet. 
 
 [Char., § 105, 4.]. 
 aoo\TixTY)t, -ov, o, trumpeter. 
 
 <ra»|, aco^KOt, > 7 , flesh. 
 ca r too, 1 load. 
 aoKprit, -h, clear. 
 auQcut, Adv., clearly. 
 afievvvpu, 1 quench, extinguish 
 [§ 139, b. 3 ; Aor. II., 
 §142.]. 
 
 crefixt, to, (only iiiHom. and Ace.), 
 respect, esteem. 
 
 alfoopoxt, I worship, honour, re¬ 
 vere. 
 
 ana-pet, o, earthquake. 
 aiioo, I shake. [Pass, with r, 
 § 95.]. 
 
 aspect, -xot, to, splendour, bril¬ 
 liancy. 
 
 ar\po6, -oLTot, to, sign, monument. 
 ar,pxivoo, I give a sign or signal, 
 signify, hint, indicate. 
 aypiiov, to, sign. 
 ai ya.oo, lam silent. 
 atyy. fj, silence. 
 aibygog, o, iron. 
 aivxori, -tot, to, mustard. 
 aiTot, o, corn, food. 
 aiooorxeo, I am silent. 
 aiooTY), y, silence. 
 aieoTyXog 3, silent. 
 axa.<pot, -ovg, To, (1) trench; (2) 
 ship. 
 
 axtUlot, I scatter, dissipate. 
 axtbxwvpi, I scatter [§ 138, A. 
 1 .]. 
 
 axsxxeo (or axtXeu), I dry up 
 [§ 117, 2 and § 142, 3.]. 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 611 
 
 fxv-TTgov. to, sceptre, staff. 
 vx,icx, f), shadow. 
 
 cxXyfog 3, dry, rough, hard, 
 rude. 
 
 vxoXio's 3, crooked, perverse. 
 uxoTta (axiorsoput), I behold, 
 consider. 
 
 vxoTai, -ov, o, and -ovg, to, dark¬ 
 ness. 
 
 VxdjOTTU, I jest, scoff. 
 cpxm, I smear. [ Contr ., § 97, 3, 
 (a); A or. Pass., \ cphx$w\ 
 co'pioc, bi, wisdom. 
 irotpto'TYis, -ou, o , teacher of elo¬ 
 quence, sophist. 
 co/p is 3, wise. 
 
 fry a Vi 2 >, (Gen.), I am in want 
 [§ 83.]. 
 
 <ry«v/f, -£»?, y, dearth, scarcity, 
 want. 
 
 o-txv'ius, Adv., rarely, seldom. 
 cor olm, I draw [§ 98, (a)]. 
 
 CTi'i^co, 1 SOW. [Per/, eaorogx; 
 
 Aor. Pass. tav$o*v, § 111, 3.]. 
 virGlu, I pour a drink-offering, 
 make a libation, pour out. 
 IImice cTTiv'So/xtx.'i nvi, I make a 
 treaty with any one, (libations 
 of wine usually preceding the 
 conclusion of a treaty), 
 corivbu, I hasten, work earnestly, 
 strive; with the Acc., I acce¬ 
 lerate, urge on. 
 
 cwoubaZ,*), I hasten, am in earnest, 
 work hard, am active. 
 cjrovbouos 3 , zealous, active, ear¬ 
 nest, serious, good, brave. 
 vrouhxioos, Adv., zealously, dili¬ 
 gently, earnestly. 
 crovbr\, h, zeal. 
 cruyojv, -ovos, «, drop. 
 
 CTOlSlOV, TO, Plur. , oi (XTxbiOl or TOO 
 
 o-rodix, ( 1 ) a stade, (6 plethra— 
 600 Greek feet— 125 Roman 
 ■paces) ; (2) a racecourse. 
 vru.0p.os, o, stage, day’s march. 
 errata/, tTrocXa^ou, I drip. [Char ., 
 § 105, 2.J. 
 
 cruaid.Z,u, I am at variance with. 
 ctolcis, -tus, 17 , faction, sedition. 
 -vos, o. ear of corn. 
 
 vreyn, rj, roof, house. 
 vrexxo), I send. [Aor. II. Pass., 
 § 102, 2 and § 114.]. 
 vTtvx^M, I groan. [Char., § 105, 
 
 2-J. 
 
 areoyu, (Acc.), I love ; (Dat.), I 
 am contented with. 
 iTTigeai (nva Tt and Tiva. Tivog), I 
 deprive one of something [§ 122 , 
 16;— Synt., § 160, Obs. 2.]. 
 arsoopou, I am deprived of. 
 ffno'urxw, I deprive of [§ 122, 16.]. 
 arepuvos, o, crown, wreath. 
 Gri(pa,v'M, I crown. 
 arr.Xyi, h, pillar, column. 
 o-T’/igi^eo, I make firm. [Char., 
 § 105, 2.]. 
 
 o-T I prick. [Char., § 105, 2.]. 
 cnxfbw, I glisten. 
 cro’Xvi, i), robe. 
 aripu, -xros, to, mouth, 
 t TTo/Jswupi, trrogvupi, I spread cut 
 [§ 139, b. 4.J. 
 
 Trgxriupx, -oltos, to, army. 
 crrgurivw, I take the field, serve 
 as a soldier; Mid., I am in 
 the field, make war, march. 
 crr/)%ryyos, o , a general. 
 arrounx, n, army, expedition. 
 crr(>a.ri(x)T*ii, -ov, o, soldier. 
 arouTOTsbiCoput, I encamp. 
 
 <7Tga.rb'n'bov, to, cainp r encamped 
 army. 
 
 crr^uTos, o, army. 
 
 <rr£s(->Xou, 1 twist, torture. 
 
 <rr£p<a, I turn. [Aor. Pass. \ar%K- 
 <pnv, iaT^ip0Yiv; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass., § 102, 5.]. 
 argJjvvvpi, I spread out [§ 138, 
 A. 3.]. 
 
 aruysoj, I hate. 
 
 avyyiyvtxjjxco, I think with, agree 
 with ;—auyyiyvchax&> ipaovru, I 
 am conscious ;— auyyiyvucxA 
 nvi, I pardon any one. 
 vvyyvojpuv, -ov, (Gen.), (1) par¬ 
 doning, indulgent ; (2) agree¬ 
 ing with. 
 
 cuyyoxtpu, I describe, write about, 
 s Tuyxoorrt, (1) a cutting short; 
 hence (2) in Gramm. syncope t 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 i. <?. a striking out one or 
 more letters in a word ; (3) a 
 swoon. 
 
 ffuyKuvtxM, I confound, tlirow into 
 confusion. 
 
 ( Dat .), I rejoice with. 
 ovy-^iu, confundo, I pour toge¬ 
 ther, confuse, disturb, 
 t v, fig-tree. 
 
 CV40V, TO, fig. 
 
 c.Xxu (<r<va <r<), I strip or plunder 
 one of something. 
 cv?.Xa/x.fravco, [Dat.), I take in 
 common with, help, succour. 
 cukkt you, I collect. 
 vvkkoyog, o, assembly. 
 
 CJU.frx.ivoo, I go with J— CVfx.frtxivu, 
 
 it happens, results. 
 c vx.fr ovXivw, I advise. 
 c-jufrovkog, o, adviser, counsellor. 
 cjfx.fx.ct^iu. ii, alliance, aid. 
 cjfx.tx.u^os 2-, fighting with; Subst., 
 an ally.. 
 
 Cjfx.rus, -acot, -at, vniversus, all 
 together, the whole. 
 ouu.T /1 yv~ufx.i, I put together, 
 frame, congeal, curdle, com¬ 
 pound, compose. 
 avaottvoo, I drink with. 
 cvfx.nivroo, I fall in with, coin¬ 
 cide with ;— cvfxcrivTu, it hap¬ 
 pens, befalls. 
 
 cv/x.z’oveco, [Dot.'), I labour with, 
 aid, succour. 
 
 cvfx.ir^uTTu, ( Dot .), I do in com¬ 
 mon with, help. 
 
 cvu. ptooo, I bear together with, 
 contribute, am profitable to 
 
 avfx.pt,on, it is advantageous, is 
 expedient. 
 
 cvfx.popx, f), an event, (especially a 
 misfortune). 
 
 cvv, Prep., § 164, 2. 
 
 ovvu.yoovi't ) o[x,ai, X contend with. 
 c vva.i(30[x,ui, (Gen.), I take part in. 
 cwaxrokXvfx.i, I ruin together 
 with ; Mid., 1 go to ruin with 
 any one. 
 
 cvvuofco^co, 1 fit together, adjust, 
 arrange. 
 
 cCvhiortos, o, a companion at 
 table. 
 
 cvvlicftis, o, band, conjunction. 
 cvt rxTfiifroo, I spend time With, 
 live with. 
 
 cvvufx. 1 . Inf. cwsTvat, (Dat.), I am 
 with, associate with. 
 
 CVVil/U.1, Inf. cvvitvxi , (Dat.), I 
 
 come or assemble with. 
 cvvi\ofx.oiou, I make equal to, assi¬ 
 milate. 
 
 cvrzT^'^eopi, I give together with; 
 Mai., I give myself up with 
 others to anything, 
 cw-oyog 2, working with, help¬ 
 ing ; Subst., a helper, fellow- 
 workman. 
 
 i rvvicig, - lug, h, understanding, in¬ 
 telligence. 
 
 xvvsTog 3, sensible, sagacious. 
 cwndua, ij, intercourse, intimacy, 
 society. 
 
 cvvSxttoo, I bury together with. 
 cw^xri, ?i, covenant, treaty. 
 cuv'irifx.i, I understand. 
 cvviCTYifu, X put together j Mid ., 
 
 I collect, unite, bring toge¬ 
 ther. 
 
 cvWioo, X spin, weave together 
 with. 
 
 cvvoiha, I know the same as an¬ 
 other ; cvvoi'Sa IfxuvTM, I am con¬ 
 scious. [Wi.th the Part., § 175, 
 Obs. 2.]. 
 
 CVVTOLTTU, X order, arrange. 
 cwrot%oo, I run with. 
 cvvTvy%uvoo, (1) I meet with ; (2) 
 I happen. 
 
 ov{yy\, -lyyog, i), flute, pipe. 
 cu^ilfroo (cvfiTTu), I whistle. [Char ., 
 § 105, 2.J. 
 
 ct^u, I drag [§ 115.]. 
 cvs, cuts, o , «, sus, boar, pow 
 [§ 45.]. 
 
 tTvazvvtoo, I live in the same tent 
 with, eat with. 
 
 cpa^oo, apxTroo, I slay. [Char., 
 § 105, 2.]. 
 
 cpui^a, i], ball, sphere. 
 cpaiku I cause to fall, trip up, 
 
 * 2 D 2 
 
GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 613 
 
 overthrow, foil, deceive 
 
 U 118-]. 
 
 Qiyyu, I squeeze [§ 106, Obs. 1 
 and § 109.]. 
 
 Adv., very, very much, 
 exceedingly, vehemently. 
 
 *$6opot 3, violent. 
 
 ir/'u.^w, I throb. [Char., § 105, 2 ]. 
 
 rf ugci, b, hammer. 
 
 I loose, open [§ 98, (a)]. 
 0£i'A.x7ot 3, slow, leisurely. 
 
 I save, preserve. [Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass. Atrutr^xt; Aor. 
 Pass, iorcodtjv]. 
 c(~>xx, -uTos, to, the body. 
 
 (Turfy, -fyos, 0 , preserver, saviour. 
 
 [ Foe., § 34 Obs. 1.].- 
 eurn^ix, jj, safety, preservation. 
 c u$qovsu, 1 am of sound mind, 
 am discreet, am temperate. 
 eu$£otr6w, b, sound-mindedness, 
 modesty, wisdom, chastity. 
 ru>$guv 2, of sound mind, pru¬ 
 dent, temperate. 
 
 T. 
 
 T uXawrov, to, talent (a weight), 
 rcikct^os, o , little basket. 
 
 TuXxt, - xivk, -xv, miserable. 
 
 \Decl, § 40, Obs. 1.]. 
 
 <■«$<f, -tus, b, order, rank. 
 
 <rxvuvos 3, low, humble. 
 cYfTs ivou, I humble. 
 vugxrTu, I confuse, disturb, trou¬ 
 ble. 
 
 b, confusion, disturb¬ 
 ance. 
 
 •rurru, I arrange, order [§ 109.]. 
 
 rxfyot, a, bull. 
 
 * u.vroXoy'tot., tautology, repeti¬ 
 
 tion. 
 
 rctQgos, b, trench. 
 tu Z x, Adv., quickly, speedily, 
 soon, perhaps. 
 
 T'ji^sus, Adv., quickly. 
 qru^os, -ot>s, to, quickness. 
 
 Adv., quickly. 
 
 vx^vs, -t7x, -u, quick, swift. 
 
 [Comparison, § 51. I.]. 
 vau't, -to, a, peacock. 
 to {End.), and ; r» — ts, ts — xa.i, 
 
 hot h—an d, as we 11—a s, 
 
 [- Synt ., § 178, 3.]. 
 
 rtivu, I stretch. [ Perf. t(txxx ; 
 Aor. Pass. Ir&tn*; Perf. Mod. 
 or Pass., § 113.]. 
 t u£u, tero, I rub or wear away, 
 weary, weaken. 
 tz7%os, -out, to, wall, fortress. 
 Tix/xxi^u, I shew by a sign, limit, 
 finish; Mid., I set as a bound, 
 decree, infer. 
 
 TtXVOV, TO, child. 
 
 r‘.\iurx7o$ ■ 3, last. 
 
 TiXiUTXU, (1) I end, finish ; (2) I 
 die [tov j3 iov (life) understood ]. 
 TiXiVTYt, b, end, death. 
 
 TiXeu, I accomplish, fulfil [§ 9S, 
 
 (b)]. 
 
 TtXeus, Adv., fully, completely. 
 tsXos, - ovs, to, end. 
 
 TB/XVU, I cut, divide, ravage 
 
 B 117.]. 
 
 Ttpxs, -xto{, to, wonder, prodigy, 
 monster. [ Decl., § 39, Obs.]. 
 rfyoru, I delight, amuse; tioto- 
 [xou, ( Dat .), I amuse myself, 
 delight in, or I am delighted. 
 TiTgxivu, I bore [§ 111, Obs. 2.]. 
 TtTTil, -7yos. o, cicada, tree- 
 grasshopper. 
 
 ts^vxo/xxi, Pep. Mid. A contrive, 
 perform skilfully. 
 
 Tifcvn, b, art, skill. 
 
 Ti^viTns, - ov, o, artist. 
 tyixu, I melt ( trans.); Mid. (with 
 Aor. II. and Put. 11. Pas*., 
 § 103, Obs. 1.), I melt ( intrans .), 
 am dissolved. 
 
 tv\\ixo7)tos , -xvty\, - ovto , so great, 
 of such an age [§ 60.]. 
 
 T?)\o0i, Adv., afar. 
 tyiXov, [Gen.), Adv., far from, 
 afar. 
 
 Tiri(?x, b, tiara, turban. 
 rifafu, I put, place, appoint, 
 hold or reckon as, ordain, ar¬ 
 range, propose (as a prize), 
 make, render, assign; Mid., 
 I lay up for myself, make or 
 prepare for myself ;—vopous t<- 
 ' 6ia$xi, to enact laws [§ 133.]. 
 
614 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 ntyvriy f), nurse. 
 
 r.xru, I beget, produce [§ 123.]. 
 
 I pluck [§ 115.]. 
 
 Tipxu, I honour, esteem, value. 
 r7/u.fi, fi, honour. 
 
 vifuos 3, honoured, esteemed, pre¬ 
 cious. 
 
 ri^u^euy (Dat.), I help, avenge ; 
 Mid. (Acc.), I revenge myself 
 on any one. 
 
 rJpufix, 1 7, punishment. 
 
 «■'»». I atone, pay; Mid ., I 
 avenge myself,'punish [§ 119. 
 4.J. 
 
 rir^uu, I pierce, bore [§ 96, Obs. 
 
 i.]. 
 
 nr^utrxa, I wound [§ 122, 17.]. 
 Tahmi, I bear, suffer [§ 135, 7.]. 
 <roi, ( Enel .), Adv., (a strengthen¬ 
 ing Particle), indeed, cer¬ 
 tainly. 
 
 ' / ^ 
 roiyx^, rotyxgroi, roiyxgouv, SO 
 
 then, therefore [§ 178, 9.]. 
 rolwv, therefore, then [§ 178, 9.]. 
 
 <ro7o; 3, of such a nature ; (ro7o; _ 
 
 oios, talis — qualis, such—as). 
 •roiosh 3, such, of such a nature. 
 •roioL/ro; 3, tails, such [§ 60.]. 
 roX/xxu, I dare, venture, under¬ 
 take. 
 
 rl,\iv(xx, -a.ro;, ro, arrow. 
 roster), y\, archery. 
 f'\ov, ro, bow. 
 
 rloros, o, position, place ;—o pt- 
 roc^h ro-ros , the intervenin'' 
 space. ° 
 
 roaog, SO great; (roro;—or os, tail- 
 tus—quantus, so great— as). 
 rorovro; 3, tantus, so great [§ 60.]. 
 rirs, Adv., then. 
 rgxyixos 3, tragic. 
 r(.ocyis, o, he-goat. 
 r^xyoJbcx, fj, tragedy. 
 roxviX», fj, table. 
 r^rco, I turn ; Mid., I turn my- 
 self ; (2) I turn for myself, ( i. e. 
 
 I put to flight). [Aor. er^x, 
 
 tr^‘\pxy,yiv, ir^ep^v ; ir^xoro/xyiv, 
 troxonjv ; Perf. Act., rirgotpx ; 
 Per/. Mid. or Pass., rerpx/x- 
 § 102, 4, 5.]. 
 
 r^ipu, I rear, support, nourish. 
 [Put. fyiyj/co ; Aor. eV^id-a ; 
 Perf. rir^oQx, § 102, 3; Perf. 
 Mixl. or Pass., rt^x^axt, § 102 , 
 5 ; A or. Pass., ir^xtpnv (rareiy 
 ie^tp^v), § 102, 2.]. 
 
 r^x*>, 1 run [§ 126, 6.]. 
 
 rfiev, I tremble [§ 98, (b)]. 
 r^tHu, I rub [§ 107.]. 
 r^riZ*i;, -fyous. k, trireme. [Decl. 
 and Accent, § 42. ]. 
 
 I chirp. [Char., § 105, 
 
 rfvous, -own, Gen., -oro^os, three- 
 legged ; Subst., a tripod. 
 rfoorxiov, ro, trophy. 
 r^ooros, o, (1) turn, way; (2) 
 
 manner ; (3) character, dispo¬ 
 sition (turn of mind). 
 r^vpxXux, fi, helmet. 
 
 roup-71, f), luxury, effeminacy. 
 r£vp7irri;,-ov,o, luxurious, riotous, 
 voluptuous; (Subst., a volup¬ 
 tuary). 
 
 rgcuyco, I gnaw. [Fut., r^o/xxi ; 
 Aor., erguyov). 
 
 rvy^xvu, I happen, befal; with 
 the Gen., I hit, obtain [§ 121, 
 16.].— With the Part., §175, 
 3. 
 
 rv/xSo;, o, tomb. 
 rvrru, I strike. 
 
 rugxwis, -/Saj, absolute power. 
 rvgxvvos, l, monarch, tyrant. 
 rvi^n, f), crowd, disorder. 
 rvpXou), 1 make blind. 
 
 'h fortuna, casus, fortune, 
 chance, (in the Plur. usuady 
 =nnsfor tunes). 
 
 T. 
 
 ' r t<xxiv6o;, o, hyacinth. 
 ufiffuv, <Acc.)A am haughty to¬ 
 wards, ina treat, insult. 
 vfi^s, -tooi, ij, insolence, outrage, 
 haughtiness. 
 
 dfigirr'/is, -oi>, o', an insolent man. 
 uytx'ivcj, I am in good health. 
 
 vhxros, ro, water [§47, 10.]. 
 v't os. o, son. 
 
 vkxkovu, (Dat.), I obey. 
 
Greek—English vocabulary. 
 
 X an at hand, am, am 
 for, serve as, belong to. 
 bvrt%'nrrfipi, I remove; Mid., I 
 come out from, withdraw 
 from, avoid. 
 v*i£, Prep., § 166, 3. 
 v9ri^a.‘To6vr\a'Ku, (Gen.'), I die for 
 some one. 
 
 vvriooi%Qo[/.<xi, I am much grieved. 
 b*i^(b<zXXu, I throw beyond, ex¬ 
 ceed, excel. 
 bortofieta-U, v, trespass. 
 b-rt^tpoLvoi 2, haughty, arrogant. 
 uTi^o^a.M, I look, over, despise. 
 vire^av, -ov, high-minded, 
 haughty, proud. 
 vT'/igiTtiv, (Dat.), I aid, serve. 
 bvia%viof/,cti, X promise [§ 120, 
 3.]. c 
 
 vwof, o, sleep. 
 
 VT 0, sub, [Prep., § 167, 7 .]. , 
 
 b ! roy^a.(f>ri, k, (1) subscription; 
 (2) sketch ; (3) paintiug under 
 (of the eyelids). 
 
 virblnpoo, - aro;, to , sandal, shoe, 
 (that which is bound under 
 the foot, biro, leu). 
 viroPsiTK, -s us, >), foundation, hy¬ 
 pothesis, supposition. 
 
 •jirofievu, (Acc.), I await, endure. 
 brope^u, I endure. 
 biro%ugeu . I go back, withdraw. 
 ItjTi.Qcuot 3, following. 
 limbos 3, later, following. 
 vipxivu, I weave. [Per/, vpayxa ; 
 Per/. Mid. or Pass, 'bpcca- 
 pooi\. 
 
 l.ypoi, -ou s, tc, height, eleva¬ 
 tion. 
 
 bftu. I elevate, exalt. 
 
 Zu 1 rain. [Pass. with a, 
 §95.]. 
 
 *>Arn. See \aQiu. 
 
 (pctftvu, 1 shew, disclose ; AT id., I 
 appear [§ 113.]; —pxlvopott with 
 the Part, and Inf, § 175, Obs. 
 
 3. ... 
 
 <puH£6( 3, manifest, plain, evi¬ 
 dent. 
 
 61? 
 
 pxopxxov, to, drug, remedy. 
 
 Qxtrxu, I assert, allege, suppose 
 [§ 122, 18.]. 
 
 tpavXos 3, worthless, bad, evil. 
 
 <pg ilopott, Dep. Mid., (Gen.), I 
 spare, save. 
 
 <pevxZ, -axo;, o, quack, impostor. 
 <psou, fero, I bear, bring [89, Obs. 
 and § 126, 7.]. 
 
 QiCyu, (Acc.), fugio, I flee, avoid, 
 shun. [Fat., § 116, 2; Aor. 
 
 efti/yov]. 
 
 p*pi, I say [§ 126, 8 Inflexion, 
 
 § 135, 8.]. _ 
 
 (pfiavco , I anticipate. [Formation 
 of the Tenses, § 119, 5.— With 
 the Part., § 175, 3, and page 
 231 (note)]. 
 
 ph'tgu, 1 destroy [§111, 3.— Perf. 
 Act. e ptyx; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass. ep6oc.^pu.t ; Put. Pass, 
 p^oooyj < 7 opooi and A or. II. Pass. 
 iQ0<xorp> in the sense of’’ perire ’ ]. 
 <p0ov£u'(Dat.), I. envy. 
 p6ovos, o, envy. 
 qnoiXv, ft, drinking-cup. 
 ptXxv^uiroi 2, loving mankind, 
 philanthropic. 
 
 QiXiu, I love. 
 pi'xla, ti, friendship. 
 p'tXios 3, friendly. 
 ptXoxegl/js, -'-Si fond of gain. 
 
 <f. ikop<x.t}-!)s, -b$, fond of learning. 
 pixilivos 2, hospitable. 
 ptxo? 3, doar, beloved. [ Compa¬ 
 rison, § 50, Obs. 1.].— Subst., 
 a friend. 
 
 piXoTopeu, I philosophize. 
 piXofc/>'/ipo<7uv7i, ft , avarice, cove* 
 tousness 
 
 pxui^u, I bubble. [Char., § 105, 
 
 2 .]. 
 
 Qofieu, I frighten; Mid., (with 
 Aor. Pass.), I am afraid, 
 fear. 
 
 plfoos, o, fear ;—pbfloi i%u pi, I 
 am afraid. 
 
 pomxioi (-oo$) 3, purple. 
 poiroLu, I go to and fro. 
 povAs, -loos, b, murderer. 
 povtvu, I murder, slay. 
 
€16 
 
 GREEK—ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 f'vos, o, murder, slaughter. 
 
 ■ippo&b, «i pasture, food. 
 fo^eeo, I carry, wear. 
 
 Qkwl ’ -07«f> b, lyre, harp. 
 
 I declare, make known, 
 say, utter [§ 110.]. 
 tub », -tv os, by Plur. (Pgsns, the 
 ua derstanding, the mind. 
 f)£iacr u (jpfirrw), (1) I bristle; 
 
 (2) I shudder [§ 104, 2, (/?)]. 
 tfivem, I think ;— fieyot. (proven, I 
 am haughty. 
 
 ff-.w (Ati. 2, thoughtful, prudent. 
 fyonril'a), [Gen.), I care for, trou¬ 
 ble myself about; (Acc.), I 
 meditate on, think about 
 [$ 83.}. 
 
 foov rls, -t'Zos. by care, concern. 
 fvX a.xri, h, guard, watch. 
 uA.«g, -oixog, o, a guard, guardian. 
 fyA-arr*/, I guard, watch, keep, 
 protect; Mid. [Acc.), I guard 
 against any one. 
 fuoyifAx, -a.ros, ro, breath. 
 f^ jcns. -tut, b, nature. 
 ifiiTiuu, I plant. 
 
 q<ju>, I bring forth, produce; Perf. 
 
 ( intrans .), I am by nature, 
 am, am formed so and so 
 [§ 142, 10 }. 
 
 np^vsfo, I produce a sound, speak, 
 address. 
 
 i t, voice, language. 
 
 Qugos) o, thief. 
 
 I detect. [ Formation of 
 die Tenses , § 96, 3.]. 
 
 (Qurof, TO, light. 
 
 X. 
 
 X */'»», I gape, yawn. 
 
 {Dad.), I rejoice, delight 
 in [§ 125, 23.]. 
 a oo, I looseii [§ 98, (a)]. 
 ^aAewo's 3, molestus, troublesome, 
 difficult, annoying, oppressive. 
 fco-Xtsrwf, Adv., with difficulty. 
 ^aA.7»o'f, o, bridle. 
 
 £«a*o'j, o, brass. 
 
 \zXksos (-0V{), Aa. ( ?), •*ov (-o^v), 
 
 brazen* 
 
 -ftf-o-oe, -f», graceful. [ Dec! 
 §40, Obs. 1.]. 
 
 %ag,evrtus, Adv., gracefully. 
 Xtz^ouxt. ( Dat .), T . gratify, com¬ 
 pliment, favour. 
 
 ^ao/j,-iVo?, b, favour, kindness, 
 gratitude, grace, elegance. 
 
 %<xcrxu, I open the mouth; Per f. 9 
 1 gape [§ 122, 19.]. 
 %n/u.uv, -oiivos, o, winter. 
 
 X-‘(t -fs, by hand, [ Decl ., § 3«>, 
 Obs. 2.]. 
 
 X f -ifonxt, I overpower, master, 
 subdue. 
 
 p^ikilwv, -o'voy, b , swallow. [Decl., 
 § 35, Obs. 3.]. 
 xe/», I pour out [§ 116, 2.]. 
 y''/)P00J, 1 deprive, rob, bereave. 
 
 Adv., yesterday. 
 
 X^uv, -ovoj, by earth, ground, soil. 
 X‘T^v, -uvosy o, tunic, coat 
 X t( *>v, -o vos, b, snow. 
 
 "Xoivs, x°&ft a Greek liquid- 
 measure ( about 3 quart*). 
 [Decl., § 41 .}, 
 
 Xo'^uos 3, pertaining to swine. 
 Xokoofzat, I am angry. 
 
 X^°ty °y gall, bitterness, anger, 
 xo^vu, I dance. 
 
 X°^fy °y dance. 
 
 xow, I heap up. [Pass, with r, 
 § 99, Obs. 3.1. 
 
 xfojjua. 1 , Dep. Mid., ( Dat .), utor, 
 I use, employ, enjoy, treat, 
 have dealings with any one. 
 [§ 96, Obs. ; Contr., § 97, 3, 
 (a);— Pass, with a, § 99, Obs. 
 3.}. 
 
 X^y I give an oracle. [§ 98, 
 Obs. ;— Contr., §97, 3, (a) ;— 
 Pass, with tr, § 99, Obs. 3.]. 
 X*'-‘a, by usus, (1) use ; (2) need ; 
 (3) association. 
 
 xfy it is necessary [§ 135, 2.]. 
 X(f}X> M y [Gen.), I need, am in want 
 of. 
 
 xfip-ty -ares, rb, thing; Plur., 
 property, money, riches. 
 Xtbrip*s 3, useful, serviceable, 
 X^7/xo<rv»tt, b , need, poverty. 
 
GREEK- ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 617 
 
 X^vtU 3, useful, serviceable, 
 pood, brave. t 
 
 X A U , 1 grazo, sting; and xf u ' 
 ’l smear over, anoint. [ Pass, 
 with cr, § 94, 1, and § 95.]. 
 
 X oivoi, o, time. „ 
 
 y*ovaiov, to, {diminutive of z° va ’°s) 
 "gold. c 
 
 aos , •» g°^- . ~ . 
 
 Xtfnos {-ois), -U (-?), -«•» (-‘H, 
 golden. 
 
 X QG)f/.a,, -Sltos, to, (1) skm ; (-) co- 
 
 lour. . « qa 
 
 x *vwjfAi, I colour, stam |_S A 5J, 
 
 c. 3.]. 
 
 yc foa, fi, country, region. 
 x ffi s , {Gen), Adv., separately, 
 apart from, without. 
 
 X ugifffAos, o, separation. 
 
 w. 
 
 {Gen.), I touch. [Pass, 
 with a-, § 95.]. 
 
 ^ xv, I rub. [Pass, with a 
 Contr., § 97, 3, (a)]. 
 
 *J/syv, I blame. 
 
 <,.ivhr)$, As, false. 
 tpijfiogKos 2, perjured ; to 
 xov, false oath. 
 
 ■J/'vlos, -ovs, to, a lie. 
 
 I cheat, deceive ; Mid., 1 
 
 lie [§ 110.]. 
 
 \ptucrr*is, -ov, o. liar. 
 
 ^w'ot, o, wasp. 
 
 -aTHt ra » decree, reso¬ 
 lution. 
 
 ■4,v X n, ft, soul, spirit. 
 
 \pd X °5, ~ovs, to, Cold. 
 
 SI. 
 
 {fib), fi, song. 
 
 oj Jew, I push. [§ 124, 6; Aug. f 
 § 87, 4.]., 
 
 aiKvq, -ux, -v, quick. 
 ufxos, o, shoulder. 
 
 uviopai, I buy. [Aug., § 87, 4.]. 
 See vgtxaOai. 
 
 vvios 3, venalis, for sale ; t* «w«, 
 market-wares. 
 
 vov, to, ovum, egg. 
 
 {Prep.), ad, to, § 165, 3 * 
 
 that, § 180, 2j—in order 
 that, § 181 as, when, 
 
 § 183, 2, a as,, because, 
 since, § 184, 1;—a s, h i k e 
 a s, § 187, 1; with the Part., 
 § 176, Obs. 2;—about {with 
 indefinite expressions of Num¬ 
 ber) j—ioi txx^tx, quam celei 
 rime, as quickly as possible, as 
 soon as. 
 
 Urn Adv., as, just as, as it 
 were. [Synt., § 187, !•]• 
 vsTt, so that, [§ 186]; as, [b 187, 
 
 ■hpixux, fi, advantage, profit, be¬ 
 nefit. 
 
 ipttiv, {Acc), I benefit. _ 
 
 Vtempos 2, useful, beneficial. 
 
 v*Z s , b, eye, face, count©* 
 mince. 
 
IT. ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 A. 
 
 Abandon, cxXetrc/v; or^oXtirciv ; 
 
 xxrxXctvctv j coriXc'ioruv ; xQtcvxt. 
 abide, uvxt ; $/xrf (Is/v. 
 
 -- by, Txgx/xemv (Dat .) ; ip- 
 
 ftevttv (Dat.). 
 ability, 'hvvxfxtg, -tvs, fi. 
 able, to be, ^Cvxaffxt (with A or. 
 Pass.) ; ta^Zctv j otovrt uvxt ; 
 e%uv (with Inf.). 
 abolish, x6uv. 
 
 abounding in, cuorogog 2 (Gen.). 
 j bout, ? rtg'i; xfc<pi : (with Nume¬ 
 rals) cis ; xfjt.fi • Tigi. 
 
 -,to be (=intend), fitXXuv. 
 
 above (=beyond), iri s . 
 abroad, to travel, xto^v/xc7v. 
 absent, xtIiv, -ovax , -ov. 
 
 -- > to be, xTctvxt ; (=to be 
 
 from home), xto^vi/uiTv. 
 abstain from, xore^iaSxt (Gen.); 
 
 — one must abstain from, x<Dcx- 
 
 _ / > \ 7 1 
 
 rsov ctrrt(v). 
 
 abundance, x<p6ov'ix, fj ; (=wealth), 
 tXovtos, o. 
 
 accompany, tTiaHau. 
 accomplish (= perform), x<ro- 
 ouxvvaSxi ; \\c^yx^ca6xt ; xvvctv ; 
 (•—linish), xvvctv ; nXuv; 'Stx- 
 tsXciv ; Tc^x'tvctv] (=effect), hx- 
 irf<r<na6xt ;— (a journey ), xx- 
 
 T XVVCtV. 
 
 accosting to, in accordance with, 
 
 xxrx ; fjbcrx. 
 
 according to law, vo/xi/xus. 
 account of, on, $** j Ivsxx ; vvlp ; 
 
 X^tv. 
 
 account, on this, nun. 
 
 accuse of, y^etrfiai; xanr/o^Tt ; 
 otdjxuv. 
 
 accused, to be, <pc&yuv (Gen.). 
 accuser, xxrbyooog, i. 
 accustom, M%m. 
 accustomed, to be, uuttvxt. 
 achieve, xorohi'txvuaSxi ; 
 
 aOxt ; 'btxvftx.rrcaPai; xvvctv. 
 
 acquainted with, to be, cMvxt; 
 
 WtaTxvSxt (Dep. Pass.). 
 acquire, xrxaSxt ; vrgogTotuclfxi j 
 (by lot), Xxy^xvuv. 
 acquisition, xryjngy -tut, h. 
 acquit, xtoXvuv. 
 across, passage, <rx^o S , ft. 
 act, an, v^xi-ts, -cuts, rj ; <r^xy/xx t 
 -Xros, ro (=work), cfyov, to. 
 
 -~,to, wgxmtv ; fyxv. 
 
 action. See act. 
 active, c<rouhx7os 3. 
 add, TgosToistv ; orposrtSlvut ; it/- 
 Tt(cvxi. 
 
 addition to, in, orgis. 
 administer, hotxsTv; roXtnvuv. 
 administration, good, cuvo/xlx , sj. 
 administrator, to be an, oixuv. 
 admirable, Dxufxxaros 3. 
 admire, 6xvfxxXuv\ ctyxvOx/. 
 adorn, xoafttTv; xyxXXuv; aaxtTv. 
 
 ~■ with (=invest), a/xtyttwu- 
 
 vxt (rtvx ti ). 
 adult, rexttos 3. 
 
 advance, to, ixjiuivuv ; or^xlvuv; 
 !)£fxxo-$x/; 2ice%ia0x/. 
 
 advantage, dnpeXux, fj ; ovnatf, 
 
 b. 
 
 -, an, xyxtov , to, 
 
 ' ~ of, for the, orgcs. 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 619 
 
 advantage from anything, to de¬ 
 rive, xorokxxniv Tivog ti. 
 
 ——, to be of, avp<piguv ( Dat .) ; 
 _ of what advantage is it ? t! 
 crvpcpegu; 
 
 advantageous, x^aipot 3; xz*- 
 
 CTog 3 , uftkipog 2 . 
 
 advice, (boukri, i?. 
 
 advise, (b ouktvut ; ffvp$ov\ivut(Tivi). 
 adviser, aupfbavkos, o. 
 affair, -rgxypx. -xtos, to. 
 affected (well), tvvoug, -cut. 
 affirm, <p<xvou [§ 126, 8.]. 
 affliction, ora.6og, -ovs, to. 
 afford, Taoi%nv ; orag s^ltr^a/. 
 afraid, to be, Qo(buc6ou>with Aor. 
 
 Pass. (Acc.) ; SiS«i*s»a< Mcc.). 
 after, (Prep.), pira. ;_«*• 
 
 (Conj.), Uni ; iorudfi. 
 
 -, yKSwj. ), . , 
 
 afterwards, 'ivuTx ; psn-Turx ; 
 
 y£TTS£OV. 
 
 again, ; <raX/». ^ > , 
 
 against, avid; ^os; »<f; i<JFt » 
 
 X.XTX. 
 
 age ( =cetas ), nkixia, ft- 
 
 -, (old), yr.gxs, to [§ 39, Obs.]. 
 
 3 -/ 7 * V ' ^ •- % 
 
 agreeable, -!?«, -u. 
 agriculture, ytugylx, h- ~ 
 aid. to, (bowiut ; toragxuv ; ffvpQt- 
 
 gut. 
 
 alarm, to, *ar xorkriTTuv. 
 alike, (^dv.), rc , 
 
 all, *raf, ?racr«, <rav ; acraf (_§ 4U.J. 
 alleviate, iorixovQiZut; (grief)* 6i- 
 gxorivut. 
 
 alliance, avppnx'u*-* h. 
 allow, lit to allow one to en¬ 
 joy anything, piTubibbvou nvi 
 
 mug. 
 
 allowable, it is, t%urTi(t) (Dat.). 
 ally, an, euppa-xos, o. 
 almost, cr^sSov ; bkiyou duv. 
 alone, pbvos 3 ; Adv. , povot. 
 already, n$#. 
 also, *«/. 
 
 altar, &up«s, «• / 
 
 alter, piTXTiiitai ; ptra\\a.rrut 
 (Char, y) ; ptTpfidkXut. 
 alternately, *» pk u > 
 although, xav (=jc'/.t ucv)-, u hcu ; 
 xuiong (with P(X) t. ). 
 
 always, xii ;—to be always doing 
 so and so, hanktit, tAyut or 
 'bixyiyti(j6xi (with Pal t.y ^ I/O, 
 3.). 
 
 am. See be. _ f 
 
 ambassador, <rgtcr(biVTfis t -ov, • £ 
 Plur., oi vrgeafbug. 
 ambitious, tpikbripog 2. 
 amid, it ; crag*. 
 among, ev; pira. 
 amputate, aoronptut. 
 amuse oneself, ngrtaffeti, with 
 Aor. Pass. (Dat.). 
 ancestors, orgoyiyunpivoif oi ; ergo- 
 yovoi , oi. 
 
 ancient, orakaios 3. ^ / 
 
 and, xx \;—and not, xai ou (pri) > 
 oubt (pv'be), § 178, Obs. 2. 
 anger, ogyr\, n ; x' oXo ^ 0 » Cvpog,o. 
 angry to be, egyi&o-tteu. 
 
 _ with to be, ax^^ a ‘ > ** 
 
 ogyyi tx ity (4CC.). 
 animal, Zfiot, to. 
 announce, xyyfkkui 
 annually, xar ‘irog. 
 anoint, ikutyut ; XV U ' , ‘ 
 another (—alius), xkkog, *«, •« . 
 
 (=.alter), ‘Ingas 3. 
 another’s, belonging to another, 
 ukkoTgiog 3. 
 ant, pugpvfe,, -n*og, o, 
 any longer, sri. 
 any one, ng (End.). 
 anything, t) (Enel.). 
 any where, nov (End .); \} n a 
 sentence with a negative, oIjx* 
 P»u\. 
 
 apparel, \cGng, -frog, n. 
 appear, <pxivurfai (with Aor. //• 
 Pass.). 
 
 appetite, yxerrrig, ‘Tgbg t h ;—the 
 appetites, fi^ovxi, al. 
 appoint, d.To'btixtvtxi ; xx^ictcoxi ; 
 —to appoint anything to one, 
 
 OgiZyllt. 
 
 apprehend (=seize), aukkapfa* 
 
 VUV. 
 
 approach, to, <rX»sva£«v; argoshvou* 
 approbation, 'box.ipuo-ia, 
 aj)!irove of, Wxm7v. 
 arciier, tortus, -ov, b. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 20 
 
 rchery, rsl'ixv, 
 
 ( I'dour, Ciroubr), fj ; (ZpocQ, o. 
 rgument, key os, o. 
 arise (=happen), yiynafut. 
 armament, ffrokos, o ; arcana, f) \ 
 ffrgxrbs. o. 
 
 arms (=weapons), ovkx, tx. 
 army, ct^xtix, fi \ ct^xtos, o f 
 aT^xnvpa, -xrog, to. 
 around, <nfi ; op.fi. 
 arouse, xvtarxvxi. 
 
 arrange, Siararrsiv j covTarruv : 
 (-=flt together), awx^p'oTTuv j 
 avp.rnyvvvai. 
 
 arrest, to, avkkapfbxvuv. 
 arrive, wxuv ; •vx^Avxi. 
 
 &i rogant, vfboiGrrjs, -ov ; vvi^tp^uv, 
 -«v; vvigriQdvos 2. 
 l'OW, TO^iVpx, -OLTOg, TO. 
 r t, Ti^VTI, Y]. 
 
 rtincer, i^yxarbg, -oi , o ‘ t^yxrvg, 
 -ov, o. 
 
 i'tist, Tt^VlT^g, -OV, 0. 
 
 •s, us ; ugvtg ; (=since), ion!. 
 i if, us ( with Part.). 
 long as, tug ; tusvi^. 
 much, ToaouTog 3 [§ 60.]. 
 
 often as, OVOTi OTXV ", 0V0TUV 
 
 [see § 183.]. 
 
 > soon as, US rxg^iaroo. 
 
 ' well as, xxl — xxt. 
 
 cend the throne, t!s r*iv /bxai- 
 
 kuxv xxTXTrrjvxi. 
 
 Certain, s rvvHavujQat. 
 shamed, to be, a'lhuaQai [§ 98, 
 (b)] with A or. Pass., (Acc.); 
 ai<rx > vvio6xi, with Aor. Pass., 
 (Acc.) 
 
 ask, E’lPOMAI • IguTxv (nvx ti ) ; 
 
 XiTllv (TIVX Tl) ; XVXiTii V (tIVX 
 
 Ti); (for oneself), xiruaCat. 
 aspire after, otfyurQxi (Gen.); hph- 
 v6xi {Gen.')’, Sfcvxtiv (Acc.). 
 
 .assert, tpxrui [§ 126, 8.]. 
 assist, vx^xcTrjvxi ; avpvovt/v , 
 (=defend), xpvvtm. 
 
 Assign to, vepav ‘ xaravepiiv ; 5<- 
 
 iovxt ; Tifevxi. 
 
 associate with, bptkut (Dat.); 
 avtiivui (Dat All ’vrxxokovdtZ* 
 (Dat.). 
 
 assured, to be (—believe), »««- 
 
 £s/v; r,yu(r^xi. 
 astonish, xaTxvkbrvu u 
 at, orxftx ; iv. 
 attack, an, orgosfZokf), %. 
 attack, to, iviTiUtaSai (Dat.) ; 
 ivttvxi (Dat.). 
 
 attempt, to, vui>a<r( f at (Gen. or 
 Inf), Dep. Pass. [Verbal Adj. 
 vri/gxreov] ; Vvr^uouv. 
 attend to, \vtpski7a^at ( Gen.) t 
 Dep. Pass.; (p^ovri^uv (Gen.). 
 attractive, iv^x^is, -7ros. 
 audible, xxovttos 3. 
 auditor, xx^oxTns, -ov, o. 
 author,a/V<af, b ;—tobethe author 
 of many advantages, irtkk&t 
 
 KyxPtoV XiTIOS XXTXPTfjvxl. 
 
 authority, royal, (bxvtkux, »j. 
 avail, 'buvxadxt • ItXvuv. 
 avarice, <piko^npoavir/i, b ; tptkx/s - 
 yv^ix, fj ; (=covetousness), 
 
 orktovit'ix, ij. 
 
 avaricious, vksovixTrif, -ov, b. 
 avert, aror^evsiv ; xke^uv’, ipvvut, 
 avoid, tp'zvytiv (Acc.). 
 await, v^ogboxxv ; vvopevut, 
 awake, to be, iy^riyo^evxi. 
 awaken, iysl^uv, xvittxvxi. 
 away-, to lead, xTxyuYy 
 
 -, to flee, o'lfciaiui (Qsvyuv [§ 175^ 
 
 3.]. 
 
 B. 
 
 Back, otivu J — go back, iorava- 
 fcuguv ;—send back, a voirsfiTM ; 
 —i-eceive back, dvokxfA(bxvtn. 
 bad, xxxos 3; vovn^og 3; (=con- 
 temptible), <pxvkog3. 
 bad, the (in the abstract), rt. 
 ball, a<put/)a, b. 
 
 banish, ifykavvuv ; ixfbxkkut; av*» 
 6iiv. 
 
 banter, orai^uv. 
 barbarian, a, (bx^fba^os, 1. 
 base, Tavuvog 3 ; xaxcg 3; orovif 
 ?bg 3. 
 
 basket, x&vtov (=xavovv ), tre J-* 
 little basket, Txkx^os, o. 
 bathe oneself, kovtaiai. 
 battle, pdxffl, i) ; ctyjjt, -untg, it 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 621 
 
 be, uvai i yryncrSat ; tura^t/v; t X u» 
 with an Adv. 
 
 _angry with, l» b^yTi £%£iv(A cc.). 
 
 _at leisure, cr X oXa^nv. 
 
 _at war with. <7toXifAi7v ( Dat.). 
 
 _distant from, u.n&x, in (Gen.). 
 
 — eager, avrtvhiv. 
 
 — here, <ru£i7va.i. 
 
 — insufficient, hhw; t X tiv. 
 
 — sufficient, IxavZg t X nv* 
 
 — there, ora^dvai. 
 
 — therewith, oroogi7vxi. 
 
 — underneath, vm7voci. 
 
 — well, tv i'z e/r - 
 
 — with, (rvvtivxi. 
 
 bear (= carry), <p£ouv; < peotT*; 
 
 (iocar&^uv ; (=endure), i p'^uv; 
 
 VTt<pt^tlV J VTO/ASVUV J T?.yjvdl ’, 
 
 (=bring forth, produce), <pv u»; 
 ivetpuuv ; t’ixtuv. 
 
 .-about, 
 
 -witness, (ao-^tvouv. 
 
 beast (wild), 6r\o, o'; Hn^ov, 
 
 TO. 
 
 beat, xgovsi*. 
 
 beautiful, xaXcg 3. y 
 
 _, the (i» £/*<? abstract), xuXov, 
 
 t 
 
 TO. 
 
 beautifully, 
 
 beauty, *«Aoy, to ; kxXXos, -ovf, to. 
 because, on ; 'hibn ; art. 
 
 __ of, t o (with Inf.)* 
 
 become, ylyvifff at. 
 becomes, it, (=is becoming to), 
 *eoiY)Ku (Dat .); (Dat.). 
 
 becoming, i -ovtru, -ov. 
 
 .-, it is, T^oiriKti (Dat .); 
 
 or£< (Dat.).' 
 befall, or^os^orniv. 
 befitting, or^ogviAuv, -ovaa, -ov. 
 before, ; (=in the presence 
 
 of) u’?; **£»*• , 
 
 - (Conj.), or^/y [§ 183> 3, and 
 
 Ob8. ] , <T£Cn£OV. 
 
 beforehand, to observe, <r^ovot7v. 
 beg oft, \\onTua6n. 
 beget, rtxvtiv. , , 
 
 be nn, fan*!** (Gen., or a<rc, t* 
 with Gen.) ; Aytfrfc, (<?«*.); 
 ( =set about), a-mot'ai (Gen.). 
 
 begin to degenerate, (/.irafioXb t*' 
 
 to xcixov Xa.f/.(ha.vuv. 
 
 beginning, h* 
 
 behalf of, in, bveo. 
 behind, brlau ; —to leave behind, 
 xetTaXi'iTtiv. 
 
 oeiug, to come into, ytyvurfut. 
 believe (=imagine), 'hoxuv ; (=1)0 
 persuaded by), vrutitrtcu, with 
 A or. Pass. (Dat.) ; (—fiden* 
 habere), mcmvuv (Dat.) ; m* 
 TotStva, (Dat.) ; (=think), hy^ 
 cdai j vo/ai^uv ; 'Sox.tT(Dat.). 
 believe in the gods, (tou.; y o^u* 
 believed, to be, *nmvia6xt. 
 belly, yacrrfy, "r£o(, i). 
 belonging to, o\xt7o$ 3 ; ’D‘»s 3. 
 beloved, to be. See to love, 
 benefactor, ibt^ytrm, -ov, b. 
 beneficence, tbs^yteria, h. 
 beneficial, apiXipos 2; xtfnpot 
 
 3 ; xzyxr’roi 3 . 
 
 benefit, to, upiXuv (Acc.); on- 
 voLvat (Acc ) ; tvi^ytruv (Acc.). 
 
 ---,a, tvioyiata, r) ' r %/xott, -iros r 
 
 j, ; —to confer a benefit, tbsoyt- 
 
 TUV (_<4CC. ). 
 
 bereave, an^t7v ; a-r ocrigt7v (tiux 
 nvog and nvos t<) ; 
 
 (nva. n). 
 
 beside, (with Dat.) ; 
 besides, In ; tX^v. 
 besiege. woXio^xii v. 
 best. See good. 
 
 -,to be the, a^crrtvnv.^ 
 
 bestow, 'biliviu ; b-ru^uv; tora.ffx.u* 
 (nvi nvog). 
 better. See good, 
 betimes, tblb? 
 betray, or^i^ovat. 
 betrayer, <r^brvig, -ot>, i* 
 between, y-iraiv (Gen.). 
 beware of, <puX&ma6at (Acc.) , 
 ivXct(bt7a(lot,i (ACC.). 
 beyond, Prep., ^ 
 
 --- desert, a^iav. 
 
 bid, xtXtbuv (with Acc. and Inf.)* 
 
 bind, crvvixirruv ; "heuv. 
 
 bird, fyvtg, -76og, o, hi birds; 
 
 TTVIVOL. 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 birth (=descent), yivot, -ovs, to. 
 bite, louivtiv. 
 black, poiXag, -aiva, -xv. 
 blame, to, tpeyav (tivx or ti) ; iy- 
 xaXs7v (nvi) , /u'i/x$ic0al (<r/). 
 blessing, a, dyuQov, to. 
 blind, Adj., Tvpxog^ 
 
 -, to, tu$Xou v. 
 
 blood, x'i/xx. -xTog, rt, 
 bloom, dxptb, r). 
 
 -, to, (a.7.Xuv. 
 
 blow, to, wtiv. 
 
 -, a, orXYiyYj, b. 
 
 blush, to, iftuPfta.ivia’doti, faith Aor. 
 
 and Fut. Pass.). 
 boar, Ka.T^oi, o ; aus, o. 
 boastful display of, to make a, 
 
 ioTlbuxVVVXI. 
 
 body, <rw/xx, -xtos, to. 
 
 -, in a (=together), avfxvxs 3. 
 
 boil, to, (trails.),‘i^uv \ avidity; 
 
 ^ivvvydii m , (intrains.), £sr». 
 boldly, 6a.ppx\tus, 
 boldness (oj speech), vxppvcrix, 
 bolt, /X 0 %XcS, 0 . 
 iooty, Xtix, h. 
 borders, (xtSopix, to.. 
 bore through, tovvxv. 
 born, to be, <pvvxi (§ 142, 10) ; 
 
 yiy vi a 6 xi. 
 
 both, xx<pu [§ 68 , Obs. 2 ]; apt- 
 <pori£os 3, ( uterque). 
 both—and, xxi — xxl\ ti (End.) 
 
 - XXI. 
 
 boundary, aregag, -xrog, to. 
 bow, a, tc^ov, to. 
 bowl, mixing, -b^og, b. 
 
 boy, orxTg, - 2 «j, o. 
 bracelet, ^peXXiov, to. 
 brass, p^xXxog, b. 
 
 brave, xv^t7os 3; yiwxTog 3 ; aXxi- 
 uos 3; xyxSbg 3. 
 
 bravely, xv^^iiug j yiwxtoog j 6 xppx- 
 Xeeuf. 
 
 bravery, xvb^ux, % j xgtrv, 17 . 
 bread, bigTog, b. 
 
 break, p-nyvvvxi j 'bixppnyvvvxi ; dy- 
 vvvxi • xxTxyvvvxt j (=to shat¬ 
 ter), Oqxvuv, 
 
 ■-up an encampment, ha- 
 
 \\uyvvvxi. 
 
 break in pieces, biappnyvltxt ; 
 
 xxTayvvvxi. 
 
 breathe, tvuv ; Ipcrvuv. 
 
 brick, orX'ivPos, i). 
 
 bridge, to, Z,ivyvvvai (Acc,.). 
 
 bridle, x,xXi vbg, b. 
 
 brdliant, Xaptbr^bg 3. 
 
 bring, ayE/vj I peguv , orgospbguv ; xo- 
 
 fjoiZ,uv. 
 
 -a sacrifice, Qvt'ixv <rmuaPxi. 
 
 -forward (as a charge), xx- 
 
 Tnyogt 7v. 
 
 -On, borayuv. 
 
 -to, or/Yogpeguv. 
 
 -up (=rear), -raibivuv j r^i- 
 
 <pav. 
 
 brother, abiXQos, b. 
 
 brute, (icaxypox, -xrog , to. 
 
 buckler, oreXr*i, b. 
 
 build, ib^Cuv \ xti^siv ; (a house), 
 
 oixobofJOUV. 
 
 bull, radges^ o. 
 burden, a%0os, - ovs , to. 
 burdensome, (bu^vg , -ux, -i\ %a- 
 Xiorbg 3 ; agyxlebf 3. 
 burn ( trans .), xaiuv ; Tiffrgxvxi • 
 (intrans.), xxitafai. 
 
 -down, xxTXXxiuv xaratyXi* 
 
 yuv ; ipoviorgxvxi. 
 bury, Polottuv. 
 
 -with, awSaorTSiv. 
 
 business, tpyov, TO j orpxypxx, - XT 0 g , 
 to ; —it is the business of, san 
 faith Gen.). 
 but, be ; ( =sed ), xXXx. 
 
 -also, xXXa xxi. 
 
 buy, T^ixirSai ; uvurOxi. 
 by, vvb ; bix j 7rx^x\ or^bg. 
 
 — no means, yikittx ; ovbxtxZg. 
 
 — or through myself, %i ipxu- 
 
 TOV. 
 
 — sea, xxtx 6xXxttxv ; by land, 
 xutx yijv. 
 
 c. 
 
 Calamity, xTv^npox, -xrog, rb ; tv/x- 
 tpogx, b ; xtv%ix, r, ; to. 
 
 call, to, xaXtiv; (=name), ovopo «• 
 Zyiiv ; T^ogxyopivuv ; xoroxxXuv. 
 call to mind, /avtj/aottuu* (rt). 
 calumny, bixfioXt, b. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 623 
 
 can (=be able), Svvac t6<u ;—one 
 eau, 'i^ian ( Dat .). 
 capacity, -t*>s, h ;—m a 
 
 private capacity, Ilia.; —in a 
 public capacity, 'bvpoaia.. 
 captive, TOi 2. 
 
 care, tygovTig, -<2oj, b ; b ; 
 
 (==Solicitude), i ori/xsXux, b . 
 
 - for, take care for or of, 
 
 iorifiiXuatai, Dep. Puss. (Gen.) ; 
 tTifiiXutiv s%uv (Gen .); <p^ovn- 
 %uv (Gen.) ;—I care for any¬ 
 thing, fJoiXu fJOOl TlVOg. 
 
 -, take (—beware), tpvx&TTi- 
 
 aSooi (Acc.). 
 carefully, tonusXcus. 
 carousal, orbais, b. 
 carry, ; (bxTTx^tiv; Qoguv. 
 
 - about, ore^Kpe^iv. 
 
 -off, &£*(tX,uv ; booriyeiv ; \\x\- 
 
 ffSotl. 
 
 - on war, vroXi^v (Dat.). 
 
 case as, to be in the same, rl 
 xvto vr<xcr%tiv (Dat.). 
 cast down, to, a<pa.XXuv. 
 
 Castle, axgcc, b. 
 
 catch (animals), tn^vuv; ay^ivuv; 
 
 Xx/U.(bxViSV. 
 
 cause (=affairs), or^xy/naTX, r«. 
 
 -- to revolt, a^/o-rava/. 
 
 cauterise, aoroxxiuv. 
 cease, /xtPuvoci; orxvicrtxi; 
 
 TilV. 
 
 celebrate (=praise), Warn?*. 
 
 - (m song), a2uv, vpn7*. 
 
 celestial, ob^xnos 3. 
 
 Cell, oixi^iov, TO. 
 
 censure, ^eyuv (tivx or rt) ; psptyi- 
 aOcii (r<); \y xaXs7v ( nvi). 
 centre, centre of, ptaog 3, (agree¬ 
 ing with the Noun , § 148, Obs. 
 5.)- 
 
 certainly not or never, oh pb 
 
 [§ 177,9.1. c 
 
 chance, tv%*i, «• / 
 
 change, to, fWTar/^vat/; pttTuXXxT- 
 
 T&tv (Char, y) ; plitx^xXXw. 
 character, T^o-rog, »; fit os, -ovs, 
 
 TO. 
 
 __of the Deity, ru tov 
 
 tl*U. 
 
 charge, to take in, Xafifiavuv. 
 charge, to (=attaek). WiTihadmt 
 (Dat.); \<riivai (Dat.), 
 chariot, elg/xa,, -ca-tos, to. 
 charioteer, bvb°x os ' b. 
 charm, Tigorvbv, to. 
 cheerfully, ybioig. 
 chiefly, (joxXkjtx. 
 
 child, orot7i,~1b{, o,fi ; tUvov, to;— 
 little child, -ra^/ov, to. 
 choice (Adj.), oroXvTiXbi, -is. 
 choose, ui£t7(r0ai; xgtniv; (=wish), 
 
 lhov'kurtxi ; \6eXsiv. 
 
 circumference, mo'ipirgos, b. 
 citadel, «*{«. b- 
 citizen, voXiT'/ig, -ov , b. 
 city, oroXn, -tag, b. 
 clamour, x^xvyb, b- 
 clash, k^ovuv. 
 
 clear, to (=to free from wild 
 beasts), l^pt^obv; (=cleanse), 
 
 Xudoc'l^ilV. 
 
 cleave to, 'ixurtxi (Gen.). 
 close (Adv.), iyyvg. 
 
 ■ -, tO, xXUUV 
 
 clothes, itrtnst -y™f> *> 5 
 
 / 
 
 TOC. 
 
 cluster (of grapes ), (Zotovs,- vog, l. 
 cold, -J/bpcoi, -ovs, to ; piyog, -ovg , 
 
 TO. 
 
 -, (Adj.), 3. , ^ / 
 
 collect, avXXiyav; truvitrrxveii; «ys<* 
 
 QUV. 
 
 colony, kvoixix, b. 
 column, arfiXv, b- 
 combat, pv-w, b ;—to engage in 
 single combat with, ^ovo^a* 
 %t7v (Dat.). 
 
 combatant, utXnTbg,-ov, b. 
 come, e^^icrtui ; a<pixve7o‘txi ; 
 (=come into existence), y> 
 yvf ffOcti ;—to have come, be 
 present, rixav. , * # 
 
 _in or into, t\gi^x t ^ M * 
 
 VXI. 
 
 -into being, ylyvurtoti. 
 
 -to a knowledge of, y<y«&* 
 
 a xu>. 
 
 -together, avn^x^^ 1 - 
 
 command (=office), xgx,b, b- 
 
d 21 
 
 ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 command, to, otoyav ; xiXivnv ; 
 (=enjoin), Xvitxttuv ( Dat .) ; 
 trgogrctrrtiv ( Dat .) ; Ivr£AAj<v <??’ 
 Ivtj \XXto-6xi (Dat.); (of ijene- 
 rals), orxgx'/yeXXiiv. 
 
 -, to be at one’s, •xxfivxt 
 
 (Dat.). 
 
 -, to give a, or^ogrxrTtiv. 
 
 commander, fariTxxr*£, e; 
 
 (=a general), o-r^ar^yaf, b; 
 
 biyi/xcvv, -hog. o. 
 
 -, to be a, xoyuv. 
 
 commend, Wxm7v. 
 common, xotvls 3 (Gen. or Dat.). 
 common origin, acr/yiveg, -ovg, to. 
 companion, \-x7oog, o. 
 compare, bpotovv (ri tivi) J i lzaZ ) uv 
 
 (t i Tin). 
 
 comparison with, in, vx^x or tr £ V 
 (with Acc.). 
 
 compassionate, to, xxnXiuv 
 (Acc.) ; oXoQv°ia@xi (Acc.). 
 competent, Ixxvlg 3. 
 complain, xyxvxxruv. 
 complete, to, 'hixTiXtiv. 
 compulsion, xvxyxn, f). 
 comrade, ItxT^os, b. 
 conceal, xtox^uttuv j xxrxxgv- 
 TTitv ; xtvSuv. 
 
 concealed, x^vttcs 3. 
 
 -from, to remain, hxXxv- 
 
 Sxvuv (Acc.). 
 
 -, to be, A xvOoivuv (Acc.). 
 
 concerned for, to be, (p^ovTi^nv 
 (Gen.). 
 
 concerns, it, fisXu. 
 condemn, x^ivuv ;—to condemn 
 to death, x^vnv Bnvxrov. 
 confer (= in vest with), t^itiBs- 
 
 1X1. 
 
 -benefits on, iv oroiuv (tivx) ; 
 
 I VtQytTUV (tivx). 
 
 - great benefits on, fx.iya.Xx 
 
 tlt^ytTiiv (tivx). 
 
 confide in, tor/r^Vwv: vrzorciBivxi. 
 confidence in, to have, Bxppuv 
 (Acc.). 
 
 confine, xxTxxXuti y; xxBugyuv. 
 conformably to, f/,irx(with Gen.). 
 confuse, avy^uv. 
 confused noises, Bo^n, «/. 
 
 congratulate, crvvr}icBxi,withFuL 
 and A or. Pass. (Dat.). 
 conquer, vixxv (vice.); x^xnTt 
 (Gen. or Acc.). 
 
 conscious, to be, avvuVzvxi lavra. 
 consider, axoorAv, vouv ; (=con- 
 template), B(xoz7v ;—to be con¬ 
 sidered, vofftaSxi. 
 considerable, x\tlxoyog 2. 
 considerate (=moderate), /xzt^ios 
 3. 
 
 consideration, Xoyicr/xbs , o. 
 constitutionally, vofi^ag. 
 construction (=buiiding). olxobb- 
 [x.vnrt;, -tug, h. 
 
 Consult, (bovXzviaBai. 
 
 -an oracle, /xxvTzviaBxi. 
 
 Consume, xvaXiaxuv ; xxrtaBisiv. 
 contenjplate, hu^uv; axowuv. 
 contend ( = fight), fx.xyiaBx4 
 (Dat.)’, (in music, with des¬ 
 tiny, &c.), t£<'£iiv (Dat.). 
 contentedly, very, xvTx^xbaTarx. 
 contention, %f, -i'Sos, h- 
 Contest, fAxyy, *)’ dyuv, -uvoc , o. 
 continually, asi; a■uviy&s ; [ some¬ 
 times translated by Ura :7* y 
 £ ixyuv or 'bixyiyvivBxi With the 
 
 Part., § 175, 3.]. 
 
 continue, $ixrzXi7v ; 'tnxynv ; 2ix- 
 y'tyviafxi ( with Part., § 175, 3.). 
 contrary to, ivxvt'ios 3; — (Prep-), 
 
 <TXO(X. 
 
 contrive, p’/iyxvxaBx^Dep. Mid.). 
 control, to, xv^uvuv (Gen.) ; 
 tuv (Gen.). 
 
 conversation, 'SixXoyos, b ; (=in- 
 struction), opiXlx, ft. 
 converse with, to, tiiaXeyztrBat 
 (Dat.), Dep. Pass. 
 convict, to, iXsyynv ; \\iPiyyn. 
 convince, *u6uv (vice.), 
 cooperation of any one, with 
 the, avvsgyovvrtf Tivos (Gtn. 
 
 Abs.). 
 
 corn, ctTtos, o. 
 
 -, ear of, trrxyvg, -vog, o. 
 
 corpse, vox vs, -uos, b ; »i x^og, *• 
 correct (Adj.), otfbg 3- 
 correctly, btf&s. 
 corrode, i aBiuv ; xaTiaHiin. 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 625 
 
 corrupt, to, \a<p6u^u ». 
 
 COStly, ‘TeXvTtXqs, -eg. 
 
 - living, ToXvTtXtta, 
 
 eounsel, fiouxh, fj. 
 country, fj; yr}, h ; —one’s 
 
 country, ocaafg, -7$og, f). 
 
 -, belonging to the, of the, 
 
 •rurgios 2 and 3. 
 
 -, native, oraTfs, -7^os, f). 
 
 courage, Ovpog, «. 
 
 -, be of good, 0a.ppi7v. 
 
 courageously, ffappaXsug. 
 courier, otyytXti, o; vjpego^fpos, o. 
 course, Ifpog, o; (= journey), 
 
 ' t 
 
 cdo$, 37 . 
 
 court (of the Persian king), Ov^xt. 
 
 at. 
 
 -of justice, $ixaary(3iM, to', 
 
 covetousness, <rXtovi%ix, fj, 
 cow, foods, h, [§ 41.]. 
 eowardly, ^uXog 3 ; xxxeg 3. 
 crave for, icplsaffat (Gen.). 
 creature, £<5av, t£. 
 credit, to, TuSiaSut (Dat.). 
 crew, oi av^tf. 
 
 crime (=outrage), -tut, h> 
 croak, xfj^uv. 
 crocodile, x^oxtiaXot, i. 
 crowd, o%Xos. 0. 
 
 crown, a, 0 TeQxvog, o ; itodripa, 
 -XTog, to. 
 
 Crush, to, fyxuav. 
 
 cry, a, x^xvyh, *i ; «• 
 
 -Out, xf^itv ; dvaxf^nv ; dva- 
 
 (Zoxv ;—to cry out to, /3 odv (rtvt). 
 cubit, Tfjxvt, -ius, 0 . 
 cultivation (=education), -rat- 
 \fota , hi ^ct'thiuatg, -tug, h. 
 cup, xvtiXXov, to ; (for mixing 
 wine), x^aTri^, -h^os, 0 . 
 curdle (trans.), auponiyvvvxt. 
 custom, « V «, - ows , to ; (=usage), 
 vo/aos, 0 ;—it is an established 
 Custom, voftZyiTat. 
 
 p. 
 
 Dainty food, o-^ 0V , TO, 
 dance, to, og%i7a0xt; (of choral 
 dancing), %ogivtt». 
 dancing, i^nSpog, 0 ; (choral 
 dancing), %ofg, a. 
 
 danger, xiv&vvog, 0 ; dityov, Tfi. 
 
 -, to incur, or be in dan 
 
 ger of, xtvbuvivuv. 
 dare, reA^y. 
 
 dark (= black), pixag, -attx, -*»« 
 darkness, vw|, wxro'g, {/. 
 daughter, 6vydTrn>, -Tfg, h, [§ 36.]. 
 day, viptgx, h. 
 
 daybreak, at, dpx t7i hpigop. 
 dead, TiOvnxdg, ~v7x, -og\ vsxfgS; 
 —to be dead, TiSvnxfvxt [§ 122. 
 9.]. 
 
 deal, a great deal of, to. 
 
 [§ 48.]. 
 dear, tpiXog 3. 
 death, SdvaTog, 0 . 
 
 -, to be put to, avoCvYia-xuv. 
 
 -, to put to, xoro cTilv'tv. 
 
 debar, xtiX. xvvuv ; ttfoystv, 
 deceive, l|a?raTa» j cipaAAi/v; (>J 
 lies), iptvbuv. 
 
 decide, xfvstv ; ^txxfvttv ; 5*«y<- 
 yvdjaxttv ; (judicially), $<xa£i/v. 
 
 -upon or about, (ZouXiviatai. 
 
 declare, doroQxivtadat J aTobt'ixw 
 affect. 
 
 decoration, x capos, «. 
 decorum, it txoapix, ft. 
 decree, a, '\rl)$tapa, -arog, to. 
 deed, <r fey pot, -arog, to ; i£yo», 'to j 
 arf\tg, - lug, i). 
 
 -, in, uXv)6ug. 
 
 deem, vopifytv. 
 
 -worthy, «|<a3*. 
 
 deep, fiaPvg , -Cta, -v. 
 defeat, vttx, h- 
 
 -, to, Vixdv (Acc .). 
 
 defence (by speech), doroXoyta, ft. 
 defend, QuXdTTttv; —to defend 
 Oneself, dpxtvtaSat; dcrapuMafat ; 
 (by speaking), dnoXoyiiadat. 
 defendant, droXoyoCpivog, 0 . 
 deformed (=disgraceful), »»• 
 axfg 3. 
 
 degenerate, begin to, piraH*- 
 Xhv l<r< to xaxov Xocpfhdvuv. 
 deity, 6i7ov, to j Hxtpovto*, to ; 
 
 'haipuv, -flvfif, e J Qiog, 0 . 
 delay, to, pixxuv ; xa itoxu7p. 
 deliberate, to, foovXiCtaffui. 
 delight, to, tv^aivuv j ripruK 
 
 E 2 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 626 
 
 delight in, %xl(>tiv ( Dat .) ; yhtaSat 
 with Fut. and A or. Pass. 
 {Dat.); rigvttrtlc&i, with Aor. 
 Pass. [Dat.) ; ayd.xXf.aSai [only 
 Pres, and Imp/.'] [Dat.) ; tv- 
 (Pga'ivtcrSxi {Dat.). 
 deliver, C(jjZ,uv ; airxXX&Truv j 
 (=set at liberty), tXtvSt^ovy. 
 
 ... judgment, 
 
 -up, orxgx'&ibovxi. 
 
 deliverance (=safety), aurr.oia, 
 b ; (=freedom from), dvixv- 
 atf, -tug, b. 
 demand, to, airtTv. 
 demean oneself towards anyone, 
 vrgos<pei>ta0ai {with Aor. Pass.) 
 nvi or •x’qos riva ;-kindly to¬ 
 
 wards, (piXotp^ovug e%i/v (with 
 Dat.pers., or v^dg with Ace.). 
 deny, d(pi7aSai (withAor. Pass.), 
 
 t^a^vov tJvai. 
 
 depart, dTxXXdrrurSxi (with Aor. 
 II. Pass.);dore^taSai; doriivai; 
 aTof&atvuv. 
 
 departed (=dead), d-rortSvyxdg, 
 -via, -eg. 
 
 dependent, to be, (=be ruled), 
 x^aruaSai ; uo^taSai. 
 
 deplore, xXaiuv [§ 116, 2.]. 
 deposit, nSevai, (in something , s» 
 nvi). 
 
 deposited, a thing, ora^axaraSyxti, 
 
 < 
 
 y- 
 
 deprive, ^y^ovy ; artgtTv ; d<roare- 
 (>t7v ^(tiv x Tivog and nvog ti) ; 
 dcpaiptTaSai (rivx at). 
 
 derive advantage from any 
 
 thing, d-roXavuv ntog ti. 
 
 —- gain, xtfiaiyti*. 
 
 descendant, txyovog, o, b. 
 descended from, Hxyom, «, n. 
 describe, avyy^&Qu*. 
 desert, beyond one’s, nag a|/a». 
 
 -, to, xaraXtioruy J txXuvruv ; 
 
 ioriXtiorut ; rgoXtiortiv ; dvroQiv- 
 yav. 
 
 deserter, avroftoXog, o. 
 deserve, a\ioy i’i»ai. 
 deserving, d.\iog 3 (Gen.). 
 -, to think, d%i*u9. 
 
 desire, a, Urtiv/aia, y ; 
 y ; (=impulse), oopy. y. 
 
 -, to, imSvp£y‘, (=wish), (7>ov- 
 
 XtaSui, Dep. Pass. ; (=pray), 
 tv X,*. a So. i, Dep. Mid. (Dat.); 
 hiaSai, Dep. Pass. (Gen.) ; 
 (=claim) afyovv. 
 desirable, ai^tros 3. 
 desirous, to be, tS'tXuv. 
 despair, to, d-royiyvwaxtiv ; dSv- 
 puv ; (= despair of oneself), 
 
 diroyiyvujaxtiv tauTov. 
 
 despise, xara<pgovi7v (Gen.) ; 
 (=not to honour) dnftaZ,u *; 
 (=not to value), aXiytuoth 
 (Gen.) ; (=neglect), vn^dy 
 (Ace .) ;—we must despise, 
 xaraipgovyrto* iari(v) (Gen.). 
 destiny, po7^a, b. 
 destinies, human, tx avS^dvriya. 
 destroy, Xvuv ; xxTaXvtiv ; QStigtit; 
 ^latpSii^uv ; Ixxvvai ; (^over¬ 
 throw), avar^6T£;v ;—destroy 
 utterly, dvoXXvvai ; \\oXXvyai. 
 determine (=resolve), yiyvwaxut. 
 determined, it is, loxt7 (Dat.) ; M- 
 'boxrai (Dat.). 
 detrimental, (ixafdt^dg 3. 
 devote oneself to (=turn to), 
 ‘rgETio'Sai (with Aor. II. Pass ). 
 die, Syyo’xtiv ; dnoSvATxuy ; rtXttf 
 •rdv. 
 
 -for, vTtgxoroSvyjcrxtiv. 
 
 differ, differ from,$<*p£g£/v (Gen.). 
 different, tud^o^og 2 to run in 
 different directions, ha'biZ^i.- 
 crxiiv. 
 
 -from, to be, ^latpegu* (Gen.). 
 
 difficult, fiagvg, -tia,-v ; 3. 
 
 __ to restore, dugiorayofSturog 
 
 , 2 . 
 
 dig through, 'hio^vTT i/» J 'hia.ixd- 
 
 WTtlV. 
 
 dignity (=gravity), -ev*, 
 
 TO. 
 
 diligence, crwovly, y. 
 diligent, erToubadog 3. 
 diligently, cToutix'.jig. 
 dining-room, aydrytuv, -», re. 
 direct, to, iSvvtiv; (= manage), 
 ptT x%u(>ifyaSa.i. 
 
627 
 
 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 d ireet oneself, r^inoBai ( with A or. 
 11. Pass.). 
 
 directly under tlie mountain, u-r 
 
 KUTO TO 0/)0{. 
 
 disappear, dtpxvl^t aBai ( with A or. 
 Pass.), 
 
 disclose, ixxxXvrrziv , <pxlvuv ; dro- 
 tpxivuv y 'tztyx'tvuv j (ficcvzgov noiuv ; 
 bn J.ovv. 
 
 discourse, xbyos, o. 
 discourse with, to, btxXeytaBx! 
 (rivi). 
 
 discover (=shew), <pxivuv. 
 
 discreet, ip^ovi/xos 2; o-wtrbs 3. 
 
 disease, vcaag, fj. 
 
 disgrace, xla%vvn, v/ ; Xv/ayi, h. 
 
 disgraceful, xia^bs 3 ; duxris, -«?• 
 
 disgracefully, xia^iog. 
 
 dishonest, x-ovn^o's 3. 
 
 dishonour, inpix, r\. 
 
 dishonourable, xtx%obg 3; duxng, 
 
 / 
 
 -ts . 
 
 disorder, rx^x^h, h ;—to throw 
 into disorder, rx^irruv. 
 disorderly, dxoXxarug. 
 dispel, x6uv. 
 
 dispirited, to be, a 6vp.t7v. 
 display, xroQx'ivtiv, (xroQxtvtaBxi) ; 
 dvrobuxvvvxi, (xrobslxvuaBxi). 
 
 • ■ of, make a, ix-tbuxvvvxt ; 
 tribuxvvaBxi. 
 
 displease, arx^iaxuv (Dat.). 
 displeased with or at, to be, d%Bt- 
 aBxi, with Aor. Pass. (Dat.). 
 dispose (=arrange), n%vxaBxi. 
 disposed, kindly, %ilvovg 2 ;— to 
 be kindly disposed, s%uv Qi\o- 
 (Dgovus (Dat. or T(>og with ^deed- 
 disposition (=feeling), yvdfxn, h; 
 <Pgtvis, xi ; (=character), rga- 
 
 irof, o; v\6og, - oug, ro. 
 dissension, bi%oarxala, n. 
 dissipate (=scatter), axtbd^uv; 
 
 axtbxvvvvxi. 
 
 dissolute, dx^xrng, -U. 
 dissolve, Xvuv ; xxrxXvuv ; bixXvtiv. 
 distance from, at a, r^bauBtv. 
 distant from, to be, xrt%tiv. 
 distinguish oneself, be distin¬ 
 guished for or from, bjxtpiouv. 
 distinguished for, irian/xog 2- 
 
 disturb, rxoxrruv j auy%i7v j 
 (=annoy), tvo^uv (Dat.). 
 disturbance, rx^x^, ij. 
 divide, pt(>iZ ) uv ; vs put ; xarxri - 
 fxuv [§ 160, 4, (y) J. 
 divine, Bt7og 3 , bxi/xbvtog 3. 
 divination, pxvrtxv\, n. 
 do, rrojxrruv ; oroisiv ; b^xv. 
 
 — good to, a kindness to, tu 
 vroiuv (ACC.) ; ilt(>yiri7v (Acc.) ; 
 —do Wrong to, xbixuv ; xuxSig 
 <rois7v ;—do no wrong, olblv (pn- 
 3b) xbixuv. 
 
 dog, xuuv, xuv'g, o, $,[§ 47, 6.]. 
 domestic affairs, rx o’lxoi (sc. «rgay- 
 fxxrx). 
 
 dominion, x^fi, h. 
 door, 6u(>x, ri ; rruXxt, a!. 
 double-speaking, bt^c^uBog 2. 
 doubt, to, (=fear), bsboizivui. 
 draw (a chariot, &c. ), dyuv. 
 
 - up (an army), rxrruv ; 
 
 (laws), auyygxQtiv. 
 dreadful, buvog 3. 
 dress, aroXrj, rj ; i/xxnov, rb. 
 
 - ■ — in ( trans.), x/zQnvvvvxi (Acc. 
 
 pers. et rei). 
 
 dried up, taxXnxdg, - u7x, -ot. 
 drink, to, or f vuv. 
 
 -out or up, \z<xtvuv. 
 
 drive, to, tkxuvuv. 
 
 -away, xrsXxvvuv ; xoruBtiv. 
 
 - in or into, ugtXxvvuv; tig*- 
 
 Bz7v. 
 
 -out, c|«Xauv£iv ; xoruBuv. 
 
 drunkenness, fisBn, »■ 
 during, xxra; tv ; xvx ; xrx^a.. 
 duty, Isov, ro; —it is the duty or 
 part of, tan with the Gen. 
 dwell, oixtiv, oixtiaBxt (Dep. 
 Mid.) i vxiuv ; (— be), itvxi; 
 (= be in), vrgosuvxi (Dat .); 
 (=lie), xuaBxt. 
 
 dwelling, olxix, h ; oTxos , b; dlxnpx, 
 
 - xrog, ro. 
 
 E. 
 
 Each, txxaros ; (of two), l xars^og. 
 - other, one another, o£ 
 
 XviXuv. 
 
 eager, to be, 
 
628 
 
 ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 eager for honour, <pixbn ftog 2. 
 
 -to learn, <pi\o/tx6yg, *s«. 
 
 eagle, xtr'og, o. 
 
 ear, oug, urbg, r#,[§ 39.]. 
 
 -of corn, -uog, o. 
 
 earn (=work out), \\i£yxC,t<j6xi. 
 earnest, aorouhxiog 3. 
 
 -, to be in, <xxou^x^uv. 
 
 earnestly engaged in anything, 
 to be, uvxi (ytyvtffSxi) or^bg rivt, 
 or aorouho^uv xtgt ri. 
 earth, the, yy, fi ; x^v, Z 6ov °*> 
 earthen, xtga/xiog 3. 
 earthquake, au<ry.bg r k 
 ease, yaux'tx, b. 
 easily, pxhiug. 
 east, tug, -u, n. 
 easy, pad tog 3. 
 
 eat, iadUiv (Gen. or Acc.), [§126, 
 3; § 158, 5, (a) and Obs. 3.]. 
 echo, bxv, -oug, b. 
 educate, orxihiuuv ; ^I'bxcrxav. 
 educated, rtxx/hu/x'ivog 3. 
 education, orxthix, y ; li^xaxxXtx, 
 
 t 
 
 V. 
 
 effect, to, (=accomplish), tl^yx- 
 £ect 6x1. 
 
 effeminate, to make, pxXxxiZ,uv; 
 
 tiryLUvuv. 
 
 either—or, % — y. 
 elder. See old. 
 
 elegance (^gracefulness), xfys, 
 
 -i<T0S, V). 
 
 elevate, u-^ouv. 
 eloquent, Xoyiog 3. 
 else, anything, cixxoru 
 embassy, ‘xfiafrug, oi. 
 embrace, xaxaX^ta^xi. 
 employ, x$ a6a ‘ l ( Dat.). 
 
 -force, p>iaZ,ia6xi. 
 
 employed in, to be zealously, 
 
 cr <rouhxZ ) uv (<xt ft n). 
 
 empty itself (of a river), \\tGxi; 
 
 tigfbxXXttv ; 1/u.fixXXtiv. 
 emulate, %yXouv (Acc.). 
 emulation, <ptXor7ftx, y. 
 enact (laws), rtSGxt. 
 encampment, rr^xroxtbov, ro. 
 
 -, to break up an, xvxfyu- 
 
 y» uvxt. 
 
 encounter, to. vroaryvxt (Dat.). 
 
 encourage, trxgxxxktT*; rx^x/xu- 
 OitaSxt. 
 
 end, rsXog, -oug, ro; (of war }, 
 xxrxXuatg, -tug, y; (=limit), 
 •xk^xg, -xrog, ro. 
 
 -of life, rtXtury rou (itou. 
 
 -to, put an, xxrx’Txuttv. 
 
 endeavour, to, •xuftrSxt, Dept 
 Pass. (Gen. or Inf.); ; 
 
 —we must endeavour, vtt^x- 
 
 rsov 5CTTi(v). 
 
 endure, <pegs/v; uxoft^uv ; irroptt- 
 
 VtlV. 
 
 enduring, very, xx^n^txbg 3 . 
 enemy (=hostis), <xoXt(uo$, b ; 
 
 (=inimicus), txfybg, k 
 energy, Ivvxfxig, -tug, y. 
 enfeeble, ni^uv ; xxrxyvvvxi. 
 engage with (of an army), aup- 
 
 fxtyvvvxt ; au/xfixXXttv. 
 
 -in a naval battle, 
 
 -in single combat with, jxovo- 
 
 fxx%t7v (Dat.). 
 
 engaged in anything, to be ear¬ 
 nestly, uvxi (yiyvtrSxt) xfog nvq 
 or XToubaJ^tiv ori/>l rt. 
 enjoin, tvrtXXajOxt. 
 enjoy, xxoXxvstv(Gen.) ; (=taste)^ 
 ytuio’dxi (Gen.) ; —to allow one 
 to enjoy (i.e. participate) in 
 something, (ttrx$t$bvxi rm rtvog. 
 enlarge, orXxrunt*. 
 enraged with, to be, fiyvltit 
 (Dat.). 
 
 enrich, xXourl^tiv. 
 
 enslave, SouXouv; l|av fyxTo'St&irfx/. 
 
 enslaved, to be, 'bouXtvuv (Dat.); 
 
 yrrovx t 7 vxt (rtvog) ; SouXourtixt. 
 enter, tlgttvxt ; tlg'buvxt ; (=in¬ 
 
 vade) tlgfixXXttv; (= take a 
 course or way), rfxtrSxt blov. 
 entire force, an, •xxprXySbt crro- 
 Xog. 
 
 entreat, ixtrtvu » (Acc.) ; 
 
 (Gen.). 
 
 entreaty, Hyrtg, -tug, y ;— to ob¬ 
 tain one’s release by entreaty, 
 t\xiri 7 a 6 at. 
 
 entrust to, 'vrtrfxuv (Dat.). 
 enumerate, xxrx^tSptiaSxt. 
 envoys, oi irfo-fiug. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 629 
 
 -envy, <p6evos, S. 
 
 -■, to, tpfonn ;—to envy one 
 
 something or on account of 
 something, <pdovt7v rm tivo;. 
 
 •epic poetry, oroinats or tx 
 torn. 
 
 equal, 1<ros 3. 
 
 -, to make, \%iffwh (excequare). 
 
 equivalent to, to be, xvtx^ov 
 u»ai (Gen.). 
 
 ere, ;—ere this, if$n. 
 
 •erect, to, o^dovv ; \\oq6ov v; (as , a 
 
 Statue), xvxTidlvxi ; iarorvxi ; a»- 
 iTTXvxi. 
 
 err, apxgTtxniv. 
 
 •escape, to, liatptvyuv (Acc.) ; £«■ 
 (pivyav (Acc .); xvtKptuyuv (ACC .); 
 a«rtf5/^£a0 - *£fv (ACC.). 
 
 ■especially, pxXtfTx. 
 establish, xx6i<ttxmxi. 
 
 •established, custom, it is an, vopi~ 
 I^itxi. 
 
 esteem, to, npxv ; h^ccnvuv ; 
 (=value much), Totuadxi (pi- 
 -xpou, oroXXov, or <rttf pixgou, &C ); 
 ,(=consider, think), vo^nv. 
 
 -happy, pxxx^uv ) ^»Xouv. 
 
 esteemed, ripios 3. 
 estimable, a&oi 3. 
 even, jmm. 
 
 -as, vf-rig. 
 
 _if, even though, xx) hxv (xolv) 
 
 with Subj. 
 
 - , not, ovhz (priU), 
 
 -now, xx) yuv. 
 
 evening, $£<x», f). 
 
 •event, avp^o^x, *i. 
 ever, *ore (Enel .); vwTort ; (= al¬ 
 ways), xu. 
 
 •every, <rxg, orxax, txv [§ 40] ; 
 ( =quisque ), txxcTog 3;—every 
 year, xxd' ‘ixscarov tros —every 
 third day, r^irnt fipi^xg. 
 
 ■everything, x-xvtx ; xtxvtx. 
 everywhere, vxvrx^ov. 
 evidence, Tixp^iov, to. 
 evident, SrjXos 3 ; Qxvtgog 3.^ 
 evil, xxxof 3; vovngos 3 \ <pauXos 3. 
 
 -, an, xxx cv, to. 
 
 _ _doer, xxxovgyog, o ; xoix* S/v, o. 
 
 exact from, to, xrxnut (r! ntx ); 
 
 or^XTTUV (ti TiVx). 
 
 exalt, ly^/ovv. 
 
 __ highly, f&ey<<TTov xoro^uxvvixi. 
 
 examination, sksy^og, o. 
 examine, \\iTxC,uo ; iXey^ui. 
 exceedingly, l)uvu>s; o-<pofyx. 
 excel, x/JiaTivav. 
 
 excellence, xxXoxiyxdix, rj ; x^it^, 
 
 v. 
 
 excellent, oiyxdog 3 ; 'urtlXog 3 . 
 except, vXriv (Gen.). 
 excess (= luxury), roupf h 
 excess in anything, xaeXyux, $i. 
 exchange, to, /xitxXXxttuv, (=to 
 change one thing for another), 
 
 XVTlKXTxWXTTi ffdxi. 
 
 excite, \yii%in. 
 exclude, xonXxvvuv ; si^yf/v. 
 excuse, an, or^o^xaig, -tug, f). 
 execute (=accomplish), iinTtXu*; 
 
 OlXVVSIV. 
 
 exercise, aerxv<ns, -£«?, > 7 . 
 
 -, to, y vfxvxZfiv ; £<rxs 7 v. 
 
 exhibit, tpxvifov <rou 7 v ; xTehixv-.vxi ; 
 t-r&iixvuirdxt. 
 
 exhort, t^ot^tuv ; irgoTgeTicd a ; 
 
 orx^xxxXuo ; orx^xxiXiviaiixi. 
 
 existence, come into, yiyvtadxi. 
 expect (=hope), iXorl^uv ; (=look 
 
 for), UTOfTUJUV", *(> 0 g% 0 xi}V y VTO- 
 
 ptniv (Acc.) ; ioxuv. 
 expedition, ct^xtix, fi. 
 _, to make an, trr^a* 
 
 TiVU V 5 (JT^XTiVUrdxi. 
 
 expend, xxTxvxXiaxuv. 
 experience, ifvrugix, f\. 
 
 .—-•, to, Tru^xadat, Dep. 
 
 Pass. {Gen. or Inf.) ; Veroal 
 
 Adj. Til£XT£ 0 V. 
 
 expert at, xyxdos 3 . 
 exploit, or^xypx, -XTOS, to. 
 exposed to stratagems, to be, 
 
 WlfiovXiViO-dxt. 
 
 express, to, ; ixQxmi v; 
 
 OOTSpxivUV. 
 
 _ (an opinion), drohixfv- 
 
 ffdxt, 
 
 extent, x^idpog, 0 ; tkriffoi, -ovs, to $ 
 psyodog, 'ovs, to. 
 
 1 exterior, the, <r%> ipxrx, t*. 
 
630 
 
 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 extinguish, a(bivvvvxi; uvroafbivvvvxi. 
 extol, tiff iga/£E/v. 
 extraordinarily, Smd/f. 
 eye. oQBxX/lo's, #. 
 
 F. 
 
 Face, irgc;u<ro», ri; oyf/ig, -tus, 
 * 
 
 *». 
 
 -, to look in the, dvrifoXsTtiv. 
 
 fail, ixXi'iTiiv ; ’tonXtiwtiv. 
 fair (=beautiful), xxXos 3. 
 faithful, -Tieros 3. 
 fall, to, trforntv. 
 
 -back (=retreat), a to^u^sTv. 
 
 -into [of a river), tfyivxi; 
 
 us^olXXui ; IftfZixXXeiv [tig ri). 
 
 -■> make to, crqxxXXuf. 
 
 ■ - off, Ttgl’ppitv. 
 
 -upon, tfLirivruv. 
 
 falsely, swear, Itj o^xtTv. 
 fame, tvxXux, b ; xXtog, -iovg, to ; 
 Saga, b. 
 
 famine, Xiftos, o. 
 
 famous, tuxXt/is, -iff ; Qxn^og 3; 
 «v3e£af 2. 
 
 far [oj distance), fLxx^xy ; ttjXov ; 
 
 with the Comp. <roXv. 
 
 — from, so far from, xvri 
 —, SO, roaovrov. 
 
 faro so and so, Tgarruv with an 
 Adv. 
 
 fast to, to hold, s%t<rBxi [Gen.). 
 fasten, xXtiuv. 
 fat, Tfuv, -ov. 
 
 fate, fcoioa., b; ( —fortuna ), r6%n, 
 b. 
 
 fated, it is, tl/xx^rxi. 
 
 father, TXTr\^, -rpog, • ,[§ 36.]. 
 
 fault, x/tx^rix, b; xfLxgry/LX, -xros, 
 
 TO. 
 
 favour, ;£<$£/?, -iros, b. 
 
 -, a, tvtoytutx, b. 
 
 - on, confer a, %xf%ur0xi 
 
 (Dat.) ; tv <roit7v [Acc.). 
 
 -, receive a, tv 9rx<r%uv. 
 
 -, return a, xvroh^ovxi %xgn>. 
 
 fear, q>c(Zog, o. 
 
 -, to, (pofitTcrBca, with Aor. 
 
 Pass. [Acc.); Ithoixivxt [Acci) ; 
 —he fears, <pIfbog airh S%U. 
 fearful (=<freadM), fo/rig 3. 
 
 fearful, to be, Qo&iTirdai. 
 feed (trans.), p>ba-xu>. 
 feel grateful, pcH lv f*^***- 
 fellow-combatant, av t ujuut^og, i, 
 fetter, a, t&v, b. 
 few, bx'ryoi, -xi, -a. 
 field, xyfs. b ; y««, b. 
 fight, to, fxxxtaBui [Dat.). 
 
 -(sea), vacu/xK%'ux, b. 
 
 -at sea, to, vxvfLx%uv. 
 
 fill, fZvvti* [Gen.) ; Titov Xavxi [ri 
 nvos) ; txvivXxvxi [ri nvog). 
 
 filled with, ptcrrcf 3 [Gen .); vX >»- 
 2 *g, -if [Gen.). 
 find, tvQicrxti*. 
 
 fine (=beautiful), xxXos 3. 
 
 -> a, xff* 0CTa > T “ 5 ); 
 
 —to punish by a fine, &/j.iov». 
 fir, ortvxv, b. 
 fire, <rvg, orvfs, to. 
 
 -, to set on, ifzviT^ixvxi. 
 
 firm, tiefSatos 2 and 3;—to stand 
 firm, vTOju.svuv. 
 
 firmness, xxgnfx, h ;—with firm¬ 
 ness, ippufttvut. 
 
 first, orguros 3 ; Adv. Tgurov • 
 too <jt fur a .;—to do anything 
 first (i. e. before another), <pBx- 
 VtlV, with Part. [§ 175, 3.J. 
 
 -, at, iv a^w. 
 
 first-fruits, xvx^xi, al. 
 fish, a, l%6bg, -lot, ». 
 fit, tTirfbuot 3 ; ixxtoff 3. 
 
 — of madness, in a. See to be 
 mad. 
 
 fitted, txxvcs 3. 
 
 fix (=determine), bf^nt ; (=to 
 make firm), vriyvvvxi. 
 flagon, £oeyff, o, [§ 41.]. 
 flatter, xoXxxtvuv (^Lcc.). 
 flatterer, xoXx\, -xxog , o. 
 flattery, xoXxxut , b. 
 flay, Vt(>uv. 
 
 flee, flee from, xiroQtvyu* [Acc.) f 
 (ptvyitv [Acc.)‘, —we must flee, 
 (piVKrtov tcrt[v). 
 
 -away, xvroipt&ytiv. 
 
 flesh, o-af, -pxbg, *i ; (=meat), 
 xfxff , -tug, ri, [_§ 39, Obs.]. 
 flight, take to, ifnvyut. 
 fling, pitrTvv. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 631 
 
 flock (=herd), xyikv\, ft. 
 flourish, Btxkktu. 
 
 flow, to, pu»; (=be borne), ty'^t- 
 trOat. 
 
 -by, VXgXppitV. 
 
 flower, a, btvBog, - ovs , to ; oivth/xov, 
 
 TO. 
 
 flute, xlkos , o. 
 fly (=flee), tytvytiv. 
 
 — away, xvxvirttrBxi ; IxviTtcBxt. 
 follow, svtaBxt { Dat .) ; ixoX.ovBui 
 
 {Dat.) ; (=obey), vuBt'sBxt, with 
 Aor. Pass. ( Dat.). 
 folly (=madness), pxvix, h- 
 fond of learning, tytko/xxBris, * £ »> 
 
 -labour, tytkbvovog 2. 
 
 -war, tytkovoX.tfjt.os 2. 
 
 -wisdom, tytkiaotyos 2. 
 
 food, (bntUXX, -XTOS, TO ; (oOfJOt, f). 
 
 -, dainty, o^tyov, to. 
 
 fool, ftoufis, o. 
 
 foolish, fjou^os 3 ; avows, -at/v; aty(>wv, 
 -oi ; acuvirof 2. 
 
 -talking, xboktapfitx, b. 
 
 foot, sraof, vo’bds, o. 
 
 -of, at the, vvb. 
 
 for, {Prep.), vfig; uvig ; \vi ; *•££/; 
 — {Conj.), ydo {after the first 
 word of a sentence) ; on ; hion. 
 
 — the sake of, htxx ; vsfi. 
 
 — ever, ail;—to be for ever 
 (=abide in), tivxi\ bixr^ffittv. 
 
 forbid, xvxyo^tvuv J ac rttvttv 
 
 {Aor.). 
 
 force {military), Swva^/s, -tug, b ; 
 —entire force, vxpvk.-.Bbg arb- 
 A 0$ • 
 
 -(=violence), (bix, f). 
 
 -, by, *«ra x.f><xrog. 
 
 -, to employ, /3 tx%taBai. 
 
 forefathers, v^oytytvrtftvot, oi ; vfi- 
 yovot, ot. 
 
 forehead, fiirwvov, to. 
 foreign, xkk'oT^tos 3. 
 
 -to (=outside), t%» {Gen.). 
 
 foreigner, b ; (bdofiagog, o, 
 
 {every one not a Greek). 
 foresee, v^oo^ov. 
 forget, ivtkavBxvttrBxi {Gen.), 
 former (=ancient), vxkxtit 3. 
 
 former—latter, o fjoii—b Si. 
 formerly, v^ots^ov. 
 forsooth, crjhv {scilicet). 
 forthwith, <r>jv TxpfarTno\ ii «r<£- 
 
 y^KTTX. 
 
 fortify, Tu%iZ s/y. 
 
 fortunate, tfixifiui, -oi; tiiTv%bs, 
 -is ; (=blessed), /xxxxgtos 3 ; 
 (=rich), ok fit os 3. 
 
 -, to be, ivru%ttv ; tvhxt- 
 
 ftoviTv. 
 
 fortune, tv%*i, b- 
 
 -, good, tyTvyftx, 
 
 forward, to bring, {as a charge), 
 
 xxTYtyofu. 
 
 found, to, xtI^ui; fyvui. 
 foundation, x^/t vis, -iiios, ii ; BtfA- 
 
 ktov, TO. 
 
 fountain, vnyb, b. 
 frankness, vappnai*, b. 
 free, tktuBtoos 3. 
 
 -, to, kvstv ; IktvBi^otJv. 
 
 - from,to, xvokvtiv ; xvakkdr- 
 
 Titv. 
 
 freedom, iktvBtoix, b. 
 
 -of speech, vxppvatx, c. 
 
 freemen, tktvBtgoi, oi. 
 friend, tyikos, o ; (=compauion), 
 trxi^os, o. 
 
 friendship ,' tytkix. b. 
 frivolity, pxbtov^yix, *]• 
 
 frog, (b<XTox%og , o. 
 from, xvo ; ix ; vxfit .; vvb, 
 frontiers, put'ooix, t d. 
 fruit, XUOVOS, 0 . 
 fruits, first, xvx^xi, «... 
 fugitive, tyvyxs, -alas, o, h J tyi* • 
 yeov, o. 
 
 fulfil, rtkiiv. 
 
 full, /xtarbs 3 {Gen.) J vkvgqs, *•{ 
 {Gen.). 
 
 — of, to be, yipuv {Gen.). 
 
 — power, Vegovaix, b. 
 furnish, Xvxoxtli {tiv'i tivos). 
 future, the, to fitkkov. 
 
 G. ^ 
 
 Gain, xifios, -ov;, TO. 
 
 -~, to, (=acquire), nTuc6at\ 
 
 (=get gain), xtfitxhui. 
 
C>32 
 
 ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 gallant, ayato'g 3 ; xakbs xui ayat- 
 6bg ; y ivvoiios 3. 
 
 gape, xi%vi)isva,i [§ 122, 19.]. 
 garden, xojvos, b. 
 garland, arefavog, o. 
 garment, i/xxnov, rb ; arokw, fj. 
 gate, TuXn, fi, ( usually in the 
 Plur., <rv\a.i). 
 
 general (=common), xoivog 3. 
 
 -, a, argarvybg, o. 
 
 generation of men, a, ym&, fi. 
 generously, ipfovug. 
 gentle, v(aog [§ 48.]; Utios 3. 
 get out of the way of, ilxuv obov, 
 
 — possession of, xv^itvuv (Gen.). 
 giant, ytybis, -avros, o. 
 
 gift, $&>£oy, TO. 
 
 girl, xopi, i). 
 
 give, otbovat; ; (= en¬ 
 
 trust), 9ra.£oihtbtva.t. 
 
 -a command, <r£ogr&.rruv. 
 
 -a response, xz * v • 
 
 -a sign or signal, av/xaimv. 
 
 -away, "bib even. 
 
 -back, a-Tobibovai. 
 
 -one a share of anything, 
 
 f/.iraSiScveu rm t ivog. 
 
 -way to, place to, uxuv ; 
 
 ivoidbvai. 
 gladly, vibiug. 
 
 glorious, iulo%os 2 ; — glorious- 
 deeds, xXta,, -tu v, toc. 
 glory, xkios, -6 ovg, ro; suxkua, t) ; 
 Scgot, fl. 
 
 go, i'ivai ; a6cu; ( = walk), 
 (iot'miv ; ( = journey, march), 
 oro^iviaSooi (with A or. Pass.); 
 —to be gone, oJ'^so^om. 
 
 — about, srs^i,3am<v. 
 
 — away, dordvea ; aorukkamafai J 
 
 j dorofbaivtiv. 
 
 *— back, iauvx%M()ii)>. 
 
 •— down (as the sun), xurulCtabai. 
 
 ■— forward, w^odvou. 
 
 '— in or into, tiadvai ; ils^x e ~ 
 aSou ; (a contest, &c .), tv }Zv«t. 
 
 *—over (to another party), o’/x*- 
 aiat. 
 
 *— round, trtpustat. 
 
 —- through, d/e^{<r^a/. 
 
 ■*— to meet, airavT«v (DaL). 
 
 goal, TE^jCta, -OtTOf, TO* 
 goat, a "I, -yof, 0 , q. 
 goblet, JttfTiXXov, TO. 
 
 God, a god, &o'f, o. 
 goddess, 6ta, fi; hot, %. 
 gold, xi va °s> «> Xi va ‘ it > T ®‘ 
 golden, of-gold, xz u<T0 ^i -o?». 
 gone, to be, «! '%ar0ai. 
 good, ayadlg 3 J xakbs 3 ; 
 t a Skis 3; (=earnest), avovlalog 
 3; (=useful), ^jjvto'p 3;—to 
 uyaSiv, thegood (intheabstract) ; 
 the highest good, to a^tarov. 
 
 -administration, tvvo/aia, fi. 
 
 -courage, be of, Sappti*. 
 
 --fortune, wTi^/ot, v. 
 
 -reputation, tvhofya, it. 
 
 -to, do, iv tou7v (Acc .); fwf£- 
 
 yeT£?v (Acc.). 
 
 - will, tvveia, *). 
 
 govern, apx u * (Gen.) ; x^artit 
 (Gen.); (=to be king), /Wi- 
 ktuiiv (Gen.). 
 
 government, orokin'ia, f) ; (=a 
 governed province), v- 
 governor’s residence, a^tiov, to. 
 grace, £*£/«, ‘iros, $. 
 graceful, x a ?‘ u s 3 ; -c. 
 
 gracefully, x a Z* VTas i imxcttfrut. 
 Graces, x t *Z lT * s > **• 
 gracious, fota/j [§ 30.]. 
 grain (=eorn) air os, o. 
 grant, to, <ra^ex it *> oTa^uv; $/5«vaw. 
 grapes, cluster of, fiords , -woj, o', 
 grateful, feel, £«^v ilbevat. 
 gratify, x ct ^ ia ^ ctl (-Dat.). 
 gratitude, tux°t^ariot, y; x*V f * 
 
 - iros, t). 
 
 gravity, /Sa^of, -«»f, to'. 
 great, fxiyas, -dXn, -at [§ 48.] ; 
 (=much), oroXvg, oroXkri, troXii. 
 
 -deal, orokvs £§ 48.]. 
 
 greatly, /xtydkus; 'buv&s. 
 greatness, peyifos. -ov(, ro. 
 grief, kvorn, fi; oikyog, -ovg, to, 
 grievous, kwrn^bs 3 ; kvy^t 3; 
 
 Xcckiorog 3. 
 grind, ktaivuv. 
 gross, ptyaf, pfy&kn, fiiya. 
 ground, the, x ^ v , 
 grow old, y ngdaxut. 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 633 
 
 grow up, '*u%an<r0a.t ( with Aor. 
 Pass .). 
 
 growing old, never, -»»• 
 
 guard, a, <pt >\xxyi, f). 
 
 to, <pvX<xrrav ; 'hixtyuka.r- 
 
 tuv. 
 
 - against, be on one’s 
 
 guard, <pvAokrria0<zi (Acc. ). 
 guardian, <pvXx^ y -xxo;, 6. 
 guide, a, ^yswoiv, -hog, 1. 
 
 _ } to, lUvvav ; fiyuarGtzt. 
 
 guilty (=doing wrong), xhxS». 
 gymnasium, orxXxl7rgx, b» 
 
 H. 
 
 Hades,, fin;, -««, «• 
 
 hair, >7> [§ 47, 4.]. 
 
 halcyon, xXxuu », - 6 V 0 f, *j. 
 hand, ££<£, «• 
 
 handsome, xxXi; 3. 
 happen, y<yv£<j-4a/ ; rtr/xxvuv 
 
 [§ 175, 3.]- , 
 
 happens, it, 7 up(Zxmi ; tv y£<m<; 
 
 7vporifTU’, ot^osti ttii. 
 happiness, tvZxtpovix, 
 happy, ivSxlpuv, -ov. 
 
 __to be, ivZxipon7v ; ewrv- 
 
 -, to esteem, pxxx^uv ; 
 
 %nXouv. 
 
 harbour, X/^v, -bo?, a. 
 
 hard (=difiicult), ^osXito? 3; 
 
 a^yxXea; 3. 
 hardship, viva;, b. 
 hardy, xx^ti^ixo; 3. 
 hare, Xayws, o, [§ 30, Obs. 2.]. 
 hark you ! Z olrog. 
 harmony (=unanimity), bphoix, 
 
 c 
 
 «. 
 
 harp, <po£ftiy%, -iyyog, h \ xi6x^x, b- 
 harp-playing, xi6x^fiix, b, 
 haste, xoroubb, b. 
 hasten, g<xi\Auv. 
 hastily, hx tx%ov;. 
 hate, to, fuau y; (=abhor), 1 %6xi- 
 guv ; crrt/y^y. 
 hated, be, a-r^av^ai ., 
 hateful, *%fyas 3 ; pirnTos 3. 
 haughtiness, -£«?, «• 
 
 haughty, v*^foav, -**; vxtgnfx- 
 
 ~s 2 . 
 
 haughty, be, ^e'y* ip^ovuv. 
 have, s^siv; (= possess), *£*rn- 
 cr^a<;—to have to suffer pu¬ 
 nishment, Z,npix y oQiiXuv. 
 he, ixtivo;; o ; oh. 
 head, xnpxXb, b- 
 
 heal, 1x76x1 ; xxiix6xi [§ 98 , (b) J; 
 
 (figuratively) 6t£x<rtvn y. 
 health, uyiux, b. 
 
 hear, xxouav {Gen. or Acc.), 
 xx.£oxff6xi {Gen.). 
 hearer, xxgoarbs, ~ov, o . 
 heart, xxfiix, b; *ij£, xngos, to ; 
 
 ( = feeling or disposition), 
 
 'I'vxb, i- 
 
 heat, 6xk<ros , -ou;, to j xxlpx, 
 
 - xro; , TO. 
 
 heaven, ob^xvos, a. 
 
 heed, take, iu\x(hi 7 a 6 xt {Acc.). 
 
 heedlessly, il»b. 
 
 height, u-j/os, - ov ?, to ; (=sum- 
 mit), olx^x, b- 
 help of, with the, 7vk 
 herald, -vxoi, o. 
 
 herd, xyixn, b* 
 
 herdsman, vopius, *««?, o ; orotph, 
 
 -EVOSj 0. 
 
 here, iv6<xh. 
 
 -, be, orx/itTvxi. 
 
 hero, r'lgws, -0104, o. 
 
 hide, x^ottuv ; xTox^iVTtn ; **- 
 X6ttuv. 
 
 -oneself, xxrxbZvxi. 
 
 high-souled, piyxkb$v%o; 2. 
 highest good, to <xp 7 ro». 
 highly, very, xx) <raw. 
 
 _, to value or esteem more, 
 
 ori^i orXsiovos {or pii&vos) oron 7 ~ 
 76x1 to reverence or prizo 
 very highly, ori^i oroXXov orom- 
 76x1 ;—to exalt highly, piyiaro* 
 
 xrtobiixvvvxt. 
 
 hill, yn\o$o;, 0. 
 
 himself, xvro ;, *4[§ 60.]. 
 
 -,of, IXUTOU. 
 
 hinder, ilgyuv. 
 hired labourer, 6fa, 6nrU, 0. 
 his, xiirou ;—his own, ixvrov ;—hia 
 own business, possessions, Sc c., 
 
 TX IXUTOU ; TX ‘l%X. 
 
 historian, \sTa^oy^o$, a. 
 
G34 
 
 ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 hold (=have), ?;£«»;—hold fast 
 to, i’fciaSa.i (Gen.) 'i —take hold 
 of, anricrPui (Gen.). 
 
 - -before oneself, •r^o[l&XXta6ai. 
 
 - -out (=sustain an attack), 
 
 voroffTiivxi. 
 
 holy (=sacred to), U^t 3. 
 home, oixog, o. 
 homewards, hr olxov. 
 honour, to, ti/xkv ; ( =colere ), 6t- 
 £KTiustv, (==worsliip), <r*P>i<r6at; 
 (=reverence), aibtic6at. 
 
 --, rip*, V- 
 
 -, eager for, tfuXorJpog 2. 
 
 honourable, ivbofys 2 ; xaXo$ 3. 
 honoured, rifuos 3 ; evn/Ms 2. 
 hoof, oorXfj, fl. 
 hook, btyxtTT^ov, to. 
 hope, *Xi n't, -tbot, i. 
 
 -, to, iXori&tv. 
 
 horn, xegcis, to, [§ 39, Obs.]. 
 horse, ’iororot, «. 
 host, £syaj, o. 
 
 hostile, vox'iftiot 3; txfyt 3. 
 
 house, oixoi, o ; olxia, fi. 
 household, oixot , a; oixia, n. 
 how ? oruis; (in an indirect Ques¬ 
 tion , ooruf) j— how much, eVaf 
 3. 
 
 human, ivS^ortvot 3 ;—human 
 race, to yevos uvS^wtuv. 
 
 - destinies, ra av^a ><riva. 
 
 humane, <ptXiv6^uoro{ 2. 
 humble, to, Tamivovv. 
 hunger, Xt/xog, b. 
 
 -, to, or be hungry, *uvnv. 
 
 hunt, to, Qnoiutni. 
 hunter, Sn^iurrig, -ov, o. 
 hurtful, /S Xafii^og 3 ; xccxougyoi 2, 
 husband, ayqg, ivb^bg, a, [§ 36.]. 
 
 I. 
 
 I, lyix>. 
 
 idle-talker, iboXe<r%*if,-ou, l. 
 idleness, i^yia, f/ ; ior^xypootTuvn, 
 
 fl ; peCCTT(tJV'/l, f). 
 
 if, si ; totv (jiv, av) (with Subj 
 ignorant, ifjt.ot.6rii, -«*. 
 illness, voaos, fi. 
 ills, xaxtx, ra. 
 
 illustrious, Xapor^ot 3. 
 
 imitate, fttptt 7 <r 6 a.i (Acc.) ; (=enrn* 
 late), ^uXovv (Acc.). 
 immediately, tv66* ; <rapax^if*-x. 
 immoderate, ax^ir-ht, - 4 . 
 immortal, a.6ivaT0i 2 . 
 impart, sorapxiiv (nvi Tint) i 
 %in> (r< tivi). 
 
 impel, -r^or^eoruv. 
 impiety, acre fin*, fi. 
 implant, ifx<pvrsuuv; \vri6hau 
 implanted, 'i^vTos 2 . 
 impose a task on, <r£afrarr*/»; 
 tv TeXXuf [usually \vTtXXsa6at\ 
 (Dat.). 
 
 impossible, abCvarot 2 . 
 impostor, <psva£, -axos, o. 
 imprudent, aWf, -ouv. 
 impure, axiiaprot 2 . 
 in, «v. 
 
 — deed, aXn6S>t. 
 
 — order to, was; ug ; (sometimes 
 translated by the Fut. Part.). 
 
 inactivity, iT^otyfcotrvvn, fi; ipyia, 
 
 fl ; paaTtuvri, ft. 
 
 incite, T(>oT(>hru* (Acc.) ; *a.£0%U' 
 
 y av (Acc.) ; ora^xxiXtvtfft'ai, 
 
 Dep. Mid. (Dat.). 
 increase, to, ab\ivuv (trans.) ; 
 ulloma&xt (intrans.), with A^r. 
 
 Pass. 
 
 incur danger, xtvblviiuv xlvbvvov. 
 indeed, b*i ; ; ys (Enel.) 
 
 indeed—but, fxev — 'be. 
 indict one for anything, ygdp*- 
 a6at (or bid)xi tv) Tivi Ttvog , 
 indictment, yfi. 
 individually, tbia. 
 indolent, to be, oxvs 7 v. 
 industrious, a-oroubuios 3 . 
 inferiors, tj ituvIts^m, ol. 
 infuse, tvTtSsvxi. 
 inglorious, xbo\ot 2 . 
 inhabit, oixsiv. 
 
 inimical, 3 . 
 injure, xax&s woiCv (Acc.) ; (ixi* 
 -TTUV (Acc.) ; abixsiv (Acc.) ; >if 
 (Jt.aive<j6cci (ACC.). 
 
 injurious, (ixu(hc£ s 3 . 
 injury, (ixifin, fi; ^fx'a, «. 
 injustice, ibtx'ta., 
 innate, s^fira* 2 . 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 635 
 
 innocent, ovblv (fttjTtv) xhix&v. 
 innumerable, a.vxf(l(/.v)Tog 2. 
 insane, to be, (xxivtadxi (Dep. 
 
 Pass.) ; 'hxifxovuv. 
 
 Inscribe, yfpuv. 
 insolence, Ifyig, -tug, $. 
 instead of, xvtI. 
 instil, \vTi0evxi. 
 instruct, orxibtvttv ; 'Sibao-xtiv. 
 instruction, orxihux, b ; 'hihxaxx- 
 kix, b \ (=conversation), bfu- 
 kix, fj. 
 
 insufficient, to be, i vh&g e%tiv. 
 insult, ufy/g, -tug, n. 
 intellect, yvdvpn, b. 
 intelligence, <rwt<rig, -tug, b- 
 intelligent, avvsrog 3; tpfvi/xog 2 . 
 intemperate, xx^xTbg, -eg. 
 intend to, p.ekkav ; ( sometimes 
 translated by the Fut. Part.), 
 inter, SdotTuv. 
 
 intercourse with, op.ikix,b, ( Dat.); 
 avvrjhix, f], (Dat.) ; xoivuvix, b. 
 
 - , to have, bfuktiv 
 
 (Dat.), 
 
 iutestines, rx 1 vrog. 
 intimacy, ofukix, b, (Dat. ); auvtyua 
 b , (Dat.) ; avvovcrix, 17 . 
 intimate (as friends), otxuog 3. 
 into, tig. 
 
 intoxication, (Al*, b* 
 invade, tlg^xkkuv. 
 invent, \\tvf<rxuv. 
 invention, tv^tng, -tug, b* 
 inventor, tfytrris, -ov, b. 
 invest a city, ort^ixx6iZ ) eaSxi orokn 
 [§ 125 . 13 .]. 
 
 _with, xfiQn vvvvxi (tivx ti). 
 
 invincible, bc/xx^og 2. 
 irrational, x$guv, -ov; xvovg, -ouv. 
 island, vrjcrog, b. 
 
 issue, rekog, -ovg, to ;— (of a war), 
 
 xxrxkueng, -tug, b. 
 ivory, tketpxg, -xvrog, 0 . 
 
 J. * 
 
 Javelin, otxuv,-ovrog, S; xxovtiov, to. 
 
 _, to throw a, 1^xxovt/^u». 
 
 jest, to, txi^uv ; axdjwruv. 
 journey, bfog, b ; 'bfp.og, b. 
 
 joy, *. 
 
 judge, a, xgirbg, -ov, 0 ; (in <% 
 Court of justice) hxxcrrfig, -ov, e. 
 
 -, to, (—judicare), xfvtn, 
 
 'btxxf/ivuv • (of a judge) ^ixoi^ut. 
 judgment (= understanding), 
 ytoj/xn, b ; avvtng, -tug, b. 
 
 - of, in the, or fog (Gen,). 
 
 -, to deliver, hxx&iv. 
 
 just, £Ixxiog 3. 
 
 justice, Tiixuiocruvn, b ; (=righfc) 
 llxn, b ;—court of justice, &- 
 
 XXJ’TYJOIOV, TO. 
 
 justly, btxxiug. 
 
 E. 
 
 Keep, e%tif. 
 
 - olf, dke^taSxi', xpvvtrdett. 
 
 - oneself from, xvi^taSeu 
 
 (Gen.) ; —we must keep from, 
 
 X<ptXTeoV \<TTl(v). 
 
 -quiet, bxv^ixv xyuv. 
 
 -watch, t*ouv. 
 
 key, xkug, xktibog, b, [§ 47, 5.]. 
 
 kid, egipog, 0 . 
 
 kidnapper, a.v'h^xoro'biarbg, -ov, b. 
 kill, xoroxTuvav ; (=murder), <po» 
 vtvnv ;—to kill off, xvxkiffxav. 
 kind (Adj.), ttlvovg, -ow. 
 kindly, to demean oneself, 
 
 <pfvug tggtiv. 
 
 -disposed, tvvovg, -ow ;— to 
 
 be kindly disposed, Qikotp^ovug 
 e%uv (Dat. or vfg with Acc.). 
 kindness, tlt^ytaix, b; (—favour), 
 xfyig, -iTog, b to do a kind¬ 
 ness to any one, tv <ron7v tivx ; 
 tvi^ytTuv tivx j—to do one many 
 kindnesses, /xty&kx (or orokkx) 
 tvi^ytTuv tivx ;—to receive ft 
 kindness, tv orxv%tiv. 
 kindred (Adj.), oUt7og 3. 
 
 king, (ixaiktvg, -tug, b ; ava£, -a*-* 
 Tog, b. 
 
 _of, to be, jSai Tiktvtiv (Gen.). 
 
 kingdom, (Zxnktix, b. 
 kingly, (ixaikixog 3. 
 know, yiyvdxrxuv ; tiSevxi (oTtix) ; 
 (=understand, know how) i 
 WkttxtOxi (Dep. Pass.) ;—XS 
 be so and so, without know- 
 
G36 
 
 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 it, kavUatut, with Part. [§ 175, 
 
 3.]. 
 
 know, not to, oiytout. 
 knowledge of, to come to a, y<- 
 y» euaxtit. 
 
 known, well-known, (pan fog 3; 
 
 bUkos 3. 
 
 ——, to be well, hjAas (or <pan- 
 
 £ 0 ?) tlva/. 
 
 _ , to make, aoro'buxtvtai; hj- 
 
 kovv ; ixfaivut. 
 
 L. 
 
 Laborious, orokvoroiog 2; ^akiTcs 3. 
 labour, orbvog, o ; %yav, to. 
 
 -, fond of, Qikovrovos 2. 
 
 _, to, tgyxfyal'ai ; ( with toil) 
 
 orovuv ; (with the accompanying 
 idea of being weary) xdym>. 
 
 -with, avfjovovuv (Pat.). 
 
 labourer, hired, &jj, inrot, o. 
 lack, a'ravl&iv (Gen .); hi* (Gen.). 
 lake, kifivii. ii. 
 lament, obuftrSai. 
 land, y5j, h ; (=region), xfya, h ; 
 —by or on land, **t« yrjv ;— 
 native land, oraTfg, Abos. 
 language, y kvrra, «; (=talk), 
 key Of, o ; yvOos, o. 
 
 large, ply as [§ 48.]. 
 
 - sum, orokvg [§ 48.]. 
 
 lasting, by v Hog 2. 
 
 late, b^ios 3 j Adv. o^pi j—later, 
 
 vangov. 
 
 lately, evxy%og. 
 latter, oZros. See former, 
 law, v'yos, o. 
 
 -, by or according to, xxra 
 
 itfj.au Or » oyiyoog. 
 
 -, observant of, tbyiyog 3. 
 
 lawgiver, voyodryig, -ou, a. 
 
 lawlessness, avoyia, ii. 
 
 lay (=place), iaTtxvai ; Tidtai. 
 
 — by or up, xarardevai ; (sibi) 
 
 xaTaTiStaiai. 
 
 — down (= ordain), bfZ,uv. 
 
 — waste, biutpDugtit ; Ttytut ; 
 
 hjat/v. 
 
 lazy, be, (bkaxtvuv. 
 lead, to, ayuv ; r\ytiaBat. 
 
 -away, ««y«<». 
 
 % E 2 
 
 lead onward, r^o&ytn. 
 
 -round, *igtuysit. 
 
 leader, iiytytvt, -btog, o . 
 leaf, fvkkov, to. 
 
 lean (=dried up), iaxknxdbs, -via, 
 
 t 
 
 ’Of. 
 
 learn, yat6d »»<»; ( = ascertain), 
 tvfaxut ; orvtidnaSai (Gen.). 
 learning, fond of, <pikoya6rig, dg. 
 leave, ixktimit ; xaraktivini ; too- 
 ktlorut ; tmkuortit ; (=allow), 
 tat. 
 
 -behind, xaTxkuvru*. 
 
 -off, oravtaSat ; ytSdtai ; has- 
 
 k SI Tilt. 
 
 leisure, a%okf), h. 
 
 -, to be at, to have, ax,*' 
 
 ka^ut. 
 
 length, yrjxos, -ovg, to ; (=num- 
 ber, measure), a^iffy'g, a; Tkij* 
 6og, -ovf, to. 
 
 lenity, TgaoTrig, -tiros, ft. 
 less. See little, 
 lesson, ydfnya, -arog, to. 
 lest ( after a word denoting fear), 
 yh; (=that not), Vv« (brut, «;) 
 
 py\. 
 
 let (=permit), tat. 
 
 — down, xafittat. 
 
 letter, an alphabetical, yfyya, 
 -aTos, to ; (= epistle), *<r<« 
 arok-fi, «. 
 
 letters, yfyyar%, ra. 
 liar, yptvarvg, -ay, o. 
 liberate, tktvSt^out. 
 licentiously, axokxarug. 
 lie, a, tpsubog, -ovg, TO. 
 
 —, to, yptvbnrfai. 
 
 — (=be situated), xt7a6ai; Cita*. 
 
 — before, T^oxslaiat. 
 
 — in wait for, inbgivut (Acc.). 
 life, (bios , a; (bioTos , o ; £«■>«, *; 
 
 (—cetas), tikixia, ti. 
 
 — , mode of, biaira, h 
 —, to lose one’s, dTohfiaxut. 
 light, (pug, tpuTos, to ; (=a light 
 or lamp), Xy^»af, ,a. 
 lightning, daT^xorri, f/. 
 like, by OIOS 3 J JVaj 3 ; ora^a-rkriaitt 
 2 and 3 ; (=such as) do; d. 
 -likeness, lyot'orm, -*itos, b. 
 
ENGLISH—GRFF.K. VOCABULARY. 
 
 637 
 
 likewise, bpelus ; (-—also), **<• 
 lineage, yew. -ovg, to. 
 listen to, a x^oxt6xi (Gen.) ; (—to 
 obey), •x’itdiorVu.i (Dat.) j vtx- 
 Kovtiv (Gen. or Dat.)., 
 literature, y^xppxrx, rx. ^ / 
 little, bxiyot 3; Adv., pix^ov, oX,- 
 ryov ;— less, jUUOV. 
 live, (iiortvtiv ; (iiovv ; 
 
 _ with, <ruyyiy*lO‘6xi (Dat.) ; 
 
 avvbixTPt (hiiv (Ddt.). f 
 
 long,^**r(3; l—much), rAu, 
 
 k m- , . , v . 
 
 ___ way, a, pxx^xv (SC. odtfv). 
 
 longer, any, fm. 
 
 , no, ouxen (firixert). 
 
 longing for, a, o^‘t, -t*>g, *J* 
 look after (=guard), <pt 
 —— at, (bxiontv) ^ogfixeruv > 
 
 nfixioruv. > / 
 
 _in the face, x*rt(ZXt<ru*. 
 
 loquacious, <&'oXwXoy«5 2 ; xunXog 
 
 3. 
 
 lord, *y e ias, S ; 2scr<r T «’ °* 
 
 lose, «t«xxvv«/; iorofixxXttv. 
 
 _one’s life, xvotivnrxti*. 
 
 loss, be at a, xoro^uv. 
 
 Loves, the, fyurit, «'• 
 
 love, \%ut, , , 
 
 _ of pleasure, <piX*dovix, ^ 
 
 -, to, <piXsr», vr&MUV ; ayaarav ; 
 
 (ardently), *g«» (Gen.). 
 
 - with, be in, e^«v (Gm). 
 
 lovely, x*£> ii s [§_40, Obs. l.J. 
 lover, t^ctarr.s, -ov, o. 
 
 _ of labour, (piXoorovog 2. 
 
 - of wisdom, tpiXbcojiot 2. 
 
 lyre, xt^x, «; *t6*gx, >* ; 
 
 -tyyot, »?• 
 
 M. 
 
 Mad. to be, pxina6xt (Dep. Pass. ); 
 
 bxipovZ.v. 
 
 madness, ^awa, ij. 
 magistracies, a.^x ltu 
 magistrates, a^a/', a<. / 
 
 magnificent, p%yxXor^ornt , -»f* 
 magnificently, ToXvTiXug. 
 maiden, xo^n, fi. 
 maintain (==affirm), 
 majestic, /aey a fi ’*• 
 
 make, foitTv ;—to cause to make 
 or be made, to make for one¬ 
 self, •jtoiu<t6xi ;—to make one 
 something, Wohixvvwxt (with 
 double Acc.). 
 
 _ a display of, ioriotixivvxi ; 
 
 Wtbt'utvuffHat. f 
 
 _ an expedition, <tt^xtwu %; 
 
 ffT/>XTiVlx6xt. t 
 
 — effeminate, ftxXxxifyiv ; 6n- 
 
 XVVUV. ' 
 
 — equal, t^nrovv ( exaequare f 
 _known, xTobtixvvvxt ; 'hnXot 7*. 
 
 — proclamation, txQxivuv. 
 
 — proficiency or progress in, 
 or^oxborntv, or Wibiblvxi (rtfs or 
 
 Wm. ^ _ _ . 
 
 resistance, uTva-rrjvxi (Dat.), 
 
 — to fall, <T<p<xXXuv. 
 
 -use of, Dep. Mid. 
 
 man (= homo), xv6^utos, o; (=vir% 
 
 &vri(>, xvh^og, «• 
 
 old, y'i£uv, - ovrog , 0 . 
 
 -, V1«, . e 
 
 _seller, a.vdgx*ooi<rrrig, -ov, o. 
 
 manage, hoixiiv; toXitojuv, (=:ir- 
 range), btxnff'tvxi. 
 manfully, xv\iiug. 
 manifest, tpxngbg 3 ; oijxog 3 ; <rx- 
 
 <pfo> 
 
 ■, to, dttXouf, 
 
 manner, r^vos, b; (—-custom, 
 habit), fidos, -ous, T '° > ' ovs > 
 
 TO. 
 
 in like, b^oius. 
 
 mantle, ipArm, to., 
 many, iroXug, oroXXYl, oroXv [§ 4S.J. 
 march, obit, h ; orogiia, «. 
 
 -, a day’s, <TTx6p.it, 1. 
 
 _ — 9 to, <TT^XTliur6xi ; OTOOiV s- 
 
 crSxi (with Aor. Pass.) j dvx- 
 
 ^ tvyvvvxt. 
 
 -, to begin a, (march out), 
 
 \x(TT(>XTiU&a6xt. 
 
 mar gill of, on the, sa%xTog 3, 
 (agreeing with the Noun , 
 
 § 148, Obs. 5.). 
 
 mark (==evidence), nxpfyiov, t-. 
 marry (of a man), yxpuv ; (oj a 
 woman), yxpu<r6xi (Dat.). 
 marshal, to, txttuv. 
 mass, red-hot, hxorl^og uvo^ti, i. 
 

 ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 master, xvgios, o } bscrTo'-rys, -ov, o ; 
 (=teacher), bihxo'zxXog, b. 
 
 -—, to, x^xtuv (Gen.). 
 
 matter (^=work), sgyov, to. 
 
 maturity, dxpft, fj. 
 
 may, one, (=it is allowable), *$*- 
 
 <rn(v). 
 
 meadow, Xu/tuv, -uvog, o. 
 mean, the, (=inidway course), 
 
 fttalryg , -*)rog, f). 
 
 -, QxvXos 3; (=base), xxxbg 
 
 3 ; ala^cg 3. 
 
 means, by no, ovbx/xais , yxiara. 
 medical, Ixr^ixts 3. 
 meet, or go to, xorxvrov ; (=fall 
 in with), xxruXa/xfbtxvtiv ; **- 
 Tuy%<xvsiv (Dat . ) ; avvruy^xvuv 
 (Dat .) ; cruftri Trtiv (Dat.) ; 
 
 (—-strike against), tposti erruv 
 (Dat.). 
 
 meeting, a, (rwovrla, ft. 
 melody, peXos, -ovro; (==song), 
 Ofibriy f). 
 
 melt, r/ixuv (trans.) ; ryxsa.Sxi (in- 
 trans.). 
 
 memorial, It bftvyftx, -arog, to ; 
 
 ftVYlfCX, -XTOg, TO. 
 
 memory, /avy/xy, f). 
 mention (=record), xlyog, &. 
 mentioning, worth, dycXoyog 2. 
 mercenaries, gsvoi, el; /tirLopb^oi, 
 ol 
 
 merciful, 'l\tug, -uv [§ 30.]. 
 mere, ftbvos ; xtvcs 3. 
 meritorious than, to be no less, 
 ou puoZadcu (withAor. Pass.). 
 message, xyytXla, ». 
 messenger, ayysXos, b. 
 middle, middle of, midst of, 
 fAaos 3, (agreeing withiheNoun, 
 
 § 143, Obs. 5.). 
 midnight, fttaxi vuxrtg. 
 
 Ought, bLtU.fJl.lSy -tOOfy 7], 
 
 mild, t^uos, -the, -ov f§ 48.1 : 
 
 %nog 2 and 3. 
 mildness, T^xbry ?, -yros, fi. 
 military years, cTgxTivo-iftx try, 
 milk, y xXx, -axros, to. 
 min i, fcvz, y, (as a weight=100 
 drachmae— 15 oz., 83^ grs. ;— 
 
 as a sum of money == 100 
 drackmce=£4 Is. 3d ). 
 mind, the, voC/g, o ; pgevts, al j 
 (—animus), eup.lt, b; {,. 
 
 , call to, pvypovivuv (ti). 
 
 -, nobleness of, ytwxicTysy 
 
 -yrog. y. 
 
 mindful of, be, uipvyrSat (Gen .); 
 <Peovrl%t.v (Gen.). 
 
 mingle with, playuv (Dat.); **« 
 
 gXVVJVX/. 
 
 minstrelsy, xiSx^cublxy y. 
 mirror, xoltott/jov, to. 
 misfortune, arv^lx, y ; xaxov, TO ; 
 aufx.Qoox, ^ ; xru%ypa, -aros, ro ; 
 
 —-misfortunes, ruga/, al. 
 mislead, er%()xytiv ; orxgxorla^uv. 
 mix, ftiyvuvxi (Dat.); pieyuv (Dat ); 
 xtgxvvuvxt. 
 
 mob, ox,XoSy b; hypos, b. 
 mode of life, blxira, y. 
 moderate, pernios 3 ; ^absti¬ 
 nent), tyx^aryg, -eg. 
 moderately or in moderation, 
 
 ptr^iug. 
 
 moderation, ptr^ov, to. 
 modern, vsdursgos. 
 modest/, xlbobg, -ovg, y; aup^oervvy, i 
 monarchy, / IxatXtlx, ft. 
 money, r<x ; x^vcrlov, to. 
 
 -> travelling, ipbhov, to. 
 
 month, ftvjv, pyvcg, b. 
 monument, pvfjp a, -xros, to. 
 moon, cnXyvy, y. 
 morals, y0y, rx. 
 
 more (plus), -rXt'ov or rxiov; (ma- 
 gis), y.xXXov. 
 moreover, T^bg roury. 
 morrow, xfyiov. 
 mortal, Svyrog 3. 
 
 most, TXttcrrog 3; — (Adv.) pt t- 
 Xtarx. 
 
 - of all (=especially), pd- 
 
 Xiarx. 
 
 mother, ftyryo, -Tftbiy fjy [§ 36.]. 
 motion, xlvymg, -tug, )j. 
 
 -—, to be in, kmTo-Pxi (with 
 
 Aor. Pass.). 
 
 mount, to, xvxfixlvuv ('tori n). 
 mountain or mount, o^og, -ovg, 
 
 To; xlpog, o. 
 
ENGLISH—QUEER VOCABULARY. 
 
 639 
 
 mourn, obv^ta’^xi ; A v<rs7<r0au 
 — - for, xkaisn ; c nvOtiv. 
 
 mournful, kvygbg 3; kvxyoos 3; 
 
 (=plaintive), yoJAyg, -ss. 
 mouse, /£*£/?, -Ms, «• 
 mouth, cropx, -xrog, ro. 
 move, to, xivuv {trails.) ; xmTtrPxi 
 {intrans.), ivilh Aor. Pass. ; 
 (=affect), xxrxxkvv {Acc.) ;— 
 to be moved to pity, skia^uv; 
 
 oix-Ti igl/V. 
 
 much, Tokv; [§ 48.] ; Adv ., <r«Ay ; 
 
 fjbxkx. 
 
 multitude, ^y/aos, o; b^kos, o; 
 
 Tky?OS, -OVS, TO ; -TflAAo;. 
 
 murder, to, Qonvuv. 
 
 Muse, Movcrx, «. 
 
 Muses, leader of the, Moutrxytrys, 
 •av, o. 
 
 music, povtnxy, ]• 
 must, or xgy {with Acc. and 
 Inf.) ; %osouv {icrri). 
 my, tf*is; pou. 
 
 N. 
 
 Naked, yop* Is 3. 
 
 name, b'vo/xx, -xros, ri. 
 
 -, to, ovo/xx^tiv ; xxktit. 
 
 nation, ehos, •ovs , to. 
 native land or country, <rxr(tg, 
 -ftog, y. 
 
 nature, Qvjis, -sag, y ; (—dispo¬ 
 sition), %0os, -ovs, to'. 
 naval battle, to engage in a, mv- 
 
 f&XfcUV. 
 
 near, (Prep.), tx^x; to os ; Adj., 
 rkyalos 3 ; Adv., tyyvs. 
 necessaries, Wtrfiux, tx. 
 necessary, xvxyxxios 3. 
 
 .-—, it is, §s7 or {with 
 
 Acc. and Inf.). 
 
 necessity, xvxyxy, y. ' 
 neck, rga%ykos, o 
 necklace, ar^s-rrog, b. 
 need, svbux, y ; (rorxvis, -teas, y. 
 
 -, to, Iu<t6x4 {Gen.) ; xzK u9 
 
 {Gen.); er-rx^uv {Gen.). 
 neglect, to, xpikilv {Gen.) ; (=to 
 esteemlightly), bkiyugsTv {Gen.); 
 (=overlook), Tt^/ogav; {==prce- 
 iarmittere), txoJvxi ; xpn*xi. 
 
 neighbour, yslrsov, -ovos, b, h 
 neighbours, o< vskxg ; o\ xkyo.o* 
 neither, ouht; neither—nor, ovrt 
 — ovrt, ft firs — /xyrs. 
 net, a, vtQeky, y ; SUtuov, to. , 
 never, otlxon (pyTort) ; ovbs<rom 
 {(/.yhexoTi) ;—{of past time), 
 never yet, ovtutoti {/xy • xtu- 
 
 <rore) ; ovbivuxon {py^sru/Tort). 
 
 -growing old, xyy^ug, -uv. 
 
 nevertheless, o^oug. 
 news, ayyskix, y. 
 night, vvg, vvxrog, y. 
 no, no one, none, oubut [pyhls) 
 [§ 68, Obs. 1.]in no way, 
 ovbsv {/xyVtv) by no means, 
 ovbxfxoog ; yxiarx ;—no longer, 
 ovxen {ftyxsTi). 
 
 noftle, \a6kbs 3 ; xxkbs 3 ; ayxPot 
 3 ; y ivvxios 3 ; svysvyg, •« ; (= = ho* 
 nour-loving), qnkirlpas 2. 
 nobleness of mind, ytvvx.bryg, 
 -yros, y. 
 nobly, yiwxlus. 
 noises, confused, 6o^v(boi, si. 
 nonsense, kyoog, o. 
 north, xoztos, y ; (boppag, •*, •• 
 north-wind, tloppus, -<*■> b. 
 nose, pis, pi vi>s, y- 
 not, oil {oux, oii%); pd\ [§ 17/, 
 3 — 9 .] ; not only—but also, ob 
 pcovov—xkkx xxi ;—not less, ou- 
 lh yrrov ;—not even, tvbi (jtyb*.); 
 —certainly not or never, ait 
 ^[§177,9.]. 
 
 nothing, ovUv {pybG). 
 nourish, rgspuv. 
 
 now ( = already), yh ;— even 
 
 now, tTI XXI vuv. 
 noxious, xxxls 3. 
 number, a^fxbs, b. 
 nurture, to, r^lpuv ; (=educate), 
 
 TXlSiVUV. 
 
 °. 
 
 0 that! iris or si yx.^, with Opt. 
 
 [§ 153, 1, b, (/3)J. 
 
 oath, o^xos, b. 
 
 _, to swear a false, Wiooxu 
 
 opvvvxt (i. e. WiooxoY 0£X0V, 
 obedient, xxryxoos 2 {Gen. ox Dai .), 
 
EN'GLISFT—-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 *40 
 
 obey, orufaaioct (Dat .); vxttxovtn 
 (Gen. or Dat.) ; H^iaBat ;—we 
 must obey, ruo riot iart(t). 
 object to (= bring as a charge 
 against), lyxxXut (r! r/w). 
 obliged, one is, (=forced to do 
 so and so), du, with Acc. and 
 Inf. 
 
 oblivion, xMn, fi. 
 obscure, d<pocv*is, -tg. 
 observant of law, toptpos 3. 
 observe (=perceive), alaSHnafcu, 
 Dep. Mid., (Gen. or Acc.). 
 
 -- beforehand, w^otoiit. 
 
 obtain, Xocpftoittit ; Tuy%<xvtit 
 (Gen.); (by lot), Xay^xtut 
 (Gen.); (by entreaty), \\u.iru- 
 aiat. 
 
 occasion (= cause), alms, o. 
 
 -, to, (=bring), a yut. 
 
 ocean, ortXxyog, -ovs , ro. 
 
 odious, 3. 
 
 -, to become, tin^xttaixi. 
 
 offend (=sin), ccpaoTootut. 
 offender, v, o. 
 
 offer, •rxoe%eiv ; (=dedicate), «v«- 
 ri0ev<zi; (=ofifer sacrifice), 6vut. 
 offering, an, ivaia, 
 
 -, to present an, ivaiocv iroi- 
 
 ucrScti. 
 
 office (in the State), 
 
 -- (=task), eoyov, to. 
 
 often, vroWctxis. 
 
 often as, as, Won J Wat ; iororat 
 [see § 183.]. 
 
 oil, e Xociot, to. 
 
 old, irg'io-fius, -vos and-£«,-; yt^ooios 
 3 ; (=ancient), oraXouig 3 ;— 
 never growing old, iyfyoos, -»». 
 
 — age, yyj^as, to, [§ 39, Obs.]. 
 
 —, grow, y/igotuxuv. 
 
 man, yegeov, -ovrog ; orgnafovg, o. 
 
 — woman, y^xvs, [§ 41.]. 
 omit, piQittcu ; oroo^oc\tiontv. 
 
 on, tori; It ; lor to ; atx\ (=COn- 
 cerning), nfi. 
 
 once, a.Tut.\\ (=before), t^cti^j ; 
 (=at a certain time), non 
 (End.). 
 
 -, at, '-raja^^a ; s 16is. 
 
 one (=any one, some one), ri$ ; 
 
 —(when contrasted with ‘the 
 other,’ it is rendered by o pit or 
 tregog). 
 
 one another, of, ocXXfiXut. 
 only, fioMov, (sometimes rendered 
 by pong ); not only—but also, 
 
 ov pitot —aU« xeti. 
 
 onward, lead, orgoxyuv. 
 
 Open, I stand, ocvtyyct or itiar/pxt. 
 opinion, yvuipq, 55 . 
 
 -■, to be of, topi%ut ; iy?*"- 
 
 G0OU. 
 
 oppose, ItxvTiovaBxt (loifll A Of. 
 Pass.). 
 
 opposite, ttxtr/os 3 j 5 Tt(>os 3. 
 oppressive, %etXtorog 3. 
 or, H. 
 
 oracle, %c*i<rp : ,g, 0 . 
 
 -, consult an, pxtTiviaOxt. 
 
 order, xcapos, 0 ; (=rank, line), 
 
 TOt.\lg, -tUi, fi. 
 
 -, good, iixoapioc, fi. 
 
 - that, in, ivx ; cog ; oVj»i 
 
 [§ 181. J; in order that—not, 
 tov pfj (with Inf.) [§ 173, 2»j. 
 
 -, to, (=arrange), t<xttu» ; 
 
 }iuT<xTTut; (=command), «=- 
 Xtvut (with Acc. and Inf. ); 
 (=enjoin), \trtXXut or ivTtXXi « 
 a6aci; (as a general), cro^ayys A« 
 Xs it. 
 
 ordered (well), tuTxxros 2 . 
 origin, common, avyytvsg, -ovg y 
 
 TO. 
 
 ornament, xlcpog, 0 . 
 other, the, (=alter), tnoos 3 4 
 (=alius) oixxos, —of each 
 
 other, uXXrjXuv. 
 
 others’ (=belonging to others), 
 ccXXct^ios 3. 
 
 otherwise (=another thing), 
 oiXXo. 
 
 ought, h7 or ( with Acc. and 
 
 Inf.). 
 out of, lx. 
 outside, IX M (Gen.). 
 over, uors£ ; (=throughout), *«- 
 t<x; (=too great), ay*». 
 overhanging (=over), voreo. 
 overturn, atxT^iorut ; onoiT^Wu*. 
 owe, ojiiXut. 
 
English—greek vocabulary. 
 
 311 
 
 ®wn, 5%a* 3 ; oWuoi 3 his own 
 affairs or concerns* rx ixv- 
 tov \ rot. Thix. 
 
 OX, COW, /3 ovi, (7>oog, o, b , [§ 41.]. 
 
 P. 
 
 Pain, otXyog, -out, *r° j ( == g r i e ^)> 
 xt*n, b ; {severe) dhvw, b- 
 painful, dxyuvU 3. 
 painless, dvxXyurog 2. 
 painting, Z.uy^xtpix, b. 
 palace, (ixaiXux , r(u 
 pale, d>x,^s 3. 
 
 parasang, •rx^xadyym, -ov. «• 
 pardon, to, atr/yiyvdjaxirt. 
 parents, yovi7s, -euv, oi. 
 park, <ra(><x$ujos, o. 
 part, a, pe^os, -ovg, re. 
 
 -, to, y£ 4 !£<£srv. 
 
 _ in, take, pirixuv {Gen.). 
 
 participate in, pi rl^e/v {Gen.). 
 pass (= go), tro^ivtaQxi {Dep. 
 Pass.). , 
 
 .- \>y,trx£xr(>i%iw \irxpi(>XiG6xi > 
 
 orapxfoxlniv. t 
 
 _ {life ), hidyuv ;—pass one s 
 
 ftimeln public, *» ru ipxvi^d Ami. 
 passage across, trd.^o'hos, im¬ 
 passion, fdPos, -ovs, to’, l=evil 
 desire), iorihpix, f). 
 past (=what is past), <rx^.XnXu- 
 6 ojs, -v 7 x, -is. 
 path, ohef, b. 
 
 pay, pnr6ot, o. # 
 
 _^ to, ctvronvuv J CLtfooioovcu* 
 
 peace, f/^vw, ^ 
 
 -, make, tfybmv troiu-aQxi. 
 
 peacock, -&>, «, [§ 30, Obs. 
 
 2 .]. , , 
 
 peep up or out, xvxitvirniv. 
 
 oeltasts, triXrxcrrxi, 01 . 
 
 people, Xidts, o, [§ 30.]; (=the 
 
 body politic), Zypog, l ; (=na- 
 tion), ePvog, -ovg, to ; (=^=multi- 
 iude), <rxij0of, ~ ot, t; T ®> [ l people^ 
 in the indefinite sense of ‘ one,’ 
 ‘they’ is expressed by r)g, by 
 the III .Pers. Plur. Act., by 
 the III. Pers. Sing. Pass., or 
 by the II. Pers. Sing, of the 
 Opt with ah]. 
 
 perceive, aioQdvtaSat, Dep. Mid., 
 {Gen. or Acc.) ; yiyvd>cncu>. 
 perform, or^drvuv ; h^xv ; trout »; 
 
 diroQxivtaOxi , xvvuv ; ioyxZ > i(T0xi ; 
 'hia.tr^dmuSai'y WiriXu*-, htxvvuv. 
 performed, be, (=take place), 
 yiynaUxi. 
 
 performer, \pyxrvs, -tv, »• 
 perfume, pv^ov. to. 
 perhaps, ’lerug. 
 peril, x'lvhvvosy o. 
 
 period ( = time), #e* 9f * • * 
 (=right time), xxi^os, o. 
 perish, d<roX\t>r0xi. 
 permit, ss»; hihovxi ;—it is per¬ 
 mitted, e%itTri{v) or tcrr/(») With 
 the Dat. 
 
 person (=appearance), Ahog, -ov;, 
 TO ; ( = body), a&pa, -a rag, 
 
 t 
 
 TO . 
 
 persuade, rAOu » (Acc.). _ 
 persuasiveness, -out, b- 
 
 perverse, axoXug 3. 
 philosopher, qnXcaoipoi, a. 
 philosophise, <piXo<ro$i7v. 
 philosophy, QiXaaofix, b' 
 physician, Ixroog, o. 
 
 r J ^ 1 » 
 
 pieces, tear in, hixppnyvvmi. 
 piety, tvaefiux, fn 
 pillar, <rrf)X>i, b- 
 pilot, xufiigvYiTns, -ov t t 
 pine (tree), ixim, b. 
 
 | pious, ivai&bg, -eg. 
 pipe (shepherd’s), Oreo'S* -iyye, 
 b. 
 
 pity, to, IXtxigitv ; oixnfysiv ; oXo - 
 
 <ptJ()i(T(?Xl. 
 
 _on, have, xxnXiuv {Acc.). 
 
 -, to be moved to, ixtxi^siv; 
 
 OlKTtiptIV. 
 
 place, rotrofy o * — in place of, 
 > / 
 a-vn. 
 
 _, to, TiVivxi j (^=-to dedicate), 
 
 dvxrt0svx.. 
 
 plague, to, ruftut. 
 plaintiff, xx-rbyo^o$. i. 
 plane-tree, r*.xrx»os, k 
 plant, to, (pvrtvtiv. 
 play, play at, trx'^m. 
 plea, Xoyog, o. 
 pleasant, nh'Ji, -t7x, -i. 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCARTTLARY. 
 
 C12 
 
 pleasantly, 
 
 please, xoiaxuv {Dat.). 
 pleasing (=graceful), iv^aots, -i, 
 
 Gen., -iTog. 
 
 pleasure, vibovb, ft. 
 
 - in, take, %a!guv { Dat .); 
 
 viSior0on {with Fut. and Aor. 
 Pass.). 
 
 . — ■ , love of, <pt\*i'$oviu , 
 
 -, with, hotcug. 
 
 plot, a, WifiouXv, bi. 
 
 - against, to, WifiouXtusn 
 
 {Dat.). 
 
 plunge, piorrut. 
 poet, oroiriTns, -ou , o. 
 poetry, epic, Toi’/iaig t rout j ra «t»j. 
 political, •roXiTixog 3. 
 
 politics, Ta ‘ToXlTtXIX. 
 pollute, ptoclvuv. 
 
 poor (=not rich, pauper ), new ?, 
 •tiros’, rzvi%t>bg 3; (=menrlicus), 
 srrai^oV 3 ; (=inops), (XTogo; 2 J 
 (=mean), QuvXos. 
 
 ■-, to be, orevurPai ; tivyitivuv. 
 
 poorly (=badly), xxxcus. 
 portion, pi^og, -ovg, to. 
 pOSSeSS, t^tiv ; xtXTr)T0xi, * 
 
 -oneself of, xuure7v {Gen.). 
 
 possessed by, to be, (=to be 
 subject to), ££fo-i?a/. 
 possession, xrijpec, - utos > ve ; XT) j- 
 
 «r/f, -twf, q ; oualx, i); xfipoe, 
 •UTOS, TO. 
 
 -of, get, kv^uvuv {Gen.). 
 
 possible, 'buvxTog 3. 
 
 --, as quickly as, us raw 
 
 ffra. 
 
 -, it is, «&™(*)« 
 
 pour, 
 
 poverty, orivia, VI ; ^onapoaCvvi, fi j 
 
 aoro^ia, r/. 
 
 power, buvxpig, -tug, f] ’ ^autho¬ 
 rity, potestas ), \\ovaia, f). 
 
 —- , in thy, tort aoi. 
 
 , it is in one’s, (=it is pos¬ 
 sible), t^ian {Dat.) ; or A i<T<Tl ! 
 {Dat.). 
 
 --of any one, to be in the, 
 
 Wi tivi clvai. 
 
 powerful, to be, butxa&xi to be 
 very powerful, roXXa luvzaSou. 
 
 practice, aaxtitng, -tag, f). 
 practise, piXtTuv ; xfiaffai {Dat.) • 
 ctaxuv ’ yvpvct^uv, {the last two 
 
 usually of athletic exercises); 
 (=pursue), WiTtihvu*- 
 praise, torzivog, o. 
 
 -, to, iramTv [A cc.). 
 
 prater, uboXea%Tig, -ou, o. 
 
 prating, xboXia^ix, f). 
 
 pray, tu^ta-^ai,Dep. Mid.{Dat.) 
 
 { — entreat), Ixinvuv {Acc.) 
 %{7(t6xi {Gen.). 
 
 prayer, tv%{j, b ; bey trig, -fag, n. 
 precaution, r^ovoia, y. 
 precious, rlptos 3. 
 prefer, ai^uaSai ;—we must pre¬ 
 fer, orgouigiTeov terri{v). 
 preferable to, ai^sTcur^og. 
 preparation, piXem, b. 
 prepare oneself, orx^xaxtva^Bcr^eu, 
 (for something , ri'g n). 
 present, rx^uv, -ouax, -cv ; tnardg, 
 -uax, -eg. 
 
 -, to, (=submit, afford), 
 
 vrxfi%iiv. 
 
 -an offering, dualxv otok7- 
 
 <r6ai. 
 
 -, be, <ra^i7vai {Dat.) ; tfxuv. 
 
 - before, be, rx^riivxi {Dat.). 
 
 preserve, aih^uv. 
 president, or^ogTxrriS, -ou, b. 
 press into, ugortorruv {us n). 
 
 - On, iyxuatixi {Dat.). 
 
 pretence, ir^otyaaig, -tug , b- 
 pretend, orgogroiurllxi j (prxaxuv. 
 prevail (= exist), tTvai ; {as a 
 custom ), r’~‘-6ai. 
 
 prevent, xuXvav ; tigyuv ; a<rt%uv 
 {Gen.). 
 
 pride (= proud thoughts), < poovf )- 
 para, rot , (=arrogance), tp^ig, 
 -ius, h- 
 
 -oneself, to, y xu^aiuaSxi {with 
 
 Aor. Pass.) J ayaXXur&ai {\<rt 
 nvi) : vipvvviaQai {tori nvt) ; iy- 
 xaXXuTTt X,iaBai. 
 
 priest, hgiug, -teas, o. 
 prime {of life, dbc.), axpv, h- 
 prison, public, hapuTb^ov, ri % 
 prisoner [of war), a/^aXwras, «. 
 private capacity, in a, iblcf. 
 
ENGLISH-GREER VOCABULARY. 
 
 64‘5 
 
 prize, x6\ov, to. 
 
 . -very highly, to, vrifi oroXXov 
 
 xoiuaQtzi. 
 
 proceed, (ixivuv, T^oflxm/v. 
 proclamation, make, 
 procure (=find for), tv^iuxuv. 
 prodigy, ts^< -cf, -xtos, to, [§ 39, 
 Obs.]. 
 
 produce, tixtuv ; Qvitv ; xvxi puny, 
 profess, l<rxyyt\Xtcr0xi. 
 proffer, Tx^t^tiv ; E-ra^e/v. 
 proficiency in, make, t^oxottuv 
 or ionbib'vxi ( rgos or it i ti). 
 profit, to, (trans.), u$tXuv what 
 does it profit ? rl arupQegu *, 
 profitable, afeXipog 2; ^turt^og 3. 
 progress in, make, profi¬ 
 ciency. , 
 
 prohibit, xTxyo^tvuv ; xtutuv 
 (Aor.). 
 
 prominent, be, T^oi^tn. 
 promise, to, vmcr%vt7<r£xi’, tvrxy- 
 ye XXtaUxi. 
 
 promptitude, Vtprvi, -vitos, *i. 
 property, ^ip ,ra ) 5 <5 ‘'' cna ’ *»• 
 propitious, ‘ixtug, -uv. 
 prosper, tv ft^tadau. 
 prosperity (=good fortune), tv- 
 rv%lx, n; (=wealth), okfos, 
 prosperous, ivbxiy.uv, -ov; tvTv^rjg, 
 
 _-_be, tVTVp^tiV', tvlxipi- 
 
 tuv. 
 
 protect, <pu\irrtiv. > / 
 
 proud of, be, vtpvvvtaSxt ( tTinvi ); 
 
 dyxXXuxSxi {if! nvi). 
 provide for oneself yet or more¬ 
 over, T^ogTo^tafxi. 
 provided that, ti; kb; •*« (w»w 
 Inf.) ; if yru . 
 
 provident for, be, or Z ovouaeai 
 
 (Gen.). , 
 
 provision (for a journey), tpluv, 
 
 TO. 
 
 provisions, e<«, ra.. 
 
 prudence, <ru$^ T vrn, y ; tp^ovtjtns, 
 
 prudent, J 
 
 <p^«» 2; (^moderate), 3. 
 
 _, to be, cr«<Pe<>v»/V. 
 
 public, l*i/*oa-ios 3; (=common), 
 
 xoivU 3 in a public capacity, 
 'hvxoTix ;—to pass one’s time m 
 
 public, iV T*i <px\)i$ UVXi. 
 
 pubhc prison, bttrftwTri^ov, r6. 
 
 -square, ayoga, «. 
 
 publicly, l'/>u.oalx. 
 punish, xoXi&v; Zppiovv (pro 
 perly, by a fine); (=avenge 
 oneself), xvoTivurUxt. 
 punishment, &fix, * » # %o\x<ri;, 
 -tui, vt ; rtfAu^lx, ti ; (judicia), 
 'hixvt, «. 
 
 _to suffer, 'Sd vxi r <- 
 
 [/.uoixv. 
 
 purchase, wvtiaSxi ; T^lacrSau 
 pupil, pxPvir'/);, -ov, o. 
 purple, vro^v^ovf, -a, -»«*; Qoivi- 
 xovg, -55, -oov. 
 purpose, for any, tls ri. 
 purposes, one’s, rx 'hfc > xvrx. 
 pursue, biwxuv, tTi'biwxuv ; 6v)^ivttv •, 
 ixoXovSuv ; (—practise), i««»- 
 
 ^tVUV. 
 
 put an end to, xxtxtxvu ». 
 
 — 011, tv&vuv (nvi. ti) ", ay.Qitvvvvxi J 
 
 ifjoTt^Sxi or ipTiaxviiaixi ; 
 
 tTlTthO’^XI. 
 
 — out (=extinguish), <r$twvvxi\ 
 
 OLTOCrfiiVVUVXI. 
 
 — to death, utoxtuvuv. 
 
 be, XTodvqffXHV. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quack, Qivxi, -xxog, o. 
 
 quail, a, o^tv%, -vyos, b. 
 
 queen, fixa'iXux, j). 
 
 quick, uxvg, -vx, -v ; o^£g, **7a, -o, 
 
 quickly, rx^scog ; ra^a ; aiV* ; 
 
 (=easily), ?xXus. 
 
 __as possible, ; 
 
 r^» rx^iarviv. 
 
 quiet, iicrux'ix, b. 
 
 -, (J.(#.), ft<rv%os 2 . 
 
 -, keep, wcrv^iav *y»«. 
 
 R. 
 
 Race (=fineage), yevaf, «i« 
 
 -- 5 human, ivS^Tuv ytvoi. 
 
 rail at, o-xcOttud, 
 rain «W3g<»f» «• 
 
<U4 
 
 ENGLISH—GREEK VOCARUTART. 
 
 ram, xgtos, ». 
 rank, a, <ra£<s, -£&>?, «. 
 
 -before anyone, 
 
 rapacious, «£■*•«£, -«>«? 1. 
 rapidly, rx%eus ; ■?■«;£« ;—most 
 rapidly, <r>jv ra^iamv. 
 rashly, e/*?. 
 rather, pdxxov. 
 
 rational, acSp^uv, -av; ftsrgiog 3. 
 ravage, re/avuv ; JysM ; foapfitguv. 
 raven, xo^a\, -mhos, o. 
 reach, \pix\u<jBai, Dep. Mid. 
 (Gen.). 
 
 readiness, or^oBvpia, 
 ready, be, (=be willing), \Bix.u*. 
 reality, in, aXnBu;. 
 rear, r^ipuv; (=educate), ira/- 
 Js/t/v. 
 
 reason, Xo'y a f> «; (=understand- 
 ing), »ovf, -a?, o ;—with reason, 
 
 ^ixatug. 
 
 receive, Ss^so-^an; x.ap.p>a*uv. 
 
 - a kindness, il <r<xcrxtiv. 
 
 - back, uvoXapfixv'iv. 
 
 recently, aW/; eWy^aj. 
 
 .reclaim (=clear of wild beasts), 
 
 £ %n(Jlt(> 0 VV. 
 
 recompense, rts > 
 
 rectify, tvBvvuv. 
 
 red-hot mass, foivv^ot /av^^og, i. 
 Red sea, ’E {uBga BaXarra. 
 reed, xaX.ap.og, o \ va^»j£, -nxog, o ; 
 
 (=rush), pty, pTorog, ij. 
 reflect, foavos7aBat (Dep. Pass.) ; 
 
 Xoyi^iaBai (Dep. Mid.). 
 reflection, Xoyiapog, a ; to tp^ovri- 
 %uv. 
 
 refuge, xaraplyri, f). 
 
 ■regal, (Zaaixuog 2 and 3. 
 regulate (=prepare), xaTacrxtvu- 
 
 regulated, be well, x%x.ug olxuv ; 
 
 auvramaBai. 
 
 reign over, fixcAtuu* (Gen.). 
 rejoice at or in, x a k uv (Dat.) \ 
 nforBai (with Aor. and Put. 
 Pass.) ; —rejoice with, at^- 
 X<z,t(>uv (Dat.). 
 
 release from, a-reXvut ; iXivBt^oSv. 
 
 -by entreaty, obtain one’s, 
 
 i£euTtZffBu> 
 
 relieve (the poor), up sX«JW 
 relish, with, iifo'ug. 
 rely on, mo-nvuv. 
 remain, pinn; foapinn ;— re¬ 
 main concealed from, ^aXar* 
 Savin (Ace.). 
 
 remaining, Adj., Xoiorlg 3. 
 remember, pipvii<r6ai (Gen.), 
 remembrance, pvripyi, ft. 
 remote, most, eax^rog 3. 
 render (=make), rtfUou. 
 
 - aid to, (■>oYifow (Dat.). 
 
 - effeminate, paXax'i&n. 
 
 renown, iuxX.ua, $ ; fo%a, r, ; xXlog, 
 
 -SOUg, TO. 
 
 repay, d<rohfoiai ; aptifitaBat (nv£ 
 
 TIVl). 
 
 repel, d*u6u* ; (from oneself), 
 
 koruSuaBai. 
 
 repent, pirapixto-Bai, Dep. Pass ; 
 or (impersonally) ptrapixu (no* 
 
 TIVOg). 
 
 report, a, xlyog, a. 
 reproach, to, -^tyu* (nvd or n) ; 
 iyxaXuv (tivi) (= blame), P*f*~ 
 (Qiv&a'i (n). 
 
 reputable pleasures, nfovau pitm 
 fo&g. 
 
 reputation, iSxX.ua, *i ; $«£«, 
 
 -, good, tvho^ia, i). 
 
 request, to, airuv (nvx n) ; for- 
 <t6ou (Gen.); Ixtnvuv (Acc.). 
 
 -, a, Vmcif, - tug, h ; tux* h. 
 
 require (=need), foicrSai, Dep, 
 Pass. (Gen.). 
 
 requite a favour, arofo'&otat xd^n. 
 rescue, au%uv ; ixadj^tn. 
 resemble, ioixevai. 
 residence, governor’s, dg%tto >. *i. 
 resistance, make, uroarriv'u 
 (Dat.). 
 
 resolutely, orgoPvpug. 
 resolution, a, (ZouXtupa , - aros , to i 
 (=decree), <p£piapa, -aros, to. 
 resolve, yryvwcrxuv I am re¬ 
 solved, hoxii poi. 
 respect, a thug, -oSg. fi. 
 
 ->, to, xlduo’Pai (Acc.). 
 
 - to, with, ortgi. 
 
 response, ^^v/taaf, a. 
 
 -, give a, %£*>*, 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 645 
 
 rest, the, dkkos, -n, -o; {=reU- 
 quus), "koines 3. 
 restore, 
 
 -, difficult to, \vsioravtp6u- 
 
 rog 2. 
 
 restrain, ugystv; ans^gu {Gen.). 
 
 retire, avux^uv. 
 
 retreat, a, xara(bxcns, -tag, h 
 
 -, to, dva%ai£liv ; uno^at^tTv. 
 
 return, dva%wgitv. 
 
 -a favour, dnohhvai x&oiv. 
 
 reveal, txxakvormv; ( =shew be¬ 
 forehand), or^oan^aivuv. 
 revenge oneself on, ripw^tlrUai 
 {Acc.) ; dpovviaSai {Acc.). 
 revenue, or^lgolos, n. 
 revere, cifisatlat; allt7<r@ai {Dep. 
 Pass .). 
 
 reverence, afivs, -ovs, h. 
 
 _, to, (=respect), te^a- 
 
 •mvuv , alliZcdai {.With Aor. 
 Pass .'); aicr%uviO’0ui, (with Aor. 
 Pass.)-, (=worship), <r’ip>i<r9ai 
 {only the Pres, and Aor. Pass, 
 occur). 
 
 —-very highly, ori^l <xok- 
 
 kov noiiiaQai. 
 revile, koilo^uv {Acc.). 
 revolt, to, doroarijvxi. 
 
 .-, cause to, dip arrival. 
 
 reward, d9kov, ro y yt£«f, -*>s, ro, 
 
 [§ 39, Obs.]. 
 
 rich, orkovtrios 3rich in, tSrooog 
 2 (Gen.) to be or become 
 rich, orkovreiv. 
 
 riches, orkoZrog, o ; xtfpiara, ra. 
 Tide by, ora^tkauvuv. 
 
 right (= just),B/*a/os 3 ; {=dex- 
 ter), h%tbg 3. _ 
 
 __ } to set, tbdvvuo(>6oZv.', \\op6ovv. 
 
 rightly, htf&s. 
 ring, latrvktog , o. 
 ripe, oikoruv, -ov. 
 rise up, dvi<rra<r9ai. 
 river, nordfxos, o. 
 road, blog, f). 
 
 rob, d^ndluv ; (=- deprive of), 
 
 oupai^u<r6ai {nvi n). 
 
 robber, ky<irr\s, -oZ, o. 
 robe, arokv, h ; i/Aanov, rb, 
 rock, orlr^a, *. 
 
 room, upper, dxvyivv, -a, ro. 
 root, pi^ot, v. 
 rope, xakus, -CO, o. 
 rose, pllov, ro. 
 
 rough, (TKkYioes 3 ; {of a road), 
 
 rga%us, -ua, -u. 
 
 royal, /laertkuos 2 and 3 ;—royal 
 dominion or authority, (bam- 
 kiia, f /;—royal palace, paoi- 
 kua, ra. 
 
 rugged, r£a%us, -t7a, -6. 
 
 rum, to, dnokkuvxi ; hutpdtiouv. 
 
 -with, go to, cvvxorokkua^ai. 
 
 rule, rule over, a^uvy (=be 
 
 king of), (batrikivuv {Gen.). 
 ruler, ug%eov, -ovrog, o. 
 
 run, to, rgs^stv ; dtiv. 
 
 — away from, dorolil^aaxuv 
 
 {Acc.). . . . 
 
 — in different directions, ha hr 
 
 Igaazuv. 
 
 — past, nx£ar(>ixu*. 
 
 — to, orfosr£e%iiv. 
 
 rush, to, b^fxuv. 
 
 s. 
 
 Sacred, sacred to, Ufog 3 {Gen. )_ 
 sacrifice, (vria, ti. 
 
 -, or offer sacrifice, fivtiv. 
 
 __ f bring a, Qutriav oroiutrdai. 
 
 sad, kvygos 3 ; kvorn^os 3. 
 sadness, kvnn, h 
 safe, dtrQukns, ~h. 
 safely, dtrpakug. 
 safety, ffurn^ia, 
 sail, orkiTv. 
 
 _away, txnks7v ; dnoorksTv. 
 
 sake, for my, t/xhv %aoiv. 
 
 -of, for the, tvuca ; ort^l ; ha. 
 
 same, the, b avr'os [§ 60, Obs.]. 
 
 _time, at the, apex. 
 
 satisfaction, give, ( = suffer pu¬ 
 nishment, dare poenas), h**> 
 hi c vat. 
 
 say, keysiv ; <pdvat [§ 126, 8.] ; 
 
 to be said {did), kiyvrSai. 
 saying, a, p^/xa, -arog , ro. 
 scarcely, /xlki$] pix^ov ;—scarcely 
 escape, fxixfov ix<ptvyuv. 
 scarcity, aordvig, •*«*> >5» anoxia, 
 
 e 
 
 n. 
 
 \ 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 C46 
 
 Scatter, ffxi'bd^uv \ exCbunCvat ; $<a- 
 trcrsigi/v. 
 
 Sceptre, ffxrjorTgov, to. 
 school, to, iU 'bthu.aKu.'kov (sc. oT- 
 xov );—Thales and his school, 
 
 ol clfif i QaXfjv. 
 
 science, i«ric'<rj5 ( wq, fi. 
 sciences, the, tx ygd/x/xxTa. 
 
 SCOff at, cx.dj-7rriiv. 
 scourge, to, (&a<TT<youv. 
 
 8COUt, a, cxoTog, o. 
 scythe-bearing, fyrravtjpbgos 2. 
 sea, 6a.karrx, q —by Sea, xaroc, 
 6<xXurrav. 
 
 —, to fight at, vavax^tTv. 
 8ea-COast, orx^x6aXuTTix, i). 
 sea-bird, 6xXxttIx ogvis. 
 sea-fight, vxv/xu%lx, f). 
 season, out of, ( i. e. unseason¬ 
 ably), OTXpX xuigov. 
 secret, x^vottos 3. 
 
 -, a, XgVTTOV, TO ; ftVTTriglOV, TO. 
 
 secretly, x^vpx. [‘To do a thing 
 secretly’ is sometimes ren¬ 
 dered by \av6avuv with the 
 Part., § 175, 3.). 
 secure, ac?px\r,s, -eg; (=firm), 
 (ie&xtog 2 and 3. 
 securely, dapaXoDg. 
 sedentary trade, (.lavxvaixri T6%w. 
 sedition, cTacis, -avg, n. 
 see, (ixsvruv ; ogxv [§ 126, 5.] ; 
 it(>xta6xi. 
 
 — to anything, <rxoort7v ti. 
 seek, seek for, Z,nn7v, (=pursue), 
 
 TllWXtlV. 
 
 seem, boxuv ; pu'maSxi (with Aor. 
 II. and Fut. II. Pass.). 
 
 seen, not to be, it.6f5.Tos 2. 
 
 Seize, Xxfxfldvuv ; auXXx/xfodvei* ; 
 
 (=fall on), ifAwhrruv (Dat .);— 
 seize quicklj T , avx^ord^uv. 
 
 Select, to, xglvuv ; at ou a 6 at. 
 self, M.UT 0 (, -V, -o [§ 60 .]. 
 self-command, \yxpxTua, f>. 
 self-control, lyx^arax, %. 
 self-taught, a.vTo'bi'bxxTog 2. 
 
 sell, •rtor^uaxuv ; dirob$ocr6ai. 
 send, oreftmm p aTiXXttv ; dorotrriX- 
 Xut. 
 
 - -back or away, <drovi/torin> 
 
 send forth or out, Ixori/aviis. 
 senseless, oLaittToi 2 j a»oug, -®t*j 
 
 dpguiv, -#». 
 
 sensible, ctwitoi 3 j p^bn/xog 2 j 
 —to be sensible, crupoovAv. 
 sentence (judicial), xfta-ig, -ivg, 
 
 t m V' e 
 
 rj; oixti, n. 
 
 Separate, to, 'biitTT&vai ; xftvitv 
 ( intrans .), ylyvscr6ai ; uv* 
 
 Xvta6xt’, 'bixxfjiviaiai (with Aor. 
 Pass.). 
 
 seriously, speak, arovhxZ.u*. 
 serve (= be a slave), 'houXivu* 
 (Dat.) ; (=render service to), 
 v<rn^in7v (Dat .); (as a soldier ), 
 gt^xtiuio6xi ;—serve 2b3,ylyvt96cu 
 
 *lf. 
 
 service (=benefit). n. 
 
 servile, lovXuos 2 and 3. 
 servitude, louXtix, rj. 
 set (= place), xxtii^uv j Ttfft»xii 
 iortrifevxt. 
 
 — (as the sun), xxTxbveo-Pat, and 
 Aor. II., Perf. and Plpf. of 
 
 XXTxhCllV. 
 
 — on (=place), eortT/6ivxi. 
 
 — on fire, s/xtit^ixvxi. 
 
 — out (on a journey), •ro^iviaflou 
 
 (with Aor. Pass.); <x6xt ; 
 
 cpjixa‘6xt. 
 
 — right, ilQvvuv ; og6ovv j i \o%6ov9. 
 sever, Suo-raven. 
 
 shake, ct'uv. 
 shame, xlbug, -ovs, it. 
 shameful, ala^-g 3 ; duxfjs, -ipj 
 [xix(>bs 3. 
 
 shave, typuv or %vouv. 
 sheep, orgcifiaTov, to j olg, otig, o, 
 
 [§ 46, Obs. 2.]. 
 shelter, cTeyuv. 
 
 shepherd, voty.w, -evos, b ; yo/xiug, 
 
 / c 
 
 0 . 
 
 shew, btixvvvat’, XTobuxvuvai ; <px." 
 vtiv ; uoropxlvuv ,* tpavigov oroit7r ; 
 
 d'/jXoUu ; ( = present), <rȣ- 
 
 t%uv ; — shew oneself, <p«/« 
 vi<r6xi (with Aor. II. Pass .); 
 y>Y\Kov<j6ai (with Aor. Pass.) — 
 shew forth, iv^uKwsrffou, 
 shield, davng, -7log, h ;—small 
 shield, tr£AT/j ; q. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 647 
 
 ship, vavs, vtdbg, b, [§47, 9.]. 
 
 shoe, vvobnfjt.'t, -ocrog, re. 
 short, (iga.%vs t -uc&, -u; (=little), 
 
 »4 ' O 
 
 oAiyog o. 
 shortly, tv 
 shoulder, u/xog, o. 
 shouting, a, (=calling to), vuga- 
 xsXtvais, -u»Si b. 
 
 shrink from, xuroxvuv with Inf. 
 shun, Qtvyuv ( Acc .) ;—one must 
 shun, ptvxreov iar'iv. 
 shut, xXtiuv ; xuraxXi'iuv. 
 
 -in or up, xxrxxXttuv ; xccdu(>- 
 
 yuv. 
 
 sick, aerhvbs, -eg ; voatfg 3. 
 
 --, to be, votCiv ; atrllwuv, 
 
 side of, by the, cra^a. 
 signal, give a, anpcAvuv. 
 silent, be, ciuvruv; atyxv. 
 silver, ocoyv^os, b. 
 similarity, bpoibms, -nros, $. 
 simple, otrXoZg, -ij, -ovv. 
 sin, to, ot/xx^rxvtiv. 
 since (=because), on ; iru. (See 
 
 § 176.). 
 
 sing, sing of, o'buv. 
 single one, not a, ovbt'n [§ 171, 
 6 .]. 
 
 single combat with, engage m, 
 
 f&ovof&<i%iiv (Dat.). 
 
 sink into or under ( trans.),xx - 
 rctbuuv ; ( intrailS.) xxrabZvxi ; 
 xa.rtibvt(rl)a.i ; — sink away 
 
 (=fall), TiTrtlV. 
 
 sister, afoxpb, b. 
 
 sit on, iq>i%a,v'tv (Dat.). 
 
 slander, 'biotfioxb, b- 
 
 slave, louXog, o; 'b/xuj;, - ubg , a. 
 
 ■- to, be a, louXtutiv ; brrovx 
 
 iivai (nvog). 
 slavery, bouXtlx, b. 
 slavish labour, boZxuov Z^yov. 
 slay, xn'ivtiv j ccroxrtlvtiv ; povsvuv. 
 sleep, vnvos. b. 
 
 -, to, s vbuv ; xx6tvhuv ; xxro e- 
 
 Zx^oivitv. 
 
 small, fuxfrs 3 ; (in number), oXi- 
 yog 3. 
 
 smell, to, (frans.), oap^xlvtcrSxi 
 (Gen.). 
 
 —— of anything, %up. 
 
 snare, vrxylg, b- 
 
 - for, lay a, tnfytvu* (Acc.), 
 
 snow, %i*>v, * bvos , b. 
 snow-storm, viptro's, o. 
 
 SO, ovrco(s) ; (=this), rouro. 
 
 — far, roaovrov. 
 
 — far from, xvri. 
 
 — that, eogri [§ 186.]. 
 
 soar away, xvo'rrb/u.tvoe o“x,i<r$au. 
 sober-minded, aojp^uv, -a». 
 soldier, rr^xrturng, -ov, b. 
 solicitude, WifAsXtix, b. 
 solitude, tetiftiX, 19 . 
 some, evioi 3 ;—some one. r)s 
 (End.) something, r) (End.). 
 some—others, o\ pev — o\ It. 
 sometimes, hion ; non (Enel.). 
 son, vlos, b ; (—boy), rrx'n, vxih'og, 
 0 . 
 
 song, b ; (—melody, poetry), 
 
 /cceXog, -oug, rb ; (=VOice), payy, 
 
 € 
 
 V. 
 
 soon, rx^x ; 
 
 sooner, orfon^ov ; (=rather), /xxX- 
 Xov ;—to do something sooner 
 than or before another, pcavtn 
 (with Part.) [§ 175, 3.]. 
 sophist, aopiarbs, -oZ, o. 
 sorrow, Xv-rti, b. 
 sorry (=mean), pxZXog 3. 
 soul, ipu%b, b. 
 
 sound of, to the. See § 167, 7. 
 
 sound-mindedness, cup^avv*), b‘ 
 source, -rtjyb, b. 
 south, b ; vbrog. o. 
 
 sovereign, f.IxaiXtii^-tus , a; x^x uy t 
 -ovrog, o. 
 
 sovereignty, (bxo-tXux, b i b; 
 
 x^xrog, - ovs , rb. 
 
 SOW, to, awtiguv. 
 spacious, sufficiently, ^suffici¬ 
 ent), Ixavbi 3. 
 
 sparing of, to be, ptfitaHat (Gen.). 
 speak, Xeyeiv ; pxvai ; p6'tyyta6xi. 
 
 - seriously, c<xoubtxZ,uv. 
 
 _ the truth, ixyStvuv. 
 
 spear, Z'^v, -arog , rb,~ [§ 39.]. 
 spectator, foc&rbi, -ou, b. 
 speech, Xoytg, o ; (IZhg, o ; —free¬ 
 dom or boldness of speech, x«^- 
 f tier lot, b. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 £48 
 
 speedily, ; ra^eus ; x7^/x. 
 
 spirit, f) ; voZg, VOU, o ; <p^v, 
 
 - tvo’s, *1. 
 
 splendid, kx/xvgog 3 ; (=costly), 
 
 vrokVTikrjg, 'if. 
 
 sportsman, 6rt^(vrf)g, - ov , o. 
 spread a report, keyov 2,xcrTti^av. 
 spring, belonging to, i xpvig 3. 
 spring from ( = be, originate 
 from), d>x,\ ylyviaOtti) (=grow), 
 fikxarxvuv. 
 
 square, public, xyoox, ft. 
 stadium, CTodiovy to. 
 
 Stag, ekxtpof, o, *]. 
 
 stage (=a day’s march), cW^'jy 
 
 C. 
 
 - (m a tliea're), ax*^ y 
 
 stand, to, aTrjvx, ; \ttxvxi. 
 
 - by (=aid), -rxgxftsvuv. 
 
 *- firm, uTopevuv. 
 
 state, a, vrokinix, >i y <rok.iffy -toog, jj. 
 
 -, relating to the, woXitikos 
 
 3. 
 
 station, to, kxQkttxvxi. 
 statuary, xd^ixvTOTOitx^ fi. 
 statue, av^gixs, -xMToiy o. 
 steadfast, to'Ttixufy j /3s- 
 
 fixtos 2 and 3. 
 steal, xXittuv. 
 steersman, xufitgvrjrrisy- ou, i. 
 still (=yet), e n. 
 stillness, fi.au%ioc, *j. 
 stir (=move), xtvuv. 
 stolen, xk oTifjt.og 2. 
 stone (=made of stone), kihvo; 3. 
 
 -, to, xxTxTtTgouv. 
 
 story, koyoi , o ; /xZ0os, 1. 
 straightway, ihiug , erx^xx^/^x. 
 stranger, £lvoj, o. 
 stratagems, be exposed to, In- 
 
 fioukiuiafxu 
 
 street, Shot, h> 
 strength, pu>/x*, »; xkxf,, ft. 
 strife, -dog, ft. 
 strike with terror, xxrxwkfjTriiv.. 
 stripes, Tktjyxl, xl. 
 strive (=endeavour), -rupxafx,; 
 (—Seek), Z,rtTUP. 
 
 ' for or after, o^iyiaSx, (Gen.)‘ y 
 i^naSxi (Gen.') y Otdtxuv (A.CC.) y 
 %KAOUP ( Acc.). 
 
 strong, ia-^v^tg 3 ; (=tirm), jS/.jl 
 &* l °s 2 and 3 ; xr<pxkv ; , -eg. I 
 study, to, (axvOxvuv. I 
 
 stupid, xa-'jviTog 2 ; TiTvpu/uetog 3. H 
 subdue, x u Z°»<r6xi * ^ovkoZp • (mOi) 1 
 
 xxrxirr^etpsirdcti. I 
 
 subject to, utoxos 2. 1 
 
 > X li °°7iGcxi , doukouv ;— | 
 
 to subject to oneself, xxrxffTQi- ;1 
 <PiaQxt , 2oukoZa7xi. I 
 
 subjugate, ; 2ovkoZv. m 
 
 submissive, txtuvis 3. f 
 
 submit (=present, afford), 
 
 X‘.t*. 
 
 --— to (=serve), SoukiZaK 
 
 subsistence, r^pfi, ft. 
 
 subvert, xvxr^es tup. 
 
 succeed to the sovereignty, xa - 
 
 , rxJTrj-vxt iIf fixer,kuav. \ 
 
 success, ivTvx'ix, h ; (=riches), * 
 wkouros, l ; okfiog, o. | 
 
 succour, to, t x^xaTijvn ( Dat . ) ; 
 
 au/xTovi?v ( Dai.). \ 
 
 such ( =talis ), to,oZto; 3 ; (=t(lil- 
 tus)y rotrouTOi 3, [§ 60.]. i 
 
 such as, oaog (==*iuantus) ; oJo; { 
 (=qualis), [§ 182, 7.]. 
 suffer, o rxcrx uv > (= permit), on- ( 
 Ziogxv (with Part.). \ 
 
 - or j>ay, have to, ipukut. i. 
 
 - punishment, 23 OVCU TIUGJ* 'j 
 
 f/av. 
 
 suffering, orevog, o. 
 sufficient, ixxvis 3 —to be suffi¬ 
 cient, Ixxvui e'x^y. 
 
 sufficiently, Ixxvug. | 
 
 —7 -spacious, Uxv'cg 3. ,1 
 
 suitably to ( = conformably), 
 xxrx. 
 
 sum, large, (= much), erokZs. 
 
 L§ 48.]. 
 
 summer, Sfyog, - ous , ro. 
 SUmptuOUSnesS, orokvrektix, ft. 
 
 sun, %kiog, o. 
 sup, to, 2uervt7r. 
 superior, to be, x^xnarivut. 
 Superiors, o\ x^urrovig. 
 supplicate, ixtnZuv ; ivxictioa. 
 
 (Dat.). } 
 
 supply, (tx^xuv (Dat .); t^o;t^ 
 
 (ivxt (Dat.), 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 649 
 
 support (=nourish), rfpuv. 
 suppose, hxt7v; Yiyiitrdcct; vofxiZ,uv; 
 uToXa.ftfiu.vsiv. 
 
 supremacy, r,ys/xovia ;, V). 
 sure, iapocXns, -eg; sp.rs'Sos 2. 
 surely, urgsxscog ;—surely not or 
 never, ob ft* [§ 177, 9. j. 
 
 Surpass, vtxocv (ACC .) ; brtgfidXXs- 
 a(ou (Acc.). 
 
 surrounding (=around), net. 
 Swallow, xsXi'hoJV, -ovog, vi. 
 swear, bftvuvat. 
 
 -by any one, \rofxvvvai 
 
 (Ace.). 
 
 - -falsely, sno^xsiv. 
 
 sweat, ft gabs, -uiToi, o. 
 
 sweet, vftut, -s7a, -v; yXvxus, -Cu, 
 / 
 
 -L>. 
 
 Swift, rx^bs, -six, -u ; uxus, -sla., 
 -v ; ‘ticc ) -v. 
 
 Swiftly, rd%x. 
 swim, to, vuv. 
 
 T. 
 
 Take ( = receive), Xxfxfidvuv; 
 (=capture), xtfs7v. 
 
 -care, ln{xiXi7a0xt, Dep. 
 
 Pass. (Gen .); (= beware of), 
 ^uXdrrsaSat (Acc.). 
 
 ■ -from, apatguaPa! (nvd r /). 
 
 --heed to, ibXxfiila&xt ( Acc.). 
 
 ■ -hold of, amadou (Gen.). 
 
 -in charge, Xx/xfidvuv. 
 
 -place (=happen), y/yvs 760 . 1 . 
 
 -pleasure in, x a -k uv {Dat.) ; 
 
 nhadat (with Put. and Aor. 
 Pass.). 
 
 - to flight, (fnuyuv. 
 
 taken, be, (of a city), aXlaxsadat. 
 talk, Xiyog, b. 
 
 -, to, XaXslv; (=chatter), *<■>• 
 
 riXXuv. 
 
 talker, idle, a$oXetr%vs, -ov , b. 
 talking, foolish, dhxsa%lx, fi. 
 taste, to, y shad at (Gen.). 
 teach, hbdaxtiv (rtvx n). 
 teacher, bftdaxdXof, b. 
 tear, a, Idx^vov, to. 
 tear, to, ^luppnyvvvxt ;—to tear in 
 pieces ( —- dilacerare), xa.ro.' 
 
 srx^dmtv. 
 
 tell, Xsyuv ; (pgd^ziv ; <pd.vxt. 
 temperate, lyx^arns, -h ; ftiring 
 
 3 ; aoutp^etiV , -ov. 
 temple, vs<L »?, -<i>, b. 
 temple-robber, hfoavXos, 5. 
 tend (=feed), fioaxuv. 
 tent, axnvv), vi. 
 terrible, htvbs 3. 
 terribly, 'huvug. 
 
 terrify, xxrar\virruv ; sxrXnrrstv. 
 terror, strike with, xarxrXnr- 
 
 TSIV. 
 
 testimony. fxxorvpx, n. 
 
 than, n :—(‘than’ after a Comp. 
 
 is often expressed by the Gen. ). 
 thank, ^d^iv sftsvxt. 
 that (Demonst. Pron .), ixiivog; 
 
 (with the Noun understood). 
 - (Cony.), on ; dig; (after ex¬ 
 pressions of fearing) ftn—ne; 
 (=in order that), us', drug, 
 ’iva [§ 181.]; in order that — 
 not, rob pen with Inf. [§ 173, 2.]. 
 theatre, deargov, ro. 
 theft, xXotyi, n. 
 then, rors. 
 there, ixs7. 
 
 -, to be, rx^uvxt. 
 
 therefore, rouro; oZv ? [oZv can- 
 not begin a sentence.]. 
 therewith, fxsrd. rourou. 
 
 - , to be, T^ossivai (Pat.). 
 
 thief, xXsrrng, ~ou, b ; xXurf, 
 -curbs, b ; $(*)(>, (pounds, b. 
 thievish, xXonpos 3; xxirrns 1. 
 thing, rfu.yu.ac, -arof, ro ; rfd\ig, 
 -lais, VI ; (=WOrk), egyov, rb ; 
 (=p0ssessi01l), xrrj/xx, - ccros , 
 rb ; xznftoc, -UTOS, rb. 
 think, nys7adcct ; vo/xi^uv; oiiadai ; 
 'boxsiv ; <Pf>ovs7v ; vos7v ; (=judge), 
 yiyvdicrxsiv. 
 
 - about or on, Xoyi^sadxt ; 
 
 <P^ovr'iZ,iiv (Acc.). 
 
 - worthy, x\iouv. 
 
 thirst, di-^os, -ous, rb. 
 
 -, to, or be thirsty, bi^nv. 
 
 thirsty, xlog 3. 
 
 this, olros ; oh [§ 60. ]. 
 
 thoroughly, r dvr us (=clearly) p 
 
 ffuQ&S. 
 
 F 2 
 
 
650 
 
 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 thoroughly, to understand, $/«- 
 yiyvciaxuv. 
 
 thou, av. 
 
 though, xxin^ with Part, j 
 xxi tow (*av) with Subj. :— 
 
 ‘ though ’ is sometimes ex¬ 
 pressed by the Part. [§ 176, 1.] 
 thought, von/xx, -xros, ro ; (=fore- 
 thought), orpovotx, fi. 
 thoughtful, tp^ovifxos % 
 thrash, tt), teguv. 
 throne, fycvog, o. 
 
 ———, ascend the, tig &xaikux» 
 
 ' xxrxarYjvxi. 
 
 through, bix. 
 
 throughout, xvx; ; (=whol¬ 
 ly), orxvrus. 
 throw, piirruv. 
 
 -a bridge over, ^ttr/vvvxi 
 
 (Acc.). 
 
 . down, xxSihxi. 
 
 __into disorder, 
 
 -javelins, t^xxovr/^u*. 
 
 -out (as words), pivruv. 
 
 thus, outu(s'). 
 
 thwart, ivxvTiovaSou (Dat.). 
 thy, aos ; aou. 
 thyself, of, atxuroi. 
 tidings, ■dyytkix, fi. 
 tile, T\ly6og, b. 
 till, tus ; ; orpiv. 
 
 time, 0 ’—right time, xxi- 
 
 £of, o; —life-time, uluiv, -u>vog, o ; 
 —at the same time, ci/xx ;—in 
 good time, tis xxkov ;—to pass 
 one’s time in public, tv ry 
 <paviHvxi ;—it is time to do 
 a thing , uox (lari) with Inf. 
 to, cr^Gj ; orx^x ; tori ; tig ; us. 
 to-day, rb/xtgov. 
 together with, xpxx ( Dat .). 
 toil, orovog, o. 
 
 — , to, fxo%6t7 y ; aravsiy. 
 toilsome, orokvorovog 2. 
 to-morrow, xtlgiov. 
 tongue, ykarrx, q. 
 too (=also), xxi ; (=too much), 
 otyxv ;— (sometimes translated 
 by the Comp.). 
 tooth, oholg, •c»T0$ } a. 
 
 top, top of, xxpog 3, ( agreeing with 
 the Noun , § 148, Obs. 5.). 
 touch, to, xorrtaixi (Gen.) ; (ty- 
 yxvav (Gen.). 
 
 towards, tree's; us ; la rl ; «rig<; 
 
 (of time ), wore, 
 town, orokts, - bus , *l» 
 trade, a, n^w, b- 
 tradition, key os, S, 
 traduce, 'Sia&akkuv. 
 tragedy, r^xyuihix, fj. 
 train (=exercise), xaxtlt. 
 transition, fxtrx^okbi fj. 
 travel, to, x^tvtaOxi (with Aor. 
 Pass.). 
 
 - abroad, dorobnfxuv. 
 
 - over, ‘xt^ivo^iuiffSxi ti (with 
 
 Aor. Pass.). 
 
 travelling-money, hpoihov, ro. 
 treason, srgaWla, b- 
 treasure, tiqaxugog, o; [xxrx t 
 rx. 
 
 treaty, oWjjxjj, f). 
 
 tree, Sev^gav, ro. 
 
 triad, rgixg, -a2aj, 
 
 trial of, make, m^xaSxi (Gen.). 
 
 tribunal (=court of justice), h- 
 
 xxtrrri(>iov, ro. 
 
 tribute, Qbgoi, oi. 
 
 triumph over (=defeat), ore^iyl- 
 y vtrQxi (Gen.). 
 trivial, <pxvkos 3. 
 trophy, rgborxiov, ro. 
 trouble, orovog , 0 . 
 
 - oneself about, (p^otri^u* 
 
 (Gen.). 
 
 troubled, be, \wrt7a6xi. 
 troublesome, %xknros 3 ; Xvrvfos 
 3; x^yxktos 3. 
 
 true *Xn %, - eg ; (= genuine), 
 xkriPivcs 3; (=faithful), Turns 
 3. 
 
 truly (=really), xXnf&s. 
 trumpet, aaXTiy%, -lyyo f, fi. 
 trumpeter, axXonyxrbs, - oh , a. 
 trust (— be persuaded by), 
 •xuhaUxiy with Aor. Pass. 
 (Dat .); (=fdem habere), *•<- 
 anvilv (Pat.); tbtoiCsvxi (Dat.). 
 trusty, onaros 3. 
 truth, dkr)(ux, b. 
 
ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 651, 
 
 truth, speak the, xXnhvuv. 
 turn, to, ( trans.), Tpivttv ; viot- 
 Tgevnv ; ; (intrans.),r^i- 
 
 vtaixt ; erTgtQtcrUa*. 
 
 »- — away (trails.), u<pio-ruvxt j 
 kvoTptvtsv. 
 
 -, in, iv fjt.sau ; arx ptegos. 
 
 -to, V^OT^tvtiv. 
 
 tusk, oboig, -ovroSf L 
 twice, S/f. 
 tyrant, vv^xwog, «■ 
 
 U. 
 
 Ulcer, tXxos, ~ovs, to. 
 unacquainted with, ctvei^a 2 
 (Gen.). 
 
 unadvisedly, iUrj. 
 unchangeable, dptTafiXnrog 2. 
 uncle (by the father's side), vx- 
 rgws, -uos, o. 
 under, ivo ; xank. 
 undergo, ivofivuv (Acc.) ; Ivs- 
 <p4guv (Acc.). 
 underneath, be, ivuvxi. 
 understand, understand how, \vl- 
 aruaOxi (Dep. Pass.); tfiivut. 
 -thoroughly, hxyiyvdi- 
 
 CXt IV. 
 
 understanding, vovg, vov, c; <pf- 
 vtg, at. 
 
 undertaking, egyov, to. 
 undeservedly, va£ d%ixv. 
 undone, xv^axros 2 . 
 uneasy, render, tx^xttuv. 
 uneducated, xva^mros 2. 
 unexpected, va£xbo%og 2 ; xvixvt- 
 
 CTOS 2 . 
 
 unfortunate, arvx*S, -h. 
 
 -, to be, aru%s7v ; $vg- 
 
 TU%t7v. 
 
 ungrateful, u%ugiaros 2. 
 unhappy, aTv%ris, -«'<• 
 unharmed, xv^puv, -ov. 
 unintelligent, xvoug, -ow; aavvt- 
 TOS 2. 
 
 miited, be, bp.ovot7v. 
 unjust, xhtxog 2. 
 
 unknown, advXog 2; (=unseen), 
 itpxvf\g, -ip. 
 
 unrewarded, xx^nrrog 2. 
 unseasonably, vu^x xaigov. 
 
 unseemly, xuxfa, -h ; ui<r%ebs 3. 
 unskilled in, avisos 2, (Gen.). 
 until, £&>$; f^xz 1 5 
 unvarying, 'htwixfa, -*g. 
 
 up, XVa. 
 
 —, lay, xarxrlfaaUxi. 
 
 upon, ivi ; vvio ; (==about), vt^l. 
 
 upright, ofbg 3. 
 
 uprightness, xxXoxdyxPia, rj. 
 
 upward, soar, dvxvbnaSxt. 
 
 usage, vbftos, o. 
 
 use, xeyw> -*«r» $• 
 
 -of, to make, x$v^h Dep . 
 
 Mid. (Dat.). 
 
 -, to be of, avp.<pe^uv (Dat.) ; 
 
 uptXtiv (Acc.) ; ovivdvxi ( ACC .). 
 
 useful, 3; upbxipog 2; 
 
 X^waTog 3. 
 
 .-, to be, uptXuv (Acc.) \ 
 
 bvivxvxt (Acc.). 
 using, xfi at Sv *<ȣ> fl 
 atter, Xeysiv; <p<xvxi; (=eunt as a 
 sound), vootter6 at. 
 utterly, destroy, xvoXXfaxt ; Ifax- 
 
 Xvvat. 
 
 V. 
 
 Valiant, avb^uog 3. 
 valour, dvbfa, n ; u^tT-h, 
 valuable, voXvrtXfa, - eg ; Tifcio; 3 ; 
 
 d'jadcg 3. 
 
 value more or more highly, vtfi 
 
 vXtiovog voiuaSai. 
 
 vehement, 'Buvtg 3. 
 venture, to, ToXpu*. 
 verdant, be, DaXXur. 
 vernal, ia^vbs 3. 
 
 versed in, dyxdbs 3; 'iy-vunog 2, 
 (Gen.). 
 
 very, very much, xixv; o-pifya; 
 (sometimes rendered by the 
 Comp, or Sup. of the AdjeC‘ 
 tive) ;— very highly, xxi vxvu. 
 vessel (=*hip), vXo7ov, to. 
 vice, xxxix, f) ; xaxortig, -ting, fa 
 victory, fa 
 
 vie with, 7nxpiXXda-6m, Dep . 
 Pass. (Dat.). 
 
 vigorous, ippupivos 3 ; i<rx^^s 3; 
 
 xXxipog 3. 
 village, xupn, fa 
 
652 
 
 ENGLISH—GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 villain, xaxovqyog, o. 
 vine, apt-mkos, I?, 
 violate (a treaty), kvuf. 
 violence, (hlx, b. / 
 
 violent, jS ixios 3 ; (rtpohgog 3. 
 violently, atplh^x ; klxv ; hr%vpus. 
 virtue, x^ityi, ^ ; xakoxccyxQia, yj ', 
 dya&ov, to. 
 
 virtuous, dyxQos 3 ; ernovhxios 3 ; 
 
 %g7icrro( 3. 
 visible, o^xtos 3. 
 voluntarily, txoverlus ; [sometimes 
 translated by the Adj. U6>, 
 -ouffat, -ov). 
 
 voluptuous, a voluptuary, 
 
 «r«ff, -ov, o. 
 
 w. 
 
 "Wage war with, nokifiuv [Dat.). 
 wait, ort^i/xevuv. 
 walk, to, £am/v. 
 wander about, negmkxvxoflai ; <rs- 
 [with Aor. Pass.), 
 want, to, (=need), [Gen .); 
 ht7cr6xi, Pep. Pass. {Gen .); 
 
 be in, virav^ov [Gen.) ; 
 
 xe?& ,v 
 
 war, nakt/xog, o. 
 
 _, to be at, to carry on, nokt- 
 
 f.Ail V [Dot.). 
 
 Ward off, aororgeVsw; afivniv ; 
 
 aXs^scr&zJ. 
 
 warlike, nokt/xixlg 3. 
 warning, autp^oviapog, o. 
 
 Warrior, ct^xt turns, -ov, o. 
 war-song, nxiav, -avoff, a. 
 wasb, v/^clv or vlnnuo ; tXvvuv. 
 wasp, ^«v, ^nvii, o. 
 wastes, lay, hixpStl^uv ; 2»jovy; 
 vuv. 
 
 watch, to, tpuXtxrruv , (= keep 
 watch), rvouv. 
 
 water, vhug, Ihxrog, to, [§ 47,10.]. 
 way (=road, journey), oh os, h; 
 (=manner), T^nog, i. 
 in no, obh'iv {(Anher). 
 
 . -, to give, 1 vhihovcu ; uxuv. 
 
 wax, xvgof, o. 
 
 weak, xathvhs, •*( > tLfpo/nros 2. 
 weaken, niguv ; fc=make dull), 
 
 XfAXV^OV* 
 
 weal, cum^lx, fj. 
 wealth, nkovrog, <5 
 
 (=prosperity), okfios, o. 
 wear, d/u,ni<r%*t7o'0xi or xpine^t- 
 
 < r0ui ; tpootlv; dfAtptevvv/rdai ; 
 
 - out, mlgtiv ; xa.Ta.ywva- 1 . 
 
 weary, to, nlguv. 
 
 -, to be, xdf.tvuv. 
 
 weep, xkxiuv. 
 welfare, aurvfia, fi. 
 well, kooXuis , iZ ;—to do well to, 
 iZ nonlv ( ^4cc. ) ; £V£ e ysr f 7» 
 
 (. Acc .)to be well, il i'xuv ; 
 xaXus s^i/v;—to fare well (=to 
 prosper), tZ ^rriiv. 
 well affected, well-disposed, £v- 
 vovg, -ow. t 
 
 well-known, hrjkos 3; <pxn^og o ; 
 
 _to be well-known, hnkos (<p«- 
 
 vi/oos) uvxi 1 i5, Obs. 4.]. 
 
 well-ordered, ivtxxto ; 2. 
 well-regulated, be, avvrxTn^m. 
 west, i ontgos, I", htlkn, *i. 
 what, o or u\ ns ; ogms ; what ? 
 r ; t • n; ( =qualis ?) nolog 3; 
 'analog 3, [Depend. Interrog.). 
 whatever, on. f 
 
 when, oTi ; Inti, \nuhh ; us ; on on ; 
 
 orxv {Subj .) ; intihxv [Subj.). 
 whence, dtp' ov ; ofov ;—whence ? 
 noitv, onothv [Depend. Inter - 
 rog.). ■ ' „ 
 
 whenever, on on ; onorxv ; orxo 
 [see § 183.] ; tl with Opt. 
 where, ov ; Inov where ? nij ; 
 wherever, *» or onn a» (with 
 
 Subj.). 
 
 wherein ? <n ; 
 
 whether, nori/>ov ; nonga ; (m a 
 dependent question) tl ;—(a/ier 
 a Verb of fearing) ^ 
 which, os; Interrog., th ; 
 
 _(of two), a<roTf^«f 3. 
 
 while, whilst, a.pax (with Part.) j 
 ^8Ta|y Par«.). [/* w j/e- 
 
 nerally expressed by the P art • 
 alone', § 176, 1.]. 
 whip, p-xtti\, -Tyos, 
 whither ? «rlj; 
 who, of, Interrog v/f; 
 whoever, o;r/f. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 653 
 
 Whole, orxs, oraccra., <rav ; ecrxs, 
 uToiax, urxv ; Ikog 3 . 
 why ? 3«x n; 
 
 wicked, xxxog 3 ; crorngog 3 . 
 wickedness, xxxorns, - r,ros, b i 
 xaxix, b- 
 
 wife, ywbt y vvKi»Df,b, [§47, 2.]; 
 
 ya.f4.irb, b • 
 
 vrAA.,ferus, xy^ios 3 . 
 
 -beast, 6bo , 6nfog, «; dnfm, ra'. 
 
 willing, fxah, -ouax, -ov. 
 
 _ _, to be, P ovkiadxi (Pep. 
 
 Pass.) ; \0ekuv or 6i\tn. 
 willingly, 
 
 wind, xvipos, a. 
 
 -, north, Prfpots, a. 
 
 wine, a/vaj, a. 
 
 wine-cup, x£xrb%, ?, »• 
 wing, «rT££av, ra; <tt£^£/|, «. 
 
 -(o/a;i army), xi^xs, [§39, 
 
 . Obs.]. 
 
 winter, %upwv, -&vos, o. 
 wisdom, aotp'ia, )j. 
 
 _, fond of, <pt\o<ro$os 2 . 
 
 wise, o-a^flf 3 ; Q^ovipos 2 ; trvvtrog 
 
 3 ; tvfiovkos 2 . 
 
 wisely, crocus’, (=well), tv., 
 wish (=prayer), tv%b, b ^nais, 
 
 -tut, b. 
 
 -, to, p oixurSou [Dep. Pass.); 
 
 Wekitv, (=pray for), tvx,t<r6xt. 
 With, crvv ; arxgu; pirx {with (Jen.); 
 
 (=together with), upx {Pat.). 
 within, hr is {Gen.). 
 without, oivtv (Gen.). 
 witness, pa^rvs, -ugos, o, n. 
 
 _, to bear, px^rvpy.y. 
 
 wolf, kvxcos, o. 
 
 *Vornan, ywb, yvvxixos, b, [§ 47, 
 
 2 .]. _ 
 
 --, (old), yoaus, y^uos, b, 
 
 [§ 41.]. 
 
 wonder, to, (xupo^ay. 
 wonderful, 6a.upu.crrOS 3- 
 wont, be, t\u6hxi. 
 word, kiyog, o; liras, •»(, to ; 
 
 (=saying), fit**, -ocros, ro. 
 work, rl. 
 
 ■ - , to, i^yafirQui ; (with toil), 
 
 -ravov; (with the accompanying 
 idea of fatigue), x&pvuy. 
 
 work evil to, seotuo (or $£«*) xaxm 
 ( Acc.). 
 
 - out, c%egyet%tcr6eu. 
 
 - with, auprovtio. 
 
 world, xocrpog , a. 
 worship, 6t^a.<rtuuy (Acc.) ; orpe 
 xuviTv (Acc.) ; x'huaBxi (Acc.) 
 
 [§ 98, (b)] ; aipirBou (Acc.) 
 worst. See bad. 
 
 -, to, ^u^ovcrSxi. 
 
 worthless, ava^og 2 and 3. 
 worthy, a£/a? 3 (Gen.) ; (=ear- 
 nest), crrtubcuos 3. 
 
 -, to deem or think, «|/aD». 
 
 would that! tffa or u ydg, with 
 Opt. [§153, 1, b, (/3)] ; u yh.% 
 uQikav, with Inf. 
 
 wound, to, rirpfaxuy; (=strike), 
 
 arXbrruv ; arxittv. 
 wrestler, xBkyrbs, -ov, a. 
 wretched, oixrfos 3. 
 write, yjaps/v. 
 
 wrong (=injury), ohixlx, b- 
 
 -, or do wrong to, xoixuo ; 
 
 xa.xus rottTv; —to do no wrong 
 to, oLVtv (prhh) ohixth. 
 wrong-doer, xbixuy, a. 
 
 Y. 
 
 Yarn, vrjpx, -xros, ro. 
 year, 'iros, -OVg, ro ; hixvrog, e ;— 
 every year, xxd' ixxarov iros. 
 years, military, trr^xnvaipx irn. 
 yet, ’in ; oruj (End.). 
 
 — even now, in xx) vvi. 
 yield to, tlxuv (Pat.). 
 you, ye, vput. 
 young, vios 3. 
 
 young-man, nxyixg, -ov, b ; nog, 
 
 o ; iQnPos, o. 
 
 your, trig (Sing.), vptn^os (Plur.), 
 youth, norns, -tiro;, b ; *Pn> b i — 
 from youth, tx rechos. 
 
 - -, a, nxvias, -ou , a J nog, o ; 
 
 itonpos, o. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zealous, <r<rovba.7og 3. 
 zealously, arouixius. 
 
 -employed, to be, aatv 
 
 (n^i n). 
 
 2 f 2 
 
m. INDEX OF PROPER NAMES. 
 
 A. 
 
 ’AfbgabaTxt, -ov, b, Abradatas. 
 Ayxft.eju.yeov, -ovos, o, Agamemnon. 
 
 'Ayn&tXnos, -ov, o, Agfisilaus. 
 
 "a ibng (*fi*u), •oo, l, Hades (Pluto), 
 the god of the lower world. 
 
 "A }gxvov, -ov, to, Adranon. 
 
 ’a (rival, -gDv, a!, Athens. 
 
 ’A dnva/og, -ov, o, an Athenian. 
 
 ”a 0us, -a, l. Mount Athos. 
 
 Aixxcg, -ov, 0, iEacus. 
 
 Aixf, -xvtos, I, Aias (Aj ax'). 
 A’lyvxnos, -ov, o, an Egyptian. 
 
 A "ywrros, -ov, b, Egypt. 
 
 Aidlo-4t, -o-Tos, o, an Ethiopian. 
 
 A loXos, -ov, o, jEolus. 
 
 A'ltryfivns, -ov, o, vEschines. 
 
 A itruv, -ovog, o, Eson. 
 
 Alrvn, -n;, fj, Mount Etna. 
 'Axtf><roX/s, -tens, b, the Acropolis, 
 (the citadel). 
 
 A KTogluv, -a>vog, S, Actorion. 
 
 *A Xe^avb^os, -ov, o, Alexander. 
 AixYteTTu;, -io; and -/bog, b> Alce3- 
 tis. 
 
 AX*</3/aS>jf. -ov, o, Alcibiades. 
 
 'a kxvuv, - ovos , b, Halcyon (the 
 kingfisher). 
 
 ’A/xx&vis, -euv, al, the Amazons. 
 "a fiuais, -/os, o, Amasis. 
 
 ’Afctp'iToAi;, -tug, b, Amphipolis. 
 ‘Avagay b^ag, -a, o, Anaxagoras. 
 
 ’A vfyoyeajf, -eu, o, Androgeus. 
 
 *A vr/yovog, -ov, o, Antigonus. 
 'Avnalivns, -ovs, b, Antisthenes. 
 
 ' AvoXXobedoos, -ov, o, ApollodorUS, 
 ’AvoXluv, -uvog, o, [§ 34, Obs. 1.], 
 Apollo. 
 
 ’Agxfbix, -as, b, Arabia. 
 
 'Agafbios 3, Arabian. 
 
 'A^atrorag, -ov, o, AraspaS. 
 
 *A(>x'4', -afies, l, an Arab. 
 
 'Aoyeios, -ov, b, an Argive. 
 
 "Agyos, -ovg, to, ArgOS. 
 
 *A(>t)s, [Decl., § 42, Obs. 3.], Area 
 (Mars). 
 
 'AgiaTos, -ov, b , Ariseus. 
 
 ’A ^ffTtibng, -ov, b, Aristides. 
 
 ’A^iaTiTTog, -ov, o, Aristippus. 
 
 ’A etffToyUTuv, -ovog, o, Aristoaiton. 
 ’A £i<TTOTeX*)s, -ovs, o, Aristotle. 
 ’Afiuv, -ovog, o, Arion, 
 
 'Arabia, -ag, b , Arcadia. 
 
 ’A anas, -&bog, o, an Arcadian. 
 
 ’a o/xeviog, -ov, b, an Armenian. 
 'A^ftobios, -ov, o, Harmodius. 
 
 " Aon ay og, -ov, o, HarpagUS. 
 
 'A^aaft.v\g, -ov, b, Arsames. 
 
 ’a oTx\e^\ng, -ov, o, Artaxerxes. 
 
 "a ot!/u.is, -/bos, b, Artemis (Diana\ 
 ’Ag%ecrTgxTog, -ov, o, Archestia- 
 tus. 
 
 'Atria, -ag, b, Asia. 
 
 ’Ai rcrv^ia, -as, b, Assyria. 
 
 ’a aavyog, -ov, b, an Assyrian. 
 
 'AtrTvayrts, -ovs, b, Astyages. 
 
 ’A awrbg, -ov, o, Asopus. 
 
 ’A TXavrtg, -ilos, b, Atlantis. 
 
 "A TXag, -avTog, o , Atlas. 
 
 ’AtT/ xb, -bs, b, Attica. 
 
INDEX OF PROPER NAMES. 
 
 655 
 
 'Armas 3, Attic. 
 
 'A rgfiitf, -ovg, c, Atreides (son of 
 Atreus). 
 
 a£x<s, -ibog, fi, Aulis. 
 
 ’A tyoiim, -ns, «, Aphrodite ( Ve¬ 
 nus). 
 
 *A%aios, -ov, 5, an Achaean. 
 
 *A% i t(>ov<rios 3, Acherusian. 
 
 'A%t(>*>*, -avroff,«, Acheron. 
 ’A^iXAtwj, -tug, o, Achilles. 
 
 B. 
 
 BafbvXd/t, -u*og, b, Babylon. 
 BafivXuvia, -ag, b, Babylonia. 
 Ba/ivXuviog 3, Babylonian. 
 
 B aortas, -ov, o, Basias. 
 
 B lets, -avrog, o, Bias. 
 
 Boiurix, -as , b, Bceotia. 
 
 B oppag (Bofsag), -a, o, Boreas ( the 
 north wind). 
 
 Banatlas, -ov , a, Brasidas. 
 
 r. 
 
 TaXar'ia , -«f, Galatia. 
 Tavvptvdvs, -out, o, Ganymedes. 
 r.y«f, -avros, o, a Giant. 
 m t -Us, b, Terra ( the Earth). 
 r o^ytag, -ov, o, Gorgias. 
 
 Togyiv, -ovg, b, the Gorgon, 
 r obXXog, -ov, 0 , Gryllus. 
 
 Tvyvg , -ov, o , Gyges. 
 
 Tufigvag, - ov, o, Gobryas. 
 
 A. 
 
 A a't^aXog, -ov, o, DaedalllS. 
 
 A^i iog, -ov, i, Darius. 
 aeX( pot, -uiv, oil, Delphi. 
 
 AvXog, -ov, fj, Delos. 
 
 Av/st^rv^, -r^og, v, [Heel. , § 36, 
 Obs.], Demeter {Ceres). 
 A‘/if/-oo’6evris, -ovg, c, Demosthenes. 
 Atoysws, -ovg, o, Diogenes. 
 Aioiaifos, -OV, l, Diodorus. 
 
 Aiovvcros, -ov, o, Dionisos {Bac- 
 chus). 
 
 Aioyv'Ttog, -ov, l, Dionysius. 
 Atp^i^as, -a, c, Diphridas. 
 
 A gatcuv, - ovrog, o, Draco. 
 
 E. 
 
 •ExajSii, -fig, b, Hecuba. 
 
 *E« ra>(>, -ot>og, e, Hector. 
 
 'EX£»>j, -ns, b, Helen. 
 
 'Exxaj, -aiof, fi, Hellas {Greece). 
 w exx»j, -vs, b) Helle. 
 
 "EXX> 1 », -vfoe, I, a Greek. 
 
 'Exxvvtxos 3, Hellenic {Greek). 
 'EXXwU, -i^of, b, a Greek woman, 
 *E xxbsTovros, -ov, l, the Helles¬ 
 pont. 
 
 *Etra/ai/mviag,< -aw, o, EpamTnon* 
 das. 
 
 ’E oaroj, -ovg, b> Erato. 
 
 ’E osrpsvg, -eus, o, an Eretrian. 
 'E^vs, -ov, o, Hermes {Mercury). 
 Eilfioia, -as, v , Euboea. 
 
 Evfiotvg, -sms, o, a Euboean ; [ Fern. 
 Evflotf, -iios, «.]. 
 
 Ev%uvog TLovrog, o, the Euxine Sea 
 {the Black Sea). 
 
 Evporifog, -ov, o, Euripides. 
 
 E v^vaXog, -ov, o, Euryalus. 
 Eb^vaStvs, -sus, o , Eurystheus. 
 Eb^uorv, -vs, h, Europe. 
 
 Evovros, -ov, o, Eurytus. 
 
 E bp^arvg, -ov, o, the Euphrates. 
 "Epsaog, -ov, b > Ephesus. 
 
 "e us, -a, fi, Eos {Aurora), [§ 30, 
 Obs. 1.]. 
 
 z. 
 
 z<xfiaros, -ov, o, the Zabatos. 
 ZxKwSog, -ov, fi , Zacynthus {Zan- 
 te). 
 
 ZsXsia, -as, b » Zeleia. 
 
 Zto^tg, -dog, o, Zeuxis. 
 
 Zsvg, a ios, o, [j Decl., § 47, 3.], 
 Zeus {Jupiter), 
 zbvuv, -uvos, o, Zen©. 
 
 H. 
 
 "H ox, -as, v, Hera (/ uno). • 
 'H^axXrjs, -levs, l, \_DecL, §42, 3.], 
 Heracles {Hercules). 
 
 ’h%gv, -ovg, v, [Heel., § 43. j, Echo. 
 
 0 . 
 
 0aXijg. O, [Gen. BxXsu, Hat. -xb, 
 Acc. Thales. 
 
 Sx/av^is, -tbog and -tog, o, Thamyris. 
 0? ftia'roxXbs, -sovg, o, Themisto- 
 cles 
 
656 
 
 INDEX OP PROPER NAMES. 
 
 Siitp^aaros, -ov, i, Theophrastus. 
 GtgftoTvkai, -uv, oi, Thermopylae. 
 1 >i g/uuduv, - avrog , o, the Thermo- 
 don. 
 
 8 s aorguris, -*^os, b- Thesprotis. 
 SirrxXiu, -of, by Thessaly. 
 SirraA.es, -ov, b, a Thessalian. 
 ©ij/Sa;, -&/V. o/, Thebes. 
 
 Stifiatos, -ov, o, a Theban. 
 
 0 »j£rswf, -e»y, 0, Theseus. 
 
 0£ox>7, -»?, Thrace. 
 
 0 £o£, -ox0j, #, a Thracian. 
 
 I. 
 
 Ifingix, -as, jj, Iberia (Spain). 
 'I'hopmvs, -boos, o, Idomeneus. 
 m lK<t£os, -ov, o, Icarus. 
 
 ’lkiag, -ados, by the Iliad. 
 
 ’I Xiaaos, -ov, o, the Ilissus. 
 
 "I Xios, -ov, rj, Ilios (Troy). 
 
 ’lvS/*] 7 , -rjg, fi, India. 
 
 ’IvJa'f, -ov, o, Indian. 
 
 'lovhxTos, -ov, o, a Jew. 
 
 "lorera^os, -ov, i, Hipparchus. 
 
 ’I orerias, -oi, l, Hippias. 
 
 “largos, -ov, o, the Ister (the Da¬ 
 nube). 
 
 'luvia, -as, b, Idnia. 
 
 K. 
 
 Kaduog, -ov, 0, Cadmus. 
 
 K uxxias, -ov, o, Callias. 
 
 KaXXi&vos, -ov, l, Callixenus. 
 Kapfivans, -ov, o', Cambyses. 
 Ka^ov^ot, - uv , oi, the Carduchi. 
 Kag%y$wv, -ovos, b, Carthage. 
 Kao-rcog, -o^oq, o, Castor. 
 
 Kccrav*), -ns, b, Catana. 
 j KavKaaos, -ov, o, Caucasus. 
 
 K ex^o^/, -ovog, b, Cecrops. 
 KiXaivai, -uv, al. Celsense. 
 KiXn(b*i(>, -ngos, b, a Celtiberian. 
 
 K igaptixos, -ov, b, the Cerameicos 
 (a district in Athens). 
 KigaofiXevrns, -ov, b, Kerso- 
 bleptes. 
 
 K/A4X40, -as, b, Cilicia. 
 
 Kxeavfyos, -ov, o, Cleandrus. 
 KXea^oq, -ov, o, Clearchus. 
 KXtiros, -ov, b, Clltus. 
 
 KXiith, -ovs, h, Ciio. 
 
 K Xiovofives, -ov, o, Cleopompug. 
 KXiuwpos, -ov, S, Cleonymus. 
 KXuPoj, -ovs, by Clotho. 
 
 KotfvSios, -ov, 0 , a Corinthian. 
 Korvooga, -uv, ri t, Cotydra. 
 
 Kgbrtt, -ns, by Crete. 
 
 KoitraTos 3, Crissean. 
 
 Kotrias, -ov, o, Critias. 
 
 Kooicos, -ov, o, Croesus. 
 
 K^eruv, •uvob, Crotona. 
 K^oruvtams, • ov , b , a native of 
 Crotona. 
 
 Krearos, -ov, o, Cteatus. 
 
 Kva\d^ns, ‘ovs, b, [ Acc . -»»»], Cy- 
 
 axares. 
 
 K vbvos, -ov, «, the Cydnus. 
 KvkAu\]/, -uvos, c, a Cyclops. 
 
 K vv^os, -ov, b, Cyprus. 
 
 K v£os, -ov, 0 , Cyrus. 
 
 A. 
 
 AaKt^aifjobvios 3, Lacedaemonian. 
 
 A (xxuv, -uvos, bp a Laconian. 
 AxoioTa, -*it, b, Larissa. 
 
 A eafios, • ov, b, Lesbos. 
 
 Aivxrga, -uv, roc, Leuctra. 
 Afuvlbxs, -ov, 1, Leonidas. 
 
 Aifivn, -ns, by Libya. 
 
 A vh'ta, -as, b, Lydia. 
 
 A vbioq 3, Lydian. 
 
 Avhbs, -ov, l, a Lydian. 
 
 Avxio; 3, Lycian, a Lycian. 
 
 A vxovgyos,. -ov, l, Lycurgus. 
 Avaavb^os, -ov, b, Lysander. 
 
 Avaias, -ov, o, Lysias. 
 
 M. 
 
 M«~o, -o?, b, Maia. 
 
 Matxdoos, -ov, b, the Meander, 
 Maxdovia, -as, b, Macedonia. 
 MxKfliuv, -ovos, o, a Macedonian. 
 Mxxdovixbs 3, Macedonian. 
 Mov^ayjj, -ns, b, Mandane. 
 Mavnviia, -as, b, Mantinea. 
 
 M Khavas, -ov, o, Marsyas. 
 
 Msyo^o, -uv, r&., Megara. 
 
 Miyxgtvs, -bus, 1, a native of Me* 
 gara. 
 
 Miduvn, -ns, b, Methone. 
 
 M sXnsy -*iros, l, Meles. 
 
INDEX OF PROPER NAMES. 
 
 657 
 
 M iknroe, -ov, l, Meletus or Meli- 
 tus. 
 
 M ipQit, -ids and -ibos, v, Memphis. 
 Ms>ehfcas, -ov, o, Menedemus. 
 MsvsXewj, -cu, b, Menelaus. 
 
 Msvauy, -cuvog, o, Menon. 
 
 M= o-o-^ »/oj 3, Messenian, a Messe- 
 nian. 
 
 M fitioc, -as, v, Medea. 
 
 M»j hxcg 3, Median. 
 
 -ov, o, a Mede. 
 
 Mifythxrvs, -OV, 0, Mithridates. 
 Mikrufins, -ov, o, Miitiades. 
 
 Mlkcuv, -cuvos, o, Milo. 
 
 M.y«e, o, \CrQ7l. -veuog and -vcu, ACC. 
 
 -vmv and -vu~\, Minos. 
 
 'M.tvujToiv^os, -ov, o, the Minotaur. 
 
 M ovca, -vs, * i, a Muse. 
 
 Mvtrog, -ov, 0, Mysus. 
 
 'SlvrtXvv-xTo;, -ov, o, a native of 
 Mitylene. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nx&os, -ov, l, a native of Naxos. 
 N«g«f, -ov, v, Naxos. 
 
 N ukos, -ov, o, the Nile. 
 
 N t/jtsa, -as, h, Nemea. 
 
 N e<rrou(>, -ogos f o, Nestor. 
 
 N ixoxkns, -eovg, o, NicocleS. 
 
 N/'yof, -ov, o, Nlnus. 
 
 N/'o-af, -ov, 0, NlSUS. 
 
 N ovfjcas (-a.) IlofAvrikios (-ov), o, 
 Numa Pompilius. 
 
 Kvpfv, -ns, n, a Nymph. 
 
 S. 
 
 S entim, -vs, V, Xantippe. 
 
 S ivop<xws, -ovs, o, Xenophanes. 
 
 S=i lopcov, - oovtos , o, Xenophon. 
 Seg%vs, -ov, o, Xerxes. 
 
 o. 
 
 OWc-fo?, -boos, l, Odysseus {Ulys¬ 
 ses). 
 
 Olvov, -ns, h, CEnoe. 
 
 'OkvftTios 3, Olympian, an Olym- 
 pian. 
 
 *0\vfAiros, -cv, 1, Olympus. 
 
 "'Of/.v^og, -ov, o, Homer. 
 
 *o,i,^og, -ov, o, Oneiros (the god 
 of dreams). 
 
 'O^sarvs, -ov, o, Orestes. 
 
 ’O {Sin, -ecs, n, Orthia (an epithet 
 of Artemis). 
 
 -ilog, o, Osiris. 
 
 ”0 a a a, -vs, n, Ossa. 
 
 O u^avlbai, -uv, oil, the inhabitants 
 of Ouranos (heaven), the gods. 
 
 n. 
 
 Tlfyios 3, Parian. 
 
 Tlocoig, -tos and -ibos, o, Paris. 
 
 Tlxgos, -ov, f], Paros. 
 
 Hxt^oxXos, -ov, o, PatrOCiUS. 
 Tlavcraviag, -ov, o, Pausanias. 
 YictcxiaT^ocTos, -ov, o, Pisistratus. 
 lliXlag, -ov, o, Pelias. 
 
 Hsxo<rl^ag, -ov, o, Pelopidas. 
 Tl‘\o , ’j'ovvvcricc?cos 3, Peloponnesian# 
 lUXoTowvaiog, -ov, b, a Pelopon¬ 
 nesian. 
 
 niXoTovwo’og, -ov, v, the Pelopon¬ 
 nesus. 
 
 risxo^, -ottos, o, Pelops. 
 n io$'tx.Kccs, -ov, I, Perdiccas. 
 n lo/xXfjs, -bovs, o, Pericles. 
 Yii^aula.1, -Sjv, oil, the Persldae. 
 m^.fovv, -ns, v, Persephone 
 (Proserpine). 
 
 Ue^o-vs, -ov, l, a Persian. 
 
 Us^ai>cos 3, Persian. 
 ri^Af, -Idog, v, Persia, a Persian 
 woman. 
 
 Tlriyxaog, -ov, c, Pegasus. 
 
 HvXtvg, -Boog, o, PeleUS. 
 
 TlnXovmov, -ov, to, Pelusium. 
 nvnibg, -ov, b, the Peneus. 
 Tlxaratai, -cuv, al, Platseae. 
 nkecTocm g, -scuv, oi, the Piataeans. 
 II Xxrcuv, -cuvog, o, Plato. 
 UXtlrrag^og, -ov, b, Pllstarchus. 
 JJXovrcuv, -cuvog, o, Pluto, 
 n okvhvxvs, -ovg, b, Polydeukea 
 (Pollux). 
 
 n oXvbcu^os, -OV, b, Polyddrus. 
 TLoXvxXurog, -ov, l, Polyclitus, 
 n ofjcTTikios, -ov, 1, Pompilius. 
 nbvTos Evguvog, b, the Euxine Sea 
 (the Black Sea). 
 
 Tiocitbeiv, -cuvos, b, \Decl., § 34, 
 Obs. 1.], Poseidon (Neptune). 
 n £v%<xrtrns t -ovg, o, Prexaspes. 
 
Gj8 
 
 INDEX OF PROPER NAMES. 
 
 II giapdai, -&)», a!, the PriamidcB 
 (sons of Priam). 
 
 Tlolapos, -ov, l, Priam. 
 
 IlgapnUtvg, -tus, b, Prometheus. 
 Ylufuyogas, -ov, b, Pythagoras, 
 n uila, -as, v, the Pythia ( the 
 priestess of Apollo at Delphi). 
 Hupp os, -ov, o, Pyrrhus. 
 
 P. 
 
 "Pap-^mros, -ov, b, Phampsinltus. 
 'Yupalos 3, Roman, a Roman. 
 
 'Po >pn, -ns, h, Pome. 
 
 s. 
 
 Xxxas, -a, o, Sacas. 
 
 "SaXapis, -hog, n, Salamis. 
 
 Ixpios, -ov, o, a Samian. 
 i&pos, -ov, v, Samos. 
 lafiavxvroiXos, -ov, t, Sardanapalus. 
 2x^sis, -loov, al, Sardis. 
 la^os, -ov, l, the Saros. 
 
 Sx/jTn'Sujv, -ovos, o, Sarpedon. 
 
 2«Ai voug, -ovvros, o and n, Selinus. 
 ltpi(>xpig, -i§os, b, Semiramis. 
 "StuPng, -ov, o, Seuthes. 
 
 Ubuv, -ajvog, i). Sldon. 
 
 U^tuvtos, -ov, o, a Sldonian. 
 tSiKikta, -as, fi, Sicily. 
 jtpciXidjrns, -ov, o, a Sicilian. 
 Xvuarn, -ns, b, Sinope. 
 
 'Zx.Mng, -ov, o, a Scythian. 
 
 'S.Kvfta, -as, b, Scythia. 
 
 'Zpefiis, -ios, o, Smerdis. 
 
 "SiXuv, -uvot, o , Solon. 
 
 ^ouatog 3, Susian, a Susian. 
 SapoxXrjs, -eovg, o, Sophocles. 
 
 2 rfyrn, -ns,»), Sparta. 
 
 STugrtxTng, -ov, o, a Spartan. 
 Zora^narixos 3, Spartan. 
 2rno-i%^iioi 3, Stesichorean. 
 Srno-j'xofos, -ov, b. Stesichorus. 
 ’Srgxrovfxn, -*ig, b, Stratonlce. 
 
 2 reotKog 3, Stoic, a Stoic. 
 
 2t5/3 apg, -$ag and -tvs, b, Sybaris. 
 'lufia^tmt, -ov, o, a Sybarite. 
 t£vXXx£, -a, o, Sylla. 
 
 2 v^axovaat, -uv, a), Syracuse. 
 
 2 uoaxouaios ( Att . 2t igxxbaiog) 3, 
 Syracusan, a Syracusan. 
 
 2t ’>^ai,-ov, o, a Syrian. 
 
 2 p<y£, -typos, *i, the Sphinx. 
 lux^arng, -ovs, o, [Decl., § 42, 
 Obs. 3.], Socrates. 
 
 T. 
 
 TxvraXog, -ov, o, Tantalus. 
 
 Ttyla, -as, n, Tegea. 
 
 TtXapav, -uvog, o, Telamon. 
 Tsparn, -<vv, ra, Tempe. 
 
 Ttiix^os, -ov, o, Teucer. 
 
 TnXtpag^og, -ov, o, Telemachus. 
 
 T;y £&.vng, -ov, o, Tigranes. 
 Tiaaaipegvns, -ovg, o, Tissaphernes. 
 T opvpg, -dog, n, Tomyris. 
 
 T £oia, -ag , b, Troy. 
 
 T^oi^nv, -ijvos, b, Troezen. 
 
 Tvgrxtof, -ov, 1, Tyrtaeus. 
 
 i'aiaxts, -ctv, oi, the Phseucians. 
 $avng, -nrog, o, Phanes. 
 
 3>tgavkas, -a, o , Pheraulas. 
 $t(>ixubng, -ovg, o, Pherecydes. 
 ‘PtyaXtus, -lug, b, Phigaleus. 
 
 •blXiTTTOS, -OV, o, Philip. 
 
 $om\, -Txog, o, a Phoenician. 
 $opxvg, -vvos, o, Phorkys. 
 
 -ov, o, Phrixus. 
 
 <f?guyla, -as, b, Phrygia. 
 
 -vyos, l, a Phrygian. 
 
 Quxtvs, -lug, b, a Phocian. 
 
 X. 
 
 yLai/s'-xgarns, -ovs, l, Chserecrates. 
 ’XaxbaTos, -ov, c, a Chaldean. 
 XaXxdtvs, -tug, o, a Chalcidian. 
 Xagixiog, -ov, o, Charilaus. 
 Xagpdng, -ov, o, Charmides. 
 Xtctrovnaos {or Xtppbvn<rog), -ov, bt 
 the Chersonesus. 
 xtog, -ov , b, Chios. 
 
 X7os 3, Chian, a Chian. 
 
 TTxppis, -iog, o, Psammis. 
 Wxppirt%os, -ov, o, Psammitlchus. 
 
 a 
 
 ’(hctavig, -ov, o, OceanoS {thA 
 ocean-god). 
 
 'SlXnv, -ijvog, o, Olen. 
 
 'toouivia, -as, b, Orlthyia. 
 
 'Q^.uto:, -ov, e, Oropus. 
 
IV. GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 Accentuation, §§ 10—16 ;—of 
 the I. Decl., § 26, 4 and 5 ;— 
 of the II. Decl., § 28, Obs. 2 ; 
 —of the Attic II. Decl., § 30, 
 Obs. 2;—of Contracts, § 29 
 and § 11, 2;—of the III. Decl., 
 § 33 ;—of the Gen. Plur. of 
 Adjectives of three endings 
 § 26, 4, (y);—of Verbs, § 84 ;— 
 irregular Accentuation of some 
 Verbs in § 134, 1. 
 
 Accusative, Synt., § 159;—dou¬ 
 ble Acc., § 160 ;—Acc. with 
 Inf., § 172 ;—Acc. with Part., 
 § 175, 2;—Acc. Abs., § 176, 
 3. 
 
 Active Verbs, § 71;—with Fut. 
 Mid., § 116, 1, and § 144, (c); 
 —Synt., 149, 1 ;—with trans. 
 and intrans. meaning, § 150, 
 1 ;—with a causative meaning, 
 § 150, Obs. 2. 
 
 Acute accent, § 10, 2. 
 
 Adjectives, § 23;—Declension 
 of Adjectives, ( see Declen¬ 
 sion) ;—Comparison of Adjec¬ 
 tives, §§ 49—52; — Verbal- 
 adjectives, § 168, 1, 2. 
 
 Adjective-sentences, § 182. 
 
 Adverbial sentences of place and 
 time, § 183 ;—causal, § 184; 
 —conditional, § 185;—of con¬ 
 sequence or effect, § 186 ;—of 
 comparison, § 187. 
 
 Adverbs, (Formation), § 53 
 
 Comparison, .§ 54;—used as 
 Adjectives, § 148, 8;—Synt., 
 §177. 
 
 Anomalous words. See Verbs 
 and Declensions. 
 
 Answer, (how expressed), § 188, 
 Obs. 4. 
 
 Aorist, Synt., § 152, 8 and 12;— 
 Aor. II. Act. with intrans. 
 meaning, § 150, 2. 
 
 Apocope, § 195, 6. 
 
 Apodosis, § 185, 1. 
 
 Apostrophe, § 6. 
 
 Apposition, § 154, 2 ;—with po3- 
 sessive-Pronouns, § 154, 3. 
 
 Arsis, § 190, 2. 
 
 Article, Synt., § 148. 
 
 Atonies or Proclitics, § 13. 
 
 Attraction in the case of Pre¬ 
 positions, § 167, Obs.;—in the 
 case of the Inf., § 172, 3 in 
 the case of the Part., § 175, 
 2; —in Adjective-sentences 
 § 182, Obs. 2 ;—of the Rela¬ 
 tive, § 182,6 and 7 ;—inverted 
 Attraction, § 182, Obs. 5. 
 
 Attributive relation, § 154. 
 
 Augment, §§ 77, 85—87 ;—in 
 compound Verbs, §§90—91. 
 
 Barytones, § 10, Obs, 2; § 12, 
 1. 
 
 Breathings, § 5. 
 
 Caesura, § 190, 3. 
 
GENERAL INDEX 
 
 660 
 
 Cardinal numbers, § 65, (a) ; 
 §67. 
 
 Cases, § 22 ;—Synt., § 156, sqq.; 
 —Casus absoluti (Gen. Abs. 
 and Acc. Abs.), § 176, 2, 3. 
 
 Change of Consonants, § 8. 
 
 Characteristic of the Verb, § 77; 
 —of the Tenses, § 79, (a);— 
 simple and strengthened Cha¬ 
 racteristic, § 104. 
 
 Circumflex, § 10, 3. 
 
 Classes of Verbs, §§71, 149. 
 
 Classification of the Vowels, § 3; 
 —of the Consonants, § 4 ;—of 
 Verbs in -u, § 92;—of Mute 
 Verbs, § 104;—of Verbs in 
 
 -(Li, § 128. 
 
 Comparative adverbial sen¬ 
 tences, § 187. 
 
 Comparative, construction with, 
 § 168, 3. 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives, §§ 49 
 —52;—of Adverbs, § 54. 
 
 Concord, § 146 ;—exceptions to 
 the general Rules of Concord, 
 § 147 ;—Concord when there 
 are several Subjects, § 147 b , 
 
 Conditional adverbial sentences, 
 § 185. 
 
 Conjugation, § 76 ;—of Verbs in 
 -u, § 81, sqq. ;—of Verbs in 
 § 127, sqq. 
 
 Consonants, § 4 ; — moveable 
 Consonants at the end of a 
 word, § 7 ;—change of Conso¬ 
 nants, § 8. 
 
 ConstruCtio KOt.ru. auvtaiv, § 147, 
 (a). 
 
 Contraction, Accent in the case 
 of, § 11, 2. 
 
 Co-ordinate sentences, § 178. 
 
 Copula, (elvut), § 145, 5. 
 
 Coronis, § 6. 
 
 Correlatives, § 63. 
 
 Crasis, § 6 ; § 195, 3;—with the 
 Accent, § 12, 2. 
 
 Dactyl, § 190, 1. 
 
 Dative, § 161;—with, the Inf., 
 § 172, 3;—with the Part., 
 § 175, Obs. 2. 
 
 Declension of Nouns ; I. Decl., 
 §§ 25-27;—II. Decl., §§28 
 —30 Contracts of the IL 
 Decl., § 29;—Attic II. Decl., 
 § 30 ;—III. Decl., §§ 31—47 ; 
 —Accentuation of L Decl., 
 § 26, 4 and 5 ;—Accentuation 
 of II. DecL, § 28, Obs. 2 ;— 
 Accentuation of Contracts of 
 the II. Decl., §29;—Accen¬ 
 tuation of the Attic II. Decl., 
 § 30, Obs. 2 ;—Gender, Ac¬ 
 centuation and Quantity of the 
 III. Decl., § 33;—irregular 
 Nouns of the III. Decl., § 47 ; 
 —Declension of Adjectives in 
 -os, -rt (-a), -e»,§ 28, Obs. 3, and 
 § 26, Obs. 2;—of Adj. in - og , -ov, 
 § 28, Obs. 3 ;—of Contracts in 
 - oos , - or, i, -oov, in -oos, -oov, and in 
 -tog, -e u, -tov, § 29, Obs.;—of 
 Adj. in -us, -uv, § 30 ; —of Adj. 
 in -7is and -us, § 27, Obs. 2 ;—. 
 of Adj. in -uv, - ov , § 35, Obs. 
 4;—of Adj. in -us, -iveu, -**, 
 § 40, Obs. 1 ;—of Adj. in 
 -us, -t7u, -v, § 46, Obs. 1;—of 
 irregular Adjectives, § 48 ;—• 
 of Pronouns, § 56, sqq. ;—of 
 Numerals, § 68 ;—of Compa¬ 
 ratives in -uv, -ov, § 35, Obs. 4. 
 
 Demonstrative-Pronouns, § 60. 
 
 Deponent Verbs, § 144; § 150, 
 Obs. 4. 
 
 Diaeresis, § 3, Obs. 3 ;—in Ho¬ 
 meric verse, § 190, 5; § 19^ 
 2. 
 
 Digamma, § 194. 
 
 Diphthongs, § 3. 
 
 Disjunctive co-ordination, § 178* 
 8. 
 
 Division of Syllables, § 17. 
 
 Dual, Synt., § 147, (e), and Obs. 
 3, 4. 
 
 Dual Subject with Plur. Verb, 
 § 147, (e). 
 
 Elision, § 6, 3;—in Homeric 
 verse, § 195, 5;—Accent in 
 the case of Elision, § 12, 3. 
 
 Ellipsis of the^ioun on which 
 
GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 661 
 
 the Gen. depends (e. g. ivfiou), 
 
 § 154, Obs.of the Subject, 
 
 § 145, Obs. 2. 
 
 Enclitics, §§ 14—16. 
 
 Feminine Nouns connected with 
 Neuter Adjectives, § 147, (al 
 and (b) ;—with Masc. Dual 
 forms, § 147, Obs. 4. 
 
 Final Substantive - sentences, 
 §181. 
 
 Future (Attic) in -to and -ov^a.i, 
 § 83 ;—Doric in •aovpu.i, § 116, 
 2;—without a, § 111, 1;— 
 with the Mid. instead of 
 
 l the Act. form, § 116, 1, and 
 § 144, (c) Synt., § 152, 6; 
 —Fut. III., § 152, 7. 
 
 Gender of Nouns, § 21;—of the 
 III. Decl., § 33. 
 
 Genitive, §§ 156—158 ;—attri¬ 
 butive Gen., § 154 ; — Gen. 
 with Inf., § 172, 3;—Gen. 
 Abs., § 176, 2;—Gen. Abs. 
 with &s, § 176, Obs. 2 and 3. 
 
 Grave Accent, § 10, 1 ;—grave 
 instead of acute, § 12, 1. 
 
 Hiatus, § 192. 
 
 Historical Tenses, § 72, 2, b. ;— 
 Synt., § 152, 3. 
 
 Imperative, Synt., § 153, 1, c.; 
 —with /u.r)i 1^3, Obs. 3. 
 
 Imperfect, Synt., § 152, 9 and 
 
 10. 
 
 Impersonal construction changed 
 into the personal with the 
 Part., § 175, Obs. 4in Sub¬ 
 stantive-sentences with un or 
 on. § ISO, Obs. 
 
 Inclination of tb* 1 Accent, §§ 14 
 —16. 
 
 Indefinite-Pronouns, § 62. 
 
 Indicative, Synt., § 153, 1, a. ;— 
 of a historical Tense, express¬ 
 ing a wish, § 153, Obs. 1 ;—of 
 a historical Tense with 153, 
 
 2 a. 
 
 Infinitive, Synt., §§ 170—173; 
 
 —with oii, § 153, 2, d.;—with 
 the Article, § 173 ;—with 
 § 186, (a); -with i<p' Zn, § 186, 
 Obs. 2 ;—with as, § 186, Obs. 
 
 3 ;—used after certain Verbs 
 instead of the Part., but with 
 a difference of meaning , § 175, 
 Obs. 3. 
 
 Interrogative-Pronouns, § 62. 
 
 -sentences, § 188. 
 
 Intransitive Verbs, Synt., § 149, 
 1, (£) ;—in the Pass. (e. g. 
 <pt>OVOVpCil), § 150, 6. 
 
 Iota subscriptum , § 3;—with 
 Oasis, § 6, Obs. 
 
 Lengthening of the Pronouns, 
 
 § 64. 
 
 Letters, the, §§ 1, 2. 
 
 Masculine Adjectives connected 
 with Neut. Nouns, § 147, (a). 
 
 Metathesis, § 117, 2. 
 
 Middle Verbs, Synt., § 149, 2; 
 § 150, 3. 
 
 Moods, Synt., §§ 151, 153 - 
 
 sequence of Moods, § 181, Obs. 
 
 Mood-vowels, §§ 79, 80, 129. 
 
 Moveable Consonants at the end 
 of a word, § 7. 
 
 Negatives, § 177. 
 
 Neuter Adjectives connected 
 with Masc. or Fem. Nouns, 
 § 147, (b) ; —Neut. Plur. with 
 a Verb in the Sing , § 147, (d); 
 —Neut. Plur. of Verbal-Ad¬ 
 jectives instead of the Sing., 
 §168,1. 
 
 Nominative, Synt., § 145, 4;— 
 double Nominative, § 146, 2 ; 
 —with the Pass, of intrans. 
 Verbs which govern a Gen. or 
 Pal. (e.g. (ptovoupou), § 150,6;— 
 Nora. with Inf., § 172, 2 and 
 3 with Part., § 175, 2. 
 
 NumDer, §§ 22, 75. See Con* 
 cord. 
 
 Numerals, §§ 65—69. 
 
 Object, § 155. 
 
662 
 
 GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 Objective relation, § 155. 
 
 Oblique or indirect narration, 
 
 § 189. 
 
 Optative, Synt., § 153, 1, b, (/?). 
 
 Ordinal numbers, § 65, (0) ; §67. 
 
 Oxytones, § 10, Obs. 2. 
 
 Paroxytones, § 10, Obs. 2. 
 
 Participials, § 74. 
 
 Participle, Synt., §§ 174—176; 
 —with rvy%(xvu, &c., § 175, 3 ; 
 —with «*, § 153, 2, d.used 
 after certain Verbs instead of 
 the Inf., but with a difference 
 of meaning , § 175, Obs. 3. 
 
 Passive Verbs, Synt., § 149, 3. 
 
 Perfect, Synt., § 152, 5;—Perf. 
 II. with intrans. meaning, 
 
 § 150, 2. 
 
 Perispomena, § 10, Obs. 2. 
 
 Person of the Verb, § 75 ; Synt., 
 §146 when the Subjects are 
 of different Persons, § 147 b , 2. 
 
 Personal-endings of Verbs in -u, 
 §§ 75, 79, 80 of Verbs in 
 -fAi, § 130. 
 
 Personal-Pronouns, § 56 —59. 
 
 Personal construction instead of 
 the impersonal. See Imperso¬ 
 nal construction. 
 
 Pluperfect, Synt., § 152, 11 and 
 Obs. 6. 
 
 Plural in concord, §§ 147, 147 b . 
 
 Position, § 9, 3 and Obs.; § 191, 
 3—6. 
 
 Possessive-Pronouns, § 59. 
 
 Predicate, § 145, 5; § 146. 
 
 Prepositions, § 24 ; — Synt., 
 §§ 162—167 with a Reg¬ 
 nant signification, §164, Obs.l; 
 —attraction of Prepositions, 
 § 167, Obs. 
 
 Present Tense, Synt., § 152, 4. 
 
 Principal sentences, § 179. 
 
 - Tenses, § 72, 2, a. ; 
 
 -Synt., § 152, 2. 
 
 Proclitics or Atonies, § 13. 
 
 Pronouns, §§ 55—64;—meaning 
 and use, § 169. 
 
 Pronunciation of particular let¬ 
 ters, § 2. 
 
 Proparoxytones, § 10, Obs. 2. 
 
 Properispomena, § 10, Obs. 2. 
 
 Protasis, § 185, 1;—sometimes 
 omitted, § 185, Obs, 4. 
 
 Punctuation-marks, § 18. 
 
 Quantity, §§ 9, 191 ;—of the 
 III. Decl., § 33. 
 
 Reciprocal-Pronoun, § 58. 
 
 _Verbs, § 149, Obs. 1. 
 
 Reduplication, §§ 77, 88At¬ 
 tic Redup., § 89 ;—Redup. in 
 compound Verbs, § 90. 
 
 Reflexive Verbs, Synt., § 149, 2. 
 
 -Pronouns, § 57. 
 
 Relative-Pronoun, § 61. 
 
 -sentences. See Adjec¬ 
 tive-sentences. 
 
 Root of the Verb, § 77 ;— simple 
 and strengthened Root, § 101 j 
 —variation in the Root, § 102. 
 
 Sentences, § 145. 
 
 - denoting a purpose , 
 
 § 181. 
 
 Singular Noun with Plur. Verb 
 §147, (a) Sing. Neut Adj. 
 with a Noun in the JMasc. or 
 Fern. Plur., § 147, (b);—Sing. 
 Verb with a Subject in the 
 Neut. Plur., § 147, (d). 
 
 Spondee, § 190, 1. 
 
 Subject, § 145 ; — sometimes 
 omitted, § 145, Obs. 2. 
 
 Subjunctive, Synt., § 153, 1, b. 
 
 Subordinate sentences, § 179, 
 sqq. 
 
 Subordination, § 179, sqq. 
 
 Substantive, § 20 ;—Gender, 
 § 21;—Number and Case, § 22; 
 —Declension, § 25, sqq. 
 
 Substantive-sentences with Vri, 
 us (‘ that ’), § 180;—with onus, 
 7va, us (‘ in order that ’), § 181. 
 
 Superlative, §§ 49—52. 
 
 Syllables, §§ 9—17 division 
 of Syllables, § 17. 
 
 Syncope, § 117, 1. 
 
 Synizesis, § 195, 4. 
 
GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 663 
 
 Tenses, § 72;— secondary Tenses, 
 § 103Synt., §§ 151, 152. 
 
 Tense-characteristics, § 79, 1. 
 
 Tense-endings, § 79, 2. 
 
 Theme, § 101, 3. 
 
 Thesis, § 190, 2. 
 
 Transitive Verbs, Synt., § 149, 
 
 1, («). 
 
 Trochee, § 190, 1. 
 
 Variation of the Root-vowel, 
 
 § 102 . 
 
 Verbs,§§ 70—144;—pz/re Verbs, 
 Verbs, §§ 93—99 ;— contract 
 §§ 96—99 ; — mute Verbs, 
 
 §§ 104— 110;— liquid Verbs, 
 
 §§ 111 — 115 ; — special pe¬ 
 culiarities in the formation 
 of certain Verbs in - u , § 116 ; 
 —anomalous Verbs, §§ 117 — 
 126 ;—Verbs in -pi, §§ 127 — 
 143 ;—Verbs in -a which in 
 the Aor. II. follow the ana¬ 
 logy of Verbs in -pi, § 142 . 
 
 Verb-characteristic, § 77. 
 
 Verbal-adjectives, Synt., § 168, 
 1 , 2 . 
 
 Verbum-finitum and Verbum in¬ 
 finitum, § 74, Obs. 
 
 Vowels, $ 3. 
 
 •«ra< instead of -inti, -are instead 
 of -iro, § 106, Obs. 4. 
 ittp' ol, § 183, 2, b. 
 
 •$£, suffix, § 53, Obs. 2. 
 us O, § 183, 2, c. 
 if Z, § 183, 2, a. 
 
 ctou, il ol, § 183, 2, b. 
 tarif ol, Zf, &c., § 182, Obs. 3. 
 i<p' Zrt, § 186, Obs. 2. 
 tus ol, § 183, 2, c. 
 
 -£t, suffix, § 53, Obs. 3. 
 
 •n9m, Accent of 'Adjectives end¬ 
 ing in, § 42. 
 
 -hi, -h, suffixes, § 53, Obs. 2. 
 pixv ° Tev > t^XV § 183, 2, c. 
 p*i ov with Inf., § 177, 8. 
 
 v lipsXxuonxoi, § 7, 1. 
 
 olos n with Inf., § 182, Obs. 4. 
 outiiis osris ol, nemo non, § 182, 
 Obs. 5. 
 
 •vs, suffix, § 53, Obs. 2 and 3. 
 
 oxfipa. xa9' e/.oi xoti pegof, § 147 ^, 
 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 us a», § 181, 3. 
 
 THE END 
 
 Pattison Jolly, Steam-Press Printer, 
 22, Essex-st. West, Dublin. 
 
left $8 
 
 AUTHOR 
 
 iiuUM£Jl r li AzhAel 
 
 ELeMStoTARV Irffgg K (r RAM MB, 
 
 riTLE / 
 
 BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY 
 
 UNIVERSITY HEIGHTS 
 CHESTNUT HILL, MASS. 
 
 Books may be kept for two weeks and may be 
 renewed for the same period, unless reserved. 
 
 Two cents a day is charged for each book kept 
 
 overtime. 
 
 « 
 
 If you cannot find what you want, ask the 
 Librarian who will be glad to help you. 
 
 The borrower is responsible for books drawn 
 on his card and for all fines accruing on the same.